JP7381132B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pinball gaming machines (generally referred to as "pachinko machines") and reel-type gaming machines (generally referred to as "pachislot machines").

2. Description of the Related Art Gaming machines that provide display changes based on operations on an operation unit are known (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP2010-046210A

Incidentally, such operations are generally simple and lack a sense of tension, and there is room for improvement in terms of increasing interest.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decline in interest.

The gaming machine according to [Means 1] is:
a determination means capable of deriving a predetermined determination result;
an effect control means capable of displaying an effect display on a display means based on a determination result of the determination means;
an operation section that can be operated by a player and that can change the display on the display means;
The effect control means is capable of executing a variable display showing the determination result in the display means,
If the operating section is operated outside the predetermined operating range during a specific period in which the operating section is to be operated within a predetermined operating range, and further specific conditions are met, a specific display is displayed on the display means. , due to the specific display, the visibility of the effect display displayed on the display means is lowered compared to the state before the specific display was displayed,
The specific display that is displayed when the operation unit is operated outside the predetermined operation range and further specific conditions are met is a display that does not suggest the determination result,
The specific display can be displayed when the symbol indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed,
Separately from the operation section, a separate operation section that can be operated by the player is provided, and a suggestion display suggesting the determination result can be displayed by operating the separate operation section, and when the suggestion display is displayed, The above specific display may now be displayed.
This gaming machine is characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decline in interest.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of the pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind, with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a front view of the outer frame of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from behind. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. (a) is a perspective view of the upper hinge member on the outer frame side of the outer frame, viewed from below with the left frame member omitted; (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a); be. (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the outer upper hinge member. FIG. 3 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the main body side upper hinge member. It is an explanatory view showing the action of the locking member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from behind. 20 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19. FIG. 20 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19. FIG. 20 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 19. FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into each main member and seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into each main member and seen from behind. (a) is a front view of the production operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. (a) is a perspective view of the production operation unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the production operation unit seen from the back. It is an explanatory view of the performance operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 34(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34(a). FIG. 34B is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34(b). 34(a) is a sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 34(b), and FIG. 34(b) is an enlarged view of section A in FIG. 34(a). It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into its main members and viewed from behind. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button as seen from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the decoration board unit of the performance operation unit as seen from the front. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the production operation unit in FIG. 37; (a) is a diagram of the production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and shows the part that is hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, button frame, etc. by cutting out a part of the operation button. (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a portion that is to be hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in a cross-sectional view of the production operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit in a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. . (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a front view of the door frame left side unit seen from the back. FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from behind. FIG. 47(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 47(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a front view of the door frame right side unit seen from the back. FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from behind. 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51(a). 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and FIG. 51(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the back. It is. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from behind. 57 is a sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 56. FIG. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 when viewed from the front. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 when viewed from behind. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged front view of the function display unit with the game board attached to the pachinko machine. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a different form from that shown in FIG. 63, viewed from the front together with the front component, the board holder, and the main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. FIG. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals that are input and output to a connection terminal board for a game ball lending device, which relays electrical connections between the payout control board, the CR unit, and the frequency display board, which constitute the main board. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a peripheral control MPU. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of the periphery of the VDP with built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and sound control section. It is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 75. FIG. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a power outage monitoring circuit. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing an inter-board communication interface circuit between a main control board and a peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit etc. of a payout control section. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81. FIG. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit. It is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an arrangement of output terminals of an external terminal board. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that draws a display area of a door frame side liquid crystal display device. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 3 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from a main control board to a peripheral control board. 89 is a table showing a continuation of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89; It is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board that the main control board receives. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control side power-on processing. 93 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 92. FIG. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a connection failure determination process. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of connection recovery processing. 7 is a timing chart illustrating the timing of outputting a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the upper plate side liquid crystal transmitter IC. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit installed in a gaming machine. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 1) of a magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 2) of a magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 3) of a magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the operating states of a magnetic sensor and each transistor in a table format. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a circuit configuration when a plurality of sensor signal input sections each connected to a plurality of magnetic detection sensors are connected in parallel to a base terminal of a transistor of a detection circuit section. (A) is a diagram showing a signal waveform input to a sensor signal input section in a conventional example, and (B) is a diagram showing a signal waveform input to a sensor signal input section in an embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a signal waveform input to a sensor signal input section in a conventional example, and (B) is a diagram showing a signal waveform input to a sensor signal input section in an embodiment. FIG. 7 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a magnetic sensor input circuit according to another embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in which a voltage output section, a voltage raising section, and a detection circuit section are arranged on the same substrate. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration in which a voltage raising section and a detection circuit section are arranged on the same board, and a voltage output section is arranged on a separate board (sensor board). FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration in which a voltage output section and a voltage raising section are arranged on the same board, and a detection circuit section is arranged on a separate board (for example, a main control board). FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a circuit configuration in which a plurality of sensors are connected in parallel to a voltage output section. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing how the first control unit MCG is integrated with only components (discrete components) with high security performance against fraud. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a partial area of the base substrate of the main control board according to a modified example. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram for explaining the principle of acquiring operation information in the vicinity of an open window. 120 is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 119. This is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between the special operation receiving part when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, and various production members arranged at positions overlapping the special operation receiving part when viewed from the front. be. (a) is a diagram illustrating a first operation control mode for the display section, and (b) is a diagram illustrating a second operation control mode for the display section. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control mode with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control mode with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control mode with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 4th operation control aspect with respect to a movable body. It is a figure explaining the 4th operation control aspect with respect to a movable body. 7 is a flowchart illustrating a control example of physical object detection information analysis processing executed in peripheral control unit steady processing. (a) is a time chart showing the control when a production reception occurs at a plurality of operation parts, and (b) is a time chart showing how the production operation occurs when a production reception occurs at a plurality of operation parts. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of a performance using a special operation receiving part. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of a performance using a special operation receiving part. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of a performance using a special operation receiving part. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of a performance using a special operation receiving part. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the first starting port passage process (step S5232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the second starting port passing process (step S5234). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process processing (step S5238). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305). (A) is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing symbol determination tables. It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S5282). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S5283). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal symbols and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). 12 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure for gate passage processing (step S5402). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal symbol normal processing (step S5403). It is a functional block diagram explaining the structure and outline of a function for executing production control in this embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a module configuration in the peripheral control section of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram showing the basic concept of performance control in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram illustrating the configuration up to the acquisition of data necessary for performance control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal display rendering of a step-up notice according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a flow when executing scheduler data according to the present embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram showing the function of the sound module of this embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing the function of the lamp module of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the function of sequence control in production control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of lamp and sound functions in performance control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of functions such as sounds and motors in performance control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a scheduler definition according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation|movement of the accessory controlled using the scheduler data of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the execution timing of a preview performance executed in a series of variable displays from the start of variation to the stop of special symbols in the present embodiment, and an example of a scheduler and scheduler data to be used. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating the contents of scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” that controls lighting and blinking of lamps in the step-up notice of the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating the contents of scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” that controls the lamp in the button cut-in notice of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" which controls the whole flow in the star accessory notice of this embodiment, and the left star accessory. It is a figure explaining scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" which controls the right star accessory in the star accessory notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" which controls the middle star accessory in the star accessory notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the contents of scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" which performs motor control in logo accessory fall notice of this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating scheduler data executed when the gaming machine of the present embodiment is powered on. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating the configuration for processing commands and scheduler data in the peripheral control board of the gaming machine of the present embodiment, and the relationship between these configurations. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a process of executing scheduler data when power is turned on according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a preview performance in a series of variable display from the start of variation to the stop of the special symbol in the present embodiment, and (A) shows the production executed from the start to the end of variation and the performance executed. FIG. 7B is a diagram illustrating the position of a machete accessory in a notice of a fall of a machete accessory. It is a figure explaining the contents of button machete accessory first half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" which performs motor control in the first half fall notice of button machete accessory which is the first half of the hatchet accessory fall notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the first half of machete accessory latter half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which performs motor control in the latter half of hatchet accessory fall notice which is the second half of the hatchet accessory fall notice of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the second half of hatchet accessory fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which performs motor control in the hatchet accessory fall notice, which is the second half of the hatchet accessory fall notice of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal presentation block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) by variation pattern which stores the combination of liquid crystal presentation block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal pattern block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) by variation pattern which stores the combination of liquid crystal pattern block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the sub effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) by variation pattern which stores the combination of sub effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline of effect control of the first half variation (normal variation 12 seconds) of variation pattern "10H03H" in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of sub production block data control start processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of sub production block data control starting processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of sub production block data control update processing of this embodiment. It is a diagram explaining the procedure for executing a preview effect in a variable display corresponding to the variation pattern "10H03H" of the present embodiment, in which (A) shows the timing and execution time of the preview effect, and (B) shows the execution time of the preview effect. It shows scheduler data driven by each scheduler to execute the preview performance. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the liquid crystal display block data classified by fluctuation pattern and the liquid crystal design block data classified by fluctuation pattern of this embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an image of creating a data file for drawing a step-up notice for liquid crystal display according to the present embodiment in step-up performance units (step-up 1 performance to 4 performance) using a video synthesis/motion creation graphic tool. It is a figure explaining the composition of production block data of a step-up notice of this embodiment, (A) shows the composition of step-up notice liquid crystal production block data, and (B) shows the composition of step-up notice sub production block data. show. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler function for liquid crystal effects of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the composition of the production switch in this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a production SW group of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a production SW starting command table of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a step-up notice in this embodiment, (A) shows the stage in which a step-up notice performance is performed, and (B) shows an example of the screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device at each stage. . It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using production SW in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of step-up notice using production SW in this embodiment, (A) is liquid crystal presentation scheduler data for executing step-up notice 1, and (B) is step-up notice 1 liquid crystal presentation. A drawing image using scheduler data is shown. It is a figure explaining master data defined on liquid crystal presentation scheduler data for every drawing section in this embodiment, and presentation SW corresponding to replacement data to be replaced with the master data. It is a figure explaining the control procedure by the effect switch of this embodiment, and especially shows the evaluation procedure of setting the effect SW to ON. It is a figure explaining an example of the function defined in the production SW command analysis module of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the details of the structure of the production SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is an example of the program code which defines the production SW information table, (B) is a bit assignment of production SW control information, (C) is a diagram showing an example of a production SW group. It is a diagram showing an example of a program code that defines a production SW number corresponding to a production SW in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data code which defines the production SW flag and production SW information table of this embodiment, (A) shows a production SW flag, and (B) shows a production SW information table. It is a figure showing an example of the production SW replacement table information included in the production SW information table of this embodiment and the program data that defines the production SW replacement table, in which (A) is production SW replacement table information, (B) is production SW Shows the replacement table. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) is the list which stores the address which stores each layer information table, (B) is the content of the layer information table (for background) shows. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of program data that defines the layer information table of the present embodiment, in which (A) shows the contents of the layer information table (first half of the preview 1), and (B) shows the contents of the layer information table (first half of the preview 2). show. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal layer table and the liquid crystal presentation common block in this embodiment, (A) shows the liquid crystal layer table of the step-up notice presentation, and (B) shows the structure of the liquid crystal presentation common block. . FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of program data that defines liquid crystal display blocks (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1 to 4) for each step of the step-up notice of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline of button mini-character production of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to button mini-character production in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the individual common block of the button mini-character performance in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal presentation block data for performing the button mini-character presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing classification which can be determined within the callback function at the time of callback execution by the effect SW of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing result of an individual layer and the drawing result of all layers at the time of the preview effect execution of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the common block which spans multiple periods of this embodiment, (A) shows the execution timing of the display of a symbol and a preview performance, and (B) shows the structure of the liquid crystal preview performance block by a common block. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a conventional configuration in which images are written to a frame buffer by writing images written to each layer, respectively. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for converting an image file stored in an off-screen buffer and then writing it to a frame buffer in this embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for temporarily storing a display list command group in a peripheral control RAM and then transferring it to a VDP with a built-in sound source in this embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for transferring a display list command group to a VDP with a built-in sound source without storing the display list command group in the peripheral control RAM in this embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a configuration having a plurality of display areas for variably displaying identification symbols in the present embodiment, and (A) is an example of a configuration having a display area A and a display area B of identification symbols on one display screen; B) is a configuration example in which two display screens are provided, each display screen having a display area A and a display area B for identification symbols. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an emphasizing mode of a display area in which a variable display of identification symbols is performed in the present embodiment, and (A) is a normal mode in which display area A and display area B are displayed in a standard mode (specified size); , (B) is an emphasis mode A in which the display area A is displayed in an emphasized manner, and (C) is an emphasis mode B in which the display area B is displayed in an emphasized manner. It is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen transition in a configuration in which the fluctuation display of the identification symbols of the present embodiment is performed in the display area A and the display area B, and is linked when the fluctuation of some of the identification symbols in the display area A stops. An example is shown in which the fluctuation of the identification symbol stops in the display area B. It is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen transition in a configuration in which the identification symbols of the present embodiment are displayed in a variable manner in a display area A and a display area B, and regardless of the display mode of the display area A, when the variation is stopped, An example of displaying all stopped symbols is shown. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a production block of timer production of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of execution of timer effect of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a production block of background production of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of the background effect of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of mini character presentation of this embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example in which identification symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of display areas according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example in which identification symbols are independently and variably displayed in a plurality of display areas according to the present embodiment, and are variably displayed in the same manner at a predetermined timing. It is a figure which shows the example which each identification pattern changes and displays in the several display area of this embodiment, and stops at a different pattern. It is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a game board of a game machine in this embodiment. It is a perspective view showing the shape of the character accessory in this embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the shape of the snowman accessory in this embodiment, (A) is a figure seen from the front, (B) is a figure seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the character accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which looked at the cover member of the character accessory of this embodiment from the back side. It is a figure showing the front side of the character accessory board of the character accessory of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character accessory board in the cover member of the character accessory of this embodiment, and shows the back side of the character accessory board. It is a figure explaining the positional relationship of the light-emitting body and the transparent part and non-transparent part of a cover member in the character object of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the light guide member which diffuses the light from the light emitter in the character object of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side of the character accessory board|substrate of the character accessory of the modification 1 of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character accessory board in the cover member of the character accessory of the modification 1 of this embodiment, and shows the back side of the character accessory board. It is a figure explaining the positional relationship of the light-emitting body and the transparent part and non-transparent part of a cover member in the character accessory of the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure showing the front side of the character character object board of the character character object board of modification 2 of this embodiment of this embodiment, and shows the state where the character character object board and the light guide member overlap. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character accessory board in the cover member of the character accessory of the modification 2 of this embodiment, and shows the back side of the character accessory board. It is a figure which shows the state in which the character accessory of the modification 2 of this embodiment is attached to the game board. It is a figure which shows the cross-sectional view of the snowman accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side cover member of the snowman accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the back side cover member of the snowman accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure showing the front side of the snowman board of the snowman accessory of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the back side of the snowman board|substrate of the snowman accessory of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is a top view of a horizontal cross section of the snowman accessory of this embodiment. It is a top view of a horizontal cross section of a snowman accessory in a modified example of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the entire game board of this embodiment. It is a figure showing a front view, a perspective view, and an exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure showing the front view and the back view of the face board of the rabbit accessory of this embodiment. It is a perspective view of the face cover part of the rabbit accessory of this embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the rabbit accessory of this embodiment is in a standby position. It is a diagram showing an example of the rabbit accessory of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the rabbit accessory of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the rabbit accessory of the present embodiment. It is a figure showing the whole game board in a modification of this embodiment. It is a figure showing the stump accessories of this embodiment. It is a figure showing the stump accessories of this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a stump box section of the present embodiment, an exploded view thereof, a front view of a rear wall cover, and a front view of a rear wall board. It is a figure which showed the stump box part, its exploded view, the front view of a rear wall cover, and the front view of a rear wall board|substrate in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example about a grass accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example about a grass accessory in a modification of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example about a grass accessory in a modification of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example about a grass accessory in a modification of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example about a grass accessory in a modification of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example about a grass accessory in a modification of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example about a grass accessory in a modification of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example about a grass accessory in a modification of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example about a grass accessory in a modification of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example about a grass accessory in a modification of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example about a grass accessory in a modification of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example about a grass accessory in a modification of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example about a grass accessory in a modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the front view, perspective view, and exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example about mountain accessories of this embodiment. It is a figure showing the ornamental grass behind the board of this embodiment. In the stump box section shown in FIGS. 257(A) and 258(A) of this embodiment, the box top wall, box right wall, box bottom wall, and box left wall are moved from the standby position to the moving position. It is a figure showing the state where it was moved. This is a diagram showing an example in which a stump board part is not provided in front of the stump box part of the present embodiment, and a fixed grass board part is provided in place of the first grass movable part and the second grass movable part. be. 276 is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 276 of this embodiment. 277 is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 277 of this embodiment. 277 is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 277 of this embodiment. 277 is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 277 of this embodiment. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of the configuration of the rear wall of the box in FIG. 279 of this embodiment, and (C) and (D) are diagrams showing an example of the configuration of the rear wall of the box in FIG. 280 of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a configuration. It is a figure showing the pachinko machine of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are a front view, (C) is a top view, and (D) and (E) are right views. It is a time chart showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram schematically showing changes in the display mode of the game board side performance display device, the moving state of the frame movable body, and the light emitting performance state over time in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram schematically showing changes in the display mode of the game board side performance display device, the moving state of the frame movable body, and the light emitting performance state over time in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure showing the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are a front view, (C) and (D) are top views, and (E) and (F) are right views. be. It is a figure showing the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are a front view, (C) and (D) are top views, and (E) and (F) are right views. be. It is a figure showing the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are a front view, (C) is a top view, and (D) and (E) are right views. It is a figure showing the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are a front view, (C) and (D) are top views, and (E) and (F) are right views. be. It is a figure showing the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are a front view, (C) is a top view, and (D) and (E) are right views. It is a time chart of a modified example showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure showing the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are a front view, (C) is a top view, and (D) and (E) are right views. It is a figure showing the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are a front view, (C) is a top view, and (D) and (E) are right views. It is a figure showing the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are a front view, (C) is a top view, and (D) and (E) are right views. It is a figure showing the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are a front view, (C) and (D) are top views, and (E) and (F) are right views. be. It is a time chart of a modified example showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure showing the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are a front view, (C) is a top view, and (D) and (E) are right views. It is a figure showing the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are a front view, (C) is a top view, and (D) and (E) are right views. It is a figure showing the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are a front view, (C) is a top view, and (D) and (E) are right views. It is a figure showing the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are a front view, (C) is a top view, and (D) and (E) are right views. It is a figure showing a pachinko machine of a modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are a front view, and (C) and (D) are a top view. It is a figure showing a pachinko machine of a modification in this embodiment, and (A) and (B) are right views. It is a figure showing the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are a front view, (C) is a top view, and (D) and (E) are right views. It is a time chart of a modified example showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure showing the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are a front view, (C) is a top view, and (D) and (E) are right views. It is a figure showing a pachinko machine of a modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are a front view, and (C) and (D) are a top view. It is a figure showing a pachinko machine of a modification in this embodiment, and (A) and (B) are right views. It is a figure showing a pachinko machine of a modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are a front view, and (C) and (D) are a top view. It is a figure showing a pachinko machine of a modification in this embodiment, and (A) and (B) are right views. It is a time chart of a modified example showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing the operation mode, display state, and light emitting performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board in a 2nd embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game panel in a 2nd embodiment. It is an enlarged right front perspective view of a game panel in a 2nd embodiment. FIG. 7 is an exploded front perspective view of the region cover member in the second embodiment. It is a top view of the arrangement of obstacle nails in the right side game area in the second embodiment. FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the area cover member in the second embodiment. They are sectional views of the obstacle nails in the right side game area in the second embodiment, in which (a) is a sectional view of a place where one obstacle nail is accommodated in the penetration part, and (b) is a sectional view of a place where two obstacle nails are accommodated. A cross-sectional view of a location where three obstruction nails are accommodated in the penetrating portion is shown, and (c) a cross-sectional view of a location where three obstacle nails are accommodated in the penetrating portion. It is a front view showing an example of a nail sheet. FIG. 3 is a front view showing an example of how the nail sheet is used. An example of the installation mode of the area cover member in the third embodiment, in which (a) is a front view showing an example of the installation method of the area cover member, and (b) is a front view showing an example of the installation state of the area cover member. In the figures, (c) is a cross-sectional view when the area cover member is attached to the existing member, and (d) is a cross-sectional view when the area cover member is integrated with the existing member. Examples of installing multiple types of area cover members in the third embodiment, in which (a) the area cover member is installed with the right-hand penetration part shifted inward, and (b) the left-hand penetration part is moved inward. (c) is an installation aspect of the area cover member with both penetration parts shifted inward, and (d) is an installation aspect of the area cover member with the right penetration part shifted outward. However, (e) shows an installation mode of the area cover member with the left penetration part shifted outward, and (f) shows an installation mode of the area cover member with both penetration parts shifted outward, respectively, in front view. ing. Another embodiment of the area cover member in the third embodiment, in which (a) is a front view showing an example of an installation method of the area cover member, and (b) is a front view showing an example of an installation state of the area cover member. However, (c) is an installation mode in which the area cover member is rotated 180 degrees and both penetration parts are shifted inward, and (d) is an installation mode in which the area cover member is rotated 90 degrees to the right and both penetration parts are moved inward. A front view of a shifted installation mode is shown in (e), and an installation mode in which the area cover member is rotated 90 degrees to the left and both penetration parts are shifted inward. Another embodiment of the area cover member in the third embodiment, in which (a) is a front view showing an example of an installation method of the area cover member, and (b) is a front view showing an example of an installation state of the area cover member. However, (c) is a front view showing an installation mode in which the area cover member is moved downward and the penetration parts on both sides are shifted downward. In other embodiments of the area cover member in the third embodiment, (a) to (d) each show a front view of various applicable shapes of the penetrating portion. Another embodiment of the area cover member in the third embodiment, in which (a) is an installation mode of the area cover member that accommodates two obstacle nails in the penetration part on both sides, and (b) is an installation mode of the area cover member that accommodates two obstacle nails in the penetration part on both sides. (c) is a front view showing an example of the case where the area cover member is installed from the front side to the game panel. (d) and (e) are cross-sectional views showing an example of installing the area cover member on the game panel from the front side. Another embodiment of the area cover member in the third embodiment, in which (a) is a front view showing an example of fixing the area cover member from the rear of the game panel, and (b) is a front view showing an example of fixing the area cover member to the game panel. A sectional view showing an example of fixing from the rear is shown. Another embodiment of the area cover member in the third embodiment, in which (a) is a front view showing a part of the left side game area before the area cover member is installed, and (b) is the left side after the area cover member is installed. A front view showing a portion of the gaming area is shown in each case. Another embodiment of the area cover member in the third embodiment, in which (a) is a front view showing an installation mode of the area cover member formed by shifting the penetration part downward, and (b) is a front view showing the installation mode of the area cover member formed by shifting the penetration part downward. A front view showing an installation mode of the area cover member molded in a shifted manner is shown in each case. An example of how the decorative sticker is installed on the area cover member, (a) is a front view showing the area cover member before the decorative sticker is installed, and (b) is an example where the decorative sticker is pasted all around the penetration part. (c) is a front view showing a state in which a decorative seal is affixed to a part of the periphery of the penetrating portion. An example of how an obstacle nail is accommodated in a penetrating part formed in an area cover member, and (a) to (c) show examples of accommodation modes of an obstacle nail in a penetrating part formed in a penetrating part formed in a penetrating part formed in a penetrating part formed with a convex part on the front side and a game panel side of a region cover member. The manner in which the obstacle nails are accommodated is shown in cross-section. An example of how a faulty nail is accommodated in a penetrating portion formed in a region cover member, and (a) to (g) show how a faulty nail is accommodated in a penetration portion in which a convex portion is formed in the center of a cross section of the region cover member. The accommodation mode is shown in a cross-sectional view. An example of how an obstacle nail is accommodated in a penetration part formed in an area cover member, and (a) to (d) show how an obstacle nail is accommodated in a penetration part in which a convex part is formed on the game panel side of an area cover member. The accommodation mode is shown in a cross-sectional view. An example of how a faulty nail is accommodated in a penetrating portion formed in an area cover member, in which (a) to (d) show how a faulty nail is accommodated in a penetration portion having a convex portion formed on the front side of the region cover member. Embodiments are each shown in cross-section. An example of how a faulty nail is accommodated in a penetration part formed in an area cover member, and (a) to (e) are cross-sectional views showing how a faulty nail is accommodated in a penetration part that closes the front side of the area cover member. are shown respectively. An example of how a faulty nail is accommodated in a penetration part formed in a region cover member, and (a) to (c) show cross-sectional views of how a faulty nail is accommodated in a region cover member in which a rib is formed around the penetration part. Each is shown in the figure. An example of how the obstructing nail is accommodated in the penetration part formed in the area cover member, in which (a) shows the visible state before the fraudulent act, and (b) shows the visible state after the fraudulent act in front view. It is shown. A front view of another embodiment of the area covering member in the third embodiment is shown. It is a figure showing the pachinko machine in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are a front view, (C) is a top view, and (D) and (E) are right views. (A) and (B) are front views showing a modified example of a pachinko machine in this embodiment. (C) is a front view of a root vegetable frame movable body included in the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the effect mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the effect mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the effect mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the effect mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the effect mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the effect mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the effect mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the effect mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the effect mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the effect mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a table showing the display effect pattern of the game board side effect display device and the image data arranged in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a table showing the display effect pattern of the game board side effect display device and the image data arranged in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a table showing the layers used for the display effect of the game board side effect display device and the priorities of the image data arranged in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a table showing the layers used for the display effect of the game board side effect display device and the priorities of the image data arranged in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a table showing the layers used for the display effect of the game board side effect display device and the priorities of the image data arranged in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a table showing the layers used for the display effect of the game board side effect display device and the priorities of the image data arranged in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a table showing the layers used for the display effect of the game board side effect display device and the priorities of the image data arranged in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a table showing image data arranged in the display effect of the game board side effect display device and combinations of image data in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a table showing the display effect pattern of the game board side effect display device, the layers to be used, and the priorities of the image data to be arranged in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a table showing the layers used for the display effect of the game board side effect display device and the priorities of the image data arranged in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure showing the obstacle nail and the panel board in this embodiment. It is a figure showing an obstacle nail, a panel board, and a game ball in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a decorative member and a panel board in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a decorative member and a panel board in this embodiment. It is a figure showing the decoration member in this embodiment. It is a figure showing the decoration member in this embodiment. It is a figure showing the decoration member in this embodiment. It is a figure showing the decoration member in this embodiment. It is a diagram showing a game board in this embodiment. It is a diagram showing a game board in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the casing in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the casing in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of display in a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 2 is an image diagram of the movement of a self-tank displayed in a display area in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is an image diagram of the movement of a self-tank displayed in a display area in the present embodiment. It is a diagram explaining a gaming state in this embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the game state in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a table of performance patterns in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a table of performance patterns in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a table of performance patterns in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a table of performance patterns in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the Pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the Pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the Pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. Figure 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame, game board, body frame, and outer frame disassembled, and Figure 10 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine with the door frame, game board, body frame, and outer frame. FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed from the front of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that supports the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a main body frame 4 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. A game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20, which are spaced apart vertically and extend left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. It includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the frame 20 and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and back. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

The outer frame 2 also includes a curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and a curtain plate member 50 that is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left frame member 30. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below the handle unit 111 and can be operated by the player to drive a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. A tray unit 320 is attached to the lower front part of the tray unit 320, and a tray unit 320 is attached to the center of the tray unit 320, and the tray unit 320 is attached to the center of the tray unit 320, and the tray unit 320 is attached to the bottom of the tray unit 320, and it is attached to the center of the tray unit 320. A production operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory production, and a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 above the plate unit 320. , a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 above the dish unit 320, a door frame left side unit 530, and a door frame right side unit 550. A door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 whose part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a main body frame base 600. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends of the left side in front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 is attached to the front lower part of the game board 5 for driving game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a ball launcher 680 is attached to the right side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the outer frame 2 and the main body frame. 4, a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and a locking unit 700 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 along the upper side and left side in front view and that pays out game balls to the player side. An L-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the rear lower part of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. A back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the.

The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 includes an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a dispensing unit base 801 attached to the upper part of the dispensing unit base 801, which is opened upward and extends left and right. A ball tank 802 is box-shaped and stores game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown), and a ball tank 802 is attached to a payout unit base 801 on the lower side of the ball tank 802, and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are moved to the left when viewed from the front. A tank rail 803 that extends left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front and that guides game balls from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; It is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and pays out the game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. A payout device 830 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides the game balls put out by the payout device 830 downward, and also guides game balls paid out by the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 according to the storage state of the game balls. The upper full bulb path unit 850 is configured to discharge from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full bulb discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full bulb path unit 850 is attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801. A normal guide path 861 guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3, and a game ball discharged from the full discharge port 850e is guided forward and guides the game ball from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3. A lower full bulb path unit 860 having a full bulb guide path 862 guiding to the bulb socket 274 is provided.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a lower part for bass sound that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front. A speaker unit 920 having a speaker 921, a power board box 930 installed on the right side in front view at the rear side of the board unit base 910 and housing a power board inside, and a power board box 930 installed on the rear side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 that accommodates an interface control board inside, and a payout control board 951 that is installed across the power supply board box 930 and interface control board box 940 and that controls the payout of game balls is housed inside. and a payout control board box 950.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of a game area 5a into which game balls are hit, and the game balls fired from a ball firing device 680 are sent to the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that guide the player, and a flat game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitions the rear end of the game area 5a. There is.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a player rotates the handle 302 with game balls stored in the upper tray 321, the ball launcher 680 fires the game balls with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit into the game area 5a are received in the winning hole, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 by the payout device 830 according to the accepted winning hole. Since the player's interest can be increased by this payout of game balls, the game ball in the upper tray 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Moreover, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 16(a) is a perspective view of the upper hinge member on the outer frame side of the outer frame, viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16(b) is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 16(a) in an exploded manner. It is a diagram. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 has an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated and extend left and right, and connects both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 to each other. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and back. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces facing outward in the left and right direction of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are on the same surface. It is being

The outer frame 2 also includes an outer frame upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, and a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame upper hinge member 60. It includes an upper left end side upper part of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and a lower outer frame hinge member 70 attached to the left frame member 30. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The outer frame 2 also includes a curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and a curtain plate member 50 that is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively, a flat left sliding member 81 attached to the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 at a position to the left of the left-right center; A flat right sliding member 82 is attached to a position near the right end of the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

Furthermore, the outer frame 2 includes the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40, respectively. A connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 also has an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 that are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and to which an outer frame hook 703 of a locking unit 700 to be described later is locked. , is equipped.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) with a predetermined thickness. This upper frame member 10 is provided with an engagement notch 11 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. Inside this engagement notch 11, upper and lateral fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached. Further, the upper frame member 10 is provided with a mounting step portion 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion when viewed from the front. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to this mounting step portion 12 .

[2-2. Bottom frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) with a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 has the same dimensions as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear widths of the upper frame member 10. It is longer than the front and back width of the The lower frame member 20 is provided with engagement notches 21, which penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction, at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In this engagement notch 21, a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of a lower left connecting member 85C and a lower right connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, is attached.

The lower frame member 20 also includes front end notches 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surface at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to be the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 have a constant cross-sectional shape and extend vertically, and are formed of extruded shapes of metal such as aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in mutually symmetrical shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward on the outer sides in the left-right direction from a position near the rear with respect to the center in the front-rear direction to near the rear end. It includes recessed portions 31 and 41, and protruding portions 32 and 42 that bulge out from the side surface opposite to the recessed portions 31 and 41 and are hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are increased by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, lower and horizontal fixing portions 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are inserted into the protrusions 32 and 42 and attached.

Furthermore, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves formed on their surfaces that extend vertically. These grooves make it easier for the operator to hold the pachinko machine 1 by providing finger rests when installing or transporting the pachinko machine 1 to island facilities such as game halls. The design of the exterior of the machine 1 can be improved.

[2-4. Curtain board members]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with an open rear side. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extension part 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape with a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extension part 51. A left discharge hole 52 which is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 which penetrates vertically and is large enough for a game ball to pass through on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension part 51. A standing wall portion 54 extends upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extending portion 51, and a standing wall portion 54 bulges forward from near the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 with the front surface facing upward. It is provided with a return part 55 which is inclined so as to go toward the rear as it goes toward the front.

The curtain plate member 50 is arranged such that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extending portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position that coincides with a discharge hole 74, which will be described later, of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side when assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

Further, the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined so that the front end side is lower. The curtain plate member 50 also includes a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 on the top surface, and a right mounting portion 56 for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the top surface. A section 57 is provided. On the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed via a left sliding member 81 and a right sliding member 82.

As shown in the figure, this curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on its front surface. Further, although not shown in the drawings, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned into a grid pattern by a plurality of ribs, thereby increasing strength and rigidity. Moreover, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper fixing part 61 that is horizontally extended and has a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate-shaped upper fixing part 61 that extends forward from the front end of the upper fixing part 61. , a bearing groove 63 extending from the right end of the front extending part 62 toward the left and right center of the front extending part 62 and penetrating vertically, and the upper fixing part 61 in a plan view. A flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 64 extends downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing part extends downward from the end side of the front extension part 62 from the left end to the front end to the area where the bearing groove 63 opens. A flat hanging part 65 that is continuous with the part 64 is provided (see FIG. 16(b) etc.).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the upper fixing part 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step part 12 of the upper frame member 10, and is fixed with screws (not shown). There is. Further, the front extending portion 62 extends further forward than the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the horizontal fixing portion 64 is inserted from above into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 and is fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws.

This outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 to rotate the main body frame 4 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band-shaped lock body 66a that extends back and forth with a predetermined width on the left and right sides, and an operating portion that protrudes rightward from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a and then diagonally to the left front, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d. This lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 using attachment screws 67 .

The lock member 66 is attached through the attachment hole 66d at a position where the rear end of the lock body 66a is on the rear side of the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side. Further, when the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side near the front end is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 of 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

Further, the tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner circumferential surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. This locking member 66 is biased in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the attachment hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock body 66a to accommodate a body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620, which will be described later.

This lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic part 66c by operating the operating part 66b. By operating the operating portion 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in a direction in which its front end moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retreated from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. can be in a state where it is completely passed through. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63 and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 extending horizontally, and a portion extending upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 71. A rising flat plate-like rising part 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal part 71, and penetrating the horizontal part 71 vertically, allowing only one game ball to pass through. A discharge hole 74 of the same size is provided. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed into a trapezoid with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape, and is formed into a truncated cone shape with the upper end narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. This outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a left-side position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction, and to extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U-shape. This discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extension portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71 is fixed to the curtain reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) that pass through the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. In addition, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 using screws (not shown). This outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is constructed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. In cooperation with the hinge member 60, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Furthermore, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 is aligned with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (ejected) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. To be more specific, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a game ball that falls between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 will fall between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between the two gradually narrows, the liquid rolls toward the rear where the gap is wide, and the liquid can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, since the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is approximately the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game balls that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent them from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for game balls to stay in the lower hinge member 70 portion.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting members 85 of the outer frame 2 include an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There are a lower left connecting member 85C that connects the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing part 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing part 86, and a horizontal fixing part 86. A flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing part 88 extends downward from the same side as the part from which the upper lateral fixing part 87 in 86 extends. This connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper lateral fixing part 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing part 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower lateral fixing part 88 extends from both front and back sides of the upper lateral fixing part 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 spaced apart from each other in the front and rear. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 while being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper-lateral fixing parts 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the ends of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. Further, the lower and horizontal fixing portions 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the protrusions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower and horizontal fixing portions 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are screwed into the protrusions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. are fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing part 87 protrudes further rearward than the rear end of the horizontal fixing part 86, and further than the horizontal fixing part 86 of the upper horizontal fixing part 87. A lower horizontal fixing part 88 extends below the horizontal fixing part 86 from the lower end of the rearwardly projecting part. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 that projects from the rear end of the upper horizontal securing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal securing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper and lateral fixing parts 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the protrusions 32 and 42, respectively. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing parts 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surfaces of the lower frame member 20 in the left and right direction, respectively. Ru.

[2-9. Locking mechanism of upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the locking mechanism for the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the locking member 66 on the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. Refer to and explain. FIG. 17(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. FIG. 3 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram showing the action of the locking member on the outer frame.

When the locking member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c is in contact with the inner circumferential surface of the hanging portion 65. Therefore, the lock body 66a partially closes the bent bearing groove 63, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space is formed in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 into which the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

In this embodiment, the support mechanism of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 is such that the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a is The right side of the lock body 66a is close to the right side hanging part 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging part 65, and they are in contact with each other). In the normal pivoting state (not shown), the centers of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are offset in an oblique direction and are opposed to each other. It is in a state.

In this normal pivoting state, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622, which pivotally supports the heavy main body frame 4, is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a. In other words, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the locking member 66. Note that, since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, when the operating portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly. There is. In addition, in the illustration, the center of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the attachment hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is applied with an acting force F in a direction in which it comes out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape and comes into contact with the arcuate front end surface of the lock body 66a, the acting force F is a component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the abutting portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the circular arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of one side, the direction of the component force F1 is directed toward the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (rotation center of the lock member 66). , the moment that rotates the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not work, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is connected to the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the inner surface and the side surface is maintained.

Therefore, even in a normal pivoting state or a state in which the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, no load is always applied to the elastic part 66c of the lock member 66, and the elastic part 66c is integrally formed with synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from falling off from the bearing groove 63 over a long period of time. Note that even if the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right due to excessive force, the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a will come into contact with the hanging portion 65 and the lock body 66a will not move further. Since it does not rotate, the locking member 66 is prevented from protruding outside the front extending portion 62.

Note that even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not an arc shape, the lock member 66 may be placed at a position where no rotational moment is generated due to the action of the component force F1 described above, or when the front end portion of the lock member 66 is directed toward the outside of the front extension portion 62. By locating the center of rotation of the locking member 66 (the axis fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment is generated to rotate the locking member 66, no load is constantly applied to the elastic portion 66c of the locking member 66. Even when the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only comes into contact with the hanging portion 65, so the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extending portion 62.

When supporting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 in the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert hinge pin 622. When the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 comes into contact with the right side of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the biasing force of the elastic part 66c. The locking member 66 rotates around the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock body 66a that had closed the bearing groove 63 retreats, opening the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest part (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

Then, when the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock main body 66a is released by the urging force of the elastic part 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to its normal state. As a result, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is accommodated in the space in front of the front end of the lock main body 66a in the bearing groove 63, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is rotatable in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. It is held (locked) in the state.

When removing the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from inside the bearing groove 63, operate the operating part 66b of the lock member 66, rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and then remove the elastic part. The lock body 66a is retreated from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of the lock body 66c. As a result, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball bite prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
A security mechanism at the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment and ball chewing prevention for preventing game balls from being caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. The mechanism will be explained.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the lower outer frame hinge member 70 is attached to the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 when viewed from the front. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to be placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and on the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 is provided with a standing wall portion 54 rising upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, Since the tip of the unauthorized tool comes into contact with the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the top surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear side. , it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from occurring through the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side.

In addition, since the upper end of the vertical wall portion 54 is provided with a barbed portion 55 extending forward, if an unauthorized tool that has come into contact with the vertical wall portion 54 bends upward, the barred portion 55 will cause the tip of the unauthorized tool to bend. Since it is possible to fold back further forward, it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and unauthorized acts can be carried out through the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side. can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 is provided with the standing wall portion 54 extending upward, the game ball is placed on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 open to the outer frame 2. When the game ball falls onto the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal part 71), the game ball on the horizontal part 71 is not ejected backward from the rear end of the horizontal part 71 due to the presence of the standing wall part 54, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the horizontal part 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension part 51 of the curtain plate member 50 include a discharge hole 74 through which a game ball can pass, and a left discharge hole 52. , and the right discharge hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal part 71 of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 etc., and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is caught between the balls.

Therefore, if the game ball is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the area around the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side may be damaged, or the main body frame 4 may not close normally and the outer frame 2 may It is possible to prevent a gap from being created between the main body frame 4 and the use of the gap to commit fraudulent acts.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. FIG. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 19. It is a diagram. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the back.

As shown in FIGS. 29, 30, etc., the door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100, which has a rectangular frame-like external shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a door frame base unit 100, which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 300 that is attached to the handle unit 300, the pan unit 320 that is attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, the production operation unit 400 that is attached to the center of the pan unit 320, and the door frame base unit that is attached to the upper side of the pan unit 320. The door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit 320, and the door frame left side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 that has a vertically extending rectangular (quadrangular) outer shape when viewed from the front and has a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth, although the details will be described later. , a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to both upper and lower ends of the left end side in front view of the reinforcing unit 130, and attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closes the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, The door frame 3 and main body frame 4, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 are locked. an opening/closing cylinder unit 210 for sending the game balls to the ball firing device 680, which is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a ball sending device 680, which is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. The foul cover unit 270 receives the game balls that are ejected and does not reach the game area 5a and discharges them to the lower tray 322.

Although the details will be described later, the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 allows the player to rotate the rotatable handle 302 to move the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is possible to drive the ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a certain force.

The plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 below the through hole 111, and the front side bulges forward, although the details will be described later. A production operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The tray unit 320 includes an upper tray 321 that stores game balls to be hit into the game area 5a, and a tray unit 320 that is disposed below the upper tray 321 and stores game balls supplied from the upper tray 321 and the foul cover unit 270. A lower tray 322 that can be stored, an upper tray ball removal button 327 for pulling out game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, and a ball lending machine within the range of cash or prepaid card balance inserted into the ball rental machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending game balls to a player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card minus the amount of game balls lent from the ball lending machine, and cash inserted into the ball lending machine. A ball rental/return display section 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., a performance selection left button 331 and a performance selection right button 332 that can be operated by the player when presenting a performance, and a display section 330 in the lower tray 322 A lower tray ball removal button 333 for discharging the game ball below the tray unit 320 is provided.

The production operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front part of the tray unit 320 at the center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed and operated by the player and presents a production image to the player. It is something that can be done. Although the details will be described later, this production operation unit 400 includes a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side production that is arranged within the operation button 410 so as to be visible from the player side and can display a production image. A display device 460 is provided.

Although the details will be described later, the door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 on the upper side of the dish unit 320, and It decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light.

Although the details will be described later, the door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 above the tray unit 320, and It decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a). This door frame right side unit 550 protrudes more forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides, and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided at the front end. A right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. In the door frame right side unit 550, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be decorated with light emission.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It is used to decorate the upper part of the frame 3. Although the details will be described later, the door frame top unit 570 includes a pair of upper speakers 573 spaced apart from each other on the left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward at the center of the front surface, and both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. In the door frame top unit 570, the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame seen from the front, and FIG. 31(b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. Fig. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main parts and viewed from the front, and Fig. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main parts and seen from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed (hinged) so that the left side in front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 at the lower front corner, a tray unit 320 to which the production operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 at the front left outside of the through hole 111. A door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 has a plate-shaped door frame base 110 that has a rectangular outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and has a through hole 111 penetrating the front and back. , a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to both upper and lower ends of the left end side in front view of the reinforcing unit 130, protruding forward from the door frame base 110 and supporting the main body frame 4. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 which are rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front side of the through hole 111 on the front side of the door frame base 110. A door frame left side decorative board 160, which is attached to the left side of the view and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a glass unit 190, which is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, are detachably attached. and a glass unit mounting member 170 for use.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front view of the front side of the door frame base 110 for attaching the handle unit 300, and a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 that closes the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an opening/closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Furthermore, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, a ball feed solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental and return display section 330, performance selection left button 331, performance selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side performance display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , upper speaker 573, etc., and a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the main body frame 4.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 has a square (rectangular) shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 110 is provided with a through hole 111 that penetrates the door frame base 110 in the front and back, and has a substantially rectangular inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery of the through hole 111 are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is located above and below the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at about 1/3 of the height in the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is entirely formed into a frame shape with the through holes 111 penetrating in the front and rear. This door frame base 110 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 has a handle mounting seat surface 112 formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward than the right end side, and the handle mounting seat surface 112 and the through hole 111. A cylinder mounting part 113 is recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end in front view, and the cylinder mounting plate 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached to the cylinder mounting part 113 . The cylinder insertion hole 114 into which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted passes through the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 from front to back on the left side when viewed from the front, so that the entry port 251a and the ball extraction port 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 are inserted forward. A ball feeding opening 115 for facing the ball is provided.

Further, the door frame base 110 is located to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the door frame base 110 and penetrates back and forth at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, so that the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. A passage hole 116 for the lower plate, which is inserted into the door frame base 110, and an upper hole that penetrates back and forth adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111 near the left end of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front, so that the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. A plate passage opening 117 , a glass unit mounting part 118 that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner periphery of the through-hole 111 and into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and the upper left and right sides of the door frame base 110 . It is provided with a speaker insertion opening 119 that penetrates back and forth at the corner and into which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31, 33, and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 extending left and right and attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a middle reinforcing sheet metal 131 extending left and right attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A left reinforcing sheet metal 133 that extends vertically and is attached along the left side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front; and a right reinforcing sheet metal 133 that extends vertically and is attached along the right side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front. It includes a metal plate 134 and a locking portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing metal plate 134 and to which the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700 is locked.

In the reinforcing unit 130, both left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 with screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 with screws. Fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to a right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of an opening/closing cylinder unit 210, which will be described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed into a frame shape by an upper reinforcing metal sheet 131, a middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, a left reinforcing sheet metal 133, a right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by suitably bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 has a notch 132a formed in the door frame base 110 at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage opening 117 and penetrating back and forth.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has portions bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, This location increases strength and rigidity, and prevents unauthorized tools such as piano wire and flathead screwdrivers from entering from outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 includes a door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 that is attached to the door frame base 110 and has a pair of vertically spaced protruding pieces 141a, and a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A cylindrical door frame upper hinge pin 142 that passes through the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, and a pair of protruding pieces 141a on the door frame upper hinge pin 142. A disc-shaped flange member 143 is attached at a position between the flange member 143 and the hinge pin 142 on the door frame, which is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. is inserted through the lock spring 144 and urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

Although not shown, the hinge shaft bracket 141 on the door frame has a flat mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and has a shape in side view that is open to the front. It is formed into a letter shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, a mounting piece connecting a pair of protruding pieces 141a is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

The door frame upper hinge pin 142 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 at a portion (upper end) that protrudes higher than the upper protruding piece 141a. Further, although not shown in the drawings, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 has a portion that protrudes below the lower protruding piece 141a and is bent in the horizontal direction. This bent portion abuts against the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142.

The collar member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted, and its upper end is in contact with the collar member 143, and its lower end is in contact with the lower protruding piece 141a. This lock spring 144 is interposed in a compressed state between the collar member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a, and urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the collar member 143. .

In the door frame upper hinge member 140, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a by a predetermined amount.

When an operator holds the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 and pulls that portion downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 144, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is attached to the door frame side upper hinge member 140. The entire upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 does not allow the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 to be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 or pulled out from below. Can be done. Thereby, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is , can be supported so as to be hinged and rotatable relative to the main body frame 4.

Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by a pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is a door frame side lower hinge member 150, which will be described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. Thereby, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 can hingely rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 in a good condition.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31, 32, and the like. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 that is attached to the door frame base 110 and has a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 that is attached to the door frame base 110 and has a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending forward. A cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protrudes downward from near the front end of the extending piece 151a.

The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of a horizontally extending flat plate-like extension piece 151a, and has an overall shape in side view. is formed into a substantially L-shape. This door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

The lower end of the door frame lower hinge pin 152 is shaped like a truncated cone that narrows downward. This door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into a door frame hinge hole 644 of a body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the body frame 4, which will be described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

This door frame side lower hinge member 150 allows the door frame 3 to hinge relative to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. can be supported.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative board 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31, 32, and the like. The door frame left side decorative board 160 is attached to the left side of the through hole 111 in front view on the front surface of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decorative board 160 is a door that extends vertically from a height below the speaker insertion opening 119 on the left side of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front to a height near the vertical center of the through opening 111. Frame left side upper decorative board 161 and door frame left side lower decoration which extends vertically from the height of the lower side of door frame left side upper decorative board 161 to approximately the same height as the lower end of upper plate passage hole 117. A substrate 162 is provided.

The door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are each equipped with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a on the front surface that can emit light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative board 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, when the door frame 3 is assembled. By emitting light as appropriate, the left unit decorative lens member of the left side unit 530 of the door frame can be decorated with light.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting parts]
The glass unit attachment member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 31(b) and the like. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and is used to detachably attach the glass unit 190. The glass unit mounting member 170 includes a disc-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-shaped base 171 that protrudes from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protrusion 172.

The glass unit attachment members 170 are each rotatably attached to a portion of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 below the pair of speaker insertion holes 119 and outside the glass unit attachment portion 118.

The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, so that the protrusion 172 is positioned further outward than the glass unit attachment portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the rear. In this position, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit attachment part 118 of the door frame base 110 or removed from the glass unit attachment part 118.

When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding part 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 with the glass unit 190 inserted into the glass unit mounting part 118 of the door frame base 110, the protruding part 172 attaches to the glass. It comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190, restricting rearward movement of the upper part of the glass unit 190, and the glass unit 190 can be mounted on the door frame base 110.

Since the glass unit attachment member 170 has a protrusion 172 protruding from a disc-shaped base 171 that is rotatably attached to the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit attachment member 170 is located within the protrusion 172. . From this, when the glass unit mounting member 170 is freely rotatable, the protrusion 172 is stably protruded downward from the base 171. In the glass unit mounting member 170, when the protrusion 172 is in the rotational position protruding downward from the base 171, the protrusion 172 restricts the rearward movement of the glass unit 190. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the entire body will not rotate so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the restriction on rearward movement of the glass unit 190 will not be naturally released. do not have.

In addition, when removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, rotate the glass unit mounting member 170 so that the protruding part 172 protrudes upward from the base part 171, and the protruding part 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 further outward, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1g. Handle mounting parts]
The handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle attachment member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181 from the rear end of the tube portion 181. An extended annular flange portion 182 , and a plurality of ( In this example, the cylindrical portion 181 includes three projecting rims 183 and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181. .

The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment surface 112 with screws, with the rear surface of the flange portion 182 in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment surface 112 on the door frame base 110.

The cylindrical portion 181 has an inner diameter slightly larger than an outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side within the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side within the cylindrical portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c on the handle base 301. Therefore, in the handle attachment member 180, the base 301a of the handle base 301 can be inserted into the cylindrical part 181 only when the three protrusions 183 and the three grooves 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) with respect to the door frame base 110 can be regulated.

In addition, since the axis of the cylindrical part 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange part 182, the handle mounting member 180 can be attached to the slanted handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 so that the cylindrical part The handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a similarly tilted state, with the axis line of the handle unit 300 being tilted so as to extend toward the right front.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that it can be seen from the front to the rear. The glass unit 190 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner circumference of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment part 118, and a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that closes the inside of the glass frame 191 and whose outer periphery is a glass frame. 191 and two transparent glass plates 192 attached to the glass plate 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end and the rear end of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other in the front and back so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 26, etc.).

The glass frame 191 includes a pair of mounting pieces 191a that extend outward in a flat plate form from a position below the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a band that projects downward from the lower end and extends along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191 can come into contact with the protrusion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

This glass unit 190 is assembled by inserting the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from the rear side of the door frame base 110. , the front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit attachment part 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit attachment member 170 is rotated so that the protruding part 172 of the glass unit attachment member 170 is attached to the attachment piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by bringing it into contact with the rear surface of the door frame base 110.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit 190 can be removed by reversing the procedure described above. Thereby, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 includes a flat main body part 201 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat rear protruding piece 202 that protrudes short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body part 201, which are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. A pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110 are provided.

The main body part 201 of the security cover 200 is formed so that its lower end protrudes further downward than the lower end of the glass unit 190 when it is attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the main body portion 201 has an upper end formed in a shape along the lower end of the gaming area 5a on the gaming board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so that it does not protrude into the gaming area 5a when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 202 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201 . Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed into a shallow box shape opened to the rear by the main body portion 201 and the rear protruding piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear projecting piece 202 also projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. The rear projecting piece 202 that protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body part 201 is formed so as to align with a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

Note that the rear projecting piece 202 is not formed in a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball fired by the ball firing device 680) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and is kept inside the game area 5a. It does not impede hitting the game ball into the ball.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the part that protrudes rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is The removed rear protruding piece 202 is inserted into the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. In addition, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear protruding piece 202 that protrudes rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from the lower front side of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening/closing cylinder unit]
The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to a cylinder attachment part 113 located between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 that has a keyhole 211a on the front and extends back and forth, and a locking unit that is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and that rotates the key inserted into the keyhole 211a. 700, and a cylinder attachment plate 213 for attaching the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can be rotated by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a.If the cylinder lock 211 is a corresponding key, it can be rotated either clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from the front. It can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed into a cylindrical shape with an open rear end (more specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and is formed from the rear end toward the front at opposing positions across the central axis. It has a pair of notches 212a which are cut out. This rotation transmission member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. By doing so, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted into the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700, and the key cylinder 710 can be rotated.

The cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and has a convex shape protruding forward in a plan view. To be more specific, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 includes a rectangular flat plate-like front plate part 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate parts 213b extending rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate part 213a in a flat plate-shape. and a pair of attachment plate parts 213c extending in a flat plate shape in a direction away from each other from the respective rear sides of the pair of side plate parts 213b. The cylinder lock 211 passes through the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 from the rear at a position approximately at the center in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. The pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is such that the left side mounting plate portion 213c in front view is attached to the right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the right side mounting plate portion 213c in front view is attached to the right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Thereby, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 of the reinforcing unit 130 are connected by the cylinder attachment sheet metal 213 .

When the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate part 213a and a pair of side plate parts 213b of the cylinder mounting plate 213 are accommodated in the box-shaped cylinder mounting part 113 which is open to the rear. ing.

[3-4. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the production operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 34 to 41 and the like. FIG. 34(a) is a front view of the production operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34(b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. Moreover, FIG. 35(a) is a perspective view of the production operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is a perspective view of the production operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram of the production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 37 is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 34(a), and FIG. 38 is a sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 34(b). FIG. 39(a) is a sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34(b), and FIG. 39(b) is an enlarged view of section A in FIG. 34(a). FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into its main members and seen from the back. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front part of the tray unit 320 at the center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed and operated by the player and can also present an effect image to the player. It is.

The performance operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent center side excluding the outer periphery, and includes an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player, and a performance operation unit that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and is a plate unit cover 326. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 that is attached to the mounting portion 326a, a decorative board unit 420 that is arranged behind the operation button 410 and can decorate the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 with light, and a frame. A base unit 430 is attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and has an operation button 410 and a decorative board unit 420 attached to the front side. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image is provided.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. FIG. 42(a) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button as seen from the front, and FIG. 42(b) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button as seen from the back. The operation button 410 has a circular outer shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the vertical height of the dish unit 320, and the center side excluding the outer periphery is transparent. The operation button 410 includes a transparent button lens 411 that has a circular outer circumference and a curved surface (partial shape of a spherical surface) so that the center side bulges forward, and a transparent button lens 411 that has a circular outer circumference and a curved surface (partial shape of a spherical surface) that bulges forward. It includes an attached annular button frame 412 and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are made of a material that does not easily transmit light.

The entire button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness. Further, the button lens 411 is formed into a smooth curved surface with no unevenness on the front side. The button lens 411 is recessed in a W-shaped cross section from the back surface at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 and extends a predetermined length toward the center (inside), and is arranged in rows in the circumferential direction. One button decoration part 411a is recessed from the back surface in a cross-sectional arc shape at a position on the outer circumferential side of the first button decoration part 411a, and extends on the axis toward the center, and is arranged in a row within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction. A plurality (six) of second button decoration parts 411b are provided.

As shown in the figure, the first button decoration part 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 toward the center when assembled to the operation button 410, and one group on both left and right sides is one group on both upper and lower sides. It extends further towards the center.

The plurality of second button decoration parts 411b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and three are formed on each of the left and right sides. These second button decoration parts 411b are formed so as to face from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward so that the front side thereof is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted due to unevenness with a W-shaped cross section or an arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface at the first button decorative part 411a and the second button decorative part 411b. Therefore, the rear side cannot be clearly seen.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape and includes a plurality of (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in an arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decorative parts 411b of the button lens 411. This button frame 412 has a plating layer with metallic luster on its surface.

The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a that extends from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (four) guide boss parts 413c protrude rearward along the outer periphery of the main body part 413a and are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction. Detection pieces 413d protrude rearward in a band-like shape and are arranged in plurality (three) in the circumferential direction, and a detection piece 413d that penetrates the flange part 413b back and forth outside the main body part 413a and extends along the outer periphery for a predetermined length. A plurality of base openings 413e (six) are formed in the circumferential direction, and a base opening 413e extends forward from the front end of the main body 413a in a cylindrical shape, and the front end side is inward so as to follow the inner surface of the button lens 411. An inner extending portion 413f that narrows toward the center (center side) is provided.

The outer circumferential edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer circumferential surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are arranged at portions corresponding to the four upper, lower, left, and right corners of the main body portion 413a in the circumferential direction. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, respectively. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a, two on the upper side and one on the lower side. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

The six base openings 413e are provided, three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the second button decoration part 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the base opening 413e of the button base 413, a portion of the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f are recessed inward from the outer circumferential side. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extending portion 413f, which narrows inward, substantially matches the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

This operation button 410 has a front surface that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (approximately a part of a spherical surface) and is transparent, and a door frame side effect display device 460 disposed on the rear side. The display screen can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide bosses 413c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and an operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431. is urged forward by. The front side of the outer periphery of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the frame unit 415 due to the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, so that further forward movement is restricted. By pressing against this, the base unit 430 is moved rearward until the rear end contacts the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The detection of the detection piece 413d by the pressure detection sensor 440 indicates that the operation button 410 has been operated.

In addition, the operation button 410 has a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 so as to extend from the inner peripheral end to the center side when the production operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a can make it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner circumferential surface of the button base 413 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

Further, the operation button 410 has a front end opening of a cylindrical button base 413 closed by a button lens 411 and a button frame 412, and the button frame 412 attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 allows the operation button to be closed. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion that is visible from the rear is formed so as to narrow inward from the outer periphery. The presence of this button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner circumferential surface of the button base 413 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

In addition, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the production operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body portion 413a) passes through the inner circumferential side of the decorative board unit 420 and is lower than the front surface of the decorative board unit 420. It will protrude backwards. As a result, the light radiated forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420 is transmitted to the button. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside of the base 413 to the inside, and also to prevent leakage from the outside of the base unit 430, the left side of the operation button decorative board 433, the right side of the operation button decorative board 434, the upper side of the operation button decorative board 435, and the lower side of the operation button. Light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative board 436 can be prevented from leaking from the inside of the button base 413 to the outside. Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the decorative board unit 420, the operating button left inner decorative board 433, the operating button right inner decorative board 434, the upper operating button inner decorative board 435, and the operating button of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent the LEDs mounted on the lower inner decorative board 436 from decorating parts other than those targeted for the light-emitting decoration, and it is possible to perform the light-emitting decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the performance operation unit 400 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the performance operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery of the operation button 410 from the front side, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed to have an outer shape that matches the front end side of the production operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame main body 416 that is attached to the performance operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 and has a circular central opening 416a, and a frame body 416 that is attached to the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of frame side lenses 417 having light-transmitting properties that are attached to the frame body 416 from the rear side, and a frame top lens 418 having light-transmitting properties that is attached to the frame body 416 from the front side above the central opening 416a. There is.

The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a having a smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrating back and forth, and a central opening 416a that penetrates back and forth on both left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a and arranged in a row in the circumferential direction, and a notch 416c cut out with a predetermined width in the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , is equipped with. The center opening 416a is formed to have approximately the same size as the outer diameter of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. This allows the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to come into contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided three each on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by frame side lenses 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-back direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

Further, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the periphery of the central opening 416a. The inner cylinder portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and is cut out at a portion corresponding to the notch 416c. When the production operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylinder portion 416d is connected to the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420, respectively. and partitions between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b (see FIG. 38).

Furthermore, the frame body 416 extends outward at the upper portions of the left and right sides of the outer periphery, and includes a pair of attachment portions 416e that are attached to the production operation unit attachment portions 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. The frame main body 416 (presentation operation unit 400) has a pair of mounting portions 416e and a cutout portion 416c on both sides thereof attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320.

The frame body 416 has almost the entire surface made of metal, except for a portion with the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A shiny plating layer is formed.

The frame side lenses 417 close off the outer peripheral openings 416b, which are formed three on each side of the frame main body 416, from the rear side. The frame side lens 417 has a smooth surface with no irregularities on the front side, and a plurality of irregularities along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear side (see FIGS. 39 and 46). The light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 has a substantially rectangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front. The frame top lens 418 has a smooth front side. In addition, the frame top lens 418 has a plurality of concavities and convexities extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side, and are arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). The light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

In the frame unit 415, when the performance operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are connected to the second LEDs 422b, 423b on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420. At the same time, the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decoration board 437 of the base unit 430, and each can be decorated with light by the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted thereon. .

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 43 and the like. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the production operation unit as seen from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission, and also This allows vibration to be applied to the operation unit 400.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 with an open upper side, and an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the left and right front surfaces of the board base 421, respectively. , a vibration motor 424 attached to the front lower part of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

The board base 421 has an inner circumferential side slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and an outer circumferential side larger than the outer diameter of the flange part 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The operation button left outer decorative board 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the front side along the inner periphery of the board base 421, and a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the inner periphery of the board base 421 on the radially outer side of the plurality of first LEDs 422a. A plurality of second LEDs 422b are mounted along the side. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 has a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted on the front side along the inner periphery of the board base 421, and a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted on the inner periphery of the board base 421 on the radially outer side of the plurality of first LEDs 423a. A plurality of second LEDs 423b are mounted along the side. Both the front and rear surfaces of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white.

The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to a rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the production operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. In addition, in the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located behind the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410, The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. In addition, when assembled into the production operation unit 400, a frame is provided between the respective first LEDs 422a, 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 and the respective second LEDs 422b, 423b. An inner cylindrical portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, the decorative board unit 420 emits light and decorates only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operating button 410 using the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operating button left outer decorative board 422 and the operating button right outer decorative board 423, respectively. At the same time, only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with light by the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b.

Further, the decorative board unit 420 can generate vibrations by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the entire production operation unit 400.

[3-4f. Effects of production operation unit]
The effects of the production operation unit 400 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the sectional view of the production operation unit of FIG. 37. FIG. 45(a) is a diagram of the production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, where a part of the operation button is cut out and hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. It is an explanatory view showing a part, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a part which is going to be hidden by a first button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in a sectional view of a performance operation unit. FIG. 46(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit in a perspective view seen from the front, and FIG. 46(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is.

The performance operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can display a performance image to the player according to the game state that changes when a game ball is hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and also allows the player to operate the performance image. The player can be entertained by having the player participate in the presentation presented to the player by operating the button 410.

The overall height of the production operation unit 400 is approximately the same as the height of the lower portion of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Further, the production operation unit 400 has a total width slightly larger than ⅓ of the total width of the door frame 3. The performance operation unit 400 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) when viewed from the front.

In the performance operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. When the production operation unit 400 is attached to the pan unit 320, there is a gap between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the tray unit cover 326 of the pan unit 320. is formed. That is, the production operation unit 400 is attached to the tray unit 320 only at the upper part, and is attached in a suspended state.

In addition, in the production operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the front inner circumference of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the production operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed as follows. As a result, in the production operation unit 400, the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410, which bulges forward in a curved shape (partial shape of a substantially spherical surface), is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is sloped so that it moves upward as it goes forward. As a result, when a player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is placed above the tray unit 320 (performance operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when a player looks down from the gaming area 5a to the production operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to its front view (projected view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Therefore, the operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460 inside the operation button 410, etc. can be visually recognized in good condition.

In the performance operation unit 400, the four guide bosses 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state of the production operation unit 400 (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is pressed against the frame unit 415 by the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. It abuts a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface of the frame body 416.

In the normal state, the production operation unit 400 has a button frame 412 of the operation button 410 whose center side (center axis CL side) protrudes forward from the center opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that protrudes forward in a curved shape (partial shape of a substantially spherical surface), the portion that protrudes forward from the inner periphery (inside) of the button frame 412 is , protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 37, etc.).

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is approximately 15 cm, and (the front end of) the button lens 411 is located in the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It protrudes approximately 4cm forward from the front of 415.

In a normal state, when a player presses the operation button 410 of the production operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411 which bulges forward in a curved shape (approximately a part of a spherical surface).

This operation button 410 has a much larger outer diameter than the operation buttons for performance provided in conventional pachinko machines, so the area near the periphery away from the center of the button lens 411 is pressed. There is a high possibility that it will be done. To explain in detail, the operation button for performance in a conventional pachinko machine is installed so that its central axis extends substantially parallel to a vertical line, whereas the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 of this embodiment is installed so that the central axis CL is inclined with respect to the vertical line, so when the player presses the operation button 410 from above like in a conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. This means pressing a portion of the operation button 410 that is away from the central axis CL.

By the way, the operation buttons for performance in conventional pachinko machines are formed on a flat surface for the player to press, so if the operation buttons are made larger while keeping the part pressed on the flat surface, If you press a part of the operation button that is off the center of the button, the pressed surface will tilt so that the pressed part retreats first, making it impossible for the operation button to move back straight. There is a possibility that the pressing operation will not be possible.

On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 of the present embodiment has a part (button lens 411) that is pressed and operated by the player in a curved shape (partial shape of a substantially spherical surface) that bulges forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. I can do it. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retreated without tilting. You can fully enjoy the effects you operate.

In addition, the effect operation unit 400 has a vibration motor 424 attached to the front lower part of the board base 421 of the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is plated so that the effect operation unit 400 is suspended. Since it is attached to the production operation unit attachment part 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the part to which it is attached. , the entire production operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the production operation unit 400. Furthermore, since the vibration motor 424 is placed directly below a position where it is relatively easy for the player to press the button (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44), the vibration motor 424 can It is possible to transmit strong vibrations, surprising the players and making them enjoy the performance.

Furthermore, the production operation unit 400 is attached to the pan unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the pan unit cover 326 Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the leg section 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate section 326i, when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or hit, the frame remains until the lower surface of the leg section 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate section 326i. The attachment portion 416e of the unit 415, the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc. can absorb the impact by bending downward. Furthermore, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the production operation unit 400 is restricted, and the production operation unit mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the plate unit cover 326 are mounted. It is possible to avoid applying excessive force to the portion 326a etc., and damage to the production operation unit 400 etc. can be prevented. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or tapped with strong force, such as when the player is presented with an effect in which the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is pressed, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since the 400 etc. will not be damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to damage, suppress the decrease in player's interest, and increase the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to damage. It can be suppressed.

Note that, as described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that is pressed by the player is formed into a curved surface shape (partial shape of an approximately spherical surface) that protrudes forward, so it is formed into a flat plate shape. The button lens 411 has higher strength and rigidity than the button lens 411, and even if it is hit strongly, the impact can be dispersed throughout the button lens 411, making it less likely to be damaged.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 46, the effect operation unit 400 has a button lens 411, a frame side lens 417, a frame top lens 418, and an operation button internal decoration member 432 made of transparent members. The decorations with unevenness such as the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, the first button inner decoration part 432f, and the second button inner decoration part 432g formed on the back side are on the front side (player side). ) can be visually recognized. In addition, in areas where these uneven decorations are formed, light is refracted in a complicated manner due to changes in board thickness, making it difficult to see the rear side through the areas where uneven decorations are formed. .

Since the production operation unit 400 includes a first button decoration part 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the uneven decoration of the first button decoration part 411a This makes it difficult to see the rear at the outer periphery of the inner part of the button lens 411. Behind the part where the first button decoration part 411a is formed (back in the central axis CL direction), there is an inner peripheral surface of the main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a peripheral wall part of the operation button inner decoration member 432. 432a, and the first button decoration part 411a located in front of the gap allows the gap between the outer circumference of the inner operation button decoration member 432 to be closed from the front side (player side). It can be made difficult to see. As a result, even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the interior decoration member 432 whose position is fixed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating, and when the operation button 410 is viewed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and the interior decoration member 432 of the operation button can be placed within the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

To be more specific, the production operation unit 400 has a first button decoration part 411a, a second button decoration part 411b, and a button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, so that the outer periphery of the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 is A unit base 431, a decorative board unit 420, etc. located on the outer side and rear side (rear side) are formed so as not to be visible from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the cross-hatched area surrounded by the dashed line is hidden from the player's view. In this way, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, the button frame 412, etc., the outside and back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 are made difficult to see and hidden. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the entire performance operation unit 400.

In addition, in the production operation unit 400, the first button decoration part 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. A second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 extends in a modified octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 46, the uneven lines of the first button decoration part 411a and the uneven lines of the second button inner decoration part 432g intersect, resulting in a geometrical Decorations can be shown to players.

In addition, in the production operation unit 400, the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends). The second button interior decoration portion 432g allows the player to see a deep, three-dimensional geometric pattern, and enjoy the decorations including the interior of the operation button 410.

Furthermore, in the production operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g are separated from each other in the front and back direction, when the position of the player's eyes moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration part 411a changes. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the uneven line of the second button interior decoration part 432g changes, a moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

In this way, the production operation unit 400 provides a moving and three-dimensional decoration to the player using the first button decoration part 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button interior decoration part 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432. Since the pachinko machine 1 can be shown, it can strongly attract the attention of players, making it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing.

In addition, in the production operation unit 400, inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, an operation button An upper inner decorative board 435 and a lower operating button inner decorative board 436 are arranged, and by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surfaces thereof, the inner operating button decorative member 432 in the operating button 410 emits light. It can be decorated. That is, the interior of the operation button 410 can be decorated with light by the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration board 436. As shown in FIG. 38, the LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of these operation button left interior decoration board 433, operation button right interior decoration board 434, operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and operation button lower interior decoration board 436 are as follows. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is arranged inside the cylindrical main body 413a, so that light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body 413a. , only the inside of the operation button 410 can be well decorated with light.

In addition, the production operation unit 400 has a decorative board 422 on the left side of the operation button in the decorative board unit 420 behind the second button decoration part 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A first LED 422a and a first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are arranged, and by making these first LEDs 422a and 423a emit light, the six second button decoration parts 411b of the operation button 410 are decorated with light. I can do it. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are connected to the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. The light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body part 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder part 416d, making it easy to operate. Only the second button decoration part 411b of the button 410 can be well decorated with light.

Furthermore, the production operation unit 400 has a second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. 423 second LEDs 423b are arranged, and by making these second LEDs 422b and 423b emit light, the frame side lens 417 can be decorated with light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylinder part 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylinder portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with light. .

In addition, in the production operation unit 400, a frame top lens decorative board 437 in the base unit 430 is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of frames are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative board 437. By causing the LED to emit light, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light. A flat light-shielding wall portion 431c protrudes forward from the lower side of the portion of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative board 437 is attached to the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED of the top lens decoration board 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be well decorated with light.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. 47(a) is a front view of the left side unit of the door frame, FIG. 47(b) is a perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 47(c) is a front view of the left side unit of the door frame from the rear. FIG. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the back. FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 47(a). The door frame left side unit 530 is a door frame base unit so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (door frame left side decorative board 160) above the dish unit 320. 100 is attached to the left front part on the left side of the through hole 111. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front; A transparent band-shaped left unit diffusion lens member 532 is attached to the front surface, and a light-transmitting lens is placed in front of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and has a polyhedral decoration on the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit upper part that is attached to the front upper part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, protrudes forward in a cylindrical frame shape, and extends vertically. a decorative base 534; a left unit lower decorative base 535 that is attached to the front lower part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a frame shape shorter than the left unit upper decorative base 534; A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 is attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535, and the left unit A plurality of decorative members 537 are attached to the front side of the decorative cover 536.

The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed into a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating the front side back and forth. As illustrated, the plurality of openings 531a include circular holes and square holes extending vertically. In the left unit base 531, the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the left side upper decorative board 161 of the door frame and the lower left side decorative board 162) are connected to each other through the plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. The openings 531a of the left unit base 531 are formed such that when assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the left side decorative board 160 of the door frame are located approximately at the center in the vertical direction. This left unit base 531 is formed of a non-transparent member.

Furthermore, the left unit base 531 has a left reflective standing wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) that stands upright from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111 toward the front side. ing. In this left reflective standing wall portion 538, an inner surface that is flat and faces the through hole 111 is provided as a reflective surface that can reflect light. Note that this reflective surface can be provided not only by providing the inner surface of the left reflective vertical wall section 538 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, but also by attaching a reflective seal to the inner surface. It is possible. As will be described later, this left reflective standing wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a part (left side portion) of the reflective standing wall portion 33 described above.

The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is vertically divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 has a circular lens portion 532a that is circular in front view and corresponds to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a square lens portion 532a that is square in front view that corresponds to the square opening 531a. A lens portion 532b is provided. When the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are located immediately behind the center of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. It is formed.

The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed into a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. This circular lens portion 532a allows the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged at the rear to be irradiated forward in a point-like manner. The light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a allows the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member to be decorated with light.

The rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a central diffuse reflection portion 532c that is conically recessed toward the rear at the center of the front surface, and a front diffuser lens portion 532d that is formed on the outside of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c on the front surface. , an input lens section 532e that bulges rearward in a curved shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection section 532c), and an input lens section 532e that bulges rearward in the shape of a curved surface at the rear surface, and an input lens section 532e that extends forward as it moves away from the input lens section 532e as a whole on the outside of the input lens section 532e on the rear surface. The front reflecting portion 532f is tilted so as to move.

The front diffuser lens portion 532d of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. More specifically, in the cross-sectional shape of the front diffusing lens portion 532d when cut along the radial direction, the groove portion is recessed backward in an arc shape, and the mountain portion between the grooves is recessed forward. It bulges out in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed into a smooth wave shape. Further, the front diffusing lens portion 532d is formed such that groove portions and mountain portions are alternately located in the circumferential direction, with the boundary being a radially extending line dividing the lens portion in the circumferential direction.

The front reflecting portion 532f of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. These grooves are recessed in a V-shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f has a serrated cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, with the peaks between the grooves being triangular and pointed rearward. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed such that the grooves and peaks move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed such that groove portions and mountain portions are alternately located in the circumferential direction, with the boundary being a radially extending line dividing the front reflecting portion 532f in the circumferential direction. This radially extending line dividing in the circumferential direction coincides with the radially extending dividing line in the front diffuser lens portion 532d.

When the rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the left side decorative board 160 of the door frame are located immediately behind the input lens portion 532e.

In the square lens section 532b, light emitted forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input into the square lens section 532b from the input lens section 532e. Since this input lens portion 532e bulges backward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), it refracts the light that spreads forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a so that it travels parallel to the front. Almost all of the light can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflection section 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflection part 532c is directed by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection part 532c in a direction perpendicular to the axis extending back and forth (parallel to the front surface of the left side decorative board 160 of the door frame). The light is reflected so as to be diffused in a direction (direction), and travels inside the square lens portion 532b from the center toward the outside along the front surface of the square lens portion 532b. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection section 532c travels from the center to the outside (in the direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection section 532c) over the entire thickness of the square lens section 532b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected from the center to the outside in the rectangular lens portion 532b substantially parallel to the front surface of the left side decorative board 160 of the door frame reaches the saw-shaped front reflecting portion 532f, it is reflected forward by the surface of the front reflecting portion 532f. Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting section 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting section 532c, the thickness of the square lens section 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as it moves away from the center. (See Figure 50). As a result, the light that is reflected outward over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens section 532b in the front and back direction at the central diffuse reflection section 532c is sequentially reflected forward by the front reflection section 532f as it goes from the center side to the outside. It can be reflected.

The light reflected forward by the front reflecting section 532f passes through the front diffusing lens section 532d and is irradiated forward from the rectangular lens section 532b. At this time, since the front diffusing lens part 532d has a wave-shaped cross section, it can diffuse the light reflected forward by the front reflecting part 532f in various directions, and the square lens part 532b It is possible to irradiate light substantially uniformly forward (to the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) from the front surface of the lens member.

In the front diffusing lens part 532d and the front reflecting part 532f, the square lens part 532b has a plurality of concentric grooves divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves with the dividing line as a border. Since the grooves are shifted in the radial direction and the concentric arc-shaped grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, the light emitted forward from the front surface of the square lens part 532b has a concentric striped pattern of shading. It is possible to prevent the light from turning into light, and it is possible to irradiate the front with light with a more uniform density. Thereby, the multifaceted decorative portion in front of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be decorated with light emission substantially uniformly.

A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member includes a circular decorative portion formed in a portion located in front of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532, and a circular decorative portion located in front of the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532. A multifaceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion having a concave front surface and a short extension in the front and back. The polyhedral decoration part has multiple rows of square pyramid-shaped parts arranged vertically on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped that extends vertically, and multiple rows of polyhedrons made of a plurality of triangles arranged vertically on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped. It is shaped like a. The circular decorative part and the multifaceted decorative part are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative part 561a and the multifaceted decorative part 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. Further, in the left unit decorative lens member, the circular decorative part is caused by the light irradiated forward from the circular lens part 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532, and the multifaceted decorative part is directed forward from the square lens part 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532. The light irradiated onto each of them emits light and decorates them.

The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is formed into a rectangular tube shape extending longitudinally. The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a portion constituting a lower surface on the outer periphery that is inclined so as to protrude downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and the lower part of that portion penetrates back and forth. This left unit upper decorative base 534 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The left unit lower decoration base 535 has a U-shape that is open upward when viewed from the front. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is inclined from approximately the center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves rearward as it goes upward. This left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 has a vertical middle part bent backward, and a dogleg-shaped part where the lower part is bent backward along the front end of the left unit upper decorative base 534, and a left A doglegged part whose upper part is bent backward along the front edge of the lower unit decorative base 535 connects the lower end of the upper doglegged part and the upper end of the lower doglegged part. It consists of a straight part.

Both upper and lower ends of the left unit decorative cover 536 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. This left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and allows the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side to be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative members 537 extend vertically in short lengths and are attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is made of a non-transparent member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55 and the like. 51(a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. FIG. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51(a). 55(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and FIG. 55(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320.

The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the right side in front view of the through hole 111, and a front side of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is attached to the door frame right side decorative board 552, and the door frame right side decorative board 552 is attached to the left side of the center in front view of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552, and extends in the vertical direction and the front/rear direction. A transparent plate-shaped right unit left diffusion lens member 553, a sheet-shaped right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decorative member. A right unit left cover 555 in the form of a transparent flat plate is attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the right unit 554 .

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 in front view, on the right side of the center in front view on the front side of the right unit base 551, and on the right side of the right unit left diffuser lens. A transparent flat right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is attached to the member 553 and extends in the vertical and longitudinal directions, and a decorated right unit is attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. a right unit right decorative member 557 in the form of a sheet, and a right unit right cover 558 in the form of a transparent plate attached to the right diffuser lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. There is.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a shallow front and right side opening extending in the vertical and front and rear directions. A box-shaped opaque right unit left light shielding member 559 and a light opaque member attached to the left side of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 to close the open right side of the right unit left light shielding member 559 The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a flat plate shape.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and the right side unit 550 has a translucent right side unit with a polyhedral decoration on the front end. It is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the unit decorative lens member 561, the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561, the front end sides of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553, and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating from front to back, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover. 563 and a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to vertically penetrate the right unit base 551, and connects the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 has a rectangular shape that is elongated vertically when viewed from the front, has a short rectangular cylindrical shape in the front and back, and is formed into a box shape that is closed near the center in the front and back direction. has been done. This right unit base 551 is formed of a non-transparent member.

Further, the right unit base 551 has a right reflective standing wall portion 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) that stands upright from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111 toward the front side. ing. In the right reflective standing wall portion 568, the inner surface, which is flat and faces the through hole 111, is provided as a reflective surface capable of reflecting light. Note that this reflective surface can be formed by providing the inner surface of the right reflecting wall section 568 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, similar to the inner surface of the left reflecting wall section 538, or by providing a reflective surface for the same inner surface. It is also possible to provide this by attaching a seal. As will be described later, this right reflective standing wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and serves as a part (right side portion) of the reflective standing wall portion 33 described above.

The door frame right side decorative board 552 is formed in the shape of a vertically extending strip. The door frame right side decorative board 552 has a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a plurality of right LEDs 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface. A plurality of medium LEDs 552c are provided. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is used to decorate the right unit left decorative member 554 by emitting light through the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Further, the right LED 552b is used to decorate the right decorative member 557 of the right unit by emitting light through the right diffuser lens member 556 of the right unit. The middle LED 552c is used to decorate the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light.

The door frame right side decorative board 552 has both front and rear surfaces formed in white. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative board 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. Although not shown, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is connected to the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffuser lens member 553 includes a main body portion 553a in the shape of a flat plate extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, and a rear wall portion 553b projecting in a short flat shape from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right side in front view. A rectangular notch 553c is cut out from the right end side of the rear wall section 553b toward the left when viewed from the front, and a plurality of cutout sections 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a right unit left decorative member is formed on the left side of the main body section 553a when viewed from the front. 554, a housing recess 553d that is shallowly recessed so that the lens 554 can be accommodated, a plurality of input lens parts 553e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body part 553a, and are provided in a plurality in the vertical direction; A plurality of side reflection parts 553f are arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens part 553e is located in the center in the vertical direction.

The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 has a rectangular shape extending vertically, with the upper corner of the front end side cut out diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower edge extending upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape so that it moves toward the In addition, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 553a as a whole moves to the right in the front view as it goes from the rear end side to the front. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body part 553a, when assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530.

When the rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, its right end extends to approximately the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

The plurality of notches 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of them correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c illuminate the right unit decorative lens member 561 well. It can be decorated.

The housing recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens sections 553e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body section 553a in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals. Specifically, when the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction, it is formed approximately at the center in the vertical direction of each half. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the input lens portion 553e has a rectangular parallelepiped portion with a vertically extending rectangle projecting rearward, and is recessed forward in a spherical shape from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a part and. These input lens portions 553e are respectively located immediately in front of the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body portion 553a.

A plurality (six) of side surface reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 553e. In each of these concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface farther from the input lens portion 553e is inclined to the surface of the main body portion 553a. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflection portion 553f has a sharp triangular cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction around the input lens portion 553e, with the peaks between the grooves facing toward the center. , the entire structure is saw-shaped. Further, the side reflection portion 553f is formed such that groove portions and peak portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, with radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as boundaries. ing.

This right unit left diffuser lens member 553 allows the light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 to enter the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e. It is incident. Since the rear end of this input lens portion 553e is curved forward, the curved surface refracts the light from the left LED 552a so that it spreads, and each input lens portion 553e It will spread radially forward from the center.

The main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending perpendicularly from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 553a moves to the right in the front view as it moves forward. Light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident into the main body part 553a from the input lens part 553e hits the flat left surface inside the main body part 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the main body section 553a due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body section 553a, but is reflected on the inner surface of the left surface toward the side reflecting section 553f. becomes.

The light incident forward into the main body 553a from the input lens portion 553e is reflected to the left in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflection portion 553f, and is directed outward from the left surface of the main body 553a. It will be irradiated. Note that light is also irradiated outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a, but the right unit left light shielding member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body portion 553a is white. Since the left side of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 passes through the main body portion 553a and is irradiated to the left side. . Therefore, from the left side of the main body part 553a, there is light reflected leftward by the side reflection part 553f inside the main body part 553a, and light irradiated rightward from the side reflection part 553f and left by the left side of the right unit left light shielding member 559. Since the light reflected in the direction and passed through the main body 553a is irradiated to the left, it is possible to decorate the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a with good brightness. can.

In addition, in the side reflection portion 553f, the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary, thereby forming concentric arc-shaped grooves. are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, which prevents the light emitted outward (leftward) from the left surface of the main body portion 553a from having concentric striped shading. This makes it possible to irradiate light with more uniform shading to the left. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 accommodated in the accommodation recess 553d on the left surface of the main body portion 553a can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly.

In addition, since the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the left side of the main body part 553a in front view (the side where the accommodation recess 553d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the left decorative member 554 of the right unit, the pattern of the side reflection portion 553f of the left diffuser lens member 553 of the right unit is visible through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the left decorative member 554 of the right unit is visible. This portion can be decorated with the side reflection portion 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and is decorated with decorations such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 and a logo that is in line with the concept of the performance presented to the player on the game board 5. It is designed to have a The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. To be more specific, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 includes a main body part 556a in the shape of a flat plate extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, and a rear wall projecting in the shape of a flat plate from the rear side of the main body part 556a to the left in front view. 556b, a rectangular notch 556c that is cut out from the left end of the rear wall 556b to the right in a front view, and is formed in plurality at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction; A housing recess 556d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, a front view of the main body 556a, and a plurality of input lens parts 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body 556a and are provided in the vertical direction. A plurality of side reflection portions 556f are provided on the left side, which are arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is centered in the vertical direction.

The main body portion 556a of the right diffuser lens member 556 of the right unit has a rectangular shape extending vertically, with the upper corner of the front end side cut out diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower edge extending upward as it goes forward. The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the main body portion 553a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 556a as a whole moves to the left in the front view as it goes from the rear end side to the front. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 556a, when assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes forward to a greater extent than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530.

When the rear wall portion 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, its left end extends to approximately the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is in contact with the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

The plurality of notches 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of them correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These plurality of notches 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notches 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the notch 553c of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 form a square opening penetrating back and forth. is formed, and the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be well decorated with light by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

The housing recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of the outer periphery approximately matches the outer shape of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit. Thereby, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens sections 556e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body section 556a in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals. Specifically, when the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction, it is formed approximately in the vertical center of each half. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the input lens portion 556e includes a rectangular parallelepiped portion with a vertically extending rectangle projecting rearward, and a spherically curved recess toward the front from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a part and. These input lens parts 556e are respectively located immediately in front of the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state where they are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body portion 556a.

A plurality (six) of side surface reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflecting portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of these concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface farther from the input lens portion 556e is inclined to the surface of the main body portion 556a. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflection portion 556f has a sharp triangular cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction around the input lens portion 556e, with the peaks between the grooves facing toward the center. , the entire structure is saw-shaped. Further, the side surface reflecting portion 556f is formed such that groove portions and peak portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as boundaries. ing.

This right unit right diffuser lens member 556 allows the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 to enter the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens section 556e is curved forward, the curved surface refracts the light from the right LED 552b so that it spreads, and each input lens section 556e It will spread radially forward from the center.

The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending perpendicularly from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 556a moves to the left in the front view as it moves forward. Light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident into the main body part 556a from the input lens part 556e hits the flat right surface inside the main body part 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the main body 556a due to the angle of incidence with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected on the inner surface of the right surface toward the side reflecting portion 556f. becomes.

The light incident forward into the main body 556a from the input lens part 556e is reflected to the right in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflection part 556f, and is directed outward from the right side of the main body 556a. It will be irradiated. Note that light is also irradiated outward (to the left in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a, but the right light shielding member 560 of the right unit disposed on the left side of the main body portion 556a is white. Since the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is a member, the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560 will be brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 will be irradiated to the right side through the main body portion 556a. . Therefore, from the right side of the main body part 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side reflection part 556f inside the main body part 556a, and the light irradiated leftward from the side reflection part 556f and the right side on the right side of the right light shielding member 560 of the right unit. Since the light reflected in the direction and passed through the main body portion 556a is irradiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body portion 556a can be decorated with light with good brightness. can.

In addition, in the side reflection portion 556f, the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary, thereby forming the concentric arc-shaped grooves. are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, which prevents the light emitted outward (rightward) from the right surface of the main body portion 556a from having concentric striped shading. This makes it possible to irradiate light with more uniform shading to the right. Thereby, the right unit right decorative member 557 accommodated in the accommodation recess 556d on the right surface of the main body portion 556a can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly.

In addition, since the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side in front view of the main body part 556a (the side where the accommodation recess 556d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 556f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right decorative member 557 of the right unit, the pattern of the side reflection portion 556f of the right diffuser lens member 556 of the right unit can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit becomes visible. This portion can be decorated with the side reflection portion 556f.

The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed into a thin sheet shape, and is decorated with decorations such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 and a logo that is in line with the concept of the performance presented to the player on the game board 5. It is designed to have a The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed approximately symmetrically with respect to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decorations applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or may be different decorations.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed to have substantially the same shape in side view as the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in side view. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed into a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The right unit left light shielding member 559 includes a main body portion 559a in the shape of a flat plate extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, a rear wall portion 559b projecting in a short flat shape from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in front view, and a rear wall portion 559b. A rectangular notch 559c is cut out leftward from the right end side of the wall portion 559b when viewed from the front, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a cutout portion 559c extends rightward from the right side of the main body portion 559a and is cut out from the rear side. It includes a plurality of plate-shaped reinforcing parts 559d extending from the wall part 559b to the front end of the main body part 559a.

The main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a rectangular shape extending vertically, with the upper corner of the front end side being cut diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower edge extending upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to be movable, and the outer shape is formed to be approximately the same as the main body portions 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

When the rear wall portion 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, its left end extends to the right of the approximate center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 comes into contact with the right end of this rear wall portion 559b.

The plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of them correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These plurality of notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notches 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c cause the right unit decorative lens member 561 to emit light well. It can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided in three sets, each pair being a pair of reinforcing portions 559d spaced apart in the vertical direction and having substantially the same height as the left and right width, and spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559d is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563, respectively. The strength and rigidity of the entire door frame right side unit 550 are increased by the plurality of reinforcing portions 559d.

The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a shape in a side view of a rectangular shape extending vertically, with the upper corner of the front end side cut out diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower edge moves upward as it moves forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light shielding member 560, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left light shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, as shown in FIG. It is arranged so as to be close to the main bodies 553a and 556a of the left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are spaced apart from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the vertical and front-back directions with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. . Through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560, light radiated forward from the LED 552c inside the door frame right side decorative board 552 is transmitted to the right unit decoration. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated with light.

In addition, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of non-transparent members, and are irradiated forward from the left LED 552a, middle LED 552c, and right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552, respectively. The right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 are prevented from interfering with each other, and the corresponding left LED 552a, right LED 552b, and Light-emitting decoration can be performed only by the middle LED 552c.

Furthermore, since the internal space is vertically divided into four parts by the three sets of reinforcing parts 559d, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged at the rear side of each divided space. The LED 552c inside the door frame right side decorative board 552 can prevent light from interfering between the spaces, and the portion of the right unit decorative lens member 561 located in front of each space can be , each can be decorated with light emission independently. That is, the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550 can be divided into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction, and each region can be decorated with light emission independently.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape that follows the front end shapes of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and having a plurality of polyhedrons formed therein. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion having a concave front surface and a short length extending back and forth. The multifaceted decorative portion 561b includes a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts arranged vertically on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped that extends vertically, and a plurality of polyhedrons made of a plurality of triangles arranged in a plurality of vertical rows on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped. It is formed in a shape similar to the one shown below.

To be more specific, the right unit decorative lens member 561 has a plurality of circular decorative parts 561a and a multifaceted decorative part 561b in each space divided into four by three sets of reinforcing parts 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the top three parts located at the front, one multifaceted decorative part 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decorative part 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction, and in the lowermost part, the multifaceted decorative part 561b is arranged in the top three parts. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is disposed.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. This right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated with light by an LED 552c inside the door frame right side decorative board 552 disposed at the rear.

The right unit decoration base 562 is formed into a cylindrical frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front and upper ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed to be able to cover both left and right outer sides near the front ends of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and both left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 protrudes slightly forward than the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. This right unit decoration base 562 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed to be able to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562. The right unit cover 563 is made of a transparent member, and allows the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side to be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative members 564 extend vertically in short lengths, and are attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of a non-transparent member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

When the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled to the door frame 3, it protrudes forward in a plate shape to a greater extent than the door frame left side unit 530, and slightly protrudes further forward than the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 has a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on the protruding left and right sides, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end, respectively, independently. It can be used as a luminescent decoration.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward, when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 will be separated from the adjacent pachinko machine on the right side. It can act as a partition between the two. As a result, it is possible to give the illusion that a player playing on this pachinko machine 1 is playing in a private room, and to allow the player to play in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around him. I can do it.

In addition, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes significantly forward, in a game hall where pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if it is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the island equipment This pachinko machine 1 can be seen even from the lateral direction along the , and the pachinko machine 1 can stand out in a game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are arranged in rows. Therefore, when the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are decorated with light, the book can be seen from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. The existence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both left and right sides are removed. By decorating the member 561, etc. with light emitting light in a unique manner, it is possible to immediately notify the game hall attendant of the occurrence of a malfunction and make him/her aware of the occurrence of a malfunction, thereby enabling a quick response to the malfunction. Therefore, it is possible to resolve the interruption of the game by the player at an early stage, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming irritated and losing interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. Figure 56 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the back. FIG. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 59 is a sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 56. The door frame top unit 570 is attached above the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

The door frame top unit 570 includes a central base 571 attached to the center in the left and right direction above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and attached to both left and right sides of the center base 571. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surface of the pair of side bases 572, respectively, extend from side to side, and the center in the left and right direction protrudes forward. A pair of openings 574a, which are box-shaped and open at the rear, penetrate front and rear of the pair of upper speakers 573, respectively, and from a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to near the center. It has a plurality of slits 574b (three each on the left and right) extending and penetrating in the front-rear direction and spaced apart vertically, and is attached to the front side of a central base 571 and a pair of side bases 572. It includes a unit main body 271, and a speaker cover 575 made of punched metal, which is arranged in front of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. ing.

Although not shown, each of the pair of side bases 572 (left side base 572a, right side base 572b) has an internal space that is opened only toward the side where the opening window is provided. In the internal space of the opening window, the outer periphery outer light emitting part 34 (left outer periphery outer light emitting part 34a, right outer periphery outer light emitting part 34b) is provided to emit light from outside the outer periphery into the outer periphery of the opening window, and It has a structure in which outer circumferential outer light detecting sections 35 (left outer circumferential outer light detecting section 35a, right outer circumferential outer light detecting section 35b) which detect light outside the outer circumference are provided.

That is, as will be described later, with such a structure, the outer peripheral light emitting section 34 and the outer peripheral light detecting section 35 are arranged outside the outer periphery of the aperture window, so that the aperture can be seen from the front when viewed from the front. Almost the entire area of the window can be made to function as a part (operation receiving part) that receives operations by the player. Further, the outer peripheral light detection unit 35 is not arranged in an exposed state, but is arranged in the internal space 3435 of the side base 572 (see FIG. 119) that is opened only toward the side where the opening window is provided. Therefore, when detecting light with the outer peripheral light detection section 35, it becomes possible to suitably exclude the effect light that may cause disturbance.

The door frame top unit 570 also includes a top middle decorative member 576 that is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 at the center in the left-right direction and has translucency, and a top middle decorative member 576 that is attached to the rear side of the top middle decorative member 576. A door frame top middle decorative board 577 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame, and a door frame top middle decorative board 577 that is attached to the front of the unit main body 271 to close the plurality of slits 574b, respectively, and both left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576. A plurality of transparent flat plate-shaped light guiding members 578 (three each on the left and right ends) extend from the vicinity across the opening 574a to near both left and right ends of the unit body 271, and a top middle decorative member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 271. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are attached to the left and right sides and respectively cover the front surfaces of the plurality of (three) light guide members 578, and a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decoration A top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front side of the unit body 271 from the front side of each lens member 580 and extends from both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to near the center end of the opening 574a. A top middle right decorative member 582 is provided.

Furthermore, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of both the left and right sides of the unit body 271, and LEDs are mounted on the parts facing the outer ends of the plurality (three) light guide members 578 in the left and right direction. A plurality of (three) slits 574b are formed through the door frame top left decorative board 583 and door frame top right decorative board 584, respectively, which are formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left and right direction on the rear side of the unit main body 271. A pair of board bases 585 are respectively attached to the parts, and a door is mounted on the front side of the pair of board bases 585 and has a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted at positions behind the slit 574b of the unit body 271. The frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 on the front side of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. A pair of light shielding members 588 are provided.

Furthermore, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the center base 571 so as to cover the door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 within the unit body 271, and the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The attached relay board cover 590, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 271 to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 271, and the unit cover 591 to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 271. A lower cover 592 is attached to the main body 271.

The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 has a rectangular shape extending from side to side when viewed from the front. The central base 571 is formed into a box shape that is open to the rear, and has a plurality of projections and depressions on the front surface. A pair of side bases 572 are attached to both left and right ends of the center base 571, respectively. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. When the pair of upper speakers 573 are assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surfaces of each of the upper speakers 573 are mounted obliquely so that the side closer to the center in the left-right direction of the door frame top unit 570 moves rearward. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-shaped speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 271 has a shape when viewed from the front, such that the lower portions near both left and right ends of a rectangular shape extending left and right bulge downward. In other words, the unit main body 271 has a shape in a front view, in which a rectangle extending left and right is cut out with a trapezoid that narrows upward from the lower end side. The unit main body 271 has a shape in a plan view of a rectangle extending left and right, and a base that is approximately 1/2 of the total width (length in the left and right direction) centered on the center in the left and right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle. It is formed in a shape that is a combination of a trapezoid that protrudes forward, and a rectangle that protrudes short forward and has the front end side of the trapezoid as its long side. Therefore, in the unit main body 271, both sides of the forwardly protruding part at the center in the left-right direction on the front face are connected to the line connecting the left-right end of the unit main body 271 and the left-right end of the front end of the forward-protruding part. It is located further back (concave) than the

The unit main body 271 has openings 574a extending from both left and right ends of the front surface to positions outside of the forwardly protruding portions, which extend through the unit body 271 in the front and rear directions. In addition, the unit main body 271 has a plurality of slits extending horizontally at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction at an obliquely extending portion of the trapezoidally projecting portion on the front surface. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend left and right from near the front end of a portion extending diagonally forward on the front surface of the unit main body 271 to near the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction, three each, spaced apart vertically.

The unit main body 271 also has an upper opening 574c cut out in a square shape from the rear end toward the front in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction, and a lower opening 574d cut out in the left-right direction from the rear end toward the front on the lower surface. , is equipped with. The upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. Further, the lower opening 574d is closed by a lower cover 592.

The unit body 271 also includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at approximately the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that its front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. This unit main body 271 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction. The top middle decorative member 576 has a shape in a front view of a modified pentagon that is bent so that the center of the lower side of the approximately square is located downward, and extends outward in the left and right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the modified pentagon. It is formed into a shape that is a combination of a substantially right triangle connecting the tips of the sides and the bottom ends of the left and right sides of a side pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined so that the pentagonal portion on the front side moves rearward as it goes downward. This top middle decorative member 576 is entirely formed into a three-dimensional shape and has translucency.

The door frame top middle decorative board 577 is attached to the back of the top middle decorative member 576 in a state where the front surface is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward, so that the front surface is along the front surface of the pentagonal part of the top middle decorative member 576. Mounted on the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decorative board 577, and by making these LEDs emit light, the top middle decorative member 576 can be decorated with light.

The light guide member 578 is made of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that follows the shape of the front end of the forwardly protruding portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 on both the left and right sides. The side near both ends of the unit main body 271 in the left and right direction is considered to be the end side, and the side near the center is the center side. 578a, and a circular arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape with a large radius so as to move forward from the center end side of the straight portion 578a toward the center. The light guide member 578 has a straight portion 578a whose depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than its height in the vertical direction, and a circular arc portion 578b whose depth in the front-rear direction is larger than its height in the vertical direction. Further, the light guiding member 578 is formed so that the height in the vertical direction is constant at the straight portion 578a, and the height in the vertical direction becomes smaller toward the center side at the arcuate portion 578b. When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight part 578a is located just in front of the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the circular arc part 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front. There is.

The light guiding member 578 includes a diffuse reflection part 578c made of saw-shaped unevenness formed on the rear surface of the straight part 578a, and a diffused input part 578d made of a plurality of unevenness formed on the rear side of the arcuate part 578b. It is equipped with

When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both outer ends in the left and right direction face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 or the door frame top right decorative board 584. At the same time, the diffusion input section 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 or the door frame top right decorative board 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both outer ends in the left and right direction, the light is transmitted to the straight part 578a. As the light travels toward the center, the light is sequentially reflected forward from the end portion by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of these in front of the straight portion 578a is decorated with light.

In addition, light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 enters the light guide member 578 from a diffusion input part 578d formed on the rear surface of the circular arc part 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Thereby, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the circular arc portion 578b can be decorated with light.

In this way, the light guide member 578 is connected to the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, or the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. By guiding the light from the LEDs 584a and 587a, the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 disposed in front can be illuminated and decorated in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens parts 579a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, concave and convex portions in the shape of a square pyramid protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. This top left decorative lens member 579 is decorated with light emission by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 via the three light guide members 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens parts 580a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, concave and convex portions in the shape of a square pyramid protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire area on the right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. This top right decorative lens member 580 is decorated with light emission by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 via the three light guide members 578.

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from in front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574 a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576 . The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to fill the space between the three decorative lens parts 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side is closer to the top left side. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 579. This top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the top right decorative lens member 580 so as to fill in the space between the three decorative lens parts 580a when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side is closer to the top right It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 580. This top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The door frame top left decorative board 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) of the unit body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing right. The door frame top left decorative board 583 has an LED 583a mounted at a position facing the left end surface of the three light guiding members 578 attached to the front left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 583a can each independently emit light. The LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 illuminates the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the left opening 574a of the unit body 271 through the straight portions 578a of the three light guiding members 578. Can be decorated with light.

The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. The door frame top right decorative board 584 has an LED 584a mounted at a position facing the right end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 584a can each independently emit light. The LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative board 584 illuminates the portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the right opening 574a of the unit body 271 through the straight portions 578a of the three light guiding members 578. Can be decorated with light.

The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion in the unit body 271 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with respect to each other. The board base 585 has a substantially square side wall in side view having sides extending vertically and longitudinally, a quadrangular rear wall in front view extending outward in the left and right direction at right angles from the rear side of the side wall, and a side wall extending from the front end of the upper side of the side wall. A roughly right triangular upper wall that connects the upper sides of the side wall and rear wall with the line that connects the upper half of the side wall as the hypotenuse, and a roughly right triangular upper wall that connects the lower sides of the side wall and rear wall on the opposite side of the upper wall. It has a right triangular lower wall, and is formed into a triangular prism-like box shape with an open space between the upper and lower hypotenuses. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit body 271 such that the open portion is closed by the unit body 271. A door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or a door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to this board base 585 so that the open portion is closed.

The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585, which is attached to the rear left side of the left-right center of the unit body 271, so as to close the box-shaped open part from the front. It will be done. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction, relative to the surface extending left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, when the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, its front surface is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed. The state is almost parallel.

A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit body 271. As a result, when the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, a plurality of LEDs 586a are exposed forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 586a to decorate the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 near the top middle decorative member 576 through the arc portion 578b of the light guiding member 578. be able to.

The door frame top center right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585, which is attached to the rear right side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271, so as to close the box-shaped open part from the front. It will be done. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction, relative to the surface extending left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, when the door frame top center right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, its front surface is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left and right direction are formed. The state is almost parallel.

A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit body 271. As a result, when the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, a plurality of LEDs 587a are exposed forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 271. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 587a to decorate the portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 near the top middle decorative member 576 through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The pair of light shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit main body 271. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed of non-light-transmitting members and are substantially symmetrical to each other. The light shielding member 588 extends between the upper and lower portions of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 which are arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. It's in charge. This light shielding member 588 allows light to be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be well decorated with light in a state where they are independent from each other.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. It relays the connection between the frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door main body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered by a relay board cover 590.

This door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward at the center in the left and right direction, and the front faces on both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are curved so as to be gouged rearward. Therefore, the player can be given the illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 is significantly protruding forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame top unit 570 also includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 disposed at the center. It is formed to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed at both left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the entire front upper part of the door frame 3 can be decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punched metal at the rear of each of the left and right ends near where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are arranged. The speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three decorative lens parts 579a and 580a spaced apart above and below of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The player can listen to the sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 in good condition, and can enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

Furthermore, the door frame top unit 570 has a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be well decorated with light emission. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can decorate the entire upper front surface of the door frame 3 including the front side of the left and right upper speakers 573 with light emission.

[3-8. Effects of door frame]
The functions and effects of the door frame 3 will be explained. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the through holes 111 that penetrate the front and rear of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 are made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than in conventional pachinko machines. In accordance with the enlargement of the through hole 111, the vertical heights of the pan unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 are reduced, and the horizontal widths of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 are reduced. is made smaller. As a result, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , it corresponds to a game board 5 with a wide game area 5a.

The door frame 3 has a production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) that has a large hemispherical operation button 410 in the center in the left-right direction of a plate unit 320 that bulges forward on the lower side of the through-hole 111. The front surface (the front surface of the lower plate front decorative part 326c) of the lower half (the part below the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 has a recessed shape so that it can be scooped out backwards (the plate unit 320 and the front ends of both left and right ends of the production operation unit 400. ing. As a result, the production operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 appears to protrude significantly forward, so that the production operation unit 400 is highlighted and emphasized to the player. This makes it possible to draw strong attention to the performance operation unit 400.

In the door frame 3, the production operation unit 400, which is arranged on the front side of the tray unit 320 below the through-hole 111, is tilted so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces diagonally upward and forward. Therefore, when a player is seated in front of this pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 is in a state facing the player's head (face), and the player lowers his/her gaze and presses the production operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen in a state close to the front, making the large, round operation button 410 clearly visible, and increasing expectations for the production using the operation button 410. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed within the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in good condition, and the effect image can be fully enjoyed.

Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is equipped with a large operation button 410 that has a diameter that is approximately the same as the overall height of the pan unit 320 and bulges out in a round shape toward the front, when operating the operation button 410, it is possible to operate the operation button 410 by moving the hand over a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and "quick pressing" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward, is installed in an inclined position, so it can not only be pressed from above like a conventional pachinko machine operation button, but also operated from the left or right side. The user can easily operate the button 410 from the front or from the front, and the easy-to-operate operation button 410 can make the performance using the operation button 410 more enjoyable.

In addition, the door frame 3 has the performance operation unit 400 mounted in a suspended state by the plate unit 320, and is equipped with a vibration motor 424 that generates vibrations at the bottom of the performance operation unit 400, so that the game When the vibration motor 424 is rotated to generate vibrations depending on the state, strong vibrations can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the top of the operation button 410, surprising the player and causing the operation button to move. 410 can be enjoyed even more.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 is equipped with a large operation button 410 (performance operation unit 400) that spans the entire height of the tray unit 320 at the center of the front surface of the tray unit 320. Since the lower plate 322 underneath becomes less noticeable, players who are used to conventional pachinko machines can easily recognize that it is clearly different, and this appeal strongly attracts players' attention. The pachinko machine 1 can have high power.

Further, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 goes around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d that is open on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower tray 322 can be increased relative to the size of the lower tray opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls can be stored in the lower tray 322. In addition, since the rear part of the lower tray 322 wraps around to the rear side of the performance operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand into the lower tray 322 or hooks his left fingers on the lower tray opening 326d, Since it becomes difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and to reduce the size of the lower plate opening 326d. The user can also tactually recognize that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger than that of the lower plate 322 .

Furthermore, the door frame 3 includes a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which game balls from the upper tray 321 are discharged into the lower tray 322, and a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which the game balls from the upper tray 321 are discharged into the lower tray 322, and a lower tray for extracting the game balls from the lower tray 322 into a dollar box or the like below the tray unit 320. The plate ball extraction hole 322a is arranged linearly in the front and back, and is also arranged on the right outer side of the lower plate opening 326d (to the right of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the production operation unit 400) in front view. In other words, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are connected to the production operation unit 400, the production operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) of the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Because they are arranged at the rear of the side, etc., the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are not visible from the player side, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be made neat. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, in the door frame 3, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is arranged below the front (directly in front) of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, so the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is in an open state. Then, the game balls released from the upper tray 321 etc. to the lower tray 322 enter the lower tray 322 and are immediately discharged from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a to the dollar box or the like below. At this time, since the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the flow of game balls from the upper tray 321 etc. to the lower tray 322 and discharged to the dollar box is also limited. I can't see it. This prevents the player from giving the illusion that the game balls in the upper tray 321 and the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 when the upper tray 321 is full are being directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the trouble of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest by allowing the player to concentrate on the game (the operation of hitting the game ball, the effect image, etc.). can.

In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a disposed in a position to the front left of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, and a vertical position of the lower plate 322 on the right side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since the raised wall part is curved diagonally so as to face the direction of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the game balls supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 are directly transferred to the lower tray ball. It can be guided to the hole 322a, or indirectly guided to the lower ball hole 322a by being reflected on the right wall. As a result, while the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a remains open, the game balls supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 are transferred to the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since the balls flowing in the lower tray 322 can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a without entering the lower tray first area A1, the game balls circulating in the lower tray 322 can be removed from the lower tray 322 without being visible to the player. The game balls can be ejected downward (to the dollar box), and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Further, the door frame 3 includes a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326, through which the lower plate 322 faces forward, between the production operation unit mounting portion 326a (production operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if the player places his/her hand on the lower tray opening 326d or puts his/her hand into the lower tray 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e will not be blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be outputted forward in a good manner, and the sound from the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Furthermore, when the player puts his/her hand into or approaches the lower tray 322, the player can tactually feel the vibrations caused by the deep bass sound from the lower speaker 921 that is output forward from the lower speaker port 326e. It is possible to entertain the players and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is equipped with a door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can act as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, it is possible for players who play with this pachinko machine 1 to play in a private room. It is possible to create the illusion that the player is actually there, and it is possible to have players play games in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around them.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 can be decorated with light emitting light on the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward. Even if you are not located in front of the pachinko machine 1 inside the building, you can make the presence of the pachinko machine 1 known from a distance, such as from the side along the island equipment, making it a pachinko machine that is highly appealing to players. It can be set as machine 1.

In addition, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 above the through-hole 111, and the front face of the top middle decorative member 576 on both left and right sides. The top middle decorative member of the door frame top unit 570 has a concave shape that can be scooped out backwards (the top middle decorative member of the door frame top unit 570 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides are located rearward. As a result, only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 appears to protrude forward, making it possible to highlight and emphasize the top middle decorative member 576 to the player. The center decorative member 576 can be strongly noticed.

By the way, the upper part of the door frame of a conventional pachinko machine is provided with a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other on the left and right, and the two upper speakers stand out. In contrast, in the door frame 3 of this embodiment, in the door frame top unit 570 attached above the through hole 111, a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal at both left and right ends are provided. In addition to being equipped with a speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are provided, which extend from both left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to both left and right ends in front of the speaker cover 575. The entire front surfaces of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light. As a result, the entire front upper part of the door frame 3 can be decorated, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 are not noticeable at the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration is clearly different from that of conventional pachinko machines. It is possible to make the player aware at a glance that the player is in the pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player, and the pair of upper speakers 573 allows the player to enjoy high-quality stereo sound. can.

In this way, in the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the production operation unit 400 attached to the tray unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are arranged below and above the through-hole 111. , each protrudes forward at the center in the left and right direction, so that the imaginary line passing through the center in the left and right direction stands out, allowing the player to see a uniform decoration at the top and bottom, as well as giving the player a sophisticated decoration. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 stand out from other pachinko machines and have high appeal.

In addition, since the door frame 3 has the top middle decorative member 576 and the production operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570, which are arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction, protruding forward, the top middle decorative member 576 When the performance operation unit 400 is decorated with light, it is possible to show the player a light emitting line extending vertically at the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left and right direction, so that the player's line of sight is placed at the center in the left and right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 etc. of the production operation unit 400.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66 and the like. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded into its main components and viewed from the back. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as seen from the front, and FIG. 65 is a front view of the game board of FIG. 63. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view seen from behind after being disassembled. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged front view of the function display unit with the game board attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven when the player operates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. In addition, the game board 5 includes a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 so that the rear end of the game area 5a is A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that partitions, a board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is operated by driving a game ball into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 that controls the game contents to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, a game board side performance display device 1600 that is placed in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying a predetermined performance image, and a front side of the game panel 1100. It further includes a front unit 2000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and also includes a transparent flat panel plate 1110, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are always open to receive game balls that are hit into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are used for playing games at different positions in the gaming area 5a. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to receive a ball, a gate section 2003 that is installed at a predetermined position in the gaming area 5a and detects passage of a gaming ball, and a gaming ball that passes through the gate section 2003. The second starting port 2004 allows game balls to be accepted according to the result of the regular lottery drawn by drawing, and the first special lottery draws by accepting game balls into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. A grand prize opening 2005 is provided in which game balls can be accepted depending on the lottery result or the second special lottery result.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and a big winning port 2005, and a starting port unit A lower side unit 2200 that is installed along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the lower side unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has a plurality of general prize openings 2001, and a side unit that is installed above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is installed approximately at the center of the gaming area 5a and has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. A locking mechanism 3020 for removably attaching the board side effect display device 1600 is provided.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 has a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end of the back box 3010 upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 at the top of the vertical center. A rear lower rear movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and a rear upper left movable production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view The back left movable production unit 3300 is attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 when viewed from the front, and the back upper center is attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view. It includes a movable performance unit 3400 and a back/front/back movable performance unit 3500 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and in front of the back/lower/rear movable performance unit 3100.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be explained with reference mainly to FIGS. 64, 65, and the like. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from a lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, passes the upper end of the center in the left-right direction as seen from the front, and extends to the diagonally upper right corner; The inner rail 1002 is arranged inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to the diagonally upper left side when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. An out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and slopes downwardly toward the rear.

The front component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that is sloped linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 in front view to near the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher; The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the bottom of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and has an upper part curved inward to the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. A stopper part 1006 is connected to the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with the stopper part 1006.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front component 1000 and the outer rail 1001. The backflow prevention member can be rotated only between an open position in which the space between the backflow prevention member and the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the circumferential direction, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position. 1007.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 is located on the outside of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 near the lower end extending substantially perpendicularly, on the lower side of the out guide section 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and on the outside of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1008 that is recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1008 has a rear protrusion 202 that protrudes toward the rear of the security cover 200 on the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from the lower front side of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 that protrude rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning protrusions 1009 into inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed on the front surface of the panel board 1110.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of attachment bosses 1010 that protrude rearward from the rear surface. By inserting the plurality of attachment bosses 1010 into the attachment holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, they can be positioned with respect to the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100).

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1011 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball path passes through these notches 1011 and 1127. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, FIGS. 64 and 65, etc. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and which holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin board such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic board such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120 (gaming panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be held sufficiently even when obstacle nails are planted in the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel board 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

The panel board 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position within the game area 5a. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel board 1110, penetrating the front and back, and through which the front unit 2000 is attached.

The panel plate 1110 also has a plurality of fitting holes 1113 formed of round holes arranged near the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 1114 arranged near the outer periphery at the lower left side and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the up-down direction. , is equipped with. These fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 are arranged outside the gaming area 5a and are used for positioning with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel board 1110 is provided with step-shaped engaging step portions 1115 with a depressed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. These engagement step portions 1115 are cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel board 1110, and, like the fitting hole 1113 and the elongated hole 1114, are arranged outside the gaming area 5a. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

Furthermore, the panel board 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. By fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1009 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole 1116, the inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is sized to include the panel board 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker than the panel board 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (eg, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a holding step part 1121 which removably holds the panel board 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a holding step part 1121 which has a size approximately equal to that of the game area 5a inside the holding step part 1121 in the front and rear direction. A through hole 1122 penetrating through the.

The depth of the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120 from the front is approximately the same as the thickness of the panel board 1110, and the front surface of the panel board 1110 held within the holding step 1121 is the same as the thickness of the panel board 1110. It is approximately the same surface as the front. Further, the holding step portion 1121 has a front inner circumferential surface formed in such a size that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer circumferential surface of the panel plate 1110. With this clearance, even if the panel board 1110 relatively expands and contracts due to temperature changes or changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to a fitting hole 1113 and a long hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step 1121, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding step 1121. It extends and includes a plurality of protruding pins 1123 that can be fitted into and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel board 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engagement claw 1124 and an engagement piece 1125 that engage with the engagement step 1115 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. Specifically, the engagement claw 1124 is arranged at the upper part of the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding step 1121. It protrudes toward the front and is adapted to be elastically engaged with the engagement step portion 1115. The engagement claw 1124 is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

The engagement piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. This engagement piece 1125 is attached to the upper side ( It extends a predetermined amount toward the center (center side). By engaging the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with these engaging claws 1124 and engaging pieces 1125, the panel plate 1110 is held detachably from the panel holder 1120.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an out port 1126 that penetrates back and forth at the lowest position within the gaming area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower rear surface of the outlet 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the outlet 1126.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball path unit 860 passes through these notches 1011 and 1127. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 face forward.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a plurality of attachment holes 1128 penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the plurality of attachment bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front component 1000 into these multiple mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the panel holder 1120 can be attached to the front component 1000. 1120 (gaming panel 1100) can be positioned.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a square insertion hole 1129 passing through in the front-rear direction above the notch 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game balls flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a are guided by the out guiding section 1003 to the out port 1126 on the rear side, and are discharged to the back side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-2a. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the game panel 1100 described above will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a different form from that shown in FIG. 63, viewed from the front together with the front component, the board holder, and the main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. This game panel 1150 is formed of a wood board material such as plywood with a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). This game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 described above.

The game panel 1150 has an outer shape that is approximately the same as the outer shape of the front component 1000. The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000 at the lower part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In the game panel 1150, the lower side of the rear surface of the outlet 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the outlet 1151.

In addition, the game panel 1150 has a notch 1152 that extends horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front and is opened downward and has the same shape as the notch 1011 of the front component 1000, and a notch 1152 on the upper side of the notch 1152 in the vertical direction. A rectangular insertion hole 1153 is provided, which extends through the hole 1153 and into which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

In addition, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of inner rails that pass through the front and rear so that the positioning protrusions 1009 can be fitted in positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 that protrude rearward from the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. A fixing hole 1154 is provided. Furthermore, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of attachment holes 1155 penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the plurality of attachment bosses 1010 in the front component member 1000. By inserting the attachment bosses 1010 of the front component 1000 into these multiple attachment holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the game panel 1150 can be attached to the front component 1000. 1150 can be positioned.

Furthermore, although not shown in the drawings, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating the front and rear for attaching the table unit 2000, similar to the openings 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100 described above. ing.

When the game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1151 is opened at the rear side of the out guide section 1003 of the front component 1000. Thereby, the game ball flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear side outlet 1151 by the out guide part 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the outlet 1151.

[5-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box with an open top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined toward the center in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200, when assembled on the game board 5, can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below. As a result, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000. The liquid can be discharged downward from the discharge section 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. This main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls the game content and payout of game balls, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that accommodates the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

The main control board box 1320 is equipped with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Therefore, traces of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, thereby increasing deterrence against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

The various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042, including the main control board box 1320, are all provided as transparent members to enable visual confirmation from the outside. There is. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 have surfaces that are inferior in fraud prevention performance. Since implementation areas are now provided, it is important to ensure such transparency in order to obtain various effects related to fraud countermeasures, which will be described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66 and the like. As shown, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 when the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the gaming status (gaming situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc.

As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator 1401 consisting of one LED that displays the gaming status, and four LEDs that display the normal lottery results drawn by passing the game ball through the gate section 2003. A normal symbol display 1402 consisting of a normal symbol display 1402, a normal holding display 1408 consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holdings related to the passing of game balls to the gate part 2003, and a drawing by receiving the game balls to the first starting port 2002. A first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs that displays the first special lottery result, and a first special holding consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holdings related to the acceptance of game balls into the first starting slot 2002. A number display 1404, a second special symbol display 1405 consisting of eight LEDs that display the second special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls into the second starting port 2004, A second special reservation number display 1406 consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls, and a special reservation number display 1406 that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "jackpot" etc. It mainly includes a round indicator 1407 consisting of three LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (round number) of the opening/closing pattern.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, etc. the provided LED.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be explained with reference to FIG. 62. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that accommodates the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section for controlling light emitting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control section for controlling effect images. .

[5-7. Game board side performance display device]
Next, the game board side performance display device 1600 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. The game board side performance display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. To be more specific, the game board side performance display device 1600 is removably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the approximate center. This game board side performance display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 when the game board 5 is assembled. This game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

The game board side performance display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 that protrude outward from the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a right fixing piece 1602 that protrudes outward from the right side surface when viewed from the front. This game board side performance display device 1600 has two fixing grooves opened on the left inner circumferential surface in a front view inside a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. 3010c, insert the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the back box 3010, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020, and lock it. The mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding downward.

[5-8. Front unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and has a front end protruding forward from the front surface of the panel board 1110 and a rear end passing through the opening 1112. and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110.

The table unit 2000 of this embodiment has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are always open and capable of receiving game balls shot into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are inside the gaming area 5a. a first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions; a gate section 2003 that is installed at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and detects passage of game balls; A second starting port 2004 allows game balls to be accepted according to the normal lottery results that are drawn by passing through the part 2003, and a lottery is performed by accepting game balls into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. A grand prize opening 2005 that can accept game balls according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

The plurality of general winning holes 2001 are arranged at the lower part of the gaming area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is located directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed approximately directly below the blocking portion 1006 at the upper right in the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front. The second starting port 2004 is located directly below the gate portion 2003 to the right when viewed from the front. The big prize opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1126.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and a big winning port 2005, and a starting port unit A lower side unit 2200 that is installed along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the lower side unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has a plurality of general prize openings 2001, and a side unit that is installed above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It includes an upper part 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 which is attached to the approximate center of the gaming area 5a and has a gate part 2003 and a second starting opening 2004.

The starting port unit 2100 is located in the gaming area 5a, near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction, directly above the out port 1126, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. This starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that opens upward with a size that can accept only one game ball at a time, and a big winning port 2005 that allows multiple game balls to be received at a time ( For example, 4 to 6 pieces) are of an acceptable size and extend from side to side, and are formed to be openable and closable depending on the gaming state.

The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the gaming area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that can accept game balls at all times.

The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front in the upper left of the lower side unit 2200 in the front view, slightly below the center in the vertical direction, in the gaming area 5a. When the upper side unit 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110, the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game balls flowing down along the inner rail 1002 are directed to the right (playing area 5a). (center in the left-right direction).

The center accessory 2500 is arranged in the gaming area 5a above the starting port unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200 and slightly above the center in front view, and is placed on the front side of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed into a frame shape, and allows the game board side effect display device 1600 placed behind the game panel 1100 and the effect unit provided in the back unit 3000 to be visually recognized from the front through the frame. be able to. The center accessory 2500 has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, excluding the lower side, protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, so that a game ball struck into the game area 5a is placed within the frame. It is made so that it cannot be invaded.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 that is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front so that game balls in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 and can be released into the frame. It includes an open warp exit 2522 and a stage 2530 that rolls the game ball released from the warp exit 2522 in the left-right direction and then releases it into the game area 5a. A starting port unit 2100 is arranged directly below the stage 2530, and when a game ball is released downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is received into the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Furthermore, a game board side performance display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and a lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010. A box-shaped performance drive board box 3042 is provided, which is rotatably mounted around an axis extending left and right along the direction and accommodates a performance drive board.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a back left center decoration unit 3050 that is attached to the front end of the back box 3010 upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 that is attached to the front end of the back box 3010 at an upper position from the center in the vertical direction. A rear lower rear movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and a rear upper left movable production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view The back left movable production unit 3300 is attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 when viewed from the front, and the back upper center is attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view. It includes a movable performance unit 3400 and a back/front/back movable performance unit 3500 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and in front of the back/lower/rear movable performance unit 3100.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a penetrating through the rear wall, and a flat frame-shaped frame projecting rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside of the frame toward the outside on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b when viewed from the rear, into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side performance display device 1600 is inserted. , a notch 3010d is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the vertical center of the right side of the liquid crystal mounting part 3010b when viewed from the rear, and a notch 3010d is provided to which the locking mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010a is formed to have approximately the same size as the display screen of the game board side performance display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the game board side performance display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface in a vertically slidable manner.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. This fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. formed at appropriate positions for mounting each movable performance unit and the like.

The back unit 3000 appropriately uses a back lower/rear movable presentation unit 3100, a back top/left movable presentation unit 3200, a back left movable presentation unit 3300, a back top/middle movable presentation unit 3400, a back/bottom/front movable presentation unit 3500, etc. , a light-emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc. can be performed, the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

[6. Game content]
Next, the content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3, the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 are released. , the ball passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5 and is hit into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game with the game ball is started. A game ball hit into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving force of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and the more clockwise the handle 302 is rotated, the stronger the ball can be hit. , game balls can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and game balls are attached to the obstacle nails. By making contact, the falling speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game ball, so that the movement can be enjoyed. In addition to the obstacle nails, the game area 5a is provided with windmills (not shown) that are rotated by contact with game balls at appropriate positions.

When the game ball hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). It flows down the area to the left of the center accessory 2500. When the game ball flowing down the left side area of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp exit 2522.

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward. When a game ball is released from the center of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, since it is located directly above the first starting port 2002, it is received into the first starting port 2002 with a high probability. When game balls are received into the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the gaming area 5a may be received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the large prize opening 2005 in the open state, and the like.

By the way, if the game ball that has flown down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it will be moved toward the center in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300, and will enter the general prize opening 2001 and the first prize slot in the lower side unit 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the starting port 2002 or the like. Then, when game balls are accepted into the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

On the other hand, when the game ball hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called hitting to the right), On the downstream side thereof, the water flows down a region where a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 are provided.

Then, when the game ball hit to the right passes through the gate section 2003, a normal lottery is held in the main control board 1310, and if the normal lottery result is "normal win", the second starting port 2004 is opened for a predetermined time ( For example, the second starting port 2004 remains open for a period of 0.3 to 10 seconds, allowing game balls to be received into the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Ru.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when game balls pass through the gate section 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is indicated (for example, 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). This suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 becomes open after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

In addition, if the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 after the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and before the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started, so the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of suggesting the result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result is finished. Further, the number of normal lottery results that can be held is set at an upper limit of four, and even if game balls pass through the gate section 2003, they are discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when game balls are received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays an advantageous gaming state (for example, "jackpot", "jackpot", " A special lottery result is drawn to generate a "medium win," "small win," "probability fluctuation win," "time reduction win," etc.). Then, the special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variable time). In addition, the special lottery results drawn when game balls are received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include "Lose", "Small hit", "2R jackpot", "5R jackpot", " 15R jackpot," "probability variable (probability change) win," "time saving (time reduction) win," "probable variable time saving win," "probable variable no time saving win," and so on.

When the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving game balls into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state. After the special variable time has elapsed, the grand prize opening 2005 becomes ready to accept game balls in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the big winning hole 2005 while the big winning hole 2005 is in an open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 send out a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) from the payout device 830. Game balls are paid out onto the upper tray 321. Therefore, by allowing the big winning hole 2005 to accept game balls when the big winning hole 2005 is enabled to accept game balls, many game balls can be paid out and the players can be entertained.

If the special lottery result is a "small win", after the big prize opening 2005 is open to accept game balls for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening and closing pattern is repeated multiple times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "jackpot", a predetermined period of time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the grand prize opening 2005 is open to accept game balls, or When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are accepted, an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) that brings the game balls into a closed state where they cannot be accepted is established. Repeat a number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, a ``2R jackpot'' is repeated for 2 rounds, a ``5R jackpot'' is repeated for 5 rounds, and a ``15R jackpot'' is repeated for 15 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in "Jackpot", after the end of the jackpot game, the probability that a special lottery result such as "Jackpot" will be drawn will be changed ("probable winning"), and the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result will be changed. There is a ``win'' (``time saving hit'').

In this embodiment, the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 receive game balls from the start of the special lottery until the special lottery result is suggested. Once a game ball is received in the second starting slot 2004, it is not possible to start suggesting the special lottery result, so the start of suggesting the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. Ru. The maximum number of special lottery results to be held is 4 for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if game balls were accepted in 2004, they were discarded without retaining the special lottery results. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

This suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side performance display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest special lottery results. The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 by flashing a plurality of LEDs by repeatedly turning them on and off for a predetermined period of time, and then indicating the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the game board side performance display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and suggests the special lottery result as a performance image. The performance image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side performance display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by varying each symbol row with three symbol rows each consisting of a plurality of symbols being displayed side by side in the left and right direction. The symbol rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the symbols of the three stop-displayed symbol rows are a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "lose", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmed image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small winning game, a big winning game, etc.) occurs according to the special lottery result.

In addition, there is a time period (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) indicating a special lottery result on the function display unit 1400, and a time period indicating a special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 (when the symbol rows fluctuate). The time required for displaying the confirmed image is different from the time required for displaying the finalized image, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In addition to displaying a performance image for suggesting a special lottery result by the game board side performance display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 also controls the performance operation unit 400 on the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result. The operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460, various decorations on the center accessory 2500, various decorations on the back unit 3000, back lower and rear movable effect unit 3100, back upper left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect It is possible to perform light emitting effects, movable effects, display effects, etc. by appropriately using the unit 3300, the back upper and middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc. It is possible to keep the players entertained, and to prevent the players from losing interest in the game.

[Relationship between this embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in this embodiment is a door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in this embodiment is a main body unit of the present invention, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of this embodiment is a door unit of the present invention. The tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to the window portion of the present embodiment, and the operation button 410 of the production operation unit 400 and the second production operation unit 400A of the present embodiment is attached to the bulge portion of the present invention. The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in this embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention.

In addition, the interior decoration member of the operation button of the base unit in this embodiment, the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side are the second decoration body of the present invention. The second button interior decoration part 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432, the peripheral decoration part 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the peripheral decoration member 478 correspond to the second decoration part of the present invention, respectively. .

Furthermore, each LED and the sub-screen decoration board mounted on the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration board 436 in this embodiment The LED 477a of 477 is the light emitting body of the present invention, the door frame side effect display device 460 in this embodiment is the back side decoration means of the present invention, the frame unit 415 in this embodiment, the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 corresponds to the base portion of the present invention.

[8. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the performance operation unit 400 (or the second performance operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 bulging forward in the door frame 3 can be operated. When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the screen unit 470 in the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) The decoration in which the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) overlap, the decoration in which the first button decoration part 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlap, etc. Since it is possible to show players a highly decorative decoration with a sense of perspective, it is possible to strongly attract the attention of players, and to differentiate it from other pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 can be made expensive.

In addition, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), the door frame side effect display device 460, etc. are arranged in the movement direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). In addition, since the button lens 411 is supported by the unit base 431 (unit base 451) so that it can be moved by the player's operation, the button lens 411 can be moved by the player operating (pressing) the button lens 411. When this happens, the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) will approach or separate. Due to the change in the distance between the first button decoration part 411a and the second inner button decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411a It becomes possible to change the perspective of the decoration that appears to overlap with the button inner decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), and the first button decoration part 411a and The player can change the decoration (intersection mode) with the second button interior decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), and It is possible to have fun and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward to the side opposite to the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side), it is different from the first decoration body. Since a space will be formed between the button lens 411 and the second button decoration member 432, the distance from the button lens 411 to the first button decoration part 411a and the second button of the operation button interior decoration member 432 when viewed from the player. The distance to the inner decorative part 432g (or the peripheral decorative part 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) will be much different, and the button lens 411 may be moved by operating the button lens 411. Even when the player's eye position moves, the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) Since the intersecting manner (overlapping degree) changes, a moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the transparent button lens 411 is provided with the first button decoration part 411a having a radial decoration toward the center, the center side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration part 411a is not provided. Through this, the interior operation button decoration member 432 on the back side (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be clearly seen, and the radial shape of the first button decoration part 411a The decoration allows the player's line of sight to be directed to the center of the button lens 411, and the interior decoration member 432 of the operation button (or the second performance display device 460A on the door frame side) and the door frame can be directed through the center of the transparent button lens 411. The player's attention can be strongly focused on the side effect display device 460.

In addition, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 is provided with a second button interior decoration portion 432g having a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, when viewed from the outside, the button lens 411 The decoration of the first button decoration part 411a and the decoration of the second button decoration part 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 intersect with each other, so that the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g It is possible to reliably bring out the sense of perspective in the decorations created by the buttons, and to make the decorations created by the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g stand out, thereby making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players. can.

Moreover, since the decoration of the second button interior decoration part 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 has a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the second button interior decoration part 432g The decoration can direct the player's line of sight and attention to the door frame side effect display device 460 visible in the center of the operation button internal decoration member 432, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. can.

Furthermore, each LED mounted on the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration board 436 (or the sub-screen decoration board 477) When the LED 477a) is made to emit light, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or sub-screen decoration member 476) can be decorated with light emission, and the button lens 411 can also be decorated with light emission. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the player can be entertained by the light-emitting decoration. At this time, the second button interior decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) controls the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration board. Since the light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the decorative board 436 can be diffused, in the second button interior decoration part 432g, the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button top While the interior decoration board 435 and the lower operation button interior decoration board 436 are illuminated by direct light from each LED (or LED 477a), the first button decoration part 411a is decorated with the second button interior decoration. The second button inner decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) is decorated with a strong luminescence, whereas the second button interior decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) is decorated with a strong luminescence. Since the first button decoration part 411a is decorated with weak light, each LED of the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration board 436 When looking at the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) from the outside with the LED 477a emitting light, the sense of perspective is more emphasized. The decoration can be shown to the players, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing, strongly attracting the players' interest.

In addition, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is arranged in the direction in which the button lens 411 moves, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side decoration member 432) There is no need to secure space for the button lens 411 to move around the outer circumference of the frame side second effect display device 460A), It is possible to expand the side second effect display device 460A) outward and make it as large as possible, and by increasing the size, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device) can be enlarged. 460A) can be highlighted. Furthermore, as described above, since there is no need to secure a space for movement outside the button lens 411, by arranging the frame unit 415 outside the button lens 411, the entire pachinko machine 1 can be The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly decorative, has a good appearance, and has a high appeal that strongly attracts the attention of players.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward, if a player hits the button lens 411 and applies an impact to a part of the surface, the button lens 411 has a flat shape. Since the applied impact force is more easily dispersed over the entire button lens 411 than in the case of the button lens 411, the button lens 411 can be made difficult to break (hard to be damaged). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the interruption of the game due to the button lens 411 being damaged during a game, which may cause some players to become irritated and lose their interest, and also to prevent the button lens 411 from being damaged. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the door frame 3 that allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 disposed in the main body frame 4 to be viewed from the front through the through hole 111, there is a space under the through hole 111. The unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward on the side has an outer diameter of 10 cm. An operation button 410 with a circular shape of about 15 cm within a range of ~30 cm that can be moved (advance and retreat) by the player's operation, and an internal decoration that can be seen from the front through a transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 Since the member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged within the frame are attached, it is different from the conventional one. In a pachinko machine, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the largest possible operation button 410 is visible in the position where the game ball storage tray is conspicuous. The pachinko machine 1 can be recognized as being different from conventional pachinko machines, and can have a high appeal. The frame unit 415 is provided with a frame side lens 417 having translucency, and a second button decoration having translucency is provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) adjacent to the frame side lens 417. 411b, and an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative part 411b. The frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided with first LEDs 422a and 423a for decorating the second button decoration part 411b with light emission and second LEDs 422b and 423b for decorating the frame side lens 417 with light emission. It includes an inner cylindrical part 416d of the frame main body 416 that partitions from the decorative part 411b, and a main body part 413a and an inner extension part 413f of the button base 413 that partition the second button decorative part 411b and the center side of the button lens 411. Therefore, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411, and the light from the second LED 422b illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and button lens 411 due to the inner cylinder portion 416d, the main body portion 413a, and the inner extension portion 413f. , 423b can be prevented from illuminating the second button decoration part 411b, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and second button decoration part 411b can be decorated with light emission independently. can. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration part 411b can be clearly decorated with light emission, and a good-looking light emission effect can be performed. In addition, by appropriately combining lights off, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, etc. for the adjacent frame side lens 417 and second button decoration part 411b, various patterns of light emission can be produced. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and it is also possible to entertain the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, the first LEDs 422a and 423a that emits light to decorate the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b that emits light to decorate the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are combined into one operation button left outer decoration. In preparation for the circuit board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operating button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), so that the second button decorative part Compared to the case where 411b (operation button 410) is provided with a board, the first LEDs 422a, 423a can be kept as far away from the second button decoration part 411b as possible, and the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a can be sufficiently reflected. The second button decoration part 411b can be irradiated with the light in a diffused state. Therefore, since the second button decoration part 411b can be uniformly decorated with light emitting light, the appearance of the second button decoration part 411b and the light emitting decoration of the frame side lens 417 can be improved, which strongly attracts the attention of players. In addition, it is possible to entertain the players, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the players.

Furthermore, since the operating button left outer decorative board 422 and the operating button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the operating button left outer decorative board 422 is attached as the operating button 410 moves back and forth. The wiring connected to the outer right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button is not bent or stretched, and disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (second button decoration part 411b) is moved, the wiring will not be disconnected. To allow a player to enjoy the light-emitting decoration without any problem, and to suppress a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, since the second button decoration part 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be seen through the transparent button lens 411. (Second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) When looking at the inner decoration member 432 of the operation button and the outer edge of the door frame side effect display device 460 (second effect display device 460A on the door frame side), the second button decoration part 411b is in a decorated state, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. By causing the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b to emit light as appropriate, the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) are transparent and visible. As described above, the second button decoration part 411b and the frame side lens 417 that decorate the outer edge of the button lens 411 can be decorated with light emitting light in various patterns. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the light emitting effect and operation of the operation button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be strongly attracted. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by entertaining the effect images etc. on the effect display device 460A).

In addition, since the button lens 411 (operation button 410), which is provided with the second button decoration part 411b on the outer edge, can be operated by the player, the operation button 410 can be operated by the player during execution of a player participation type performance. By allowing the player to operate the button 410, the player can enjoy operating the operation button 410 (player participatory effect), and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in the game. When performing a player participation type production, the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are decorated with light, thereby attracting the player's attention to the operation button 410. Therefore, the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be entertained by participating in the player participation type performance.

Furthermore, since only the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 is provided with the non-transparent main body part 413a and the inner extension part 413f that can be decorated with light by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 The area closer to the center than the button decoration part 411b is not decorated with light emission (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the center side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) becomes brighter, so that it is placed at the rear. It is possible to prevent the operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) from becoming difficult to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration part 411b can be decorated with light in a good condition, and the rear operation button internal decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in good condition, and the decorations, light-emitting effects, etc. can be sufficiently enjoyed by the players, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, since the inner cylinder portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 provided with the frame side lens 417, the second button decoration of the frame side lens 417 and the operation button 410 is displayed on the rear side of the frame unit 415. 411b can be completely partitioned off by the inner cylindrical portion 416d. On the other hand, the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b is at the end (rear end) of the inner cylinder part 416d closer to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423. Since the rear end of the inner cylindrical portion 416d is located closer to the left outer decorative board 422 and the right outer operating button decorative board 423 than the diffusion range, the outer left decorative board 422 and the right outer operating button Even if a gap is formed between the front surface of the decorative board 423, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LED 422b 423b illuminates the second button decoration part 411b. There's nothing to do. Therefore, the light can be reliably blocked by the inner cylindrical portion 416d, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-mentioned effects can be realized.

In addition, since the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the second button decoration portion 411b on the rear side of the operation button 410 and the center side of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned off by the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) of the main body portion 413a closer to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operating button right outer decorative board 423 Since the LEDs 422a and 423a also extend rearward, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not pass through the rear end of the main body 413a, completely blocking light from entering the center of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410. I can do it. Therefore, the second button decoration part 411b can be illuminated and decorated in good condition by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 ( The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side can be visually recognized in a good condition, and the player can fully enjoy the decorations, light-emitting effects, etc., thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, when viewed from the front, a second button decoration is provided in front of the outer part of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the part 411b is located, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side). The members on the outside of the effect display device 460A) and the rear side (rear side) can be made difficult to see by the second button decoration part 411b, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating. At this time, when the second button decoration part 411b is decorated with light by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the brightness of the second button decoration part 411b is different from the brightness of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (the second decoration on the door frame side). Since the outside and rear side of the display device 460A) are relatively dark, the members on the outside and rear side of the operation button internal decoration member 432 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be made difficult to see. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the interior decoration member 432 of the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Moreover, since the outer circumference of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration part 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration part 411b The side lens 417 has an arcuate shape. Therefore, by causing the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b to emit light as appropriate, a light emitting effect in which light circles around the outer edge of the operation button 410 or a light emission in which light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410 can be produced. Since it is possible to show the player a display, a light-emitting display in which light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored with the various light-emitting effects, and to make the player have fun. This can prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game balls stored in the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 in the door frame 3 are driven into the game area 5a, and the upper tray 321 used for the game is opened. At the same time, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is removably attached to the front side and lower part of the upper plate 321 to create a mounting space of a predetermined size behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). A remaining space of the mounting space 326j is formed, and a portion of the lower plate main body 325 corresponding to the first region A1 of the lower plate is arranged on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and a remaining space of the mounting space 326j is formed from that portion. Since the lower tray 322 capable of storing game balls is attached by extending the portion of the lower tray main body 325 corresponding to the lower tray second region A2 inside, the lower tray 322 looks small when viewed from the front. Therefore, the lower plate 322 can be made less noticeable, and the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be made relatively more noticeable. Therefore, when this pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be seen in the position where the upper tray and lower tray are seen vertically side by side in conventional pachinko machines. It is possible to make a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can make players realize that it is different from conventional pachinko machines at just a glance, and that can strongly attract the attention of players. can.

Further, in the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the main body vertical wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery extends upward from the upper end to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Since the lower tray covers 340, 340A are provided to restrict the movement of the game balls, the game balls in the lower tray 322 are prevented from coming into contact with the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A). This prevents the game balls supplied into the lower tray 322 and the game balls stored in the lower tray 322 from coming into contact with or pressing against the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball will not come into contact with the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), and the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) will not be damaged by the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest due to interruption of the game due to damage to the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), and this pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

In addition, lower plate covers 340, 340A are provided in the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322 to prevent the game ball from moving toward the main body vertical wall portion 325b and the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower tray main body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost or uncomfortable due to the game ball intruding into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. It is possible to suppress the decrease in .

In addition, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A cover the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322, the game balls supplied into the lower plate 322 bounce within the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be reliably prevented from intruding into the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved. In addition, since the lower tray covers 340 and 340A cover the lower tray second region A2 of the lower tray main body 325, the player can 326d) into the lower plate second region A2, the lower plate covers 340, 340A can prevent the fingertips etc. from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. It is possible to prevent injuries caused by touching the underside of the upper tray 321 or the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), etc., and to allow the player to play the game in a safe state. Can be done.

Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the impact and pressure caused by the contact of the game ball with the lower plate covers 340, 340A. Even if the operation occurs, the information is not transmitted from the lower plate cover 340, 340A to the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and damage to the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is ensured. It can be prevented.

In addition, in the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is provided in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, so the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open. In this state, the game balls released from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can directly enter the lower tray ball removal hole 322a and be discharged downward (to the dollar box), and the game balls can be removed from the main body of the lower tray body 325. It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided as described above, the game ball will be removed from the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). Since it is possible to prevent the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) from coming into contact with the rear side, it is possible to prevent damage to the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), reduce interruptions in the game, and reduce the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower tray main body 325 near the front end of the lower tray 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325 is tilted. The ball will climb up the bottom surface, and the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, since the speed of the game balls that come into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A can be slowed down, the lower plate covers 340, 340A reliably restrict the movement of the game balls to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. At the same time, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game ball comes into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body vertical wall portion 325b, and to prevent them from being damaged.

In addition, since at least the lower plate covers 340, 340A are separate members, if the lower plate covers 340, 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower plate covers 340, 340A, and this pachinko machine 1 can reduce the burden on the game hall side where the game hall is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center of the front surface in the left and right direction expands most forwardly below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game in which a game ball is received into the general prize opening 2001 etc. is played. The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 taken out is provided, and the production operation unit 400 and the second production operation unit 400A are removably attached to the most forwardly bulging part thereof, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the plate unit cover 326. The storage tray (upper tray 321 and lower tray 322) is provided with a storage tray that can store game balls, and the storage tray (the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322) is provided with an outer part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front. It has a lower plate first area A1 located therein and a lower plate second area A2 located in a space at the rear of the mounting space 326j which is behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) in front view. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out, and the storage trays (the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322) can be made to look smaller and less noticeable. can. Therefore, since the conspicuous production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is visible in the area where the upper tray and lower tray were visible in the conventional pachinko machine, the player can see that the game machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 can be recognized at a glance as being a highly appealing pachinko machine that can strongly attract the attention of players.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is Although it is small, the first part of the lower plate main body 325 has a second lower plate area A2 located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j which is the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front. Since it includes the extension part 325B, the second extension part 325C, and the lower tray covers 340, 340A, it is possible to store game balls even in a range that cannot be seen from the front of the lower tray 322 (lower tray second area A2). can. Therefore, contrary to the appearance from the front, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls stored, allowing the player to concentrate on playing the game without having to worry about the remaining amount of game balls in the lower tray 322. This makes it possible to enjoy the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the lower plate cover 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part are attached to the lower plate main body 325 and the main body part 325A having the lower plate first area A1, and the lower plate cover 340, 340A having the lower plate second area A2. Since the lower plate 322 is constructed by attaching (combining) the parts 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340, 340A of different sizes, a first extension part 325B, a second extension part 325C, etc. are prepared in advance. By installing the lower tray cover 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C, the size of the lower tray cover 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C can be adjusted according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the installation space 326j in the tray unit cover 326. The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (replacing) the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C, it is possible to correspond to the size of the space at the rear of the mounting space 326j. Since the width of this rear space depends on the amount of rearward protrusion of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), various production operation units 400 (second production operation unit 400A) with different rear protrusion amounts can be used. The lower tray 322 can be made compatible with the performance operation unit 400A), and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased.

In addition, since the lower tray 322 includes a bottom wall portion 325a and a main body standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower tray 322 becomes a container-like shape concave downward, and the game ball can be stored reliably. In addition, since the lower plate covers 340, 340A have a cover standing wall part 340a rising from the upper end of the main body standing wall part 325b of the lower plate main body 325, lower plate covers 340, 340A of various shapes are prepared in advance. Then, by combining (installing) the lower plate covers 340, 340A of a shape according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, the size (shape) of the space at the rear of the mounting space 326j, etc., it can be adapted to various forms. It is possible to achieve the same effects as described above.

Further, in the lower plate 322 composed of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the lower plate covers 340, 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Therefore, since the part of the lower tray 322 on which the game balls are placed is the lower tray main body 325, the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray covers 340, 340A are placed in the area where the load of many game balls is applied due to storage. Boundaries (joints, dividing lines PL) are never located. Therefore, the load of the stored game balls is only received by the lower tray main body 325, so even if many game balls are stored, there is no force that would cause the lower tray covers 340, 340A to be separated from the lower tray main body 325. There is no action, and the lower plate covers 340, 340A can be prevented from coming off from the lower plate main body 325.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper tray capable of storing game balls is provided below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game in which game balls are received into the general prize opening 2001 etc. is played. 321 and a lower tray 322, and a lower tray ball supply port 323c and a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a in the lower tray 322 by a production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) arranged in the center in the left-right direction. Since more than half of the lower tray 322 including It is possible to create a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can strongly attract people. In addition, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see the game ball heading from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, it is difficult for the player to see the game ball in the lower plate 322. It is possible to prevent the player from becoming distracted by making it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the ball, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) controls the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate on the bottom of the lower plate 322 that guide the game balls from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since it is difficult to see the game balls guided by the guiding means such as the ball guiding part 322c and the buffer part 322d between the ball extracting hole 322a and the ball extracting hole 322a, if the lower plate ball extracting hole 322a is left open. , the game balls supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 are guided by the guiding means and are smoothly (immediately) discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, which makes it difficult for the player to It is possible to create an illusion that the game balls are being discharged below the lower tray 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower tray 322. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the trouble of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and it is possible to allow the player to concentrate on the game and suppress a drop in interest.

Furthermore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see from the front more than half of the lower plate 322, including the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, etc. In addition, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, etc. are located at the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). In other words, since more than half of the lower plate 322 is made to go around to the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), the size of the lower plate 322 seen from the front is smaller than that of the actual lower plate. Since the size (capacity) of 322 is large, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 compared to appearance.

In addition, when the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open, the game ball released into the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is transferred to the lower plate ball supply port 323c on the bottom of the lower plate 322 and the lower plate ball. This is because the balls can be smoothly guided to the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a and discharged to the lower part of the lower tray 322 (dollar box) by the guiding means such as the ball guide portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d, which are located between the ball extraction hole 322a and the ball guide portion 322c, and the buffer portion 322d. , it is possible to prevent the game balls from circulating in the lower tray 322, and it is possible to reliably make the game balls circulating in the lower tray 322 difficult to see from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of game balls in the lower tray 322, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming distracted and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 are immediately removed by the ball guide portion 322c etc. without the player noticing. Since the ball can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, the player is given the illusion that the game ball is being discharged below the lower tray 322 (to the dollar box) without passing through the lower tray 322. I can do it. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the trouble of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and it is possible to allow the player to concentrate on the game and suppress a drop in interest.

In addition, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see from the front more than half of the storage area (storage area) of game balls in a plan view of the lower tray 322, the lower tray is visible from the front. 322, the actual lower tray 322 is more than twice the visible size, so it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of game balls, similar to the lower tray of a conventional pachinko machine.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the door frame 3 bulges forward in the lower part of the game area 5a of the game board 5 when viewed from the front, where a game in which game balls are accepted into the general prize opening 2001 etc. is played. Installation of a production operation unit for attaching a large production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the same height as the overall height of the dish unit cover 326 to the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. 326a, and a plate front lower decorative part 326c located below approximately the center in the vertical direction on both left and right sides of the production operation unit mounting part 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is recessed so as to be gouged rearward. Because of the shape, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) attached to the performance operation unit attachment part 326a can appear to protrude significantly forward, and the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) This allows the operation unit 400A) to stand out. Therefore, the large performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be seen in an emphasized manner in the position where the upper tray and the lower tray are visible side by side in the conventional pachinko machine, so that the player can see On the other hand, it is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine is different from a conventional pachinko machine just by looking at it, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing. The lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the lower plate front decoration part 326c which is recessed rearward on both left and right outer sides of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. A part of the game balls is routed to the rear of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), and a sufficient amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 (capacity of the lower tray 322) can be secured. There is no need to play the game while worrying about the lower tray 322 being full of game balls, the player can concentrate on the game, enjoy the game, and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since a part of the lower tray 322 wraps around to the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), when the player puts his hand into the lower tray 322 from the front, his fingertips are in the lower plate. It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall of the plate unit base 322 (the front surface of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, etc. This makes it possible for the player to recognize through the sense of touch that a sufficient amount of game balls is stored, and when the game balls are stored in the lower tray 322, the amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 is Since it is possible to recognize that a large number of game balls are stored in the player, it is possible to give a feeling of satisfaction to the player, and it is possible to enjoy the game and suppress a decrease in interest. Furthermore, since the fingertips of the hand placed in the lower tray 322 are unlikely to touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322, the lower tray cover 340, etc., it provides the player with a feeling similar to that of the lower tray in a conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort to players who are accustomed to conventional pachinko machines, and it is possible to reassure the players and prevent them from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the lower tray 322 is formed to become wider toward the back (backward), a sufficient amount of game balls can be stored even if the front side is small. In other words, since the front end side portion of the lower plate 322 is made small, the lower plate 322 is made less noticeable on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open (lower plate front decoration part 326c). This makes it possible to relatively make the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) more conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to provide the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) while ensuring a sufficient storage amount of game balls in the lower tray 322, and it is possible to increase the appeal to players and to It is possible to have fun and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the side and upper part of the lower tray 322 that goes around to the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is covered with the lower tray cover 340, the player cannot enter the lower tray 322. It is possible to prevent the player from getting injured by touching the inner surface of the tray unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) with the tip of a finger when inserting a hand. You can play games in a safe state. Further, the lower tray cover 340 can prevent game balls from entering (spilling) from the lower tray 322 into the tray unit cover 326.

Furthermore, since the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) is arranged in the center of the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) cannot be operated from the player side. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 more appealing, which can be made more conspicuous and strongly attract players' attention, and the decoration by the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be easily seen. This allows the player to enjoy the decorations and performances of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), thereby suppressing a decrease in player's interest.

In addition, since the lower tray 322 is equipped with a lower tray ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper tray 321 and a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a that penetrates vertically so as to be openable and closable, it is different from the conventional pachinko machine. Since it has the same function as the lower tray 322, when players who are accustomed to conventional pachinko machines play games with this pachinko machine 1, they will not be confused about the function of the lower tray 322, and will be able to play the same way as before. The player can enjoy the game by allowing the player to concentrate on the game. In addition, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are respectively arranged at the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), when viewed from the front, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and The lower plate ball removal hole 322a is not visible from the player's side, making the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 neat and good-looking, and providing a highly appealing pachinko machine that can strongly attract the attention of players. It can be set as machine 1.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the plate unit 320 bulging forward is located below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a of the door frame 3. A door frame side effect display device 460 that can present effects to the player is attached to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326. At the same time as attaching the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) that decorates the outside, the outer diameter of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) is attached. An operation button 410 is attached, which has a transparent button lens 411 with a diameter of about 15 cm and whose center bulges away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward). A cylindrical button base 413 includes a first button decorative part 411a, a second button decorative part 411b, and a button frame 412, and protrudes from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side. Therefore, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (second door frame side It is possible to reduce visibility of the outer edge, the inner side (rear side), etc. of the screen unit 470 of the effect display device 460A, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the internal operation button decoration member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Also, the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410 prevent the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) from being removed. By increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410, the outer edge and back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see, so the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see. 470), it can be well hidden by the first button decoration part 411a, etc., thereby preventing deterioration of the appearance, while also allowing the large operation button with an outer diameter of approximately 15 cm to be used. 410 (button lens 411) can be realized without any problem. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be made larger, this pachinko machine 1 can stand out, and the player's attention is strongly increased. The pachinko machine 1 can be made attractive and highly appealing.

Furthermore, since the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) is provided which protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed diagonally, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield and hide anything outside the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), and the operation The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

In addition, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) that bulges in the direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the area near the outer periphery of the button lens 411 The surface is a plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane perpendicular to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are lined up, that is, the forward and backward direction of the operation button 410). Since the player is inclined with respect to the plane (orthogonal to the plane), light is easily refracted when viewed from the player's side. Therefore, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470 ) can make it difficult to see the outer edge, the back side, etc. of the interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) of the operation button, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, since the button lens 411 is formed into a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 becomes large, so that the operation button inner decoration member 432 disposed inside the operation button 410 and the door frame A door frame side effect display device that allows the side effect display device 460 (second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) to be made larger or easier to move, and allows the player to be entertained by using the inside of the operation button 410. 460 (second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) can be easily provided, and a pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain players can be realized.

Furthermore, since the button lens 411 is formed into a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is given design (decoration), so the operation button 410 in the pachinko machine 1 is made to stand out and attracts players' attention. This allows the player to easily select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play.

Moreover, in the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, since the button frame 412 is made opaque, the button frame 412 has a button It is possible to reliably hide the rear side of the operation button 410, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), etc. from being seen through the gap between the lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), and the operation The appearance of the button 410 and the like can be improved by reducing deterioration in appearance.

The button lens 411 also has an opaque button frame 412 extending inward from the outer circumferential edge to the inside with a predetermined width, and cooperates with the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411b to Since it is possible to make the gap between the main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) difficult to see from the side, the main body part 413a and the operation button inner decoration member 432 ( It becomes possible to increase the gap between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470 of the operation button 410 and the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side. can be moved well.

Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the outer periphery has no directionality compared to a case where the button lens 411 has a polygonal shape, making it easier to move the operation button 410 smoothly. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is enlarged, it can be pressed and operated without any problem, and it is possible to reliably let the player enjoy the player participatory performance using the operation button 410, thereby suppressing a drop in interest.

Furthermore, since the operation button 410 is enlarged, when a player participatory effect is executed in which the player operates the operation button 410, it is possible to easily operate the operation button 410 without checking the position of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to make it easier to touch and press the operation button 410, it is possible to make it easier for the player to participate in a player participatory performance using the operation button 410, thereby entertaining the player and reducing interest. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since a door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, player's interest can be controlled by presenting effect images according to the gaming state. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) inside the button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be strongly attracted. Not only can the effects be entertained, but also the effect images and light emitting effects provided by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can prompt the player to operate the operation button 410. By having the players actively participate in the player-participation type presentation and having fun, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. Further, by executing the effect within the operation button 410, it is possible to make some players think that something good will happen, thereby increasing expectations for the game and suppressing a drop in interest. I can do it.

Further, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 of the large operation button 410 (part inside the first button decoration part 411a). Therefore, players can immediately recognize that the operation buttons 410 of this pachinko machine 1 are clearly different from the operation buttons of conventional pachinko machines, and the system has high appeal to players. The pachinko machine 1 can be used as a pachinko machine 1, and the player's expectations for the performance using the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) inside the operation button 410 can be increased. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in player interest.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention, as shown below. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but it is not limited to this, and the game machine can be applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effects as above can be achieved.

Further, in the above embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 has the first button decoration part 411a formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412, but the invention is not limited to this. , the button lens 411 may not have the first button decoration part 411a formed thereon.

Further, in the above embodiment, the opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, but the button frame 412 is not limited to this. A decorative portion for hiding the rear side may be formed all around the lens 411 at a portion corresponding to the button frame 412.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (the second Although the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the second base unit 450) is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the second display on the door frame side are shown. At least one may protrude toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to surround only a portion of the entire outer periphery of the display device 460A. The button base 413 may have a shape that follows the outer periphery of the button lens 411, or may have a shape that does not follow the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have decoration (planar decoration by pasting a sticker, printing, etc., or three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as relief) on at least the inner wall side. Furthermore, the button base 413 may be translucent or opaque. Further, the button base 413 may be colored or may be colorless and transparent. Furthermore, when the button base 413 is made transparent, it is desirable to apply a light diffusion process such as a grain, a slit, or a prism to at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the lower plate 322 is recessed backward only from the left outer part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. The lower plate is not limited to, but is recessed rearward from both left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) and connected to each other at the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). 322, or it is recessed backward only from the right outer part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and a part wraps around to the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). You can make it so that there is.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the shape of the portion of the front surface of the tray unit cover 326 where the lower tray 322 is recessed rearward (the lower tray front decorative portion 326c) (the shape of the front end of the lower tray 322) is changed to a rearwardly curved surface. Although an example is shown in which the front surface is recessed in the shape of a polygonal column, the front surface may be recessed in the shape of a polygonal column or a polyhedron.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) was attached to the front surface of the dish unit cover 326, but the present invention is not limited to this. "A device equipped with a rotating body with a decoration on its surface," "A device equipped with a decorative body with a decoration and a movable device that moves the decorative body," "A game machine equipped with a rotating body that has a decoration on its surface," Items with decorations that three-dimensionally imitate characters, items, logos, scenes (dioramas), etc. that are in line with the concept of the game machine.'' It is also possible to attach a member such as a unit or a panel with decorations such as ``, etc.'' applied by stickers, printing, etc. Further, the number of members attached to the attachment space 326j (the production operation unit attachment portion 326a) does not need to be one, and a plurality of (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the plate unit cover 326 is provided with a production operation unit mounting portion 326a that is open to the front for attaching the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). However, the present invention is not limited to, and may include a dish unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover part) that does not have an opening (performance operation unit attachment part 326a) for attaching the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). A configuration may be adopted in which a space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is formed behind the dish unit cover. Furthermore, it is desirable to decorate the front surface of such a tray unit cover with characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. that are in line with the concept of the gaming machine by stickers, printing, attaching decorative members, etc. .

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (storage area) of game balls in a plan view of the lower tray 322 is controlled by the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) as a covering part. Although an example has been shown in which the covering is made difficult to see from the front, the present invention is not limited to this, and half or less of the storage area of game balls in the lower tray 322 may be made difficult to see from the front. The entire plate 322 may be made difficult to see from the front.

Further, in the above embodiment, the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are shown as having an arc shape partially provided in the circumferential direction. However, the second button decoration part 411b and the frame side lens 417 may have an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the second button inner decoration part 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the production operation unit 400 is a decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered at the center. The present invention is not limited to this, and the second button interior decoration portion 432g may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an oval shape) centered at the center.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the operation button internal decoration member 432 arranged on the rear side, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect can be seen through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410. Although the rear member such as the display device 460A is shown to be always visible, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration including a variable light transmitting means that makes the rear side visible when the following is satisfied. Here, the variable light transmitting means includes ``a magic mirror that makes the rear side visible due to the difference in brightness between the front and rear sides,'' and ``a device that becomes transparent when the power is turned on and off, such as a liquid crystal film.'' "It becomes invisible or opaque so that the rear side can be seen." Note that the front member and the rear member may be relatively movable or may not be relatively movable.

By providing at least one of the front member and the rear member with a variable light transmitting means, only the front member or the front member and the rear member are visible under normal conditions, Decorations of visible members can be shown to the player. In a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, the rear part (the rear member or a member placed behind the rear member) that is invisible in the normal state becomes visible, and the front part becomes visible. The member and the rear member, or the front member, the rear member, and the member on the rear side of the rear member can display an overlapping decoration. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player using the front member and the rear member, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and also making it possible to entertain the player. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

To be more specific, for example, if the front member is equipped with a variable light transmitting means such as a one-way mirror, under normal conditions, by darkening the rear side of the front member, only the decoration of the front member can be displayed. It can be visually recognized by the player. Then, when the space between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened with light from a light emitting unit such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear side of the rear member passes through the front member. The members become visible, and the decoration in which the decorations on the front member and the decorations on the rear member overlap can be shown to the player.

Alternatively, if the front member is transparent and the rear member has variable light transmission means such as a one-way mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member under normal conditions, so the decoration of the front member and the rear member can be The player can see the decorations on the surface of the player. Then, when the rear side of the rear member is brightened by light from a light emitting part such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side becomes visible through the rear member, and the front member and the rear Through the member, a member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decoration such as a character, etc.) can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, if both the front member and the rear member are provided with variable light transmitting means such as a one-way mirror, only the decoration of the front member can be shown to the player under normal conditions, and the decoration of the front member and the When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by light from a light emitting unit such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member becomes visible through the front member. Decorations made with the rear member can be shown to the player. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by light from a light emitting part such as an LED (or the space between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by light from a light emitting part such as an LED). ) and the respective satisfaction conditions of the variable light transmitting means in the front member and the rear member are satisfied, and the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decoration such as a character) is passed through the front member and the rear member. can be shown to the player. As a result, by appropriately selecting the part to be brightened by the light from the light emitting part, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages, and the player can enjoy a variety of decorations.

In the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means is like a one-way mirror, so when the rear side is darkened, it looks like a mirror, so there is no light on the surface of the front or rear member. A glittering decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means was explained as something like a one-way mirror, but even if it is something like a liquid crystal film, similar effects can be achieved. In addition, when using something like a liquid crystal film as a variable light transmission means, it is possible to transmit light even in an opaque state (it has translucency), so it is possible to If the rear side of the member can be made brighter (or decorated with light emitting light) by light from a light emitting part such as an LED, it is possible to show a wider variety of effects such as light emitting effects and decorative effects to the players. .

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. FIG. 69 is a block diagram of the main control board, dispensing control board, and peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram schematically showing a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram of the periphery of a VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal display control section.

As shown in FIG. 69, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a first control unit MCG that performs control related to the game including the payout of prize balls in addition to the process of generating a control power source (for example, +5V, etc.). , and a second control section SCG that performs effects related to the game progressed by the first control section MCG.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment adopts a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of boards, and the main control board 1310 serves as the first control unit MCG. , a payout control board 951, and a power supply board 931, and a peripheral control board 1510 as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in explaining the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be explained in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931, and then the The second control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be explained.

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and a predetermined period of time has passed since the power was turned on, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM that stores various control programs and various commands such as a main control program that is executed after the game is executed and controls gaming operations, and a RAM that temporarily stores data. A main control input circuit 1310b to which a detection signal from a detection switch is input, a main control output circuit 1310c to output various signals to an external board, etc., and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to drive various solenoids. , and a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors signs of a predetermined voltage power outage or instantaneous power outage.

The main control MPU 1310a includes its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM"), its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), etc. The watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in main control 1310af") for monitoring its operation (system) and functions for preventing fraud are also built in.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. This nonvolatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code that is given a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. This ID code once assigned is stored in a non-volatile RAM and cannot be rewritten even using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve and refer to the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a also includes a hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in A hard random number circuit 1310an) is built-in. This main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value to 32767 as the maximum value is preset), The predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit is configured such that a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an first uses a clock signal ( Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator (described later), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. Once this is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without duplication. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a selects the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an as a jackpot. It is set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information inputted with detection signals from various detection switches to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. In other words, in the main control input circuit 1310b, information based on detection signals from various detection switches inputted to its various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described later, so that various signals based on the information are It is configured as a circuit that outputs from an output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type whose emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board, etc. are input to its various input terminals. A main control output circuit with a reset function 1310ca is provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information that has been reset, and a main control output circuit without a reset function 1310cb is not provided with a reset terminal and does not have a reset function. It consists of and. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. In other words, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function resets information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. by the main control system reset described later. The circuit is configured such that no signals based on the above are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is configured so that the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. is not reset by the main control system reset described later. The circuit is configured such that signals based on the data are output from its various output terminals.

A first starting port sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002, a second starting port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 2004, and general A detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 4020 that detects a game ball that has entered the winning hole 2001 and a signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e are sent to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. has been entered. In addition, a gate sensor 4003 that detects game balls that have passed through the gate section 2003 shown in FIG. 60, a count sensor 4005 that detects game balls that have entered the grand prize opening 2005, and a back unit 3000 shown in A detection signal from the attached magnetic detection sensor 4024 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet is sent to a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. It is input to the input terminal of the port.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca based on the detection signals from each of these switches. A control signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starting port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, the first special symbol display 1403 is transmitted via the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400. , outputs a drive signal to the second special symbol display 1405, the first special reservation number display 1404, the second special reservation number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the status display 1401, and the round display 1407. do.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (gaming information) related to the game from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with a reset function 1310ca, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit with a reset function 1310ca. By outputting various information related to games (gaming information) to the board 951 and outputting a signal (power outage clear signal) from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, A signal (power outage clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e.

Note that in this embodiment, non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used for the first starting port sensor 4002, second starting port sensor 4004, gate sensor 4003, and count sensor 4005; A contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch is used for the general winning a prize opening sensor 4020, 4020. This is because the game balls frequently enter the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and Detection of game balls by the gate sensor 4003 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with long lifespans are used for the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Further, when a jackpot game state advantageous to the player occurs, the big prize opening 2005 is opened and game balls frequently enter the ball, so that the count sensor 4005 frequently detects game balls. For this reason, a proximity switch with a long life is used for the count sensor 4005 as well. On the other hand, in the general winning holes 2001 and 2201 where game balls do not enter frequently, detection by the general winning hole sensors 4020 and 4020 does not occur frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter lifespan than a proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 4020, 4020.

The main control MPU 1310a also controls the payout from the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function by transmitting various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of its predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function. Various commands are sent to the board 951 as serial data. When the payout control board 951 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a signal to that effect (payer ACK signal) to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data at the main control input circuit 1310b, and inputs the input from the main control input circuit 1310b to its predetermined serial input port. The terminal receives various commands as serial data. When the main control MPU 1310a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal to that effect (main payout ACK signal) from the output terminal of its predetermined output port as a main control output with a reset function. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 951.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function from the output terminal of its predetermined serial output port. , various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

Here, the main serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is mainly configured with a main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to a main control built-in RAM, a main serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I/O ports, etc. connects a bus 1310ah. (See FIG. 79). The main serial transmission port 1310ae is for transmitting various commands as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510, and is mainly composed of a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management section 1310aec, etc. (Fig. 79). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets the command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. It is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea and starts to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data. In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. Main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to peripheral control board 1510 by setting a plurality of commands in transmission buffer register 1310aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to serial management section 1310aec.

Note that the power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") that serves as a backup power source to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. BC0 (see FIG. 75). This capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is generated by an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951, which will be described later, is operated within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on. is output from the payout control board 951 and input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and with this as a trigger, it is completely erased from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU 1310a. (cleared).

[7-2. Payout control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, a payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls, etc. includes a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout, and an operation switch 954 that also serves various functions, as shown in FIG. and an error LED display 860b that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the operation switch 954, which also functions as a RAM clear switch, detects the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") based on the detection signal output when operated. .) outputs a RAM clear signal to completely erase the information stored in the memory.

[7-2-1. Payout control section]
As shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payouts controls the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and also controls the payout of game media that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on. Detection from the payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM that stores various control programs including a payout control program that controls operations, a ROM that stores various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, and various detection switches related to payout. A payout control input circuit 952b into which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830. 952d, and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6. The payout control MPU 952a includes its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") and its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"). It also has a built-in watchdog timer to monitor its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program transmits various information regarding games (gaming information) and various commands regarding payouts from the main control board 1310 through the payout control input circuit 952b in a serial format as a main payout serial data reception signal. to receive serial data. In addition, the payout control program generates a frame status 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, and operates the operation switch 954 as an error release unit. Create a 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) based on the signal (detection signal), and send these error generation commands and error cancellation navigation commands to the payer as serial data. The signal is output as serial data to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port 952b (command transmitting means). In addition, this payout control program executes the payout control program after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main processing is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is executed and the payout control is started. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on a detection signal generated with the operation of the operation switch 954, and output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

In addition, this payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (main body frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, this dispensing control program also executes a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. At the same time, when a detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which detection signals from various detection switches are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, since the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals of the payout control input circuit 952b is not reset by the payout control system reset described later, the various signals based on the information are It is configured as a circuit that outputs from an output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type with an emitter terminal connected to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board, etc. are input to its various input terminals. A payout control output circuit with a reset function 952ca that has a reset function and is provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information that has been reset, and a payout control output circuit without a reset function 952cb that is not provided with a reset terminal and does not have a reset function. It consists of and. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit into which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. by the payout control system reset described later. The circuit is configured such that no signals based on the above are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured so that the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. is not reset by the payout control system reset described later. The circuit is configured such that signals based on the data are output from its various output terminals.

A ball outage detection sensor 827 that detects out of game balls in the supply path of the ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and a payout detection sensor 842 that detects game balls released from the payout ports 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. A detection signal from a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via a payout control input circuit 952b. Note that for the sake of explanation below, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will be simply referred to as rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

Furthermore, the detection signals from the door frame release switch 618 that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame release switch 619 that detects the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are sent to the dispensing control input circuit 952b. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control MPU 952a.

Further, a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor 279 that detects whether the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the board 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b in a serial data format at the input terminal of its serial input port, and receives operation signals (detected) from the operation switch 954. signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a signal to that effect (payer ACK signal) from the output terminal of its predetermined output port as a payout control output with a reset function. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the main control board 1310.

The payout control MPU 952a also controls payout control without a reset function by transmitting various commands for indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function from the output terminal of its serial output port. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it outputs a signal to that effect (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payout ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function from the output terminal of its predetermined output port. A drive signal is outputted from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, and a drive signal is outputted from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and the status of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the error LED indicator from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal for display on the error LED display 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the error LED display 860b.

The error LED display 860b is a segment display and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860b include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is reported that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is reported that there is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, the connection between the main control board 1310 and When the number "1" is displayed, it indicates that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it is notified that there are no game balls in the supply path of the dispensing device 830, and when the number "2" is displayed, it is notified that the ball is in play (specifically Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotating body and the game ball engage with each other near the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830, making it difficult for the payout rotating body to rotate. When the number “3” is displayed, it indicates a “dispensing detection sensor error” (specifically, a malfunction has occurred in the dispensing detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 842). When the number "5" is displayed, it indicates a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit). and when the number "6" is displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is filled based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279). When the number "7" is displayed, it indicates that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is made at any point from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6). When the number "9" is displayed, it indicates that the game ball is in stock (with prize ball stock (unpaid)) (specifically, game balls that have not yet been paid out). The number of pitches has reached a predetermined number).

Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of game balls actually paid out from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The number of game balls actually put out is output from the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various information regarding the game (gaming information) from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (constructed with built-in infrared LEDs and photo ICs), and is connected to the game hall (hall) via these plurality of photocouplers. ) The number of game balls, etc., and various information (game information, error details regarding the payout operation of game balls, or the fact that an error has occurred) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in the hall computer.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and if an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1, the hall computer The computer is designed not to malfunction or break down, and the pachinko machine 1 is connected to the main control board 1310 for playing the game and the payout control board 951 for controlling payouts etc. from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1. It is designed to prevent malfunctions or failures due to abnormal voltage being applied. The hall computer monitors the games of the players by grasping the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The game ball rental request signal from the ball rental button 328 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 329 are first sent to the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball rental device connection terminal board. The signal is input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, and this signal is transmitted to the CR unit. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input/output circuit 952e. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and sends a signal for displaying the remaining balance on the ball rental/return display section 330. The signal is output to the ball rental device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the ball rental and return display section 330. Further, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental/return display section 330 receives the voltage supplied from the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. ing.

Note that the power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 is equipped with a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power source for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. There is. This capacitor BC1 allows the payout control MPU 952a to store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) during power cutoff processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is such that when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from power-on, the operation signal is sent to a predetermined input of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. It is input to the input terminal of the input port, and the payout control MPU 952a determines it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and using this as a trigger, the payout control MPU 952a clears the information from the payout control built-in RAM. It is now completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function, and is also output from the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function to the main control board 1310.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the connection terminal board for rental equipment such as game balls]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control section 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be explained based on FIG. 71. As shown in FIG. 71, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 not only relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, but also connects the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. It also relays electrical connections between the boards of , the CR unit 6 and the connection terminal board 869 for rental equipment such as game balls are electrically connected, the terminal board 869 for rental equipment such as game balls etc. and the main door relay terminal board 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay terminal board 869 is electrically connected. The terminal plate 880 and the frequency display plate 365 are electrically connected). Between the board between the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, between the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control board 951, between the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay The terminal board 880 and the board, and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by respective wirings (harnesses). Further, AC 24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V")) from the supplied AC 24V using a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown) and outputs it together with the ground LG. , is supplied to the payout control board 951 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, and is supplied to the frequency display board 365 through the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. .

The frequency display board 365 has a ball rental button 328, which is a push button switch, mounted on its component surface at a position corresponding to the ball rental button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the ball rental unit 360. A return button 329 is mounted, and a ball rental/return display section 330, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining rental display section 363 of the ball rental unit 360.

The ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via a game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and a main door relay terminal board 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is turned on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game player. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the switch of the return button 329 is turned on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device. The signal is input to the CR unit 6 via a terminal board 869.

The ball rental/return display section 330 has three segment displays arranged in a row, and uses a so-called dynamic lighting method in which each one of these three-digit segment displays is sequentially driven. The lighting of the digit segment display is controlled. Through such lighting control, the ball rental/return display section 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The ball rental and return display unit 330 receives digit signals DG0 to DG2 (total of 3 signals) for specifying a 1-digit segment display among the 3-digit segment display, and the specified 1-digit segment display. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (total of 7 signals) for specifying the content to be displayed by lighting are connected from the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal. When input through the board 880, the one-digit segment display sequentially lights up according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these three-digit segment display The content of the light emitted from the device can be visually confirmed through the lending remaining display section 363.

Note that a CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the ball rental/return display section 330. A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input to this CR unit lamp 365d via a game ball etc. rental device connection terminal board 869 and a main door relay terminal board 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball rental available signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on a terminal board 869 for connecting a game ball rental device via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 931 using a built-in voltage generation circuit, and when the ball rental button 328 and return button 329 are enabled and the ball rental is possible. controls the logic of the ball rental available signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the rental remaining display section 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball rental/return display section 330 through a current limiting resistor mounted on a terminal board 869 for connecting a game ball rental device.

In the CR unit 6, when the ball rental button 328 is pressed, the ball rental operation signal TDS from the ball rental button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display board 365 to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. When input, the ball rental request signal BRDY is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 sends a single payout operation start request signal to payout a predetermined number of rental balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which corresponds to an amount of 100 yen) in one payout operation. BRQ is outputted to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying the start or end of one payout operation, to the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869. PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 and informing that the payout operation for paying out rented balls is possible or impossible, is sent to the connection terminal board for the rental device such as game balls. 869, and output to the CR unit 6. Note that, for example, if the hall clerk or the like has set the CR unit 6 in advance so that when the ball rental button 328 is pressed, game balls worth 200 yen are paid out, one payout operation is performed. This is done twice in a row, and once 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out, for a total of 50 balls worth 200 yen. Become.

In the CR unit 6, when the return button 329 is pressed, a return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is inputted from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores a remaining amount after subtracting an amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328.

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, the power supply board 931 of the first control unit MCG will be briefly explained. The power supply board 931 includes a power switch 934 that can electrically connect or disconnect 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment, and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power supplies. , a firing control section 953 that performs firing control using the firing solenoid 682 of the batted ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feeding control using the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG. 1.

[7-3-1. Power control section]
The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectifier circuit 935a that rectifies 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment when the power switch 934 is operated, and improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a. A power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c that smoothes the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and various direct currents for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various boards. A power generation circuit 935d that generates a power source is provided.

[7-3-2. Launch control section]
The firing control section 953, which performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255, mainly includes a firing control circuit 953a. The firing control circuit 953a receives an operation signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (launching strength) of firing a game ball toward the gaming area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 302, and receives an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, A detection signal from a handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not a finger is touching the button, and a single button operation sensor 312 that detects whether or not the launch (launch) of a game ball is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. The detection signal from the handlebar relay terminal board 315 is inputted via the handle relay terminal board 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, a CR connection signal is input to the firing control circuit 953a via the payout control board 951. .

The firing control circuit 953a controls to adjust the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the gaming area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 and output it to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320, The game ball received by the ball sending member is controlled to be sent to the ball launching device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
For such first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. A peripheral control unit 1511 that exchanges control commands and various information (various data) with an effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in 19, a game board side effect display device 1600, and the door. A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the frame-side effect display device 460 and controls sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and calendar information specifying the year, month, day, and time. Rotate the knob to control the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds time information that specifies seconds, and the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573. A volume adjustment volume 1510a that can be adjusted by operation is provided.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control section]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs production control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and also controls the process that is executed after a predetermined period of time has passed since the power is turned on. A peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and control performance operations, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control section 1512, which will be described later. Various information that continues beyond the peripheral control unit steady processing that is executed every time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data that defines the screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, light emission modes of various LEDs, etc.) peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information for managing schedule data that defines A peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores peripheral control SRAM 1511d (information for managing production flags, etc.) and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 1511e") that monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally. ).

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can only retain the stored contents long enough for the power to be immediately restored after an instantaneous power outage, and can only be stored in a state where the power is cut off for a long time (in the event of a long power outage) ), the contents are lost, whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as "SRAM electrolytic capacitor") provided on the power supply board 931 (not shown). By doing so, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. By providing an SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is no longer supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. It can no longer be held and loses its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control, and when this timer times out, it is reset by hardware. In other words, if the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer times up) to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period of time, it can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so that no reset is required.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has multiple built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, it controls each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands. Game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs etc. provided on the lamp is sent from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data is sent to the drive board 4170 and is used to output drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. Door side motor drive for transmitting a drive signal from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit or outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 Data is sent from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and peripheral door relay terminal board 882, Peripheral control output of door side light emission data from the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs etc. provided on each decorative board in 3. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch provided in the production operation unit 400 for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation section 401 and a detection signal from a press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation section 405 is transmitted. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and this serialized production operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit to the serial I/O port for detecting the production operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors, etc.) for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. The serialized movable object detection data is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and is input from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in peripheral control"), and uses the built-in peripheral control WDT and the external peripheral control WDT 1511e together to prevent its own system from going out of control. We are diagnosing whether or not it is.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be explained. As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (direct memory access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serial I. /O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A/D converter) 1511ak, etc.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data to and from the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while also reading and writing various data from the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, Various data are read and written to and from peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via internal bus 1511ah, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai.

Additionally, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data into the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading various data into the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, and peripheral control various parallel I/O ports. It is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between input/output devices such as the /O port 1511ag and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. ~It has four channels called DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab storage device built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, and peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. , peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices to perform data transfer independently without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. While reading and writing to the storage device of the RAM 1511ab with built-in peripheral control via the internal bus 1511ah, various serial I/O ports 1511ae for peripheral control, WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I/O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and It reads from and writes to input/output devices such as the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac also includes storage devices such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which are externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and peripheral control various serial I/Os built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. O port 1511ae, WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and input/output devices such as peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, without going through peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In order to transfer data independently, data is read and written to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h. For input/output devices such as serial I/O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, via peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai. Read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the external bus 1511h, and controls the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control Various devices including storage devices such as SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converters 1511ak and other input/output devices. This is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between the two.

The various peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae include a serial I/O port for a lamp drive board, a serial I/O port for a motor drive board, a serial I/O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, and a frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. A serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I/O port for the main control board, and a serial I/O port for obtaining information on the production operation unit.

The watchdog timer with built-in peripheral control (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control, and when this timer times out, it resets the hardware. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer, if it does not output a clear signal to clear the timer within a certain period of time (until the timer times up) to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa resets the watchdog timer. It will take a while. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so that no reset is required.

The peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag not only output various latch signals such as the game board side motor drive latch signal and the door side motor drive light emitting latch signal, but also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a serial transmission circuit on the game board (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and the serial It outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. This LED is a high-intensity white LED, and serves as a confirmation lamp to notify that the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state has been confirmed. In this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LEDs and the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag are directly electrically connected, the path between the LEDs and the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures regarding the lighting control of LEDs, which is important in terms of gaming. Note that the lighting control of the LED is executed in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later, and other LEDs other than this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024-level value is divided into seven parts and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. At board volume 0, the volume is set to mute, and at board volume 6, the volume is set to maximum, and the volume is set so that it increases from board volume 0 to board volume 6. Music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source to be described later) so that the volume is set at the board volume 0 to 6. In this way, music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the knob.

In this embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds are used to notify the hall staff of malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1, as well as content related to game production. (For example, to make the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 more impressive, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility that the game will shift to an advantageous game state.) The notification sound is also played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the system is such that the notification sound and notification sound are played completely independently of the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, and the sound can be adjusted from mute to maximum volume. The volume can be adjusted by controlling a liquid crystal display control section 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source to be described later) using a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned board volume which is divided into seven levels, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume.
As a result, even if, for example, a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 can be reproduced. Although the sound is low, the notification sound set at a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when a player is committing a fraudulent act. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for the hall staff etc. to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the fraudulent activity of a player. In addition, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be lowered so that it does not interfere with the music or sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the volume of the playback may be increased to make the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 more powerful, and there is a possibility of shifting to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. You can also announce things that are expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control section 1511, the liquid crystal display control section 1512, the RTC control section 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data that generates screens to be drawn on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data that generates the light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. There are sound generation schedule data for generating sounds and sound effects, and electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. has been done. The schedule data for generating a light emission mode is configured by chronologically arranging light emission data that defines the light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels of the built-in sound source of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later, and the output channel number of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. A track number is defined for instructing which track among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source is to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, and defines the operation of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Note that some of the various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, while others are copied to the various control program copy area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which will be described later, when the power is turned on, etc. There are some that are read out and executed. Also, some of the various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, while others are stored in various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c (described later) when the power is turned on. There are some items that are copied and read out.

In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511b contains, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, a program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. Includes brightness correction program. This brightness correction program is for correcting the decrease in brightness of the game board side performance display device 1600 due to aging when the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is of an LED type. , acquires the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on, the current date and time, brightness setting information, etc. from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and uses the acquired brightness setting information based on the correction information. Correct it. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in a range from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and the current brightness. It includes the set brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, and, for example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on, and the current date and time. Therefore, if six months have already passed since the power was first turned on to the game board side effect display device 1600, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness is When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75%, the brightness is set to 80% by adding 5%, which is the acquired correction information, to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the backlight is turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the game board side effect display device When turning on the backlight of 1600, the game board is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 85%, which is 10%, which is the acquired correction information, added to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup memory that specifically stores information to be backed up among various types of information updated by executing various control programs. A managed work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc that exclusively store copies of various information stored in this backup managed work area 1511ca, and peripheral control ROM 1511b. The various control program copy area 1511cd exclusively stores copies of the various control programs stored in the program, and the various data, control data, schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. A various control data copy area 1511ce that is exclusively stored, and a backup unmanaged work area 1511cf that exclusively stores various information that is updated by executing various control programs but is not subject to backup. is provided.

Note that when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (including when the power is restored due to an instantaneous power outage or power outage), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and cleared to zero. Regarding the managed work area 1511ca, backup first area 1511cb, and backup second area 1511cc, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the power-on status command from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 89) starts the RAM clear effect. and the game state (for example, it instructs the start of the performance when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca contains performance information (1fr ) is stored exclusively as a backup target, and the effect information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later, is backed up. Bank 0 (1 ms) is stored exclusively as a target. Here, to briefly explain the names Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is the minimum management unit that represents the size of the storage area for storing various information. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information that is updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511cb to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as "Bank0". It means that it has a size. "(1fr)" means that when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a Since a V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which indicates that it is ready to accept screen data from Since the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each time, "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" are respectively appended (direction information (1fr) and the performance described below). The same meaning is used for backup information (1fr). "(1ms)" means "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3" because the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, as described later. and "Bank4" (the same meaning is used for presentation information (1 ms) and presentation backup information (1 ms), which will be described later).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. etc. are provided. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa contains game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. is a storage area where is set, and the LED transmission data storage area 1511cab on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side contains lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs etc. provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3. This is a storage area where the door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting signals is set, and the received command storage area 1511cac receives various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 and stores the various received commands. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a described later) is set, and the schedule data storage area 1511cae is is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce are read out and set, while various schedule data are directly read out from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. There are some that are set.

Bank0 (1ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, a performance operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf contains door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag contains data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. This is a storage area in which the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is a storage area where the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. This is a storage area in which various information acquired such as the original position and movable position of various movable bodies is set, and the performance operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai stores detection signals from various detection switches provided in the performance operation unit 400. Various information obtained based on the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the press operation unit 405 (for example, a dial created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the production operation unit 400) This is a storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the operation unit 401, operation history information of the press operation unit 405, etc.) is set, and the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak is a storage area in which information about the rotation (rotation direction) of the operation unit 401 and operation history information of the press operation unit 405 is set. When the control board 1510 receives the drawing data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 output the LOCKN signal to notify that fact. This is a storage area in which various information obtained about the frequency of malfunctions and the state of occurrence of malfunctions during connection with the effect display driving board 4450 is set.

Note that the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of Bank0 (1fr), the LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, and the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor of Bank0 (1ms). and the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag are each divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit steady processing described later is executed, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. , when the next peripheral control unit steady state processing is executed, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, and the peripheral control unit steady state processing is performed. Every time the process is executed, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and for example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, the previous peripheral When the control unit steady processing is executed, the processing is proceeded based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab stores the door side light emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. - When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the LED transmission data storage area 1511cab on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side. Each time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set alternately in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Ru. When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed and, for example, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, Processing is now performed based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the LED transmission data storage area 1511cab on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side when the previous peripheral control unit steady process was executed. It has become.

When the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf executes the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later, the door When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. - DAT is set, and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side is set in the first area and second area of the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side. Motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, and for example, in the current peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT that was set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing was executed. Based on this, the process proceeds.

In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. When the next peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, and for example, in the current peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Sometimes, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag when the previous peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process was executed. It looks like this.

Next, a description will be given of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, which exclusively store copies of production information, which are various types of information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs of two banks are managed as one page. The production information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored as production backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). , the production information (1ms) is copied at high speed to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and is stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area. is, as production backup information (1ms), sent by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Copied quickly. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511cb, a total of two pairs are managed as one page, with Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is copied every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. The page is copied at high speed to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is done depending on whether the contents of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) match.

In addition, in the backup second area 1511cc, a total of two pairs are managed as one page, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is copied every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by checking whether the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is done depending on whether the contents of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb has a total of two pairs, Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area to be managed as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of two pairs: Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in the peripheral control unit every frame (1 frame) as effect backup information (1fr). Every time regular processing is executed, the content is copied at high speed to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and is stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area. The performance information (1ms) is stored as the performance backup information (1ms) in the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac performs high-speed copying, but the program for executing high-speed copying by these peripheral control DMA controllers 1511ac is shared. That is, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr) and the performance information (1ms) are managed using a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores backup target among various information updated by executing various control programs; A first backup area 1511db and a second backup area 1511dc are provided to exclusively store copies of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are the power-on state commands from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 89) when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (including when power is restored due to instantaneous power failure or power outage). is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state (for example, for instructing the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on). ), it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the above-described point in which the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Furthermore, if the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. It is now possible to do so. By operating the dial operation section 401 and press operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of occurrence of jackpot game state) ), while the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. In this respect as well, the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are completely different.

The backup management target work area 1511da stores performance information (SRAM), which is various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of jackpot gaming states and information for managing special performance flags). It consists of Bank 0 (SRAM) that exclusively stores information (information, etc.) as a backup target. Here, to briefly explain the name Bank0 (SRAM), as mentioned above, "Bank" is the minimum management unit that represents the size of the storage area for storing various information. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information that is updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as "Bank0". It means that it has a size. "(SRAM)" is "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3" because various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is backed up. , and "Bank4" (the same meaning is used for performance information (SRAM) and performance backup information (SRAM) to be described later).

Next, a description will be given of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, which exclusively store copies of production information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc are managed with two banks as one pair, and each pair as one page. Performance information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, is stored as performance backup information (SRAM) every time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame. Then, it is copied at high speed to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511db, one pair includes Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM), and one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame. The page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

Further, in the backup second area 1511dc, one pair includes Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM), and one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame. The page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by checking whether the contents of Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this pair as one page, and the backup second area 1511db is an area for managing this pair as one page. 1511dc is an area where Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) form a pair, and this pair is managed as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. LCD display control section]
A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawings of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and controls the sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is shown in FIG. As such, a sound source for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects is built-in (hereinafter referred to as "built-in sound source"), and the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is A VDP (Video Display Processor) 1512a with a built-in sound source that performs control, various character data on the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, as well as various types of music, sound effects, etc. A liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b that stores sound data, an audio data transmission IC 1512c that transmits serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the door frame side effect display device 460. The serialized drawing data is sent to the effect display drive board 4450 which is placed near the bottom of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320. A differential circuit 1512e that differentiates LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, into a positive signal and a negative signal. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side production transmitter IC 1512d, a signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, and when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is input. A forced switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the signal, and when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d; It is equipped with This liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b contains, for example, annular image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (ring-shaped display object), and sprite data used for displaying screens and images, which will be described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selected display object image data to be used for displaying at least one selected display object to be described later, tone adjustment background image data to be used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale to be described later, and volume adjustment icon data to be described later. In addition to the volume setting icon image data used for display, the main body frame back image data used to display the main body frame back image that allows the position of each part on the back of the main body frame 4 to be visible from the player's perspective, and the display of the service mode screen. Service mode screen image data used for displaying the break timer setting screen, break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the break timer setting screen, and break screen image data used for displaying the break screen are stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used to display a suggestion display object for prompting the user to operate the press operation section 405 (operation section) of the performance operation unit 400.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the first screen data of the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various types of peripheral control RAM 1511c. After extracting it from the control data copy area 1511ce and outputting it to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, when a V blank signal, which will be described later, is input, the first screen data is copied according to the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next screen data following is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, updates the screen data arranged in chronological order in the screen generation schedule data every time the V blank signal is input. Then, the first screen data is output one by one to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source.

Additionally, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The sound command data at the beginning of the schedule data for sound generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is extracted and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the surroundings. After extracting various control data from the copy area 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the input of the V blank signal triggers the start of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and receives the V blank signal. Each time, the sound command data is output one by one to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a starting from the first sound command data.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
In addition to the built-in sound source described above, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source receives screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and based on this input screen data, as shown in FIG. Extract side character data and upper plate side character data to create sprite data and generate drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460 It also has a built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM") for this purpose. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and also outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 to the door frame side effect display device 460. The drawing data is sent from channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from channel CH2 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay. The terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display that is placed near the bottom of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450. As described above, the drawing data output from channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for the path from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short because they are respectively attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from channel CH2 is The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because it is output from the control board 1510 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, so that it can be connected from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of the wiring required for the route is much longer than that for channel CH1, it becomes extremely susceptible to the influence of noise. Therefore, for channel CH2, where the length of the wiring for transmitting drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d uses THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One ( By adopting a differential communication method called "Registered Trademark", the system is not easily affected by noise.

Channel CH1 uses a serial differential interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), while channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from channel CH2 is composed of three video signals: a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals: a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side production transmitter IC4610d, and is stored in the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the pan unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display driving board 4450. The various serialized signals are then restored to parallel signals by the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs one screen worth of screen data (one frame worth) to be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Based on this input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data for one screen (1 of the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1. Image data for the effect display device 460 is transmitted from the channel CH2 to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and a effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. In other words, "screen data for one screen (one frame)" means that drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is stored in the built-in VRAM. This refers to the data to be generated above.

In addition, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and also outputs image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Transmission) Then, a V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps, so a V blank signal is output. The interval is approximately 33.3ms (=1000ms÷30fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to execute peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, in response to input of this V blank signal. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Furthermore, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary somewhat depending on the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 in which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the VDP with built-in sound source 1512a are mounted.

Note that the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source employs a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer method" means that drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). This is a method in which drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460.

Furthermore, when the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from the main control board 1310, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source outputs the music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as music and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data such as music and sound effects is incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and is used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is installed, and multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source have production sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sub-volume value that adjusts the sound data and its volume, the sound data and volume of the notification sound that is used to notify the hall staff, etc. of the occurrence of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 can be adjusted. Includes subvolume values. Specifically, for the performance sound, the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotating operation of the knob of the volume 1510a.
The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating a dial operation section 401 or a press operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to shift to a setting mode to be described later.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is In fact, it is amplified to the master volume value that corresponds to the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and this amplified performance sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized performance sound is at the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value and is output from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the production sound, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used among multiple tracks, and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used. The board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the set volume adjustment volume 1510a is synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized performance sound is adjusted to the volume actually flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. This amplified performance sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, and for the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, A maximum volume that is completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the rotating operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, which is set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, is synthesized, The volume of this synthesized notification sound is actually amplified to the master volume value that corresponds to the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and this amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. .

Here, we will briefly explain the control for playing a notification sound in order to notify the hall clerk of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 when the production sound is being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. To explain, first, the subvolume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound data of the track in which this production sound is incorporated, the subvolume value set for muting, and the notification The sound data of the track in which the sound is embedded and the sub-volume value where the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized performance sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually set at the bottom. It is amplified to a master volume value that corresponds to the sound volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified performance sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In other words, only the maximum volume notification sound is actually heard from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, it does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound is progressing according to the above-described sound generation schedule data. In this embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and after this predetermined period has elapsed, the sound that has been forcibly set to mute is generated. The volume of the production sound that is progressing according to the production schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a (at this time, the volume of the production sound is adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a). If the adjustment is made by switching to the setting mode by operating the operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set), and the sound is output from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It's flowing.

In this way, when the production sound is being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when a notification sound is played to notify the hall clerk of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1, Although the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound that has been muted is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data, so the notification sound continues after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. When the sound stops flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound does not start playing again from the point where the notification sound started, but continues according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the notification sound started playing. The flow will start again from where it left off.

[7-4-2b. LCD and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b stores game board side character data for drawing on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and data for drawing on the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. The upper plate side character data are stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and announcement sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, it outputs the audio data on the right side as serial data using a differential method in which the right side audio data is used as a plus signal and a minus signal. It is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and is also sent to the peripheral control output circuit (not shown) as differential serial data that makes the left audio data a plus signal and a minus signal. , the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. As a result, music, sound effects, etc. matching various performances are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

Note that the audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data between the boards from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data for the left and right sides, so that, for example, the plus signal of the left audio data, Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 into one left audio data, Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Transmitter IC for door frame side production]
As shown in FIG. 74, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d receives drawing data output from channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data consists of three video signals: a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals: a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. , a green video signal, and a blue video signal each consist of 8 bits, a total of 24 bits. In this embodiment, the red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, 18 bits in total, so the upper 6 bits of each video signal are the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since the lower two bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, the lower two bits containing weak color information are invalidated even though they are output from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source.

Three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, which are drawing data output from channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. When , is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d sends three video signals: a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization signal. The three synchronizing signals, the signal and the clock signal, are serialized into serial signals (serial data) using a differential method called THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One (registered trademark)" and can be transmitted using only one differential pair cable. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the pan unit 320 of the door frame 3.

As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so the path from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is Although the length of the wiring required for (the first route) is short, the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is transferred from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (the Since the length of the wiring required for the second route is much longer than the length of the wiring required for the first route, the second route becomes extremely susceptible to the influence of noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported on the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. On the closed side, for example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the tray unit 320 provided in the door frame 3, etc., on the main body frame 4 side. It is necessary to run various wirings that electrically connect the various boards provided and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the dispensing device 830, the game balls put out by the dispensing device 830 can be guided to the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320. A full tank branching unit 770 is arranged which can branch and guide the put out game balls to the lower tray 322 side when the tank is full.
Moreover, on the lower side of the main body frame 4, a payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5 is disposed, which is a unit made up of a power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 6 and the like that are supplied with power from the pachinko island equipment. In this way, the various wirings that electrically connect the various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are routed near the dispensing device 830, the full tank branch unit 770, the power supply board 931, etc. In addition to the noise caused by the drive of the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game balls and the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. is in an environment where it is subject to noise, etc.

Therefore, for channel CH2, where the length of the wiring for transmitting drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a By adopting a differential communication system called ``V-by-One (registered trademark)'', the system is not easily affected by noise. In this embodiment, a transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effects provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and a receiver ICSDIC0 for door frame side effects (described later) provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, As mentioned above, a differential 1-pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting the transmitter and the receiver, but this differential 1-pair cable consists of two wires. are not just parallel lines, but twisted pair cables. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case will be briefly described in which a parallel wire is used as a differential one-pair cable that electrically connects a transmitter and a receiver. For channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, where the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is much longer than that of channel CH1 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, THine Electronics has developed a transmitter IC1512d for the door frame side performance provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Even if a differential communication system called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by Co., Ltd. is used to make it less susceptible to noise, this kind of hardware configuration alone is not enough to prevent electrostatic discharge from the game balls. When the serial data on the parallel lines is affected by noise or noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, a performance display is stored in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the drive board 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in an affected state. , the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a disordered data that is different from the normal one, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, it is displayed as a so-called sandstorm. There is a problem in that a certain image is displayed and it becomes impossible to recognize what the image is.

Therefore, in this embodiment, for channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the side of the door frame provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is The production transmitter IC1512d uses a differential communication method called ``V-by-One (registered trademark)'' by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. to create a mechanism that is less susceptible to the effects of noise, and in addition to this hardware configuration. Therefore, even if differential serial data is affected by noise that has entered the wiring, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) that noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and receiver. Adopted as a differential 1-pair cable. As a result, even if the serial data in the twisted pair cable is affected by noise caused by electrostatic discharge from game balls, noise intruding into the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of No. 3, the channel of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. By doing so, the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control section 1512 can be reliably displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. By canceling (removing) noise, it is possible to prevent an image such as a sandstorm from being displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 in which it is impossible to recognize the image at all. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play due to the influence of noise.

In addition, in this embodiment, a transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effects provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a receiver ICSDIC0 for door frame side effects, which will be described later, provided in an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. A frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed between the connections between and, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not constructed integrally, but are assembled separately, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 4, electrically connect various wiring such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. This makes it possible to electrically connect various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and various boards provided on the door frame 3 side. With this configuration, maintenance of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be performed by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4 after opening the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4 and removing various wirings. If the defect that occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, replace the defective door frame 3 with another door frame 3' to the main frame 4, and replace the door frame 3 with another door frame 3'. By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various wirings from various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and various wirings provided on the door frame 3' side can be connected electrically. The substrate can be electrically connected to the substrate.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, the door frame side presentation transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 employs a differential type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to this hardware configuration, even if serial data using the differential method is affected by noise that has entered the wiring, the receiving side can cancel (remove) that noise. ) was adopted as a differential 1-pair cable to electrically connect the transmitter and receiver. Specifically, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the effect display drive. The substrates 4450 and 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, whereas the power wiring and wiring for transmitting various other signals are electrically connected by harnesses. As a result, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 have, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. A power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed together. For this reason, the above-mentioned video transmission wiring patterns are formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 at a predetermined distance from the power supply wiring pattern and the various signal wiring patterns. The route from the transmitter to the receiver traverses multiple relay terminal boards, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, so the video transmission terminals formed on these multiple relay terminal boards are Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal that transmits differential serial data transmitted by the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal decreases. occurs. Therefore, in this embodiment, the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these plurality of relay terminal boards are subjected to impedance matching.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the boards between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay The terminal board 882 and the production display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, whereas the power supply wiring and wiring for transmitting various other signals are electrically connected by harnesses. However, one wire of the twisted pair cable is red and the other wire is gray, and the wire that supplies power is red and several other wires of the harness are gray. . Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side production transmitter IC 1512d is sent to the forced switching circuit 1512f, a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is configured to be transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 that is housed. This forced switching circuit 1512f receives LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. is input into a differential circuit 1512e after being differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal. This differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential type serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data includes the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, and the period during which the game board side performance display device 1600 displays a demonstration while waiting for a customer. During the period, a transmitter IC 1512d for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a receiver ICSDIC0 for the door frame side effect provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, which will be described later, are installed. , that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuit so as to transmit these two signals. The circuit is configured such that the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input to the conversion circuit 1512e. has been done. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are , is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, while in the differential circuit 1512e. When the two differential signals of the positive signal and the negative signal are not input, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, so the door frame side effect transmitter A signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the pan unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a displays a startup screen on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, and performs a demonstration using the game board side performance display device 1600 while waiting for a customer. During the period, LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3.

When the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives a serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which will be described later, the effect display drive board 4450 displays various serialized signals. It mainly consists of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores the signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460.

The door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 receives the drawing data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and if it determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it sends a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , and is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source to generate an image to convey that fact and outputs it to the game board side performance display device 1600. The information is displayed on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and notified.

Furthermore, when the door frame side production receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal, which will be described later, is sent to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input to the tray unit of the door frame 3. On the other hand, if the LOCKN signal is not input, it can be determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, ``A malfunction has occurred in the effect display device on the door frame side. Please call the store staff.") is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 by controlling the built-in sound source VDP 1512a, and a notification sound to that effect (for example, ``There is a problem with the door frame side effect display device.'' ”) is outputted to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, thereby producing a notification sound from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. As a result, notification can be made using the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker etc. provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the light-emitting decorative LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control section]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured with an RTC 4165a as its center. This RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa (hereinafter referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa") that holds calendar information and time information. The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. In other words, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (Pachinko machine 1), but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently from the peripheral control board 1510 (Pachinko machine 1). Thereby, even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and maintain calendar information and time information by supplying power from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and uses the acquired calendar information and time information. Based on this, the effects can be played out on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Examples of such effects include, for example, if it is December 25th, a Christmas tree or reindeer screen will be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, or if it is New Year's Eve, a new year countdown will be displayed. For example, the screen to be executed may be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

In addition, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information if the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of an LED type. There is. If the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of an LED type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600, in a range from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and the currently set game. It includes the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

Additionally, in addition to calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information as information on the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second when it was first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date and time information is also stored.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls ON/OFF or only ON of the backlight when cold cathode tube type backlights are installed in the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. It is supposed to be done.

Various information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information, is set on the production line of the gaming machine manufacturer. On the manufacturing line, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, input date and time information is inputted on the manufacturing line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on. The manufacturing date and time are set as month, day, hour, minute and second.

In this way, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores, in addition to calendar information and time information, brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type, input date and time information, etc. , it is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a jackpot game state with a low probability or a high probability).

Also, depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the brightness setting information etc. stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the manufacturing date and time. , it may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to a setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, if you operate the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 during the period when the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state and a demonstration is being performed, the setting mode will be activated. The screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. By operating the dial operation section 401 and press operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, calendar information and time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side production display device 1600 can be set as desired. You can adjust the brightness to The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

In addition, in the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-mentioned brightness correction program, so that when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type, the game board side effect is adjusted. A decrease in brightness due to aging of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on, and inputs calendar information and time specifying the year, month, and day. The current date and time is determined by acquiring time information that specifies minutes and seconds, and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted in 5% increments from 100% to 70%. The brightness setting information including the brightness adjustment information for the game board and the currently set brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is acquired. This acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, if six months have already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on and the current date and time, In addition to acquiring the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% that is the correction information obtained for the brightness. If 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. , when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 85%, which is 10%, which is the acquired correction information, added to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is the same.

Note that the current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or by using the peripheral information described later. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on process The current date and time may be specified by acquiring the current time information set in the time information storage section and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510.

[834. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a has a resistance value that can be varied by rotating the knob, and the electrically connected peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak adjusts the knob. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, as described above, the 1024-level value is divided into seven parts and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. At board volume 0, the sound is muted, and at board volume 6, the volume is set to maximum, and the volume is set so that it increases from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In this way, music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the knob. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds to notify the hall staff of the occurrence of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity with respect to the pachinko machine 1, and game effects. (For example, to make the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 more impressive, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility that the game will shift to an advantageous gaming state.) etc.) is also played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573, but the system is such that the notification sound and announcement sound are played completely independently of the volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob, and are muted. It is possible to adjust the volume from the maximum volume to the maximum volume by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) using a program.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned board volume which is divided into seven levels, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, even if, for example, a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 can be reproduced. Although the sound is low, the notification sound set at a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when a player is committing a fraudulent act. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for the hall staff etc. to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the fraudulent activity of a player.

In addition, based on the current board volume that is set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be lowered so that it does not interfere with the music or sound effects, while the advertising sound In addition to the music and sound effects, the volume of the playback can be increased to make the screens displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 more powerful, or to provide an advantageous effect for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a gaming state.

In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation section 401 of the production operation unit 400 and By operating the press operation unit 405, the user can enter a setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, if you operate the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 during the period when the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state and a demonstration is being performed, the setting mode will be activated. The screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation section 401 and press operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 according to this setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and applies the voltage to this converted value. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400, the value of the board volume can be increased or decreased. There is. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which sound data of production sounds such as music and sound effects is incorporated, among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. However, it is not reflected in the volume adjustment of the above-mentioned notification sound or notification sound.

As described above, in this embodiment, the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation section 401 of the production operation unit 400 or the press operation section 405 There are two ways to adjust the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation. Since the volume adjustment volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to keep the main body frame 4 open from the outer frame 2. In this case, the person who can rotate the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is the clerk at the hall. However, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk may feel too low for the player, making it difficult to hear the music or sound effects, or may feel too loud for the player, making the music or sound effects too loud. Therefore, after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, within a predetermined period of time, the dial operation section 401 and the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 may be operated, or the demonstration using the game board side performance display device 1600 may be performed while waiting for a customer. If you operate the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 during the period in which the game is being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, By operating the dial operation section 401 and press operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 according to this setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. This allows the player to adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume, so if the player feels that the volume adjusted by the hall clerk is too low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effects, the player can use the production operation unit 400 You can increase the volume to a desired level by operating the dial operation unit 401 or press operation unit 405. If you feel that the volume adjusted by the hall staff is too loud and the music or sound effects are too loud, you can use the production operation unit The volume can be lowered to a desired level by operating the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of 400.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the pachinko machine 1 continues to be in a state where no games are played for a predetermined period of time, enters a customer waiting state, and the demonstration by the game board side performance display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). , the volume adjusted last time by the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 while playing the game is canceled and the volume is initialized. In this initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. As a result, if a player who played the game while sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the adjusted volume is too low and has difficulty hearing the music and sound effects, the player who played the game while sitting in the front of the pachinko machine 1 this time A player who plays a game can increase the volume to a desired level by operating the dial operation section 401 or press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400. If a player who has been playing the game while sitting at the front of the pachinko machine 1 feels that the adjusted volume is too loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the player who plays the game while seated at the front of the pachinko machine The volume can be lowered to a desired level by operating the press operation section 405.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 75. First, the power supply board 931 will be explained, and then the power supplied to each control board and the like will be explained. Note that the ground (GND) of the various boards and the ground (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 931, and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power supply board 931 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into a power outlet of the pachinko island equipment. When the power switch 934 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied to the power supply board 931, and the pachinko machine 1 can be powered on.

The power supply board 931 includes a power supply control section 935 and a firing control section 953, as shown in FIG. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from 24 volts (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment, supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, and performs firing control. The section 953 is a circuit that drives and controls the firing solenoid 682 of the batted ball firing device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

The power supply control section 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power supply generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied via the power supply board 931 to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. This synchronous rectifier circuit 935a rectifies 24 volts of alternating current (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 935b. This power factor improvement circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power, creates +37V DC (hereinafter referred to as "+37V"), and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. This smoothing circuit 935c removes the ripple of the supplied +37V, smoothes the +37V, and supplies the smoothed +37V to the firing control circuit 953a and the power generation circuit 935d of the firing control section 953, respectively.

The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. It supplies backup power to the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

The firing control circuit 953a of the firing control unit 953 uses +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a driving power source to drive the game ball to the game area 5a shown in FIG. Control is performed to adjust the driving current for launching (shooting) the ball to the firing solenoid 682, while outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250. The sending member receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320, and controls the ball sending member to send the received game ball to the batted ball firing device 650 side.

The power generation circuit 935d generates DC +5V (DC+5V, hereinafter referred to as "+5V"), DC +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V"), and DC from +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c. +24V (DC +24V, hereinafter referred to as "+24V") is generated and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power supply system to which +5V is applied and supplied is a +5V power supply line, the power supply system to which +12V is applied and supplied is a +12V power supply line, and the power supply system to which +24V is applied and supplied is a +24V power supply line.

+5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951, as will be described later. The +5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The +12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. This +5V generation circuit 1310g generates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from +12V from the payout control board 951. The +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 on the power supply board 931 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control on the payout control board 951, and It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951. In other words, the +5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and also connects the power supply terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM in the forward direction through the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1. Current flows towards the positive terminal. In this way, the capacitor BC1 receives +5V by an electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is transferred to the payout control board 951 and then returned from the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when the +5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 to the power terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, the memory contents are retained by supplying payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. In other words, the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode MD0 and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0. Current is flowing towards it. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is supplied with +5V and charged by the electrical connection method in which +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. It is now possible to do so. As a result, the +12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the +5V generation circuit 1310g is no longer able to generate +5V. When it runs out, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, so a diode is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the current is blocked by MD0 and does not flow, and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power terminal of the main control built-in RAM, so that the stored contents are retained. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the main control built-in RAM is constituted by the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline of the voltages supplied to each control board etc. will be explained, and then the voltages mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltages supplied to the main control board will be explained.

Three types of voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V created by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931, are supplied to the payout control board 951 as shown in FIG. Two types of voltages, +24V, are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Furthermore, three types of voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and are also supplied to the peripheral area via this frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

Three types of voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510, are supplied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180, as shown in FIG. 76(a). 4180a, respectively. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as lighting signals, flashing signals, and gradation lighting signals to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 outputs various signals such as lighting signals, flashing signals, and gradation lighting signals to various decorative boards of the game board 5. A drive signal is output to an electrical drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the panel 5.

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a +3.3V generation circuit 1510b that generates 3.3V DC (+3.3V DC, hereinafter referred to as "+3.3V") from +5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. ing. The +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600. Further, +12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, the three types of voltages +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, as shown in FIG. 76(b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a +9V generation circuit 194a that generates +9V DC (hereinafter referred to as "+9V") from +12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. In addition to the +9V generated by the +9V generation circuit 194a, a total of four types of voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to various decorative boards of the door frame 3.

Further, +12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x generates +3.3V from +12V. The +3.3V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to various electronic components configuring the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 74, and also to the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y and the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to a payout control MPU 952a and the like. This delivery control filter circuit 951a is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 931, and removes noise from this +5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via the diode PD0, this +5V is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952. +12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal conveying the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). It is. The hall computer monitors the games of the players by ascertaining the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. Note that +24 from the power supply board 931 is not used in the payout control board 951 and is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a +5V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like. The +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and creates +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this +12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system to which +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g is applied and supplied is a +5V power supply line. In this embodiment, the +5V power line created by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the +5V power line created by the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Since the circuit is configured as shown in FIG. The +5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a. +12V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and +24V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and monitors signs of a power outage or instantaneous power outage of these +12V and +24V. When the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of a +12V or +24V power outage or instantaneous power outage, it outputs a power outage warning signal as a power outage warning to the main control MPU 1310a. The power outage notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a via the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 951. Further, the power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Further, the power outage warning signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, as shown in FIG. 76(b). At the same time, the signals are inputted to the door frame decoration board and the like via this frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

In this embodiment, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltages applied to two power lines, a +12V power line and a +24V power line, so that the voltage applied to one of the +12V power line or the +24V power line is Compared to the case of monitoring the applied voltage, it is possible to more accurately grasp signs of a power outage such as a power outage or momentary power outage.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit etc. of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. FIG. 77 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing the power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing the communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a diagram. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be explained, followed by the power supply, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, main control MPU created on the main control board 1310. Various input/output signals to and communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be explained.

The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a +5V generation circuit 1310g, and a main In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as peripheral circuits, as shown in FIG. )).

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
The main control filter circuit 1310h, as shown in FIG. 77, mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 has its No. 1 terminal applied with +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g, its No. 2 terminal is grounded (GND), and the noise component is removed from its No. 3 terminal. +5V is being output. One end of the +5V applied to terminal 1 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC0, so that ripples (alternating current components superimposed on the voltage) are first removed. smoothed.

The +5V output from the No. 3 terminal is electrically connected to the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded (GND). By connecting it to , ripples are further removed and smoothed. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. Note that when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the electric charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is transferred to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. +5V is applied over a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of the voltage.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the capacitor MC4 is connected to the ground (GND) at one end. electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, the VBB terminal of this RAM with built-in main control is connected via the resistor MR0 to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. electrically connected to the terminal. That is, the +5V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is also applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 via the diode MD0. The voltage is applied to the positive terminal of . As a result, as described above, the +12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. If the circuit 1310g is unable to generate +5V, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is Although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow, and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is applied to the VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in main control, so that the stored contents are retained.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
+5V, whose noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h, is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, as shown in FIG. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC5 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor MC5. It is now possible to do so. Specifically, when +5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (4.25V, for example), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after a delay time has elapsed.

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1, and one end is a capacitor that is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripples are removed and smoothed by this capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is greater than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic is output to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output with reset function. While being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is applied to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. Note that the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal has ripples removed and smoothed. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
The +5V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in FIG. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. Further, this smoothed +5V is applied not only to the VDD terminal but also to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is the output terminal, by applying +5V to each of these terminals A, B, C, and ST.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and receives a 24 MHz clock signal. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is connected to the ground (GND), and the D terminal, which outputs the frequency-divided wave of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b includes a vibration sensor 2405, general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, first starting opening sensor 4002, second starting opening sensor 4004, magnetic detection sensor 4024, count sensor 4005, and gate sensor shown in FIG. In addition to the detection signal from 4003, this circuit receives an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from an operation switch 954 provided in the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70. Since the circuit configuration into which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, the circuit into which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit where the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 controls the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is operated to clear the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the MPU 1310a, or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear RAM within a predetermined period from power-on, and error cancellation after power-on (after the period for functioning as RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed from power-on). It has the ability to do this. Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling an error that the payout control board 951 has, if an operation signal is input from the operation switch 954 within a predetermined period from power-on, the main control board 1310 It is judged as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM, and processing to clear the main control built-in RAM is performed.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the logic signal from the payout control board 951 is input to the main control board 1310. An operation signal in which the input signal becomes HI is input from the payout control board 951 (detailed explanation of this point will be given later).

As shown in FIG. 77, the transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on is a pull-up line whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected not only to the resistor MR3 but also to the other end of a resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC10 (Non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A).) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type circuit whose emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and the circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is configured as an open collector output type circuit whose emitter terminal is grounded (GND). The line is pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW and is input. When the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2, the logic becomes HI and is input.

A circuit composed of resistors MR3, MR4, and transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by an operation signal from operation switch 954.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. The main control MPU 1310a must not instruct to perform RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 inputted to the input terminal PA0 is HI. to decide.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal, which is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and whose logic becomes HI, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, turning on the transistor MTR0 and switching the switch 954 on. The circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs to perform RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. I judge that.

Note that the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the payout control board 951. In other words, between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, the voltage is higher than +5V, which is the control reference voltage, in order to suppress the influence of noise that enters the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The voltage +12V is used to increase the reliability of the signal. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, and the second starting opening sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are pulled to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, count sensor 4005, general winning hole sensor 4020, and gate sensor 4003, which are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69, are sent to the main control board 1310. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the +12V side by a pull-up resistor, similar to the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power outage monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages, +12V and +24V, from a power supply board 931 via a payout control board 951, and +12V and +24V are input to a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors +12V and +24V power outages or signs of instantaneous power outages, and when it detects signs of power outages or instantaneous power outages, it sends a power outage warning signal as a power outage warning to the main control MPU 1310a as well as to the payout control board. It outputs to the payout control MPU 952a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will first be described, followed by the monitoring of +24V power failures or momentary power failures, the monitoring of +12V power failures or momentary power failures, and the output of a power failure notice signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, of the shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. +5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (in this embodiment, 2.495V is set) which becomes a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. AC components) are removed and smoothed. Note that the A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded (GND).

The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the +24V monitoring voltage V1 and the reference voltage Vref, and the remaining one (MIC21B) is used to compare the +24V monitoring voltage V1 and the reference voltage Vref. , is used to compare the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V and the reference voltage Vref. A monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of +12V is applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is , ripples are removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is connected to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. +24V power outage or momentary power outage monitoring]
As described above, the +24V power outage or instantaneous power outage is monitored by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, the No. 3 terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the +24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, is connected to the other end of the resistor MR21, one end of which is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line, and the other end of the resistor MR21, which is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22, which is grounded to the ground (GND); and the other end of the capacitor MC23, which is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR21 and MR22, and whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND); are electrically connected. The +24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the No. 3 terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +24V by the resistance ratio of resistors MR21 and MR22, and is smoothed by removing ripples by capacitor MC23. . The values of resistors MR21 and MR22 are such that when there is a power outage or momentary power outage of +24V, the voltage starts to drop from +24V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 21.40V). The monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC24 which is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to a PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is increased to +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is lower than the ground (GND). A signal whose logic is LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. +12V power outage or momentary power outage monitoring]
As described above, the +12V power outage or instantaneous power outage is monitored by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, the No. 5 terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, is connected to the other end of the resistor MR24, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the other end of the resistor MR24, which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 and the other end of the resistor MR25 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the other end of the capacitor MC25 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR24 and MR25, and one end of the capacitor MC25 is grounded to the ground (GND). are electrically connected. The +12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +12V by the resistance ratio of resistors MR24 and MR25, and is smoothed by removing ripples by capacitor MC25. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are such that when there is a power outage or momentary power outage of +12V, the voltage starts to drop from +12V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 10.47V). The monitoring voltage V2 of +12V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The No. 7 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and is electrically connected to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A mentioned above, so that one end is connected to the +5V power line and electricity. The other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the other end of the capacitor MC24 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) to preset the D-type flip-flop MIC22. It is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a terminal. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays the role of a low-pass filter.

When the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 7 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is increased to +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +12V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 7 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is ground (GND). A signal whose logic is LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Power outage warning signal output]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is a D input terminal, based on a change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is a clock input terminal, and stores this stored value. (logic) is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. Furthermore, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal whose logic is LOW to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal, it releases the latch state and changes the logic of the signal that is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. On the other hand, when a signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, a latch state is set. In addition, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 inputs a logic HI signal to the clear terminal CLR terminal to set the latch state, the logic LOW signal enters the preset terminal PR terminal. When a signal is input, the state in which a signal with logic HI is output from the output terminal 1Q terminal is maintained. (maintains the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In this embodiment, the D type flip-flop MIC22 has a 1D terminal which is a D input terminal and a 1CK terminal which is a clock input terminal, which are each grounded (GND). The circuit is configured so that the edge of the input clock signal does not change, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, receives a signal from the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, which monitors a +24V power outage or instantaneous power outage, and a +12V power outage, as described above. Alternatively, a signal from the No. 7 terminal which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors instantaneous power outages is input, and based on these signals, a signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. Note that the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22, one end of which is grounded (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. +5V is smoothed by removing ripples by capacitor MC22, the GND terminal which is the grounding terminal is grounded (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal which inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a inputted to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. This power failure clear signal is started to be output and stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the main control side power-on processing performed by the main control MPU 1310a, which will be described later. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with its logic set to LOW via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latched state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal.At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is inverted and the output terminal is output. It is output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power outage clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI and is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to set a latch state when a power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal is input as a power outage warning signal to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. In addition, the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 1310cb outputs it to the dispensing control board 951 as a dispensing power outage notice signal, and also outputs it to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage notice signal.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main control input circuit 1310b electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the transistor MTR22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected not only to the resistor MR27 but also to the other end of a resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC23 (Non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC23A).) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

A circuit composed of resistors MR27, MR28, and transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned off. , the switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI is transmitted to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. It is input to PA1.

On the other hand, when either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is transmitted to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. It is input to PA1.

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the dispensing control board 951 as a dispensing power outage notice signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b mentioned above, and the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. Electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected not only to the resistor MR30 but also to the other end of a resistor MR31 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage via the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is not only electrically connected to the resistor MR33 but also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND), and the wiring It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via a harness. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. In the circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. connected.

The circuit composed of resistors MR30, MR31 and the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is a switch circuit in the former stage, and the circuit composed of resistors MR33, MR34 and the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is a switch circuit in the latter stage, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the previous stage transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the previous stage transistor MTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. MTR21 turns OFF, and the switch circuit in the previous stage also turns OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage, is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the +5V side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, which is the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the switch circuit in the latter stage is The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. The transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage, thereby turning on the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness), and the payout power outage warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is issued. It is input to the control board 951.

On the other hand, when either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the previous stage transistor MTR21. Upon input, the previous stage transistor MTR21 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is lowered to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage, thereby turning off the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 on the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness). A payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951.

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b mentioned above, and is connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. electrically connected to. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35 and also to the other end of a resistor MR36 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. , one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

A circuit made up of resistors MR35, MR36, and transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned off. , the switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the output control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the logic is set to HI. The peripheral power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the peripheral power outage warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which outputs the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, has one transistor each, and the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral While the logic is the same as the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the control board 1510, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is output to the output control board 951. The main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that is output as a power outage warning signal has two transistors, one in the front stage and the other in the latter stage, and the logic of the issued power outage warning signal is the same as the logic of the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the surroundings. The logic is the inversion of the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the control board 1510, and is different from the logic of the power outage warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is connected to the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage of the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is connected to the payout control board via wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cb has no reset function. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the. This means that between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are connected to the main control board. 1310, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are installed in the main control board 1310 and the payout control board. 951 and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control MPU 1310a, Power outage warning is performed by the logic of a power outage warning signal (ON/OFF signal) using +12V, which is a voltage higher than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the delivery control MPU 952a and the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

[9-6. Various input/output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be explained with reference to FIG. 77. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 as a payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, output the serial data sent from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main payment serial data transmission signal and output the main control without a reset function. The main control output circuit 1310cb sends the main payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control board 951, and the serial data to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 69 from the TXB terminal. The main control output circuit without a reset function 1310cb sends the main control output circuit without a reset function as a serial serial data transmission signal to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition to inputting the above-mentioned operation signal (RAM clear signal) to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned main payment serial data reception signal is input. A payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and detection signals from various switches such as the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is input, etc.

On the other hand, each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a outputs, for example, a main payment ACK signal indicating completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal to the main control output circuit with a reset function 1310ca. and outputs the main payout ACK signal from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951, and outputs a drive signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function for the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. The main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs drive signals to the main control output circuit 1310ca, and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs drive signals to various displays, and various information related to games (gaming information). is outputted to the main control output circuit with a reset function 1310ca, and various information regarding the game (gaming information) is outputted from the main control output circuit with a reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 951.

[9-7. Communication interface circuit between the main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 via the payout control board 951, and the +5V creation circuit 1310g creates +5V, which is the control reference voltage for the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. ing. The main circuit serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise that invades the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress this, the reliability is increased by transmitting using +12V, which is a higher voltage than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51, MR52, and a transistor MTR50. has been done. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) as a communication interface circuit. It is mainly composed of:

+12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the negative terminal of the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor MC50 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF)). In addition to being electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal No. 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the. As a result, if power from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the main control board 1310 via the output control board 951 due to a power outage or instantaneous power outage, for example, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 will be removed. +12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged with the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 μF) shown in FIG. Since the charge is applied as +5V, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a at least serially manages the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in its transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 41aea by the unit 1310aec, and transmission can be completed as main cycle serial data from the transmission shift register 1310aea.

As described above, the main serial data transmission signal sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is increased by transmitting using a voltage of +12V, which is higher than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to its transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits it. When the main cycle serial data is transmitted from the shift register 1310aea, it is possible to transmit a main cycle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI with +12V from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50.

In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a is 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for a maximum of 10 packets is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Further, in this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (terminal 3) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). A resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal that outputs the main frequency serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via the transistor MTR50. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected not only to the resistor MR51 but also to the other end of a resistor MR52 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded (GND).

The circuit composed of resistors MR51, MR52, and transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is switched to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main frequency serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the ground (GND), and the negative terminal is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and also to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6) which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (terminal 4) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal (terminal 5) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the +5V side by the AR 11 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler AIC10, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is sent to the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a as a main frequency serial data transmission signal. is input to the input terminal of

As a result, as described above, if +5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to a power outage or instantaneous power outage, for example, The charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied as +5V to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. When a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, by applying +5V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10, the main frequency serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the main control MPU 1310a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main serial transmission port 1310ae can be completely transmitted, and the main serial data transmission signal, that is, the main serial data in the middle of transmission, is interrupted. The peripheral control board 1510 is configured to reliably receive the data without missing or missing the data.

When the logic of the main frequency serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the main circuit whose logic becomes HI. The serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, while the logic of the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. When is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and turning on the photocoupler AIC10. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the main serial data transmission signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. . In this way, the logic of the main serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. This is the logic.

In this way, in this embodiment, there is a +5V power line to which +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is applied, and a +12V power line, to which +12V, which is the communication voltage, is applied via the diode MD50. Measures have been taken in the event that a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the control reference voltage and communication voltage drop. That is, for the main frequency serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, the +5V power supply line and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, which uses the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, even if a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5V power supply line drops, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h, which is the first auxiliary power supply, By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of MC2, it is possible to maintain the state in which the control reference voltage is applied. For the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which functions as a communication interface circuit, +12V applied to the +12V power supply line is applied as a communication voltage to the anode terminal of the diode MD50, and the cathode terminal of this diode MD50 is and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, so that when a power outage or instantaneous power failure occurs, the communication voltage is applied from the +12V power supply line through the diode MD50. Even if the voltage drops, the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained by applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power source. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the commands being sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 from being fragmented, and also to prevent the commands from being dropped, so that the peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the commands being sent. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate commands from being missed immediately after a power outage occurs or at the time of a momentary power outage.

In addition, the plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all converted into main serial data by the resistor MR50, resistors MR51, MR52, and transistor MTR50. The capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h is set to 470 μF so that transmission can be completed to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which functions as a communication interface circuit. The capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is set to 220 μF. As a result, even if a power outage or instantaneous power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a reset allows the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to be converted into main cycle serial data and all function as an interface circuit. Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the non-functional main control output circuit 1310cb, the peripheral control board 1510 does not interrupt the plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and prevents them from being lost. You can receive the message without any problem.

[10. Payout control board circuit]
Next, the circuit etc. of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85. FIG. 80 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the payout control section, etc., FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing the payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. 83 is a circuit diagram showing the payout motor drive. 84 is a circuit diagram showing the CR unit input/output circuit, and FIG. 85 is a circuit diagram showing various input/output signals to the main control board 1310 and various output signals to the external terminal board 784. It is an output diagram. First, the payout control filter circuit 951a will be explained, and then the circuit of the payout control section, various input/output signals with the main control board 1310, and various output signals to the external terminal board 784 will be explained.

[10-1. Payout control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This output control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. Terminal 1 of the output control three-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 whose one end is grounded (GND). The +5V from the power supply board 931 is first smoothed by removing ripples (alternating current components superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The second terminal of the three-terminal output control filter PIC0 is connected to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the three-terminal output control filter PIC0 outputs +5V from which noise components have been removed.

The third terminal of the output control three-terminal filter PIC0 is connected to the capacitor PC1 and the other end of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded (GND). By electrically connecting them, ripples are further removed and smoothed from the +5V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, etc., which will be described later. . In addition, when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the electric charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is transferred to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a. +5V is applied over a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of the voltage.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU952a, and the capacitor PC4 is connected to the ground (GND) at one end. electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, the VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in output control is connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. electrically connected to the terminal. That is, the +5V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the dispensing control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and is also applied to the VBB terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 via the diode PD0. The voltage is applied to the positive terminal of . As a result, as described above, when +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Since the current is supplied to the payout control board 951 as a current, the current is prevented from flowing to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a by the diode PD0 and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. The stored contents are retained by applying the voltage VBB. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the payout control built-in RAM is constituted by the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Payout control unit circuit]
The payout control unit 952 includes a payout control MPU 952a, a payout control input circuit 952b, a payout control output circuit 952c, a payout motor drive circuit 952d, and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e, as well as peripheral circuits such as a reset circuit, as shown in FIG. It mainly includes a payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal, and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal. Here, we will first explain the dispensing control system reset, and then explain the dispensing control crystal oscillator, dispensing control input circuit, dispensing motor drive circuit, CR unit input/output circuit, and various input/output signals to the dispensing control MPU.

[10-2-1. Payout control system reset]
+5V, whose noise components have been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a, is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, as shown in FIG. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC5 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor PC5. It is now possible to do so. Specifically, when the +5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after a delay time has elapsed.

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1, and one end is a capacitor that is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of PC6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic outputs the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output with reset function. While being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is input to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca. Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function are activated. The payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal has ripples removed and smoothed. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Payout control crystal oscillator]
The +5V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in FIG. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC8 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VCC terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. Further, this smoothed +5V is applied not only to the VCC terminal but also to the OE terminal which is the output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from its output terminal, ie, the OUT terminal, when +5V is applied to its OE terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
The dispensing control input circuit 952b receives the dispensing power outage warning signal from the door frame release switch 618 shown in FIG. 70, the main body frame release switch 619 shown in FIG. 70, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The circuit includes the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 70, a circuit into which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, a circuit into which the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, etc. . First, we will explain the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame release switch is input, followed by the circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame release switch is input, the circuit to which the power outage warning signal issued from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, The circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank sensor is input and the circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input will be explained. Note that the full tank detection sensor 279 and the various detection switches shown in FIG. 70, such as the out of ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840, have open collector output type output terminals. Since the circuit configuration into which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, the circuit into which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input will be described here.

[10-2-3(a). Circuit where the detection signal from the door frame release switch is input]
The door frame release switch 618 uses a normally closed type (NC), and the switch is turned on (conducting) when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the door frame release switch 618 is grounded (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame release switch 618 is connected to a pull-up resistor PR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR21 but also to the other end of a resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded (GND). In addition, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame release switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and also to the other end of the capacitor PC20 whose one end is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC20 (Non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A).) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR20, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input as a door open signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

In addition, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame release switch 618 is pulled up to +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21, and is also pulled to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR20. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR24 but also to the other end of a resistor PR25 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), a pull (not shown) is connected at one end to the +12V power supply line on the external terminal board 784. Electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR21, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Furthermore, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame release switch 618 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and the No. 1 terminal is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. In addition to being pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via a resistor PR26, ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR26 but also to the other end of a resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end is connected to the +12V power supply in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR22, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, The circuit is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame release switch 618 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts forming the door frame release switch 618 repeat ON/OFF for a short time.

A circuit consisting of resistors PR21, PR22 and transistor PTR20, a circuit consisting of resistors PR24, PR25 and transistor PTR21, and a circuit consisting of resistors PR26, PR27 and transistor PTR22 are door frame release switches. This is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the detection signal from 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR20 is turned on. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. Ru. In addition, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal board 784. In addition, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20. The transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +5V side, and the transistor PTR21 is turned ON. However, the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the external terminal board 784. In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +5V, and the transistor PTR22 is turned ON. However, the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and a main frame door open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is turned on, and the door frame release signal whose logic is HI is sent to the input terminal of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. The outer end frame door open information output signal input to PA0 and whose logic becomes HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned OFF, and a door frame open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. The outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3(b). Circuit where the detection signal from the main frame release switch is input]
The main body frame release switch 619 uses a normally closed type (NC), and the switch is turned on (conducting) when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The No. 2 terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is grounded (GND), while the No. 1 terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is connected to a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR29 but also to the other end of a resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded (GND). In addition, the No. 1 terminal of the main body frame release switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and also to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness). electrically connected. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), a pull (not shown) is connected at one end to the +12V power supply line on the external terminal board 784. Electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR23, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door opening information output signal.

In addition, the No. 1 terminal of the main body frame release switch 619 is pulled up to +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29, and also connected to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR28. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR31 but also to the other end of a resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, as shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end is connected to the +12V power supply in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR24, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, The circuit is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the main body frame opening switch 619 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the main body frame opening switch 619 repeatedly turn on and off for a short time.

The circuit made up of resistors PR29 and PR30 and transistor PTR23 and the circuit made up of resistors PR31 and PR32 and transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned on and off by a detection signal from body frame opening switch 619.

When the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame release switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR23 is turned on. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal board 784. In addition, when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame release switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 24 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. The transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side at the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated. It is input to an external terminal board 784. In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door open signal whose logic becomes LOW is transmitted to the main control board 1310. 1310.

In this manner, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, when the main body frame open switch 619 is turned on, the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784. The main frame door open signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310, while when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame door open switch 619 is turned OFF, and the logic is The outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this embodiment, as described above, either one or both of the states in which the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 are provided. Even in this case, the main frame door open signal is input to the main control board 1310, so the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 based on the door frame 3 and/or The player can determine that the main body frame 4 is open, which does not normally occur during gaming, and the outer end frame door open information output signal is sent to the external terminal board 784. Therefore, this outer end frame door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784, and the hall computer determines the door frame door open information output signal based on the outer end frame door open information output signal. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 are opened from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 may be opened. It can be determined that a situation that does not normally occur during gaming is occurring for the player who is playing the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, by adopting normally closed switches for the door frame release switch 618 and the main body frame release switch 619, the door frame release switch 618 may be short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned ON ( Even if the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and the main frame release switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned ON (conductive), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, by adopting normally closed switches for the door frame release switch 618 and the main body frame release switch 619, it is possible to output the main frame door release signal to the main control board 1310 even in the event of a short circuit, and the outer edge The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

In addition, if the door frame release switch 618 and the main body frame release switch 619 are changed from normally closed switches to normally open (NO) switches (door frame release switch 618' and main body frame release switch 619'), , the door frame release switch 618' is turned on (conducting) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and is turned off (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4. . The main body frame opening switch 619' is turned ON (conducting) when the main body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and turned OFF (disconnecting) when the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame release switch 618' is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 3 will be released from the main body frame 4. Even if the frame release switch 619' is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the main body frame 4 remains open from the outer frame 2. In this way, even if normally open switches are adopted as the door frame release switch 618' and the main body frame release switch 619', the main frame door release signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even in the event of a disconnection. The outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3(c). Circuit into which the power outage warning signal issued from the power outage monitoring circuit is input]
A transmission line that transmits a power outage warning signal issued from a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR40, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and a resistor. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR41 but also to the other end of a resistor PR42 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (Non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A).) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR40, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is inputted to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a payout power outage warning signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR41, PR42, and transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a power outage warning signal issued from power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in main control board 1310.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the two types of voltages +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 for signs of a power outage or momentary power outage, and when a sign of a power outage or momentary power outage is detected, the reset function is disabled. A payout power outage warning signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a power outage warning via the main control output circuit 1310cb. The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the +12V and +24V voltages for signs of a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and as described above, meets the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf and that the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the payout power failure notice signal is input to the payout control board 951, either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is applied. When the conditions are met, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to +12V by the above-mentioned pull-up resistor PR40 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. is input to the payout control board 951.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, that is, there is no sign of a power failure or instantaneous power failure of the +12V and +24V voltages. Sometimes, a payout power outage notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 951, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR40 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to +5V by the resistor PR43. As a result, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of +12V and/or +24V is When there is a sign of a power outage or instantaneous power outage, a power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the power outage control board 951, so that the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. When the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor PR40, the transistor PTR40 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic at the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

In this way, when there is a sign of a power outage or instantaneous power outage of +12V and/or +24V voltage, a payout power outage notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of a power outage or instantaneous power outage of the +12V and +24V voltages, a payout power outage notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. This is because, as described above, when there is a sign of a power outage or momentary power outage of +12V and/or +24V voltage, a power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of a power outage or instantaneous power outage in the +12V and +24V voltages, a power outage warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The logic of the dispensing power outage notice signal input to the dispensing control MPU 952a and the logic of the power outage notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a due to the power outage notice are the same logic.

[10-2-3(d). Circuit into which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. has been entered. The output terminal of this full tank detection sensor 279 has a circuit configuration as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line on the dispensing control board 951. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a, and is also electrically connected to the No. 1 terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. This three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The 2nd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor is connected to the ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor is connected to the 3-terminal filter for the full-tank detection sensor via the resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the No. 1 terminal of the terminal filter PIC50, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via a resistor PR45. Thereby, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is inputted to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after noise components are removed by the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR45, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR46 whose one end is grounded (GND), and whose other end is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. Capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (Non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40B).) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR41, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input as a full signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

A circuit composed of resistors PR45, PR46, and transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a detection signal from full tank detection sensor 279.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls. In this embodiment, when the storage space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. In the payout control board 951, a signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 951, while when the storage space is full of stored game balls. , a signal in which the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is lowered to the ground (GND) side at the dispensing control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes LOW. is input to the payout control board 951.

When the storage space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. A signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and whose logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, which turns on the transistor PTR41 and turns on the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and a full signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the storage space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. At 951, the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side and its logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, which turns off the transistor PTR41 and turns off the switch circuit as well. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR47, and a full tank signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

Note that in this embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to a switch circuit including a resistor PR45, a resistor PR46, and a transistor PTR41 via a three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. However, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 and the dispensing detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. The circuit configuration is such that the signal is directly input to each switch circuit without any intervention. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, it is compared with the out of ball detection sensor 827, the dispensing detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the dispensing device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. , the path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long and is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with stored game balls, and the payout control MPU 952a detects whether the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with stored game balls. When it is determined that the storage space is full of stored game balls based on the detection signal from 279, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout rotary body from paying out game balls. It is designed to be controlled. In other words, if noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a will control the payout motor 834 even though the accommodation space is not full of stored game balls. In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout rotary body from dispensing game balls, or the payout motor 834 is driven even though the storage space is full of stored game balls. When the above-mentioned prize ball passageway is filled with game balls upstream by controlling and rotating the payout rotary body to continue paying out game balls, the payout rotary body itself becomes unable to rotate and the payout motor 834 There may also be cases where an abnormal load is applied to the dispensing motor 834, resulting in overload and abnormal heat generation, resulting in failure, or a failure of the mechanism that transmits the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 834 to the rotational motion of the dispensing rotating body. be. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the circuit configuration is first changed to remove the noise component from the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 in the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. Adopted.

[10-2-3(e). [Circuit into which the operation signal from the operation switch is input]
The 1st and 2nd terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are grounded (GND), and the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are connected to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous stage transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. The base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to a resistor PR49, and also to the other end of a resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded (GND). In addition, the No. 4 terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is not only electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, but also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41, one end of which is grounded (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR42 at the front stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 at the front stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage via the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is not only electrically connected to the resistor PR52 but also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR53 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C)). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the former stage and the latter stage, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage changes, and the signal is sent as the RWMCLR signal to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. is input.

In addition, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. It is pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor PTR44 via a resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to a resistor PR55, and also to the other end of a resistor PR56 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end is connected to +12V in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR2, which is electrically connected to the power supply line. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR44, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input as a RAM clear signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contacts forming the operation switch 954 repeatedly turn on and off for a short period of time, causing a flapping phenomenon. The circuit is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the operation switch 954 due to the operation switch 954.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR49, PR50 and transistor PTR42 is a front-stage switch circuit, and the circuit consisting of resistors PR52, PR53 and transistor PTR43 is a rear-stage switch circuit, including resistors PR55, PR56, and transistor PTR44. The circuit consisting of is a switch circuit, and is turned on/off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

As described above, the operation switch 954 is configured to operate the RAM built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 (RAM with built-in payout control) and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from power-on. It is operated to clear the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time of power on, and an error reset function after the power is turned on (after the period in which it functions as RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time of power on). It has the following functions. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 serves as a RAM clear signal in a function that clears the RAM within a predetermined period from power-on; ), it becomes an error release signal in the error release function.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals 3 and 4 of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is transferred to the previous stage transistor. The voltage is input to the base terminal of PTR42, turns on the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and turns on the switch circuit in the previous stage. By pulling the voltage down to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear to erase information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from power-on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. It is determined that this is not an instruction.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, which are the third and fourth terminals, are pulled up to +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is transmitted to the transistor PTR44. The signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, which turns on the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. is input. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when a RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, this logic becomes LOW as shown in FIG. By inputting the RAM clear signal to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it does not instruct to perform RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, which are the third and fourth terminals, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the operation signal whose logic becomes LOW is transmitted to the previous stage transistor. The voltage applied to the base terminal of PTR42 turns off the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage also turns OFF. When the voltage is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR51, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear to erase information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from power-on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. It is judged that it is an instruction.

In addition, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, which are the 3rd and 4th terminals, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48, so that the logic becomes LOW. The signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, turning off the transistor PTR44 and turning off the switch circuit as well. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM whose logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to main control board 1310. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives a RAM clear signal whose logic is HI within a predetermined period from power-on, this logic becomes HI as shown in FIG. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, this is an instruction to perform RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a dispensing motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the dispensing motor 834 of the dispensing device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC 60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the +12V power line and the +5V power line, respectively, and +12 and +5V are applied thereto, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is connected to the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is outputted from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and outputted from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is now possible to do so. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the 3rd terminal and the 10th terminal, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60, through the Zener diode PZD60, and is also electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the dispensing motor 834. Based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da, +12V or +5V is applied as the motor drive voltage to No. 3, which is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC 60, via the Zener diode PZD60. It is supplied to the terminal and terminal No. 10, respectively, and also to the dispensing motor 834.

The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors, and in this embodiment, the 6th and 7th terminals, which are the emitter terminals, of the drive ICPIC 60 are grounded (GND), and the base terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 is connected to the ground (GND). A payout motor drive signal is input to certain terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12 via resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The collector terminals of the drive ICPIC60, which are terminals 2, 4, 9, and 11, are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, which are terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, which are terminals No. 1, No. 5, No. 8, and No. 12 through the resistors PR60 to PR63, an excitation signal is generated. A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 834. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the drive ICPIC 60 via resistors PR60 to PR63. The signals are output to the base terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12, respectively. These driving pulses are generated by switching excitation currents flowing through each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) of the dispensing motor 834, and rotate the dispensing motor 834. Note that when the drive pulses (excitation signals) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) are cut off by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 will be damaged. Therefore, as a protection, the Zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected in front of the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, which are terminals 3 and 10. A circuit configuration has been adopted.

[10-2-5. CR unit input/output circuit]
Next, the CR unit input/output circuit 952e for inputting and outputting various signals to and from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. The payout control board 951 receives the BRDY, which is a ball rental request signal, and the BRQ, which is a single payout operation start request signal, from the CR unit 6, as described above, via the gaming ball rental device connection terminal board 869. , is input, and a predetermined voltage VL (+12V) and ground LG created from AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Via the terminal board 869, an EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for dispensing rental balls is possible or impossible. and outputs. As shown in FIG. 84, the input/output circuit for inputting/outputting these various signals is mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (incorporating an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via a resistor PR70. A cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC 70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. At times, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via a resistor PR71, and also to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via a resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of PTR71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is not only electrically connected to a resistor PR71, but also electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power supply line.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR71 but also to the other end of a resistor PR74 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. FIG. 80 It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR70, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR72 but also to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness), a pull-up resistor (not shown) whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line is connected to the power supply board 931. electrically connected to the other end of the By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR71, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply board 931 as a CR connection signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR71, PR74, and transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, which turns on the transistor PTR70 and turns on the switch circuit. This will turn it on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. Ru.

The circuit composed of resistors PR72, PR76, and transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, turning on the transistor PTR71, and the switch circuit is also turned off. This will turn it ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and a CR connection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply board 931. Ru.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness), and a CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply board 931. be done.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via a resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON, while the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned OFF. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B)). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC71, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 turns OFF. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. In this way, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via a resistor PR79. BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72, and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on, while the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C)). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC72, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 72 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 turns OFF. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. In this way, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

An EXS signal from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a that informs that one payout operation has started or ended is outputted to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and outputs the payout control output circuit without reset function. 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR82, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, EXS is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is applied. When the logic of the EXS signal outputted from the output terminal of the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 through a terminal board 869 for connecting a rental device such as a game ball by a pull-up resistor PR83. is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to its built-in control device. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC73, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is inputted to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, EXS is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 turns ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic becomes LOW becomes the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the voltage is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. In this way, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the same as the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. The logic is the same.

A PRDY signal that informs that the payout operation for paying out rental balls is possible or impossible from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is sent to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. has been entered. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR85, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is applied. When the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC 74 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869 for connecting a rental device such as a game ball by a pull-up resistor PR86. is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to its built-in control device. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC74, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input as PRDY to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is connected to the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the voltage is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. In this way, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the same as the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. The logic is the same.

[10-2-6. Various input/output signals to the payout control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals input/output from input/output terminals of various input/output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a, receives serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main payment serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a, serial data to be sent to the main control board 1310 is sent as a payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. A payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function to the main control board 1310.

Each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a receives the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, dispensing power outage warning signal, door open signal, full tank signal, and various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection). In addition to inputting signals such as signal 1, etc., for example, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is input via the payout control input circuit 952b. Detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, etc. shown in FIG. 70 are input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a outputs the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and outputs the EXS signal and PRDY signal from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input/output circuit 952e, or the voltage switching signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is sent from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Or output the payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and output the payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition, for example, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function outputs a payout control output circuit 952ca with a payout control output circuit with a reset function to send the payout control output circuit 952ca to the payout control output circuit 952ca. The ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310, or the drive signal for the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. It outputs to the error LED indicator 860b, etc.

[10-3. Various input/output signals to the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input/output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310, and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be explained with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input/output signals with main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input/output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(a), the payout control board 951 transmits the above-mentioned payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc. is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, in addition to the above-mentioned main payment serial data reception signal, main payment ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal), the payout control board 951 outputs a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15 round jackpot information output signal, And games such as jackpot information output signals such as 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving information output signal, starting opening winning information output signal, etc. A game information signal, a payout power outage warning signal, etc. related to the game are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(b), in addition to the above-mentioned outer end frame door open information output signal, the number of game balls actually put out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls. The jackpot information of the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15th round jackpot information output signal and the 2nd round jackpot information output signal is outputted from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Outputs gaming information signals such as an output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving information output signal, and a starting opening winning information output signal to the external terminal board 784. do. These output signals are pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor on the external terminal board 784. In other words, two signals are output to the external terminal board 784: the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and the prize ball number information output signal, and the main prize ball number output signal from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving information output signal, and starting opening winning information Eight signals called output signals are output via (pass through) the payout control board 951.

The signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a gaming hall (hall) not shown, and the hall computer monitors the games played by the players. In addition, when outputting the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hole computer outputs the number of jackpots in which there are 2 rounds (2-round jackpot information output signal). The number of jackpots in the pachinko machine 1 is the sum of the number of jackpots (number of occurrences of 15 round jackpots) and the number of jackpots with 15 rounds (the number of jackpots in 15 rounds). For this reason, the hall computer cannot determine the number of 2-round jackpots or the 15-round jackpot from the total number of jackpots, so the number of jackpots that actually occurred in Pachinko machine 1 is higher. , it is impossible to determine whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. Additionally, a data counter (not shown) is placed above the pachinko machine 1, and some players select whether or not to play by referring to the number of jackpot game states displayed on this data counter. Some do.

However, the number of jackpot game states displayed on the data counter may actually be biased toward the number of two-round jackpots, so even if the player starts playing, only two-round jackpots will occur. Sometimes it is difficult to hit the jackpot after 15 rounds. In this way, although the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, it may unnecessarily agitate the player's gambling spirit.

Therefore, in this embodiment, by separately outputting the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as the jackpot information output signal, the hall computer can determine the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot, It is now possible to accurately grasp the number of 15-round jackpots. Therefore, the hall computer can determine whether the highest number of jackpots actually occurred in Pachinko machine 1 is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot, and the data counter shows the 15-round jackpot. Since the number of jackpot occurrences and the number of 2-round jackpot occurrences can be displayed separately, or only the number of 15-round jackpot occurrences can be displayed as the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to unnecessarily arouse the gambling spirit of players. do not have.

In this embodiment, the 2nd round jackpot information output signal is output to the hole computer during the period from when the 2nd round jackpot occurs until the end of the round, and the 15th round jackpot information output signal is also output when the 15th round jackpot occurs. The state is output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence to the end. In addition to the method of outputting the 2nd round jackpot information output signal and the 15th round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in this embodiment, for example, when a 2nd round jackpot occurs, the 2nd round jackpot information output signal is output for a predetermined period. The 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information are output to the hole computer, and when a 15-round jackpot occurs, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hole computer for a predetermined period. Another example is a method in which the output signal is output to the hall computer for the same predetermined period.

[11. Arrangement of output terminals on external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to the hall computer installed in the game hall (hall) will be explained with reference to FIG. The external terminal board 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and its rear side is covered by an external terminal board cover 786. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal board.

As described above, the external terminal board 784 outputs the outer end frame door opening information output signal, the prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15th round jackpot information output signal, and the 2nd round jackpot information output signal. When a jackpot information output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving information output signal, and a starting opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, This is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

To briefly explain these various signals, the outer end frame door open information output signal does not occur during normal gaming when the player indicates that the door frame 3 and/or main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 are open. This is a signal that indicates that a situation has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is output every time the number of game balls actually put out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. The main prize ball number information output signal is a signal that conveys the information, and the main prize ball number information output signal is the various winning holes such as the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the general winning holes 2001, 2201, and the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal that informs each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on the entered game balls reaches 10 balls, and the 15 round jackpot information output signal indicates that a 15 round jackpot has occurred. The 2nd round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 2nd round jackpot has occurred, and the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 2nd round jackpot has occurred. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal that indicates that the special symbol is in the state of This is a signal that indicates that the fluctuating display has ended (stopped), and the normal symbol display information output signal indicates that the fluctuating display of the normal symbol has ended (stopped) on the regular symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The time-saving information output signal is a signal that conveys that the time-saving state is occurring, and the starting opening winning information output signal is a signal that conveys that the time-saving state is occurring. This is a signal that notifies each time a game ball enters the opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004.

On the external terminal board 784, output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in a row, as shown in FIG. The output terminal PT1 is colored white and outputs a prize ball number information output signal. As mentioned above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that notifies each time the number of game balls actually put out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer controls the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 to output 10 prize balls each time the prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to know that game balls have been paid out as prize balls, and the total number of game balls put out by the Pachinko machine 1 can be determined by counting the number of game balls that have been put out.

The output terminal PT2 is colored green and outputs an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door open information output signal indicates that the door frame 3 and/or main body frame 4 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, this signal is output from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 are open. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer controls the door frame 3 and the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is being input. /Or it can be recognized that the main body frame 4 is open.

The output terminal PT3 is colored gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal is generated when the variable display of the special symbol is finished (stopped) on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. This is a signal that conveys the status, and in this embodiment, the end (stop) of the variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display 1403 and second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 is sent from the output terminal PT3. It is designed to be output for 0.128 seconds at a time. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, when the special symbol display information output signal is input, the hall computer displays the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to know that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and also to count the number of times and display the first special on the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of times the special symbols have been variably displayed on the symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405.

The output terminal PT4 is colored yellow and outputs a starting slot winning information output signal. As described above, the starting hole winning information output signal is a signal that notifies each time a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 shown in FIG. , is output for 0.128 seconds every time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 from the output terminal PT4. When the starting hole winning information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer outputs the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole of the pachinko machine 1 every time the starting hole winning information output signal is input. It is possible to know that a game ball has entered the starting port 2004, and also to count the number of times the starting port winning information output signal has been input to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls that have entered the ball.

The output terminal PT5 is colored black and outputs a 15 round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15 round jackpot information output signal is a signal that informs that the 15 round jackpot is occurring, and in this embodiment, while the 15 round jackpot is occurring from the output terminal PT5, It is now output. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer detects that a 15-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15-round jackpot information output signal is being input. In addition to being able to grasp the status, it is also possible to grasp the total number of times that a 15-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of times the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input.

The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a 2nd round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 2nd round jackpot information output signal is a signal that conveys that a 2nd round jackpot is occurring, and in this embodiment, while the 2nd round jackpot is occurring from the output terminal PT6, It is now output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer detects that a 2-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is being input. In addition to being able to grasp the current state, it is also possible to grasp the total number of times that a two-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of times the two-round jackpot information output signal is input.

The output terminal PT7 is colored blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. As mentioned above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal that conveys that the fluctuating display of the normal symbols has ended (stopped) on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT7 for 0.128 seconds when the fluctuating display of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 ends (stops). When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer outputs the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. At 1402, it is possible to know that the fluctuating display of the normal symbols has ended (stopped), and by counting the number of times, the total number of fluctuating displays of the regular symbols can be counted on the regular symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. You can keep track of the number of times.

The output terminal PT8 is colored red and outputs a time saving information output signal. As mentioned above, the time saving information output signal is a signal that conveys that the time saving state is occurring, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time saving state is occurring. ing. When the time saving information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer recognizes that the time saving state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1. In addition, by counting the number of times the time saving information output signal is inputted, it is possible to grasp the total number of times the time saving state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs a probability fluctuation information output signal. As described above, the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal that conveys that a probability fluctuation is occurring, and in this embodiment, the information output signal during probability fluctuation is output from the output terminal PT9 while a probability fluctuation is occurring. It has become so. When the probability fluctuation information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer determines that the probability fluctuation is occurring in the pachinko machine 1 when the probability fluctuation information output signal is input. Not only can it be grasped, but also the total number of times that a probability variation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the probability variation information output signal has been input.

The output terminal PT10 is colored light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal is sent to various winning holes such as the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the general winning holes 2001, 2201, and the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal that informs that every time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have been pitched reaches 10 balls, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer determines that the pachinko machine 1 receives 10 balls as prize balls each time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to know that game balls are scheduled to be paid out as prize balls, and the total number of game balls scheduled to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1 is determined by counting the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out. can do. In addition, for example, game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on game balls that have entered various winning holes such as the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the general winning holes 2001, 2201, and the big winning hole 2005. When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize ball number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize ball number information output signal is output for 0.256 (=0.128 seconds x 2 times) seconds, It is designed to output at intervals of 0.128 seconds, as if it were one continuous signal.

Among the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal board 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 output the various signals output from the main control board 951 side. It is arranged so that various signals output on the 1310 side are output via (pass through) the payout control board 951. The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are colored, and by electrically connecting wires with connectors colored in the same color to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, it is possible to avoid accidentally connecting other wires with electricity. It is now possible to prevent unauthorized connections. Then, various signals output from the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer so that various signals output from the payout control board 951 side and various signals output from the main control board 1310 side are not mixed. output terminals PT1 and PT2 are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output from the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are arranged on the left side of the external terminal board 784. By arranging them in a line from the center left side to the right side, in this respect as well, the wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and the various signals output on the main control board 1310 side can be connected. This makes it possible to prevent incorrect electrical connection of the wiring for transmitting signals to the hall computer.

In addition, in this embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are respectively connected to the hall from the external terminal board 784. It is configured to communicate to a computer. For example, in a state where game balls from the pachinko island equipment side are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 If a 15th round jackpot happens to occur in the pachinko machine 1 when there are few remaining game balls, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out game balls as prize balls is insufficient, so the game balls are paid out. (Furthermore, for example, if ball jamming or ball jamming occurs in the payout device 830, game balls cannot be paid out unless this problem is resolved). Then, the prize ball number information output signal output from the payout control board 951 side indicates that the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10, as described above. Since it is a signal that conveys this fact every time, when it becomes impossible to pay out game balls, the payout control board 951 outputs a prize ball number information output signal and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. become unable. When the game ball is not paid out, the player calls the hall clerk or the like. A hall clerk or the like may, for example, check the hose-like replenishment nozzle for supplying game balls from the pachinko island equipment to the prize ball tank 720, and identify the location of ball clogging (or, for example, By identifying the location of the ball jam or the location of the ball jam and resolving the problem, the game ball can be returned to a state where it can be paid out.

However, even if the hall clerk, etc. is working, the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress, so after the 15th round jackpot is completed, the game balls are paid out by the work of the hall clerk, etc. When the state is restored, the payout control board 951 will pay out the unpaid game balls one after another, and even though the 15th round jackpot has ended and the 15th round jackpot has not occurred, the payout control board 951 Every time the number of game balls actually put out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls, it outputs a prize ball number information output signal that conveys this fact and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. That will happen. In this case, even though the 15th round jackpot has not occurred, an extremely large number of game balls will be paid out. A problem arises in that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between and.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the payout motor 834 is drive-controlled by the payout control board 951 and is independent of whether or not it is actually paid out as a prize ball, that is, it is independent of the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control board 951. The main control board 1310 receives game balls that have entered various winning holes such as the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the general winning holes 2001, 2201, and the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 based on this, a main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal to notify the fact, and the payout control board 951 and external terminal board 784 are activated. We adopted a system in which the information is transmitted to the hall computer via the computer. As a result, even if the above-mentioned troubles occur (problems such as ball jamming in the replenishment nozzle, ball jamming or ball jamming in the payout device 830, etc.), the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout in this gaming state The relationship between the number of game balls scheduled to be thrown out and the relationship can be accurately communicated to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Production display drive board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. 87. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is disposed near the bottom of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed within the plate unit 320. It mainly consists of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460.

[12-1. LCD module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V of the effect display drive board 4450 mainly includes a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

The liquid crystal module circuit 4450V receives a serial signal (serial data) from the door frame side display transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. are transmitted as a positive signal and a negative signal, they are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the common mode choke coil SDL0 outputs a positive signal and a negative signal. It is now possible to separate noise from negative signals. The plus signal and the minus signal from which the noise has been separated are input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. This resistor SDR0 is a terminating resistor (terminator) and prevents the positive signal and the negative signal from being reflected at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, thereby preventing disturbance of the serial signal.

The door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 receives three video signals: a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. Three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, are restored (that is, restored to a parallel signal before being serialized). Note that the red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal are, as described above, although the red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal each output from channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source are 8 bits. , the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d each have 6 bits, a total of 18 bits, so they are the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

The liquid crystal module circuit 4450V receives the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510, as described above. Two signals in which certain LOCKN signal output request data is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510 are also input. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits these two signals when the two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e. On the other hand, when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input to the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured to connect the circuit as follows. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the two signals, so the two signals are , is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the pan unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input to the activation circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. The signal output from the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transferred from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. is sent to the LCD module circuit 4450V.

The forced switching circuit 1512f, when the two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side production transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the door frame A serial signal (serial data) using a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. is transmitted from the side production transmitter IC 1512d as a positive signal and a negative signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. 868, and is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and is input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side production receiver ICSDIC0, while the differential circuit 1512e When two differential signals, a positive signal and a negative signal, are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, these two signals are The signal is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. The door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 determines that when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, it is a request to output the LOCKN signal, A LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

Note that, as described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is used to create a startup screen on the game board side when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. During the period of displaying on the display device 1600 or during the period of waiting for a customer and performing a demonstration using the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display In order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 is This is sent as an operation confirmation request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e, it is a signal output from the door frame side production transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. The data format is completely different from that of the company's differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)." Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the signal is not output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d, and an abnormality occurs. Assuming that it is data, a LOCKN signal will be output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later. In other words, in this embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later by using the function of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to force the output, the LOCKN signal output request data, which has a different data format from the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, is sent from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. By outputting the information, it is possible to check whether the device called the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to confirm whether a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDSVDD terminal, PLLVDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 are each supplied with +3.3V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND request paper, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminal of the frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 are each grounded.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for the digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal, which serves as the ground for this digital circuit, and the +3.3V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the line.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal, which serves as the ground for this TTL output. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power supply line.

The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal, which serves as the ground for this LVDS input. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power supply line.

The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal, which serves as the ground for this PLL circuit, and the power is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power supply line.

When +3.3V is supplied (applied) to the PDWN terminal, the logic becomes HI, indicating that it will operate normally, and on the other hand, when the supply of +3.3 is stopped, the logic becomes LOW, indicating that it will power down. It is a terminal for transmitting information. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3V via the resistor SDR1, and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0, one end of which is grounded. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the +3.3V power line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal uses a rising edge to transmit various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later. This is a terminal for specifying either the case where the logic changes from LOW to HI or the falling edge (the logic changes from HI to LOW). The falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal. Incidentally, by connecting the EDGE terminal to +3.3V, a rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal is used to instruct whether or not to permit output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal), which will be described later. As described above, by grounding the OE terminal, the output is always enabled. Incidentally, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3V, no output will be possible.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and when both are grounded, the operation mode can be selected. The operation modes include normal mode and shakehand mode. In normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, are generated based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. In the normal operating mode, the door frame side production receiver ICSDIC0 restores the parallel signal consisting of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal): horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal. be. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. This is a mode in which a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). This shake hand mode is designed to switch automatically.

For example, three video signals (18-bit video signals), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, are generated based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. For some reason, the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 restores the parallel signal consisting of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal): horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal, and the error occurs. If it is difficult to draw data on the door frame side effect display device 460, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode and a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is a damping resistor, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and is input to the peripheral control board 1510 to control the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. The signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d in order to notify the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of this fact. Output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d connects to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for restoring is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the performance display drive board 4450 for the door frame side effect. Send to receiver ICSDIC0. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. Note that the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 are connected to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door. A direct electrical connection may be made via the relay terminal board 882.

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is a terminal that outputs a request to send a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the two. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is a damping resistor of the effect display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, The signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

The SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals output three synchronization signals: a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively. It is a terminal. In this embodiment, the three restored synchronization signals, the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal, are not used, so the SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals are unconnected terminals.

The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a DE signal that indicates whether a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and data output from terminals D0 to D17, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid, which will be described later. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via a resistor SDR3 which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal that outputs a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit built in the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via a resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

The D0 to D17 terminals receive three video signals (18 This is a data output terminal that outputs a bit video signal. Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals called D0 to D5 terminals in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line for the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA0. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals called D6 terminals to D11 terminals in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line for the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA1. Red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals called D12 to D17 terminals in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line for these red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA2.

The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected and are connected to the same ground. It has become.

[Mounting mode of each electronic component included in the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG]
Incidentally, it is generally known that surface mounting electronic components is advantageous in that it is possible to suitably downsize the hardware circuit through integration. However, among electronic components, integrated circuit components (components in which multiple types of single-function elements (resistance elements, diode elements, capacitor elements, etc.) are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package) By their nature, packages are naturally larger than discrete components (components in which a single functional element is enclosed in a relatively small package), creating a relatively large amount of space behind the package. In a surface-mounted state, the space on the back side of such a package becomes a location that is difficult to visually confirm (a location where electronic components (unauthorized components) are easily mounted illegally). For this reason, in the field of gaming machines, electronic components have been mounted on base boards (so-called base boards, etc.) by insertion rather than surface mounting for many years.

That is, electronic components that are inserted and mounted tend to create a relatively large gap between the package and the base plate. Therefore, by inserting and mounting electronic components, it is possible to maintain the space on the back side of the package as a place that is easy to visually check even in the mounted state, and this prevents unauthorized components from being mounted. This is done so that it is suitably suppressed.

However, in recent years, in the field of gaming machines, the spaces used for performances have become even larger, so it is necessary to downsize the hardware circuitry while maintaining security performance against unauthorized installation of electronic components. It is becoming necessary to take measures to achieve this goal.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, out of the first control section MCG and the second control section SCG shown in FIG. 69, the second control section only performs performance control regarding the game. In view of the fact that the SCG is not directly related to the benefits that the player obtains and is therefore unlikely to be subject to fraud, the second control unit SCG is constructed by surface mounting.

That is, as described above, the second control unit SCG according to this embodiment is configured to include the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. The second control unit SCG uses various integrated circuit components and various discrete components mounted on the base board of the peripheral control board 1510 to process the performance progress according to the result of the game progress process. is considered to be executable.

Here, various integrated circuit components mounted on the base board of the peripheral control board 1510 include, for example, a peripheral control MPU 1511a and a peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 72. Further, various discrete components mounted on the base board of the peripheral control board 1510 include, for example, resistors AR10 and AR11 shown in FIG. 79, a diode AD10, and an electrolytic capacitor AC10.

In this regard, in the second control unit SCG according to this embodiment, the lead parts of various electronic components are placed on the surface of the base plate (here, the base board of the peripheral control board 1510). Only the surface mount area to be mounted in the form is formed. That is, in this case, surface mount type components (SMD) are used as the above-mentioned various electronic components included in the peripheral control board 1510. However, since these electronic components are not directly related to the benefits that players receive and are unlikely to be subject to fraud, it is possible to prevent unauthorized installation of electronic components without compromising security performance. It becomes possible to downsize the hardware circuit installed in the pachinko machine 1.

On the other hand, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment is configured to include the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931, as shown in FIG. The first control unit MCG uses various integrated circuit components and various discrete components mounted on the base boards of these boards 1310, 951, and 931 to control the control power supply (for example, +5V, etc.). Game-related processing including generation processing and payout of prize balls can be executed. However, since such processing on the side of the first control unit MCG is directly connected to awarding benefits to the player, the first control unit MCG is easily targeted by fraud. Therefore, although there is a need to downsize the hardware circuit, if the first control unit MCG is simply integrated by surface mounting, the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components will be significantly degraded, and the enjoyment of the game will be greatly reduced. The reality is that a decline in the economy is becoming inevitable.

However, on the other hand, even such a first control unit MCG is mounted on its base board (the base board of the main control board 1310, the base board of the payout control board 951, the base board of the power supply board 931). Among various electronic components, discrete components have smaller packages than integrated circuit components, and even if an electronic component is illegally mounted on the back side, it can be easily confirmed visually. It can be said that this component has relatively high performance in terms of security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components.

That is, the inventor discovered that among the electronic components installed in the first control unit MCG, there are components with high security performance against fraud (discrete components) and components with low security performance against fraud (integrated circuit components). If we focus on the fact that there is a problem and try to further integrate the hardware circuit using only components with high security performance against fraud (discrete components), even on the first control unit MCG side, which is easily targeted by fraud, We have discovered that it is possible to downsize the hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components.

FIG. 117 is a diagram schematically showing how the first control unit MCG is integrated with only components (discrete components) with high security performance against fraud. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 117, it is possible to downsize the hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components even on the first control unit MCG side, which is easily subject to fraud. I will explain why.

As shown in FIG. 117, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment includes a base plate BB and various electronic components D mounted on the base plate BB. . Note that FIG. 117 is only a schematic diagram for explaining the principle of the characteristic technology of the present application, and for example, the base board BB is actually the base board of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board. Although it is configured with three base substrates, a base substrate of 951 and a base substrate of power supply substrate 931, an example in which the characteristic technology of the present application is applied to such an embodiment will be described later. First, for convenience of explanation, an example in which they are configured by one base substrate will be described here.

Here, on the base plate BB,
・An insertion mounting area TH in which the lead part provided on the electronic component is inserted into the base plate BB and is inferior in integration performance but excellent in fraud prevention performance;
- The surface mounting area SM has excellent integration performance but poor tamper prevention performance due to multi-layered wiring patterns, etc., where the lead part provided on the electronic component is mounted on the surface of the base board BB. Both are separated into sections.

According to such a configuration, electronic components that are difficult to be targeted for tampering can be mounted in the surface mounting area SM, while electronic components that should be pursued to prevent tampering rather than integration can be mounted on the insertion mounting area TH side. As a result, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining a good performance in suppressing mounting of unauthorized components.

That is, as described above, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, as the various electronic components D,
・An integrated circuit component D1 in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and sealed in a relatively large package, and has low security performance against unauthorized installation;
- A single-function element is simply enclosed in a relatively small package, and it is equipped with a discrete component D2 that has high security performance against unauthorized mounting.

In this regard, as a characteristic first technique according to the present application, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, the integrated circuit component D1 with low security performance is connected to the insertion mounting area TH and the surface. Among the mounting area SM, the components are mounted only in the insertion mounting area TH, which has excellent tamper prevention performance, and in the surface mount area SM, which has poor tamper suppression performance, only the discrete components with high security performance are mounted. This makes it possible to downsize the hardware circuitry while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components even on the first control unit MCG side, which is likely to be subject to fraud.

In addition, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, a surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted in the surface mount area SM is used as the discrete component D2 with high security performance. , and an insertion mounting type discrete component D2b mounted in the insertion mounting area TH.

That is, as mentioned above, with regard to electronic components, it is generally better to use surface mount types rather than insertion mount types to achieve greater integration. However, if the base plate BB is provided with both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM, the position where the electrically connected integrated circuit component D1 is provided, for example, is determined based on the circuit design. Considering the space required for wiring patterns related to this, it may be possible to achieve greater integration by arranging electronic components in the insertion mounting area TH rather than in the surface mounting area SM. Cases may also occur.

In this regard, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment does not use all of the discrete components D2 as surface-mounted discrete components D2a, but instead uses them in the most suitable manner for integration. Insertion mounting type discrete components D2b are intentionally used in some parts. As a result, it is expected that it will be possible to more appropriately downsize the hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 117, the insertion mounting area TH, which has excellent tamper suppression performance, is not formed on one side (back side) of the board, but is formed on the other side (front side) of the board, so that the insertion mounting area TH has excellent tamper suppression performance. and integrated circuit components are respectively mounted. On the other hand, the surface mount area SM, which has poor tamper suppression performance, is not formed on one side (back side) of the board, but is formed on the other side (front side) to prevent the integration between integrated circuit components and discrete components. It is desirable that my integrated circuit components not be mounted, but only discrete components. That is, in this case, first, mounting electronic components on the back surface side, which is likely to become a blind spot when confirming whether a fraudulent component is mounted, is eliminated. Then, in the insertion mounting area TH, which has excellent fraud prevention performance, both integrated circuit components, which are easily targeted by fraud, and discrete components, which are difficult to be targeted by fraud, are mounted. Since it was decided to mount only discrete components that are unlikely to be targeted by unauthorized persons in the inferior surface mount area SM, it is expected that the hardware circuit can be made smaller while maintaining the performance of suppressing the mounting of unauthorized components. It becomes like this.

Furthermore, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. For power supplies, etc.), the surface mount area is It is not used as a surface mount type discrete component D2a to be mounted on the SM, but is prepared only as an insertion mount type discrete component D2b-C to be mounted in the insertion mount area TH. This makes it possible to better maintain security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components when downsizing the hardware circuit.

However, although the capacitor element with a large capacitance value is larger than other elements (discrete components), compared to the integrated circuit component D1, there is not that much of a gap between the package and the base plate. . Therefore, the capacitor element may be used as a surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted in the surface mount area SM, and even in this case, security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components can be maintained. is possible.

Moreover, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment incorporates a second characteristic technique that is developed from a different viewpoint from the first characteristic technique according to the present application described above. ing.

That is, as shown in FIG. 117, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment includes one hardware circuit for the purpose of performing a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). It has a discrete circuit (hardware circuit that does not use the integrated circuit component D1) DHC that is electrically configured by the discrete component D2. However, this discrete circuit DHC is provided with an electrical structure constituted by a plurality of discrete components D2 mounted in an insertion mounting area TH and a surface mounting area SM, respectively.

That is, in this case, although the discrete circuit DHC is intended to perform a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function), the mounting in the insertion mounting area TH is not performed on the base board BB. The electronic component D2b having a shape that allows mounting on the surface mounting area SM and the electronic component D2a having a shape that allows mounting on the surface mounting area SM coexist. Therefore, when a third party visually recognizes the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, it is clear that the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG has a close electrical role in order to perform a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). By making it more difficult to understand circuits, it can be expected that fraud will be suppressed. Further, since some electronic components are mounted on the surface mounting area SM, it can be expected that the hardware circuit will be made smaller.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suppressing fraud on electronic components.

However, as mentioned above, the example shown in FIG. 117 is for explaining the principles of two characteristic technologies according to the present application. explain.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the base board BB of the first control unit MCG includes the base board of the main control board 1310, the base board of the payout control board 951, and the base board of the power supply board 931. It is configured with three base substrates. Both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided on these base substrates in a divided manner.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, only the insertion mounting area TH is formed on the power supply board 931 among the three base boards, and the base board of the main control board 1310 is In the substrate and the base substrate of the dispensing control board 951, both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided in a separated manner.

Of the various electronic components D mounted on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, the diode MD0 (Fig. 75 ) is mounted as a surface mount type discrete component D2a on the surface mount area SM of the base board of the main control board 1310. Similarly, the diode PD0 (see FIG. 75) of the above-mentioned "backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the RAM with built-in payout control" is mounted on the surface of the base board of the payout control board 951. It is assumed that the area SM is mounted as a surface-mount type discrete component D2a.

According to this configuration, of the integrated circuit component D1 with low security performance and the discrete component D2 with high security performance, only the discrete component D2 (diode MD0, diode PD0) is used as a surface-mount type discrete component D2a. They are respectively mounted on the surface mounting area SM (main control board 1310, payout control board 951). This makes it possible to downsize the hardware circuitry while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components, even on the first control unit MCG side, which is easily subject to fraud. The first characteristic technology of the present application).

Furthermore, in the example applied to this embodiment, a specific type of discrete component (here, both the diode MD0 and the diode PD0 are Schottky Only a plurality of diode elements) will be mounted. That is, in this case, the electronic components mounted in the surface mounting area SM, which is inferior in fraud prevention performance, all have the same shape, and therefore it is expected that the effort required for fraud confirmation can be saved.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, the discrete components (electronic components that play a part of the power supply function) that the power supply board 931 should originally have are deliberately mounted on a board (main control board 1310) that is different from the power supply board 931. I have to. That is, even if there is not enough space to form the surface mount area SM on the power supply board 931, it is possible to form the surface mount area SM on another board and mount it there as a surface mount type discrete component D2. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in circuit design of the first control unit MCG as a whole.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, one discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) has a plurality of discrete components D2 (here, a capacitor element and a Schottky diode element) for the purpose of exhibiting a backup power supply function. However, the plurality of discrete components D2 constituting the discrete circuit DHC are separately mounted in an insertion mounting area TH (capacitor element) and a surface mounting area SM (Schottky diode element). It is said that

According to such a configuration, although the discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) is designed to perform a backup power supply function, the insertion mounting area TH (power supply board 931), and the electronic component D2a, which has a shape that allows mounting on the surface mounting area SM (main control board 1310, delivery control board 951), are mixed. become. Therefore, when a third party visually recognizes the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, it is clear that the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG has a close electrical role in order to perform a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). By making it more difficult to understand the circuit, fraud can be expected to be suppressed (the second characteristic technology of the present application).

Moreover, in the example applied to this embodiment, a plurality of discrete components D2 included in one discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) for the purpose of exhibiting a backup power supply function are inserted into the mounting area TH (capacitor element). In addition to separately mounting the discrete components D2 on the surface mounting area SM (Schottky diode element) and the surface mounting area SM (Schottky diode element), it is also possible to mount these discrete components D2 on two different boards (main control board 1310, payout control board 951 (Schottky diode element), power supply board 931 (capacitor element).In other words, in this case, the electronic components D2a and D2b, which are mixed for surface mounting and insertion mounting, are mounted on different base boards, respectively. As a result, it becomes increasingly difficult to understand circuits, and fraud can be expected to be further suppressed.

In the above embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 117, the mounting surface of the surface mounting area SM on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the same as that of the insertion mounting area TH on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG. It is provided so that the area is smaller than the mounting surface. Therefore, it becomes difficult for a third party to notice that the surface mounting region SM, which is inferior in fraud prevention performance, is provided, and fraud can be expected to be suppressed.

Further, in the above embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 117, the number of types of electronic components mounted on the surface mounting area SM on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is The number of electronic components is smaller than the number of types of electronic components mounted in the insertion mounting area TH in BB. Therefore, the number of types of electronic components that are subject to visual checks to determine whether unauthorized acts have been performed on electronic components mounted on the surface mount area SM, which has relatively poor security performance, is relatively reduced. This allows for easier visual checks.

Further, in the above embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 117, the total number of electronic components mounted on the surface mounting area SM on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is The number of electronic components mounted in the insertion mounting area TH is smaller than the total number of electronic components mounted in the insertion mounting area TH. Therefore, the total number of electronic components that are subject to visual checks to determine whether unauthorized acts have been performed on electronic components mounted in the surface mount area, which has relatively poor security performance, is relatively reduced. , it becomes possible to reduce the burden on visual checks.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the surface mounting area SM is provided on the base board of the main control board 1310 and the base board of the payout control board 951, respectively. may be formed.

Further, the surface mount area SM is formed only on a specific base board, and the surface mount type discrete components D2 that should originally be mounted on other base boards are also arranged on the specific base board. Good too. According to such a configuration, when confirming whether or not unauthorized mounting has been carried out, it is only necessary to check only the surface mounting area SM formed on a specific base board, which reduces the possibility of unauthorized mounting. It is expected that the required effort will be saved.

However, considering that the integrated circuit component D1 is mounted on any of the three base substrates mentioned above, in order to appropriately suppress fraud, at least an insertion mounting area TH must be formed on any of the three base substrates. Must be.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the base board BB of the first control unit MCG is connected to the base board of the main control board 1310, the base board of the payout control board 951, and the base board of the power supply board 931. Although it is configured by three base substrates, they may be configured together on one base substrate as schematically shown in FIG. 117.

In addition, the "base plate BB of the first control unit MCG" according to the present application may be any type as long as the surface mounting area SM and the insertion mounting area TH are separated, and this is provided by a plurality of base boards. Alternatively, it may be provided using one base substrate.

For example, the base board of the main control board 1310 may include a first base board on which only the insertion mounting area TH is formed, and a second base board on which only the surface mounting area SM is formed. By inserting and mounting the board into the insertion mounting area TH of the first base board, the electronic parts inserted and mounted on the first base board can be mounted while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components. It may be assumed that a structure is adopted in which the component and the electronic component surface-mounted on the second base board are electrically connected to each other. The term "board BB" is a concept that includes at least both a first base substrate on which only the insertion mounting area TH is formed and a second base substrate on which only the surface mounting area SM is formed. In other words, this aspect is also one of the aspects such as "the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is provided with both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM in a manner that they are separated from each other." It is included as an aspect.

Note that when the first base substrate is provided with only the insertion mounting area TH and the second base substrate is formed with only the surface mounting area SM, the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are It is desirable that the first base substrate and the second base substrate are respectively disposed so that they face different directions (preferably, perpendicular directions).

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the electronic component is enclosed in a relatively small package as a component (surface mount component) mounted in the surface mount area SM, which has poor fraud prevention performance. By using only discrete components, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while eliminating the space required to mount unauthorized components (reducing the space on the back side).

However, even with such a discrete component (surface mount component) with excellent security performance, there is a small space on the back side that is difficult to visually confirm when mounted in the surface mount area SM. still remains. Therefore, the hall side that operates and manages Pachinko machine 1 understands that ``there is no space left behind the discrete components (surface-mounted components) to mount unauthorized components.'' However, it is impossible to completely give up the anxiety that an extremely small unauthorized part may be produced and installed illegally, and in a situation where it is difficult to confirm by visual inspection. There is a concern that the operation and management of the pachinko machine 1 will become complicated, such as being forced to perform confirmations.

Therefore, it is more desirable to provide each base board of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 in the following manner instead of the above-mentioned manner.

[Modifications of each base board of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951]
FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a partial area of the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to the modification. Hereinafter, a modification of the base board MB of the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIG. 118. Although a description of the modification of the base board of the payout control board 951 will be omitted, it can be modified in the same manner as the base board MB of the main control board 1310 described below.

As shown in FIG. 118, the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification is configured to include at least an insertion mounting board THB which is inferior in integration performance but excellent in fraud prevention performance.

Also in the insertion mounting board THB according to this modification, a plurality of types of electronic components (insertion mounting components) are mounted in an inserted manner, similar to the insertion mounting board TH of the above embodiment. Similarly, these electronic components (insertion mounted components) include both the integrated circuit component D1 with low security performance and the discrete component D2b with high security performance.

However, as is clear from FIG. 118, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, the insertion mounting board THB and the insertion mounting lead part are inserted into the insertion mounting board THB. The electronic components mounted in the form of That is, although the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification has a surface mounting area and a surface mounting component mounted in the area, at first glance, it is difficult to see which of them. We have adopted a special mounting structure that makes it appear that there are no components installed.

More specifically, the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification includes not only the integrated circuit component D1 and the discrete component D2b as the insertion mounted components, but also the special mounting component D3 (in the figure, the special mounting component D3a and special mounting component D3b). Although this special mounting component D3 contains an electronic component (surface mount component) mounted in a surface mount area with poor tamper prevention performance, it is hidden from the insertion mounting board THB. It is designed to be inserted and mounted via a special insertion mounting lead part TL which will be described later.

According to such a special mounting component D3, although a surface mount area and an electronic component (surface mount component) mounted in the surface mount area, which will be described later, are provided inside the special mount component D3, it is difficult to prevent fraud. Since it has an external appearance that looks like a single insertion mounting component mounted on the insertion mounting board THB, which has excellent performance, it is expected that it will be excluded from the target components for fraudulent purposes by malicious parties. become possible. In addition, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, the part of the insertion mounting board THB where such a special mounting component D3 is inserted and mounted is a surface mounting board on which a surface mount component is mounted. It will function as an area.

Moreover, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, such special mounting components D3 are not arranged in one place (adjacent) but in multiple places on the base board MB. At least one of the special mounting components D3 (special mounting component D3a in the figure) is arranged so as to be surrounded by a relatively large area (insertion mounting area) in which the insertion mounting components D1 and D2b are inserted and mounted. We are planning to establish a

In other words, in this case, the surface mount area, which has poor tamper prevention performance, and the electronic components (surface mount components) mounted in the surface mount area are divided into smaller parts and become less noticeable, and in combination with the above-mentioned external shape, the tamper prevention performance is affected. Since the surface mounting area can be easily blended into the insertion mounting area, which is provided as a relatively large area, when a malicious person looks at the base board MB of the main control board 1310, the surface mounting area exists. It is now possible to make it even more difficult to notice, and as a result, it is expected that the hardware circuit can be made smaller while maintaining better performance in suppressing the mounting of unauthorized parts.

As will be described later, a diode MD0 (see FIG. 75) as a surface mount type discrete component D2a shown in FIG. 117 is enclosed inside the special mounting component D3a according to this modification. As described above, such diode MD0 is used in one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) intended to perform a backup power supply function. Nevertheless, even in this modification, regarding the plurality of discrete components constituting one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit), there is an insertion mounting area (capacitor element (capacitor BC0)) and a surface mounting area (Schottky diode element). (diode MD0))) and are mounted separately. Moreover, the capacitor element (capacitor BC0) inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area is located at a position (such as the power supply board 931) that is not adjacent to the special mounting component D3a containing the Schottky diode element (diode MD0) in the insertion mounting area. It will be implemented in .

In this way, it is made difficult to remember that the electronic component built into the special mounting component D3a performs a specific electrical function (backup power supply function), increasing the difficulty in understanding the circuit. As a result, fraud can be expected to be suppressed even if it is noticed that there is a surface mount area with poor fraud prevention performance.

Next, an example of the structure of the special mounting component D3a according to this modification will be explained. In addition, for convenience of explanation, in FIG. 118, the part where the special mounting component D3a is mounted is enlarged, and a part of the outer package OP of the special mounting component D3a is omitted to expose its internal structure. Contains diagrams (area surrounded by dotted lines).

As shown in the same explanatory diagram, the special mount component D3a according to this modification includes a special surface mount board SMB as a surface mount board on which a surface mount type electronic component (surface mount component) is mounted; A surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted on the special surface mount board SMB, and a special insertion mounting lead part as a lead part for insertion mounting inserted into the through hole (specific insertion hole) of the insertion mounting board THB. It includes a TL and an outer package OP in which each of these parts is molded with a molding resin.

Here, the special surface mount board SMB electrically connects the surface mount lead part SL provided on the electronic component (surface mount type discrete component D2a) to be mounted on the board and the special insertion mounting lead part TL. It has a wiring pattern HP formed so as to be connected to each other, and is provided so that its mounting surface is approximately orthogonal to the mounting surface of the insertion mounting board THB.

The surface area of the mounting surface of the special surface mount board SMB remains large enough to mount the surface mount type discrete component D2a, and is necessary when, for example, the integrated circuit component configuring the main control MPU 1310a is mounted. It is designed to have a mounting surface that is smaller than the area assumed to be. In other words, in the insertion mounting board THB, even when all the electronic components required to operate the pachinko machine 1 are mounted, there is still enough space left to mount other electronic components. In order to reduce the size of the surface mount board SMB, when the electronic component to be mounted (surface mount type discrete component D2a) is mounted, there is not enough free space to mount other electronic components. Not left.

With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to carry out any kind of fraud on the special surface mount board SMB, so it is possible to further reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suppressing the mounting of unauthorized components. become expected.

Further, the surface mount type discrete component D2a has a package structure (inner package) in which itself is molded with a molding resin. Inside, a Schottky diode element (diode MD0) included in one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) is electrically connected to the surface mounting lead portion SL by a bonding wire. That is, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is provided with the surface mount lead portion SL formed so as to be drawn out to the outside of the inner package (molded resin). By being electrically connected to the special insertion mounting lead part TL via the wiring pattern HP formed on the special surface mounting board SMB, it can be connected to other electronic components mounted on the insertion mounting board THB. The above-mentioned Schottky diode element (diode MD0) is electrically connected so that mutually cooperative processing can be performed.

Furthermore, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is provided with a flat external shape (package shape), and is soldered with its flat surface facing the special surface mount board SMB. It is surface mounted. However, as described above, the special surface mount board SMB on which the surface mount type discrete component D2a is mounted has a mounting surface that is approximately perpendicular to the mounting surface of the insertion mounting board THB. Therefore, the surface mount type discrete component D2a provided in the special mounting component D3 faces the insertion mounting board THB not by its flat surface but by its thinner surface (thinner surface). It will be implemented in a concrete manner.

In such a configuration, instead of a flat surface having a relatively large area, a thin surface having a relatively small area faces the insertion mounting board THB. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 118, only a small area (two through holes) is left on the insertion mounting board THB where one discrete component (insertion mounting type) can be mounted. Even in a situation where the special mounting component D3 is not mounted, it becomes possible to arrange the special mounting component D3 in the small area (corresponding to two through holes).

The size of the surface mount type discrete component D2a according to this modification (horizontal length in the figure) is the same as that when the special mounting component D3a is mounted on the insertion mounting board THB. The pitch is smaller than the pitch between the through holes into which the special insertion mounting lead portion TL is inserted (the installation interval of specific insertion holes).

Further, the special insertion mounting lead part TL has a bifurcated structure in which one end side sandwiches the special surface mount board SMB from both sides, and the wiring pattern HP is formed on the special surface mount board SMB. By soldering at the location where it is located, it is fixed to the special surface mount board SMB and is electrically connected to the surface mount lead part SL via the wiring pattern HP. . On the other hand, the other end side is fixed to the insertion mounting board THB by being soldered while being inserted into the through hole of the insertion mounting board THB, and the other end side is fixed to the insertion mounting board THB. It is designed to be electrically connected to various electronic components through the wiring pattern.

Furthermore, although the surface mount type discrete component D2a itself has a package structure (inner package) in which the surface mount type discrete component D2a itself is molded with a mold resin, the outer package OP is made of a mold resin different from the mold resin. Accordingly, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is further molded (double molded) together with the special surface mount board SMB to be mounted.

With such a configuration, it becomes extremely difficult to carry out any kind of fraud on the surface mount board, which has poor fraud prevention performance.

In particular, in the special mounting component D3a according to this modification, the external shape created by the outer package OP of the double mold is different from the external shape of the specific type of surface mount component itself that is surface mounted inside. . In other words, in this case, since the discrete component D2a can be mounted while its external shape is hidden, it is possible to prevent the specific type of surface mount component built into the special mounting component D3a from being mounted. This will make it more difficult to understand circuits, such as making it look like a ``digital image'', and may be expected to suppress fraud.

Moreover, of the special insertion mounting lead part TL and the surface mounting lead part SL provided inside the outer package OP, only the special insertion mounting lead part TL is made of the outer package OP (molded resin). The surface mount type discrete component D2a is integrally molded with the special surface mount board SMB so that it can be pulled out to the outside of the board. It is designed to be mounted on the insertion mounting board THB as one electronic component having a lead portion TL for use in the electronic device.

According to such a configuration, even though a surface mount board with inferior tamper suppression performance and an electronic component (surface mount component) mounted on the board are provided inside, the special mount component D3a is Since it will be possible to function as if it were a single insertion component mounted in the insertion mounting area, which has excellent fraud suppression performance, it is expected that it will be excluded from malicious purposes for fraudulent purposes. become possible. Furthermore, in terms of logistics and mounting, it can be handled in the same way as an insertion-mount type discrete component, so it can be said that it is excellent in terms of ease of handling.

Furthermore, the outer package OP is mounted with a mold resin different from the mold resin of the discrete component D2a itself, with respect to the surface mount type discrete component D2a whose width is smaller than the pitch between the through holes. By integrally molding it with the targeted special surface mount board SMB, it is possible to give it the appearance of a single electronic component whose size does not fit within the pitch between through holes.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 117, if a surface mount type discrete component is left with an external shape that is smaller than the pitch between through holes in the insertion mounting area (insertion hole installation interval), the main control board It becomes easy for a third party to notice that the base board MB of 1310 is provided with a surface mount area with poor fraud prevention performance, which may further encourage fraudulent acts.

In this regard, in the above configuration, the surface mount type discrete component D2a, which has a width smaller than the pitch between the through holes, is treated as an electronic component whose size does not fit within the pitch between the through holes. I try to implement it after giving it an external shape. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 118, there is no electronic component on the base board MB of the main control board 1310 that has an external shape whose width is smaller than the pitch between the through holes, and it is difficult to insert and mount the electronic component. Since it becomes possible to make it appear as if only the type of electronic component (insertion mounted component) is mounted, it is possible to improve the performance of suppressing mounting of unauthorized components.

Furthermore, the external shape created by such an outer package OP is not only different from the external shape of the electronic components surface-mounted inside, but also the external shape of all the insertion mounting components (special It has a unique external shape that is different from any of the electronic components (excluding the mounted component D3). In other words, the special mounting component D3a according to this modification has excessive security performance such as protection with double molded resin, compared to the simple discrete component D2a that can only have a limited function compared to an arithmetic processing device or the like. In addition, it is designed to have a unique and relatively large external shape to intentionally attract the attention of malicious persons.

According to such a configuration, the excessive security performance implemented on the base board MB of the main control board 1310 can be shown to a third party, thereby reducing the motivation to commit fraudulent acts. can be expected.

Furthermore, an identification number indicating the type of electronic component as the special mounting component D3a is attached to the outer package OP, but in this modification, the content of the identification number (○3213) is set to the inner package ( It is made to be different from the content (SD) of the identification number attached to the surface mount type discrete component D2a) mounted on the special surface mount board SMB.

According to such a configuration, the content (SD) of the identification number assigned to a specific type of surface mount component will not appear, so the external shape created by the outer package OP and the internal surface mount component will not appear. Coupled with the fact that the external shape of the specific type of surface mount component is different (coupled with the double mold structure), it becomes possible to make it appear that the specific type of surface mount component is not mounted. Moreover, it becomes possible to make it appear as if only insertion-mounted electronic components (insertion-mounted components) are mounted, and it becomes possible to improve the performance of suppressing mounting of unauthorized components.

Further, in the special mounting component D3a according to this modification, the length in the thickness direction of the special surface mount board SMB is made smaller than the length in the thickness direction of the surface mount type discrete component D2a. On top of this, a mounting surface on which electronic components and wiring patterns are provided is formed only on one side of the flat surface of the special surface mount board SMB, and a molding resin is directly attached to the back side of the mounting surface. It has become.

In other words, by adopting such a configuration, not only can a unique and asymmetric external shape be formed, but also an insertion mounting type in which the length of the special mounting component D3a in the thickness direction is mounted in the insertion mounting area TH. It is smaller than the length in the thickness direction of the discrete component D2b. This, combined with the above-mentioned structure in which the mounting surfaces are orthogonal to each other, eliminates the need to secure a special mounting space when mounting the special mounting component D3a on the insertion mounting board THB, and The special mounting component D3a can be mixed in while the insertion mounting component is being mounted.

As mentioned above, the special mounting component D3a according to this modification example appears to be a single insertion mounting type discrete component, but in reality it is a special surface mounting board SMB and a surface mounting type discrete component. D2a and D2a are contained therein. That is, in the special mounting component D3a, the special insertion mounting lead part TL is fixed to the special surface mounting board SMB inside thereof, and is electrically connected to the surface mounting lead part SL via the wiring pattern HP. On the other hand, insertion mounting components have a structure in which a lead portion for insertion mounting is electrically connected to a specific electronic component by a bonding wire inside the insertion mounting component.

Furthermore, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, as shown in FIG. 118, a Schottky diode element (diode MD0) is internally installed as a special mounting component D3 having such an internal structure. In addition to the special mounting component D3a that is surface mounted, a special mounting component D3b that internally has a capacitor element with a small capacitance mounted on the surface is provided.

That is, the special mounting component D3b according to this modification has a filter for a specific data line between it and the discrete component D2b provided as a resistance element among the insertion mounting type discrete components D2b mounted in the insertion mounting area TH. It forms a circuit. Even in the configuration of such a filter circuit, remember that the electronic components included in one discrete circuit have a close electrical role in order to perform a specific electrical function (filter function). By increasing the difficulty of circuit understanding, fraud can be expected to be suppressed.

As for the special mounting component D3b, both the resistive element and the capacitor element constituting the filter circuit may be internally surface-mounted on the special surface mounting board SMB. However, in this case, each electronic component is arranged side by side in a line, and at least the electronic component (insertion mounting component) that is the tallest among the electronic components (insertion mounting component) to be inserted and mounted on the insertion mounting board THB ( For example, it is desirable to keep the external shape lower than that of the capacitor element (which is omitted in the figure) in order to reduce the size of the base board MB of the main control board 1310.

Further, the special mounting component D3 may include a plurality of types of electronic components built-in as described above, or may include a plurality of one type of electronic components built-in. In any case, if multiple electronic components are built-in, the multiple electronic components should be surface-mounted side by side in a row on one special surface mount board SMB, and the electronic components should be It is desirable to package the components and the special surface mount board SMB by molding them with a molding resin.

However, if multiple electronic components are built into the special mounting component D3, its external shape will naturally become larger. There is a concern that it will no longer be possible to expect dazzling effects based on preconceived notions such as "It's probably an insert-mount type discrete component." Therefore, in order to suitably obtain a dazzling effect that takes advantage of such preconceptions, it is necessary to make a single surface-mount type discrete component have a different external shape by using the above-mentioned double mold structure, and also to increase its thickness. It is desirable to mount it with the surface facing the insertion mounting board TH.

In addition to forming the above-mentioned double-molded outer package OP with a non-transparent material such as mold resin, it is also possible to attach an identification number to the outer package that is different from the identification number attached to one surface-mount type discrete component itself. It can also be said that it is important to increase the difficulty of understanding the circuit by attaching it to the OP.

Note that the special mounting component D3 according to this modification has a structure in which it has "one surface mount type discrete component" which is smaller than "one insertion mounting type discrete component". When double-molded, the size is about the same as that of ``an insertion-mount type discrete component,'' and it can be expected to have the excellent functions and effects described above. . Therefore, in a configuration in which "one insertion-mounting type discrete component" is double-molded, its size will be larger than "one insertion-mounting type discrete component". Since this is clear, it cannot be expected to produce the excellent effects described above.

The techniques described above will be summarized below with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. It should be noted that each content described below can be adopted by any of the technology and its other examples described with reference to FIG. 117, and the technology and its other examples described with reference to FIG. 118, unless otherwise specified. This is the structure that is considered to be, and the effects that can be achieved.

As mentioned above, the technology explained with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118 is as follows.
・It has a board on which multiple electronic components are mounted, and by using these electronic components, it is possible to generate control power (for example, +5V) as well as process the game progress, including the payout of prize balls. and a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and by using these electronic components, effects related to the game proceeded by the first control section MCG are provided. Second control unit SCG
The aim is to solve the problem of ``miniaturizing the hardware circuitry while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components'' in gaming machines equipped with this technology. .

More specifically, in the technique described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, first, "out of the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG shown in FIG. The second control unit SCG is not directly related to the benefits that players receive, and is therefore unlikely to be subject to fraud. One of its technical features is that it is constructed only by surface mounting. In other words, in this case, surface mount type components (SMD) will be used as the various electronic components for mounting mentioned above that the peripheral control board 1510 has, but these electronic components for mounting will be provided by the player. Since it is not directly related to the award and is difficult to be targeted for fraud, the hardware circuit installed in the pachinko machine 1 can be installed without compromising security performance against unauthorized installation of electronic components for mounting. This makes it possible to downsize the device.

On the other hand, since the processing on the side of the first control unit MCG is directly connected to awarding benefits to the player, the first control unit MCG is easily targeted by fraud. Therefore, although there is a need to downsize the hardware circuit, if the first control unit MCG is simply integrated by surface mounting, the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components will be significantly reduced. The reality is that a decline in interest in games is inevitable.

Therefore, in the technique described with reference to FIG. 117 and FIG. 118, on the substrate of the first control unit MCG,
・An insertion mounting area in which a lead part provided on an electronic component for mounting is inserted into the base plate BB, and has an inferior integration performance but an excellent tamper prevention performance;
・Surface mounting area in which the lead part of the electronic component for mounting is placed on the surface of the base board BB, and although it has excellent integration performance due to multi-layered wiring patterns, it has poor tamper prevention performance. We are planning to establish both. Based on this, the technical feature is to selectively mount the following two types of electronic components with different properties into the insertion mounting area or the surface mounting area with the above-mentioned properties in a manner that can solve the above-mentioned problems. It is one of the

・Integrated circuit components where multiple types of single-function devices are integrated and encapsulated in a relatively large package, and have low security performance against unauthorized installation. ・Single-function devices are encapsulated in a relatively small package. It is a discrete component with high security performance against unauthorized installation.

More specifically, the first control unit MCG mounts the integrated circuit component with low security performance only in the insertion mounting area which has excellent fraud prevention performance between the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area. At the same time, in the surface mounting area, which has poor fraud prevention performance, only the discrete components with high security performance are mounted. This makes it possible to downsize the hardware circuitry while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components even on the first control unit MCG side, which is likely to be the target of fraud.

However, even if the configuration is such that the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting is maintained, the board owned by the first control unit MCG is likely to be the target of unauthorized tampering. There is no difference. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 7, FIG. ), and is preferably disposed with its mounting surface (flat surface) facing the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. In other words, in this case, the transparent cover member not only makes it difficult to tamper with the mounting surface (flat surface), but also allows the first control unit MCG to be opened simply by opening the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2. Since it will be possible to monitor (visually) whether fraudulent components are mounted on the board (first board) on which integrated circuit components that are easily targeted for fraud are mounted, fraudulent components will be detected. This makes it possible to suitably ensure the suppression performance and ease of monitoring of the mounting of the vehicle.

Note that in order to obtain such effects, as shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, electronic components for mounting are not mounted on one side (back side) of the board included in the first control unit MCG. First, the electronic component for mounting is mounted only on the other side (front side), and the electronic component is covered with the transparent cover member (various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, etc.). It goes without saying that the pachinko machine 1 should be disposed with its other side (front side) facing toward the rear side.

Furthermore, in view of the fact that the main control board 1310 in the first control unit MCG is a part that performs processing directly connected to awarding benefits to players, the first control unit MCG has the above-mentioned configurations. Among the substrates, it is particularly desirable to apply the present invention to each substrate included in the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, in order to better maintain security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting, first, an insertion mounting area with excellent tamper prevention performance is formed as a board of the main control board 1310 so that integrated circuit components cannot be mounted. At least a first board on which both the discrete components and the discrete components are inserted and mounted, and a second board on which the integrated circuit components are not mounted and the discrete components are surface-mounted because a surface mounting area with poor tamper suppression performance is formed. Make it. Among these boards, the first board is covered with the transparent cover member (various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, etc.), and the first board is covered with the one side (on which electronic components are not mounted). The second board is arranged so that the other side of the back side) and the other side (the front side on which electronic components are mounted) face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. In this case, neither the one side surface (the back side where electronic components are not mounted) and the other side surface (the front side where electronic components are mounted) face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 and are perpendicular thereto. It is desirable that the device be placed so that it faces in the direction of In other words, in this case, the presence of the surface mounting area (second board), which has poor anti-tampering performance, can be made difficult to see from the rear side, so security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting can be improved. will be expected to be maintained.

However, even with this configuration, if a malicious person becomes obsessed with whether a surface mount area with poor fraud prevention performance is formed somewhere, the surface mounting area with poor fraud prevention performance may There is a concern that the second substrate on which the mounting area is formed may be noticed. In this case, although only the discrete components with high security performance among the integrated circuit components and the discrete components are mounted on the surface mounting area of the second board, there may be a fraudulent act that the hall side has not yet thought of. (For example, if an extremely small fraudulent chip is developed), it could lead to losses.

Therefore, regarding the other side (front side) of the first board where both integrated circuit components and discrete components are inserted and mounted to the insertion mounting area that has excellent tamper prevention performance, it is necessary to The surface mounting area, which has poor performance, is intentionally formed on the same surface (front side). Then, the other side (front side) of the first board is attached to the pachinko machine with no electronic components mounted on the surface mount area and the pattern wiring as the surface mount area exposed. It is desirable to arrange it so that it faces the rear side of 1. In other words, in this case, the surface mounting area of the other side (front side) of the first board, which is arranged so as to face the rear side, is the area where a malicious person attempts to commit a fraudulent act from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. ``We do not mount any electronic components in the surface mount area, which has poor fraud prevention performance, and this pachinko machine 1 has a high fraud prevention performance.'' As a result, a malicious person can be discouraged from trying to find the second board on which the surface mount area is formed, which is inferior in tamper prevention performance. Note that it is desirable that the surface mounting area formed on the first substrate be provided at a position (such as an end of the first substrate) where its presence can be easily noticed when looking at the first substrate.

Also, regarding the pattern wiring as a surface mounting area formed on the first substrate, does it have an independent shape that is not electrically connected between the surface mounting area and the insertion mounting area formed on the same surface? Although it is electrically connected to the insertion mounting area, it is formed so that even if an unauthorized component is mounted on the surface mounting area, the insertion mounting area will not be affected (the game will not proceed). (e.g., on an output signal that does not need to be used above). On the other hand, in the second board according to this illustrative example, unlike the first board, only the surface mount area, which has poor tamper suppression performance, is formed among the insertion mounting area and the surface mount area. Mounting electronic components (here, discrete components) are surface mounted on the surface mounting area.

Furthermore, even if each of the above-mentioned configurations is adopted, there is a possibility that a malicious person will find out the "second board on which discrete components are surface-mounted in the surface-mount area, which has poor fraud prevention performance." Gender cannot be completely eliminated. Therefore, among the surface mount areas that the main control board 1310 has, "the surface mount area that is formed only on the other side of the first board and in which no electronic component for mounting is mounted" is the surface mount area. Regarding the "surface mounting area formed only on the other side of the second board" Of the discrete components and integrated circuit components, only the discrete components that are difficult to be targeted by fraud are surface-mounted, and the second substrate is molded with a molding member (non-transparent material), and the one side surface ( The pachinko machine 1 is arranged so that both the back side (on which no electronic components are mounted) and the other side (front side) do not face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 but face perpendicular thereto. This is desirable. In other words, in this case, it is possible to conceal the fact that a surface mounting area is formed on the second board and the type of discrete component that is surface mounted on the surface mounting area. Of course, the mold component makes it difficult to perform fraudulent acts on the mounting surface (the surface mounting area, which has poor fraud prevention performance, functions as a special area where it is virtually impossible to mount fraudulent components, making it difficult to mount fraudulent components). This makes it possible to reduce the size of hardware circuits while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components. It is expected that the company will be able to appropriately solve problems such as "

However, more preferably, for the mounted components (discrete components here) that are surface-mounted in the surface-mounted area, as shown in FIG. It should be inserted into the insertion mounting area TH of the first board in a molded state using a non-transparent member). According to such a configuration, the first board (the surface mount area that gives the impression that "no surface mount components are mounted in the pachinko machine 1"), which is arranged so as to face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, and the electronic component ``discrete components'', ``integrated circuit components'', and ``a molding member (non-transparent member) for both the second board and the second board. The "surface mount areas" in a molded state are inserted and mounted, respectively, and electrical connections are made between each other's respective electronic components. In other words, in this case, when the first board is visually observed from the rear side, there is a surface mounting area (the first board) with poor tamper prevention performance in the insertion mounting area where both discrete components and integrated circuit components are mounted and which has excellent tamper prevention performance. 2 boards) are made difficult to see by using a molded material, making it possible to make them appear as if they were inserted and mounted components and make them function electrically.This makes it possible to maintain security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting. It is expected that this technology will be able to better solve the problem of "miniaturizing hardware circuits while at the same time reducing the size of hardware circuits."

In addition, the second board on which the surface mount components are mounted is inserted into the first board so that the thin side of the board faces the rear side (both board surfaces are perpendicular to the first board). Since the second board is inserted into the first board, it becomes possible to mount the second board in the molded state without creating a large blind spot between the second board and the first board.

Here, even if each of the above configurations is adopted, "the second board itself, which is molded with a mold member (non-transparent member), is molded with the mold member (non-transparent member) together with the unauthorized parts." Halls are required to regularly check to see if there is any fraudulent activity such as "replacing the molded board with a different board." In this regard, if the above-mentioned mold structure is simply adopted, the above-mentioned fraudulent act of replacing the mold member with a different board with the same color and material, etc., is carried out. It becomes difficult to detect that the electronic components are being tampered with, and the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components may deteriorate.

Therefore, only a specific type of discrete components (electronic components for mounting) among the various discrete components to be mounted on the board of the main control board 1310 is placed in the surface mounting area of the second board that is to be molded. It is desirable to perform surface mounting, and for other types, it is preferable that they are not surface mounted on the second substrate and are mounted only on a different substrate. According to such a configuration, only discrete components having a specific shape are molded in a surface-mounted state in the surface mounting area of the second board, so that the shape of the undulating portion of the mold member ( The degree of bulge of the mold member at the mounting position of the discrete component (see, for example, FIG. 118) becomes uniform. In other words, if a separate board on which a specific type of discrete component and a fraudulent component are also mounted is molded using a mold member, the degree of bulge of the mold member at the mounting position of the fraudulent component will be the same as the mounting position of the specific type of discrete component. Since the degree of bulge of the mold member differs from that in It is now expected to maintain good security performance.

In this case, in the board included in at least the main control board 1310 of the first control unit MCG, discrete components of a specific type are mounted only in the surface mounting area of the second board, and the It can be said that it is more desirable to avoid mounting on a board different from the two boards in order to achieve miniaturization (integration) of the hardware circuit.

However, in order to suitably obtain the above-mentioned effects, "specific types of discrete components" are required to be electronic components for mounting that have the same shape, so for example, "specific types of discrete components" If the "Schottky barrier diode" is surface mounted on the second board, the "PN diode" is a "discrete component different from a specific type" and is not mounted on the second board but on a different board. It will be required to implement it. Strictly speaking, when surface mounting a "Schottky barrier diode" on a second board as a "specific type of discrete component," Therefore, it is desirable that "Schottky barrier diodes" of different products are not mounted on the second substrate but on a different substrate.

However, on the board included in the main control board 1310, it is required to mount many types of discrete components in addition to the specific type of discrete components. Therefore, in order to achieve better miniaturization (integration) of hardware circuits, it is important that the types of surface-mounted discrete components are different, and that other structures (such as those in which no insertion mounting area is formed) and A third board is prepared that is the same as the second board mentioned above (in terms of mounting only on one side, mold structure, etc.), and only one type of discrete component that is different from the specific type is surface mounted. It is desirable that the third board be inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area of the first board so as to be electrically connected to other electronic components for mounting. According to such a configuration, a board (second board, third board) having the above-mentioned mold structure for each type of discrete component can be used for each type of electronic component (in the example of FIG. 118, special mounting component D3a, special mounting component D3a, The shape to be monitored (the degree of bulge in the mold member) for each board with a molded structure is unified, and the above-mentioned fraudulent activities are monitored (equivalent to the board in question). This makes it easier to confirm whether electronic components of a type that should not be mounted are mounted, so it is possible to easily check whether electronic components of a type that should not be mounted are mounted. This makes it possible to suitably solve problems such as "reducing circuit size." In addition to the second board and the third board, a board on which only discrete components of a different type from those mounted on these boards are surface-mounted may be similarly prepared.

Note that if only one discrete component is surface-mounted on the second or third board as shown in FIG. In combination, it becomes possible to more appropriately solve the problem of "miniaturizing the hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting."

In addition, when providing a plurality of boards molded in this way (here, the second board and the third board (corresponding to the special mounting component D3a and the special mounting component D3b in the example of FIG. 118)), regarding these boards It is desirable that each surface mounting surface (the other surface mentioned above) be arranged so as to face a specific direction. According to such a configuration, it is possible to check the degree of bulge in the mold member of each board at once from the same direction. This makes it easier to check whether any electronic components are mounted.

Furthermore, each member (mold member) for molding the second and third boards is attached with a component-side identification mark corresponding to the type of discrete component surface-mounted on those boards. In addition, it is desirable that the surfaces on which the component side identification marks are attached are also arranged so that they all face the same direction. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to make a one-to-one correspondence between the "type of component side identification display" attached to the second board and the third board, respectively, and the "shape that should appear on the mold member". This makes it easier to monitor unauthorized parts replacement. In this case, the component side identification display should be attached to the mold surface opposite to the side where the surface mounting area is formed (the side where no bulge occurs in the mold member). This is desirable in order to eliminate distortion in the identification display and prevent confirmation errors from occurring.

Further, according to the above configuration, for the second substrate and the third substrate in which a surface mount area having poor tamper suppression performance is formed, one electronic component molded together with a discrete component to be surface mounted on the substrate is used. They are each provided as a component, and are inserted and mounted so that their respective board surfaces are perpendicular to each other with respect to the insertion mounting area formed on the first board. In other words, in this case, the second and third boards on which discrete components, which are originally provided as surface mount components, are mounted can be mounted as if they were insert-mounted components, without creating a large space between them and the first board. Since it becomes possible to insert and mount the device onto the first board, it is expected that the hardware circuit can be miniaturized while maintaining a suitable performance for suppressing mounting of unauthorized components.

However, in order to properly maintain the performance of suppressing the mounting of unauthorized components, it is necessary to maintain the appearance of "electronic components that are inserted and mounted on the first board as if they were insert-mounted components" on the second board and the like. It is required that the third substrate be provided with each of them so that they are not visible on the substrate on which the surface mounting area is formed. Therefore, regarding the second and third substrates, it is necessary to prevent multiple types of discrete components from being surface-mounted, to prevent integrated circuit components from being surface-mounted, and to prevent surface-mounting of integrated circuit components. In order to reduce the size of the board, it is possible to surface-mount only one discrete component, and to reduce the size of the board and to create a structure in which the electrical element is connected to the lead part for insertion mounting using bonding wires. This can be said to be extremely important in making it appear as if it is a general electronic component (discrete component). That is, the surface mounting area formed on the second substrate or the third substrate is at least the insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate, or the surface mounting area formed on the first substrate but in an empty state without mounting anything. It is required that the area be smaller than the surface mounting area.

Furthermore, after making the second substrate and the third substrate compact in this way, the second substrate and the third substrate each have one electron in the first substrate with respect to the first substrate. Insertion mounting components (discrete components) that are mounted at a lower mounting height than those electronic components when inserted and mounted as components (components)) and insertion mounting components (discrete components (general electronic components with a structure in which the electrical element is connected to the insertion mounting lead part by bonding wire)) that are mounted at a higher mounting height than those electronic components. It is more desirable that the According to such a configuration, the second board or the third board in which the surface mount area having poor tamper suppression performance is formed is inserted and mounted into the insertion mounting area formed on the first board and having excellent tamper suppression performance. This makes it possible to more conveniently present the electronic component as if it were a single electronic component. In this sense, the second board and the third board may be provided as electronic components (molded parts) that are smaller than any of the integrated circuit components inserted and mounted on the first board, or It can also be said that it is important to provide an electronic component (molded component) smaller than the largest discrete component to be mounted.

In addition, in general, a board on which an electronic component is mounted, including the board (first board) on which the insertion mounting area according to this embodiment is formed, also has a board corresponding to the type of the electronic component to be mounted. A side identification mark is often attached, for example, an electrical diagram symbol corresponding to the Schottky barrier diode is attached near the location where the Schottky barrier diode is mounted. However, with regard to the second board and the third board according to this embodiment, it is possible to conceal which type of electronic component they function in order to increase the difficulty in understanding the circuit. This can be said to be desirable in order to suitably maintain the suppression performance against mounting of unauthorized parts.

Therefore, on the insertion mounting surface of the first board, different board side identification marks are attached to the vicinity of each position where the second board and the third board are inserted and mounted as one electronic component. However, all of these board-side identification marks, including board-side identification marks attached corresponding to the same type of electronic components for mounting, are not applicable to any board-side identification mark within the insertion mounting area of the first control unit MCG. It is desirable to use a unique display mode that is different from the display (for example, a special display mode such as "?" or "*"). In other words, in this case, even if you check the board side identification marks (on the mounting surface of the first board) attached near the positions where the second board and third board are inserted and mounted, the mode is different from that of the mounting electronics of the same type. Since it is a unique aspect that is different from the board-side identification mark attached to the corresponding component, it is difficult to know which type is mounted as a discrete component surface-mounted on the second or third board. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize.

However, if a structure is adopted that increases the difficulty of understanding the circuit by concealing which type of electronic component the second board and the third board function as, There is a concern that someone with malicious intent may scrape the mold member and try to confirm the internal elements.

Therefore, regarding the second board and the third board, first, make sure that no board side identification mark is attached on the surface mounting surface (surface mounting surface in a molded state) formed on these boards. However, even if a person with malicious intent shaves off the mold member and attempts to check the inside, it is difficult to recognize which type of discrete component is mounted. desirable.

Furthermore, many of the discrete components that are surface mounted on the surface mounting areas formed on the second board and the third board are similar to many of the discrete components that are inserted and mounted on the insertion mounting areas formed on the first board. is formed by molding with a first mold member of a different color, and then the second or third board to be mounted is molded with a second mold member of the same or similar color as the specific color. Furthermore, it is desirable that the electronic component be inserted into an insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate as a single molded electronic component. According to such a configuration, the second board or the third board on which the surface mount area with poor tamper suppression performance is formed is molded in the same form as other insertion mounting components, and then mounted on the first board. Even in the case of insertion mounting, the hall administrator can easily discover where the second and third boards are located, and there is no possibility that tampering has been done to the second or third boards. This makes it easier to confirm whether or not the person is present.

In this case, malicious parties will also be helped to obtain information about which surface mounting area (second board or third board) with inferior fraud prevention performance is provided. It could happen. In this regard, in the above configuration, the type of the electronic component is concealed by molding the discrete component surface-mounted on the surface-mounting area with the second mold member on the second substrate or the third substrate. In addition to increasing the difficulty of understanding the circuit, the second mold member should be provided in the same or similar color as the specific color arranged on the first mold member of the surface-mounted discrete component. ing. In other words, in this case, in order to ascertain the type of discrete component that is surface-mounted in the surface-mounting area, the second mold member is scraped by a malicious person and an attempt is made to check the inside of the second mold member. Even so, it is difficult to know whether the second mold member that is molded together with the second or third substrate is being cut, or whether the first mold member that is inside the second mold member is being cut. As a result, it is expected that the type of the electronic component can be kept secret and the difficulty in understanding the circuit can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in this explanatory example, on the insertion mounting surface of the first board, in the vicinity of each position where the second board and the third board are inserted and mounted as one electronic component, there are A board-side identification display having a unique mode (for example, a special display mode such as "?" or "*") different from any of the board-side identification displays is attached. However, if only the board side identification display with such a unique aspect is attached, the hall side will not be able to understand which type of electronic component it is functioning as, and maintenance and maintenance will be difficult. There are concerns that this may have a negative impact on management. Therefore, on the insertion mounting surface of the first board, near each position where the second board and the third board are inserted and mounted as one electronic component, a board with a unique aspect is placed at a relatively easily visible position. In addition to attaching side identification marks, electronic components of the same type (or different It is desirable that a board-side identification mark having the same form as the board-side identification mark attached to the same type of mounting electronic component on the board is also secretly attached.

Furthermore, as described above, in this explanatory example, the surface mounting area of the second board includes a specific type (for example, a Schottky barrier diode) of various discrete components mounted on the board included in the main control board 1310. Only the discrete components (electronic components for mounting) are surface mounted. Further, in the surface mounting area of the third board, one of the various types of discrete components mounted on the board of the main control board 1310 that is different from the specific type (for example, one with a relatively small specific capacitance) is provided. Only the discrete components (electronic components for mounting) of the capacitors are surface mounted. According to these configurations, it is clear that the second substrate and the third substrate alone cannot function as a discrete circuit with a specific function (for example, a backup circuit, a filter circuit, etc.). That is, an electronic component for mounting is surface-mounted on a surface mounting area formed on a molded substrate (second substrate or third substrate), and a substrate (here By configuring a specific discrete circuit with mounting electronic components that are surface-mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on the first board (first board), it may be difficult to understand the circuit, or the molded board may be difficult to understand. (Second board or third board) It is difficult to replace the board itself (not only because the structure inside the mold is kept secret, but also because it is necessary to make molded parts that do not have specific circuit functions), making it illegal. It is expected that this will be used for countermeasures.

As mentioned above, in summarizing the technologies explained with reference to FIG. 117 and FIG. Each configuration is described merely as the best embodiment, and in implementation, it is not necessary to use all of these configurations, and the configurations may be combined as appropriate regardless of the order in which they are described. It is possible to implement it by

Next, technical ideas that can be understood from the above embodiments and modified examples will be described below.

[Technical philosophy 1-1]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can perform control power generation processing and game progression processing by using the electronic components, respectively.
A gaming machine that can provide a benefit to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the gaming progress process,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
an insertion mounting area where a lead part provided on the electronic component is inserted into the base plate;
a surface mounting area in which a lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted on the surface of the base plate;
At least one of the surface mount components mounted in the surface mount area among the plurality of electronic components is molded with the mold resin, although the surface mount component itself is molded with the mold resin. The gaming machine is characterized in that the surface mounting area to be mounted is also molded with another molding resin.

[Technical philosophy 1-2]
a first control unit that has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and can perform control power generation processing and game progression processing by using the electronic components;
a second control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and by using the electronic components, a performance progression process can be executed according to the result of the game progression process;
A gaming machine that can provide a benefit to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of the gaming progress process,
The base plate of the second control unit includes an insertion mounting area in which the lead part provided on the electronic component is mounted in the form of being inserted into the base plate, and the lead part provided in the electronic component is mounted on the base plate. Of the surface mount areas mounted in a form placed on the surface of the surface mount area, only the surface mount area is provided,
The base plate of the first control unit is provided with both the insertion mounting area and the surface mounting area,
Among the plurality of electronic components, a first side surface mount component is mounted on the surface mount area provided on the base plate of the first control section, and a first side surface mount component is mounted on the surface mount area provided on the base plate of the second control section. Although the second side surface mount components to be mounted are themselves molded with mold resin, one of the first side surface mount components and the second side surface mount components A game machine characterized in that the first side surface mount component is further molded together with its surface mount area using a mold resin different from the mold resin of the first side surface mount component itself.

In these technical ideas 1-1 and 1-2, surface mount components mounted in the surface mount area with poor tamper prevention performance are molded with mold resin, but Because it is integrally molded with the surface mount area to be mounted using a mold resin different from the mold resin, it is possible to prevent any tampering from being performed on the surface mount area, which has poor tamper prevention performance. It becomes extremely difficult.

[Technical philosophy 2]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can perform control power generation processing and game progression processing by using the electronic components, respectively.
A gaming machine that can provide a benefit to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the gaming progress process,
The base plate of the specific control section is
an insertion mounting board into which an insertion mounting lead provided on an insertion mounting component of the electronic component is inserted;
A surface mount board is mounted such that a surface mount lead portion provided on a surface mount component of the electronic component is placed on the surface,
The surface mount board includes:
At least a special surface mount board having a special insertion mounting lead part formed so as to extend outward from the surface mount board and be insertable into the insertion mounting board,
On the special surface mounting board,
A wiring portion formed to electrically connect the surface mounting lead portion of the surface mount component mounted on the special surface mounting board and the special insertion mounting lead portion is provided,
The surface mount components mounted on the special surface mount board are:
Of the surface mounting lead part and the special insertion mounting lead part, only the special insertion mounting lead part is molded together with the special surface mounting board so that only the special insertion mounting lead part is pulled out to the outside of the molding resin, and A gaming machine characterized in that the electronic component is mounted on the insertion mounting board as one electronic component having a lead part for special insertion mounting.

In this technical idea 2, a surface mount component mounted in a surface mount area with poor tamper prevention performance functions as if it were a single insertion mount component mounted in an insertion mount area with excellent tamper prevention performance. As a result, it can be expected that malicious parties will be excluded from the illicit purposes of malicious parties.

[Technical philosophy 3]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can perform control power generation processing and game progression processing by using the electronic components, respectively.
A gaming machine that can provide a benefit to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the gaming progress process,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
an insertion mounting board into which an insertion mounting lead provided on an insertion mounting component of the electronic component is inserted;
A surface mount board is mounted such that a surface mount lead portion provided on a surface mount component of the electronic component is placed on the surface,
The surface mount components include:
It includes at least a discrete surface mount component in which a single-function element is molded with a molding resin,
The discrete surface mount component is
The discrete surface mount component has a relatively large external shape because it is integrally molded with the surface mount board on which it is mounted using a mold resin different from its own mold resin, and the base of the specific control section A gaming machine characterized by having a different external shape from any of the electronic components mounted on the board.

In this technical concept 3, simple discrete surface mount components that have only limited functions compared to processing units, etc. are given excessive security performance by being protected with double molded resin. The exterior shape is unique and relatively large in order to attract the attention of malicious persons. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to show a third party the excessive security performance implemented within the specific control unit, which can be expected to reduce the desire to commit fraudulent acts.

[Technical philosophy 4]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can perform control power generation processing and game progression processing by using the electronic components, respectively.
A gaming machine that can provide a benefit to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the gaming progress process,
The base plate of the specific control section is
an insertion mounting area where a lead part provided on the electronic component is inserted into the base plate;
a surface mounting area in which a lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted on the surface of the base plate;
In the base plate of the specific control unit, the surface mounting area is provided in a plurality of locations so that each area is relatively small, whereas the insertion mounting area is provided in a plurality of locations so that each area is a relatively small area. A gaming machine characterized by being provided as a relatively large area surrounding at least one of the provided surface mounting areas.

In this technical idea 4, the surface mounting area, which has poor fraud prevention performance, is not collected in one place, but is dispersed to make it less conspicuous. It is arranged in such a way that it blends into the insertion mounting area provided as an area. Therefore, it becomes difficult for a malicious person to notice the existence of the surface mounting area when looking at the base plate of the specific control unit, and while maintaining the performance of suppressing the mounting of unauthorized components, It is expected that hardware circuits will be made smaller.

[Technical philosophy 5]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and includes a specific control unit that can respectively execute control power generation processing and game progression processing by using the electronic circuits,
A gaming machine that can provide a benefit to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the gaming progress process,
The plurality of electronic circuits include:
A backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to a predetermined storage unit when the control power supply is cut off is included as a discrete circuit having at least a capacitor and a diode, both of which are electronic components of single function elements. ,
The base plate of the specific control section is
an insertion mounting area where a lead portion provided on the electronic component is inserted into the base plate;
a surface mounting area in which a lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted on the surface of the base plate;
The insertion mounting area is
A relatively large area surrounding the surface mounting area is provided so that the electronic components mounted in the surface mounting area are adjacent to some of the electronic components mounted in the insertion mounting area,
The backup power supply circuit includes:
Although the discrete circuit is provided as a discrete circuit having a backup power supply function of supplying backup power to a predetermined storage unit when the control power is cut off, the capacitor and the diode included in the discrete circuit are One of the electronic components is mounted on the surface mounting area surrounded by the insertion mounting area, and the other electronic component is mounted on the surface mounting area of the insertion mounting area. A game machine characterized by being mounted in a position that is not adjacent to a component.

In this technical idea 5, although it is a discrete circuit that aims to perform a specific electrical function (backup power supply function), it can be mounted in the insertion mounting area on the base board. Electronic components that have a shape that allows for smoothing and electronic components that have a shape that allows mounting on a surface mounting area coexist. Therefore, when a third party visually observes the base plate of a specific control unit, it must be remembered that they have a close electrical role in order to perform a specific electrical function (backup power supply function). By increasing the difficulty of circuit understanding, it can be expected to suppress fraud.

Moreover, the surface mount area, which has poor tamper suppression performance, is arranged in such a way that it blends into the relatively large insertion mount area, which has excellent tamper suppression performance. A capacitor and a diode included in one discrete circuit whose purpose is to perform a supply function (supplying function) are arranged so that they are not adjacent to each other. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of a surface mount area that has poor fraud prevention performance, and even if the existence is noticed, the electronic components mounted in the surface mount area cooperate with other electronic components. This makes it difficult to remember what kind of electrical function the circuit is implemented to perform, and by making it even more difficult to understand the circuit, fraud can be effectively suppressed. It can be expected.

[Technical philosophy 6]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can perform control power generation processing and game progression processing by using the electronic components, respectively.
A gaming machine that can provide a benefit to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the gaming progress process,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
an insertion mounting board into which an insertion mounting lead provided on an electronic component is inserted;
and a surface mount board on which a surface mount lead part provided on the electronic component is mounted on the surface,
The surface mount board includes:
At least a special surface mount board having a special insertion mounting lead part formed so as to extend outward from the surface mount board and be insertable into the insertion mounting board,
The special surface mount board is
It has a wiring part formed to electrically connect the surface mounting lead part of the electronic component to be mounted on the special surface mounting board and the special insertion mounting lead part, and The special insertion mounting lead portions are inserted into the insertion mounting board so that their mounting surfaces are substantially perpendicular to each other.

A gaming machine characterized by:

Generally, components mounted on surface mount boards often have a flat shape. In this regard, in the above-mentioned technical idea 6, the special surface mounting board is arranged so that the mounting surfaces thereof are approximately orthogonal to each other with respect to the insertion mounting board. In other words, in this case, instead of a flat surface with a relatively large area, a thin surface with a relatively small area faces the insertion mounting board, so electronic components can be mounted as the insertion mounting board. Even in situations where only a small area (surface area) is left available, the special surface mount board can be installed.

[Technical philosophy 7]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can perform control power generation processing and game progression processing by using the electronic components, respectively.
A gaming machine that can provide a benefit to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the gaming progress process,
The base plate of the specific control section is
an insertion mounting board into which an insertion mounting lead provided on an electronic component is inserted;
and a surface mounting board on which a surface mounting lead part provided on the electronic component is mounted by being placed on the surface of the base board,
Among the plurality of electronic components, the surface mount components mounted on the surface mount board include a specific surface mount component having a size that fits within an installation interval of a specific insertion hole provided in the insertion mounting board. It is
The specific surface mount component is
Even though the size of the surface mount component fits within the installation interval of the specific insertion hole, the surface mount component is integrated with the surface mount board on which it is mounted using a mold resin different from the mold resin of the specific surface mount component itself. A game machine characterized in that, by being molded, it has an external appearance as an electronic component having a size that does not fit within the installation interval of the specific insertion hole.

In other words, if a specific surface mount component is left with an external shape that is smaller than the installation interval of the insertion holes in the insertion mounting board, it can be determined that a surface mount area with poor tamper suppression performance is provided in the specific control unit. This may make it easier for a third party to notice, and may even encourage fraudulent activity.

In this regard, in Technical Idea 7, a specific surface mount component is integrally molded with a surface mount board to be mounted using a mold resin different from the mold resin of the specific surface mount component itself. , since the appearance shape is made to appear as a single electronic component with a size that cannot fit within the installation interval of the specific insertion hole, a surface mount area with inferior tamper prevention performance is provided in the specific control section. It becomes possible to make it difficult for a third party to notice.

[Technical philosophy 8]
a first control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and by which a game progress process can be executed by using the electronic components;
a second control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and by using those electronic components, a performance progression process can be executed according to the result of the game progression process;
A gaming machine that can provide a benefit to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the gaming progress process,
The plurality of electronic components for mounting include:
These include discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in a relatively small package, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package.
The base plate of the first control section is
an insertion mounting area where a lead part provided on an electronic component for mounting is mounted by being inserted into the base plate;
a surface mounting area in which a lead part provided on an electronic component for mounting is mounted on the surface of the base plate;
The base plate of the first control unit includes at least a first substrate and a second substrate as substrates on which the surface mounting area is formed,
The first substrate is
Neither the discrete component nor the integrated circuit component is mounted on the surface mount area, and the pattern wiring as the surface mount area remains exposed, facing the rear side of the gaming machine. It is arranged in
The second substrate is
Of the integrated circuit component and the discrete component, the integrated circuit component is not mounted on the surface mounting area, and only the discrete component is mounted, facing in a direction different from the rear side of the gaming machine. A game machine characterized in that:

In this technical concept 8, a first board is purposely prepared in which a surface mounting area is formed, which is empty without any electronic components mounted thereon, and this first board is placed in the surface mounting area. The gaming machine is arranged in such a way that its pattern wiring remains exposed and faces the rear side of the gaming machine. In other words, in this case, when a malicious person attempts to commit fraud from the rear side of the gaming machine, "no electronic components are mounted on the surface mounting area, which has poor fraud prevention performance, and the gaming machine is highly susceptible to fraud." It has come to play the role of an advertising tower that emphasizes that it has suppressive performance, and is expected to suppress the installation of unauthorized parts.

On the other hand, on the second board, the integrated circuit is placed in a direction different from the rear side of the gaming machine so that its presence is difficult to notice, and the integrated circuit is placed in the surface mounting area. Among the components and discrete components, integrated circuit components that are likely to be tampered with are not mounted, and only discrete components that are less likely to be tampered with are mounted. In other words, in this case, the presence of the first board not only makes it difficult for the second board itself to be noticed, but even if the second board is noticed, the fraud prevention performance is poor. Since only discrete components that are difficult to target for fraud are mounted in the surface mount area, it is expected that it will be possible to miniaturize the hardware circuit while maintaining good performance in suppressing the mounting of fraudulent components. Become.

[Technical philosophy 9]
a first control unit having a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and in which a game progress process can be executed by using the electronic components;
a second control unit having a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and by using those electronic components, a performance progression process according to the result of the game progression process can be executed;
A gaming machine that can provide a benefit to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the gaming progress process,
The plurality of electronic components for mounting include:
These include discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in a relatively small package, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package.
The board of the first control unit is
A first board in which an insertion mounting area is formed in which the lead part provided on the electronic component for mounting is inserted into the board, and the lead part provided in the electronic component for mounting is mounted on the surface of the board. A second board is provided with a surface mounting area that is placed on top of the board and a special insertion mounting lead part that extends outward and can be inserted into the insertion mounting area of the first board. and
The first substrate includes:
an insertion mounting area in which the insertion mounting lead part provided on the insertion mounting component is inserted into which mounting is possible; and an insertion mounting area in which the surface mounting lead part provided on the surface mounting component is placed on the surface. Both the surface mount area and the surface mount area that can be mounted are formed, but no electronic components for mounting are mounted on the surface mount area formed on the first substrate, and pattern wiring as the surface mount area is formed. It is said to have been left exposed,
The second substrate includes:
Of the insertion mounting area and the surface mounting area, only the surface mounting area is formed, and of the discrete component and the integrated circuit component, only the discrete component is to be mounted. By inserting the special insertion mounting lead portion into the insertion mounting area of the first board as one electronic component molded in A game machine characterized by an electrical connection between the two.

In such technical concept 9, a surface mounting area (where no electronic components are mounted and the pattern wiring as the surface mounting area is exposed) is defined as a surface mounting area with poor fraud prevention performance. A surface mount area (second board) in which only the discrete components, which are difficult to be targeted by fraud among discrete components and integrated circuit components, are surface mounted and molded together with the board. It is equipped with In other words, in this case, when a malicious person attempts to perform a fraudulent act from the rear side of the gaming machine, the surface mounting area where the electronic components for mounting are mounted will be difficult to see, and the surface mounting area where the electronic components for mounting are mounted will be difficult to see. Since only the surface mount area where no electronic components are mounted will be visible, the surface mount area will be classified as a ``surface mount area with poor tamper prevention performance in which no electronic components are mounted.'' The game machine has come to play the role of an advertising tower that emphasizes that it has a high level of anti-fraud performance, and it is expected that this will prevent the installation of fraudulent parts.

Moreover, in addition to the surface mount area, the first substrate on which the surface mount area that serves as the advertising tower is formed has an insertion mount area that has excellent fraud prevention performance. Then, a surface mounting area (second board) which is molded together with the above board is inserted and mounted. In other words, in this case, there is a surface mount area (first board) with poor tamper prevention performance in an insertion mounting area with excellent tamper prevention performance within the board (first board) that gives the impression that "no surface mount components are mounted". 2 boards) are hidden in the mold in a way that makes them difficult to see, so it is expected that it will be possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining good performance in suppressing the mounting of unauthorized parts. Become.

[Technical philosophy 10]
a first control unit having a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and in which a game progress process can be executed by using the electronic components;
a second control unit having a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and by using those electronic components, a performance progression process according to the result of the game progression process can be executed;
A gaming machine that can provide a benefit to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the gaming progress process,
The plurality of electronic components for mounting include:
These include discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in a relatively small package, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package.
The board of the first control unit is
A first board in which an insertion mounting area is formed in which the lead part provided on the electronic component for mounting is inserted into the board, and the lead part provided in the electronic component for mounting is mounted on the surface of the board. It has a second substrate formed with a surface mounting area that is mounted on top of the second substrate,
In the first substrate,
With no electronic components mounted on one surface and both the discrete components and integrated circuit components mounted on the other surface, the other surface is located at the rear of the gaming machine. While it is placed facing the side,
In the second substrate,
The electronic component for mounting is not mounted on one side, and the integrated circuit component of the integrated circuit component and the discrete component is not mounted on the other surface, but only the discrete component is mounted, and the mold member is formed. The gaming machine is mounted on the first substrate in a molded state with both the one side surface and the other side facing in a direction different from the rear side of the gaming machine. A gaming machine that does.

In such technical concept 10, for the first board on which an insertion mounting area with excellent tamper suppression performance is formed, no electronic components for mounting are mounted on one surface, and discrete components and integrated components are mounted on the other surface. Since both integrated circuit components and circuit components are mounted with the other side facing toward the rear of the game machine, integrated circuit components that are easily targeted for fraud are not mounted. As a board (first board), it is possible to suitably ensure performance of suppressing mounting of unauthorized parts and ease of monitoring.

In addition, regarding the second board on which a surface mount area with poor tamper suppression performance is formed, electronic components for mounting are not mounted on one side, and integrated circuit components that are easily targeted for tampering are not mounted on the other side. Since only discrete components that are difficult to identify and are difficult to target for fraud are mounted, it is expected that it will be possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining good performance in suppressing the installation of unauthorized parts. Become.

Moreover, in the second board, the surface mounting area on which the discrete components are mounted is molded together with the molding member, and both the one side surface and the other side surface are connected to the gaming machine. It is arranged so that it faces in a different direction from the rear side of the vehicle. In other words, in this case, the surface mounting area, which has poor fraud prevention performance, is made to function as a special area where it is virtually impossible to mount fraudulent parts, and the target (gaming machine) that requires monitoring for the mounting of fraudulent parts. It is now possible to remove it from the confirmation target from the rear side.

In addition, regarding the surface mount area (second board) that is excluded from the monitoring target for mounting of unauthorized components, the thin wall part of the board faces the rear side (both the one side surface and the other side face the Since it is mounted on the first board so that it faces in a direction different from the rear side of the gaming machine, the molded state can be mounted without creating a large space between it and the first board. It becomes possible to mount the second board.

[Technical philosophy 11]
a first control unit having a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and in which a game progress process can be executed by using the electronic components;
a second control unit having a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and by using those electronic components, a performance progression process according to the result of the game progression process can be executed;
A gaming machine that can provide a benefit to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the gaming progress process,
The plurality of electronic components for mounting include:
These include discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in a relatively small package, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package.
The board of the first control unit is
a first substrate formed with an insertion mounting area in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted;
a second substrate on which the integrated circuit component among the discrete components and the integrated circuit component is not mounted, and a surface mounting area is formed on which a specific type of electronic component for mounting among the discrete components is surface-mounted; A third substrate on which the integrated circuit component among the discrete components and the integrated circuit component is not mounted, and a surface mounting area is formed on which an electronic component for mounting of a type different from the specific type among the discrete components is surface mounted. It has
The second substrate and the third substrate are
Discrete components that are surface-mounted on the respective substrates are provided as separate molded electronic components, and are inserted and mounted into the insertion mounting areas formed on the first substrate, respectively. It is possible to electrically connect with various insertion mounting components mounted on the first board,
Each member that molds the second board and the third board is provided with a component side identification mark corresponding to the type of discrete component that is surface-mounted on those boards. A gaming machine characterized in that each side with an identification display is arranged so as to face a specific direction.

In such technical idea 11, both integrated circuit components that are easily targeted for tampering and discrete components that are difficult to be targeted for tampering are mounted on the first board on which an insertion mounting area with excellent tamper suppression performance is formed. Then, only discrete components that are difficult to be targeted for fraud are mounted on the second and third boards in which surface mounting areas with poor tamper suppression performance are formed, respectively, in different types for each board.

Therefore, for electronic components to be mounted on the insertion mounting area side, which has excellent tamper suppression performance, the tamper suppression function will not only be maintained as before, but also for mounting electronic components mounted on the surface mount area side, which has poor tamper suppression performance. Regarding electronic components for mounting, check whether electronic components for mounting with shapes of types corresponding to the second and third boards are mounted respectively (electronic components of types that should not be mounted on the corresponding boards) It is expected that even if fraud is committed, it will be easy to detect it, and the hardware circuits will be made smaller. become.

Moreover, the second and third substrates, on which surface mount areas with poor tamper suppression performance are formed, are provided as separate electronic components molded together with discrete components that are surface mounted on these substrates, respectively. and electrically connectable with various insertion mounting components mounted on the first board by being inserted and mounted in respective insertion mounting areas formed on the first board. There is. In other words, in this case, a specific type of discrete component that is originally provided as a surface mount component and a discrete component of a different type from the specific type are each inserted and mounted on the first board as if they were insert-mounted components. As a result, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining a suitable performance for suppressing the mounting of unauthorized parts.

Furthermore, each member for molding the second board and the third board is attached with a component-side identification mark corresponding to the type of discrete component surface-mounted on those boards, and the component The surfaces with the side identification markings are arranged so as to face a specific direction. In other words, in this case, there is a one-to-one relationship between the "type of component side identification display" attached to the second and third boards inserted and mounted on the first board, respectively, and the "shape that should appear on the mold member." Since it becomes possible to correspond to the above, it becomes possible to easily monitor whether or not parts have been replaced.

[Technical philosophy 12]
a first control unit having a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and in which a game progress process can be executed by using the electronic components;
a second control unit having a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and by using those electronic components, a performance progression process according to the result of the game progression process can be executed;
A gaming machine that can provide a benefit to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the gaming progress process,
The plurality of electronic components for mounting include:
These include discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in a relatively small package, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package.
The board of the first control unit is
a first substrate formed with an insertion mounting area in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted, and of the discrete component and the integrated circuit component, the integrated circuit component is not mounted; It has a second substrate formed with a surface mounting area on which the discrete components are surface mounted,
The second substrate is
The discrete components to be surface-mounted on the board are both provided as one molded electronic component, and are inserted and mounted in such a manner that the surfaces of each board are orthogonal to the insertion mounting area formed on the first board. By doing so, it is possible to electrically connect with various insertion mounted components mounted on the first board,
The first substrate includes:
When the second board is inserted and mounted as one electronic component on the board, an insertion mounting component is mounted at a lower mounting height than the electronic component, and an insertion mounting component is mounted at a mounting height higher than the electronic component. A game machine characterized in that insertion mounting parts are respectively arranged.

According to this technical concept 12, both integrated circuit components that are easily targeted for unauthorized use and discrete components that are difficult to be targeted for unauthorized access are mounted on the first board on which the insertion mounting area with excellent tamper suppression performance is formed. Since only discrete components that are difficult to be targeted for fraud are mounted on the second board on which the surface mount area with poor fraud prevention performance is formed, hardware It is expected that circuits will be made smaller.

Moreover, the second substrate on which the surface mount area with poor tamper suppression performance is formed is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete components to be surface mounted on the substrate, and is formed on the first substrate. Insertion and mounting are performed such that the surfaces of each board are perpendicular to the insertion mounting area. In other words, in this case, the second board on which discrete components, which are originally provided as surface mount components, are mounted can be mounted on the first board as if they were insert-mounted components, without creating a large space between them and the first board. Since it becomes possible to insert and mount the device into the device, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining a suitable performance for suppressing the mounting of unauthorized components.

Furthermore, the first board includes an insertion mounting component that is mounted at a lower mounting height than the electronic component when the second board is inserted and mounted as one electronic component on the first board, and the electronic component. Since the insertion mounting components are mounted at a higher mounting height than the first board, the second board, which has a surface mounting area with poor tamper suppression performance, is able to prevent tampering formed on the first board. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize that the device is mounted in the insertion mounting area, which has excellent suppression performance.

[Technical philosophy 13]
a first control unit having a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and in which a game progress process can be executed by using the electronic components;
a second control unit having a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and by using those electronic components, a performance progression process according to the result of the game progression process can be executed;
A gaming machine that can provide a benefit to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the gaming progress process,
The plurality of electronic components for mounting include:
These include discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in a relatively small package, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package.
The board of the first control unit is
a first substrate formed with an insertion mounting area in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted, and of the discrete component and the integrated circuit component, the integrated circuit component is not mounted; It has a second substrate formed with a surface mounting area on which the discrete components are surface mounted,
The discrete components surface-mounted on the second substrate are molded by a first mold member of a specific color different from most of the discrete components inserted and mounted on the first substrate. and
The second substrate is
An insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate, where the discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate are provided as one electronic component molded with a second mold member of the same or similar color as the specific color. A game machine characterized in that the game machine is electrically connected to various insertion-mounted components mounted on the first board by being inserted into the first board.

According to this technical concept 13, both integrated circuit components that are easily targeted for unauthorized use and discrete components that are difficult to be targeted for unauthorized access are mounted on the first board on which the insertion mounting area with excellent tamper suppression performance is formed. Since only discrete components that are difficult to be targeted for fraud are mounted on the second board on which the surface mount area with poor fraud prevention performance is formed, hardware It is expected that circuits will be made smaller.

Moreover, the second substrate on which the surface mount area with poor tamper suppression performance is formed is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete components to be surface mounted on the substrate, and is formed on the first substrate. The insertion implementation is performed for the inserted insertion implementation area. In other words, in this case, the second board on which the discrete component, which is originally provided as a surface mount component, is mounted can be inserted into the first board as if it were an insertion-mounted component. It is now expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining a suitable performance for suppressing the mounting of unauthorized components.

In addition, for discrete components that are surface-mounted in the surface-mounting area formed on the second board, the first mold member has a color different from that of most of the discrete components that are inserted and mounted in the insertion-mounting area formed on the first board. The second board to be mounted is further molded with a second mold member having the same or similar color as the specific color to form a single electronic component. I have to.

Therefore, even if a second board on which a surface mount area with poor tamper suppression performance is formed is molded in the same form as other insertion-mounted parts and inserted into the first board, hole The administrator on the side can easily discover where the second board is located, and can easily confirm whether or not fraud has been performed on the second board. However, in this case, a malicious person may also be helped to grasp information about where the surface mounting area (second board), which is inferior in fraud prevention performance, is provided.

In this regard, in the above configuration, by molding the discrete component surface-mounted on the surface-mounting area with the second mold member together with the second board, the type of the electronic component is hidden, making it difficult to understand the circuit. In addition to improving the quality, the second mold member is provided in the same or similar color as the specific color arranged on the first mold member of the surface-mounted discrete component. In other words, in this case, in order to ascertain the type of discrete component that is surface-mounted in the surface-mounting area, the second mold member is scraped by a malicious person and an attempt is made to check the inside of the second mold member. Even if the second mold member is molded together with the second substrate, it may be difficult to determine whether the second mold member molded together with the second mold member is being cut or the first mold member inside the second mold member is being cut. As a result, it is expected that the type of the electronic component can be kept secret and the difficulty in understanding the circuit can be suitably maintained.

[Technical philosophy 14]
a first control unit having a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and in which a game progress process can be executed by using the electronic components;
a second control unit having a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and by using those electronic components, a performance progression process according to the result of the game progression process can be executed;
A gaming machine that can provide a benefit to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the gaming progress process,
The plurality of electronic components for mounting include:
These include discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in a relatively small package, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package.
The board of the first control unit is
a first substrate formed with an insertion mounting area in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted, and of the discrete component and the integrated circuit component, the integrated circuit component is not mounted; It has a second substrate formed with a surface mounting area on which the discrete components are surface mounted,
The second substrate is
The first board is provided as a single molded electronic component together with discrete components that are surface-mounted on the board, and is inserted and mounted into an insertion mounting area formed on the first board. It is said that it is possible to electrically connect with various insertion mounted components mounted on the
The mounting surface of the second board does not have any board-side identification markings corresponding to discrete components that are surface-mounted on the board, and the mounting surface of the first board does not have any board-side identification marks that correspond to the discrete components that are surface-mounted on the board. A specific board side identification mark is attached corresponding to the position where the second board is inserted and mounted, and the specific board side identification mark is attached corresponding to the same type of electronic component for mounting. A gaming machine, including a board-side identification display, having a unique aspect that is different from any of the board-side identification displays attached within the insertion mounting area of the gaming machine.

In such technical concept 14, both integrated circuit components that are easily targeted for unauthorized use and discrete components that are difficult to be targeted for unauthorized access are mounted on the first board on which the insertion mounting area with excellent tamper suppression performance is formed. Since only discrete components that are difficult to be targeted for fraud are mounted on the second board on which the surface mount area with poor fraud prevention performance is formed, hardware It is expected that circuits will be made smaller.

Moreover, the second substrate on which the surface mount area with poor tamper suppression performance is formed is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete components to be surface mounted on the substrate, and is formed on the first substrate. The insertion implementation is performed for the inserted insertion implementation area. In other words, in this case, the second board on which the discrete component, which is originally provided as a surface mount component, is mounted can be inserted into the first board as if it were an insertion-mounted component. It is now expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining a suitable performance for suppressing the mounting of unauthorized components.

Furthermore, the mounting surface (surface mounting surface) of the second board is not provided with any board-side identification markings corresponding to the discrete components that are surface-mounted on the board, and the mounting surface of the first board is is attached with a specific board-side identification mark corresponding to the position where the second board as one electronic component is inserted and mounted, but the specific board-side identification mark is attached to a mounting electronic component of the same type. Including the board-side identification display attached correspondingly to the board-side identification display, this is made in a unique manner different from any of the board-side identification displays attached within the first control section and the second control section. In other words, in this case, even if the specific board-side identification mark attached to the mounting surface of the first board is confirmed, its form is different from the board-side identification mark attached to the same type of electronic component for mounting. Since it is a unique aspect, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which type of discrete component is mounted on the surface of the second board. Furthermore, even if a malicious person were to scrape the mold member and attempt to check the inside in order to understand the type of discrete component that is surface-mounted in the surface-mount area, It is possible to make it difficult to recognize which type of discrete component is mounted.

[Technical philosophy 15]
a first control unit that has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and can perform a control power generation process and a game progression process by using the electronic circuits;
a second control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and by using these electronic circuits, a performance progress process can be executed according to the result of the game progress process;
A gaming machine that can provide a benefit to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the gaming progress process,
The plurality of electronic circuits provided in the first control section include:
Consists of electronic components for the implementation of single-function elements, and includes specific discrete circuits intended to perform specific electrical functions;
The base plate of the first control unit has an insertion mounting area and a surface mounting area formed on different substrates,
Of the base board, on the specific substrate on which the surface mounting area is formed, only a specific type of electronic component for mounting out of the plurality of types of electronic components for mounting that constitutes the specific discrete circuit is surface mounted, and the specific type of electronic component is mounted on the surface of the specific substrate. Various types of electronic components are provided as a single molded electronic component together with electronic components for mounting, and are mounted on a different substrate by being inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on a substrate different from the specific substrate. It is possible to electrically connect between the inserted and mounted components,
Among the plurality of types of electronic components for mounting constituting the specific discrete circuit, other electronic components for mounting different from the specific type are inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on a board different from the specific board. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such technical concept 15, only discrete components (electronic components for mounting constituting a specific discrete circuit) that are unlikely to be targeted by fraud are mounted on a specific board on which a surface mount area with poor fraud prevention performance is formed. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the performance of suppressing the mounting of unauthorized parts.

Moreover, in a specific board on which a surface mount area with inferior tamper suppression performance is formed, only a specific type of electronic component for mounting out of multiple types of electronic components for mounting that constitute a specific discrete circuit is surface mounted, and the electronic component for mounting of the specific type is Various types of electronic components are provided as a single molded electronic component together with electronic components for mounting, and are mounted on a different substrate by being inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on a substrate different from the specific substrate. It is designed to be able to be electrically connected to the inserted and mounted components.

In other words, in this case, the specific board on which the surface-mounted component is mounted can be inserted and mounted on the first board as if it were an insertion-mounted component, which improves the performance of suppressing mounting of unauthorized components. It is now expected to reduce the size of hardware circuits while maintaining a suitable value. In addition, on the above-mentioned specific board, only a specific type of electronic component for mounting out of the electronic components for mounting that constitutes a specific discrete circuit is surface-mounted. It will be possible to make it easier. In addition, since the above-mentioned specific board is molded together with a specific type of electronic component for mounting and then inserted and mounted on another board on which other electronic components for mounting are inserted and mounted, it is possible to To increase the difficulty of circuit understanding for a specific discrete circuit formed across a surface mounting area formed in a board and an insertion mounting area formed on a board different from the specific board, and to be used as a fraud countermeasure. becomes expected.

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. FIG. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board, FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIG. is a table showing a continuation of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board that the main control board receives. First, we will explain the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout that is sent from the main control board to the payout control board, and then we will explain the various commands that are sent from the main control board to the peripheral control boards, and the commands that the main control board receives. Various commands from the payout control board will be explained.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects from various winning switches such as general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, first starting opening sensor 4002, second starting opening sensor 4004, and count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. When the signals are input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board based on these detection signals. This prize ball command has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko machine 1) drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to dispense the upper tray 321 and lower tray 322, which are storage trays. If the machine that pays out game balls as rental balls is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "CR machine"), the main control board The prize ball commands sent from 1310 to the payout control board 951 include commands 10H to 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number). Command 10H specifies one prize ball, and command 11H In command 1EH, 2 prize balls are specified, and in command 1EH, 15 prize balls are specified. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to pay out game balls by the specified number of prize balls.

In addition, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball rental machine (a device that directly dispenses game balls as rental balls to storage trays such as an upper tray 321 and a lower tray 322) are installed adjacent to the gaming hall (hall), and the pachinko machine 1 and the ball rental machine (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "general machine"), as shown in FIG. Commands 20H to 2EH are prepared as the prize ball commands to be sent to , command 20H specifies 1 prize ball, command 21H specifies 2 prize balls, ..., command 2EH specifies the prize ball. Fifteen balls are specified. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to pay out game balls by the specified number of prize balls.

Note that as a common command for the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 88(c), and this command 30H specifies self-check. If the sending side does not receive an ACK signal from the receiving side for a predetermined period of time after sending a command, it can send command 30H and check whether an ACK signal is received. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 951 checks the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be explained. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands have a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a status indicating the type of command that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), It consists of a mode that shows variations of effects and has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the various commands are related to special figure 1 synchronized performance, special figure 2 synchronized performance related, jackpot related, power on, general pattern synchronized performance related, normal electric role performance related, notification display, and status. It is classified into Display, and Others.

[13-2-1. Special figure 1 synchronized production related]
Special figure 1 synchronized production related is based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. 89, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special symbol display 1403 is composed of commands named special symbol 1 synchronized performance start, special symbol 1 designation, special symbol 1 synchronized performance end, and state designation during fluctuation. These various commands are assigned a status of "A*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special pattern 1 synchronized performance start command instructs the start of the special pattern synchronized performance with the performance pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 1 designation command specifies a loss, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. , the special figure 1 synchronized performance end command is for instructing the end of the special figure 1 synchronized performance, and the variation state designation command is for instructing the probability and time saving state. Note that the probability and time saving states include a low probability time saving state which is a low probability state and indicates a time saving state, a high probability time saving state which is a high probability state and indicating a time saving state, and a low probability time saving state which indicates a time saving state which is a high probability state. It consists of a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a state but not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (as a normal gaming state, low probability non-time-saving state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of hitting the jackpot is set higher than the low probability state (normal gaming state), and the time saving state is, for example, a state in which the probability of hitting the jackpot is set higher than that in the normal gaming state. By shortening the time during which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner compared to the non-time saving state (normal gaming state) and displaying them in a static manner in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the normal lottery results, the normal lottery results by the regular lottery (described later) at a predetermined time can be changed. In addition to increasing the number of stop displays compared to the non-time saving state, the period in which the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 are opened and closed is made longer than in the non-time saving state (normal gaming state). A state where it is possible to obtain a lottery opportunity for a special symbol without reducing the number of balls by increasing the acceptance rate (entering rate) of game balls into the second starting port 2004 shown (in other words, compared to the non-time saving state) , by increasing the number of decisions as to whether or not to open and close the pair of movable pieces, and when opening and closing the pair of movable pieces, by lengthening the period of opening and closing of the pair of movable pieces, the second starting port 2004 This is a state in which the acceptance rate (entering rate) of game balls is increased.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization production start command is sent when the special symbol 1 variation starts, the special symbol 1 designation command is sent immediately after the special symbol 1 synchronization production starts, and the special symbol 1 synchronization production start command is sent when the special symbol 1 synchronization production starts. The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning/losing information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

[13-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronized production related]
Special figure 2 synchronized production related is based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. 89, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is composed of commands named ``Start special pattern 2 synchronized performance,'' Special pattern 2 designation, and End special pattern 2 synchronized performance regarding the second special symbol display 1405. These various commands are assigned a status of "B*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special pattern 2 synchronized production start command instructs to start the special pattern synchronized production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 2 designation command specifies a loss, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. , Special figure 2 synchronized performance end is an instruction to end the special figure 2 synchronized performance.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the special pattern 2 synchronization production start command is sent when the special pattern 2 variation starts, the special symbol 2 designation command is sent immediately after the special pattern 2 synchronization production starts, and the special pattern 2 synchronization production start command is sent when the special pattern 2 synchronization production starts. The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variable time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in Figure 89, categories related to jackpots include jackpot opening, jackpot opening 1 Nth opening display, jackpot 1 closing display, jackpot 1 count display, jackpot ending, jackpot symbol display, and small win opening. , small win release display, small win count display, and small win ending commands. These various commands are assigned a status of "C*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of the jackpot opening, and the N-th opening jackpot opening command command starts during the opening of the jackpot 1 in the 1st to 16th rounds (starting slot unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). The big winning hole 1 closing display command is used to indicate when the big winning hole 2005 is opening or starting to open for the Nth round. The winning opening 2005 is closed between rounds or has started closing), and the grand winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the number of game balls with a count of 0 to 10 has been counted (as shown in FIG. 69). The jackpot ending command is for instructing the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is for telling the jackpot number of game balls that have entered the jackpot opening 2005, which is detected by the count sensor 4005. This is an instruction to display symbol information.

In addition, the small win opening command is for instructing the start of the small win opening, and the small win opening display command is for instructing the opening of the small win. The small win count display command is used to instruct the small win medium/large prize opening winning presentation (when the count sensor 4005 detects a game ball that enters the large prize opening 2005 during the small win). The small win ending command instructs the start of the small win ending.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is sent at the start of the jackpot opening, and the N-th time display command when the jackpot 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (when the jackpot 1 is opened (starting port unit 2100). The grand prize opening 1 closing display command is sent when the grand prize opening 1 is closed (starting closing of the grand prize opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100), The big winning hole 1 count display command is used when the big winning hole 1 is opened and when the count changes to the big winning hole 1 (when the big winning hole 2005 of the starting hole unit 2100 is opened, and when the game ball enters the big winning hole 2005) is detected by the count sensor 4005), the jackpot ending command is sent when the jackpot ending starts, and the jackpot symbol display command is sent when the jackpot opening is opened (when the jackpot opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is opened). ) will be sent to.

In addition, the small win opening command is sent at the start of the small win opening, and the small win opening display command is sent when the small win is opened (when the large win opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is opened at the time of the small winning), The small win count display command is sent when a small hit, medium or large prize opening is won (when the game ball that entered the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small winning), and the small winning ending command is sent. , sent when the small winning ending starts. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the power-on category includes commands named state at power-on and main control return destination at power-on. These various commands are assigned a status of "D*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state. The power-on status command is used to control the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. Information that instructs when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, but also when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs) ), information indicating which state (probability and time saving state) to return to among the low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability non time saving state, and high probability non time saving state mentioned above. , and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. For example, when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the model code of this pachinko machine is used to determine which work's copyright it corresponds to, and what kind of game specifications (for example, the probability fluctuation occurs). In addition to the game specifications in which the state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, there are also game specifications in which probability fluctuations occur with the number of changes in the special symbol being limited (for example, 30 or 70 times). (so-called ST machine), etc.). In other words, the information on the model code of a pachinko machine includes the series code to identify the machine type among the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, and the series code to identify the copyright of the work. Copyright code and game specifications (for example, in addition to the game specifications that when a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, the probability change with a limited number of changes of special symbols) It mainly consists of a game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which this occurs.

The main control return destination command at power-on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69, and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. ing.

The transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command is when the main control board is powered on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs) ). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or recovered from a power outage or instantaneous power failure, the main control side power-on process described later is executed and the peripheral control board command in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process is executed. In the transmission process, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Futu synchronization related]
The normal pattern synchronization performance related is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. 89, the normal pattern display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. Regarding the device 1402, it is composed of commands named ``Start of ``Fuji pattern synchronization performance'', ``Family pattern designation'', ``Full pattern synchronization performance end'', and ``Change state designation''. These various commands are assigned a status of "E*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The general pattern synchronization performance start command instructs to start the general pattern synchronized performance with the performance pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern designation command specifies a loss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronization performance end command is for instructing the end of the general figure synchronization performance, and the fluctuation state designation command is for instructing the probability and time saving state. As mentioned above, the probability and time-saving states include a low-probability time-saving state that indicates a time-saving state that is a low probability state, and a high-probability time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state that is a time-saving state. state, a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a low-probability state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (usually As the gaming state, a low probability non-time saving state is set).

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the common symbol synchronization performance start command is sent at the start of the normal symbol 1 variation, the common symbol designation command is sent immediately after the beginning of the common symbol synchronization performance, and the common symbol synchronization performance end command is sent. , is transmitted when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is confirmed), and the fluctuation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the normal symbol winning/losing information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The normal electric effect related is related to the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 that are opened and closed by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. It consists of commands named winning opening, general power open display, and general power opening ending. These various commands are assigned a status of "F*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The general power opening command is for instructing the start of normal power opening, and the general power open display command is for starting the normal power opening (when the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left and right direction by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107). state or when to expand), and the ending command per general map instructs the start of the ending per general map.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal power opening command is sent at the start of the normal power opening, and the normal power release display command is transmitted when the general power is released (a pair of movable pieces move left and right by driving the starting port solenoid 2107). (when expanding in the direction), and the normal map ending command is transmitted when the normal map ending starts. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the notification display classification includes commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection/short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door open, and door close. These various commands are assigned a status of "6*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is used when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 of the starting hole unit 2100 and the game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 of the starting hole unit 2100 even though there is no jackpot (even though it is not a jackpot). When the count sensor 4005 detects the winning abnormality notification), the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical It instructs to start connection abnormality notification when there is a connection abnormality, and the disconnection/short circuit abnormality display command is, for example, sent to the main control board 1310, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the count sensor. 4005, etc., to start displaying a disconnection/short circuit abnormality. This command instructs the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when this occurs. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the vibration sensor 2405, a vibration detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted to instruct the start of vibration detection switch abnormality notification.

Further, the door open command is executed when the door frame 3 is moved relative to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal (open signal) from the door frame open switch 618 inputted via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the door is in an open state, the door open notification is instructed, and the door frame close command is used to close the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618. This command instructs the door open notification to end when the door is open. On the other hand, the main body frame release command is executed when the main body frame 4 is connected to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame release switch 619 inputted via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the main body frame is in the open state, the main body frame open notification is instructed, and the main body frame close command causes the main body frame 4 to close to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619. This is to instruct the end of the main body frame opening notification when the main body frame is in the closed state.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is sent when a prize is won in the big winning opening other than during a jackpot (when the conditional device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. When there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the dispensing control board 951 when sending a command to The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door open command is transmitted when the door is detected to be open (when the door frame 3 is in an open state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618), and the door The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is in a closed state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The main body frame opening command is sent when the main body frame opening is detected (when the main body frame 4 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619), and the main body frame is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when body frame closure is detected (when the body frame 4 is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display classification consists of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command), error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the error cancellation command), and frame status 2 command. There is. These various commands are assigned a status of "7*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command are each commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and detailed explanations of these will be described later. . In addition, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. In addition to setting the status, the received command is also set as the mode. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command from the payout control board 951, it adds "7*H" as additional information to these received commands. This formats the command into a command with a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame status 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame status changes, and when error cancellation navigation is performed, the error cancellation navigation command is sent when error cancellation navigation is performed, and the frame status 2 command is sent when the power is restored. , and when the frame status changes. Note that these formatted frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test-related category includes various commands named test. This test command is assigned "8*H" as the status and "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number). , and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, liquid crystal display control unit 1512, lamp drive board 4170, motor drive board 4180, and frame decoration shown in FIG. 72). This is used to inspect various boards such as the drive amplifier board 194).

The test command is sent at times other than RAM clear when the main control board is powered on and RAM clear. Specifically, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, when the power is restored from a power outage or an instantaneous power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the power-on processing on the main control side, which will be described later, is performed. The test command is executed and transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-10. others]
Other classifications include, as shown in Figure 90, starting opening winning, variation reduction operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect, and It consists of a command named special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned a status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The starting hole winning command instructs the start of the starting hole winning performance, and is the command to start the performance when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002. , and the start of the performance when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004. The high probability end designation command instructs the state transition from the shortening working state to the variable shortening non-working state, and the special symbol 1 memory command is, 0 to 4 special symbols 1 are reserved (game balls enter the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. The special symbol 2 memory command is used to convey the number of balls that have not been played (the number of balls held), and the special symbol 2 memory command is to notify the number of balls that have not been played (the number of balls that have entered the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. The second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (reserved number) that has not yet been used for the variable display of special symbols, and the normal symbol memory command is for normal symbols 1 pending 0 to 4. This is to convey the number of balls that have passed through the gate section 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and which have not yet been used to display fluctuating normal symbols on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 (pending number). Yes, the special symbol 1 memory pre-read production command pre-reads and makes the special symbol 1 pending before the special symbol 1 pending is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. The special symbol 2 memory pre-reading performance command is used to instruct the start of a pre-reading performance that notifies a preview of the display result on the first special symbol display unit 1403 based on the function display unit 1400. This is to instruct the start of a pre-reading performance that pre-reads and notifies a preview of the display result on the second special symbol display 1405 based on the special symbol 2 reservation before the special symbol is used for variable display on the device 1405.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting hole winning command is transmitted at the time of starting hole winning (when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002, or when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002, When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on a detection signal from the starting port sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The fluctuation reduction operation end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is confirmed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been completed (after the outage stop period has elapsed), and the high probability end designation command is , in the case of "high probability N times", the special symbol 1 memory command is sent at the end of the stop period (after the failure stop period has elapsed) after the fluctuation is confirmed after the high probability number of times has been consumed, and the special symbol 1 memory command is used to change the number of balls on hold when special symbol 1 is activated. (When a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and there is a reserved number that has not yet been used in the variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, the first starting It is transmitted when a game ball enters the mouth 2002 and the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations is used to display a variable special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the number of reservations decreases. , the special symbol 2 memory command is executed when the number of reserved balls changes when the special symbol 2 is activated (a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 changes the special symbol). When there is a reserved number that has not been used yet, when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the reserved number increases, or from the reserved number, the special symbol changes on the second special symbol display 1405. The normal symbol storage command is sent when the number of reserved balls changes when the normal symbol 1 is activated (when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the normal symbol on the function display unit 1400 is used for display). In a state where there is a pending number that has not yet been used for the normal symbol fluctuation display on the display 1402, when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the pending number increases, or from the pending number, the normal symbol display 1402 The special symbol 1 memorization pre-reading production command is sent when the number of reserved balls decreases when the normal symbol is displayed fluctuatingly. The special symbol 2 memory pre-reading production command is sent when the special symbol 2 activates and the number of reserved balls increases (when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the number of reserved balls increases). sent when the number increases). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as mentioned above, the starting hole winning command is used when a starting hole is won (when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002, or when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002), When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly transmit audio to notify that fact. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in 72 uses the starting opening winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are designed to not only provide audio notifications but also to monitor whether there is any fraudulent activity. On the other hand, other pachinko machines have specifications in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the starting opening winning command, but does not notify the player by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board that the main control board receives]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 that the main control board 1310 receives will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 91, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 951 includes commands named frame status 1, error cancellation navigation, and frame status 2. The priority order is set in the order of frame state 2.

Frame status 1 commands (equivalent to error occurrence commands) include out of bulb, full tank, 50 or more in stock, connection error, and CR not connected, and if the bulb is out, bit 0 (B0, "B" represents a bit) is set to the value 1, when the tank is full, the value 1 is set to the bit 1 (B1), when there are 50 or more in stock, the value 1 is set to the bit 2 (B2), and when there is a connection error, the value 1 is set to the bit 1 (B1). Bit 3 (B3) is set to a value of 1, and if CR is not connected, bit 4 (B4) is set to a value of 1. In bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, B5 is set to a value of 1, B6 is set to a value of 0, and B7 is set to a value of 0.

The error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to the error cancellation command) includes ball gumming, payout detection sensor error, and retry error. In ball gumming, bit 2 (B2) is set to value 1, and the payout detection sensor In the case of an error, the value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and in the case of a retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, the "dispensing detection sensor error" indicates whether a malfunction has occurred in the dispensing detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70. A "retry error" indicates that inconsistent payouts of game balls have been repeatedly performed due to retry operations. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value of 0 for B0, a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, Then, the value 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command includes a ball being removed, and a value of 1 is set in bit 0 (B0) when the ball is being removed. Bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame status 2 command have a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B2, a value of 0 for B3, a value of 0 for B4, a value of 1 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, and The value 0 is set in B7.

Regarding the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame status 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame status changes, and when error cancellation navigation is performed, the error cancellation navigation command is sent when error cancellation navigation is performed, and the frame status 2 command is sent when error cancellation navigation is performed. is sent when the power is restored and when the frame status changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process which will be described later.

[14. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 92, and FIG. 94 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be explained, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control side timer interrupt process will be explained.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
Various random numbers used for game control include random numbers for jackpot determination, which are used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state, and random numbers for determining whether or not to generate a reach (out of reach) when a jackpot gaming state does not occur. Random numbers for reach determination to be used for determination and fluctuations for use in determining the fluctuation display pattern of special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and second special symbol display 1405 shown in FIG. A random number for a display pattern, a random number for a jackpot symbol used to determine a jackpot symbol derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when generating a jackpot gaming state, and this jackpot symbol. The random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol used to determine the initial value of the random number for the symbol, which is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when generating the small win game state. Random numbers for small winning symbols used to determine small winning symbols, random numbers for determining initial values for small winning symbols, etc. are prepared for use in determining initial values of the random numbers for small winning symbols. In addition to these random numbers, there is also a normal symbol hit determination random number used to determine whether or not to open/close the movable piece shown in FIG. 8, and a random number used to determine the initial value of this normal symbol hit determination random number. A random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol hit determination, a random number for a normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, etc. for use in determining a fluctuating display pattern of a normal symbol fluctuatingly displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. Provided.

Among the various random numbers used for such game control, the random numbers for jackpot determination are updated by hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the jackpot determination random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, this main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an first uses a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a with a value of 1 within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. do. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a selects the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an as a jackpot. It is set as a random number for judgment.

On the other hand, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1, thereby counting up. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is updated. This method of updating a counter is called an "initial value update type counter." The random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number. .

In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated at power-on, or when the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values is stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when the checksum value (sum value) does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is set by the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. retrieves the ID code from its built-in nonvolatile RAM, and performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination based on the retrieved ID code. The system is such that the derived fixed value is set. In other words, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set as the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is set in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer who manufactured the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure is that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used if the ID code is stored in the memory, and the ID code is saved by executing initial value derivation processing when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. A second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the above is taken to prevent the data from being analyzed.

Here, the advantage of extracting the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination will be explained. For example, a person who attempts to illegally obtain game balls that are paid out as prize balls may somehow obtain the game board 5, disassemble it, and steal the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is obtained illegally and it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the ID code is attached with a code, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a' provided in other game boards 5'. In other words, in other game boards 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value is also completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless for other game boards 5', that is, other pachinko machines 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if an instantaneous power outage occurs at each predetermined interval obtained and a game ball is allowed to pass through the gate part 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. It is not possible to generate a gaming state in which game balls can be accepted into the starting port 2004.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer can, for example, indicate the address placed on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after ending a subroutine. It indicates the address loaded onto the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded.

Then, the above-mentioned main control program performs the main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit).

Following step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and startup setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer setting value is set in the "WDT control register"), the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated, and time measurement is started until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts, time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts, and by the time the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a ( If a timer clear setting value is not set in the WDT clear register (hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT1310af starts up and starts measuring time, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and time measurement is started again. In this way, by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af until the time set by the timer setting value is reached and starting time measurement again, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a can operate normally. It is possible to monitor whether the

Following step S12, the main control program performs a power outage clearing process (step S14). In this power clearing process, first, output of a power outage clear signal to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78 is started. This power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares the voltages between +24V and the reference voltage, or compares the voltages between +12V and the reference voltage, and outputs the comparison results. The result of this comparison is that when a power outage or instantaneous power outage does not occur, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

In the power clearing process, first, by starting to output a power outage clear signal to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, outputting the power outage clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of this D type flip-flop MIC22, is started. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca with its logic set to LOW. be done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, can be canceled until the latched state is set. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Subsequently, in the electricity clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether a power outage notice signal has been input. The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power outage or instantaneous power outage (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input as a power outage warning from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). has been done. The determination as to whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is made based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, as the power outage warning signal.

If the power failure warning signal is not input even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, the main control program sends the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal is sent from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, with its logic set to HI, and sent to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. is input. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latched state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches a state in which the logic is LOW and is input to its preset terminal PR terminal, it outputs a power outage warning signal from its output terminal 1Q terminal.

Following step S14, the main control program makes it possible to execute a RAM clear process that initializes the main control built-in RAM (gaming storage unit) for a predetermined period of time from the time the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) to the main control MPU 1310a based on the operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951. Depends on whether or not. Based on the logic value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, it does not instruct to clear the RAM, and the operation switch 954 is operated. On the other hand, when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that it is an instruction to clear the RAM, and it is determined that the operation switch 954 is being operated.

In step S16, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 when the operation switch 954 is operated (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 0 (step S20). That is, the main control program is capable of executing a RAM clearing process that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in RAM (gaming storage unit)) for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. state (gaming control side power-on operation control means). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG determines whether to erase game information related to games such as probability fluctuations and unpaid prize balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. This flag is set to the value 1 when the game information is to be deleted, and to the value 0 when the game information is not to be deleted. Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait time waiting processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that controls the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72 is activated (boot I am waiting until In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. When it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal is input, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Thereafter, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Note that a detailed explanation will be given later regarding the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22.

If it is determined in step S24 that no power outage warning signal is input, the main control program determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the gaming information is to be erased, and to the value 0 when the gaming information is not to be erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S26, that is, when the gaming information is not to be erased, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the total thereof.

Following step S28, the main control program determines that the calculated checksum value (sum value) is the same as the checksum value (sum value) stored in main control side power-off processing (power-off time), which will be described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores and retains game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off processing described later. This is a flag indicating whether or not the main control side power off process has been completed normally, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power off process has been completed normally, and is set to a value of 0 when the main control side power off process has not been normally completed. In the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, the checksum calculation in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection. A detailed explanation of , will be given later.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off processing has ended normally, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM for when the power is restored ( Step S34). In this setting, power restoration information is read from the ROM built into the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, game information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that "power restoration" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after being cut off, as well as the state in which power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage. This also includes a state in which the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset by irradiating the main control board 1310 with high frequency waves from a hidden high frequency output device (hidden high frequency output device), and then returns to normal operation.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, checksum value (sum value), etc. will be changed as various processes are performed after this, so the main control side power-off process (described later) will be successfully completed and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S26, that is, when erasing gaming information, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S30, , or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, the main control program erases all of the main control built-in RAM. The area is cleared (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the gaming control side RAM clearing process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 into the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM and set it as an initial value. The main control MPU 1310a also performs processing when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 instructs to clear the RAM and erases gaming information, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is cut off. If the process has not ended normally, a fixed numerical value range of a counter that retrieves a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a and updates a random number for normal symbol hit determination based on the retrieved ID code. Perform initial value derivation processing to always derive the same fixed value from , and set this fixed value as the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination to be used for determining the initial value of the random number for determining normal symbol hit described above. do.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initial settings (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU 1310a (for example, serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the payout control board 951, serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the peripheral control board 1510, ), the transmission serial port prescaler is configured to set the communication speed, parity is present, etc., and the transmission serial port control register is configured to initialize the transmitting circuit, enable transmission, etc.

Following step S44, the main control program performs test signal output port initialization settings (step S46). Here, in a gaming machine testing institute, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control program performs activation settings for the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to games, a hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a is used to update, by hardware, a jackpot determination random number used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state. At the same time, the hardware random number setting register is set to activate the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an. When the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, a predetermined random number circuit is generated at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77). Other values within the numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and once all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predefined numerical range is extracted again, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication at high speed. Note that when the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an, and when this latch signal is input, the main control The random number (random value) extracted by the built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an is acquired from a hard random number latch register built in the built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the obtained random number value as a random number for jackpot determination.

Following step S48, the main control program performs reservation settings for commands to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (power restored) based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, FIG. A power-on state command classified as power-on and a power-on main control return destination command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM may read out game information from the game backup information and store various commands corresponding to this game information. be. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later. A detailed explanation will be given later regarding the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50.

Following step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control program executes an error cancellation navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, when the main control side main processing has started. This will restrict the execution of the gaming control side RAM clearing process triggered by the receipt (normal operation control means). As described above, based on the concept of time sharing, the main control program uses the detection signal inputted with the operation of the operation switch 954 as the error release navigation command for a predetermined period of time from the power-on as described above. The RAM clearing process is triggered by the input (gaming control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the execution of the RAM clearing process is restricted even if the error cancellation navigation command is input ( (game control side normal operation control means), is handled as a release switch for canceling error notification accompanying an error that has occurred. In other words, the operation switch 954 (error cancellation section), which was originally supposed to be used to cancel an error that occurred regarding the payout operation, is used instead as a game storage section for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. The main control built-in RAM (and the payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) functions as an operation unit for executing a RAM clearing process to start initialization, and after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the game It can function as an operation section for canceling an error that occurs regarding the ball dispensing operation.

Next, the main control program determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

If no power outage warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs a non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning/losing random number updating process, the above-mentioned random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for variable display patterns, random numbers for determining initial values for jackpot symbols, random numbers for determining initial values for small winning symbols, etc. are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number updating process, random numbers that are not related to winning/losing determination (jackpot determining) are updated by software. In addition, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination, random numbers for normal symbol fluctuation display patterns, etc. are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control program determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If the power outage warning signal has not been input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. and repeat steps S54 to S56. Note that the processing from step S54 to step S56 is referred to as "main processing on the main control side."

On the other hand, when a power outage warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). This setting prevents the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, from being performed, prevents writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protects game information from being rewritten.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as that for starting output of the power outage clear signal in the power outage clearing process in step S14 is performed. Thereby, the main control program can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program is as shown in FIG. , the drive signal being output to the second special reservation number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal symbol memory display 1188, the status display 1401, the round display 1407, etc. is stopped (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control program sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM (game storage section), thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage section) from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the built-in main control WDT 1310af started in step S12, the time measurement by the built-in main control WDT 1310af is cleared, and time measurement starts again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Thereafter, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Note that the processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and the main control side power-on process is performed when the power is restored thereafter.

In addition, in step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal or not, and then in step S32, it is checked whether the main control side power-off processing has been completed normally. is being inspected. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is examined whether the game backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

Here, a description will be given of the fact that the determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined following the wait time waiting process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is proceeded. We will explain the problems in .

As mentioned above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is used to charge the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The electric charge is applied as +5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs. In other words, even if the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a momentary power outage or power outage, the electric charge charged to the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V, and the power from the pachinko island equipment is restored. The main control side power-off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power is cut off. This is because a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs while a player is playing a game, that is, while the main control side main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing (described later) occurs and the pachinko island equipment is interrupted. When the power is cut off, the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed reliably.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 when the power is restored, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIG. Start counting the waiting time (boot timer: in this embodiment, 2.5 seconds is set) until the system that controls drawing of the device 460 starts up (boots), and immediately before the waiting time reaches that waiting time. If an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs, the electric charge charged in the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, but within a period of approximately 7ms, step S42 The interrupt initial setting is performed in step S52, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so that even if the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side It may become impossible to complete the main control side power-off process in the power-on process. Therefore, the main control side power-on process is started again when the power is restored without storing the calculated checksum value based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on process is started, the wait time standby process in step S22 is completed without an instantaneous power outage or power outage, and then, in step S28, the main control built-in RAM When the value calculated based on the contents of the checksum and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power outage are compared in step S30, it is found that the checksum values should match. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, when the power is restored, the operation switch 954 is operated by a hall clerk, etc., and the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even without the hall clerk's intention to clear the RAM. ).

Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power outage warning signal is input, Returning again to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before performing the wait time standby process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (gaming information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step 24, and when a power outage warning signal has been input (that is, step When it is determined in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the process returns to the determination in step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, By repeatedly performing the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game cannot proceed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and to prevent variations in the checksum calculation results. This allows the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to determine that the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation and memorized value in step S64 match when restarted. Therefore, there is no need to initialize the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before a momentary power outage or power outage occurs. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the gaming information immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage from being initialized.

Immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step 24, and if the power outage warning signal has not been input (that is, in step S22) (When it is determined in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is in progress of the game, the pachinko machine 1 Even if the power supply to the main control MPU 1310a is cut off, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 supplies power to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the main control side power-off processing consisting of the processing from step S58 to step S68 and an infinite loop, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 When the control MPU 1310a is restarted, the control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the value stored in the checksum calculation in step S64). Therefore, there is no need to initialize the gaming information stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs. In other words, the main control board 1310 can be started after being restored to the gaming information that existed immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage occurred.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage notice signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a forcibly resets the contents of the main control built-in RAM using the main control built-in WDT 1310af. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, the main control side power-off processing can be started again without updating the The main control side power-off processing can be reliably completed within the "instantaneous power outage or power outage securing period" of about 7 ms by the standard hardware. In other words, in this embodiment, when power is cut off from the pachinko island equipment due to an instantaneous power outage or power outage while performing the power-on processing on the main control side at the time of power restoration, the main control MPU 1310a The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in Fig. 77 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal, for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power-off processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms due to the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby processing in step S22 Immediately following step 24, it is determined whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, step S24 is performed. By repeating this determination, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and restarted. By not being able to start time measurement, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. By forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a by the main control built-in WDT 1310af using software, the steps after step S24 (specifically, interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then in step S52). It is possible to avoid updating the contents (gaming information) of the main control built-in RAM by preventing the control flow from proceeding to the control flow in which interrupt permission is set and the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, which will be described later. This system was adopted. In this way, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power is cut off from the pachinko island equipment, the content of the main control built-in RAM (gaming information) will not be changed at all. The content of the main control built-in RAM (game information) is divided into two parts: a hardware part that ensures that the timeout process is completed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (gaming information) are not changed at all. This makes it possible to reliably prevent game information) from being changed.

Next, a description will be given of the reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50. In step S50, as described above, the fact that the power has been turned on (restored) is determined based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to transmit the message, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, this power-on main control return destination command mainly consists of information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. There is. Here, first, if the main control return destination command at power-on does not include information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. A problem in the case where the command to be sent at power-on as the main control return destination command at power-on is not reserved in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a jackpot game state screen (for example, a jackpot game performance screen) in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 shown in FIG. drives the attacker solenoid 2108 to open the big prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. Based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, the game state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurs is restored, so that the attacker When the solenoid 2108 starts to be driven, the big prize opening 2005 changes from the closed state by the opening/closing member 2107 to the open state.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored. When the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot gaming state as a gaming state, if an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will control the main control board 1310 when the power is restored. Based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from It is not possible to display which round of the jackpot game state it is in at all. That is, for example, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. Even if the main control board 1310 sends a message to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the game ball that entered the big prize opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, it is not possible to display which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game state it is in at all.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2108 and opens the big prize opening 2005 by the opening/closing member 2107 when finishing the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state, for example. The main control board 1310 sends a grand prize opening 1 close display command that instructs the transition from the closed state to the closed state (that is, the start of closing the big prize opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 between rounds) from the peripheral control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state by transmitting it to the board 1510, it starts driving the attacker solenoid 2108 and closes the jackpot 2005 by the opening/closing member 2107. The main control board 1310 sends a command to display the opening of the grand prize opening for the fifth time to instruct the state to transition from the state to the open state (that is, to start opening the fifth round of the grand prize opening 2005) from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. do. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen indicating the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game state from the screen corresponding to the probability and time saving state described above and displays it in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. becomes.

In addition, for example, a screen may be displayed that informs the player that the gaming state is such that the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player (for example, that the movable piece is expanded). When the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of the screen that informs the player in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting port solenoid 2107 to display the pair shown in FIG. If an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs while the movable piece is expanded in the left and right direction, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 updates the work area of the RAM with built-in main control in step S34. Based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the settings, the game state is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurred, and the starting port solenoid 2107 is started to drive. The movable piece shifts from a state in which it stands up substantially vertically to a state in which it expands in the left-right direction.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored. When the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which game balls can be received into the second starting port 2004, creating a gaming state advantageous to the player, a momentary power outage or power outage may occur. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and time-saving state specified by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and returned, the game state becomes such that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, resulting in a game state that is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen at all on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to inform that the player is present. For this reason, players seated at the front of the pachinko machine may be surprised at the occurrence of a momentary power outage or power outage, and when the power is restored, game balls may be received into the second starting port 2004 just before the momentary power outage or power outage occurs. In some cases, the user may forget that the gaming state is such that the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004 as the gaming state when the power is restored. Despite this, when the power is restored, a screen instructing a game (that is, a screen instructing a game in which a game ball enters the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. As a result, there was a problem in that the player did not know what kind of game to play.

As described above, in the two examples described above, there was a problem in that the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power outage could not be returned to immediately after the power was restored. In other words, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored, a player seated in front of a pachinko machine will see the pachinko machine system in a frozen state, mistakenly thinking that it has malfunctioned. There was a problem.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 turns on the power (in addition to when the power is turned on, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power failure occurs), the main control board 1310 uses the power-on status command. In order to send the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into power-on shown in FIG. is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-mentioned example, in the fourth round of the jackpot gaming state, When a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 starts driving the attacker solenoid 2108 and opens the big prize opening 2005 from the closed state by the opening/closing member 2107. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen specifying that it is the fourth round of the jackpot game state (in other words, a screen indicating what round it is). ) cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, but in a jackpot game state, when the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the jackpot opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member 2107. A screen that conveys a message to the player (for example, a screen that conveys a message to the player, ``You have won the jackpot. The grand prize opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the grand prize opening.'') It is possible to display on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to instruct a player seated at the front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which a game ball is placed into the big prize opening 2005 after the power is restored. For example, in the above-mentioned example, while the game state is such that game balls can be received into the second starting port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs, and then the power is restored. When the main control board 1310 returns, a screen informing you that the starting port solenoid 2107 has started to be driven and the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left and right direction (for example, a message saying "The movable pieces are expanded") is displayed. The peripheral control board 1510 displays a message on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 that tells the player, "Please play the game so that the game ball enters the lower start opening." can be displayed to instruct a player seated at the front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which a game ball is entered into the second starting port 2004 after power is restored. This allows the main control board 1310 to give detailed instructions as to where the peripheral control board 1510 should return when power is restored after a momentary power outage or power outage occurs. Therefore, after the power is restored, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage. In other words, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored, a player seated in front of a pachinko machine will see the pachinko machine system in a frozen state, mistakenly thinking that it has malfunctioned. This can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process which is the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, the checksum in step S28 is checked when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be explained. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 is Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum is calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S28, it is not executed in step S30. In the comparison and determination, there is no way that the checksum values match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM must be cleared in step S38. As a result, when the command to be sent at power-on is reserved in step S50, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created. By storing transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. will be stored in the state. As for these commands, in the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, first a power-on state command is transmitted, and then a power-on main control return destination command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, as mentioned above, the power-on state command is executed as shown in FIG. Information that instructs when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. (including when the power is restored), the state is restored in any of the above-mentioned low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability non time saving state, and high probability non time saving state (probability and time saving state). It consists of information instructing whether to play the pachinko machine, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem occurs when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

As mentioned above, the model code of the pachinko machine is determined when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs), and what kind of game specifications (for example, a game specification in which the state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs), as well as a limited number of changes in special symbols (for example, It is possible to specify whether the game specification (such as a so-called ST machine) is such that a probability change occurs when the game is played 30 times or 70 times.

In the manufacturing line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works may coexist.
Then, workers on the production line can determine which of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works Movie A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F) has ownership over the copyright. You may not know whether the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright for a work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also a misconception or misunderstanding that it is flowing down the production line. Therefore, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the production line worker will It is not possible to confirm which work's copyright belongs to the manufactured main control board 1310, and even if the copyright of the same work belongs to which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also impossible to confirm what type of game it is (type of game) and what kind of game specifications (game specifications or ST machines in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs). As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of multiple types of works coexist. 1310 will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, workers on the game board assembly line sometimes attached a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there was a problem in that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreased.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the main control board 1310 inputs the model code of the pachinko machine when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs). In order to send the power-on state command including information indicating the power-on state command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on shown in FIG. 89 and the power-on main control return destination command are sent. is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

As a result, a worker on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 can turn on the power to the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on status command received from and sweet digital type, the series code to identify which type it is, the copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, the next jackpot game state will be changed. In addition to game specifications in which the state continues until the occurrence of a special symbol, a game specification code for specifying a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of changes in the special symbol (ST machine, etc.); By visually checking detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on What type of machine is it (max type, middle type, or sweet digital type) and what kind of game specifications (if a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs) It is also possible to determine whether the game is a game specification or an ST machine. As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the main control board inspection process of the production line By being able to visually check the inspection monitor and accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the operator can classify the copyright of the work by main control board 1310 and perform subsequent work. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can reliably attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 corresponding to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 corresponding to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt processing will be explained. This main control side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 92 and 93.

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register banks as shown in FIG. 94 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S100). The general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks, a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is the main routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, the second register bank is changed from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. Switch the register bank to the register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started, there is no need to save each register to the stack.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction processing, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, the normal In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 lights up according to the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern determined by the symbols and the ordinary electric accessory control process, the payout control board 951 also displays various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payer has been received normally is input, time management is performed such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4ms. However, when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes 0. Note that these various times and ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program, for example, detects the detection signal from the general winning hole sensors 4020, 4020 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 which detects the game ball that entered the big prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, and the game ball that entered the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 is detected. A detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69 which detects a game ball entering the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. , a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 which detects the game ball passing through the gate part 2003 shown in FIG. 8, and a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 which detects fraudulent activity using a magnet shown in FIG. The detection signal, the vibration sensor 2405 that detects a fraudulent act that vibrates the gaming machine shown in FIG. 69, and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 informing that the payout control board 951 has been received is read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. In addition, a detection signal from a first starting port sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002, and a detection signal from a second starting port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 2004. When each signal is read, the corresponding starting opening winning command shown in FIG. 90 classified into others is stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002, the corresponding starting port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and when there is a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004. , and the corresponding starting opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in this embodiment, the detection signal from the general winning a prize hole sensor 4020,4020 which detects the game ball which entered the general winning a prize hole 2001,2201, and the count sensor 4005 which detects the game ball which entered the big winning a prize hole 2005 A detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002, a second starting port sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that has entered the second starting port 2004 and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate section 2003. When this switch input process is started, the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is read as the first time, and the detection signal is read for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs ), each is read again a second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the results are not the same, they are read again a third time, and the third and second reading results are compared. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the results are not the same, they are read again a fourth time, and the fourth and third reading results are compared. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is the same, it will be treated as if the game ball did not enter.

In this way, in the switch input process, the main control program receives the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. By performing two readings in total, one for comparing the first to third readings and the second reading for comparing the second to fourth times, it is possible to eliminate the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Since false detection can be avoided, the detection signals from the general prize opening sensors 4020, 4020, count sensor 4005, first starting opening sensor 4002, second starting opening sensor 4004, and gate sensor 4003 are Reliability can be increased.

Following step S104, the main control program performs win/loss random number update processing (step S106). In this win/loss random number update process, the above-mentioned random numbers for jackpot symbols and random numbers for small win symbols are updated. In addition to these random numbers, random numbers for determining the initial value for jackpot symbols, which are updated in the non-winning random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small prize symbol are updated in the main control side main processing and this main control side timer interrupt processing to further enhance randomness. . On the other hand, since the random number for the jackpot symbol and the random number for the small prize symbol are random numbers related to the win/loss determination (jackpot determination), their respective counters count up only every time this win/loss random number update process is performed. In addition, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination and initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol hit determination are also updated by this win/loss random number update process.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is, as mentioned above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value. The range from 1 to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. It counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is updated by this win/loss random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number. .

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are used as the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The winning/losing random number updating process and the winning/losing random number updating process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine are updated, but each time the interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven and the next If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , and the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols may be updated only in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and the prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 for paying out game balls based on this input information is created, and the prize balls are paid out as prize balls. When the planned number of game balls has reached 10 balls, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify that fact, and it is stored as output information in the output information storage area, or A self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for checking the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 balls as prize balls, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is created. Since the number of balls has reached 10 balls, the main prize ball number information output signal is set to be output to notify that fact, stored in the output information storage area as output information, and a prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 951. Or, if the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has successfully received this prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, check the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. A self-check command is created and sent to the payout control board 951. In addition, if the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls exceeds 10, such as when creating a prize ball command that pays out 15 balls as prize balls, the exceeding number of balls will be added to the number of balls that will be played next time. In the prize ball control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added based on this input information, and the added number of game balls is calculated. When the number of balls has reached that point, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify that fact, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S108, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S110). In the payout control board 951, the payout control program includes various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified into status displays shown in FIG. 91 (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command). Send. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, and outputs an error cancellation navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program successfully receives these various commands as payer serial data, the main control program stores information to notify the payout control board 951 to that effect in the main control built-in RAM as output information. Store in area. In addition, the main control program formats the commands normally received as payer serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (various commands categorized by status display in Figure 90 (frame status 1 command, error clearing). The navigation command and the frame state 2 command) are stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. Note that the frame status 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is checked. For example, when the input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is input when the jackpot game state is not (when the game ball enters the jackpot hole 2005), etc. , a winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 as an abnormal state is created, and is stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number extracted by the main control built in hard random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input. (Random number value) is obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and the obtained random number value is set as a random number for jackpot determination. Then, whether or not the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random number obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the built-in main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the built-in main control ROM. (to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state (referred to as "special lottery")), and to update the random number for jackpot symbols.The value of the counter is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the probability variation hit determination value (determination as to whether or not a probability variation is generated). Here, "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of hitting the jackpot changes to a high probability (when the probability changes) that is set higher than when it is normal (low probability). In this embodiment, the above-mentioned jackpot judgment value range (jackpot judgment range) is set to a value of 32,668 to 32,767 for low probability, and is read from the normal judgment table, whereas for high probability, the value is 31,768. ~ value 32767 is set and read from the probability change time determination table. In this way, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process of step S114, the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the When determining whether or not the jackpot judgment value pre-stored in the ROM matches the jackpot judgment value, a random number for jackpot judgment (that is, a random number obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a with built-in main control) is used. This is done depending on whether or not it is included in the jackpot determination range.

If these determination results are based on the first starting port sensor 4002, various commands related to the special map 1 synchronization effect shown in FIG. In some cases, various commands related to special figure 2 synchronized production shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the first special symbol is displayed according to the determined special symbol fluctuation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is set so that the device 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is lit, and is stored in the output information storage area mentioned above as output information. do. In addition, depending on the gaming state to be generated, for example, when a jackpot gaming state is entered, various commands classified into jackpot related as shown in FIG. A closing display command, a jackpot opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening/closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened/closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, and when the number of times (round) that the big prize opening 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state is 2, The output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round indicator lamp 1407a is set so that the 2nd round indicator lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in 10 is lit, and the lighting signal is stored in the output information storage area as output information. In some cases, the output of a lighting signal to the 15th round indicator lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. The output of a lighting signal to the status display 1401 is set to indicate whether or not a fluctuation has occurred in a predetermined color, and the output is stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted and used as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. to be memorized.

This gate information storage area is provided with 0th section to 3rd section (4 sections), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. It looks like this. For example, if the gate information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the gate information storage, and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage. do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information in the first section of the gate information storage is placed in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information in the second section of the gate information storage is placed in the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is placed in the 0th section of the gate information storage. The gate information in the third section of information storage is shifted to the second section of gate information storage, and the third section of gate information storage becomes a free area. For example, if gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information in the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of gate information storage, respectively, and the second section of gate information storage and the third section of gate information storage become empty areas. Here, if gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-mentioned gate information is stored so that the total number of stored gate information is reserved and the normal symbol storage display 1188 is lit. Based on this, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area mentioned above.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and from this read gate information, the random number value for normal symbol hit determination is extracted and stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as "normal lottery"). Based on this determination result (result of a normal lottery), it is determined whether the movable piece is to be opened or closed. When the opening/closing operation is performed based on this determination, the pair of movable pieces expands in the left and right direction, resulting in a gaming state in which the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. It's in a gaming state. The fluctuation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern described above, and various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization performance shown in FIG. 89 are created and sent as the transmission information. In addition to storing it in the transmission information storage area described above, the output of a lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so that the normal symbol display 1402 is lit according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and the above-mentioned output information is set. Store in the output information storage area. For example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the ordinary electric role performance shown in FIG. is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and also sets the output of a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 to open and close the movable piece, and stores it in the output information storage area mentioned above as output information. When the value of the random number for normal symbol hit judgment taken out does not match the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol fluctuation is performed based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern. Decide on the display pattern, create various commands related to the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. The output of a lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the symbol display 1402, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

Following step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area mentioned above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, this main control program sends a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 951 when various commands from the payout control board 951 have been successfully received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. When in the jackpot game state, it outputs a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2005, and outputs a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2107 that opens and closes the movable piece. In addition to outputting, main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information (gaming information) signals related to the game, such as time saving information output information, starting opening winning information output signal, etc., are output to the payout control board 951.

Following step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, this main control program reads transmission information from the above-mentioned transmission information storage area and transmits this transmission information to peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. This transmission information includes various commands categorized as related to special figure 1 synchronized production, created in the main control side timer interrupt process that is this routine, and various commands categorized as related to special figure 2 synchronized production. Commands, various commands related to jackpots (for example, big winning based on the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69) when a game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected. 90 Various commands categorized as notification displays (door open command, door frame close command, body frame open command, body frame close command, etc.) and various commands categorized as status displays (frame status 1 command, error clear), as shown in Navigation commands and frame state 2 commands), various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others are stored. One packet of the main cycle serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main cycle serial data includes a status that indicates the type of command that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode that indicates a variation of the effect that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value and calculating the sum value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands, to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order as main serial data. As described above, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. It is possible to transfer the data to the register 41aea and complete transmission from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main cycle serial data. When the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, in order to notify that the power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. In this case, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , as main cycle serial data, is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes a status command at power-on, and then status, which constitutes a main control return destination command at power-on, The mode and sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, game information is read from the game backup information and is stored in accordance with this game information in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on processing. In some cases, various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the frame status 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit ) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 151 An error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command) is transmitted to (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error cancellation navigation command received from the payout control board 951 in the form shown in FIG. 91 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error cancellation navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 151 A main body frame opening command (second main body frame opening command) is transmitted to the (presentation control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame opening command received from the payout control board 951 in the form shown in FIG. 91 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command received from the payout control board 951 in the form shown in FIG. 91 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

In addition, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (acting control (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame close command received from the payout control board 951 in the form shown in FIG. 91 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a door close command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (presentation control (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door close command received from the payout control board 951 in the form shown in FIG. 91 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a door close command in the form shown in FIG.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. Clearing of the main control built-in WDT 1310af in step S22 is performed by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Then, by restarting time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af, the main control MPU 1310a does not have to be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af.

Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 performs the backup function described above for storing game information based on the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The process can be executed and completed, and when the power is restored, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup process was executed as the destination for the main control board 1310 to resume playing the game. 89, which instructs the drive state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108, which are electrical drive sources, by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine, is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. It is now possible to output to. In other words, the main control board 1310 is the main control board 1310 in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on process in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in control RAM, the power-on status commands and power-on main status commands classified as power-on in FIG. A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 of this routine, the power-on state command is generated as main cycle serial data. The status, mode, and sum value are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, and then the status, mode, and sum value are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the main control return destination command when the power is turned on. Send to. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 determines the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored based on the main control return destination command from the main control board 1310 when the power is turned on. The effect can be displayed in the display area. As a result, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs while a player is playing a game, and then the power is restored, the gaming state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage is restored after the power is restored. At the same time, it is possible to notify the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 by displaying an effect in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It is possible to prevent the player from seeing this state and being mistaken for a malfunction. Therefore, by quickly returning to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage after the power is restored, it is possible to prevent players from misunderstanding that a malfunction has occurred.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process that is the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. The entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38 in the main control side power-on processing. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on is performed in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 in the same process, the power-on state command classified as power-on shown in FIG. By creating a main control return destination command at power-on and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, two commands, the power-on status command and the main control return destination command at power-on, can be created. Only the following information is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 of this routine, the power-on status command is configured as main cycle serial data. The main control board is inspected in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which is sent to the inspection equipment in the main control board inspection process, and then the status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the command to return to the main control when the power is turned on. Send to process inspection equipment. The inspection device in the main control board inspection step configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code to identify the model type among the Max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, in addition to a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of changes in special symbols (ST Detailed machine type information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for specifying the machine (such as machine).

[16-1. Various control processing of peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 95. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control section 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs the peripheral control section power-on processing as shown in FIG. 95. When this peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the production control program performs initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the production control program performs processes such as initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, determining hot start/cold start, and setting a wait timer after reset. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs processing to initialize itself, but the time required to initialize the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a enters a state where interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the commands shown in FIGS. 89 and 90 from the main control board 1310. , it becomes possible to receive various commands such as commands related to control of game performance and commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, regarding the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, the performance backup information (which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) 1fr), and also compare the performance backup information (1ms) which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), and compare the performance backup information (1ms), which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), and compare the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc. ), the performance backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1ms), and the performance backup information (1ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 4 (1ms), were compared. When the contents match, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the contents stored in Bank1 (1fr), and Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, are stored. , the effect backup information (1ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1ms), is copied back to Bank0 (1ms) to perform a hot start, but if the compared contents do not match ( In other words, when there is a mismatch), a value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, to perform a cold start.

In addition, in the hot start/cold start determination process, regarding the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. (SRAM), and the performance backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc. When the compared contents match, the performance backup information (SRAM), which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), is ) to perform a hot start, and if the compared contents do not match (in other words, they do not match), the value is copied back to Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Forcibly write 0 to perform a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to zero-clear it. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I'm trying not to get it on.

Following step S1000, the production control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Furthermore, in the current time information acquisition process, a brightness setting process for the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In this brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and adjusts the brightness of the game board so that the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information is set. Processing is performed to adjust the brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 and turn it on. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and the current brightness. This includes the set brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600.

Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is set. When lighting, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness is adjusted to the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Adjust the brightness and turn on the light. In addition, in the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. This is no longer done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% every time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent this from happening.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. Further, after performing this current time information acquisition processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1002, the production control program sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to the value 0 (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute peripheral control section steady processing, which will be described later.When executing peripheral control section steady processing, the value is 1; When not executed, each is set to the value 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is used for peripheral control, which will be described later, to be executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. The value 1 is set in part V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Furthermore, after setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to the value 0, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset. There is.

Following step S1006, the production control program determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 and it is repeatedly determined whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. By repeating such a determination, the peripheral control unit enters a standby state until the steady state processing is executed. After determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af and the external peripheral control WDT 1511e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I'm trying not to get it on.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is to be executed, the steady processing flag SP-FLG is first set to the value 1 (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, and is set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed.

Following step S1009, the production control program performs a 1ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1ms interrupt timer is activated to execute the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, and the number of times this 1ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized by setting the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting. This 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the production control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the production control program performs continuous DMA serial transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 72. Here, continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 through the lamp drive board serial I/O port. When this lamp drive board serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Game board side light emitting data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is created by the lamp data creation process described later. It is now set.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address is sent to the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register. As a result, the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK to send 1 byte of the transmission shift register. Start transmitting the data one bit at a time.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I/O port is The 1-byte written data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte of data.), the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is sent one byte at a time via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I/O port, the lamp drive board serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and Transmission of 1 byte of data from the transmission shift register is started bit by bit in synchronization with the panel side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board.

In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 72. Also here, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 1511cab, door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created by the lamp data creation process described later. It is now set.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and sends the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The first byte of the door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the first address of 1511cab is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial number via external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the I/O port's transmit buffer register. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK to transfer the data of the transmission buffer register written to the transmission shift register. Start transmitting 1 byte of data 1 bit at a time.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O This is triggered by the fact that 1 byte of data written in the transmit buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmit shift register, and the transmit buffer register no longer has 1 byte of data and becomes empty.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is sent one byte at a time to the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. , and then transfers and writes to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED via the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data in the transmitting buffer register is transferred to the transmitting shift register, and in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, transmission of 1 byte of data in the transmitting shift register is started bit by bit, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is Continuous transmission is performed using the serial I/O port.

Following step S1012, the production control program performs production operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this performance operation unit monitoring process, in the performance operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 410 etc. is performed based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the performance operation unit 400. Based on the performance operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. It will be decided as appropriate whether or not to reflect the changes.

Following step S1014, the production control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source from the channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. It is output to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. In addition, in the display data output process, if the drawing exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is sent to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. Output to the display device 460 is canceled. This makes it possible to prevent delays in processing time, but although so-called dropped frames may occur, various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. Various effects are produced from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 by the multiple LEDs and the multiple LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, and the sound data output processing described later. The system is designed to prioritize the synchronization of music, sound effects, etc., and synchronization.

Following step S1016, the production control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, the production control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation processing described later to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data, In addition to music and sound effects, the sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds are output as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. When this audio data transmission IC 1512c receives serialized audio data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the audio data on the right side is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data using a differential method that has a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left side audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with plus and minus signals. As a result, music, sound effects, etc. matching various performances are played in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and notification sounds and announcement sounds are also played in stereo.

Following step S1018, the production control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the production control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, which screen data from the first screen data is transferred to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. Update the pointer to indicate what to output.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for light emission mode generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of light emission data from the first light emission data is selected for the light emission of various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate the mode.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music, sound effects, etc., and the sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds arranged in chronological order that constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae are specified. The pointer is updated in order to instruct which number of sound command data from the first one of the sound command data is to be output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the first drive data is The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output. The drive data for electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitutes the electrical drive source schedule data, is a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated in motor and solenoid drive processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed every time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in chronological order is performed. Updates the pointer to the data, and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. In other words, the drive data pointed to by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, so if for some reason the pointer points to the original point in the motor and solenoid drive process, Even if the drive data that was originally supposed to be used is to be used to instruct other drive data, the scheduler update process is forcibly updated to instruct the originally intended drive data.

Following step S1020, the production control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the production control program uses information transmitted from the production display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various information transmitted from the main control board 1310. Various commands received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command reception means), which will be described later, are analyzed (command analysis means). The production control program generates schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emitting mode generation, and sound based on information transmitted from the production display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. Generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. do. In addition, the performance control program is configured such that the command received from the main control board 1310 in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing is, for example, a starting opening winning command to instruct the start of the starting opening winning presentation, the number of pending normal symbols, etc. Normal symbol memory command to identify (0 to 4 pieces), symbol synchronization performance start command to instruct the start of symbol synchronization performance, symbol memory command output when the starting pending number changes, large winning opening 2005 The big winning hole 1 count display command (big winning hole count command) that is output every time a game ball is accepted, or the frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command, (command analysis means) and recognizes the current gaming state. In addition, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power was turned on, this production control program executes a command received by this peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing such as a main body frame open command, a main body frame close command, a door open command, or a door frame close command. Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. , the production control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. The various commands include, as shown in Fig. 89, various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronized performance, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronized performance, various commands classified as related to jackpot, and various commands classified as power-on. various commands classified as related to general figure synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric role performance, various commands classified as notification display shown in FIG. 90, and the above-mentioned door frame opening command. , the door frame close command, the main body frame open command, the main body frame close command, the error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the second error cancellation command), and the frame status 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command), etc. There are various commands that are classified, various commands that are classified as test-related, and various commands that are classified as other.

Following step S1022, the production control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, if the command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 as described above includes various commands categorized as the notification display shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit 1511 sends screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. set to the abnormality display mode for executing abnormality notification. It is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c and set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In addition, in warning processing, if multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification will be performed from the highest priority registered in advance, and will automatically transition to other abnormality notifications that remain after the abnormality has been resolved. It is supposed to be done. This makes it possible to monitor multiple abnormalities at the same time without losing the information that the first abnormality has occurred because another abnormality occurs after the first abnormality occurs and before that abnormality is resolved. Can be done.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the power was turned on, the production control program classifies the command analyzed in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above into the status display shown in FIG. In the case of various commands such as the error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), for example, by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a manner different from the normal presentation mode accompanying the presentation operation, for example, the game board side A visual warning is given to the outside using the effect display device 1600 (the effect device), a door frame side effect display device 460 (the effect device), and a lamp (the effect device), and an auditory warning is given to the outside using the speaker ( error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player tries to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 even though the player is in the gaming state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts against the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are prevented.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the production control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the production control program stores it in the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The updated calendar information and time information stored in the time information storage section are updated. Through this RCT acquisition information update processing, the hours, minutes, and seconds, which are the time information stored in the time information storage section, are updated, and the calendar information, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage section, is updated based on this updated time information. The date is updated.

Following step S1026, the production control program performs a pre-read production control process (step S1027). The pre-read effect control process executes the process related to the pre-read effect based on the effect command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, when a special symbol 1 memory pre-read effect command or a special symbol 2 memory pre-read effect command (hereinafter referred to as a "pre-read effect command") is received, the command for executing the pre-read effect is executed. Make settings. Details of the prefetch effect control process will be described later.

The pre-read performance command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. In this embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a prefetch effect command, a prefetch effect execution flag is set in the received command analysis process of step S1022. In the pre-read effect control process, if the pre-read effect execution flag is set, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read effect based on the contents of the pre-read effect command. That is, in this embodiment, even if a prefetch effect command is received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not to actually execute the prefetch effect.

When performing a pre-reading effect, the mode of displaying the start memory on hold is changed as the pre-reading effect (normal pre-reading effect). In addition, after the normal look-ahead effect is executed, if a predetermined condition is met, a continuous look-ahead effect is executed that changes the mode of the pending display every time the starting memory is exhausted, in which a variable display is executed in advance. do. In the prefetch effect control process, a process for executing a normal prefetch effect is performed, and it is also determined whether or not to execute a continuous prefetch effect. The predetermined condition may be, for example, when the number of unused starting memories is a certain number or more, or when there is a high expectation that the result of the variable display game based on the starting memory to be read ahead will be a jackpot. You can.

The contents of the look-ahead effect include not only changing the display mode of the startup memory, but also display effects on the door frame side effect display device 460 such as changing the character display and background, lighting of lamps, etc., and audio output from the speaker. , the movement of a movable body, or the like.

Following step S1027, the production control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer is specified among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for light emission mode generation. Game board side light emitting data SL- for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. DAT is extracted and created from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511, and set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. At the same time, the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 stores the door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3. Alternatively, it is extracted and created from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the LED transmission data storage area 1511cab on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG.

Following step S1028, the production control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the production control program selects the screen data indicated by the pointer from among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the screen generation schedule data whose pointer has been updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020. is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and displays it on the game board side effect display device. 1600 and one screen worth of drawing data (one frame worth) to be displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the production control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the production control program selects the pointer that is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, and controls the built-in sound source to output the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to track numbers specified in the data, and output channels to be used are set according to output channel numbers.

In addition, in the sound data creation process, each time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 73 is activated, and the volume adjustment volume is The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob 1510a is converted into a value in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024-level value is divided into 7 parts and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute, board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and board volume 0 to board volume 6 are set to muffling. The volume is set so that the volume increases toward volume 6. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and the audio data is transmitted as serialized audio data in the audio data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC 1512c, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound are played without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, and the sound source built in the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is used to program the volume from mute to maximum volume. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned board volume which is divided into seven levels, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the music flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, sound effects, and other performance sounds will be low. However, when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when a player is cheating, a notification sound set at a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for the hall staff etc. to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the fraudulent activity of the player. In addition, based on the current board volume that is set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be lowered so that it does not interfere with the music or sound effects, while the advertising sound In addition to the music and sound effects, the volume of the playback can be increased to make the screens displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 more powerful, or to provide an advantageous effect for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a gaming state.

Following step S1032, the production control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the production control program transfers the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Included in Bank0 (1fr) are a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac stores the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, as the performance backup information (1fr) in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Specify to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and copy the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). The stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) starting from the start address of Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa transfers the data to the peripheral control DMA controller. The request factor of 1511ac specifies copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied to Bank0 (1fr). ), all of the content stored at the end address of the backup area 1511cb is sequentially copied starting from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb, one byte at a time (for example, one byte).

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank0 (1fr). ) from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), sequentially backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the second area 1511cc. Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies that the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are successively stored in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at a time in Bank4 (of the backup second area 1511cc). 1fr) in order from the first address.

In addition, in the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is backed up every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac transfers the performance information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), as the performance backup information (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db. Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the data to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Specify to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and copy the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank 1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa transfers the data to the peripheral control DMA controller. In the request factor of 1511ac, specify copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and copy the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank0 (SRAM). ), all of the content stored at the end address of 1511 db is sequentially copied starting from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511 db, one byte at a time (for example, 1 byte).

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc. ) from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), successively backup a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the second area 1511dc. Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies that the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) be copied to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored in the last address of Bank0 (SRAM) are successively stored in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at a time in Bank4 (of the second backup area 1511dc). Copy everything in order starting from the first address of SRAM).

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clearing process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1036, the production control program sets the value 0 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later. That is, in step S1008, the system waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1009 to The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. In this way, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the processes in steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing."

This peripheral control section steady processing starts with the production control program first setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1009, indicating that the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, and then setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to a value of 1 in step S1010. The interrupt timer activation process is performed, and the processes of steps S1012, S1014, . Setting this will complete the process. The peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later. In this embodiment, as mentioned above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps, so V The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be accepted, as shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed in response to this will be explained. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 (step S1045). As described above, this steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 95 is being executed; They are each set to the value 0 when the processing is completed.

If the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, this routine is immediately terminated. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050); Exit this routine. As mentioned above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control section steady processing, and when the peripheral control section steady processing is executed, the value is 1; They are each set to a value of 0 when no stationary processing is executed.

In this embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed, and the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed. Sometimes, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady state processing currently being executed is assumed to be executed in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. Since the peripheral control unit steady state processing is forcibly canceled midway through and starts execution from the beginning, in order to prevent this, the steady state processing is canceled in step S1009 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady state processing) in FIG. By setting the value 1 to the processing flag SP-FLG, the fact that the steady processing of the peripheral control unit is being executed is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing that is this routine, and the peripheral control unit power supply shown in FIG. By setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the input processing (peripheral control steady state processing), the completion of the peripheral control steady state processing is indicated by the peripheral control V blank in this routine. By transmitting the signal to the signal interrupt processing, it is determined whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the judgment in step S1045 in the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, that is, the peripheral control section steady processing is executed. It is designed to determine whether or not the process has been completed. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the routine processing of the peripheral control section cannot be completed between the input of the V blank signal and the input of the next V blank signal, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, if the processing cannot be completed in approximately 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next It is in a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, it takes approximately 66.6 ms to execute the current peripheral control section steady processing that has failed. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is normally executed repeatedly each time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process will be executed 64 times. It is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the steady processing of the peripheral control unit fails, the progress state of the effect caused by the steady processing of the peripheral control unit and the progress state of the effect caused by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress of the performance can be reliably matched.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed each time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 95. . When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 determines whether the 1ms timer interrupt execution number STN is smaller than 33, as shown in FIG. is determined (step S1100). As described above, the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer being activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, as mentioned above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps, so V The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3ms, after starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before the process is executed. Specifically, when the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit, first the first 1ms timer interrupt occurs, then the second, etc., and then the 32nd 1ms timer interrupt are sequentially generated. This will occur.

If the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN is not smaller than 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is immediately terminated. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has priority over the peripheral control unit V blank signal. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, if the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN (incremented, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. The number of times this routine, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, has been executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electrical drive source schedule data arranged in time series that constitutes the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. At the same time, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in chronological order, and the pointer is updated every time this motor and solenoid drive process is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c is first read. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the production operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series. The door side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive data of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Set in the amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first byte of the door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the start address of the area 1511caf is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK to the transmission shift register. Start transmitting 1 byte of data bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O This is triggered by the fact that 1 byte of data written in the transmit buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmit shift register, and the transmit buffer register no longer has 1 byte of data and becomes empty.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is transferred one byte at a time to the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller. 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. Transfers the data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, starts transmitting 1 byte of data in the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and transfers the data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. Continuous transmission is performed using the motor serial I/O port.

Further, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also here, continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 through the serial I/O port for the motor drive board. When this serial I/O port serial transmission for the motor drive board is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c is configured. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting drive signals to the solenoid and solenoid is extracted and created from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. 73 in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies transmission of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it at the start address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The first byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is sent to the transmission buffer of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to register. As a result, the serial I/O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the motor drive clock signal SM-CLK on the gaming board side. Start transmitting byte data one bit at a time.

Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, interrupts the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port) whenever a transmission interrupt request of the motor drive board serial I/O port occurs. The 1-byte written data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte of data.), the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is sent one byte at a time via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. , by transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port, the motor drive board serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, Transmission of one byte of data from the transmission shift register is started bit by bit in synchronization with the motor drive clock signal SM-CLK on the game board side, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired from the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in this movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah.

Following step S1106, performance operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this production operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation (operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the production operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Whether or not the operation button 410 is operated can be acquired from the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the performance operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak of the control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 detects that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact, and specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. From the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, the frequency of failures and the occurrence status of failures between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 are acquired, and the door frame side effect display device 460 drawing status can be obtained.

Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc for backup. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c, each time the 1ms interrupt timer occurs in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed. Each time, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah are included in Bank0 (1ms) which is the backup target. , and the effect information (1ms) stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai as effect backup information (1ms) around Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cb. The control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Specify to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank1 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cb, and copy the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). The stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) starting from the start address of Bank1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa transfers the data to the peripheral control DMA controller. In the request factor of 1511ac, specify copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank2 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cb, and copy the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (1ms) to Bank0 (1ms). ), all of the contents stored at the end address of the backup area 1511cb are sequentially copied one byte at a time starting from the start address of Bank2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb.

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank3 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank0 (1ms). ) from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1ms), sequentially backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (1ms) of the second area 1511cc. Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies that the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) be copied to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1ms) are successively stored in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at a time in Bank4 (of the backup second area 1511cc). 1ms) in order from the first address.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 described above as the progress of the effects are executed within a period of 1ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 95, various processes related to the effect from step S1012 to step S1032 described above as the progress of the effect are executed within a period of about 33.3 ms. are doing. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. , this routine ends as is, so even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt After forcibly canceling the start of the 1ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control is started again by the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. In other words, the consistency between the state of progress of the performance by the steady processing of the peripheral control unit and the state of progress of the performance by the 1ms timer interrupt process of the peripheral control unit, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the performance.

In addition, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a The interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary somewhat depending on the production lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute section V blank interrupt processing, the start of peripheral control section 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. This makes it possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 start being transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. One byte (8 bits) of information is loaded into the reception buffer by the serial I/O port for the board, and when this loading is completed, an interrupt is generated using this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main cycle serial data, one packet consists of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values and are summed as the 3rd byte. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 98 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received among the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when it is within the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received, the peripheral One byte of information received from the reception buffer of the main control board serial I/O port built in the control MPU 1511a is taken in (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (incremented, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data is taken out from the reception buffer.When the status, which is the first byte of the main frequency serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the value is 1, which is the second byte of the main frequency serial data, which is the mode. When taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. Note that the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, has been taken out from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this judgment, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, are sequentially read from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC is not value 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode which is still the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the third byte of the main cycle serial data. If the sum values are not taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received is set.

On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the third byte of the main cycle serial data. When the sum value of the byte is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, which has already been taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, are regarded as numerical values, and their sum (sum value ) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main frequency serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main frequency serial data among the main frequency serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island equipment, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, electrostatic discharge occurs and noise is generated, so the pachinko machine 1 is not affected by the noise. It is in a sanding environment. Therefore, in this embodiment, on the peripheral control unit 1511 side, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are regarded as numerical values. and calculates the sum value (sum value), and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether the main circumference serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has changed to main circumference serial data different from the normal one due to the influence of noise. be able to.

In step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the received main cycle serial data The status allocated as the first byte of the main serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are stored in the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. (step S1216), and this routine ends. This received command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the 1st byte of the main serial data and the mode allocated as the 2nd byte of the main serial data are the received command storage area. 1511cac is stored in the peripheral control section reception ring buffer. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used as if the end and beginning of the buffer are connected, and it stores data sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and returns to the beginning when it reaches the end of the buffer. Remember. The peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the status allocated as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the status allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data when storing it in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. The sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, if the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period has exceeded the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received. Sometimes, or in step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is continued as is. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal is executed when the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. Interrupt processing will be explained. When this peripheral control section power outage notice signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control section 1511 shown in FIG. 72 first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1320), signal) is input (step S1302). If it is determined that the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has not been input, this routine is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the power outage warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer activated in step S1320 has elapsed for 2 microseconds. If 2 macro seconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input, and if the power outage warning signal has not been input, this routine ends, while the power outage warning signal is input. If a signal is being input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. In other words, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

If the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is the main routine, is started in step S1304, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 are turned off, the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 is turned off, and various LEDs are turned off, etc. in sequence. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured for only a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being sent by the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 waits for at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the commands being sent. It is set to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described above is started, and the received command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. ) the received command is stored.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73 are transferred to Bank1 (1fr) and The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies data to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies data to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac specifies copying of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. Then, the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is stored in a predetermined byte (e.g. , 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa copies the request source of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify to copy the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and copy the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank0 (1fr). The content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in the received command storage area 1511cac to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank 0 (1fr) is contiguous by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). Then, all the received command storage areas included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb are copied in order from the first address.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. The content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is stored to the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). The received command storage area is sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and then the peripheral control MPU core The peripheral control DMA controller 1511aa transfers the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Copy is specified, and the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is copied to a specified value. All bytes (for example, 1 byte) are sequentially copied starting from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

Following step S1310, it is determined whether a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has been input (step S1312). If it is determined that a power outage warning signal has been input, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset. .

On the other hand, if the power outage warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again and it is determined whether the power outage warning signal is being input. In other words, it continues to be determined indefinitely whether or not a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has been input. By continuing to make the determination infinitely in this way, when the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. cannot be output, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. Note that when the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 is restarted.

In this way, if the determination in step S1312 is that the input of the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) continues in the infinite loop, the WDT clearing process is executed in step S1314, so that peripheral control is performed immediately before the power outage occurs. The MPU 1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power outage notice signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled, the WDT clearing process is not executed, and therefore the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e are The output of the clear signal is now interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing of this routine is mistakenly started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for more than 2 microseconds and passes the determination in step S1302, the step If it is determined in S1312 that the input of the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset because the WDT clearing process in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to deal with such noise by automatically returning to reset.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as part of the drawing state information acquisition process in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, a history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, this LOCKN signal is the drawing data that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 receives from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. If it is determined that the data is abnormal, this is a signal that is output to notify that fact. Specifically, it is a signal that is output to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side performance receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, as shown in FIG. LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is stored in 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. remembered.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). This determination is made because when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. , requests transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (normal data). This data is used to confirm (recover) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the pattern (SYNC pattern) is not requested to be transmitted.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, a shift process of LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1504). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift process, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the most significant bits B7←B6, B6← B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to the value 1 (step S1506), and this routine is ended.

On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, a shift process of LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). In this shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed, and when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal read out in step S1500 is Signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is changed to the least significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0. Shift one bit at a time toward the most significant bit B7.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to 0 (step S1510), and this routine ends.

In this way, each time this LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then shifted to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, it is possible to create a history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0.

[16-1-7. Connection failure determination process]
Next, a connection failure determination process executed as part of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection failure determination process, based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87, the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 It is determined whether or not a problem has occurred in the connection between the performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, as shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, this LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450. As described above, this LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined that this is the case, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact, and specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

Following step S1520, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). This determination is made by determining whether the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation judgment value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination in step S1522, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

In step S1522, if the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is prepared. It is determined that there is no problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. and then exit this routine.

On the other hand, in step S1522, if the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 151 There is a problem in the connection between the door frame side presentation transmitter IC1512d prepared for the event and the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the presentation display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by the value 1 (step S1524). Each time this routine is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times it has been determined in step S1522 that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. (counts the cumulative number of times). Note that the communication check counter CC-CNT is set to a value of 0 and reset when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, but it is not reset due to a momentary power outage or power outage, and when the power is restored. In some cases, the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is restored to the instant or immediately before the power outage.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative count of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative count. While it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times it has been determined that this state has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number of times. If the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S1528), and this routine is ended. On the other hand, in step S1526, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S1530), and this routine is ended. The communication error flag CC-FLG indicates that the connection between the transmitter and receiver is interrupted when the cumulative number of times it has been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. This is a flag that indicates whether a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, and the value is 1 when there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. When the cumulative number of times it is determined that the current state is in the current state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0. Note that the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 and reset when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, but it is not reset due to a momentary power outage or power outage, and is not reset when the power is restored. At times, the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is restored to the value of the moment or immediately before a power outage.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery processing]
Next, a connection recovery process executed as part of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection recovery process, which is executed following the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is output to confirm (recover) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. We will notify you to that effect.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process in step S1020, it is determined whether or not screen generation schedule data is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. S1540). This determination is used to instruct which screen data, starting from the first screen data, is to be output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation in the scheduler update process. Then, it is determined whether the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the presentation is progressing according to the screen generation schedule data, so while it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is being activated, the screen generation schedule When the performance has been completed in accordance with the data and all pointer updates have been completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data has not been activated. Note that this determination includes the period during which the startup screen when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 performs a demonstration while waiting for a customer. It is possible to judge whether or not it is the current period based on the schedule data for screen generation, and display the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side effect display device 1600. In the period when the player is waiting for a customer and a demonstration is being performed using the game board-side effect display device 1600, the process proceeds to step S1542, which will be described later. When the period is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the period when the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a state of waiting for a customer and performing a demonstration (when it is simply in a state of waiting for a customer), This routine ends immediately.

In step S1540, when the performance is progressing in accordance with the screen generation schedule data, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is being activated, this routine is immediately terminated, while in step S1540, the performance is progressing in accordance with the screen generation schedule data. When the effect has been completed and all pointer updates have been completed, that is, when the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step S1542). As described above, each time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT is set to Counts up the number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. (counts the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether it has been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once.

If the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, if it has not been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, then the While the routine ends, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 in step S1542, that is, the number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is even 1. If so, it is determined whether the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, this communication error flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times it has been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, and the transmitter This flag indicates whether or not there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.The value is 1 when there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. When the cumulative number of times it has been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0.

When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. If the value has not been reached, SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine is ended. In this SYNC pattern output processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, thereby causing the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 to The transmitter IC1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d, and is output to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, and is used for door frame side performance. This is to restore the connection between the transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

On the other hand, if the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, if a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, the communication error display process is performed. (step S1548), and this routine ends. In this communication error display process, in order to reliably notify that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. Performs processing to draw on. For example, in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, a message “A malfunction has occurred in the door frame side performance display device. Please call the store clerk.” is displayed. In addition, in the communication error display process, the startup screen when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the period when the game board side effect display device 1600 displays a demonstration while waiting for a customer. During this period, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. In order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 outputs the LOCKN signal. As a response signal to the transmission of signal output request data, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and if this LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. It is determined that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, and a notification image (for example, "A problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device. Please call the store staff.") is displayed to that effect during the game. In addition to performing the process of displaying in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600, a notification sound (for example, "There is a problem with the door frame side effect display device.") is repeatedly emitted from the speaker etc. installed in the door frame 3. Perform flowing processing. At this time, a process may be performed in which all of the light-emitting decorative LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 are turned on.

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described using the timing chart shown in FIG. 103.

First, to briefly explain the decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8, the peripheral control of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. A variable display of the decorative pattern is executed by part steady processing, etc., and the main control side of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 93 is performed by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 through the main process or the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 94, or the second special lottery result shown in FIG. When the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the starting hole 2004 becomes a "jackpot", the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. 8 will be from 1 round to 15 rounds. There will be a total of 15 rounds, and in each round, if a game ball enters the grand prize opening 2005 within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls), The round is completed, and each time one game ball enters the grand prize opening 2005, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out.

The first special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball into the first starting port 2002 or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball into the second starting port 2004 is determined by the main control board 1310. Based on the command, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, so that a left decorative pattern is displayed on the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and a central decorative pattern is displayed in the center. Then, on the right side, the variable display of the right side decorative pattern is started, and after a predetermined period of time, the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is stopped, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is displayed. At this time, the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result can also be confirmed in the symbol or the second special symbol. When the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner, the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are translucent to the extent that the background image is visible, and the left side decorative pattern is displayed. The reels rotate from the upper left side of the area to the lower left side of the area, the center decorative symbols rotate from the upper center side of the display area to the lower center side of the display area, and the right side decorative symbols rotate from the upper right side of the display area to the lower right side of the display area. When the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed in a fluctuating manner as if they were floating, and the left side decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right side decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, they correspond to the stopped and displayed left side decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right side decorative pattern. The left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are opaque so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. In this way, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that starts to be displayed variably and then stops on the first special symbol display 1403 or second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66, The left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern, which are started to be displayed in a variable manner and then stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, are synchronized.

The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 selects a first special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball into the first starting port 2002 or a second special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball into the second starting port 2004. Upon receiving a command from the main control board 1310 that conveys the special lottery results, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command to display the game board side shown in FIG. 8 as shown in FIG. 103. When the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern starts in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit steady state of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the first screen of the screen data arranged in chronological order forming the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The pointer is updated to instruct which screen data to output to the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source.In other words, when the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process, the screen data is updated in accordance with the schedule data for screen generation. Since the production is in progress, the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, and while the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, that is, the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is not started. Until the stop display is displayed, even if the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. , the determination in step S1540 in this connection recovery process causes the routine to be forcibly terminated.

As a result, the communication check counter CC-CNT is kept in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 from the start of the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol until they are stopped and displayed. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, between the transmitter and Even if the number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver is even once, the SYNC pattern output process in step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and receiver The communication error display process in step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 displays "Door Frame". A malfunction has occurred in the side effect display device. Please call the store staff.'' The message is not displayed, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. In addition to invalidating the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Display.

When the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to display the left decorative symbols, central decorative symbols, and right decorative symbols in a variable manner and stops displaying them (timing K1), the peripheral control unit power is turned on as shown in FIG. 95. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the time process, the effect is completed in accordance with the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since all the updates have been completed, that is, in the scheduler update process, the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated, and while the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated, the peripheral control unit power is turned on as shown in FIG. In the determination in step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102, which is executed as part of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the time process, the process advances to step S1542 in the same process, and the communication check counter CC- When the value of CNT is 0, that is, when it has been determined that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the routine is terminated and the communication check counter is When the value of CC-CNT is not 0, that is, when it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process advances to step S1544 in the same process. When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. If the value has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S1546, the above-described SYNC pattern output process is performed, and the routine ends. On the other hand, if the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1), In other words, if a problem definitely occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process advances to step S1548, the above-described communication error display process is performed, and the routine ends. In other words, while the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are being stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side performance receiver If there is a problem with the connection to ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver, even once, and if there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver. When the cumulative number of times determined to be present does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is performed without fail, so that between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, In other words, while processing is performed to restore the connection between the transmitter and receiver, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. (In other words, there is definitely a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver), by always performing the communication error display process, for example, " A malfunction has occurred in the door frame side effect display device. Please call the store staff.'' The process is to display and notify the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which conveys that the data is valid, is enabled.

In the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern start to be displayed in a variable manner, and are stopped, and then the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner again. During the interval period until the start of the game, the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is enabled, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d are activated. A state in which a problem has occurred at least once in the connection with the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. If the cumulative number of times determined to be the same does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is performed without fail, thereby reducing the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0. In other words, while performing processing to restore the connection between the transmitter and receiver, the cumulative number of times it has been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. (In other words, there is definitely a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver), by always performing communication error display processing, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 Processing is performed to display and notify the message ``A malfunction has occurred in the door frame side performance display device. Please call the store staff.''

When the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern starts again (timing K2), as described above, since the screen generation schedule data is being activated, the left side decorative pattern and the center decorative pattern , and until the right side decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510 The number of times it has been determined that a problem has occurred between the connection between the transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. Even if the connection recovery process is repeated, the SYNC pattern output process in step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the process to recover the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed. The communication error display process in step S1548 is not performed, and for example, the message "A malfunction has occurred in the door frame side effect display device. Please call the store clerk." is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data is disabled, and the door frame side effect display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d.

In this way, in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern start to be displayed in a variable manner, and then are stopped, and then the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed again. During the interval period until the start of the fluctuating display of symbols, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 is activated, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. On the other hand, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter The LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, which indicates that the drawing data received from the IC1512d is abnormal data, is disabled. This is because the combination result of the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the information that is most interesting to the player, and is beneficial to the player. Since the player can judge whether or not a jackpot game state in which a jackpot is awarded will occur, the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Then, until the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the effect image drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is distorted due to the influence of noise and may not be correct. Even if it becomes impossible to draw, instead of interrupting the performance midway through and performing processing to restore the state to a state where it can be drawn correctly, the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 displays the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and By stopping and displaying the right-side decorative pattern, the information most interesting to the player is completed.

In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the period during which the startup screen of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the power is turned on, and the period when the pachinko machine 1 is displayed in the customer waiting state. This is greatly different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510 during the demonstration using the game board side performance display device 1600. This LOCKN signal output request data includes the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, and the period during which the game board side performance display device 1600 displays a demonstration while waiting for a customer. During the period of execution, the information is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and is transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, the differential Two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the switching circuit 1512e are input to a forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuit so as to transmit the two signals. Two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the pan unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is As described above, since the data format is different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is determined that the data is abnormal, and the LOCKN signal is sent to the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Output to control MPU 1511a. As a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input, and sends the effect to the effect display drive board 4450. While it can be determined that no malfunction has occurred, if the LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and a malfunction has occurred in the production display drive board 4450. A notification image (for example, "A malfunction has occurred in the door frame side effect display device. Please call the store staff.") is displayed on the game board side effect display device by controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source. 1600, and outputs a notification sound to that effect (for example, "There is a problem with the door frame side effect display device.") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. A notification sound is emitted from a speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. As a result, notification can be made using the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker etc. provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the light-emitting decorative LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f can receive the LOCKN signal output request data at the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0. The circuit is connected so that the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, which has received the LOCKN signal output request data, outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a response signal. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no problem in the door frame side effect display device 460. When no signal is input, it can be determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460. Then, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as a notification process. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a discovers a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460, it can notify the hall clerk etc. of this by executing a notification process. Hall clerks and the like can very easily check whether or not a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side performance display device 460 before a player plays a game, and this check does not take much time. ing. Therefore, a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460 can be discovered without much effort.

Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined that there is, it is a signal that is output to notify that fact. Specifically, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact. This is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver, so it is used for door frame side production. When the receiver ICSDIC0 cannot properly receive the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, a communication problem occurs between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. In order to notify that the rendered drawing data is abnormal data, a LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input sends a connection confirmation signal to the door indicating that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is to be started being transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0. By outputting to the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is possible to eliminate communication problems between image communications. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can early discover a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication failure during image communication, and can act on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to resolve the defect. It looks like this. Therefore, by discovering and resolving the malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460, receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. If reception cannot be received normally, the production control microprocessor sends a LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure signal that indicates that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d. Since it is possible to output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, causing a communication problem. The generated image is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It is now possible to display and notify users. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication malfunction during image communication at an early stage, and notifies the player seated at the front of the pachinko machine 1 of the malfunction to that effect. Since the player can notify the pachinko hall clerk, etc., or directly notify the pachinko hall clerk, etc. who happened to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko hall clerk, etc. will be able to notify the pachinko machine 1 of the occurrence of the malfunction. You can begin work to resolve the problem at an early stage. Therefore, by early detection and resolution of the malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the effect display drive board 4450 during the period from timing K1 to timing K2 (interval period). If a problem occurs even once in the connection between the side production receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. When the cumulative number of times it is determined that the state is in a state of A connection confirmation signal is sent to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. , it is possible to continue outputting repeatedly. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Since the connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period when the game is started and stopped and the game is not progressing, communication problems can be resolved.

Then, during the period from timing K1 to timing K2 (interval period), the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect provided in the effect display drive board 4450. If a problem occurs even once in the connection between the performance receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. If the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is activated to enable the LOCKN signal and eliminate communication problems during image communication. The door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d sends a connection confirmation signal to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to inform the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 of the start of transmission, until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. While the output continues to be repeated, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 to play the game. When the process starts again, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped, and when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d performs a predetermined process. It is possible to stop sending the data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 and output the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0. It looks like this. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a problem-resolving signal, only during the period when the game starts and stops and is not progressing, it is possible to move in the direction of resolving the communication problem. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game and stops displaying it on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. While repeatedly outputting the connection confirmation signal only during the period when the game is not progressing, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 displays the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Even if the first special symbol or the second special symbol game is started to fluctuate and the game progress is started again, the distortion of the performance (disturbance of the image) that progresses on the display screen of the door frame side performance display device 460, Each time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and ends the game again (every time the period from timing K1 to timing K2 (interval period) begins), it is possible to move the game toward resolution.

According to the embodiment described above, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70. The main control board 1310 controls the first starting port 2002, which is a starting area provided in the gaming area 5a, and the second starting port 2002, which is a starting area provided in the gaming area 5a, when a game ball is fired by a ball launcher 650 toward a game area 5a defined on the game board 5. A main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on the ball entering the mouth 2004, is installed. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball commands shown in FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b), which are payout commands from the main control board 1310. 70 payout control MPUs 952a are installed.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information regarding games even after the power is turned off.

The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built into the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information regarding payout even after the power is shut off.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment further includes an operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 70. If the operation switch 954 is operated within a period from when the power is turned on to when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed, information regarding the game stored in the main control internal RAM is erased. The RAM clear signal shown in FIG. 77 is output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a gaming control microprocessor, and if the operation is performed within the period from when the power is turned on to when the power-on processing of the payout control unit is performed, the RAM clear signal with built-in payout control is A RAM clear function outputs the RWMCLR signal shown in FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing stored payout information, and the main control side power supply shown in FIG. 92 from the time of power-on. If the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process in step S16 in the power-on process is performed (or the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from the time the power is turned on), the error that has occurred regarding the payout device 830 is canceled. This system also has an error cancellation function that outputs the RWMCLR signal shown in FIG. 82 as an error cancellation signal to the payout control MPU 952a, which is the payout control microprocessor, without outputting it to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor. .

In this way, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a period from when the power is turned on to when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed, the game stored in the main control internal RAM is When the RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 for erasing the information regarding is outputted to the main control MPU 1310a which is the gaming control microprocessor, and the payout control unit is operated within the period from power-on to the power-on processing of the payout control unit, A RAM clear function outputs the RWMCLR signal shown in FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing information related to payouts stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and a RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal shown in FIG. If the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process is performed (or the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed after the power is turned on) has elapsed, the dispensing device 830 An error cancellation function that outputs the RWMCLR signal shown in FIG. 82 as an error cancellation signal to cancel the generated error to the payout control MPU 952a, which is the payout control microprocessor, without outputting it to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor. Therefore, by operating one operation switch 954, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error release function. Therefore, it is possible to provide a RAM clear function and an error release function while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input section of the panel relay board 4161 includes various detection sensors arranged on the game board, such as a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting opening sensor 4002, a second starting opening sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, and a vibration sensor 2405. This is a circuit into which detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the like are input. Since the circuit configuration into which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is cited as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit into which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be explained. do.

Attempting to gain unfair profits by manipulating the flow of game balls as desired by, for example, bringing a magnet (e.g., a permanent magnet or electromagnet) close to a game ball that has been hit into the gaming area of a game machine. There is no end to fraudulent gaming activities.

In order to detect such fraudulent gaming activities and suppress them by means of light emitting means, audio warnings, etc., magnetic detection sensors 4024 capable of detecting magnetism are provided corresponding to predetermined positions in the gaming area. There is.

[Conventional magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 104 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit installed in a gaming machine. The gaming machine has a main control board 1310 and a panel relay board 4161. As shown in the figure, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is supplied with a voltage of +5V generated by a +5V generation circuit 1310g.

The magnetic detection sensor 4024 includes a magnetic sensor MGS and a built-in transistor STR. The magnetic sensor MGS is composed of, for example, a magnetoresistive element, and outputs a predetermined voltage (for example, +5V) when it does not detect magnetism of a predetermined value or more, and outputs a voltage when it detects magnetism of a predetermined value or more. It is set not to (0V).

The base terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR is grounded. The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay board 4161 via a connector CON1, and +12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. As a result, when the transistor STR is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor IR0 (corresponding to the first voltage).

When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the transistor STR is turned on by the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS, and a current flows from the collector terminal to the ground via the emitter terminal. Further, when the transistor STR is in a detection state in which the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism, the output from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, so that the transistor STR is turned off, and the flow of current from the collector terminal to the emitter terminal is stopped.

In addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor IR0, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is also connected to one end of the resistor IR1, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2, and +12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2. As a result, when the transistor ITR0 is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected not only to the pull-up resistor IR2 but also to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the subsequent stage. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

The main control input circuit 1310b is composed of a pull-up resistor NR1, a resistor NR2, and a transistor NTR1, and one end of the pull-up resistor NR1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the previous stage of the panel relay board 4161 via the connector CON2. , +12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor NR1. As a result, when the transistor ITR in the previous stage is in an off state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1.

In addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor NR1, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is also connected to one end of the resistor NR2, and the other end of the resistor NR2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor NTR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is electrically connected to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

In the figure, the detection sensor section corresponds to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the voltage output section 4163 corresponds to the pull-up resistor IR0 connected to the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and to which +12V is applied. Further, the detection circuit section 4164 is a circuit configured by a pull-up resistor IR2 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 and to which +12V is applied, and a transistor ITR1 whose base terminal is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0. is applicable.

Furthermore, in the preceding stage of the detection circuit section 4164, a sensor signal input section 4162 is configured by a circuit including a connector CON1, a voltage output section 4163, a resistor IR1, and a transistor ITR0. In this way, the panel relay board 4161 is provided with the sensor signal input section 4162 and the detection circuit section 4164.

[Detection operation]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also lowered to the ground side. This turns off transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, thereby turning on the transistor ITR1. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Furthermore, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is LOW (OFF) at the collector terminal where the transistor NTR1 is OFF is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the built-in transistor STR is turned off as the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears. By turning off the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to +12V. Furthermore, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also raised to the +12V side (corresponding to the first voltage). This turns on transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, by turning on the transistor ITR0, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, a voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor NR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, a magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is HI (on) connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

The operating states of the magnetic sensor MGS, the built-in transistor STR, the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR1, and the transistor NTR1 described above are shown in a table format in FIG. Note that even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected from the panel relay board 4161, the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the transistor ITR1 is turned off, and the transistor NTR1 is turned on, in the same way as when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism. .

By the way, when signal transmission is performed using a connector member, if the connector member corrodes or dust enters the connector connection portion, contact resistance occurs. There are two types of connector members, pin contact type and bellows contact, depending on the shape of the contact terminal of the connector member.In the case of bellows contact type, when the harness attached to the connector member is pulled during connection work, the pin contact type Gap is easier to open compared to the type. When the gap opens, dust etc. can easily enter from this area.

Further, contact resistance also occurs when vibration is applied to the connector member. For example, when playing a game by hitting right-handed, slight sliding wear may occur due to vibrations from a specific part of the gaming area where a large number of game balls are concentrated and flowing down, which is applied to the connector member. However, this may cause contact resistance.

Here, the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit when such contact resistance RR occurs in the connector member (connector CON1) that electrically connects the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the voltage output section 4163 of the panel relay board 4161. The operation will be explained. For example, in FIG. 104, when contact resistance RR occurs in the connector member, contact resistance RR is indicated by a chain line. Note that the magnitude of the contact resistance RR is 100 to 1000 times that when the contact of the connector is normal.

As described above, when the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which it does not detect magnetism, the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), current flows through the contact resistor RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR is lowered. is raised. In FIG. 104, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a location where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

In other words, a current flows through the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector part, so that a voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. . Then, when the voltage raised by the contact resistance RR reaches a specified voltage between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR0 is turned on. Therefore, even though the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state, there is a possibility that the transistor ITR0 will be in the on state. That is, in the conventional sensor signal input section 4162 provided on the panel relay board 4161, if contact resistance RR occurs, there is a possibility that the sensor signal will be erroneously detected.

[Example 1 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 105 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a magnetic sensor input circuit (Example 1) provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of Example 1 in this embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector CON1, the voltage output section 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit section 4164, and the main control board of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit shown in FIG. The main control input circuit 1310b of 1310 has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

In addition, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is installed at multiple locations in the gaming area, for example, in the vicinity of the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, the big winning opening 2005, the out opening 1126, etc. become.

The magnetic sensor input circuit of this embodiment differs from the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit in that when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which it does not detect magnetism, there is a Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the voltage (second voltage) and lower than the first voltage is applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR to the ground side, the effect of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit section 4164 A voltage raising section 4166 is provided to avoid this, and the voltage output section 4163 and the detection circuit section 4164 are electrically connected via the voltage raising section 4166.

In this first embodiment, the voltage raising section 4166 is an example of a Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output section 4163, and connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 at the front stage of the connection part. It is connected.

The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 disposed in the subsequent stage. Further, +12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2 to which +12V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit section 4164. connected to the base terminal. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. Note that the connector CON1, the voltage output section 4163, and the voltage raising section 4166 constitute a sensor signal input section 4162.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, and the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains a non-conducting state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). This turns off transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164, thereby turning on the transistor ITR1. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Further, by turning on the transistor ITR1, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is LOW (OFF) at the collector terminal where the transistor NTR1 is OFF is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetic sensor MGS section is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the built-in transistor STR is turned off as the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears. By turning off the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to +12V. Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, a Zener voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (corresponding to the first voltage). This turns on transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, by turning on the transistor ITR0, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, a voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, a magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is HI (on) connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines that such an abnormal state exists, in the above example, if the logic of the magnetic detection switch signal is HI, the main control MPU 1310a It performs processing such as transmitting an error command to the control unit 1511 and outputting a signal to that effect from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. In response to the error command, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies the abnormality using the game board side performance display device 1600, the door frame side performance display device 460, an alarm lamp, audio, etc.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), current flows through the contact resistor RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR is lowered. is lifted. In FIG. 105, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the Zener diode ZD0 is illustrated as a black circle as a location where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

In other words, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 when a current flows through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector part. become. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied, the Zener diode ZD0 remains non-conductive because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). This turns off transistor ITR0. In other words, the voltage raising section 4166 avoids the effect of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit section 4164.

Note that the operation of the subsequent detection circuit section 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b is the same as the detection operation when the connector contact is normal.

This does not affect the voltage of the detection circuit section 4164 (because there is no voltage change), so when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, the signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance is False detection can be prevented.

Note that, as in the past, when an abnormality is detected by the magnetic sensor MGS, the main control MPU 1310a transmits an error command to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 responds to the transmitted error command by The game board side performance display device 1600, the door frame side performance display device 460, a warning display, audio, etc. will notify that an illegal gaming action has been performed using the do. Additionally, an error signal is output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer.

[Example 2 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 106 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a magnetic sensor input circuit (Example 2) provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the second embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector CON1, the voltage output section 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit section 4164, and the main control of the main control board 1310 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit shown in FIG. Input circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

In this second embodiment, the voltage raising section 4166 has a first resistor IR1 whose one end is connected to the voltage output section 4163, one end which is connected to the other end of the first resistor IR1, and the other end which is grounded. and a second resistor IR3. Comparing the sensor signal input section 4162 of the second embodiment and the conventional sensor signal input section 4162 of FIG. The difference is that it is connected to the connection point with the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. That is, in the second embodiment, the voltage raising part 4166 is an example configured with a resistor IR3 that causes a current to flow to the ground and drop the voltage when the predetermined voltage is applied.

Note that one end of the first resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output section 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 at the front stage of the connection part. ing.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR1 to which +12V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit section 4164, and is also connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. Note that the connector CON1, the voltage output section 4163, and the voltage raising section 4166 constitute a sensor signal input section 4162.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0, a voltage lowered to the ground side is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. This turns off transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, thereby turning on the transistor ITR1. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Further, by turning on the transistor ITR1, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is LOW (OFF) at the collector terminal where the transistor NTR1 is OFF is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the built-in transistor STR is turned off as the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears. By turning off the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the +12V side.

Further, a voltage of +12V is applied to a series resistance circuit composed of the pull-up resistor IR0, the first resistor IR1 of the voltage raising part 4166, and the second resistor IR3, and Current flows to ground via the first resistor IR1 and the second resistor IR3. When a current flows through the second resistor IR3, a potential difference generated between both ends of the second resistor IR3 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, thereby turning on the transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, by turning on the transistor ITR0, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, a voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, a magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is HI (on) connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), current flows through the contact resistor RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR is lowered. is lifted. In FIG. 106, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a location where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

In other words, as a current flows through the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector part, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the first resistance. It turns out. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied to one end of the first resistor, a current flows through the first resistor IR1, and this current further flows to ground through the second resistor IR3. In other words, since the other end of the second resistor IR3 is grounded, the current due to a predetermined voltage higher than the applied second voltage and lower than the first voltage almost falls to the ground, and the current flows through the second resistor IR3. Almost no current flows into the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 subsequent to IR3. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage is not turned on. As a result, the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage maintains the off state. In other words, the voltage raising section 4166 avoids the effect of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit section 4164.

Note that the operation of the subsequent detection circuit section 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b is the same as the detection operation when the connector contact is normal.

This does not affect the voltage of the detection circuit section 4164 (because there is no voltage change), so when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, the signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance is False detection can be prevented.

[Example 3 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 107 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a magnetic sensor input circuit (Example 3) provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the third embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector, the voltage output section 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit section 4164, and the main control input of the main control board 1310 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit shown in FIG. The circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

In this third embodiment, the voltage boosting unit 4166 connects two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 that configure the Darlington circuit, which are set to an operating voltage higher than a predetermined voltage that is higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage. and resistors IR1, IR4, and IR5. In comparison with the above-mentioned Example 2, in Example 3, instead of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded, a resistor IR4 and a resistor IR5 connected in series are connected in parallel to the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 forming the Darlington circuit, respectively. Connected. That is, in the third embodiment, the voltage raising section 4166 is an example composed of a resistor IR4 and a resistor IR5 that cause a current to flow to the ground and drop when the predetermined voltage is applied.

More specifically, one end of the resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output section 4163, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage of the Darlington circuit. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage of the Darlington circuit, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 is grounded.

Further, the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage, and also to one end of the resistor IR4, and the other end of the resistor IR4 is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage. Further, one end of the resistor IR5 is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage, and the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded.

That is, the resistor IR4 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage, and the resistor IR5 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the latter stage. Further, the collector terminals of the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 are connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR2 to which +12V of the detection circuit section 4164 is applied to the other end, and to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Since the base terminal of the transistor is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also lowered to the ground side. As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off, and the transistor ITR2 is also turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164, thereby turning on the transistor ITR1. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Further, by turning on the transistor ITR1, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is LOW (OFF) at the collector terminal where the transistor NTR1 is OFF is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the built-in transistor STR is turned off as the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears. By turning off the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to +12V.

Further, a voltage of +12V is applied to a series resistance circuit composed of a pull-up resistor IR0, a resistor IR1 of the voltage raising part 4166, a resistor IR4, and a resistor IR5. Current flows to ground via resistor IR4 and resistor IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR4, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR4 is applied between the base terminal and emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage. As a result, the previous stage transistor ITR0 is turned on.

When the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is turned on, a current flows to ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR5, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR5 is applied between the base terminal and emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage. This turns on the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage.

When the subsequent transistor ITR2 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor ITR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2. Further, by turning on the transistor ITR2, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, a voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, a magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is HI (on) connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), current flows through the contact resistor RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR is lowered. is lifted. In FIG. 107, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a location where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

In other words, when current flows through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector part, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1. . This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1, a current flows through the resistor IR1, and this current further flows to ground through the resistor IR4 and the resistor IR5. In other words, since the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded, most of the current due to the applied predetermined voltage falls to the ground, and almost no current flows to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 at the front stage of the Darlington circuit, which is the stage after the resistor IR1. It doesn't flow in. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is not turned on. Furthermore, the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is not turned on either. As a result, the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 of the Darlington circuit remain off. In other words, the voltage raising section 4166 avoids the effect of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit section 4164.

Note that the operation of the subsequent detection circuit section 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b is the same as the detection operation when the connector contact is normal.

This does not affect the voltage of the detection circuit section 4164 (because there is no voltage change), so when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, the signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance is False detection can be prevented.

Further, as shown in FIG. 109, a plurality of open collector sensor signal input sections 4162 connected to each of the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 are connected in parallel to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164. ing. When any one of these sensor signal input sections 4162 detects magnetism and turns on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164 turns off.

Note that even if one of the connections between the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the sensor signal input section 4162 is disconnected, similarly, the sensor signal input section 4162 corresponding to the disconnected magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned on, so that the detection circuit section 4164 The transistor ITR1 is turned off. In addition, when there are multiple sensors, a voltage output section 4163 is provided for each of these multiple sensors, and each voltage output section 4163 is connected to a transistor array having a plurality of Darlington circuits, such as "TD62083AP" (commercial product, manufactured by TOSHIBA). (manufactured by).

The sensor signal input section 4162 provided on the panel relay board 4161 of this embodiment has been described above, but the detection sensor that can be applied to the sensor signal input section 4162 is not limited to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the connector member Any sensor may be used as long as it transmits a sensor signal from the detection sensor, such as a general prize opening sensor 4020, a first starting opening sensor 4002, a second starting opening sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, a vibration sensor 2405, and a contact sensor. It is possible to apply sensors, etc.

[Application example to which the sensor signal input section 4162 of the panel relay board 4161 is applicable]
The sensor signal input unit 4162 of Examples 1 to 3 described above has been described as a device that prevents erroneous detection of signals from the detection sensor due to contact resistance that occurs when the contact of the connector is abnormal. By the way, the applicable parts of the sensor signal input section 4162 of Examples 1 to 3 are not limited to the contact part of the connector.

As explained earlier, in gaming machines, there are circumstances in which detection sensors are installed at multiple locations within the gaming area (for example, placed near the starting opening, winning opening, big winning opening, exit opening, etc.). . Therefore, the electrical connection between the detection sensor and the detection circuit that detects the detection signal from the detection sensor (for example, a transistor on a panel relay board, etc.) requires various circuit patterns and wiring (harnesses) depending on the installation location of the detection sensor. The length of is selected appropriately. In this regard, various forms may be taken depending on the type of gaming machine.

By the way, due to aging of the electrical components used (for example, connectors and detection sensors) and wiring patterns, and the length of the wiring (harness), the resistance value changes and the current flowing through the detection sensor changes. If the value is different, there is a risk that the circuit will not operate properly. Further, the resistance value also changes when specifications are changed during development, for example, when the type of detection sensor, location, or length of wiring (harness) is changed in design. Therefore, the current flowing through the detection sensor changes. Furthermore, by changing the location of the detection sensor, extending the length of the harness, or changing the location where the harness is routed, there may be locations where noise is more likely to be picked up, and the degree of influence of noise will also change.

If a current flows through a resistance value that changes due to such a reason, there is a possibility that the current flowing through the detection sensor differs from the original design value. That is, there is a possibility that the signal of the detection sensor may be erroneously detected. Furthermore, there is a possibility that the circuit may not operate normally due to the influence of noise, resulting in erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor.

The sensor signal input section 4162 equipped with the voltage raising section 4166 of Embodiments 1 to 3 is designed to prevent changes over time in the electrical components (for example, connectors and detection sensors) and wiring patterns used, as well as in the wiring (harness). Even if the resistance value changes depending on the length, it is possible to prevent false detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to aging or noise, and the detection circuit can be made more general. In addition, in the conventional example shown in FIG. 104 and the embodiment shown in FIG. 105, changing resistance values are shown surrounded by two-dot chain lines.

In the following, a case where noise is placed on the harness will be explained as an example. Further, FIG. 110(A) shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input section 4162 in the conventional example, and FIG. 110(B) shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input section 4162 in the embodiment. The left side of FIG. 110(A) is a signal waveform input when there is no noise, and the right side is a signal waveform input when noise is present.

As shown in FIG. 110(A), in the conventional example, when there is no noise, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is at a low level (0.4 V) when it is not detecting magnetism, and the transistor ITR0 in FIG. 104 is turned on. It is possible to maintain a level lower than the current voltage (0.8V). When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, the voltage is at a high level (12V), which is higher than the voltage (0.8V) that turns on the transistor ITR0, and the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

On the other hand, in the conventional example, when noise is detected, even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is not detecting magnetism, the peak of the noise waveform is the voltage at which the transistor ITR0 turns on (0.8V ), the transistor ITR0 turns on and cannot maintain its off state. Therefore, the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

In addition to noise, for example, if overshoot occurs as shown in FIG. 110(A), false detection will not occur in the state where magnetism is detected, but if undershoot occurs, transistor ITR0 is turned on. and cannot maintain the off state. Therefore, the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

As shown in FIG. 110B, in the embodiment, the voltage that can be input to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in FIG. 105 is raised to 2V by the voltage raising unit 4166, as an example of a voltage higher than 0.8V. has been done. The detection operation is at a low level (0.4V) when there is no noise and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is not detecting magnetism, which is lower than the raised voltage of 2V, so it is the voltage that turns on the transistor ITR0. (0.8V) can be maintained at a lower level. When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, it is at a high level (12V) and is higher than the raised voltage of 2V, so the voltage that turns on the voltage raising part 4166 and the voltage that turns on the transistor ITR0 (0. 8V), and the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

On the other hand, in the embodiment, when noise is detected, the peak of the noise waveform exceeds the voltage (0.8V) at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on, even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is not detecting magnetism. Since the voltage is also lower than the raised voltage of 2V, the voltage raising section 4166 maintains the off state. Therefore, transistor ITR0 can maintain an off state. Therefore, false detection can be prevented.

Next, a case where a voltage increase occurs due to an increase in resistance value due to aging will be explained as an example. Further, FIG. 111(A) shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input section 4162 in the conventional example, and FIG. 111(B) shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input section 4162 in the embodiment. The left side of FIG. 111(A) is a signal waveform that is input in a normal case, and the right side is a signal waveform that is input when a voltage increase occurs due to an increase in resistance value due to aging.

In the conventional example, when a voltage rise occurs due to an increase in resistance value due to aging, even if the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is not detecting magnetism, the input voltage is applied to the transistor as shown by the hatched area. Since the voltage at which ITR0 turns on (0.8V) is exceeded, the transistor ITR0 remains on and cannot maintain its off state. Therefore, the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

On the other hand, in the embodiment, even if a voltage increase occurs due to an increase in resistance value due to aging, when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is not detecting magnetism, the input voltage causes the transistor ITR0 to turn on. Even if the voltage exceeds the raised voltage (0.8V), the voltage raising part 4166 maintains the off state because it is lower than the raised voltage of 2V. Therefore, transistor ITR0 can maintain an off state. Therefore, false detection can be prevented.

In this way, since the sensor signal input section 4162 of Examples 1 to 3 includes the voltage raising section 4166, it is possible to prevent false detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to aging or noise. Furthermore, since the sensor signal input section 4162 includes a voltage raising section 4166, noise may be caused by changing the location of the detection sensor, extending the length of the harness, or changing the location where the harness is routed. Even if there are places where noise is likely to be picked up, the sensor signal input section 4162 can prevent the influence of noise. Therefore, the circuit sections (sensor signal input section 4162 and detection circuit section 4164) provided on the panel relay board 4161 can be made general-purpose. Therefore, it becomes possible to have a margin for design changes during development.

[Sensor signal input section 4162' of another embodiment]
The magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in Examples 1 to 3 described above includes a built-in transistor STR, and while the built-in transistor STR turns on when magnetism is not detected, the built-in transistor STR turns on when magnetism is detected. In other words, in the sensor signal input section 4162, the input is low when magnetism is not detected, and the input is high when magnetism is detected. Alternatively, a magnetic sensor whose input is high when it does not detect magnetism and low when it detects magnetism, in other words, a magnetic sensor that turns off when it does not detect magnetism and turns on when it detects magnetism. It is also possible to use

FIG. 112 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a magnetic sensor input circuit according to another embodiment. The magnetic sensor MGS is turned off when it does not detect magnetism greater than a predetermined value, and turned on when it detects magnetism greater than a predetermined value.

The input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay board 4161 via the connector CON1, and +12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. Further, the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS is grounded.

As the voltage raising unit 4166, those in Examples 1 to 3 described above can be used. In this other embodiment, the voltage boosting section 4166 is configured with a Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output section 4163, and is connected to the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS via the connector CON1 at the front stage of the connection part.

The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 disposed in the subsequent stage. Note that in another embodiment, the detection circuit section 4164' is configured with a transistor ITR0. Further, +12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2, and is connected to the pull-up resistor NR to which +12V is applied. There is. Here, the circuit configuration of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 is the same as in the first to third embodiments. In another embodiment, the voltage output section 4163 and the voltage raising section 4166 constitute a sensor signal winning section 4162', and the transistor ITR0 constitutes a detection circuit section 4164'.

[Detection operation in normal case]
When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a non-detection state in which it does not detect magnetism, the magnetic sensor MGS is off. As a result, the voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor IR0 is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Since this applied voltage is higher than the Zener voltage, the Zener diode ZD0 is turned on, and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit section 4164 through the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0, thereby turning on the transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to ground via the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit section 4164', and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0.

Further, by turning on the transistor ITR0, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is LOW (OFF) at the collector terminal where the transistor NTR1 is OFF is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a detection state in which it detects magnetism, the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on. When the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0 to which +12V is applied, the connector CON1, the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS.

As a result, the voltage at one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output section 4163 is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so the Zener diode ZD0 maintains an off state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). This turns off transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, a voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, a magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is HI (on) connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation in case of abnormality caused by change in resistance value]
When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a non-detection state in which it does not detect magnetism, the magnetic sensor MGS is off. As a result, the voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor IR0 is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Since this applied voltage is higher than the Zener voltage, the Zener diode ZD0 is turned on, and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit section 4164 through the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0, thereby turning on the transistor ITR0.

At this time, even if there is noise on the harness from the magnetic sensor MGS, the voltage applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage) is higher, so the Zener diode ZD0 There is no effect on the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164 through the anode terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the transistor ITR0 remains turned on. In other words, the voltage raising section 4166 avoids the effect of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit section 4164'.

On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor MGS is in a detection state in which it detects magnetism, the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on. When the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0 to which +12V is applied, the connector CON1, the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS.

As a result, the voltage at one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output section 4163 is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so the Zener diode ZD0 maintains an off state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). This turns off transistor ITR0.

At this time, even if there is noise on the harness from the magnetic sensor MGS, the predetermined voltage due to the noise applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage. This is a predetermined voltage, and this predetermined voltage is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains an off state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). This turns off transistor ITR0. In other words, the voltage raising section 4166 avoids the effect of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit section 4164. Note that the operation of the main control input circuit 1310b is the same as the detection operation in a normal case.

[Example in which multiple sensor signal input units 4162 are arranged on panel relay board 4161]
Next, FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of the invention according to claim 1. As shown in FIG. 113, an example is shown in which three of the voltage output section 4163, voltage raising section 4166, and detection circuit section 4164 are arranged on the same board (on the panel relay board 4161). The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the voltage raising section 4166, and at least one of the voltage output section 4163 and the detection circuit section 4166 are arranged on the same substrate. FIG. 114 shows a circuit configuration in which a voltage raising section 4166 and a detection circuit section 4164 are arranged on the same board (panel relay board 4161), and a voltage output section 4163 is arranged on a separate board (for example, a sensor board). It is a figure which shows an example.

Further, in FIG. 115, the voltage output section 4163 and the voltage raising section 4166 are arranged on the same board (panel relay board 4161), and the detection circuit section 4164 is arranged on a separate board (for example, the main control board 1310). FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration. In this way, the arrangement positions of the voltage output section 4163 and the detection circuit section 4164 can be changed in various ways.

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing another example of the circuit configuration of the invention according to the embodiment of the invention. The resistance value that changes with aging and wiring length includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024 or magnetic sensor MGS, the wiring (harness) from these to the panel relay board 4161, and the connector CON1. The detection sensor section arranged at a predetermined position on the game board 5a is constituted by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of Examples 1 to 3 in FIG. 113.

The voltage output section 4163 outputs a first voltage when the detection sensor section is in the first state, and outputs a second voltage that is lower than the first voltage when the detection sensor section is in the second state. Output voltage. For example, in the circuit shown in FIG. 113, when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, it outputs a low level voltage (for example, 0.4 V), but when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, it outputs a low level voltage (for example, 0.4 V). At this time, a high level voltage (for example, 12V) is output.

The detection circuit section 4164 switches output of the detection signal on and off in response to the first voltage or the second voltage output from the voltage output section 4163. Since the detection circuit section 4164 in FIG. 113 uses the detection circuit section 4164 described in Examples 1 to 3, the pull-up resistor IR2 pulled up to +12V is connected to the front stage of the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. ing.

Then, the first voltage (for example, 12V in each embodiment) which is higher than the second voltage (for example, 0.4V in each embodiment) is applied to the subsequent stage of the voltage output section 4163. Even if a predetermined voltage (as an example, a voltage of 0.8 V or more and less than 2.0 V is shown in FIG. 111) is applied, the effect of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit section 4164 is avoided. A voltage raising section 4166 is provided.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 113, one detection circuit section 4164, a plurality of voltage output sections 4163, and a plurality of voltage raising sections 4166 are arranged on the same board (on the panel relay board 4161). . In this example, the sensor signal input section 4162 is composed of a voltage output section 4163 and a voltage raising section 4166 arranged after the voltage output section 4163. Further, each of the plurality of voltage raising parts 4166, . . . is electrically connected in parallel to one detection circuit part 4164.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 113, a plurality of open collector sensor signal input sections 4162 connected to each of the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 or the magnetic sensor MGS are connected to the base of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164. Multiple terminals are connected in parallel. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

In FIG. 113, when any one of these sensor signal input sections 4162 detects magnetism and turns on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164 turns off, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b. It is. Therefore, the detection signal can be detected without erroneously detecting any of the plurality of detection sensor units. In this way, when the sensor signal input section 4162 including the voltage raising section 4166 is used, there is no need to take into account the resistance value that changes as shown in the figure. Therefore, a plurality of sensor signal input units 4162 can be integrated on one board (on the panel relay board 4161), and the panel relay board 4161 can be used in common (universalization) for various types of gaming machines. becomes possible. Therefore, it contributes to reducing design changes during development and the number of man-hours involved in manufacturing.

FIG. 116 shows an example in which a plurality of magnetic sensors MGS of the other embodiment described in FIG. 112 are provided and each of the plurality of magnetic sensors MGS is electrically connected to the voltage output section 4163 in parallel. Further, in FIG. 116, a magnetic sensor MGS of another embodiment is used. In another example of FIG. 116, when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism (magnetic sensor MGS is on), the voltage output section 4163 outputs a low level voltage (for example, 0.4 V), while the magnetic sensor When the MGS does not detect magnetism (the magnetic sensor MGS is off), the voltage output section 4163 outputs a high-level voltage (for example, 12V).

On the other hand, in FIG. 116, since the detection circuit section 4164' described in another embodiment is used, the difference is that there is no pull-up resistor IR2 pulled up to +12V, and one end of the main control input circuit 1310a is connected to +12V. The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor NR1 to which the voltage is applied.

In FIG. 116, when any one of these magnetic sensors MGS detects magnetism and turns on, the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit section 4164' turns off, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b. It is.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, control related to game progress and performance will be summarized below.

As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1, and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the results of the processes. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display mode of the effect display device 1600 (display images such as patterns, various background images, text, characters, etc.) based on the control signal (control command) output by the main control board 1310, It controls the display mode and operation mode of various members that contribute to the performance (the performance operation unit 400, movable members, etc.).

In particular, the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process every time an interrupt process is performed. In this special control processing, first and second starting opening winning processing is performed. In this first and second starting hole winning processing, a judgment is made as to whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the starting hole, and when it is determined that a winning has been won, processing such as increasing the number of reservations on the corresponding special symbol side by 1 is performed. It will be done.

When the first and second starting opening winning processes are finished, if the processing flag is 0, a fluctuation start process is executed. In this fluctuation start process, on the condition that the number of pendings is 1 or more, the jackpot judgment in the pending state is completed and executed, and the result of this jackpot judgment (wins/losses, its type, etc.) is memorized, and then , updates the processing flag to "1".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 1 when the first and second starting opening winning processing are completed, the fluctuation pattern setting processing is executed. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, the fluctuation pattern ( After determining and setting the variable time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the stop display) and the stop symbol (such as a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol), the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, if the process flag is 2 when the first and second starting opening winning processes are finished, the changing process is executed. In this process during fluctuation, a timer monitors the fluctuation time determined and set in the fluctuation pattern setting process, and based on the timeout, the special symbol is displayed in fluctuation on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. to stop. After that, if the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start process is a jackpot, the process selection flag is updated to "3", and when the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start process is not a jackpot (loss). , update the processing selection flag to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process will be restarted from the fluctuation start process.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 3 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is completed, the jackpot game processing is executed. In this jackpot game process, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is activated to set the jackpot game aspect (for example, the number of rounds) determined based on the type of jackpot won, Based on this, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 2106 is controlled. In addition, when a jackpot game ends, a process is performed to stop the operation of the conditional device, and if the type of jackpot won is a special type, it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state. After updating the gaming status flag as shown, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process will be restarted from the fluctuation start process.

Note that a plurality of types of variation patterns are stored as the variation patterns. The fluctuation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol, and also determines the effect that appears on the effect display device 1600 by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510. This can determine the type of pattern. In this embodiment, the plurality of types of variation patterns can be classified into a variation pattern for jackpot variation, a variation pattern for losing reach variation, and a variation pattern for loss variation. The jackpot variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, and in the production display device 1600, after the reach production, the variation display of the decorative symbol is developed so that the final jackpot symbol is fixed and stopped. The performance to be performed is executed. The missed reach variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and it is determined that a reach is to be performed in the reach determination based on the reach random number. A performance is performed in which the fluctuating display of the symbols is finally discontinued and the symbols are displayed as fixed and stopped. The loss fluctuation is a fluctuation that is performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and it is not determined that a reach is to be performed in the reach determination based on the reach random number. , an effect is performed in which the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols is developed so that the symbols are finally stopped and displayed as fixed. Further, the variation pattern is defined so that it is possible to specify which variation pattern is on the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side.

That is, the peripheral control board 1510 acquires game information such as the result of jackpot determination from the main control board 1310 and refers to it, thereby making it possible to generate such a variation pattern of decorative symbols. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 causes a fluctuating pattern of decorative symbols to appear on the effect display device 1600 based on the acquired game information, as well as changes the effect display (background and pending image) related to the level of expectation. Control is executed to change the mode (display and movement) of the operation unit 400 and to operate movable members such as the rear-down movable production unit 3100.

Further, the peripheral control board 1510 can acquire operation information for the operation buttons 410 and operation information of the player in the vicinity of the opening window, and can also execute control related to performances according to these information.

Here, the principle of acquiring operation information near the open window will be explained. FIG. 119 is a schematic diagram for explaining the principle of acquiring operation information in the vicinity of an opening window, and in addition to omitting irrelevant members in explaining the principle of acquiring operation information, related members are also shown. These are shown schematically. Further, FIG. 120 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 119.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the game board 5 is housed within the main body frame 4 and has a game area 5a where game balls flow down, and the game area 5a is made visible. The door frame 3 has an opening window and is provided to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 4. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the door frame 3 is provided with a reflective standing wall portion 33 that is erected along the outer periphery of the opening window and is formed to be able to reflect light at least on its inner surface. It is being Note that the opening window is a portion of the through-hole 111 that is closer to the front side (front side) than the glass plate 192.

Here, the reflective standing wall portion 33 is provided as a frame decoration. More specifically, the reflective standing wall section 33 is formed by a lower reflective standing wall section 338 formed by the lower pan unit base 323, a left reflective standing wall section 538 formed by the left unit base 531, and a right unit base 551. These members are arranged in a substantially U-shape along the outer periphery of the open window (a mode in which the reflective standing wall is not installed above the open window). It consists of: The inner surfaces of the lower reflective standing wall section 338, the left reflective standing wall section 538, and the right reflective standing wall section 568 are all approximately perpendicular to one specific virtual plane P (FIG. 120). It is provided to serve as a light reflecting surface.

According to such a configuration, among the reflective vertical wall portions 33 formed in a substantially U-shape, none of the lower reflective vertical wall portion 338, the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, and the right reflective vertical wall portion 568 are provided. The portion (the upper side of the opening window) is defined as "the light from the predetermined light source outside the outer periphery of the opening window travels on the above-mentioned one specific virtual plane P and is taken into the outer periphery of the opening window, and as a result, the reflection standing wall part It functions as a first part that enables the light reflected by the reflective standing wall part 33 to travel on the above-mentioned one specific virtual plane P and exit outside the outer periphery of the opening window. It also functions as the second part that enables "to be detected."

Furthermore, in the reflective standing wall section 33 according to this embodiment, one reflective wall is provided over the inner surfaces of the three separate members (the lower reflective standing wall section 338, the left reflective standing wall section 538, and the right reflective standing wall section 568). A structure is adopted in which a member 36 (for example, a reflective seal) is attached, and thereby the reflection performance of the reflective vertical wall portion 33 is suitably ensured including the joints of three separate members.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, a left side base 572a (see FIG. 23) is provided on the upper left side of the door frame 3 outside the outer periphery of the opening window. The internal space 3435a includes a left outer peripheral light emitting section 34a and a left outer peripheral outer light detecting section 35a. Note that the left side base 572a itself is provided with a member having extremely low (or zero) light transmittance.

Here, the internal space 3435a is a space that includes the one specific virtual plane P that intersects with the lower reflective standing wall section 338, the left reflective standing wall section 538, and the right reflective standing wall section 568, respectively, and is provided with an opening window. It is provided as a space that is opened only toward the side, allowing light to travel toward the open window side, and allowing light from the open window side to be taken in. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although such an internal space 3435a is provided behind the left upper speaker 573, in order to suppress illegal acts from behind the speaker 573, there is a space between the inner space 3435a and the opening window. A transmitting member 3436a designed to have extremely high transmittance and extremely low influence on the traveling direction of light is provided.

Further, the left outer circumferential light emitting section 34a is unitized with the left outer circumferential outer light detecting section 35a, and emits light toward a wide range on the one specific virtual plane P at least on the side where the opening window is provided. It is set up so that it can be progressed.

Further, the left outer circumferential light detecting section 35a is unitized with the left outer circumferential outer light emitting section 34a, and is capable of detecting light from the side where the opening window is provided on at least the one specific virtual plane P. It is set up so that

According to such a configuration, the light from the left outer periphery outer light emitting part 34a travels toward the opening window side and then is reflected by the reflective standing wall part 33, and becomes reflected light from the reflective standing wall part 33 and enters the internal space 3435a. be incorporated into. In this regard, in the internal space 3435a, only the light from the opening window side is taken in by the left side base 572a, so that while disturbances are suitably suppressed, the light from the left outer circumference external light emitting section 34a is taken in. The light emitted and reflected by the reflective vertical wall portion 33 can be detected by the left outer circumference external light detection portion 35a.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, the right side base 572b (see FIG. 23) is provided on the upper right side of the door frame 3 outside the outer periphery of the opening window. The inner space 3435b includes a right outer peripheral light emitting section 34b and a right outer peripheral light detecting section 35b. Note that the right side base 572b itself is also provided with a member having extremely low (or zero) light transmittance.

Here, the internal space 3435b, like the internal space 3435a, is a space that includes the one specific virtual plane P located at a position where it intersects with the lower reflective standing wall section 338, the left reflective standing wall section 538, and the right reflective standing wall section 568, respectively. and is provided as a space that is opened only toward the side where the opening window is provided, allowing light to travel toward the opening window side, and allowing light from the opening window side to be taken in. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although such an internal space 3435b is provided behind the right upper speaker 573, there is a space between it and the opening window in order to suppress fraudulent acts from behind the speaker 573. A transmitting member 3436b designed to have extremely high transmittance and extremely low influence on the traveling direction of light is provided.

Further, the right outer circumferential light emitting section 34b is unitized with the right outer circumferential outer light detecting section 35b, and emits light toward a wide range on the one specific virtual plane P at least on the side where the opening window is provided. It is set up so that it can be progressed.

Further, the right outer circumferential light detecting section 35b is unitized with the right outer circumferential outer light emitting section 34b, and is capable of detecting light from the side where the opening window is provided on at least the one specific virtual plane P. It is set up so that

According to such a configuration, the light from the right outer circumferential light emitting part 34b travels toward the opening window side, and then is reflected by the reflective standing wall part 33, and becomes reflected light from the reflective standing wall part 33, and then enters the internal space 3435b. be incorporated into. In this regard, in the internal space 3435b, only the light from the opening window side is taken in by the right side base 572b, so that the light from the right side outer periphery external light emitting part 34b is suitably suppressed. The light emitted and reflected by the reflective standing wall portion 33 can be detected by the right outer circumference external light detection portion 35b.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an area ( The area marked with a dotted pattern in FIG. 120) functions as a special operation receiving section 3333 that can detect operations by the player, and the manner in which the player operates on this special operation receiving section 3333 is determined. Therefore, it is possible to perform production control according to the determination.

For example, when the player does not perform any operation on the special operation receiving section 3333, the light emitted from the left outer peripheral light emitting section 34a in a wide angle range is not blocked by any physical object, and the light is emitted from the reflective standing wall section 3333. The light is reflected from various angles (various angles on at least one specific virtual plane P) and travels toward the left outer circumference external light detection section 35a. That is, in the left outer periphery external light detection unit 35a, the reflected light from various angles is detected by a plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements lined up on at least one specific virtual plane P) using an optical lens or the like. Based on the separate detection signals, the special operation receiving section 3333 outputs information to the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect that no physical object exists.

In addition, at this time, the light emitted from the right outer peripheral light emitting part 34b in a wide angle range is not blocked by any physical object, and is emitted from various angles (on at least one specific virtual plane P) at the reflective standing wall part 33. The reflected light from the angle) is directed toward the right outer peripheral light detection section 35b. In other words, the right outer peripheral light detection unit 35b also uses an optical lens or the like to detect the reflected light from various angles through a plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements lined up on at least one specific virtual plane P). Based on the separate detection signals, the special operation receiving section 3333 outputs information indicating that no physical object exists to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when the player operates the special operation receiving part 3333 in the manner shown in FIG. Only the light other than the light directed in the blocked direction (angular range) becomes reflected light on the reflective standing wall portion 33 and travels toward the left outer periphery external light detection portion 35a. That is, in this case, the left outer circumferential light detecting section 35a detects the left outer circumferential light emitting section 34a based on information from the plurality of light receiving elements (the plurality of light receiving elements lined up on at least one specific virtual plane P). By determining the direction (angle) in which the light emitted from the light is blocked and its size (angular range), it is possible to determine the physical size in any direction when viewed from the left outer peripheral outer light emitting section 34a. Information regarding whether the object exists is output to peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, at this time, a part of the light emitted from the right outer peripheral light emitting section 34b in a wide angular range is also blocked by the player's finger (physical object), and the light directed in the blocked direction (angular range) Only the other light becomes reflected light at the reflective standing wall portion 33 and goes toward the right outer circumference external light detection portion 35b. That is, in this case, the right outer periphery outer light detection section 35b detects the right outer periphery outer light emitting section 34b based on the information from the plurality of light receiving elements (the plurality of light receiving elements lined up on at least one specific virtual plane P). By determining the direction (angle) in which the light emitted from the light is blocked and its size (angle range), it is possible to determine the physical size in any direction when viewed from the right outer peripheral outer light emitting section 34b. Information regarding whether the object exists is output to peripheral control board 1510.

The peripheral control board 1510 acquires and analyzes the information from the left outer peripheral external light detection section 35a and the right peripheral external light detection section 35b, respectively, so that the special operation receiving section 3333 can perform physical In addition to information on whether an object exists (whether an operation was performed on the special operation receiving section 3333), if a physical object exists in the special operation receiving section 3333, the coordinate position (x, y) and size of the physical object are provided. You will be able to obtain information related to As will be described later, the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment periodically acquires such information, and this allows the movement of the physical object in the special operation receiving section 3333 and the size of the physical object to be determined. It is possible to determine operation gestures such as changes, and perform performance control according to the determination.

Note that these analysis processes do not necessarily have to be performed on the peripheral control board 1510 side, but may be performed by external means that acquires information from the left outer peripheral external light detection section 35a and the right peripheral external light detection section 35b. The peripheral control board 1510 may acquire the analysis results from the external means, or the external means and the peripheral control board 1510 may share the analysis results.

Further, the light emission from the left outer circumferential light emitting section 34a and the light emission from the right outer circumferential light emitting section 34b are each in a blinking mode, so that the left outer circumferential outer light emitting section 34a is in the light emitting state and the right outer circumferential light emitting section 34b is in the off state. A certain period and a period in which the left outer peripheral light emitting section 34a is in the off state and the right outer peripheral light emitting section 34b is in the light emitting state may occur alternately. That is, in this case, the reflected light when the left outer peripheral light emitting section 34a is in the light emitting state is detected by the left outer peripheral light detecting section 35a, and the reflected light when the right outer peripheral light emitting section 35a is in the light emitting state is detected by the right outer peripheral light detecting section 35a. If the external light detection section 35b side detects and analyzes based on this information, the light from the left outer peripheral light emitting section 34a and the light from the right outer peripheral light emitting section 34b will not interfere. Therefore, it is expected that detection information with higher accuracy will be obtained.

Furthermore, the light emission from the left outer circumferential light emitting part 34a and the light emission from the right outer circumferential light emitting part 34b are each in a blinking mode, so that the left outer circumferential light emitting part 34a is in the light emitting state and the right outer circumferential light emitting part 34b is in the off state. a period in which the left outer circumferential light emitting section 34a is in the off state and the right outer circumferential light emitting section 34b is in the light emitting state, and a period in which the left outer circumferential light emitting section 34a is in the off state and the right outer circumferential light emitting section 34b is also in the light emitting state. A cycle in which periods in which the light is off and periods in which the light is off may occur repeatedly may appear repeatedly. That is, in this case, the reflected light when the left outer peripheral light emitting section 34a is in the light emitting state is detected by the left outer peripheral light detecting section 35a, and the reflected light when the right outer peripheral light emitting section 35a is in the light emitting state is detected by the right outer peripheral light detecting section 35a. If the external light detection section 35b side detects the offset, and also detects the offset when the left outer light emitting section 34a and the right outer light emitting section 35a are in the off state, and analyzes based on this information, The light from the left outer peripheral light emitting section 34a and the light from the right outer peripheral light emitting section 34b no longer interfere with each other, and the detected offset can also be eliminated before making a judgment, which increases the accuracy accordingly. It is expected to obtain high detection information.

Further, visible light may be used as the light from the left outer peripheral light emitting section 34a and the right outer peripheral light emitting section 34b. However, considering that the pachinko machine 1 performs effects using lights in various places, using invisible light such as infrared rays is recommended to prevent disturbances from these effects and effects from the effects. This is more desirable in terms of suitably suppressing adverse effects on.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, "light from a predetermined light source located outside the outer periphery of the opening window travels on the above-mentioned one specific virtual plane P and is taken into the outer periphery of the opening window, and A first portion that enables the light reflected by the reflective vertical wall portion 33 to travel on the above-mentioned one specific virtual plane P and exit outside the outer periphery of the opening window. It was decided that the second portion that enables "to be detected" is provided as the same part of the reflecting vertical wall part 33 formed in a substantially U-shape. However, a plurality of areas where light is allowed to travel between the inside and outside of the outer periphery of the opening window are provided in the reflective standing wall part 33, and each of these areas is divided into an outer periphery light emitting section and an outer periphery light detecting section. and may be arranged respectively.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reflective standing wall portion 33 is formed in a substantially U-shape with an opening at the top. A reflective standing wall portion 33 may also be formed on the periphery between the two. However, it is desirable that the internal spaces 3435a and 3435b are opened in a downward direction in order to prevent direct light from being taken in from lighting etc. and causing external disturbance. .

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, by using the left outer peripheral light emitting section 34a and the left outer peripheral outer light detecting section 35a, and the right outer peripheral light emitting section 34b and the right outer peripheral outer light detecting section 35b, a special Although the operation on the operation receiving section 3333 is made detectable, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, any structure may be sufficient as long as the operation on the special operation receiving section 3333 can be detected. For example, the reflected light from the left outer peripheral light emitting section 34a and the reflected light from the right outer peripheral light detecting section 35b can be combined into one outer peripheral light detecting section 35b. The physical object may be detected by a light detection unit, and the coordinates (x, y) and size of the physical object may be determined from the detection result.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, light from the outer peripheral light emitting section 34 (the left outer peripheral light emitting section 34a, the right outer peripheral light emitting section 34b) provided outside the outer periphery of the opening window is transmitted to the outside of the opening window. The outer periphery external light detection section 35 (left outer periphery By detecting it with the external light detection section 35a and the right peripheral external light detection section 35b), the vicinity of the opening window is made to function as a special operation receiving section 3333, and a performance according to the player's operation mode on the special operation receiving section 3333 is performed. It is considered executable.

By disposing the outer circumferential external light detection unit 35 in the internal space 3435 of the side base 572 that is opened toward the side where the opening window is provided, the outer circumferential external light detection unit 35 is not disposed in an exposed state. As described above, when detecting light in the section 35, it is possible to suitably exclude effect light that may cause disturbance.

However, even with such a configuration, the light from the outer peripheral light emitting section 34 is reflected by the reflective vertical wall section 33 from the portion of the internal space 3435 that is opened toward the side where the opening window is provided. Since the structure is such that in addition to light, effect light may also be taken in, there is a concern that such effect light may cause disturbance and adversely affect the detection accuracy of the outer peripheral light detection unit 35.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 120, the frame side light emitting section L1 provided on the right unit base 551 of the main body frame 4 is It is arranged at a position where it cannot be irradiated with the traveling light. More specifically, the frame side light emitting part L1 is provided at a position in front of the special operation receiving part 3333 and has extremely low (or 0) light transmittance with respect to the base part BL1. attached to the side. Since the base part BL1 has a wider shape than the frame side light emitting part L1, it is difficult for the light from the frame side light emitting part L1 to travel to the rear side (the side where the opening window is provided). This makes it difficult for the light from the frame side light emitting section L1 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

In addition, in the right unit base 551 according to this embodiment, the first right decorative base portion 551a is made of a material that allows light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 to travel with high transmittance, and the first right side decorative base portion 551a is provided on the frame side It has a second right side decorative base portion 551b made of a material (for example, metal) with low transmittance (or transmittance of 0) that prevents the progress of light from the light emitting portion L1. The first right-side decoration base portion 551a is formed to surround the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 so that the light from the frame-side light-emission portion L1 can contribute as performance light, whereas the second right-side decoration base portion 551a The base portion 551b is formed between the frame side light emitting portion L1 and the opening window so that the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 is difficult to travel toward the side where the opening window is provided, This also makes it difficult for the light from the frame side light emitting section L1 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

In particular, the second right side decorative base portion 551b according to this embodiment allows the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 to travel toward the player side through the first right side decorative base portion 551a. It is provided so as to extend to a part of the front side of the right decorative base portion 551a, thereby suitably suppressing light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 from proceeding to the opening window. .

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the right unit base 551 includes both the base portion BL1 and the second right side decoration base portion 551b, but it is also possible to include only one of these. Even in this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the light from the frame side light emitting section L1 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

On the other hand, the frame side light emitting part L2 provided on the left unit base 531 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the front side of the base part BL2, which has an extremely low (or 0) light transmittance. It is located at a position where light traveling on a specific virtual plane P can be irradiated. However, as is clear from FIG. 120, since the reflective member 36 is provided between the frame side light emitting section L2 and the opening window, the light from the frame side light emitting section L2 is transmitted through the opening window. It is said that it is difficult for the light to travel to the side, so that the light from the frame side light emitting section L2 is difficult to be taken into the internal space 3435.

However, since the reflection member 36 has a small height and width, there is a concern that the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 may be reflected by other members and directed toward the opening window. Therefore, the left unit base 531 according to this embodiment also includes a first left decorative base portion 531a made of a material that allows light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 to travel with high transmittance, and a first left side decorative base portion 531a provided on the frame side. It has a second left side decorative base portion 531b made of a material (for example, metal) with low transmittance (or zero transmittance) that prevents the progress of light from the light emitting portion L2. The first left side decoration base part 531a is formed so as to surround the frame side light emitting part L2 so that the light from the frame side light emitting part L2 can contribute as performance light, whereas the second left side decoration base part 531a The base portion 531b is formed between the frame side light emitting portion L2 and the opening window so that the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 is difficult to travel toward the side where the opening window is provided, This also makes it difficult for the light from the frame side light emitting section L2 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

In particular, the second left side decorative base portion 531b according to this embodiment allows the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 to travel toward the player through the first left side decorative base portion 531a. It is provided so as to extend to a part of the front side of the left decorative base portion 531a, thereby suitably suppressing light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 from proceeding to the opening window. .

Note that in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the second left side decorative base portion 531b is provided on the left unit base 531, and the second right side decorative base portion 551b is provided on the right unit base 551; These members do not necessarily need to be provided, and even in this case, as described above, it is difficult for the effect light to be taken into the internal space 3435. When the second left side decorative base portion 531b and the second right side decorative base portion 551b are not provided, the reflective member 36 is not provided with the first left side decorative base portion 531a or the first right side decorative base portion 551a. If it is attached to the inner surface (the surface that cannot be contacted from the outside) of the first left side decoration base part 531a or the first right side decoration base part 551a, instead of being attached to the outside surface (the surface that can be accessed from the outside), it is possible to It is expected that reflection performance will be prevented from deteriorating due to direct physical contact with the reflector. In this case, the light from the outer peripheral light emitting part 34 (the left outer peripheral light emitting part 34a, the right outer peripheral light emitting part 34b) passes through the first left decorative base part 531a and the first right decorative base part 551a, and then passes through the first left decorative base part 531a and the first right decorative base part 551a. The light is reflected by the reflecting member 36, passes through the first left decorative base portion 531a and the first right decorative base portion 551a again, and then is taken into the internal space 3435.

Furthermore, when the left unit base 531 is provided with the second left decorative base portion 531b and the right unit base 551 is provided with the second right decorative base portion 551b, the reflective member 36 is omitted and the second The left decorative base portion 531b and the second right decorative base portion 551b may also function as reflective members made of a material such as metal. According to such a configuration, simply by providing the reflecting members (second left decorative base portion 531b, second right decorative base portion 551b), it is possible to prevent the effect light from the frame side light emitting portions L1 and L2 from becoming a disturbance. The detection accuracy by the outer circumferential external light detection unit 35 can be suitably ensured by the reflected light from the reflecting members (second left decorative base portion 531b, second right decorative base portion 551b) while suitably suppressing the reflection. Become.

In the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, information such as the coordinates and size of a physical object located near the opening window can be obtained by using the principle of acquiring operation information near the opening window. This allows for more dynamic and highly flexible operability by using almost the entire area of the opening window (approximately the entire area that is visible when viewed from the front of the glass plate 192) as the special operation receiving part 3333. This makes it possible to achieve performance that is suitable for this purpose.

The operability and performance that can be realized by using such special operation receiving section 3333 will be explained below. 121 to 127 are schematic diagrams for explaining the operability and performance that can be realized by using the special operation receiving section 3333. In addition to omitting missing parts, related parts are also shown schematically.

FIG. 121 shows the special operation receiving section 3333 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, and various production members A to E arranged at positions overlapping the special operation receiving section 3333 when viewed from the front. is schematically shown. Note that the arrows in the figure simply indicate the movable ranges of the various movable bodies of the performance members A to E.

As shown in FIG. 121, when the special operation receiving section 3333 according to this explanatory example is viewed from the front, there is a section on the back side with the glass plate 192 in between that can contribute to the performance according to the result of the jackpot determination. As members, movable bodies A1, A2, B, C, a display part D, and a board surface light emitting part E that is provided so as to be able to emit light in the part where the game ball can fall and other parts are arranged. . The arrows in FIG. 121 schematically indicate the movable ranges of the movable bodies A1, A2, B, and C.

Note that these members are shown as an example for explaining the technology of the present application, and do not necessarily correspond to the embodiment described earlier using FIG. 60 and the like. However, basically, the movable bodies A1, A2, B, and C are "back lower and rear movable production unit 3100, back upper left movable production unit 3200, back left movable production unit 3300, back upper and middle movable production unit 3400, back The display section D corresponds to the "effect display device 1600," and the board light emitting section E corresponds to "the various decorations provided on the game board 5." This corresponds to "various LEDs mounted on a board." Note that the board light emitting section E does not necessarily need to be provided on the game board 5, and may be a member (such as a light guide plate) provided on the front side of the game board 5, for example.

Here, in the peripheral control board 1510, first, the display part D where the performance display according to the result of the jackpot determination is performed is positioned as the target of the operation performance, and when viewed from the front, the display part D of the special operation receiving part 3333 is When a player performs an operation on an overlapping coordinate area and this is detected as a physical object, control is possible so that a change in effect appears on the display section D in accordance with the operation.

Hereinafter, an example of performance control in the case where a performance change is caused on the display section D by an operation on the special operation receiving section 3333 will be described.

[First operation control mode for display section D]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 122(a), when the first performance condition is satisfied based on the result of the jackpot determination, the special operation receiving part 3333 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 119), the first coordinate area Z1 facing the first display area of the display section D is set (controlled) to be able to receive effects, and the display A specific operation instruction image S1 is displayed in the first display area of section D. Then, during a predetermined period during which the specific operation instruction image S1 is displayed, an operation (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (strictly When this is detected as a physical object, the specific operation instruction image S1 is hidden and the specified operation instruction image S1 is hidden. It is possible to execute control in which performance acceptance for the first coordinate area Z1 is ended, and a performance change is caused on the display section D, and the degree of expectation for the result of jackpot determination can be suggested by the type of the performance change that has occurred.

At this time, when producing a performance change based on an operation being performed somewhere within the first coordinate area Z1 of the special operation receiving section 3333, the performance change is at least displayed on the display section D. It is desirable that the image be generated within the first display area facing the first coordinate area Z1. In other words, in this case, when the player uses his or her finger to make it difficult to see the first display area from the front, a performance change occurs at least within the first display area. In the first display area until you move your finger or view the first display area from an oblique direction (using the space between the glass plate 192 and the display section D) instead of from a front view. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize the change in performance that is occurring. Alternatively, the player may proceed with the game without checking the changes in the effect within the first display area while keeping his finger on the first coordinate area Z1, or may place his finger in front of the pachinko machine 1. It is now possible to select how to enjoy the game, such as having a third party who is not present check changes in the performance in the first display area, and it is expected to improve the game's interest.

Note that if no operation by the player is detected after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (a specific timing has arrived) after the specific operation instruction image S1 appears, the specific operation instruction image S1 will not be displayed. At the same time, the presentation reception for the first coordinate area Z1 is terminated. At this time, the effect change that appears when the effect is accepted for the first coordinate area Z1 may be caused, or the effect change that appears when the effect is accepted for the first coordinate area Z1 may not be caused. The presentation reception for the first coordinate area Z1 may be terminated.

[Second operation control mode for display section D]
Further, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 122(b), when the second effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the jackpot determination, the special operation receiving part 3333 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 119), ``the second coordinate area Z2 facing the second display area of the display section D'' and the ``third display area of the display section D'' and the opposing third coordinate area Z3 are set (controlled) to be able to receive effects, and the second operation instruction image S2 is displayed in the second display area of the display section D, and the second operation instruction image S2 is displayed in the third display area. , the third operation instruction image S3 is displayed. Then, during a predetermined period when both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are displayed, the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 of the special operation receiving section 3333 is displayed. An operation is performed on somewhere (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (strictly speaking, it is only necessary to have a finger inside the special operation receiving part 3333, and it is not necessary to touch it)), and this becomes a physical object. When detected, both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are hidden, and the reception of the production of the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 is ended, and the display section D A specific performance (a performance corresponding to the selected side (coordinate area side where the physical object is detected)) is generated in the game, and it is possible to execute control that can indicate the degree of expectation for the result of the jackpot determination in the specific performance that occurs. .

Note that no operation by the player is detected until a predetermined period of time has elapsed (a specific timing has arrived) after both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 appear. In this case, both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are hidden, and the reception of effects for the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 is ended. ing. At this time, a specific effect that appears when a presentation is received for the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 may be generated, or a specific effect may not be generated. However, when producing a specific effect that appears when an effect is accepted for the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3, the operation for the second operation instruction image S2 must be accepted prior to execution of the specific effect. It is desirable to display a display (such as an effect) that is generated when the third operation instruction image S3 is received, or a display (such as an effect) that is generated when the operation on the third operation instruction image S3 is accepted. In other words, in this case, it is possible to understand that the production on the side where the effect has occurred is being forcibly executed while no operation is being performed on either the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3. This prevents the player from losing interest in the game due to not knowing what performance is being performed.

In addition, in the first operation control mode and the second operation control mode for the display section D, not only is it possible to accept effects for the first coordinate area Z1, the second coordinate area Z2, and the third coordinate area Z3, but also the same The same presentation reception may be allowed for other operating means such as the operating button 410 within the period.

For example, in the first operation control mode for the display section D, when the first performance condition is satisfied, both the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410 can be used to receive the performance, and the specific operation instruction image S1 Even if a pressing operation on the operation button 410 (detection of a button switch) is performed instead of an operation on the first coordinate area Z1 (detection of a physical object) during the predetermined period in which is displayed, the above-mentioned specific The operation instruction image S1 is hidden, the performance reception of the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410 is ended, and a performance change is caused in the display section D, and expectations regarding the result of jackpot determination are determined based on the type of the performance change that has occurred. This makes it possible to execute control that can be suggested at a certain level.

Note that even when there is an operation (detection of a physical object) on the first coordinate area Z1, the specific operation instruction image S1 is hidden and reception of the production of the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410 is ended, and the above A performance change is caused on the display part D, and control can be executed in which the degree of expectation for the result of jackpot determination can be suggested based on the type of the performance change that has occurred.

In addition, in the second operation control mode for the display section D, when the second effect condition is satisfied, the second coordinate area Z2, the third coordinate area Z3, and the operation button 410 can all be used to receive effects. do. Then, during a predetermined period in which the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed, an operation is not performed on either the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 (detection of a physical object). When a pressing operation (detection of a button switch) is performed on the button 410, a second selection image indicating that a specific operation instruction image S2 is selected and a specific operation instruction image S3 are selected. A switching display is performed between the third selected image and the third selected image indicating that the current state is present. Then, when a predetermined period of time elapses after the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed while either the second selection image or the third selection image is displayed, the selection image Generates a display (such as an effect) that allows users to understand that the operation on the operation instruction images S2 and S3 on which they appear has been accepted, and selects the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3. Both images (the second selected image and the third selected image) are hidden, and the presentation reception for the second coordinate area Z2, the third coordinate area Z3, and the operation button 410 is ended. Thereafter, a specific performance (performance on the selected side) is generated on the display section D, and a control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the jackpot determination can be executed in the specific performance that has occurred.

Furthermore, within the above-mentioned predetermined period, an operation on another operation means (an operation that accepts any decision) can be performed, and when there is an operation on the other operation means, the selected image appears. A display (effect) that allows the user to understand that the operation on the side operation instruction images S2 and S3 has been accepted is generated, and the second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selected image (second selection image, third selected image) may be hidden, and the reception of effects for the second coordinate area Z2, the third coordinate area Z3, the operation button 410, or another operation means may be terminated. Thereafter, a specific performance (performance on the selected side) is generated on the display section D, and a control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the jackpot determination can be executed in the specific performance that has occurred.

Also, within the predetermined period before the specific effect appears, even if either the second selection image or the third selection image appears, the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Area Z3 is allowed to receive performances. Then, when an operation on either the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 is detected, regardless of whether the second selected image or the third selected image is displayed, The display (effects, etc.) on the side where the reception has been made appears, and the second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selected images (second selection image, third selection image) are all hidden. Then, the reception of effects for the second coordinate area Z2, the third coordinate area Z3, the operation button 410, and other operation means is ended. At this time, the operation is detected before the second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selected images (second selection image, third selection image) are all hidden. The display may be switched so that the selected image on the other side (the second selected image, the third selected image) appears. Thereafter, a specific performance (performance on the selected side) is generated on the display section D, and control can be executed in which the degree of expectation for the result of the jackpot determination can be suggested in the specific performance that has occurred.

According to such a configuration, not only is it possible to accept effects for the first coordinate area Z1, second coordinate area Z2, and third coordinate area Z3, but also for other operation means such as the operation button 410. It is possible to receive the same performance. In this regard, in the second operation control mode, if the same production reception is possible but the operation is performed on the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3, the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area By only accepting one operation (detection of a physical object) in the area Z3, it is possible to generate a performance according to the player's preference. That is, when using other operation means, "the side according to the player's preference will be displayed until a predetermined period elapses after the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed." However, if a specific operation receiving section 3333 is used, this is not possible. Since it is possible to create a display mode according to the player's preference with only a small number of operations (in this production example, once), it is possible to realize a more complex production with simple operability. become expected.

In addition, while providing such efficient operability, it is also possible to simultaneously provide operability that allows a desired operation to be achieved by performing at least two operations using a plurality of operating means, The player can now worry about which operation to select as the desired operation while performing operations in the process steps leading to the desired operation. In other words, in this case, while performing the operations that are in the process of reaching the desired operation, it becomes easier to imagine the performance situation after the selection, and it becomes easier to think about which operation to perform within a predetermined period of time. You will be able to do this. In this way, since the player can selectively use operating means that require a different number of operations depending on whether the player is in a state where he or she is ready to make a quick decision or is in a state where he or she is in a state where he or she is in a state where he or she is in a state where he or she is in a state where he or she is in a state where the player is in a state where he/she is in a state where he/she is in a state where he or she is in a state where he/she is in a state where the player is in a state where he/she is in a state where the player is in a state where he or she is in a state where he/she is in a state where he/she is in a state where he/she is in a state where he/she is in a state where he/she is in a state where he/she is in a state where he/she is in a state where he/she is in a state where he/she is in a state where he or she is worried, the player can selectively use operating means that require a different number of operations. It becomes like this.

In this way, in the peripheral control board 1510, by using the display section D as a target for operation performance using the special operation receiving section 3333, it is possible to realize an unprecedented and interesting performance. However, as described above, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the special operation receiving section 3333 has a larger operation receiving range when viewed from the front than the display section D (the coordinate range to be detected is the coordinate range of the glass plate 192). By realizing performances that take advantage of these special relationships, it is possible to realize more dynamic and highly flexible operability, as well as performances suitable for this. .

[Third operation control mode for display section D]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 123(a), when the third performance condition is satisfied based on the result of the jackpot determination, the special operation receiving part 3333 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 119), the fourth coordinate area Z4 facing the fourth display area of the display section D is set (controlled) to be able to receive effects, and the display A specific operation target image S4 is displayed in the fourth display area of the display unit D, and a specific image prompting that the specific operation target image S4 should be operated to be moved to the movable body B is displayed in the other display area of the display unit D. indicate.

Then, during a predetermined period after the specific operation target image S4 is displayed, an operation is performed somewhere within the fourth coordinate area Z4 of the special operation receiving section 3333 (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192). Strictly speaking, it is only necessary to have a finger or the like in the special operation receiving part 3333, and it is not necessary to touch it)). When this is detected as a physical object, as shown in FIG. 123(b). , the coordinate area where production can be accepted is not the limited fourth coordinate area Z4 within the display section D, but a large fifth coordinate area that includes at least the coordinate area facing the movable body B provided outside the display section D. Change the settings to Z5. Note that the fifth coordinate area Z5 in this example is a coordinate area facing the fourth display area (which does not necessarily have to coincide with the fourth coordinate area Z) and facing the movable body B provided outside the display section D. It is set in such a way that it straddles the movable body B, the display section D, and the board light emitting section E.

At this time, the display mode of the specific operation target image S4 may be changed (for example, the color may be changed It may be possible to make it possible to recognize that the specific operation target image S4 is in a state where it can be moved by an operation by the player.

That is, in this third operation control mode, with a physical object such as a finger held in the special operation receiving part 3333, the physical object is moved to a coordinate position facing the movable body B in the fifth coordinate area Z5. When the image S4 to be operated appears in the display section D, it appears as if the specific operation target image S4 acting on the movable body B provided outside the display section D starts the production on the movable body B. Achieving a great performance.

Therefore, when a physical object such as a finger is moved within the fifth coordinate area Z5 while being held in the special operation receiving section 3333, the peripheral control board 1510 detects the movement of the physical object and Control can be executed to move the specific operation target image S4 within the display section D so as to follow the movement of the detected physical object. As a result, the specific operation target image S4 can be changed from the time when the physical object is in the middle of its movement, which has not yet finished moving to the coordinate position facing the movable body B, to It moves within the display section D so as to follow the movement when viewed from the front.

More specifically, with a physical object such as a finger held in the special operation receiver 3333, move the physical object from the position shown in FIG. 123(b) in the fifth coordinate area Z5 to the position shown in FIG. 124(a). When it is moved to the position shown in , the peripheral control board 1510 moves the specific operation target image S4 within the display section D so as to follow the movement of such a physical object. However, when a physical object such as a finger is at the position shown in FIG. A part of it protrudes from the display area D and cannot be displayed in its entirety. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, only the displayable portion of the specific operation target image S4 is displayed on the display portion D, and the portion that protrudes from the display portion D is displayed. Control is performed to cause the corresponding portion of the panel light emitting section E to emit light so that it can be recognized. More specifically, as the physical object approaches the coordinate position facing the edge of the display section D, the portion where the specific operation target image S4 is displayed on the display section D decreases, and the board light emitting section E Control is performed to increase the corresponding portion as the light emitting area.

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to express that the specific operation target image S4 on the display section D is about to jump out of the display section D due to the operation by the player, and the display section D More dynamic operability with a higher degree of freedom and performance that is suitable for this will be realized than can be achieved by this alone.

In particular, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Even though the board is placed, the effects are controlled not only for the display section D but also for a member different from the display section D (board surface light emitting section E). Therefore, even when a physical object is moved in a coordinate area facing a plurality of members in the special operation receiving section 3333, it becomes easy to recognize that an effect corresponding to the movement has appeared, and thereby It becomes possible to suitably realize presentation performance suitable for dynamic operability.

Note that when a physical object such as a player's finger is moved slightly upward from the position shown in FIG. (Here, it is placed at a coordinate position facing the board surface light emitting section E). However, in this case as well, instead of suddenly hiding all of the specific operation target image S4 and causing only the board light emitting section E to emit light, as the physical object moves away from the coordinate position facing the display section D, the specific operation Control is performed so that the area where the target image S4 is displayed on the display section D is reduced, and the area corresponding to the light emitting area of the panel light emitting section E is increased. In other words, in this case, when the physical object moves a specific distance away from the coordinate position facing the display part D, the display (here, light emission) is performed only on the board light emitting part E of the display part D and the board light emitting part E. This makes it possible to create an effect as if the specific operation target image S4 had moved outside the display section D.

Then, when the physical object such as the player's finger moves further upward in the fifth coordinate area Z5 and reaches the position shown in FIG. 124(b), the peripheral control board 1510 moves the physical object Control is performed to cause both the board surface light emitting section E and the movable body B located in the screen to emit light. That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the same control as the above-mentioned effect control performed between the display part D and the board light emitting part E is performed between the board light emitting part E and the movable body B. I try to do it. More specifically, when a physical object in a coordinate area facing the game board 5 (here, the board light emitting part E) approaches a predetermined distance to a coordinate area facing the movable body B, the physical object Even though it is in the coordinate area facing the board light emitting part E, the effect is controlled not only for the board light emitting part E but also for a member (movable body B) different from the board light emitting part E. I have to. Therefore, even if the physical object is moved within the coordinate area that faces both the board light emitting part E and the movable body B of the special operation receiving part 3333, the effect corresponding to the movement (here, the display It becomes easier to recognize that the specific operation target image S4) that has been moved outside part D has appeared (moved), and thereby it becomes possible to suitably realize performance that is suitable for dynamic operability. .

Then, when the physical object such as the player's finger moves further upward within the fifth coordinate area Z5 and reaches the position shown in FIG. It is determined that the operation as if moving up to the point has been properly performed, and the conditions for the third operation control mode are satisfied, and the reception of the effect for the fifth coordinate area Z5 is ended. In addition, a display that allows recognition that the condition in the third operation control mode (moving the specific operation target image S4 to the movable body B) is satisfied appears on the display section D, and when the movable body B is used. Execute control to start the performance. The performance using the movable body B can be realized as, for example, a performance in which the movable body B emits light in a predetermined manner, a performance in which the movable body B operates in a predetermined manner, etc., and it is possible to determine a jackpot through such a performance. The level of expectation for the results should be suggested.

Note that in the third operation control mode, when the physical object moves within the special operation receiving section 3333 and moves out of the fifth coordinate area Z5 (if the physical object moves away from the special operation receiving section 3333), the physical object moves within the special operation receiving section 3333. 123(a), it is desirable to start over from the state shown in FIG. 123(a). In other words, as will be described later, the peripheral control board 1510 basically periodically acquires the position information of the physical object regardless of the performance execution status, and thereby the physical object moves within the fifth coordinate area Z5. Information indicating that the object is moving, information indicating that the object has moved outside the fifth coordinate area Z5, etc. is obtained.

Further, although the specific operation target image S4 is moved to follow the movement of the physical object, the invention is not limited to this. For example, the specific operation target image S4 is moved to follow only the movement of the physical object in a specific direction. The operation target image S4 may be moved.

Furthermore, the fifth coordinate area Z5 may be the entire coordinate area of the special operation receiving section 3333. In addition, if there is no part that can perform a production expression that suggests the existence of a specific operation target image S4 on the side opposite to the coordinate position where the physical object is placed, then the coordinate position close to the coordinate position where the physical object is placed is It is also possible to perform a production expression that suggests that a specific operation target image S4 exists in a region.

In addition, in this example, a board light emitting part E that can produce an effect (light emission) is placed between the display part D and the movable body B, but the board light emitting part E does not necessarily have to be provided. good. In other words, in this case, from the time when the specific operation target image S4 is no longer displayed on the display unit D until the physical object is moved to the coordinate position facing the movable body B (or to a nearby coordinate position), the player In this case, the user continues the operation while holding in his/her mind the image of the specific operation target image S4 moving.

In addition, a map is displayed on the display unit D that allows the user to grasp the positional relationship between the display unit D and the movable body B, and the position of the specific operation target image S4 is displayed on the map according to the movement of the physical object. It may also be possible to display an effect suggested by .

Note that in the drawings of FIGS. 122 to 125, each coordinate area Z1 to Z5 is indicated, but in reality, the player cannot visually recognize the coordinate areas Z1 to Z5.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control board 1510, among the various performance members shown in FIG. 121, movable bodies A1, A2, and C, which perform performance operations according to the result of jackpot determination, are also positioned as targets for operation performance, and special When a player performs an operation on a coordinate area of the operation receiving section 3333 that overlaps the movable bodies A1, A2, and C when viewed from the front and this is detected as a physical object, a performance action corresponding to the operation appears. It can be controlled. Therefore, the player can select any one of the plurality of movable bodies and operate it in an appropriate manner (speed, amount of movement).

[Fourth operation control mode for movable body C]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 126(a), when the fourth effect condition is satisfied based on the result of jackpot determination, the special operation receiving part Of all the coordinate areas when 3333 is viewed from the front (see FIG. 119), the sixth coordinate area Z6 facing a part of the movable body C is set (controlled) to be able to receive effects. At this time, in order for the player to be able to recognize that the sixth coordinate area Z6 is available for production reception in order to operate the movable body C, a specific display image appears on the display section D, and the movable body It is desirable to cause C to emit light in the first mode (eg, emit light in a blinking mode) or to vibrate.

Then, during a predetermined period after the sixth coordinate area Z6 is set to be able to accept production, an operation (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (strictly speaking, a special If a finger or the like is required in the operation receiving part 3333, and it is not necessarily necessary to touch the object)) and this is detected as a physical object, the effect can be accepted as shown in FIG. 126(b). The coordinate area is changed to a large seventh coordinate area Z7 that includes at least the movable range CT of the movable body C, instead of the sixth coordinate area Z6. Note that here, the seventh coordinate area Z7 is set as a coordinate area including all of the sixth coordinate area Z6.

That is, in this fourth operation control mode, with a physical object such as a finger held in the special operation receiving part 3333, the physical object is moved to the end of the movable range CT of the movable body C within the seventh coordinate area Z7. When moved to a coordinate position facing the part, an effect is realized in which the movable body C can be moved so as to follow the movement of the physical object.

Therefore, when the state shown in FIG. 126(b) is reached, a physical object such as a finger has been detected in the seventh coordinate area Z7, and the movable body C is in a state of being moved by the movement of the physical object. It is desirable to perform control that makes it possible to recognize the In the example shown in FIG. 126(b), the movable body C is caused to emit light in the second mode (for example, in the constant mode).

However, from the player's perspective, he does not know what kind of movable range CT is provided for the movable body C, and the player does not know what kind of movable range CT is provided for the movable body C, and the player does not know what kind of movable range CT is provided for the movable body C, and the player does not know what kind of movable range CT is provided for the movable body C. There is a concern that even if an attempt is made to move the physical object along the movable range CT of the movable body C, this cannot be done properly. As a result, if the physical object such as the player's finger deviates from the seventh coordinate area Z7 despite the player's intention to operate along the movable range CT of the movable body C (special operation receiving section 3333), the player will have to start over from the state shown in FIG. 126(a) against his/her intention, which may reduce his/her interest in the game.

In this regard, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 126(a) and 126(b), the seventh coordinate area Z7 in the fourth operation control mode is set as the control target. The sixth coordinate area Z6 is set in a range expanded by at least the first distance in all directions when viewed from the front, including the direction opposite to the upper side in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. It is said that

According to such a configuration, even if the player does not know what kind of movable range CT is provided for the movable body C, the direction deviated from the movable range CT of the movable body C When the finger (physical object) is moved to the side, the movable body C does not move even though the production has been accepted (despite not having to start over from the state shown in FIG. 126(a)). Since phenomena begin to occur, it becomes possible to estimate the movable range CT of the movable body C and perform operations by confirming these phenomena.

The peripheral control board 1510 also moves the movable body C to a plurality of predetermined positions (the first position shown in FIG. 126(b)) within the movable range CT set for the movable body C. original position), the second position shown in FIG. 126(c), the third position shown in FIG. 127(a), and the fourth position (terminal position) shown in FIG. 127(b)). It is possible to execute control to Then, the seventh coordinate area Z7 is divided into a first driving coordinate area Z7-1 including a portion facing the first position (original position) and a second driving coordinate area Z7-1 including a portion facing the second position. Z7-2, a third drive coordinate area Z7-3 including a portion facing the third position, and a fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 including a portion facing the fourth position. By determining which of the coordinate areas Z7-1 to Z7-4 the physical object detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 has moved, the movable body C is moved to the drive coordinate area corresponding to the determination. Control is executable.

Here, the first drive coordinate area Z7-1, which includes the part facing the first position (original position) within the movable range CT, is the control target as shown in FIGS. 126(a) and (b). The movable range CT of the movable body C extends from the sixth coordinate area Z6 by at least a first distance in the left, right, and downward directions excluding the upper side where the movable range CT of the movable body C extends.

According to such a configuration, after a physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126(a)) and the setting is changed to the seventh coordinate area Z7 (FIG. 126(b)), the corresponding Even if the physical object is moved in a direction different from the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends (moved by less than the first distance), the physical object is moved within the single first drive coordinate area Z7-1. Therefore, the movable body C remains at the first position (original position) corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 where the physical object is detected without moving. Become. In other words, in this case, a phenomenon occurs in which the movable body C does not move even though the operation by the player has been accepted (despite not being restarted from the state shown in FIG. 126(a)). Therefore, by confirming these phenomena, it becomes possible to estimate the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends and perform the operation.

On the other hand, after a physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126(a)) and the setting is changed to the seventh coordinate area Z7 (FIG. 126(b)), the physical object cannot be moved. When the physical object is moved in the direction in which the movable range CT of the body C extends (movement less than the first distance), the physical object only moves a second distance shorter than the first distance, as shown in FIG. 126(b). The second driving coordinate area Z7-2 shown in FIG. 126(c) is reached from the first driving coordinate area Z7-1 shown in FIG. That is, in this case, based on the fact that the physical object has been detected within the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, the movable body C moves to the first position (FIG. 126) corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1. b)) to the second position (FIG. 126(c)) corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2.

Here, as shown in FIG. 126(c), the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, which includes a portion facing the second position within the movable range CT, also extends in the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. In the left and right directions perpendicular to , the range extends by the same distance as the first drive coordinate area Z7-1. On the other hand, the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends is set to be shorter than the length in the horizontal direction.

According to such a configuration, when the physical object detected in the second driving coordinate area Z7-2 is moved in a direction different from the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends, the physical object is , it is easy to remain detected within the single second drive coordinate area Z7-2, and the movable object C corresponds to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 where the physical object was detected without moving. It continues to stay at the second position. In other words, in this case, a phenomenon occurs in which the movable body C does not move even though the operation by the player has been accepted (despite not being restarted from the state shown in FIG. 126(a)). Therefore, by confirming these phenomena, it becomes possible to estimate the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends and perform the operation.

Moreover, by setting the second driving coordinate area Z7-2 to be expanded to the left and right ranges shifted from the movable range CT of the movable body C, the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126(a)) After a physical object such as a finger is detected, the criteria for determining an appropriate operation for moving the physical object along the movable range CT of the movable body C are relaxed. This makes it possible to alleviate the difficulty of moving a physical object while estimating it without knowing what kind of movable range CT is provided for the movable body C. You will be able to maintain your interest.

Note that when the movable body C moves to the second position corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, it is the same as when the movable body C was located at the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1. The light emission mode (for example, blue) may be different from the light emission mode (for example, green). Also, at this time, when a physical object is detected within the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 before the movable body C finishes moving to the second position corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 (the movable By changing the light emission mode (for example, from blue to green) when the body C starts moving toward the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, it is possible to indicate that the player's operation has been properly accepted. This can be recognized from an early stage, and it becomes possible to suppress the feeling of irritation caused by the inevitable delay in the behavior of the movable body in response to a quick operation by the player's finger or the like.

Additionally, if a physical object moves at a speed that exceeds the moving speed of the movable object, the movable object cannot be moved to follow the physical object, but in this case, at a predetermined moving speed, Control will be performed to move it to the latest detected position.

Then, as a result of the player's finger operation, the physical object in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 (FIG. 126(c)) moves upward and moves to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 (FIG. 127(c)). a)), the movable body C moves from the second position (FIG. 126(c)) corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3. It will move to the third position (FIG. 127(a)).

Here, as shown in FIG. 126(c), the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 including the portion facing the third position within the movable range CT is in the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. In the left and right directions perpendicular to the left and right directions, the range extends over a longer distance than the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 and the second drive coordinate area Z7-2. On the other hand, the length in the vertical direction within the third drive coordinate area Z7-3, in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends, is set to be shorter than the length in the horizontal direction.

In other words, as mentioned above, when operating a movable object that does not have a means of indicating the direction of operation, unlike display means, etc., it is difficult to operate it without knowing what range of movement it has. You have to move physical objects while making guesses. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 and the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, effects can be accepted even to the left and right ranges shifted from the movable range CT of the movable body C. As described above, by widening the range, the criteria for determining an appropriate operation when moving the movable body C along the movable range CT are relaxed.

However, when a physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126(a)) and the physical object is moved along the movable range CT of the movable body C, the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126(a)) There is a tendency for the deviation from the movable range CT to increase as the distance from the range CT increases. Therefore, in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 (FIG. 127(a)), the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 and the second Assuming that the movement distance of the physical object from the sixth coordinate area Z6 increases due to the range extending over a longer distance than the driving coordinate area Z7-2, and the deviation from the movable range CT gradually increases. Also, this can be accepted as a proper performance operation. This makes it possible to alleviate the difficulty of moving a physical object over a long distance while estimating it without knowing what kind of movement range CT is provided for the movable body C. This makes it possible to maintain the player's interest in gaming. For example, even if the physical object moves upward in a coordinate range that does not face the movable range CT of the movable body C, the movable body C will continue to move upward.

Note that when the movable body C moves to the third position corresponding to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3, the light emission mode (for example, blue) when the movable body C was located at the first position and the second position The light emitting mode (for example, red) may be different from the light emitting mode (for example, green) when it is located at . Furthermore, when a physical object is detected within the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 before the movable body C finishes moving to the third position corresponding to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 (the movable body C The light emission mode may be changed (for example, from blue to green) when the light starts moving toward the third drive coordinate area Z7-3).

For the same reason, the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 also extends further than the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 in the left and right directions perpendicular to the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. It has a range that extends over long distances. However, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the physical object within the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 is moved upward by the player's operation with a finger or the like, and moved upward to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-3. 4, the movable body C is moved from the third position corresponding to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 (FIG. 127(a)) to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. It is not necessarily moved to the position (FIG. 127(b)). In addition, if the physical object within the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 moves upward due to the player's operation with a finger or the like and is detected within the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, the movable object The body C is moved from the third position (Fig. 127(a)) corresponding to the third driving coordinate area Z7-3 to the first position (Fig. 127(c)) corresponding to the first driving coordinate area Z7-1. It can be moved.

That is, the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment determines whether or not the movable body C can be moved to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 based on the result of the jackpot determination. This has been decided, and such an effect using the movable body C will be provided to the players. Then, when the physical object detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 is detected in the fourth driving coordinate area Z7-4 by the operation of a finger or the like by the player, the movable body C is moved to the fourth position (FIG. 127 ( The degree of expectation (specific result obtained (It may be a definitive indication of the

Note that in the peripheral control board 1510, the physical object within the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 is moved upward by the player's operation with a finger or the like, and is detected within the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. In this case, it is assumed that the conditions in the fourth operation control mode are satisfied, and the reception of the effect for the seventh coordinate area Z7 is ended. Then, when it is determined that the movable body C can move to the fourth position, as shown in FIG. 127(b), the movable body C Control will be performed to move it to the fourth position. On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable body C cannot move to the fourth position, as shown in FIG. 127(c), the movable body Control is performed to move C to the first position.

However, at this time, even if it is determined that the movable body C can move to the fourth position, the movement of the movable body C to temporarily move downward (the movable body C is moved to the fourth position (Fig. 127) (b)) Even if it is determined that the movable body C cannot move to the fourth position, the movable body C is temporarily moved upward. It is desirable to show the moving movement (representation of whether or not the movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127(b))) in order to improve the game's interest.

When the movable body C moves to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, the light emission mode (for example, blue) when the movable body C was located at the first position and the second position The light emitting mode (e.g., rainbow color) is different from the light emitting mode (e.g., green) when the device is located at the third position (e.g., red) or the light emitting mode (e.g., red) when it is located at the third position. However, unlike the first to third positions, the timing is not when the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, but at a later timing (when the movable object C It is desirable to make it appear at a later time (timing when it is possible to definitively determine the movement from the movement to the fourth position). Similarly, when the movable body C moves to the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1, the physical object is not detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, but when the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. It is desirable to end the light emission at a later timing (a timing at which it can be determined with certainty that the movable body C will not move to the fourth position from the movement of the movable body C).

After the movable body C has been moved to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the movable body C to be moved to the first position (original position) after a predetermined time has elapsed. By doing so, the fourth operation control mode is ended.

By the way, in this fourth operation control mode, regardless of the expectation level of a jackpot, the movable body is moved between the first position (FIG. 126(b)) and the third position (FIG. 127(a)) of the movable range CT. It is possible to move C freely. For example, when the physical object is operated to return to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 after moving the movable body C to the second position (FIG. 126(c)), the peripheral control board 1510 Based on the physical object being detected again in the coordinate area Z7-1, control is performed to move the movable body C from the second position (Fig. 126(c)) to the first position (Fig. 126(b)). . Further, when the physical object is operated to return to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 after moving the movable body C to the third position (FIG. 127(a)), the peripheral control board 1510 Based on the physical object being detected again in the coordinate area Z7-2, control is performed to move the movable body C from the third position (Fig. 127(a)) to the second position (Fig. 126(c)). It happens.

According to such a configuration, the driving mode for moving the movable body C up and down in small steps is determined by the player's preference as an effect of whether or not the movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127(b)). It becomes possible to make the game appear according to the player's preference, or to perform it for a time that suits the player's preference, making it possible to control the ``pause'' until the final result appears, improving the enjoyment of the game. It is now expected that Note that after the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, the presentation reception for the fourth operation control mode is terminated, and therefore the movable body C cannot be freely manipulated.

It should be noted that the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 is moved between the time when the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126(a)) is set (controlled) to be able to receive effects and the time when a predetermined period of time has elapsed (a specific timing has arrived). If the physical object is not properly detected in , the presentation reception for the sixth coordinate area Z6 or the seventh coordinate area Z7 is terminated. At this time, the behavior of the movable body C that appears when the physical object is properly detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 may be caused, or the movable body C may be , may be controlled to be located at a plurality of predetermined positions (the first position (original position) shown in FIG. 126(b)).

In addition, in the fourth operation control mode according to this explanatory example, the movable range CT from the first position (FIG. 126(b)) to the third position (FIG. 127(a)) is During the period, it was possible to move the movable body C freely, but instead, it is possible to move the movable body C freely within the range of the first position (Fig. 126(b)) to the fourth position (Fig. 127(b)) of the movable range CT. It may be arranged such that the higher the position is located, the higher the degree of expectation of a suggested jackpot. That is, in this case, the peripheral control board 1510 selects one of a plurality of performance patterns with different jackpot expectation levels based on the result of the jackpot determination, and selects a position (first position to fourth position) determined by the selected performance pattern. ), the movable body C is controlled to be movable. At this time, when the physical object moves from the first driving coordinate area Z7-1 to the second driving coordinate area Z7-2 or from the second driving coordinate area Z7-2 to the third driving coordinate area Z7-3. Sometimes, an effect indicating whether or not the movable body C moves to the next position (behavior of moving back and forth) may be displayed.

In addition, in the first to third operation control modes for the display section D, when making images S1 to S4 available for production, coordinate areas Z1 to Z4 that are larger than these images S1 to S4 when viewed from the front are generated. On the other hand, in the fourth operation control mode for the movable body C, when the movable body C is enabled to receive a performance, a sixth coordinate area Z6 smaller than the movable body C in front view is generated. In other words, since movable objects often include parts with a relatively large amount of movement and parts with a relatively small amount of movement, for example, it is possible to create a part with a relatively small amount of movement. It is desirable to exclude them from the reception target in order to suppress a decline in interest in gaming. On the other hand, in the display section, if you try to set the coordinate area according to the size of the image that can accept the production, you will need to make the image large in order to maintain good operability, and other Since there is a concern that the balance with the displayed image may deteriorate, it is desirable to independently set the size of the image for which the effect can be accepted, separate from the setting range of the coordinate area.

However, when controlling to detect the movement of a physical object within a specific coordinate area (here, the first driving coordinate area Z7-1 to the fourth driving coordinate area Z7-4) and to make a corresponding effect appear. For example, if the physical object detected in the first driving coordinate area Z7-1 moves and moves to the fourth driving coordinate area without passing through the second driving coordinate area Z7-2 or the third driving coordinate area Z7-3. It is also conceivable that a situation may arise where Z7-4 is suddenly detected. Such a situation may occur, for example, when the right hand is set as a detection target in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1, and then the left hand is set as a detection target in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 without moving this right hand. Therefore, it should be determined that the physical object is not moving, and an effect corresponding to the movement (such as movement of the movable body C) should not be performed.

In this regard, the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment generates interrupt timer processing every 4 ms while executing the above-mentioned peripheral control section steady processing (every 33.3 ms). During the timer process, information from the left outer circumferential light detecting section 35a and information from the right outer circumferential light detecting section 35b are acquired and stored as coordinate information indicating the coordinate position where the physical object was detected. Then, in the peripheral control unit steady processing described above, a specific coordinate area is determined by analyzing a plurality of pieces (8, 9 pieces) of coordinate information stored every 4 ms after the previous peripheral control unit steady processing ended. (For example, the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4) determines whether the physical object is moving properly or not, and also controls the actuator according to the result of the determination. Set. Then, in the interrupt processing every 1 ms, control is performed to drive the movable body C based on the control data set in this way, so that the movable body C and the physical object move up to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. When the physical object is in the middle of its movement and has not finished moving, it begins to move to follow the movement of the physical object in the sixth coordinate area Z6 when viewed from the front. Note that the coordinate information is stored in the chronological order in which the coordinate positions were acquired.

For example, even if a physical object is detected in the fourth driving coordinate area Z7-4 after the physical object is detected in the first driving coordinate area Z7-1, the physical object is detected in the fourth driving coordinate area Z7-4. Coordinate information indicating that a physical object was detected in the second driving coordinate area Z7-2 and coordinate information indicating that a physical object was detected in the third driving coordinate area Z7-3 at a timing before the physical object was detected in the second driving coordinate area Z7-2. If there is no coordinate information indicating that the physical object has been detected, it is determined that the physical object has not moved properly, and the movable body C is controlled not to move.

That is, in the fourth operation control mode, the movable body C moves from the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. This means that the physical object detected in the first driving coordinate area Z7-1 is located in the second driving coordinate area Z7-2, the third driving coordinate area Z7-3, and the fourth driving coordinate area Z7-. For example, if there is no detection within the third drive coordinate area Z7-3, the detection is performed only up to the second position corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2. The movable body C is designed not to move. As a result, only when a proper operation is performed on the special operation receiving section 3333, an appropriate effect can be made to appear.

Furthermore, in the fourth operation control mode, control is performed to move the movable body C depending on whether a physical object is detected in each of the coordinate areas Z7-1 to Z7-4, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. , to perform control to move the movable body C depending on whether movement of a physical object having a vector component in the direction toward the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 is detected within the movable range CT of the movable body C. You may also do so. That is, in this case, the vector components of the physical object are analyzed based on the acquired coordinate positions stored in chronological order.

Note that the setting control of the coordinate area, the movement detection of the physical object, and the production control of the movable body C used in this fourth operation control mode are, for example, performed in the display unit in the third operation control mode described above. It may be applied to the image S4.

In addition, in the third operation control mode and the fourth operation control mode, the detection (representation reception) regarding the movement of the physical object after the movement of the physical object has started in the special operation receiving unit 3333 has not been completed and is still continuing. While this is being done, control is performed to move the performance target (display image or movable object) in a manner that corresponds to at least the movement direction and movement amount of the physical object that has already been detected. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to create a performance as if the player himself had created the performance, so that a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

By the way, in the first operation control mode, the second operation control mode, the third operation control mode, and the fourth operation control mode, the production reception for the special operation receiving section 3333 is performed based on the coordinates set at that time. limited within the area. However, the detection of the physical object in the special operation receiving unit 3333 is always performed (every 4 ms), and the detected coordinate information is stored in association with the acquired time series. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, the position and movement of the physical object are analyzed in the peripheral control unit steady processing (every 33.3 ms) based on the coordinate information stored in a time-series manner. In this regard, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, when a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving section 3333, one of a plurality of analysis processes having different analysis contents can be executed. Even if the same movement is detected as the movement of the physical object in the unit 3333, different controls can be performed depending on the analysis result.

FIG. 128 is a flowchart illustrating a control example of the physical object detection information analysis process executed in the peripheral control unit steady process.

That is, the peripheral control board 1510 first determines whether or not it is in the operation performance acceptance period that occurs based on the fulfillment of a specific performance condition according to the result of the jackpot determination (step S3301). As a result, if the operation production reception period is in progress, as described above, a physical object is detected within the coordinate area where production reception is possible, based on the coordinate information stored in a chronological manner. In addition, if a physical object is detected within the coordinate area where the performance can be accepted, the moving mode and size of the physical object are further analyzed (step S3302). Based on the analysis results for these performances, control regarding the coordinate area where the production can be accepted (resetting, termination), control to cause production changes to display images, movable objects, etc., and the current situation. Control is performed to maintain the presentation state (step S3303). As a result of the process in step S3302, even if no physical object is detected within the coordinate area where production can be accepted, the control (resetting, etc.) regarding the coordinate area where production can be accepted 126(a)), or control to return the display image, movable object, or other performance object to its original position (for example, control to move the movable object C to the first position shown in FIG. 126(a)).

On the other hand, in the process of step S3301, if it is determined that there is no coordinate area in which the special operation reception unit 3333 can receive the effect during the set operation effect reception period, the analysis content for the above effect is determined. The analysis is performed with different content (step S3312). That is, the special operation receiving section 3333 according to this embodiment is provided in a manner that faces the entire area of the game board 5. Therefore, in order to fraudulently facilitate the winning of game balls, there are actions such as placing magnets at coordinate positions facing the various winning openings in the special operation receiving part 3333, and inserting wires etc. into the gap between the door frame 3 and the glass plate 192. It is conceivable that someone will break in and destroy a speaker that emits an alarm in the event of fraud.

Therefore, in the process of step S3312, an analysis is performed to determine whether there is a possibility that fraudulent activity is being carried out within the special operation receiving unit 3333, based on the coordinate information stored in chronological association. That's what I do. For example, it is determined whether or not a physical object is detected within the special operation receiving section 3333, and if a physical object is detected within the special operation receiving section 3333, the movement mode and size of the physical object are determined. Analyze whether the movement pattern and size match the movement pattern and size that may appear when a fraudulent act is being committed. If it is determined that there is a possibility of fraudulent activity being carried out as a result of such fraud prevention analysis, an external output indicating that fraudulent activity is being carried out or an alarm sound or warning light is activated. If it is not determined that there is a possibility of fraud being committed, control is performed so that such fraud countermeasures are not taken (step S3313). ).

As an analysis procedure (step S3312) for such fraud prevention, for example, first, when a physical object is detected within the special operation receiving unit 3333, the detected coordinate position is set as the reference position for analysis ( Remember. Next, an analysis coordinate range that includes the analysis reference position and extends by a predetermined distance from the analysis reference position is set, and the detected physical object is kept within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). ) (does the physical object hardly move)? As a result, if the detected physical object continues to remain within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), there is a possibility that some fraudulent act is being performed within the analysis coordinate range. It is possible to adopt a method that determines that there is. In this case, if the size of the physical object is such that it is difficult to commit fraud (e.g., it has an extremely thin shape), fraud may not be committed even if such a movement pattern is detected. It may be arranged not to determine that there is a possibility that there is a problem. This makes it possible to prevent false alarms from being erroneously reported when dirt or the like adheres to the glass plate 192.

According to this configuration, during the operation performance acceptance period, even if any act is performed, it will not be judged as a fraudulent act, and only the performance action will be analyzed and the result of the analysis will be However, if there is no operation performance reception period, any act will be judged as a fraud analysis target, and fraud prevention controls will be performed according to the results of the analysis. become. Therefore, even if an event (for example, a physical object is detected in a specific coordinate area for 30 seconds) occurs and is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, depending on the production situation, It may be considered as a performance act and cause a specific performance change, or it may be considered as a fraudulent act and falsely reported. In this way, one piece of detected information can be used for multiple different purposes (in this case, performance purposes and anti-fraud purposes) depending on the gaming and performance situation, allowing more purposes to be achieved with less detected information. It becomes possible to achieve this, and it becomes possible to realize an efficient control structure.

In addition, in this explanatory example, when there is no operation performance acceptance period that occurs based on the fulfillment of a specific performance condition according to the result of the jackpot determination, the performance change is not caused by the operation on the special operation receiving section 3333. However, even when the operation production reception period is not in effect (always), the display image changes and the movable body emits light and moves due to the detection of a physical object in the special operation receiving section 3333. Good too. However, in this case, if there is no operation performance acceptance period, all acts will be judged as being analyzed as fraudulent acts, and also as performance acts, and controls will be performed according to the results of these judgments. Become. Therefore, when an event occurs in the special operation receiving section 3333, both a change in performance and a false notification can occur.

Also, during the process of monitoring whether the physical object continues to remain within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), it may be determined that certain performance conditions are met according to the result of the jackpot determination. If the operation performance acceptance period occurs based on the above, the analysis process for preventing fraud will not end, and monitoring will be performed to see if the physical object continues to remain within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds). It is desirable to continue to do this even after the operation performance acceptance period has occurred. In other words, in this case, during the operation performance reception period, in addition to performing analysis processing for the performance and controlling according to the result, it is also necessary to check whether the physical object remains within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds). monitoring will continue, and depending on the results of this monitoring, fraudulent notifications will be made.

By the way, when the special operation receiving unit 3333 is in the first performance period in which reception of a performance related to a first performance event (for example, a performance that moves a movable body) is allowed, an operation means different from the special operation receiving unit 3333 ( For example, control may be performed to further generate a second performance period during which performance reception regarding a second performance event (for example, a performance that changes a display image) is permitted using the operation button 410).

For example, as shown in FIG. 129(a), at timing t1, the special operation reception unit 3333 allows reception of a performance (panel operation reception) regarding a first performance event (for example, a performance of moving a movable body). Assume that the first performance period has occurred. In addition, in this first production period, from the occurrence of the period to the arrival of timing t2 when the first reception time has elapsed, the movement of the physical object is started in the special operation receiving section 3333. Control for moving a movable body in a manner that corresponds to at least the movement direction and movement amount of a physical object that has already been detected (analyzed) while detection (analysis) related to movement is not finished and is still continuing. (For example, control to move a specific movable body to follow the movement of a physical object, etc.) can be executed.

In this regard, in the peripheral control board 1510, if it is determined that a specific performance condition is satisfied based on the result of the jackpot determination, the first performance period is generated and the first performance period continues without ending. In addition, a second performance in which reception of a performance (button operation reception) regarding a second performance event (for example, a performance that changes a display image) is permitted using an operation means (for example, an operation button 410) different from the special operation receiving section 3333; It is possible to execute control to set performance patterns, preview performances, etc. that are determined to occur during a certain period.

That is, in this case, when timing t11 arrives while the first performance period is occurring, the performance reception (button operation reception) regarding the second performance event (for example, a performance that changes the display image) is allowed on the operation button 410. Control is performed to generate a second presentation period. Then, when an operation on the operation button 410 is received between the occurrence of the second performance period and the arrival of timing t12 when the second reception time has elapsed, the second performance period is ended at that point. let Alternatively, if the operation on the operation button 410 is not received before the timing t12 arrives, the second performance period is ended when the timing t12 arrives.

According to such a configuration, there is a first performance period during which performance reception regarding the first performance event is allowed at the first operation part (here, the special operation receiving section 3333), and a performance reception regarding the second performance event. and the second performance period allowed by the second operation part (here, the operation button 410) both occur simultaneously (timings t11 to t12 shown in FIG. 129(a)). Moreover, in the above configuration, the end timings of the first performance period and the second performance period are different, and the second performance period that occurs later than the first performance period ends earlier. In other words, in this case, if the second performance period occurs after the first performance period, even if the user is in the middle of operating the first operation part, the operator may interrupt the operation and operate the second operation part. , it becomes necessary to operate the first operation part and the second operation part in different ways at the same time, and it is possible to provide unprecedented and interesting performance operability and suppress a decline in game interest. become expected.

In addition, in order to suitably realize such performance operability, it is necessary to accept the performance regarding the second performance event (the performance that ends after a relatively short period of time), as shown in FIG. 129(b). Reception), when it is detected that a predetermined number of times (preferably once) or a predetermined amount of operation (a finite amount of operation) has been performed on the second operation part (here, the operation button 410), the performance is performed. Even if the execution conditions are met, it is desirable to perform control to generate a second performance event (for example, a performance operation that changes the display image) without requiring any further operation. For example, when one press operation is detected on the operation button 410, the second presentation period is ended before the timing t12 arrives, and no further operation is required, and the presentation changes in the displayed image. This includes controls that cause

On the other hand, regarding the performance reception regarding the first performance event (the performance reception that ends after a relatively long period of time), the performance reception will continue at least until the end of the second performance period, and even after that. Regardless of the number of operations or the amount of operation for the first operation part, the production reception regarding the first production event continues without ending, and each time an operation is performed for the first operation part during the continuation, the corresponding It is desirable to perform control that reflects changes in performance in response to operations. For example, the movement of a physical object detected within the special operation receiving unit 3333 is analyzed, and the production reception is continued without ending according to the movement mode (movement amount, etc.) of the physical object, and in this way, the movement of the physical object is This includes control that repeatedly executes a process of moving a movable body to the latest analyzed coordinate position each time its movement is analyzed periodically (every 33.3 ms).

According to such a configuration, even if the operation on the first operation part is interrupted when the second performance period occurs after the first performance period, the opportunity to operate the first operation part is lost. Since it is possible to suitably guarantee that the interruption will not occur, a decrease in interest in gaming due to the interruption can be suppressed. Furthermore, if the second operation section is operated after interrupting the operation on the first operation section, the second performance period can be ended at a relatively early stage, and from then on, the operation on the second operation section can be completed. Since a production change (second production event) occurs in response to the operation without the need for The operation opportunity for the first operation part is also suitably secured.

In this case, in a situation where the operation on the first operation part is restarted, the effect change (second effect event) corresponding to the operation on the second operation area is about to start, and the first operation It becomes possible to generate a special performance situation in which the second performance event can be enjoyed while being provided with an opportunity to operate the body part. In this regard, ``When an operation is performed on the second operation part, a production event in which the size of the specific display image changes occurs, and when the operation on the first operation part is performed, the specific display image changes to a specific position. If the first performance event is set to influence (change) the aspect of the performance target of the second performance event, such as "to cause a moving performance event to occur," In special performance situations, it is now possible to enjoy the second performance event while changing the aspect of the performance target of the second performance event by operating the first operation part, making it more dynamic and flexible. High operability and performance suitable for this can be realized.

Here, as an example of influencing (changing) the aspect of the performance target of the second performance event when the operation on the first operation part is performed, for example, the performance of the second performance event Changing at least one of the following: amount of movement, direction of movement, speed of movement, mode of light emission (color of light, direction of movement, amount of light, etc.), size, or shape of an object (displayed image, movable object, etc.) However, the present invention is not limited to these, and any device that can have some influence on the performance object (display image, sound performance, movable body, etc.) of the second performance event may be used. In other words, even if the object of the operation effect for the first operation part and the object of the operation effect for the second operation part are the same effect object, the mode of the effect produced on the effect (for example, the first operation part For the operation performance for the second operation part, the size is changed, and for the operation performance for the second operation part, the display position is changed). Further, the first performance period does not necessarily have to be set as a finite time, and the operation for the first operation part is accepted even after the second performance period ends, and the second performance period does not necessarily have to be set as a finite time. Any device may be used as long as the first operation portion can be operated while an event is occurring.

In addition, in a period in which both the first performance period and the second performance period occur simultaneously, the performance reception regarding the first performance event and the performance reception regarding the second performance event, the performance reception regarding the second performance event. Only for presentation reception, display prompting for operation instructions and display suggesting the maximum remaining time for the second presentation period can be made to suitably prompt the user to interrupt the operation of the first operation part. preferred above.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, in order to suitably realize the relationship between such effects, although control may be performed to cause the second effect period to occur after the first effect period, Control is performed so that the first performance period does not occur after the second performance period.

In addition, in the above explanation example, both the first performance period and the second performance period are set to occur at the same time, but if the second performance period occurs after the first performance period, the first performance period is The first performance period may be caused to occur again when the second performance period ends after the second performance period ends. Even in this case, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned operability and performance in which the aspect of the performance target of the second performance event is affected when the operation on the first operation part is performed. It is possible.

In addition, in the above explanation example, each time an operation is performed on the first operation part, control is performed to reflect a change in effect according to the operation, but if the first operation part is operated multiple times. When a change occurs, control may be performed to reflect a change in performance in response to the operation.

In the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the following various operation reception performances can be realized by appropriately using the control methods according to the above-described examples.

[Example 1 of production using special operation receiving section 3333]
For example, as shown in FIG. 130(a), the performance pattern of performance example 1 (variation pattern of performance example 1) is set based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the performance of performance example 1 is displayed on the display section D. It is assumed that the decorative design SZ is varied in the pattern. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable bodies A1 and A2 in the special operation receiving section 3333 to be able to receive the effect during the period in which the effect pattern of the effect example 1 is appearing. (control) to generate an operation performance period.

Here, the production pattern of production example 1 includes at least production pattern A1 of production example 1, which is determined to operate movable body A1, and production example 1, which is determined to operate movable body A2. The production pattern A2 is included. However, while the movable body A1 is provided on the front side of the game board 5 so as to be visible from the player side, the movable body A2 is provided on the back side of the game board 5 and is difficult to see from the player side. It is provided at a position that overlaps the movable body A1 when viewed from the front. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510, no matter which of the effect patterns A1 and A2 is performed as the effect pattern of the above effect example 1, in the display section D, the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 is displayed. , a suggestion image HG1 is displayed that suggests that an operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (in this case, to the left) should be performed. Similarly, regardless of which production pattern A1 or A2 is being performed, the movable body A1 is made to emit light to indicate that the coordinate area (not shown) facing it should be operated. ing.

Then, when such a slide operation is properly accepted while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 performs a process to follow the slide operation by the player, as shown in FIG. 130(b). The movable body A1 is controlled to start moving to the left. Note that even in this situation, the display unit D displays a suggestion image HG1 that suggests that a sliding operation should be performed in the movable direction of the movable body A1 (here, to the left) in a coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. is displayed, and the movable body A1 is in a light emitting state.

When the slide operation reaches a specific point while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 moves to follow the slide operation by the player, as shown in FIG. 131(a). After moving the body A1 to a specific performance position, control is performed to end the operation performance period in which performance reception for the movable body A1 is permitted. In this situation, a display appears on the display section D indicating that the movable body A1 has been successfully moved to a specific production position and that expectations for jackpot determination are high, and the movable body A1 does not emit light. It is desirable to perform an effect such as a change in the aspect or shape of the object.

However, even if the slide operation by the player reaches a specific point while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, if the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the peripheral control board 1510 may As shown in b), the operation performance period in which the performance reception for the movable body A1 is allowed is ended so that the movement of the movable body A1 following the player's slide operation is interrupted, and the movable body A1 is returned to its original position. Perform control to move it back. In this case, a message appears on the display section D indicating that the movable body A1 has failed to move to a specific performance position and expectations for jackpot determination are low, and the movable body A1 stops emitting light. It will be controlled so that the

On the other hand, if the player's slide operation is properly accepted while the effect pattern A2 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 will respond to the player's slide operation as shown in FIG. 130(c). The movable body A2 is controlled to start moving leftward in a following manner. Note that even in this situation, the display unit D displays a suggestion image HG1 that suggests that a slide operation should be performed in the movable direction of the movable body A1 (here, to the left) in a coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. is displayed, and the movable body A1 is in a light emitting state. However, in addition to this, the movable body A2 is also controlled to be in a light emitting state.

When the slide operation reaches a specific point while the effect pattern A2 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 moves to follow the slide operation by the player, as shown in FIG. 131(c). After moving the body A2 to a specific performance position, control is performed to end the operation performance period in which performance reception for the movable body A2 is permitted. In this situation, a display appears on the display section D indicating that the movable body A2 has been successfully moved to a specific performance position and that expectations for the jackpot determination are extremely high, and on the movable body A2, It is desirable to perform effects such as changes in the mode and shape of light emission.

However, even if the slide operation by the player reaches a specific point while the effect pattern A2 is being performed, if the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the peripheral control board 1510 may As shown in b), the operation performance period in which the performance reception for the movable body A2 is allowed is ended so that the movement of the movable body A2 following the player's slide operation is interrupted, and the movable body A2 is returned to its original position. Perform control to move it back. In this case, a display appears on the display section D indicating that the expectations for jackpot determination are low due to failure in moving the movable body A2 to a specific performance position, and the movable bodies A1 and A2 emit light. will be controlled so that it is terminated.

According to the first production example, when the player performs a slide operation while the situation shown in FIG. 130(a) appears to make the movable body A1 move, Instead, the movable object A2, which had been made difficult to see, suddenly appears and moves, so this kind of surprise moving performance, as if the target of the performance has been replaced, suppresses the decline in game interest. become possible.

Also, although not shown, according to the first production example, within the period from when the situation shown in FIG. 130(a) appears to when the situation shown in FIG. 130(c) appears, the slide operation by the player Although the movable body A2 has started moving, it is still in a position that is difficult to see (behind the game board 5), and from the player's perspective, it appears as if no change in performance has occurred. Be able to appear. In other words, in this case, the movable body A2 moves to the front side of the display section D after the player feels disappointed that no effect change has occurred despite the slide operation being performed properly. Therefore, a decline in game interest can be more appropriately suppressed by such a surprising movable performance.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example 1, as shown in FIGS. 131(a) and 131(c), the movable bodies A1 and A2 are advanced to the position where they overlap with the decorative pattern SZ in the fluctuating state. , the player is encouraged to shift his/her gaze from the decorative pattern SZ to the movable bodies A1, A2, making it difficult to overlook which of the movable bodies A1, A2 has appeared.

Moreover, in the above configuration, since the manner in which the decorative pattern SZ overlaps is different between when the movable body A1 appears and when the movable body A2 appears, the decorative pattern SZ is overlapped with the movable bodies A1 and A2. Even if the player fails to shift his/her gaze, it is possible to predict which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared by checking the size and position of the part where the decorative pattern SZ is made difficult to see. This makes it possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the player misses which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared.

In addition, in the above production example 1, the movable body A1 is disposed in front of the game board 5, and the movable body A2 is disposed behind the game board 5. The movable bodies A1 and A2 may both be disposed at the rear side of the game board 5, or both the movable bodies A1 and A2 may be disposed behind the game board 5.

Here, when both the movable bodies A1 and A2 are disposed in front of the game board 5, the movable body A1 is disposed in front of the movable body A2 so that it is difficult to visually recognize the movable body A2. It is desirable to maintain visibility of the movable body A2 by keeping the movable base portion (a portion that does not move) in front of the movable body A2 even when the movable body A1 moves.

On the other hand, when both the movable bodies A1 and A2 are arranged behind the game board 5, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of seeing which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 will appear according to the player's operation. It becomes like this. In this case, the portion of the game board 5 located in front of the movable bodies A1 and A2 is made to emit light to prompt an operation to the coordinate area (special operation receiving portion 3333) facing the portion. This is desirable.

Further, in the first example of effect, the movable bodies A1 and A2 are set to have the same movable direction (leftward direction), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the movable direction of the movable body A1 is set to the left and the movable direction of the movable body A2 is set to the upward direction, the game moves to the left when prompted by an operation instruction (suggestion image HG1) that suggests the left direction. Despite the slide operation performed by the player, the movable body A2 moves upward, and such a surprising movable performance can better suppress the decline in game interest. Alternatively, even though the player is prompted to operate the movable body A1 whose movable direction is set to the left, an operation instruction suggesting an upward direction is displayed so that the player does not perform a sliding operation upward. When this is done, the movable body A2, which has been made difficult to visually recognize, may move upward and appear.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example 1, when the movable body A2 appears due to the operation by the player, the movable body A1 is made not to operate, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the movable body A2 is moved by a player's operation, the movable body A1 is also moved following the player's slide operation. Even if only the movable body A1 is moved back to its original position after the movable bodies A1 and A2 have moved a predetermined distance, the drop in game interest can be more effectively suppressed due to the surprising movable effect. It becomes wet. Alternatively, when moving the movable body A2 by the player's operation, first, only the movable body A1 is moved following the player's slide operation. Even if the movable body A1 is moved back to the original position after the movable body A1 has moved a predetermined distance, and the movable body A2 is moved to follow the slide operation by the player, surprises may not occur. A certain movable performance can more appropriately suppress the decline in game interest. However, when switching the object to be operated by the player between movable bodies A1 and A2, the operation by the player must remain at a predetermined location for a predetermined time (the time required for movable body A2 to move to a predetermined location). It is desirable to execute the performance.

Furthermore, in the above production example 1, in a situation where the movable body A2 is moving (see FIGS. 130(c) and 131(c)), the movable body A1 and the movable body A2 are made to emit light, respectively. In this situation, the movable body A1 does not necessarily need to emit light. That is, in this case, the timing at which a physical object is detected in the coordinate area (special operation receiving section 3333) facing the movable body A1, or the timing at which the movable body A2 starts advancing toward the front side of the display section D and returns to the original position. Control is performed to end the light emission of the movable body A1 at a timing when the movable body A1 is more easily visible than at a certain time (timing when the movable body A1 has moved to a predetermined position).

Furthermore, in the above production example 1 and its other examples, the movable body A2 is arranged on the rear side where it overlaps the movable body A1 in front view, but the board light emitting part E is disposed in place of the movable body A1. You can do it like this. That is, in this case, when moving the movable body A2 (in the situation shown in FIG. 130(a)), by emitting light from the panel light emitting section E located in front of the movable body A2, the movable body that is difficult to see can be moved. This prompts the user to perform an operation on the coordinate area (special operation receiving section 3333) facing A2.

Furthermore, in the display section D according to the above-mentioned production example 1, in each of the situations shown in FIGS. The situation (initial situation where none of the movable objects are moving) is now shown. However, instead of this, the display mode of the suggestion image HG1 is changed depending on the location of the movable bodies A1 and A2, so that the movement status of the movable bodies A1 and A2 can be recognized just by looking at the suggestion image HG1. You may also do so.

[Example 2 of production using special operation receiver 3333]
For example, as shown in FIG. 132(a), the performance pattern of performance example 2 (fluctuation pattern of performance example 2) is set based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the performance of performance example 2 is displayed on display section D. It is assumed that the decorative design SZ is varied in the pattern. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 sets (controls) a coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 in the special operation receiving section 3333 to be able to receive the effect during the period in which the effect pattern of the effect example 2 is appearing. ) generates an operation performance period.

Here, the performance pattern of the performance example 2 is at least the performance pattern A1 of the performance example 2, which is determined to operate the movable body A1, and the performance pattern A1, which is determined to operate the movable body A1 and the movable body B, respectively. The performance pattern AB of the performance example 2 shown in FIG. In the production pattern A1 of production example 2, as in the case of production pattern A1 of production example 1 described above, FIGS. 130(a), (b), and 131(a) (or FIG. 131(b)) An opportunity to accept an operation performance for the movable body A1 is provided in the manner shown in , and the movable body A1 moves. On the other hand, in the production pattern AB of production example 2, an opportunity to accept an operation production for the movable body A1 is provided, and then an opportunity to accept an operation production for the movable body B is provided. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510, no matter which effect pattern A1 or AB is performed as the effect pattern of the above effect example 2, the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 on the display section D is , a suggestion image HG1 is displayed that suggests that an operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (in this case, to the left) should be performed. Similarly, regardless of which production pattern A1 or AB is being performed, the movable body A1 is made to emit light to indicate that the coordinate area (not shown) facing it should be operated. ing.

However, in the production pattern AB of production example 2, when an operation to a coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 is accepted (when a physical object is detected), a specific production event is performed for the movable body A1. First, as shown in FIG. 132(b), control is performed to hide the suggestion image HG1 on the display section D and interrupt the performance reception in the coordinate area facing the movable body A1. At this time, it is desirable that the decorative pattern SZ in the display section D is displayed in a manner that is visible but difficult to see (such as semi-transparent display), and the light emitting state of the movable body A1 is also interrupted. It is desirable that the

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(c), in the display section D where the suggestion image HG1 is hidden, an operation on an operation means (operation button 410, etc.) other than the special operation receiving section 3333 is performed. A prompting operation instruction image SG is displayed, and an operation acceptance period for a specific performance using the other operation means (operation button 410, etc.) is generated. Then, when an operation on another operation means (operation button 410, etc.) is accepted during the operation acceptance period of the specific performance, the operation instruction image SG on the display section D is hidden, as shown in FIG. 133(a). At the same time, it is controlled to operate the movable body B, which is different from the movable body A1 that was initially shown as the performance target. In addition, in this performance example 2, the movable body B is advanced to the front side of the display section D for a predetermined period of time.

In the production pattern AB of production example 2, after the movable body B operates in this way, as shown in FIG. A suggestion image HG2 suggesting that an operation to slide the body A1 in the movable direction (here, leftward) is displayed is displayed, and a coordinate area (not shown) of the special operation receiving part 3333 facing the movable body A1 is displayed. The operation performance period for setting (controlling) to enable performance reception is generated again. At this time, the opportunity to operate the effect on the movable body A1 will be given again, but after the situation shown in FIG. 132(a) appears, the movable body B will not operate and the movable body A1 will operate. It is desirable to set the performance pattern AB of the performance example 2, in which the movable body A1 moves after the movable body B operates, to have higher expectations than the performance pattern A1 of the performance example 2 above. In this case, as shown in FIG. 133(b), the display mode of the suggestion image HG2 is made different from the suggestion image HG1 shown in FIG. 132(a) to suggest that it is a highly anticipated performance pattern. It is desirable to make the light emission mode of the movable body A1 different from the light emission mode of the movable body A1 shown in FIG. 132(a) to suggest that it is a highly anticipated performance pattern. .

In addition, in the performance pattern AB of the performance example 2, after the situation shown in FIG. In the manner shown in a) (or FIG. 131(b)), an opportunity to accept an operation performance for the movable body A1 is provided, and the movable body A1 moves. Moreover, after the situation shown in FIG. 133(b) appears, as in the case of production pattern A2 of the above-mentioned production example 1, the situation shown in FIG. 130(c) and FIG. 131(c) (or FIG. 131(b)) ) may provide an opportunity to accept an operation performance for the movable body A1, and a performance pattern in which the movable body A1 moves may appear.

In particular, in the performance pattern AB of this performance example 2, as shown in FIG. 133(b), a suggestive image HG2 that suggests that it is a highly anticipated performance pattern is displayed, and the light emitting mode of the movable body A1 is changed. Since it is made to be different, this also serves as a movable effect that appears when an operation is performed to slide the movable body A1 in the movable direction (in this case, to the left) in a coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. It is desirable to perform this in a special execution mode different from the case of production pattern A1 of production example 2.

According to the production pattern AB of production example 2, the first production opportunity using the first operation part (here, the special operation receiving part 3333) is first provided (in this situation, the second operation Even though the second performance opportunity is not given to the part (for example, the operation button 410), when the first operation part is operated and the performance is accepted, it is different from the first operation part. A second performance opportunity is given to the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410), and the first performance opportunity is temporarily lost. Then, in a situation where the first performance opportunity is once lost, if the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) is operated and the performance is accepted, the second performance event ( Here, the motion of the movable body B) begins to occur. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to create a performance effect as to whether or not a second performance opportunity is given to the second operation part when the performance reception for the first operation part is accepted. This provides novel operability using the operating parts.

In addition, in order to suitably realize novel operability using such a plurality of operation parts, it is desirable to provide the second operation part in a manner that is difficult to physically operate at all times. If it is determined that a second performance opportunity is given to the second operation part, it is difficult to physically operate the second operation part based on the reception of the performance for the first operation part. It is desirable to control the mode from one mode to an easy-to-operate mode, and to allow production reception for the second operation part when the mode is in the easy-to-operate mode. Here, "physically difficult to operate" refers to, for example, a manner in which the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) is covered with another member and is difficult to operate, or a manner in which the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) is covered by another member, This refers to the state in which the second operating part itself is positioned when it is already operated, and "control from a state that is physically difficult to operate to a state that is easy to operate" means Control to move the second operating part to a position where it is not covered by another member, control to move another member covering the second operating part to a position where it does not cover the second operating part, and control to operate the second operating part. This can be realized as control that causes the robot to move to a position different from the state it was in when it was moved. Furthermore, in this case, the trigger for controlling the second operation part from a mode that is physically difficult to operate to a mode that is easy to operate does not necessarily have to be when the production reception for the first operation part is received; It may also be when a specific time has elapsed since the performance pattern was executed. In any case, in order to provide a second performance opportunity to the second operation part when the performance is accepted for the first operation part, the second operation part itself or a member provided in the vicinity thereof is operated. It is desirable to do this in order to suggest that the object of operation has been changed from the first operation part to the second operation part and that the degree of expectation is increased due to this change.

In addition, in the performance pattern AB of the production example 2, after providing the first performance opportunity using the first operation part (here, the special operation receiving part 3333), the first performance opportunity is provided by operating the first operation part. It was decided that a second performance opportunity would be granted based on the reception of the performance. However, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the first performance opportunity using the first operation part (here, the special operation receiving part 3333) is given (or after the suggestion image HG1 is displayed), the first A second performance opportunity may be given to a second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) different from the operation part of , and the first performance opportunity may be temporarily lost. In this case, the first performance event will be generated by operating the first operation part until the predetermined time has elapsed, but the first performance event will end based on the elapse of the predetermined time. (If the performance target is a movable body, the movable body is controlled to return to its original position). Alternatively, the first performance opportunity using the first operation part is not provided, and a second operation part different from the first operation part (for example, A second performance opportunity may be given to the operation button 410). That is, in this case, it is possible to improve the game's interest when the effect is not accepted by operating the first operation part even though the suggestion image HG1 is displayed.

Further, in the production pattern AB of the above production example 2, after displaying the suggestion image HG1, the suggestion image HG1 is hidden, but the present invention is not limited to this. The operation instruction image SG shown in may also be displayed. According to such a configuration, since it is possible to depict how the suggestion image HG1 changes to the suggestion image HG2 with a higher degree of expectation, a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed. However, at this time, if the suggestion image HG1 is to be displayed in a state where no direction is received for the first operation part, the display mode of the suggestion image HG1 may be changed (for example, from color display to black and white display, translucent display, etc.). It is desirable to display the information in a manner that is relatively difficult to visually recognize. Furthermore, a timer image showing the remaining display time of the suggestion image HG1 (remaining time for the production reception for the first operation part) is also displayed, so that the production reception for the first operation part is not performed. If the time measurement image shows that the remaining time is not decreasing in the state, the player can be made aware that the remaining period in which the performance reception for the first operation part is performed is not decreasing. This allows the user to enjoy games using other operating means (for example, the operating button 410) with peace of mind. In this case, even though the production reception for the first operation part is in a state where the production reception is not performed, the remaining time for which the production reception is performed appears to have decreased by a predetermined amount, and then the remaining time does not appear to decrease. By showing the above-mentioned time measurement image, it becomes possible to provide a more interesting performance.

In addition, in the performance pattern AB of the above-mentioned performance example 2, after displaying the suggestion image HG1, based on the fact that the performance reception for the first operation part has been performed, there is a predetermined state in which the performance reception for the first operation part is not performed. A time period is generated, and the display mode of the suggestion image HG1 is changed during the predetermined period (for example, from color display to black and white display, or to a display mode that is relatively difficult to see, such as semi-transparent), and the time is measured. The image may also indicate that the remaining time is not decreasing (such as a display meter not decreasing and becoming stationary). Further, at this time, it is desirable to also change the display mode of an image different from the suggestion image HG1 on the display section D. In this case, when the predetermined period ends after the second performance opportunity is provided, the display mode of the suggestion image HG1 is changed to a mode with higher expectations, and the performance reception for the first operation part is performed again. You can do it like this.

In addition, in the production pattern of production example 2 above, after displaying the suggestion image HG1 that prompts an operation to target the movable body A1 (or while the suggestion image HG1 is being displayed), the movable body B is operated. However, the movable body B does not have to be operated by the player's operation; for example, the movable body B may be operated based on a special result obtained in determining whether a predetermined operating condition is satisfied. It may be a non-operable movable body that operates. When adopting such a non-operable movable body, even if it is determined to operate (a special result is obtained), no operation instruction is given for the non-operable movable body, and the operation is accepted. Nor. In this regard, if the determination as to whether the predetermined operating conditions for the non-operable movable object are satisfied is made as appropriate regardless of the execution status of the performance pattern, it would be possible to etc.), a decision to operate a non-operable movable object can be made secretly while the suggestion image HG1 is displayed, so operation instructions regarding other performance targets will appear and the operation will not be accepted. While this is possible, it is possible to create the possibility that unrelated non-operable movable objects may suddenly move, or that special movable objects and other performance objects may move simultaneously. Therefore, it can be expected that the game's interest will be improved by such unexpected operation performances.

In addition, when the suggestion images HG1, HG2 or the operation instruction image SG appear in the display section D, the target operation part (a specific coordinate area of the special operation receiving section 3333, the operation button 410, etc.) ), but also the suggestion images HG1, HG2 and the coordinate area (special operation receiving section 3333) facing the part where the operation instruction image SG appears. Good too. According to such a configuration, even if the operating part cannot be recognized, the user can simply operate the specific images (suggestion images HG1, HG2 and operation instruction image S) that appear in the display section D. It becomes possible to generate similar effects, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In the embodiment described above, while the detection of the movement of the physical object after the movement of the physical object has started in the special operation receiving unit 3333 is not completed and is still continuing, at least one of the physical objects that has already been detected is detected. Although it is now possible to control the movement of a performance target (displayed image or movable object) in a manner according to the direction and amount of movement, the speed of movement of the physical object is detected in order to control the movement of the performance target. However, the movement speed may be reflected in the movement of the movable body.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment described above, when realizing an operation performance using the special operation receiving section 3333, the performance is performed in a coordinate area facing a part of the special operation receiving section 3333 that is to be operated. Although the reception is made to be performed, the direction does not necessarily have to be in the coordinate area facing the part to be operated, and even if the production reception is made in a specific coordinate area of the special operation receiving section 3333. good.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment described above, a change in light caused by an operation (a physical object such as a finger) on the special operation receiving section 3333 is detected by the outer peripheral light detection section 35, and this is detected by the peripheral control board 1510. Through analysis, we decided to determine the operation mode (movement information of a physical object such as a finger, etc.) for the special operation receiving section 3333. The manner in which the portion 3333 is operated (in this case, the manner in which the touch operation is performed on the glass plate 192) may be determined. However, in this case, there is a concern that the visibility of the game area, display area, etc. through the glass plate 192 may be adversely affected.

Next, game control of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: Step S114).

Now, if the main control program moves to the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: Step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the above-mentioned process as shown in FIG. On the condition that the detection signal by the first starting port sensor 4002 is in the ON state (ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (YES in step S5231), a first jackpot determination random number is obtained from the random number counter. A first starting opening passage process such as storing this in the first special symbol retention storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). Further, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (the ball has entered the second starting port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number of the second special symbol ( A second starting opening passage process is executed, such as acquiring a second jackpot determination random number) from the random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol retention storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S5234).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled is set (step S5235), and if the jackpot execution flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. The jackpot control process (step S5240a) is executed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
・When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests either "8R definite variable jackpot A" or "8R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 After opening for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have entered the grand prize opening 2005, the opening/closing pattern (round game) is repeated 8 times. Control to 8R jackpot gaming state,
・When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "16R variable jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have been won in the big winning opening 2005, the opening/closing pattern (round game) is repeated 16 times to create a 16R jackpot game state,
- When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "8R guaranteed variable jackpot B", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) ) or when it is detected by the count sensor 4005 that 9 game balls have entered the big winning opening 2005, the opening/closing pattern (round game) is repeated 8 times and controlled to an 8R jackpot game state,
・When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "2R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) The game is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which an opening/closing pattern (round game) in which the game is closed after opening is repeated twice.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is more advantageous for the player to play right-handed than to play left-handed in a situation where the time-saving control is executed, and it is more advantageous for the player to play right-handed than to play left-handed in a situation where the time-saving control is not executed. As mentioned above, left-handed hitting is advantageous for players. In this respect, in the left-handed game, even if a jackpot is won as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol in response to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002, the jackpot game is open for a maximum of 8 rounds. Only the state (approximately 1000 game balls can be obtained) occurs.

On the other hand, in the right-handed state, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol according to the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2004, the probability of winning the jackpot is approximately 50% (allocation rate of the winning type). ), the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained when winning a jackpot, such as the 16-round long-open jackpot game state (approximately 2000 game balls can be obtained). As a result, when the player is controlled to shift to the right-handed batting state, he can expect to win a larger amount of prize balls than when he is in the left-handed batting state.

In the jackpot control process, in order to start the opening control of the big winning hole 2005, first, processes such as starting the operation of the conditional device, resetting the fluctuation number counter described later, etc. are performed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process, after controlling the opening of the jackpot 2005 as described above, as shown in FIG. Execute each flag and time saving flag setting process.

The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state, and is used in the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 139, which will be described later. It is set when ending the jackpot game state based on Probable Variable Jackpot, 8R Probable Variable Jackpot B), and when the next jackpot occurs, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 144 or the second special symbol stop process (not shown), which will be described later. will be reset.

The time saving flag is a flag indicating that time saving control is being executed (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), and as shown in FIG. It is set when ending the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (8R probability variable jackpot A, 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B), and when the next jackpot occurs, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 144, which will be described later. Or it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown). Alternatively, when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are digested 100 times without winning the jackpot after the low probability time saving state occurs, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 144 described later Or it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown).

The variation counter is a counter that indicates the number of variations of the special symbol after the variation counter is reset, and is used in the first variation pattern setting process (second variation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 142, which will be described later. It is updated (for example, counting up) when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) change, and at least a specific type of jackpot (16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B). It is reset when starting a jackpot gaming state based on .

In addition, if the jackpot execution flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then as a process of step S5236, whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the control is in a small win gaming state is set. Determine whether As a result, if the small winning execution flag is set, a small winning control process (step S5240b) for controlling the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, in the small hit control process, a process is performed in which the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds).

Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the case of the jackpot control process (step S5240a), after the opening control of the big winning hole 2005 is performed, the high probability flag, the time saving flag, the time saving flag, etc. Each set process such as a number counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 140(a), there is no possibility of winning a small hit in the jackpot determination.

Further, if the small hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of second jackpot determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is On the condition that it is "0" (step S5237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S5238).

On the other hand, if the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of random numbers for second jackpot determination stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is not "0" (step S5237), the second special symbol A second special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display is stopped is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is played so that the lottery for the second special symbol that is in a pending state is not lost (as long as the value of the second special pending number counter is not "0"), the first special symbol Regardless of the pending state of the lottery, only the lottery for the second jackpot determination random number will be held continuously without interruption (priority execution).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (right-handed hit) in the time saving state (high probability time saving state). Only the lottery (judgment process) for the two random numbers for jackpot determination can be performed continuously without interruption.

In addition, it is limited to those where the special pattern game (symbol variation) using the second special pattern (second special pattern) is executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (first special pattern). Instead, for example, the execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which game balls enter (pass) the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings have occurred, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if we could decide which.

FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S5232).

Now, in the process of step S5231, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 4002 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the first starting port 2002, then as shown in FIG. In step S5241, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first inputs each random number on the first special symbol side (random number for jackpot determination, random number for reach determination, random number for jackpot symbol, random number for variable display pattern). ) is obtained from the above random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the first special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the number of reservations of the first special symbol is set to its maximum value. (upper limit value) is "4" (step S5242). In the process of step S5242, if it is determined that the number of reservations for the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (determination process for the first special symbol) is newly suspended. In order to achieve this state, the following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5243, the first special reservation counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as the process of step S5244, each random number acquired in step S5241 is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Then, the first special figure pre-reading process for executing the first special figure side pre-reading effect is executed, and the process ends (step S5245). As will be described later, the pre-read performance on the first special symbol side is a performance that suggests the determination result (or its expectation level) of the first special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. In this first special figure pre-reading process, information required on the peripheral control board 1510 side to determine whether or not to execute a pre-read effect and the content of the effect (information regarding wins and losses for pre-read judgment, information regarding symbol types for pre-read judgment) information, information regarding the variation pattern number for pre-read determination, etc.) and stores it in the corresponding storage area as information to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the first special symbol itself, information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before being finally determined, such as SP reach group, normal reach group among the fluctuation patterns, potential hit group and small hit group among the symbol types, may be transmitted as a pre-read command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5242, if it is determined that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S5243 to S5245, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S5234).

Now, in the process of step S5233, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the second starting port 2004, then as shown in FIG. In step S5251, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first inputs each random number on the second special symbol side (random number for second jackpot determination, second random number for reach determination, random number for second jackpot symbol). A random number (random number for second variable display pattern) is obtained from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and sets the number of reservations of the second special symbol to its maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether the value is "4" (step S5252). In the process of step S5252, if it is determined that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly suspended. In order to achieve this state, the following steps S5253 to S5255 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5253, the second special reservation counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as the process of step S5254, each random number acquired in step S5251 is stored in a second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Then, a second special figure pre-reading process for executing a pre-reading effect on the second special figure side is executed, and the process is ended (step S5255). As will be described later, the pre-read performance on the second special symbol side is a performance that suggests the determination result (or its expectation level) of the second special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. In this second special symbol pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 generates information (winning/losing information, symbol type, fluctuation pattern number, etc.) required for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect and the content of the effect. It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the second special symbol itself, information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before being finally determined, such as SP reach group, normal reach group among the fluctuation patterns, potential hit group and small hit group among the symbol types, may be transmitted as a pre-read command. Further, within the process of step S5255, a process (FIG. 176) for realizing a completely changed effect, which will be described later, may be performed.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5252, if it is determined that the number of pending second special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S5253 to S5255, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

When the number of reserved first special symbols changes based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002, a command is issued to instruct the number of reserved first special symbols in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). (First pending number designation command 0 to 4) is set and sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, when the number of reserved second special symbols changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, the number of reserved second special symbols is instructed in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). commands (second pending number designation commands 0 to 4) are set and sent to the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S5238). In addition, the first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process are the same. This program module differs only in the random numbers and tables used for determination, so only the first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

1. A random number for jackpot determination corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read out, and based on the read random number for jackpot determination, a lottery process is performed regarding the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. The first special symbol normal processing (step S5280)

2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281 )

3. It is executed in response to the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 based on the random number for the variable display pattern, and the special symbol on the performance display device (game board side performance display device) 1600. A first variation pattern setting process (step S5282) in which a lottery process is performed regarding the variation mode of the effect display to be performed.

4. First special symbol variation processing (step S5283) that waits until the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped.

5. The mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403. First special symbol stop processing to stop the fluctuating display of the first special symbol (step S5284)

The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S5280) should be performed.

FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display of the first special symbol in a pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display of the first special symbol in a pending state, then as a process of step S5302, the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The earliest memory of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first jackpot determination random number, the first reach determination random number, the first jackpot symbol random number, the first variable display pattern random number) The random number stored in the area is read from the main control built-in RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, the first special reservation number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM is Random numbers related to the display mode when the fluctuating display of symbols is stopped (for example, first jackpot determination random number, first reach determination random number, first jackpot symbol random number, first fluctuating display pattern random number) are first-in first-out. Shift operation is performed in the manner of (First-Out).

Specifically, the first special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol retention storage area a to first special symbol retention storage area d), and the first special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol retention storage area a to first special symbol retention storage area d), and the first special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol retention storage area a to first special symbol retention storage area d). Random numbers extracted according to occurrences are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a starting winning occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1st (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and are stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Move various random numbers to the N-1st (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display of the above-mentioned first special symbol occurred is memorized in a specifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). . Similarly, the second special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol retention storage area a to second special symbol retention storage area d), and is responsive to the occurrence of a starting prize to the second starting opening 2004. The random numbers extracted are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a starting winning occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1st (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and are stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Move various random numbers to the N-1st (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the fluctuating display of the second special symbol occurred is memorized in a specifiable manner, and the suspension of the fluctuating display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). .

After that, as the process of step S5305, a jackpot judgment process is performed, which is a judgment process regarding the jackpot win or loss, based on the read first jackpot judgment random number. Thereafter, at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5306) so as to proceed to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281), this process ends.

FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305).

If the current gaming state is a high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state) (step S5311), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls the high probability state shown in FIG. A jackpot determination table is selected (step S5312), and if the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S5311), a jackpot determination table for low probability shown in FIG. 140(A) is selected (step S5313) and selected. The jackpot determination table is compared with the random number for jackpot determination read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S5314).

As shown in FIG. 140(A), the jackpot judgment table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is determined for each type of special random number (first jackpot judgment random number, second jackpot judgment random number) when the gaming state is low probability. (low probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state) and the high probability jackpot judgment table used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability non time saving state, high probability time saving state). It is equipped with a probability jackpot determination table. Then, in the low probability jackpot judgment table that is referred to for comparison with the first jackpot judgment random numbers, 204 types of first jackpot judgment random numbers match the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65332 The first jackpot judgment random numbers (65,536 types) are associated with each other so that the first jackpot judgment random number of the type matches the loss judgment value indicating the loss (jackpot probability at low probability; approximately "1/321"). On the other hand, in order to compare with the random number for jackpot determination (second random number for jackpot determination) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing. In the referenced low-probability jackpot judgment table, 204 types of second jackpot judgment random numbers match the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65,332 types of second jackpot judgment random numbers are the above-mentioned losses. The second jackpot judgment random numbers are respectively associated with each other so as to match the failure judgment value indicating that the winning probability is low (jackpot probability at low probability; approximately "1/321").

In addition, in the high probability jackpot judgment table that is referred to for comparison with the first jackpot judgment random number, 2040 types of first jackpot judgment random numbers match the jackpot judgment value, and 63496 types of first jackpot judgment random numbers match the jackpot judgment value. The first jackpot judgment random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the loss judgment value (jackpot probability at high probability; approximately "1/32"). On the other hand, in the high probability jackpot judgment table that is referred to for comparison with the second jackpot judgment random number in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing. , 2040 kinds of second jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 63496 kinds of second jackpot determination random numbers match the loss determination value indicating the above-mentioned loss. The second random numbers for determining a jackpot are associated with each other (probability of jackpot at high probability; approximately "1/32"). In addition, the jackpot judgment value (the jackpot judgment value The number of jackpot judgment values may be the same (the jackpot probability is the same), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is different). In this case, the jackpot judgment value of at least one of the jackpot judgment table for low probability and the jackpot judgment table for high probability may be made different (both may be made different). .

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected jackpot judgment table with the random number for jackpot judgment read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process, and if it is judged as a jackpot (step S5315 ), sets a jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has won a jackpot (step S5316), and ends the jackpot determination process.

In addition, if it is determined in step S5315 that the jackpot has been won, the jackpot judgment random number read above matches the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit has been won, based on the selected jackpot judgment table. It is determined whether or not (step S5317). However, as mentioned above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (second special symbol process) of this example, the random number for jackpot determination that matches the small hit determination value is not read out (small hit probability; 0/65536), and in this step S5317, it is determined that the small win has not been won (it is determined that it is a loss).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game loses in step S5317, the reach determination table is compared with the random number for reach determination read out in step S5302 (step S5319).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM and is used when the gaming state is in the high probability non-time saving state, and the reach determination table when the gaming state is in the high probability non-time saving state. A reach determination table in a high probability time saving state used in the case of , and a reach determination table in a low probability state used when the gaming state is in a low probability state (low probability non time saving state) are provided.

Here, in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state, one type of reach determination random number matches the reach determination value indicating reach, and 71 types of reach determination random numbers match the reach determination value indicating not reach. The above-mentioned random numbers for reach determination are associated with each other so as to coincide with each other. However, in the reach judgment table in the high probability time saving state, in order to maximize the speed of game progress when in the time saving state, all 72 types of reach judgment random numbers match the reach judgment value indicating that there is no reach. In this way, it may be possible to avoid matching the reach judgment value indicating reach.

In addition, in the reach determination table in the low probability state, five types of random numbers for reach determination, including the same random number for reach determination as the random number for reach determination set in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state, are used to determine reach. The random numbers for reach determination are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 kinds of random numbers for reach determination indicate no reach. In this way, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is higher than in the high probability time saving state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

Furthermore, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-time saving state, there are five types of reach determination including the same reach determination random numbers as the reach determination table set in the high probability time saving state and the low probability state. The above-mentioned random numbers for reach determination are respectively associated so that the random number for reach determination matches the reach determination value indicating that reaching is possible, and the 67 types of random numbers for reach determination match the reach determination value indicating that reaching is not possible. In this manner, in this embodiment, in the high probability non-time saving state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is the same as in the low probability non-time saving state.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the random number for reach determination read out in step S5302 (step S5319), and if it is determined that the reach is lost (YES in step S5120). , sets a reach flag indicating that the change is a reach, and ends the process (step S5121).

FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 141, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S5305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 140(B) and selects the random number for the first jackpot symbol read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process By comparing the selected symbol determination table with the selected symbol determination table, a jackpot symbol is determined as a mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped (a stop symbol of the first special symbol) (step S5332).

As shown in FIG. 140(B), the first special symbol side symbol determination table contains random numbers for the first jackpot symbol (here, a total of 200) for the judgment results (8R probability variable jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot). (Random numbers for the first jackpot symbol) are stored in a form that is associated with each other. In addition, as shown in FIG. 140(C), the second special symbol side symbol determination table has a random number for the second jackpot symbol (16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) Here, a total of 200 second jackpot symbol random numbers) are stored in a manner that they are associated with each other.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by identifying the determination result associated with the obtained jackpot symbol random number. In addition, in the symbol determination table of this example, the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the first jackpot symbol and the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot symbol are set to be different. . More specifically, the allocation rate (allocation) for a variable jackpot that triggers a transition to a high probability state and a regular jackpot that does not trigger a transition to a high probability state is said to be the same, but for the first jackpot symbol. The expected value of the game balls that can be obtained by winning the jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot symbol is greater than the expected value of the gaming balls that can be obtained by winning the jackpot determined based on the random number. ing.

The specific game/performance contents for each type of jackpot are briefly summarized as follows.

1. After the jackpot symbol combination appears on the game board side effect display device 1600, after the big winning hole 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or when 9 game balls have entered the big winning hole 2005, as described above. By repeating the opening/closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected by the count sensor 4005 eight times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and this 8R jackpot game After the state, the high probability time saving state is controlled until the next jackpot game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state, a battle performance (battle victory performance) in which a specific character wins is performed, and the high probability 8R Probable Variable Jackpot A controlled by the performance mode that is shown on the game board side performance display device 1600 to be in a relatively advantageous state in the time saving state

2. After the jackpot symbol combination appears on the game board side effect display device 1600, after the big winning hole 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or when 9 game balls have entered the big winning hole 2005, as described above. By repeating the opening/closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected by the count sensor 4005 eight times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and this 8R jackpot game After the state, the low probability time saving state is controlled until the variable display of the special symbol is consumed 100 times (or the jackpot is won within the period until it is consumed 100 times), and the 8R jackpot game state is executed. During the period, a battle performance in which a specific character is defeated (battle defeat performance) is performed, and in a low probability time saving state, control is made to a performance mode in which the game board side performance display device 1600 indicates that the character is in a relatively disadvantageous state. 8R normal jackpot

3. After the jackpot symbol combination appears on the game board side effect display device 1600, after the big winning hole 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or when 9 game balls have entered the big winning hole 2005, as described above. By repeating the opening/closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected by the count sensor 4005 16 times, the game ball is controlled to a 16R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and this 16R jackpot game After the state, it is controlled to a high probability time saving state until the next jackpot game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 16R jackpot game state, it is produced as to whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (or becomes 16 rounds). After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since an additional challenge performance in which (success performance) is performed and the high probability time saving state has elapsed, the game board side performance display device 1600 indicates that the state is relatively advantageous. 16R guaranteed strange jackpot controlled by production mode

4. After the jackpot symbol combination appears on the game board side effect display device 1600, after the big winning hole 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or when 9 game balls have entered the big winning hole 2005, as described above. By repeating the opening/closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected by the count sensor 4005 eight times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and this 8R jackpot game After the state, it is controlled to a high probability time saving state until the next jackpot game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state, it is produced as to whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (or becomes 16 rounds). The game board side effect display device 1600 indicates that the player is in a relatively advantageous state after a predetermined period of time has passed since the additional challenge effect (failure effect) is performed and the high probability time saving state is controlled. 8R guaranteed strange jackpot B controlled by production mode

5. After the jackpot symbol combination appears on the game board side effect display device 1600, after the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds), or when 9 game balls are won in the big winning hole 2005, as described above. By repeating the opening/closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected by the count sensor 4005 twice, it is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning hole 2005, and after this 2R jackpot game state controls the time saving state with low probability until the variable display of the special symbol is consumed 100 times (or wins the jackpot within the period until it is consumed 100 times), and during the execution period of the 2R jackpot game state. 2R in which a battle performance in which a specific character is defeated (battle defeat performance) is performed, and in a low probability time saving state, the performance mode is controlled to be such that the game board side performance display device 1600 indicates that the character is in a relatively disadvantageous state. Normal jackpot

In addition, in the left-handed hitting state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) that opens the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 2004, and only the game ball enters the first starting port 2002, and there is a reserved ball with the second special symbol. Except in the case, only the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is executed, and a jackpot (8R probability variable jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot) related to the first special symbol will occur. Similarly, no game ball enters the first starting port 2002 in the right-handed hitting state. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 will occur, and the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1186 will not be displayed unless there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol. Only the variable display is executed, and jackpots related to the second special symbol (16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) occur.

In addition, in the jackpot related to the first special symbol, only about 1000 game balls are paid out by repeating the opening and closing pattern of opening the big winning hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 8 times, In the jackpot related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out approximately 2000 game balls by repeating the opening/closing pattern of opening the jackpot 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 16 times at maximum.

In addition, if it is determined to be 8R definite variable jackpot A in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 8R definite variable jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and if it is determined to be 8R regular jackpot, the 8R regular jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. decide. Although not shown, in the second special symbol stop pattern setting process, if the 16R probability variable jackpot is determined, the 16R probability variation jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and if the 8R probability variation jackpot B is determined, the 8R probability variation jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. If the B symbol is determined and the 2R normal jackpot is determined, the 2R normal jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

Furthermore, if the jackpot flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the small win flag is set as a process in step S5333. As a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to step S5333 in the second special symbol process (step S5239), the small hit symbol ( After determining the unique pattern stopping mode (step S5334), the process moves to step S5337.

Furthermore, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the losing symbol as the state when the variation of the special symbol is stopped (step S5336), and then moves to step S5337. do.

After the process of determining the stop symbols is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S5337 to select the lottery result (type of jackpot, small hit, out of reach, or out of reach). A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that an instruction (which may also instruct the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, as the process of step S5338, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received judgment result notification command and variation pattern command (variably displaying the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, and changing the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → The display is stopped in the order of the middle decorative symbols (in some cases, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same symbol and are synchronously displayed in a variable manner and stopped at the same time). For example, if the jackpot is won in a type other than the 2R normal jackpot, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination of three left, middle, and right decorative symbols. On the other hand, when a 2R normal jackpot is obtained, a specific symbol combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is not the same as any other symbol) is determined. In addition, when a reach miss is identified, a miss symbol with a reach (a combination of the same symbols with left and right decorative symbols "0" to "9" but different middle decorative symbols; a miss reach symbol) If the winning pattern is determined and a miss is specified, a miss symbol without reach is determined (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are different). The stop symbols thus determined are displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the variable time specified from the variable pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect).

In any case, when a win is obtained as a result of the progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU 1511a causes a winning performance display (special display mode) to appear before the jackpot game starts, and the jackpot game After the start of the game, an effect display during the jackpot game is displayed.

FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S5282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 142, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the jackpot flag. If so (step S5341), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S5342), and the small hit flag is set. is set (step S5343), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a small hit is selected (step S5344), and if a reach flag is set (step S5345), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a reach is selected (step S5344). (not shown) (step S5346), and when none of the jackpot flag, small hit flag, and reach flag are set, that is, when the result is a normal loss (the result is a result in which the reach effect is not performed), when the result is a loss. A variation pattern table (not shown) is selected (step S5347).

Then, by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the random number for variation display pattern read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process, a variation pattern to be executed is determined (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variable pattern command is set to notify the peripheral control board 1510 of this, and variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S5349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets a variation time set in correspondence to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer (step S5350). Then, at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5355) so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol variation process (step S5283), this process ends. As a result, the variable display control of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 1403 for the variable time determined in this way, and the effect control is performed on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. will be carried out.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table of this example includes random numbers for jackpot determination (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number) and jackpot symbol random numbers (first jackpot symbol random number, second jackpot symbol random number). A plurality of types are provided for each determination result based on the determination result. In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of pieces of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). The random numbers for the first variable display pattern are stored in association with each other. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a reads out the selected variation pattern table from among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the judgment results based on the jackpot judgment random number and the jackpot symbol random number in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing. The above-mentioned special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are compared with the random number for the fluctuating display pattern that has been read out, and the fluctuating time information associated with the random number for the fluctuating display pattern that has been read out is obtained from this table. determine the fluctuation pattern of As a result, a determination process regarding the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

However, as mentioned above, in this example, there is no chance of winning a small hit, so the fluctuation pattern table at the time of a small win is not used. In this example, the small prize is not won, but the small prize may be won.

In addition, in the variation pattern table during reach in this example, the mode type of the reach effect to be executed is determined by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect to execute and the random number for the variation display pattern. has been done. For example, in the non-time saving state, 164 types of random numbers for variable display patterns out of 241 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as judgment values (0 to 163) indicating that any of the normal reach effects will be executed, and 59 The random number for the 18 types of variable display patterns is set as a judgment value (164 to 222) indicating that one of the super reach effects with a low expectation of a jackpot will be executed, and the random numbers for the 18 types of variable display patterns are set as a judgment value (164 to 222) indicating that one of the super reach effects with a low expectation of a jackpot will be executed. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that one of the super reach effects is to be executed.

In addition, super reach performance (SP performance) is a game in which the expectation of a jackpot is higher than that of normal reach performance, and for players who desire the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state, when the super reach performance is executed, the player who is in a jackpot gaming state Expectations are increasing. In other words, this kind of super reach effect has the highest selection rate in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of jackpot, and even if a loss is displayed in the end, the player's expectation level for the jackpot game state will decrease. You will be able to increase your However, in reality, in order to sufficiently raise players' expectations for a jackpot gaming state, a highly anticipated preview performance that is a separate lottery from the fluctuating pattern appears during the period when the super reach performance is being executed. It is required to do (compound).

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the first jackpot determination random number and the first jackpot symbol random number and is used when determining the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the non-time saving state and the time saving state A common variation time of 12 seconds is set for both. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the second jackpot determination random number and the second symbol random number and is used to determine the variation time of the second special symbol, the time saving state is 0.1 seconds to A variation time of 12 seconds can be set, and a variation time of 12 seconds is set as a non-time saving state. In this way, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same in the time-saving state and in the non-time-saving state, and when the first special symbol is fluctuating in the time-saving state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2004 is At the same time as prompting the player, time is secured for the player to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004.

In addition, if 0.1 seconds is selected from the fluctuation time when the second special symbol loses, each game ball that is hit into the game area 5a at an interval of 0.6 seconds in a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.) This prevents items from being discharged without being subjected to lottery processing.

That is, the game ball hit right is supplied to the area directly above the gate section 2003. Then, when the game ball is accepted from this area into the gate section 2003 while in a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), a win as a normal symbol is obtained (for example, winning probability is 100%), The movable piece involved in opening and closing the second starting port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). This creates a situation where the balls can be received one after another into the second starting port 2004 (a time-saving state where almost all of the game balls hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be received into the second starting port 2004). Even if there is, every time those game balls are accepted, control is executed so that the lottery on the second special symbol side can be executed one after another with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) of around "1 in 32". It becomes possible.

In this example, when the player is operating the handle 302, the game balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, so in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), the second Game balls are often accepted into the starting port 2004 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this regard, in this example, as described above, the fluctuation pattern table when the second special symbol misses based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 has extremely low fluctuation times in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.). It is said that it can be set to a short value of 0.1 seconds. In other words, in this case, when a loss is obtained, the symbol variation is ended in a time (0.1 seconds) that is less than the firing interval of game balls (0.6 seconds), so it is 0.6 seconds. Even in a situation where game balls fired at intervals are received one after another into the second starting port 2004, it is possible to prevent these game balls from being ejected without being subjected to lottery processing. .

FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S5283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process, the variable timer in which the variable time is set according to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process for the variable pattern (step S5282) is subtracted by 1. As a result, when it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the selected variable time has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of this step S5373, this process ends at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

In addition, even though the variable timer has been subtracted by 1 (step S5371), if the variable time timer has not reached 0, until the variable time timer reaches 0 (until the time when the symbol should be fixed and stopped), Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the processes in steps S5371 and S5372 are performed.

FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process, display control is performed to display the stop symbols determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1403, and the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 to instruct the derivation and display of the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern (step S5382).

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start a jackpot gaming state (step S5387); A waiting time until the start of the jackpot gaming state (time for displaying, etc. that the jackpot gaming state is to be started) is set in an interval timer (step S5388). Then, a jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the time saving flag is set, the high probability flag is reset. At the time when the time saving flag is reset (step S5389), the fluctuation frequency counter is reset, and the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the initial value, the first special symbol normal process (step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it will be determined in the process of step S5235 that the jackpot execution flag is set, and the jackpot game will be executed in the jackpot control process (step S5240a) described above. The state will now be executed.

Note that the jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually depending on the type of jackpot. In step S5387, the jackpot start command (8R probability variable jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R probability variation jackpot) according to the type of jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) Set the jackpot command, 8R certain variable jackpot B command, and 2R normal jackpot command). Thereby, a performance of a jackpot game state (battle performance or additional challenge performance) according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the performance display device 1600, each lamp/LED, each speaker, etc.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5386, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S5386), first, it is determined whether or not the process is in a low probability time saving state (step S5390). Then, when in the low-probability time-saving state, it is determined whether the number of variations of the special symbol consumed after being controlled to the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit (here, 100 times) ( Step S5391). In other words, when the number of variations of the special symbol consumed after being controlled to the low probability time saving state reaches a predetermined upper limit (100 times), it is assumed that the conditions for ending the low probability time saving state are satisfied, and the time saving state is The function is stopped and a transition is made to the normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving gaming state) (step S5392).

After the processing related to the time saving function is thus performed, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small win flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small win start command indicating to start the small win game state is set (step S5394), and the small win flag is set. The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the start of the small winning game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, the small winning execution flag indicating that the small winning gaming state is being executed is set (step S5396), and the first special symbol process flag is set so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value. When updated to (step S5394), this process ends. In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it will be determined in the process of step S5236 that the small hit execution flag is set, and the small win control process (step S5240b) will be executed. A small winning game state is now executed. Incidentally, unlike when a jackpot is won, the gaming state is not changed when such a small winning gaming state is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the jackpot flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S5393), it is considered a loss and the first special symbol process is performed without performing any processing related to the jackpot or small win. At the time when the flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it will be determined that the jackpot execution flag and the small hit execution flag are not set (steps S5235, S236), and a new game will be started according to the pending status. Processing related to the progress of (lottery and symbol control) is performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116).

Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and that the game ball has passed through the gate section 2003, then as shown in FIG. As the process of step S5402, the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 first executes gate section passing processing such as acquiring the normal random number of the normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. do.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Normal symbol normal processing (step S5403) in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out, and based on the read normal random number, a lottery process for the display mode of the normal symbol when the variation control is stopped is performed.
2. A normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404) in which a lottery process for the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 is performed based on the regular symbol fluctuation random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing that waits until the variable display of the above-mentioned normal symbols on the normal symbol display 1402 is stopped (step S5405)
4. The fluctuation display of the normal symbols is performed such that the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbols is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display 1402, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbols is stopped. Normal symbol stop processing to stop (step S5406)
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the normal symbol is in a mode that suggests a "normal symbol hit", the movable piece becomes open and the game ball is accepted into the second starting port 2004. Normal electric accessories release processing (step S5407) that executes processing to enable control of

In addition, the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is operated so that its initial value indicates that the above-mentioned normal symbol normal processing (step S5403) should be performed.

FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate passage process (step S5402).

Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate section 2003, then as shown in FIG. As the process of step S5411, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value of the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value "4" or not.

In the process of step S5411, if it is determined that the number of pending normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are performed in order to newly put the variable display control of the normal symbols in a pending state. Processing will be carried out. That is, first, as the process of step S5412, the normal pending number counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as processing in step S5413, the normal random number and the normal pattern fluctuation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as the process of step S5414, each random number thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal holding number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a.

However, in the process of step S5411, if it is determined that the number of pending normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S5412 to S5414, the fluctuation display control of the normal symbols is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal processing (step S5403).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. Based on the counter value of the normal holding number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the holding state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control for the normal symbols in the pending state, then as a process of step S5422, the normal symbols stored in the normal symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a are The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the display mode of symbols (for example, normal random numbers, normal pattern fluctuation random numbers) is read out from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, the normal holding number counter is counted down, and when the variable display of the normal symbols stored in each storage area of the normal holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped. Random numbers related to the display mode (normal random numbers, normal pattern fluctuation random numbers) are shifted in a first-in, first-out manner.

Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted in response to the passing of the game ball to the gate section 2003 are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Remember. When a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1st (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random numbers stored in the first storage area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out, and the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area is read out. The various random numbers stored in are moved to the N-1st (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the fluctuating display control of the above-mentioned normal symbols occurred is memorized in a specifiable manner, and the suspension of the fluctuating display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). .

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a normal figure hit determination table (not shown) in the time saving mode if the current gaming state is the time saving state (high probability time saving state) (step S5426). Step S5426), if the current gaming state is a non-time-saving state (low probability non-time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state) (step S5425), selects the normal figure hit determination table (not shown) in the non-time-saving state ( Step S5427), the selected normal symbol hit determination table and the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing are compared (step S5428).

The normal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and is used when the gaming state is short time (high probability time short state), and the normal figure hit determination table is used when the gaming state is non-time short. (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state). Then, in the short-time normal pattern winning judgment table that is referred to for comparison with normal random numbers, all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal pattern winning judgment value indicating that the normal pattern has been won. The above-mentioned normal random numbers are associated with each other so that the normal map indicating a loss does not coincide with the loss judgment value. In this way, in the time saving mode, when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, the winning pattern is guaranteed, and the movable piece becomes open and the game ball passes through the second starting port 2004. Acceptance is controlled. Rather than all of the 255 types, more normal random numbers than in the non-time-saving state may be made to match the normal pattern winning determination value indicating that the winning pattern has been won.

In addition, in the non-time-saving normal pattern winning judgment table that is referred to for comparison with normal random numbers, it is possible that all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal pattern winning judgment value indicating that a winning pattern has been won. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are respectively associated with each other so as to match the ordinary figure deviation judgment value indicating that the ordinary figure is not correct. In this way, in the non-time saving period, even if a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, there is no chance of winning a normal ticket, so the movable piece 2106 is in the open state and the second starting port There is no possibility of controlling the acceptance of game balls into 2004. However, as mentioned above, it may be possible to make it possible to win the normal symbol even in the non-time-saving state. In this case, the probability of winning is lower than in the time-saving state (for example, 50%), and the lottery result of the normal symbol is the winning probability. When the second starting port 2004 is opened, the movable piece of the second starting port 2004 is opened for a shorter time than the time saving state, for example, two seconds to allow the game ball to be received into the second starting port 2004, and then moved forward again. It may also be possible to make it impossible to accept game balls into the second starting port 2004.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table with the ordinary random number read out in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal processing, and when it is determined that the ordinary symbol has won (step S5429 ), after setting the normal pattern winning flag indicating that the fluctuation is winning per normal pattern (step S5430), the normal pattern winning as the state when the fluctuation control of the normal pattern stops (the stopping pattern of the normal pattern) The symbol is determined (step S5431). On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the comparison between the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal processing is that the symbol is a loss, the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol A normal symbol is determined as a mode at the time of control stop (stop symbol of a normal symbol) (step S5432). After that, at the time when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated (step S5433) so as to proceed to the normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404), this process is ended.

While such control is performed by the main control MPU 1310a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains the above-mentioned various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a to perform the peripheral control unit steady processing (received command analysis processing). In step S1022)), the game situation is grasped each time, and it is possible to execute a performance according to the game situation.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not a starting prize has occurred, and when such a situation exists, performs control regarding a hold display and a look-ahead effect in accordance with the starting winning. After that, by updating the process flag based on the grasped gaming situation, the following fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting processing, production symbol fluctuation start processing, production symbol fluctuation processing, production symbol fluctuation stop processing, jackpot display processing , a jackpot game process, or a jackpot end performance process.

Waiting process for reception of a fluctuation pattern designation command: Until a fluctuation pattern command related to a fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, a performance (demonstration performance, etc.) is performed when the symbols are not in a fluctuating state and control regarding jackpots is not being performed. While performing control, upon receiving a variation pattern command regarding a variation pattern from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the production symbol variation start process.

Production pattern variation start processing: Various production contents (production pattern, preview production, etc.) during the pattern variation period are determined based on a variation pattern command, etc., and variation of decorative symbols is started based on the determined production contents. Control as follows. After this, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during effect pattern variation.

Processing during production symbol fluctuation: Performs control to start various production contents determined in the production symbol variation start processing at respective timings during the symbol variation period, and when the variation time ends, changes the value of the process flag to the production symbol. Update to a value compatible with fluctuation stop processing.

Effect pattern fluctuation stop processing: Based on the reception of a command (design confirmation command) instructing to stop all patterns, control is performed to stop the fluctuation of decorative patterns and derive and display the display result (stop pattern). Then, if the decorative pattern is to be stopped at a jackpot pattern, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process, and if the decorative pattern is to be stopped at a loss pattern, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the reception of the fluctuation pattern designation command. Update to the corresponding value.

Jackpot display processing: Controls the performance (display performance that notifies the performance display device 1600 of the occurrence of a jackpot, etc.) during the period from when the decorative pattern stops at the jackpot pattern until the start of the jackpot game. Thereafter, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot in-game process.

Processing during the jackpot game: Controls various performances during the period when the jackpot game state occurs. When the jackpot game state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing.

Jackpot end performance processing: In the performance display device 1600, the performance during the period from the end of the jackpot game state to the change permissible state (such as a display performance that notifies the player that the jackpot game state has ended) is controlled. . Then, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process.

[18. Performance control by scheduler]
Gaming machines perform various effects during the game by outputting audio, lighting/flashing lamps, displaying images, etc., and various elaborate effects have been attempted to increase the interest of the game. As described above, the gaming machine controls a plurality of types of performance devices using the peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control device, based on commands output from the main control board 1310, and executes a performance according to the game state of the game. do. The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are connected by a unidirectional signal line that transmits signals in one direction.

In order to cooperatively execute multiple types of effects, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 7-313694 discloses a control technique that uses scenario data to display various effects. Scenario data is data that defines the symbols to be displayed on the screen in chronological order. By preparing a control process that realizes a general-purpose process of sequentially displaying specified symbols according to this scenario data, there is an advantage that a wide variety of effect displays can be easily realized simply by switching the scenario data. The scenario data can also include BGM designation. In this case, by outputting the designated BGM from the sound source IC, it becomes possible to output audio corresponding to the display screen.

However, gaming machines are required to have more elaborate performances. In the above-mentioned conventional technology, it is difficult to perform various effects by linking a plurality of effect devices such as audio output, lamp lighting, and image display. For example, it was not possible to change the BGM while displaying an image according to scenario data. Furthermore, when a sound effect is to be output in response to a user's operation during image display, the display of the image and the output of BGM are stopped, and the sound effect is output. When the output of the sound effect is finished, regardless of how far the BGM has been played, the BGM and image display are restarted from the beginning, creating an unnatural effect. The lighting and blinking of the lamps is controlled by individual programs depending on the gaming status and regardless of the content of the image display, and it is difficult to realize a wide variety of lighting and blinking in conjunction with the image display. there were.

[18-1. Software configuration in peripheral control section]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a peripheral control unit 1530 provided in a peripheral control board 1510 receives a main command from a main control board 1310 and executes a game effect. In this embodiment, each component that executes the effect based on the received main command is configured as software, but may be configured as hardware. Hereinafter, after explaining the configuration and outline of the functions for realizing the production control in this embodiment, the details of each function will be explained.

[18-1-1. Configuration and overview of each function]
FIG. 148 is a functional block diagram illustrating the configuration and outline of functions for executing production control in this embodiment. The peripheral control section 1530 includes an input command analysis section 5010, a production control section 5020, a layer data storage section 5030, a production block control section 5040, a production block data storage section 5050, a scheduler execution section 5060, a scheduler data storage section 5070, and an output module section. 5080.

The input command analysis unit 5010 receives input of a main command and analyzes the input command. The effect control unit 5020 obtains layer data from the layer data storage unit 5030 based on the analysis result of the main command, and determines block control information (effect block number). To explain the layers, in this embodiment, a layer is set for each production category such as the background and characters, each production element is drawn on each layer, and these layers are displayed in an overlapping manner to display the image on the liquid crystal display device. Output. With this, for example, if only the backgrounds are different and the character display (movement) is the same, it is possible to use a common layer for displaying the characters. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of performance data (scheduler data) and improve development efficiency. The layer data storage unit 5030 stores information for specifying effects for each layer.

The effect block control unit 5040 receives the block control information (effect block number) determined by the effect control unit 5020, and acquires effect block data corresponding to the effect block number from the effect block data storage unit 5050. The performance block data includes scheduler data for executing the performance. Scheduler data is a set of functions that instruct a predetermined process to be executed among the multiple processes required depending on the performance device, in order to control the performance in each performance device, in the order in which they should be executed. It is data. The effect block data includes "liquid crystal effect block data" for executing the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device, "liquid crystal pattern block data" for variably displaying the identification pattern on the liquid crystal display device, sound (sound), There are three types of data: ``sub effect block data'' for controlling lamps, accessories, etc. The effect block control unit 5040 executes control according to the type of effect block data, and passes scheduler control information including the effect block data to the scheduler execution unit 5060.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires scheduler data included in the effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070. Then, the scheduler data is executed, a function corresponding to each presentation device is called, and presentation device control information is transmitted to the output module section 5080.

The output module section 5080 receives presentation device control information from the scheduler execution section 5060, and transmits presentation device drive data to each presentation device based on the presentation device control information. Each performance device performs an operation based on performance device drive data. In the output module section 5080, the effect control section 5020 is configured in software by a CPU (peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided in the effect control device (peripheral control board 1530), and the CPU executes another computer program. This is realized by In addition, it may be configured by a calculation circuit separate from the production control unit 5020 and configured as hardware.

[18-1-2. Module configuration]
Next, details of the configuration of modules and the like that implement the above-mentioned functions will be explained. FIG. 149 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of modules and the like in the peripheral control section 1530 of the gaming machine of this embodiment. Although each configuration is configured as software by a computer program executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1530, a part or all of it may be configured as hardware.

In this embodiment, a system module 5100 for driving each presentation device is processed by a peripheral control unit 1530. The system module 5100 includes a command analysis module 5200, a liquid crystal module 5400, a sound module 5500, a lamp module 5600, a driving device module 5700, and the like as modules related to presentation. Also included is a production control unit 5020 for creating production device control information for driving each production device based on the main command.

The system module 5100 includes a main command buffer 5110, a liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, a lamp data output buffer 5130, a motor data output buffer 5140, and a serial control IC 5150. Main command buffer 5110 receives the main command transmitted from main control board 1310 and passes it to command analysis module 5200. In this embodiment, the main command is a set of 3 bytes of information, which is a command status value, a command mode value, and a checksum value of the command status and mode value in order from the first byte, and is divided into 3 times of 8 bits each. The main command buffer 5110, which is output as If it is determined, it is passed to the command analysis module 5200.

The main command includes information representing the game state and the operation state of the gaming machine that are related to the performance. For example, the main command can include information such as whether or not a game ball enters a starting prize opening, the result of a special drawing lottery, a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols, and the like. In addition, when this embodiment is applied to a slot machine, sensor outputs such as door opening, operation of a start lever or stop button, rotation and stop of the reels, success or failure of a winning combination when stopped, etc. are included. Note that the commands listed here are just examples, and various commands can be included depending on the model of the gaming machine and the content of the performance.

The command analysis module 5200 is included in the input command analysis section 5010, and analyzes the contents of the main command to determine whether the command is related to production. If the command is determined to be related to presentation, it is passed to presentation control section 5020.

Based on the analysis result of the main command, the effect control unit 5020 identifies a layer to be subjected to effect control from the layer data table. Then, the block data number (effect block number) is acquired from the specified layer, and the block data number corresponding to each layer is transmitted to the effect block control section 5040.

The effect block control section 5040 includes a liquid crystal effect block control section 5310 and a sub effect block control section 5320. The liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 determines control information for executing the effect of displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device. The sub effect block control unit 5320 determines control information for executing sound output, lighting/blinking of lamps, movement of accessories, etc.

When the effect block number is determined, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 executes the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The liquid crystal rendering block data is block data for executing liquid crystal display rendering, and includes one or more drawing scheduler data. By executing the drawing scheduler data, backgrounds, characters, identification patterns, etc. are displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

The liquid crystal rendering block control unit 5310 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the control (display) target, and executes the rendering scheduler data included in the block data. The liquid crystal display scheduler execution unit 5060 includes a liquid crystal display 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 for displaying production elements such as backgrounds and characters, and a liquid crystal pattern 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 for displaying identification patterns. included.

The liquid crystal presentation 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal pattern 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 are executed at a frame period (1f = approximately 33.334 milliseconds) which is the screen update period. The liquid crystal presentation 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal pattern 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 drive the drawing scheduler data specified by the liquid crystal presentation block data with the drawing scheduler, and generate a liquid crystal display list command by the liquid crystal module 5400. The liquid crystal display list command is passed to the effect display device (game board side effect display device 1600, door frame side liquid crystal display device 460) via the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120.

The VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source generates display data based on the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, and outputs it to the effect display device (game board side effect display device 1600, door frame side liquid crystal display device 460). The display data is generated, for example, by expanding character data specified by a liquid crystal display list command onto a frame buffer at a specified position.

When the performance block number is determined, the sub performance block control unit 5320 executes the sub performance block data corresponding to the performance block number. The sub effect block data is block data for executing each effect of lamps, sounds, and motors, and includes one or more sub effect scheduler data. By executing the sub effect scheduler data, each effect device such as a lamp, sound, and motor performs an operation predefined in the sub effect scheduler data.

The sub performance block control unit 5320 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the execution cycle of various performance devices, and executes the sub performance scheduler data included in the sub performance block data. The scheduler execution unit 5060 for controlling various performance devices includes a sub performance 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 that controls the performance device at 1 frame intervals, and a sub performance 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 that controls the performance device at 1 millisecond intervals. included. In this way, by providing a scheduler execution section that corresponds to the execution interval, it becomes possible to execute performances according to the configuration of the gaming machine and the required specifications of the performance device. For example, since 1f corresponds to the drawing update interval, it is possible to synchronize sound output, movement of accessories, etc. with the liquid crystal display. Moreover, if the detection interval of the sensor is in units of 1 ms, it becomes possible to quickly respond to a problem in the operation of the accessory.

The sub effect block control unit 5320 executes effect control other than liquid crystal display, and in this embodiment, for example, it controls three types of effect: sound output, lighting/blinking of lamps, and movement of accessories. explain. Note that the effect control by the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 and the sub-effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 will be described without particular distinction, assuming that they are the same except for the execution cycle. Hereinafter, an outline of control according to the type of presentation device will be explained.

First, a case will be described in which a performance is performed using sound output. If the sub effect block data includes scheduler data for sound output, the scheduler execution unit 5060 starts the scheduler for sound output and executes the scheduler data. Then, when a sound output function (for example, SPLAY) is executed, the sound module 5500 generates sound source drive data (sound source command) based on the specified parameters. Note that multiple schedulers can be activated; for example, by controlling the output of BGM and production sound effects with different schedulers, it is possible to generate sound source drive data in parallel and output the sound at the same time. . The sound source built-in VDP 1540a reads out the sound source data designated by the sound source drive data from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b, and outputs it from the speakers 921 and 573 using the audio data transmission IC 1540c.

Next, a case in which an effect using lamps is executed will be described. If the sub effect block data includes scheduler data for lamp control, the scheduler execution unit starts the lamp scheduler and executes the scheduler data. When the lamp control function (eg, HPLAY) is executed, the lamp module 5600 generates lamp drive data based on the specified parameters. Note that, as in the case of sound output, it is possible to start multiple schedulers, and multiple lamps and layers can be controlled in parallel.

Lamp module 5600 creates lamp drive data every cycle (1 frame or 1 millisecond) and outputs it to lamp data output buffer 5130. Lamp data output buffer 5130 has a double buffer structure, temporarily stores lamp drive data generated by lamp module 5600, and outputs it to serial control IC 5150. By making the lamp data output buffer 5130 a double buffer, lamp data can be created and output simultaneously in a single cycle. By configuring in this way, the processing time for lamp control increases due to an increase in the number of lamp systems or overlapping lamp layers. By using a period, it is sufficient that the processing related to the creation of lamp data is completed within the processing period.

Specifically, when the lamp data output buffer 5130 is composed of buffer A and buffer B, for example, if buffer A stores lamp drive data created previously, buffer B stores data for the next cycle. The previously created lamp drive data is outputted from buffer A to the serial control IC 5150 by DMA, and each lamp is turned on and blinks. In the next cycle, the buffers are switched, lamp drive data is output from the lamp module 5600 to buffer A, and lamp drive data stored in buffer B is output to the serial control IC 5150. Note that the control of lighting and blinking of the LED is the same as that of the lamp, and the description of the control of the lamp can be replaced with that of the LED unless otherwise specified.

Finally, a case will be described in which a drive device (for example, a motor, a solenoid) for operating an accessory is controlled. If the sub effect block data includes scheduler data for controlling the drive device, the scheduler execution unit starts the scheduler for the drive device (motor scheduler) and executes the scheduler data. When the drive control function (eg, MPLAY) is executed, the drive module 5700 generates lamp drive data based on the specified parameters. Note that, as in the case of sound output, it is possible to start multiple schedulers, and multiple drive devices can be controlled in parallel.

The drive device module 5700 creates motor drive data every cycle and outputs it to the motor data output buffer 5140. In this embodiment, motor drive data is created and output in a 1 millisecond cycle. Motor data output buffer 5140 temporarily stores motor drive data generated by drive device module 5700 and outputs it to serial control IC 5150. Note that the motor drive data is output from the serial port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a without using DMA. However, the output of the latch signal to reflect the motor data to each drive device is not at the same timing as the output from the motor data output buffer 5140 to the serial control IC 5150, but rather at the next cycle of all motor data transmission. It is outputting. This is because the output timing of the latch signal is after the serial transmission of all motor data is completed, so as the serial transmission time of motor data becomes longer, the wait time until the serial transmission is completed becomes an overhead, which increases the overall processing time for each frame period. This is because there will be a shortage of In this embodiment, by shifting the timing of motor data serial transmission and the corresponding latch signal output, it is possible to reduce the waiting time until the serial transmission is completed to 0, but depending on the CPU used, multiple DMAs can be used. In this case, by serially transmitting motor drive data using DMA and outputting a latch signal with a DMA completion interrupt, the waiting time until the serial transmission is completed can be similarly reduced to zero. Simultaneously with the output of the motor drive data, effect drive photo information is input to the drive device module 5700 (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Each effect driving photo information is received by serial communication via a parallel serial control IC.

[18-2. Data structure]
In this embodiment, the scheduler data can have various structures. For example, a call function may be provided for importing other scheduler data as part of the scheduler data. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processes specified by the scheduler data, and when executing a call function, once executes other scheduler data specified by the call function, and then continues processing the original scheduler data. and execute it. By doing this, it becomes possible to utilize general-purpose performance contents in various situations, just like calling a subroutine in a general program.

This function not only reduces the load of creating scheduler data, but also has effects specific to gaming machines, as described below. In gaming machines, various lottery drawings and the like are held during the game, and the development of the game changes depending on the results. Some players are able to detect subtle differences in the contents of the performance during the lottery and guess the lottery results. In contrast, in this embodiment, the call function allows general-purpose performance contents to be used in various situations, so it is possible to eliminate such subtle differences and make it difficult to predict lottery results, etc. This makes it possible to prevent the enjoyment of the game from being lost.

As another configuration, the scheduler data may include a conditional branching function that switches the presentation content according to the gaming state. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processes specified by the scheduler data, and when executing a conditional branch function, determines the gaming state based on the main command and executes the content of the performance according to the gaming state. . By doing so, it becomes possible to deal with a wide variety of branching game states using one scheduler data. Examples of the game state used for conditional branching include the result of a lottery held during a game, and whether or not a player operates a button or the like. In a reel-type gaming machine, the stopping state of the rotating reels may be used, and in the case of a pachinko machine, the winning state in the starting winning opening may be used. Furthermore, conditional branching may be performed depending on whether or not an error occurs during the game.

Various configurations are possible for the performance contents after conditional branching. For example, after the conditional branch, the process may be completely separated into two or more processes. Further, after performing a predetermined process by a conditional branch, the system may be configured to return to the process before the branch. According to the latter aspect, for example, after executing a process of temporarily outputting a sound effect when a button is pressed during a game, it is possible to return to the previous performance without feeling any discomfort.

As explained above, the gaming machine can include various presentation devices, and for example, can include a display device for displaying images. As the display device, various devices capable of displaying images can be used, such as a liquid crystal panel, CRT, organic EL panel, and plasma display. The display content of the display device is controlled by the image processing device. An image processing device is a device that develops an image into a bitmap according to a predetermined display command and generates display data for displaying the image on a display device. For example, it can be configured by a combination of a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a character ROM in which characters and the like to be displayed on the screen are prepared in the form of bitmaps.

[18-3. Basic concept of production control]
FIG. 150 is an explanatory diagram showing the basic concept of performance control in the gaming machine of this embodiment. Here, the case of a sub-effect in which the main effect control is executed by executing scheduler data including a function will be explained, and in particular, sound output will be explained as an example.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 (sub-effect scheduler execution unit 5320) activates the type and number of schedulers 5502 according to the effect device when executing the effect. The scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the scheduler data designated as the sub effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070, and executes the function included in the scheduler data. The structure of the scheduler data will be described later.

The sound functions executed when outputting sound include "SPLAY" for reproducing a phrase, "STOP_PH" for stopping the phrase being reproduced, and "VOL_PH" for setting the volume level when reproducing the phrase. These sound functions are processed by the sound module 5500, and control specified by parameters and the like is executed. Upon receiving the execution of the sound function, the sound module 5500 generates sound source driving data and outputs the sound source driving data to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a.

The functions processed by the sound module 5500 control the output of the sound corresponding to the designated channel. The gaming machine of this embodiment is provided with 32 channels, but for ease of understanding, the number of channels will be explained as 4. Furthermore, the sound output by each channel is output from speakers [1] to [4] via volumes 5506v[1] to [4]. Note that the speakers [1] to [4] shown here schematically represent the output of each channel Ch1 to Ch4, and correspond to any one physical speaker installed in the gaming machine. It does not mean that it is.

The correspondence between the scheduler 5502 and the output channels is managed by channel management works 5507[1] to 5507[4] provided in association with channels Ch1 to Ch4. The data structure of the channel management work 5507 is illustrated in the lower right of the figure. The work 5507 stores phrase numbers, stereo playback flags, output volumes, and loop attributes. The phrase number is information indicating which phrase is currently being played. The stereo playback flag indicates whether or not to perform stereo output. The output volume is the volume for each channel. The loop attribute specifies whether or not to play repeatedly. This information is specified by the sound module 5500 based on the sound function.

As mentioned above, in FIG. 150, the basic concept of production control in this embodiment has been shown using sound output control as an example. The sub effect scheduler execution unit starts the scheduler specified by the sub effect block data and executes the scheduler data on the scheduler. When the scheduler data is executed, a function for controlling each presentation device is called and processed by a module (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) corresponding to each presentation device.

[18-4. Data flow in production control]
The basic concept of the module configuration and control in the production control of the gaming machine has been explained above. Next, the flow of performance control from receiving the main command to acquiring scheduler data will be explained.

[18-4-1. Acquisition of data necessary for production control]
FIG. 151A is a diagram illustrating the configuration up to the acquisition of data necessary for performance control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. As explained in FIG. 149, the effect control unit 5020 receives the main command from the main control board 1310, analyzes it by the command analysis module 5200, and notifies the effect control unit 5020 of the analysis result.

Based on the layer data table, the performance control unit 5020 controls each layer, the fluctuation pattern layer (a layer that performs a performance related to the fluctuation pattern), the reservation layer (a layer that performs a performance related to the reservation performance), and the game instruction layer (a layer that performs a performance related to the reservation performance). Based on the analysis results by the command analysis module 5200 for each of the communication error layer (layer that performs communication error notification), notification layer (layer that performs various notifications), and abnormality notification layer (layer that performs abnormality notification) , acquires and updates the performance block data number corresponding to each layer. Further, the acquired effect block data number is delivered to the effect block control section 5040. For example, if the production block number is a variation pattern layer, based on the variation pattern number, the liquid crystal production block data combination number table for each variation pattern, the liquid crystal design block data combination number table for each variation pattern, and the sub production block data for each variation pattern. Determined from the combination number table. The unit of division of the performance block is divided into predetermined units (blocks) that are a common performance within a series of performances (for example, a performance that is executed from the start of the variation of the special symbol until it is stopped). In addition, block data including control information such as performance content and performance time for each performance device is defined for each block. By controlling the performance for each performance block based on the performance block number, the performance by each performance device can be synchronized. In addition, the arrangement of the layers corresponds to the layers on the liquid crystal display, and in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern layer is at the back, and the abnormality notification layer is at the front, meaning that the more important information is displayed at the front. This is the configuration for.

When the production block control unit 5040 receives the block data number (production block number) corresponding to each layer, the production block control unit 5040 controls the scheduler control unit (liquid crystal production block control unit 5310, liquid crystal pattern block control unit 5311, sub production block) corresponding to each layer. The corresponding block data (liquid crystal effect block data 5051, liquid crystal pattern block data 5052, sub effect block data 5053) is acquired by the control unit 5320). Each block of data includes scheduler data for executing the effects, as described above.

For example, when the main command is a start winning command, a pending layer is specified, and liquid crystal production block data 5051 is used to display a pending display on the LCD screen, and sub production block data is used to output a sound effect when a starting prize is won. 5053 is obtained. Furthermore, when the special symbol starts to fluctuate, a fluctuating start command or the like is transmitted, and the fluctuating pattern layer is specified. Furthermore, a command is also sent to notify the occurrence of an error or a warning, and the abnormality detection layer is specified. Furthermore, by performing the effects for each layer, multiple effects can be layered at the same time.

When the liquid crystal presentation block control unit 5310 acquires the liquid crystal presentation block data 5051 from the liquid crystal presentation block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal presentation block data number, the liquid crystal presentation block control unit 5310 uses the liquid crystal presentation 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 to Launch the production 1f scheduler. The liquid crystal presentation 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 further acquires liquid crystal presentation schedule data 5071. Then, by executing the liquid crystal presentation schedule data 5071 on the liquid crystal presentation 1f scheduler, the liquid crystal module 5400 is instructed to process the function defined in the liquid crystal presentation schedule data 5071. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the function instructed to be executed based on the specified scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary to drive the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, and displays the game board. Images are drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Processing in the liquid crystal display 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (one frame).

Further, when the liquid crystal pattern block control unit 5311 acquires liquid crystal pattern block data 5052 from the liquid crystal pattern block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal pattern block data number, the liquid crystal pattern 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 starts the LCD pattern 1f scheduler. The liquid crystal pattern 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 further acquires liquid crystal pattern schedule data 5072. Then, by executing the liquid crystal pattern schedule data 5072 on the liquid crystal pattern 1f scheduler, the liquid crystal module 5400 is instructed to process the function defined in the liquid crystal pattern schedule data 5072. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the function instructed to be executed based on the specified scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary to drive the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, and displays the game board. Images are drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The processing in the liquid crystal pattern 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (one frame).

Upon acquiring the sub-effect block data 5053, the sub-effect block control unit 5320 specifies the execution cycle (1 frame or 1 millisecond) based on information specified in the sub-effect block data 5053. Then, if the execution cycle is 1 frame, the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 starts the sub-effect 1f scheduler, or if the execution cycle is 1 millisecond, the sub-effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 starts the sub-effect 1ms scheduler. Start the scheduler.

Further, the sub performance 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub performance 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 obtains the sub performance schedule data 5073 and executes it on the corresponding scheduler. The sub performance schedule data 5073 has no difference depending on the execution cycle, and all functions can be executed by schedulers of all execution cycles. This makes it possible to create scheduler data that is commonly used by schedulers with different execution cycles, resulting in a reduction in data capacity. Furthermore, it is possible to quickly respond to changes in the execution cycle of the presentation device. In addition, the same schedule data can be executed simultaneously by different schedulers, making it possible to share scheduler data, preventing the same type of failure from occurring in multiple locations, and reducing data capacity. can.

Here, a specific example will be described in which the same schedule data is simultaneously executed by different schedulers. FIG. 151B is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal display rendering of a step-up notice according to the present embodiment. There are four types of step-up notices that can be executed: step-up notices 1 to 4, and by executing a production that develops the content of the production in stages, the player can expect the result of the fluctuating symbol display. suggest degree.

In the step-up notice 1, the notice effect ends when the step-up 1 effect is executed. In the step-up notice 2, the step-up 2 performance occurs just before the end of the step-up 1 performance, and after the end of the step-up 2 performance, the preview performance ends. Performances are similarly executed for step-up notices 3 and 4, and the preview performance ends after the step-up 3 performance and step-up 4 performance are completed, respectively.

During the step-up notice, the sound and lamps will also perform the step-up notice effect in accordance with the LCD display. In the sound performance, different sounds are output at each stage of the step-up performance, so four types of scheduler data from step 1 to step 4 are defined for each stage of the performance. On the other hand, in the lamp effect, since the same lamp pattern is displayed at each stage of the step-up effect, it is sufficient to define one type of common lamp scheduler data.

In addition, when the step-up notice LCD display progresses to the next stage, the next step-up notice will start just before the end of the current step-up notice, so multiple step-up notices may temporarily be displayed at the same time. There is a period when As mentioned above, in the ramp production, it is necessary to execute the same scheduler data for the subsequent step-up production, but in this embodiment, the configuration is such that multiple schedulers can execute the same scheduler data at the same time. It has become. Therefore, when executing the same effect at each stage, it is sufficient to define one type of common scheduler data even if the execution periods of the effects overlap.

Specifically, when the step-up notice lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by the ramp scheduler (LMP_SCH01) in the step-up 1 performance, when the step-up 2 performance starts just before the end of the step-up 1 performance, the same step-up The advance notice lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by another lamp scheduler (LMP_SCH02). With this configuration, the same scheduler data can be executed simultaneously (overlappingly) without being defined redundantly, and the same pattern of performances can be executed in parallel in a series of performances. Realize what you want to do.

The sub performance 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub performance 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 calls the module (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) corresponding to the performance device to be controlled, and defines it in the sub performance schedule data 5073. Instructs the processing of the specified function. Each module processes a function instructed to be executed based on specified scheduler data, creates data necessary for driving the presentation device, and outputs the driving data to the presentation device.

[18-4-2. Scheduler data execution summary]
FIG. 152 is a diagram illustrating the flow when executing scheduler data of this embodiment. The production control unit 5020 determines the content of the production based on the analysis result of the main (main board) command by the command analysis module 5200, and controls various production devices using the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source, the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600, and the drive device module 5700. Control. FIG. 152 shows the structure of scheduler data 5401 that is referenced to set this command.

In this embodiment, the scheduler data 5401 is prepared for each performance number specified by the performance block control unit 5040, and is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b. The correspondence between scheduler data 5401 and performance numbers is defined in the performance management table. As shown on the left side of the figure, the performance management table includes a performance management pointer that indicates the storage address of scheduler data. Although the number of performance management pointers corresponding to the performance number is prepared, only five are illustrated here. In the illustrated example, for example, the production management pointer [1] initially stores the start address A1 of the scheduler data 5401. As the scheduler data is processed, the value of the production management pointer [1] sequentially shifts to A1 and A2.

In this embodiment, the performance number uses the address value of the performance management pointer. In the example of FIG. 152, performance numbers 01H, 02H, etc. represent storage addresses of performance management pointers [1], [2], etc., respectively. Note that the production number is not limited to the address value, and any identification information can be used. In this case, the performance management table may be constructed such that the performance number and the performance management pointer are associated with each other, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 searches for the performance management pointer using the performance number as a key, and then searches for the performance management pointer using the performance number as a key. All you have to do is process it. Further, if the address value of the performance management pointer is used as the performance number, the amount of data in the performance management table can be reduced, and the above-mentioned search is also unnecessary, so the load required for processing scheduler data can be reduced.

Each command configuring the scheduler data 5401 is basically composed of a function and a parameter, as shown in FIG. 152. As mentioned above, the function is a command for controlling the production device, for example, for instructing each module to operate the production device. A parameter is a variable that specifies the processing content of a function. Note that a function may be provided that does not require specifying parameters.

Functions are classified into groups such as sequence control, lamp, sound, motor (drive device), and user. Sequence control is a basic function for effect control, and lamps, sounds, and motors are functions for controlling each effect device. User is a function that does not belong to these groups. A detailed explanation of the functions will be given later with reference to FIGS. 155 to 157.

In the example shown in FIG. 152, the "call" function is specified at address A2. The "call" function belongs to the sequence control group, and after saving the pointer value of the next function, sets the address specified by the parameter to the performance management pointer. The scheduler execution unit 5060 can temporarily move to the address specified by the parameter and process the scheduler data, and then return to the previous processing based on the above-mentioned saved pointer value.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the address A31 specified by the parameter of the "call" function next to the address A2. A liquid crystal command is set at address A31, an audio operation number is set at A32, a lamp operation number is set at A33, and the process returns at A3n. When the production command finishes these processes, it returns to the address A2 where "call" is specified, and moves on to the process at the next address A3.

In this way, by utilizing the "call" function, it is possible to incorporate the contents of the series of blocks BL3 specified by addresses A31 to A3n into various parts of the scheduler data. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the scheduler data and also reduce the load of creating the scheduler data. 2. Description of the Related Art In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various drawings are held during the game, and the outcome of the game changes depending on the results. Some players are able to detect subtle differences in the contents of the performance during the lottery and guess the lottery results. On the other hand, in the present invention, since general production content can be used in various situations by calling, it is possible to eliminate such subtle differences and make it difficult to predict lottery results, etc. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game.

Although it is possible to use the "call" function in this way, the scheduler data 5401 of this embodiment is different from an interpreter program. As mentioned above, the main functions used in the scheduler data 5401 are those for setting instructions to other schedulers, such as "accessory action number set," "voice action number set," and "lamp action number set." , this is because it merely specifies a very limited function that can be realized by the scheduler execution unit 5060.

In the example shown in FIG. 152, NOP (wait) is then executed at address A3. The "NOP" function waits for a specified number of frames and continues processing scheduler data. Here, processing of the scheduler data is waited until the time specified by the parameter Prm[031] has elapsed. As described later, in this embodiment, processing is repeatedly executed by timer interrupts. Therefore, in the "NOP" function, the scheduler execution unit 5060 temporarily ends the scheduler data processing without performing any subsequent processing if the value of the parameter Prm[031] is not 0; , performs processing to move to the function at the next address.

In this embodiment, a work in the same format as the work area 5301 shown in FIG. 151A is used to specify the voice action number and the like. A work area 5301 used by system events and a work used by a scheduler execution unit 5060 are prepared separately, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 stores audio operation numbers and the like in each work according to the specifications of scheduler data. Further, the layer designated by the effect control unit 5020 is also provided separately from the layer for the system module (see FIG. 151A). In the work for each module, multiple audio operation numbers and lamp operation numbers can be specified in parallel from among these layers.

The scheduler data after the conditional branch address A11 is similarly defined by functions and parameters. In the example shown in FIG. 152, no conditional branch is provided from the conditional branch address A11 until the end of the effect (address An). Since this range is a block BL2 different from the block BL1 mentioned above, it is possible to specify accessory commands (address A22), voice action numbers (address A21), etc. without considering conflicts with block BL1. . Instead of these settings, the block BL3 etc. may be fetched by the "call" function.

The scheduler data may use a combination of conditional branches and "call" functions. For example, a random number may be generated for switching the presentation content, and a different address may be called depending on the value of the random number. In the example shown in FIG. 152, if the condition ``Random value≦Th1?'' is attached to address A2, the effects at addresses A31 to A3n will be executed when this condition is satisfied. Also, if address A41 (not shown) is called next to address A2 (address A2+1) with the condition "Th1<random number ≦ Th2?", then address A31 and subsequent addresses will be called according to the random number value. A different performance is performed. In this way, by calling different addresses with conditional branching according to random numbers, the contents of the performance can be randomly switched depending on the random numbers, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. Hereinafter, switching the performance contents in this manner will be referred to as "performance lottery" in this specification.

In the performance lottery, all of the displays, sounds, lamps, and driving devices may be changed, or only some of them may be changed. If you want to switch everything, you can specify all the display, sound, and lamp contents in the scheduler data called with the "Call" function. When switching only a part, specify only the part to be switched in the scheduler data called by the "Call" function, and specify the other parts uniformly after returning from the "Call" function. do it.

Further, within the scheduler data, a conditional branch and a "call" function may be used to specify that different scheduler data is called depending on the random number for the performance lottery. In this case, as a result of the display, sound, lamp, and driving device independently performing the performance lottery, the performance modes realized by the combination thereof are extremely diverse, which has the advantage of further increasing interest.

However, regardless of the result of the lottery for display, sound, lamp, and driving device, it is preferable that these performances end at the same time in order to realize a performance that does not feel strange. Therefore, in this embodiment, the scheduler data to be selected for the performance lottery is such that the performance ends at the same time. Note that it is not an essential requirement that the performances end at the same time, and these performance times do not have to be the same.

The performance lottery using scheduler data has the advantage that the content of the performance is diverse, and the lottery format can be changed depending on the display, sound, lamp, and output status of the drive device. For example, when a performance lottery is instructed and the drive device is performing a figure-eight sorting operation and other operations are restricted, the drive device module 5700 prohibits the performance lottery related to the drive device. It's okay. Similarly, with regard to display, sound, and lamps, the performance lottery may be prohibited depending on the situation when the performance lottery is instructed. In addition, when prohibiting the performance lottery, some of the performance lottery may be prohibited by prohibiting selection of some scheduler data.

As described above, the performance lottery is simply a matter of switching the performance contents through the control processing of the peripheral control board 1510, and does not affect the game itself. However, by enabling the performance lottery in this manner, it is possible to realize a variety of performances more diverse than the types of commands output from the main control board 1310, and the interest can be further increased.

[18-4-3. Overview of sound output control]
Next, the function of the sound module that controls sound output will be explained. FIG. 153 is an explanatory diagram showing the functions of the sound module 5500 of this embodiment. The sound module 5500 receives instructions from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes processing specified by the function included in the scheduler data, and outputs audio. The sound module 5500 can accept requests from multiple schedulers 5502 and process them. Each scheduler 5502 is provided in association with a sound layer for audio. Further, each scheduler 5502 is provided with a work 5507 for operation management. The contents of the work 5507 will be described later.

When the scheduler execution unit 5060 specifies the voice operation number based on the scheduler control information, it refers to the voice operation number table and specifies the scheduler data 5505 to be executed. The audio action number table is a table that associates sound pointers and sound layers with audio action numbers. In this embodiment, the voice action number corresponds to the storage address of the voice action number table. Although it is possible to use any identification information for the voice action number, as in the case of the production number mentioned above, it is better to correspond to the storage address to reduce the capacity of the voice action number table and the processing load when referencing the table. It has the advantage of making it possible.

The sound pointer specifies the storage address of scheduler data 5505. In this embodiment, address SA1 is stored in sound pointer [1].

Scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters. Functions used in scheduler data 5505 for controlling sound output will be described later with reference to FIGS. 156 and 157.

In the example shown in FIG. 153, a "call" function is defined at address SA2. After executing a series of blocks starting from address SA31 (not shown), scheduler execution unit 5060 processes address SA3 following address SA2.

At address SA3, phrase playback is specified. Scheduler execution unit 5060 reads phrase data 5508 corresponding to phrase number 00H specified by the parameter and reproduces it.

Further, an example of the structure of phrase data 5508 is shown on the right side of FIG. 153. The phrase number is identification information attached to each phrase data. In this embodiment, any identification information can be used, but the storage address of the phrase data 5508 may be used as the phrase number. In this case, the phrase number can be omitted from the phrase data 5508.

The channel is the output channel specified when playing the phrase. The left/right panpot and the vertical panpot are the left/right/top/bottom output balance of each speaker provided in the gaming machine. The volume is the output volume. The song number is the identification number of the audio to be played. When the VDP with built-in sound source 1540a is notified of the song number, the VDP with built-in sound source 1540a reads out the sound source data corresponding to the song number from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b, and reproduces the audio. Loop is a designation of whether or not to repeatedly reproduce audio. Stereo is a designation of whether or not to output in stereo.

Each scheduler 5502 is associated with a work 5507 for operation management. The work 5507 stores various information shown in the figure. The operating state indicates whether each layer is in operation. The voice number represents the number of scheduler data 5505 in operation. In this embodiment, the start address of scheduler data 5505 is used. The sound pointer is the address of scheduler data 5505 being executed by scheduler 5502. In the example shown in FIG. 153, as the process progresses, the value of the sound pointer sequentially shifts to SA2 and SA3. The timer value represents the waiting time until the next function is executed. The wait time is set when the wait time is specified in the scheduler data 5505, and is sequentially subtracted as time passes. The sound module 5500 executes the following function when this value becomes 0.

The number of call nests and the number of loop nests represent the number of nests of calls and loops that are multiplexly specified by the scheduler data 5505 and phrase numbers. That is, for example, in the process after address SA31 called by the "call" function (first call) of address SA2, if scheduler data 5505 of another address is called by the "call" function (second call), the call nest The number becomes 2. After completing the second call and returning to the first call, the number of call nests is reduced to one. The same goes for loops. The call return address is a return address from the called destination and is provided according to the number of call nests. The loop start address is the start address of the loop range, and the loop count is the number of times the loop is repeated. The loop start address and the like are provided according to the number of loop nests.

[18-4-4. Overview of lamp output control]
Next, the function of the lamp module that controls the output of the lamp will be explained. FIG. 154 is an explanatory diagram showing the functions of the lamp module 5600 of this embodiment. The lamp module 5600 receives instructions from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes processing specified by the function included in the scheduler data, and controls lamp output, that is, lighting and blinking of the lamp. Like the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600 can also accept requests from multiple schedulers 5602 and process them. Each scheduler 5602 is provided in association with a lamp layer for lamps. Further, each scheduler 5602 is provided with a work 5603 for operation management. The contents of the work 5603 will be described later.

When the scheduler execution unit 5060 specifies the lamp operation number based on the scheduler control information, it refers to the lamp operation number table and specifies the scheduler data 5601 to be executed. The lamp operation number table is a table in which lamp operation numbers are associated with lamp pointers and lamp layers. In this embodiment, the lamp operation number corresponds to the storage address of the lamp operation number table. Although it is possible to use any identification information for the lamp operation number, as in the case of the performance number described above, using a storage address reduces the capacity of the lamp operation number table and reduces the processing load when referencing the table. It has the advantage of being possible.

The ramp pointer specifies the storage address of scheduler data 5601. In this embodiment, the address LA1 is stored in the lamp pointer [1].

The scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters similarly to the production data (FIG. 152). Functions used in scheduler data 5505 for controlling the lamp will be described later with reference to FIG. 156.

In the example shown in FIG. 154, a "call" function is defined at address LA2. After executing a series of blocks starting from address LA31 (not shown), scheduler execution unit 5060 processes address LA3 following address LA2.

At address LA3, gradation pattern settings are defined. Scheduler execution unit 5060 sets gradation pattern data 5606 stored at address LA11 specified by the parameter. Each lamp scheduler 5602 is associated with a gradation scheduler 5604, which lights the lamp at the specified gradation data 1, and when the time specified by the timer value has elapsed, turns on the lamp at the gradation data 2. lights up. Here, an example is shown in which two types of gradation data are specified, but even if three or more types of gradation data are specified, the lamp is lit while switching the gradation data sequentially at the time interval of the timer value. By preparing a plurality of gradation pattern settings after address LA12, it becomes possible to light the lamp in various gradation patterns while changing the switching timer value between gradation data. It is also possible to provide a loop within the gradation pattern data. The gradation scheduler 5604 finishes lighting the lamp after executing a series of processes for addresses LA11 to LA1n. The ramp scheduler 5602 returns to processing the address LA3 of the scheduler data 5601, and continues processing the next address until it stops (address LAn).

Each scheduler 5602 is associated with a work 5603 for operation management. The work 5603 stores various information shown in the figure. The scheduler status indicates whether the scheduler is activated or not. The operation pattern number represents the number of scheduler data 5601 in operation. In this embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5601 is used. The scheduler timer represents the waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified in the scheduler data, and is subtracted sequentially as time passes. The lamp performs the following function when this value becomes 0. The gradation data timer represents the waiting time until the next gradation data is executed when the gradation pattern data 5606 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 154, when executing the gradation data specified in address LA11, when the timer value set in the gradation data timer becomes 0, the transition from gradation data 1 to gradation data 2 occurs. However, when the timer value becomes 0 again, the processing of address LA11 is ended and the processing shifts to address LA12.

The ramp pointer is the address of scheduler data 5601 being executed by scheduler 5602. In the example shown in FIG. 154, as the process progresses, the value of the lamp pointer sequentially shifts to LA1, LA2, and LA3. The gradation data pointer is the address of the gradation pattern data 5606 being executed by the gradation scheduler 5604. In the example shown in the figure, as the process progresses, the value of the gradation data pointer sequentially shifts to LA11 and LA12. The loop count is the number of times the loop is repeated, and the loop start address is the start address of the loop range. As with sounds, loops may be allowed to nest.

[18-4-5. Overview of drive control]
Next, the function of the drive device module 5700 that controls the operation of the drive device will be explained. The drive device is, for example, a stepping motor. Since the control is the same as that of the lamp module 5600, illustration thereof is omitted. The driving device module 5700 receives instructions from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes processing specified by the function included in the scheduler data, and controls the operation of the driving device. The drive module 5700 can also accept and process requests from multiple schedulers.

Control items for the drive device include, for example, the amount of movement (rotation step angle of the stepping motor), movement time, movement speed (rotation speed of the motor), excitation method, trapezoidal drive, rotation direction, and the like. Furthermore, instructions to execute a return operation to return to the home position and instructions to stop the mechanical end (when the movable range of the drive device is mechanically limited, stop it with the force applied to the limit position of the movable range) are given. included. Note that in the trapezoidal drive, the rotational speed is not changed in a step function manner when starting and stopping rotation, but is changed at a predetermined angular acceleration.

Scheduler data is composed of functions and parameters. The functions used in the scheduler data to control the drives are discussed below in FIG. 157.

[18-5. function]
An example of using a function in a module used for performance control has been described above. Here, other functions will be explained. 155 to 157 are diagrams showing examples of functions in performance control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. As mentioned above, the functions are classified into the following groups: sequence control, lamps, sounds, motors and users. The functions belonging to each group will be explained below.

[18-5-1. Function details (sequence control)]
The functions belonging to the sequence control group are mainly functions for controlling the flow of the performance. FIG. 155 shows an example of a sequence control function. An overview of each function will be explained below.

"STOP" is a function representing the end of scheduler data. "NOP" is a wait function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions by specifying the number of executions as a parameter. The time corresponding to the number of executions varies depending on the processing cycle in which the "NOP" function is executed, and if it is executed in frame cycles, one frame is approximately 33.334 milliseconds in this embodiment, so the number of executions is If you specify 30, you will wait for about 1 second, and if you want to execute at a 1ms cycle, if you specify 30 as the number of executions, you will wait for about 30ms. "NOP_F_VALUE" uses the number of executions (number of frames), scheduler memory number, mask value, and comparison value as parameters, and when the conditions based on the scheduler memory number, mask value, and comparison value are met, the "NOP_F_VALUE" function ends and the condition is If the condition is not met, this is a conditional wait function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions.

"MEMW" is a function that takes the target scheduler work number and value as parameters and writes the specified value into the corresponding scheduler work area. "LOOPST" is a function for performing repetitive processing (loop), and specifies the beginning of the loop and sets the number of loops as a parameter. Note that if the number of loops is set to "0", an infinite loop will occur. "LOOP" is a function for specifying the end of a repeating process (loop).

"RET" is a function for returning processing to the calling block (function data). The pointer value saved by the "call" function is set in the performance management table. "CALL" is the above-mentioned "call" function, and executes processing from a specified address (block), and information specifying the call destination, such as an address value and a label, is set as a parameter. In "CALL", the pointer value of the next function to be executed is saved, and the address of the called destination is set in the effect management pointer. After executing the called process, the address saved by the above-mentioned "RET" function is set in the performance management pointer, and the previous process is resumed.

"SUBC" selects a process to be called (block to be executed) based on the target scheduler work number specified in the parameter and the branch table, using the scheduler work number value as an index, and executes the selected process. That is, it executes a "call" function based on specified conditions. A specific example using "SUBC" will be described later with reference to FIG. 160. When the called process is completed by the "SUBC" function, the process returns to the calling process (the process following the "SUBC" function).

"SUBJ" selects a process to be called (block to be executed) based on the target scheduler work number and table specified in the parameter, using the scheduler work number value as an index, and executes the selected process. That is, a "JUMP" function, which will be described later, is executed based on the specified conditions. A specific example using "SUBJ" will be described later with reference to FIG. 161. It does not return to the process of the caller that executed the "SUBJ" function, but continues the process of the callee as it is. "JUMP" sets the address specified by the parameter to the performance management pointer, and continues processing from the specified address or label.

"REQ" is a function for starting another scheduler specified by a parameter. A specific example using "REQ" will be described later with reference to FIG. 162. "REQF", like "REQ", is a function to start another scheduler specified by the parameter, and other scheduler data will not be overwritten until the overwrite prohibition time specified by the parameter has elapsed. Prohibits starting with With "REQ", control using multiple scheduler data can be executed in parallel. On the other hand, "REQF" allows the process of the scheduler data to be executed to be executed independently for a specified period, for example, when initializing an accessory, other scheduler data that operates the accessory is executed and controlled. This can be prevented from becoming incapacitated.

[18-5-2. Function details (lamp)]
The functions belonging to the lamp group are functions for controlling the flow of lamp effects. FIG. 156 shows an example of functions related to lamp control, and an overview of each function will be explained.

"HPLAY" is a function for executing lamp gradation data reproduction processing for lighting a lamp based on gradation data specified by a parameter. In "HPLAY", even if the lamp is being reproduced with the same gradation data, it is reset and the lamp reproduction is started from the beginning when the function is executed. The gradation data is specified by setting the gradation pattern data address, and the execution of the gradation data is instructed by clearing the gradation data timer in the work 5603.

"KPLAY", like "HPLAY", is a function for executing lamp gradation data reproduction processing for lighting a lamp based on gradation data specified by a parameter. In "KPLAY", if the lamp is being played back with the same gradation data, the running lamp playback is continued without being reset.

"HPLAY2" is a function that specifies a layer in addition to gradation data using parameters and executes ramp gradation data reproduction processing. The processing is the same as "HPLAY". "KPLAY2", like "HPLAY2", is a function that specifies a layer in addition to gradation data using parameters and executes ramp gradation data reproduction processing. The processing is similar to "KPLAY".

"HPLAY" and "KPLAY" execute a specified lamp gradation data reproduction process that reproduces lamp gradation data specified by a parameter. If the lamp gradation data has already been played, when playing with "HPLAY", the reproduction of the lamp gradation data is interrupted and the same lamp gradation data is played from the beginning, and when playing with "KPLAY", the lamp gradation data is Continue playing without interruption. That is, while the lamp gradation data is being reproduced, no particular processing is executed even if the gradation data of the same lamp is executed using "KPLAY".

``HPLAY2'' has the same functions as ``HPLAY'' except that in addition to the functions of ``HPLAY'' described above, the layer for reproducing lamp gradation data is specified by a parameter, and the layer is specified by a parameter.

"KPLAY2" has the same functions as "KPLAY" except that in addition to the functions of "KPLAY" described above, the layer for reproducing the lamp gradation data is specified by a parameter, and the layer is specified by a parameter.

[18-5-3. Function details (sound)]
Functions belonging to the sound group are functions for controlling sound output. Examples of functions related to sound control are listed in FIGS. 156 and 157, and an overview of each function will be explained.

"SPLAY" is a function for executing a phrase playback process that outputs sound based on a phrase number specified by a parameter. In "SPLAY", even if the sound of the same phrase number is being played, it is reset and the sound starts playing from the beginning when the function is executed. "SXPLAY", like "SPLAY", is a function for executing a phrase playback process that outputs sound based on a phrase number specified by a parameter. In "SXPLAY", if a sound with the same phrase number is being played, the sound is continued to be played without being reset. "STOP_PH" is a function for executing phrase stop processing that stops the reproduction of sound based on the phrase number specified by the parameter.

"PAN_PH" starts the currently playing phrase specified by the parameter from the audio output coordinate position at the start of the "PAN_PH" function execution, and ends the panpot using the transition time and panpot end coordinate position also specified by the parameter. This is a function to move the audio output coordinate position in a specified transition time to the coordinate position. In addition to the functions of the "PAN_PH" function, "PAN_PH2" also allows you to specify the panpot start coordinate position with a parameter, and like the "PAN_PH" function, the audio output coordinates of the target phrase are determined at the start of function execution. This is a function for moving the audio output coordinate position from the panpot start coordinate position specified by a parameter to the panpot end coordinate position in a specified transition time.

"VOL_FADE_PH" specifies the currently playing phrase specified by the parameter from the volume value at the start of the "VOL_FADE_PH" function execution to the fade end volume value using the transition time and fade end volume value also specified by the parameter. This is a function to increase/decrease the volume value at the specified transition time. In addition to the functions of the "VOL_FADE_PH" function, "VOL_FADE_PH2" also allows you to specify the fade start volume value with a parameter.Similar to the "VOL_FADE_PH" function, the volume value of the target phrase is set as a parameter at the start of function execution. This function increases or decreases the volume value from the fade start volume value specified by the fade start volume value to the fade end volume value in the specified transition time.

“VOL_PH” is a function that increases or decreases the volume value of the phrase that is being reproduced and is specified by the parameter, using the volume value specified by the parameter. "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH" is a function that mutes the volume of a phrase specified by a parameter. “VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH” is a function that cancels muting of the volume of a phrase specified by a parameter.

"SCPLAY" and "SXCPLAY" execute specified channel music reproduction processing for reproducing the phrase corresponding to the phrase number specified in the parameter on the specified channel. When the same phrase has already been reproduced, when reproducing by ``SCPLAY'', the reproduction of the phrase is interrupted and the same phrase is reproduced from the beginning, and when reproducing by ``SXCPLAY'', the reproduction of the phrase is continued without interruption. That is, even if the same phrase is executed using "SXCPLAY" while the phrase is being reproduced, no particular processing is executed.

"PAN_CH" performs panpot targeting a channel, whereas "PAN_PH" described above performs panpot targeting a phrase. The channel is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to channel. Other than that, the processing is the same as "PAN_PH". Regarding "PAN_CH2", while the aforementioned "PAN_PH2" performs panpot targeting a phrase, "PAN_PH2" performs panpot targeting a channel, except that ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to ch. ” and the processing remains the same.

"VOL_FADE_CH" performs a fade for a channel, whereas the aforementioned "VOL_FADE_PH" performs a fade for a phrase. The channel is specified by a parameter, and the phrase changes to a channel. Processing remains unchanged. Regarding "VOL_FADE_CH2", while the aforementioned "VOL_FADE_PH2" performs a fade targeting a phrase, "VOL_FADE_PH2" performs a fade targeting a channel, except that the channel is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to a channel. Processing remains unchanged.

"VOL_CH" increases or decreases the volume value for a channel, whereas the aforementioned "VOL_PH" increases or decreases the volume value for a phrase. The channel is specified by a parameter, and the phrase changes to a channel. Other than that, the processing is the same as "VOL_PH". Regarding "VOL_MUTE_ON_CH", while the aforementioned "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH" performs muting for a phrase, it mutes for a channel. The channel is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to a channel. Other than that, the processing is the same as "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH". Regarding "VOL_MUTE_OFF_CH", while the aforementioned "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" cancels muting for a phrase, it cancels muting for a channel. The processing is the same as "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" except that "CH" is changed to "CH".

[18-5-4. Function details (motor)]
Functions belonging to the motor group are functions for controlling the output of motors and solenoids. FIG. 157 shows an example of functions related to motor control, and an overview of each function will be explained.

"MPLAY" executes a motor regeneration process that causes the motor to regenerate an operation based on the motor data number specified as a parameter. "MMPLAY" executes a motor regeneration process that causes the motor specified by the parameter to reproduce an operation based on the motor data number. "SOL_ON" executes a solenoid ON process that causes the solenoid to perform an operation based on the solenoid data number specified as a parameter. "SOL_OFF" executes a solenoid OFF process that causes the solenoid to stop operating based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter.

[18-5-5. Function details (user)]
The functions that belong to the user's group are functions for executing the controls that do not belong to the groups described above. FIG. 157 shows an example of these functions, and an overview of each function will be explained.

"MBUF_SET" executes a motor output buffer scheduler work value setting process that sets a scheduler work value in the motor output buffer. "COMMAND" and "COMMAND0" are processes for issuing commands from within the scheduler. "COMMAND" issues a command to the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source. For example, a command to start drawing is issued to the liquid crystal display device. On the other hand, the command issued by "COMMAND0" is analyzed by the command analysis module 5200 and performs the same operation as the main command. "MEMC" executes scheduler memory copy processing to copy the contents of the work area of the scheduler being executed to the work area of another scheduler.

[18-6. Scheduler]
Next, the scheduler that calls each function will be explained. The scheduler is used to execute scheduler data, which is a data string that defines functions necessary for executing a series of processes in the order of execution. One or more schedulers are provided for each management purpose, but all schedulers can execute all functions; a scheduler for sound executes functions related to lamps, and a scheduler for ornaments executes functions related to lamps. There is no difference other than the processing cycle (frame or 1 ms) among the schedulers provided for each application, which can execute sound functions, and it is also possible to execute all functions in a mixed manner. Furthermore, there is no limit to the number of schedulers that can be executed, and multiple registered schedulers can be executed simultaneously.

FIG. 158 is a diagram showing an example of the scheduler definition of this embodiment. Schedulers can be conveniently classified according to state transitions or devices to be controlled. An overview of typical types of schedulers will be explained below.

First, to explain an example of a scheduler related to state transition, there is a special figure state scheduler (special figure state SCH, TOK_SCH) for executing main state transition scheduler data that controls the transition of the game state of the entire game. In the production control on the peripheral control board 1510, the transition of the game state is controlled based on commands received from the main control board 1310. The processing cycle of the special figure state scheduler is 1f (frame).

Further, there is a sub-state scheduler (sub-state SCH, SUB_SCH) for executing sub-state scheduler data that controls the transition of the internal state (sub-internal state) in the peripheral control board 1510. The internal state changes when a predetermined condition is met, and for example, changes to another state when the player operates a performance button, wins a performance execution lottery, or when a predetermined period of time elapses from the start of the fluctuation. do. The processing cycle of the sub-state scheduler is 1f (frames).

The scheduler that targets sounds includes a background display that controls the output of sounds that are output along with the display of background and symbol variations, a scheduler (SND_SCH01) that executes symbol sound scheduler data, and a scheduler (SND_SCH01) that is output when a preview effect is executed. There is a scheduler (SND_SCH02, 03) that controls the output of the sound when the announcement is made by the accessory, and a scheduler (SND_SCH04) that controls the output of the sound when the preview is executed. The processing cycle of the scheduler that targets sound is 1f (frames).

Similar to the sound-related scheduler, the lamp-related scheduler includes a scheduler (LMP_SCH01) for executing the background and symbol lamp scheduler data that controls the lighting and blinking of the lamp in accordance with the background display and fluctuating display of symbols. ), a scheduler (LMP_SCH02, 03) that controls lighting and blinking of lamps when a preview performance is executed, and a scheduler (LMP_SCH04) that controls lighting and blinking of a lamp when a preview performance is executed using accessories. The processing cycle of the scheduler that targets lamps is 1f (frames).

Furthermore, a scheduler that controls sounds and lamps in conjunction with each other is also defined. Such a scheduler includes a sound/lamp notification layer that outputs sounds and lights/flashes lamps in order to notify the outside of bulb outs, bulb jams, etc., and alarms due to abnormality detection by magnetic sensors, etc. There is a scheduler (INF_SCH01-03) for executing scheduler data for each layer. There is also a general-purpose sound/lamp scheduler (SNDLMP_SCH01 to SNDLMP_SCH05) that is used for general purposes to execute effects that link sound output and lighting/blinking of lamps. The processing cycle of these schedulers is 1f (frame).

Schedulers targeting motors include a scheduler (MOTSYS_SCH) for executing motor system scheduler data for executing system operations, and a scheduler (MOTSYS_SCH) for executing motor ram clear scheduler data for setting RAM clearing. MOTRAM_SCH), a scheduler (MOTINI_SCH) for executing motor accessory initialization scheduler data for initializing the arrangement of accessories, etc., and a scheduler (MOTINI_SCH) for executing motor accessory correction scheduler data for correcting the position of accessories. There is a scheduler (MOTHOS_SCH) for executing the actions of the accessories based on the performance, etc.

The scheduler for executing the actions of the accessories based on the performance, etc. includes a scheduler (MOT_SCH01-05) for controlling the actions of specific accessories, and a general-purpose scheduler that is used regardless of the type of the accessory. There is a scheduler (MOT_SCH05-10).

Note that the processing cycle of the scheduler that targets motors is 1 ms (milliseconds), which is shorter than the processing cycle of the scheduler that targets game state management, sounds, and lamps (1f = approximately 33.334 ms in this embodiment). It has become.

Note that although the number of schedulers that control each target device is fixed in this embodiment, the number of schedulers may be controlled to be dynamically increased or decreased in accordance with the gaming state or advance notice. This makes it possible to start each scheduler without depending on the number of accessories and the like provided in the gaming machine or the number of performances, and it is possible to reduce restrictions for executing performances.

[18-7. Application example of scheduler data (effect 1)]
Above, we have explained the functions used in production control and the types and functions of schedulers that combine these functions to perform a series of controls. Below, we will explain specific application examples of scheduler data and functions with reference to the drawings. explain.

[18-7-1. Performance overview]
FIG. 159A is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the accessory controlled using the scheduler data of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 159A, the game board 5 of this embodiment includes a logo accessory 5001, a star accessory 5002 (left star accessory 5002a, middle star accessory 5002b, right star accessory 5002c), and a hatchet accessory 5003. is placed.

The logo accessory 5001 is arranged at the upper left of the gaming area. When the logo accessory 5001 operates, it falls (moves) from the initial position (upper stage position) to an intermediate position, and returns to the initial position after the performance ends. Further, the logo accessory 5001 can not only move vertically, but also vibrate vertically and horizontally before and after the movement.

The star accessory 5002 is placed above the game area, the left star accessory 5002a is placed on the left side, the middle star accessory 5002b is placed in the center, and the right star accessory 5002c is placed on the right side. Each star accessory 5002 can operate independently, and one or more star accessories 5002 operate at a predetermined timing depending on the performance content.

The left star accessory 5002a moves to the lower left and can move to a position slightly lower left in the center of the game area. Moreover, the middle star accessory 5002b can be moved downward to a position slightly above the center of the game area. The right star accessory 5002c can be moved to the lower right and to a position slightly lower right in the center of the game area. Each star object 5002 may be stopped before moving to the final destination position, or may be returned to an intermediate position and stopped after reaching the final destination position.

The hatchet accessory 5003 is placed above the center of the game area. The hatchet accessory 5003 can be dropped (moved) from an initial position (upper position) to an intermediate position and a lower position. Depending on the operation of the performance button by the player or the lottery result of the hatchet accessory preview performance, the robot moves from the initial position to the intermediate position, stops once, then moves to the lower position, or moves from the initial position to the lower position all at once. The operating mode is set. Similar to the logo accessory 5001, the hatchet accessory 5003 can also be made to vibrate vertically and horizontally before and after movement.

Next, the flow of the preview performance executed with one symbol change will be explained. First, the step-up notice, button (BTN) cut-in notice, group notice, star feature notice, and button (BTN) logo feature drop notice will be described with reference to FIG. 159B. Note that the flow of the preview performance including the machete preview performance will be explained with reference to FIG. 169.

FIG. 159B is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution timing of a notice effect executed in a series of variable displays from the start of variation to the stop of special symbols in this embodiment, and the scheduler and scheduler data used at this time. be. In the series of variation displays shown in FIG. 159B, a step-up notice and a button (BTN) cut-in notice are executed in the first half of the variation. After that, a reach occurs, and in the latter half of the change, a group notice, a star feature notice, and a button (BTN) logo feature drop notice are executed. For each preview performance, scheduler data is executed to control lamp lighting, sound output, image output, movement of accessories, etc.

Hereinafter, a part of the scheduler data for executing each preview effect will be extracted, and the control and constituent functions using the scheduler data will be explained. Specifically, the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" (Figure 160) that controls the lamp in the step-up notice, the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" (Figure 161) that controls the lamp in the button cut-in notice, and the star feature in the star feature notice. The motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" (FIGS. 162 to 164) that controls the operation of the logo accessory 5002 and the motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" (FIG. 165) that controls the operation of the logo accessory 5001 in the button logo accessory fall notice will be explained.

[18-7-2. Lamp control during step-up notice]
In the step-up notice of this embodiment, the lighting mode of a predetermined lamp is controlled to change in stages according to the degree of expectation (the step-up notice lottery result value). As shown in FIG. 159B, the step-up notice lamp scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" belongs to notice group 01 and is driven by the scheduler for notice group 01 lamp scheduler data (lamp SCH notice 01) "LMP_SCH02".

FIG. 160 is a diagram illustrating the contents of scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" that controls lighting and blinking of lamps in the step-up notice of this embodiment.

When the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" is started, the function "SUBC:YKK_STP:TBL_LMP_STP" is executed first. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" and is executed using the target scheduler work number "YKK_STP" and the step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the specified step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" and identifies the address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the step-up notice work area "YKK_STP". The step-up notice work area "YKK_STP" stores the lottery result value of the step-up notice, and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP".

The step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" stores addresses of step-up notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 indicating addresses of scheduler data are stored. In addition, SUBC_NON is an address for a dummy call that indicates that no processing will be performed, and by preparing an address for a dummy call, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the winning notification is not won. . SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 are addresses of scheduler data for executing a step-up notice corresponding to the step-up number (1 to 4).

In this embodiment, the step-up notice work area "YKK_STP" stores a lottery result value corresponding to a step-up notice with a step-up number of 4, and the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is executed. The scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" specifies the gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step, executes the ramp gradation data reproduction process (KPLAY), and waits for 90 frames (approximately 3 seconds) for each step. Execute processing. As a result, in each step, the lamp is turned on and blinks in a corresponding gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is driven using the scheduler "LMP_SCH01" for background and symbol lamp scheduler data.

Thereafter, the function "RET" is executed in the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4", thereby returning to the process of the calling source (scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP"). Furthermore, the function "STOP" is executed and the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP" is ended.

In this embodiment, the step-up notice work area "YKK_STP" stores a lottery result value corresponding to a step-up notice with a step-up number of 4, and the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is executed. The scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" specifies the lamp gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step up and executes the lamp gradation data reproduction process (KPLAY) for 90 frames (approximately 3 seconds) for each step. Executes wait processing. As a result, in each step, the lamp is turned on and blinked for 3 seconds in the corresponding lamp gradation pattern. At this time, the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is driven using the scheduler "LMP_SCH02" for advance notice group 01 lamp scheduler data.

Thereafter, the function "RET" is executed in the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4", thereby returning to the next process of the calling source (scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP"). Furthermore, the function "STOP" is executed and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" is ended.

The step-up notice has been described above, but now the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" will be described. First, it is possible to call scheduler data for multiple lottery results with a single action based on the dynamically rewritten work memory contents (in this embodiment, the preview lottery result value). be. Depending on the content of the notice, the range of lottery result values may be several hundreds, and in a two-way branch such as an IF statement, the number of scheduler data for judgment increases and becomes too complex, making it difficult to manage corrections and the like. On the other hand, "SUBC" easily solves the above problem by using the contents of the work memory as an index. Further, in this embodiment, the number of work memory and call address table for branching is one, but by using a plurality of both, complex conditional branching may be processed in one action. Second, since it uses the "CALL" format, it is possible to execute common scheduler data after executing the "SUBC" function, and there is no need to write the scheduler data after branching for the number of branches. By writing one scheduler data, the same process can be executed after all branches. Further, in order to deal with a problem in the program, if the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, the "SUBC" function may be terminated without performing the branching process.

That is, the function "SUBC" can select scheduler data at a branch destination based on values stored in the work area from branch destinations previously held in a table format, and call the selected scheduler data. With simple conditional branching, it is necessary to define conditions according to the number of branches and set scheduler data for each branch destination, but with the function "SUBC", branch destinations can be easily added or deleted. , it is possible to easily handle additions and changes to production contents, and improve development efficiency.

[18-7-3. Lamp control during button cut-in notice]
The button cut-in notice of this embodiment is started in the first half of the variation, and is executed until the end by accepting operation input of the effect button by the player within a predetermined period. Further, similarly to the step-up notice, the lighting mode of a predetermined lamp is controlled according to the expectation level (the lottery result value of the button cut-in notice).

The button cut-in notice belongs to notice group 02, and the lamp scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is driven by the scheduler for notice group 02 lamp scheduler data (lamp SCH notice 02) "LMP_SCH03", as shown in FIG. 159B. Since it belongs to a different notice group from the step-up notice and the scheduler data is driven by a different scheduler, it is possible to execute the notice in parallel.

FIG. 161 is a diagram illustrating the contents of scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" that controls the lamp in the button cut-in notice of this embodiment.

When the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is started, the function "KPLAY:LMP_SCH03:PTA_CUT_STA" is first executed, and then the wait process "NOP:30" for 30 frames (approximately 1 second) is executed. As a result, the designated lamp lights up (blinks) for one second based on the gradation pattern data "PTA_CUT_STA". At this time, the lamp scheduler "LMP_SCH03" is used.

Subsequently, a 3-second loop process is executed in order to accept the input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. Since each loop corresponds to one frame, 90 loops corresponds to 3 seconds. In the loop processing, functions from "LOOPST" indicating the start of the loop to "LOOP" indicating the end of the loop are executed a maximum of a specified number of times. Therefore, the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_LMP_CUB" is executed a maximum of 90 times.

To explain the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_LMP_CUB", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed using the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB" and identifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN". Button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN" stores the operation status of the production button, and when the production button is not operated, "0: Button OFF", and when the production button is operated, "1: Button ON" is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record in the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". Further, the contents of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN" are rewritten with a button processing program other than the scheduler data.

While "0: Button OFF" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the lamp scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF" is selected in the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB" when the button cut-in notice button is OFF. Ru. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_LMP_CUB" (function "LOOP") of the calling source scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT". Therefore, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the loop processing 90 times, the loop processing is exited, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" ends.

On the other hand, when "1: Button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", in the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB", the button cut-in notice button ON lamp scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON" is set. is selected. The contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON" are the function "SUBJ:YKK_CUT:TBL_LMP_CUT", and the scheduler work area index branch jump "SUBJ" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_CUT" and the button cut-in notice branch jump address table "TBL_LMP_CUT". is executed as a parameter.

The button cut-in notice branch jump address table "TBL_LMP_CUT" stores addresses of button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBJ_NON, SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 indicating addresses of scheduler data are stored. In addition, SUBJ_NON is an address for a dummy call that indicates that no processing will be performed, and by preparing an address for a dummy call, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the winning notification is not won. . SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 are addresses of scheduler data for executing the lamp lighting pattern (color, lighting time) corresponding to the button cut-in notice lottery result value.

In this embodiment, the button cut-in notice work area "YKK_CUT" stores a lottery result value indicating the button cut-in notice pattern (PTN) 4, and the scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is executed. In the scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4", first, the lamp is lit in red (gradation data pattern "PTA_CUT_RED") by lamp gradation data reproduction processing (KPLAY), and then it continues for 5 seconds by executing wait processing for 150 frames. let At this time, the scheduler data is driven using the lamp scheduler "LMP_SCH03". At this time, the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is driven using the scheduler "LMP_SCH03" for advance notice group 02 lamp scheduler data.

Note that the call to the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is not a CALL but a JUMP, so the execution of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data ends with the function "STOP" and the calling scheduler "SUBC_LMP_YKK_CUT" is returned. do not. Therefore, there are two types of termination of scheduler "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT": when the "STOP" function included in "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is executed, and when the "STOP" function included in schedulers "SUBJ_LMP_CUT1" to "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is executed. There is.

The button cut-in notice has been described above, but now the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch jump "SUBJ" will be described. First, it is possible to call scheduler data for multiple lottery results with a single action based on the dynamically rewritten work memory contents (in this embodiment, the preview lottery result value). Depending on the content of the notice, the range of lottery result values may be in the hundreds, and with bifurcations such as IF statements, the number of scheduler data for judgment increases and becomes too complex, making it impossible to manage corrections etc. . "SUBJ" easily solves the above problem by using the contents of the work memory as an index. Further, in this embodiment, the number of work memory and call address table for branching is one, but by using a plurality of both, complex conditional branching may be processed in one action. Second, since it is in the ``JUMP'' format, different processes can be executed depending on the branched scheduler data after executing the ``SUBJ'' function. Also, like "SUBC", in order to deal with program defects, if the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, the "SUBC" function is terminated without performing branch processing. You can do it like this.

In other words, like the function "SUBC", the function "SUBJ" selects the scheduler data of the branch destination based on the values stored in the work area from the branch destination held in advance in a table format, and selects the scheduler data of the selected scheduler data. It becomes possible to transition the processing to , and it is possible to obtain the same effect as the function "SUBC".

Also, unlike the function "SUBC", the function "SUBJ" continues to process the schedule data of the callee and does not return to the caller's process, so it is suitable for executing processes alternatively. ing. For example, when the content of the performance to be executed differs depending on whether or not the performance button is operated, by using the function "SUBJ", it is possible to suppress the performance from being executed redundantly. On the other hand, since the function "SUBC" returns to the process using the scheduler data of the caller, it is possible to execute the shared post-processing after the process of the callee is executed, and the process can be simplified.

Therefore, by using the function "SUBC" and the function "SUBJ", it is possible to simplify the structure of scheduler data and create a structure that can flexibly accommodate processing branches. Furthermore, additions and changes can be easily made by simply changing the branch destination of the table format, which improves development efficiency and makes it easier to respond to changes in gaming machine specifications.

[18-7-4. Motor control in star announcement]
Next, control of the star feature notice that is executed in the second half of the variation in this embodiment will be explained. When a reach occurs in the variable display of the special symbol and moves to the latter half of the variation, a group notice occurs, and a star feature notice is executed independently of the group notice. The star accessory notice includes multiple types of star accessory 5002 (in this embodiment, three types: left star accessory 5002a, middle star accessory 5002b, and right star accessory 5002c) that can be operated by a driving body (motor). The expected level of symbol fluctuation is notified by the operation. Specifically, the more star objects 5002 appear, the higher the expectation level becomes.

The star object notice of this embodiment is executed by driving the star object notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" with the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH02" (scheduler for left star object scheduler data), as shown in FIG. 159B. be done. In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, a dedicated scheduler (MOT_SCH02 to 04) for operating the star accessory 5002 is provided in advance, but it is also possible to use a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH05 to 09). .

FIGS. 162 to 164 are diagrams for explaining the contents of scheduler data for controlling the motor in the star feature announcement of this embodiment. FIG. 162 shows the overall flow and scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" that controls the left star accessory 5002a, FIG. 163 shows the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" that controls the right star accessory 5002c, and FIG. 164 shows the scheduler data that controls the middle star accessory 5002b. It is a figure explaining data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is started, the function "SUBC:YKK_HYA:TBL_MOT_HYA" is executed first. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" and is executed using the target scheduler work number "YKK_HYA" and the star preview branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the specified star feature notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" and identifies the address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the star feature notice work area "YKK_HYA". . The star feature notice work area "YKK_HYA" stores the lottery result value of the star feature notice, and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the star feature notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA".

The star feature advance branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" stores addresses of star feature appearance scheduler data. Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 indicating addresses of scheduler data are stored. In addition, SUBC_NON is an address for a dummy call that indicates that no processing will be performed, and by preparing an address for a dummy call, it is possible to make the accessory inactive when the preview is not won. There is. SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 are the addresses of scheduler data for executing the star accessory notice. Specifically, SUBC_MOT_HYA1 is for the left star accessory 5002a only, and SUBC_MOT_HYA2 is for the left star accessory 5002a and the right star accessory 500. 2c, SUBC_MOT_HYA3 is scheduler data for operating all three types of star objects 5002.

In the present embodiment, the star accessory preview work area "YKK_HYA" has a lottery result value indicating that a star accessory preview will be executed to make the left star accessory 5002a, middle star accessory 5002b, and right star accessory 5002c appear. "3" is stored, and scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_HYA3" is executed. In addition, when operating only the left star accessory 5002a, the lottery result value of the star accessory notice is "1", and when operating the left star accessory 5002a and the right star accessory 5002c, the lottery result value of the star accessory notice is set to "1". “2” is set as the result value.

The scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_HYA3" first specifies the parameter "PTA_HYA_LEF" indicating the pattern of appearance motion of the left star accessory 5002a, and executes the function "MPLAY" corresponding to the motor regeneration process. At this time, the function "MPLAY" is executed by the motor scheduler "MOT_SHC02" which is executing the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1".

Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the right star ornament 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" using the function "REQ". The function "REQ" is a function for executing scheduler data specified by a parameter using a scheduler also specified by a parameter. Here, the right star accessory 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is executed using the scheduler "MOT_SHC03" for right star accessory 5002c scheduler data. Similarly, the function "REQ" executes the Nakaboshi accessory 5002b appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" using the scheduler "MOT_SHC04" for the Nakaboshi accessory 5002b scheduler data. In addition, in this embodiment, the motor regeneration process (function "MPLAY") for operating the right star accessory 5002c and the middle star accessory 5002b is executed within the same frame as the motor regeneration process for the left star accessory 5002a. ing. As described above, each star accessory 5002 can be controlled in parallel by executing scheduler data for operating each star accessory 5002 using different schedulers.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes wait processing "NOP:300" for 300 frames (10 seconds). During this wait time, the left star accessory 5002a operates in the specified manner. After the wait processing is completed, the function "RET" is executed to return to the calling source star feature notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1", and the function "stop" terminates the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1".

Next, control of the right star accessory 5002c will be described with reference to FIG. 163. The right star accessory 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is executed using the right star accessory 5002c scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC03" specified during execution by the function "REQ".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is started, as shown in FIG. 163, the parameter "PTA_HYA_RGT" indicating the appearance operation mode (pattern) of the right star accessory 5002c is specified and the motor regeneration process "MPLAY" is executed. . Subsequently, wait processing "NOP:300" for 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This wait time becomes the operation time of the right star accessory 5002c. After the wait process is completed, the process is terminated by executing the function "STOP" without returning to the process of the calling scheduler data.

Finally, control of the middle star accessory 5002b will be explained with reference to FIG. 164. The Nakaboshi accessory 5002b appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" is executed using the scheduler "MOT_SHC04" for the Nakaboshi accessory 5002b scheduler data, which is specified when the function "REQ" is executed.

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" is started, as shown in FIG. 164, the parameter "PTA_HYA_MID" indicating the appearance operation mode (pattern) of the middle star accessory 5002b is specified, and the motor regeneration process "MPLAY" is executed. . Subsequently, wait processing "NOP:300" for 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This wait time becomes the operation time of the Nakaboshi accessory 5002b. After the wait process is completed, the process is terminated by executing the function "STOP" without returning to the process of the calling scheduler data.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the scheduler data for operating the left star accessory 5002a, the scheduler data for operating the right star accessory 5002c and the scheduler data for operating the middle star accessory 5002b are set using the function "REQ". By using , it becomes possible to operate each accessory in parallel. That is, the actions of each accessory can be executed in parallel without any special control by executing individually defined scheduler data as needed. The advantage of executing scheduler data in parallel is that a single accessory action can be described without being aware of other schedulers. Furthermore, when a single scheduler performs multiple operations corresponding to a notice pattern, the number of combinations becomes enormous, which makes the scheduler data complex and the amount of data becomes enormous. By calling the scheduler data in parallel, the minimum number of scheduler data can be created and called, making it possible to easily control the scheduler data. In this embodiment, an example in which three types of accessory objects are operated in parallel has been described, but it is possible to execute more accessory objects in parallel if there is no problem with the operation of the accessory objects. As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to operate a plurality of accessory objects in parallel without requiring complicated control, and it is possible to easily realize a variety of performances.

[18-7-5. Motor control during notice of falling logo objects]
Next, a description will be given of the control of the logo accessory fall notice that is executed in the second half of the variation in this embodiment. The logo accessory falling notice is executed independently of the group announcement and the star accessory announcement. The logo accessory falling notice is a preview performance in which a logo accessory 5001 imitating the logo of a gaming machine moves vertically in front of the game board side performance display device 1600, and the probability of a jackpot is higher than usual. It shows that it is high.

As shown in FIG. 159B, the logo accessory falling notice of this embodiment is performed by driving the logo accessory falling notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" with the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" (scheduler for logo accessory scheduler data). executed. Note that it is also possible to operate the logo accessory 5001 using a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH05-09).

FIG. 165 is a diagram illustrating the contents of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" that performs motor control in the logo accessory drop notice of this embodiment.

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is started, the function "MPLAY:PTA_LGO_GAT" is first executed, and then the wait process "NOP:30" for 30 frames (approximately 1 second) is executed. As a result, the specified operation is performed for one second based on the operation pattern data "PTA_LGO_GAT." Specifically, the logo accessory 5001 vibrates. At this time, the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used.

Subsequently, a 3-second loop process is executed in order to accept the input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. As described above, in loop processing, the functions between "LOOPST" and "LOOP" are repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function "SUBC:YKK_LGO:TBL_YKK_LGO" is executed a maximum of 90 times.

To explain the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed using the target scheduler work number "YKK_LGO" and the button logo accessory drop notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO" as parameters. Ru.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo accessory fall notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO” and determines the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the button logo accessory advance notice work area “YKK_LGO”. Identify. The result of the execution lottery for the button logo accessory falling notice is stored in the button logo accessory notice work area "YKK_LGO", and if the result of the execution lottery for the button logo accessory falling notice is not selected, "0: Not executed", the button If you win the lottery to execute the notice of dropping the logo accessory, "1: Execute the notice of dropping the logo" is set. The result of the execution lottery for the button logo accessory falling notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo accessory falling notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO".

While "0: Not executed" is set in the button logo accessory notice work area "YKK_LGO", in the button logo accessory falling notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", the motor scheduler when the logo accessory falling notice is not executed. Data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC:YKK_LGO:TBL_YKK_LGO" (function "LOOP") of the calling scheduler "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". Therefore, if you are unsuccessful in the execution lottery of the button logo accessory falling notice, the loop process is executed 90 times, and then the loop process is exited and the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" ends. .

On the other hand, if "1: Logo falling notice execution" is set in the button logo accessory notice work area "YKK_LGO", that is, if you win the execution lottery for the button logo accessory falling notice, the button logo accessory falling In the preview lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" is selected when the logo accessory falling notice is executed. The contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" are the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_MOT_LGO", and the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button logo accessory fall notice button branch call address table It is executed using "TBL_MOT_LGO" as a parameter.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO" for announcing the fall of the button logo accessory, and identifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN". As in the case of the button cut-in notice, the operation state of the production button is stored in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", and if the production button is not operated, "0: Button OFF", and if the production button is not operated, the operation status of the production button is stored. In this case, "1: Button ON" is set. The operation state of the production button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo accessory drop notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO".

Button ON_OFF While "0: Button OFF" is set in the work area "YKK_BTN", in the button logo accessory fall notice button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO", when the logo accessory fall notice button is OFF, motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF" is set. ” is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_MOT_LGO" of the calling source scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" (function "RET"). This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". Therefore, even if you win the execution lottery of the button logo accessory falling notice, if no input of the production button is detected during the 90 loop processing, the loop processing will be broken out and the function "STOP" will be activated. is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is completed.

On the other hand, if "1: Button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", in the button logo accessory fall notice button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO", when the logo accessory fall notice button is ON, the motor scheduler Data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON" is selected. The contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON" first execute the function "COMMAND:COM_LGO_ON". The function "COMMAND" is a function for issuing a command when executing scheduler data. Here, the command "COM_LGO_ON" is issued. The command “COM_LGO_ON” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect when the logo accessory 5001 falls, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY:PTA_LGO_DOWN" in the same frame as when the command "COM_LGO_ON" is issued. The parameter "PTA_LGO_DOWN" is pattern data for performing an action of dropping the logo accessory 5001. Further, the function "NOP:120" executes wait processing for 120 frames (approximately 4 seconds). At this time, the logo accessory 5001 performs a falling motion for 3 seconds, and stops at the falling position for the remaining 1 second.

Furthermore, by executing the function "MPLAY:PTA_LGO_INI", the logo accessory 5001 moves from the falling position to the initial position. Subsequently, a wait process of 90 frames (approximately 3 seconds) is executed using the function "NOP:90", during which time the logo accessory 5001 is returned to the initial position. After the wait processing is finished, the execution of the logo accessory falling motion is completed, so the function "MEMW:YKK_LGO:0" is executed, the button logo accessory preview lottery result is rewritten to "0: Not executed", and the calling scheduler The process returns immediately after the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_MOT_LGO" of the data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" (function "RET"). This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". The function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" returns, but the button logo accessory preview lottery result is rewritten to "0: Not executed", so the scheduler data "PTA_LGO_DOWN" that drops the button logo accessory is executed. Instead, the remaining number of loops are processed, and the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is ended by the function "STOP".

As described above, by issuing a command internally when dropping the logo accessory 5001, it is possible to display an effect on the liquid crystal only when the logo accessory 5001 falls and at the timing of the fall of the logo accessory 5001. realizable. In this embodiment, by using the function "COMMAND", it is possible to link multiple types of production devices and execute them as needed at appropriate timings, making it possible to perform more interesting productions. .

In this embodiment, the function "COMMAND" is used to display effects on the LCD of the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source, but by processing the command issued by the function "COMMAND" on the program side, control is transferred from the scheduler to the program. By returning once, performing complex processing that cannot be handled by function commands, and writing the processing results to the work area used by the subsequent scheduler, it is possible to perform processing that cannot normally be controlled by function commands. Furthermore, the advantage of issuing commands within the scheduler data is that the command issuing timing is used as the processing timing, so there is no need for time management or execution determination by the program. Furthermore, it is possible to interactively process external inputs by the user (buttons, jog dials, touch pads) that are not determined in advance at the start of fluctuation, and issue commands using the function "COMMAND" to perform processing.

In addition, in this embodiment, the function "COMMAND" is a function to send a command with a fixed value, but instead of a fixed value, it specifies a work area and sends the contents of the work area as a command. You can.

[18-8. Application example of scheduler data (at power on)]
Next, scheduler data executed in the peripheral control board 1510 when the gaming machine is powered on will be explained. Here, a description will be given of control from when the gaming machine is powered on until the game starts and the first variable display starts.

[18-8-1. Outline of processing]
FIG. 166 is a diagram illustrating scheduler data executed when the gaming machine of this embodiment is powered on. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the gaming machine is powered on, a power-on command is output from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510.

When the scheduler execution unit 5060 receives the power-on command, it drives the scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON" using the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH".

When the scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON" is executed, the sub-internal state transition scheduler is executed in a predetermined order, and the scheduler data corresponding to the sub-gaming state (sub-internal state) is activated. As the scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON" progresses, the LCD screen displays screens corresponding to the sub-internal status, such as the standby screen, manufacturer demo screen, model demo title screen, and anti-gore screen, as shown in Figure 166. be done. At this time, the main game state is in a standby state. When the standby state ends, the game starts, and when a game ball enters the starting winning hole, the main game state and the sub-internal state transition to the fluctuating state.

[18-8-2. Power-on control]
Next, a configuration for processing various commands and scheduler data will be described. FIG. 167 is a diagram illustrating the configuration for processing commands and scheduler data in the peripheral control board 1510 of the gaming machine of this embodiment, and the relationship between these configurations.

As mentioned above, when the power of the gaming machine is started or when a predetermined event occurs in the gaming control on the main control board 1310, the main command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, and is received by the peripheral control board 1510. Ru. The main command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 of the system module 5100, as described with reference to FIG. 149, and is analyzed by the main command analysis process in the command analysis module. The command analysis module identifies the type of event that occurred through the main command analysis process, starts the corresponding scheduler, and executes the scheduler data.

Also, when the function "COMMAND0" (FIG. 156) is executed and a command is output from the scheduler, the output command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 and analyzed by the main command analysis process, just like the main command. be done.

When a main command or a command output by the function "COMMAND0" is received, a command for executing control on the peripheral control board 1510 is generated by main command analysis processing. The generated commands include commands to start the scheduler and commands to control various production devices (sub-internal output commands).

The command to start the scheduler includes, for example, scheduler data for performing control corresponding to changes in the gaming state on the main control board 1310 and changes in the sub internal state due to the progress of control on the peripheral control board 1510, starting winnings, etc. on the main control board. Scheduler data for executing a performance corresponding to the event notified from 1310, scheduler data defined so that various performance devices operate in a series of modes, etc. are executed. In this embodiment, in addition to activating the scheduler directly from a command, it is also possible to activate another scheduler using the function "REQ" included in the scheduler data.

On the other hand, the command for controlling the presentation device (sub-internal output command) is, for example, a liquid crystal command for displaying a predetermined image on a liquid crystal display device. Commands for controlling the production device are output based on the result of analyzing the main command, as well as by the function "COMMAND" included in the scheduler data. Commands for controlling the presentation device are temporarily stored in the sub-internal output command buffer, and are processed in the order in which they are stored from the beginning of the buffer.

As described above, in this embodiment, by activating other schedulers from the scheduler, it is possible to hierarchically combine and execute a plurality of schedulers by receiving one main command. This makes it possible to componentize various controls on the peripheral control board 1510 in units of scheduler data, and by combining schedulers, it is possible to implement multiple types of effects in parallel while realizing various effects control. It is possible to improve the development efficiency of gaming machines, such as by making debugging work more efficient.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the command output by the function "COMMAND0" makes it possible to standardize command analysis processing. This makes it possible to standardize the logic for selecting scheduler data through command analysis and the logic for determining function parameters, which eliminates the problem of having to manage a huge number of combinations of scheduler data in tables. can be suppressed.

Next, startup of the scheduler and execution of scheduler data when a power-on command is received from the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 168 is a diagram illustrating a process of executing scheduler data when power is turned on in this embodiment.

As explained with reference to FIG. 167, when the gaming machine is powered on and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the power-on command is analyzed by the main command analysis process, and the scheduler The sub-state scheduler is activated by the activation process, and the corresponding scheduler data is sequentially executed. When each scheduler data is executed, a sub-internal state is created by executing the function "COMMAND0" and issuing a command, and furthermore, a lamp or a sound corresponding to the sub-internal state is outputted as necessary.

To specifically explain the scheduler to be executed, first, the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH" is used to execute the state power-on scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON". In the state power-on scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON", a command "COM_STS_TAIKI" for transitioning to the next internal state is issued by the function "COMMANDO", and the scheduler is stopped.

The command "COM_STS_TAIKI" is processed in the "main command analysis process", and the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" is executed using the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY:PTA_LAMP_TAIKI" is executed. Thereby, lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_TAIKI" in the standby state. Thereafter, the function "NOP:900" is executed to enter a standby state for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_MDEMO" to transition to the next internal state, and the scheduler is stopped.

The command "COM_STS_MDEMO" is processed in the "main command analysis process" and the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_MDEMO" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_MDEMO" is executed using the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY:PTA_LAMP_MDEMO" is executed. Thereby, lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_MDEMO" in the manufacturer's demo state. Thereafter, by executing the function "NOP:300", it enters a standby state for 300 frames (10 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_KDEMO" to transition to the next internal state, and the scheduler is stopped.

The command "COM_STS_KDEMO" is processed in the "main command analysis process" and the state model demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_KDEMO" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_KDEMO" is executed using the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY:PTA_LAMP_KDEMO" is executed. As a result, lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_KDEMO" in the model demo state. Thereafter, the function "NOP:900" is executed to enter a standby state for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_GOTO" to transition to the next internal state, and the scheduler is stopped.

The command "COM_STS_KDEMO" is processed in the "main command analysis process" and the state goto prevention scheduler data "SCH_STS_GOTO" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state goto prevention scheduler data "SCH_STS_GOTO" is executed using the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY:PTA_LAMP_GOTO" is executed. Thereby, lighting of the lamp is started based on the lighting pattern of the lamp data "PTA_LAMP_GOTO" in the goto prevention state. Furthermore, by executing the function "SPLAY:PTA_SND_GOTO", reproduction of sound is started based on the sound data "PTA_SND_GOTO" in the goto prevention state. Thereafter, the function "NOP:450" is executed to enter a standby state for 450 frames (15 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_TAIKI" to transition to the next internal state, and the scheduler is stopped.

The command "COM_STS_TAIKI" is processed in the "main command analysis process", and the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed. At this stage, the gaming machine becomes ready to play, starts playing, and loops in this standby state until the game ball wins.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to set the internal state of the peripheral control board 1510 simply by receiving the power-on command transmitted from the main control board. Specifically, the function "COMMAND0" allows control as if the main control board 1310 had issued a command. For example, the initialization command at power-on may have fixed parameters, and is sent from the main control board 1310 by outputting the command with the function "COMMAND0" instead of the main command from the main control board 1310. It becomes possible to reduce the number of main commands. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the game control program of the main control board 1310, which is particularly effective when there is a restriction on the capacity of the game control program.

[18-9. Application example of scheduler data (effect 2)]
Next, an example will be described in which a hatchet accessory falling notice is executed instead of a button cut-in notice and a button logo accessory falling notice. The hatchet accessory falling notice is divided into a first half and a second half, and the first half and second half are executed in conjunction. At this time, control is performed that is different from the control described above in that the parameters used for the first half notice are carried over to the second half notice.

[18-9-1. Performance overview]
FIG. 169 is a diagram showing an example of a preview effect in a series of variable display from the start to the end of the change of the special symbol in this embodiment, and (A) shows the effect executed from the start to the end of the change and the relevant effect. The scheduler data for executing the performance and the scheduler to be executed are shown, and (B) is a diagram illustrating the position of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the hatchet accessory falling notice.

In the series of fluctuation displays shown in FIG. 169(A), a step-up notice and a button (BTN) first half drop notice of a hatchet accessory, which is the first half of a hatchet accessory fall notice, are executed in the first half of the fluctuation. After that, a reach occurs, and in the second half of the fluctuation, a group notice is carried out, followed by a first half fall notice of a button hatchet accessory, which was continued from the first half, and a second half fall notice of a hatchet accessory, which is continued from the first half. For each preview performance, scheduler data is executed to control lamp lighting, sound output, image output, movement of accessories, etc. The contents of the step-up notice are as described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 169(B), the contents of the hatchet accessory fall notice will be explained. As mentioned above, the hatchet accessory fall notice is divided into a button (BTN) hatchet accessory fall notice in the first half and a hatchet accessory fall notice in the second half.

In the first half, the first half of the fall preview of the button machete accessory, the preview performance progresses by operating the performance button. Therefore, even if the player wins the execution lottery for the first half fall notice of the button machete accessory, the falling effect of the hatchet accessory 5003 will not be executed unless the effect button is operated. On the other hand, in the second half, the second half of the hatchet accessory falling notice, the performance is executed based on the result of the execution lottery of the hatchet accessory second half falling notice, regardless of the operation of the performance button.

When the user wins the execution lottery of the first half fall notice of the button hatchet accessory and operates the production button at a predetermined timing, the hatchet accessory 5003 falls to the middle position. Furthermore, if the hatchet accessory 5003 falls to the middle position and wins the execution lottery of the latter half fall notice of the hatchet accessory, the hatchet accessory 5003 falls to the lower position. That is, the hatchet accessory 5003 falls from the top (upper position, initial position) to the center (middle position) in the first half of the hatchet accessory fall notice, and falls to the bottom (lower position) in the second half. In addition, if the hatchet accessory 5003 is won in the lottery for announcing the latter half of the fall, it will fall to the bottom regardless of the position of the hatchet accessory 5003. Further, when the hatchet accessory falling notice ends, the hatchet accessory 5003 returns to the upper position (initial position).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 169(B), the machete accessory falling notice is performed in six different patterns. To be more specific, if the result of the lottery for the first half fall notice of the button machete accessory is non-winning, it does not depend on the operation of the production button, so if the second half fall notice of the hatchet accessory is non-winner (pattern 1) There is a case of winning (pattern 2). In the case of pattern 1, the first half fall notice of the button hatchet accessory and the second half fall notice of the hatchet accessory are non-winning, so the hatchet accessory 5003 does not fall and is maintained without moving from the top. In the case of pattern 2, in the hatchet accessory falling notice, the hatchet accessory 5003 does not fall and is located at the top, but in the latter half of the hatchet accessory falling forecast, the hatchet accessory 5003 is located from the top to the bottom because the execution lottery was won. fall all at once.

If you win the execution lottery of the first half fall notice of the button machete accessory, the presentation mode of the first half fall notice of the button machete accessory differs depending on whether or not you have operated the presentation button. Therefore, the machete accessory fall notice can be executed in four patterns depending on whether or not the performance button is operated and the result of the execution lottery for the hatchet accessory fall notice in the second half.

If you win the lottery for the first half of the button machete accessory to fall and do not operate the production button, and if the result of the lottery for the second half of the hatchet accessory to fall is not a winning result, the hatchet accessory 5003 will not fall. It remains at the top (pattern 3). If you win the execution lottery for the first half of the button machete accessory, operate the performance button, and if the result of the execution lottery for the second half of the hatchet accessory fall notice is non-winning, then when you operate the production button, the hatchet accessory 5003 falls from the top to the middle, and remains in the middle until the hatchet accessory fall notice ends (pattern 4).

If you win the execution lottery for the first half of the button machete accessory to fall and do not operate the production button, and furthermore, if you win the execution lottery for the second half of the hatchet accessory to be announced, the hatchet The hatchet accessory 5003 does not fall and remains at the top until the second half fall notice starts, and falls from the top to the bottom during the second half fall notice (pattern 5). If you win the lottery for the first half of the button machete accessory to fall, operate the production button, and then win the lottery for the second half of the hatchet accessory to fall, when you operate the production button, the hatchet accessory 5003 will appear from the top. It falls to the middle, and then falls from the top to the bottom in the second half of the hatchet accessory (pattern 6).

As described above, six patterns of production modes can appear in the hatchet accessory falling notice of this embodiment, and the scheduler data that controls the operation of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the hatchet accessory falling notice will be described below. Specifically, the button machete accessory fall notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” that controls the operation of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the first half fall notice of the button machete accessory shown in FIG. 169(A), and the second half of the hatchet accessory The second half fall notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" that controls the operation of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the fall notice will be explained.

[18-9-2. Various controls for advance notice of falling machete objects]
FIG. 170 is a diagram illustrating the contents of the button machete accessory first half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" which performs motor control in the button machete accessory first half fall notice which is the first half of the hatchet accessory fall notice of this embodiment. . As mentioned above, if you win the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet accessory falling notice, the function "LOOP" accepts the operation of the production button for 3 seconds, and when the production button is operated, the hatchet accessory 5003 is activated. Execute the performance. If the execution lottery of the first half drop notice of the button machete accessory is not won, or if the performance button is not operated even if the lottery is won, the process ends without operating the machete accessory 5003. The motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used to execute the button machete accessory first half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" is started, first, the function "COMMAND:COM_NTA1_STA" is executed and drawing of the effect for rattling the machete accessory 5003 on the game board side performance display device 1600 is started. After that, the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_GAT" is executed, and then the wait process "NOP:30" for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the specified operation is performed for one second based on the operation pattern data "PTA_NTA_GAT." Specifically, the hatchet accessory 5003 vibrates rattling.

Subsequently, a 3-second loop process is executed in order to accept the input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. As described above, in loop processing, the functions between "LOOPST" and "LOOP" are repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function "SUBC:YKK_NTA1:TBL_YKK_NTA1" is executed a maximum of 90 times.

To explain the function "SUBC:YKK_NTA1:TBL_YKK_NTA1", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" uses the target scheduler work number "YKK_NTA1" and the button machete accessory first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" as parameters. executed.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button machete accessory first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1", and based on the contents of the button machete accessory first half fall notice work area "YKK_NTA1", scheduler data to be the branch destination. Identify the starting address of. The result of the execution lottery for the first half fall notice of the button machete accessory is stored in the work area "YKK_NTA1", and if you do not win the execution lottery for the first half fall notice of the button machete accessory, "0: If the lottery is won, "1: Execution of first half fall notice of a hatchet accessory" is set. The result of the execution lottery for the first half fall notice of the button machete accessory corresponds to the index (address) of each record in the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1".

If "0: Non-winning" is set in the button machete accessory first half fall notice work area "YKK_NTA1", in the button machete accessory first half fall advance notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1", the button machete accessory When the first half fall notice is not executed, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON" is only the function "STOP", and the result of the lottery for notifying the fall of the first half of the button machete accessory is "non-winning", so the scheduler data does not execute the first half fall notice of the button machete accessory. Terminates execution.

On the other hand, if "1: Execute the first half fall notice of the button machete accessory" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA1", that is, if you win the execution lottery for the first half fall notice of the button machete accessory, In the first half of the button machete accessory falling notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_NTA1", the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" is selected when the machete accessory fall notice is executed. The contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" are the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_MOT_NTA1", and the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button hatchet first half fall notice button branch call address It is executed using the table "TBL_MOT_NTA1" as a parameter.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1" for advance notice of falling of the first half of the button machete accessory, and identifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN". . As in the case of button cut-in notices and button logo accessory drop notices, the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN" stores the operation state of the production button, and if the production button is not operated, "0: Button OFF" is stored. ”, and when the production button is operated, “1: Button ON” is set. The operation state of the production button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button machete accessory first half fall notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1".

While "0: Button OFF" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", in the button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1", the motor scheduler is set when the button machete accessory first half fall warning button is OFF. Data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_MOT_NTA1" of the calling source scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" (function "RET"). This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1". Therefore, even if you win the execution lottery of the first half of the button machete accessory falling notice, if no input of the production button is detected during the 90 loop processing, you will exit from the loop processing and press the function "STOP". is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" is completed.

On the other hand, if "1: Button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", in the button machete accessory first half fall warning button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1", the button machete accessory first half fall warning button is ON. The time motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON" is selected. The scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON" first executes the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-MID" and issues the command "COM_NTA_STA-MID". The command “COM_NTA_STA-MID” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect when the hatchet accessory falls, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

Furthermore, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_STA-MID" in the same frame as when the command "COM_NTA_STA-MID" is issued. The parameter "PTA_NTA_STA-MID" is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the machete accessory 5003 to an intermediate position. Furthermore, a wait process for 120 frames (approximately 4 seconds) is executed by the function "NOP:120", during which time the hatchet accessory 5003 falls to the intermediate position.

Finally, by executing the function "MEMW:SCH_MEM_NTA:1", "1" is written in the scheduler machete position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA", and it is recorded that the machete accessory 5003 has moved to the intermediate position. Thereafter, the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" is terminated by the function "STOP".

When the first half of the hatchet accessory fall notice, which is the first half of the button hatchet accessory fall notice, ends, the second half of the hatchet accessory fall notice, which is the second half of the hatchet accessory fall notice, starts. 171 and 172 are diagrams for explaining the contents of the hatchet accessory fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” that controls the motor in the hatchet accessory fall notice, which is the latter half of the hatchet accessory fall notice in this embodiment. be. To execute the machete accessory second half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2", the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used similarly to the button machete accessory first half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is started, it first executes the function "COMMAND:COM_NTA2_STA" and starts drawing an effect on the game board side effect display device 1600 that indicates whether or not the hatchet accessory 5003 will fall. . Thereafter, wait processing "NOP:90" for 90 frames (approximately 3 seconds) is executed. Since the expectations of a jackpot increase when the hatchet accessory 5003 falls, the expectation of the player is increased by drawing an effect for 3 seconds.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "SUBC:YKK_NTA2:TBL_YKK_NTA2". In the function "SUBC:YKK_NTA2:TBL_YKK_NTA2", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed using the target scheduler work number "YKK_NTA2" and the hatchet accessory late fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" as parameters. .

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" for the lottery results for the late fall of the machete accessory, and selects the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the content of the hatchet accessory latter half fall notice 2 work area "YKK_NTA2". Identify the first address. The hatchet accessory latter half fall notice 2 work area "YKK_NTA2" stores the result of the execution lottery for the hatchet accessory latter half fall notice, and if you are not selected for the execution lottery for the hatchet accessory latter half fall notice, "0: Not elected". ”, and if the lottery for execution of notice of late fall of hatchet accessory is won, “1: execution of notice of fall of hatchet accessory in second half” is set. The result of the execution lottery for the second half fall notice of the hatchet accessory corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" as a result of the lottery result for the second half fall notice of the hatchet accessory.

If "0: Non-winning" is set in the hatchet accessory latter half fall notice 2 work area "YKK_NTA2", the hatchet accessory latter half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" The motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON" when the notice is not executed is selected. In the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON", the function "SUBC:SCH_MEM_NTA:TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" is executed, and the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler and the non-winning branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NT A2NON” Branch based on.

If "0: Initial position" is set in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, in the hatchet accessory late fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON", there is no hatchet accessory late fall notice. Runtime motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON" is selected. In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON", the function "RET" is executed to return to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

If "0: Initial position" is set, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON" is selected in the hatchet accessory late fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" when the hatchet accessory late fall notice is not executed. Ru. In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON", the function "RET" is executed to return to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2". Thereafter, the value of the scheduler position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" is overwritten to "0: initial position", and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is ended.

On the other hand, if "1: Intermediate position" is set in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, then the first half of the hatchet accessory will fall in the first half of the hatchet accessory in the second half of the hatchet accessory fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON". When the notice execution/second half fall notice is not elected, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is selected.

In the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" at the time of execution of first half fall notice of hatchet accessory and non-election of second half fall notice, wait processing "NOP:120" for 120 frames (approximately 4 seconds) is first executed. The wait process executed here is a waiting time for returning the hatchet accessory 5003 to the intermediate position when it is at the lower position, as will be described later. Here, since the hatchet accessory 5003 is originally in the intermediate position, the user waits for 4 seconds.

After the wait process is completed, the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_INIT_MID-TOP" is executed to return the hatchet accessory 5003 from the intermediate position to the initial position. Further, in order to secure the operation time of the machete accessory 5003, a wait process "NOP:120" for 120 frames (approximately 4 seconds) is executed, and the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

In addition, if "1: Hatchet late fall notice" is set in the hatchet accessory latter half fall notice 2 work area "YKK_NTA2", the hatchet accessory latter half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" is set. At the time of winning the second half of the accessory falling notice, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN" is selected. In the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN", the function "SUBC:SCH_MEM_NTA:TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN" is executed, and the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler and the hatchet accessory fall notice 2 branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2D" are executed. OWN” .

If "0: Initial position" is set in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, in the hatchet accessory second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN", there is no hatchet accessory fall notice in the first half. When the execution/second half fall notice is won, motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" is selected.

In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" (FIG. 172), first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-END" is executed and the command "COM_NTA_STA-END" is issued. The command "COM_NTA_STA-END" is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the machete accessory 5003 falls from the initial position to the lower position.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_STA-END" in the same frame as when the command "COM_NTA_STA-END" is issued. The parameter "PTA_NTA_STA-END" is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the machete accessory 5003 to the lower position. Further, the function "NOP:240" executes a wait process for 240 frames (approximately 8 seconds), during which time the hatchet accessory 5003 is dropped from the initial position to the lower position.

Then, at the timing when the hatchet accessory 5003 moves to the lower position, the function "COMMAND:COM_NTA_END" is executed and the command "COM_NTA_END" is issued. The command “COM_NTA_END” is a command for causing the game board-side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the machete accessory 5003 reaches the lower position. Further, the function "NOP:90" executes a wait process of 90 frames (approximately 3 seconds) to continue drawing the effect on the game board side effect display device 1600.

After that, the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is executed. The parameter "PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is pattern data for performing an operation of returning the machete accessory 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position.

Subsequently, the function "CALL:SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed to call the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" described above, thereby returning the hatchet accessory 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. Thereafter, the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

On the other hand, if "1: Intermediate position" is set in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, the first half of the hatchet accessory falls in the first half of the hatchet accessory in the second half of the hatchet accessory fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN" When the notice execution/second half fall notice is won, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN" is selected.

In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN" (FIG. 172), first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_MID-END" is executed to issue the command "COM_NTA_MID-END". The command “COM_NTA_MID-END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the machete accessory 5003 falls from the middle position to the lower position.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_STA-END" in the same frame as when the command "COM_NTA_STA-END" is issued. The parameter "PTA_NTA_STA-END" is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the machete accessory 5003 to the lower position. Furthermore, a wait process of 120 frames (approximately 4 seconds) is executed by the function "NOP:120", and during this time the machete accessory 5003 is dropped from the intermediate position to the lower position.

Then, at the timing when the hatchet accessory 5003 moves to the lower position, the function "COMMAND:COM_NTA_END" is executed and the command "COM_NTA_END" is issued. The command “COM_NTA_END” is a command for causing the game board-side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the machete accessory 5003 reaches the lower position. Further, the function "NOP:90" executes a wait process of 90 frames (approximately 3 seconds) to continue drawing the effect on the game board side effect display device 1600.

Here, in order to match the timing when the hatchet accessory 5003 falls from the initial position to the lower position and the timing to start the operation of returning the hatchet accessory 5003 to the initial position, the function "NOP:120" is used to create 120 frames (approx. Executes wait processing for 4 seconds). This time is the time required for the hatchet accessory 5003 to move from the initial position to the intermediate position.

Thereafter, similarly to the case of "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN", the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is executed to return the hatchet accessory 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position. Furthermore, the function "CALL: SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed to return the hatchet accessory 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. Thereafter, the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

When the hatchet accessory 5003 returns to the initial position and returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2", the function "MEMW:SCH_MEM_NTA:0" is executed and the value of the hatchet position information work area for the scheduler "SCH_MEM_NTA" is set to "0: initial position". and ends the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

In the hatchet accessory falling notice, the scheduler data is divided into a first half and a second half, and the operation of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the latter half differs depending on whether or not the player operates the performance button in the first half. Therefore, by writing the position of the hatchet accessory 5003 using the function "MEMW" in the first half and acquiring the written position information in the second half, it is possible to specify the position of the hatchet accessory 5003. . Thereby, the amount of movement of the motor can be determined for each position of the hatchet accessory 5003, and by calling each corresponding scheduler data, it is possible to execute a performance according to the operation result of the performance button.

Also, in the operation of returning the hatchet accessory 5003 to the initial position after operation, common scheduler data is called for movement from the intermediate position to the initial position, so the entire scheduler data can be simplified.

The function "MEMW" can refer to a common value by writing a fixed value in a predetermined area when executing scheduler data and referring to it when executing other scheduler data. This makes it possible to specify values that indicate states that change due to the execution of multiple scheduler data when each scheduler data is executed. Processing can be completed only by defining scheduler data without having to create scheduler data separately. As a result, even if the scheduler data requires different processing depending on the state, the required number can be suppressed to a minimum, making creation and debugging of scheduler data more efficient and easier to manage. In addition, in this embodiment, the function writes a fixed value, but by specifying the work name as a parameter of the function instead of the fixed value, it is possible to transfer data from the program side or perform processing based on command information. This means that more complex processing can be performed on the scheduler. A unique feature of the function "MEMW" is that even if the information is not determined at the start of execution of the scheduler data including the function "MEMW", it can be processed if the information is determined by the time the function "MEMW" is executed. This enables effective time control and interactive control.

[18-10. Scheduler data configuration example (variation pattern)]
The flow of executing a series of preview performances has been described above. The execution contents of such a series of preview performances are selected by lottery based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the specific content of the performance will be drawn by lottery for each preview performance.

Below, we will explain the procedure for controlling the execution of a series of preview performances based on the fluctuation pattern commands sent from the main control board 1310, and the basic performances related to these series of preview performances and variation patterns (regardless of the lottery other than the preview performances). The configuration of scheduler data for executing a background effect or a pattern effect that is one-to-one with a variation pattern will be explained.

In this embodiment, the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol until the variation is stopped is managed in block units (performance sections) divided into predetermined structural units. For example, a block is defined as the period from the start of a symbol variation until a reach occurs or, if a reach does not occur, until the symbol stops (first half variation), or from the start of a reach until the symbol stops (second half variation). ), from the stop of the symbol until the end of the fluctuation. Furthermore, each block is assigned a time corresponding to the variation pattern, and the execution timing and execution time of the preview performance within the assigned time are defined. The data regarding the time corresponding to each block and the basic performance to be executed are collectively referred to as block data.

In addition, the rule for block division is that when comparing the basic effects related to fluctuations in multiple variation patterns, the same basic effects are treated as common block data, and the parts with different basic effects on the LCD display are divided as block data. do. Referring to FIG. 173A, in the variation pattern-by-variation pattern liquid crystal production block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) that stores combinations of liquid crystal production block data corresponding to variation pattern commands in this embodiment, variation pattern "10H01H" normally varies for 6 seconds. It is a loss, and the normal fluctuation is performed for 6 seconds, and then a losing symbol is produced. Since the normal variation 6-second performance and loss stop performance are used in other variation patterns, they are divided into 6-second normal variation liquid crystal performance block data (LCD01_BLK) and loss stop liquid crystal performance block data (LCD02_BLK).

The variation pattern "10H02H" has a normal variation of 12 seconds of loss, and the normal variation is performed for 12 seconds, and then a losing symbol is produced. Since the 12 seconds of normal variation is also used in other variation patterns, it is divided into 12 seconds of normal variation LCD production block data (LCD03_BLK), and the losing symbol production is exactly the same as the variation pattern "10H01H". , the liquid crystal performance block data for loss stop is commonly used as the liquid crystal performance block data for loss stop (LCD02_BLK), which is divided into liquid crystal display blocks with a variation pattern "10H01H". Regarding other variation patterns, in the same way, the parts that have already been converted into block data regarding the basic performance are used in common, and the parts where there are differences are newly converted into block data.

As mentioned above, by creating blocks, the common basic performance part becomes a unique number of block data, and all fluctuation patterns and basic performances such as jackpots other than fluctuations can be created by combining unique LCD performance block data. , it becomes possible to realize basic performances such as all fluctuation patterns and jackpots other than fluctuations. Although it is important that the total amount of production data to be created is significantly reduced, the main purpose of creating blocks is to create LCD productions that include specific basic productions when there are changes to specific basic productions. The change will be reflected in all variation patterns that use block data.

Regarding the liquid crystal display in this embodiment, in order to control the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source, the format and function are completely different from the scheduler data for sounds, lamps, and accessories in this embodiment, but the basic The structure in which the drawing scheduler data for presentation and the drawing scheduler data for preview presentation are combined has the same structure as the sub presentation block data that controls sounds, lamps, accessories, etc. In addition, the drawing scheduler data for the liquid crystal display includes frame information, still image and video material IDs, display position information, scaling information, rotation angle information, and colors related to the effects of pictures, movies, and designs displayed in the background. It consists of functions that can specify control information for generating display list commands for the VDP1540a with built-in sound source, such as information and alpha information, and also specify the type and execution timing of effects related to preview effects that occur within block data. The information shown is embedded.

Further, in the present embodiment, block data for displaying identification symbols in a variable manner on the liquid crystal display device is defined as liquid crystal symbol block data separately from block data for performing other liquid crystal presentations. This makes it possible to make the control for variably displaying the identification pattern independent from the control of other liquid crystal presentations. For example, even when the identification pattern is displayed variably with different shapes, a common preview effect can be used. It becomes possible to execute it on a liquid crystal display device. Note that the drawing scheduler data for symbol display has the same format and function as the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display. In addition, the configuration in which drawing scheduler data for basic effects and drawing scheduler data for preview effects related to symbols are combined for each block data is the same as the sub effect block data and liquid crystal effect block data described above. The drawing scheduler data for symbol display has the same configuration and function as the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display, and in addition, information for specifying the mode of variable display of the identification symbol is embedded therein.

FIG. 173A is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal presentation block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern that stores combinations of liquid crystal presentation block data corresponding to variation pattern commands in this embodiment. FIG. 173B is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal pattern block data combination number (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variable pattern that stores a combination of liquid crystal pattern block data corresponding to a variable pattern command in this embodiment. FIG. 174 is a diagram illustrating a sub effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern that stores combinations of sub effect block data corresponding to variation pattern commands in this embodiment.

The liquid crystal presentation block data combination number table for each variation pattern (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) is a table that holds information indicating combinations of liquid crystal presentation block data for each variation pattern. For example, for each variable pattern number, unique numbers that identify constituent liquid crystal display block data are held in chronological order. For example, if the fluctuation pattern number is "10H03H", it is composed of "LCD03_BLK" which indicates a normal fluctuation of 12 seconds in the first half of the fluctuation, "LCD04_BLK" which indicates a normal short reach in the second half of the fluctuation, and "LCD02_BLK" which indicates the time of a stop when the fluctuation is off. be done. At this time, "LCD03_BLK", "LCD04_BLK", and "LCD02_BLK" are stored in this order. In this way, by connecting the liquid crystal presentation block data for each variation pattern, it is possible to define (realize) the configuration of the basic presentation and preview presentation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 414, the same liquid crystal effect block data is used for all the same effect sections. For example, when the first half variation is a normal variation of 12 seconds, "LCD03_BLK" is used regardless of the content of the preview performance that is actually executed. This makes it possible to realize a unique number of liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the type of variation, and it is possible to uniquely specify liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 173B, the liquid crystal design block data combination number table for each fluctuation pattern (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) holds information indicating the combination of block data for each fluctuation pattern, similar to the liquid crystal display block data combination number table for each fluctuation pattern. . Further, the sub effect block data corresponding to the variable pattern number is defined in a one-to-one correspondence (same combination, same effect time) with the liquid crystal effect block data of the same variable pattern number.

Further, as shown in FIG. 174, the sub effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) stores information indicating the combination of block data for each variation pattern, similar to the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern. Hold. Further, the sub effect block data corresponding to the variable pattern number is defined in a one-to-one correspondence (same combination, same effect time) with the liquid crystal effect block data and liquid crystal pattern block data of the same variable pattern number.

Next, a description will be given of a procedure for executing a notice effect based on scheduler data corresponding to a variation pattern. Here, the execution procedure of the basic performance and preview performance based on the performance scheduler data corresponding to the variation pattern "10H03H" will be explained. First, an outline of the procedure for executing performance control based on liquid crystal performance block data, performance control based on liquid crystal pattern block data, and performance control based on sub performance block data will be explained. FIG. 175 is a diagram illustrating an overview of effect control for the first half variation (normal variation 12 seconds) of the variation pattern "10H03H" in this embodiment.

When the fluctuation pattern command (main fluctuation related command) “10H03H” is received from the main control board 1310, the command analysis module 5200 analyzes the received command, identifies the fluctuation pattern number “10H03H”, and sends it to the production control unit 5020. Notice.

As explained in FIG. 151A, the effect control unit 5020 determines the layer to be used, determines the block data number corresponding to the layer, and sets each fluctuation pattern number "10H03H" based on the determined block number. Obtain the corresponding block data number from the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO), the liquid crystal design block data combination number table for each variation pattern (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO), and the sub effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) do. By setting all the block data numbers corresponding to each performance device to the same number, it becomes possible to execute all the performances of each performance device in synchronization.

Then, the production control section 5020 transmits block data numbers for all layers to the liquid crystal production block control section 5310, the liquid crystal pattern block control section 5311, and the sub production block control section 5320.

After that, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 is the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331, the liquid crystal pattern block control unit 5311 is the liquid crystal pattern 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332, and the sub effect block control unit 5320 is the sub effect 1f (1ms) scheduler execution unit. 5333 (5334), block data corresponding to the transmitted block data number is executed in chronological order. Specifically, the liquid crystal display 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 uses the normal variation 12 seconds liquid crystal display block data “LCD03_BLK” corresponding to the first half variation, and the liquid crystal pattern 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 uses the normal variation 12 seconds liquid crystal pattern block data “ZUG03_BLK”. ", the sub performance 1f (1ms) scheduler execution unit 5333 (5334) executes the normally variable 12 second sub performance block data "SCH03_BLK".

When processing of the liquid crystal presentation block data is started, one or more liquid crystal presentation 1f schedulers corresponding to the liquid crystal presentation block data are activated, and the drawing scheduler data specified according to the presentation contents is executed. The drawing scheduler data includes liquid crystal function information for displaying an image on a liquid crystal display device, specifies parameters according to the content of the presentation, and transmits the liquid crystal function information to the liquid crystal module 5400 in a predetermined order. The liquid crystal module 5400 analyzes and executes the received liquid crystal function information, and sends a DISPLAY list to the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source, thereby drawing on the liquid crystal display device.

Further, when processing the liquid crystal pattern block data, the liquid crystal pattern 1f scheduler is started and the drawing scheduler data according to the variable display mode of the identification pattern is executed. The procedure for drawing on the liquid crystal display device is the same as that for processing liquid crystal presentation block data.

On the other hand, when processing of the sub performance block data is started, one or more sub performance 1f (1ms) schedulers corresponding to the sub performance block data are started, and the scheduler data specified according to the content of the performance is executed. Note that the scheduler may be prepared according to the execution cycle, or the scheduler may be shared and the execution cycle may be set at startup.

As described above, the scheduler data includes performance data designation functions for controlling performance devices such as lamps ("KPLAY"), speakers ("SPLAY"), and accessories ("MPLAY"). It is configured to perform a specified performance by sequentially executing performance data designation functions in a defined order. The performance data designation function is transmitted to modules corresponding to the performance devices to be controlled (lamp module 5600, sound module 5500, drive unit (motor) module 5700, etc.), and each module executes the performance by various performance devices.

It is also possible to call other scheduler data from the scheduler data using the functions "REQ, REQF". By executing the performance data designation function in the scheduler data called at this time, it is possible to control various performance devices. Furthermore, by using the command transmission function "COMMAND" or "COMMAND0", control by commands rather than functions is possible. For example, by sending a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal module 5400 at the timing of executing a performance data specification function that controls the movement of an accessory, the movement and drawing of the accessory can be coordinated, as in the aforementioned hatchet accessory falling preview performance. It is possible to perform a performance.

Here, a procedure for executing performance control using sub-performance block data will be explained. FIG. 176 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the sub effect block data control start process for each variation pattern related to the variation pattern layer of this embodiment.

Based on the variation pattern number notified from the command analysis module 5200, the production block control unit 5040 changes the control of the block data number by variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern when the variation pattern layer is selected by the production control unit 5020. Control is started using the pattern-specific sub effect block data combination number table (FIG. 174). The row position of the sub performance block data combination number table for each variation pattern (FIG. 174) is set to the row index of the sub performance block data combination number table for each variation pattern (step S7001). For example, in the table shown in FIG. 174, if the variation pattern number is "10H01H", "0" is set in the sub effect block data combination number table row index for each variation pattern, and if the variation pattern number is "10H03H", For example, since it is the third row, "2" (row-1) is set in the row index of the sub effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern.

Next, the effect block control unit 5040 initializes the sub effect block data combination number table column index by variation pattern to "0" (step S7002). It starts from the sub effect block data corresponding to the first column of the specified row (sub effect block data combination number table row index by variation pattern). Finally, the effect block control unit 5040 causes the scheduler execution unit 5060 to execute a sub effect block data control scheduler activation process for each variation pattern (step S7003). As a result, the scheduler for executing the sub effect block data for each variation pattern is activated, and the scheduler data included in the sub effect block data is executed.

FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sub effect block data control activation process for each variation pattern according to the present embodiment.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 first obtains the number of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern based on the row and column index from the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (step S7011). Further, the sub effect block data number table row index is initialized to "0" (step S7012). As a result, processing is started from the first record of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern specified from the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 activates the scheduler data registered in the sub effect block data classified by variation pattern (step S7013). The scheduler data is registered in the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect registered in the sub effect block data number table by variation pattern (FIG. 179(B)). Specifically, based on the sub-effect block data number table row index, sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the preview) is extracted from the sub-effect block data number table. get. One or more scheduler data are registered in the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the preview), and a corresponding scheduler is defined for each scheduler data. ing. If a plurality of scheduler data are registered, one or more scheduler data are associated with each other based on the preliminary lottery result or the like.

Furthermore, the scheduler execution unit 5060 updates the sub-effect block data number table row index when all the scheduler data defined in the sub-effect block data has been activated, and the sub-effect block data number table row index changes in the variation pattern. It is determined whether the number of elements in the row of the separate sub effect block data number table has been exceeded (step S7014). If the number of elements in the row of the sub effect block data number table by variation pattern is exceeded (result of step S7014 is "YES"), the sub effect block data control activation process is ended. On the other hand, if the number of sub effect block data number table row elements by variation pattern is not exceeded (result of step S7014 is "NO"), the next sub effect block data is processed.

FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sub effect block data control update process for each variation pattern of this embodiment. In the sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to a preview) that constitutes the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern is This is a process for executing the next variation pattern-specific sub effect block data when the execution of all the scheduler data is completed. The sub effect block data control update process for each variation pattern is periodically executed and monitors the execution status of the sub effect block data for each variation pattern.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 first obtains the number of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern from the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern using the row and column index of the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern. (Step S7021). As a result, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the preview) constituting the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern is identified and defined as the sub-effect block data. It is determined whether the scheduled scheduler is being executed (step S7022). If it is being executed (result of step S7022 is "YES"), execution of the scheduler is continued as it is, and the sub effect block data control update process is ended.

Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 operates all the schedulers of the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to the preview) defined in the sub effect block data by variation pattern. is completed (result of step S7022 is "NO"), increment the sub effect block data combination number table column index by variation pattern, and check whether the next column data is the end data ("DATA_END"). is determined (step S7023). If it is the end data (the result of step S7023 is "YES"), the series of performances has been completed, and therefore the sub-performance block data control update process for each variation pattern is ended.

On the other hand, if the next column data is not the end data (the result of step S7023 is "NO"), the scheduler execution unit 5060 starts executing the sub effect block data by variation pattern corresponding to the next column data. , executes a sub performance data block control scheduler activation process for each variation pattern (step S7024).

As explained in FIGS. 173A, 173B, and 174, sub effect block data for each variation pattern is defined in association with liquid crystal effect block data and liquid crystal pattern block data, and the corresponding block data are executed at the same timing, By making the execution time of each block data the same, it is possible to synchronize the effect control by the drawing scheduler, the effect control by the sub effect scheduler, and the effect control by a plurality of schedulers. In addition, by creating blocks, if the variation pattern is the same, the number of activations of the scheduler defined by the performance block and the performance block will always be the same number of times, regardless of the combination of performances or whether or not the performance appears, and the program The complexity of the process can be reduced and, as a result, the quality can be improved.

As described above, in this embodiment, by synchronizing the effect control by one or more drawing schedulers and sub-effect schedulers, it is possible to coordinate the operations of various effect devices, and perform a variety of effects without any discomfort. can do. In addition, since scheduler data having the same execution time can be executed in parallel, scheduler data that controls various presentation devices must be developed and operated independently for each presentation device and block data. This makes it possible to improve development efficiency.

FIG. 179 is a diagram illustrating the procedure for executing the basic effect and preview effect of the variable display corresponding to the variable pattern "10H03H" of this embodiment, and (A) shows the timing of executing the basic effect and the preview effect, and the corresponding Execution time of preview performance, (B) shows the structure of sub-performance block data for each variation pattern. The sub-effect block data for each variation pattern includes background sub-effect block data and preview sub-effect block data for executing background effects and preview effects. Although FIG. 179B shows a combination of two types of sub effect block data, background block data and preview block data, the number of sub effect block data can be varied.

As shown in FIG. 179, the sub effect block data for each variation pattern that constitutes the variation display of the variation pattern "10H03H" are "SCH03_BLK" (normal variation 12 seconds), "SCH04_BLK" (normal short reach), "SCH02_BLK" ( It is composed of (stop losing). The sub performance block data "SCH03_BLK" by variation pattern corresponds to 12 seconds from the start of variation until the left symbol and right symbol stop. The sub performance block data “SCH04_BLK” by variation pattern corresponds to a period in which the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same identification symbol and the normal short reach is executed. The sub performance block data "SCH02_BLK" by variation pattern corresponds to a period in which the middle symbol stops, the result of the variation display is determined to be a loss, and the determined symbol is displayed.

The sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" by variation pattern includes sub-effect block data related to the step-up notice, BTN logo accessory falling notice, and symbol stop notice, and sub-effects related to the background, as shown in FIG. 179(A). Block data is defined. Furthermore, sub effect block data "SCH04_BLK" defines sub effect block data for cut-in previews and group previews, and sub effect block data related to the background. Further, in the sub effect block "SCH02_BLK", preview effect sub effect block data is not defined, but sub effect block data related to the background is defined. In addition, although in the figure, the execution of the preview effects does not overlap, a plurality of preview block data may be defined and executed so that a plurality of preview effects overlap. The contents of each preview performance shown in FIG. 179 are as described above.

Hereinafter, performance control using each sub-performance block data will be explained. As shown in FIG. 179(B), two types of sub effect block data in the variable display of the variable pattern "10H03H" are executed in parallel. First, the sub effect block data "SCH03_BLK" by variation pattern will be explained.

In the sub effect scheduler data related to the background, normally variable 12 second background sub effect block data is defined. The normal variation 12-second background sub-effect block data defines a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the normal variation 12-second background. The normally variable 12-second background sub-effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, so it has the same effect time as the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK". Therefore, the execution continues until the sub effect block data "SCH03_BLK" is completed.

The sub-performance scheduler data related to the notice defines the function "NOP", step-up notice sub-performance block data, BTN logo accessory falling notice sub-performance block data, and symbol stop notice sub-performance block data. The function "NOP" is a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal presentation scheduler, and is defined to perform sub effects in accordance with the liquid crystal presentation. The step-up notice sub-performance block data defines a sub-performance scheduler number and sub-performance scheduler data related to the step-up notice. The step-up notice sub performance block data has the same performance time as the step-up notice liquid crystal performance block data. The BTN logo accessory falling notice sub performance block data defines a sub performance scheduler number and sub performance scheduler data related to the BTN logo accessory falling notice. The BTN logo accessory falling notice sub-performance block data has the same performance time as the BTN logo accessory falling notice liquid crystal display effect block data. The symbol stop notice sub-performance block data defines a sub-performance scheduler number and sub-performance scheduler data related to the symbol stop notice. The symbol stop notice sub performance block data has the same performance time as the symbol stop notice liquid crystal performance block data. The sub effect block data by variation pattern "SCH03_BLK" is constructed by combining and executing the above sub effect block data.

By executing the above sub effect block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect block data, the scheduler data for each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub effect block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect. It turns out.

At this time, from the start of the fluctuation until the first LCD presentation block data (step-up notice) starts, from the end of the liquid crystal presentation block data corresponding to each liquid crystal presentation presentation to the liquid crystal presentation block data corresponding to the next liquid crystal presentation presentation. The function "NOP" is executed and waits for the specified time. In this way, by controlling the appearance timing of the sub effect scheduler data corresponding to each liquid crystal effect block data in the scheduler block for each variation pattern using the function "NOP", the scheduler can be sequentially executed at the execution timing of each preview effect by a program or the like. By starting the corresponding scheduler data without instructing the execution of the data, it becomes possible to execute the performance of each performance device corresponding to the liquid crystal preview performance at the specified timing. Further, it is assumed that the last function "NOP" of each scheduler data in the sub effect block data for each variation pattern does not need to be provided.

The execution time of the preview performance, which is set by scheduler data that controls performance devices such as lamps, sounds, and accessories, is defined as a common time for each preview performance. This uniquely determines the time from the start of control based on the sub-effect block data until the execution of each preview effect, so the control timing of each effect device can be synchronized.

Further, the time information at the time of execution of the sub effect block data for each variation pattern is managed as a relative value from the start of execution of the sub effect block data for each variation pattern, not from the start of variation. As a result, when the same sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is used in multiple variation patterns, each effect in the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern will have a production start time from the start of the variation. Although it will be different, since the time value is relatively managed within the sub effect block data for each variation pattern, it can be processed without any problem. In addition, in the case of liquid crystal display block data by variation pattern, it is similarly managed by the relative value from the start of execution of the liquid crystal display block data by variation pattern, and in the case of liquid crystal design block data by variation pattern, the liquid crystal display block data by variation pattern Managed as a relative value from the start of data execution.

Next, the sub effect block data "SCH04_BLK" by variation pattern will be explained. The sub effect block data by variation pattern "SCH04_BLK" corresponds to normal short reach, but at this time, two types of sub effect block data are executed in parallel.

Normal short reach background sub-effect block data is defined in the sub-effect scheduler data related to the background. The normal short reach background sub performance block data defines a sub performance scheduler number and sub performance scheduler data related to the normal short reach background. Since the normal short reach background sub-performance block data is scheduler data related to the background, it has the same performance time as the sub-performance block data by variation pattern "SCH04_BLK". Therefore, the sub effect block data by variation pattern "SCH04_BLK" is continuously executed until it ends.

The sub performance scheduler data related to the preview defines the function "NOP", cut-in preview sub performance block data, and group preview sub performance block data. The function "NOP" is a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal presentation scheduler, and is defined to execute a sub presentation in accordance with the liquid crystal presentation. The cut-in notice sub-performance block data defines a sub-performance scheduler number and sub-performance scheduler data related to the cut-in notice. The cut-in preview sub performance block data has the same performance time as the cut-in preview liquid crystal performance block data. The group preview sub-performance block data defines a sub-performance scheduler number and sub-performance scheduler data related to the group notice. The group notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the group notice liquid crystal effect block data. The sub effect block data by variation pattern "SCH04_BLK" is constructed by combining and executing the above sub effect block data.

By executing the above sub effect block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect block data, the scheduler data for each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub effect block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect. It turns out.

In addition, the sub effect block data by variation pattern "SCH04_BLK" has the same number of sub effect block data columns as the sub effect block data by variation pattern "SCH03_BLK", but the number of sub effect block data columns cannot be increased or decreased. no problem.

Finally, in the variation pattern-specific sub effect block data "SCH02_BLK", since no effect related to the preview is performed, only the loss stop background sub effect block data is executed. Loss stop background sub-effect block data is defined in the sub-effect scheduler data related to the background. The loss stop background sub-effect block data defines a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the normal variation 12-second background. Since the loss stop background sub effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, it has the same effect time as the sub effect block data "SCH02_BLK". Therefore, the execution continues until the sub effect block data "SCH02_BLK" is completed.

FIG. 180 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between liquid crystal presentation block data by variation pattern and liquid crystal pattern block data by variation pattern of this embodiment. The liquid crystal presentation block data for each variation pattern and the liquid crystal pattern block data for each variation pattern differ only in the function executed in the scheduler data in the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data from the function executed in the scheduler data in the sub presentation block data. Since the data format and control method are common, their explanation will be omitted.

Next, the structure of the sub-effect block data will be explained using the step-up effect explained in FIG. 151B as an example. First, an overview of creating liquid crystal display scheduler data for step-up notice will be explained. FIG. 181 is a diagram showing an image of creating a data file for drawing a step-up notice for LCD display according to this embodiment in step-up effect units (step-up 1 effect to 4 effect) using a video synthesis/motion creation graphic tool. be.

The drawing data file is created for each step-up effect and consists of a series of effects that combine still images and videos. Further, as shown in FIG. 181, the drawing data file is converted by the tool into liquid crystal presentation scheduler data in this embodiment in step-up presentation units.

The reason why a drawing data file is not created one-on-one with the LCD preview effect (step-up notices 1 to 4) is because, for example, if only the step-up 1 effect is changed, four types of step-up notices are created as in this embodiment. If it were possible to do this, it would be necessary to change four drawing data files, and considering the work time required for changes and the risk of omission of corrections, a unique number of drawing data files should be created for each step. This is because it is more efficient to realize the advance notice in combination.

FIG. 182 is a diagram illustrating the structure of the effect block data of the step-up notice of this embodiment. (A) shows the structure of step-up preview liquid crystal performance block data, and (B) shows the structure of step-up preview sub-performance block data. As described above, four types of step-up notices can be executed in this embodiment, and step-up notices 1 and 2 are shown in (A) and (B). In step-up notices 3 and 4, step-up 3 effects and step-up 4 effects are executed at predetermined timings.

To explain the step-up notice LCD production block data, first, it is determined whether to execute any step-up notice from step-up notices 1 to 4 based on the lottery result value of the step-up notice obtained at the start of the fluctuation. Ru. If the lottery result value of the step-up notice is non-winning, the process ends without executing the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, so the step-up notice is not executed and no drawing is performed on the liquid crystal display device.

On the other hand, if the lottery result value of the step-up notice is step-up notice 1, step-up notice 1 of the step-up notice liquid crystal production block data is selected, and if the lottery result value of the step-up notice is step-up notice 2, Step-up notice 2 of the step-up notice liquid crystal performance block data is selected, and the corresponding performance block data is selected. The effect block data of the step-up notice 2 operates in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 for executing the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 for executing the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data in parallel.

In the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01, when the step-up 1 liquid crystal presentation scheduler data is executed, the next data to be executed is "DATA_END", so the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 is ended.

Further, the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 executes the function "NOP", waits for the time specified by the parameter, and then executes the step-up 2 liquid crystal performance scheduler data. Step-up 2 After the execution of the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data, the next data to be executed is "DATA_END", so the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 is ended.

As described above, a plurality of variations of a single preview can be realized by combining the preview performance scheduler data in the smallest structural unit.

Next, step-up notice sub effect block data will be explained with reference to FIG. 182(B). The step-up notice sub-effect block data is configured in a one-to-one correspondence with the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data in terms of block configuration and execution time. As a result, it becomes possible to dynamically synchronize all performance devices even for combinations of fluctuating patterns and preview lottery results, and it is possible to realize a performance with a sense of unity.

In addition, the step-up notice sub-performance block data differs from the step-up notice liquid crystal production block data only in the functions executed by the liquid crystal production scheduler data and the functions executed by the sub-performance scheduler data, Since the data format and control method are common, their explanation will be omitted.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a variable pattern command is received from the main control board 1310, sub effect block data stored in the data access order is acquired from the variable pattern sub effect block data combination table "SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO". Then, by executing the scheduler data included in the acquired sub-effect block data according to the data access order, it becomes possible to execute the defined basic effects and preview effects in a predetermined order and at a predetermined timing. .

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, scheduler data for controlling various presentation devices can be executed in parallel, and scheduler data to be executed at the same timing is defined as the same execution time. Performances can be synchronized. Furthermore, once execution of the scheduler data is started, predetermined operations are performed at timings set within the scheduler data. As a result, by simply executing the corresponding block data based on information that specifies the performance content such as fluctuation patterns, the hierarchically defined scheduler data is automatically obtained and the performance is executed at the defined timing. It is now possible to do so.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, multiple schedulers can be activated and schedule data can be executed independently by each scheduler, making it possible to develop multiple types of scheduler data in parallel, greatly increasing development efficiency. can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler is configured to analyze scheduler data written in a predetermined format and control the presentation device. Therefore, even if the control mechanism of a gaming machine (for example, the peripheral control board 1510 or the arithmetic unit included therein) is updated, a common schedule can be maintained by installing a scheduler compatible with the new gaming machine. Data can be used. That is, the scheduler has a function as middleware for executing common schedule data on different platforms, and it becomes possible to utilize software assets related to performance control of gaming machines over a long period of time.

Note that the scheduler in this embodiment may be realized by software or hardware. In the case where the scheduler is implemented by software, the scheduler activated when scheduler data is executed may be stopped after use, and the used area of memory may be released. Memory usage can be reduced by stopping the scheduler. For example, the system may be opened when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the execution of schedule data is completed, or all but the minimum number of schedulers may be stopped when the gaming machine enters a customer waiting state.

[19. Production control using LCD production scheduler data]
Next, details of the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data forming the liquid crystal presentation block data will be explained. Like the sub-performance block data, the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data is composed of a combination of functions that control presentation objects. In the sub effect block data, the output of sound, lighting of lamps, operation of the drive device, etc. were controlled, but in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, the object to be controlled was drawing on the liquid crystal display device.

[19-1. Scheduler function for LCD display]
First, the functions (liquid crystal presentation scheduler function) that constitute the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data will be explained. The liquid crystal performance scheduler function is a command (function, command) for controlling the performance written in the liquid crystal performance scheduler data that constitutes the liquid crystal performance block data mentioned above. Send and execute the performance. Furthermore, when executing the scheduler function for liquid crystal display, the attributes of the displayed object (for example, color, shape, action content, etc.) can be changed by specifying parameters.

[19-1-1. Scheduler function for LCD display]
FIG. 183 is a diagram showing an example of a scheduler function for liquid crystal display according to this embodiment. An overview of each liquid crystal display scheduler function will be explained below.

Each liquid crystal presentation scheduler function is managed for each group. In this embodiment, there are groups of coordinate settings, scale settings, rotation angle settings, α settings, frame settings, Z index settings, production SW settings, and subscheduler settings.

First, the functions belonging to the coordinate setting group will be explained. The functions belonging to the coordinate setting group, for example, specify the coordinates of the display area of the liquid crystal display device and set the liquid crystal display object. This makes it possible to designate the position of the liquid crystal display object and display it.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSX", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSY", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSZ" set the display position of the liquid crystal display object by specifying the X-axis coordinate position, Y-axis coordinate position, and Z-axis coordinate position, respectively.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORX" specifies the X-axis coordinate position, and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORY" specifies the Y-axis coordinate position to set the anchor point position for liquid crystal display. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORXY" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions and sets the anchor point position for liquid crystal display. The liquid crystal display object anchor point position is the center position of the liquid crystal display object.

Next, a group to which a function for scaling (scale setting) a display target (still image, moving image) belongs will be explained. Scaling is, for example, setting the center of the display area that is specified for enlarging or reducing the size of still images or videos stored on CGROM when displaying them on a liquid crystal display device, or converting the coordinate units. It is to do something. By setting an appropriate coordinate system in the display area and performing drawing processing, it is possible to display the liquid crystal display object at an appropriate position and size.

The scale setting group includes the functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ". The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX" specifies the X-axis value and sets the coordinates of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY" specifies the Y-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ" specifies the Z-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ" specifies the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis values to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object.

Next, the group to which the function for setting the angle when rotating and displaying the liquid crystal display object belongs will be explained. By storing only the reference liquid crystal display object in the CGROM and displaying it by specifying the angle, there is no need to store multiple liquid crystal display objects after rotation, and an increase in storage capacity can be suppressed. can.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ" belong to the rotation angle setting group. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX" specifies the X-axis value, the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY" specifies the Y-axis value, and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ" specifies the Z-axis value to rotate the liquid crystal display object. Further, the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ" specifies the X-axis value, Y-axis value, and Z-axis value to rotate the liquid crystal display object.

Next, other functions will be explained. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ALPHA" is an α setting process, and specifically, the α value is specified to set the transparency of the liquid crystal display object. The α value is a numerical value that indicates transparency, and can be set from transparent (colorless), which completely transmits the background color, to completely opaque, which does not transmit the background color at all.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAME" is a frame setting process, and specifically sets a frame value that is the drawing update interval of the liquid crystal display object. The frame value is a numerical value indicating the interval at which the liquid crystal display object is redrawn during animation processing.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ZINDEX" sets the Z index of the liquid crystal display object. The Z index is a hierarchy in which liquid crystal display objects are displayed, and by setting this, the liquid crystal display object can be displayed in the front or moved to the back side on the screen. For example, if the liquid crystal display object is the background, the Z index is set so that it is drawn at the backmost position.

The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW” and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW” belong to the effect SW setting group in order to set information regarding the effect SW. Although the details will be described later, the production SW is information that is incorporated into the control information for drawing (images, videos), and by detecting this information, a predetermined process is called back, and the content of the production can be switched. , or execute a different performance. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW" sets the effect SW information to the still image index number on the CGROM and the moving image index number on the CGROM in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW" sets frame effect SW information in the entire liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW" sets SW information that defines special control information to be described later in the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SUBSCH" is a function for calling the subscheduler. By defining a highly versatile process as a subscheduler and calling it back at a predetermined timing, it is possible to simplify the process and improve development efficiency.

[19-1-2. Scheduler function parameters for LCD display]
An example of the liquid crystal display scheduler function used in the gaming machine of this embodiment has been described above. Next, the parameters specified when executing the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentation will be explained using an example. FIGS. 184 and 185 are diagrams showing examples of parameters for the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentation in this embodiment.

The parameters of the scheduler function for liquid crystal display are managed for each group similarly to the scheduler function for liquid crystal display. The liquid crystal presentation scheduler function group and the parameter group are divided into different groups. The parameter group includes sequence control, production SW, footage setting, symbol replacement related, sub production scheduler function, etc.

The sequence control parameter group includes "AAD_FRAME", "AAD_POS", "AAD_POS2", "AAD_POS3", "AAD_ALPHA", "AAD_ANGLE", "AAD_ENTRY", "AAD_ENTRY_B", "AAD_SKIP", "AAD_SKIP_B", "AAD_SCALE", "AAD_SCALE2", "AAD_SCALE3", "AAD_SIZE". ” etc. Each parameter will be explained below.

“AAD_FRAME” is a parameter for specifying a frame value, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS” is a parameter for specifying the X-axis coordinate position, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_POS2" is a parameter for setting the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS3” is a parameter for setting the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis coordinate positions, and each has a length of 16 bits.

“AAD_ALPHA” is a parameter for specifying the α value, which is the transmittance of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 8 bits. "AAD_ANGLE" is a parameter for specifying the rotation angle of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_ENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of parameters to be set, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_ENTRY_B" is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of parameters to be set, and is divided into two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

“AAD_SKIP” is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to skip, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SKIP_B" is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to be skipped during liquid crystal display, and is divided into two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

"AAD_SCALE" is a parameter that specifies a scale value when the coordinate system of the display area is one axis, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SCALE2" is a parameter that specifies the enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area has two axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SCALE3” is a parameter that specifies the enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area is three axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SIZE” is a parameter that specifies the size of the liquid crystal display object in two axes, XY, and each has a length of 16 bits.

The group of parameters of the production SW includes "AAD_LCDSWENTRY", "AAD_LCDSW", "AAD_LCDSW_PARAM", "AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY", "AAD_KICKLCDSW", "AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY", "AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM", etc.

“AAD_LCDSWENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered production SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_LCDSW" is a parameter that specifies the number of the production SW, and specifies two 16-bit length values. "AAD_LCDSW_PARAM" is a parameter for passing the production SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

“AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered kick effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_KICKLCDSW" is a parameter that specifies the number of the kick effect SW, and specifies two 16-bit length values. “AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered frame effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM" is a parameter for passing the frame effect SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

The group of parameters for footage settings includes "AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY", "AAD_SEQFOOT", etc. "AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the number of still images to be registered in a predetermined area, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SEQFOOT” is a parameter that specifies the index number of a still image stored in the CGROM, and has a length of 16 bits.

The group of parameters related to symbol replacement includes "AAD_ZUGARA" and the like. "AAD_ZUGARA" is a parameter that specifies a symbol index number, and has a length of 16 bits.

The group of parameters of the sub-performance scheduler function includes "AAD_SUBENTRY", "AAD_SUB", etc. "AAD_SUBENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the number of subscheduler function parameters, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SUB" is a parameter that specifies a subscheduler function number, and has a length of 16 bits.

[20. Callback control based on image information]
Performance control in gaming machines has conventionally been achieved by executing a combination of programs that individually control various performance devices, programs that link multiple performance devices, and the like. These programs were created by highly skilled programmers, and were written using program codes that expressed the operation details and control procedures of the performance device for each preview content in addition to commands related to the fluctuation patterns. In liquid crystal drawing, individual effect drawing data was called up in the frame in which the effect was executed, and multiple effect drawings (background, design, preview, pending, etc.) were combined.

However, in recent years, gaming machines have been required to execute a wide variety of performances in order to improve the performance of the hardware and to increase the interest of the gaming machines, and it has been necessary to implement complex performance control. As a result, individual programmers were required to have sophisticated skills, the number of development steps increased, and it became difficult to secure the necessary personnel (programmers) both qualitatively and quantitatively. Furthermore, as the total amount of program code for the production control program increases, the number of man-hours required for testing for the purpose of checking the operation of the gaming machine and improving its quality also increases.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, in order to shorten the development period and improve quality, the gaming machine of this embodiment uses program code to realize effects that are executed in conjunction with liquid crystal drawing (image display). By outputting program data for gaming machines using a tool that creates liquid crystal drawing effects, and controlling the effects based on the output program data, the development period can be shortened and quality improved.

Specifically, a tool is used that can create data for executing liquid crystal drawing effects by allocating images and videos displayed on a liquid crystal display device in chronological order. In this tool, a single performance drawing data (notice, background, design, pending, etc.) is defined as one performance block, and performance blocks are grouped together for each state such as fluctuation patterns and jackpots to create a common performance block. By combining multiple performance common blocks, a series of performance drawings such as fluctuating patterns and jackpots can be realized.

However, due to the configuration of the gaming machine, it is necessary to display or hide effects related to the lottery, replace effects and symbols, and perform interactive effects in response to external input by the player, so it is only necessary to simply execute the combined effect common block as is. However, it is impossible to realize all the effects.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when creating a production common block using the above-mentioned tool, a production switch (production SW ) can be set (incorporated). The effect SW is a flag on the RAM, and is set to ON or OFF. When the effect SW set in the effect data for drawing is set, a callback always occurs regardless of whether the effect SW is "ON" or "OFF". Further, when the effect SW is ON in the callback destination function, predetermined control is performed based on predefined effect SW information corresponding to the effect SW. The production SW is set to ON by a command issued inside the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. The effect SW is set for each display target, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal layer table, liquid crystal effect common block, liquid crystal effect block, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

When the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 executes and analyzes the effect blocks included in the effect common block during liquid crystal drawing and detects the incorporated effect SW, it dynamically calls a program function (callback) based on the detected effect SW. do). Then, a display list command is created based on the information processed by the callback program function, and it is possible to turn on/off the effect display or replace the effect. Note that the program function called by the callback can also perform effects other than liquid crystal effects (for example, sound output, lighting of lamps, movement of accessories, etc.). It is also possible to perform processing such as setting a flag, updating data in a predetermined area, and setting information necessary for subsequent performance control. As described above, by calling a program function upon detection of the production SW, it is possible to display or hide drawings using multiple production blocks, replace production and symbols, and realize interactive production in response to external input by the player. .

The program functions for turning on/off the liquid crystal display and for replacing the display, which are called by the callback, are already built into the peripheral control unit 1530 and do not need to be newly created. Therefore, designers and project creators who do not have advanced programming knowledge can set production elements such as images and videos when designing productions, and set production SW to call predefined program functions. It is possible to realize complex performance specifications. Furthermore, by using the production creation tool to create production blocks (LCD production scheduler data) for each production unit, it is possible to significantly shorten the development period. By performing a test using the production SW without performing a test, it is possible to simplify the test process and significantly reduce the time required for the test.

[20-1. Production switch configuration]
Next, the configuration of the production switch (SW) will be explained. FIG. 186 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the effect switch in this embodiment. The effect SW is uniquely identified by the effect SW number, and information necessary for replacing the effect, a program function called by a callback, etc. are associated with the effect SW.

The performance SW number is associated with a performance SW group ID, a performance SW reset group ID, a performance SW attribute, a performance SW activation command address, a performance replacement information table address, and the like.

The production SW group is a collection of production SWs grouped according to the execution mode of production, and the production SW group ID is an identifier of the production SW group, and defines which production SW group the production SW group belongs to. The production SW reset group has the same configuration as the production SW group, and by specifying the production SW reset group ID, the production SW groups belonging to the production SW reset group can be set to OFF, and the productions belonging to the production SW group can be set to OFF all at once. Can be hidden. The production SW reset group ID is an identifier of the production SW reset group. Since the effect SW group ID and the effect SW reset group ID have a bit configuration, it is possible to specify a plurality of effect SW groups.

FIG. 187 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the production SW group of this embodiment. Furthermore, as described above, there are active and passive production SWs, and a production SW group is composed of one or more active production SWs and passive production SWs. Specifically, it includes the first group number of active production SWs and the number of active production SWs that belong to the production SW group, and the first group number of passive production SWs and the number of passive production SWs.

The production SW attribute is information indicating the attribute of the production SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal production SW total reset information, replacement information, special control information, passive/active information, and the like. The liquid crystal performance SW all reset information is information that specifies whether or not the performance SW belonging to the performance group specified at the time of evaluation of the performance SW is set to OFF. The replacement information is information that specifies whether or not to call a callback function for performance replacement when evaluating the performance SW. The special control information (special control behavior) is information that specifies whether or not to call a predetermined callback function when evaluating the effect SW. The passive/active information indicates the evaluation method of the production SW, and in the passive case, the production SW is statically evaluated, and in the active case, the production SW is dynamically evaluated.

The production SW activation command address is the address of the production SW activation command table. The effect SW activation command is a command string for setting the effect SW to ON, and the effect SW activation command table defines the command for setting the effect SW to ON. FIG. 188 is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW activation command table of this embodiment. FIG. 188 exemplifies the effect SW activation command table “lcdsw_cmd_en_ykk_b051_crs_charenge_suc” and the effect SW activation command table “lcdsw_cmd_act_b056_cmc_su3_out_red”. Each table is made up of the number of commands and data for the number of determination commands.

[20-2. Control by production switch in step-up preview production]
Next, performance control using the performance switch will be explained using a step-up preview performance as an example. FIG. 189 is a diagram showing an example of a step-up notice in this embodiment, in which (A) shows the stages in which the step-up notice effect is executed, and (B) shows the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device at each stage. An example is shown below.

The step-up notice of this embodiment can be executed in up to four stages, as shown in FIG. . If the step-up notice develops, the step-up notice performance of the next stage is continuously executed, and if the step-up notice does not develop, the step-up notice ends.

Here, variations of the step-up preview performance for each stage will be explained. In step-up notice 1, which is the first stage after the start of step-up notice performance, a performance in which the display screen is filled with ink is executed. At this time, the level of expectation is suggested by the color of the ink and the pattern of filling. For example, when the color of ink is black, the expectation level is low, and the expectation level increases in the order of white, red, and rainbow color. Furthermore, as for the filling pattern, the more positions the filling starts, the higher the expectation level, and the expectation level may change depending on the position where the filling starts. For example, if filling starts from only one place at the bottom left, the level of expectation is low, when filling starts from two places, bottom left and top left, or from three places: bottom left, top left, and top right. The degree of expectation increases in this order, and the degree of expectation is highest when filling starts from the four corners.

Further, as described above, at the end of the step-up notice of each stage, a development effect to the step-up notice of the next stage is executed. In the development performance, the performance is executed in a common manner up to the middle in order to heighten the player's sense of expectation regardless of whether or not the game actually progresses to the next stage. To explain the case of step-up notice 1, first, the liquid crystal display screen is filled with a combination of ink color and fill pattern determined by lottery. After that, when the screen is completely filled, the ink gradually fades (becomes lighter) and the characters to be displayed in Step-up Notice 2 emerge. When the step-up notice 2 develops, the ink is removed and the text becomes darker, and the effect continues. On the other hand, if the development effect fails, the characters will not be displayed darkly, but will be covered with ink and will be hidden.

In the step-up notice 2, characters are displayed according to the level of expectation. Expectations for the character patterns increase in the order of ``change,'' ``persistence,'' ``spirit,'' ``continuation,'' and ``one-hit kill.'' The presentation mode of the step-up notice 2 is as follows: First, with characters displayed, the area to be filled with the combination of the ink color and fill variations in the step-up notice 1 is enlarged to fill the screen. After that, when the screen is completely filled with ink, the screen shifts to step-up notice 3. On the other hand, if the development effect fails, the ink will gradually fade away before the screen is completely filled with ink, and eventually the ink will be completely removed and the displayed characters will disappear. It will end up being put away.

In the step-up notice 3, the liquid crystal display screen is in a state where it is filled with ink due to the step-up notice 2, and an effect in which the ink gradually fades from this state is executed. At this time, the level of expectation is suggested according to the pattern in which the ink fades. For example, if the ink is coming off from only one place on the bottom left, the expectation level is low, but if the ink is coming off from two places, the bottom left and the top left, the ink is coming off from three places: the bottom left, the top left, and the top right. The level of expectation increases as the ink goes out, and the level of expectation is highest when the ink begins to run from the four corners. Characters are displayed as the ink is being brushed off, and if the characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all of the ink is brushed off, the development performance is successful and the process moves to step-up notice 4. On the other hand, if no characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all the ink has been brushed off, it means that the advanced effect has failed.

The step-up notice 4 is the final stage of the step-up notice, and the level of expectation is suggested by the content (pattern) and color of the characters displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. For example, the character patterns have higher expectations in the order of ``game,'' ``opportunity,'' ``development,'' ``passionate battle,'' ``fierce enthusiasm,'' and ``happiness.'' Furthermore, the expectation level increases in the order of font color: black, white, red, and rainbow. In the presentation mode of the step-up notice 4, an animation in which displayed characters are enlarged, etc. is executed.

Next, a procedure for executing the step-up notice described above using the production SW will be explained. 190 to 192 are diagrams for explaining the procedure for executing a step-up notice using the effect SW in this embodiment. FIG. 190 is a diagram showing the correspondence between all production contents and production SW in step-up notice 1. Figure 191 (A) shows step-up notice 1 liquid crystal performance scheduler data and drawing image for executing step-up notice 1 that fills the screen with black ink from all four directions, and (B) shows red ink from the top right and bottom left of the screen. The step-up notice 1 liquid crystal display scheduler data and drawing image for executing the step-up notice 1 to be filled with are shown. FIG. 192 is a diagram showing the relationship between the performance SW and the performance for replacing the performance related to step-up notice 1.

Figure 190 shows all the effects performed in Step-up Notice 1, which are categorized by each drawing (lower left ink drawing, upper left ink drawing, lower right ink drawing, upper right ink drawing, character failure, character success). The name of the performance SW and the content of the performance are listed in correspondence for each category. The total number of step-up effects shown in the figure is 16 effects with 4 effects each for the lower left, upper left, lower right, and upper right drawing categories, and 10 effects with 5 effects each for the character failure and character success drawing categories, for a total of 26 effects. It becomes. Also, only one effect can be executed at the same time in each drawing category, and only one of them will be executed for the drawing categories "Character Failure" and "Character Success", so the maximum number of effects that can be executed simultaneously in Step-up Notice 1 is There are a total of five effects: the drawing category "lower left", the drawing category "top left", the drawing category "bottom right", the drawing category "top right", and the drawing category "character failure" or the drawing category "character success".

In addition, a method for determining effects for each drawing category will be specifically explained in accordance with the notice lottery result value of step-up notice 1. First, a step-up notice 1 lottery is held to determine the content of the performance related to the ink drawing. Specifically, the production contents related to ink drawing include the selection of the position where ink appears from the drawing classification "lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right", and the color of the ink that appears from the selected ink appearance location. Become. In addition, the drawing classification is either "Character failure" or "Character success" and the content of the character to be displayed at this time.

Next, using FIG. 191(A), the structure of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal presentation scheduler data and the step-up notice 1 drawing image when the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal presentation scheduler data is executed without any control will be explained. . As mentioned above, the total number of effects for step-up notice 1 is 26 in total, but the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal display scheduler data includes one for each drawing category of lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right, character failure, and character success. Only the performance data of is defined. If the step-up notice 1 LCD effect scheduler data is executed without any control, that is, if all the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data are executed at the same time, as shown in the step-up notice 1 drawing image, At the same time, black ink spreads from the bottom left, top left, bottom right, and top right of the screen, and the word "Change" is displayed faintly in the drawing category "Character Failure" and the drawing category "Character Success," and then the text "Change" appears in the drawing category "Character Success." The character ``Change'' is erased in the case of ``Failure'', and at the same time, the character ``Change'' is clearly displayed in the drawing category ``Character Success''.

Furthermore, in FIG. 191(B), depending on the lottery results of step-up notice 1, the drawing category "lower left" is "red", the drawing category "top left" is "none", the drawing category "bottom right" is "none", A command is issued in which the category "upper right" is "red", the drawing category "character failure" is "spirited", and the drawing category "character success" is "none". As a result, in the drawing image, red ink spreads from the drawing section "bottom left", red ink spreads from the drawing section "top right", the character "Kai" is displayed faintly in the drawing section "character failure", and then , the character "Kaiai" is deleted in the drawing category "Character failure".

At this time, the performance SW corresponding to the corresponding performance is set to ON depending on the content of each issued lottery command. Specifically, "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" is set to ON when the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing classification "bottom left" is "red", and when the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing classification "top right" is "red" Then, "LEDSW_RIGUP_S1_RED" is set to ON, and "LEDSW_MOJI_NGS1_KIA" is set to ON for the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "Character failure is spirit". On the other hand, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "top left" is "none", the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "bottom right" is "none", and the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "character success" is "none" Since the command "" does not perform any effect, none of the effect SWs are set to ON but are set to OFF.

As a result of the above, red ink spreads from the drawing category "bottom left" and red ink spreads from the drawing category "top right" among all the performances of Step-up Notice 1, and "Kai" appears in the drawing category "character failure". It is realized that the effect SW corresponding to the case of displaying characters is set to ON in response to a command based on the lottery result of the step-up notice 1.

Next, referring to FIG. 192, using the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal performance scheduler data of FIG. 191(A), to perform a performance according to the lottery result of step-up notice 1 of FIG. 192(B), The mechanism for performing performance replacement will be explained.

FIG. 192 is a diagram illustrating the master data defined on the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data for each drawing section in this embodiment and the presentation SW corresponding to replacement data that is replaced with the master data. To explain specifically with reference to the lower left ink effect replacement group in FIG. 192, the effect SW corresponding to the master data of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is the index number on the CGROM of the video where black ink spreads from the lower left. The corresponding effect SW is "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK". On the other hand, the effect SW corresponding to the replacement data is the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI" which corresponds to the index number on the CGROM of the video where white ink spreads from the bottom left, and the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI" corresponds to the index number on the CGROM of the video where red ink spreads from the bottom left. The effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" is the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED", and the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_REI" corresponds to the index number on the CGROM of the video in which rainbow ink spreads from the bottom left. Note that the replacement data is not defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal presentation scheduler data, but is separately defined in the lower left black presentation replacement table. Further, the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK" corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black ink spreads from the lower left of the master data is defined in both the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the lower left ink effect replacement table.

The liquid crystal presentation 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 analyzes and executes the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal presentation scheduler data in the process of creating a display list command to draw the presentation, and executes the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal presentation scheduler data defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal presentation scheduler data. When the existing effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK" is used as a trigger (detected), a callback is generated and control is transferred from the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 to a program function for effect replacement.

The replacement program function called by the callback refers to the lower left black effect replacement table, determines all the effect SWs registered in the lower left black effect replacement table, and identifies the effect SW that is set to ON. do. In this embodiment, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing classification "lower left" is "red" and the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" is set to ON, so the "from the lower left" corresponding to the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" The video number on the CGROM of "Red Sumi" is specified.

The replacement program function called by the callback hands over the specified video number on the CGROM in red ink from the lower left to the liquid crystal presentation 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and ends the execution. When the control returns to the liquid crystal presentation 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 again, the liquid crystal presentation 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 executes the CGROM corresponding to the video in which black ink appears from the lower left corner defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal presentation scheduler data. Instead of creating a display list command using the video number above, create a display list command using the video number on the CGROM that corresponds to the video in which red ink appears from the bottom left, passed from the replacement program function. create.

The feature of the replacement of effects using callbacks in this embodiment is that it changes from a low-level control structure (in this embodiment, LCD effect scheduler data, a data structure that is easy to change and suitable for turning into a tool) to a high-level control structure (in this embodiment, a data structure that is easy to change and suitable for turning into a tool). By using a callback to call a program function for replacement, or a program function that is unsuitable for modification but capable of executing complex processing, it is possible to separate the detection of the timing of replacement from the replacement control, making it possible to easily It is possible to perform complex processing using liquid crystal display scheduler data, which is a data structure.

Further, in this embodiment, the process is always executed by callback, regardless of the identifier for callback (the ON/OFF setting value of the production SW in this embodiment). Rather than executing the same control as the effect control in this embodiment by callback, a structure for performing complex control is incorporated into the liquid crystal effect scheduler data side, and the liquid crystal 1f drawing scheduler execution unit executes a complex liquid crystal effect scheduler. If performance control is realized by analyzing and executing data, the complexity of the program code processed by the LCD 1F drawing scheduler execution section increases, and furthermore, when adding new functions or changing functions, it is necessary to It is necessary to change the LCD display scheduler data. In this case, it is necessary to change both the program code and data, and not only will problems occur due to changes in control, but also functions that were working properly before the change will be affected, causing new problems. There is a risk that this may occur.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the callback execution always executes the process by the callback, regardless of the identifier for the callback (the ON/OFF setting value of the production SW), and the process is always executed by the callback. Determine whether or not it can be executed and the processing content within the callback function. By creating a callback function that corresponds to a single function, there is no need to change the LCD display scheduler data structure even when adding a new function or changing a function, and you can create a callback function that corresponds to the new function. This can be achieved by creating a callback function or modifying an existing callback function. For this reason, the range of influence caused by changing or adding a function is limited to the newly added or changed callback function, and the possibility of affecting other callback functions and causing a problem is reduced. Also, compared to executing execution analysis of LCD presentation scheduler data centrally with a single large program, it is better to perform execution analysis using multiple callback functions and LCD presentation scheduler data to realize each function. However, the structure and composition of the program can be simplified.

In this embodiment, the explanation has been given with a focus on replacing effects, but the control mechanism using callbacks in this embodiment is not only for replacing effects, but also for replacing symbols, controlling display or non-display of effects, and controlling the drawing target. It is also applicable to conversion of drawing data, execution of scheduler data of other effect display devices, and conversion of scheduler data.

Here, regarding the purpose of defining the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK" which corresponds to the index number on the CGROM of the video where black ink spreads from the lower left of the master data in both the step-up notice 1 LCD effect scheduler data and the lower left ink effect replacement table. explain. If the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master production SW is not defined in the production replacement table, the relationship between the master and the replacement target, that is, the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master production SW must be determined by the LCD production scheduler. It exists only in the data, and the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the replacement effect SW corresponding to the master exists only in the effect replacement table. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, several thousand effect replacement tables and effect SWs are each defined. In situations where game specifications are frequently changed or added between the planning and development of a game machine and its release into the market, it is important to ensure consistency between the index number of the video (image) on the CGROM and the production SW. It will be extremely difficult to maintain this.

Regarding the relationship between the index number on the CGROM and the production SW, it is possible to incorrectly define the index number on the CGROM that corresponds to the master production SW in the production replacement table, or vice versa. It is possible that the above index number may be mistakenly registered in the LCD presentation scheduler data. In this case, a difference occurs between the command value of the performance lottery and the number of data of the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the performance SW on the replacement table, and the performance is replaced with a performance different from the performance selected in the performance lottery. . Since expectations are set for each performance, it is possible for a special jackpot performance to appear that would not appear due to a negative variation, which is a fatal problem for a gaming machine. As in this embodiment, by defining the effect replacement table including the index number on the CGROM that corresponds to the master effect SW, consistency can be confirmed by comparing the total number of effects with the replacement table. Become. In addition, since the liquid crystal performance scheduler data operates without problems no matter which data in the replacement table is defined, it is a control method that is extremely unlikely to cause problems. In this embodiment, even if the master effect defined on the LCD effect scheduler data is drawn as a result of the effect lottery, the index number on the CGROM of the master on the LCD effect scheduler data is not used and must be replaced. A display list command is created using the index number on the master CGROM defined in the table, and the effect is drawn.

In the step-up notice 3, as described above, ink is gradually erased from part or all of the vertices of the display area from the filled state, and when the development effect is successful, the characters appear. On the other hand, if the development performance fails, the ink is completely erased without any characters being displayed, and the step-up notice ends. In both cases of success and failure, the effect of gradually erasing ink from the vertices of the display area is executed, so there are four types of effect SW flags for drawing patterns that gradually erase ink from each vertex. (layer) is defined. Furthermore, two types of effect SW flags (layers) corresponding to the results of the advanced effect are defined.

The upper left ink replacement group, lower right ink replacement group, upper right ink replacement group, character failure effect replacement group, and character success effect replacement group other than the lower left ink replacement group shown in FIG. 192 have the same configuration and control method as the lower left ink replacement group. It is.

In step-up notice 4, since the step-up notice will not be executed continuously thereafter, you may define a production SW flag (layer) according to the aspect of the animation of the displayed character, or you may define one type of production SW flag (layer). layer) and set the type of character animation using parameters.

As described above, in this embodiment, different types of effects can be created by individually defining drawing effect patterns for each ink appearance position or character content, and setting the effect SW flag corresponding to the effect to be executed to ON. You can perform a combination of these effects. Switching and combining effects is as simple as switching the settings of the effect SW flags individually, so planners and others who configure the effects can simply set parameters using tools without the need for skills such as creating new programs. Various variations of performances can be realized. For example, in the step-up notice 1, dozens of drawing patterns can be realized by simply combining four types of drawing patterns based on the appearance position of black ink and two types of result display patterns of advanced effects. As a result, it is possible to minimize the types of programs to be developed, improve the development efficiency of performance control programs for gaming machines, and improve the quality by making it possible to inspect developed performance control programs more efficiently. I can do it.

[20-3. Overview of control based on production switch]
Next, an overview of control based on the effect switch will be explained. FIG. 193 is a diagram illustrating a control procedure using the effect switch of this embodiment, and particularly shows an evaluation procedure for setting the effect SW to ON. In this embodiment, first, when a main command (main control command) that triggers the start of the performance is received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1530 issues a peripheral control command to the configuration inside the peripheral control board 1510. An issue command is generated. The peripheral control internally issued command is a command for executing a preview lottery or for executing an effect by the peripheral control unit 1530.

The performance SW command analysis module of the peripheral control board 1510 evaluates the analyzed main control command and the received sub-internally issued command, and sets the corresponding performance SW to ON. Specifically, it is compared with the performance SW determination data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b to determine whether data matching the received command is registered. It is determined whether data matching the received command is registered in the command string of the effect SW judgment data, and if matching data exists, peripheral control is performed based on the effect SW number corresponding to the command string. The effect SW flag stored in the RAM 1530c is set to ON.

The performance SW determination data is composed of two types of information, the first information being a performance SW determination command string for turning on the performance SW. The production SW judgment command string is not of a fixed length, but it is possible to combine multiple command values, a main control command value and a sub internal command value, or a combination of a peripheral control internal issued command value and a peripheral control internal command value. . For example, the fluctuation start designation command value sent from the main control board 1310 and the probability state designation command value are defined side by side, or the background designation command of the peripheral control internally issued command value and the command value of the mini character preview lottery result are defined side by side. It is now possible.

By defining multiple commands side by side, for example, if the same mini character preview is displayed differently depending on the background, the background command value can be determined, and the background can be identified, then the mini character command value can be determined. For the first time, it will be possible to specify the mini-character's performance that corresponds to the background, but it will require multiple determinations for the number of commands. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, by defining the background specification command and the command value of the mini character preview lottery result side by side, the production SW corresponding to the command value can be set as the mini character corresponding to the background. There is no need to make multiple judgments, and even for effects defined by a combination of a plurality of commands, the corresponding effect can be specified in the same way as for effects defined by a single command. Further, since it is possible to define a plurality of effect SWs for the same command value, it is possible to activate a plurality of effect SWs simultaneously with a single command value.

The second information of the performance SW determination data is the performance SW number, which is the index number of the performance SW flag array. The performance SW determination data is a combination of a performance SW determination command value and a performance SW number, and is registered for all performance SWs.

From the above, as shown in FIG. 193, when the command "0x103001" is received, "LCDSW_LEFDW_S1" with the production SW number 100 is registered in the production SW determination data, so the production SW flag stored in the RAM is Set lcdsw_flg[LCDSW_LEFDW_S1] to ON.

As described above, by setting the production SW flag corresponding to the command, a predetermined process is called when executing the LCD production scheduler data for executing the corresponding preview production, as shown in FIGS. 190 to 192. It will be done.

Further, a function for executing a performance based on the performance SW is defined in the performance SW command analysis module. An example of these functions will be explained below. FIG. 194 is a diagram illustrating an example of a function defined in the production SW command analysis module of this embodiment. Each function takes a production SW number (LEDSW number) as an argument.

LEDSW_TST is a function that determines whether the production SW number is ON from a regular program or a called-back program. LEDSW_SET is a function for turning on the effect SW from a regular program or a callback program, rather than activating the effect SW by a command.

LEDSW_OFF is a function that turns off the effect SW from a regular program or a called-back program. In addition, if the attribute of "all reset" is defined in the attribute of the production SW, based on the "reset target production SW group ID" of the "production SW information table" corresponding to the production SW number, the reset target production SW All production SWs belonging to the group are set to OFF.

LEDSW_GET is a function that acquires attribute information of the target effect SW from a regular program or a called-back program. LCDSW_ATIMER is a function that acquires the frame time from the activation of the active production SW from a regular program or a called-back program.

[20-4. Implementation example of production switch]
Next, an implementation example of control using a production switch will be described. 195 to 200 are diagrams showing part of the program code for executing control using the effect switch in this embodiment. Note that the program code shown in each figure is written in C language.

As described above, the effect SW is set for each display target, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal layer table, liquid crystal effect common block, liquid crystal effect block, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Note that since the effect SW is set in all effect blocks, the process based on the effect SW is always called back when the effect block is executed. Even if there is no need to execute a specific process, the callback is executed, it is determined within the callback function that the specific process is not to be executed, and the callback function is terminated.

FIG. 195 is a diagram illustrating the details of the configuration of the production SW information table of this embodiment, in which (A) is an example of a program code that defines the production SW information table, and (B) is a diagram showing the bit assignment of production SW control information. , (C) is a diagram showing an example of a production SW group.

The production SW information table is configured based on the production SW information table management structure shown in (A), and includes production SW group ID, reset target production SW group ID, production SW control information (production SW attribute), production SW Contains command information address and production replacement information table information.

The production SW group ID is identification information of the production SW group to which the corresponding production SW belongs. Production SW groups are grouped by function, such as production SW for performing the same (same type) preview production, production SW for displaying a hold, production SW for notification, etc. ing. The production SW group ID is expressed in bits, and one production SW can belong to a plurality of production SW groups.

The reset target production SW group ID is identification information for specifying the production SW group whose production SW is set to OFF when "all production SW reset" is specified in the "attrib bit assignment" described later. This makes it possible to collectively designate the effect SWs whose processing is to be canceled (reset) at the same time when switching the effect SWs. The reset target performance SW group ID is expressed in bits like the performance SW group ID, and it is possible to specify a plurality of groups.

The production SW control information is information that defines the function of the production SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal production SW total reset information, replacement information, special control information, and passive/active information. Further, the effect SW control information is composed of 16 bits, and each bit defines the function of the effect SW. The bits corresponding to the functions of the production SW are as shown in FIG. 195(B), and the contents will be explained below.

The passive (PASSIVE)/active (ACTIVE) information indicates the evaluation method of the effect SW, and when the bit is "0", it is "PASSIVE", and when the bit is "1", it is "ACTIVE". In passive mode, the drawing effect corresponding to the effect SW is performed only once even if a command to activate the effect SW is received multiple times during the period in which the effect SW is defined; in active mode, the effect is executed only once in the period in which the effect SW is defined. If a command to start the SW is received multiple times, the corresponding performance is re-executed for the number of times the command has been received. Active is used when a button is pressed multiple times within the button validity period to display a drawing effect corresponding to the button press.

The special control information (special control behavior) is information that specifies whether or not to call a predetermined callback function when evaluating the effect SW. If the bit is set to "1", the user-side callback function is called instead of the system-side callback function.

The replacement information is information that calls a callback function for performance replacement when evaluating the performance SW. If the bit is set to “1”, a predefined replacement callback function is called when evaluating the effect SW defined for each display target, still image, or video in the LCD effect scheduler data. It will be done.

The liquid crystal performance SW all reset information is information that specifies whether or not the performance SW belonging to the performance group specified at the time of evaluation of the performance SW is set to OFF. When the bit is set to "1", the performance SWs belonging to all groups set in the "reset target performance SW group ID" are set to OFF during performance SW evaluation.

Here, we return to the description of FIG. 195(A). As for the production SW command information address, defined command information is output when the production SW is set to ON at the time of performance SW evaluation. The output command is stored in the reference destination of the production SW command information address, and new production SW control and production are executed by the output command.

The production SW replacement table information is a replacement table in which the data to be replaced is defined when the replacement information bit of the production SW control information is set to "1" (when "with replacement" is specified). address is stored. Details of the replacement table will be described later with reference to FIG. 198.

Next, the production SW group will be explained. In this embodiment, when setting a plurality of related effect SWs, they are managed as a effect group. The production group includes a production SW group ID, an active production SW top ID, an active production SW number, a passive production SW first ID, and a passive production SW number.

The production SW group ID is an identifier of the production SW group. In the performance SW group, active performance SW and passive performance SW are stored in a continuous area. The active production SW head ID is identification information of the production SW located at the head among the active production SWs belonging to the production SW group. The number of active production SWs is the number of active production SWs arranged from the production SW corresponding to the active production SW head ID. The passive production SW head ID is identification information of the production SW located at the head among the passive production SWs belonging to the production SW group. The number of passive performance SWs is the number of passive performance SWs arranged from the performance SW corresponding to the passive performance SW head ID. As mentioned above, by defining the production SW group ID as the reset target production SW group ID, if "all production SW reset" is specified in "attrib bit assignment", the continuous It becomes possible to simultaneously set a plurality of passive production SWs and a plurality of consecutive active production SWs to OFF.

FIG. 196 is a diagram showing an example of a program code that defines the effect SW number corresponding to the effect SW in this embodiment. In the program code shown in FIG. 196, a specific numerical value is defined for the production SW number using an enumerated type (enum). In this embodiment, the work area and the performance information table can be referred to using the performance SW number as an index.

By defining the effect SW numbers in an enumerated format in this way, when setting or referencing the effect SW numbers within a program, there is no need to directly handle them numerically, and the readability of the program can be improved.

Next, the effect SW flag and the effect SW information table will be explained. FIG. 197 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the effect SW flag and effect SW information table of this embodiment, (A) shows the effect SW flag, and (B) shows the effect SW information table.

The effect SW flag is a flag indicating whether or not (ON/OFF) the process based on the corresponding effect SW is executed by the callback function that has called back. As shown in (A), the effect SW flag is stored in a byte type array variable, and the index of the array corresponds to the effect SW number. When executing the effect SW corresponding to the effect SW number, "1" (ON) is set, and when not executing it, "0" (OFF) is set.

The effect SW information table is defined by the effect SW information table management structure shown in FIG. 195(A), and each element of the effect SW information table is a constant that is read during program execution and is not updated unless the program data is changed. It becomes. Further, the effect SW information table is stored in an array using the effect SW number as an index, like the effect SW flag, and stores data corresponding to all effect SWs.

Next, the performance SW replacement table information and the performance SW replacement table for performing performance replacement will be explained. The effect SW replacement table information is included in the effect SW information table, as shown in FIG. 195(A). FIG. 198 is a diagram showing an example of the production SW replacement table information included in the production SW information table of this embodiment and the program data that defines the production SW replacement table, in which (A) shows the production SW replacement table information, (B ) indicates a production SW replacement table.

FIG. 198(A) is program data showing the configuration of the production SW replacement table information "lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1". The performance SW replacement table information stores the address of the performance SW replacement table, performance SW master data, and performance SW replacement data. The address of the effect SW replacement table is the address of the table in which the numbers of actual replacement materials are stored.

The effect SW master data is effect SW data defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and in the case of "lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1", this corresponds to the case where the ink color is black (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK). The replacement data is information indicating the material to be replaced from the master data, and for example, there is a case where the black color is replaced with white (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI), and the material information is replaced with the corresponding replacement data by evaluating the effect SW.

FIG. 198(B) is program data showing the configuration of the effect SW replacement table "lcdsw_cchanege_lefdw_s1". First, the number of columns and rows of material numbers defined in the replacement table are defined in the effect SW replacement table, and in this embodiment, the number of columns is 1 and the number of rows is 4. After defining the number of columns and rows, information indicating the replacement material is stored. In this embodiment, the replacement information has a one-dimensional table structure, but a two-dimensional or three-dimensional table structure may also be used.

The specific replacement method first refers to the production SW replacement table information and evaluates all production SW production switch master data and production SW replacement data defined in the production SW replacement table information. At this time, one of the performance SWs defined in the performance SW replacement table information is set to ON by a command issued according to the result of the performance lottery. Here, the description will be made assuming that the effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) is set to ON. The same row of the performance SW replacement table is specified using the number of rows of the performance SW set to ON in the performance SW replacement table information as an index. In the effect replacement data, the material number (CG_MOVE_LEFDW_S1_WHI) corresponds to the line of effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI), and the material number to be replaced is specified. The material number is an index number that identifies a still image or a moving image on the CGROM.

[21. Layer configuration]
Next, we will explain the layers that display images and videos. By dividing the liquid crystal display object into a plurality of regions (layers) and drawing the layers, the display results can be used for general purposes. For example, by separating the background layers, even if the displayed character is changed, it can be drawn using a common method.

In this embodiment, by individually storing and managing a table that stores layer information (layer information table), it is possible to configure the structure so that even if some layers are changed, other layers are not affected. I can do it.

FIG. 199 is a diagram showing an example of program data that defines the layer information table of this embodiment, in which (A) is a list that stores addresses for storing each layer information table, and (B) is a list that stores the layer information table (background information table). (for use). The above-mentioned effect SW is also defined in the layer information table, and a callback function is called using the effect SW as a trigger.In the callback function, it is determined whether or not to execute the corresponding liquid crystal layer table based on the information of the effect SW. decide. For example, when the effect SW (LEDSW_BG_RIV) is ON, the river background layer table (direct_layer01_common0002) is executed. Further, FIG. 200 is a diagram showing an example of program data that defines the layer information table of this embodiment, in which (A) is the content of the layer information table (first half of the preview), and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of the layer information table (first half of the preview). The contents of the first half 2) are shown. The layer information tables for the first half of the preview and the second half determine the layer table to be executed by the production SW, similar to the layer information table for the background.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 199(A), layer information tables for background, symbol display, first half preview, jackpot effect, role object movement, pending display, etc. are defined.

In addition, FIG. 199(B) shows a layer information table for the background, and in the production in this embodiment, a sea background, a mountain background, and a river background are defined, and furthermore, a background (time saving) according to the game state is defined. medium background, high-accuracy medium background) are also defined. Furthermore, variations such as partially changing the background color can be added using the effect SW.

FIG. 200(A) shows a layer information table for the first half of the notice, in which a roulette notice, a blackout notice, and a window notice are defined, and a command for clearing the notice is also defined. Figure 200 (B) shows the layer information table for the first half of the preview, in which the step-up notice, button mini-character notice, and conversation notice are defined, and as in the case of the first half of the notice, the layer table for clearing the notice. is also defined. The layer table for clearing the preview is used to finish the drawing of the preview executed in the layer table of each preview defined in the layer information table of each preview. Specifically, the effect SW group ID of the preview layer is defined as the reset target effect SW group ID of the effect SW control information of the effect SW described above, and ``all effect SW reset'' is defined in the ``attrib bit assignment''. Then, when the production SW (LEDSW_YKK_CLR) is set to ON, the production SW of all previews belonging to the production SW group ID defined in the reset target production SW group ID is set to OFF, and the drawing corresponding to the production SW is set to OFF. will end and be hidden. Note that the layer table for clearing the preview will be empty data because no effects will be performed.

Note that a record for determining the end is stored at the end of the area allocated to the list that stores the layer table and the table that stores the layer information, and when the record for determining the end is detected, it is determined that the data loading has finished. It becomes possible to do so. This makes it possible to dynamically change the amount of data (number of records) without having to set the number of elements for each list or table in advance.

[22. Implementation example of step-up notice]
Next, an example of implementing a preview effect using liquid crystal display block data (common block) will be described using a step-up preview effect as an example.

[22-1. Production layer table/LCD production block data]
FIG. 201 is a diagram showing an example of program data that defines the liquid crystal layer table and the liquid crystal effect common block in this embodiment, (A) is the liquid crystal layer table for the step-up preview effect, and (B) is the liquid crystal effect common block. The configuration is shown below.

As shown in FIG. 201(A), the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the step-up preview effect is based on the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table and the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks corresponding to the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks. It is defined as a pair with the total number of drawing frames and the effect SW. In this embodiment, the total number of drawing frames (580), the effect SW "LCDSW_STEPUP", and the common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" are defined. A callback is executed based on the effect SW ``LCDSW_STEPUP'', and within the callback function, it is determined whether or not to execute the common block ``LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP'' based on the information of the effect SW ``LCDSW_STEPUP.''

The liquid crystal effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" is defined in the following order: effect SW, total number of frames to be drawn, loop start frame position, playback time, and liquid crystal effect block. As shown in FIG. 201(B), when there are multiple liquid crystal presentation blocks, multiple lines are defined in the same format. After the step-up notice 4, a terminal is set, and the configuration is such that it can respond to an increase or decrease in the number of steps by adding or deleting liquid crystal presentation blocks. For example, when adding step-up notice 5, data corresponding to step-up notice 5 may be added between step-up notice 4 and the end.

Similar to the effect SW defined in the layer table, the effect SW controls whether or not the corresponding liquid crystal effect block can be executed based on a set value. The total number of drawn frames defines the total number of rendering frames of the liquid crystal rendering block. To explain using the step-up notice 1 in the first line, it is defined that the liquid crystal presentation block of the step-up notice 1 is to be played for (150) frames. The loop start frame position is a frame position for determining which display data frame to return to after the reproduction of the liquid crystal display block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" on the first line is finished.

The playback time is the playback time of the LCD production block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1". The relationship between the total playback time, loop start frame position, and playback time is that the playback time is the playback time of the LCD effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1", so after the playback of the LCD effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" is completed, the LCD effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" is replayed. When loop playback is performed from the beginning or middle of a video, the number of frames to be looped is added to the playback time, and the added frame number is defined as the total playback time. The playback time of the LCD effect block of Step Up Notice 1 "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" is (150) frames, so if you want to loop the latter 50 frames twice after the playback of the LCD effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" is completed, it will be played within the total playback time. This can be achieved by defining (250) frames of time (150) frames + loop playback time (50×2) frames, and defining (100) frames at the loop start frame position. A performance in which the symbols fluctuate without being fixed during a pseudo-continuous performance can be achieved by using the loop playback function.

Furthermore, although the total playback time and playback time of the LCD production block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" of this embodiment are the same, the reason why the loop start frame is defined as one frame before the playback end is due to some kind of defect. In order to prevent the drawing from being updated and the LCD screen to stop if the next effect common block is not executed, drawing is repeated based on the loop start point when the total playback time is exceeded.

In this embodiment, when executing the effects from step-up notice 1 to step-up notice 3, the control by the LCD effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" is performed after the peripheral control board 1530 executes the lottery of notices related to the effect. Issues peripheral control internal commands related to preview performance, step-up notice 1 command, step-up notice 2 command, and step-up notice 3 command. Next, in response to the issued command, the step-up 1 effect SW "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1", the step-up 2 effect SW "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2", and the step-up 3 effect SW "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3" are set to ON. On the other hand, the step-up 4 production SW "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4" remains set to OFF because the step-up notice 4 command has not been issued.

After setting the effect SW, a callback is executed based on all the effect SWs defined in the LCD effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" and a callback function is called. In the called callback function, it is determined whether each performance SW is set to ON or not, and a liquid crystal performance block corresponding to the performance SW set to ON is executed. In the LCD production common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP", "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1", "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2", and "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3" are set to ON, so the LCD production blocks "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1", "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2", and "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU3" are set to ON, respectively. executed. On the other hand, since "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4" is set to OFF, "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU4" is not executed. As described above, it is possible to define multiple liquid crystal presentation blocks within the liquid crystal presentation common block and use the presentation SW to control whether or not to execute the liquid crystal presentation blocks, so it is possible to execute multiple notices in combination. Furthermore, it is possible to switch between displaying and non-displaying each effect.

Next, the contents of the liquid crystal display block of each step in the step-up notice will be explained. FIG. 202 is a diagram showing an example of program data that defines the liquid crystal display blocks (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1 to 4) for each step of the step-up notice.

Regarding the contents of the liquid crystal presentation block, first, the total number of data defined in the liquid crystal presentation block is defined. There are two types of functions used in the liquid crystal presentation block, which are the number of execution frames, functions, or liquid crystal presentation scheduler data: "LCD_NOP" and "LCD_NULL" and liquid crystal presentation scheduler data. "LCD_NOP" is a function that waits for the number of execution frames, and "LCD_NULL" is a function that indicates the end of the liquid crystal display block.

Next, we will provide a specific explanation of the liquid crystal presentation block. Explaining with reference to the liquid crystal display block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2", the first (3) indicates that "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2" is composed of three lines of data (the number of steps is 3). The next line is "LCD_NOP" which specifies the number of execution frames (120), so it waits for (120) frames from the start of execution of the liquid crystal effect block. (120) After waiting for a frame, execute the liquid crystal display scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" for frames corresponding to the number of execution frames (175). Thereafter, "LCD_NULL" with the specified execution frame number (1) is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal display block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2" is ended.

As explained in Figure 189, this is achieved by using the weight of "LCD_NOP" to execute the development effect to the next step-up notice at the end of each step-up notice of the step-up notice. are doing.

Specifically, the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1" does not wait and starts executing the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1". The LCD effect block "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" executes a wait using "LCD_NOP", waits for (120) frames, and then starts executing the LCD effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2", so that the LCD effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1" is When (120) frames have passed since the start of execution, the liquid crystal display scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" starts execution. Thereby, at the end of the step-up notice 1, it is possible to repeatedly execute the development effect to the next step step-up notice 2.

In addition, it is possible to define multiple liquid crystal presentation scheduler data in chronological order in the liquid crystal presentation block, and if liquid crystal presentation scheduler data is defined continuously, the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data corresponding to the period of the number of execution frames will be Execute and execute the LCD display scheduler data of the next line.

In the performance scheduler data for step-up notice performance 2, after the total number of functions is defined, a function NOP for waiting while step-up notice performance 1 is executed, a function LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2 for executing step-up notice performance 2, Finally, a function LCD_NULL indicating the end of scheduler data is defined. Step-up notice 3 and step-up notice 4 are similarly described.

[23. Implementation example of button mini character production]
The above is an explanation of the LCD performance scheduler data for the step-up preview performance. Next, an explanation will be given of an effect in which a mini-character appears on the liquid crystal display screen by prompting the user to operate the effect button while the symbols are changing and by operating the effect button within a predetermined period.

[23-1. Mode of button mini character production]
FIG. 203 is a diagram illustrating an overview of the button mini-character presentation of this embodiment. The button mini character performance is executed when a lottery is performed when the main command is received or when the fluctuation starts, and when the lottery is won. In the button mini-character presentation, when the presentation button is operated during the acceptance period for button operation input, a predetermined character (mini-character) is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. In addition, a first half validity period and a second half validity period are set for the reception period of button operation input, and the mini characters are displayed in different manners.

To explain further, if you win the execution lottery for the button mini-character performance and 90 frames (f) have passed since the start of the variation, the first half of the button mini-character valid period ends. The first half of the button mini-character valid period is 90 frames, and at the start of the first half valid period of the button mini-character, an image (video) prompting the user to press the button is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. Button Mini Character If you press the button during the first half of the validity period, the mini character will be displayed. More specifically, as will be described later, when the button is operated during the first half validity period of the button mini-character, the effect SW for displaying the mini-character is set to ON, and the corresponding liquid crystal effect block is executed by callback.

If you operate the button during the second half of the button mini character's validity period, the mini character will be displayed as in the second half of the button mini character's first half validity period. In Figure 378, the character is displayed in a different manner than when the button is operated during the first half of the validity period of the button mini character, but it may be displayed in the same manner, or when the button is operated during the first half of the validity period of the button mini character. The characters may be displayed in different ways.

If you operate the button during the second half of the button mini character's validity period, the mini character will be displayed in the same way as the button mini character's first half of its validity period. In Figure 203, the character is displayed in a different manner than when the button is operated during the first half of the validity period of the button mini character, but it may be displayed in the same manner, or when the button is operated during the first half of the validity period of the button mini character. The characters may be displayed in different ways.

[23-2. LCD display common block]
FIG. 204 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining a liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the button mini-character presentation in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 204, the liquid crystal layer table "direct_layer05_common0002" corresponding to the button mini character presentation is based on the number of liquid crystal presentation common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table, and the total drawing frame of the liquid crystal presentation common blocks corresponding to the number of liquid crystal presentation common blocks. It is defined as a pair with the number and the production SW. In this embodiment, the total number of drawing frames (180), the effect SW "LCDSW_BTN_MINIBEF", and the liquid crystal effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF" are defined. Subsequently, the total number of drawing frames (150) frames, presentation SW "LCDSW_BTN_MINIAFT", and liquid crystal presentation common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT" are defined. In the liquid crystal layer table "direct_layer05_common0002", first, the liquid crystal display common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF" is executed for (180) frames. Thereafter, for (150) frames, the liquid crystal display common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT" is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal layer table "direct_layer05_common0002" is finished.

Next, the configuration of the common block for each liquid crystal display of the button mini character display will be explained. FIG. 205 is a diagram illustrating an example of program data defining individual common blocks for button mini-character presentation in this embodiment.

The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal effect common blocks "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF" and "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT" in FIG. 205 are the same as the effect layer table and liquid crystal effect block data explained in FIG. 201. The production SWs “LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT” that call the callback function to determine whether to execute the liquid crystal production block data “LCD_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” are active productions with active attributes defined in the production SW control information. It becomes SW. Therefore, the drawing effect (effect block) corresponding to the effect SW is executed as many times as the button is operated.

[23-3. LCD production block data]
FIG. 206 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining liquid crystal presentation block data for executing button mini-character presentation in this embodiment.

The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal presentation block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" shown in FIG. 206 are the same as the liquid crystal presentation block data explained with reference to FIG. 377. To explain the processing by each liquid crystal effect block data, first, in the first half of the effect, "LCD_NOP" defined at the beginning of the liquid crystal effect block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" is executed, and it waits for (90) frames from the start of fluctuation. . Subsequently, the liquid crystal display scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINIBEF" corresponding to the first half validity period of the button mini-character is executed for (90) frames, and the execution of the liquid crystal display block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" is ended. In addition, in the second half of the performance, "LCD_NOP" defined at the beginning of the liquid crystal display block data "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" corresponding to the second half valid period of the button mini character is executed, and waits for (30) frames from the start of the fluctuation. Thereafter, the liquid crystal display scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINIAFT" corresponding to the second half of the valid period of the button mini-character is executed for (120) frames, and the execution of the liquid crystal display block data "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" is ended.

As mentioned above, the production SW "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" are active production SW, so the production SW "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" are set to ON while the LCD production scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINIBEF" and "LCD_DIR_MINIAFT" are being executed. If the command to do so is issued multiple times, the drawing effects corresponding to the effect SWs "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" are executed for the number of times issued. Furthermore, a callback is generated every frame by the production SW, and the corresponding callback function is called. Control is executed when the button is pressed within the called callback function, and the callback is executed every frame even after the button press control ends until after the execution of the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data is completed. By creating liquid crystal display scheduler data that draws effects during the button's valid period and controlling it with the active effect SW, control that sets the period during which the callback is executed as the button's valid period without separately determining the button's valid period. becomes possible. For example, by repeatedly pressing a button, the number of times the button is repeatedly pressed can be counted, and an effect can be executed according to the number of times. Further, by calling sub effect scheduler data including a function for controlling the lamp within the callback function, the lamp can be turned on in response to a button operation. Furthermore, by calling sub performance scheduler data including a function for controlling the accessory, it is possible to perform an operation according to the number of button operations and to execute scheduler data for returning to the initial position after the button operation valid period ends. The procedure for returning the accessory to the initial position is, for example, to wait by "LCD_NOP" until the button operation validity period ends, and then execute a production block including a function for returning the accessory to the initial position.

[24. LCD display scheduler for designs]
As described above, in the present embodiment, when executing a preview performance, it is possible to replace the drawn content according to the gaming state and the expectation level of the variable display game that is the target of the preview. Similarly, it is also possible to replace the identification symbols that are displayed in a variable manner in a variable display game when a predetermined condition such as a gaming state is satisfied. Hereinafter, an outline of the procedure for replacing the identification symbol will be explained.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the variable display of the identification symbols stops in the order of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol, and each column is assigned a reel in which the identification symbols are arranged in a predetermined order. Identification symbols are drawn on each reel in a manner that corresponds to the gaming state, and each reel is defined for each aspect. The variable display of the identification symbols is realized by sequentially displaying the identification symbols drawn on each reel together with the background image.

The display of the identification symbol is updated every frame, and a production SW is assigned, similar to the preview production. In the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data for displaying the identification pattern, the index number on the CGROM of a still image or moving image for displaying the identification pattern and the presentation SW corresponding to the index number on the CGROM are defined as master data. . A reel number is defined in the presentation SW for identification symbol replacement. The reel number represents a unique identification number that is displayed for each game state or performance. For example, if the identification symbols displayed on the mountain background, river background, and sea background are different, the left symbol on the mountain background is R0, the middle symbol is R1, and the right symbol is R2, and the left symbol on the river background is R3, the middle symbol. is R4, the right symbol is R5, the left symbol with a mountain background is R6, the middle symbol is R7, and the right symbol is R8. By using the reel numbers, it becomes possible to individually correspond to the gaming state and performance, and it also becomes possible to specify the display position of the identification symbol.

Furthermore, the reel number includes a reel index number. The reel index number is defined for each reel arrangement number of identification symbols. The reel arrangement is the design of the identification symbols when the identification symbols are displayed in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0 and returns to 1 after 0. A reel index is defined as the total number and display order of identification symbols. It is also possible to define multiple reel indexes.

In addition, the table for replacing identification symbols includes a reel number and an identification symbol replacement table corresponding to a reel index number corresponding to the reel number, and a reel replacement work number table for reel replacement. In the identification symbol replacement table, an index number on the CGROM of a still image or a moving image corresponding to the reel arrangement is defined for each reel index.

Replacement of identification symbols is performed using a reel index replacement work number table in addition to an identification symbol replacement table. The reel index replacement work number table defines work numbers for reel replacement on one or more RAMs corresponding to each reel index. In the reel replacement work, temporary stop symbol number values of identified symbols related to pseudo-continuous fluctuations, confirmed symbol number values of identified symbols, etc. are displayed when the identified symbols are stopped or can be recognized by the player as being stopped. The identification symbol number value is stored in advance at the start of variation by the peripheral control program in accordance with the performance content.

To explain the specification of data for replacing identification symbols, when a callback is executed based on the production SW for identification symbol replacement, the reel index number corresponding to the reel number is specified within the callback function for identification symbol replacement. Based on this, the target reel index replacement work number is specified from the reel index replacement work number table. Furthermore, the identification symbol number value stored in the reel index replacement work is taken out, and the reel index replacement work number is corrected based on the display number of identification symbols produced in the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data. Similarly, based on the reel index number corresponding to the reel number, a corresponding replacement table is identified in the identification symbol replacement table, and the reel is corrected for the index number on the CGROM of the still image or video to be replaced in the identified table. Specify using the index replacement work number.

In addition, when replacing the identification symbol, the index number on the master CGROM on the LCD performance scheduler data is not used even if the master performance defined on the LCD performance scheduler data is selected, as in the case of performance replacement. , a display list command is always created using the index number on the master CGROM defined in the replacement table, and the content of the effect is drawn.

Furthermore, by replacing the identification symbols every frame, even if an incorrect identification symbol is displayed due to the occurrence of noise, it is possible to immediately return to normal display. In addition, by setting the reels according to the gaming state, even if a problem occurs in replacing the identification symbol due to an error, the player will be able to understand the gaming state regardless of the content of the identification symbol. , it is possible to suppress a decline in player interest.

[25. Callback timing]
Next, the timing at which a callback occurs when a production SW is detected will be explained. In this embodiment, the drawing classification can be determined based on the parameters passed to the callback function.

FIG. 207 is a diagram showing an example of drawing classifications that can be determined within a callback function when a callback is executed by the effect SW of this embodiment.

"LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_A" generates a callback before the liquid crystal A drawing starts, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_A" generates a callback after the liquid crystal A drawing starts. Further, "LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_B" generates a callback before the liquid crystal B drawing starts, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_B" generates a callback after the liquid crystal B drawing starts. Liquid crystal A and liquid crystal B are each separate liquid crystals, and by making it possible to determine the completion of drawing before each liquid crystal starts drawing, it is possible to use the completion of drawing on liquid crystal A as an opportunity to draw on liquid crystal B, or to finish drawing on liquid crystal B. Taking this as an opportunity, it becomes possible to draw on the liquid crystal A.

"LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM" causes a callback to occur before all drawing starts, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM" causes a callback to occur after all drawing is completed. By making a determination before the start of drawing, you can initialize the frame buffer with the necessary background color before drawing, and by determining the end of drawing, you can instruct other presentation devices to execute the effect when drawing is complete. It becomes possible.

For "LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM", a callback occurs before drawing of the corresponding layer starts, and for "LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM", a callback occurs after drawing of the corresponding layer is completed. Predetermined processing can be performed before or after drawing of a specific layer is completed. For example, by making a determination before starting layer drawing, if a plurality of notifications are occurring when drawing a notification layer, it is possible to enlarge and draw the display of the notification with a higher priority. In addition, by making a judgment after the layer drawing starts, effects can be drawn around the drawn pattern at the timing when the highly anticipated pattern stops before the pattern layer drawing starts. It is possible to display effects around the symbol only when the symbol stops.

As described above, it is possible to specify a drawing section and execute a predetermined process before starting or after drawing is completed. It is also possible to generate a callback for each common block. As shown in FIG. 207, "LCD_EFF_BEF_COMBLK" can generate a callback before the common block drawing starts, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_COMBLK" can generate a callback after the common block drawing is completed. By making a determination before the start of common block drawing, it is possible to stop the execution of a specific liquid crystal effect block corresponding to a single effect that constitutes the common block for liquid crystal effects, so as not to draw the effect, or to stop drawing the effect. By making the determination after the drawing is completed, it is also possible to execute a liquid crystal presentation common block different from the liquid crystal presentation common block scheduled to be executed that was determined in advance at the start of the variation.

In addition, "LCD_EFF_BEF_DIR" generates a callback before the liquid crystal performance block drawing in the liquid crystal performance common block starts, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_DIR" generates a callback after the liquid crystal performance block drawing is completed. By making a determination before the liquid crystal effect block drawing starts, it becomes possible to change the liquid crystal effect block to be executed based on the result of external input by the player. Furthermore, by making a determination after the liquid crystal effect block drawing starts, it becomes possible to add new drawing to the content drawn by the liquid crystal effect block based on the drawing content of the liquid crystal effect block that draws a single effect. Furthermore, "LCD_EFF_BEF_CAST" can generate a callback before the start of still image and video drawing in the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_CAST" can generate a callback after the still image and video drawing is completed. By making a judgment before starting to draw still images or videos, it is possible to replace various effects. Further, by making a determination after the drawing of a still image or a moving image is completed, it becomes possible to add rendering of effects according to the replacement content of various effects.

As described above, since the control that can be achieved differs depending on the drawing classification, it is very important to determine the drawing classification within the various callback functions that are called back.

[26. Production switch group management]
As explained so far, in this embodiment, multiple procedures (functions) are managed by the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data for each liquid crystal presentation block, and images and videos are drawn for each layer based on the state of the gaming machine and the classification of presentation. be done. Furthermore, as described above, one or more effect SWs are set in each layer.

When a performance is executed, images and the like are drawn in parallel in multiple layers, and multiple liquid crystal performance scheduler data are executed in parallel. For example, in the step-up notice performance, when step-up notice 1 is executed, the background layer background is drawn and the identification pattern is drawn on the symbol layer. Further, step-up notice 1 is drawn on the notice layer (notice_first half 1 layer). FIG. 208 is a diagram showing an example of the drawing results of individual layers and the drawing results of all layers when the preview effect is executed according to the present embodiment.

At this time, one or more effect SWs are set in each layer, but if these effect SWs are to be managed individually, there is a risk that the processing will become complicated. Therefore, in this embodiment, the performance SWs are grouped and managed by layer, gaming machine state, and performance category.

For example, the effect SWs assigned to each layer are grouped. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 208, a performance SW group background, a performance SW group pattern, and a performance SW group preview are configured in correspondence with the background layer, pattern layer, and preview layer. These performance SW groups may be further grouped and managed, and the performance SW may be managed for each gaming machine state or performance category.

In this way, by grouping and managing the effect SWs, individual effect elements can be controlled all at once. For example, if you want to change the currently displayed background, pattern display and pending display that match the background to a different background when starting a new variation, the background layer, pattern layer, and pending layer will be divided according to the background. Performance SWs are grouped, and performance SWs belonging to the group are collectively set to OFF within a callback function using a callback. As a result, it is possible to hide the symbol display and pending display that match the current background together with the background, and by displaying the symbol display and pending display that match the new background in the corresponding layer, multiple It becomes possible to switch the drawing of only the necessary effect display from among the plurality of effect displays displayed in a layered manner.

In addition, in a performance that spans game states, for example, a jackpot performance from the start of fluctuation to the end of fluctuation, the symbol will be hidden and the background will be changed to the jackpot performance, but regarding suspension, the suspension that was drawn during the fluctuation will be It is also possible to display it continuously. Such control is performed by defining the above-mentioned effect group to be hidden in the reset target effect SW group ID, and setting the effect SW for which the reset of all effect switches has been specified to the liquid crystal effect common block at the start of fluctuation. This can be achieved by defining it in the LCD performance common block at the start of the jackpot performance.

[27. Exception common block]
In the embodiment described so far, all performances are managed as a common block in blocks of a certain length in order to improve the efficiency of controlling increasingly complex game performances in order to increase player's interest. As a result, a series of effects such as fluctuating symbols and jackpots can be realized by selecting a production block according to the fluctuation pattern or the result of a preview lottery, and drawing based on the selected production block, making it possible to achieve complex control. This enabled control to synchronize sub-effects such as props, lamps, and sound output with the drawing content without having to do so. A common block is set up with a period separated by a predetermined timing from the start of symbol fluctuation to the finalization of the symbol, and these periods correspond to, for example, the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation, and are assigned to the fluctuation pattern. It was set according to the fluctuation time of the pattern.

By configuring in this manner, the common block can be used for general purpose in multiple types of variation patterns. Furthermore, by ensuring independence between the preview performance executed during the first half variation and the preview performance executed during the second half variation, it was possible to increase the degree of freedom in combinations of common blocks.

However, as mentioned above, since the common blocks are divided into predetermined periods, it is difficult to realize a performance that lasts from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the fluctuation simply by combining performance blocks of a certain length. When executing such a performance that spans multiple periods, the preceding common block and the subsequent common block are associated with each other, reducing versatility. In addition, each common block is executed independently. Therefore, there was a risk that the control would become complicated in order to maintain the continuity of the performance. Therefore, in order to realize such effects, it was necessary to create and control individual program codes instead of setting program data.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, in this embodiment, in addition to performing a fluctuating display of symbols and a series of jackpot performances by combining performance blocks of a certain length in all performances, the length of the performance blocks is The block length is not exceptionally fixed, but is configured to allow a performance block length that matches the performance period. Furthermore, by making it possible to draw by combining performance blocks with different performance times, and by simultaneously drawing performance blocks that extend over the combined performance blocks, it is possible to realize a drawing performance that continues from the start of variation to the end of variation.

An example of a performance that spans multiple periods is a countdown performance that displays numbers as a countdown at the start of symbol fluctuation, and continues the countdown display from the first half of the fluctuation to the second half of the fluctuation. FIG. 209 is a diagram illustrating an example of a common block spanning multiple periods according to the present embodiment, in which (A) shows the execution timing of symbol display and preview performance, (B) shows the liquid crystal preview performance block by the common block, and , shows the configuration of a liquid crystal preview presentation block with common blocks spanning multiple periods.

In the example shown in FIG. 209, corresponding to the variation pattern "10H03H", the first half variation is "normal variation 12 seconds" and the second half variation is "normal short reach". As shown in FIG. 209(A), in the first half variation, a step-up notice and a BTN logo accessory drop notice are executed, and in the second half variation, a cut-in notice and a group notice are executed. The contents of each preview performance are as described above. Further, a countdown notice is executed from the start of the step-up notice to the end of the group notice.

In Figure 209(B), the liquid crystal display block data for preview performances that use common blocks (step-up notice, BTN logo accessory falling notice, cut-in notice, and group notice) and the group notice from the start of the step-up notice are shown. This shows the configuration of a production block for a countdown notice that is executed until the end of the game. Each block data corresponding to the common block is as described above.

The countdown preview performance block is composed of a function NOP that waits until the LCD performance notice block data starts, an LCD performance notice block data, and a function NOP that waits until the second half of the variation ends after the LCD performance notice block data ends. . In addition, the function NOP that waits until the LCD presentation notice block data starts is a NOP that is executed before the step-up notice starts, and the function NOP that waits until the end of the second half variation is a NOP that is executed after the group notice ends. The same waiting time is set.

As described above, by making it possible to set exceptions during the execution period of a production block, it becomes possible to operate the common block more flexibly. Furthermore, by setting a standby time before and after the start of the effect, it is possible to minimize the influence of deviations in the execution timing of other effect blocks due to exception settings. Note that the exception common block is also controlled by a callback function using the effect SW in the same way as other common blocks.

[28. Image conversion]
For the purpose of increasing the interest of the game and reducing processing time related to drawing, the drawing data for one screen of the liquid crystal display is extracted from the frame buffer and stored in the capture storage area of the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source separately from the frame buffer. , processing such as image reuse, transformation, and additional drawing was performed. In this way, by temporarily storing drawing data in a separate area and using it for drawing the next frame, a variety of effects have been efficiently realized.

FIG. 210 is a diagram illustrating a conventional configuration in which an image is written to a frame buffer by writing each image written to each layer. As shown in FIG. 210, conventionally, images drawn in each layer are written in a frame buffer in an overlapping manner, and then output to a display device.

Specifically, first, moving images and still images displayed on the background layer are written onto the frame buffer using a display list command. Next, the moving images and still images displayed on the pattern layer are overwritten on the frame buffer using the display list command. Furthermore, the video and still images displayed in the preview layer are overwritten on the frame buffer using the display list command. Finally, the moving images and still images related to the reserved layer are overwritten on the frame buffer using a display list command to create one frame's worth of drawing data.

Thereafter, the peripheral control board 1530 copies one frame of drawing data to be displayed created in the frame buffer to a capture buffer separately allocated to the RAM of the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source. After adding a new effect around the design to the drawing data stored in the capture buffer, it is written back to the frame buffer to create one frame's worth of drawing data for next display.

By doing this, it is possible to easily create the drawing data to be displayed in the next frame by simply adding an effect to the already created drawing data. However, in image conversion using such conventional technology, it is only possible to convert image data for one frame of drawing data, and in addition to adding new drawing elements to the liquid crystal drawing screen for one frame, it is possible to perform image conversion for one frame of drawing data. It is limited to enlarging or reducing the entire LCD drawing screen. It is impossible to perform image conversion on the drawing elements drawn on each layer or on each drawing element within a layer on the capture buffer.

The reason why it is not possible to perform image conversion for each drawing element is that the drawing elements in each production, such as backgrounds, designs, and previews, are overwritten on the frame buffer in layer order, so overlapping drawing elements will not be converted later. It will be overwritten by the drawing elements of the layer drawn from. Also, since a drawing element becomes a collection of colored dots when it is drawn on the frame buffer, even if you try to extract a drawing element as a rectangle, it will be overwritten by another drawing element. This is because the data of the drawing element in the overwritten part is lost.

Nowadays, as the processing power of VDP has improved, there is no longer a need to reuse the image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display that has already been drawn, but it is necessary to diversify the expression of effects with the aim of increasing the interest of the game. Therefore, it was expected that the load would increase due to the complicated drawing process.

In this embodiment, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and create more diverse effects, we capture image data for one screen of the LCD display of the already created frame buffer, and perform transformations and new drawings on the captured image. When newly drawing image data for one screen of LCD display, instead of adding image data for one screen of LCD display, dynamically change the image or Achieve complex production expressions by adding new drawings.

Specifically, a single performance drawing data (notice, background, design, pending, etc.) is defined as one performance block, and a performance SW is created for each performance block within the LCD performance scheduler data for displaying using the performance block. Incorporate. Then, when drawing the liquid crystal, the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data is executed and analyzed, and a process (program function) is dynamically called (callback) based on the information of the presentation SW incorporated in the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data.

When changing an image, instead of drawing the LCD performance scheduler data and the corresponding performance block in the callback program function on the frame buffer, it is allocated on the RAM of the VDP1540a with built-in sound source separately from the frame buffer. Drawing is performed on an off-screen buffer (image display information temporary storage means). Then, after changing the image or adding a new image to the image on the off-screen buffer, the image is written back onto the frame buffer. With this configuration, in addition to changing the image of a specific preview, adding a new image, or replacing the effect of only the background, it is possible to change the image of an image with multiple effects superimposed, or add a new image. addition can be realized.

Hereinafter, a configuration in which images drawn in each layer are stored in an off-screen buffer, and the image stored in the off-screen buffer is converted and written into a frame buffer will be specifically described. FIG. 211 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for converting an image file stored in an off-screen buffer and then writing it to a frame buffer in this embodiment.

As described above, one or more buffers for image conversion called off-screen buffers, which are different from frame buffers, are allocated to the RAM of the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source. Then, image conversion is performed using an image conversion buffer, and complex image conversion is made possible by combining the image converted on one or more off-screen buffers and the image drawn on the frame buffer.

To explain further, the effect SW is embedded in the liquid crystal effect block data that constitutes each layer corresponding to the effect and each liquid crystal effect scheduler data that constitutes the liquid crystal effect block data, and is embedded when creating the display list command when drawing the liquid crystal. A callback function is called by a callback based on the produced effect SW, and image conversion is performed in the callback function.

In FIG. 211, first, before starting to draw the background layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A in a function that is called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the drawing timing of each performance element on the background layer, a display list command for enlarging each performance element on the background layer is created and sent to off-screen buffer A in a function called back based on the performance SW. By doing this, each enlarged background is drawn on the off-screen buffer A.

Next, before starting drawing of the pattern layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A and drawn in a function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the drawing timing of each production element in the pattern layer, an effect is added to the pattern drawn on the background drawn on the off-screen buffer A within the function called back based on the production SW. Create a display list command. By sending this display list command, an effect can be added to the background and pattern drawn in the off-screen buffer A, and furthermore, the image drawn in the off-screen buffer A can be overwritten on the frame buffer.

Next, before starting to draw the preview layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer B and drawn in a function that is called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the timing when the drawing of all the presentation elements related to the notice layer is finished, in the function called back based on the presentation SW, execute a display list command that rotates the notice drawing of each presentation element of the notice layer. create. By sending this display list command, each rotated preview is drawn in the off-screen buffer B, and furthermore, the image drawn in the off-screen buffer B is overwritten on the frame buffer.

Finally, all the production elements of the reserved layer are written to the frame buffer, and one frame of liquid crystal drawing screen for displaying this time is created.

Through the above steps, unlike the conventional image conversion described above, image conversion is not performed for the entire screen, but image conversion is performed for each layer drawing unit, drawing element unit that makes up a layer, and regardless of the order in which they are drawn in the frame buffer. It can be performed.

The present embodiment is characterized in that a callback based on the same effect SW is performed multiple times at each drawing timing within a period from the start of drawing to the end of drawing on the liquid crystal screen for one frame. Note that the details of the types of drawing timing are as explained using FIG. 207 above.

Furthermore, by performing image conversion using a callback, there is no need to determine or monitor whether or not the image being drawn is a target of image conversion. Furthermore, instead of starting drawing related to a series of fluctuations, at the timing of creating a display list command to draw the image to be converted, the image is created based on the lottery result value of the preview lottery or the result of the interactive operation based on the user's external input. It becomes possible to determine the method of conversion.

[29. RAM-less transfer]
Conventionally, a display list command is created based on animation data stored on a CGROM, and the created display list command is processed by the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source to perform drawing when a game performance is executed. At this time, the display list command created while analyzing the animation data stored in the CGROM is stored in the buffer allocated to the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and after the creation of the display list command for one screen is completed, the external request DMA (transfer means) is sent. was used to send the contents of the buffer to the VDP.

However, as the performance specifications have become more complex and the processing load has increased, processing time has increased, such as the preliminary lottery processing at the start of fluctuations. The processing time for motor data creation processing is also increasing due to the increase in the number of motor data. The processing time for peripheral controls such as presentations is executed at a fixed cycle, so if the high-load processing described above was executed overlappingly, there was a risk that the processing could not be completed within the cycle. .

Regardless of exceptional cases where processing cannot be completed within a period, if processing cannot be regularly completed within a period, game control by the main control device and production control by the peripheral control device are synchronized based on the processing period. This could lead to a discrepancy between the progress of the game and the performance of the game by each performance device, which could significantly reduce the interest in the game.

Therefore, it has been necessary to shorten the processing time of peripheral control processing, such as by reducing the time required for high-load processing in peripheral control processing such as presentation. Therefore, in this embodiment, the processing time required for peripheral control processing is relatively high-load drawing processing, especially the processing time for analyzing animation data on the CGROM and creating native display list commands that can be processed by the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source. A means for reducing the processing time of the entire peripheral control processing will be described.

First, a conventional procedure for transferring a group of display list commands for displaying images on a liquid crystal display device to the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source will be described. FIG. 212 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for temporarily storing a display list command group in the peripheral control RAM 1530c and then transferring it to the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 212, first, the liquid crystal presentation scheduler display list control module obtains various liquid crystal presentation scheduler data from the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and analyzes and converts the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data into a group of VDP native display list commands. The purpose of converting the LCD presentation scheduler data into a VDP native display list command group is that the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data includes information regarding the display list commands (VDP register numbers and parameter values corresponding to the register numbers) to be sent to the VDP1540a with built-in sound source. Therefore, it is necessary to convert the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data into VDP native display list commands that can be executed by the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source. The converted VDP native display list command group is temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. Furthermore, when a callback function called by the presentation SW is executed during execution of the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data, the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group as required, and stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs display list transfer settings in the external request DMA in the process of processing the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data. As a result, the VDP native display list command group stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c is acquired from the peripheral control RAM 1530c by the external request DMA and transferred to the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source.

When the VDP with built-in sound source 1540a receives the transferred VDP native display list command, it temporarily stores it in the display list FIFO. The VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source processes the display list stored in the display list FIFO from the beginning, and outputs an image (video) to the liquid crystal display device.

As described above, the display list command group for one frame is stored in the buffer of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and in the next processing cycle in which the display list command group is created, the display list command group is transferred from the buffer to the VDP 1540a using external request DMA. Drawing is achieved by sending the data. However, the process of analyzing and converting a huge amount of liquid crystal presentation scheduler data for one screen into a group of VDP native display list commands imposes a large processing load. In addition, if a single gaming machine is configured to have multiple VDPs from different manufacturers installed, the liquid crystal display scheduler data, which is an intermediate data format, is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group corresponding to each manufacturer's VDP. becomes possible.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a part or all of the display list command group can be transferred to the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source without being stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. FIG. 213 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for transferring the display list command group to the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source without storing it in the peripheral control RAM 1530c in this embodiment.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 213, first, display list transfer settings are made to the external request DMA by the liquid crystal production scheduler display list selection management module. The external request DMA obtains the set display list command group not from the peripheral control RAM 1530c but from the peripheral control ROM 1530b.

The peripheral control ROM 1530b stores liquid crystal presentation scheduler data in the same way as when display list commands are temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c, but each liquid crystal presentation scheduler data is a converted VDP native display list command group. and an interrupt display list command.

The external request DMA acquires specified liquid crystal presentation scheduler data from the peripheral control ROM 1530b based on the transfer settings by the liquid crystal presentation scheduler display list selection management module, and transfers it to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. The VDP with built-in sound source 1540a temporarily stores the transferred VDP native display list command and interrupt display list command in the display list FIFO.

The VDP with built-in sound source 1540a extracts a VDP native display list command from the display list FIFO, analyzes and executes the extracted VDP native display list command, and writes an image to the frame buffer. Further, upon analysis and execution of the interrupt display list command transferred together with the VDP native display list command group, the analysis of the display list is interrupted, and a transfer interruption request is issued to the external request DMA. Thereafter, an interrupt is generated to the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

When the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects an interrupt from the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source, the interrupt processing module determines that the cause of the interrupt is an interrupt caused by an interrupt display list command, and executes a callback. The callback function refers to the callback information table corresponding to the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data and replaces the presentation or symbol. The method for replacing the effects is the same as the explanation using FIG. 198, etc. described above, and the method for replacing the symbols is also the same as the explanation using FIG. 198, etc., described above. In the callback information table corresponding to the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data, presentation SWs corresponding to the number of interrupt display list commands defined in the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data are defined. The replacement information is determined by the callback function, a display list command is created based on the determined replacement information, and it is sent to the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source. Thereafter, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits a display list command to restart display list analysis to the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source. The VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source analyzes the display list command for restarting display list analysis, issues a transfer restart request to the external request DMA, and restarts the analysis of the display list command.

By processing only the replacement part of the effect using the callback function as described above, the peripheral control RAM 1530c (temporary storage means) can be used without converting the VDP native display list related to all effects other than the replacement. First, it becomes possible to transfer data from the peripheral control ROM 1530b to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a using an external request DMA (transfer means).

By configuring as described above, the VDP native display list command group can be transferred to the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source without being stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. This makes it possible to reduce the load on the peripheral control MPU 1511a associated with image display, and to speed up image processing. Furthermore, since the area used in the peripheral control RAM 1530c can be saved, the storage area can be used effectively.

Note that the peripheral control ROM 1530b may store only the frequently used VDP native display list command group, and the less frequently used VDP native display list command group may be processed using the conventional procedure. This shortens the processing of frequently used display list commands, thereby increasing the overall processing speed and suppressing an increase in the capacity of the peripheral control ROM 1530b. In addition, display list commands corresponding to highly versatile images (videos) are stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and different images depending on model and version can be processed using conventional procedures, thereby improving development efficiency. is also possible.

[30. Alignment adjustment]
Processors (CPU, MPU) used for game control and peripheral control (performance control) of gaming machines can basically handle integer type and floating point type data types. The integer types that can be used on a 32-bit CPU are char (character) type, int (integer) type, and long (long integer) type, each of which has a size of 1 byte, 2 bytes, and 4 bytes. . Further, the floating point type is a float (single precision) type and a double (double precision) type, which have sizes of 4 bytes and 8 bytes, respectively.

The processor used for peripheral control of gaming machines, whether CISC or RISC, is a byte that can read and write data stored in all addresses in 1-byte units of memory (ROM, RAM). It is a machine. Note that this does not apply to addresses for reading and writing multiple bytes of data. When a processor reads multiple bytes of data, it always reads from a byte boundary, and an alignment violation occurs if the access crosses a byte boundary. The behavior when an alignment violation occurs depends on the processor, but for example, instead of being able to continue processing, program execution may be delayed due to multiple memory accesses, or processing may be interrupted due to a runtime exception. Relaxing.

However, in the current development of gaming machines, when a program that controls gaming is executed, a data structure consisting of multiple pieces of information in memory (ROM, RAM) is created without being aware of alignment. There were many things. As a result, an alignment violation may occur during program execution, resulting in a decrease in program execution speed. In the peripheral control of gaming machines, it is necessary to complete all processes within a predetermined processing cycle, so a decrease in program execution speed can sometimes become a big problem. In particular, since the performance of gaming machines is constructed based on multiple elements, it is necessary to collectively manage various information related to each element, and it is necessary to store various information in different data types. Data structure is used.

In order to solve the above problems, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in a data structure composed of a plurality of pieces of information used for game control, when storing data corresponding to the data structure on the memory, each piece of information Explicitly embed empty data between or at the end of the storage area. By adjusting the starting position of data access by the processor and arranging information so that the processor always accesses it from a byte boundary address, alignment violations can be avoided and program execution speed can be prevented from slowing down. I can do it. Adjusting alignment for all data structures in ROM and RAM is a huge amount of work, so it places a large load on the processor and takes a long processing time. It is desirable to adjust the alignment using a data structure on the ROM or RAM related to the image processing, control processing related to liquid crystal drawing, lamp control processing, etc. Further, there is no problem in adjusting the alignment using processes other than those described above.

[31. Configuration that displays multiple identification patterns]
By the way, in recent years, a wide variety of effects have been required to increase the interest of games, so the content of effects on effect display devices has become more complex and the content drawn has become more diverse. In the embodiment described so far, the configuration is such that only one set of identification symbols is displayed to notify the result of the variable display, and a relatively wide variety of effects are added to the variable display of this one set of identification symbols to play the game. However, there are some players who do not like a wide variety of performances, and the challenge is to develop gaming machines that meet the needs of a wide range of players. A configuration in which a wide variety of effects frequently appear may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that meets the needs of a wide range of players, a configuration that can display a plurality of sets of identification symbols in a unique manner will be described below. Specifically, a plurality of display areas for performing variable display of identification symbols on the performance display device 1600 are allocated to one or more display devices (display screens), and the needs of any player among different player needs are allocated. In order to accommodate this, different sets of identification symbols are displayed in a variable manner at the same time. Each display area is common in that the result of the variable display is notified by the identification symbol, but is displayed in different performance modes such as the variation mode of the identification symbol.

[31-1. Mode of identification pattern display area]
FIG. 214 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration having a plurality of display areas for displaying the above-described identification symbols when the plurality of identification symbols described above are displayed variably under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a in this embodiment, (A) is a configuration example in which a display area A and a display area B for identification symbols are provided on one display screen in the performance display device 1600, and (B) is an example of a configuration in which identification symbols are displayed on each display screen when two display screens are provided. This is a configuration example having a display area A and a display area B.

In the example shown in FIG. 214(A), one screen has a display area A and a display area B for identification symbols, and the display area A is allocated to the upper part of the screen, and the display area B is allocated to the lower part of the screen. A first identification pattern 8010 is displayed in the display area A, and a second identification pattern 8020 is displayed in the display area B. In the example shown in FIG. 214(A), display area A and display area B are configured as display areas of the same size, and display area A and display area B are divided by a wavy boundary extending toward the center and horizontal direction. has been done. Further, the first identification symbol 8010 is composed of three-digit symbols: a first left symbol 8010a, a first middle symbol 8010b, and a first right symbol 8010c. Similarly, the second identification pattern 8020 is a 3-digit pattern of a second left pattern 8020a, a second middle pattern 8020b, and a second right pattern 8020c, in accordance with the fact that the first identification pattern 8010 is a 3-digit pattern. configured. Note that the sizes of the display areas A and B are not limited to the same size, but may be different sizes.

The first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 start varying display at the same time and stop at the same time. Although the stop timing of each individual symbol (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) of each identification symbol is arbitrary, the timing at which the stopping mode of all the identification symbols is finally determined is the same. Furthermore, the final stopped symbols are a combination of the same stopped symbols (lottery result) so that no matter which identification symbol the player recognizes, the player will not misidentify or feel uncomfortable. For example, when deriving a winning result as a result of a lottery, all the individual identification symbols of the first identification symbol 8010 are the same symbol combination (for example, "777", etc.), and in synchronization with this, the second All of the individual identification symbols 8020 have the same symbol combination (such as "777" which is equivalent to the first identification symbol 8010). In addition, when deriving a no-reach result as a lottery result, each identification symbol of the first identification symbol 8010 may be a symbol combination that does not constitute a reach display (the left symbol and the right symbol are the same) (for example, "135", "224", etc.), and in synchronization with this, the individual identification symbols of the second identification symbol 8020 are also symbol combinations that do not constitute a reach display (the left symbol and the right symbol are the same) (equivalent to the first identification symbol 8010). ``135'', ``224'', etc.). In addition, when deriving a reach result as a result of a lottery, each identification symbol of the first identification symbol 8010 constitutes a reach display (the left symbol and the right symbol are the same), but all symbols are not the same. At the same time as a combination (for example, "131", "242", etc.), the individual identification symbols of the second identification symbol 8020 also match the symbol combinations (such as "131" and "242") that do not constitute a reach display (the left symbol and the right symbol are the same). "135", "224", etc., which are equivalent to the first identification pattern 8010).

Note that the first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A and the second identification symbol 8020 displayed in the display area B may be in a symbol display mode that allows the player to recognize that they are equivalent symbol combinations. For example, one display area is configured to display a combination of symbols in a pattern display mode consisting of ``Kanji numerals'' (such as ``123''), while the other display area displays a pattern consisting of ``alphanumeric characters'', etc. It may be configured to display symbol combinations in a display format (such as "123"). Further, the symbol combination may be configured to be displayed in the same type of symbol display mode in both display areas (for example, "123" is displayed in both display areas). Further, when displaying the same type of symbol display mode, the display style (font) may be the same or different. Further, in this embodiment, the number of digits of the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 is three digits, but if it is possible to show the player an equivalent symbol combination as the ultimately derived symbol combination, other symbols may be used. For example, the number of digits of the first identification pattern 8010 and the second identification pattern 8020 may both be 2 digits, or the number of digits of the first identification pattern 8010 and the second identification pattern 8020 may both be 4 digits. It may be composed of the same number of digits or more. Although the details will be described later, it is sufficient that the first identification pattern 8010 has the same number of digits as the second identification pattern 8020 when the stop mode of the second identification pattern 8020 is finally determined. In the process of variable display of the 1 identification symbol 8010, the number of digits may be temporarily changed to a number different from the final number of digits.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the same type of symbol display mode (alphanumeric numeric symbols in this embodiment) is adopted in the display area of both the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020, each identification symbol is The manner of additional decorative display added to each pattern is different. Specifically, in the first identification pattern 8010, additional decoration is displayed for each identification pattern, giving an impact to each identification pattern itself, and various effects are performed by these additional decorations ( High decorative dynamic display). On the other hand, the second identification pattern 8020 does not have an additional decorative display like the first identification pattern 8010, or at least has a simpler additional decoration display than the first identification pattern 8010 (lower decorative dynamic display).

Furthermore, the types of symbols that make up the first identification pattern 8010 and the types of symbols that make up the second identification pattern 8020 do not necessarily have to match exactly or have a strict one-to-one correspondence. For example, depending on the performance mode, the first identification pattern 8010 has a number pattern (0 to 9) and a character pattern (for example, a pattern imitating an airplane) as a pattern that is variably displayed in each identification pattern, The second identification pattern 8020 may be only a numerical pattern (0 to 9). In addition, in this case, when the first identification symbol 8010 stops at a character symbol, the symbol changes again and is controlled so that the final stopped symbol becomes a numeric symbol. It is conceivable that character symbols include special game elements different from numerical symbols, and while numerical symbols are directly connected to the final lottery result, character symbols are not directly connected to the final lottery result. It can be positioned as something that is used specifically for presentation in the process of variable display.

In the first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A, various effects are performed (highly decorated dynamic display) until the result of the variable display (symbol variation) is displayed (the lottery result is derived). For example, in the variable display of identification symbols, a high-speed display mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the contents of the identification symbols is switched at a predetermined timing to a low-speed display mode in which the player can recognize the contents of the identification symbols. Specifically, as described above, by executing a callback based on the production SW for identification symbol replacement, the identification symbol replacement table is created based on the stop symbol or the stop timing of the symbol at the switching timing of the identification symbol. and a reel index replacement work number table to replace the identification symbols, finely decorating the identification symbols until just before the stop, and giving interest to the player who pays attention to the first identification symbol 8010 until just before the stop. It is said that

In addition, all or part of the first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A can be changed depending on the gaming state, performance mode, or type of variation pattern of the special symbol. The first identification symbol 8010 is changed in a variety of ways as the game progresses, depending on the gaming state, performance mode, or type of special symbol variation pattern. Specifically, a plurality of symbol string data of the first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A are provided (for example, symbol string data of 0 to 9, symbol string data of 0 to 9, etc.), and the game state is At the time of switching, production mode switching, or special symbol variation pattern selection, the symbol row data selection performance SW that individually corresponds to the types of these plural symbol row data (for example, the symbol corresponding to the symbol row data 0 to 9) By setting column data selection production SW1 and symbol column data selection production SW2 corresponding to symbol column data of zero to nine to ON and setting other production SWs to OFF, it is used for displaying the first identification symbol 8010. The symbol row data can be changed in a variety of ways, making it possible to perform a variety of performances.

In addition, as described above, in the first identification pattern 8010, the final digit is determined in the fluctuating display process on the premise that the number of digits is the same as that of the second identification pattern 8020 when it is finally determined. It may be configured to temporarily change to a number of digits different from the number. For example, although the final number will be 3 digits, it may be displayed as 2 digits only during a specific period during the variable display (for example, during a reach promotion period that determines whether or not the left symbol will become a reach after it stops). etc. can be exemplified. Regarding this, it is sufficient to perform the execution based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the fluctuation pattern, etc. For example, The defined performance SW includes a digit data selection performance SW corresponding to digit data (for example, digit data selection performance SW1 corresponding to 3-digit digit data, digit data selection performance SW1 corresponding to 2-digit digit data) When displaying two digits using a selection effect SW2 (such as selection effect SW2), a variety of effects can be executed by setting the digit number data selection effect SW2 to ON and setting the other effect SWs to OFF. .

For the first identification pattern 8010, not only the identification pattern itself is changed to change the display mode, but also an effect is performed using the additional decorative display made on the identification pattern as described above. For example, as shown in FIG. 214(A), by displaying a star-shaped additional decoration 8011 on the left identification pattern 8010a of the first identification pattern 8010, advantageous lottery results (such as winnings) can be obtained in the variable display being executed. It may also be possible to suggest that there is a high possibility that it will be derived. At this time, the expectation level may be notified according to the number and color of the additional decorations 8011, or the type of action (for example, the expectation level increases in the order of 1 → 3 → 5 additional decorations 8011). The color of the additional decoration 8011 increases in the order of white → blue → red, and the expectation level increases in the order of the motion of the additional decoration 8011 from stationary → vibration → rotation. ). In addition, by displaying a similar additional decoration 8011 on the right identification symbol 8010c, the performance with the first identification symbol 8010 is made to draw the player's attention even more, and it is made to more clearly suggest that the level of expectation has increased. Good too. Furthermore, different additional decorations may be applied to each identification symbol to notify the degree of expectation that an advantageous lottery result will be derived from any of the first identification symbols 8010.

In addition, as another example, effect display control is performed to overlay a flame effect image (white, blue, red), which is an additional decoration display different from the star-shaped additional decoration 8011 described above, on each symbol included in the first identification symbol 8010. The color of the flame may be changed according to the degree of expectation (for example, the degree of expectation is high in the order of white → blue → red). In this way, when providing a plurality of additional decorative displays for the first identification pattern 8010, a lottery is performed to determine which additional decorative display the peripheral control board 1510 will display based on the lottery results of hits and misses. It is only necessary to reflect the decision result and execute the performance based on the performance SW defined in the liquid crystal performance scheduler data selected based on the fluctuation pattern or the like.

In the display area A, the additional decorative display to be added to the first identification pattern 8010 is drawn on a layer different from the layer in which the identification pattern is displayed. Thereby, the display control of the identification pattern can be made common regardless of the presence or absence and type of additional decoration display. In addition, by drawing the identification design and additional decoration display on separate layers, it is possible to specify whether the additional decoration display is to be displayed on the front or back side of the identification design, which can be set using the LCD production scheduler data. If you do this, you can automatically control the performance when executing it. Furthermore, as mentioned above, whether or not to display the additional decoration display is determined at runtime based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the fluctuation pattern etc., and the corresponding process is executed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more effective performance without complicating the performance control.

Furthermore, in the display area A where the first identification symbol 8010 is displayed, a character effect display may be performed independently of the identification symbol. For example, in a ready-to-reach state where the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c stop at the same symbol, a display that displays a character according to the expectation level (the possibility of an advantageous lottery result being derived depending on the character type, action, etc.) It is also possible to perform a suggested pattern effect).

Further, the background display in the display area A may be changed according to the expectation level of the lottery result in the variable display (a pattern effect that suggests the possibility that an advantageous lottery result will be derived depending on the type of background display). Further, instead of changing the background display itself, an effect may be performed in which only the background display color is changed (for example, the expectation level is higher in the order of white → blue → red).

As mentioned above, in the display area A, the character effect display and background display are also drawn on a layer different from the layer in which the identification symbols are drawn, so that the front side of the identification symbols is It is now possible to specify whether to display the character on the front side or on the back side (for example, the character effect display is on the front side, the background display is on the back side, etc.), and if you set these in advance with the LCD effect scheduler data, you can specify when the effect is executed. Can be controlled automatically. This makes it possible to independently control the variable display of the identification symbols, regardless of the character performance display mode, the presence or absence of a change in the background display, and the type of background display.

As for other production modes in the display area A, an operation instruction image for the operation section is displayed on the front side layer of the first identification symbol 8010 independently of the first identification symbol 8010, and the operation section is operated by the player. Executes an operation effect according to the mode (a pattern effect that suggests the possibility that an advantageous lottery result will be derived based on the operation corresponding image, etc.). For example, when a player presses a performance button after a button operation instruction image is displayed, a character is displayed according to the level of expectation, and an operation performance that performs a specific action is executed.

Further, in the display area A, an effect may be executed in conjunction with a movable object provided on the game board 5a (an effect suggesting the possibility that an advantageous lottery result will be derived by the movement of the movable object). For example, by moving a movable body placed at the top of the gaming area 5a to a position where part or all of the first identification pattern 8010 is blocked from the player's line of sight, it is possible to suggest that the level of expectation is high. Good too.

Next, display area B will be explained. The second identification pattern 8020 displayed in the display area B is such that when the fluctuation start command is received and the fluctuation display of the identification symbol is started, the fluctuation display of the identification symbol is started after receiving the fluctuation stop command or after the fluctuation time has elapsed. It ends and stops at the specified stop symbol. While the identification symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the display mode is such that it is difficult for the player to recognize the content of the identification symbols, and the display mode is simple in that only the stop symbols are displayed after the variation time has elapsed (low speed). decorative dynamic display).

In the display area B, an additional decorative display made to the first identification pattern 8010, a character performance display for informing the expectation level during the fluctuating display of the identification pattern, and an operation performance can be performed. There isn't. Furthermore, unlike the first identification symbol 8010, no control is performed to change the display mode of the second identification symbol 8020 from a high speed display mode to a low speed display mode. Furthermore, even if the first identification symbol 8010 temporarily stops and fluctuates again, the variable display of the second identification symbol 8020 continues.

Therefore, the liquid crystal performance scheduler data for controlling the display of the second identification symbol 8020 does not define the performance SW for changing the display mode such as replacing the symbol, resulting in extremely simple scheduler data. Furthermore, since the presentation control program only sequentially executes the contents defined in the LCD presentation scheduler data, even with such simple scheduler data, the same presentation control as when performing a highly decorative dynamic display can be executed. The execution of the effect by the effect SW or the like is simply skipped.

Note that the mode of the second identification symbol 8020 may be changed as long as the display mode is not changed during the variable display. For example, the modes of the second identification symbol 8020 corresponding to the gaming state and production mode may be prepared in advance, and the corresponding mode may be selected at the start of the variation.

Further, regarding the background display, a background display for display area B (background other than display area A) may be drawn. In this case, a background corresponding to the game state or production mode may be prepared. In addition, in order to simplify the control aspect, the background part of display area B is made transparent, and the background display of display area A is enlarged to display the same background as display area A. You can.

In this way, the variable display of the second identification symbol 8020 in the display area B is different from the first identification symbol 8010, and after the start of variation, a callback is executed based on the production SW for identification symbol replacement, or an additional decoration is performed. There is no variety of effects such as displays, but it is a simple one that specializes in waiting to see which combination of symbols will be stopped and displayed. Therefore, in the display area B, the game progresses in a game style in which the player waits with bated breath to see which symbol combination will be stopped and displayed, rather than having to worry about the various performance types.

Further, in the display area B, an additional decoration display made to the first identification symbol 8010, a character performance display to notify the degree of expectation during the fluctuation display of the identification symbol, and an operation performance are displayed. There is no need to do this, and the background display can also be set to be transparent, so various layer settings such as the first identification pattern 8010 (display area A) are not required.

Further, a fourth symbol 8030 different from the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 is displayed at the upper left of the screen shown in FIG. The fourth symbol 8030 indicates the period from when the variation of the special symbol starts until it stops, and during the display of the variation of the special symbol, the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 are displayed. During the fluctuation display, a special symbol fluctuation explicit display is performed to indicate that the special symbol is being fluctuated, and when the fluctuation of the special symbol has stopped or has stopped, the first identification symbol 8010, while the second identification symbol 8020 is being displayed in a stopped state, a special symbol stop explicit display indicating that the special symbol is being stopped is performed. For example, even if the identification symbol is apparently stopped (temporary stop), the special symbol variation explicit display is performed in the fourth symbol 8030 until the display of the result of the variation display is completed. While the special symbol variation explicit display of the fourth symbol 8030 is being performed, the triangular symbol rotates 90 degrees at predetermined intervals and is displayed in vertical stripes. Further, while the special symbol stop explicit display of the fourth symbol 8030 is being performed, the triangular symbol is displayed in a state filled with a predetermined color. Note that the fourth symbol 8030 is drawn on an upper layer that is independent of the layer for drawing on the display area A or display area B described above. Further, the fourth symbol 8030 in this embodiment, unlike the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020, is displayed so as to be recognizable from the outside in all situations including waiting for customers. In the example shown in FIG. 214, the fourth pattern 8030 is provided so as to overlap the display area A, but the fourth pattern 8030 is not necessarily limited to this form, and the fourth pattern 8030 may be provided so as to overlap the display area B. Alternatively, control corresponding to the special symbol change explicit display and special symbol stop explicit display of the fourth symbol 8030 may be performed using a display device (lamp device) or the like different from the effect display device 1600.

As described above, the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 tell the player what kind of lottery result was obtained, including the details (hit, loss without reach, loss with reach, etc.). On the other hand, the fourth symbol is used to convey the game status (is the special symbol changing, is it stopped, or is it waiting for a customer). It plays the role of communicating this information to designers and game machine managers (or players). In other words, although the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 have similar roles, they have a role that the fourth symbol cannot fulfill in terms of communicating the details of the lottery result to the player. There is. Furthermore, although the details will be described later, the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 may be temporarily erased or hidden during the variable display of the special symbol or while waiting for a customer. On the other hand, the fourth symbol always communicates the game status to the player, and the fourth symbol may be temporarily erased or hidden while the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner or while waiting for a customer. It has a role that cannot be fulfilled by the first identification pattern 8010 or the second identification pattern 8020.

Further, a pending storage display 8040 is drawn at the bottom of the screen shown in FIG. 214. In this embodiment, a reserved memory display of the first special symbol is drawn at the lower left of the screen, and a reserved memory display of the second special symbol is drawn at the lower right of the screen, although not shown. Further, in FIG. 214(A), the reserved storage display 8040 overlaps the display area B, but there is no problem as long as it does not overlap with the identification symbol. Note that, as described above, the reserved storage display 8040 is drawn on an independent layer and is placed in front of the layer corresponding to the display area B. Note that, like the fourth symbol 8030, it is not necessarily limited to this form, and the reserved memory display 8040 may also be replaced with a display device (lamp device) or the like that is different from the effect display device 1600.

As described above, in this embodiment, a layer is defined for each display area. This makes it possible to perform drawing effects independently for each display area, with a highly decorative dynamic display with high performance effect executed in display area A, and a low decoration dynamic display executed in display area B. and can be executed in any combination. The combination of high-decoration dynamic display and low-decoration dynamic display can be defined in the LCD production scheduler data, so there is no need to change the production control program itself, and production configurations can be easily created and changed. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 214(B), an example in which two display screens are provided and each display screen has a display area A and a display area B for identification symbols will be described. In FIG. 214B, display areas are allocated to physically different display devices, and display area A and display area B are composed of display devices of the same size. Note that components having the same functions as those in the example shown in (A) are given the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof will be omitted. Note that the sizes of display area A and display area B are not limited to the same size, but may be different sizes.

In the example shown in FIG. 214(B), a plurality of effect display devices are provided on the game board 5, and a display area A is assigned to the main liquid crystal display device, and a display area B is assigned to the sub liquid crystal display device. In the display area A, a first identification symbol 8010 is displayed, and a fourth symbol 8030 and a pending memory display 8040 are drawn. On the other hand, in display area B, a second identification pattern 8020 is displayed.

Note that instead of setting the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device as the display area A, the area where the fourth symbol 8030 and the reserved storage display 8040 are displayed may be a different area from the display area A. Further, the fourth symbol 8030 and the reserved storage display 8040 may be allocated to the display area B.

In the example shown in FIG. 214(B), the first identification pattern 8010 is in a ready-to-reach state, and decorations 8011 are drawn on the left identification pattern 8010a and the right identification pattern 8010c. Further, a preview image 8050 is displayed that suggests that there is a high possibility that an advantageous lottery result will be derived in the fluctuation.

Furthermore, all of the second identification symbols 8020 are displayed in a high-speed display mode during variable display, so that the player cannot recognize all of the identification symbols. In the display area A, the first identification symbol 8010 is in a reach state, and a preview effect such as a preview image 8050 is displayed, but in the display area B, the second identification symbol is displayed without performing the above effect. The low-decoration dynamic display of 8020 is only continued.

[31-2. Display area emphasis mode]
As described above, in this embodiment, the identification symbols are displayed in a variable manner in different display modes in the display area A and the display area B, respectively. In the following, while the variable display of the identification symbols displayed in each display area is executed in parallel, the player performs a selection operation (by operating a switching operation section (not shown)), one of the identification symbols is displayed in parallel. A control for displaying a variable display being executed in one display area more emphatically than the other display area will be explained (emphasis mode, large setting).

FIG. 215 is a diagram illustrating a mode of emphasizing the display area for performing variable display of identification symbols in this embodiment, and (A) shows display area A and display area B in a standard mode (specified size). The normal pattern to be displayed, (B) is an emphasis pattern A that displays display area A in an emphasis manner, and (C) is an emphasis pattern B that displays display area B in an emphasis manner. In this embodiment, the display area on the side that is not emphasized is displayed as a reduced wipe display (small setting, suppression mode), and the display area on the side that is not emphasized is also in a state that can be recognized by the player as the game progresses. There is. The display area to be highlighted can be switched by operating a predetermined switching operation section (switch button, etc.), and even if the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, It is possible to switch even while it is being displayed.

The player can sequentially switch between (A) normal pattern, (B) emphasized pattern A, and (C) emphasized pattern B by operating the switching operation section. Note that the switching mode may be such that (A) normal pattern, (B) emphasis pattern A, and (C) emphasis pattern B are switched in a predetermined order each time the player operates the switching operation section. However, the player may be able to immediately select a desired display pattern. As a configuration that allows the player to immediately select a desired display pattern, for example, the display pattern to be switched to is set to correspond to a plurality of types of operation modes of the switching operation unit by the player, respectively. The display mode is configured so that the display mode desired by the player can be immediately switched by the operation mode on the switching operation section. Specifically, the display pattern of the switching destination is set to the normal pattern in response to a first operation on the switching operation section (for example, a long press for 5 seconds or more), while a second operation on the switching operation section (for example, pressing for less than 2 seconds) The display pattern of the switching destination is set to emphasis pattern A in response to a short press (for example, a short press of the button), and the display of the switching destination is set in response to a third operation on the switching operation section (for example, a long press of 2 seconds or more but less than 5 seconds). Set pattern B to emphasize the pattern. For example, when the game is progressing in the emphasis mode (emphasis pattern B) of display area B shown in FIG. 215(C) by performing the third operation on the switching operation section, low decoration dynamic display is displayed in a large area. As a result, the pattern changes will progress. At this time, as shown in FIG. 215(C), in the display area A displayed on the wipe, a display equivalent to a highly decorative dynamic display will be displayed, in which an "unusual effect" will be performed. By performing a second operation on the switching operation section when the player recognizes that the emphasis pattern A is on, it becomes possible to immediately change to the emphasis pattern A at the player's will. An example of an "unusual production" is a preview production in which a character pattern (airplane) temporarily stops at the medium identification pattern 8010b, and when the character pattern is confirmed in the display area A displayed on the wipe. By performing a second operation on the switching operation section, it becomes possible to immediately change the emphasis mode of display area A (emphasis pattern A). Note that when shifting to the emphasis pattern A, a character effect or an accessory movement that was not displayed in the reduced area may be performed (FIG. 215(C)→(B)).

Furthermore, even if the display area A is displayed in a reduced size (wiped) manner as shown in FIG. 215(C), it may be possible to perform an operation effect that requires a player's operation in the display area A. . In addition, if the display area A is displayed in a reduced size (wipe), even if the player does not actually operate the switching operation section, it is assumed that the operation has been performed after a specified time from the start of the operation performance. , the operation performance may be automatically advanced in the same manner as when the switching operation section is operated. On the other hand, when the display area A is displayed in a reduced size (wipe) as shown in FIG. Since it is necessary to change the operation mode of the accessory and make the control complicated, the performance of shielding the object and making it visible at a predetermined timing is suppressed (cancelled).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 215(B), when the mode that emphasizes display area A (emphasis pattern A) is selected, display area B that is reduced (wiped) is displayed with low decoration dynamic display and the pattern changes. , so the ``unusual production'' described above will not occur. Therefore, when emphasis pattern A is selected, by making the background of display area B transparent or performing the effect in display area A together with the background of display area B, the effect in display area A can be increased. It may be possible to improve the Note that even when display area B is wiped, it is necessary to maintain the visibility of the identification pattern in display area B, so the layer that draws the identification pattern in display area B has an image related to display area A. It is preferable to set it to a layer higher than the displayed layer.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a production sound effect is output in response to the variable display of the identification symbol in each display area. Specifically, since the first identification symbol 8010 in the display area A is displayed in a variable manner with a variety of effects, effect sound effects based on the effect mode, gaming state, variation pattern, etc. are output in accordance with these effects. be done. Here, the sounds (BGM, performance sound effects) that are output along with the variable display of the identification symbols in the display area A and the performance being performed are managed as one AUTO group, and sound control is performed using an automatic channel system. This limits the upper limit of the channels to be used even when the effects in the display area A are executed overlappingly, so that it is possible to suppress the amount of resources consumed by executing the effects of the gaming machine. Furthermore, since it becomes possible to automatically output sounds with a high priority, it is possible to suppress the complexity of production control.

On the other hand, the second identification symbol 8020 in display area B is displayed in a variable manner in a high-speed display mode, and the output sound effects are simple (only variable BGM and stop sound). Therefore, if display area A and display area B are both reduced (wiped) and displayed in the normal pattern (FIG. 215(A)), the production sound effect corresponding to display area B is not output, or The control is performed in such a manner that the output of the production sound effect corresponding to the display area B is suppressed by, for example, reducing the output sound. In addition, if one display area is displayed in an emphasis pattern, only the effect sound in the display area displayed in the emphasis pattern is output, and the effect sound in the display area that is reduced (wiped) is output. Control is performed in such a manner that the output of the effect sound corresponding to the display area that is being reduced (wiped) is suppressed by not outputting it or by reducing the output sound.

In the standby state where the symbol fluctuation display is not performed (the starting memory is not suspended), one display area is not reduced (wiped) as shown in Figures 215 (B) and (C). , each display area is displayed in a normal pattern as shown in FIG. 215(A). This is because there is little significance in emphasizing one display area when the identification symbols are not displayed in a variable manner, and the screen for attracting customers is designed on the premise of full-screen display.

Further, when the power is turned off while the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner and then the power is turned on again, each identification symbol is displayed in a predetermined manner. For example, it may be an emphasis pattern A that highlights the display area A, or it may be a normal pattern. At this time, the combination of symbols to be displayed is set to the symbol combination for the initial state (for example, "123"), regardless of the result of the previous variation. In addition, when the power is turned off and then turned on while the symbol is not changing, the wipe display will not be displayed (without displaying in emphasis patterns A and B) until the symbol begins to change, and the normal pattern will be displayed. Display an identification pattern. This is because, as described above, in a state where the symbols are not displayed in a variable manner, there is little significance in emphasizing one display area.

In this embodiment, as described above, each display area is composed of different layers. In each display area, the area to be drawn differs depending on whether it is drawn in an emphasized manner or in a reduced display. Specifically, the overall size of each layer is the same as the overall size of the display screen, and is drawn within a designated display area (for example, display area A). At this time, by converting the coordinate system of the drawing area, it becomes possible to draw using a common means even if the sizes of the areas are different. Therefore, regardless of whether you display it at the default size (normal pattern), enlarge it (emphasize mode), or reduce it (wipe), if the drawing content is the same, the display area Even if their actual sizes are different, they can be drawn using a common means (program or data).

Therefore, it is only necessary to newly draw a specific object (for example, a decorative image) when displaying a specific object (for example, a decorative image) in a specific display mode (for example, only in an emphasis mode). For example, when adding a decorative image to an identification pattern, a new layer for drawing the decorative image may be prepared and combined with a layer for drawing the identification pattern. At this time, by setting the priority of the layer that draws the decorative image higher than the priority of the layer that draws the identification pattern, the decorative image can be placed in front of the identification pattern when the layers are combined. can.

As described above, in this embodiment, common programs and data are used for objects (for example, identification patterns) that are displayed in the same image whether they are displayed in an emphasized mode or in a reduced size. On the other hand, when displaying a decorative image over the identification pattern, prepare a layer with a higher priority than the identification pattern, draw the decoration image on that layer, and draw it in front of the identification pattern layer. By arranging them, an emphasis mode is drawn. As a result, for objects whose drawing content is common in each display mode, such as identification patterns, there is no need to prepare separate programs and data for each display mode, and it is possible to use common programs and data. All you need to do is prepare the minimum number of programs and data that will be used as differences. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress an increase in image data due to diversification of presentation contents, suppress complication of presentation control, and suppress an increase in storage capacity.

[31-3. Screen transition]
Next, the mode of the variable display of the identification symbol from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the stop will be explained. FIG. 216 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen transition in a configuration in which the identification symbols of this embodiment are displayed in a variable manner in display area A and display area B, where some of the identification symbols stop changing in display area A. An example will be shown in which the fluctuation of the identification symbol stops in the display area B in conjunction with this. FIG. 217 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen transition in a configuration in which the identification symbols of this embodiment are displayed in a variable manner in display area A and display area B, and regardless of the display mode of display area A, when the variation is stopped, An example in which all stopped symbols are displayed in display area B is shown. The screens shown in FIGS. 216 and 217 each show the same state, and are all displayed in a normal mode. Each screen will be explained below.

(A) shows the state immediately after the fluctuating display of symbols has ended with the number of starting memories being 3. At this time, as described above, the triangular fourth symbol 8030 is stopped and displayed in a filled state. Further, the first identification pattern 8010 displayed in the display area A and the second identification pattern 8020 displayed in the display area 2 are both stopped and displayed with the identification pattern being "125".

(B) shows a state in which the starting memory has been digested (number of starting memories 3→2) and the variable display of symbols has started. The first identification pattern 8010 in display area A and the second identification pattern 8020 in display area B are each displayed in a high-speed display mode. When the variable display of the symbols is started, the triangular fourth symbol 8030 changes from solid color to vertical stripes and is rotated and displayed.

(C) shows a state in which the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010 is stopped. In FIG. 216(C), when the left identification pattern 8010a of the first identification pattern 8010 stops, the left identification pattern 8020a of the second identification pattern 8020 is also stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in FIG. 217(C), even if the left identification pattern 8010a of the first identification pattern 8010 stops, the left identification pattern 8020a of the second identification pattern 8020 continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, after the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010 changes from the high speed display mode to the low speed display mode, the variable display stops. On the other hand, when stopping the left identification symbol 8020a of the second identification symbol 8020, the display is stopped without shifting to the low speed display mode. This is because the purpose of the fluctuating display of the identification symbols in the display area B is to notify the player that the symbols are being fluctuated and to clearly display the stopped symbols, rather than to enhance the performance effect.

(D) shows a state where the right identification symbol 8010c of the first identification symbol 8010 has further stopped from the state of (C). At this time, the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c are stopped at the same symbol, resulting in a ready-to-reach state. In the display area A, a ready-to-reach effect according to the variation pattern is executed, while in the display area B, the variable display of the second identification symbol 8020 is continued without executing any special effect.

(E) shows a state in which the medium identification pattern 8010b of the first identification pattern 8010 has stopped (temporarily stopped) at the character (airplane) pattern in the ready-to-reach state. Here, the airplane symbol is a symbol that indicates restarting the variable display, and indicates execution of so-called pseudo-continuous variation. Therefore, even when the middle identification symbol 8010b is stopped, the fourth symbol 8030 continues to fluctuate, and as shown in FIG. 216(E), the middle identification symbol 8020b of the second identification symbol 8020 is Fluctuation display continues in high-speed display mode. When the first identification pattern 8010 continues to be temporarily stopped for a predetermined period of time, then, as shown in (F), the first identification pattern 8010 and the second identification pattern 8020 start changing again. In the example shown in FIG. 217, regardless of the display mode such as re-fluctuation of the first identification symbol 8010, the variable display in the high-speed display mode of the second identification symbol 8020 is continued.

(G) shows a state in which the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010 has stopped after the first identification symbol 8010 has started to fluctuate again. At this time, a decoration 8011 is drawn over the left identification symbol 8010a, and it is reported that there is a high possibility (expectation level) of obtaining an advantageous lottery result in this variation. Note that for the second identification pattern 8020, no particular performance is performed according to the expectation level, and in FIG. The symbol 8020a stops, and the variable display in the high-speed display mode continues in FIG. 217(G).

(H) shows a state where the right identification symbol 8010c of the first identification symbol 8010 has further stopped from the state of (G). At this time, the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c stop at the same symbol (“5”) and become a ready-to-reach state, and the decoration 8011 is also displayed on the right identification symbol 8010c. After that, as shown in (I), the middle identification symbol 8010b also stops at the same symbol ("5") as the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c, and when the stop symbol is confirmed, the second identification symbol 8020 also stops at the first The game stops at the symbol corresponding to the identification symbol 8010, and a jackpot effect is executed.

When displaying identification symbols using a highly decorative dynamic display, it is possible to realize a variety of performances and increase the interest of the game. On the other hand, when displaying identification symbols using a low-decoration dynamic display, it is possible to avoid flamboyant effects and to maximize expectations regarding symbol changes. In this embodiment, a display area A in which identification symbols are variably displayed in a highly decorative dynamic display and a display area B in which identification symbols are variably displayed in a low decoration dynamic display are provided, and either one or both may be selected. By performing variable display in parallel in the display mode, the player can play the game in a mode that suits his/her preference.

In addition, since it is possible for the player to freely switch between a highly decorative dynamic display and a low decorative dynamic display during the variable display, for example, when a reach occurs, a display that notifies expectations is executed. By highlighting area A and highlighting display area B in other states, it is possible to play a game that suits the situation.

Note that in the above-described embodiment, the highly decorative dynamic display and the low decorative dynamic display are executed in parallel, and the game progresses in a manner that is visible to the player. You can. For example, while running high-decoration dynamic display and low-decoration dynamic display in parallel, the player can view the display on the other side so that the player can see only the display on one side that the player desires. A movable body or the like (one side concealing means) having a function of concealing so as to be invisible or difficult to see may be provided, and the display on the other side may be hidden by such a movable body. For example, in FIG. 214(A), the covered position overlaps with all or at least part of the display area A, and the area where the movable body overlaps with the display area A is smaller than the covered position, and the effect display performed in the display area A is easily visible. The upper cover movable body is movable to a retracted position (a position above display area A), a cover position that overlaps all or at least a part of display area B in FIG. 214(A), and a display area that is lower than the cover position. The movable body has a structure in which there is little overlap between the movable bodies and a retracted position (a position below display area B) where the effect display performed in display area B is easily visible, and an undercover movable body that can be moved to the display area B. When the covering condition A that hides the area A is satisfied (such as the first specific operation on the switching operation unit by the player), the upper covering movable body is moved to the covering position, and the covering condition B that hides the display area B is satisfied. An example of this is to move the lower cover movable body to the cover position (such as a second specific operation on the switching operation unit by the player). Thereby, for example, it becomes possible for the player to concentrate on only one side of the display desired by the player and proceed with the game without complicated control such as switching effect displays.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, during the progress of the game, the highly decorated dynamic display and the lowly decorated dynamic display are executed in parallel, but the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 is performed while waiting for a customer. During the period in which high-decoration dynamic display and low-decoration dynamic display can be executed in parallel, for example, it is not necessary to execute high-decoration dynamic display and low-decoration dynamic display in parallel. You may also delete the decorative dynamic display. For example, as shown in FIG. 215(A) of the above-described embodiment, the game progresses in the normal pattern in which display area A and display area B are displayed in a standard manner (specified size), and after a predetermined time, a customer waits. When transitioning to the state, examples include erasing display area B while leaving display area A, or erasing display area B and expanding display area A to a large area. Note that if a new starting condition is satisfied while the device is waiting for a customer, the display in display area B, which is a low-decoration dynamic display, may be restored.

[32. Application of production block to production that continues over multiple variations]
Next, an example in which a production block is applied to a production that continues over multiple variations will be described. In the example described above, the period from the start to the stop of the symbol variation is divided into predetermined periods, and a production block corresponding to each period is defined. By combining these effect blocks, it is possible to realize a variety of effects while suppressing the complexity of effect control. We also explained an example in which it was possible to define a production block that exceeds a predefined period, but this is limited to production blocks that fall within one variation, and is limited to production blocks that are executed over multiple variations. It was insufficient to apply the production block.

Therefore, in this embodiment, an example will be described in which a production block is applied to a series of productions executed over a plurality of variations. This is a series of performances that are executed over multiple variations, such as a timer performance and background performance that are executed as a look-ahead performance (pre-notification performance) at the time of winning the start, and a mini character performance that is executed when switching the production mode and continues until a predetermined condition is met. I will explain about it.

[32-1. Control of pre-reading performance (pre-notification performance)]
Before explaining the timer effect and background effect that are executed as a look-ahead effect at the time of starting winning, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the control of the look-ahead effect.

When a game ball enters the starting winning hole, the main control board 1310 executes the first starting hole passing process (FIG. 135) or the second starting hole passing process (FIG. 136) depending on the winning starting hole, and starts the game ball. A random value is extracted (obtained) as a memory (steps S5241, S5251). Then, in the first special symbol pre-reading process (S5245) or the second special symbol pre-reading process (S5255), based on the extracted random number value or the lottery result based on the random number value, a special symbol 1 memory pre-reading production command or special symbol 2. A memory pre-read effect command (see FIG. 90, hereinafter referred to as "special figure pre-read effect command") is sent to the peripheral control board 1510.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the special figure pre-read effect command, it determines whether or not to execute the pre-read effect based on the received command. Commands from the main control board 1310 are stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer by peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (FIG. 98). The received command is then analyzed by the received command analysis process (S1022) of the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 95).

Upon receiving the special figure pre-read effect command, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a pre-read effect control process in the received command analysis process. In the prefetch effect control process, a process for executing a normal prefetch effect for changing the starting memory display, and a process for executing the above-mentioned timer effect and background effect are executed. Note that the prefetch effect control process may be performed by setting a flag indicating that a prefetch effect command has been received in the received command analysis process, and calling it in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 95). good.

In the process for executing the normal pre-reading performance for changing the starting memory display, a lottery is drawn based on the special figure pre-reading production command, and the mode of the changed starting memory display is selected based on the lottery result. At this time, the mode of the start memory display may be changed only when transitioning to the ready-to-reach state in the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol pre-read performance command. The mode of the starting memory display may be, for example, changing the color or shape. Then, a normal prefetch effect setting process is executed to change the mode of start memory display. In the normal look-ahead effect setting process, settings are made to change the display color of the start memory display, and settings are made to output sound effects, turn on lamps, and move accessories at the timing of the change. . Processing for executing the timer effect and background effect will be described later.

[32-2. Timer production]
The timer effect is a preliminary suggestion effect that uses a countdown display to indicate that the execution time of the suggestion effect that suggests the lottery result or the possibility of winning for a specific starting memory is approaching. There are broadly two types of timer effects, which are controlled as one of the aforementioned look-ahead effects, and include a variable display for a specific starting memory that starts before the variable display for a specific starting memory starts. A timer effect that spans multiple fluctuations (hereinafter referred to as a look-ahead timer effect) that counts down the period until a predetermined timing of A timer display that does not span multiple fluctuations (hereinafter referred to as a timer display within fluctuations) that displays a countdown of the period from a predetermined timing after the start of the fluctuation display for this specific starting memory to another timing of the fluctuation display for this specific starting memory. ,have. In other words, both the look-ahead timer performance and the within-variation timer performance are advance notification performances in which the symbol variation for a specific starting memory is not completed, and a countdown is displayed on the display screen of the performance display device 1600, and the count display is 0. Although they are common in that they perform a predetermined performance, the look-ahead timer performance is different from the within-variation timer performance in that a countdown is displayed on the display screen over a plurality of symbol fluctuations. In addition, the initial value of the countdown display performed in the look-ahead timer performance and the variable timer performance may be set to various values, but since it spans multiple fluctuations, the average value of the initial value used in the look-ahead timer performance This value is relatively larger than the average value of the initial values used in the variable timer effect. In this embodiment, since a characteristic element is included in the look-ahead timer effect, the look-ahead timer effect will be described in detail below.

In the process for executing the prefetch timer effect, first, it is determined whether or not to execute the prefetch timer effect. As mentioned above, the look-ahead timer effect is a look-ahead effect that can be executed across multiple fluctuations, so it is sufficient to execute the look-ahead timer effect before the variable display corresponding to the received special figure look-ahead effect command starts. Determine whether sufficient time is secured. That is, it is determined whether the total of the variation times of all the start-up memories that have been suspended until the start of the variation is equal to or longer than a specific time (40 seconds or longer in this embodiment). Furthermore, based on the win or loss of the starting memory to be executed and the fluctuation pattern of the starting memory, whether or not to execute the look-ahead timer effect and the content of the effect are determined. In addition, when the content of the performance is determined, the execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer performance is also determined. The execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer performance is, for example, at the start of a fluctuation corresponding to a start memory stored before the start memory for the look-ahead performance, or before the start memory for the look-ahead performance. Either the ready-to-reach start time of the variation corresponding to the stored starting memory, or the end time of the variation corresponding to the starting memory stored before the starting memory of the look-ahead performance target, etc. is set.

The look-ahead timer effect consists of a timer count effect that displays a countdown and a timer end effect that is executed when the timer is up. The timer counting effect and the timer end effect are executed continuously. In addition, the execution time of the timer counting effect, that is, the execution timing of the timer end effect, differs depending on the length of the timer counting effect, but it is fluctuating with respect to the starting memory that is the target of pre-reading, and may be performed before a reach occurs or after a reach occurs. There are various timings such as.

When it is decided to execute the pre-read timer effect, first, the execution time of the timer count effect is determined. The execution time of the timer counting performance is determined based on the time from the starting prize winning to the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the starting memory of the look-ahead performance target. For example, in this embodiment, 10 seconds is added to the total fluctuation time of the starting memory that is suspended before the starting memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is set as the execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer effect. A predetermined time calculated by subtracting the time based on the time period is set as the execution time of the timer counting effect (initial value of the countdown display). Furthermore, the content of the performance (during countdown performance pattern) to be executed as a timer counting performance is set. Examples of the countdown effect pattern include pattern 1 in which the light emitting mode of a specific lamp provided on the game board 5 is gradually changed to high-speed flashing as the countdown display progresses, and pattern 1 in which a specific lamp provided on the game board 5 Examples include pattern 2 in which the emitted light color of the lamp changes as the countdown display progresses, and pattern 3 in which a specific movable body provided on the game board 5 operates as the countdown display progresses. It corresponds to the expected success rate of changes in the performance target, and is set by lottery. For example, if you set it so that the expectation of winning increases in the order of pattern 1 → pattern 2 → pattern 3, pattern 1 is more likely to be selected when it is a miss than when it is a hit, and pattern 2 is more likely to be selected when it is a miss than when it is a hit. Both cases are selected at the same rate, and pattern 3 is more likely to be selected in the case of a hit than in the case of a loss.

After setting the content of the performance to be executed as the timer count performance (countdown performance pattern), the content of the timer end performance (post-countdown performance pattern) is set. In the timer end effect, for example, the text "End!!" is superimposed on the identification pattern on the display screen in a color according to the level of expectation (for example, the level of expectation increases in the order of black → blue → red). To surely make a player aware that the time is up by displaying a predetermined time. Examples of post-countdown production patterns include pattern 1 in which the font color of "End!!" is black, pattern 2 in which the font color of "End!!" is blue, and pattern 2 in which the font color of "End!!" An example is pattern 3, which is red. These patterns 1 to 3 correspond to the expected success rate of fluctuations in the look-ahead performance target, and are set by lottery. For example, it is set so that the expectation of winning increases in the order of pattern 1 → pattern 2 → pattern 3, and pattern 1 is more likely to be selected when it is a miss than when it is a hit, and pattern 2 is selected when it is a hit and a miss. Both cases are selected at the same rate, and pattern 3 is more likely to be selected in the case of a hit than in the case of a loss. Note that the post-countdown production pattern is not limited to this; in addition to the font color, the font may be decorated or a character may be displayed. It may be made to correspond to different expectations.

As described above, after performing various settings related to the look-ahead timer effect, the look-ahead timer effect is executed (started) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition (the arrival of the start time of the look-ahead timer effect). As described above, the look-ahead timer effect is composed of a timer count effect and a timer end effect, and effect blocks corresponding to the timer count effect and the timer end effect are individually defined. These performance blocks are defined in advance, and when the execution of the pre-read timer performance is determined, the performance block for the timer counting performance and the performance block for the timer end performance are selected based on the execution time and expectation level of the timer counting performance. The performance block for the timer counting performance and the performance block for the timer end performance may be selected individually, or the performance block for the timer counting performance and the performance block for the timer end performance may be managed as a set and selected for each set. You may also do so. When a performance block for timer counting performance and a performance block for timer end performance are selected, the performance block for timer counting performance is executed, and after the performance block ends, a performance block for timer end performance is executed.

In addition, in the effect block for the timer count effect, only the content of the effect is defined, and the execution time can be set variably. This eliminates the need to hold duplicate performance blocks with the same content that differ only in execution time, and it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity due to diversification of performance content. The look-ahead timer performance is not a performance whose execution timing and end timing are strictly determined like the aforementioned performance block that corresponds to variable time, but is based on the execution time calculated based on various conditions as described above. Therefore, it is possible to respond flexibly to the calculated performance execution time. Specifically, the calculated performance execution time may be stored in a predetermined storage area, and the performance execution time stored in the predetermined storage area may be read out at the start of the performance block of the timer counting performance.

Furthermore, if the execution time of the timer counting effect can be covered, a presentation block may be prepared in advance so as to cover the execution time of the timer counting effect. The execution time of the timer counting performance only needs to be within a predetermined range, so even if all patterns are covered based on the number of pending or fluctuation patterns (variation time), it may be possible to limit the execution time to a realistic number of performance blocks. be. For example, if the execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer effect is one pattern, the time from the start winning to the start of the change of the look-ahead effect is set as the lower limit, and the fluctuation time of the change is added to this time, Furthermore, by setting the time obtained by subtracting the execution time of the timer end effect as the upper limit, the range of the execution time of the timer count effect can be specified. Since it is sufficient that there is at least one effect block whose execution time is included in this range, there is a possibility that it is sufficient to prepare the minimum number of effect blocks. Alternatively, only the performance blocks that are frequently executed may be prepared in advance, and the number of performance blocks to be managed may be suppressed by setting the performance blocks that are less frequently executed as performance blocks whose variable times can be variably set.

FIG. 218 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a production block for the look-ahead timer production of this embodiment. FIG. 219 is a diagram showing an example of execution of the look-ahead timer effect of this embodiment. The execution example of the look-ahead timer effect shown in FIG. 219 corresponds to FIG. 218.

FIGS. 218 and 219 show an example in which a look-ahead timer effect is executed across fluctuation 1 and fluctuation 2. Variation 1 has the first half variation as "normal variation" and there is no reach, while variation 2 has the first half variation as "normal variation" and after the reach occurs, you will hit the jackpot. Note that the case in which the effects are executed within each variation is as described above, so the explanation will be omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 219(A), when variation 1 is started, variable display of all identification symbols is started (time t0). At this time, the number of pending symbol changes is 0. Note that, as described above, variation 1 is a normal variation in which no reach occurs.

Further, the variable display of the symbols continues, and the variable display of the left symbol is stopped at a predetermined timing. After that, a starting prize occurs and the number of pending symbol changes becomes 1. At the time of starting winning, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading timer effect can be executed, and here, execution of the pre-reading timer effect is determined, and a timer counting effect block and a timer end effect block are selected. At this time, as shown in FIG. 219(B), only the left symbol is stopped and the other symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, and a timer display section is placed at the lower right corner of the screen (time t1). Note that in FIG. 219(B), "START" indicating the start of the timer effect is displayed instead of the remaining time of the look-ahead timer effect.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 219(C), variation 1 ends and the stop symbols of all identification symbols are determined (time t2). At this time, the timer counting performance is continuing, and the remaining time of the look-ahead timer performance (timer counting performance) is displayed on the timer display section.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 219(D), variation 2 to be read ahead is started, and the remaining time displayed on the timer display section is continuously updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 219(E), when the execution of the timer counting effect is finished, the remaining time "0.00" is displayed on the timer display section, and the timer end effect is executed by executing the timer end effect. (time t3). At this time, as a timer end effect, a message "End!!" indicating the end of the timer effect is displayed on the screen, or a preview image of a character or the like is displayed. As described above, the font color of the message displayed here is set depending on the degree of expectation of the change. Furthermore, the content of the message may be set depending on the degree of expectation of the change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 219(F), while the timer end effect continues, the game stops at the same symbol "5" of the left symbol and the right symbol, and a reach occurs. Further, as shown in FIG. 219(G), after the timer end effect ends, the fluctuation of the middle symbols stops and all the symbols are determined. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 219(H), the state shifts to a jackpot state.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 218 and 219, the timer end effect is executed before the occurrence of a ready-to-win, but the timer end effect may be executed after the occurrence of a ready-to-reach. At this time, since the ready-to-win effect and the timer end effect are executed overlappingly, the content of the timer end effect may be determined based on the content of the variable ready-to-reach effect. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from being reduced due to repeated execution of the performance.

As described above, it becomes possible to define effects executed across multiple variations using effect blocks, and it becomes possible to use common blocks more flexibly. By defining effects that are executed as a look-ahead effect at the time of start-up winning, such as a look-ahead timer effect, as in the above-mentioned common block, it becomes possible to standardize and simplify the effect control, making the development of gaming machines more efficient. can be converted into

In addition, control of the effect block spanning multiple variations is performed by a callback function using the effect SW in the same manner as other common blocks. This makes it possible to move the characters and output sounds in accordance with the progress of the look-ahead timer performance, making it possible to realize a variety of performances.

[32-3. Background production]
Next, similar to the look-ahead timer effect, a background effect which is an advance notification effect that suggests a lottery result for a starting memory for which symbol variation has not been completed will be explained. As an outline of the background effect, the background of the display screen is changed over a plurality of symbol changes, and the background effect is ended at a predetermined timing during the change of the prefetch target. In this embodiment, the background is returned to its original state when the reach of the prefetch target is changing.

FIG. 220 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a production block for background production according to this embodiment. FIG. 221 is a diagram showing an example of execution of the background effect of this embodiment. The execution example of the background effect shown in FIG. 221 corresponds to FIG. 220.

FIGS. 220 and 221 show an example in which background effects are executed across variation 1, variation 2, and variation 3. Fluctuation 1 and Fluctuation 2 have a "normal fluctuation" in the first half and no reach, and fluctuation 3 has a "normal fluctuation" in the first half and develops into a reach. The description of the latter half of fluctuation 3 is omitted. Note that, similarly to the look-ahead timer effect, the case in which the effect is executed within each variation is as described above, so a description thereof will be omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 221(A), when variation 1 is started, variable display of all identification symbols is started (time t0). At this time, the number of pending symbol changes is 1. As mentioned above, fluctuation 1 is a normal fluctuation in which reach does not occur. After that, the fluctuating display of the symbols continues, and the left symbol stops. Then, at time t1, a starting winning occurs, and the number of pending symbol variations becomes 2. Here, execution of the background effect is determined at the time of starting winning, and a background effect block is selected. At this time, the background is changed from "mountain" to "sea" as shown in FIG. 221(B).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 221(C), variation 1 ends and the stop symbol is determined (time t2). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 221(D), variation 2 is started, and the variation display of the identification symbols is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 221(E), variation 2 ends and the stop symbol is determined (time t3). During this time, the background changed by executing the background effect continues to be displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 221(F), variation 3 to be read ahead is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 221(G), as the symbol variation develops into a reach, the background effect ends and the "sea" background returns to the "mountain" background (time t4).

Similar to the timer effect, the effect block for executing the background effect is selected and executed when a starting prize to be prefetched occurs. The timing to end is the timing when the variation targeted for look-ahead develops into a reach, i.e. the remaining time of the variation being executed at the time of starting winning, the total variation time of the variation executed before the variation targeted for look-ahead starts, and the look-ahead. The total value of the first half fluctuation time of the target fluctuation may be calculated and set. Alternatively, the execution time may not be set in the effect block for executing the background effect, and the background effect may be continuously executed until the end condition is satisfied. In this case, the termination condition is to detect that a change in the prefetch target has developed into a reach state. The termination condition is determined by a callback, and when the termination condition is met, a process for terminating the background effect is called.

As described above, in the background effect according to the present embodiment, the background display continues to be changed from the start of the background effect until the reach develops in the variation targeted for the look-ahead effect. As the background returns to its original state when the reach develops, the player recognizes that the degree of expectation for the change is high, and the degree of attention to the second half change becomes high.

On the other hand, if a reach occurs due to a change before the start of the change that is the target of the look-ahead effect, the background is temporarily returned to its original state when the reach occurs, and after the change ends, the background display is switched and the background Resume the performance. As a result, even if the player is disappointed after being out of reach, the player's expectations can be raised again, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[32-4. Mini character production]
Next, a description will be given of the mini character performance that is started when switching the performance mode. The mini character performance is a performance in which a character (mini character) corresponding to the performance mode appears. Since the mini-character displayed at this time is displayed only during symbol variation, when the symbol variation ends with the number of pending variations reaching 0, the mini-character is hidden. Note that the hidden mini-character may be displayed again when a predetermined condition is met. In addition, the mini-character is continuously displayed across multiple changes until it transitions to the customer waiting state. Hereinafter, the mini character presentation will be explained with reference to FIG. 222.

FIG. 222 is a diagram illustrating an example of mini-character presentation according to this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222(A), the game is continued in the "mountain" mode. In this state, when changing from the "mountain" mode to the "sea" mode as shown in FIG. 222(B), the mini character "Whale" is displayed at the center left of the screen. The mode can be changed by operating an operation section (presentation button) not shown.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 222(C) and 222(D), the suspended symbol variation is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 222(E), when all the pending symbol changes are completed, the state shifts to a customer waiting state and the displayed mini-characters are hidden.

Since the execution condition for the mini-character performance is that the symbol variation continues, the mini-character performance is continued even if there is no pending variation as long as the symbol variation is in progress. The execution condition for the mini-character performance may be not only when the mode is changed but also when a starting prize is generated after the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined period. By controlling in this manner, the mini-characters appear even when the mode is changed, giving the player a sense of surprise and increasing interest. Furthermore, the game state may be added to the determination conditions as a condition for executing the mini-character performance. For example, in a game state where the probability state is not clearly announced, if the probability state is high, the mini-character is likely to appear, thereby suggesting the current game state to the player.

Furthermore, the condition for ending the mini-character presentation may be, for example, the case where the display of the mini-character continues for a predetermined period of time, other than the case where the state shifts to the customer waiting state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a premium feeling in the appearance of the mini-character.

The mini-character performance is defined in a performance block, and while the mini-character performance is being executed, the end condition of the mini-character performance is determined by a callback, and when the end condition is met, the mini-character performance is ended. With this configuration, there is no need to set the duration of the mini-character performance in advance, and it is possible to flexibly determine whether or not to continue the mini-character performance based on conditions such as transition to a customer waiting state and gaming state. In this way, the end conditions for the mini-character performance can be dynamically determined by callbacks, so there is no need to define individual performance blocks corresponding to the execution time of the mini-character performance, and a performance block can be defined for each character. management can be made easier.

Note that the effect blocks for effects that can span multiple variations such as the look-ahead timer effect, background effect, and mini-character effect described above may be set overlappingly, and in that case, the look-ahead timer effect, background effect, mini-character effect, etc. may overlap. It will be executed as follows. Furthermore, multiple performance blocks for a performance that can span multiple fluctuations may be overlapped at different timings, and in that case, the starting memory to be read ahead in the look-ahead timer performance and background performance may be different, or the same starting memory may be used. However, it is possible to make the start timing of each performance different. This makes it possible to maintain expectations for the subsequent changes even after one performance ends, and further increases expectations for the changes if the same starting memory is being read ahead. be able to.

In addition, when outputting a performance sound effect by applying the automatic channel method in a performance that spans multiple fluctuations, it is different from the performance sound effect that is output in a performance that is executed in one fluctuation (for example, a reach performance). An AUTO group may be assigned. For example, by creating an AUTO group that can allocate the sound effects of a production performed with one variation to more channels, it is possible to give priority to the output of the production sound effects of the variation; In the AUTO group, sound effects for performances that span multiple variations (for example, the sound of "Start!" which is the start sound of the look-ahead timer performance, the counting sound (chitchitchi, etc.) that is the sound during countdown, and the sound of the timer end performance) It is possible to prevent many channels from being occupied for a long period of time by assigning a voice message such as "End!"

Furthermore, different AUTO groups may be set for each type of performance that spans a plurality of variations. For example, an AUTO group composed of two channels for look-ahead timer production and an AUTO group composed of two channels for mini-character production are defined. Thereby, even when the look-ahead timer performance and the mini character performance are executed in parallel, the performance sound effects of each performance can be output without being disturbed. The sound effects for background production are those that are constantly output during the duration of the production, such as BGM, or are only output when the background changes, so the AUTO group for background production is not set, but for BGM. channel (AUTO group) may be used instead.

Controls such as the output of performance sound effects, the movement of movable characters, and the lighting of lamps in performances that span multiple variations such as look-ahead timer performances, background performances, and mini character performances can be executed in accordance with the liquid crystal display using the production SW. It is. In particular, if the end timing of the performance cannot be specified at the start of the performance, it is difficult to control the performance device at the timing preset by the sub-performance block data. By controlling the , it is possible to realize a performance with a sense of unity. In addition, when outputting a production sound effect for a production whose end timing is not specified at the start of the production, sub-production block data for outputting the corresponding production sound effect is repeatedly executed while the production continues, and when the production ends, The execution of the sub effect block data may be stopped.

On the other hand, when it is possible to specify the end timing of the performance at the start of the performance, such as in a look-ahead timer performance, the liquid crystal performance block data that performs the display performance and the sub-performance block data that performs the performance using sounds, characters, etc. are used in parallel. It is possible to execute it by This makes it possible to independently define display effects and effects using sounds, accessories, etc., and it is possible to configure effects by freely combining various effect block data. For example, it is possible to prepare multiple types of liquid crystal display block data that define the display mode of the timer in a timer counting display and sub-effect block data that define the notification sound that is output when executing the timer counting display, and to freely combine these. It is possible to diversify the variations of production.

[33. Configuration 2 that displays multiple identification patterns]
By the way, in recent gaming machines, a wide variety of performances are executed on the performance display device 1600 to increase the interest of the game, but in order to ensure that the player can see the changing display of the identification symbols, the identification symbols are displayed. There was a risk that the production area would be narrowed depending on the area where the image was displayed. To prevent this, measures were taken such as temporarily reducing the area where the identification symbol is displayed. However, continuing the variable display while changing the display area of the identification symbol may complicate the control or increase the load on the control. Furthermore, it was necessary to suppress the reduction or enlargement of the identification symbols in a way that is compatible with the content of the performance to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

Therefore, the effect display device 1600 is configured to provide a plurality of display areas for displaying the identification symbols in a variable manner, and to simultaneously display the plurality of sets of identification symbols in a variable manner. The configuration for displaying multiple sets of identification symbols in different modes (high decoration dynamic display, low decoration dynamic display) in order to meet the needs of players has been explained with reference to FIG. 214, etc., and will be explained below. In the embodiment, the player is configured to be able to visually recognize the changing display of the identification symbols in at least one of the display areas while the symbols are changing. At this time, the decoration mode of the identification pattern in each display area may be the same or different.

[33-1. An example of a configuration in which identification patterns are displayed in multiple areas at the same time]
FIG. 223A is a diagram illustrating an example in which identification symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of display areas according to the present embodiment. The display area A occupies about 70% of the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 from the top. Furthermore, the display area B occupies the lower right area when viewed from the front of the entire display area. Further, the hold display is placed at the bottom left of the screen. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the fourth symbol is not displayed within the display area of the effect display device 1600, but is displayed by a light emitting body such as an LED or a lamp (not shown).

In the example shown in FIG. 223A, first, as shown in (A), the starting memory is digested and the variable display of the identification symbols is started. At this time, variable display of the first identification symbol is started in the display area A (first display area), and variable display of the second identification symbol is started in the display area B (second display area). In this embodiment, the first identification symbol displayed in display area A and the second identification symbol displayed in display area B are displayed in substantially the same manner, but the first identification symbol displayed in display area A The second identification symbols displayed in the display area B may be in any symbol display mode as long as the player can recognize that they are equivalent symbol combinations.

In addition, the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol start fluctuating display at the same time and stop at the same time, and the timing at which the stopping manner of all the identification symbols is finally determined is the same. In this embodiment, the stop timing of the individual symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) of each identification symbol is also set at the same time, but as long as the determination timing of the symbols is the same, the stop timing of each individual symbol may be arbitrary. Good too.

Further, the layers of the screen shown in FIG. 223A include a background layer, a symbol layer (first identification symbol), a symbol layer (second identification symbol), a notice layer, and the like. In this embodiment, since the first identification pattern and the second identification pattern are displayed in the same manner, it is possible to change the coordinates, size, etc. for displaying the identification pattern and use other drawing information. This makes it possible to share drawing data and reduce data capacity. Moreover, it becomes possible to share drawing processing, and it is possible to suppress the program structure from becoming complicated.

Similar to the above-mentioned example, various effects are performed on the first identification symbol until the result of the variable display (symbol variation, dynamic display) is displayed (the lottery result is derived). For example, when switching the identification pattern from a high-speed display mode to a low-speed display mode, the identification pattern can be replaced by executing a callback based on the identification pattern replacement production SW, and the identification pattern can be decorated until it is about to stop. can. Further, in this embodiment, the second identification symbol is also displayed in a variable manner in the same manner as the first identification symbol, but it is also possible to change the presentation content to suit the display area. Furthermore, the display mode of the second identification symbol may be changed based on the effect SW defined in the first identification symbol. Thereby, the variable display of the first identification symbol and the variable display of the second identification symbol can be smoothly linked.

In this embodiment, when the variable display of symbols is started, the symbols are stopped in the order of left identification symbol, right identification symbol, and middle identification symbol. FIG. 223A(B) shows a state in which the left identification symbols of the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol are stopped. At this time, an airplane-shaped preview character is displayed on the upper right side of the display area, and a tree-shaped preview character is displayed at the bottom of the display area. Note that each preview character is drawn on a different layer, and the image can be changed or deleted individually. This makes it possible to independently execute a plurality of preview performances depending on the degree of expectation of the variable display.

An airplane character displayed as a preview performance is enlarged and displayed by performing a performance in which it is visually recognized as approaching the front of the screen according to the degree of expectation of a jackpot. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 223A(B), the airplane character is displayed in a reduced state in the upper left part of the display area, and is gradually enlarged as the variable display progresses. FIG. 223A(C) shows a state in which the fluctuating display of the right identification symbol has stopped and a reach has occurred. The airplane character has been moved to the upper center and is displayed larger than the character shown in FIG. 223A(B). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 223A(D), in the ready-to-reach state, a preview effect is performed in which an additional decoration is displayed on the first identification symbol.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 223A(E), the airplane character is further enlarged and displayed on the front side of the first identification symbol. At this time, the middle identification pattern of the first identification pattern becomes hidden by the airplane character, and then the airplane character further expands and the display of the first identification pattern is interrupted, as shown in FIG. 223A(F). be done. At this time, the first identification symbol may be continuously displayed on the back side of the enlarged airplane character without stopping the variable display of the first identification symbol.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 223A(G), the variable display of the identification symbol ends and becomes a final display. Further, as shown in FIG. 223A(H), the result of the variable display becomes a jackpot, and the state shifts to a jackpot game state.

Next, to further explain the second identification symbol, as shown in FIGS. 223A(A) and 223A(B), the second identification symbol is also displayed in a variable manner in the same manner as the first identification symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 223A(C), when the left identification symbol and the right identification symbol stop at the same identification symbol "5" and a reach occurs, as shown in FIG. 223A(D), the first identification symbol Similarly, an additional decorative display is also made on the second identification pattern.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 223A(E) and 223A(F), the second identification symbol is displayed in a variable manner even if the first identification symbol is no longer visible to the player due to the preview performance in the variable display after the reach occurrence. are visible to the player.

In this embodiment, the player is configured to be able to visually recognize at least one of the first identification symbol or the second identification symbol during the variable display of the identification symbol. Therefore, even if the first identification pattern or the second identification pattern cannot be visually recognized, additional decoration is displayed on the second identification pattern in the same way as the first identification pattern, so the change in the decoration mode of the identification pattern It is possible to reliably inform a player of the expectation level of a jackpot.

Further, the additional decoration of the first identification pattern and the additional decoration of the second identification pattern may be different, for example, the number of stars of the additional decoration is 5 for the first identification pattern with a wide display area, and the number of stars of the additional decoration is 5 for the first identification pattern with a wide display area, The maximum number of additional decorative stars on the second identification symbol may be set to 3 to make it easier for the player to recognize the symbol. The player can have the player determine that a highly anticipated preview image is being displayed in which the first identification symbol is hidden while only the second identification symbol is being displayed. If there is no additional decoration of the pattern, even if a preview image that hides the first identification pattern is displayed, it may be determined that it is a so-called fake effect with low expectations.

The first identification pattern and the second identification pattern may be drawn on layers corresponding to each display area using common image data, and the additional decoration may be set for each display area. In this way, by displaying identification patterns in a variable manner in multiple areas and sharing some of the image data necessary for the variable display, the capacity for storing image data can be saved and the variety of effects can be achieved. I can do it.

Furthermore, not only the image data but also the liquid crystal display scheduler data for variably displaying the identification symbols in each display area may be shared. For example, by parameterizing the display position (coordinates) of identification symbols, layer-related information, etc. and processing them using a common procedure, it is possible to improve the development efficiency of production-related programs and flexibly respond to changes in production specifications. becomes possible. Furthermore, whether or not to display additional decorations is determined at the time of execution based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the fluctuation pattern etc., and the corresponding process is simply executed. It is possible to realize a more effective performance without complicating the performance control.

In the example shown in FIG. 223A, the preview image (character) is displayed on the front side of the identification pattern so that visibility of the identification pattern is obstructed. The same applies even if the movement of the accessory obstructs the visual recognition of the variable display of the identification symbol. For example, even if the accessory moves to the front side of the display area and becomes difficult to see except for the lower part of the screen, the movable area of the accessory may be set so that the display area B becomes visible.

As described above, in this embodiment, there is a period in which the first identification symbol becomes difficult to visually recognize due to the advance notice performance, and only the second identification symbol is visible to the player. Therefore, a callback is executed based on the identification symbol replacement production SW of the second identification symbol, and based on the stop symbol and the stop timing of the symbol at the switching timing of the identification symbol, the identification symbol replacement table and reel index replacement work number By replacing not only the second identification pattern but also the first identification pattern using a table, the identification pattern is decorated until just before it stops. Thereby, the decoration for the first identification symbol and the decoration for the second identification symbol can be executed at the same timing or in conjunction with each other, increasing the performance effect and improving the interest of the game.

Further, the display area B in which the second identification symbol is displayed does not have to be fixed. The arrangement of the display area B may be changed depending on the type of preview performance, and the position where the second identification symbol is displayed may be changed. For example, the coordinates of the layer corresponding to display area B are set to values according to the preview effect. Further, a plurality of layers corresponding to the display area B may be prepared. At this time, multiple types of layers are prepared corresponding to the positions where the second identification symbols are displayed, and parameters for displaying the corresponding layers are set to ON according to the type of preview effect, and parameters for layers that are not displayed are set to ON. Set to OFF. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display the second identification pattern at a preset position, and it is also possible to display the identification pattern separately from the first identification pattern and the second identification pattern, and also, By setting the parameters of all layers to OFF, it is also possible to display only the first identification pattern.

The display of the layer corresponding to the display area may be executed based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the fluctuation pattern, preview effect, etc. For example, if the movable accessory moves to the front left of the screen, making it difficult to see the left side of the screen, turn on the production SW that sets display area B on the right side of the screen and display the second identification symbol. However, the effect SW displayed at other positions may be set to OFF.

In addition, a production sound effect is output in response to the fluctuating display of the identification symbols in each display area, but in this embodiment, the fluctuating display of the first identification symbol and the fluctuating display of the second identification symbol are performed in a similar manner. Therefore, a common production sound effect may be output. In addition, if only the narrow display area B is displayed, such as when a preview effect is executed in the front, you can reduce the volume of the effect sound effect or stop the output of the effect sound effect. , the output of sounds related to the variable display may be suppressed, giving priority to the output related to the preview performance.

Furthermore, the sounds related to the fluctuating display of identification symbols (BGM, production sound effects) are managed as one AUTO group, and the sounds related to the preview production (BGM, production sound effects) are managed as another AUTO group, thereby creating an automatic channel system. Performs sound control. At this time, by setting a high priority for the AUTO group that outputs sounds related to the preview performance, it becomes possible to automatically give priority to the output of the sound output by the preview performance, which complicates the production control. can be suppressed. As mentioned above, by setting parameters such as whether sound can be output or not and the volume suppression value, it is possible to suppress the output of other production sound effects that are output while the sound related to the preview production is being output. can.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if it becomes difficult to visually recognize the identification symbol being displayed in a fluctuating manner due to a preview effect or the like, by displaying the identification symbol in a fluctuating manner in a plurality of display areas, one of the Since it is sufficient for the player to be able to visually recognize the changing display of the identification symbols, it is possible to ease the restrictions on the area in which the preview performance is executed. Moreover, it becomes possible to relax restrictions on the range in which the movable accessory moves.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, variable display in a plurality of display areas is performed in the same manner, so it is possible to draw using a common program and image data. On the other hand, even when displaying a decorative image overlapping the identification pattern in each display area, a layer is prepared for each display area that is displayed in front of the identification pattern, and only programs and image data corresponding to the decorative image are displayed. It can be realized with. As a result, it is only necessary to prepare the minimum number of programs and data that can be used as differences, and it is possible to suppress the increase in image data due to the diversification of production contents, to suppress the complexity of production control, and to suppress the increase in storage capacity. You can

[33-2. Modification example 1 of a configuration in which identification patterns can be displayed simultaneously in multiple areas]
In the above-mentioned configuration example, the identification symbol is displayed variably in the same manner in the display area A and the display area B from the start of the variation to the stop of the identification symbol, but here, the identification symbol is displayed in an independent manner in each display area. An example will be described in which identification symbols are displayed in a variable manner and are displayed in the same manner (synchronized) in each display area when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

FIG. 223B is a diagram showing an example in which identification symbols are independently and variably displayed in a plurality of display areas of this embodiment, and are variably displayed in the same manner at a predetermined timing. In this modification, the variable display of identification symbols starts simultaneously in each display area, but as shown in (B), even if the left symbol stops in display area A, the left symbol stops displaying in display area B. The variable display continues without being changed. Similarly, as shown in (C), even if the right symbol stops in the display area A and the left and right symbols form a reach mode, the variable display of all identification symbols continues in the display area B.

Next, after forming the ready-to-reach mode in (C) and after the ready-to-reach effect has progressed for a predetermined period, in order to again change all the symbols on the left middle right, as shown in (D), the identification symbols are changed again. A symbol ("Next") indicating ``Next'' is displayed as the middle symbol, and as shown in (E), the variable display of all identification symbols is restarted. Then, as shown in (F), the left and right symbols stop so as to form a reach pattern. In addition, at the timing of this reach, the second identification symbol in the display area B does not form a reach mode. As mentioned above, after the first identification symbol displayed in the display area A forms the ready-to-reach mode, the symbol indicating the re-variation of the identification symbol is displayed in the middle symbol, so that the re-variation is performed. Therefore, at the timing when the first identification symbol displayed in the display area A becomes the ready-to-reach mode, if the second identification symbol changes again, the second identification symbol does not form the ready-to-reach mode, and if it does not change again, the second identification symbol changes. If the symbols form a reach pattern, the player will be able to determine whether or not the second identification symbol will be re-varied by looking at the display, which may lead to a decrease in interest (especially when the above-mentioned re-variable symbol is used). Since the game is designed to increase the expectation of a jackpot by repeatedly stopping and changing again, it is necessary to maintain the interest of the player as much as possible in that the game may change again.) Therefore, in this modification, such a problem is solved by preventing the second identification symbol from forming the ready-to-reach mode at the timing when the first identification symbol forms the ready-to-reach mode. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the ready-to-reach mode is formed in the first identification symbol (for example, when a high-expected reach effect with a high expectation of a jackpot is performed after becoming a ready-to-win pattern), as shown in (G), the second The identification pattern is displayed in the same reach mode as the first identification pattern, and from this point on, display area B is displayed with additional decoration in the same manner as display area A, and display area B is also displayed in the same display mode as display area A. An identification pattern is displayed. (H) and (I) are similar to (G) and (H) in FIG. 223A. In addition, in FIG. 223B, for example, after the timing when the highly anticipated reach performance is performed, the second identification symbol is displayed in the same manner as the first identification symbol in the display area B (in other words, the first identification symbol is For a predetermined period after reaching reach, the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol have different display modes), and the additional decoration is displayed in the display area B in the same way as in the display area A. , this timing can be triggered by another predetermined condition.

The predetermined condition may be, for example, the time when the last re-variation is started while repeatedly performing the temporary stop of the identification symbol, or the start timing of the re-variation after the last temporary stop in a pseudo series. You can also do that. Further, the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect may be set to a timing to make the display mode of each display area the same.

As another predetermined condition, the predetermined condition may be satisfied when a preview performance using a specific movable accessory is executed, for example, when there is a possibility that a part of the display area may become invisible. At this time, assuming that a predetermined condition is satisfied from the start of the fluctuation, the display mode of each display area may be made the same from the beginning, or may be set to match the execution timing of a preview performance by a specific movable accessory. The execution timing of the preview performance is, for example, the elapsed time from a specific timing such as the start of fluctuation. Furthermore, when the movable accessory is operated by operating the effect button, the display mode of each display area may be controlled to be the same, using the operation of the effect button as a predetermined condition.

Further, if the expectation level of a jackpot is high, a predetermined condition may be satisfied. This is because there is a high possibility that flashy performances will be performed in addition to performances using movable accessories. In this case as well, the predetermined condition may be satisfied from the start of the fluctuation. Furthermore, the various timings explained above may be combined, for example, the timing may be used to execute a reach effect with high expectations for a jackpot, or the timing to start the final provisional fluctuation when executing an effect using movable accessories. .

As described above, according to the present modification, similar to the embodiment described above, the display mode of the identification symbols in each display area is made the same while maintaining the effect of relaxing the restrictions on the area where the preview effect is executed. By adjusting the (synchronization) timing, it is possible to realize a variety of effects. In addition, in the first half, when performances using movable accessories are performed less frequently, the display mode of some display areas is simplified (low decoration mode) to reduce the control load, and in the second half, when highly anticipated performances are performed. By using the same display mode (high decoration mode) in all display areas, it is possible to suppress restrictions on the production content, such as restrictions on the movement range of movable accessories, and increase the interest of the game. I can do it.

[33-3. Modified example 2 of a configuration that allows identification patterns to be displayed simultaneously in multiple areas]
In the example described above, after the identification symbols are variably displayed in the same display mode in each display area, the same symbols are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the modified example described here, after the identification symbols are displayed in a variable manner in each display area, it is possible to stop display the identification symbols in a different manner (design).

FIG. 223C is a diagram illustrating an example in which identification symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of display areas of the present embodiment, and stop at different symbols. Note that since (A) to (F) are the same as the example shown in FIG. 223A, illustrations of (C) to (E) are omitted. It should be noted that a gaming machine may be used in which the identification symbols are displayed in a variable manner as in the first modification shown in FIG. 223B, and the stop symbols in each display area are made different as in the second modification.

In this modified example, when multiple types of winnings are prepared, and when they are stopped and displayed in the same manner (identification pattern) in each display area, "first win" is indicated, but different types are displayed in each display area. When the (identification symbol) is stopped and displayed, it indicates a "second win" (for example, a "small win") that is different from the "first win". As shown in FIG. 223C(G), in the display area A, the identification symbols are all the same "5", "5", and "5" and are stopped and displayed, while in the display area B, the middle symbols are different, and the identification symbol "5" is displayed. ”, “V” and “5”. In this modification, if a small win is prepared as the second win, for example, the result of the symbol variation becomes the "second win" as shown in FIG. 223C (H), and if the "second win" is won, Game balls can be received in the V zone arranged in the game area. When a game ball lands in the V zone, it becomes possible to shift to a high probability state, for example.

As described above, according to this modified example, it is possible to notify the player of the details of the win by indicating the type of win by a combination of each identification symbol that is stopped and displayed in a plurality of display areas. . For example, it is also possible to use the stop symbols in the display area A to indicate whether or not there is a "win", and the stop symbols in the display area B to indicate the type of "win".

Further, the combination of the stopped symbols in each display area makes it difficult for the player to misunderstand the result of the variable display. Specifically, when a stop symbol in the display area A indicates a "win", the same identification symbol is stopped and displayed so that the player can clearly recognize that it is a win. It is better to prevent the player from misperceiving the display area B as well; for example, when the result of the variable display is a "miss", the same identification symbol may be stopped and displayed to prevent the player from misperceiving it. In addition, in the case of a so-called "big hit", the same identification symbol is displayed in display area A, while in the case of a "small win", which has less gaming value than a "big hit", the same identification symbol is displayed only in display area B. The display may be stopped and displayed depending on the pattern.

When suggesting the type of "win" depending on the display mode of display area B, for example, if the same identification symbol as display area A is stopped and displayed, it will be interpreted as a "probable strange jackpot", or if the same identification symbol as display area A is If the identification symbol is stopped and displayed, it may be considered a "normal jackpot" that does not shift to a variable probability state. Furthermore, only the middle symbol may be used as another identification symbol to recognize the type of jackpot, and as mentioned above, if the middle symbol is "V", it indicates that the game ball can be accepted in the V zone. , The number of rounds may be suggested by stopping the symbol corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot game in the middle symbol.

Further, the display area B may be hidden when the identification symbols stop, and the player may be made to feel a sense of anticipation by notifying the type of the "win" while notifying the "win". For example, it may be possible to increase the player's expectations by making it ambiguous whether or not the probability is in a fluctuating state after winning the jackpot. Further, the display area B may indicate an advantageous gaming state (probability fluctuation state, time shortening state, etc.) to be generated after the end of the jackpot game.

Further, after the player is notified of the jackpot in the display mode in the display area A, the identification symbols may be continued to be displayed only in the display area B. If the display area B continues to be displayed, the player can recognize that the player has won the jackpot, and by hiding the identification symbol in the display area A after notifying the player of the jackpot, the player can perform subsequent effects. Area can be secured. In this case, the display that was displayed as "5", "V", and "5" at the start of the jackpot in display area B will be changed to "5", "5", and "5" that was displayed in display area A from the middle of the jackpot game. It may be displayed to match. Further, this display may be displayed until the jackpot game ends and the identification symbols start changing in the game after the jackpot game ends, or the display may be stopped at a predetermined timing during the jackpot game. . However, even if the display is stopped during the jackpot game, it is preferable to display the winning symbols in the display area A and the display area B when the game is started after the jackpot game ends. In this case, for example, in display area B, "5", "V", and "5" were displayed at the winning timing, but after the end of the jackpot game, it may be displayed as "5", "V", and "5", or the jackpot may be displayed as "5", "V" and "5". The display may be changed to "5", "5", and "5" with the game in between.

According to this modification, as in the above-described embodiment, by displaying the identification symbols in a variable manner in a plurality of display areas, it is possible to ease the restriction on the area in which the preview effect is executed, and also to display the stop symbols in the plurality of display areas. By combining these, it becomes possible to notify the player of the game results in detail, and furthermore, it becomes possible to realize various notification modes. Thereby, it is possible to increase the expectations of the players and to improve the interest of the game.

[34. Substrate that is a component of the decorative body]
By the way, in recent gaming machines, in order to realize a wide variety of performances, attempts have been made to increase the number of accessories (decorations) mounted on the gaming machines, and to increase the size and shape of the machines in order to improve the game's interest. However, since the size of the gaming machine is set to a predetermined size, the gaming area is limited, and due to factors such as the increasing size of liquid crystal display devices, there are restrictions on the size and arrangement of the accessories. Therefore, there was a risk that the performance would become monotonous and the interest in the game would decrease. The embodiments to be described hereinafter have been developed in view of the above circumstances, and are intended to provide a means for increasing the size of accessories and improving the flexibility of arrangement.

The accessories provided in the gaming machine are visible from the front side of the player and have highly decorative decorations to enhance the interest of the game, and are equipped with light emitting elements such as LEDs inside. , emits light in a manner that corresponds to the gaming state and the degree of expectation of the variable display. If the light emitter is disposed on the substrate, such as an LED, the decorative part includes a transmitting part that can transmit the light output from the light emitter. The transmitting portion may be, for example, a transparent member that allows light to pass therethrough, or may have holes formed in a mesh pattern through which light passes.

On the other hand, by providing the transparent portion, the board on which electronic components such as LEDs and resistors are mounted can be visually recognized by the player through the transparent portion. Usually, the board is mounted with electronic components necessary to produce a performance effect, and is not intended to be visually recognized by the player. However, in a decorative part having a transparent part through which light can pass, there is a risk that the board placed inside the decorative part will be visible to the player and the decorative effect will be reduced.
On the other hand, if you make the board invisible by reducing the transmittance of the transparent part or using a material that reflects external light on the surface of the transparent part, you may not be able to obtain the desired effect. be. Furthermore, if the LED is arranged outside the decorative part or in a position where the player cannot see it from the transparent part, the size of the decorative part may unintentionally increase.

Therefore, an object of the present embodiment is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in the decorative effect even if the board is visible through the transparent part that constitutes the decorative part.

[34-1. Game board]
FIG. 224 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the game board 5 of the game machine in this embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 224, an effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a (on the game board side). Although not shown, in the gaming area 5a, similar to the game board 5 described above, there are a plurality of general winning holes that are always open to accept the game balls that have been hit, and a plurality of general winning holes. The term "mouth" refers to a starting port that is always open to accept game balls at different positions within the gaming area 5a, a gate portion that detects passage of a game ball, and a game ball that enters the first starting port or the second starting port. It is equipped with a grand prize opening, etc., which allows game balls to be accepted at any location depending on the result of the lottery.

Further, in the upper right corner of the game area 5a, a character accessory 9100 in the shape of the character ``Gekatsu'' is placed. FIG. 225 is a perspective view showing the shape of character accessory 9100 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 225, the character accessory 9100 is a plate-shaped accessory imitating the character shape of "Gekinetsu". The performance by the character accessory 9100 is executed in a manner according to the degree of expectation of symbol variation. For example, the light emission mode may be changed, such as emitting light in a color depending on the level of expectation, or repeating lighting and extinguishing in a predetermined pattern. In addition, "geki" and "heat" are lit alternately, and if expectations are high, both letters are lit to notify a jackpot, and in the end, both letters are turned off to perform a so-called fake effect. You may also do so.

As will be described later, in the text accessory 9100, a cover member (cover body) 9110 that is visible to the player is composed of a transparent part 9111 and a non-transparent part 9112, and the character object 9100 has a shape that corresponds to the progress of the game and the content of the performance. The transparent portion 9111 is configured to be able to emit light by a light emitting body provided inside. In this embodiment, the transparent part (first area) 9111 corresponds to the characters, the non-transparent part (second area) 9112 is the outer edge of the characters, and the transparent part 9111 is almost colorless and transparent. . The non-transparent portion 9112 may also be transparent, and may be colored with a different transparency than the transparent portion 9111, for example. Details of the character accessory 9100 will be explained with reference to the drawings from FIG. 227 onwards.

Further, a part of the character accessory 9100 overlaps the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600, and the light output from the display area of the effect display device 1600 is irradiated onto the back side of the character accessory 9100. At this time, by making the back side of the character accessory 9100 a reflective member, it is also possible to perform a performance combined with the performance performed by the performance display device 1600. Furthermore, a part of the character accessory 9100 may be configured to allow light to pass therethrough, and an effect may be performed in which the light output from the display area of the effect display device 1600 is transmitted through the character accessory 9100.

In addition, a space is formed between the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game area 5a, and a snowman accessory 9200 imitating the shape of a “snowman” is placed on the front side of the lower left side of the effect display device 1600. is located. The snowman accessory 9200 is formed in the shape of a three-dimensional doll, and allows the player to view part of the side and back sides of the snowman accessory 9200 from the side.

FIG. 226 is a perspective view showing the shape of the snowman accessory 9200 in this embodiment, with (A) being a view from the front and (B) being a view from the rear. The snowman accessory 9200 is made of a transparent member, and produces a dramatic effect by transmitting light from an internal light emitting device (LED) to the outside.

The snowman accessory 9200 is visually composed of a hat, a head, and a body. The head and body are made of transparent members, allowing the player to see inside. The hat part has a bucket shape and is provided above the head. The cap portion is made of a colored member, and in this embodiment, light emitted from a light emitting body such as an LED provided inside can pass through. Details of the snowman accessory 9200 will be explained with reference to the drawings from FIG. 239 onwards.

The snowman ornament 9200, like the character ornament 9100, is executed in a manner according to the degree of expectation of symbol variation. For example, the light may be emitted in a color depending on the level of expectation, or the light may be turned on and off repeatedly. Alternatively, only the head may be lit, or only the body may be lit. Alternatively, only the hat section may be lit at the beginning of the preview performance to increase the player's expectations, and the hat section may be lit sequentially from the head to the torso.

[34-2. Character role item (extreme heat)]
Next, the detailed configuration of the character accessory 9100 will be explained. FIG. 227 is an exploded perspective view of the character accessory 9100 of this embodiment. The character accessory 9100 includes a cover member (cover body) 9110 placed on the front side that is visible to the player, and a character accessory board placed on the back side of the cover member 9110 and equipped with a light emitting body 9301 such as an LED. 9120, and a base member 9130 attached to the back side of the cover member 9110 and character object board 9120.

[34-2-1. Cover member]
The cover member 9110 has a peripheral wall portion 9113 projecting rearward formed on its outer periphery, and a character accessory board 9120 can be accommodated in a space on the back side surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113. FIG. 228 is a diagram of the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of this embodiment viewed from the back side. Note that the state in which the character accessory board 9120 is stored will be described later with reference to FIG. 230. As described above, the cover member 9110 is formed of a transparent part 9111 that is shaped like the characters "extremely hot" and can transmit light, and a non-transparent part 9112 that is formed around the periphery of the transparent part 9111 and that is difficult to transmit light. ing.

Further, the peripheral wall portion 9113 forming the outer peripheral portion of the character accessory 9100 is made of a material that does not easily transmit light, similar to the non-transparent portion 9112, and may be made of the same material as the non-transparent portion 9112. Note that in the case of lighting up the characters individually, it is necessary to provide a peripheral wall portion 9113 between the characters in order to separate the characters. At this time, a character accessory board 9120 may be prepared for each character, or the board may be integrated.

The transparent portion 9111 is made of a colorless and transparent material, and allows the inside of the character accessory 9100 to be visually recognized. When the effect is executed, the light emitting body 9301 provided inside allows light to pass through the transparent part 9111, and the non-transparent part 9112 blocks the light, thereby highlighting the words "extremely hot" and heightening the player's expectations. be able to. Furthermore, not only is it possible to transmit the light from the light emitting body (LED) 9301 arranged on the character accessory board 9120, but also it is possible for the player to visually recognize the character accessory board 9120 itself. .

In this embodiment, a light diffusing part that diffuses light is formed in a non-transparent part 9112 on the back side of the cover member 9110. Instead of forming the light diffusing part, a light guiding member may be provided between the cover member 9110 and the character object board 9120, and the diffusing member can be provided by guiding the light from the light emitter 9301 to the transmitting part 9111. You can obtain the same effect as if A modification example using a light guiding member will be described later.

By configuring as described above, the light inside the accessory can be efficiently concentrated with a small number of light emitters, so the number of light emitters 9301 arranged on the character accessory board 9120 can be reduced, The degree of freedom in arranging the body 9301 can be increased.

Further, the non-transmissive portion 9112 may be formed of a transparent material having a lower transmittance than the transparent portion 9111 without forming a light diffusing portion. For example, by using a colored material with transparency, the character accessory 9100 can be made to emit light as a whole, and the difference in transparency can make the character part stand out, while producing a different effect than when using a light diffusion section. be able to.

[34-2-2. Character accessory board]
FIG. 229 is a diagram showing the front side of the character accessory board 9120 of the character accessory 9100 of this embodiment. Moreover, FIG. 230 shows a state in which the character accessory board 9120 is accommodated in the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of this embodiment, and is a diagram showing the back side of the character accessory board 9120.

As shown in FIGS. 229 and 230, the character accessory board 9120 does not have a general rectangular shape, but has the shape of the character accessory 9100 in accordance with the outer shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110. It has a similar shape. Further, a resist colored in a predetermined color (specific color) is applied to the surface of the character accessory substrate 9120. Although various information is displayed on the character accessory board 9120, it may be displayed by silk printing or the like, or may be displayed by etching characters.

Further, the back side of the character accessory board 9120 is covered by the base member 9130 when it is attached to the game board 5, so that it cannot be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, it is not necessary to make the board a specific color, but it is important to compare the manufacturing cost of processing the front and back sides separately rather than the cost of the material, and decide whether to apply resist only to the front or both sides. All you have to do is decide.

As described above, the character accessory board 9120 is visible through the transparent portion 9111 of the cover member 9110. Therefore, if the color of the board does not match the decorative style of the accessory, there is a risk that the decorative effect will be reduced or that the electronic components placed on the board will inhibit the decorative effect. Therefore, in this embodiment, the character accessory board 9120 itself is used as one of the decorative elements. For example, the character accessory board 9120 may be colored in a color (specific color) that matches the decoration of the accessory instead of the general green, or the electronic components mounted on the character accessory board 9120 may be colored with a pattern of the accessory. Arrange as shown. The color that matches the decorative aspect of the accessory is, for example, a color that is related to a character or theme that appears in the performance of the accessory (gaming machine). Hereinafter, a detailed description will be given with reference to the drawings.

First, a specific mode for using the shape, color, etc. of a substrate provided in a decorative body such as an accessory as a decorative element will be described. As described above, the character accessory 9100 of this embodiment has the transparent portion 9111, so that the character accessory board 9120 provided inside can be visually recognized. Therefore, by coloring the character accessory board 9120 in a specific color matching the decoration mode of the character accessory 9100, the overall color of the character accessory 9100 is configured. For example, if the surface of the character object board 9120 is blue, the entire object will be blue when the light-emitting body 9301 is not emitting light, and the color of the light-emitting body 9301 will be when it is emitting light, giving a completely different impression to the game. can be given to someone. In particular, when the area occupied by the transparent portion 9111 in the entire accessory is large, a greater effect can be obtained.

[34-2-3. Luminous body/electronic parts]
A plurality of light emitters (LEDs) 9301 are arranged on the surface (front) side of the character accessory board 9120. The light-emitting bodies 9301 may all emit light of the same color, or may have a plurality of different light-emission colors. The light emitters 9301 light up depending on the progress of the game, and the lighting locations may be changed depending on the contents of the performance. For example, the number of light emitters to be lit may be determined depending on the expectation level of a jackpot, or the number of light emitters to be lit may be If there are different types of emitted light colors, the light may be emitted in a color depending on the level of expectation, or different types of emitted light colors may be emitted at the same time.

In this embodiment, the character accessory board 9120 is colored in a specific color as described above. Therefore, the color changes depending on the combination of the specific color of the character object board 9120 and the emitted light color of the light emitting body 9301, so it is possible to realize a variety of effects by making the light emitting body 9301 emit light in multiple types of colors. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the light emitting body 9301 is off, the specific color colored on the character object board 9120 is recognized, so even just blinking the light emitting object 9301 can be used as a production expression. The specific color colored in 9120 and the emitted light color of light emitter 9301 can be recognized as different colors alternately. For example, when the text accessory board 9120 is colored blue as described above, by slowly flashing the light emitting body 9301 in red, the light and dark are created and the red character accessory and the blue character accessory are alternately colored. It can be recognized as an accessory with a completely different color.

Electronic components other than the light emitter 9301 are mounted on the back side of the character accessory board 9120. Specifically, they are a resistor 9302, an IC 9303, and a connector 9304. In this embodiment, since these electronic components are not visible to the player, they may be placed in any arrangement that does not cause any technical problems. Further, as shown in FIG. 230, information regarding the light emitting body 9301 placed on the front side is printed on the back side of the character accessory board 9120, and electronic components placed on the front side can be viewed from the back side. can recognize information about Information indicating the position of the light emitter 9301 is displayed with a dotted line to prevent misidentification.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 229, only a light emitting body 9301 is placed on the front side, and no information regarding electronic components is displayed. This is to prevent the decoration effect from being reduced due to silk-printed characters (for example, part numbers of electronic parts (such as "LED1" in Figure 230)) being visible to players, but it is also Information may be displayed in a color that is difficult for players to visually recognize, if necessary, such as to improve efficiency. For example, if the text accessory board 9120 is colored blue as described above, a similar color, such as light blue, whose shading is adjusted to make it distinguishable, is used as the information display, and silk printing is performed. Bye. Alternatively, the information may be formed by etching characters.

In addition, in the character accessory 9100 in this embodiment, electronic components other than the light emitting body 9301 are arranged on the back side of the board that cannot be seen by the player, so the electronic components such as the resistor 9302 and the IC 9303 are black. . In addition, if electronic components must be placed on the front side, at least a portion of the electronic components, such as the back side of the non-transparent portion 9112, may be placed in a manner that is difficult to see from the player, or may be colored or colored so that it is difficult to see from the player. It is also possible to adopt a shaped electronic component. For example, if the electronic component has the same color as the specific color, it may be placed on the front side.

On the other hand, as described above, the present invention is configured so that the player can visually recognize the board provided inside the accessory. Therefore, an example will be described in which an electronic component arranged on a board is used as a decorative element of an accessory.

Electronic components are arranged on the surface side of the character accessory board 9120 at a position where the player can view them through the transparent part 9111 of the cover member 9110. At this time, the electronic components are arranged so as to form the pattern of the characters displayed by the character accessories 9100. For example, electronic components are placed in regular positions to decorate the letters.

Further, the arrangement of the light emitters 9301 may be such that the player cannot recognize the pattern of the characters when the light is emitted. Furthermore, by selecting and emitting light from a light emitting body 9301 located at a position where electronic components can be recognized even when the light is emitted, and a light emitting body 9301 located at a position where the electronic component cannot be recognized when the light is emitted, a pattern can be created. It may be configured such that the presence/absence can be switched.

Moreover, electronic components other than black may be placed on the front side to serve as decorative elements. Although the transmitting portion 9111 is colorless and transparent, it may be made to be a lens member or a diffusing member that can transmit light, while making it difficult to clearly distinguish electronic components so that the player can easily recognize them as patterns. Note that another specific example of how the arrangement of electronic components exhibits a decorative effect will be explained in the snowman accessories 9200 described later.

It is also possible to use characters printed on the front surface of the substrate as a pattern. In order to prevent the decorative effect from being obstructed, instead of printing characters in colors that are difficult for players to recognize, we have printed characters that indicate information on electronic components and circuit boards as decorative elements that can be recognized by players. It may be printed according to the aspect (color, shape). As a result, it is possible to make the pattern of the accessory more complex, or to change the color by printing in a color different from that of the cover member 9110, thereby making it possible to enhance the decorative effect. In addition, by consolidating the characters printed on the board, the player is made to recognize that an area on the board has a color different from that of the cover member 9110 and other parts of the board, thereby enhancing the decorative effect of the entire accessory. It may be increased.

[34-2-4. Arrangement of luminous body]
Next, the positional relationship between the light emitting body 9301 and the transparent portion 9111 and non-transparent portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 will be explained. FIG. 231 is a diagram illustrating the positional relationship between the light emitting body 9301 and the transparent portion 9111 and non-transparent portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 in the character accessory 9100 of this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the light emitters 9301 are also arranged at positions that are visible from the transparent part 9111 and at positions that are difficult for the player to see behind the non-transparent part 9112. Here, a light emitting body 9301 disposed at a position visible from the transmissive portion 9111 is referred to as a light emitting body 9301a, and a light emitting body 9301b disposed on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 is assumed.

For example, if it is desired to emit strong light, the light emitting body 9301a is arranged at a position that is visible from the transmitting portion 9111, and the light is directly emitted to the outside. Furthermore, as explained in FIG. 228, since the light diffusing section is provided on the back side of the non-transmissive part 9112, the light emitting body 9301b is placed on the back side of the non-transmissive part 9112 to diffuse the light and make it soft. It becomes possible to make it emit light.

In this way, the position of the light-emitting body 9301a can be determined according to the type of accessory, and by selecting the light-emitting body 9301 and causing it to emit light, it is also possible to switch the light emission mode with one accessory. Specifically, if you want the entire accessory to emit strong light, you can make only the light emitter 9301a emit light or all the light emitters 9301, and if you want to make it emit soft light, you can make only the light emitter 9301b emit light and diffuse the light. That's fine.

Further, the transmittance of the transmitting portion 9111 may be adjusted so that the light emitting body 9301a is slightly difficult to see without making it completely colorless and transparent. For example, the transmittance part 9111 may be made to have a slightly lower transmittance (colored transparent, e.g., light blue) to make it difficult to see the inside, or the surface of the transmissive part 9111 may be processed (e.g., textured) to diffuse light. In this way, it may be made difficult to visually recognize the inside. With this configuration, the light emitting body itself becomes difficult to see, but it can emit light more strongly than when it is placed on the back side of the non-transparent part 9112. Furthermore, since the degree of freedom in positioning the light emitting body 9301 is increased, the degree of freedom in design is increased and development efficiency can be improved.

Further, the character accessory board 9120 itself may not be used as a direct decorative element, but may indirectly enhance the presentation effect. For example, when the specific color of the character accessory board 9120 is white, it is possible to increase the reflectance even when the arranged light emitter 9301 is not lit, and when the light emitter 9301 is lit, Of course, by reflecting light from the outside, it is possible to prevent the inside of character accessory 9100 from becoming too dark.

Further, since the specific color of the character accessory board 9120 is white, the character color of the character accessory 9100 can be recognized as white as a characteristic when the light is turned off. In this case, if full-color LEDs (R, G, and B color LEDs) are used as the light emitter 9301, the text can be expressed in a variety of colors, but the light from the light emitter 9301 and the back side of the non-transparent part 9112 By overlapping and merging the light reflected (diffused) from the light diffusion section provided on the board with the light reflected from the substrate surface, it is possible to create a fantastical effect that cannot be expressed with a single type of light emitter 9301. can. At this time, it is possible to realize a variety of effects without using a plurality of types of light emitters 9301, so costs can be reduced.

As described above, the text accessory of this embodiment is configured to be visible to the player by using the color of the board and the mounted electronic components as decorative elements, so it is arranged so as to hide the board. Since there is no need to do this, the degree of freedom in design can be improved. Further, electronic components that are not decorative elements may be placed on the back side of the board, and by placing electronic components other than light emitting bodies such as LEDs on the back side, only the color of the board may be used as a decorative element.

[34-2-5. Base member]
The base member 9130 has the same shape as the cover member 9110 when viewed from the front when attached. The peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 and the base member 9130 are brought into contact with each other and fixed by a mounting member (not shown). At this time, the character accessory board 9120 may be fixed to the cover member 9110 or the base member 9130, or the character accessory board 9120 may be housed in a space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 without being fixed. You may also do so. Note that wiring for transmitting signals and supplying power to the character object board 9120 is not shown; for example, holes for wiring are formed in the peripheral wall 9113 of the base member 9130 and the cover member 9110. Just form it.

Note that the cover member 9110 may be provided with an attachment portion to directly attach it to the game board 5 without using the base member 9130. In this case, a character accessory board 9120 is attached to the cover member 9110.

[34-3. Variation example 1 of character accessories]
Subsequently, the shape of the character accessory board 9120 is not completely similar to the shape of the character accessory board 9100, and the outer edge of the character accessory board 9120 matches the outline shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110. Let's explain what happens when you don't. In this case, since it is not possible to arrange the light emitting body 9301 over the entire character object 9100, the light guide member 9140 is arranged between the cover member 9110 and the character object substrate 9120 to diffuse the light. Compensates for the lack of light amount in the part where 9301 is not placed. Note that the cover member 9110 and the base member 9130 are the same as in the example described above.

FIG. 232 is a diagram showing an example of a light guide member 9140 that diffuses light from the light emitting body 9301 in the character object 9100 of this embodiment. The light guide member 9140 is surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110, similar to the shape of the character accessory board 9120 described above, in order to diffuse the light to the entire back side of the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100. It has a shape similar to the shape of the character accessory 9100 in accordance with the outer shape of the space.

FIG. 233 is a diagram showing the front side of the character accessory board 9120 of the character accessory 9100 of Modification 1 of this embodiment. Moreover, FIG. 234 shows a state in which the character accessory board 9120 is accommodated in the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of Modification 1 of this embodiment, and is a diagram showing the back side of the character accessory board 9120. Note that the configuration other than the shape of the character accessory board 9120 is the same as the embodiment described above.

As shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, the character accessory board 9120 has a notch 9122 in which a part of the outer shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall 9113 of the cover member 9110 is missing. Further, a mounting hole 9121 for fixing to the base member 9130 is formed in the center of the character accessory board 9120. As shown in FIG. 234, the attachment portion of the cover member 9110 is inserted into the attachment hole 9121 and attached to the base member 9130.

Similarly, a mounting hole is formed in the light guide member 9140 so that the mounting portion of the base member 9130 is inserted therethrough. Note that, if the proportion occupied by the notch portion 9122 is small and the position of the board does not shift, the mounting structure may be not provided and the board may be sandwiched and fixed between the cover member 9110 and the base member 9130.

FIG. 235 is a diagram illustrating the positional relationship between the light emitting body 9301 and the transparent portion 9111 and non-transparent portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 in the character accessory 9100 of the modified example of this embodiment. In this modification, since the light emitter 9301 cannot be placed in the notch 9122, the entire character object 9100 is made to emit light by guiding light with the light guide member 9140. At this time, a light diffusing section may be provided on the back side of the non-transmissive section 9112 to assist the light guide member 9140.

Therefore, the character accessory 9100 of this modification includes a portion decorated by the character accessory board 9120 by using the color of the character accessory board 9120, electronic components, etc. as decorative elements, and a notch 9122. Therefore, there are parts that are not decorated by the character accessory board 9120. At this time, the decorative effect can be maintained by performing optical decoration using the light diffusing section provided on the back side of the non-transmissive section 9112 of the light guiding member 9140 and the cover member 9110.

As explained in this modification, the shape of the character accessory board 9120 does not have to be similar to the character accessory board 9100, and the parts that are not decorated by the character accessory board 9120 are decorated with light guide members 9140, light diffusion parts, etc. Decrease in the decorative effect may be suppressed by providing light decoration. Furthermore, reduction in the decorative effect may be suppressed by making the color of the base member 9130 the same as the specific color of the character accessory board 9120. This makes it possible to make the shape of the character accessory board 9120 relatively simple without making it a complicated shape, and by increasing the degree of freedom in the size of the board, manufacturing costs such as processing the board can be reduced. The increase can be suppressed.

Alternatively, without using the base member 9130, a light-emitting decorative portion placed on the back side of the character accessory 9100 may be used to transmit light from the decorative portion through the cutout portion 9122. good. For example, when the character object 9100 is placed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600 as in this embodiment, by displaying an image at the upper right of the screen, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1600 and the character object are A display integrated with a light emission display by the object 9100 may be executed. Furthermore, the same effect can be achieved by using a transparent member for the base member 9130. Note that an example using the display of the liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described in more detail in Modification 2.

[34-4. Variation example 2 of character accessories]
In Modification 1, a notch 9122 was formed in a part of the board, but in Modification 2, an example will be described in which the above-mentioned character accessory board 9120 is about half the size of character accessory 9100. In addition, the cover member 9110 is configured to directly attach the game board 5 without using the base member 9130, and the structure of the character accessory 9100 in this modification includes the cover member 9110, the character accessory board 9120, and the light guide. It is constituted by member 9140.

In this modification, as in Modification 1, the light guide member 9140 guides light to a portion where the light emitting body 9301 cannot be placed, thereby performing optical decoration. Furthermore, in this modification example, since the base member 9130 is not provided, if a light emitter is provided on the back side of the character accessory 9100, it is possible to transmit the light from the light emitter.

FIG. 236 is a diagram showing the front side of the character accessory board 9120 of the character accessory 9100 of the second modification of the present embodiment, in which the character accessory board 9120 and the light guide member 9140 overlap. Indicates the condition. Further, FIG. 237 shows a state in which a character accessory board 9120 is accommodated in the cover member 9110 of a character accessory 9100 according to modification 2 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing the back side of the character accessory board 9120.

As shown in FIGS. 236 and 237, the character accessory board 9120 is configured to occupy about the upper half of the character accessory 9100. Therefore, when the character accessory 9100 of this modification is attached to the game board 5, the upper half is decorated with the specific color colored on the character accessory board 9120, but the lower half is not decorated with the character accessory board 9120. becomes. On the other hand, since the lower half of the character accessory 9100 can be transmitted through the transparent portion 9111, the back side of the character accessory 9100 may be colored in a specific color to suppress the sense of discomfort.

Further, different effects may be performed in the upper and lower regions. For example, in the case of a character accessory with characters written in two rows, the character accessory board 9120 is arranged on the upper row side, and a light emitting body is arranged on the back side of the lower row, so that different effects are performed between the upper row and the lower row. Furthermore, if this accessory is movable, a different effect can be performed for each stop position by arranging a different light emitting body on the back side for each stop position.

Furthermore, the light emitting body is not limited to an LED or a lamp, but may also be the liquid crystal display device 1600 as described above. When the object is moved downward to the point where the object is moved downward, the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 allows light to pass through the lower part of the accessory to perform an effect.

Note that the image to be displayed on the back side of the character accessory 9100 is an image of the same color (character character It is preferable to display an image of the same color (the same color as the specific color) and the same shape for the part where the object board 9120 is shown. This is because even if some kind of failure occurs in the character accessory 9100, the image is displayed, so the game can be played without giving the player a sense of anxiety due to the failure.

By configuring as described above, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of performances with one accessory, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 238, a part of the liquid crystal display device 1600 is made visible to the player through the character object 9100. Therefore, in addition to the light guided by the light guide member 9140, light from the image (video) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is displayed from the back side of the character object 9100, and the light emitting effect by the character object board 9120 This makes it possible to perform display effects by the liquid crystal display device 1600 in cooperation with each other. With this configuration, the lower side of the character accessory board 9120 becomes a boundary, and can also be used as an element constituting a decoration.

FIG. 238 is a diagram showing a state in which the character accessory 9100 of Modification Example 2 of this embodiment is attached to the game board 5. The upper part of the character accessory 9100 uses a light guide member 9140 to diffuse the light emitted by the light emitting body 9301 mounted on the character accessory board 9120. On the other hand, in the lower part of the character accessory 9100, the light (displayed image) output by the liquid crystal display device 1600 is diffused by the light guide member 9140. At this time, by combining the light from the light emitting body 9301 and the light from the liquid crystal display device 1600, it is possible to perform a performance that integrates the performance by the character object 9100 and the performance by the liquid crystal display device 1600.

Note that effects other than the character accessory 9100 and the liquid crystal display device 1600 may be combined. For example, if the game board 5 is made of a transparent member and the decorative effect is enhanced by arranging a luminous body on the back side or pasting a sticker etc., it is possible to combine it by making it visible through the transparent part of the accessory. The decorative effect can be further enhanced.

[34-5. Snowman role item]
Next, the snowman accessory 9200 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 226, the snowman accessory 9200 is an accessory (decoration) imitating a snowman, and has a shape in which a spherical head rests on a spherical body that is slightly larger than the head. It becomes. Furthermore, a bucket-shaped hat part is placed on the head in an inclined state. The hat portion is made of a colored member, and in this embodiment, light emitted from a light emitting body such as an LED provided inside can pass through.

FIG. 239 is a diagram showing a cross-sectional view of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment. The snowman accessory 9200 includes a board (snowman board 9220) on which electronic components including a light emitter 9301 such as an LED is mounted inside a cover member 9210 that is divided into a front cover member 9210a and a back cover member 9210b. be done.

The snowman accessory 9200 is used in a performance that is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and for example, a performance such as causing an internal light emitting body to emit light is performed in accordance with the expected level of pattern variation. Furthermore, since the cover member 9210 is made of a material that allows light to pass through and is placed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600, it is possible to perform effects such as transmitting or reflecting the displayed image. Good too. Each configuration of the snowman accessory 9200 will be specifically explained below.

FIG. 240 is a diagram of the front cover member 9210a of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment viewed from the back side. FIG. 241 is a diagram showing the back side cover member 9210b of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment. FIG. 242 is a diagram showing the front side of the snowman board 9220 of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment. Moreover, FIG. 243 is a diagram showing the back side of the snowman board 9220 of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment.

The cover member 9210 (front side cover member 9210a, back side cover member 9210b) of the snowman accessory 9200 is approximately colorless and transparent except for a part and has transparency, and the board (snowman board 9220) housed inside from the front. ) can be visually confirmed on the surface side.

As shown in FIGS. 242 and 243, the snowman substrate 9220 has the shape of the snowman accessory 9200, and has a very decorative shape. Further, the snowman substrate 9220 is coated with a resist colored in a predetermined color (specific color), similarly to the character accessory substrate 9120. Other than that, the structure of the board itself is the same as the character accessory board 9120, and various electronic components are mounted on the front side and the back side. Note that the same symbols as the character accessory 9100 are used for the electronic components on the board.

In this embodiment, the shape of the snowman board 9220 is such that it occupies the interior of the snowman accessory so that the back side of the snowman accessory 9200 cannot be viewed from the front. As a result, the entire snowman accessory 9200 is recognized as the specific color colored on the snowman substrate 9220, and the color of the entire accessory is determined. On the other hand, a notch or a hole may be formed in a part of the snowman substrate 9220 so that the back side of the snowman accessory 9200 can be visually recognized. At this time, an image may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 from behind the snowman accessory 9200, or decorations such as light emitters may be placed to increase the variety of effects.

Furthermore, the snowman accessory 9200 has a three-dimensional shape, and the player can see the side of the snowman accessory 9200 by simply tilting his/her line of sight slightly from the front. Since the cover member 9210 is transparent, the player can see beyond the sides of the snowman board 9220 to the back surface. In the character accessory 9100, which was configured so that the board could not be seen from the back side, it was not necessary to paint the back side of the board in a specific color, but in the snowman board 9220, the back side is also colored in a specific color. Thereby, even when the player approaches the liquid crystal display device 1600 and views the snowman accessory 9200 from the side, it is possible to prevent the decorative effect from decreasing. Thereby, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the shape of the accessory, and it is possible to improve the production effect and to improve the interest in the game.

Since the player can see beyond the sides of the snowman board 9220 to the back side, a light emitting body 9301 may be placed on the back side of the snowman board 9220 to cause the entire snowman accessory 9200 to emit light from the back side. . Furthermore, by coloring the back side of the snowman board 9220 in a different color from the front side, it is possible to give a different impression to the player than when only the light emitters 9301 on the front side emit light. Note that the same effect can be expected by arranging light emitting bodies 9301 of different luminescent colors while the snowman substrate 9220 has the same color. With this configuration, it is possible to diversify the lighting modes of the accessories and increase the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 239, the hat portion of the snowman accessory 9200 is provided with an opening, through which a cord for transmitting power and signals to the snowman board 9220 housed inside the snowman accessory 9200 is inserted. There is. Various effects are executed by causing a light emitting body (LED) 9301 arranged on the snowman board 9220 to emit light using the supplied power and signals from the effect control device.

Further, as described above, the hat portion of the snowman accessory 9200 is colored (for example, red) and has transparency. The transparency of the hat part is lower than that of other parts of the snowman accessory 9200, making it difficult to see the inside. Therefore, the connector 9304 arranged on the snowman board 9220, the cord connected to the connector 9304, etc. are arranged in the hat part to make it difficult for the player to see them.

The cover member 9210 (front side cover member 9210a) is formed with a transparent portion B9211b having a different degree of transparency at a portion corresponding to the eyes of a snowman when viewed from the front by the player. Note that the other transparent parts other than the hat part are referred to as transparent parts A9211a. In this embodiment, the transparent part B9211b is configured so that the interior of the snowman accessory 9200 can be viewed in a blurred state with aberrations remaining like a soft focus lens. Therefore, the outline of the electronic component placed on the snowman board 9220 housed inside the snowman accessory 9200 can be visually recognized in a blurred manner.

Further, as shown in FIG. 242, in this embodiment, electronic components (resistors 9302) are arranged in a concentrated manner on a snowman board 9220 corresponding to the eyes of the snowman accessory 9200. The resistor 9302 is a black electronic component and is arranged closely in a circle. When the player looks at the snowman accessory 9200 during the game, the outline of the electronic component appears blurred because it is visible through the transparent part B9211b. As a result, the electronic components (resistance 9302) that are aggregated and arranged on the board can be recognized as the black eyes of a snowman, and can constitute a decorative element.

In addition, the part numbers of electronic components (silk-printed part numbers such as "R1") are silk-printed in yellow, which is the same color as white, which is the same specific color as the resist on the snowman board 9220, so that they can be identified. There is. In this embodiment, like the resistor 9302, they are printed densely, so they can be identified, and because they are printed densely, they function as something that reflects light.

Note that in this embodiment, the part number of the electronic component (the silk-printed part number such as "R1") may also be silk-printed in black in the same way as the resistor. As described above, due to the effect of the lens, both the resistor 9302 and the resistor 9302 can be recognized as the eyes of a snowman.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 243, an electronic component (IC9303 etc.) are arranged. This makes it difficult for the player to see electronic components that have low decorative effects or that may reduce the decorative effect, so it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to a reduction in the presentation effect. . At this time, by directing the snowman board 9220 toward the center of the game machine, it is possible to make the electronic components arranged on the back side even more difficult to see.

Here, the configuration of the snowman accessory 9200 will be described with a focus on the cover member 9210 (front side cover member 9210a, rear side cover member 9210b). The front side cover member 9210a and the rear side cover member 9210b do not need to be divided equally in the front and back. For example, one side of the front side cover member 9210a may be formed to extend beyond the snowman board 9220 and face backward. good. Hereinafter, an example in which one side (inner side) of the front cover member 9210a is formed to face backward beyond the snowman board 9220 will be described with reference to FIG. 244.

FIG. 244 is a top view of a horizontal cross section of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 244, when the inner cover member 9210a of the front cover member 9210a is formed to extend backward beyond the side surface of the snowman board 9220, most of the external appearance of the snowman accessory 9200 is visible to the player. is constituted by the front side cover member 9210a. As a result, the attachment point of the front side cover member 9210a to the back side cover member 9210b (the joint between the front side cover member 9210a and the rear side cover member 9210b) is on the back side of the snowman board 9220, so it is highly decorative. It is possible to realize a role.

Further, since the colorless and transparent (or substantially colorless and transparent) front side cover member 9210a extends to the rear of the snowman board 9220, the snowman board 9220 colored white (specific color) is not only on the front side but also on the back side of the snowman accessory 9200. Decorate in white. Although it is desirable that both sides be white as in this embodiment, only the front side may be white since the player will mainly view the player from the front side.

In addition, although FIG. 244 shows a mode in which only the inner cover member of the front side cover member 9210a extends backward beyond the snowman board 9220, depending on the decoration of the ornament to be adopted, a mode in which only the outer cover member extends behind the board is shown. You may adopt the aspect which extends to the back of a board|substrate both inside and outside.

Furthermore, the structure for attaching each component of the accessory to each other and attaching the accessory to the game board will be explained. In the snowman accessory 9200 in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 244, the snowman board 9220 is attached by a board attachment part 9213 and an attachment member 9214 formed on the back cover member 9210b. At this time, it is preferable that the board attachment part 9213 be provided outside the snowman accessory 9200, which is difficult to see from the player. Further, the front side cover member 9210a is attached to the back side cover member 9210b by a cover attachment part (not shown), but like the board attachment part 9213, the cover attachment part is preferably provided on the outside of the snowman accessory 9200. Further, the back side cover member 9210b is attached to the structure of the game board 5 (not shown), and like the board attachment part 9213, it is preferable that the attachment part to the structure be provided on the outside of the snowman accessory 9200. In this way, by arranging the attachment parts of each component of the accessory and the attachment parts of the accessory and the game board 5 on the outside where it is difficult for the player to see them, it is possible to suppress the decorativeness of the accessory from being obstructed. Can be done.

In addition to the outside of the accessory, there are also areas that are difficult for the player to see (for example, parts made of colored parts (the hat part in the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment), a lens cut for decoration, etc.) that make visibility difficult. By providing an attachment part at a place where the shape of the accessory is lowered, a part where the accessory shape bends (in the case of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment, the boundary between the head and the body part), etc., the decorativeness can be improved depending on the attachment location. can be prevented from being damaged.

In the example shown in FIG. 244, the snowman accessory 9200 is configured by the front side cover member 9210a and the back side cover member 9210b, but as shown in FIG. 245, the snowman shape is formed using one cover member 9210. You can do it like this. FIG. 245 is a top view of a horizontal cross section of a snowman accessory 9200 in a modification of this embodiment.

In the modification shown in FIG. 245, a cover member 9210 and a snowman board 9220 are attached to the game board 5 via a base body 9230. In this modification, as well as the example shown in FIG. 244, it is preferable that both surfaces of the snowman substrate 9220 are white, but only the front side may be white.

In this modification, the inner cover member not only extends backward beyond the snowman board 9220 but also extends backward beyond the base body 9230, so that not only the snowman base board 9220 but also the base body 9230 can be It becomes visible from Therefore, in this modification, the base body 9230 can also be configured as a decoration by having the same specific color (for example, white) as the snowman substrate 9220. Regarding the attachment of the cover member 9210 and the snowman board 9220 to the base body 9230, as described above, by providing attachment portions in locations that are difficult for the player to see and attaching them with attachment members, etc., it is possible to attach them depending on the attachment location. Decorative properties can be prevented from being impaired.

In this modification, only the inner side of the cover member 9210 extends backward beyond the snowman board 9220 and the base body 9230, but depending on the ornamentation of the accessory to be adopted, the outer side of the cover member 9210 It is also possible to adopt a mode in which the cover extends only behind the substrate or the base body, or a mode in which it extends to the rear of the substrate or the base body both inside and outside.

[34-6. Effects, etc.]
Generally, electronic circuit boards have a basic size of raw board, and the cost is greatly influenced by how many boards can be made from one raw board based on this raw board. If you think about it very simply, it is designed to have a rectangular shape, but the snowman board 9220 of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment has a shape that is very rich in design. In other words, it can be said that all the elements that make up the board, from the resist and the color of the board to the electronic components, are used for the decorative performance of the accessory.

In addition, regarding the character accessory board 9120 of the character accessory explained earlier, it has a substantially rectangular shape. Compared to the snowman board 9220, it has a simple design, but it can be said that the cover body that covers the board has more functionality to give it a design.

As explained above, inside the accessories seen in recent years, not only the light emitting body (LED) but also the board on which the electronic circuit consisting of the electronic parts that control the light emitting body are formed, is almost shaped like the ornament. They are also equipped. In the first place, the substrate on which an electronic circuit is formed has wiring that electrically connects the electronic components that make up the electronic circuit, and a protective film ( covered with resist).

Therefore, we focused on the color of the resist, which is a protective film, or the color of the substrate, as a way to color the ornament. Even so, when a transparent part is provided on the front side, there is a risk that the electronic components mounted on the board will be visible from the transparent part and the decorative effect as an accessory will be reduced. As exemplified with the object 9100 and the snowman accessory 9200, by using the color of the board, all the elements constituting the board, and the mounted electronic components themselves as decorative elements, it is possible to prevent the reduction of the decorative effect and improve the game. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

A gaming machine is equipped with a plurality of boards on which electronic components are mounted. Among these, the main board, payout control board, etc. provided on the back side of the gaming machine are generally housed in a colorless and transparent case, making them easy to inspect and confirm. On the other hand, in a light-emitting decorative board that is used as a movable or non-movable decorative member mounted on a game board panel, the front surface facing the player is equipped with a lens that reflects and scatters light from the light-emitting decorative board. The player is provided with members and the like, and is attached to the game board panel on the rear side facing an effect display device attached to the game board panel. In addition, on the rear side of the light emitting decoration board, in order to realize the function of light emitting decoration, there are connectors, control elements, drivers, resistors, capacitors, etc. for connecting flat cables for receiving control signals from peripheral control means, etc. electronic components are mounted. When such gaming machines are installed in gaming parlors, it is difficult to confirm whether or not there is a problem with the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the light-emitting decorative board in the gaming machine after installation. . This is because the rear surface of the light-emitting decorative substrate is in a state opposite to the surface forming the display area of the effect display device. Therefore, means for solving such problems will be described below.

FIG. 246 is a diagram showing the entire game board 5 in this embodiment. The game board 5 includes a game panel 1100 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin and a game board-side performance display device 1600. Furthermore, the game panel 1100 includes a game area 5a, a rail member 5950, and a game panel opening 1100a. The game panel opening 1100a is formed by punching out a physical opening in the game panel 1100. A space is formed between the game board side performance display device 1600 and the game panel 1100 on the front side, and a plurality of accessory objects are arranged in layers in this space. Specifically, from the front side, at a position close to the back of the game panel 1100, there are a grass accessory behind the board 6800, a first giant tree accessory 6600, a second giant tree accessory 6650, a first cloud accessory 6700, and a second A cloud accessory 6750 is provided. The first giant tree ornament 6600 is composed of a first giant tree trunk board 6610 and a first giant tree leaf board 6630, and the second giant tree ornament 6650 is composed of a second giant tree trunk board 6660 and a second giant leaf board 6680. There is. Further, a first grass accessory 6470 and a second grass accessory 6475 are provided behind these, a rabbit accessory 6000 is provided behind these, a mountain accessory 6500 is provided behind these, and a mountain accessory is provided. A game board side performance display device 1600 is provided behind the game board 6500. By arranging multiple accessories in layers in this way, a sense of depth can be created.

FIG. 247(A) is a front view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. 247(B) is a perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. 247(C) is an exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. The rabbit accessory 6000 is configured as a unit by a face cover part 6010 on the front side, a face board 6020 provided behind the face cover part 6010, and a body part 6030. The face substrate 6020 has a first face light emitting part 6023a and a second face light emitting part 6023b as a face light emitting part 6023 on the front surface. Further, the face substrate 6020 has a mouth decoration part 6024 shaped like a rabbit's mouth. Attached to the vertical bottom surface of the face cover section 6010 are a first arm section 6016 and a second arm section 6017 made of white opaque synthetic resin and imitating the left and right front legs of a rabbit. Further, at the lower end of the face substrate 6020, there is provided a body part 6030, which is a plate-shaped member made of white opaque synthetic resin and imitates the body part of a rabbit.

FIG. 248(A) is a front view of the face substrate 6020. FIG. 248(B) is a rear view of the face substrate 6020. The face substrate 6020 is a plate-shaped member made of a printed circuit board, and the front and rear surfaces of the face substrate 6020 are entirely covered with a white protective film to protect the electric circuit provided on the surface. . Further, on the front side of the face substrate 6020, an LED forming a first face light emitting section 6023a and an LED forming a second face light emitting section 6023b are provided, and on the rear side of the face substrate 6020, a control element 6025, a driver 6026, a first A resistor 6027a to a sixth resistor 6027f, a first capacitor 6028a, a second capacitor 6028b, and a connector 6029 are surface mounted.

As shown in FIG. 248(A), the face substrate 6020 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and two rectangular parts as a first ear part 6021 and a second ear part 6022 extend upward on the upper side of the rectangle. It has a shape. The horizontally long rectangular portion imitates the face of a rabbit, and the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 imitate the ears of a rabbit. When the face cover section 6010 is attached to the face substrate 6020, the first ear section 6021 and the second ear section 6022 are not covered by the face cover section 6010, and the face substrate 6020 is exposed.

The first ear part 6021 and the second ear part 6022 each have a first ear decoration part 6021a and a second ear decoration part 6022a that imitate the inside of a rabbit's ear. The first ear decoration part 6021a and the second ear decoration part 6022a are formed by printing brown ink on the white protective film on the front surface of the face substrate 6020, and are brown and visible areas. ing. In addition, in the first ear part 6021 and the second ear part 6022, areas other than the first ear decoration part 6021a and the second ear decoration part 6022a are covered with the above-mentioned white protective film. Further, electronic components such as the control element 6025 are not mounted on the front and rear surfaces of the first ear part 6021 and the second ear part 6022, and the printed circuit board is used only for decoration. .

The face substrate 6020 is provided with a first face light emitting section 6023a and a second face light emitting section 6023b. Specifically, the first face light emitting section 6023a and the second face light emitting section 6023b are each configured with an LED mounted on the front surface of the face substrate 6020. The first face light emitting section 6023a and the second face light emitting section 6023b can emit light under control by the peripheral control board 1510, but details will be described later.

A mouth decoration part 6024 is provided on the face substrate 6020. Specifically, the mouth decoration part 6024 is formed by printing pink ink on the white protective film on the front surface of the face substrate 6020, and the shape resembling a rabbit's mouth is visible in pink. It becomes. The front surface of the face substrate 6020 is configured so that the first ear decoration part 6021a and the second ear decoration part 6022a are brown, the mouth decoration part 6024 is pink, and the other areas are white and can be visually recognized.

FIG. 248(B) is a diagram showing the rear side of the face substrate 6020. As described above, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is also entirely covered with a white protective film for protecting the circuits, similar to the front surface of the face substrate 6020. On the upper left and right sides of the rear surface of the face board 6020, a first face light emitting part 6023a and a second face light emitting part 6023b are provided at positions corresponding to the first face light emitting part 6023a and the second face light emitting part 6023b provided on the front side. A dotted line indicating the mounting location and character strings ``LED1'' and ``LED2'' indicating the names of the mounted components are respectively formed by printing with black ink on the white protective film. . Further, a driver 6026 is surface-mounted between the character strings “LED1” and “LED2”. Further, below the driver 6026, a character string "DR1" is formed by printing with black ink on a white protective film.

A capacitor 6028 (a first capacitor 6028a and a second capacitor 6028b) is surface-mounted between the dotted line showing the mounting location of the first face light emitting section 6023a and the dotted line showing the mounting location of the second face light emitting section 6023b. Further, character strings "C1" and "C2" are formed by printing with black ink on the white protective film, corresponding to the first capacitor 6028a and the second capacitor 6028b.

A resistor 6027 (first resistor 6027a to sixth resistor 6027f) is surface mounted on the lower left side of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020. Furthermore, character strings "R1" to "R6" are formed by printing with black ink on the white protective film, corresponding to the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f.

A control element 6025 consisting of a microcomputer is surface mounted on the right side of the region where the resistor 6027 is mounted. Further, corresponding to the control element 6025, a character string "IC1" is formed by printing with black ink on the white protective film. The control element 6025 drives the driver 6026 based on the control signal from the peripheral control board 1510, and controls the lighting of the LEDs forming the first face light emitting section 6023a and the LEDs forming the second face light emitting section 6023b.

A connector 6029 is surface mounted on the lower right side of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020. Further, corresponding to the connector 6029, a character string "CN1" is formed by printing with black ink on the white protective film. A control signal from peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to control element 6025 via connector 6029, and power from power supply board 931 is supplied to face board 6020. Power supplied to the face substrate 6020 via the connector 6029 is supplied to the control element 6025, the driver 6026, the LEDs forming the first face light emitting section 6023a and the second face light emitting section 6023b, and the like.

The control element 6025, driver 6026, resistor 6027, capacitor 6028, and connector 6029 each have a black main body and a metal terminal. Further, metal terminal portions of the control element 6025, driver 6026, resistor 6027, capacitor 6028, and connector 6029 are surface mounted on the face substrate 6020 with solder. In FIG. 248(B), the main bodies of these electronic components are shown in black, and the metal terminals and solder included in these electronic components are shown in white.

FIG. 249 is a perspective view of the face cover section 6010. The face cover part 6010 has a box-like shape with an open rear end, and is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The face cover part 6010 includes a face cover part front part 6011 which constitutes the front surface, a face cover part upper part 6012 which constitutes the upper surface, a face cover part right part 6013 which constitutes the right surface, and a face cover part which constitutes the lower surface. It is composed of a lower surface portion 6014 and a face cover portion left surface portion 6015 that constitutes the left surface.

As shown in FIGS. 247 to 249, on the front side of the face cover part front part 6011 constituting the front side surface of the face cover part 6010, a first face light scattering part 6011a imitating a rabbit's eye and a second face light scattering part 6011a, A face light scattering section 6011b is provided. The first facial light scattering section 6011a is provided at a position overlapping the first facial light emitting section 6023a provided on the front surface of the facial substrate 6020 when viewed from the front. Further, the second facial light scattering section 6011b is provided at a position overlapping the second facial light emitting section 6023b provided on the front surface of the facial substrate 6020 when viewed from the front. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 247(A), the first face light-scattering part 6011a and the second face light-scattering part 6011b are lower in front view than the first face light-emitting part 6023a and the second face light-emitting part 6023b, respectively. The outer shapes of the first face light emitting part 6023a and the second face light emitting part 6023b when viewed from the front are respectively surrounded by the first face light scattering part 6011a and the second face light scattering part 6011b. It is configured as follows.

The first face light scattering part 6011a and the second face light scattering part 6011b are formed by forming a fine lens cut on the front side of the face cover part front part 6011 or by applying processing to make it satin-like. It is formed of a rough surface that can diffusely reflect the light emitted from the portion 6023a and the second face light emitting portion 6023b when the light is incident thereon. The face cover section front section 6011 has portions other than the first face light scattering section 6011a and the second face light scattering section 6011b that absorb incident light, such as the first face light scattering section 6011a and the second face light scattering section 6011b. A structure that diffusely reflects the light is not provided, and the face substrate 6020 located at the rear is configured to be directly visible from the front. The rectangular part of the face substrate 6020 excluding the first ear part 6021 and the second ear part 6022 and the rectangular part of the face cover part 6010 have the same vertical and horizontal flow and exactly overlap in front view. located at the location. The face board 6020 is screwed from the rear into screw holes provided in the face cover upper surface 6012, the face cover right surface 6013, the face cover lower surface 6014, the face cover left surface 6015, etc. It is attached with.

The rear surface of the face cover section front section 6011 and the face light emitting section 6023 are provided with a predetermined interval (about 1-2 mm) therebetween. With this configuration, it becomes easy to dissipate the heat generated in the face light emitting section 6023, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the face light emitting section 6023 breaks down due to the heat generated by itself. Become. In addition, in other examples, such a configuration may be adopted in the relationship between the light emitting section and a member such as a cover provided corresponding to the light emitting section.

In this way, the rabbit accessory 6000 includes a face board 6020, a face cover part 6010 that covers the front of the face board 6020, and a body part 6030 provided at the lower end of the face board 6020. On the front side of the face substrate 6020, LEDs functioning as a first face light emitting part 6023a and a second face light emitting part 6023b are surface mounted, and each face cover part constitutes the front side of a face cover part 6010 that covers the front. It is configured to irradiate light onto a first facial light scattering section 6011a and a second facial light scattering section 6011b provided on the front section 6011. Furthermore, electronic components such as a control element 6025, a driver 6026, a resistor 6027, a capacitor 6028, and a connector 6029 are surface-mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020.

A flat cable (not shown) is connected to the connector 6029 , and receives a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 for driving the LEDs forming the face light emitting section 6023 mounted on the front surface of the face board 6020 . Furthermore, power for driving each electronic component mounted on the face substrate 6020 is supplied from the flat cable. The control element 6025 controls the driver 6026 based on the control signal received from the peripheral control board 1510 to control the light emission mode of the LED forming the face light emitting section 6023.

The LEDs constituting the face light emitting section 6023 are formed by enclosing three LED chips, an LED chip capable of emitting red light, an LED chip capable of emitting green light, and an LED chip capable of emitting blue light, in a colorless transparent resin. . Furthermore, the LEDs constituting the face light emitting section 6023 are provided with three metal terminals serving as anodes and three metal terminals serving as cathodes of each LED chip. Further, by allowing current to flow from the driver 6026 to the anode of each LED chip, each LED chip can be brought into a state where it emits light. Specifically, by controlling the current flowing through each LED chip using the driver 6026, it is possible to emit red, green, and blue light independently.

Furthermore, a resistor 6027 is provided between the circuits connecting the driver 6026 and the anode of each LED chip as a limiting resistor for adjusting the current flowing through the LED chip. Specifically, a first resistor 6027a to a third resistor 6027c are connected between the circuits connecting the anodes of each LED chip included in the LED that constitutes the driver 2026 and the face light emitting section 6023a, respectively, forming the driver 2026 and the face light emitting section 6023b. A fourth resistor 6027d to a sixth resistor 6027f are provided between circuits connecting the anodes of each LED chip included in the LED. In this way, by providing the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f corresponding to the anode of each LED chip, the current flowing through each LED chip can be adjusted, and if a short circuit occurs inside the LED, the circuit can be overloaded. Prevents current from flowing.

Further, the first capacitor 6028a is connected to the power supply terminal of the control element 6025, and the second capacitor 6028b is connected in parallel to the power supply terminal of the driver 6026 in terms of an electric circuit. It has a function that allows it to operate.

The rabbit accessory 6000 is controlled to be moved by a drive mechanism (not shown) between a standby position on the lower front side of the game board side performance display device 1600 and a moving position near the front side center of the game board side performance display device 1600. It is possible to do so. Note that this drive mechanism is also controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. The game is configured such that predetermined game content is notified to the player by the movement mode and light emission mode of the rabbit accessory 6000. For example, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved from the standby position to the moving position, and the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the moving position, the first face light emitting part 6023a and the second face light emitting part 6023b mounted on the face substrate 6020 are By lighting up in red and causing the first face light scattering part 6011a and the second face light scattering part 6011b to be lit in red, the changing decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot. It may be configured to suggest that the level of expectation is higher than usual. In addition, in other embodiments, examples are shown in which a part of the accessory or a part of the member constituting the accessory is moved, or a light emitting part included in the accessory is controlled in a predetermined light emission mode. It is also possible to employ a configuration in which the effect is made to function as an effect, and the effect suggests that the degree of expectation that the changing decorative pattern will stop and be displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot is higher than usual.

As described above, there is a possibility that a problem may occur in the light emitting function of the light emitting decorative substrate (face substrate 6020) included in such a decorative member (rabbit ornament 6000). For example, in the process of performing surface mounting on the printed circuit board that constitutes the face board 6020, the amount of solder on the solder surface was insufficient, and electrical connections between the circuits on the printed circuit board and the electronic components to be mounted could not be properly established. There is a risk that other members, tools, etc. may come into contact with the electronic components mounted on the back side of the printed circuit board during assembly at the factory, causing the mounted electronic components to come off. Further, there is a risk that electronic components may malfunction due to deterioration over time after the gaming machine is installed in a gaming parlor.

For example, in an LED that functions as a face light emitting section 6023 that can emit full color light by emitting light in three colors red, blue, and green in multiple gradations using a driver 6026, one of the six metal terminals is electrically connected. When the connection is lost, even though one of the three colors is intended to be emitted for control purposes, in reality only two colors are emitted, and only one color is emitted. In this case, a non-emission state will occur. Such a state may occur when the LED chip fails and current stops flowing, or when the resistor 6027 functioning as a limiting resistor is missing from the face board 6020 and the circuit becomes disconnected. .
Such a situation may give the impression that the movable decorative member looks bad to the player playing the game. In particular, when controlling a plurality of LEDs to emit light in the same color, there is a possibility that only the defective LED may emit light in a different color. Furthermore, there is a risk that the player may be misled regarding the level of expectation of a jackpot.

In addition, the flat cable connected to the connector 6029 provided on the face board 6020 is bent many times due to repeated movements of the rabbit accessory 6000 as a movable decorative member, and the strength of the flat cable at a predetermined location is deteriorated. It is also conceivable that a situation may occur in which the flat cable becomes disconnected and signals are not transmitted or power is not properly supplied to the rabbit accessory 6000. Alternatively, it is possible that a situation may occur in which the connector 6029 is damaged due to repeated stress being applied to a portion of the connector 6029 due to repeated movements of the rabbit accessory 6000. In this case, an unintended control signal is sent to the rabbit accessory 6000, and an unintended lighting pattern is displayed to the player, or power supply is completely stopped. In this case, the face light-emitting part 6023 of the rabbit accessory 6000 will not take the lighting mode, but will move from the standby position to the movement position in the unlit state, or from the movement position to the standby position, and as a performance. There is a risk that the appearance of the product may deteriorate.

Therefore, in the present invention, when the game machine is in a power-off state, the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is black and visible, and the rear surface of the face board 6020 located in the front is reflected on its surface. It is designed so that it is reflected in the image. Specifically, it is preferable that the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is configured to mirror-reflect incident light. Alternatively, a colorless and transparent reflective plate (reflective sheet) is installed close to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 so as to cover the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The reflector may be configured to specularly reflect the incident light. With such a configuration, if there is any abnormality in the face board 6020 of the rabbit accessory 6000 located in front of the game board side performance display device 1600, the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 located at the rear By visually checking, you can confirm the nature of the abnormality. Alternatively, it is possible to check whether an abnormality has occurred.

FIG. 250(A) is a perspective view showing the rabbit accessory 6000 in a standby position. In FIG. 250(A), the rabbit accessory 6000 is provided on the game machine so that the electronic components mounted on the face board 6020 included in the rabbit accessory 6000 are reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. An example is shown.

In this example, a rabbit accessory 6000 is arranged on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and a face board 6020 provided on the front surface forming the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the rabbit accessory 6000 is arranged. It is configured such that it is located a predetermined distance (specifically, about several cm) from the back surface. In the example shown in FIG. 250(A), a part of the driver 6026, the first resistor 6027a, and the entire second resistor 6027b mounted on the rear surface of the face board 6020 are the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It shows that the image is reflected in the image.

Note that although FIG. 250(A) shows the rabbit accessory 6000 viewed diagonally from the upper right, it is also possible to view the mounting manner of other electronic components by looking into it from other angles. For example, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is viewed from above at the center in the left-right direction, it is also possible to view the entire driver 6026, the entire first capacitor 6028a, and the entire second capacitor 6028b. Alternatively, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is viewed diagonally from the upper left, it is also possible to view the entire connector 6029 and the flat cable connected to the connector 6029. Note that in this example, it is difficult to confirm the mounting manner of the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f, but this point will be described later.

FIG. 250(B) is a perspective view showing the rabbit accessory 6000 in a standby position. In FIG. 250(B), the rabbit accessory 6000 is installed in the game machine so that the electronic components mounted on the face board 6020 included in the rabbit accessory 6000 are reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. An example is shown below. In this example, electronic components such as the control element 6025 and the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face board 6020 are difficult to see, and the entire driver 6026 and the first capacitor 6028a are difficult to see. It is possible to confirm the mounting mode of only a portion of the capacitor 6028b and a portion of the second capacitor 6028b. Note that a method for visually recognizing the electronic components mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 will be described later.

In this way, in the game machine in the power-off state, the back surface of the face board 6020 of the rabbit accessory 6000 serving as a decoration means is configured to be reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. It becomes possible to check the status of the electronic components mounted on the back side of the face board 6020 even after the gaming machine is installed at the gaming parlor. In addition, since the rear surface of the face board 6020 is covered with a white protective film and is visible in white, the face board 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is visible in black, is visible. It is easily structured.

Although an example has been shown in which the entire surface and rear surface of the face substrate 6020 are covered with a white protective film, the circuits on the face substrate 6020 may be covered with a light-colored protective film such as cream color. You can. This is because when a light-colored protective film is used, compared to when a dark-colored protective film is used, the difference in brightness and darkness in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, which is black, is more obvious. This is because the face board 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 becomes easier to see.

The process of coloring the face board 6020 involves creating a circuit structure with copper plating on the printed circuit board, then applying a white protective agent to protect the wiring structure, and adding color to the areas where through-holes are provided. It is desirable to form a white protective film by coating the entire surface of the printed circuit board with this protective agent, except for the surface of the face substrate 6020, so that the entire surface of the face substrate 6020 becomes white. When a protective agent other than white is used as a protective agent for protecting the wiring structure, white ink is applied on the non-white protective agent so that the surface of the face substrate 6020 becomes white. You may. Alternatively, by combining these aspects, a white protective agent is applied to form a protective film, and then white ink is applied on the white protective film, so that the surface of the face substrate 6020 becomes whiter. It may be configured as follows. By forming the face substrate 6020 in this manner, it becomes possible to make the face substrate 6020 visible in white. Note that a similar method can be adopted when it is desired to make the board visible not only in white but also in other colors such as black and green. Note that in other examples, such a configuration may be adopted when the substrate is of a specific color.
Although an example is shown in which both sides of the face substrate 6020 are entirely white, only a part of the area of the face substrate 6020 may be white. For example, only the entire rear surface of the face substrate 6020 may be white, or the face substrate 6020 may be white. Only a predetermined area on the rear surface where electronic components are mounted may be made white. Note that the rear of the face board 6020 is covered with a thin plate-like cover, and the cover is configured to have a punched-out opening so that the electronic component whose mounting state is to be checked can be seen. In addition, the configuration may be such that the rear surface of the face board 6020 and a specific electronic component whose implementation is desired to be confirmed can be reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. If such a cover is colorless and transparent, light will be diffusely reflected on the cover surface, reducing the visibility of electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020. Furthermore, if a colored and opaque cover is used as such, the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 will be hidden by the cover, making it extremely difficult to confirm the mounting state. . Therefore, it is preferable to provide a punch-shaped opening so that at least a portion of the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 can be visually recognized. With this configuration, the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face board 6020 are protected by the cover, and the mounting state of the electronic components whose mounting state should be checked can be checked through the opening provided in the cover. can. In addition, by providing such an opening, it is possible to release the heat generated from the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 to the outside, thereby preventing the mounted electronic components from being damaged or deteriorating due to heat. It becomes possible to prevent the occurrence. Note that it is preferable to configure the electronic component so that it does not protrude rearward from the surface forming the back surface of the cover and do not jump out from the opening. Further, the color of the cover may be opaque black or dark opaque. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to visually recognize the white face substrate 6020 exposed from the cover.

It is desirable that the color of the electronic components mounted on the face substrate 6020 has a difference in brightness from the color of the protective film covering the face substrate 6020. Specifically, the color of the face substrate 6020 may be a light color such as white or cream color, and the color of the electronic components mounted on the face substrate 6020 may be a dark color such as black or navy blue. With such a configuration, the face board 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 becomes easier to see compared to the black display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, since the face board 6020 is bright in color and the mounted electronic components are in a dark color, the face board 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is not mounted on the face board 6020 and the face board 6020. This makes it possible to distinguish and visually recognize other electronic components.

Note that the LED capable of emitting multicolor light is made of a white member to increase reflectance. In this case, if the color of the face substrate 6020 is white or bright, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the mounting manner of the LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020. In this way, when the electronic component to be mounted is white, the color of the face substrate 6020 may be black or dark. In this case, although the face board 6020 reflected on the game board side effect display device 1600 becomes difficult to see, the LEDs mounted on the face board 6020 become easy to see. Alternatively, the electronic component may be mounted on a white or light-colored face substrate by applying black or dark ink to the mounted electronic component or the electronic component before being mounted.

In this specification, white refers to a color that becomes visible when an object uniformly (approximately 100 to 80%) diffusely reflects visible light of all wavelengths of incident natural light. Furthermore, a bright color refers to a color that absorbs a certain wavelength range to some extent and diffusely reflects the remaining wavelength range, thereby making it visible as cream color or light gray, for example. On the other hand, black refers to the color that becomes visible when an object uniformly absorbs most of the visible light of all wavelengths of incident natural light and reflects a part (about 20 to several percent) diffusely. There is. Also, dark color means that although most of the visible light of all wavelengths is uniformly absorbed and only a portion (approximately 20 to several percent) is diffusely reflected, the absorption rate of light differs in a specific wavelength region, so it becomes black. It refers to a similar color, for example, a color that can be visually recognized as dark blue.

The rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIGS. 250(A) and 250(B) may be configured to be able to be moved by hand from a standby position to an upward movement position. In this case, the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is not rendered immovable by the lock mechanism when the power is cut off, and the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100 is not provided with a so-called light guide plate. It is configured as follows.

As a configuration for enabling the rabbit accessory 6000 to be moved manually, first, the immovable state will be described. In general, if the movable decorative body is configured to be able to move freely between the moving position and the standby position, if large acceleration is applied to the movable decorative body when transporting the game machine or installing it at a game parlor, etc. Moreover, the movable decorative body may be damaged. Therefore, we have provided a mechanism that locks the movable decoration when it is in the standby position while the power is on, and when the power is turned off while the movable decoration is locked, the movable decoration A method of making the body immobile is being considered. However, when such a locking mechanism is provided, it becomes difficult to move the rabbit ornament 6000 as a movable ornament by hand. Therefore, by configuring the rabbit accessory 6000 without such a locking mechanism, it becomes possible to move the rabbit accessory 6000 by hand.

Next, a light guide plate will be described as a configuration for enabling the rabbit accessory 6000 to be moved manually. The light guide plate is a plate-shaped decorative member that diffusely reflects light incident from the side in a predetermined pattern provided on the surface, thereby allowing the player to see how the predetermined pattern is shining. Further, such a light emitting pattern is configured to be visible to the player as a predetermined effect. However, if such a light guide plate is provided in the game panel opening 1100a of the game panel 1100, it becomes difficult or impossible to move the rabbit accessory 6000 as a movable decoration by hand. Therefore, by configuring the game panel opening 1100a so that such a light guide plate is not provided, it becomes possible to move the rabbit accessory 6000 by hand.

With such a configuration, in the event of a power outage, the store clerk can directly move the rabbit accessory 6000 by hand through the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100, and the face board It becomes possible to reflect different areas on the rear surface of the game board 6020 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 250(A), after moving the rabbit accessory 6000 upward by hand, the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600 is visually checked so as to look into the rabbit accessory 6000 from below. This makes it easy to confirm the mounting aspects of the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f, which were previously difficult to visually recognize. In the example shown in FIG. 250(B), by moving the rabbit accessory 6000 upward by hand, the control element 6025 mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020, which had been invisible until then, It becomes possible to visually check electronic components such as the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f.

Although an example is shown in which no light guide plate is provided in the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100, when a light guide plate is provided in the game panel opening 1100a, it is necessary to cover the entire game panel opening 1100a with the light guide plate. Instead, it is preferable to configure it so that only a part of the game panel opening 1100a is covered. Specifically, when the standby position of the rabbit accessory 6000 is at the lower front of the game board side performance display device 1600, and the moving position of the rabbit accessory 6000 is at the center front of the game board side performance display device 1600, the guide It is preferable to arrange the light plate so that only the upper half of the game panel opening 1100a is covered. In this way, even if a light guide plate is provided, a part of the game panel opening 1100a is not covered by the light guide plate, so the function of producing the production effect of the light guide plate and the rabbit accessory are By manually moving the face board 6000, it is possible to change the area where the face board 6020 is reflected on the game board effect display device 1600.

Although we have shown an example in which the reflected area of the face board 6020 is changed by directly moving the rabbit accessory 6000 with the hand, it is difficult to insert the hand into the area of the game panel opening 1100a that is not covered by the light guide plate. The light plate may be made larger, and in this case, the rabbit object may be moved by an object smaller than a hand. For example, the rabbit accessory 6000 can be moved by inserting a rod-like member with a diameter of about 5 mm or a thin plate-like member with a width of about 1 cm and a thickness of about 1 mm into the area of the game panel opening 1100a that is not covered by the light guide plate. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the area of the game panel opening 1100a that is not covered by the light guide plate may be set to a size that allows insertion of such a rod-shaped member or plate-shaped member. It is sufficient if an opening of about .0 cm and length of about 1.0 cm is provided. With such a configuration, the area of the game panel opening 1100a covered by the light guide plate can be increased, and the area where effects using the light guide plate can be expanded can be expanded.

If the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is not equipped with a locking mechanism that makes it immovable in the event of a power outage, and if the game panel opening 1100a is not provided with a light guide plate, the store clerk may manually or Although we have shown an example in which the rabbit accessory 6000 can be directly moved by the member, there may be cases where the accessory in the standby position cannot be moved due to the lock mechanism during a power outage, or if the game panel opening 1100a is completely covered. In the case where a light guide plate is provided as shown in FIG. I can't. Such a problem is a big problem in an example where the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the face board 6020 are not reflected at all or hardly in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 when the rabbit role model is in the standby position. becomes.

Therefore, in such an example, by turning off the power switch installed on the gaming machine during the initial check of the movable decorative body that is performed when the power is turned on, the controller and drive unit of the gaming machine can be turned off. If a situation is forcibly created in which power is not supplied to It is best to configure it so that it stops at a position that is slightly moved by its own weight from the position where it is turned off. A specific example is shown below.

During the initial check, the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is first unlocked by the locking mechanism and changes from an immovable state to a movable state, and then the rabbit accessory 6000 starts moving to the upper movement position. do. After the rabbit accessory 6000 completes its movement to the upper moving position, it stays at the moving position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds), and then starts moving to the lower waiting position, and then the rabbit accessory 6000 waits. It stops at that position and changes from a movable state to a non-movable state by the lock mechanism, and the initial check is completed. When a game is started and the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved as a performance in response to a starting prize, etc., the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position first changes from an immovable state to a movable state, and then the rabbit accessory 6000 moves. After performing control to move the rabbit accessory 6000 in a predetermined movement manner between the standby position and the movement position, control is performed to move the rabbit accessory 6000 to the standby position, and then the rabbit accessory 6000 is changed from the unlocked state to the locked state. shall be.

In a game machine having such a configuration, by intentionally causing a power outage state, the rabbit accessory 6000 can be mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit accessory 6000 without the clerk directly moving the rabbit accessory 6000 by hand. It becomes possible to make electronic components reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, since the rabbit accessory 6000 is configured to stay at the moving position for a predetermined time during the initial check, the rabbit accessory 6000 can be forcibly turned off at the timing when the rabbit accessory 6000 remains at the moving position. The gaming machine can be stopped at the moving position as it is, and the timing for turning off the power switch provided on the gaming machine to bring it into a power-off state is not critical. Further, since it is possible to stop the rabbit accessory 6000 at a predetermined position, it is possible to pattern the confirmation operation of the face board 6020.

In addition, in the initial check, in addition to staying at the movement position for a predetermined time, when moving from the standby position to the movement position, it is necessary to The rabbit accessory 6000 is configured to stay at a predetermined position (about 2 seconds) and then move to a moving position, and when it is at the predetermined position, the power switch provided on the gaming machine is turned off to create a power-off state. In this case, the rabbit accessory 6000 may be configured to remain in a predetermined position. With this configuration, it is possible to easily stop the rabbit accessory 6000 at different positions, and it is possible to visually recognize the electronic components reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 from different angles. becomes. Further, since it is possible to stop the rabbit accessory 6000 at a predetermined position, it is possible to pattern the confirmation operation of the face board 6020.

At the time of the initial check, an example was shown in which the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved to a moving position or remains at a predetermined position for a predetermined period of time. The first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b provided in the face may be configured to light up in a predetermined manner. Alternatively, at the start of the initial check, the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position and is configured to light up the first face light emitting part 6023a and the second face light emitting part 6023b in a predetermined manner before starting to move to the movement position. You may. For example, as a light emission mode, it is preferable to light up the first face light emitting part 6023a and the second face light emitting part 6023b in the same color. Further, the emitted light color at this time is preferably white. With this configuration, the store clerk can check whether there is any abnormality in the light emitting mode of the first face light emitting section 6023a or the second face light emitting section 6023b, and if there is any abnormality in the light emitting mode, It is possible to check what kind of abnormality has occurred by visually checking the back side of the face board 6020 while the gaming machine in which the accessory 6000 is in a predetermined position or a moving position is in a power-off state. Further, when a player complains about the lighting pattern, it becomes possible to quickly identify the cause of the abnormality.

Although an example has been shown in which the first face light emitting section 6023a and the second face light emitting section 6023b are lit in the same color, it is preferable to provide three or more face light emitting sections 6023 and configure each to emit light in the same color. Further, it is preferable that the emitted light color at this time includes at least white. In such a configuration, if one of the resistors provided corresponding to the plurality of face light emitting parts 6023 is missing, one face light emitting part 6023 will be different from the other plurality of face light emitting parts 6023. Emit light in different colors (for example, if a resistor connected in series with an LED chip that can emit green light is missing, the LED can only emit blue and red light, and it is a mixture of those colors. (The manner in which the light is emitted in reddish-purple color becomes visible.) Therefore, it becomes possible to easily identify the facial light-emitting part that has a problem based on the color of the emitted light.

When a power-off state is forcibly caused, the rabbit accessory 6000 is not in the standby position. When the power is turned on in such a state, it is preferable to move the rabbit accessory 6000 to the standby position and then control the rabbit accessory 6000 to start the initial operation check from the beginning again. With such a configuration, it is possible to stop the rabbit accessory 6000 at an appropriate position where the back surface of the face substrate 6020 is easily visible.

Various embodiments can be considered regarding the aspect of the rabbit accessory 6000 itself, the movement manner of the rabbit accessory 6000, and the positional relationship between the rabbit accessory 6000 and the game board side effect display device 1600. A plurality of examples will be shown below.

FIG. 251 shows an example of a rabbit accessory 6000. In this embodiment, the area of the face board 6020 reflected on the game board side performance display device 1600 changes as the rabbit accessory moves from the lower standby position to the upper movement position. In this example, the rabbit accessory 6000 is configured by the face cover part 6010 and the face board 6020, and is movable between the standby position and the movement position, but the body part 6030 is not connected to the game panel. It is configured not to move relative to 1100. FIG. 251(A) shows a state where the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, and in this state, only the upper half of the back surface of the face board 6020 is reflected on the game board side effect display device 1600. . Further, regarding the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f, since the body portion 6030 is located immediately behind these electronic components, they are not reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. FIG. 251(B) shows a state in which the rabbit accessory 6000 is in a moving position, and in this state, almost the entire back surface of the face board is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is.

In addition, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, the rabbit accessory 6000 may be configured to slowly rotate around the front-rear direction by a drive mechanism (not shown). Alternatively, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, the rabbit accessory 6000 may be configured to be manually rotated around the front-rear direction. With this configuration, it is extremely easy to visually recognize the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f, which would normally be located below the face substrate 6020 and difficult to confirm the mounting state. Become.

FIG. 252 shows an example of the rabbit accessory 6000. In this embodiment, a first ear portion 6021 and a second ear portion 6022 are separately provided on a face substrate 6020 constituting a rabbit accessory 6000. The first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 have a vertically long rectangular shape. When the rabbit accessory 6000 is in operation, the face cover part 6010 and the face substrate 6020 do not move, and the first ear part 6021 and the second ear part 6022 move to the upper movement position to perform a predetermined effect. I will do it.

FIG. 252(A) shows a state in which the first ear part 6021 and the second ear part 6022 are in the standby position. Only a portion of the electronic component mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 while being hidden by the second ear portion 6022 is visible. FIG. 252(B) shows a state in which the first ear part 6021 and the second ear part 6022 are in the moving position. The entire area is reflected. In this way, by moving the member between the member whose mounting state of the electronic component is desired to be confirmed and the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the visual recognition state of the member whose mounting state of the electronic component is desired to be confirmed can be changed. becomes possible. Note that in other embodiments, aspects regarding the rabbit accessory 6000 have been described, but these aspects may be applied to the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 in the example shown in FIG. 252.

FIG. 253 shows an example of the rabbit accessory 6000. In this embodiment, the body portion 6030 of the rabbit accessory 6000 is configured to be vertically long. When the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the rabbit accessory 6000 are configured to be invisible due to the body portion 6030, and when the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the moving position, the body portion 6030 The rabbit accessory 6000 will be located above the rabbit accessory 6030. In this state, the game board side performance display device 1600 is configured so that almost the entire back surface of the face board 6020 is reflected.

In the embodiments described so far, the area of the face cover part 6010 of the rabbit accessory 6000 does not change, but when it is moved to the movement position, the member corresponding to the face cover part 6010 is made of an opaque member. At the same time, in the case of a movable decorative member whose area when viewed from the front increases when it is expanded in a horizontal direction with respect to the game panel 1100, the area when viewed from the front increases, so that the area of the game board side performance display device 1600 increases. A situation may occur in which it becomes difficult to visually recognize the reflection of the substrate in the display area. Therefore, when such a movable decorative member is employed, it may be configured such that the area in front view can be manually reduced in a state where the power is forcibly cut off during the initial check. Alternatively, in order to prevent the area seen from the front from increasing when the area is moved to the movement position during the initial check, the state before the area when viewed from the front increases is maintained for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 2 seconds). Later, it may be configured to have a larger area when viewed from the front. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to check the reflection of the face board 6020 in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 when the power is cut off.

An example is shown in which the rear surface of the face board 6020 is reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. On the other hand, it is undesirable for the player to see the rear surface of the face board 6020 reflected in the reflection. For example, when an effect is executed in which almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is darkened as an effect indicating that the expectation of a jackpot is high, an electronic device mounted on the rear surface of the face board 6020 by the player The parts will be visible, and there is a risk that the players will become disinterested even though they are trying to liven up the game by executing the performance. In addition, the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600 is set for the purpose of putting a break in the game when a so-called out-of-reach situation occurs, in which the decorative symbols stop in a manner indicating a loss after forming a reach state. Even when an effect that darkens almost the entire surface is executed, the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the face board 6020 will be visible to the player, and when the player is out of reach, which is unfortunate for the player, Furthermore, there is a possibility that the player may become disoriented.

Therefore, if the rabbit accessory 6000 is located at the standby position at the timing when the effect is executed to darken almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is assumed that such a reflection will be visible. It is advisable to adopt a configuration that suppresses this. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 252, the first ear part 6021 and the second ear part 6022 are located at the intermediate position between the face board 6020 and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so the first ear part 6021 and the second ear part 6022 Hidden by the ear portion 6022, the reflection of the face board 6020 on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is suppressed. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 253, the body portion 6030 is located between the face substrate 6020 and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so it is hidden by these members and the body portion 6030 is Reflection of the face substrate 6020 in the display area is suppressed.

In the example shown in FIG. 251, when executing an effect that darkens almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the driver 6026, the first capacitor 6028a, the second capacitor 6028b, etc. There is a risk of being seen. Therefore, by displaying some kind of display only in the lower front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player is disconcerted in accordance with the effect of darkening the display area. becomes. At the lower front of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, it is preferable to display a decorative pattern, display the number of reservations, or display the reservation image indicating the jackpot expectation level related to the fluctuation, for example. . In addition, in this case, the color of the image may be made darker or the size of the image may be made smaller than when displaying the decorative pattern, the number of reservations, or the reservation image. Further, instead of displaying these statically, they may be displayed dynamically like animation. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the reflection that occurs in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 less noticeable during the game.

It should be noted that after the darkening effect has started, while the darkening effect is being performed, the rabbit accessory 6000 may be moved from the standby position shown in FIG. 251(A) to the moving position shown in FIG. 251(B), or 252(A) to the moving position shown in FIG. 252(B), or from the standby position shown in FIG. 253(A) to the moving position shown in FIG. 253(B). It may be configured to perform an effect of moving the rabbit accessory 6000 to the moving position shown in FIG. However, in this case, the electronic components mounted on the back side of the face substrate 6020 become easily visible.

Therefore, when performing an effect that moves the rabbit accessory 6000 from the lower standby position to the upper moving position, the area that overlaps with the rabbit accessory 6000 when viewed from the front in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is It may be configured to display a reflection suppression image that suppresses reflections. In this way, when the rabbit accessory 6600 moves, an image that is difficult or impossible to see reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 of the face board 6020 is displayed on the game board side performance display. By displaying the information on the display area of the device 1600, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring that would disturb the player.

The size of the reflection suppression image displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is the same size as the rabbit accessory 6000 when viewed from the front, or is one size larger (approximately 1-2 cm) than the rabbit accessory. When viewed from the front, the outline of the reflection suppression image and the outline of the rabbit accessory 6000 are displayed so that they completely overlap, or when viewed from the front, the reflection suppression image protrudes around the rabbit accessory by about 1-2 mm. It's good to do that. Further, the reflection suppressed image may be configured in white or bright color. By using white or bright color, it is possible to make the reflection less noticeable. Note that in addition to white or bright colors, black or dark colors may also be used to configure the reflection suppressed image. Furthermore, the reflection suppression image may be an image that is dynamically displayed.

The timing to start displaying the reflection suppression image may be before the start of the darkening effect, at the start of the darkening effect, or when the rabbit accessory 6000 starts moving during the darkening effect. When moving the rabbit accessory 6000 from the standby position to the movement position, it is preferable to move the reflection suppression image while maintaining the positional relationship with the rabbit accessory 6000. It is preferable to display the reflection suppressed image until the dark transition effect ends. For example, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is stopped at the standby position during a dark effect, it is preferable to continue displaying the reflection suppression image. Thereafter, even when the rabbit accessory 6000 returns from the standby position to the movement position, the reflection suppression image may continue to be displayed as long as the darkening effect is performed.

In addition, it is possible to prepare a plurality of such reflection suppression image modes, assign different jackpot expectations to the reflection suppression image modes, and display one of the reflection suppression images when the rabbit accessory moves. It may also be configured to function as a presentation that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot. For example, blue and red may be prepared as the colors of the reflection suppressed image, and the red reflection suppressed image may be configured to indicate that the expectation of a jackpot is higher. In this case, the player will also pay attention to the display mode of the reflection suppression image itself, so even if some electronic components are reflected, it is possible to make it difficult for such reflection to be noticed. .

Although we have described displaying the reflection suppression image when moving the rabbit accessory 6000, the above-mentioned aspect may also be applied when moving the first ear portion 6021 and the first ear portion 6022. good.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 252, it is desirable that the color of the back surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 be black or dark. Further, it is desirable that no electronic components be mounted on the back surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022. When electronic components are mounted on the back surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, it is desirable that the electronic components be dark-colored. With such a configuration, the rear surfaces of the first ear part 6021 and the second ear part 6022, which are members that suppress reflection of the face board 6020 on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, are the same as the game board side. Even if it is reflected in the display area of the side effect display device 1600, the reflection can be made difficult for the player to notice.

Furthermore, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 253, it is desirable that the back surface of the body portion 6030 be dark in color. Further, it is desirable that no electronic components be mounted on the back surface of the body portion 6030. When electronic components are mounted on the back surface of the body section 6030, it is desirable to use a dark color. With such a configuration, even if the rear surface of the body section 6030, which is a member that suppresses reflections of the face board 6020, is reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the player will be affected by the reflection. can reduce the impact on

The moving position of the rabbit accessory 6000 at the time of initial check may be configured to be in front of the center of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. In this case, the reflection in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 can be confirmed from all directions, up, down, right and left, and the entire area of the rear surface of the face board 6020 can be viewed.

On the other hand, when performing the effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the rabbit role object 6000 is moved to the front of the central part of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It may be configured such that this effect is performed after moving the object to the desired position. In this case, the rabbit accessory 6000 will be located exactly between the direction of the player's line of sight and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the player will be forced to move his face so that the rabbit accessory 6000 will be reflected in the image. As long as the player does not attempt to visually recognize the aspect, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the state reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is visually recognized by the player. In addition, when ending the effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, after brightening the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved from the moving position to standby. By moving the player to the desired position, the impact of the reflection on the player can be reduced.

Although the face board 6020 forming the rabbit accessory 6000 is shown as an example of a member reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the rear surface of the member other than the face board 6020 forming the rabbit accessory 6000 is It may be configured such that the state of the rear surface of the member can be confirmed by reflecting it in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600. For example, the rear surface of a relay board (not shown) provided for transmitting control signals from the peripheral control board 1510 to the face board 6020 and for supplying power from the power supply board 931 displays the game board side effects. It may be configured to be reflected in the display area of the device 1600. Further, on the back side of the relay board, connectors to which flat cables used for transmitting control signals and supplying power are connected, control elements, and the like are surface-mounted. It is preferable to configure these so that they are reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. With such a configuration, it is possible to check whether there is any abnormality in the electronic components mounted on the relay board.

Although the example has been shown in which the relationship between the standby position and the moving position of the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the vertical direction, the rabbit accessory 6000 is configured to be movable in the front-back direction, and the relationship between the waiting position at the back and the moving position at the front is It may be configured to move. Alternatively, the rabbit accessory 6000 provided below the front surface of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 rotates around the rotation axis provided below the rabbit accessory 6000, thereby making the rabbit accessory The upper part of 6000 may be configured to be movable so as to tilt forward. The rabbit accessory 6000 is configured to be movable between a standby position where the rabbit accessory 6000 is parallel to the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and a moving position where the upper part of the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved so as to be tilted forward. You may. Even with such a configuration, by moving the rabbit accessory 6000 from the standby position to the movement position, the area of the rear surface of the face board 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be increased. becomes possible.

Although the game board side performance display device 1600 is fixedly provided and the rabbit accessory 6000 is movable with respect to the game board side performance display device 1600, the rabbit accessory 6000 is configured to be fixedly provided, The game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be movable. For example, the entire game board side performance display device 1600 may be configured to be movable backward, or the entire game board side performance display device 1600 may be configured to be rotatable around a predetermined movable axis. Alternatively, the entire game board side performance display device 1600 may be configured to be horizontally movable in up, down, left and right directions, and the fixedly provided rabbit accessory 6000 may be positioned in the direction of movement. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the area of the rear surface of the face board 6020 that is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 even for a fixedly provided rabbit accessory. Become.

An example in which the game board side performance display device 1600 is fixedly provided and the rabbit accessory 6000 is movable with respect to the game board side performance display device 1600, and the game board side effect display device 1600 is fixedly provided. Although the example in which the effect display device 1600 is movable has been shown, both the game board side effect display device 1600 and the rabbit accessory 6000 may be configured to be movable. For example, it may be configured such that the game board side effect display device 1600 moves backward and the rabbit accessory 6000 moves forward. Alternatively, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the rabbit accessory 6000, which are not in an overlapping state when viewed from the front, may be configured to move closer to each other in the horizontal direction so that they overlap when seen from the front. good. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to increase the area of the rear surface of the face board 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

Although an example is shown in which one game board side effect display device 1600 is provided, a configuration may be provided in which a plurality of effect display devices are provided. The rear surface of the face board 6020 may be configured to be reflected in at least one of the display areas of the plurality of effect display devices. Further, the surface formed by the display area of one effect display device and the surface formed by the display area of the other effect display device are configured to face different directions, so that the rabbit accessory 6000 can be moved to the front side thereof. may be configured. With such a configuration, the rear surface of the face board 6020 can be reflected in the display areas of a plurality of effect display devices from different angles, making it easy to find the cause of the abnormality.

In addition, it is configured to provide a plurality of movable effect display devices, and by moving the effect display devices, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 provided in the rabbit accessory 6000 can be used as a display area of at least one effect display device or a plurality of effects. It may be configured to be reflected in the display area of the display device.

Although we have shown an example in which the rear surface of the face board 6020 is reflected in the display area of the game board-side performance display device 1600 when the power is forcibly cut off, it is possible that the rear surface of the face board 6020 is reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. The rear surface of the face board 6020 may be reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 by darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

FIG. 254 shows a modification of the example shown in FIG. 246. In this embodiment, the position where the rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIGS. 246 to 253 is provided is not at the lower center on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, but at the lower left front side of the game board side effect display device 1600. It has become. Furthermore, a stump accessory 6100 shaped like a stump is provided on the lower right side of the game board side performance display device 1600. As for the game board 5 as a whole, a space is formed on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 between it and the game panel 1100, as in the embodiment described using FIG. The objects are arranged in layers. Specifically, from the front side, at a position close to the back of the game panel 1100, there are a grass accessory behind the board 6800, a first giant tree accessory 6600, a second giant tree accessory 6650, a first cloud accessory 6700, and a second A cloud accessory 6750 is provided. The first giant tree ornament 6600 is composed of a first giant tree trunk board 6610 and a first giant tree leaf board 6630, and the second giant tree ornament 6650 is composed of a second giant tree trunk board 6660 and a second giant leaf board 6680. There is. Further, a first grass accessory 6470 and a second grass accessory 6475 are provided behind these, and a third grass accessory 6480 is provided behind these so as to overlap with the third grass accessory 6480. A fourth grass accessory 6485 is provided, a rabbit accessory 6000 and a stump accessory 6100 are provided behind this, a mountain accessory 6500 is provided behind these, and a game board side effect display is provided behind the mountain accessory 6500. A device 1600 is provided. By arranging multiple accessories in layers in this way, a sense of depth can be created.

A stump part 6200 shaped like a stump, a first grass movable part 6360 and a second grass movable part 6370 shaped like grass are provided on the lower right side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the stump part 6200 , the first grass movable section 6360, and the second grass movable section 6370 constitute the stump accessory 6100 as a unit.

FIG. 255 shows a stump accessory 6100. A first grass movable portion 6360 is provided on the front left side of the stump portion 6200, and a second grass movable portion 6370 is provided on the front right side of the stump portion 6200. The first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are each plate-shaped and made of green transparent synthetic resin. The first movable grass portion 6360 has a surface formed of a transparent green synthetic resin exposed at the outer edge portion excluding the lower end portion, so that it can be visually recognized by looking through the member located at the rear. On the other hand, a first grass decoration part 6360a coated with green ink is provided at a portion other than the lower end and the outer edge, and the rear part of the first grass decoration part 6360a is invisible. . The second grass movable section 6370 also has the same configuration as the first grass movable section 6360, and includes a second grass decoration section 6370a.

The first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 are in a state where the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 are located in front of the stump part 6200 as shown in FIG. 255(B), the first grass movable part 6360 moves to the left from the state located in front of the stump part 6200, and the second grass movable part 6370 moves to the right from the state located in the front of the stump part 6200. It is possible to take a state in which the object has moved to The first grass movable section 6360 and the second grass movable section 6370 can be moved by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

In the state shown in FIG. 255(A), the end surface forming the right end of the first grass movable section 6360 and the end surface forming the left end of the second grass movable section 6370 are in contact with each other, and the stump section 6200 located at the rear The lower half is difficult to see. At this time, a part of the stump opening 6210a is divided into an area where the first grass decoration part 6360a of the first grass movable part 6360 is not provided and a part where the second grass decoration part 6370a of the second grass movable part 6370 is provided. It is configured so that it can be seen through areas that are not covered. In this state, the rear wall substrate 6352 and the rear wall cover 6356 that constitute the box rear wall section 6350 of the stump box section 6300 provided at the rear of the stump opening 6210a, and the rear wall cover 6356 provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 A portion of the wall light emitting section 6354 is configured to be visible.

In this state, as a first light emitting effect, the rear wall light emitting section 6354 is set to a light emitting mode, and the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting section 6354 is transmitted to the first grass movable section 6360, where the first grass decoration section 6360a is not provided. The area and the area where the second grass decoration part 6370a of the second grass movable part 6370 is not provided are irradiated, and the area where the first grass decoration part 6360a of the first grass movable part 6360 is not provided and the second grass movable part 6360 are irradiated. The light may be configured so that it can pass through an area of the portion 6370 where the second grass decoration portion 6370a is not provided and be irradiated onto the player.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 255(B), the first grass movable part 6360 moves to the left from the state in which it is located in front of the stump part 6200, and the second grass movable part 6370 is located in the front surface of the stump part 6200. Since the stump portion 6200 has been moved to the right from the state where the stump portion 6200 is located, visibility of the lower half of the stump portion 6200 is increased. In this state, the stump box section 6300 is visible from the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump section 6200. In this state, the rear wall substrate 6352 and the rear wall cover 6356 that constitute the box rear wall section 6350 of the stump box section 6300 provided at the rear of the stump opening 6210a, and the rear wall provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352. The light emitting part 6354 has changed from a state where it is difficult to see to a state where it is easily visible compared to the state before the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 move.

In this state, as a second light emitting effect, the rear wall light emitting section 6354 is set to a light emitting mode, and the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting section 6354 passes through the stump opening 6210a and is directed toward the front where the player is located. It may be configured so that it can take a state of being directly irradiated. In the second light emitting effect, the light passes through an area where the first grass decoration part 6360a of the first grass movable part 6360 is not provided and an area where the second grass decoration part 6370a of the second grass movable part 6370 is not provided. Compared to the first light emitting performance in which light is irradiated onto the player, it is possible to give the player a stronger visual stimulus.

Note that the first gaming state and the second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) (for example, the variable probability gaming state that is advantageous to the normal gaming state, the time-saving gaming state, or the jackpot gaming state) ), in the case of the first game state, the period in which the first light emitting effect is performed is configured to be longer than the period in which the second light emitting effect is performed, and In this case, the period during which the second light emitting effect is performed may be configured to be longer than the period during which the first light emitting effect is performed. Alternatively, the first light emission effect is executed for a relatively longer period in the first game state compared to the second game state, and the first light emission effect is executed for a relatively longer period in the second game state compared to the first game state. It may be configured such that the second light emission effect is executed during the period. Also, in the first game state, only the first light emission effect is performed, and in the second game state, both the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect, or only the second light emission effect is performed. good. The second light emission effect, which is more visually stimulating than the first light emission effect, functions as a production that gives players an interest (a production that gives them a special feeling), so it is used only when the game is in an advantageous gaming state. In addition, the performance period is used for a longer time when the game is in an advantageous gaming state, thereby making it possible to improve the player's interest.

In this way, in the second gaming state, which is advantageous to the player, the player experiences strong visual stimulation for a longer period of time, compared to the first gaming state, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. , it becomes possible to further heighten the excitement of a player who is in an excited state due to the occurrence of an advantageous state.

FIG. 256(A) shows the stump portion 6200. The stump section 6200 is composed of a stump plate section 6210, which is a colored opaque plate-shaped member provided on the front side, and a stump box section 6300, which has a box shape, and is provided on the back side. The stump plate part 6210 is a plate-like member, and has an outer shape imitating a tree stump, and a stump opening 6210a is provided in the center thereof.

FIG. 256(B) shows the positional relationship between the stump plate section 6210 and the stump box section 6300 when viewed from the front. In addition, in the figure, the stump plate part 6210 and the stump opening part 6210a are shown by dotted lines. The front side of the stump box section 6300 is arranged to correspond to a stump opening 6210a provided in the stump plate section 6210, and simulates a hole in the side surface of a stump.

FIG. 257(A) shows a stump box section 6300. The stump box section 6300 includes a box upper wall section 6310 that constitutes the upper wall, a box right wall section 6320 that constitutes the right wall, a box lower wall section 6330 that constitutes the lower wall, and a box that constitutes the left wall. It is composed of a left wall section 6340 and a box rear wall section 6350 that constitutes the rear wall. The box top wall 6310 and the box bottom wall 6330 have a trapezoidal shape when viewed from above, the back side and the front side are parallel, and the front side is longer than the back side. It has a long structure. The box right wall section 6320 and the box left wall section 6340 are each provided so that the front side thereof is inclined outward. Furthermore, the box top wall 6310, the box right wall 6320, the box bottom wall 6330, and the box left wall 6340 are made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. With such a configuration, a sense of depth can be created.

FIG. 257(B) is a diagram showing the stump box section 6300 in an exploded state. The box rear wall section 6350 is composed of a rear wall cover 6356 located on the front side and a rear wall board 6352 located on the rear side. In this figure, a dotted line with respect to a rear wall substrate 6352 schematically indicates a location where a rear wall cover light scattering section 6358 included in a rear wall cover 6356 is located.

FIG. 257(C) is a front view of the rear wall cover 6356. The rear wall cover 6356 has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. A rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 having a shape imitating a root vegetable is formed on the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356. The rear wall cover light scattering section 6358 includes a first rear wall cover light scattering section 6358a shaped like the root of a root vegetable and a second rear wall cover light scattering section 6358b shaped like the leaf of a root vegetable.

FIG. 257(D) is a front view of the rear wall substrate 6352. The rear wall board 6352 is a horizontally long rectangular printed circuit board. The front and rear surfaces of the rear wall substrate 6352 are white. A rear wall light emitting section 6354 is provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 and is configured by surface mounting a plurality of LEDs. The rear wall substrate 6352 has the same size as the rear wall cover 6356 when viewed from the front. Light emitted from the LEDs constituting the rear wall light emitting section 6354 is irradiated forward perpendicularly to the surface forming the rear wall substrate 6352. The rear wall light emitting section 6354 is provided at a position overlapping the rear wall cover light scattering section 6358 when viewed from the front. Specifically, the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a corresponds to the first rear wall cover light scattering section 6358a shaped like the root of a root vegetable, and the second rear wall cover light scattering section 6354a has a shape like the leaf of a root vegetable. A second rear wall light emitting section 6354b is provided corresponding to the section 6358b. Note that in a state where the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are located in front of the stump portion 6200 as shown in FIG. 255(A), each LED constituting the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is It is configured to be provided at a position that does not overlap in front view with the area where the first grass decoration part 6360a of the first grass movable part 6360 is not provided and the area where the second grass decoration part 6370a of the second grass movable part 6370 is not provided. It's good to do that. In this case, even if the rear wall light emitting section 6354 is in a light emitting mode as an effect, the player is not directly irradiated with light, so a weak visual stimulus is given to the player.

The rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356 and the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 are not in complete contact with each other, but are provided at a predetermined interval (about 1-2 mm). At this time, it is desirable to set the distance between the rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356 and the rear wall substrate 6352 so that the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting section 6354b do not come into contact with the rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356. With this configuration, it becomes easy to dissipate the heat generated in the rear wall light emitting section 6354, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the rear wall light emitting section 6354 breaks down due to the heat generated by itself. It becomes possible.

The stump accessory 6100 is used for an effect to notify the expectation level of a jackpot in a gaming machine. Specifically, from a state in which the stump opening 6210a is difficult to see, the first grass movable part 6360 moves to the left and the second grass movable part 6370 moves to the right, and the stump opening 6210a becomes easily visible. Next, when the stump opening 6210a becomes easily visible, the light emitted from the box rear wall section 6350 located on the back side of the stump box section 6300 becomes visible through the stump opening 6210a. What will the appearance be (for example, will the rear wall cover light scattering section 6358 appear to glow red or white? What will the color be of the rear wall substrate 6352 located at the rear when the light is off? It is configured to suggest that the degree of expectation that the changing decorative pattern will stop and be displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot is higher than usual, depending on whether the decorative pattern is displayed in white or not. For example, in each of the light emitting modes of the rear wall board 6352, the degree of expectation that the changing decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot may be set to be different. With such a configuration, the player can be greatly interested in the light emission mode of the rear wall substrate 6352.

An example has been shown in which the degree of expectation that the changing decorative pattern stops and is displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot is notified by the light emitting mode of the back wall board 6352. Such notification may be performed by setting the portion 6354b to have a different light emission mode.

For example, by not emitting light from the first rear wall light emitting part 6354a and by emitting weak green light from the second rear wall light emitting part 6354b, the first rear wall cover light scattering part 6358a, which is shaped like the root of a root vegetable, becomes white. , the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b shaped like the leaf of a root vegetable is green and can be visually recognized by the player. Furthermore, by causing the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a to emit weak white light and causing the second rear wall light emitting section 6354b to emit weak green light, the first rear wall cover light scattering section 6358a shaped like the root of a root vegetable can be The second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b, which is white and shaped like a root vegetable leaf, is green and can be visually recognized by the player. In addition, by making the first rear wall light emitting part 6354a weakly emit red light and making the second rear wall light emitting part 6354b weakly emit green light, the first rear wall cover light scattering part 6358a shaped like the root of a root vegetable can be The second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b is red and shaped like a root vegetable leaf, and the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b is green and can be visually recognized by the player.

Note that the reason why the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a emits light weakly is to prevent the light emitted from the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a from strongly decorating parts other than the first rear wall cover light scattering section 6358a. It's for a reason. Furthermore, the reason why the second rear wall light emitting section 6354b emits light weakly is to prevent the light emitted from the second rear wall light emitting section 6354b from strongly decorating parts other than the second rear wall cover light scattering section 6358b. It's for a reason. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize an effect as if only the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 is in a light emitting mode.

By adopting such a light emission mode, it is possible to realize an expression that resembles a root vegetable, radish, in the first light emission example and the second light emission example, and an expression that resembles a root vegetable, carrot, in the third light emission example. Furthermore, in the first light emitting example, although the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a does not emit light, the color of the rear wall substrate located behind the first rear wall cover light scattering section 6358a and the first rear wall Depending on the shape of the wall cover light scattering portion 6358a, it is possible to express a predetermined motif (in this example, the root of a radish). Furthermore, in the relationship between the second light emitting example and the third light emitting example, multiple motifs (in this example, radish and carrot) can be expressed by different colors of light emitted from the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a. It is possible to do so.

An example is shown in which by weakly emitting light from the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting section 6354b, it is possible to realize an effect as if only the rear wall cover light scattering section 6358 is in a light emitting mode. However, in such a production, by emitting strong light from the first rear wall light emitting part 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting part 6354b, the first rear wall light emitting part 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting part 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting part 6354b are illuminated on the entire inner surface of the stump box section 6300. It may be configured so that the light from the light emitting part 6354b reaches strongly. In this case, the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting section 6354b may be configured to emit light in the same color (for example, white).

Even if the configuration is such that the light from the rear wall board 6352 is reflected by the box top wall 6310, the box right wall 6320, the box bottom wall 6330, and the box left wall 6340 and becomes visible to the player. good. For example, in the transparent synthetic resin that constitutes the box top wall 6310, box right wall 6320, box bottom wall 6330, and box left wall 6340, a light scattering portion that can scatter each inner surface of the stump box 6300 It may be configured so that. Alternatively, plating may be applied to form a thin film of metal such as aluminum on at least the inner surfaces of the box top wall 6310, box right wall 6320, box bottom wall 6330, and box left wall 6340. The reflective portion may be formed by processing. With this configuration, it is possible to efficiently reflect the light emitted from the rear wall substrate 6352 and irradiated onto the entire inner surface of the stump box section 6300 toward the player. Furthermore, in this case, the white rear wall substrate 6352 itself also has the function of diffusely reflecting light forward.

A rear wall substrate 6352 constituting the box rear wall portion 6350 is visible in white through a colorless and transparent rear wall cover 6356. Therefore, when the first grass movable section 6360 and the second grass movable section 6370 move to their respective movement positions and the box rear wall section 6350 is visible from the stump opening 6210a, the rear wall light emitting section Even when the box 6354 is in the off state, the color of the back wall board 6352 itself allows the player to visually recognize the box back wall 6350 as being decorated. In addition, the rear wall cover 6356 is provided with a rear wall cover light scattering section 6358 imitating the shape of a root vegetable, and even when the rear wall light emitting section 6354 does not emit light, the shape of the rear wall cover light scattering section 6358 allows The box rear wall portion 6350 can be visually recognized by the player as being decorated.

Although an example has been shown in which the rear wall cover light scattering section 6358 has a shape imitating the shape of a root vegetable, the entire front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 may be configured as a light scattering section. Alternatively, in the rear wall cover 6356, the entire front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 is made smooth without providing a part that scatters the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting part 6354, and the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting part 6354 is made smooth. It may be configured so that it passes through as is. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the box rear wall portion 6350 as being decorated by the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 itself as in the above-mentioned example.

Although an example has been shown in which the box rear wall section 6350 of the stump box section 6300 includes a rear wall light emitting section 6354 and a rear wall cover 6356, instead of the box rear wall section 6350, a box upper wall section 6310, a box right wall section 6320, A structure corresponding to the rear wall light emitting section 6354 or the rear wall cover 6356 may be provided on either the box lower wall section 6330 or the box left wall section 6340. Alternatively, for at least one of the box top wall 6310, box right wall 6320, box bottom wall 6330, box left wall 6340, and box rear wall 6350 that constitute the stump box section 6300, It may be configured to have a structure corresponding to the rear wall light emitting part 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356, for example, the box upper wall part 6310, the box right wall part 6320, and the box lower wall part 6330 that constitute the stump box part 6300. , the box left wall section 6340 and the box rear wall section 6350 may all be provided with structures corresponding to the rear wall light emitting section 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356. Furthermore, in these examples, when a configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting section 6354 is provided on a predetermined wall portion, a configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting section 6354 is not provided on the other wall portions. It may be configured such that only the configuration corresponding to the rear wall cover 6356 is provided.

The box top wall 6310, box right wall 6320, box bottom wall 6330, and box left wall 6340 that constitute the stump box section 6300 are made of transparent or translucent synthetic resin, and the stump plate section 6210 is made of transparent or translucent synthetic resin. It is formed from a translucent synthetic resin, and when the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 are in the standby position, the rear wall light emitting part 6354 is in a light emitting state, so that light emitted from the rear wall light emitting part 6354 can be emitted. The rear surface of the stump plate section 6210 may be configured to be illuminated by the emitted light. With this configuration, the light from the rear wall light emitting section 6354 passes through the stump plate section 6210, and it becomes possible for the player to visually recognize that the stump plate section 6210 is decorated with light. The box top wall 6310, box right wall 6320, box bottom wall 6330, box left wall 6340, and stump plate 6210 that constitute the stump box section 6300 may be made of colored transparent or colored translucent synthetic resin. good. For example, they may be made of brown synthetic resin. Alternatively, a tree pattern may be printed on the rear surface of the stump board section 6210 using brown ink to form an opaque or translucent area in a part of the stump board section.

Although an example is shown in which the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 is white, other colors may be adopted. For example, similar to the stump plate portion 6210, the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 may be brown. In such an embodiment, by turning off the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a, root vegetables with soil attached can be represented in the rear wall cover light scattering section 6358.

When the first grass movable part 6360 moves to the left and the second grass movable part 6370 moves to the right, the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump plate part 6210 is exposed, and the rear wall of the box located at the rear is exposed. 6350 is visible, the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 are rotated using the left and right directions of the lower ends of the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 as rotation axes. The upper part is configured to be drivable so as to fall forward, and when the upper parts of the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 fall forward, the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump plate part 6210 is exposed. , the box rear wall portion 6350 located at the rear may be configured to be visible.

Although an example has been shown in which the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 are provided in front of the stump part 6200, only one of the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 is provided in front of the stump part 6200. It may be configured such that the stump opening 6210a is exposed when the stump opening 6210a is moved to the right or left movement position. Alternatively, the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 are configured as an integral member, and when this member moves to the right or left movement position, the stump opening 6210a is exposed. may be configured.

The box rear wall portion 6350 is composed of a rear wall substrate 6352 and a rear wall cover 6356, but the rear wall cover 6356 may be configured to be rotatable. Specifically, the upper side of the rear wall cover 6356 may be configured to rotate by a drive source (not shown) so that the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 is in contact with the inner surface of the box upper wall portion 6310, or The left side of the wall cover 6356 may be used as a rotation axis, and a drive source (not shown) may rotate the rear wall cover 6356 so that the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 comes into contact with the inner surface of the left wall portion 6340 of the box. With this configuration, the rear wall cover 6356 is located on the front side of the rear wall board 6352, and the rear wall board 6352 is visible to the player through the rear wall cover 6356, and the rear wall board 6352 is The box rear wall portion 6350 can be made visible to the player in any of the modes in which the rear wall cover 6356 is not located in front of the box 6352 and the rear wall board 6352 is directly visible. In addition, since the stump accessory 6100 is located at the lower right of the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the player's perspective, by rotating the rear wall cover 6356 around the upper and left sides, the rear wall The cover 6356 becomes less noticeable. Note that it may be rotated around the right side or the variable axis.

The rear wall substrate 6352 may have a larger shape than the rear wall cover 6356. For example, the rear wall substrate 6352 may have the same size and shape as the stump plate portion 6210, and may be configured such that their respective outer edges overlap in a front view. In this case, the rear wall substrate 6352 has a shape that is expanded from its original shape to the periphery. In this case, in the expanded portion of the white rear wall substrate 6352, the rear wall light emitting section 6354 irradiates the box top wall 6310, the box right wall 6320, the box bottom wall 6330, and the box left wall. The light reflected backward by the portion 6340 or the like can be reflected again toward the player in front.

Further, the light emitting portion may be provided in a portion other than the area covered by the rear wall cover 6356. For example, a light emitting part is provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 behind a part imitating a root or a part imitating a cut of a tree in the stump board part 6210, and the light emitting part is set to emit light at the same time as the rear wall light emitting part 6354 is made to emit light. It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the effect of causing the rear wall light emitting section 6354 to emit light. Alternatively, such a rear wall substrate 6352 may be configured such that no light emitting sections other than the rear wall light emitting section 6354 are provided. In this case as well, light reflected backward from the box top wall 6310, the box right wall 6320, the box bottom wall 6330, the box left wall 6340, etc. in the expanded area of the white rear wall substrate 6352 is It becomes possible to reflect the light again toward the player in front.

In the example shown using FIG. 257, the box rear wall portion 6350 is constituted by a rectangular rear wall cover 6356 provided on the front side and a rectangular rear wall substrate 6352 provided on the rear side. On the other hand, in the example shown below using FIG. 258, the box rear wall part 6350 is divided into a rear wall cover 6356 located on the front side, a rear wall board 6352 located in the middle, and a rear wall plate part 6380 located on the back side. I configured it from . In this example, the rear wall cover 6356 has a shape that imitates a root vegetable, and includes a first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a that has an external shape that imitates the roots of a root vegetable, and a second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a that has an external shape that imitates the leaves of a root vegetable. A wall cover light scattering section 6358b is provided. The rear wall cover 6356 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, so that the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 located at the rear can be visually recognized.

The rear wall substrate 6352 has a shape that imitates a root vegetable as a whole, and is composed of a first rear wall substrate 6352a that imitates the root of a root vegetable, and a second rear wall substrate 6352b that imitates the leaf of a root vegetable. A white protective film is formed using a white protective agent on the front and rear surfaces of the first rear wall substrate 6352a. Furthermore, a green protective film is formed using a green protective agent on the front and rear surfaces of the second rear wall substrate 6352b. Four LEDs are surface-mounted on the first rear wall substrate 6352a as a first rear wall light emitting section 6354a. Furthermore, two LEDs are surface-mounted on the second rear wall substrate 6352b as a second rear wall light emitting section 6354b. A rear wall cover 6356 is attached to the front surface of such a rear wall substrate 6352. Further, the rear wall plate portion 6380 has a rectangular shape, and a rear wall board 6352 is attached to the front surface thereof. In this example, the rear wall plate section 6380 forms the rear wall of the stump box section 6300.

Note that the first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b may be configured as separate printed circuit boards, and each may be configured to function as the rear wall substrate 6352 by attaching them to the rear wall plate portion 6380. Alternatively, the first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b may be formed by separately painting one printed circuit board with a white protective agent and a green protective agent.

In the stump box section 6300 having such a configuration, it is preferable to perform an effect of moving the first grass movable section 6360 and the second grass movable section 6370 to the movement position as described above. Also, in this embodiment, the light emitting mode when using the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting section 6354b for production is a weak light emitting mode that makes it visible as if the root vegetables are emitting light; A strong light emitting mode may be adopted in which the entire stump box section 6300 can be visually recognized as being emitted.

In addition, even when the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting section 6354b are turned off, the color and shape of the first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b cause the inside of the stump box section 6300 to be It is possible to express a predetermined motif. In this example, the first rear wall substrate 6352a is white, and the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b is passed through the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a simulating a root, and the second rear wall substrate 6352a is white. The rear wall substrate 6352b is visible in green. In this way, one decoration can be constructed only by the outer shape of the substrate and the color of the substrate.

In this example, a plurality of grass accessories 6400 are provided below and in front of the game board side performance display device 1600, on the near side of the rabbit accessory and the stump accessory.

In the example shown in FIG. 254, as described above, the first grass accessory 6470 to the fourth grass accessory 6485 are provided as the grass accessory 6400 between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game area 5a. There is. A plurality of embodiments of such a grass accessory 6400 are shown below.

The grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 259(A) is composed of a colored, opaque, plate-shaped grass substrate 6420 with an external shape imitating grass. In this example, the grass substrate 6420 includes a grass substrate front light emitting section 6422. The grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is formed by an LED surface-mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. Further, the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 259(B) includes a colored, opaque, plate-shaped grass substrate 6420 having an external shape imitating grass. In this example, the grass substrate 6420 includes a grass substrate rear light emitting section 6424. The grass substrate rear light emitting section 6424 is formed by an LED surface-mounted on the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420. In the examples shown in FIGS. 259(A) and 259(B), the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 imitates grass, and the outer shape itself has the function of decoration. The color of the grass substrate 6420 may be white. In this case, by causing the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 to emit light in green or brown, the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the emitted light color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422. The color of the grass substrate 6420 may be green or brown. Green can represent the color of living grass, and brown can represent the color of dead grass. Thereby, a decoration imitating grass can be realized by both the color and shape of the grass substrate 6420.

Further, as the LEDs mounted on the grass substrate 6420, LEDs having the same color as the grass substrate 6420 are used. Specifically, when the grass substrate 6420 is white, white LEDs are used as the mounted LEDs. With such a configuration, the LEDs mounted on the grass substrate 6420 can be made inconspicuous. Note that in other examples, such a configuration may be adopted when an LED is provided as a light emitting section on the substrate.

Light emitted from the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 provided on the grass substrate 6420 is irradiated forward perpendicularly to the surface of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player visually recognize a performance that gives a strong visual impression. Note that when installing the grass front cover 6440, which will be described later, the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 are attached to the grass substrate 6420 so that light is irradiated horizontally and upwardly to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420. It may be configured to be implemented in With this configuration, the light is irradiated toward the upper end of the grass front cover 6440, so the light irradiated from the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422 is transmitted to the entire grass front cover 6440. , it is possible to make the player see an effect as if the entire grass front cover 6440 were illuminated. Note that in other examples, such a configuration may also be adopted when providing a light emitting section on the substrate.

On the other hand, the light emitted from the LEDs constituting the grass substrate rear light emitting section 6424 provided on the grass substrate 6420 is irradiated upward horizontally with respect to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420. In this case, the player can see an effect as if a halo was shining on the grass board 6420. Note that when providing the grass cover 6460, which will be described later, the light will be irradiated toward the upper end of the grass cover 6460, so the grass substrate rear light emitting portion 6424 will reach the upper end of the grass cover 6460. The light emitted from the grass cover 6460 is transmitted, and the player can visually see an effect as if the entire grass cover 6460 were illuminated. Note that in other examples, such a configuration may also be adopted when providing a light emitting section on the substrate.

Through holes (not shown) forming an electronic circuit are provided on the front and rear surfaces of the grass substrate 6420. In addition, the metal that makes up the electronic circuit installed on the printed circuit board is exposed in the through hole, and if copper is used as the metal, the through hole will be visible as brown, the color of copper. . Here, if at least a portion of the grass board 6420 is visible to the player, there is a possibility that the through holes may also become visible to the player. In particular, if white is adopted as the color of the grass board 6420, brown, which is the color of the through hole provided on the front side of the grass board 6420, will be visible to the player, and the grass board 6420 will not function as a decoration. There is a problem in that the information is lost. Therefore, in order to solve such problems, the following configuration may be adopted. For example, instead of concentrating the through holes at a predetermined location on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, it is preferable to arrange the through holes so that they are scattered over the entire front surface of the grass substrate 6420. Alternatively, by arranging the through holes along the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 or on an extension of the contour line forming the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420, the through holes can be arranged along the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. It becomes possible to visually recognize it as if it were a part of it. A decorative shape resembling grass may be formed by linearly arranging through holes in the same shape as the outer shape inside the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. Further, one or more patterns having the same color as the through holes may be formed on a portion of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. Alternatively, one or more patterns having the same shape as the through holes may be formed on a portion of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. For example, if the through hole is brown and circular, one or more circular patterns may be formed on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 using brown ink. The above example is preferably applied to all the through holes provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, but it may be applied to at least some of the through holes, and even in that case, the grass substrate 6420 This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the decorative function of the product is impaired. In addition, a through hole may be provided in the board|substrate with which the accessory in other examples is provided, and the embodiment regarding such a through hole may be applied.

259(C) to FIG. 259(E) show an example in which a grass front cover 6440 is attached to the front surface of a grass substrate 6420, and a grass accessory 6400 is configured by the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover 6440. The grass front cover 6440 is made of synthetic resin and has a decorative outer shape imitating grass. In addition, the grass substrate 6420 is configured such that a portion where the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is mounted is covered by the grass front cover 6440 when viewed from the front.

In the example shown in FIG. 259(C), the grass front cover 6440 is smaller in size than the grass substrate 6420, and a part of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover 6440. In the example shown in FIG. 259(D), the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover 6440 have the same size, and the entire front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover 6440. In the example shown in FIG. 259(E), the size of the grass front cover 6440 is larger than the grass substrate 6420, the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover 6440, and the grass is grown outside the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. The front cover 6440 is in a protruding state.

In the example shown in FIG. 259(C), the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the grass front cover 6440 both realize a decorative aspect imitating grass. It can also create a sense of depth. In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 259(D) and 259(E), the grass front cover 6440 is made of colored transparent or colorless transparent synthetic resin, so that the grass substrate 6420 located at the rear can be visually recognized. You can also use it as In that case, a decorative aspect can be realized by both the external shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the external shape of the grass front cover 6440. It can also create a sense of depth.

259(F) to FIG. 259(H) show an example in which a grass cover 6460 is attached to the rear surface of a grass substrate 6420, and a grass accessory 6400 is configured by the grass substrate 6420 and the grass cover 6460. The grass cover 6460 is made of synthetic resin and has a decorative outer shape imitating grass. Further, a portion of the grass substrate 6420 in which the grass substrate rear light emitting section 6424 is mounted is configured to be covered by the grass rear cover 6460.

In the example shown in FIG. 259(F), the grass cover 6460 is smaller in size than the grass substrate 6420, and the rear of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass cover 6460. In the example shown in FIG. 259(G), the grass substrate 6420 and the grass cover 6460 have the same size, and the rear of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass cover 6460. In the example shown in FIG. 259(H), the grass cover 6460 is larger than the grass substrate 6420, the rear of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass cover 6460, and the grass is grown outside the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. The rear cover 6460 is in a protruding state. In this example, the outer shape of the grass cover 6460 is visible when viewed from the front.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 259(F) and 259(G), the grass accessory 6400 may be configured to be rotatable about the vertical direction. For example, it may be possible to perform an effect in which the grass accessory 6400 rotates 180 degrees and the grass rear cover 6460 faces forward under drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. With such a configuration, the visual recognition mode as shown in FIG. 259(C) and FIG. 259(D) can be obtained, and the same effect as the example shown in FIG. 259(C) and FIG. 259(D) can be achieved. Become. In the example shown in FIG. 259(H), a decorative aspect can be realized by both the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the grass rear cover 6460. It can also create a sense of depth.

260(A) to 260(G) show modified examples of the example shown in FIG. 259(C). In these examples, the grass front cover 6440 is configured to be smaller in size than the grass substrate 6420, but further detailed modifications of the structure of the grass front cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 260(A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420. The surface forming the grass front cover 6440 is not subjected to lens cutting or matte finishing, and is formed smoothly, so that the light passing through the grass front cover 6440 is configured to pass through without being diffusely reflected. There is. Note that the grass front cover transparent portion 6442, which will be described later, has a similar structure so that the light passing therethrough is not diffusely reflected. With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 located behind the grass front cover 6440 can be directly viewed.

In this example, by setting the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 to a light emitting state, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422. For example, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 emits green light, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated in green.

In the example shown in FIG. 260(B), a grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420. The grass front cover 6440 is formed by an upper grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and a lower grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. The grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a is formed from a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is formed from a colored transparent synthetic resin, and the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a and the grass front cover formed in this manner are formed from a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The grass front cover 6440 may be configured by assembling the colored transparent portion 6442b of the cover. Alternatively, the entire grass front cover 6440 may be formed from a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a colored transparent sticker or colored transparent printing may be applied to a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440 to make the grass front cover colored and transparent. A portion 6442b may also be formed. Although an example has been shown in which the colored transparent portion 6442b is formed by pasting a colored transparent sticker or printing colored transparent on a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440, the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440 The grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b may be formed by pasting a colored transparent sticker or printing a colored transparent color on a part of the grass front cover. Further, it is preferable to adopt green as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the front cover. Further, the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b may be the same color or substantially the same color as the grass board 6420, and in this case, it is possible to make it less noticeable that the grass board 6420 is a printed circuit board. In addition, in other examples, such a configuration may be adopted when providing a colored transparent portion.

In this example, the white grass substrate 6420 is visible through the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover. Further, by positioning the green grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in front of the white grass substrate 6420, the white grass substrate 6420 can be made to appear green. In addition, by positioning the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b in front of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, the LEDs constituting the grass board front light emitting part 6422 are difficult to see from the player, and the front of the grass board in the unlit state It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player directly views the light emitting section 6422 and becomes disoriented. On the other hand, when the front light emitting section 6422 of the grass board is turned on, the intensity of the light from the light source is reduced by the colored transparent section 6442b of the front cover, which prevents the player from feeling dazzled. It becomes possible to suppress this. Furthermore, by causing the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 to emit light, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a luminescent color.

260(C) shows that in the example shown in FIG. 260(B), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is replaced with the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is replaced with the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example of a transformation. In this example, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express white, green, and white aspects from above when viewed from the front.

In the example shown in FIG. 260(D), a grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420. The grass front cover 6440 includes a grass front cover light scattering section 6444 in this example. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and is composed of a grass front cover colorless and transparent part 6442a provided at the upper part and a grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a provided at the lower part. has been done. The grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed by subjecting at least one of the front or rear surface of the grass front cover 6440 to a lens cut or a satin finish. Preferably, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed on the front surface or both the front and rear surfaces of the grass front cover 6440. In this way, the colorless and transparent synthetic resin is made translucent by lens cutting and satin finishing, so although it may be difficult or impossible to see the shape of the components located at the rear, the color is visible to the player without changing. Although an example is shown in which the light scattering portion is formed on a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, the light scattering portion may be formed on a colored and transparent synthetic resin. In this case, the colors of the colored and transparent synthetic resin located at the front can be visually recognized in a mixed manner with the member located at the rear. Further, the color of the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b may be the same color or substantially the same color as the grass board 6420, and in this case, it is possible to make it less noticeable that the grass board 6420 is a printed circuit board. Further, in the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460, a light scattering portion may be provided so as to frame the end portion forming the outer peripheral edge when viewed from the front. In this case, the light from the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting section 6424 can be diffusely reflected at the ends of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass back cover 6460, so that the grass accessory 6400 can be seen from the front. It is possible to highlight the external shape of the Note that in other examples, such a configuration may also be adopted when providing a light scattering section.

In this example, since the grass front cover colorless light scattering section 6444a is located in front of the grass board front light emitting section 6422, the LEDs constituting the grass board front light emitting section 6422 are difficult to see from the player, and are turned off. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the player becomes disinterested due to the player directly viewing the front light emitting section 6422 of the grass board. On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting section 6422 is turned on, the light from the grass board front light emitting section 6422 is scattered by the grass front cover colorless light scattering section 6444a, so that the player feels dazzled. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of

Although the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed only on the front surface of the grass front cover 6440, by adopting such a structure, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed only on the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440. Compared to the case where the This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the user becomes disoriented. Note that when the grass front cover colorless light scattering section 6444a is formed on both the front and rear surfaces of the grass front cover 6440, electronic components mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 (LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422) ) can be made less noticeable. In addition, the color of the rear grass board 6420 becomes visible through the front grass cover colorless light scattering part 6444a, and while the shape of the electronic components mounted on the front of the grass board 6420 is blurred, the color of the grass board 6420 can be used as a decoration. It is designed to perform the following functions.

FIG. 260(E) shows, in the example shown in FIG. 260(D), that the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a is the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a is the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6444a. This is an example modified to a portion 6442a. In this example, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express white, green, and white grass when viewed from above from the front.

The example shown in FIG. 260(F) is a modification of the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 260(B). In this example, an opaque grass front cover portion 6446 is provided in place of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. The grass front cover colorless and transparent part 6442a is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, the grass front cover opaque part 6446 is formed of an opaque synthetic resin, and the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a and the grass front cover opaque part 6446 form the grass front cover. A cover 6440 may also be configured. Alternatively, the entire grass front cover 6440 is formed from a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the grass front cover opaque part 6446 is formed by applying a seal or printing on a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440 so that the rear part cannot be seen. It's okay. In addition, by applying a sticker or printing on a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440 so that the rear part is not visible, instead of forming the grass front cover opaque part 6446, the rear part of the grass front cover 6440 is made invisible. The grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be formed by applying a sticker or printing that is not visible. In this case, in the grass front cover 6440, the appearance of the area on the near side where a sticker or printing is applied becomes visible. For example, if the grass front cover 6440 is made of a colored transparent synthetic resin, it is possible to make the rear of the grass front cover 6440 invisible while making the color of the colored transparent synthetic resin visible. . Furthermore, when the grass front cover light scattering section 6444 is provided on the front surface of the grass front cover 6440, the grass front cover light scattering section 6444 can be made visible while the rear of the grass front cover 6440 can be made invisible. becomes possible. It is preferable to adopt yellow or brown as the color of the front cover opaque portion 6446. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. Note that in other examples, such a configuration may also be adopted when providing an opaque portion.

In this example, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is off, the grass substrate 6420 is white and can be directly seen, and the white color of the grass substrate 6420 is indirectly visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent section 6442a. visually recognizable. On the other hand, regarding the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is visible regardless of the color of the grass substrate 6420. An example has been shown in which yellow or brown is used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, but in this embodiment, it is possible to express a state in which snow is piled up on dead grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting state, it is possible to decorate the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover colorless transparent section 6442a with the emitted light color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422. For example, by adopting green as the emitting color, it becomes possible to decorate the grass substrate 6420 and the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover with green using the emitted light color of the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422, and the state in which the grass is growing becomes possible. can be expressed.

As the front cover opaque portion 6446, a silver member capable of specularly reflecting light may be employed. For example, the grass front cover opaque part 6446 is made of a synthetic resin plated with a thin aluminum film, and the grass front cover opaque part 6446 is constructed in this way, and the grass front cover is colorless and transparent and is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The grass front cover 6440 may be configured by assembling the portion 6442a. Alternatively, the entire grass front cover 6440 may be formed from a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440 may be pasted with a silver sticker, printed with silver paint, or plated with an aluminum thin film. The grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be configured by providing the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. Note that the opaque portion formed in silver color has the function of reflecting light. Note that it may be configured such that a colored paint is applied to the opaque portion formed in silver or a colored transparent sticker is pasted. For example, by applying a thin layer of yellow paint, it is possible to make an opaque part visible in gold. Note that in other examples, such a configuration may be adopted when providing an opaque portion or a reflective portion.

In the example shown in FIG. 260(F), the front cover opaque portion 6446 is silver in color and configured to be visible. In this case, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, the front surface of the grass front cover opaque section 6446 becomes silver, and the grass front cover colorless transparent section 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 become visible in white. It becomes possible to express the appearance of frost or snow falling on the grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the light emitting mode, the light emitted forward from the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is reflected backward at the grass front cover opaque section 6446. Furthermore, since the grass substrate 6420 is white, the light reflected backward at the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is scattered by entering the grass substrate 6420, and finally the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a are scattered. It will be decorated. In this way, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 can be efficiently used for decoration. Note that by providing a colored transparent layer in the frontmost layer of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 can be made visible in silver and in a predetermined color.

FIG. 260(G) shows that in the example shown in FIG. 260(F), the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a is transformed into a grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into a grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a. This is an example. In this example, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in white, silver, and white colors when viewed from above from the front.

FIG. 261(A) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 260(A) is transformed into a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. In this case, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass by the white visible portion of the grass substrate 6420 and the green aspect of the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b. It has become.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set in a light emitting mode, it is desirable that its emitted light color be the same as or similar to the color of the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b, such as green or yellowish green. It is desirable that it emit light. In this case, it becomes possible to perform a dynamic presentation while keeping the color of the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b as it is. Furthermore, the white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized as green by decorating the white grass substrate 6420 with the light reflected without passing through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b.

FIG. 261(B) is an example in which a part of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is transformed into a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b in the example shown in FIG. 261(A). As the color of the grass front cover 6440, it is preferable to adopt green. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, grass can be expressed in white, green, and green colors from above. In addition, since the grass front cover colored light scattering section 6444b is located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the grass front cover colored light scattering section 6444b can be visually recognized as a mixture of the white of the grass substrate 6420 and the green of the grass front cover colored light scattering section 6444b. The grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 itself is configured to be difficult to see.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is scattered in the grass front cover colored light scattering section 6444b, and the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b is decorated. It becomes possible to make it into a mode. Further, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be made visible by the light emitted by the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422.

261(C) shows that in the example shown in FIG. 261(B), the front cover colored transparent part 6442b is replaced with the front cover colored light scattering part 6444b, and the front cover light scattering part 6444 is replaced with the front cover colored transparent part 6444b. This is an example modified to 6442b. As the color of the grass front cover 6440, it is preferable to adopt green. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, grass can be expressed in white, green, and green colors from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 passes through the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b, and some light does not pass through. It is reflected and scattered at the grass front cover light scattering section 6444, so that the grass front cover light scattering section 6444 can be made into a decorative aspect. Further, the diffusely reflected light reaches the exposed white grass substrate 6420, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be made visible by the light emitted by the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422.

FIG. 261(D) is an example in which the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b is transformed into a grass front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 261(B). As the color of the grass front cover 6440, it is preferable to adopt green. It is preferable to adopt yellow, brown, or silver as the color of the front cover opaque portion 6446. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, grass can be expressed in a white, green, yellow, brown, or silver color from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set in a light emitting mode, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is reflected on the back surface of the grass front cover opaque section 6446, and the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b is illuminated. It becomes possible to make it into a decorative form. Further, by decorating the exposed white grass substrate 6420 with the reflected light, it becomes possible to decorate the white grass substrate 6420 with the emitted light color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 in green with the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422. , it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

FIG. 261(E) shows that in the example shown in FIG. 261(D), the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b is transformed into a grass front cover opaque part 6446, and the grass front cover opaque part 6446 is transformed into a grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b. This is an example. As the color of the grass front cover 6440, it is preferable to adopt green. It is preferable to adopt yellow, brown, or silver as the color of the front cover opaque portion 6446. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, grass in white, yellow, brown, silver, and green can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set in a light emitting mode, it is possible to set the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b in a decorative mode. In addition, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is scattered on the back surface of the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b or reflected on the back surface of the grass front cover opaque section 6446. By decorating the grass substrate 6420, it becomes possible to decorate the white grass substrate 6420 with the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 in green with the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422. , it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

FIG. 262(A) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 260(A) is transformed into a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express white grass in a white manner from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set in a light emitting mode, the grass front cover colorless light scattering section 6444a can be set in a decorative mode. In addition, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is scattered on the back surface of the grass front cover colorless light scattering section 6444a, so that the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering section 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 in green with the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422. This allows us to express the appearance of grass growing.

FIG. 262(B) is an example in which a part of the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is transformed into a grass front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 262(A). It is preferable to adopt yellow, brown, or silver as the color of the front cover opaque portion 6446. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, grass can be expressed in white, white, yellow, brown, or silver from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set in a light emitting mode, the light reflected on the back surface of the grass front cover opaque section 6446 allows the grass front cover light scattering section 6444 to be set in a decorative mode. Furthermore, by scattering light on the back surface of the grass front cover colorless light scattering section 6444a, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. becomes. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering section 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 with green, which makes it possible to decorate the grass substrate with green. I can express it.

FIG. 262(C) shows that in the example shown in FIG. 262(B), the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is replaced with the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is replaced with the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. This is a modified example. It is preferable to adopt yellow, brown, or silver as the color of the front cover opaque portion 6446. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, grass can be expressed in white, yellow, brown, silver, and white from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the light scattered by the grass front cover colorless light scattering section 6444a, and the white grass substrate It becomes possible to decorate the substrate 6420 with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering section 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 with green, which makes it possible to decorate the grass substrate with green. I can express it.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 262(A) to 262(C), the grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colored transparent synthetic resin, so that the grass front cover has colored light scattering instead of the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a. 6444b may be configured. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 262(D) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is changed to the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 262(C). It is preferable to adopt yellow, brown, or silver as the color of the front cover opaque portion 6446. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a white, yellow, brown, or silver color from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated by the light reflected on the back surface of the grass front cover opaque section 6446, and the white grass substrate It becomes possible to decorate the substrate 6420 with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass substrate 6420 with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 260(A) to 262(D), the outer shape of each of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass board 6420, which has a larger outer shape than the grass front cover 6440, is visible to the player as a decorative shape. It is composed of The grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 includes a grass front cover colorless transparent section 6442a, a grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b, a grass front cover colorless light scattering section 6444a, a grass front cover colored light scattering section 6444b, and a grass front cover opaque section 6446. Although it is provided in a position where only one of the members is covered in a front view, the LED constituting the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is arranged behind the position forming the boundary line between these members. It's okay. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it less noticeable to the player that the LEDs forming the grass board front light emitting section 6422 are mounted on the grass board 6420 in the off state.

For example, in the grass ornament 6400 shown in FIG. 260(B), an LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422 is placed behind the boundary line between the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a and the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b. In this case, the presence of the LEDs constituting the grass board front light emitting part 6422 becomes less noticeable, so the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a is made white and the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b is made green. It becomes possible for the player to see clearly.

Similarly, the relationship between the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the relationship between the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored Relationship with light scattering part 6444b, relationship between grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b and grass front cover opaque part 6446, relationship between grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a and grass front cover opaque part 6446, grass front cover colored light Also in the relationship between the scattering portion 6444b and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, if the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 are arranged behind these boundaries, the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 It becomes possible to make the presence of the LEDs constituting the device less noticeable.

Further, the relationship between the exposed portion of the grass substrate 6420 and the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover, the relationship between the exposed portion of the grass substrate 6420 and the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, and the relationship between the exposed portion of the grass substrate 6420 and the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, The relationship between the part where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the colorless light scattering part 6444a of the grass front cover, the relationship between the part where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the colored light scattering part 6444b of the grass front cover, and the relationship between the part where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a. In the case where the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 are arranged behind these boundaries in relation to the cover opaque section 6446, the presence of the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 can be made less noticeable.

In addition, in the above-mentioned combination, in the combination of the grass front cover opaque part 6446 and the member that forms a boundary line in combination with the grass front cover opaque part 6446, the light of the LED constituting the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is In combination with the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, it becomes possible to efficiently transmit information to the members forming the boundary line.

The light from the LEDs constituting the grass board front light emitting section 6422 may be irradiated perpendicularly to the grass board 6420, or the light from the LEDs constituting the grass board front light emitting section 6422 may be emitted at the border line at the position where the LEDs constituting the grass board front light emitting section 6422 are mounted. The light may be irradiated in a direction perpendicular to the tangent line.

For example, when both are members that can transmit light, such as a combination of the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a and the colorless light scattering part 6444a, the light emitted from the LEDs constituting the grass board front light emitting part 6422 The irradiation direction of the light is preferably configured to be irradiated perpendicularly to the grass substrate 6420. On the other hand, in the combination of the grass front cover opaque part 6446 and a member that forms a boundary line in combination with the grass front cover opaque part 6446, the border line at the position where the LEDs constituting the grass board front light emitting part 6422 are mounted is It is preferable to irradiate light in the direction of a member that is perpendicular to the tangent and forms a boundary line in combination with the front cover opaque portion 6446.

Note that when rectangular LEDs are used as the LEDs constituting the grass board front light emitting section 6422, the longitudinal direction of the LEDs coincides with the direction of the boundary line or the proximity of the boundary line at the position where the LED is arranged. It is best to place it like this.

In addition, when the two parts forming the boundary line are formed from one member, the part corresponding to the boundary line is made of a material of about the same width so that the LEDs constituting the grass board front light emitting part 6422 do not protrude when viewed from the front. A V-shaped groove may be provided. With such a configuration, when viewed from the front of the LEDs that make up the grass board front light emitting section 6422, the LEDs that make up the grass board front light emitting section 6422 are refracted by the V-shaped groove and are visible. This makes it possible to make the presence of the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 less noticeable. Note that the shape is not limited to a V-shaped groove, and any structure that can be bent may be used. On the other hand, if a boundary line is formed by combining multiple members, the LEDs that make up the grass board front light emitting part 6422 will be refracted and visible, without providing such a groove. It becomes possible to make the presence of the LED constituting the board front light emitting section 6422 less noticeable.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 260(A) to 262(D), the outer shape of each of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass board 6420, which has a larger outer shape than the grass front cover 6440, is visible to the player as a decorative shape. It is composed of This gives a sense of depth. In addition, in the grass front cover 6440, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. Decorative shapes are also formed on the border lines.

Furthermore, since the grass substrate 6420 is in an exposed state, the grass substrate 6420 is decorated by the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself, and the grass substrate 6420 is also decorated by the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422. be exposed. In particular, when the grass substrate 6420 is white and light of a color other than white is irradiated from the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the color of the grass substrate 6420 can be changed to the irradiated color to make it visible.

Furthermore, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 located in front of the grass substrate 6420 and the grass substrate 6420, so that light is emitted toward the end of the grass substrate 6420. Since it is configured to reflect, it is possible to indirectly illuminate the members that constitute the grass front cover 6440 and are not located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422. Furthermore, each member constituting the grass accessory 6400 can be decorated in a different color when the grass board front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state and in the light emitting state. Note that by mounting the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 on the grass substrate 6420 so that the light is irradiated horizontally and upward to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420, the upper part of the grass substrate 6420 can be illuminated. Light can reach more of the edges.

263(A) to 265(D) show modified examples of the example shown in FIG. 259(D). In these examples, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover 6440 are configured to have the same size, but a modification of the specific structure of the grass front cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 263(A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420. The surface forming the grass front cover 6440 is not subjected to lens cutting or matte finishing, and is formed smoothly, so that the light passing through the grass front cover 6440 is configured to pass through without being diffusely reflected. There is. In this example, the entire grass front cover 6440 functions as the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a. With this configuration, the grass substrate 6420 located behind the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be directly viewed. Furthermore, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, the entire grass accessory 6400 can represent white grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color.
For example, by adopting green as the emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless transparent section 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 with green, thereby expressing the appearance of grass growing. can.

FIG. 263(B) is an example in which a part of the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the front cover in the example shown in FIG. 263(A) is transformed into a colored transparent portion 6442b of the front cover. It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express white and green grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that is visible through the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent section 6442a, and the grass front cover 6440. It is now possible to decorate the area with green color, making it possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

FIG. 263(C) shows, in the example shown in FIG. 263(B), that the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is replaced by the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is replaced by the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example of a transformation. It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express green and white grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that is visible through the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent section 6442a, and the grass front cover 6440. It is now possible to decorate the area with green color, making it possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

FIG. 263(D) is an example in which a part of the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the front cover in the example shown in FIG. 263(A) is transformed into a colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the front cover. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express white grass in a white manner from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent section 6442a, the grass front cover colorless light scattering section 6444a, and the grass front cover 6440. It is now possible to decorate the area with green, making it possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

FIG. 263(E) shows, in the example shown in FIG. 263(D), that the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a is the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a is the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6444a. This is an example in which the portion 6442a is modified. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express white grass in a white manner from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent section 6442a, the grass front cover colorless light scattering section 6444a, and the grass front cover 6440. It is now possible to decorate the area with green, making it possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

FIG. 263(F) is an example in which a part of the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into a grass front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 263(A). It is preferable to adopt yellow, brown, or silver as the color of the front cover opaque portion 6446. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a white, yellow, brown, or silver color from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 that is visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be decorated with green. This makes it possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

FIG. 263(G) shows that in the example shown in FIG. 263(F), the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a is transformed into a grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into a grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a. This is an example. It is preferable to adopt yellow, brown, or silver as the color of the front cover opaque portion 6446. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a yellow, brown, silver, or white color from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 that is visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be decorated with green. This makes it possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

FIG. 264(A) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 263(A) is transformed into a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, the entire grass accessory 6400 can express green grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 that is visible through the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b can be decorated with green. This makes it possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

FIG. 264(B) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a is transformed into a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 263(D). It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In this case, the grass front cover 6440 has a green grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express green grass from above to green.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b, the grass front cover colored light scattering section 6444b, and the grass front cover 6440. It is now possible to decorate the area with green, making it possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

FIG. 264(C) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 263(E). It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In this case, the grass front cover 6440 has a green grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express green grass from above to green.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that becomes visible through the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b, the grass front cover light scattering section 6444, and the grass front cover 6440. It is now possible to decorate the area with green color, making it possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

FIG. 264(D) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 263(F) is transformed into a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It is preferable to adopt yellow, brown, or silver as the color of the front cover opaque portion 6446. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, grass can be expressed in a green, yellow, brown, or silver color from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 that is visible through the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b can be decorated with green. This makes it possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

FIG. 264(E) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 263(G) is transformed into a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It is preferable to adopt yellow, brown, or silver as the color of the front cover opaque portion 6446. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in yellow, brown, silver, or green from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 that is visible through the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b can be decorated with green. This makes it possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

FIG. 265(A) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 263(A) is modified to a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, the entire grass accessory 6400 can represent white grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering section 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 that is visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering section 6444a are decorated in green. This makes it possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

FIG. 265(B) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 263(F) is modified into a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. It is preferable to adopt yellow, brown, or silver as the color of the front cover opaque portion 6446. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, grass can be expressed in white, green, yellow, brown, or silver from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering section 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 that is visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering section 6444a are decorated in green. This makes it possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

FIG. 265(C) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 263(G) is modified into a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. It is preferable to adopt yellow, brown, or silver as the color of the front cover opaque portion 6446. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a yellow, brown, silver, or white color from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the grass front cover light scattering section 6444 and the grass substrate 6420 that becomes visible through the grass front cover light scattering section 6444 can be decorated with green. This makes it possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 265(A) to 265(C), the grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colored transparent synthetic resin, so that the grass front cover has colored light scattering instead of the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a. 6444b may be configured. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 265(D) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into a grass front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 263(A). It is preferable to adopt yellow, brown, or silver as the color of the front cover opaque portion 6446. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, the entire grass ornament 6400 can represent yellow, brown, or silver grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover opaque section 6446, and reaches the edge forming the outer periphery of the grass accessory 6400. The light reaches the end of the grass accessory 6400 and it becomes possible to decorate it with a predetermined color. More specifically, when the grass accessory 6400 is viewed from an angle, the end of the grass substrate 6420 appears exposed, and this exposed portion becomes visible in a manner that shines in a predetermined luminescent color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the outer circumferential edge of the grass accessory 6400 with green, thereby making it possible to express the appearance of grass growing. Note that even in an example in which another front cover opaque portion 6446 is provided, it can be made visible in this manner.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 263(A) to 265(D), the outer shape of each of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass board 6420 having the same size as the grass front cover 6440 is visible to the player as a decorative shape. It is configured. In addition, in the grass front cover 6440, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. Decorative shapes are also formed on the border lines.

Furthermore, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, decoration is performed using the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself. At the same time, the grass substrate 6420 is also decorated with light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422. In addition, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, the color of the grass front cover 6440 and the color of the grass substrate 6420 are The grass substrate 6420 is decorated with a color that is a mixture of the two, and furthermore, the grass substrate 6420 is decorated with light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422.

Furthermore, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 located in front of the grass substrate 6420 and the grass substrate 6420, so that light is emitted toward the end of the grass substrate 6420. Since it is configured to reflect, it is possible to indirectly illuminate the members that constitute the grass front cover 6440 and are not located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422. Furthermore, each member constituting the grass accessory 6400 can be decorated in a different color when the grass board front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state and in the light emitting state.

FIGS. 266(A) to 268(D) show modified examples of the example shown in FIG. 259(E). In these examples, the grass front cover 6440 is larger than the grass substrate 6420, the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover 6440, and the grass front cover 6440 is placed outside the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. Although the grass front cover 6440 is configured to protrude, a modification example of the specific structure of the grass front cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 266(A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420. The surface forming the grass front cover 6440 is not subjected to lens cutting or matte finishing, and is formed smoothly, so that the light passing through the grass front cover 6440 is configured to pass through without being diffusely reflected. There is. In this example, the entire grass front cover 6440 functions as the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, the grass substrate 6420 located behind the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be directly viewed. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express colorless, transparent, and white grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless transparent section 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 with green, thereby expressing the appearance of grass growing. can.

FIG. 266(B) is an example in which a part of the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into a colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 266(A). It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express colorless and transparent, white, and green grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that is visible through the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent section 6442a, and the grass front cover 6440. It is now possible to decorate the area with green color, making it possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

FIG. 266(C) shows, in the example shown in FIG. 266(B), that the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is replaced with the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is replaced with the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example of a transformation. It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express green transparent, green, and white grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that is visible through the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent section 6442a, and the grass front cover 6440. It is now possible to decorate the area with green color, making it possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

FIG. 266(D) is an example in which a part of the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 266(A) is transformed into a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless and transparent, white, and white form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that becomes visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent section 6442a, the grass front cover light scattering section 6444, and the grass front cover 6440. It is now possible to decorate the area with green color, making it possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

FIG. 266(E) shows that in the example shown in FIG. 266(D), the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a is replaced with the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a is replaced with the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6444a. This is an example modified to a portion 6442a. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in colorless and translucent, white, and white modes from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering section 6444a, the grass front cover colorless transparent section 6442a, and the grass front cover 6440. It is now possible to decorate the area with green, making it possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

FIG. 266(F) is an example in which a part of the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into a grass front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 266(A). It is preferable to adopt yellow, brown, or silver as the color of the front cover opaque portion 6446. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express colorless and transparent, white, yellow, brown, or silver grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 that is visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be decorated with green. This makes it possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

FIG. 266(G) shows that in the example shown in FIG. 266(F), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into a grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example. It is preferable to adopt yellow, brown, or silver as the color of the front cover opaque portion 6446. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a yellow, brown, silver, or white color from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 that is visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be decorated with green. This makes it possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

FIG. 267(A) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 266(A) is transformed into a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express green transparent and green grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 that is visible through the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b can be decorated with green. This makes it possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

FIG. 267(B) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 266(D) is transformed into a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express green transparent, green, and green grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b, the grass front cover colored light scattering section 6444b, and the grass front cover 6440. It is now possible to decorate the area with green, making it possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

FIG. 267(C) shows that in the example shown in FIG. 267(B), the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is replaced with the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b is replaced with the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6444b. This is an example modified to a portion 6442b. It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express green translucent, green, and white grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colored light diffusion section 6444b, the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b, and the grass front cover 6440. It is now possible to decorate the area with green, making it possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

FIG. 267(D) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 266(F) is transformed into a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It is preferable to adopt yellow, brown, or silver as the color of the front cover opaque portion 6446. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express green transparent, green, yellow, brown, or silvery grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 that is visible through the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b can be decorated with green. This makes it possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

FIG. 267(E) shows that in the example shown in FIG. 267(D), the grass-front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is transformed into a grass-front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass-front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into a grass-front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. This is an example. It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It is preferable to adopt yellow, brown, or silver as the color of the front cover opaque portion 6446. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, grass can be expressed in yellow, brown, silver, or green from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 that is visible through the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b can be decorated with green. This makes it possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

FIG. 268(A) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 266(A) is modified into a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express the grass in a colorless, transparent, and white form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering section 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 that is visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering section 6444a are decorated in green. This makes it possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

FIG. 268(B) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 266(F) is transformed into a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. It is preferable to adopt yellow, brown, or silver as the color of the front cover opaque portion 6446. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express colorless and transparent, white, yellow, brown, or silver grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering section 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 that is visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering section 6444a are decorated in green. This makes it possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

FIG. 268(C) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 266(G) is transformed into a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. It is preferable to adopt yellow, brown, or silver as the color of the front cover opaque portion 6446. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in yellow, brown, silver, or white from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering section 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 that is visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering section 6444a are decorated in green. This makes it possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 268(A) to 268(C), the grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colored transparent synthetic resin, so that the grass front cover has colored light scattering instead of the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a. 6444b may be configured. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 268(D) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into a grass front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 266(A). It is preferable to adopt yellow, brown, or silver as the color of the front cover opaque portion 6446. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, the entire grass ornament 6400 can represent yellow, brown, or silver grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is set to a light emitting mode, light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover opaque section 6446, so that the light reaches the edge forming the outer periphery of the grass substrate 6420. reaches the upper end of the grass substrate 6420, making it possible to irradiate the light upward and backward. This makes it possible to decorate other members with light of a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the members located above and behind the edge forming the outer periphery of the grass substrate 6420 with green. In this example, it can be said that the grass substrate 6420 is provided not to decorate the grass accessory 6400 itself but to decorate other members.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 266(A) to 268(D), the external shape of at least one of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass board 6420 is configured to be visible to the player as a decorative shape. In addition, in the grass front cover 6440, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. Decorative shapes are also formed on the border lines.

In addition, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, decoration is performed using the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself. The grass substrate 6420 is also decorated with light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422. Furthermore, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 located in front of the grass substrate 6420 and the grass substrate 6420, so that light is emitted toward the end of the grass substrate 6420. Since it is configured to reflect, it is possible to indirectly illuminate the members that constitute the grass front cover 6440 and are not located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422. Furthermore, each member constituting the grass accessory 6400 can be decorated in a different color when the grass board front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state and in the light emitting state.

269(A) to 269(D) show modified examples of the example shown in FIG. 259(H). In these examples, a grass substrate rear surface light emitting section 6424 is provided on the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420. Further, the size of the grass cover 6460 is larger than the grass substrate 6420, and the front surface of the grass cover 6460 is covered by the grass substrate 6420, and the grass cover 6460 protrudes outside the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. However, a modification example of the specific structure of the front cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 269(A), a colorless and transparent grass rear cover 6460 is provided behind a white grass substrate 6420. The surface forming the rear grass cover 6460 is not subjected to treatments such as lens cutting or matte finish, and is formed smoothly. In this example, the entire grass front cover 6440 functions as the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass rear cover colorless transparent portion 6462a located behind the grass substrate 6420 can be directly viewed. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express colorless, transparent, and white grass from above.

On the other hand, when the rear grass substrate light emitting section 6424 is set in a light emitting mode, the rear grass cover colorless transparent section 6462a can be decorated. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate rear light emitting section 6424, it becomes possible to decorate the exposed part of the grass rear cover colorless transparent section 6462a in green when viewed from the front. Can express aspects.

FIG. 269(B) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6462a of the cover behind grass in the example shown in FIG. 269(A) is transformed into a colored transparent portion 6462b of the cover after grass. It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass cover colored transparent portion 6462b. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express green, transparent, and white grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear light emitting section 6424 is set in a light emitting mode, it becomes possible to decorate the grass rear cover colored transparent section 6462b. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate rear light emitting section 6424, it becomes possible to decorate the exposed portion of the grass rear cover colored transparent section 6462b in green when viewed from the front, and grass grows there. Can express aspects.

FIG. 269(C) is an example in which the back grass cover colorless transparent portion 6462a in the example shown in FIG. 269(A) is modified to a back grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6464a. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express colorless, translucent, and white grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting section 6424 is set in a light emitting mode, it becomes possible to decorate the grass rear cover colorless light scattering section 6464a. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate rear light emitting section 6424, it becomes possible to decorate the exposed portion of the grass rear cover colorless light scattering section 6464a in green when viewed from the front, and grass grows. Can express the state of being.

FIG. 269(D) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6462a of the back cover in the example shown in FIG. 269(A) is changed to an opaque back cover portion 6466. It is preferable to adopt yellow, brown, or silver as the color of the grass rear cover opaque portion 6466. Furthermore, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a yellow, brown, silver, or white color from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear light emitting section 6424 is set to a light emitting mode, light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the grass rear cover opaque section 6466, so that the light reaches the edge forming the outer periphery of the grass substrate 6420. reaches, and it becomes possible to decorate the periphery of the edge of the grass substrate 6420 with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the periphery of the edge of the grass substrate 6420 with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 269(A) to 269(D), the outer shapes of the grass substrate 6420 and the grass cover 6460, which is larger in outer shape than the grass substrate 6420, are visible to the player as decorative shapes. It is configured. This gives a sense of depth.
Furthermore, since the grass substrate 6420 is in an exposed state, decoration is performed using the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself. Furthermore, when the grass substrate rear light emitting section 6424 is configured to emit light in a predetermined color, the light from the grass substrate rear light emitting section 6424 reaches the upper end of the grass rear cover 6460, and the light from the grass substrate rear light emitting section 6424 reaches the upper end of the grass rear cover 6460. It becomes possible to visually recognize how the image is decorated with a predetermined color.

270(A) to 271(G) show modified examples of the example shown in FIGS. 259(A) to 260(G). Specifically, in the example shown in FIGS. 270(A) and 270(B), a grass substrate opening 6426 having a decorative shape imitating a rabbit's head is provided in a grass substrate 6420, The rear side is configured to be visible through the substrate opening 6426.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 270(C) to 270(E) and FIGS. 271(A) to 271(G), the grass front cover 6440 is located in front of the grass substrate 6420, and the grass front cover 6440 is located in front of the grass substrate 6420. A grass front cover opening 6448 having a decorative shape imitating a rabbit's head is provided in the grass front cover opening 6448, and the grass substrate 6420 is configured to be visible through the grass front cover opening 6448.

In the example shown in FIGS. 270(F) to 270(H), a grass back cover 6460 is located behind the grass substrate 6420, and a decorative grass shaped like a rabbit's head is placed on the grass substrate 6420. A substrate opening 6426 is provided. The grass rear cover 6460 is configured to be visible through the grass substrate opening 6426.

FIG. 270(A) is an example in which a grass substrate opening 6426 is provided in the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 259(A). The grass substrate opening 6426 is formed by providing a physical opening in the shape of a punched hole in the grass substrate 6420. The grass substrate opening 6426 is shaped like a rabbit's head. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided, and in this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. With such a configuration, not only the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also the grass substrate opening 6426 can have a decorative shape. Further, it becomes possible to visually check the rear through the grass board opening 6426.

FIG. 270(B) is an example in which a grass substrate opening 6426 is provided in the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 259(B). The grass substrate opening 6426 is formed by providing a physical opening in the shape of a punched hole in the grass substrate 6420, and is configured such that members located at the rear can be directly viewed through the grass substrate opening 6426. There is. The substrate grass substrate opening 6426 has a shape imitating a rabbit's head. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided, and in this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. With such a configuration, not only the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also the grass substrate opening 6426 can have a decorative shape. Further, it becomes possible to directly view the rear through the grass board opening 6426.

FIG. 270(C) is an example in which a grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 259(C). The grass front cover opening 6448 is formed by providing a physical opening in the shape of a punched hole in the grass front cover 6440, and the grass substrate 6420 located at the rear is directly visible through the grass front cover opening 6448. configured to be possible. The front cover opening 6448 has a shape imitating a rabbit's head. A plurality of grass front cover openings 6448 may be provided, and in this example, a grass front cover first opening 6448a and a grass front cover second opening 6448b smaller than the grass front cover first opening 6448a are provided. ing.

The grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided at a position overlapping with the grass substrate front first light emitting part 6422a that constitutes a part of the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422 when viewed from the front, and the grass front cover first opening 6448a The grass substrate front first light emitting section 6422a is configured to be directly visible through the grass substrate front surface. On the other hand, when viewed from the front, the grass front cover second opening 6448b is located at a position that does not overlap with the grass substrate front second light emitting section 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting section 6422c, which constitute a part of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422. It is provided. With such a configuration, not only the outer shape of the grass front cover 6440 but also the grass front cover opening 6448 can have a decorative shape. Further, it is possible to visually recognize the grass substrate 6420 from the grass front cover opening 6448, and due to the shape of the grass front cover opening 6448 and the color of the grass substrate 6420 that is visually recognized from the grass front cover opening 6448. Decorations are made.

When the grass substrate front first light emitting section 6422a is in a light emitting mode, the grass exposed at the end surface of the grass front cover 6440 forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided. The substrate 6420 is directly decorated with light emitted from the first light emitting part 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting section 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting section 6422c are in a light emitting mode, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting section 6422b and the grass substrate front surface second light emitting section 6422b, It is decorated with light emitted from the third light emitting section 6422c on the front surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the part where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is It is decorated with light emitted from the front second light emitting section 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting section 6422c.

FIG. 270(D) is an example in which the size of the grass front cover 6440 is changed to the same size as the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 270(C). Moreover, FIG. 270(E) is an example in which the size of the grass front cover 6440 is changed to be larger than the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 270(C). In these examples as well, similar effects can be obtained by adopting the same aspect as the front cover opening 6448 in the example shown in FIG. 270(C).

FIG. 270(F) is an example in which a grass substrate opening 6426 is provided in the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 259(F). The grass substrate opening 6426 is formed by providing a physical opening in the shape of a punched hole in the grass substrate 6420, and the grass rear cover 6460 located at the rear can be directly viewed through the grass substrate opening 6426. It is configured. The grass substrate opening 6426 is shaped like a rabbit's head. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided, and in this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. The grass substrate rear light emitting section 6424 is not provided around the grass substrate first opening 6426a. Further, a first light emitting section 6424a on the rear surface of the grass substrate and a second light emitting section 6424b on the rear surface of the grass substrate are provided so as to sandwich the left and right sides of the second grass substrate opening 6426b.

With such a configuration, not only the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also the grass substrate opening 6426 can have a decorative shape. Further, the grass back cover 6460 can be visually recognized through the grass substrate opening 6426. Further, decoration is performed by the shape of the grass substrate opening 6426 and the color of the grass rear cover 6460 that is visible from the grass substrate opening 6426.

When the grass substrate rear surface first light emitting section 6424a and the grass substrate rear surface second light emitting section 6424b are in a light emitting mode, the grass cover 6460 exposed from the grass substrate second opening 6426b is the grass substrate rear surface first light emitting section 6424a. It is decorated with light emitted from the second light emitting section 6424b on the rear surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, the grass cover 6460 exposed from the grass substrate first opening 6426a is decorated with light emitted from the grass substrate rear first light emitting section 6424a and the grass substrate rear second light emitting section 6424b. The amount of light that reaches the grass substrate is smaller than that exposed from the second opening 6426b of the grass substrate. Therefore, the portion of the grass cover 6460 exposed from the grass substrate first opening 6426a is decorated with a smaller amount of light than the portion exposed from the grass substrate second opening 6426b of the grass cover 6460.

Note that it may be possible to perform an effect in which the first light emitting section 6424a on the rear surface of the grass substrate is turned off and only the second light emitting section 6424b on the rear surface of the grass substrate is turned on in a predetermined color (for example, green). In this case, the portion exposed from the grass substrate first opening 6426a of the grass cover 6460 is not substantially decorated because light hardly reaches there; Only the portion exposed from 6426b can be decorated.

FIG. 270(G) is an example in which the size of the grass cover 6460 is changed to the same size as the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 270(F). Moreover, FIG. 270(H) is an example in which the size of the grass cover 6460 is changed to be larger than the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 270(F). In these examples as well, similar effects can be obtained by adopting the same aspect as the grass substrate opening 6426 in the example shown in FIG. 270(F).

FIG. 271(A) is an example in which a grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 260(A). In this example, a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420. The grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided at a position overlapping with the grass substrate front first light emitting part 6422a that constitutes a part of the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422 when viewed from the front, and the grass front cover first opening 6448a The grass substrate front first light emitting section 6422a is configured to be directly visible through the grass substrate front surface. On the other hand, when viewed from the front, the grass front cover second opening 6448b does not overlap with the grass substrate front second light emitting section 6422b or the grass substrate front third light emitting section 6422c, which constitute a part of the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422. , is provided at a position overlapping with the grass front cover 6440.

In this example, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, the grass substrate 6420 is white and directly visible through the grass front cover opening 6448, and the grass front cover colorless transparent section 6442a is directly visible. Because of this, the grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized as white. Therefore, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, the rabbit-shaped shape formed by the grass front cover opening 6448 is not noticeable. In addition, since the grass board front light emitting section 6422 provided on the front surface of the grass board 6420 is composed of white LEDs, which are the same color as the grass board 6420, the grass board front light emitting section 6422 provided on the front surface of the grass board 6420 is conspicuous. This makes it possible to prevent the player from noticing the presence of the grass board front light emitting section 6422.

When the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a is in a light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end face forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided is the grass substrate. The display is directly decorated with light emitted from the front first light emitting section 6422a. For example, if brown is adopted as the light emitting color of the first light emitting part 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate, the grass substrate 6420 and the first grass front cover opening 6448a exposed in the area where the first grass front cover opening 6448a is provided are Although the end surface of the grass board 6420 is brown and has a decorative appearance, the unexposed portion of the grass board 6420 is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the board.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting section 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting section 6422c are in a light emitting mode, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting section 6422b and the grass substrate front surface second light emitting section 6422b, It is decorated with light emitted from the third light emitting section 6422c on the front surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed in the area where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed area is not completely illuminated, and the part forming the outer periphery of the exposed area is It is decorated with light emitted from the front second light emitting section 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting section 6422c. For example, when green is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front second light emitting section 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting section 6422c, the end surface forming the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b is green. Although this is a decorative aspect, the vicinity of the center of the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the grass substrate 6420.

FIG. 271(B) is an example in which the grass front cover 6440 is provided with a grass front cover opening 6448 in the example shown in FIG. 260(B). In this example, the grass front cover 6440 is formed by an upper grass front cover colorless and transparent part 6442a and a lower grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b, but the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b has a grass front cover opening. 6448 is provided. It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In this example, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, the grass substrate 6420 is white and directly visible through the grass front cover opening 6448, and the green grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b, the white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized as green. This makes it possible to express the appearance of a white rabbit in green grass.

When the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a is set in a light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end face forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided is the grass substrate. The display is directly decorated with light emitted from the front first light emitting section 6422a. For example, if brown is adopted as the emission color of the first light emitting part 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate, the grass substrate 6420 and the first grass front cover opening 6448a exposed in the area where the first grass front cover opening 6448a is provided are Although the end face of the grass board 6420 is decorated in brown, the part of the grass board 6420 that is not exposed from the grass front cover first opening 6448a is visually recognized by the player as green, although the white grass board 6420 is white. Alternatively, if green, which is the same color as the colored transparent portion of the grass front cover, is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front first light emitting part 6422a, the grass that is exposed in the area where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided is used. The end surface of the substrate 6420 and the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover has a green luminescent color and has a decorative appearance, and has the same color as the colored transparent part of the grass front cover, so it expresses the appearance of a rabbit hiding in the grass. be able to.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting section 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting section 6422c are in a light emitting mode, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting section 6422b and the grass substrate front surface second light emitting section 6422b, It is decorated with light emitted from the third light emitting section 6422c on the front surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the part where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is It is decorated with light emitted from the front second light emitting section 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting section 6422c. For example, when green is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front second light emitting section 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting section 6422c, the end surface forming the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b is green. Although this is a decorative aspect, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate.

FIG. 271(C) shows that in the example shown in FIG. 271(B), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is replaced with the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is replaced with the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example of a transformation. In this example, it is possible to express white, green, and white grass from above when viewed from the front. Further, regarding the provision of the grass front cover opening 6448, the same effect can be achieved by adopting the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 271(A).

FIG. 271(D) is an example in which a grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 260(D). In this example, the grass front cover 6440 is formed by an upper grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a and a lower grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. An opening 6448 is provided. In this example, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is in the off state, the grass substrate 6420 is white and directly visible through the grass front cover opening 6448, and the grass substrate front cover colorless light scattering section 6444a is directly visible. , the white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized as white. With this, it is possible to express an aspect as if a white rabbit is hiding in white grass.

When the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a is set in a light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end face forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided is the grass substrate. The display is directly decorated with light emitted from the front first light emitting section 6422a. For example, when green is adopted as the emission color of the first light emitting part 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate, the grass substrate 6420 and the first grass front cover opening 6448a exposed in the area where the first grass front cover opening 6448a is provided are Although the end surface of the grass board 6420 is decorated in green, the portion of the grass board 6420 that is not exposed from the first grass front cover opening 6448a is visually recognized by the player as white.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting section 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting section 6422c are in a light emitting mode, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting section 6422b and the grass substrate front surface second light emitting section 6422b, It is decorated with light emitted from the third light emitting section 6422c on the front surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the part where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is It is decorated with light emitted from the front second light emitting section 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting section 6422c. For example, when green is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front second light emitting section 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting section 6422c, the end surface forming the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b is green. Although this is a decorative aspect, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate. With this, it is possible to express an aspect as if there were a white rabbit in the green grass.

FIG. 271(E) shows, in the example shown in FIG. 271(D), that the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a is the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a is the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6444a. This is an example modified to a portion 6442a. In this example, it is possible to express white, white, and white grass from above when viewed from the front. Further, regarding the provision of the front cover opening 6448, the same effect can be achieved by adopting the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 271(A).

FIG. 271(F) is an example in which a grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 260(F). In this example, the grass front cover 6440 is formed by an upper grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a and a lower grass front cover opaque part 6446, but the grass front cover opaque part 6446 has a grass front cover opening 6448. It is set up. It is preferable to adopt yellow, brown, or silver as the color of the front cover opaque portion 6446. In this example, when the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 is off, the grass substrate 6420 is white and directly visible through the grass front cover opening 6448, and the grass front cover opaque section 6446 is yellow. It is visible in brown or silver color. This makes it possible to create the impression that a white rabbit is hidden in yellow, brown, or silver grass.

When the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a is in a light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end face forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided is the grass substrate. The display is directly decorated with light emitted from the front first light emitting section 6422a. For example, if yellow or brown is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front first light emitting section 6422a, or if a white blinking mode is adopted as the emission mode, the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided. The exposed grass substrate 6420 and the end face forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a are decorated in a blinking yellow, brown, or white manner. Further, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the grass front cover first opening 6448a is visually recognized by the player as yellow, brown, or silver, which is the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. As a result, the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 have the same decoration mode, and when the light emitting mode is changed from the above-mentioned off state, it looks as if the white rabbit has disappeared. Aspects can be expressed. On the other hand, when white is adopted as the emission color of the first light emitting part 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate, the grass substrate 6420 and the first grass front cover opening 6448a exposed in the area where the first grass front cover opening 6448a is provided are The end face of the eggplant is decorated in white. Further, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the grass front cover first opening 6448a is visually recognized by the player as yellow, brown, or silver, which is the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. As a result, when changing from the above-mentioned unlit state to such a light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the part where the grass front cover first opening 6448a, which was visually recognized as white only by the color of the substrate, is provided, The color of the light emitted by the first light emitting section 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate can also be set to white, and the white rabbit can be expressed in a manner that emphasizes the color of the white rabbit.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting section 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting section 6422c are in a light emitting mode, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting section 6422b and the grass substrate front surface second light emitting section 6422b, It is decorated with light emitted from the third light emitting section 6422c on the front surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the part where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is It is decorated with light emitted from the front second light emitting section 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting section 6422c. For example, if white is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front second light emitting section 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting section 6422c, the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b will be bordered. Although the grass board 6420 is white and has a decorative appearance, the grass board 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the board. This makes it possible to more emphatically express the appearance of a white rabbit hiding in yellow, brown, or silver grass.

FIG. 271(G) shows that in the example shown in FIG. 271(F), the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a is transformed into a grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into a grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a. This is an example. In this example, it is possible to express grass in white, yellow, brown, silver, or white from above when viewed from the front. Further, regarding the provision of the grass front cover opening 6448, the same effect can be achieved by adopting the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 271(A).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 270(A) to 271(G), decorative members provided in the front (grass substrate 6420 and grass front cover 6440) have decorative shaped openings (grass substrate opening 6426 and grass front cover 6440). By providing the front cover opening 6448) to make the members provided at the rear visible, the decoratively shaped opening is conspicuously visible to the player. Further, since the member provided at the front and the member provided at the rear are different in color, transparency, etc., the shape of the opening can be made more distinct. Further, it may be configured such that the decorative state of such an opening is used as an effect.
In the examples shown in FIGS. 259(A) to 259(H) and FIGS. 260(A) to 260(G), modified examples in which openings are provided are shown in FIGS. 270(A) to 271(G). However, in the examples shown in FIGS. 261(A) to 269(D), openings may be similarly provided.

An example has been shown in which a punch-shaped physical opening is provided in the grass front cover 6440 to form a grass front cover opening 6448 and an area that makes the rear visible. Instead of this method, the outer shape of the visible area may be formed by a boundary line between an area where the rear side is invisible or difficult to see and an area where the rear side is relatively easy to see.

For example, the outer invisible area may be configured by the grass front cover opaque part 6446, and the inner easily visible area may be configured by the grass front cover transparent part 6442. Alternatively, the outer, hard-to-see area may be configured with a colored grass front cover opaque part 6446, and the inner, easily visible area may be configured with a grass front cover light scattering part 6444, or the outer, hard to see area may be configured with a colored grass front cover. The front cover light scattering part 6444 constitutes the front cover, and the inner easily visible area is constituted by the colored transparent part 6442b of the grass front cover, and the outer hard to see area is constituted by the colorless grass front cover light scattering part 6444. The easily visible area is formed by the colorless transparent part 6442a of the grass front cover, the outer area that is difficult to see is formed by the colored transparent part 6442b of the grass front cover, and the inner easily visible area is formed by the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a. It may also be configured as follows. Alternatively, the grass front cover 6440 may include a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and a grass front cover opaque portion 6446. It may be configured to include at least two of these areas, and provide an inner easily visible area spanning two or more of these areas. With such an aspect, it is also possible to provide a region that has a decorative shape and is easily visible from the rear.

271(B) to FIG. 271(G), the grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b, the grass front cover light scattering part 6444, the grass front cover opaque part 6446, etc. Although the grass front cover opening 6448 is provided only in one region, the grass front cover opening 6448 may be provided across a plurality of regions constituting the grass front cover 6440. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 includes a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and a grass front cover opaque portion. 6446, and the grass front cover opening 6448 may be provided across two or more of these areas.
FIGS. 259(A) to 271(G) show examples in which the grass accessory 6400 is visible as a decoration mode in the unlit state or the lighted state, but these states are used as effects in the game. For example, it may be configured such that one of these states notifies the player of a predetermined event in the gaming machine. Alternatively, it may be configured to notify the player of a predetermined event by changing these states when they change from the above-mentioned one state to the above-mentioned other state. The predetermined event may be, for example, an indication of the expectation level of a jackpot, or a notice indicating that the operation button 410 will become operable.

In FIGS. 259(C) to 259(E), FIGS. 260(A) to 268(D), and FIGS. 270(C) to 271(G), the grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the grass substrate 6420. showed that. 259(F) to FIG. 259(H) and FIG. 269(A) to FIG. 269(D), an example is shown in which the grass rear cover 6460 is provided behind the grass substrate 6420. It is configured to combine any one of the embodiments in which a grass front cover 6440 is provided at the front of the grass substrate 6420 and any one of the embodiments in which a grass rear cover 6460 is provided at the rear of the grass substrate 6420. It's okay.

When combining embodiments, it is preferable to use grass substrates 6420 of the same size. In addition, when the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460 are each configured to be smaller than the grass substrate 6420 as in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 259(C) and 259(F), the grass front cover 6440 It is preferable to combine the embodiments by making the grass cover 6460 the same size. In this case, the outer edges of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460 will exactly overlap when viewed from the front. In addition, when the grass substrate 6420, the grass front cover 6440, and the grass rear cover 6460 are the same size as in the embodiment shown in FIG. 259(D) or FIG. 259(G), , it is better to combine the examples. In this case, when viewed from the front, the outer edges of the front grass cover 6440, the grass substrate 6420, and the rear grass cover 6460 exactly overlap. Furthermore, in the case where the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460 are each configured to be larger than the grass substrate 6420 as in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 259(E) and 259(H), the grass front cover 6440 It is preferable to combine the embodiments by making the grass cover 6460 the same size. In this case, the outer edges of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460 will exactly overlap when viewed from the front. In addition, the front cover 6440 and the back cover 6460 may be made of synthetic resin of the same color, and if the front cover 6440 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, the back cover 6460 may be made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. It is preferable to form it from synthetic resin. Furthermore, if the grass front cover 6440 is made of a green transparent synthetic resin, the grass rear cover 6460 may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

When the embodiments are combined, the grass substrate 6420 includes both the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting section 6424. The configuration may be such that one of them is not provided. For example, when the examples shown in FIGS. 259(E) and 259(H) are combined, the front grass cover 6440 and the rear grass cover 6460 are larger than the grass substrate 6420 in front view. Therefore, the grass rear cover 6460 can be decorated with the light from the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422. Furthermore, the front grass cover 6440 can be decorated with light from the grass substrate rear light emitting section 6424. In this case, in the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460, it is desirable to provide a light scattering portion so as to frame the edge at the end that forms the outer periphery when viewed from the front. Note that the structure may be such that neither the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 nor the grass substrate rear light emitting section 6424 are provided. In this case, the grass board 6420 may be configured to have a function of relaying the signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to other accessories, for example.

Any one example of the grass accessory 6400 described above may be applied to each of the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 shown in FIG. 255. Specifically, the external shapes of the first grass movable section 6360 and the second grass movable section 6370 are not changed, and the first grass movable section 6360 has an area other than the first grass decoration section 6360a that constitutes the outer area. , the first grass decoration part 6360a which constitutes the inner area in the first grass movable part 6360, and the member which constitutes the outer area in any one example of the grass accessory 6400 and the inner area which constitutes the first grass decoration part 6360a. It is best to apply the following. In addition, the grass is divided into areas other than the second grass decoration part 6370a that constitutes the outer area of the second grass movable part 6370 and the second grass decoration part 6370a that constitutes the inner area of the second grass movable part 6370. It is preferable to apply the members constituting the outer region and the members constituting the inner region in any one example of the accessory 6400.

Moreover, any one example of the grass accessory 6400 may be applied to both the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370. For example, the example shown in FIG. 269(B) may be applied to both the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370. In this case, the left and right white grass substrates 6420 are in contact with each other to form one decoration. Further, the left and right green transparent grass rear covers 6460 are in contact with each other to form one decorative body. On the other hand, even if the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 move left and right, the left and right white grass substrates 6420 and the left and right green transparent grass rear covers 6460 each form one decorative body as a single unit. are doing.

In FIG. 254, a third grass accessory 6480 is provided, and a fourth grass accessory 6485 is provided behind it, but when viewed from the front, the left half of the fourth grass accessory 6485 is the third grass accessory located in front. It is configured to be hidden by the grass accessory 6480. Here, any one example of the grass accessory 6400 described above may be applied to each of the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485. At this time, it is desirable that the grass substrates 6420 of the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 have the same size. Further, one or both of the grass board front light emitting part 6422 and the grass board rear light emitting part 6424 that the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 may be provided with can be simultaneously displayed as a light emitting mode as in the above example. may be configured.

An example in which the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 269(A) is used as the third grass accessory 6480 and the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 266(E) as the fourth grass accessory 6485 will be shown below. In this case, when the grass substrate rear light emitting part 6424 of the grass substrate 6420 of the third grass accessory 6480 provided in the front is emitted, the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a of the fourth grass accessory 6485, It becomes possible to illuminate the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the white grass substrate 6420 from the front side. Further, the fourth grass accessory 6485 can efficiently reflect the light irradiated from the third grass accessory 6480 forward in a diffused manner to enhance the player's interest as a performance.

On the other hand, by irradiating light from the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 included in the fourth grass accessory 6485, it is possible to decorate the grass back cover 6460 of the third grass accessory 6480. At this time, only the upper peripheral edge of the grass cover 6460 is visible to the player as a decorated aspect, but the light passes through the grass cover 6460 and is directed backward by the white grass substrate 6420. It is diffusely reflected and irradiated toward the fourth grass accessory 6485, thereby decorating the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the fourth grass accessory 6485.

In this way, the light is diffusely reflected alternately between the third grass ornament 6480 provided in the front and the fourth grass ornament 6485 provided in the rear, so that the position of the light source is made invisible to the player. It becomes possible to efficiently reflect light forward while arranging the light. In particular, when a silver member capable of specularly reflecting light is used as the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 and the grass back cover opaque portion 6466, it becomes possible to reflect light more efficiently.

Although an example was shown in which the third grass accessory 6480 provided in the front and the fourth grass accessory 6485 provided at the rear partially overlap in front view, the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 may be configured so that they completely overlap when viewed from the front. Further, the third grass accessory 6480 may be configured to be larger than the fourth grass accessory 6485. The fourth grass accessory 6485 may be configured to be completely hidden behind the third grass accessory 6480 when viewed from the front. Alternatively, they may be arranged in positions that are adjacent but do not overlap when viewed from the front.

One or both of the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 provided at the rear may be configured to be movable as a performance. For example, an example has been shown in which the third grass accessory 6480 provided at the front and the fourth grass accessory 6485 provided at the rear partially overlap in front view, but from this state, the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass ornament 6485 may be configured to completely overlap when viewed from the front. In this case, by moving either the third grass accessory 6480 or the fourth grass accessory 6485 in the left-right direction, the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 completely overlap when viewed from the front. Alternatively, by moving both the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 in the left and right direction, the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 can be viewed from the front. They may be configured so that they completely overlap. In this case, the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 may be configured to be able to move from a state where they do not overlap at all in a front view to a state where they overlap. Further, the moving direction may be configured to be movable not only in the left and right direction but also in the up and down direction. In this case, it is preferable to configure the grass accessory so that it can be moved upward or downward by the height of the grass object itself. Even in the case of such a configuration, the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 can be configured to move from a state where they do not overlap at all in front view to a state where they overlap. It is preferable that the third grass ornament 6480 and the fourth grass ornament 6485 be configured so that they can take the light emitting mode as in each of the above-mentioned examples in a state where they overlap in a front view.

Although an example has been shown in which the grass accessory 6400 is movable, the movement of the grass accessory 6400 also makes the openings (the grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448) difficult to see or invisible. A change to a visible state may be employed as an effect. Specifically, in the relationship between the third grass accessory 6480 provided at the front and the fourth grass accessory 6485 provided at the rear and provided with a grass substrate opening 6426 and a grass front cover opening 6448, when viewed from the front, From the state where the grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 of the fourth grass accessory 6485 are located behind the third grass accessory 6480, a The grass board opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 of the 4 grass accessory 6485 change to a state where they are not located, and the grass board opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 are visible to the player when viewed from the front. It is recommended to configure it so that

Although an example in which the grass accessory 6400 is movable has been shown, the grass accessory 6400 may be configured to be moved as a performance to a position overlapping the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Further, at this time, a predetermined image may be displayed as a performance in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Specifically, when the grass accessory 6400 moves from below to a position overlapping the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the outline of the grass accessory 6400 is modeled according to the movement of the grass accessory 6400. The displayed image may be moved upward. At this time, it is desirable to configure the robot to move while displaying an image imitating the outline of the grass accessory 6400 slightly above the grass accessory 6400 when viewed from the front. With this configuration, an image imitating the outline of the grass accessory 6400, the outer shape of the grass accessory 6400 constituted by the grass front cover 6440, the grass substrate 6422, or the grass rear cover 6460, and the grass front cover 6440 are configured. When viewed from the front, a plurality of shapes imitating grass, each expressed by a boundary line between a plurality of members or a grass substrate 6420 that is smaller than the transparent grass front cover 6440 and visible through the grass front cover 6440, are formed from top to bottom when viewed from the front. The provided decoration mode can be made visible to the player. In this way, one decoration mode can be realized as a performance using the image displayed on the display device, the external shape of the accessory, and the shape provided within the accessory. In addition, when the grass ornamental object 6400 has two shapes when viewed from the front as shown in FIGS. 261(B) and 266(B), one decorative mode is realized as a performance using a total of four shapes. be able to.

The back surface of the grass substrate 6420 may be configured to mount the same electronic components as those included in the rabbit accessory 6000. In addition, the grass substrate 6420 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting section 6424 are attached to the grass substrate 6420 with adhesive, and power is supplied to the LEDs. The wiring may also be similarly attached to the grass substrate 6420 with an adhesive. In this case, the grass front cover 6440 is provided with a grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b, a grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a, and a grass front cover colored light scattering part 6444b so that the wiring is difficult to see from the player. The configuration may be such that the LEDs and wiring are located behind these when viewed. In addition, by printing or engraving a pattern that has the same shape as the LEDs and wiring on the transparent grass substrate 6420, the transparency of the grass substrate 6420 can be ensured while making it difficult for the players to see the LEDs and wiring. may be configured. In this case, by making the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting section 6424 emit light, the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b, the grass front cover colorless light scattering section 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering section 6444b, or the LED A pattern having the same shape as the wire or the wiring may be illuminated to create a decorative state. With such a configuration, these members can serve both the function of hiding the presence of the LEDs and wiring and the function of decoration.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 259(C) to 271(G), one grass substrate 6420 and one grass front cover 6440, one grass substrate 6420 and one grass rear cover 6460, or one grass substrate 6420 and one grass rear cover 6460, An example has been shown in which one grass accessory 6400 is composed of one grass substrate 6420, one grass front cover 6440, and one grass rear cover 6460. One grass accessory 6400 may be configured by increasing at least one member to a plurality of members. For example, one grass front cover 6440 may be attached to one grass front cover 6420 to configure one grass accessory 6400, or two grass front covers 6420 may be attached to one grass front cover 6440, One grass accessory 6400 may be configured. Furthermore, when a plurality of grass substrates 6420, grass front covers 6440, and grass rear covers 6460 are provided, the embodiments in the examples shown in FIGS. 259(C) to 271(G) can be independently applied to each of the plurality of members. May be applied. For example, in the mountain accessory 6500 described later, two front covers are provided on one board, and an opening is provided in one of the front covers to make the board located at the rear visible, and the board also has an opening. This is an example in which a section is provided.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 266(A) to 268(D), a grass front cover 6440, which is larger than the grass substrate 6420, is provided in front of the grass substrate 6420. In this case, the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the grass front cover 6440, but the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is difficult to see or is not visible when viewed from the front. The grass front cover light scattering part 6444 and the grass front cover opaque part 6446 are provided in at least a part of the front of the grass front cover, and the grass front cover colorless transparent part is provided in front of the part other than the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 when viewed from the front. 6442a, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b may be provided. Even with such a configuration, the color of the grass substrate 6420 can be used for decoration. In this case, a grass front cover light scattering part 6444 and a grass front cover opaque part 6446 may be provided so as to cover the front of the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 in a band shape. Alternatively, in the example shown in FIG. 266(D), the area occupied by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b in the grass front cover 6440 is expanded upward so that the area in front of the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion. It may be configured to be covered by the portion 6444b. In the example shown in FIG. 266(E), the area occupied by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b in the grass front cover 6440 is reduced upward so that the area in front of the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6440. It may be configured to be covered by the scattering portion 6444b. Similarly, in FIGS. 266(F) and 266(G), by expanding or contracting the area occupied by the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 upward, the front of the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover. It may be configured to be covered by an opaque portion 6446. Alternatively, the grass front cover light scattering part 6444 or the grass front cover opaque part 6446 may have a decorative shape such that at least a part of the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover light scattering part 6444 or the grass front cover opaque part 6446. Similar effects can be obtained even in a configuration in which the portion 6446 is provided.

In FIGS. 246 and 254, an example is shown in which the grass accessory 6400 is provided in the area between the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game panel 1100, but the grass accessory 6400 is provided in a position other than this. It may be configured as follows. For example, the grass ornament 6400 may be provided in the area between the game panel 1100 and the glass unit 190. Alternatively, the grass accessory 6400 may be provided on a member constituting the door frame 3. For example, the door frame left side unit 530, the door frame right side unit 550, and the door frame top unit 570 may be configured to have grass accessories. It should be noted that not only the grass accessory 6400 but also other accessory objects may be configured to be provided at the same position as the grass accessory 6400.

In this way, in the grass accessory 6400, it is possible to perform an effect in which the grass accessory 6400 is made visible in green, white, yellow, brown, silver, etc. by the plurality of members that make up the grass accessory 6400. It can express the appearance of lush grass, withered grass, frost falling on dry grass, or snow falling on dry grass. Furthermore, it is possible to express how the grass changes from one of these modes to another mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 254, a rabbit accessory 6000 and a stump accessory 6100 are provided in front of a mountain accessory 6500. Further, in these examples, the rabbit accessory 6000 has a face light emitting part 6023, and the stump accessory 6100 has a first rear wall light emitting part 6354a and a second rear wall light emitting part 6354b, and light is emitted from these light emitting parts. It is possible to create a dramatic state by irradiating the front. By the way, in these examples, the light from the light emitting part is diffusely reflected by the members provided around the light emitting part, and a part of the light emitted from the light emitting part is directed backwards, causing the light from the light emitting part to There was a problem in that the irradiated light could not be efficiently irradiated forward, resulting in a decrease in the efficiency of using the irradiated light. Therefore, an example will be shown below in which the efficiency of using light from the light emitting part can be improved by reflecting the light that has gone backwards forward on the front side of the mountain accessory 6500 that is a decoration.

FIG. 272 shows a modification of the rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIG. 247 and the like. FIG. 272(A) is a front view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. 272(B) is a perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. 272(C) is an exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. The rabbit accessory 6000 is configured as a unit by a face cover part 6010 on the front side, a face board 6020 provided behind the face cover part 6010, and a body part 6030. The face substrate 6020 has a first face light emitting part 6023a and a second face light emitting part 6023b as a face light emitting part 6023 on the front surface. Further, the face substrate 6020 has a mouth decoration part 6024 shaped like a rabbit's mouth. Attached to the vertical bottom surface of the face cover section 6010 are a first arm section 6016 and a second arm section 6017 made of white opaque synthetic resin and imitating the left and right front legs of a rabbit. Further, at the lower end of the face substrate 6020, there is provided a body part 6030, which is a plate-shaped member made of white opaque synthetic resin and imitates the body part of a rabbit. The face cover part 6010 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and has a first face light scattering part 6011a and a second face light scattering part 6011a and a second face light scattering part at positions corresponding to the first face light emitting part 6023a and the second face light emitting part 6023b, respectively. A section 6011b is provided. Up to this point, the configuration is the same as that of the rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIG. 247 and the like.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 272(A), the face substrate 6020 does not include the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 and has a horizontally long rectangular shape. Further, the face substrate 6020 has a concave shape toward the rear formed by the face cover upper surface portion 6012, the face cover right surface portion 6013, the face cover lower surface portion 6014, and the face cover left surface portion 6015 of the face cover portion 6010. It is installed so that it fits into the part where it is installed. In addition, in the face cover part 6010, the upper surface of the face cover part upper surface part 6012 is shaped to protrude upward at two places on the left and right, thereby forming a first ear part 6021 and a second ear part 6022. Furthermore, a first ear decoration part 6021a and a second ear decoration part 6022a are formed by printing on the front surface of the face cover part 6010 with brown ink.

When the rabbit accessory 6000 takes such an aspect, the light from the first face light emitting part 6023a and the second face light emitting part 6023b is diffusely reflected by the first face light scattering part 6011a and the second face light scattering part 6011b. After that, face cover upper surface part 6012, face cover right surface part 6013, face cover lower surface part 6014, face cover left surface part 6015, first ear part 6021, first ear decoration part 6021a, second ear part 6022. , the light may be reflected many times and directed backward at the second ear decoration part 6022a and the like.

Furthermore, even when the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting section 6354b included in the stump accessory 6100 shown in FIGS. 255 to 258 emit light, the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting section After the light from the light emitting section 6354b is diffusely reflected by the first rear wall cover light scattering section 6358a and the second rear wall cover light scattering section 6358b, it is reflected on the box upper wall section 6310, the box right wall section 6320, and the box lower wall section 6330. , there is a risk that the light may be reflected at the box left wall portion 6340 and the like and directed backward.

Therefore, an example will be shown below in which the light that has gone backward from the rabbit accessory 6000 or the stump accessory 6100 is reflected forward again on the front side of the mountain accessory 6500 to improve the light utilization efficiency.

FIG. 273(A) shows a mountain accessory 6500. In addition, the dotted line in the figure has shown the position where the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 are provided. Furthermore, regarding the rabbit accessory 6000, the outer shape of the face substrate 6020 is also shown by dotted lines. The mountain accessory 6500 includes a mountain board 6520, a first mountain front cover 6540 provided on the front left side of the mountain board 6520, and a second mountain front cover 6560 provided on the front right side of the mountain board 6520.

The mountain board 6520 is composed of a printed circuit board whose front and rear surfaces are white. Further, on the front surface of the mountain board 6520, a plurality of LEDs forming a mountain board front light emitting section 6522 are mounted. Furthermore, a mountain board opening 6524 is provided approximately at the center of the mountain board 6520 in the left-right direction. The mountain board opening 6524 is formed by punching out a physical opening in the mountain board 6520. The member located at the rear can be visually recognized through the mountain board opening 6524.

The first front cover 6540 is made of colored transparent synthetic resin, and includes a first front cover colored transparent section 6542, a first front cover colored light scattering section 6544, and a first front cover opening 6548. There is. With such a configuration, the white mountain board 6520 can be visually recognized by the color of the first mountain front cover 6540. Specifically, the color of the first mountain front cover 6540 may be blue. In this case, it is possible to express an aspect in which a mountain is covered with snow or a mountain has a glacier. The first front cover opening 6548 is formed by punching out a physical opening in the first front cover 6540. Further, the first front cover opening 6548 is formed across the first front cover colored transparent portion 6542 and the first front cover colored light scattering portion 6544. The mountain board 6520 located at the rear is visible through the first mountain front cover opening 6548 in white. The second front cover 6560 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and includes a second front cover colorless and transparent portion 6562 and a second front cover colorless light scattering portion 6564. With such a configuration, it is possible to express an aspect in which a mountain is covered with snow or a mountain has a glacier. Further, each of the mountain board opening 6524 and the first mountain front cover opening 6548 decoratively expresses a cave in the mountain.

On the front surface of the mountain board 6520, a mountain board front surface first light emitting part 6522a to a mountain board front surface ninth light emitting part 6522i are provided as the mountain board front light emitting part 6522. A first mountain front cover colored transparent section 6542 is provided in front of the mountain substrate front first light emitting section 6522a. A first mountain front cover colored light scattering section 6544 is provided in front of the mountain substrate front second light emitting section 6522b. A first front cover colored light scattering section 6544 is provided in front of the third light emitting section 6522c on the front surface of the mountain board, and a face board 6020 included in the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is located in front of the first front cover colored light scattering section 6544. are doing. A first front cover colored transparent part 6542 is provided in front of the fourth light emitting part 6522d on the front surface of the mountain board, and further in front of that, a face board 6020 included in the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is located. There is. A stump accessory 6100 is located in front of the fifth light emitting section 6522e on the front surface of the mountain board. A stump accessory 6100 is located in front of the sixth light emitting section 6522f on the front surface of the mountain board. A second mountain front cover colorless transparent part 6562 is provided in front of the seventh mountain board front surface light emitting part 6522g, and a stump accessory 6100 is located further in front of the second mountain front cover colorless transparent part 6562. A second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 is provided in front of the mountain board front surface eighth light emitting portion 6522h. A second mountain front cover colorless light scattering section 6564 is provided in front of the mountain substrate front ninth light emitting section 6522i.

When viewed from the front, the mountain accessory 6500 has an area where the mountain board 6520 is exposed and visible as white, and an area where the front of the mountain board 6520 is covered with the first mountain front cover colored transparent part 6542 and is visible as light blue. , a region in which the front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 and is visible in light blue, and a region where the mountain substrate 6520 is not located behind the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 and is transparent in blue. , an area where the mountain board 6520 is not located behind the first mountain front cover colored light scattering part 6542b and is visible as a blue semi-transparent area, and a region where the mountain board opening 6524 is provided so that it is open. There is a hole-shaped area where the rear member is visible, an area where the front of the mountain board 6520 is covered with the second front cover colorless transparent part 6562 and visible white, and a area where the front of the mountain board 6520 is visible. It is composed of a region that is covered with the second front cover colorless light scattering portion 6564 and is visually recognized as white, and a region that is visible as transparent because the mountain substrate 6520 is not located behind the second front cover colorless transparent portion 6562. ing.

FIG. 273(B) shows a state in which the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 described above are provided in front of such a mountain accessory 6500. Behind the rabbit accessory 6000, there is an area where the mountain board 6520 is exposed and visible as white, and an area where the front of the mountain board 6520 is covered with the first mountain front cover colored transparent part 6542 and is visible as light blue. , the front of the mountain board 6520 is covered with the first mountain front cover colored light scattering part 6544 and is visually recognized as a light blue area, and in these areas, the first rabbit accessory 6000 provided in front is provided with a light blue area. By diffusely reflecting the light from the face light emitting section 6023a and the second face light emitting section 6023b toward the front, it is possible to improve the efficiency of light use. Further, behind the stump accessory 6100, there is an area where the mountain board 6520 is exposed and visible as white, and the front of the mountain board 6520 is covered with the second mountain front cover colorless transparent part 6562 and is visible as white. In these areas, light from the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting section 6354b provided in the stump accessory 6100 provided in the front is diffusely reflected toward the front. This makes it possible to increase the efficiency of light use. As described above, in this embodiment, one substrate is configured to include a plurality of reflective regions corresponding to a plurality of members each including a light emitting section.

In addition, when the mountain board 6520 located behind the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 is configured to be able to reflect the light from the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 forward, the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 are It is desirable to increase the reflection efficiency in the substrate region hidden by the object 6000 or the stump accessory 6100. Specifically, it is desirable to adopt white or bright color as the color of the mountain substrate 6520. In addition, in the board area hidden by the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100, the mountain board 6520 may be exposed without providing a cover in front, or if a cover is provided, a colorless and transparent cover may be provided. It is recommended to configure it so that In the example shown in FIG. 273(A), the mountain board 6520 is exposed in a region corresponding to the right side of the rabbit accessory 6000 when viewed from the front. Further, in the area where the mountain board 6520 is exposed, electronic components such as the mountain board front light emitting section 6522 are not mounted on the front surface of the mountain board 6520. Further, in the area corresponding to the stump accessory 6100, the mountain board 6520 is either exposed or covered with the second mountain front cover colorless transparent part 6562. By adopting such an aspect, it becomes possible to further improve the efficiency of reflecting light toward the front.

Of the mountain board front light emitting parts 6522 provided on the mountain board 6520, the mountain board front first light emitting part 6522a and the mountain board front fourth light emitting part 6522d have a first mountain front cover colored transparent part 6542 in front of the mountain board front surface. For the front second light emitting section 6522b and the mountain board front third light emitting section 6522c, the first mountain front cover colored light scattering section 6544 is located at the front, and for the mountain board front ninth light emitting section 6522i, the second mountain front cover is located at the front. A colorless light scattering section 6564 is provided. In this way, by providing a colored or light-scattering cover in front of the mountain board front light emitting section 6522, the player's eyes are configured so that the light from the light emitting section is not directly irradiated. On the other hand, the fifth front light emitting section 6522e of the mountain board and the sixth light emitting section 6522f of the front surface of the mountain board are not provided with a cover on the front side, and are exposed on the front surface of the mountain board 6520. The light from the fifth light emitting section 6522e on the front surface of the mountain board and the sixth light emitting section 6522f on the front surface of the mountain board is used to illuminate the stump accessory 6100 located in front. This is because the player is not directly irradiated with light from the sixth light emitting section 6522f on the front surface of the mountain board. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the presence of the mountain board front light emitting section 6522 less noticeable. In this way, in the mountain accessory 6500, the mountain board front light emitting parts 6522 are not arranged evenly on the front surface of the mountain board 6500, but the first mountain front cover 6540 is located in front of the mountain board front light emitting part 6522, They are unevenly arranged in correspondence with the second mountain front cover 6560, the rabbit accessory 6000, and the stump accessory 6100.

FIG. 273(C) shows the rabbit accessory 6000 in a state of being moved from the standby position to the movement position with a dotted line. In this state, the third light emitting part 6522c on the front surface of the mountain board and the fourth light emitting part 6522d on the front surface of the mountain board, which were previously located at a position overlapping the rear of the rabbit accessory 6000 when viewed from the front, are configured to be visible to the player when viewed from the front. has been done. The rabbit accessory 6000 not only emits light when it is in the standby position as described above, but also can emit light in a predetermined color as an effect even when it is in the moving position. At this time, the game board side effect display device 1600 may display an effect using the same luminescent color as the rabbit accessory 6000. For example, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is made to emit white light, the game board side performance display device 1600 is configured to display white lines extending radially from the location where the rabbit accessory 6000 is located. Good too.

FIG. 273(C) shows the rabbit accessory 6000 in a state of being moved from the standby position to the movement position with a dotted line. When viewed from the front, a third light emitting section 6522c on the front surface of the mountain board and a fourth light emitting section 6522d on the front surface of the mountain board are provided behind the rabbit accessory 6000, and even when the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, the rabbit accessory 6000 can be Even when 6000 is in the moving position, it is possible to emit light in a predetermined color as an effect. For example, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the moving position, the mountain board front light emitting section 6522 may be configured to emit white light at the same time as the white line is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600.

When the third light-emitting part 6522c on the front surface of the mountain board and the fourth light-emitting part 6522d on the front surface of the mountain board are in a light-emitting mode as a performance while the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, the upper surface of the face cover part of the rabbit accessory 6000 6012, the light irradiated from the third light emitting part 6522c on the front surface of the mountain board and the fourth light emitting part 6522d on the front surface of the mountain board passes through the right face part 6013 of the face cover part, the lower face part 6014 of the face cover part, and the left face part 6015 of the face cover part. , the outline of the rabbit's face becomes a luminescent form. At this time, on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 constituting the rabbit accessory 6000, the light emitted from the mountain board front third light emitting part 6522c and the mountain board front fourth light emitting part 6522d and directed forward is diffusely reflected backward. Therefore, this light will be diffusely reflected forward again at the front of the mountain accessory 6500. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the utilization efficiency of the irradiated light.

In the example shown in FIG. 273, the area of the mountain accessory 6500 when viewed from the front is larger than that of the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100; An accessory smaller than the object 6100 may be arranged behind the rabbit accessory 6000 or the stump accessory 6100 so as to have the same function as the mountain accessory 6500. For example, such an accessory may be arranged so as to fit within a region formed by the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit accessory 6000 or the stump plate portion 6210 of the stump accessory 6100 when viewed from the front. Furthermore, examples of such ornaments include white grass ornaments 6400 shown in FIGS. 259(A), 260(A), 263(A), and 269(A) to 269(D). The front surface of the grass substrate 6420 may be exposed, or the front surface of the white grass substrate 6420 may be covered with the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover. Even in such a configuration, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 or the white grass substrate 6420 whose front surface is covered with the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a prevents the rabbit accessory 6000 or the stump accessory 6100 from being removed. It becomes possible to diffusely reflect light forward.

In the rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIG. 272, the entire face substrate 6020 is completely accommodated in the face cover portion 6010 when viewed from the front. Such an aspect may be applied to the relationship between the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 in the grass accessory 6400 described above. In this case, the entire grass substrate 6420 will fit into the grass front cover 6440 when viewed from the front. Alternatively, it may be applied to the relationship between the grass cover 6460 and the grass substrate 6420 in the grass accessory 6400. In this case, the entire grass substrate 6420 will fit into the grass cover 6460 when viewed from the front. Specifically, for example, a plurality of substrates each having a shape resembling a flower may be arranged so that the substrates do not overlap in front view with respect to the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440 or the front surface of the grass front cover 6460, and Each board may be attached to the cover 6440 or the grass cover 6460 so that the entire board is completely accommodated therein. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to realize decoration by a combination of the substrate and the grass front cover 6440 or a combination of the substrate and the grass rear cover 6460. Note that in other examples, such a configuration may be adopted when providing the substrate and the cover.

As shown in FIG. 254, in the game board 5, a space is formed between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game panel 1100 provided in front of the game board side effect display device 1600. Multiple objects are set up in the space. Among these accessories, there are a first giant tree accessory 6600, a second giant tree accessory 6650, a first cloud accessory 6700, a second cloud accessory 6750, and a grass accessory behind the board in a position close to the back side of the game panel 1100. 6800 are provided. These are visible through the game panel 1100 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and have the function of decorating the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

The first giant tree accessory 6600 and the second giant tree accessory 6650 are provided so as to cover the left and right sides of the back surface of the game panel 1100. Specifically, it consists of a first giant tree accessory 6600 located on the left side of the back surface of the game panel 1100 and a second giant tree accessory 6650 located on the right side of the back surface of the game panel 1100. The first giant tree accessory 6600 is composed of a first giant tree trunk board 6610 and a first giant tree leaf board 6630. The first giant tree trunk board 6610 is made of a brown printed circuit board, and the first giant tree leaf board 6630 is made of a green printed board. A plurality of light sources made of LEDs are arranged on the rear surfaces of the first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and the first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and these light sources are oriented to the right. The second giant tree accessory 6650 is composed of a second giant tree trunk board 6660 and a second giant tree leaf board 6680. The second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 is a brown substrate, and the second giant tree leaf substrate 6680 is a green substrate. A plurality of light sources made of LEDs are arranged on the rear surfaces of the second giant tree trunk board 6660 and the first giant leaf board 6680, and these light sources are oriented to the left. The first giant tree ornament 6600 is composed of a first giant tree trunk board 6610 and a first giant leaf board 6630, and the second giant tree ornament 6650 is composed of a second giant tree trunk board 6660 and a second giant leaf board 6680. However, each of these substrates may be configured to adopt the structure related to the grass substrate 6420 of the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIGS. 259(A) to 271(G).

The first cloud accessory 6700 and the second cloud accessory 6750 are provided so as to cover the upper side of the back surface of the game panel 1100. The first cloud accessory 6700 and the second cloud accessory 6750 are each made of a white printed circuit board. Each of these substrates may be configured to adopt the structure related to the grass substrate 6420 of the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIGS. 259(A) to 271(G).

The first giant leaf board 6630 constituting the first giant tree accessory 6600 and the second giant leaf board 6680 constituting the second giant tree accessory 6650 are inserted from the end of the game panel 1100 into the gaming area 5a and further into the game area. The panel opening 1100a is configured to be continuously visible to the player. Further, the second cloud accessory 6750 is configured to be continuously visible to the player from outside the gaming area 5a, inside the gaming area 5a, and further to the gaming panel opening 1100a. On the other hand, the first giant leaf board 6630 that constitutes the first giant tree accessory 6600 and the second giant leaf board 6680 that constitutes the second giant tree accessory 6650 are placed so as to overlay the upper left and upper right of the game board side performance display device 1600. The game board side effect display device 1600 is configured so that it does not look like a rectangle. Note that the mountain yakuza 6500 is also provided so as to overlap the lower left and lower right of the game board side performance display device 1600, and is configured so that the game board side performance display device 1600 does not look like a square. Moreover, the mountain accessory 6500 is provided at the position closest to the game board side performance display device 1600 among the various characters provided in front of the game board side performance display device 1600.

FIG. 274 shows a board back grass accessory 6800. The back grass ornament 6800 is provided close to the back surface of the game panel 1100 so as to cover the lower side of the back surface of the game panel 1100. The back grass accessory 6800 is composed of a back grass substrate 6820 and a cover 6840 in front of the back grass. The front cover 6840 may be made of, for example, colored transparent synthetic resin, and specifically, it may be made of green transparent synthetic resin. Regarding the relationship between the grass substrate 6820 behind the board and the grass front cover 6840 behind the board, the structure related to the grass board 6420 and the grass front cover 6440 of the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIGS. 259(A) to 271(G) is adopted. It may be configured to do so. Similarly, the structure related to the back grass cover 6460 may be adopted for the back grass accessory 6800.

The grass accessory 6800 behind the board has a passage part for passing the game ball that enters the prize opening provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 located at the front and passes through the opening provided in the game panel 1100. As such, a circular-shaped back grass substrate opening 6824 and a circular back grass front cover opening 6848 are provided. The game ball that has passed through the grass behind the board opening 6824 and the grass front cover opening 6848 is detected by a sensor provided on the grass accessory 6800. Further, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached below each passing portion and on the back surface of the board 6820. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the presence of the sensor. As shown below, the first opening 6824a to the fourth opening 6824d of the back grass board serve as the back grass board opening 6824, and the front cover of the back grass board serves as the front grass cover opening 6848. A first opening 6848a to a fourth opening 6848d of the cover in front of the grass behind the board are provided.

The first opening 6824a of the back grass substrate and the first opening 6848a of the front cover 6848a of the grass behind the board are each circular in the same size, and are provided in overlapping positions in the back grass accessory 6800 when viewed from the front. Then, the game ball enters the prize opening provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the first opening 6824a of the grass board behind the board and the first opening 6848a of the front cover of the grass behind the board, and moves to the back surface of the game panel 1100. It forms a passage section for passing.

The front surface of the second opening part 6824b of the board back grass board is not covered by the board back grass front cover 6840, and constitutes a passage section for allowing the game ball to directly pass through the board back grass board 6820 that is exposed.

The board back grass front cover second opening 6848b has no board back grass substrate 6820 located behind it, and only the board back grass front cover second opening 6848b constitutes a passage section for directly passing the game ball. are doing. In this example, the shape of the board back grass substrate 6820 is made to follow the contour of the lower part of the board back grass front cover second opening 6848b. With such a configuration, the shape of the back grass substrate 6820 is made into a decorative external shape, and a passageway is created that guides the game ball that has passed through the second opening 6848b of the front cover of the back grass to the sensor located below. It is possible to make it as difficult to see as possible.

The third opening 6824c of the grass behind the board board and the third opening 6848c of the front cover of the grass behind the board are each circular in the same size, and are provided at positions that overlap when viewed from the front in the grass accessory behind the board 6800. Then, the game ball enters the prize opening provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the third opening 6824c of the grass board behind the board and the third opening 6848c of the front cover of the grass behind the board, and moves to the back side of the game panel 1100. It forms a passage section for passing. In this example, two elliptical areas are formed in the front grass cover 6840 at the upper part of the passage formed by the third opening 6824c of the grass base board behind the board and the third opening 6848c of the front cover 6848c. This makes the decorative shape imitating a rabbit's head visible. In this way, by using the shape of the passing part through which the game ball passes as part of the decorative shape, the presence of the passing part can be made less noticeable, and the decorative function of the grass accessory 6800 behind the board can be made less noticeable. This makes it possible to prevent situations such as damage to the equipment from occurring.

The fourth opening 6824d of the back grass board and the fourth opening 6848d of the front grass cover of the board have the same size and shape, and have a circular shape with two oval parts protruding from the top. I am doing it. Moreover, these are provided at positions that overlap when viewed from the front in the back grass accessory 6800. Then, the game ball enters the prize opening provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the fourth opening 6824d of the grass board behind the board and the fourth opening 6848d of the front cover of the grass behind the board, and moves to the back side of the game panel 1100. It forms a passage section for passing. In this example, the shapes of the third opening 6824c of the back grass substrate and the third opening 6848c of the front cover of the back grass are visually recognizable as decorative shapes imitating the head of a rabbit. In this way, by using the shape of the passing part through which the game ball passes as part of the decorative shape, the existence of the passing part can be made less noticeable, and the decorative function of the grass accessory 6800 behind the board can be made less noticeable. This makes it possible to prevent situations such as damage to the equipment from occurring.

In addition, it is preferable to arrange a cylindrical member formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin in the passage portion through which the game balls pass, so that the game balls can pass therethrough. Further, it is preferable that the cylindrical member is made of a colored and transparent synthetic resin, and the synthetic resin has the same color as the front cover 6840 or the same color as the back grass substrate 6820. With such a configuration, the presence of the cylindrical member can be made less noticeable, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the decorative function of the board back grass accessories 6800 is impaired. .

The first giant tree accessory 6600, the second giant tree accessory 6650, the first cloud accessory 6700, the second cloud accessory 6750, and the grass accessory behind the board 6800 are each attached to the front of the game panel 1100 when viewed from the front. It is located at the rear of the game panel 1100 in such a manner that it straddles the rail member 5950. This makes it possible to visually recognize each accessory as a decoration without being aware of the existence of the rail member 5950. Note that the entire rail member 5950 may be made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. Alternatively, the rail member 5950 may be made up of a plurality of members in the longitudinal direction, and at least one of the members may be made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. With such a configuration, the visibility of each accessory located at the rear is improved, and the range of decoration can be expanded. Furthermore, the rail member 5950 may be formed of synthetic resin of the same color as the accessory located at the rear. For example, when the grass accessory behind the board 6800 is visible in green, the rail member 5950 provided at a position overlapping the grass accessory behind the board 6800 in front view may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

If the game ball that is hit into the game area 5a is electrically charged, discharge will occur at an unintended location, causing electronic components to malfunction due to the high voltage, or causing the control element to cause unintended fraudulent activity due to the electromagnetic pulse generated by the discharge. There is a risk that it may be controlled. In particular, the first giant tree ornament 6600, the second giant tree ornament 6650, the first cloud ornament 6700, the second cloud ornament 6750, and the back grass ornament 6800, which are equipped with printed circuit boards on which electronic parts are mounted. When objects are provided close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, there is a higher possibility that such a situation will occur with electronic components mounted on these boards.

Therefore, in the case where these accessories are provided with a front cover, at least a portion of the front cover may be configured to include a silver-colored opaque portion formed by the above-mentioned metal thin film. More specifically, the front cover may be configured so that such an opaque portion is located in front of a location where electronic components are mounted on the board. Further, each accessory may be configured so that the front surface of each accessory that may be affected by such a charged game ball does not come into contact with the back surface of the game panel 1100. Alternatively, each accessory is provided so that at least the front surface of each accessory does not touch the back surface of the game panel 1100 in an area that overlaps the game area 5a where the charged game ball rolls and falls when viewed from the front. may be configured.

Further, it is desirable that the grounding route of the grounding wire (not shown) provided on the game panel 1100 and the grounding route of the grounding wire (not shown) provided on each accessory are separated as much as possible. For example, a ground wire (not shown) provided on the game panel 1100 may be finally installed on the island equipment via a ground circuit provided on each accessory, or conversely, a ground wire for each accessory may be installed on the game panel 1100. It is not preferable to install it on an island facility via a ground circuit connected to the ground. Therefore, it is preferable to provide a ground circuit board with a static elimination function at a predetermined location on the back of the game machine so that the ground path from the game panel 1100 and the ground path from each accessory join at the ground circuit board. . With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the influence of the charged game balls hit into the game area 5a.

In FIG. 246 and FIG. 254, an example is shown in which a back-of-the-board grass accessory 6800 is provided below the back surface of the game panel 1100, but instead of the back-of-the-board grass accessory 6800, a mountain accessory 6500, a rabbit accessory 6000, a stump accessory The object 6100 may be provided below the back surface of the game panel 1100. In this case as well, the light that has been diffusely reflected backward from the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 can be reflected forward again, thereby increasing the light utilization efficiency. In addition, by utilizing the reflection function of the mountain board 6520, other decorative accessories and a prize opening unit equipped with a prize opening can be placed in front of the mountain accessory in the same way as the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100. It may be configured as follows. Even in this case, it is possible to reflect the light emitted from the light emitting part provided in the decorative accessory or the winning a prize opening unit and diffusely reflected backwards forward on the front surface of the mountain board 6520.

In addition, by providing multiple cylindrical spacers on the back side of the front cover that makes up these accessories, the front side of the board touches the top of the spacer and does not come into direct contact with the back side of the front cover. You may. Specifically, the structure of each spacer is preferably a cylindrical structure having a height of about 2 mm and a diameter of about 2 mm perpendicularly from the back surface of the front cover. Further, it is preferable that the spacer and the front cover are integrally molded from the same material. Further, when the front cover has a plurality of regions, the spacer may be configured to be provided in a region where the rear side is more difficult to see. For example, the colored transparent part, the colored light scattering part, and the spacer of the front cover may be integrally molded using a green transparent synthetic resin. At this time, the spacer becomes green and transparent. Further, in this case, it is preferable that the colored transparent portion is not provided with a spacer, but the colored light scattering portion is provided with a spacer. By providing a spacer having such a configuration, the front cover and the substrate are arranged in parallel with each other separated by the height of the spacer. With this configuration, the part closest to the back surface of the game panel 1100 is decorated by the front cover, and the board is decorated at a position several mm backward from the front cover. At this time, compared to the case where the board is used to decorate the part closest to the back of the game panel 1100, the board is located at the rear, so the color of the board and the external shape of the board can provide a decorative effect. Also, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of through holes and electronic components provided on the board. Further, by separating the back surface of the game panel 1100 from the board, it is possible to reduce the influence of discharge from charged game balls and electromagnetic pulses on the board.

The grass accessory behind the board 6800, the first giant tree accessory 6600, the second giant tree accessory 6650, the first cloud accessory 6700, and the second cloud accessory 6750 are each provided close to the back surface of the game panel 1100. . Specifically, it is arranged on the front side of the intermediate position between the surface forming the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the back surface of the game panel 1100. In addition, in the space between the grass accessory behind the board 6800, the first giant tree accessory 6600, the second giant tree accessory 6650, the first cloud accessory 6700, the second cloud accessory 6750 and the game board side effect display device 1600. A rabbit accessory 6000 and a stump accessory 6100 are provided as movable accessories. Note that the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 600 may be configured to be provided at the bottom of the game panel 1100 where the grass accessory 6800 behind the board is provided.

Accessories that do not have a front cover, such as the first giant tree accessory 6600, the second giant tree accessory 6650, the first cloud accessory 6700, and the second cloud accessory 6750, are configured so that a light emitting part is provided on the front surface of the board. In this case, a scattering portion that scatters the light emitted from the light emitting portion may be formed on the back surface of the game panel 1100 that overlaps the light emitting portion when viewed from the front. Alternatively, in these accessories, even if a colored transparent or colorless transparent front cover is provided at a position overlapping the light emitting part when viewed from the front, the scattering part is similarly formed on the back surface of the game panel 1100. You may.

Although FIGS. 255 to 258 show an example in which the stump accessory 6100 is provided, the members constituting the stump accessory 6100 may be configured to be movable as an effect. For example, the box top wall 6310, box right wall 6320, box bottom wall 6330, box left wall 6340, and box rear wall 6350 that constitute the stump box section 6300 may be configured to be movable as a presentation.

275(A) to 275(D) illustrate moving the box top wall 6310 to box left wall 6340 from the standby position in the stump box section 6300 shown in FIGS. 257(A) and 258(A). It is a figure which showed the state moved to the position. FIG. 275(A) shows an example in which the box top wall 6310 is moved rearward to a state where the front end of the box top wall 6310 contacts the top end of the box rear wall 6350. FIG. 275(B) shows an example in which the box right wall 6320 is moved rearward to the left until the front end of the box right wall 6320 contacts the right end of the box rear wall 6350. FIG. 275(C) shows an example in which the box lower wall 6330 is moved rearward to a state where the front end of the box lower wall 6330 contacts the lower end of the box rear wall 6350. FIG. 275(D) shows an example in which the box right wall 6320 is moved rearward to the right until the front end of the box right wall 6320 contacts the left end of the box rear wall 6350. Note that only one of the box top wall 6310 to box left wall 6340 may be configured to be movable as shown in the figure, and the other walls may be configured to be immovable. A plurality of walls among the section 6310 to the box left wall section 6340 may be configured to be movable. For example, all of the box upper wall section 6310 to the box left wall section 6340 may be configured to be movable.

With such a configuration, the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a and the second rear wall are connected to the stump plate section 6210, the first grass movable section 6360, and the second grass movable section 6370 provided in front of the stump box section 6300. The manner in which light is irradiated from the light emitting section 6354b can be changed. For example, before the box upper wall section 6310 is moved backward, light is reflected on each inner wall of the stump box section 6300 and the stump plate section 6210 is illuminated in a shape corresponding to the front surface shape of the stump box section 6300. The Rukoto. On the other hand, when the box top wall section 6310 is moved backward, the light from the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting section 6354b is no longer reflected on the box top wall section 6310. The light radiated diagonally upward from the portion 6354 travels straight and illuminates the back side of the stump plate portion 6210. Therefore, in addition to the shape corresponding to the front surface shape of the stump box section 6300, the stump plate section 6210 is also illuminated in the area above the front surface of the stump box section 6300. In this way, by moving the box upper wall portion 6310, it is possible to change the illuminated area. Note that even when the box right wall section 6320 to the box left wall section 6340 are slid backward instead of the box top wall section 6310, the illuminated area changes depending on each moved wall section. It becomes possible to do so.

Further, the box rear wall portion 6350 may be configured to be able to move in the front-rear direction while maintaining its inclination. For example, from the state shown in FIG. 257(A) or FIG. 258(A), the upper end of the box rear wall 6350 is at the front end of the box upper wall 6310, and the lower end of the box rear wall 6350 is at the box lower wall 6330. The box rear wall portion 6350 may be configured to be movable forward so as to be in contact with each front end. Further, it may be configured to be movable backward from the state shown in FIG. 257(A).

Furthermore, the box top wall 6310 to the box left wall 6340 may be configured to be rotatable relative to the box rear wall 6350. For example, the box right wall 6320 and the box left wall 6340 are made into rectangular shapes of the same size as the box rear wall 6350, and the side formed by the box right wall 6320 and the box rear wall 6350 is the box left wall 6340. The box rear wall portion 6350 may be configured to be rotatable around the side formed by the box rear wall portion 6350. By rotating the box right wall section 6320 and the box left wall section 6340 inward, the box right wall section 6320 and the box left wall section 6340 can be configured to cover the front surface of the box rear wall section 6350. By rotating the right wall section 6320 and the box left wall section 6340 outward, the box rear wall section 6350 and the box right wall section 6320 and the box left wall section 6340 may be configured to be in a parallel state. In addition, the box upper wall 6310 and the box lower wall 6330 are made into rectangular shapes of the same size as the box rear wall 6350, and the box rear wall 6350 is made in the same manner as the box right wall 6320 and the box left wall 6340. It may be configured to be rotatable with respect to.

Although an example has been shown in which the box rear wall section 6350 is movable, in the examples shown in FIGS. The rear wall cover 6356 constituting the wall portion 6350 may be configured to be rotatable or movable in the front-back direction similarly to the box rear wall portion 6350 described above. When the rear wall cover 6356 is rotated, the light from the rear wall light emitting section 6354 can be directly irradiated onto the stump opening 6210a without going through the rear wall cover 6356. On the other hand, when the rear wall cover 6356 is moved forward, a distance is created between the rear wall light emitting section 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356, and the light from the rear wall light emitting section 6354 spreads radially to the rear wall. It becomes possible to illuminate the entire cover 6356. In addition, when such an aspect is adopted, it is preferable that regions other than the first rear wall cover light scattering section 6358a and the second rear wall cover light scattering section 6358b in the rear wall cover 6356 also be used as scattering sections. With this configuration, by making the rear wall cover 6356 movable in the front-back direction, a state where a part of the rear wall cover 6356 is illuminated and a state where the entire rear wall cover 6356 is illuminated can be changed. can be made visible to the player.

In the example shown in FIGS. 258(A) to 258(D), the rear wall plate part 6380 is fixedly provided, and the rear wall board 6352 and the rear wall cover 6356 are attached to the rear wall plate part 6380 in the box described above. Like the rear wall portion 6350, it may be configured to be movable in the front and rear direction.

Examples have been shown in which a fixedly provided member may be made movable, but in these examples, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and It is preferable to continue the second rear wall light emitting section 6354b and maintain a predetermined light emitting mode. As the predetermined light emission mode, for example, the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting section 6354b continue to light up, blink periodically, or are in an off state in which they do not emit light. You may also do so. Further, when performing a light emitting mode in which the light continues to turn on or flash periodically, it may be configured to continue emitting light in the same color. With such a configuration, instead of changing the light emission mode of the first rear wall light emitting part 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting part 6354b, the box upper wall part 6310 to the box rear wall part 6350, and the rear wall cover 6356 By moving members such as, it is possible to change the performance mode visually recognized by the player.

On the other hand, the light emitting mode of the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting section 6354b may be changed during the period from the timing when the movement of the member starts to the timing when the movement of the member ends. good. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to realize a more complicated presentation mode.

Note that an example was shown in which members such as the box top wall 6310 to the box rear wall 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 are moved from the state shown in FIGS. 257 and 258 as an effect. By moving members such as the wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 as an effect, a predetermined member that has been moved may be configured to be in the state shown in FIG. 257 or FIG. 258. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to change the performance mode visually recognized by the player.

Although an example has been shown in which the first grass movable section 6360 and the second grass movable section 6370 move in the left and right directions, the first grass movable section 6360 and the second grass movable section 6370 may be configured not to move. Even with such a configuration, the light emitting mode of the stump accessory 6100 can be varied by moving members such as the box top wall 6310 to the box rear wall 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356. Further, the first grass movable section 6360 and the second grass movable section 6370 may be configured as one member. In this case, the first grass decoration part 6360a and the second grass decoration part 6370a may be configured as one decoration part, or may be configured as a plurality of decoration parts. In addition, the first grass decoration part 6360a and the second grass decoration part 6370a are made colored and translucent by painting, pasting a sticker, etc., so that when the light from the rear wall light emitting part 6354 is irradiated forward, the first grass decoration part 6360a and the second grass decoration part 6370a It may be configured such that the decorative portion 6360a and the second grass decorative portion 6370a are illuminated with light to create a dramatic state.

Moreover, as shown below, the stump accessory 6100 is configured by the stump box part 6300 and the grass board part 6381 without providing the first grass movable part 6360, the second grass movable part 6370, and the stump board part 6210. It may be configured as follows.

FIG. 276 shows an example in which the stump plate part 6210 is not provided in front of the stump box part 6300, and instead of the first movable grass part 6360 and the second movable grass part 6370, a fixed grass plate part 6381 is provided. It shows. The grass board portion is preferably made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. Further, the grass board portion 6381 has a plurality of decorative portions. Specifically, a green grass board colored transparent part 6381a imitating the external shape of grass, a grass board center decoration part 6382a imitating the shape of an animal's face, a grass board upper decoration part 6382b, a grass board right decoration part 6382c, It includes a lower grass board decoration part 6382d, a left grass board decoration part 6382e, and a colorless and transparent grass board part 6381b which is an area other than these. The colored transparent part 6381a of the grass board, the center decoration part 6382a of the grass board, the top decoration part 6382b of the grass board, the right decoration part 6382c of the grass board, the bottom decoration part 6382d of the grass board, and the left decoration part 6382e of the grass board are each made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. It is constructed by printing or pasting a sticker on the front or rear surface of the grass board portion 6381. Note that the central decorative portion 6382a of the grass board has a linear shape of an animal's face and ears, and the rear wall board 6352 located at the rear can be visually recognized. On the other hand, the upper grass plate decoration part 6382b, the right grass plate decoration part 6382c, the lower grass plate decoration part 6382d, and the left grass plate decoration part 6382e have shapes that imitate animal faces, and are translucent or colored transparent that can transmit light. It is composed of

In such a configuration, as described above, members such as the box top wall 6310, the box right wall 6320, the box bottom wall 6330, the box left wall 6340, the box rear wall 6350, and the rear wall cover 6356 are moved. By doing so, it is possible to change the illumination mode of the grass board center decoration part 6382a, the grass board top decoration part 6382b, the grass board right decoration part 6382c, the grass board bottom decoration part 6382d, and the grass board left decoration part 6382e. In particular, the grass board top decoration part 6382b, the grass board right decoration part 6382c, the grass board bottom decoration part 6382d, and the grass board left decoration part 6382e were irradiated with light from a state where almost no light had been irradiated until then. The shape of each animal's face can be made visible to the player.

The stump box section 6300 is a box-shaped box having a box top wall section 6310, a box right wall section 6320, a box bottom wall section 6330, a box left wall section 6340, and a box rear wall section 6350 as each side, and does not have a front surface. However, the position, size, and shape of at least one of these members may be changed.

FIG. 277 shows a modification of the example shown in FIG. 276. In this example, the box upper wall 6310 and the box lower wall 6330 are rectangular with the same width as the box rear wall 6350, and the box right wall 6320 and the box left wall 6340 are connected to the box rear wall 6350. By forming a right angle, the stump box part 6300 is made into a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the stump board part 6210 is not provided, and the grass board part 6381 is located close to the front of the opening of the stump box part 6300. are doing. In such a configuration, as described above, as an effect, the rear wall light emitting section 6354 is set to a light emitting mode, and the box upper wall section 6310, the box right wall section 6320, the box lower wall section 6330, and the box left wall section 6340 are set to a light emitting mode. By configuring it to rotate or slide in the front-back direction, the manner in which the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting section 6354 is irradiated onto the grass board section 6381 can be changed. In addition to making the stump box part 6300 into a rectangular parallelepiped shape, the grass board right decorative part 6382c is moved to the left and the grass board left decorative part 6382e is moved to the right compared to the example shown in FIG. It is located in the same position.

278 to 280 show modifications of the example shown in FIG. 277. In the examples shown in FIGS. 278 to 280, the shape and mounting manner of the box rear wall portion 6350 are different. In the example shown in FIG. 278(A), the box rear wall portion 6350 is provided at a position shifted by half toward the left when viewed from the front. FIG. 278(B) shows an enlarged view of the stump box section 6300 in the example shown in FIG. 278(A).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 279(A), the entire box rear wall portion 6350 is configured to be enlarged to twice the length in the left direction when viewed from the front. FIG. 279(B) shows an enlarged view of the stump box section 6300 in the example shown in FIG. 279(A). FIG. 281(A) is a diagram showing the rear wall cover 6356 in the modified example shown in FIG. 279(A). Moreover, FIG. 281(B) is a diagram showing the rear wall substrate 6352 in the modified example shown in FIG. 279(A).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 280(A), the box rear wall portion 6350 is configured to be reduced in size to half in the left direction when viewed from the front. FIG. 280(B) shows an enlarged view of the stump box section 6300 in the example shown in FIG. 280(A). FIG. 281(C) is a diagram showing the rear wall cover 6356 in the modified example shown in FIG. 280(A). Moreover, FIG. 281(D) is a diagram showing the rear wall substrate 6352 in the modified example shown in FIG. 280(A).

On such a premise, the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting section 6354b included in the stump box section 6300 shown in FIG. 278(A) and FIG. 279(A) (for details, see FIG. 258(A), 258(B), FIG. 281(A), and FIG. 281(B)), the light-emitting decoration state in which the grass plate center decorative portion 6382a and the grass plate left decorative portion 6382e are illuminated from behind It becomes possible to do this. Here, by moving the box upper wall part 6310 backward, it becomes possible to make the grass board upper decoration part 6382b also in a light-emitting decorative state. On the other hand, the central decorative portion 6382a of the grass plate becomes relatively inconspicuous because the amount of light irradiated thereon decreases. In addition, when the box right wall 6320 and the box bottom wall 6330 are moved backward instead of the box upper wall 6310, the grass plate right decorative part 6382c and the lower grass plate decorative part 6382d are in the light-emitting decoration state. can do. Although an example has been shown in which both the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting section 6354b emit light, in the example shown in (A) in FIG. It may be configured so that no light is emitted in the protruding area. In this case, only the central decorative portion 6382a of the grass board can be in a light-emitting decorative state. From this state, as described above, the box upper wall 6310, the box right wall 6320, and the box lower wall 6330 may be moved rearward.

In addition, the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting section 6354b (see FIGS. 281(C) and 281(D) for details) of the stump box section 6300 shown in FIG. 280(A) emit light. In this state, it is possible to make the grass board central decorative portion 6382a into a light emitting decorative state illuminated from the rear. Here, by moving the box upper wall part 6310 backward, it becomes possible to make the grass board upper decoration part 6382b also in a light-emitting decorative state. On the other hand, the central decorative portion 6382a of the grass plate becomes relatively inconspicuous because the amount of light irradiated thereon decreases. In addition, when the box right wall 6320, the box bottom wall 6330, and the box left wall 6340 are moved backward instead of the box top wall 6310, the grass board right decorative part 6382c, the grass board bottom decorative part 6382d, the grass board left decorative portion 6382e can be made into a light-emitting decorative state.

In this way, when the grass board center decoration part 6382a is decorated with light, by moving the box upper wall part 6310, the box right wall part 6320, the box lower wall part 6330, and the box left wall part 6340 backward, the grass board center decoration part 6382a is decorated with light. The upper plate decoration part 6382b, the right grass plate decoration part 6382c, the lower grass plate decoration part 6382d, and the left grass plate decoration part 6382e can be in a light-emitting decorative state. Further, at this time, the central decorative portion 6382a of the grass plate enters a light-emitting decorative state with a weaker amount of light than before. In this way, by setting the grass board top decoration part 6382b, grass board right decoration part 6382c, grass board bottom decoration part 6382d, and grass board left decoration part 6382e in the light-emitting decorative state, some state in the gaming machine is suggested or notified. It may be configured as follows. For example, when four states with different degrees of advantage for the player are occurring or are likely to occur, the grass board decoration part 6382b is set to the light-emitting decoration state corresponding to the most advantageous state, and the second most advantageous state is set to the light-emitting decoration state. Corresponding to the most advantageous state, the grass board right decorative part 6382c is set to a light-emitting decoration state, corresponding to the third most advantageous state, the grass board left decoration part 6382e is set to a light-emitting decoration state, and corresponding to the fourth most advantageous state, the grass board left decorative part 6382e is set to a light-emitting decoration state. The lower grass board decorative portion 6382d may be configured to be in a light-emitting decorative state. By adopting such an aspect, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation in the player as to which wall section will move in a state where the central decoration section 6382a of the grass board is decorated with light.

Alternatively, with the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting section 6354b turned off, and the grass plate center decoration section 6382a not being decorated with light, first, the box upper wall section 6310, the box right wall section 6320 , even if the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting section 6354b are set to the light emitting state after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after moving either the box lower wall section 6330 or the box left wall section 6340 backward. good. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to know which of the upper grass plate decoration part 6382b, the right grass plate decoration part 6382c, the lower grass plate decoration part 6382d, and the left grass plate decoration part 6382e is visible. It becomes possible to notify in advance. In this case, each wall is provided in an upright state with respect to the front direction, and the player cannot necessarily notice that each wall has moved. Therefore, a player who is able to notice the movement of one of the wall parts will watch with great anticipation the subsequent change in the light-emitting decoration mode of one of the decorative parts, which will improve the interest of the game. becomes possible.

Furthermore, for example, in a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player (a so-called normal gaming state, etc.), the box upper wall 6310 to the box left wall 6340 are placed in the forward position (non-operating position), and the front grass plate center decoration part 6382a Only when the shipping decoration is in a limited manner, and the state is advantageous to the player (for example, probability fluctuation state, time-saving game state, jackpot game state), the box upper wall part 6310 to the box left wall part 6340 may be moved rearward to irradiate light to the upper grass board decoration part 6382b to the left grass board decoration part 6382e, thereby increasing the area where the light emitting decoration mode is applied. Thereby, the appearance of the light emitting area can also be changed in accordance with the player's increasing interest as he moves from a disadvantageous gaming state to an advantageous gaming state.

In addition, in the example shown with reference to FIG. 278(A) and FIG. 280(A), an opening is provided on the right side of the box rear wall portion 6350, but in this case, for example, an opening is provided in the front-rear direction. The moving decorative member may be configured to appear and retract from the opening.

With reference to FIGS. 278(A) to 281(D), an example in which the box rear wall portion 6350 is shifted to the left, enlarged or reduced is shown, but However, it may be arranged so that it is similarly shifted, enlarged or reduced. Furthermore, the structure of the stump box section 6300 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 257, but may adopt the example shown in FIG. 258.

In FIGS. 257 and 258, an example is shown in which the first rear wall light emitting part 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting part 6354b are provided on the box rear wall part 6350, but instead of the box rear wall part 6350, the box upper wall part 6310 ~At least one wall of the box left wall 6340 may be provided with a structure related to light emission, such as a light emitting part or a light scattering part.

Specifically, in the modified example shown with reference to FIGS. 276(A) to 281(D), the light emitting portion and the light scattering portion described with reference to FIG. 257 and FIG. may be provided to illuminate the inside of the stump box section 6300 and the grass board section 6381. At this time, at least one wall of the box right wall 6320, the box bottom wall 6330, and the box left wall 6340 is moved rearward as in the examples shown in FIGS. 275(A) to 275(D). It is recommended to configure With this configuration, in the grass board section 6381, from a state in which only the area in front corresponding to the opening of the stump box section 6300 was mainly illuminated, in addition to the area in front of the opening of the stump box section 6300. This makes it possible to illuminate the right, downward, and left sides. Note that although an example has been shown in which a light emitting section and a light scattering section are provided on the box top wall section 6310 to illuminate the inside of the stump box section 6300, instead of the box top wall section 6310, a box right wall section 6320 is provided. , a light emitting part and a light scattering part may be provided in the box lower wall part 6330 and the box left wall part 6340, and the illumination mode may be changed by moving each wall part.

The box top wall 6310, the box right wall 6320, the box bottom wall 6330, and the box left wall 6340 are each formed into a plate shape with the same thickness. The inner wall of the wall may be inclined outward so that the thickness of the wall becomes thinner. With such a configuration, the light reflected within the stump box section 6300 can be further reflected forward.

In order to move the box top wall 6310 to the box left wall 6340 and change the manner of light irradiation to the grass board 6381 as described above, the box top wall 6310 to the box left wall 6340 are colored and opaque. It is preferable to provide a reflective portion capable of reflecting light and a scattering portion capable of scattering light by plating the inner wall with a thin aluminum film. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the manner in which the manner in which light is irradiated onto the grass board portion 6381 change more prominently. Note that even if the box top wall 6310 to the box left wall 6340 are formed of a colorless transparent or colored transparent material and the inner and outer walls are smooth, the manner in which light is irradiated to the grass board 6381 can be changed. It is possible to do so.

As mentioned above, members such as the box top wall 6310 to the box rear wall 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 may be deformed to be movable, but it is also possible to make only one of these members movable. Alternatively, any plurality of members may be movable, or all members may be movable. For example, it may be configured such that only the box upper wall portion 6310 is movable and the other members are fixedly provided so as not to be movable. Alternatively, the box top wall section 6310 and the box right wall section 6320 may be made movable, and other members may be fixedly provided so as not to be movable. . Furthermore, all of the box top wall 6310 to the box rear wall 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 may be movable. Even with such a configuration, the light emitting decoration mode for the grass board portion 6381 can be changed.

Note that the movement of the box top wall 6310 to the box rear wall 6350, the rear wall cover 6356, etc. may be configured to be performed by a drive means (not shown) by the peripheral control board 1510. Further, it is preferable that the light emission of the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a, the second rear wall light emitting section 6354b, etc. is also controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

246 to 281 are illustrated, various movable bodies (rabbit accessory 6000, stump accessory 6100, etc.) used for presentation and decoration on the game board 5 provided in the pachinko machine 1. Hereinafter, movable bodies in the game board ), but below, a movable body (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a frame movable body) used for presentation or decoration is provided to the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1. An embodiment is shown.

282(A) to FIG. 282(E) show that a right ear frame movable body 7100 imitating the ear of an animal (specifically, a rabbit) is attached to the door frame top unit 570 constituting the door frame 3 as a frame movable body. An embodiment in which a left ear frame movable body 7200 is provided is shown. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are movable in the vertical direction, and the specific structure and operation mode will be described later.

282(A) and 282(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 282(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 282(D) and FIG. 282(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 282(A), FIG. 282(C), and FIG. 282(D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570. 282(B) and 282(E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570. FIG. 282(D) shows a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570.

In this embodiment, a door frame top unit 570 is provided at the top of the door frame 3. A glass unit 190 is provided in the center of the door frame 3, and through the glass unit 190, the game area 5a located at the rear, the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, and various movable bodies in the game board are displayed. (Rabbit accessory 6000, stump accessory 6100, etc.) are visible. A pan unit 320 and a handle unit 300 are provided at the bottom of the door frame 3. Furthermore, the performance operation unit 400 is equipped with an operation button 410, and is capable of receiving operation input from a player. In addition, in the figure, illustration of the upper tray 321, the lower tray 322, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, etc. is omitted.

The door frame top unit 570 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape, and its top surface, right side surface, and left side surface are the same as the top surface, right side surface, and left side surface of the door frame base unit 100 constituting the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3, respectively. They are arranged so that they overlap when viewed from the front. The door frame top unit 570 is made of white, translucent synthetic resin and has a thickness of approximately several mm, and is capable of transmitting light. The door frame top unit 570 has a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 corresponding to a right ear frame movable body 7100 movable in the vertical direction, and a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 corresponding to a left ear frame movable body 7200 movable in the vertical direction. A frame top unit upper left ear opening 7010 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 282(A) to 282(E), the door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment includes a right ear frame movable body 7100 on the left side and a left ear frame movable body 7200 on the right side when viewed from the front. There is. Their specific structures and operating modes are shown below. In addition, since the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have basically the same structure, in the following description, only the right ear frame movable body 7100 may be explained as a representative.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 has a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 facing forward and a right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 facing backward. ing. The first surface 7110 of the movable right ear frame consists of an inner decoration part 7112 on the first surface of the movable right ear frame made of a colored (specifically, pink) transparent synthetic resin, and a white translucent synthetic resin on the outside. It has a right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114. The surfaces of the right ear frame movable body 7100 other than the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 (top surface, left side surface, right side surface, right ear frame movable body second surface 7120) are the outside of the right ear frame movable body first surface. It is made of the same white translucent synthetic resin as the decorative portion 7114. Note that the left ear frame movable body 7200 also has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100.

Inside the right ear frame movable body 7100, a right ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7116 is provided at a position overlapping the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decoration part 7112 in front view. Further, a right ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7118 is provided at a position overlapping the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decoration portion 7114 in front view. Specifically, the right ear frame movable body inner light emitting section 7116 is composed of a printed circuit board with a white protective film coated on both sides, and a light emitting diode capable of emitting light toward the player is mounted on its surface. has been done. The right ear frame movable body inner light emitting section 7116 and the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting section 7118 are capable of emitting light in a predetermined light emission manner forward under the control of the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to decorate the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decoration portion 7112 with light emission by the movable body inner light emitting portion 7116, and the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decoration portion 7114 with the right ear frame movable body outer light emission portion 7118. It is. Note that the left ear frame movable body 7200 also has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are moved as shown in FIGS. 282(A), 282(C), and 282(D), respectively, by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. From the state (first state) stored in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570, vertically move upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. 282(B) and 282(E). It is possible to control it to a state where it protrudes (second state). The upper surfaces of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are formed flush with the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position. has been done. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have shapes imitating animal ears, and are housed in the door frame top unit 570 and protrude vertically upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570. It is possible to decoratively express the state in which the animal's ears move by taking the state in which the animal's ears move.

In this embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 is made of white, translucent synthetic resin and has a thickness of approximately several mm. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 282(A), when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7116, the right ear frame movable body When the movable body outer light emitting section 7118, the left ear frame movable body inner light emitting section 7216, and the left ear frame movable body outer light emitting section 7218 are made to emit light in a predetermined manner, the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 is dimly emitted. It is possible for the player to visually recognize the game in the state where the game is displayed. Note that a similar structure may be adopted for the door frame top unit 570 in other embodiments, and in this case as well, light irradiated from a light emitting part provided corresponding to the frame movable body hits the door frame top. The light is reflected and scattered within the unit 570, and the front and side surfaces of the door frame top unit 570 can be seen by the player in a dimly emitted state.

On the other hand, in a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude from the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7116, the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7118, the left ear frame When the movable body inner light emitting part 7216 and the left ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7218 are made to emit light in a predetermined manner, the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decoration part that the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 has. 7112, right ear frame movable body first side outer decoration part 7114, left ear frame movable body first side inner decoration part 7212 and left ear frame movable body first side outer decoration part of left ear frame movable body first side 7210. 7214 can be made visible to the player in a predetermined light emitting effect state.

In this way, by moving the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as frame movable body), a part of the frame movable body is moved to the outer frame 2 or the door frame base unit 100. Because it is located above the top surface, the area it occupies for the player's field of view increases, and the volume of the casing appears to have increased, giving the player an unprecedented level of surprise and fun. It becomes possible to give it to

Next, with reference to FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B), the game board side is adjusted according to the specific operation mode of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the operation mode of the frame movable body. The display mode of the frame movable body simulation image, which is an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the operation button 410 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the operation unit) Player operation reception mode, right ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7116, right ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7118, left ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7216, left ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7218 (hereinafter referred to as frame An example of a performance combining light emitting modes etc. in a movable body light emitting section (sometimes referred to as a movable body light emitting section) is shown below.

283(A) to FIG. 284(B) respectively show the operation mode of the frame movable body and the display of a frame movable body simulated image that is an image simulating the frame movable body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is a time chart showing the state, the acceptance state of the operation unit, the display state of the operation instruction display displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, and the light emission performance state of the frame movable body light emitting unit.

In addition, in the time charts shown in FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B), in order to explain the timing of the effect, t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. are indicated according to the passage of time. The time between each timing is 1 second. In addition, these points are explained in each drawing such as FIGS. 292(A) to 293(B), FIG. 298(A) to FIG. 299(B), and FIG. 307(A) to FIG. The same applies to each drawing etc. in which the above is modified.

FIG. 283(A) shows an example of a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 283(B) shows an example of a production pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 284(A) shows an example of a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 284(B) shows an example of a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each production pattern shown in FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B), the manner in which the frame movable body moves, the display manner of the frame movable body simulated image, the timing at which operation reception on the operation unit becomes valid, and the operation instruction display are The timing at which it starts and the timing at which the light-emitting section of the frame movable body changes from the light-emitting effect state to the light-out state are the same. On the other hand, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends and the timing at which the light emitting section of the frame movable body changes from the unlit state to the light emitting effect state or the specific light emitting effect state may differ depending on the effect pattern. Specific performance examples for each performance pattern will be shown below with reference to FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B).

In the production patterns shown in FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570 in the initial state (before timing t0). state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the first state or standby state). In this state, when a reach effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing between timing t0 and timing t7 (for example, timing t4), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 simultaneously rise. (timing t7).

At the same time, display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the center of the game board side effect display device 1600. At the same time, display of a door frame top unit simulated image, which is an image simulating the door frame top unit 570, is also started. Specifically, the frame movable body simulation image is composed of an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and an image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. In the frame movable body simulation image, an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and an image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 rise in accordance with the rise of the real right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200. dynamically displayed in a manner that The frame movable body simulation image is an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a left ear frame movable body in accordance with the timing (timing t9) when the real right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 finish rising. After the image imitating the body 7200 has finished rising, it continues to be displayed in a stopped state (after timing t9). The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in a state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a second state or a rising state) in which the rising is completed at timing t9, which is two seconds after starting the rising at timing t7. Become.

On the other hand, at timing t9, the acceptance of the operation on the operation unit becomes valid, and display of an image instructing the operation on the operation unit on the game board side effect display device 1600 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as operation instruction display) starts. Ru. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string instructing to operate the operation section (for example, a character string "Push!!") may be displayed. You can. Note that the operation validity period continues until an operation is accepted on the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time has elapsed (until timing t18). Further, at timing t9, all the frame movable body light emitting parts change from the state in which they have performed the light emission effect to the light-out state.

FIG. 283(A) and FIG. 283(B) show the production mode when the operation on the operation unit is performed at timing t14 after the period in which the operation on the operation unit is valid has started (timing t9). It shows. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t14, and the frame movable body light emitting section enters a predetermined light emitting effect state corresponding to the special lottery result.

FIG. 283(A) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot, and when the operation section is operated (timing t14), the light emitting section of the frame movable body changes from the off state to the normal state. A specific light emitting effect state that is different from the light emitting effect state is obtained. In this way, when the frame movable body light emitting section enters the specific light emitting performance state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is a jackpot.

On the other hand, FIG. 283(B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss, and when the operation section is operated (timing t14), the frame movable body light emitting section changes from the off state to the normal state. It will be in a light emitting state. In this way, when the frame movable body light emitting section enters the normal light emitting performance state, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is a loss.

In the specific light emission state, compared to the light emission mode in the normal light emission state, the light blinks faster, the light intensity becomes stronger, and the number of colors increases, making the player feel more stimulated. It is preferable to adopt a light emitting mode. In this way, when the performance state of the specific light emitting mode different from normal is visually recognized by the player, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is a jackpot. Specifically, in the specific light emitting effect state, the inner part of the frame movable body and the outer part of the frame movable body may be configured to be in the light emitting effect state in different ways. For example, the inner part of the frame movable body may be configured to be visible in a more stimulating light emitting manner than the outer part of the frame movable body. Note that this definition of the specific light emitting effect state and the normal light emitting effect state may be configured to be applied to other embodiments.

FIGS. 284(A) and 284(B) show that after the period in which operations on the operating section are valid has started (timing t9), the player does not operate the operating section during the valid operation period; This shows a performance mode when the operation valid period ends at timing t18 after a predetermined time period has elapsed. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t18, and the frame movable body light emitting section enters a predetermined light emitting effect state according to the special lottery result.

FIG. 284(A) is a production pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot, in which the frame movable body light emitting section emits a specific light emission state different from the normal light emission production state at the timing when the valid operation period ends (timing t18). It becomes a performance state. In this way, when the frame movable body light emitting section enters the specific light emitting performance state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is a jackpot.

On the other hand, FIG. 284(B) shows a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a loss, and at the timing when the valid operation period ends (timing t18), the light emitting part of the frame movable body returns to the normal light emitting performance state. . In this way, the light emitting section enters the normal light emitting performance state, thereby indicating to the player that the special lottery result is a loss.

In each performance pattern shown in FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B), at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the operation validity period ends, the changing decorative pattern corresponds to the special lottery result. It will stop and be displayed. For example, in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 283(A) and 284(A), the special lottery result is in the form of a row of eyes (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the result is a jackpot. In the case of the performance patterns shown in FIGS. 283(B) and 284(B) in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the reach loss mode (for example, "7", "6", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is displayed. ), the decorative pattern will be stopped and displayed.

At the timing (timing t22) when two seconds have elapsed since the decorative pattern stopped, the frame movable body moves to the raised position (second state) while maintaining the light emitting mode of either the specific light emitting effect state or the normal light emitting effect state. ) to the storage position (first state). At the same time, the frame movable body simulated image takes on a display mode in which it descends in accordance with the downward movement of the actual right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200. At the timing when the movement of the frame movable body to the storage position is completed (timing t24), the frame movable body simulated image changes to a display mode in which the descent has been completed in accordance with the lowering movement of the actual frame movable body, and The display ends.

When the special lottery result is a jackpot, the light emitting state of the frame movable body may be configured to change from a specific light emitting effect state to a normal light emitting effect state at a predetermined timing during the jackpot. If the special lottery result is a loss, the normal light emitting effect state is continued and the next decorative pattern variation is started.

FIGS. 285(A) to 285(C) show the movement state of the frame movable body, the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image, and the reception of the operation unit when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 283(A) is executed. It is a diagram schematically showing changes in the state, the operation instruction display state, and the light emitting effect state of the frame movable body over time. As described above, the performance pattern shown in FIG. 283(A) is a performance pattern when the player operates the operation unit when the special lottery result is a jackpot.

FIG. 285(A) shows the state at timing t5, in which the decorative pattern is fluctuating in the reach state, the frame movable body is located in the storage position (first state) in the normal light emitting state, The frame movable body simulated image is not displayed, the operation section is in an invalid operation period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

FIG. 285(B) shows the state at timing t8, where the decorative pattern is fluctuating in the reach state, and the frame movable body is in the light emitting state from the storage position (first state) to the raised position (second state). The frame movable body simulated image is displayed to simulate the state in which it is moving from the storage position (first state) to the raised position (second state), and the operation section is disabled. period, and the operation instruction display is hidden.

FIG. 285(C) shows the state at timing t11, where the decorative pattern is fluctuating in the reach state, the frame movable body is in the raised position (second state) in the unlit state, and the frame movable body simulated image is The display imitates the frame movable body located in the raised position (second state), and the operation valid period starts in the operation section, and an image imitating the operation section is displayed as an instruction display. ing.

FIG. 286(A) shows the state at timing t19, where the decorative pattern is fluctuating in the reach state, the frame movable body is in the raised position (second state) in the special light emission state, and the frame movable body is simulated. The image is a display imitating the raised position (second state), the operation section is in an operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

FIG. 286(B) shows the state at timing t23, where the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a row (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a jackpot. The frame movable body is moving from the raised position (second state) to the stowed position (first state) in the special light emission state, and the frame movable body simulated image moves from the raised position (second state) to the stowed position ( The display simulates the state during movement to the first state), the operation section is in an invalid operation period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

FIG. 286(C) shows the state at timing t28, in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a row (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a jackpot. , the frame movable body is located in the storage position (first state) in the special light emission state, the frame movable body simulated image is not displayed, the operation section is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed. .

In this way, by displaying the frame movable body simulated image at the timing when the frame movable body starts moving, it is possible to confirm that the frame movable body is moving and to change the light emission mode according to the operation of the operation section. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player misses a game. In addition, the frame movable body appears in an unprecedented position in response to the special lottery result (for example, in response to the occurrence of a reach effect), making it possible to give the player a great sense of surprise and fun. In addition, when the player operates the operation unit, the light emission mode of the frame movable body light emitting unit changes, making it possible to give the player the feeling that he or she has decided the special lottery result. becomes.

287(A) to 287(F) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 282(A) to 282(E). 287(A) and 287(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. 287(C) and 287(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 287(E) and 287(F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 287(A), 287(C), and 287(E) show a state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570. It shows. 287(B), FIG. 287(D), and FIG. 287(F) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570 (second state). ing.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 287(C) and FIG. 287(E), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are respectively in the standby position (first state) in front of the viewer. It has a right ear frame movable body rotation axis 7140 and a left ear frame movable body rotation axis 7240 on the side, and by rotating 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the right side, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in a moving state (second state) in which they are moved from the standby position (first state) to the moving position. A frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

288(A) to 288(F) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 287(A) to 287(F). 288(A) and 288(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 288(C) and FIG. 288(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 288(E) and 288(F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 288(A), FIG. 288(C), and FIG. 288(E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570 (first state). ing. 288(B), FIG. 288(D), and FIG. 288(F) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570 (second state). ing.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 288(C) and 288(E), the frame movable body has a rotation axis on the back side and can rotate 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right side. By doing so, the frame movable body changes from a state in which it is in the standby position (first state) to a state in which it has moved to the movement position (second state). A frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

289(A) to 289(E) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 282(A) to 282(E). 289(A) and 289(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 289(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 289(D) and FIG. 289(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 289(A), FIG. 289(C), and FIG. 289(D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570 (first state). ing. 289(B) and 289(E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570 (second state).

In this embodiment, the upper part of the frame movable body is visible when viewed from the front in the standby state (first state). A frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure. In this way, in the standby state, a part of the frame movable body is visible when viewed from the front, making it possible to remind the player that the frame movable body is moving. In addition, during normal gaming, only the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7118 and the left ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7218 are in the normal light emitting effect state, and only when the specific light emitting effect state is set, the right ear frame movable body inner side The light emitting section 7116 and the left ear frame movable body inner light emitting section 7216 may also be configured to emit light. Further, a similar light emitting pattern may be adopted in a frame movable body having another structure.

290(A) to 290(F) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 289(A) to 289(E). 290(A) and 290(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. 290(C) and 290(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 290(E) and 290(F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 290(A), 290(C), and 290(E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570 (first state). ing. 290(B), FIG. 290(D), and FIG. 290(F) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570 (second state). ing.

In this embodiment, in the standby position (first state), the left and right frame movable bodies are adjacent to each other, and the upper part of the frame movable body is visible when viewed from the front. In this embodiment, a right ear frame movable body 7100 and a left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit upper binaural openings 7040. Further, the frame movable bodies are configured to be movable upward while being separated from each other in the left-right direction. In the state where it has been moved to the movement position (second state), it is visible to the player in a state similar to that shown in FIG. 282(B). A frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

291(A) to FIG. 291(E) show another embodiment in which a door frame top unit 570 constituting the door frame 3 is provided with a frame movable body. In this embodiment, the frame movable body is rotatable, and the specific structure and operation mode will be described later.

291(A) and 291(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 291(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 291(D) and FIG. 291(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 291(A), FIG. 291(C), and FIG. 291(D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570. 291(B) and 291(E) show that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated clockwise when viewed from the right from the states shown in FIGS. 291(A) and 291(D). It shows a state in which it has been rotated 90 degrees and protrudes above the door frame top unit 570.

The door frame top unit 570 is made of white and translucent synthetic resin, and in the stored state shown in FIG. It is configured to be invisible. On the other hand, when the player visually recognizes the door frame top unit 570 from diagonally above the front, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are respectively visible as shown in FIG. 291(C).

As shown in FIGS. 291(A) to 291(E), the door frame top unit 570 has a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 and a door frame top unit upper left ear opening 7010. The shape of the door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 and the door frame top unit upper left ear opening 7010 is a vertically long rectangle when viewed from above. Furthermore, inside the door frame top unit 570, there is a right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit that illuminates the right ear frame movable body 7100, and a left light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit that illuminates the left ear frame movable body 7200. is provided. The door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment basically has the same structure as that described with reference to FIGS. 282(A) to 282(E) except for these points. .

As shown in FIGS. 291(A) to 291(E), the door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment includes a right ear frame movable body 7100 on the left side and a left ear frame movable body 7200 on the right side when viewed from the front. There is. Their specific structures and operating modes are shown below. In addition, since the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have basically the same structure, in the following description, only the right ear frame movable body 7100 may be explained as a representative.

291(A), 291(C), and 291(D) show the right ear frame movable body 7100 in the stored state. The right ear frame movable body 7100 in the stored state has a vertically elongated rectangular shape in plan view, with a right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 facing downward and a right ear frame movable body second surface facing upward. 7120. The first surface 7110 of the movable right ear frame consists of an inner decoration part 7112 on the first surface of the movable right ear frame made of a colored (specifically, pink) transparent synthetic resin, and a white translucent synthetic resin on the outside. It has a right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114. On the other hand, the second surface 7120 of the right ear frame movable body is entirely formed of gray opaque synthetic resin. The other surfaces (top surface, left side, right side) of the right ear frame movable body 7100 are made of the same white translucent synthetic resin as the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114. Note that the left ear frame movable body 7200 also has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 has a right ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7140. Further, the right ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7140 is attached near the top surface of the door frame top unit 570. The right ear frame movable body 7100 can rotate in the left-right direction by transmitting power from a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to the right ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7140. It is. The left ear frame movable body 7200 also has a left ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7240 having a similar structure, and power from a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 is applied to the left ear frame movable body rotation shaft. 7240, it is possible to rotate around the left and right direction. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be rotated at any angle clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from the right by independently controlling pulse motors (not shown). , it is possible to stop at any angle.

As shown in FIGS. 291(A) to 291(E), a right light emitting section 7050 in the door frame top unit that illuminates the right ear frame movable body 7100 is provided in the door frame top unit 570. The right light emitting section 7050 in the door frame top unit is installed in a state rotated approximately 30 degrees clockwise from the horizontal plane when viewed from the right. The right side light emitting section 7050 in the door frame top unit is specifically constructed of a printed circuit board with a white protective film coated on both sides, and is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to control the right side frame movable body located at the rear. A light emitting diode capable of emitting light to the first surface 7110 is mounted on the top surface thereof. By causing this light emitting diode to emit light in a predetermined color, it is possible to make the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 have a predetermined light emitting effect mode. Note that the left side light emitting section 7052 in the door frame top unit also has the same structure as the right side light emitting section 7050 in the door frame top unit.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are moved as shown in FIGS. 291(A), 291(C), and 291(D), respectively, by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to change from a state where the door frame top unit 570 is housed in a standby position to a state where the door frame top unit 570 is rotated by a predetermined angle and stopped at an arbitrary position. FIG. 291(B) and FIG. 291(E) are examples of this, in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right from the stored state, and are vertically aligned. In this state, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face front and are stopped. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have shapes imitating animal ears, and are housed in the door frame top unit 570 and in a state perpendicular to the top surface of the door frame top unit 570. By taking this, it is possible to decoratively express the state in which the animal's ears are erect.

Further, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be visually recognized by the player in a rotated state by continuously driving a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It is. When rotating in this manner, it is preferable to rotate the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the same direction multiple times at a speed of about 1 rotation per second. 291(B) and 291(E) can also be said to show the state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotating. The rotation direction of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to rotate clockwise multiple times when viewed from the right, or rotate counterclockwise multiple times when viewed from the right. It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body and the second surface 7120 of the right ear frame movable body are alternately visible to the player. Furthermore, the first surface 7210 of the left ear frame movable body and the second surface 7220 of the left ear frame movable body are alternately visible to the player.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be stopped at a predetermined position or rotated, and the light is irradiated from the right side light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit. Although it has been shown that it is possible to put the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 into predetermined decorative states using light, a specific example will be shown below.

As shown in FIGS. 291(A), 291(C), and 291(D), the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear of the left ear frame movable body 7200 When light is irradiated from the right side light emitting section 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting section 7052 in the door frame top unit with the frame movable body first surface 7210 facing downward, the inside of the door frame top unit 570 The light reflected by the door frame top unit 570 can cause the entire door frame top unit 570 to emit a vague light. This is because the door frame top unit 570 is made of white and translucent synthetic resin.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 291(B) and 291(E), the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 that the right ear frame movable body 7100 has and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7110 that the left ear frame movable body 7200 has. When the right side light emitting section 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting section 7052 in the door frame top unit emit light with the first side 7210 facing forward, the light will cause the right ear frame movable body It becomes possible for the player to visually recognize that the first surface 7110 and the first surface 7210 of the left ear frame movable body are decorated. Also in this case, a part of the light emitted from the right side light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit is transmitted to the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. The light is reflected and the door frame top unit 570 is illuminated from the inside by the reflected light, so that the entire door frame top unit 570 is visible to the player in a slightly dimly emitted state.

On the other hand, when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated, when light is irradiated from the right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit, the irradiation The right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 are alternately illuminated by the light, and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 and the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 are alternately illuminated. The state will be as follows. Furthermore, the entire door frame top unit 570 becomes visible to the player in a somewhat vaguely emitted state.

In this way, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are located in a stopped state above the upper surface of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100, and are rotated. By increasing the area occupied by the field of view when the player looks up and making it appear as if the volume of the casing has increased, it is possible to give the player surprise and fun that were not available before.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 292(A) to 293(B), the game board side is adjusted according to the specific operation mode of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the operation mode of the frame movable body. The display mode of the frame movable body simulation image, which is an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the operation button 410 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the operation unit) An example of a performance that combines the player's operation reception mode, the light emission mode in the right side light emitting section 7050 in the door frame top unit, the left side light emitting section 7052 in the door frame top unit, etc. is shown.

292(A) to 293(B) respectively show the operation mode of the frame movable body and the display of a frame movable body simulated image that is an image imitating the frame movable body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is a time chart showing the state, the acceptance state of the operation unit, the display state of the operation instruction display displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, and the irradiation mode of light to the frame movable body.

FIG. 292(A) shows an example of a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 292(B) shows an example of a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 293(A) shows an example of a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 293(B) shows an example of a production pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each production pattern shown in FIGS. 292(A) to 293(B), the timing at which the frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state), and the display of the frame movable body simulated image The mode, the timing at which operation reception on the operation unit becomes effective, the timing at which the operation instruction display starts, and the timing at which the light irradiation mode on the frame movable body changes from the light emitting effect state to the light-off state are the same. On the other hand, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends, the timing at which the frame movable body changes from the rotating state (second state) to another state, and the manner in which light is irradiated onto the frame movable body change from the off state to the light emission effect state or specific light emission effect state. The timing at which this occurs may differ depending on the performance pattern. Specific performance examples for each performance pattern will be shown below with reference to FIGS. 292(A) to 293(B).

In the production patterns shown in FIGS. 292(A) to 293(B), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570 in the initial state (before timing t0). state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the first state or standby state). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 291(A), 291(C), and 291(D), the right ear frame is movable. The body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 are in a state facing downward. In this state, when the reach effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing between timing t0 and timing t9 (for example, timing t4), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move at timing t9. At the same time, the rotation starts and the rotation continues (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the second state or rotation state). The rotation direction is clockwise when viewed from the right, and the rotation speed is one rotation per second.

At the same time, display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the center of the game board side effect display device 1600. At the same time, display of a door frame top unit simulated image, which is an image simulating the door frame top unit 570, is also started. Specifically, the frame movable body simulation image is composed of an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and an image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. The frame movable body simulated image has the same image as the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 in accordance with the rotation of the real right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. It continues to be dynamically displayed in a rotating manner. The rotational speed of the image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 is now rotated at the same speed as the rotation speed of the actual frame movable body (one rotation per second). Is displayed. As a result, when the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 are in the rotated state facing forward as shown in FIGS. 291(B) and 291(E), the right ear The image simulating the frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also the image simulating the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 which the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 has, and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7110. An image simulating the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 included in an image simulating the frame movable body 7200 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 as a frame movable body simulating image in a front-facing manner.

On the other hand, at timing t9, the acceptance of the operation on the operation unit becomes valid, and display of an image instructing the operation on the operation unit on the game board side effect display device 1600 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as operation instruction display) starts. Ru. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string instructing to operate the operation section (for example, a character string "Push!!") may be displayed. You can. Note that the operation validity period continues until an operation is accepted on the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time has elapsed (until timing t18). Further, at timing t9, the right light emitting section 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting section 7052 in the door frame top unit, which irradiate light to the frame movable body, change from the state in which they perform light emission to the light-out state.

FIG. 292(A) and FIG. 292(B) show the production mode when the operation on the operation unit is performed at timing t14 after the period in which the operation on the operation unit is valid has started (timing t9). It shows. In these performance patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t14, the frame movable body that had been rotating until then stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the special lottery result, and the light to the frame movable body stops. The irradiation mode becomes a predetermined light emitting effect state corresponding to the special lottery result.

FIG. 292(A) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot, and when the operation section is operated (timing t14), the right ear frame movable body 7100 moves to the right ear frame movable body 1. A state in which the left ear frame movable body 7200 is stopped vertically with the surface 7110 on the front side and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is stopped vertically with the first surface 7210 of the left ear frame movable body on the front side (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the third state). Become. At the same time, the manner in which light is irradiated onto the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 enters a specific light emission effect state that is different from the normal light emission effect state. In this way, when the light irradiation mode becomes the specific light emission performance state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is a jackpot.

On the other hand, FIG. 292(B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss, and when the operation on the operation unit is performed (timing t14), the right ear frame movable body 7100 moves the right ear frame movable body A state in which the left ear frame movable body 7200 is stopped vertically with the second surface 7120 on the front side and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is stopped vertically with the second surface 7220 of the left ear frame movable body on the front side (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the fourth state) ). At the same time, the light irradiation mode on the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 changes from the light-off state to the normal light emission state. In this way, by changing the light irradiation mode to the normal light emission effect state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is a loss.

293(A) and 293(B) show that after the period in which operations on the operating section are valid has started (timing t9), the player does not operate the operating section during the valid operation period; This shows a performance mode when the operation valid period ends at timing t18 after a predetermined time has elapsed. In these performance patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t18, the frame movable body that has been rotating until then automatically stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the special lottery result, and the frame movable body The light irradiation mode becomes a predetermined light emitting effect state corresponding to the special lottery result.

FIG. 293(A) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot, in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 moves the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 at the timing when the valid operation period ends (timing t18). The left ear frame movable body 7200 is stopped vertically with the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 facing the front side (third state). At the same time, the manner in which light is irradiated onto the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 enters a specific light emission effect state that is different from the normal light emission effect state. In this way, when the light irradiation mode becomes the specific light emission performance state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is a jackpot.

On the other hand, FIG. 293(B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss, and at the timing when the valid operation period ends (timing t18), the right ear frame movable body 7100 moves to the second side of the right ear frame movable body. The left ear frame movable body 7200 is stopped vertically with the left ear frame movable body 7200 facing the front side, and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is stopped vertically with the left ear frame movable body 7220 facing the front side (fourth state). At the same time, the light irradiation mode on the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 changes from the light-off state to the normal light emission state. In this way, by changing the light irradiation mode to the normal light emission effect state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is a loss.

In each performance pattern shown in FIGS. 292(A) to 293(B), at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the operation validity period ends, the changing decorative pattern corresponds to the special lottery result. It will stop and be displayed. For example, in the case of the performance patterns shown in FIGS. 292(A) and 293(A), the special lottery result is in the form of a row of eyes (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the result is a jackpot. In the case of the performance patterns shown in FIGS. 292(B) and 293(B), in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the reach loss mode (for example, "7", "6", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is displayed. ), the decorative pattern will be stopped and displayed.

At the timing (timing t24) when 4 seconds have elapsed after the decorative pattern stopped, the frame movable body moves to the right ear frame movable body while maintaining either the specific light emission state or the normal light emission state. A state in which the first surface 7110 and the first surface 7210 of the left ear frame movable body face forward (third state) or the second surface 7120 of the right ear frame movable body and the second surface 7220 of the left ear frame movable body face forward. The state is changed from the facing state (fourth state) to the state in which the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face downward (first state). At the same time, the display of the frame movable body simulated image ends.

When the special lottery result is a jackpot, the light irradiation state on the frame movable body may be configured to change from a specific light emitting effect state to a normal light emitting effect state at a predetermined timing during the jackpot. If the special lottery result is a loss, the normal light emitting effect state is continued and the next decorative pattern variation is started.

In this way, by configuring the frame movable body to display the frame movable body simulated image at the timing when the frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state), the frame movable body is in the rotating state ( It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks that the player is in the second state). In addition, in response to special lottery results (for example, in response to the occurrence of a reach effect), the frame movable body appears in an unprecedented position, making it possible to give players a great sense of surprise and fun. . Furthermore, when the player operates the operation unit, the movable frame body stops in a predetermined stopped state (third state or fourth state) and the manner in which light is irradiated onto the movable frame body changes. It is possible to give the player a feeling as if he or she had decided the special lottery result.

294(A) to 294(E) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 291(A) to 291(E). 294(A) and 294(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 294(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 294(D) and FIG. 294(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 294(A), FIG. 294(C), and FIG. 294(D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position (first state). 294(B) and 294(E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotating (second state).

In this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have a right ear frame movable body rotation axis 7140 and a left ear frame movable body rotation axis 7240 at their lower portions, respectively. Further, the vertical thickness of the door frame top unit 570 is smaller than that of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 291(A) to 291(E). Furthermore, a right ear frame movable body rotation axis 7140 and a left ear frame movable body rotation axis 7240 are provided to be perpendicular to the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, respectively. Further, the upper halves of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are located at a higher position than the upper surface of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100.

When the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position (first state), the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face each other. positioned. On the other hand, in the rotating state, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 rotates clockwise when viewed from above, and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above. For example, in FIGS. 294(B) and 294(E), the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise when viewed in plan, and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 is rotated in plan view. It can also be said that it shows the state rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above. In addition, by adopting such a rotation mode, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed in a plan view, and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 is rotated clockwise when viewed in a plan view. Compared to the case where the machine rotates around the machine, even if a player or an employee at a game parlor inadvertently brings their hands or face close to the movable frame, their hands or face could be dragged towards the back of the machine, resulting in injury. It becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of. A frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 292(A) to 293(B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

295(A) to 295(E) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 294(A) to 294(E). 295(A) and 295(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 295(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 295(D) and 295(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 295(A), 295(C), and 295(D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position (first state). 295(B) and 295(E) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotating from the door frame top unit 570.

Also in this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are provided so as to be orthogonal to the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. On the other hand, in this embodiment, a portion of the door frame top unit 570 has a portion that protrudes upward so as to cover the top, left, right, and back of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. are doing. In addition, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 of the left ear frame movable body 7200 are each colored (specifically, pink) and transparent composites. It is made of resin. Further, the right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 of the left ear frame movable body 7200 are each formed of gray opaque synthetic resin. Also in this embodiment, it is possible to put the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the same state as in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 294(A) to 294(E). . By providing a part that covers the frame movable body in this way, even if a player or an employee at a game parlor inadvertently brings their hands or face close to the frame movable body, their hands or face will not be exposed to the rear of the game machine. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of situations such as being dragged in and getting injured. A frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 292(A) to 293(B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

296(A) to 296(E) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 295(A) to 295(E). 296(A) and 296(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 296(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 296(D) and FIG. 296(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 296(A), FIG. 296(C), and FIG. 296(D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position (first state). 296(B) and 296(E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotating from the door frame top unit 570 (second state).

Also in this embodiment, a part of the door frame top unit 570 has a portion that projects upward so as to cover the top, left, right, and back of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. . On the other hand, in this embodiment, the upwardly protruding portion and the right ear frame movable body 7100 or the upwardly protruding portion and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are integrally configured, and after they move forward, The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are configured to start rotating. FIG. 296(D) shows the state before starting the forward movement, and FIG. 296(E) shows the state after the forward movement is completed.

Also in this embodiment, it is possible to put the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the same state as in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 294(A) to 294(E). . By providing a part that covers the frame movable body in this way, even if a player or an employee at a game parlor inadvertently brings their hands or face close to the frame movable body, their hands or face will not be exposed to the rear of the game machine. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of situations such as being dragged in and getting injured. Note that by covering the front of the upwardly protruding portion with a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be seen, but players and game parlor staff cannot come into contact with them. It may be configured as follows.

A frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 292(A) to 293(B). In this case, the upwardly protruding portion and the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the upwardly protruding portion and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be moved forward from timing t5 to timing t7, or from timing t7 to It may be performed at timing t9. Further, an image simulating an upwardly protruding part may be displayed as a frame movable body simulation image in accordance with the timing at which the upwardly protruding part starts moving. Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

With reference to FIGS. 282 to 284, an embodiment has been shown in which a frame movable body is provided in the door frame top unit 570 and a frame movable body simulated image is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. A modified embodiment of this embodiment will be shown with reference to FIGS. In the embodiment shown below, the door frame top unit 570 includes a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 in place of the right ear frame movable body 7100, and a right ear frame movable body 7350 in place of the left ear frame movable body 7200. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided.

297(A) and 297(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. Moreover, FIG. 297(C) and FIG. 297(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. Moreover, FIG. 297(E) and FIG. 297(F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 297(A), FIG. 297(C), and FIG. 297(E) show that inside the door frame top unit 570, a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear inner frame movable body 7350. This shows a state in which the ear outer frame movable body 7450 is stored (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a first state). 297(B), FIG. 297(D), and FIG. 297(F) show the door frame top unit 570, right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, This shows a state in which the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 protrudes upward (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a second state).

As shown in FIGS. 297(A) to 297(F), the door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment has a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the left side and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the right side when viewed from the front. A left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided. Their specific structures and operating modes are shown below. Note that the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have basically the same structure, so in the following description, In some cases, only the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 will be described as representatives.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 297(A) to 297(F) and FIGS. 306(A) to 306(E) described later, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are sometimes referred to as frame movable bodies. In addition, when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are referred to as the inner frame movable body, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are referred to as the outer frame movable body. There is.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is a movable body that has a rectangular shape that is vertically elongated in the front-rear direction when viewed from above in the stored state. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 has a first surface 7310 of the right ear inner frame movable body that faces upward in the stored state (first state) and forward in the protruded state (second state), and a first surface 7310 of the right ear inner frame movable body that faces upward in the stored state (first state) and forward in the protruded state (second state). The right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 faces rearward in the protruding state (second state). The right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 is made of colored (specifically, pink) transparent synthetic resin. The surfaces of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 other than the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 (top surface, left side, right side, right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320) are made of white translucent synthetic resin. It is formed by Note that the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 also has the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body 7300.

The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is a movable body having a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 facing forward and a right ear outer frame movable body second facing backward. It has a surface 7370. The right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, and other surfaces (top surface, left side, right side) of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are made of white semi-transparent material. It is made of synthetic resin. Note that the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also has the same structure as the right ear outer frame movable body 7350.

Inside the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a rectangular right ear inner frame movable body light emitting part 7330 is provided. Further, inside the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a square-shaped right ear outer frame movable body light emitting section 7380 is provided.

Specifically, the right ear inner frame movable body light emitting unit 7330 and the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7380 are composed of a printed circuit board coated with a white protective film on both sides, and are connected from the door frame top unit 570. A light emitting diode that can emit light toward the player in a protruding state (second state) is mounted on its surface. The right ear inner frame movable body light emitting unit 7330 and the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7380 can emit light in a predetermined light emission mode under the control of the peripheral control board 1510. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are rotated by the right ear inner frame movable body rotation axis 7340 and the left ear inner frame movable body rotation by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. By rotating the shaft 7440 by 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the right, the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. 297(A), 297(C), and 297(E), respectively, is formed. 297(B), 297(D), and 297(F), vertically upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIG. 297(B), FIG. 297(D), and FIG. 297(F). It is possible to control it to a state where it protrudes (second state).

On the other hand, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are moved upward by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 in FIGS. 297(A) and 297(C), respectively. ), from the state (first state) stored in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIG. 297(E) to FIG. 297(B), FIG. 297(D), and FIG. 297(F). It is possible to control the door frame top unit 570 to a state in which it vertically protrudes upward from the top surface as shown (second state).

A right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 each protrude vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. When the state (second state) is reached, as shown in FIG. 297(B), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is located inside the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is located inside the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 is positioned inside and is visible to the player. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have shapes imitating animal ears, and are attached to the door frame top unit 570. By taking the stored state (first state) and the state protruding vertically upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state), it is possible to decoratively express the state in which the animal's ears move. It is possible.

Note that the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are independently housed in the door frame top unit 570 (first state) and the door frame top unit 570 under the control of the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to take a state in which it protrudes perpendicularly upward from the upper surface of the (second state).

In addition, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 each project vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. (second state), from the state in which the door frame top unit 570 is housed independently (first state) under the control of the peripheral control board 1510, from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570. It is possible to change the state to a state in which it protrudes vertically upward (second state).

In this embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 is made of white and translucent synthetic resin. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 297(A), when the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are housed in the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting part 7380, the left ear outer frame movable body When the ear outer frame movable body light emitting section 7480 emits light in a predetermined manner, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 in a dimly emitted state.

On the other hand, in a state where the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 protrude from the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame is movable. When the body light emitting section 7330, the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting section 7380, the left ear inner frame movable body light emitting section 7430, and the left ear outer frame movable body light emitting section 7480 are made to emit light in a predetermined manner, the right ear inner frame The first surface of the movable body 7310, the first surface of the right ear outer frame movable body 7360, the first surface of the left ear inner frame movable body 7410, and the first surface of the left ear outer frame movable body 7460 are visually recognized by the player in a predetermined light emitting effect state. It is now possible to do so.

In addition, in the state in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 protrude from the door frame top unit 570 (second state). , because the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is positioned to cover the back of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is positioned to cover the back of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. , the light emitted forward from the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7380 and the left ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7480 illuminates the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420. Even if it is directed toward the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, it will be diffusely reflected backwards, and eventually the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 or Since the light is diffusely reflected forward by the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460, the utilization efficiency of the light emitted from the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7380 and the left ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7480 is reduced. It is now possible to increase the

In this way, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 move, and the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100 are moved. Since it is located above the top surface, it is possible to give the player an unprecedented sense of surprise and fun compared to the case where the movable body within the game board is moved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The display mode of the frame movable body simulation image, which is an image simulating the frame movable body, displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in accordance with the specific operation mode and the motion mode of the frame movable body, and the operation button 410 (hereinafter referred to as Right ear inner frame movable body light emitting unit 7330, right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7380, left ear inner frame movable body light emitting unit 7430, left ear outer frame movable An example of a performance that combines light emitting modes, etc. in a body light emitting section 7480 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a frame movable body light emitting section) is shown.

298(A) to 299(B) respectively show the operation mode of the frame movable body and the display of a frame movable body simulated image that is an image imitating the frame movable body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is a time chart showing the state, the acceptance state of the operation unit, the display state of the operation instruction display displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, and the light emission performance state of the frame movable body light emitting unit.

FIG. 298(A) shows an example of a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 298(B) shows an example of a production pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 299(A) shows an example of a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 299(B) shows an example of a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each production pattern shown in FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B), the timing at which the inner frame movable body changes from the retracted state (first state) to the protruded state (second state), the frame movable body The display mode of the simulated image, the timing at which operation reception on the operation unit becomes effective, the timing at which operation instruction display starts, and the timing at which the frame movable body light emitting unit changes from the light emission effect state to the extinguished state are the same. On the other hand, the presence or absence of the movement of the outer frame movable body, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends, and the timing at which the frame movable body light emitting section changes from the unlit state to the light emission performance state or the specific light emission performance state may differ depending on the performance pattern. Specific performance examples for each performance pattern will be shown below with reference to FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B).

In the production patterns shown in FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are In the initial state (before timing t0), it is housed in the door frame top unit 570 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a first state or standby state). In this state, when a reach effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing between timing t0 and timing t7 (for example, timing t4), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 Rotation starts in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the right (timing t7).

At the same time, display of a part of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the center of the game board side performance display device 1600. At the same time, display of a door frame top unit simulated image, which is an image simulating the door frame top unit 570, is also started. Specifically, the frame movable body simulation images include an image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, an image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and an image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. It is composed of an image imitating the frame movable body 7450. The frame movable body simulation image is an image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a left ear inner frame movable body 7400 in accordance with the rotation of the real right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. The simulated image is dynamically displayed in a rotating manner. Of the frame movable body simulation images, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are not yet displayed at this stage. An image imitating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are created in accordance with the timing (timing t9) when the actual right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and left ear inner frame movable body 7400 finish rising. The display of the rotating image imitating the image ends, and thereafter continues to be displayed in a stopped state (after timing t9). The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 complete their rotation at timing t9, two seconds after starting to rise at timing t7 (hereinafter referred to as the second state or rising state). ).

On the other hand, at timing t9, the acceptance of the operation on the operation unit becomes valid, and display of an image instructing the operation on the operation unit on the game board side effect display device 1600 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as operation instruction display) starts. Ru. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string instructing to operate the operation section (for example, a character string "Push!!") may be displayed. You can. Note that the operation validity period continues until an operation is accepted on the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time has elapsed (until timing t18). Further, at timing t9, all the frame movable body light emitting parts change from the light emitting effect state to the light out state.

FIG. 298(A) and FIG. 298(B) show the production mode when the operation on the operation unit is performed at timing t14 after the period in which the operation on the operation unit is valid has started (timing t9). It shows. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t14, and the frame movable body light emitting section enters a predetermined light emitting effect state corresponding to the special lottery result.

FIG. 298(A) is a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the frame movable body light emitting unit changes from the off state to the normal light emission performance. The state becomes a specific light emitting performance state that is different from the current state. At the same time, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 start rising from the state (first state) housed in the door frame top unit 570, and after 2 seconds (timing t16), the rising operation starts. It becomes a completed state (second state). At the same time, on the game board side performance display device 1600, in addition to an image imitating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and an image imitating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, which are already displayed in a stopped state, As new frame movable body simulation images, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are started to be displayed. The image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are in the same manner as the actual rising movements of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, From timing t14 to timing t16, the display mode changes from the display mode showing the stored state to the display mode showing the completed raising operation. In this way, when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 have completed their rotational operations (second state), the light-off state changes to the specific light emission effect state, and the light-off state changes to the specific light emission effect state. The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, which are in the state, change from the state where they are stored in the door frame top unit 570 (first state) to the state where the rising operation has been completed (second state). , an image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed in an upward manner on the game board side effect display device 1600, thereby offering a special lottery to the player. The result will be shown to be a jackpot.

On the other hand, FIG. 298(B) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss, and when the operation section is operated (timing t14), the frame movable body light emitting section changes from the off state to the normal light emission state. It becomes a performance state. In this case, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are maintained in the housed state (first state) and do not perform any operation. Further, an image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are not displayed. In this way, when the frame movable body light emitting part enters the normal light emitting effect state, or when the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 do not operate, the special lottery result is not displayed to the player. This will prove to be a mistake.

299(A) and 299(B) show that after the period in which operations on the operating section are valid has started (timing t9), the player does not operate the operating section during the valid operation period; This shows a performance mode when the operation valid period ends at timing t18 after a predetermined time period has elapsed. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t18, and the frame movable body light emitting section enters a predetermined light emitting effect state according to the special lottery result.

FIG. 299(A) shows a production pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot, in which the frame movable body light emitting section emits a specific light emission state different from the normal light emission production state at the timing when the valid operation period ends (timing t18). It becomes a performance state. At the same time, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 start rising from the state (first state) housed in the door frame top unit 570, and after 2 seconds (timing t16), the rising operation starts. It becomes a completed state (second state). At the same time, on the game board side performance display device 1600, in addition to an image imitating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and an image imitating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, which are already displayed in a stopped state, As new frame movable body simulation images, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are started to be displayed. The image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are in the same manner as the actual rising movements of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, From timing t18 to timing t20, the display mode changes from the display mode showing the stored state to the display mode showing the completed raising operation.

In this way, when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 have completed their rotational operations (second state), the light-off state changes to the specific light emission production state, and the light-off state changes to the specific light emission production state. The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, which are in the state, change from the state where they are stored in the door frame top unit 570 (first state) to the state where the rising operation has been completed (second state). , an image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed in an upward manner on the game board side effect display device 1600, thereby offering a special lottery to the player. The result will be shown to be a jackpot.

On the other hand, FIG. 299(B) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss, and at the timing (timing t18) when the valid operation period ends, the frame movable body light emitting section enters the normal light emitting effect state. In this case, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are maintained in the housed state (first state) and do not perform any operation. Further, an image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are not displayed. In this way, when the frame movable body light emitting part enters the normal light emitting effect state, or when the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 do not operate, the special lottery result is not displayed to the player. This will prove to be a mistake.

In each performance pattern shown in FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B), at a predetermined timing (timing t24) after the operation validity period ends, the decorative symbols that have been changing correspond to the special lottery results. It will stop and be displayed. For example, in the case of the performance patterns shown in FIGS. 298(A) and 299(A), the special lottery result is in the form of a row of eyes (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the result is a jackpot. In the case of the performance patterns shown in FIGS. 298(B) and 299(B), in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the reach loss mode (for example, "7", "6", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is displayed. ), the decorative pattern will be stopped and displayed.

At the timing (timing t26) when two seconds have passed since the decorative pattern stopped, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are in either the specific light emission state or the normal light emission state. It starts moving from the raised position (second state) to the storage position (first state) while maintaining the light emitting mode. At the same time, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 of the frame movable body simulated image and the left ear outer frame An image imitating the movable body 7450 is displayed in a descending manner. At the timing when the movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the storage position is completed (timing t28), an image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed. The image imitating the image becomes a display mode in which the lowering of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is completed, and the display ends in accordance with the lowering movement of the actual right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450.

At the timing (timing t30) when two seconds have passed since the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 finished moving to the storage positions, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame The movable body 7400 starts moving from the raised position (second state) to the storage position (first state) while maintaining either the specific light emitting effect state or the normal light emitting effect state. At the same time, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 in the frame movable body simulation image is simulated in accordance with the movement of the real right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 as they rotate and descend. The display mode is such that the image and the image imitating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 descend while rotating. At the timing (timing t32) when the movement of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 to the storage position is completed, an image imitating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed. The image imitating the image becomes a display mode in which the lowering of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 is completed in accordance with the lowering movement of the actual right ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the display ends.

When the special lottery result is a jackpot, the light emitting state of the frame movable body may be configured to change from a specific light emitting effect state to a normal light emitting effect state at a predetermined timing during the jackpot. If the special lottery result is a loss, the normal light emitting effect state is continued and the next decorative pattern variation is started.

In this way, by displaying the frame movable body simulated image at the timing when the frame movable body starts moving, it is possible to confirm that the frame movable body is moving and to change the light emission mode according to the operation of the operation section. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player misses a game. In addition, the frame movable body appears in a position that has not been seen before in response to the special lottery result, making it possible to give the player a great sense of surprise and fun. Further, after the inner frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the moving state (second state), the outer frame movable body changes to the standby state (first state) when the player operates the operation section. Since there are cases in which the player changes from the movement state (state) to the movement state (second state) and there are cases in which the movement state does not change, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if he or she has determined the special lottery result. Further, in a situation where the inner frame movable body first enters the moving state (second state) and the player is able to notice that it has entered the moving state, the player is requested to operate the operating section. Thereby, the player can operate the operating unit while having a sense of anticipation as to whether or not the outer frame movable body will be in the moving state (second state) following the inner frame movable body.

300(A) to 300(E) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 297(A) to 297(F). 300(A) and 300(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 300(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 300(D) and 300(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 300(A), 300(C), and 300(D) show that inside the door frame top unit 570, there is a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear inner frame movable body 7350. The ear outer frame movable body 7450 is shown in a stored state (first state). 300(B) and 300(E) show that the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are moved from the door frame top unit 570. A state in which it protrudes upward (second state) is shown.

In this embodiment, in addition to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are also controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. 300(A), 300(C), and 300(D), and are housed in the standby position within the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIG. 300(A), FIG. 300(C), and FIG. It is possible to control the door frame top unit 570 from the first state) to the state in which it vertically protrudes upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state) as shown in FIGS. 300(B) and 300(E). be.

In addition, on the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, a first right ear opening 7002 on the door frame top unit is located at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and a first right ear opening 7002 on the door frame top unit is located at a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The second right ear opening 7004 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the first left ear opening 7012 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. A second left ear opening 7014 on the door frame top unit is provided at the position. A frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure. Note that, as shown with reference to FIGS. 289(A) to 289(E), also in the frame movable body having the structure in this embodiment, the upper part of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 A part of the door frame top unit 570 may be configured to protrude from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 in the first state.

301(A) to 301(E) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 300(A) to 300(E). 301(A) and 301(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 301(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 301(D) and FIG. 301(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 301(A), FIG. 301(C), and FIG. 301(D) show that inside the door frame top unit 570, a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, The left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is shown in a stored state (first state). 301(B) and 301(E) show that the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are moved from the door frame top unit 570. A state in which it protrudes upward (second state) is shown.

In this embodiment, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 do not move upward, but move downward by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. 301(B) from the state (first state) stored in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIG. 301(A), FIG. 301(C), and FIG. 301(D), respectively. , it is possible to control the door frame top unit 570 vertically protruding upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 or downward from the bottom surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state) as shown in FIG. 301(E). be.

In addition, on the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 is located at a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 is located at a position corresponding to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. A top unit upper left ear opening 7010 is provided. Further, on the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570, a door frame top unit lower right ear opening 7020 is located at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and a door frame top unit lower right ear opening 7020 is located at a position corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. A top unit lower left ear opening 7030 is provided.

A frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure. In this case, in a state where it is not clear whether or not the result of the special lottery will be a jackpot, the inner frame movable body starts moving downward from the bottom surface of the door frame top unit 570 (timing t7), and the result of the special lottery is If it is a jackpot, the outer frame movable body starts moving upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 (timing t14, timing 18, etc.). On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the outer frame movable body does not move. With such a configuration, when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, it becomes possible to make the outer frame movable body visible to other players and the clerk of the game parlor. On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the inner frame movable body moves but the outer frame movable body does not move, causing the player to feel awkward and embarrassed due to the loss of the special lottery result. It becomes possible to reduce the In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 297(A) to 297(F), the outer frame movable body and the inner frame movable body decoratively express animal ears, but FIG. In the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 301A to 301E, the ears of the animal are expressed by the movable outer frame that projects upward, and the eyes of the animal are expressed by the movable inner frame. There is.

302(A) to 302(E) and 303(A) to 303(E) show FIGS. 300(A) to 300(E) and FIG. 301(A) to 301(E). This figure shows a modification of the frame movable body described above. 302(A), FIG. 302(B), FIG. 303(A), and FIG. 303(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. 302(C) and 303(C) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 302(D), FIG. 302(E), FIG. 303(D), and FIG. 303(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. In this embodiment, each frame movable body has two states: a state in which it protrudes downward from the bottom surface of the door frame top unit 570 (first state), and a state in which it protrudes upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state). It is possible to take

302(A), 302(C), and 302(D) show a state in which the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body protrude downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (first state). There is. 302(B) and 302(E) show a state (second state) in which the inner frame movable body protrudes upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, and the outer frame movable body projects above the door frame top unit 570. The figure shows a state in which it protrudes downward from the lower surface (first state). 303(A), FIG. 303(C), and FIG. 303(D) show a state (first state) in which the inner frame movable body protrudes downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570, and the outer frame movable body shows a state (second state) projecting upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. 303(B) and 303(E) show a state in which the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body protrude upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state).

In this embodiment, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are driven by a drive (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to move each of them to any position from the first state to the second state and stop them by the mechanism.

In addition, on the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, a first right ear opening 7002 on the door frame top unit is located at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and a first right ear opening 7002 is located at a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The second right ear opening 7004 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the first left ear opening 7012 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. A second left ear opening 7014 on the top unit of the door frame is provided at the position.

Further, on the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570, a door frame top unit lower first right ear opening 7022 is located at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and a door frame top unit lower first right ear opening 7022 is located at a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The door frame top unit lower second right ear opening 7024 corresponds to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the door frame top unit lower first left ear opening 7032 corresponds to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. A second left ear opening 7034 under the door frame top unit is provided at the position.

A frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

In this case, in a state where it is not clear whether the result of the special lottery will be a jackpot or not, the inner frame movable body starts moving upward from the state protruding from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (first state). (timing t7), and the movement is completed at timing t9. 302(B) and 302(E) show a state in which the movement of the inner frame movable body is completed. If the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the outer frame movable body starts moving upward from the state (first state) protruding from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (timing t14, timing 18, etc.) . 303(B) and 303(E) show a state (second state) in which the movement of the outer frame movable body is completed. On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the outer frame movable body does not move. With such a configuration, when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, it becomes possible to make the outer frame movable body visible to other players and the clerk of the game parlor. On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the inner frame movable body moves but the outer frame movable body does not move, causing the player to feel awkward and embarrassed due to the loss of the special lottery result. It becomes possible to reduce the

Although an example has been shown in which the inner frame movable body protrudes upward and enters the second state, and then the outer frame movable body protrudes upward and enters the second state, the relationship between the two may be reversed. In this case, the outer frame movable body starts an operation of protruding upward at timing t7. After that, when the movement is completed (timing t9), the state is as shown in FIGS. 303(A) and 303(D). Furthermore, it is preferable that the inner frame movable body starts moving upward at timing t14 or timing 18. It may be configured to be able to execute two effect patterns in which the order in which such frame movable bodies operate is reversed. Furthermore, it is better to set the jackpot expectation level higher for a production pattern in which the outer frame movable body moves first than for a production pattern in which the inner frame movable body moves first.For example, when the outer frame movable body moves first, It may be configured to ensure a jackpot.

304(A) to 305(B) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 297(A) to 297(F). 304(A) and 304(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. 304(C) and 304(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 305(A) and 305(B) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 304(A), 304(C), and 305(A) show that inside the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7350. The ear outer frame movable body 7450 is shown in a stored state (first state). 304(B), FIG. 304(D), and FIG. 305(B) show the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear A state in which the outer frame movable body 7450 protrudes upward (second state) is shown.

In this embodiment, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are all controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It is configured so that it can be moved upward by rotating 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right using a drive mechanism that does not require a rotation.

A frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B). In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B), the outer frame movable body is placed in the second state after the inner frame movable body is in the second state. In the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 304(A) to 305(B), the moving order of the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body is reversed, and the outer frame movable body is moved from timing t7 to timing t9. After changing from the first state to the second state, the inner frame movable body may be configured to start changing from the first state to the second state at timing t14 or timing t18. Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

With reference to FIGS. 291 to 293, an embodiment has been shown in which a frame movable body is provided in the door frame top unit 570 and a frame movable body simulated image is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. - An embodiment that is a modification of this embodiment is shown with reference to FIG. 308. In the embodiment shown below, the door frame top unit 570 includes a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 in place of the right ear frame movable body 7100, and a right ear frame movable body 7350 in place of the left ear frame movable body 7200. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided.

306(A) and 306(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. Moreover, FIG. 306(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. Moreover, FIG. 306(D) and FIG. 306(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 306(A), FIG. 306(C), and FIG. 306(D) show a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear inner frame movable body 7400 in the door frame top unit 570. This shows a state in which the ear outer frame movable body 7450 is stored (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a first state). 306(B) and 306(E) show the door frame top unit 570 to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body. 7450 shows a state in which it protrudes upward (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the second state).

As shown in FIGS. 306(A) to 306(E), the door frame top unit 570 has a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000, a door frame top unit upper left ear opening 7010, and a right side inside the door frame top unit. It has a light emitting part 7050 and a left light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit. Note that the specific structures and functions of these are the same as those with reference to FIGS. 291(A) to 291(E), so description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 306(A) to 306(E), when viewed from the front, the door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment has a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the left side, and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the right side. A left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided. Their specific structures and operating modes are shown below. Note that the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have basically the same structure, so in the following description, In some cases, only the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 will be described as representatives.

306(A), FIG. 306(C), and FIG. 306(D) show the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 in the stored state. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 in the stored state has a vertically elongated rectangular shape in plan view, and has a right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 facing downward and a right ear inner frame movable body first face facing upward. It has two surfaces 7320. The right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 is made of colored (specifically, pink) transparent synthetic resin. On the other hand, the second surface 7320 of the right ear inner frame movable body is made of gray opaque synthetic resin. The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 in the stored state has a vertically long rectangular shape hollowed out near the center so as to surround the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 in plan view, and has a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 facing downward. It has a frame movable body first surface 7360 and a right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370 facing upward. The right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 is made of white translucent synthetic resin. On the other hand, the second surface 7370 of the right ear outer frame movable body is made of gray opaque synthetic resin. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 has a right ear inner frame movable body rotation shaft 7340 on the right side (inside) in plan view. Further, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 has a right ear outer frame movable body rotation shaft 7390 on the left side (outside) in plan view. Further, the right ear inner frame movable body rotation axis 7340 and the right ear outer frame movable body rotation axis 7390 are located on the same axis. Further, the right ear inner frame movable body rotation shaft 7340 and the right ear outer frame movable body rotation shaft 7390 are attached near the top surface of the door frame top unit 570. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are connected to the right ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7340 and the right ear outer frame movable body by power from a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. By being transmitted to the rotation shaft 7390, it is possible to rotate around the left and right direction. In addition, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have a left ear inner frame movable body rotation axis 7440 and a left ear outer frame movable body rotation axis 7490 of the same structure, and the surrounding Power from a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the control board 1510 is transmitted to the left ear inner frame movable body rotation shaft 7440 and the left ear outer frame movable body rotation shaft 7490, so that the movable body rotates in the left-right direction. Is possible. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are moved from the right by independently controlling pulse motors (not shown). It is possible to rotate at any angle clockwise or counterclockwise, or to stop at any angle.

As shown in FIGS. 306(A) to 306(E), inside the door frame top unit 570, there is a right side inside the door frame top unit that illuminates the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. A light emitting section 7050 and a left side light emitting section 7052 in the door frame top unit that illuminates the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided. The specific structures of the right side light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 291(A) to 291(E), so their description is omitted. do.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are moved by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, respectively in FIG. (A), FIG. 306(C), and FIG. 306(D) from the state stored in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570 to the state where it is stopped at an arbitrary position rotated by a predetermined angle. is possible. FIGS. 306(B) and 306(E) are examples, in which a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are stored. From this state, rotate 90 degrees clockwise as seen from the right, and in a vertical state, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, and the left ear inner frame movable body first surface. A state in which the first surface 7410 and the first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body face forward and are stopped is shown. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have shapes imitating animal ears, and are attached to the door frame top unit 570. By taking the stored state and the state perpendicular to the top surface of the door frame top unit 570, it is possible to decoratively express the state in which the animal's ears move.

In addition, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are connected to a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It is also possible to allow the player to visually recognize the rotating state by driving the rotating state. When rotating in this way, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are rotated at a speed of about 1 rotation per second. It is best to rotate in the same direction multiple times. 306(B) and 306(E) show the rotating states of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. It can also be said that it shows. The rotation direction of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to rotate clockwise multiple times when viewed from the right, or rotate counterclockwise multiple times when viewed from the right. It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the first surface 7310 of the right ear inner frame movable body and the second surface 7320 of the right ear inner frame movable body are alternately visible to the player. Further, the first surface 7360 of the right ear outer frame movable body and the second surface 7370 of the right ear outer frame movable body are alternately visible to the player. Further, the first surface 7410 of the left ear inner frame movable body and the second surface 7420 of the left ear inner frame movable body are alternately visible to the player. Furthermore, the first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body and the second surface 7470 of the left ear outer frame movable body are alternately visible to the player.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 can stop at a predetermined position or rotate. The light emitted from the right side light emitting part 7050 and the left side light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit causes the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body to move. Although it has been shown that it is possible to make each body 7450 into a predetermined decorative state, a specific example will be shown below.

As shown in FIGS. 306(A), 306(C), and 306(D), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 are Right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 of left ear inner frame movable body 7400, left ear outer frame movable body first surface of left ear outer frame movable body 7450. 7460 facing downward, when light is irradiated from the right side light emitting part 7050 inside the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting part 7052 inside the door frame top unit, the light reflected inside the door frame top unit 570 will cause the door to It is possible to make the entire frame top unit 570 dimly emit light. This is because the door frame top unit 570 is made of white and translucent synthetic resin.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 306(B) and 306(E), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 that the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 has, and the right ear outer side that the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 has The frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 face forward. When the right side light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit emit light in the facing state, the right ear inside frame of the right ear inside frame movable body 7300 is emitted by the light. Movable body first surface 7310, right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 of right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 of left ear inner frame movable body 7400, left ear outer side It becomes possible for the player to visually recognize that the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 of the frame movable body 7450 is decorated. In this case as well, some of the light emitted from the right light emitting section 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting section 7052 in the door frame top unit illuminates the door frame top unit 570 from the inside. , the entire door frame top unit 570 becomes visible to the player in a somewhat vaguely emitted state.

On the other hand, when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are rotated, the right side light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the door When light is emitted from the left side light emitting section 7052 in the frame top unit, the emitted light causes the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, and the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370; left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 and left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420; left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460; The left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 is alternately illuminated.

In this way, above the upper surfaces of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body Since the 7450 is stationary and can be positioned or rotated, it is possible to provide players with surprises and fun that were not possible before compared to the case where movable bodies within the game board are moved. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 307(A) to 308(B), right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, left ear outer frame movable body 7450 ( Frame movable body simulation which is an image imitating the frame movable body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in accordance with the specific operation mode of the frame movable body (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the frame movable body) The display mode of the image, the mode of accepting operations by the player on the operation button 410 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the operation section), the light emission mode of the right light emitting section 7050 in the door frame top unit, the left light emitting section 7052 in the door frame top unit, etc. An example of a combined effect is shown.

307(A) to FIG. 308(B) respectively show the operation mode of the frame movable body provided on the outside (right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear outer frame movable body 7450) and the game board side effect display. The display state of the frame movable body simulation image, which is an image simulating the frame movable body provided on the outside (right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear outer frame movable body 7450) displayed on the device 1600, and the display state of the frame movable body simulation image provided on the inside The operation mode of the frame movable body (right ear inner frame movable body 7300, left ear inner frame movable body 7400) and the frame movable body provided inside (right ear inner frame movable body) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. The display state of the frame movable body simulation image, which is an image imitating the frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400), the reception state of the operation unit, and the operation instruction display displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 12 is a time chart showing the display state of and the manner in which light is irradiated onto the frame movable body.

FIG. 307(A) shows an example of a production pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 307(B) shows an example of a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 308(A) shows an example of a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 308(B) shows an example of a production pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each production pattern shown in FIGS. 307(A) to 308(B), the frame movable body provided on the outside and the frame movable body provided on the inside change from a standby state (first state) to a rotating state (second state). ), the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image, the timing at which operation reception on the operation unit becomes effective, the timing at which operation instruction display starts, and the light irradiation mode on the frame movable body from the light emitting state to turning off. The timing of the state is the same. On the other hand, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends, the timing at which the frame movable body changes from the second state (rotation state) to another state, and the manner in which light is irradiated onto the frame movable body change from the light-out state to the light-emission production state or the specific light-emission production state. The timing at which this occurs may differ depending on the performance pattern. Specific performance examples for each performance pattern will be shown below with reference to FIGS. 307(A) to 308(B).

In the production patterns shown in FIGS. 307(A) to 308(B), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are In the initial state (before timing t0), it is housed in the door frame top unit 570 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the first state or standby state). 306(C), as shown in FIG. 306(D), right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, left ear outer frame The frame movable body first surface 7460 is in a state facing downward. In this state, when a reach effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing between timing t0 and timing t5 (for example, timing t1), the first surface 7360 of the right ear outer frame movable body and the left ear outer frame move. The body first surface 7460 simultaneously starts rotating at timing t5, and enters a state where the rotation continues (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a second state or rotating state). The rotation direction is clockwise when viewed from the right, and the rotation speed is one rotation per second.

At the same time, display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the center of the game board side effect display device 1600. At the same time, display of a door frame top unit simulated image, which is an image simulating the door frame top unit 570, is also started. Specifically, the frame movable body simulation images include an image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, an image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and an image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. It is composed of an image imitating the frame movable body 7450. The frame movable body simulation image is an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 in accordance with the rotation of the real right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The image continues to be displayed dynamically, rotating in the same direction. The rotation speed of the image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 rotate at the same speed as the rotation speed of the actual outer frame movable body (one rotation per second). will be displayed. As a result, when the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 are in a rotated state facing forward as shown in FIGS. 306(B) and 306(E), The image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 that the image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 has. The game board side effect display device displays the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460, which is included in the simulated image and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, as a frame movable body simulated image in a state where the image simulates the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460. 1600.

After the rotation state (second state) of the outer frame movable body continues from timing t4 to timing t9, at timing t9, the inner frame movable body (right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and left ear inner frame movable body 7400) start rotating at the same time, resulting in a state where the rotation continues (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the second state or rotating state). The manner of rotation of the inner frame movable body and the display mode of an image imitating the inner frame movable body are the same as those of the outer frame movable body, so a description thereof will be omitted. On the other hand, at timing t9, the acceptance of the operation on the operation unit becomes valid, and display of an image instructing the operation on the operation unit on the game board side effect display device 1600 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as operation instruction display) starts. Ru. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string instructing to operate the operation section (for example, a character string "Push!!") may be displayed. It's okay. Note that the operation validity period continues until an operation is accepted on the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time elapses (until timing t18). Further, at timing t9, the right light emitting section 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting section 7052 in the door frame top unit, which irradiate light to the frame movable body, turn off from the state in which they perform a light emission effect.

FIG. 307(A) and FIG. 307(B) show the production mode when the operation on the operation unit is performed at timing t14 after the period in which the operation on the operation unit is valid has started (timing t9). It shows. In these performance patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t14, the frame movable body that has been rotating until then stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the special lottery result, and the light to the frame movable body stops. The irradiation mode becomes a predetermined light emitting effect state corresponding to the special lottery result.

FIG. 307(A) is a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot, and when the operation section is operated (timing t14), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, left ear outer frame movable body 7450, right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, left ear inner frame movable body first It is in a vertically stopped state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a third state) with the surface 7410 and the first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body facing toward you. At the same time, a specific light emitting effect in which the light irradiation mode on the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is different from the normal light emitting effect state. state. In this way, when the light irradiation mode becomes the specific light emission performance state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is a jackpot.

On the other hand, FIG. 307(B) is a production pattern when the special lottery result is a loss, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame The movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are respectively connected to the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface. The second surface 7420 and the second surface 7470 of the left ear outer frame movable body are in a vertically stopped state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the fourth state) with the second surface 7470 facing toward you. At the same time, the light irradiation mode for the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 changes from a light-off state to a normal light emitting effect state. In this way, by changing the light irradiation mode to the normal light emitting performance state, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is a loss.

308(A) and 308(B) show that after the period in which operations on the operating section are valid has started (timing t9), no operation is performed on the operating section by the player during the valid operation period; This shows a performance mode when the operation valid period ends at timing t18 after a predetermined time period has elapsed. In these performance patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t18, the frame movable body that has been rotating until then automatically stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the special lottery result, and the frame movable body The light irradiation mode becomes a predetermined light emitting effect state corresponding to the special lottery result.

FIG. 308(A) is a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot, and at the timing when the valid operation period ends (timing t18), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left The inner ear frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are respectively a right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, a right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, a left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, The left ear outer frame movable body is in a vertically stopped state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a third state) with the first surface 7460 facing toward you. At the same time, a specific light emitting effect in which the light irradiation mode on the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is different from the normal light emitting effect state. state. In this way, when the light irradiation mode becomes the specific light emission performance state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is a jackpot.

On the other hand, FIG. 308(B) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss, and at the timing when the valid operation period ends (timing t18), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 , left ear inner frame movable body 7400, left ear outer frame movable body 7450, right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, respectively. , the left ear outer frame movable body is in a vertically stopped state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the fourth state) with the second surface 7470 facing toward you. At the same time, the light irradiation mode for the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 changes from a light-off state to a normal light emitting effect state. In this way, by changing the light irradiation mode to the normal light emitting performance state, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is a loss.

In this way, when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, each frame movable body stops in the third state to indicate a jackpot, and when the result of the special lottery is a loss, each The frame movable body stops in the fourth state, indicating a loss.

In each production pattern shown in FIGS. 307(A) to 308(B), at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the operation validity period ends, the decorative pattern that has been changing corresponds to the special lottery result. It will stop and be displayed. For example, in the case of the performance patterns shown in FIGS. 307(A) and 308(A), the special lottery result is in the form of a row of eyes (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the result is a jackpot. In the case of the performance patterns shown in FIGS. 307(B) and 308(B), in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the reach loss mode (for example, "7", "6", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is displayed. ), the decorative pattern will be stopped and displayed.

At the timing (timing t24) when 4 seconds have elapsed since the decorative pattern stopped, the frame movable body moves the inner frame of the right ear while maintaining either the specific light emission state or the normal light emission state. A state in which the body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 face forward (third state); Right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, and left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 facing forward ( 4th state), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 are downward. The state is changed to a state facing the direction (first state). At the same time, the display of the frame movable body simulated image ends.

When the special lottery result is a jackpot, the light irradiation state on the frame movable body may be configured to change from a specific light emitting effect state to a normal light emitting effect state at a predetermined timing during the jackpot. If the special lottery result is a loss, the normal light emitting effect state is continued and the next decorative pattern variation is started.

In this way, by configuring the frame movable body to display the frame movable body simulated image at the timing when the frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state), the frame movable body is in the rotating state ( It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks that the player is in the second state). In addition, the frame movable body appears in a position that has not been seen before in response to the special lottery result, making it possible to give the player a great sense of surprise and fun. In addition, after the outer frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the rotation state (second state), the inner frame movable body rotates from the standby state (first state) with the start of the valid operation period. state (second state), and further triggered by the player's operation on the operation unit, the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body change to a third state indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. By changing the state to one of the fourth states indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if he or she has determined the result of the special lottery.

309(A) to 309(E) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 306(A) to 306(E). 309(A) and 309(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 309(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 309(D) and FIG. 309(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 309(A), FIG. 309(C), and FIG. 309(D) show that the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. A state in a standby position (first state) is shown. 309(B) and 309(E) show a state in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are rotating ( 2nd state).

In this embodiment, the vertical thickness of the door frame top unit 570 is smaller than that of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 306(A) to 306(E), and the right ear inner frame is movable. The body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are configured to be visible from below.

Near the front end of the door frame top unit, a right side light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. Further, a left side light emitting section 7052 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The right light emitting section 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting section 7052 in the door frame top unit are capable of emitting light toward the rear. As a result, it is possible to bring the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 located at the rear into a predetermined light emitting effect state. be.

A frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 307(A) to 308(B). In addition, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, the left ear outer frame It is preferable that the movable body first surface 7460 is in a stopped state (third state) facing the front as shown in FIGS. 309(B) and 309(E). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a loss, right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, left ear outer frame It is preferable to set the movable body second surface 7470 to a stopped state (fourth state) facing the front. Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

310(A) to 311(B) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 306(A) to 306(E). 310(A) and 310(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 310(C) and FIG. 310(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 311(A) and 311(B) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 310(A), FIG. 310(C), and FIG. 311(A) show that the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. A state in a standby position (first state) is shown. 310(B), FIG. 310(D), and FIG. 311(B) show that the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. A rotating state (second state) is shown.

In this embodiment, the center portion of the door frame top unit 570 is hollowed out in the left-right direction, and is visible in a U-shape when viewed from the right side. A right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are located at the bottom of the door frame top unit 570 which is hollowed out in the left and right direction. is provided with a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450, respectively.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are in the standby state (first state) as shown in FIGS. The frame movable body first surface 7310 and the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 are positioned to face each other.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have a shape that is a bottomed cylinder with a part of the cylindrical side surface cut off and reversed in the vertical direction. 310(A), FIG. 310(C), and FIG. 311(A), in the standby state (first state), in front of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. , the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 are located facing forward, and the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are It is configured so that it cannot be seen when viewed from the front. On the other hand, in the first state, when the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are viewed from diagonally below, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame It is possible to visually recognize the lower part of each movable body 7400.

At the lower part of the door frame top unit 570, a right side light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. Further, a left side light emitting section 7052 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The right side light emitting section 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting section 7052 in the door frame top unit are capable of emitting light diagonally upward and forward. As a result, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, which are located diagonally above the front, can be brought into a predetermined light emitting state. It is possible.

A frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 307(A) to 308(B). In addition, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, as shown in FIGS. 310(B), 310(D), and 311(B), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 and the left ear inner frame It is preferable that the movable body first surface 7410 is in a stopped state (third state) facing the front. On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a loss, it is preferable to make the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420 face forward and stop (fourth state). . On the other hand, regarding the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, whether the special lottery result is a jackpot or a loss, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370 and the left ear outer frame It is preferable that the second surface 7470 of the movable body faces the player side. Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

312(A) to 312(D) and FIG. 313(A) to FIG. 313(B) show modified examples of the frame movable body shown and explained in FIGS. 282(A) to 282(E). There is. 312(A) and 312(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 312(C) and FIG. 312(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 313(A) and 313(B) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 312(A), FIG. 312(C), and FIG. 313(A) show a state in which a plurality of frame movable bodies are stored in the standby position (first state). 312(B), FIG. 312(D), and FIG. 313(B) show a state in which a plurality of frame movable bodies have moved to the movement position (second state).

In the embodiment shown below, a door frame top unit face decoration part 7500 is provided in place of the door frame top unit 570, and a door frame side unit right arm part 7600, a door frame side unit left arm part 7650, and a curtain plate bottom unit are provided. It includes a right leg movable body 7700 and a curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750.

The door frame top unit face decoration part 7500 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape imitating a box composed of two members with a lid, and its right side and left side constitute the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3, respectively. It is provided so as to overlap the right side and left side of the door frame base unit 100 when viewed from the front. Further, the upper surface of the door frame top unit face decoration portion 7500 is always located above the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit face decoration part 7500 includes a door frame top unit face movable body 7510 which is a lid box that is placed on top of a box that is made up of two parts with a lid, and a lid box that is placed on top of a box that is made up of two parts with a lid. It is composed of a door frame top unit face lower part 7520 which is a body box on which the door frame is placed.

The door frame top unit face movable body 7510 is shaped like a lid box without a side surface on the back side, is provided so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top unit face lower part 7520, and is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It is installed so that it can be moved up and down by a drive mechanism that does not need to be moved. In addition, on the front side of the door frame top unit face movable body 7510, there is a decoration for the right eye of the door frame top unit, which has a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front and has a shape that imitates the eyes of an animal robot. A portion 7512 and a door frame top unit left eye decoration portion 7514 are provided. The door frame top unit face movable body 7510 is provided with a right ear frame movable body 7100 and a left ear frame movable body 7200 that imitate animal ears, similarly to the door frame top unit 570. Also in this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are configured to be movable in the vertical direction.

The door frame top unit face lower part 7520 has a box-like shape with a recess that can accommodate the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and like the door frame top unit 570, the door frame top unit face lower part 7520 It is provided in a fixed state on the upper part of 3. Further, the door frame top unit face lower part 7520 includes a door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 and a door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524.

The door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is provided so as to be embedded in the door frame top unit face lower part 7520 near the center in the left-right direction on the front side surface of the door frame top unit face lower part 7520. The door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape, but it has a box shape with the lower surface open like an upside-down sliding dresser door. The door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is movable in the front-rear direction. The door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is a frame movable body imitating the muzzle and mouth of an animal robot.

The door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is provided so as to be covered by the front side side portion of the door frame top unit face upper movable body 7510. Therefore, in the state (first state) covered by the front side surface portion of the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is not visible. Further, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is in a state where it cannot be moved forward.

As the door frame top unit face upper movable body 7510 moves upward and enters the second state, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 provided to be embedded in the door frame top unit face lower part 7520 moves upward. The front side surface becomes visible from the front, and the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 becomes movable forward.

The door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 is provided near the center in the left-right direction on the front side of the bottom surface portion of the door frame top unit face lower part 7520. The door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 has a shape like a cylinder cut into a fan shape, and when viewed from the right side as shown in FIGS. 313(A) and 313(B), it has a fan-shaped shape. It is provided so that the side forming the central angle is located on the right side. The door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 can be rotated within a predetermined angular range using the side forming the central angle of the fan shape as a rotation axis. Further, the door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 does not have a curved surface located on the near side. Therefore, when the door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 is rotated approximately 35 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the right side, as shown in FIGS. 312(B) and 313(B), The interior is configured to be visible.

The door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 changes from a state where it is embedded in the door frame top unit face lower part 7520 (first state) to a state where it is moved forward (second state), The door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 is rotated approximately 35 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the right side from the state (first state) in which the door frame top unit face lower part movable body 7524 is housed in the door frame top unit face lower part 7520 (first state). 2), it is possible to decoratively express the state in which the animal robot opens its mouth.

The door frame side unit right arm part 7600 and the door frame side unit left arm part 7650 are provided below the door frame top unit face decoration part 7500 so as to protrude toward this side from the front surfaces of both left and right ends of the door frame base unit 100. ing.

The door frame side unit right arm section 7600 includes a door frame side unit right arm case section 7610, a door frame side unit right arm upper arm section 7620, and a door frame side unit right arm lower arm section 7630.

The door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The door frame side unit right arm case part 7610 has a box-like shape with a space inside, and the door frame side unit right arm upper arm part 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm part 7630 are movable inside. It is. The thickness of the door frame side unit right arm case part 7610 is approximately several mm, and is configured so that the door frame side unit right arm upper arm part 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm part 7630 that move inside can be visually recognized.

The door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 is made of flexible synthetic resin and is formed into a pipe shape. The length of the door frame side unit right arm upper arm part 7620 is approximately 50 cm, and by rotating a reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown) provided in the door frame top unit face lower part 7520 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, It is possible to roll it up and down. 312(A) and 313(A) show a state (first state) in which the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 is wound up by a reel-like drive mechanism (not shown).

The lower right arm portion 7630 of the door frame side unit is formed of two members shaped like the letter L when viewed from the side and a cylindrical member imitating a shaft that locks them, and is imitated a manipulator of a robot. It has a shape. Furthermore, the end of the right arm upper arm section 7620 of the door frame side unit is attached to this cylindrical member, and the door frame side unit right arm upper arm section 7620 is wound up by the above-mentioned reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown). In the first state), the lower arm section 7630 of the right arm of the door frame side unit is located at the upper part of the right arm case section 7610 of the door frame side unit.

By rotating a reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown) in the opposite direction to the winding direction, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm part 7620 is lowered in the door frame side unit right arm case part 7610, and the door frame side unit right arm The lower arm portion 7630 is positioned at the lower part of the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 due to its own weight. FIG. 312(B) shows a state (second state) in which the door frame side unit right arm lower arm part 7630 is located at the lower part of the door frame side unit right arm case part 7610. Note that in the second state, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620, which had been invisible until then, becomes visible.

The door frame side unit left arm section 7650 has a bilaterally symmetrical structure and the same function as the door frame side unit right arm section 7600. Specifically, the door frame side unit left arm case portion 7660 has the same structure and function as the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610, and the door frame side unit left arm upper arm portion 7670 has the same structure and function as the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610. The door frame side unit left arm lower arm section 7680 has the same structure and function as the door frame side unit right arm lower arm section 7630. Therefore, detailed description of each member constituting the door frame side unit left arm portion 7650 will be omitted.

Also, regarding the door frame side unit left arm section 7650, similarly to the door frame side unit right arm section 7600, the door frame side unit left arm lower arm section 7680 is wound up by a reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown) (first state). By rotating the reel-shaped drive mechanism in the opposite direction to the winding direction, it is possible to take the lower state (second state). For example, FIGS. 312(B) and 313(B) show a state in which the left arm lower arm portion 7680 of the door frame side unit is located at the lower part (second state). Note that in the second state, the door frame side unit left arm bicep 7670, which was previously invisible, becomes visible.

The whole or part of the outside (left side in front view) of the door frame side unit right arm case part 7610 and the whole or part of the outside (right side in front view) of the door frame side unit left arm case part 7660 are made of opaque synthetic resin. Alternatively, it may be formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and then a colored opaque sticker or the like may be pasted thereon. The entire inside of the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 (right side when viewed from the front) and the entire inside of the door frame side unit left arm case portion 7660 (left side when viewed from the front) are preferably formed of colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

With this configuration, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm section 7620, the door frame side unit right arm lower arm section 7630, the door frame side unit left arm upper arm section 7670, and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm section 7680 can be moved. It becomes difficult for the players on the left and right to visually recognize the machine, and only the players playing the game on the pachinko machine 1 can enjoy the game to the fullest without other players knowing that the machine has operated. In addition, as described later, if these frame movable bodies are operated for the purpose of indicating a predetermined expectation level, even if the special lottery result is a loss after these frame movable bodies operate, other The player is less likely to be seen by other players, and is less likely to feel embarrassed by other players.

The curtain plate member 50 has a curtain bottom unit right foot movable body 7700 on the left side when viewed from the front, and a curtain bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 on the right side when viewed from the front. The curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 and the curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 are in the standby position (first state) as shown in FIGS. They are located below the handle unit 300, respectively.

The curtain bottom unit right foot movable body 7700 is composed of a curtain bottom unit right foot shin portion 7710 and a curtain bottom unit right foot tip portion 7720. The shape of the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shin portion 7710 is cylindrical. Furthermore, the right foot end portion 7720 of the curtain plate bottom unit has a rectangular parallelepiped shape imitating the shape of a foot, and is provided with two circular recesses in the portion corresponding to the sole of the foot. A curtain plate bottom unit right foot portion 7720 is attached to the front side surface of the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shank portion 7710. Therefore, the curtain bottom unit right foot shank portion 7710 and the curtain bottom unit right foot tip portion 7720 operate integrally.

A drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 is provided at the lower part of the outer frame 2, and it is possible to move the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shin part 7710 in the front and back direction. Further, the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shin portion 7710 can be rotated by a predetermined angle about the longitudinal direction of the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shin portion 7710.

For example, after moving the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shin part 7710 a predetermined distance forward from the standby position (first state) shown in FIGS. 312(A) and 313(A), It may be configured to rotate 90 degrees clockwise and operate in a stopped state (second state). 312(B) and 313(B) show the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shank portion 7710 in the stopped state (second state) in this manner.

The curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 has a bilaterally symmetrical structure and the same function as the curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700. Specifically, the curtain bottom unit left foot shin part 7760 has the same structure and function as the curtain bottom unit right foot shin part 7710, and the curtain bottom unit left foot part 7770 has the same structure and function as the curtain bottom unit right foot shin part 7710. It has the same structure and function as the tip 7720. Therefore, a detailed description of each member constituting the curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 will be omitted.

By providing the frame movable body below the gaming machine in this way, the player does not visually recognize when the frame movable body has operated as in the past, but the player's arm or other body part When the frame movable body makes contact, it becomes possible to provide the player with an unprecedented perceptual experience in which the player recognizes that the frame movable body has moved.

With reference to FIGS. 312 and 313, an embodiment has been shown in which a plurality of frame movable bodies are provided in the pachinko machine 1 and the frame movable bodies operate. Specifically, door frame top unit face upper movable body 7510, right ear frame movable body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200, door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522, door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 , door frame side unit right arm upper arm part 7620, door frame side unit right arm lower arm part 7630, door frame side unit left arm upper arm part 7670, door frame side unit left arm lower arm part 7680, curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700, curtain plate The bottom unit left leg movable body 7750, as a frame movable body, changes from the state (first state) shown in FIGS. 312(A), 312(C), and 313(A) to the state shown in FIG. 312(B). ), changes to the state (second state) at the movement position shown in FIGS. 312(D) and 313(B). Further, each frame movable body can take the first state and the second state by controlling a drive means (not shown) provided corresponding to each frame movable body by the peripheral control board 1510. .

Further, each frame movable body may be provided with a light emitting means controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, so that it can be configured to have the normal light emitting effect state and the specific light emitting effect state as described above.

Each frame movable body can be used in the production patterns shown in FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B), the production patterns shown in FIGS. 292(A) to 293(B), or variations of these production patterns. It may be applied to a pattern to cause it to operate or emit light.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are provided on the door frame top unit face movable body 7510. After the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 is in the second state located above, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear are housed in the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 (first state). The frame movable body 7200 may be configured to be in an upwardly protruding state (second state). Further, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B) and the time charts of modified examples thereof. Specifically, in each time chart, the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 is first changed from the first state to the second state, and the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear The frame movable body 7200 may be configured to change from the first state to the second state.

Alternatively, after the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 is in the second state located above, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body is stored in the door frame top unit face lower part 7520 (first state). 7522 may be configured to be in a forwardly protruding state (second state). Further, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B) and the time charts of modified examples thereof. Specifically, in each time chart, the door frame top unit face upper movable body 7510 is first changed from the first state to the second state, and in response to an operation on the operation section, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7510 is changed from the first state to the second state. 7522 may be configured to change from the first state to the second state.

Further, after the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is changed from the first state to the second state, the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 is changed from the first state to the second state. Good too. Further, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B) and the time charts of modified examples thereof.

Alternatively, after the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 is changed from the first state to the second state, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is changed from the first state to the second state. Good too. Further, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B) and the time charts of modified examples thereof.

314(A) to 314(K) show modified examples of the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image that can be adapted to the production pattern described with reference to FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B). It is something that Note that FIG. 314(A) collectively represents each effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B).

FIG. 314(B) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this performance pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at timing t4, and the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is completed at timing t6. Thereafter, at timing t7, the raising operation of the frame movable body is started.

By configuring such an operation/display pattern to be executable as a performance, the display of the frame movable body simulated image serves as a preview that the frame movable body will operate. In addition, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image allows the player to recognize how the frame movable body moves, and the player who sees such a frame movable body simulated image The motion of the movable body can be visually recognized from the start of the motion. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the movement of the frame movable body. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player who carelessly touches the frame movable body injures a finger or the like. Further, it is possible to indicate that a player who has placed lightweight luggage or the like on the frame movable body moves the items to another position. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player is injured due to falling luggage or a load is applied to the drive unit that moves the frame movable body.

FIG. 314(C) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this performance pattern, the raising operation of the ear frame movable body is completed at timing t9, and then dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at timing t10, and dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at timing t12. is completed.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the movement of the frame movable body to the raised position (movement position). Therefore, if a player does not notice the movement of the frame movable body, the frame movable body that has completed its movement to the raised position will suddenly become visible to such players, causing a big surprise to the player. It becomes possible to give it to a person. Furthermore, since the frame movable body simulated image is displayed after the frame movable body has been moved to the raised position, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the frame movable body that has been moved. Furthermore, the player can know how the frame movable body moves.

FIG. 314(D) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this production pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at timing t6, then the rising operation of the frame movable body is started at timing t7, and the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at timing t8. is completed, and the raising operation of the frame movable body is completed at timing t9.

With such a configuration, the display of the frame movable body simulated image serves as a preview that the frame movable body will move. The player can be made aware of how the frame movable body operates. Movement of the frame movable body can be visually confirmed from the start of movement. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the movement of the frame movable body. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player who carelessly touches the frame movable body injures his fingers or the like.

FIG. 314(E) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this production pattern, the raising operation of the frame movable body is started at timing t7, then the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at timing t8, and the raising operation of the frame movable body is completed at timing t9, At timing t10, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is completed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to surprise the player by finding out that the frame movable body starts moving before he or she knows it. Furthermore, it is possible to notify the player that the frame movable body has started moving.

FIG. 314(F) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this performance pattern, dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is performed from timing t3 to timing t7 (4 seconds). On the other hand, the raising operation of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds). The frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 at half the speed of the movement of the actual frame movable body.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to recognize in detail how the frame movable body moves.

FIG. 314(G) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this performance pattern, dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is performed from timing t5 to timing t9 (4 seconds). On the other hand, the raising operation of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds). The frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 at half the speed of the movement of the actual frame movable body.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to recognize in detail how the frame movable body moves.

FIG. 314(H) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this production pattern, after the rising motion of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds), the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is performed from timing t9 to timing t13 (4 seconds). be exposed. The frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 at half the speed of the movement of the actual frame movable body.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to recognize in detail how the frame movable body has moved.

FIG. 314(I) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this production pattern, after the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is performed from timing t5 to timing t7 (2 seconds), the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is performed again from timing t7 to timing t9. It will be done. On the other hand, the raising operation of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds). Note that the number of times that the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed may be three or more times, and for example, the frame movable body simulated image may be dynamically displayed from timing t3 to timing t5.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to recognize how the frame movable body moves.

FIG. 314(J) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this production pattern, after the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds), the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is performed again from timing t9 to timing t11. It will be done. On the other hand, the raising operation of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds). Note that the number of times the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed may be three or more times, and for example, the frame movable body simulated image may be dynamically displayed from timing t11 to timing t13.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to recognize how the frame movable body has moved.

FIG. 314(K) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this performance pattern, a total of three times are performed from timing t4 to timing t5, from timing t5 to timing t6, and from timing t6 to timing t7, which are the timings before the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. The frame movable body simulated image is changed from a display mode simulating the first state to a display mode simulating the second state at twice the speed of the frame movable body. Note that such display may be performed twice in total from timing t5 to timing t6 and from timing t6 to timing t7, or may be performed only once from timing t6 to timing t7.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to recognize in a short time how the frame movable body moves. In addition, since the frame movable body simulated image is displayed quickly, the eyes become accustomed to seeing the movement of the real frame movable body, allowing the player to fully enjoy the operation mode of the real frame movable body. becomes possible. Furthermore, by displaying the information multiple times, it is possible to make the player more aware of the operation mode.

It is preferable that each performance pattern described with reference to FIGS. 314(A) to 314(K) is executed in response to a predetermined situation in the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the degree of expectation for a jackpot and its appearance frequency may be configured to differ for each performance pattern. For example, when a predetermined reach effect occurs, one of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 314(A) to 314(K) may be selected and executed. good. Furthermore, the effect pattern shown and explained in FIG. 314(A) has the highest frequency of appearance, and the frequency of appearance gradually decreases as the effect patterns shown and explained in FIGS. 314(B) to 314(K) are shown. The performance pattern shown and explained in FIG. 314(A) has the lowest level of expectation for a jackpot, and as the performance patterns shown and explained in FIGS. 314(B) to 314(K) are shown, the level of expectation for a jackpot gradually decreases. The performance pattern to be executed may be selected based on the jackpot lottery result so that the winning lottery result becomes high. Further, each of the following modified examples may also be configured to be executed with a predetermined expectation level or appearance frequency.

With this configuration, when a production pattern with a movable frame body that is different from normal appears, the level of expectation for a jackpot for the player will not be higher than the production pattern with a normal movable frame body. It is possible to make it feel like this.

It should be noted that some of the examples of effects shown in FIGS. 314(A) to 314(K) may be combined to be executed as an effect. In this case, in the game board side effect display device 1600, it is preferable to combine a plurality of frame movable body simulated images so that they are not displayed at the same time. For example, by executing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 314(K) from timing t4 to timing t7, and executing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 314(J) from timing t7 to timing t11, the effect produced by both effect patterns is It becomes possible to execute a performance pattern that can perform both.

315(A) to 315(E) show modified examples of the light emitting mode of the light emitting part of the frame movable body that can be applied to the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B). This is what is shown. Note that FIG. 315(A) collectively represents each effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B).

FIG. 315(B) shows an effect pattern in which the light emitting section of the frame movable body is turned off in accordance with the timing (timing t7) when the frame movable body starts moving from the standby position to the movement position. Further, in FIG. 315(C), the light emitting section of the frame movable body is turned off at a timing (timing t5) before the timing (timing t7) when the frame movable body starts moving from the standby position to the movement position. It shows the production pattern.

In this way, the light emitting part of the frame movable body turns off at a timing before the frame movable body enters the second state, and this state remains until the operation part is operated or the operation validity period ends. By maintaining this, it becomes difficult for the player to notice that the frame movable body is moving from the standby position to the movement position. In such a situation, if the player performs an operation on the operation section, the frame movable body that has completed its movement to the movement position will suddenly emit light from the unlit state (a special light-emitting effect state or a light-emitting effect state). state), making it possible to give a big surprise to the players.

FIG. 315(D) shows an effect pattern in which the light emitting section of the frame movable body is turned off at timing t9, but the light emission is suppressed. The state where light emission is suppressed may be, for example, when the light is emitted with a longer blinking cycle or the amount of light is reduced compared to the light emitting effect state.

In this way, instead of turning off the lights, by setting the light emission to a suppressed state, the same effect as in the case of turning off the lights can be obtained.

FIG. 315(E) shows an effect pattern in which the light emitting section of the frame movable body is put into a specific light emitting effect state instead of being turned off at timing t9. It is preferable that this performance pattern is selected only when the special lottery result is a jackpot. An example has been shown in which the light emitting part of the frame movable body is brought into a specific light emitting performance state at timing t9 when the frame movable body enters the second state, but at timing t7 when the frame movable body starts its operation and when the frame is movable. At timing t5, which is the timing before the body starts moving, the light emitting section of the frame movable body may be put into a specific light emitting effect state.

Instead of turning off the light, the state of the light-emitting part of the frame movable body is suddenly set to a specific light-emission performance state, thereby making it possible to make the player have high expectations for winning the jackpot.

316(A) to 316(E) show modified examples of the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image that can be adapted to the production pattern described with reference to FIGS. 292(A) to 293(B). It is something that Note that FIG. 316(A) collectively represents each effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 292(A) to 293(B).

FIG. 316(B) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this production pattern, dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at timing t7, and then, at timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the standby position (first state) starts rotating and enters a rotating state (second state).

As described above, the image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 move at the same speed as the rotation speed of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. displayed. Therefore, after the image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are displayed to rotate twice between timing t7 and timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 Then, the left ear frame movable body 7200 actually starts rotating. Note that the timing to start displaying the frame movable body simulated image may be set to an earlier timing. For example, if the display of the frame movable body simulated image is configured to start at timing t5, a display in which an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and an image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 rotate four times is executed. Later, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 actually start rotating.

In this way, by configuring the frame movable body simulated image to be displayed before the frame movable body starts operating, the display of the frame movable body simulated image serves as a preview that the frame movable body will operate. . Further, by dynamically displaying the frame movable body simulated image, the player can be made aware of how the frame movable body operates. Then, a player who views such a frame movable body simulated image can visually recognize the motion of the frame movable body from the start of the motion. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player misses the movement of the frame movable body. In addition, by repeatedly dynamically displaying the frame movable body simulated image before the frame movable body starts moving, it is possible to make the player more reliably aware of how the frame movable body moves. becomes. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player who carelessly touches the frame movable body injures a finger or the like. Further, it is possible to indicate that a player who has placed lightweight luggage or the like on the frame movable body moves the items to another position. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player is injured due to falling luggage or a load is applied to the drive unit that moves the frame movable body.

FIG. 316(C) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this production pattern, at timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 that are in the standby position (first state) start rotating and enter the rotating state (second state), and then at timing At t11, dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started.

In this way, by configuring the frame movable body to display the frame movable body simulated image after the frame movable body starts its operation, the player does not notice that the frame movable body has changed to the rotating state (second state). This makes it possible to make it less likely to occur. Therefore, if the player does not notice the change in the state of the frame movable body, the frame movable body that is in a rotating state will suddenly become visible to the player, which can give the player a big surprise. becomes.

FIG. 316(D) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this performance pattern, dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at timing t7. From timing t7 to timing t9, dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is performed at high speed (two revolutions per second). Thereafter, at timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the standby position (first state) start rotating and enter the rotating state (second state).

In this way, by configuring the frame movable body simulated image to be displayed rotating at a faster speed (twice the speed) than the actual frame movable body before the frame movable body starts its operation, the frame movable body It becomes possible to get used to the operating mode when the rotation state (second state) is changed.

FIG. 316(E) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this performance pattern, dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at timing t5. Dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is performed at a low speed (half a rotation per second) from timing t5 to timing t9. Thereafter, at timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the standby position (first state) start rotating and enter the rotating state (second state).

In this way, by configuring the frame movable body simulated image to be displayed rotating at a slow speed (half speed) than the actual frame movable body before the frame movable body starts moving, the frame movable body For players who feel that the movement mode is too fast when the body changes to the rotating state (second state), it becomes possible to know the movement mode of the frame movable body.

Modifications of the display mode of the frame movable body simulated images shown in FIGS. 314(B) to 314(E) are described with reference to FIGS. 297 to 299, and modifications of those embodiments. It may be configured so that it can be suitably applied to the inner frame movable body as a performance pattern.

Modifications of the display mode of the frame movable body simulated images shown in FIGS. 316(B) to 316(E) are described with reference to FIGS. 306 to 308, etc., and modified examples of those embodiments The present invention may be applied to either the inner frame movable body or the outer frame movable body, or may be applied to both in the same manner so as to be executable as a production pattern.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 298 and 299, and FIGS. 307 and 308, respectively, the first frame movable body is changed from the first state to the second state, and then that state is maintained for a certain period of time. The second frame movable body is configured to change from the first state to the second state later. Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 298 and 299, the configuration is such that a predetermined time is required to change the first frame movable body from the first state to the second state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the manner in which the frame movable body changes state.

In the production examples described above with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284, FIGS. 292 and 293, FIGS. 298 and 299, and FIGS. 307 and 308, respectively, the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. The frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 in the same manner as the actual frame movable body changes at the same timing as the timing shown in FIG. C), as described above with reference to FIGS. 314(E), 314(H), and 316(C), the actual frame is The movable body may be configured to start an operation of changing from the first state to the second state, or to change from the first state to the second state.

With this configuration, a player who sees the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image without noticing that the real frame movable body is moving can easily find the frame movable body in motion. It becomes possible to do so.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 292 and 293, FIGS. 298 and 299, and FIGS. 307 and 308, the special lottery result is determined by the player's operation on the operation unit during the valid operation period. Depending on the situation, the state of the frame movable body may change from the first state to the second state, or may change from the second state to either the third state or the fourth state. .

With this configuration, the player determines the position of the operation unit and the position of the frame movable body whose state may change, and then performs the operation while keeping his/her line of sight on the frame movable body. It becomes possible for the player to operate the operating section at a desired timing without looking at the section. Thereby, it is possible to reliably visually confirm whether or not the state of the frame movable body changes, and if so, to what state the frame movable body changes.

In the examples described above with reference to FIG. 292 and FIG. 293, FIG. 298 and FIG. 299, and FIG. 307 and FIG. However, in addition to the above-mentioned example, it may be configured to be able to execute an effect pattern that displays a special operation instruction image that can be displayed only when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. For example, the image of the frame movable body may be simultaneously displayed as the operation instruction image in such a manner that it is included in the image of the operation section.

With this configuration, when the player visually recognizes the special operation instruction image, he or she can recognize that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot and that the frame movable body will definitely operate when the operation section is operated. This makes it possible to operate the operating section while keeping the eye on the frame movable body, and allows the user to fully enjoy the operation of the frame movable body.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284, FIGS. 292 and 293, FIGS. 298 and 299, and FIGS. A light emitting part capable of emitting light is provided separately from the frame movable body, and after the frame movable body changes its state, it is turned off at the same timing as the operation validity period starts, and the operation part is operated. Although it is configured to be in a light emitting effect state according to a predetermined light emission mode depending on the timing and the end of the effective operation period, as explained with reference to FIGS. 315(D) and 315(E), the effective period of operation It is not necessarily necessary to turn the lights off, but the light emitting effect state may be configured to be in a light emitting effect state that is distinguishable from a normal light emitting effect state. For example, by turning off only the outer frame movable body and putting the inner frame movable body into a specific light emitting effect state, or by turning off the right frame movable body and putting the left frame movable body into a specific light emitting effect state, you can win the jackpot. It may also be configured to notify that the occurrence of this occurs. Alternatively, all frame movable bodies are turned off until the operation valid period, and when the operation valid period occurs, the inner frame movable body is set to a light emitting state to notify that the operation valid period has occurred, and then the operation section The light emitting effect state of all the frame-side movable bodies may be changed to the light emitting effect state according to the special lottery result in response to the operation or the end of the valid operation period.

In this manner, the light emitting state of the frame movable body changes to a different state in response to a change in the state of the frame movable body, making it easier to recognize that the frame movable body has operated by a change in the light emission mode. Furthermore, if at least a portion of the frame movable body is illuminated, the player is less likely to be injured when the frame movable body moves, compared to when the frame movable body is unlit. be

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284, FIGS. 292 and 293, FIGS. 298 and 299, and FIGS. 307 and 308, respectively, the timing at which the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state is The frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the same manner as the actual frame movable body changes at the same timing as in FIG. 314(B). ), Figure 314(D), Figure 314(F), Figure 314(G), Figure 314(I), Figure 314(K), Figure 316(B), Figure 316(D), Figure 316(E). As mentioned above, at a timing before starting the operation of changing the actual frame movable body from the first state to the second state or changing from the first state to the second state. , the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image may be started.

With this configuration, the movable frame body can be visually checked while knowing in advance how the movable frame body moves, so there is no need to miss every move of the movable frame body. It becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of situations. Such a configuration is particularly effective when the frame movable body moves in a complicated manner as shown in the time charts shown in FIGS. 298 and 299 or FIGS. 307 and 308.

In the example described above with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284, and FIGS. 298 and 299, respectively, the frame movable body Although the simulated image is configured to be dynamically displayed at the same speed as the change mode of the actual frame movable body, as described above with reference to FIG. 314(K), the frame movable body simulated image The speed at which the frame movable body changes from the display mode in a state simulating the first state to the display mode in a state simulating the second state may be faster than the speed at which the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state.

In this way, the frame movable body simulated image changes from the display mode of the state simulating the first state in a shorter time (1 second) than the time (2 seconds) for the frame movable body to change from the first state to the second state. By configuring the display mode to be a state that simulates the second state, the eye becomes accustomed to the quick movement of the frame movable body simulated image, so that the actual frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. In some cases, you can fully enjoy the movement.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 292 and 293, and FIGS. 307 and 308, respectively, the frame movable body is configured to rotate once per second in the second state, but FIG. As mentioned above with reference, the frame movable body simulated image may be dynamically displayed in a manner of rotating at a faster speed before the frame movable body enters the second state. For example, the frame movable body may be configured to be in the second state after displaying the frame movable body simulated image so as to make one rotation or multiple rotations at a speed of one rotation in 0.5 seconds.

In this way, the structure is configured to perform dynamic display in which the frame movable body simulated image rotates once in a shorter time (0.5 seconds) than the time required for the frame movable body to rotate once (1 second). By doing so, the eyes become accustomed to the quick movement of the frame movable body simulated image, and it becomes possible to fully enjoy the rotating motion of the actual frame movable body in the second state.

In the example described above with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284, and FIGS. 298 and 299, respectively, the frame movable body Although the simulated image is configured to be dynamically displayed at the same speed as the change mode of the actual frame movable body, please refer to FIGS. 314(F), 314(G), and 314(H). As described above, the speed at which the frame movable body simulated image changes from the display mode of the state simulating the first state to the display mode of the state simulating the second state is determined by the speed at which the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. It may be slower than the rate of change.

In this way, it takes a longer time (4 seconds) for the frame movable body to change from the first state to the second state than the time it takes for the frame movable body to change from the first state to the second state. By configuring the display mode to change from the second state to the display mode that simulates the second state, even if the movement of the frame movable body seems too fast for the player, the player can see the frame movable body simulated image and This allows the player to recognize the mode of operation.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 292 and 293, and FIGS. 307 and 308, respectively, the frame movable body is configured to rotate once per second in the second state, but FIG. As mentioned above with reference, the frame movable body simulated image may be dynamically displayed in a manner that it rotates at a slower speed before the frame movable body enters the second state. For example, the frame movable body may be configured to be in the second state after displaying the frame movable body simulated image so as to make one rotation or multiple rotations at a speed of one rotation in 0.5 seconds.
In this way, the frame movable body simulated image is configured to perform a dynamic display in which it takes a longer time (2 seconds) than the time required for the frame movable body to make one rotation (1 second). By doing this, even if the rotational movement of the actual frame movable body in the second state feels too fast for the player, the player can recognize the operating mode by looking at the frame movable body simulated image. becomes possible.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284, and FIGS. 298 and 299, respectively, the frame movable body simulated image is However, the display is configured such that a display that dynamically changes from an image showing a state simulating the first state to an image showing a state simulating the second state is performed only once. As described with reference to FIGS. 314(J) and 314(K), the frame movable body simulated image may be displayed a plurality of times.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 292 and 293, and FIGS. 307 and 308, respectively, the frame movable body simulated image is displayed at the same timing as the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. is started and the actual frame movable body continues in the second state (rotation state), so that the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically rotated and displayed in the same manner as the actual frame movable body changes. It is configured. Therefore, the frame movable body simulated image is repeatedly displayed in rotation in a loop.

In this way, if the state of the frame movable body changes is dynamically displayed multiple times as a frame movable body simulated image, or if the frame movable body is in a state where it changes periodically, it can be displayed according to the state. To suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player misses the change of a frame movable body from a first state to a second state by repeatedly and dynamically displaying a frame movable body simulated image in a manner in which the frame movable body changes periodically. becomes possible.

FIGS. 317(A) to 318(B) show modified examples of the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B). In this embodiment, the frame movable body starts changing from the state in the standby position (first state) to the state in which the movement has been completed (second state) at the start of the valid operation period (timing t9). The frame movable body simulated image is not displayed, the sign is displayed from timing t7 to timing t9 before the operation validity period occurs, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14) or the operation is not performed. This is different from the performance pattern described with reference to FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B) in that the post-operation display is performed when the valid operation period ends (timing t18) without being performed. Regarding points other than these (for example, the light emitting state of the frame movable body and the stop timing of decorative patterns), the presentation mode is basically the same, so the explanation of the parts where the presentation mode is common will be omitted. , the different parts mentioned above will be mainly explained below.

FIG. 317(A) shows an example of a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 317(B) shows an example of a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 318(A) shows an example of a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 318(B) shows an example of a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 317(A) to 318(B), a precursor display, which is a display indicating that an operation valid period will occur, starts at timing t7 on the game board side effect display device 1600. . As the precursor display, the characters "Push?" are displayed as an image, and the display continues until timing t9 when the operation validity period starts. At timing t9, the valid operation period starts and the words "Push!!" are displayed as an image as an operation instruction display indicating that the operation unit is in the receiving state. The operation instruction display ends when an operation is performed on the operation section (timing t14) or when no operation is performed and the operation validity period ends (timing t18), and instead, "!!" is displayed as an after-operation display. Display text as an image. The post-operation display continues for two seconds and then ends (timing t16 or timing t20).

On the other hand, at timing t9, the frame movable body turns off and starts moving from the standby position (first state), and at timing t11, the frame movable body enters the state where the movement is completed (second state). Become.

In this way, by displaying a display that diverts the player's attention from the movable frame body (such as a warning sign display or an operation instruction display) before or while the movable frame body starts moving, the player can When the above operation is performed, the frame movable body changes from the unlit state to the specific light emission performance state or the normal light emission performance state, so that the player's line of sight is guided to the frame movable body. Since the player feels as if the frame movable body has suddenly changed from the first state to the second state, it is possible to give the player a big surprise. Furthermore, even if it takes a long time for the frame movable body to change from the first state to the second state, the player can be aware that the frame movable body will be in the second state due to the warning signs and operation instruction displays. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the person feels irritated. Furthermore, since it is possible to slowly move the frame movable body, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which a player who carelessly touches the frame movable body is injured.

319(A) to 320(B) show modified examples of the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 317(A) to 318(B). In the present embodiment, the frame movable body changes from the standby position (first state) to the timing when the operation unit is operated (t14) or the timing when the valid operation period ends (timing t9). , the frame movable body starts changing to the state where the movement is completed (second state), and the frame movable body changes to the second state only when the special lottery result is a jackpot. This is different from the effect pattern described with reference to FIG. 318(B). Regarding points other than these (for example, the light emitting state of the frame movable body and the stop timing of decorative patterns), the presentation mode is basically the same, so the explanation of the parts where the presentation mode is common will be omitted. , the different parts mentioned above will be mainly explained below.

FIG. 319(A) shows an example of a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 319(B) shows an example of a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 320(A) shows an example of a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 320(B) shows an example of a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing.

In the performance patterns shown in FIGS. 319(A) and 319(B), the operation valid period occurs and the player operates the operation unit while the operation instruction display is being performed (timing t14). If the special lottery result is a jackpot, the frame movable body moves from the standby position (first state) to the state where the movement has been completed (second state), and displays after the operation ( (timing t14 to timing t16), if the special lottery result is a loss, a performance pattern is shown in which the frame movable body does not change from the standby position (first state) and only the post-operation display is performed. There is.

In the performance patterns shown in FIGS. 320(A) and 320(B), if the special lottery result is a jackpot at the timing (t18) when the valid operation period ends, the frame movable body is in the standby position. The frame movable body moves from the (first state) to the state where the movement is completed (second state), and displays after the operation (timing t18 to timing t20), and if the special lottery result is a loss, the frame movable body A performance pattern is shown in which only the post-operation display is performed without changing from the state in which it is in the standby position (first state).

In the performance patterns shown in FIGS. 319(A) and 320(A), at timing t22, the movement of the frame movable body is changed from the state (second state) to the state in the standby position (first state). The movement is started and the movement to the standby position is completed at timing t24.

In this way, even after the player performs an operation on the operation unit, the post-operation display is displayed instead of the operation instruction display, so that the game can be played from the frame movable body that changes the state from the first state to the second state. It becomes possible to distract people's consciousness. Then, by ending the post-operation display at the timing when the frame movable body has completed changing to the second state, the player will finally notice that the frame movable body has been in the second state, and the player will have a big It is possible to give surprises. In addition, even if it takes time for the frame movable body to change from the first state to the second state, the player may feel irritated by the fact that the frame movable body changes to the second state based on the post-operation display. It becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of situations such as feeling emotions. Furthermore, since it is possible to slowly move the frame movable body, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which a player who carelessly touches the frame movable body is injured.

Note that the timing for changing the frame movable body from the unlit state to the specific light emitting effect state is configured to be performed at the timing (timing t16) when the frame movable body completes the change from the first state to the second state. It's okay. With such a configuration, it becomes more difficult for the player to notice changes in the state of the frame movable body.

FIGS. 321(A) to 322(B) show modified examples of the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B). In this embodiment, the inner frame movable body changes from a state in the standby position (first state) to a state in which movement is completed (second state) in accordance with the start of the valid operation period (timing t7). The starting point, the point that the frame movable body simulated image is not displayed, the point that a sign is displayed from timing t5 to timing t7 before the operation effective period occurs, and the point when the operation on the operation unit is performed (timing t11) or the operation. This is different from the performance pattern described with reference to FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B) in that the after-operation display is performed when the valid operation period ends (timing t16) without being performed. Regarding points other than these (for example, the light emitting state of the frame movable body and the stop timing of decorative patterns), the presentation mode is basically the same, so the explanation of the parts where the presentation mode is common will be omitted. , the different parts mentioned above will be mainly explained below.

FIG. 321(A) shows an example of a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 321(B) shows an example of a production pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 322(A) shows an example of a production pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 322(B) shows an example of a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 321(A) to 322(B), a precursor display, which is a display indicating that an operation valid period will occur, starts at timing t5 on the game board side effect display device 1600. . As the precursor display, the characters "Push?" are displayed as an image and are continued until timing t7 when the operation validity period starts. At timing t7, the valid operation period starts and the words "Push!!" are displayed as an image as an operation instruction display indicating that the operation unit is in the receiving state. The operation instruction display ends when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t11) or when no operation is performed and the operation validity period ends (timing t16), and instead, "!!" is displayed as an after-operation display. Display text as an image. The post-operation display continues for two seconds and then ends (timing t13 or timing t18).

On the other hand, at timing t7, the inner frame movable body turns off and starts moving from the standby position (first state), and at timing t9, the movement is completed (second state). becomes.

In the performance patterns shown in FIGS. 321(A) and 321(B), the operation valid period occurs and the player operates the operation section while the operation instruction display is being performed (timing t11). If the special lottery result is a jackpot, the outer frame movable body moves from the standby position (first state) to the state where the movement has been completed (second state), and displays after the operation. (timing t11 to timing t13), if the special lottery result is a loss, a performance pattern is shown in which the outer frame movable body does not change from the standby position (first state) and only the post-operation display is performed. has been done.

In the performance patterns shown in FIGS. 322(A) and 322(B), if the special lottery result is a jackpot at the timing (t16) when the valid operation period ends, the outer frame movable body is in the standby position. In addition to moving from the state (first state) to the state in which the movement has been completed (second state), a post-operation display is performed (timing t16 to timing t18), and if the special lottery result is a loss, the frame is moved. A performance pattern is shown in which the body does not change from the state in which it is in the standby position (first state) and only a post-operation display is performed.

Thereafter, in the performance patterns shown in FIGS. 321(A) and 322(A), the outer frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from timing t26 to timing t28. In addition, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 321(A) to 322(B), the inner frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from timing t30 to timing t32, and a series of frame movable bodies operation ends.

In this way, before the inner frame movable body starts moving or while the inner frame movable body is moving, displays that divert the player's attention from the frame movable body (warning signs and operation instruction displays) can be used to distract the player's consciousness. The focus will be on the game board side performance display device 1600. Furthermore, even while the outer frame movable body is moving after the player operates the operation section, the post-operation display is displayed in place of the previous operation instruction display, so the player's awareness is reduced. It continues to be directed toward the game board side effect display device 1600. With such a configuration, the player feels as if both the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body have changed from the first state to the second state without realizing it, which gives the player a big surprise. It becomes possible to give. In addition, even if it takes time to change the state of the inner frame movable body or the outer frame movable body from the first state to the second state, the inner frame movable body can be moved by the warning display, operation instruction display, and post-operation display. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels irritated due to the body or the outer frame movable body being in the second state. Furthermore, since it is possible to slowly move the frame movable body, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which a player who carelessly touches the frame movable body is injured.

Note that the timing for changing the frame movable body from the unlit state to the specific light emitting effect state is performed at the timing when the outer frame movable body completes the change from the first state to the second state (timing t13 or timing t18). It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, it becomes more difficult for the player to notice changes in the state of the frame movable body.

FIGS. 323(A) to 324(B) show modified examples of the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B). In this embodiment, the inner frame movable body changes from the standby position (first state) when the operation unit is operated (timing t11) or when the valid operation period ends (timing t16). , the outer frame movable body starts changing to the state where the movement is completed (second state), and then the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, the frame movable body simulated image is not displayed, and the valid operation period is A warning sign is displayed from timing t5 before the occurrence to timing t7, and an after-operation display is displayed when an operation is performed on the operation section (timing t11) or when no operation is performed and the operation validity period ends (timing t16). This is different from the performance pattern described with reference to FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B) in that this is performed. Regarding points other than these (for example, the light emitting state of the frame movable body and the stop timing of decorative patterns), the presentation mode is basically the same, so the explanation of the parts where the presentation mode is common will be omitted. , the different parts mentioned above will be mainly explained below.

FIG. 323(A) shows an example of a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 323(B) shows an example of a production pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 324(A) shows an example of a production pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 324(B) shows an example of a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 323(A) to 324(B), a precursor display, which is a display indicating that an operation valid period will occur, starts at timing t5 on the game board side effect display device 1600. . As the precursor display, the characters "Push?" are displayed as an image and are continued until timing t7 when the operation validity period starts. At timing t7, the valid operation period starts and the words "Push!!" are displayed as an image as an operation instruction display indicating that the operation unit is in the receiving state. The operation instruction display ends when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t11) or when no operation is performed and the operation validity period ends (timing t16), and instead, "!!" is displayed as an after-operation display. Display text as an image. The post-operation display continues for two seconds and then ends (timing t13 or timing t18).

In the performance patterns shown in FIGS. 323(A) and 323(B), the operation valid period occurs and the player operates the operation section while the operation instruction display is being performed (timing t11). , when the special lottery result is a jackpot, after the inner frame movable body changes from the state in which it is in the standby position (first state) to the state in which the movement has been completed (second state) (timing t11 to timing t13). , if the outer frame movable body changes from the state in which it is in the standby position (first state) to the state in which movement is completed (second state) (timing t15 to timing t17), and the special lottery result is a loss, A performance pattern that does not change from the state where the outer frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) is shown.

In the performance patterns shown in FIGS. 324(A) and 324(B), if the special lottery result is a jackpot at the timing (t16) when the valid operation period ends, the inner frame movable body is in the standby position. After changing from the state (first state) to the state where the movement is completed (second state) (timing t16 to timing t18), the movement is completed from the state where the outer frame movable body is in the standby position (first state). state (second state) (timing t20 to timing t22), and if the special lottery result is a loss, the production pattern that does not change from the state in which the outer frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) is It is shown.

Thereafter, in the performance patterns shown in FIGS. 323(A) and 324(A), the outer frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from timing t26 to timing t28. Furthermore, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 323(A) and 324(B), the inner frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from timing t30 to timing t32, and a series of frame movable bodies operation ends.

In this way, when the player performs an operation on the operating section, the inner frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, and then the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. By changing the state, the player can slowly observe how the frame movable body changes the state, and from the player's perspective, the degree of excitement gradually increases over time.

The effect patterns explained with reference to FIGS. 321(A) to 322(B) and the effect patterns explained with reference to FIGS. 323(A) to 324(B) are executed according to the gaming state. may be configured.

For example, when the average variation time of decorative symbols is in a normal game state (during non-probability variation, non-time saving mode, non-electronic support mode, etc.), the average variation time of decorative symbols is relatively long, It is a good idea to execute the effect pattern described with reference to . In this case, since the performance is performed in a state in which a jackpot is unlikely to occur, the player can thoroughly enjoy the movement of the frame movable body.

On the other hand, it is a state that can occur after a jackpot has occurred once, and is a state in which the average fluctuation time of decorative symbols is relatively short compared to the normal game state, which is relatively advantageous for the player (during probability fluctuation). , during reduced working hours, during power support, etc.), the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 321(A) to 322(B) may be configured to be executed. In this case, the time from when the operating section is operated until the frame movable body enters the second state is short and the transition to the jackpot game state can be made at a good tempo.

In the normal gaming state, only the performance patterns explained with reference to FIGS. 323(A) to 324(B) can be executed, and in the state advantageous to the player, the effect patterns explained with reference to FIGS. ) may be executable.
Alternatively, in the normal gaming state, the performance pattern described with reference to FIGS. 323(A) to 324(B) is more effective than the performance pattern described with reference to FIGS. 321(A) to 322(B) rather than the performance patterns explained with reference to FIGS. 323(A) to 324(B). It may be configured to increase the rate at which the effect patterns described with reference to the above are executed.

Further, the timing for executing the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 323(A) to 324(B) is configured to be executed at an earlier stage rather than immediately before the stop display of the decorative pattern is performed. Good too. For example, before the decorative pattern forms a reach state, the effect pattern explained with reference to FIGS. 323(A) to 324(B) is executed without stopping the decorative pattern, and the inner frame movable body and the outer When the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, the decorative pattern may be configured to form a ready-to-reach state. With this configuration, players who visually observe how the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body operate over time gradually develop a sense of expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a jackpot. It is possible to increase it. Note that the timing at which the decorative pattern forms the ready-to-reach state is preferably performed when the outer frame movable body is in the second state (for example, at timing t24).

In addition, after executing the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 323(A) to 324(B) as an effect to determine whether or not a ready-to-reach state is formed, the pattern immediately before the decorative pattern stops It may be configured to execute the effect pattern explained with reference to FIGS. 321(A) to 322(B) or the effect pattern explained with reference to FIGS. 323(A) to 324(B) at the timing. good.

In this way, after the performance pattern explained with reference to FIGS. 323(A) to 324(B) is executed as a performance to determine whether or not a ready-to-reach state is formed, at the timing immediately before the decorative pattern stops, When configured to execute the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 321(A) to 322(B) and the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 323(A) to 324(B), As a modification of FIG. 323(A) to FIG. 324(B) as a performance pattern for determining whether or not a ready-to-reach state is formed, the frame movable body is used as a mere performance without accepting any operation on the operation unit by the player. It may be configured to execute a working effect pattern. In this case, the operation invalidation period continues as the accepting state of the operation unit, and of course no precursor display, no operation instruction display, and no post-operation display is performed. By executing such a modified performance pattern, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player finds it troublesome to operate the operation unit in a state where the expectation level of a jackpot is not so high.

In the production pattern explained with reference to FIGS. 321(A) to 322(B), an example was shown in which the text "Push?" is displayed as an image as a precursor display, but this image is used as an operation instruction display. It may also be displayed so as to be moved to a certain position. Further, it is preferable to move the frame movable body away from a certain position. For example, when the operation instruction display is performed in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, the precursor display is performed from a position directly above or diagonally above the game board side effect display device 1600 toward the center. It is preferable to configure the display so that the characters "Push?" are displayed moving and stopped at the center. Further, as a post-operation display, the character "!!" may be configured to move from the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 to a direction directly below or diagonally below the game board side effect display device 1600. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to further divert the player's attention from the frame movable body located above. Note that, as will be described later, when the frame movable body is provided below the game board side performance display device 1600, the foreshadow display and the post-operation display may be configured to move upward in the opposite manner.

In the production pattern explained with reference to FIGS. 323(A) to 324(B), an example was shown in which the characters "Push?" were displayed as an image as a precursor display, but this image is used as an operation instruction display. It may also be displayed so as to be moved to a certain position. Further, it is preferable to move the frame movable body so as to approach a certain position. For example, when the operation instruction display is performed in the center of the game board side performance display device 1600, the characters “Push?” are displayed moving from the bottom to the center of the game board side performance display device 1600 as a precursor display. It is recommended to configure it so that Further, as a post-operation display, the character "!!" may be configured to move from the center of the game board side performance display device 1600 to the top of the game board side performance display device 1600. With such a configuration, the player's line of sight can be guided to the movable frame body, and the player can fully see the entire series of changes in the movable frame body.

Furthermore, the characters "!! Push!!" may be displayed as a special operation instruction display that occurs only when the special lottery result is a jackpot. In addition, instead of the character "!!" displayed after an operation, the character "Push!!" which is an operation instruction display or the character "!!Push!!" which is a special operation instruction display continues to be displayed as is. It's okay. In addition, in response to the special operation instruction display "!! Push!!", the characters "!? Push?!" are displayed as a special precursor display, and "!!!" is displayed as a special post-operation display. !” may be displayed. In this way, the special characters that are displayed only when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot are displayed continuously from before the operation validity period until after the operation unit is operated, giving the player a great sense of satisfaction. becomes possible.

For FIGS. 325(A) to 325(D), FIGS. 326(A) to 326(C), and FIGS. 327(A) to 327(C), refer to FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B). This shows a modification of the performance pattern described above. In these modified examples, only one of the right ear frame movable body 7100 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the first frame movable body) and the left ear frame movable body 7200 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the second frame movable body) , the timing of movement may be different when moving both the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body, and the first frame movable body may be moved by imitating the first frame movable body. However, for the second frame movable body, a frame movable body simulated image that imitates the second frame movable body is basically not displayed, and the frame movable body is displayed regardless of the operation on the operation section. The main differences are that the frame movable body operates and the timing at which the frame movable body operates is not limited to the timing immediately before the decorative pattern stops.

The effect patterns shown in FIGS. 325(A) to 325(D), FIGS. 326(A) to 326(C), and 327(A) to 327(C) are effects performed during the movement of decorative patterns. This pattern indicates a state in which a predetermined number of seconds has elapsed since the decorative pattern started to fluctuate (for example, it is assumed that 10 seconds have passed since the decorative pattern started to fluctuate at timing t0).

In the performance pattern shown in FIG. 325(A), the first frame movable body changed from the first state to the second state from timing t5 to timing t7, and maintained the second state for a predetermined time (8 seconds). Later (timing t7 to timing t15), the second state changes to the first state (timing t15 to timing t17). In addition, in accordance with the movement of the first frame movable body, a frame movable body simulated image that imitates the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, and is continuously displayed in the second state for a predetermined period of time. and changes from the second state to the second state (timing t5 to timing t17). On the other hand, the second frame movable body maintains the first state without moving from the standby position. Further, a frame movable body simulation image imitating the second frame movable body is not displayed.

On the other hand, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. t7 to timing t15), and the second state changes to the first state (timing t15 to timing t17). Note that when the second frame movable body operates, a frame movable body simulation image imitating the second frame movable body is not displayed. On the other hand, the first frame movable body maintains the first state without moving from the standby position. Further, a frame movable body simulation image imitating the first frame movable body is not displayed.

Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(A) and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(B), in the case of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(A), the frame movable body simulation imitating the first frame movable body Since the image is displayed, the player can easily notice that the first frame movable body has operated. On the other hand, in the case of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(B), even when the second frame movable body is operated, a frame movable body simulated image imitating the second frame movable body is not displayed. , it is difficult for the player to notice that the second frame movable body has operated.

When the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body move, the expectation that the special lottery result corresponding to the fluctuating decorative pattern will be a jackpot will increase when the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body move. It is preferable to configure so that the performance pattern is selected so that the performance pattern is higher than the case where the performance pattern is not used. For example, it is preferable that the expectation level when the first frame movable body operates and the expectation level when the second frame movable body operates are each 10%. In such a configuration, by displaying the frame movable body simulated image that imitates the first frame movable body, it is possible to see that the first frame movable body is in a state in which the first frame movable body is in operation when the user looks at the first frame movable body. The player who notices this will have a sense of anticipation for winning the jackpot.

On the other hand, in order to notice the movement of the second frame movable body, it is necessary to look away from the game board side effect display device 1600 on which decorative symbols are displayed and look at the second frame movable body. Therefore, if you frequently check whether or not the second frame movable body is operating, or if you accidentally turn your head in the direction where the second frame movable body is installed, the second frame movable body may not operate. You will notice that there is. In this case, the player felt that he was able to realize that his expectations for a jackpot were high through his own efforts, and as part of the production in which a frame movable body simulated image that imitated the first frame movable body was displayed. You will feel a greater sense of accomplishment than if you were to be able to visually recognize one frame of movable objects.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the player's interest in the frame movable body, and the player's interest, which conventionally was within a predetermined range centered on the game board 5, is directed outward. It becomes possible to expand.

In the production patterns shown in FIG. 325(A) and FIG. 325(B), the expectation level when the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body operate is the same 10%. The expectation level when the second frame movable body operates in the production pattern shown in ) may be set higher than the expectation level when the first frame movable body operates in the production pattern shown in FIG. 325(A). . For example, the effect pattern may be selected such that the expectation level when the second frame movable body operates is 15% and the expectation level when the first frame movable body operates is 10%. With such a configuration, the player who notices that the second frame movable body is operating will feel a greater sense of accomplishment.

The performance pattern shown in FIG. 325(C) is a modification of the performance pattern shown in FIG. 325(B). In this performance pattern, the time period during which the second frame movable body is in the second state (timing t7 to timing t21) is 14 seconds, and in the performance pattern shown in FIG. 325(B), the second frame movable body is in the second state. This is longer than the 8 seconds that is the time in this state (timing t7 to timing t15). In this way, by making the time that the second frame movable body is in the second state longer than the time that the first frame movable body is in the second state, the player can It becomes easier to notice because it is in two states.

The expectation level of the performance pattern shown in FIG. 325(C) may be set higher than the expectation level of the performance pattern shown in FIG. 325(B). For example, the effect pattern may be selected such that the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(B) is 15%, and the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(C) is 25%. . With such a configuration, from the moment the player notices that the second frame movable body is operating, the player will have greater expectations as to how long the second state will be maintained. The timing at which the player notices that the second frame movable body is in the second state is not constant, and the player may not know when it has been in the second state, so the duration of the second state is The longer the game continues, the more expectations the player will have.

In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(B) and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(C), the longer the duration that the second frame movable body is in the second state, the higher the expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot. Although the embodiment has been shown in which the second state is high, three or more effect patterns having different durations in the second state may be provided. For example, a performance pattern that maintains the second state from timing t7 to timing t27 may also be executed, and the expectation level of this performance pattern may be set to 30%.

In the performance pattern shown in FIG. 325(B) and the performance pattern shown in FIG. 325(C), the longer the second frame movable body is in the second state, the higher the expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot. However, it is configured to suggest the degree of expectation based on the number of times the second frame movable body is in the second state, rather than the duration that the second frame movable body is in the second state. Good too. The effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(D) shows an example thereof. The effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(D) shows an example in which the second frame movable body moves from the first state to the second state twice, but the effect pattern in which the second frame movable body does not perform the second operation Alternatively, a production pattern in which the third action is performed after the second action may be configured to be executable. Further, in this case as well, it is preferable to configure such that the higher the number of operations, the higher the expectation level. For example, if the second frame movable body operates only once, the expectation level is 15%, if the second frame movable body operates twice, the expectation level is 25%, and if the second frame movable body operates three times. It is preferable to configure the system so that the expected level when it operates is 35%. In this way, by configuring the system so that the higher the number of times the second frame movable body moves, the higher the level of expectation becomes, the player who notices that the second frame movable body is operating at an early timing will The user visually recognizes the second frame movable body with great anticipation as to how many times the second frame movable body will operate.

The performance pattern shown in FIG. 326(A) is a modification of the performance pattern shown in FIG. 325(A). In this effect pattern, the operation mode of the first frame movable body and the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image imitating the first frame movable body are the same as the effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(A) (up to timing t20). There is no difference in performance). On the other hand, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 326(A), the second frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at timing t21, stays in the second state from timing t23 to timing t33, and is in the second state at timing t21. This is different from the effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(A) in that it returns to the first state at t35. Furthermore, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 326(A), when the second frame movable body is moved, a frame movable body simulated image imitating the second frame movable body is not displayed.

In a gaming machine that can execute the performance pattern shown in FIG. 325(A) and the performance pattern shown in FIG. 326(A), when one of the performance patterns is executed at a predetermined timing while the decorative symbols are changing. In this case, the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, and after returning to the first state, the second frame movable body changes from the first state at the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed. When the second frame movable body is maintained and does not change to the second state (when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(A) is selected), and when the second frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (as shown in FIG. 326(A)). If the effect pattern shown is selected).

With this configuration, when the first frame movable body is operated, the player's line of sight once turns to the first frame movable body, and before the player's line of sight returns to the game board side effect display device 1600, the first frame movable body is operated. Since the two-frame movable body may move, it is possible to make a player with little gaming experience aware that the second frame movable body may move.

The expectation level of the performance pattern shown in FIG. 326(A) may be set higher than the expectation level of the performance pattern shown in FIG. 325(A). For example, the effect pattern may be selected such that the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 326(A) is 25%, and the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(A) is 10%. . With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that the second frame movable body will move after the first frame movable body moves.

The effect patterns shown in FIGS. 326(B) and 326(C) are effect patterns obtained by modifying the effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(A). This performance pattern differs from the performance pattern shown in FIG. 325(A) in that the movement of the first frame movable body and the display of a frame movable body simulated image imitating the first frame movable body are performed multiple times.

In the performance patterns shown in FIGS. 326(B) and 326(C), the first frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at timing t2, and changes from timing t4 to timing t6. 2 state, returns to the first state at timing t8, starts changing from the first state to the second state again at timing t11, becomes the second state from timing t13 to timing t15, and returns to the first state at timing t17. The state returns to the 1 state. Furthermore, a frame movable body simulated image imitating the first frame movable body is dynamically displayed in synchronization with the operation of the first frame movable body.

After that, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 326(C), the second frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at timing t21, remains in the second state from timing t23 to timing t33, and then At t35, the state returns to the first state. On the other hand, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 326(B), the second frame movable body does not operate.

In a gaming machine that is capable of executing the performance pattern shown in FIG. 326(B) and the performance pattern shown in FIG. 326(C), when one of the performance patterns is executed at a predetermined timing while the decorative symbols are changing. The first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, then returns to the first state (timing t17), and then switches to the second frame at the timing (timing t21) when a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed. There may be a case where the movable body changes from the first state to the second state, or a case where the second frame movable body maintains the first state and does not enter the second state.

With such a configuration, when the first frame movable body is operated, the player's line of sight continues to be directed toward the first frame movable body, and then before the player's line of sight returns to the game board side effect display device 1600. Since the second frame movable body may move, it is possible to make a player with little gaming experience aware that the second frame movable body may move.

The expectation level of the performance pattern shown in FIG. 326(C) may be set higher than the expectation level of the performance pattern shown in FIG. 326(B). For example, the effect pattern may be selected such that the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 326(B) is 25%, and the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 326(C) is 35%. . With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that the second frame movable body will move after the first frame movable body moves.

The effect patterns shown in FIGS. 327(A) to 327(C) are effect patterns obtained by modifying the effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(A). This effect pattern differs from the effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(A) in that the second frame movable body may operate at a timing earlier than the first frame movable body.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 327(A) to 327(C), the timing at which the first frame movable body operates and the timing at which the frame movable body simulated image imitating the first frame movable body are displayed are the same. . Specifically, the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state from timing t21 to timing t23, maintains the second state for a predetermined time (8 seconds), and then changes from timing t23 to timing t31. ), changes from the second state to the first state (timing t31 to timing t33). In addition, in accordance with the movement of the first frame movable body, a frame movable body simulated image that imitates the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, and is continuously displayed in the second state for a predetermined period of time. and changes from the second state to the first state (timing t21 to timing t33).

On the other hand, in each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 327(A) to 327(C), the operation mode of the second frame movable body is different from each other as shown below.

In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 327(A), the second frame movable body continues to be in the first state during the period from t0 to t39, and never becomes the second state. In the production pattern shown in FIG. 327(B), the second frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at timing t5, remains in the second state from timing t7 to timing t15, and remains in the second state at timing t17. The state returns to the first state at . In the production pattern shown in FIG. 327(C), the second frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at timing t5, remains in the second state from timing t7 to timing t33, and at timing t35 The state returns to the first state at . Note that in any of the presentation patterns, a frame movable body simulation image imitating the second frame movable body is not displayed.

The expectation level of the performance pattern shown in FIG. 327(C) is set higher than the expectation level of the performance pattern shown in FIG. 327(B), and the expectation level of the performance pattern shown in FIG. 327(B) is set higher than that of the performance pattern shown in FIG. ) may be set higher than the expected level of the effect pattern shown in (). For example, the expectation level of the performance pattern shown in Figure 327(A) is 10%, the expectation level of the performance pattern shown in Figure 327(B) is 20%, and the expectation level of the performance pattern shown in Figure 327(C) is 30%. %.

Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 327(A) and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 327(B), when executing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 327(B), the player may miss the movement of the second frame movable body. be. The player who was able to visually confirm the movement of the second frame movable body can recognize that the expectation level is 20% when the first frame movable body moves thereafter. On the other hand, for the player who did not notice that the second frame movable body had moved, even if the first frame movable body had operated, the player would not be able to accurately determine the degree of expectation.

Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 327(A) and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 327(C), in the case of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 327(C), even after the first frame movable body moves, the second frame The movable body continues to be in the moving position (second state). Therefore, a player who sees a frame movable body simulation image that imitates the first frame movable body and notices that the first frame movable body has entered the second state checks the state of the second frame movable body. If the second frame movable body is not operating at that time and is in the first state, it can be recognized that the level of expectation is not so high. On the other hand, if the second frame movable body is operating at that time and is in the second state, it can be recognized that the degree of expectation is relatively high.

Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 327(B) and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 327(C), when the player notices that the second frame movable body is operating and is in the second state, The player will be interested in whether the first frame movable body moves while the frame movable body is in the second state. Then, when the first frame movable body moves and enters the second state, the player can recognize that the expectation level is high. On the other hand, if the second frame movable body is in the first state before the first frame movable body is in the first state, the player may recognize that the level of expectation is relatively low. becomes.

In addition, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 327(C), after the first frame movable body is in the first state, the second frame movable body is configured to be in the first state. With such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to enjoy a state of high expectation for a long period of time, which is desirable for the player.

The embodiment has been described with the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 shown in FIG. 282 as the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body, respectively. The frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to execute the above-described effect pattern as a first frame movable body and a second frame movable body, respectively.

The embodiment has been described using the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 shown in FIG. 282 as the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body, respectively. Either or both of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are the first frame movable body, and either the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 or the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 Alternatively, both may be used as second frame movable bodies. Then, a state in which either one or both of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are in the second state is defined as the second state of the first frame movable body, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are in the second state, the above-described production pattern may be executed with the second frame movable body in the second state. .

When executing the above-described effect pattern in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 297 and 306, one of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is changed from the first state to the second state. After that, the other of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is changed from the first state to the second state, and the first frame movable body is changed from the first state to the second state. It may also be adopted as an action to do. Further, after the other of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is changed from the second state to the first state, one of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is changed from the second state to the first state. You may adopt changing one of them from the second state to the first state as the operation of changing the first frame movable body from the second state to the first state.

Similarly, when executing the above-described effect pattern in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 297 and 306, one of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is changed from the first state. After the second state, the other of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is changed from the first state to the second state. The operation may be adopted as a two-state operation. Further, after the other of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is changed from the second state to the first state, one of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is changed from the second state to the first state. You may adopt changing one of them from the second state to the first state as the operation of changing the second frame movable body from the second state to the first state.

In this way, changes in the state due to continuous operations by a plurality of movable frame bodies may be collectively treated as a change in the state of one movable frame body.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are used as the first frame movable bodies to change the state, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are used as the second frame movable bodies. Although an example of changing the state has been shown, only one of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is configured to operate as the first frame movable body, and the other is not operated and is in a standby state. It may be configured to remain as is. Alternatively, only one of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is configured to operate as the second frame movable body, and the other is configured to remain in a standby state without operating. It's okay.

For example, among the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, only the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 changes its state as the first frame movable body, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear frame movable body 7400 change the state. The ear outer frame movable body 7450 may be configured as a second frame movable body to change its state.

In this case, the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body have different areas visually recognized when viewed from the front or from the side. Specifically, since the first frame movable body is composed of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the visible area is relatively small, and the second frame movable body is composed of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear. Since it is composed of the outer frame movable body 7450, the visible area becomes relatively large.

With this configuration, when the state of the relatively small first frame movable body changes, a frame movable body simulated image corresponding to the change in the state of the first frame movable body is displayed when changing the state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking a change in the state of the first frame movable body. On the other hand, when the state of the relatively large second frame movable body changes, the second frame movable body does not change its state by purposely not displaying the frame movable body simulated image corresponding to the second frame movable body. When the player notices that something is happening, it becomes possible to give the player a bigger surprise.

The structure of the plurality of frame movable bodies described with reference to FIGS. 312 and 313 may be configured to execute the above-described effect pattern.

For example, the curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 may be used as the first frame movable body, and the curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 may be used as the second frame movable body. Further, a state in which the curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 and the curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 are in the standby position shown in FIGS. 312(A), 312(C), and 313(A) is defined as a first state. , FIG. 312(B), FIG. 312(D), and FIG. 313(B) are set as the second state, and the above-described effect pattern may be executed.

Alternatively, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm part 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm part 7630 are used as the first frame movable body, and the door frame side unit left arm upper arm part 7670 and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm part 7680 are used as the second frame. It may be a movable body. Furthermore, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm part 7620, the door frame side unit right arm lower arm part 7630, the door frame side unit left arm upper arm part 7670, and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm part 7680 are shown in FIGS. C), the state in the standby position shown in FIG. 313(A) is defined as the first state, and the state in the moving position shown in FIGS. 312(B), 312(D), and 313(B) is defined as the second state. , it may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above.

For example, when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 326(A) is executed, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm part 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm part 7630 are While displaying a frame movable body simulated image imitating the side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630, the state changes from the standby position (first state) to the movement position (second state), and then returns to the standby position. The state changes to a certain state (first state), and then the door frame side unit left arm upper arm part 7670 and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm part 7680 change to the door frame side unit left arm upper arm part 7670 and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm part. After changing from the standby position (first state) to the moving position (second state) without displaying a frame movable body simulated image imitating 7680, the standby position (first state) is changed to the moving position (second state). condition).

Alternatively, either one or both of the curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 and the curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 is used as the first frame movable body, and the door frame top unit face of the door frame top unit face decoration section 7500 is movable. At least one of the body 7510, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522, and the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 is moved to the second frame movable body. You can also use it as Furthermore, the curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700, the curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750, the door frame top unit face upper movable body 7510, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, the door frame top unit face lower part The first state is a state in which the nose movable body 7522 and the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 are in the standby position shown in FIGS. 312(A), 312(C), and 313(A), and B), FIG. 312(D), and FIG. 313(B), the state of being in the movement position shown in FIG.

For example, the above-described effect pattern may be executed by using the curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 as the first frame movable body and the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 as the second frame movable body. In this case, the frame movable body simulation image will not be displayed for the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 which is larger in size than the curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700. With this configuration, when the player notices that the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 (second frame movable body) is changing the state, the player is less surprised. It becomes possible to give

In addition to the door frame top unit face movable body 7510, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also used as second frame movable bodies, and the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 is stored below. After completing the upward movement from the position where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit face movable body 7510, the movement is completed from the state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit face movable body 7510. This state may be the second state of the second frame movable body.

In this way, by configuring the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body to be provided with a distance between them at positions facing each other across the game area 5a and the game board side performance display device 1600, the player When the player is viewing one frame movable body, the other frame movable body is difficult to be visually recognized by the player. In particular, when the performance pattern shown in FIG. 326(A) is executed, the player's consciousness is concentrated on the first frame movable body, and the second frame movable body, which is located far away from the viewing angle, is in the field of vision. It becomes impossible to enter. Then, it is possible to give a big surprise to the player who notices the state of the second frame movable body after the operation, that the second frame movable body has changed to an unexpected state.

When operating the second frame movable body, we have shown a production pattern in which the frame movable body imitation image imitating the second frame movable body is not displayed. It may be configured to display a simulated image. In this case, during a predetermined period in the second half when the second frame movable body is in the second state, a frame movable body simulated image imitating the second frame movable body is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 for a short period of time (for example, 1 second). It may be configured so that it is displayed in For example, it is preferable to display a frame movable body simulated image imitating the second frame movable body from timing t30 to timing t31 in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 326(A).

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player does not notice that the second frame movable body has operated.

Alternatively, a frame movable body simulated image imitating the second frame movable body may be displayed from timing t33 to timing t34 in the performance pattern shown in FIG. 326(A).

In such a configuration, the player will visually recognize that the second frame movable body is changing its state from the second state to the first state, and the player will be able to see that the second frame movable body is changing its state from the second state to the first state. You will feel regret that you were not able to enjoy the second state. Thereby, in subsequent games, it becomes possible to increase the player's sense of caution as to whether the second frame movable body may be moving before he or she knows it.

With reference to FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B), the effect patterns in which the frame movable body moves are shown, but when the frame movable body is moved in this way, the player may end up in an unexpected position. Due to the position of the frame movable body after the movement, there is a risk that the player may violently contact the frame movable body with his or her hands or head, resulting in injury to the player or damage to the frame movable body. On the other hand, in a gaming machine that can operate a movable frame body, in addition to the motion of the movable frame body, various effects are performed on the game board 5 side, and the effects are performed in an excessive manner for the player. There is a risk that this may occur. The embodiments described below are intended to solve such problems. 328 and 329, 330 and 331, 332 and 333, 334 and 335 are respectively This figure shows a modification of the effect pattern described with reference to each.

In each of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 328 and 329, FIGS. 330 and 331, FIGS. 332 and 333, and FIGS. It is configured to be in a suppressed state. The fluctuating performance sound is a sound in which a predetermined piece of music is played in accordance with the fluctuation of the decorative symbols, and is perceived by the player as background music. For example, a song consisting of the voice sung by a predetermined singer and the sounds of multiple musical instruments is played for several minutes, and during that time, the variation of the decorative pattern (for example, all the variation results of the decorative pattern are non-reach misses, and the variation time is 10% on average. ) is performed multiple times. By outputting such variable effect sound to the player, it is possible to increase interest in the game. Note that a plurality of such songs may be prepared in advance, and the configuration may be such that the playback of a different song starts at the timing when the playback of a certain song ends. Alternatively, in accordance with a change in the gaming state, the music that was being played up to that point may be faded out during playback, and another music that is different from the music that was being played up to that point may be played. In this embodiment, by suppressing the volume of such fluctuating effect sound in accordance with the timing when the frame movable body operates, a state where the effect becomes excessive is suppressed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a special sound is played for a short time to remind the player that the frame movable body is moving or has been operated, in accordance with the timing when the frame movable body moves. . As a special evocative sound, instead of emitting a sound that is recognized as a series of songs played over a long period of time like a variable performance sound, a sound effect (for example, a chime sound such as "ping-pong") is played for one second. It is recommended to play a song that finishes playing in a short period of time (for example, 2 seconds), or to play a sound that sounds like a drum being hit continuously (for example, a sound such as "doko doko doko...") for several seconds. Further, it is preferable that the sounds constituting the special evocative sound do not include musical instrument sounds used as part of the variable performance sound. Further, the special evocative sound is output at a predetermined volume without being affected by the output state of the variable performance sound. For example, even in a normal state in which the volume of the variable effect sound is not suppressed or in a suppressed state in which the volume of the variable effect sound is suppressed, the special evocative sound is output at a predetermined volume. Further, the volume of the special evocative sound is preferably made larger than the volume of the variable effect sound in the suppressed state. In addition, in the effect pattern described later, the state in which the special evocative sound is output may be maintained for about 10 seconds. In this case, it is preferable to repeatedly reproduce such a sound effect or a song whose reproduction ends in a short period of time to maintain a state in which the special evocative sound is output.

In this way, by suppressing the volume of the fluctuating performance sound and generating the special evocative sound in accordance with the movement of the frame movable body, it is possible to prevent the performance provided to the player from becoming excessive. Become. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations where the player is injured or the frame movable body is damaged due to the player coming into contact with the frame movable body.

In the performance patterns shown in FIGS. 328(A) to 329(B), the variable performance is It is configured so that the sound state is suppressed and a special evocative sound is output. Further, the output of the special evocative sound is configured to end at the timing at which the operation on the operating section is performed (timing t14) or at the timing at which the valid operation period ends (timing t18). Further, the suppression state of the variable effect sound is also configured to end at the timing when the operation on the operation section is performed (timing t14) or the timing when the effective operation period ends (timing t18).

In the performance patterns shown in FIGS. 330(A) to 331(B), the timing (timing t9) at which the frame movable body changes from the state in the standby position (first state) to the state in which it starts rotating (second state) ), the state of the variable performance sound is set to a suppressed state, and the special evocative sound is outputted. Further, the output of the special evocative sound is configured to end at the timing at which the operation on the operating section is performed (timing t14) or at the timing at which the valid operation period ends (timing t18). Further, the suppression state of the variable effect sound is also configured to end at the timing when the operation on the operation section is performed (timing t14) or the timing when the effective operation period ends (timing t18).

In the performance patterns shown in FIGS. 332(A) to 333(B), at the timing (timing t7) when the inner frame movable body starts moving from the standby position (first state) to the movement position, The state of the performance sound is set to a suppressed state, and the special evocative sound is outputted. Further, the output of the special evocative sound is configured to end at the timing at which the operation on the operating section is performed (timing t14) or at the timing at which the valid operation period ends (timing t18). Further, the suppression state of the variable effect sound is also configured to end at the timing when the operation on the operation section is performed (timing t14) or the timing when the effective operation period ends (timing t18).

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 334(A) to 335(B), the timing (timing) at which the inner frame movable body changes from the state in the standby position (first state) to the state in which it starts rotating (second state) At t5), the state of the variable effect sound is set to a suppressed state, and the special evocative sound is outputted. Further, the output of the special evocative sound is configured to end at the timing at which the operation on the operating section is performed (timing t14) or at the timing at which the valid operation period ends (timing t18). Further, the suppression state of the variable effect sound is also configured to end at the timing when the operation on the operation section is performed (timing t14) or the timing when the effective operation period ends (timing t18).

In this way, by changing the output state of the variable performance sound from the normal state to the suppressed state and changing the special evocative sound from the non-output state to the output state at the timing when the frame movable body starts operating, the performance state becomes excessive. It becomes possible to suppress this.

Furthermore, as shown with reference to FIGS. 332(A) to 333(B), when a plurality of frame movable bodies can operate in sequence, the frame movable body that operates second starts its operation. , the output state of the variable performance sound is changed from the suppressed state to the normal state, and the special evocative sound is changed from the output state to the non-output state. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress excessive stopping of the variable performance sound necessary for the performance.

The timing for returning the output state of the variable effect sound from the suppressed state to the normal state and the timing for turning off the output state of the special evocative sound are when the player performs an operation on the operation unit or the valid operation period ends. The timing is right. This is because a frame movable body simulated image is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, which has little meaning in suppressing the fluctuating effect sound since a predetermined time has passed since the frame movable body moved. This is because the player notices that the movable body has moved.

On the other hand, the timing for returning the output state of the variable performance sound from the suppressed state to the normal state or the timing for changing the output state of the special evocative sound from the output state to the non-output state may be set to when the frame movable body returns to the first state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent situations in which the player is injured or the frame movable body is damaged due to the player coming into contact with the frame movable body. In addition, in the case of a production pattern in which multiple frame movable bodies return to the first state at different timings, the output state of the variable production sound is suppressed at the timing when the frame movable body that returns to the first state latest returns to the first state. It is preferable to return the state to the normal state and also change the output state of the special alert sound from the output state to the non-output state.

Alternatively, the output state of the variable effect sound is returned from the suppressed state to the normal state at the timing when the operation unit is operated or the timing when the effective operation period ends, while the special evocative sound is changed from the output state to the non-output state. may be set when the frame movable body returns to the first state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent situations in which the player is injured or the frame movable body is damaged due to the player coming into contact with the frame movable body.

Alternatively, the special evocative sound can be changed from the output state to the non-output state at the timing when the operation section is operated or the timing when the operation validity period ends, and the timing is set to return the output state of the variable performance sound from the suppressed state to the normal state. It may also be when the frame movable body returns to the first state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent situations in which the player is injured or the frame movable body is damaged due to the player coming into contact with the frame movable body.

If there are multiple frame movable bodies and there are multiple timings at which the frame movable bodies begin to operate, as in the production patterns shown and explained in FIGS. 332 and 333, and FIGS. 334 and 335, It may be configured to output different special evocative sounds corresponding to each of the above.

In the production pattern described with reference to FIGS. 332 and 333, the output state of the fluctuating production sound is suppressed at the timing when the operation section is operated (timing t14) or at the timing when the valid operation period ends (timing t18). Although we have shown an example in which the state is changed from the state to the normal state and the special evocation sound is not output, the variable performance sound is suppressed or the special evocation sound is not output even after the timing when the operation section is operated or the timing when the operation validity period ends. It may be configured such that the sound output state may be continued.

For example, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 332(A), the outer frame movable body is moving to the movement position at timing t15, the outer frame movable body is moving to the movement position until timing t16, or the outer frame movable body is moving to the movement position. The structure may be such that the suppressed state of the variable performance sound and the output state of the special evocative sound continue until timing t27 when the body is moving to the standby position or until timing t28 when the outer frame movable body completes movement to the standby position. .

In addition, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 333(A), the outer frame movable body is moved to the moving position at timing t19, until the outer frame movable body completes its movement to the moving position at timing t20, or until the outer frame movable body is moving to the moving position. The structure may be such that the suppressed state of the variable performance sound and the output state of the special evocative sound continue until timing t27 when the body is moving to the standby position or until timing t28 when the outer frame movable body completes movement to the standby position. .

On the other hand, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 332(B) and 333(B), the effect pattern is not deformed, and in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 332(B), at timing t14, the effect shown in FIG. 333(B) In the pattern, at timing t18, the output state of the variable effect sound is changed from the suppressed state to the normal state, and the special evocative sound is changed to the non-output state.

In this way, when the outer frame movable body operates (that is, when the special lottery result is a jackpot), the suppression state of the variable performance sound and the output state of the special evocation sound are controlled according to the operation of the outer frame movable body. By configuring it to continue, the player may be injured if the player comes into contact with the outer frame movable body while it is moving to the moving position or in a state of moving to the moving position (second state). It becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the outer frame movable body is damaged. In particular, since the outer frame movable body starts moving at the timing when it is confirmed that the special lottery result is a jackpot, the excitement felt by the player is very large, but according to this embodiment, It is possible to make the player aware that the outer frame movable body is operating without disturbing the player.

The timing for outputting the special evocative sound may be limited. For example, the configuration is such that the special evocative sound is output only during at least one of the period when the frame movable body is changing from the first state to the second state and the period when the frame movable body is changing from the second state to the first state. It's okay.

For example, in the production patterns shown in FIGS. 328(A) to 329(B), during the period when the frame movable body is changing from the first state to the second state (period from timing t7 to timing t9), the frame movable body The special evocative sound is output only during at least one period during which the is changing from the second state to the first state (period from timing t22 to timing t24), and the special evocative sound is not output during other periods. may be configured. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from coming into contact with the frame movable body.

In addition, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 332(A) and 333(B), during the period when the inner frame movable body is changing from the first state to the second state (period from timing t7 to timing t9), the inner frame The special evocative sound is output only during at least one period during which the movable body is changing from the second state to the first state (period from timing t30 to timing t32), and the special evocative sound is not output during the other period. It may be configured as follows. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from coming into contact with the frame movable body.

In addition, in the performance patterns shown in FIGS. 332(A) and 333(A), the period during which the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (in the performance pattern shown in FIG. 332(A), the period t14 to timing t16 (in the performance pattern shown in FIG. 333A, the period from timing t18 to timing t20), and the period during which the outer frame movable body changes from the second state to the first state (from timing t26 to timing t28). It may be configured such that the special evocative sound is output only during at least one period, and the special evocative sound is not output during the other period. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from coming into contact with the frame movable body.

Also, the period during which the inner frame movable body is changing from the first state to the second state (period from timing t7 to timing t9), the period during which the inner frame movable body is changing from the second state to the first state (timing (period from timing t30 to timing t32), period during which the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (in the production pattern shown in FIG. 332(A), the period from timing t14 to timing t16, and the period from timing t16 to FIG. 333(A) In the production pattern shown, the special evocative sound is played only during at least one of the period from timing t18 to timing t20) and the period during which the outer frame movable body changes from the second state to the first state (from timing t26 to timing t28). It may be configured such that the special evocative sound is output and the special evocative sound is not output during other periods. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from coming into contact with the frame movable body.

In each of the above-mentioned performance patterns, after the state of the variable performance sound is set to the suppressed state, the special evocative sound may be output with a slight delay. For example, the special evocative sound may be output two seconds after the variable effect sound is suppressed. For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 328(A) to 329(B), the variable effect sound may be suppressed at timing t7, and then the special evocative sound may be output at timing t9. With this configuration, the player can clearly recognize that the variable effect sound is in a suppressed state and that the special evocative sound has a different property from the variable effect sound.

Alternatively, in each of the above-mentioned effect patterns, the state of the variable effect sound may be set to the suppressed state at a timing a predetermined time before the timing at which the special evocative sound is output. For example, the variable performance sound may be suppressed 2 seconds before the special evocative sound is output. For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 328(A) to 329(B), the variable effect sound may be suppressed at timing t5, and then the special evocative sound may be output at timing t7. With this configuration, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the variable effect sound is in a suppressed state and that the special evocative sound has a different property from the variable effect sound.

The timing at which the output of the special alerting sound ends may be a predetermined timing. For example, the special evocative sound may be output for only the first two seconds after the frame movable body starts moving. For example, in the production patterns shown in FIGS. 328(A) to 329(B), the variable production sound is suppressed at timing t7 and output of the special evocative sound is started, and the output of the special evocative sound is stopped at timing t9. It is best to configure it so that it ends. Note that it is preferable that the variable effect sound ends at the timing when the operation section is operated (timing t14) or at the timing when the valid operation period ends (timing t18). With this configuration, the state in which the variable performance sound is suppressed continues even after the output of the special evocative sound ends, so that the player can easily recognize that the special evocative sound has been output.

The structure may be configured such that the variable performance sound is suppressed and the special evocative sound is output before the frame movable body starts operating. For example, it is preferable to suppress the variable effect sound and output the special evocative sound two seconds before the frame movable body starts operating. For example, in the production patterns shown in FIGS. 328(A) to 329(B), at timing t5, the variable production sound is suppressed and output of the special evocative sound is started, and at timing t7, the state of the frame movable body is It is preferable to start an operation of changing the state from the first state to the second state. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the frame movable body moves, and it is possible to prevent the player from coming into contact with the frame movable body and getting injured.

The operation valid period may be generated in accordance with the start of the operation of the frame movable body and the timing when the variable performance sound is suppressed. For example, in the effect pattern shown in FIGS. 332(A) to 333(B), the operation valid period is generated at timing t7, the operation instruction display is started, and the light emitting effect state of the frame movable body is turned off. It is recommended to configure it as follows. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the frame movable body moves, and it is possible to prevent the player from coming into contact with the frame movable body and getting injured.

By slowly rotating the frame movable body by a predetermined angle in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 291, 294, 295, and 296, the time charts shown in FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B) are obtained. Alternatively, it may be operated like the frame movable body in the modified example of the time chart shown in FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B). For example, the frame movable body in the embodiment shown in FIG. 291 may be rotated 90 degrees clockwise as viewed from the right for 2 seconds. In addition, when moving to the standby position, it is preferable to rotate the frame movable body 90 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the right for 2 seconds.

In addition, the outer frame movable body and the inner frame movable body in the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 306, 309, 310, and 311, respectively, can be explained using the time charts shown in FIGS. 298 and 299, or the time charts shown in FIGS. It is also possible to operate the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body in the modified example of the time chart shown in FIG. For example, the outer frame movable body in the embodiment shown in FIG. 306 may be rotated 90 degrees clockwise as viewed from the right for 2 seconds. Furthermore, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, it is best to rotate the inner frame movable body 90 degrees clockwise as viewed from the right for 2 seconds at the timing when the operation section is operated or at the end of the operation validity period. . When moving to the standby position, rotate the inner frame movable body 90 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the right for 2 seconds, then rotate the outer frame movable body 90 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the right for 2 seconds. It is best to rotate it 90 degrees.

The frame movable body described with reference to FIG. 282, FIG. 287, FIG. 288, FIG. 289, and FIG. 290, FIG. 297, FIG. 300, FIG. 301, FIG. 302 and FIG. 297, 300, 301, 302 and 303, and 304 and 305 are in the second state, the frame movable body is in the second state. The body or one or both of the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body may be configured to continue vertical movement of about 1 to 2 centimeters or rotational movement of about 5 degrees. With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to easily notice that the frame movable body, the inner frame movable body, and the outer frame movable body operate to enter the second state.

In the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 292 and 293, and FIGS. 307 and 308, respectively, the rotation direction of the frame movable body is clockwise when viewed from the right side. For this reason, compared to the case where the rotation direction of the frame movable body is counterclockwise when viewed from the right side, when a player places his or her hand on the frame, it is more likely that the hand or the like will get caught inside the door frame top unit 570. It is now possible to prevent this from happening.

On the other hand, in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 292 and 293 and FIGS. 307 and 308, the rotating direction of the frame movable body may be configured to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the right side. With such a configuration, the rotating body is visually recognized as approaching the player, and it becomes possible to make the frame movable body visible to the player in an impressive manner.

In the embodiments shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, FIGS. 307 and 308, the frame movable body, the inner frame movable body, and the outer frame movable body are not rotated more than 360 degrees in the second state, but are rotated a predetermined number of times. It may be configured to alternately repeat a rotational movement in a clockwise direction when viewed from the right and a rotational movement in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the right within the movement range. For example, as shown in FIGS. 291(B), 291(E), 306(B), and 306(E), centering on the state where the frame movable body, inner frame movable body, and outer frame movable body are upright, The frame movable body, the inner frame movable body, and the outer frame movable body may be configured to repeatedly rotate within a range of 45 degrees toward the front and 45 degrees toward the rear. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player's hand or the like gets caught inside the door frame top unit 570 when the player places his or her hand on the frame.

In addition, in the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body shown in FIGS. 306(A) to 306(E), when the inner frame movable body rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the right, the outer frame movable body When the frame movable body rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the right, and when the inner frame movable body rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the right, the outer frame movable body rotates clockwise when viewed from the right. It may also be configured to perform rotational movement. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player's hand or the like gets caught inside the door frame top unit 570 when the player places his or her hand on the frame.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 282 and 297, the frame movable body was equipped with a light emitting part, but the frame movable body is illuminated at a predetermined location outside the frame movable body (for example, inside the door frame top unit 570). The frame movable body may be configured to have a light emitting section that illuminates the frame movable body with the light emitting section. Alternatively, both of these may be provided, and the movable frame body may be illuminated by a light emitting section included in the movable frame body and a light emitting unit outside the movable frame body to bring it into a predetermined performance state.

On the other hand, in the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 291(A) to 291(E) and FIGS. 306(A) to 306(E), the light emitted from the right side inside the door frame top unit corresponds to the frame movable body. 7050 and the left side light emitting section 7052 in the door frame top unit are provided in the door frame top unit 570, but it is also possible to provide the light emitting sections in the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, By providing light emitting parts in the inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7450, the right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit, the door The frame movable body may be configured to emit light in the same light emitting manner as the left side light emitting section 7052 in the frame top unit. Alternatively, both of these may be provided, and the movable frame body may be illuminated by a light emitting section included in the movable frame body and a light emitting unit outside the movable frame body to bring it into a predetermined performance state.

With reference to FIGS. 282 to 335, examples have been shown in which the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, or changes from the second state to the third state or fourth state. A player or a store clerk may force the frame movable body that is in the middle of changing to the second state, or the frame movable body that has completed the change from the second state to the fourth state, by using their hands to force the initial state. It may be configured such that it can be returned to the state in which it is located (first state). In this case, a sensor capable of detecting the position of the frame movable body is provided in the drive mechanism (not shown) that drives the frame movable body, and if the frame movable body is located at the initial position at a timing when it should not be at the initial position, Alternatively, the frame movable body may be configured to determine that a pushing operation or the like has been performed by a player or an employee of a game parlor, and to prevent the drive mechanism from operating any further, so that the frame movable body remains at the initial position.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible for a player or a clerk at a game parlor to return the frame movable body to the initial position (first state) at any timing. Additionally, even if a heavy item (such as a bag owned by a player) is placed on top of the movable frame body, the drive mechanism that operates the movable frame body is controlled so as not to operate the movable frame body. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the load on the drive mechanism. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player or an employee at a game parlor is injured.

282 to 335, the basic structure of the frame movable body, a modification of the structure of the frame movable body, a basic control mode of the frame movable body, and a modification of the control mode of the frame movable body are shown. However, the predetermined embodiments and modifications of the control mode of the frame movable body may be applied to the predetermined embodiments and modifications of the structure of the frame movable body. Further, one or more other embodiments or modifications of the structure of the frame movable body may be applied to a given embodiment or modification of the structure of the frame movable body. Furthermore, one or more other embodiments or modifications of the control manner of the frame movable body may be applied to a predetermined example or modification of the control manner of the frame movable body.

It is also possible to create an embodiment by combining and applying each production example in the embodiment and each technical matter in each production example. Moreover, it is good also as an embodiment by applying each technical matter in each accessory structure in combination.

(Second embodiment)
The second embodiment will be explained below based on the embodiments illustrated in FIGS. 336 to 363.

[35. Fraud measures against faulty nails]
By the way, a plurality of obstacle nails are installed in the rolling area of game balls in gaming machines, but in the past, malicious players etc. have illegally bent the obstacle nails, causing game balls to enter prizes. A fraudulent act was being carried out in which many game balls were fraudulently placed in the winning slots.

For example, a fraudulent act involves breaking into a gaming parlor after the store has closed, opening the door frame, and directly bending the obstructing nail with a tool, or breaking into the gaming area with a piano wire or other object during the opening hours to break the obstructing nail. Fraudulent acts such as bending game balls to unfairly guide them in an advantageous direction were carried out, and such fraudulent acts caused great damage to game parlors. The embodiments to be described hereinafter have been made in view of the above circumstances, and are intended to provide a means for preventing fraudulent acts regarding faulty nails.

[35-1. Game board]
FIG. 336 shows a front view of the game board 5' in the second embodiment, and FIG. 337 shows an exploded front perspective view of the game board 5'. As illustrated, the game board 5' in this embodiment is mainly composed of a front unit 2000, a game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000.

The back unit 3000 mainly includes a movable performance unit 3600 that performs movable performances using various movable members, and a game board side performance display device 1600 that is placed behind the unit and displays game information, performance display, etc. as images. has been done. The performances by the game board side performance display device 1600 and the movable performance unit 3600 are configured to be visible to the player through an opening formed in the center of the game panel 1100.

As shown in the exploded front perspective view of the game board 5' shown in FIG. 337 and the exploded front perspective view of the game panel 1100 shown in FIG. , an outer rail 1001 , and an inner rail 1002 are attached, and furthermore, a plurality of obstacle nails 1200 and various winning devices (general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002), etc. are provided, and an opening that spreads in the center of the panel board 1110 is installed. A front unit 2000 is fitted into the panel from the front and fixed to the panel board 1110 from the front with screws (not shown).

[35-2. Panel board]
The panel board 1110 in this embodiment is formed from a colorless and transparent acrylic board with a thickness of about 10 mm. In addition, examples of the material of the panel board 1110 include transparent synthetic resin boards such as polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin.

In addition, a plurality of obstacle nails 1200 are planted in the panel board 1110 in this embodiment, and the left side game area 5'a and the right side game area 5b are set on the panel board 1110 in accordance with the direction in which the game balls are launched. configured on the front. That is, as shown in the exploded front perspective view of FIG. 338, the right side game area 5b is formed as the rolling area of the game ball fired by the player's right hit, and the right side game area 5b is formed from the right side of the panel board 1110 to the center. A panel convex portion 1117 that is convex toward the opening is integrally formed with the panel plate 1110. Further, on the front side of the panel convex portion 1117, obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are planted as shown in the plan view of the arrangement of obstacle nails in FIG. 341.

[35-3. Front unit]
As shown in the exploded front perspective view of the game panel 1100 in FIG. 338, the table unit 2000 in this embodiment is formed into a substantially annular shape from a colorless and transparent acrylic plate material with a thickness of about 2 mm, and mainly includes: It is composed of a stage 2530, a warp exit 2522, a big prize opening 2005, a channel device 2700, an area cover member 2600 which will be described later, and the like.

Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of the game panel 1100 in FIG. 339 and the exploded front perspective view of the area cover member 2600 in FIG. A flow path device 2700 is provided that receives and flows down the flow path device 2700, and the flow path device 2700 includes a first flow path forming member 2720a and a second flow path that are provided in parallel on the left and right as shown in FIG. 340 above. A forming member 2720b.

The upper portions of the first flow path forming member 2720a and the second flow path forming member 2720b are provided with a first flow path entrance ball opening 2710a and a second flow path entrance ball opening 2710b, respectively, for receiving a game ball fired by right-handed hitting. Furthermore, the lower part is provided with a first flow path outlet 2730a and a second flow path outlet 2730b. Therefore, a game ball fired by right-handed hitting enters the first flow path entrance ball opening 2710a or the second flow path entrance ball entrance 2710b, and is ejected from the first flow path exit 2730a or second flow path exit 2730b. The game ball is discharged to the right side game area 5b formed on the panel board 1110 described above.

[35-4. Right side gaming area]
In this embodiment, as described above, the obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are planted in the panel convex portion 1117 that constitutes the right side game area 5b, and more specifically, the obstacle nail arrangement plan view of FIG. Obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are planted in the arrangement shown in FIG. 2 to form flow paths for a plurality of game balls. That is, three obstacle nails 1201, 1202, and 1203 are planted at equal intervals in the horizontal direction above the panel convex portion 1117, and two obstacle nails 1204 to 1215 are planted below them in the vertical direction. The obstruction nails are planted in close proximity to each other. Further below, three obstacle nails 1216 to 1218 are planted close to each other in a substantially diagonal direction. Note that in this embodiment, the obstacle nails are planted in the arrangement described above, but the arrangement is not necessarily limited to this, and the obstacle nails may be planted in any position as appropriate. It is possible.

[35-5. Area cover member]
Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of the game panel 1100 in FIG. 339 and the exploded front perspective view of the area cover member 2600 in FIG. An area cover member 2600 is attached to cover the game area 5b from the front side.

As shown in the figure, the area cover member 2600 of this embodiment is formed of a colorless and transparent acrylic plate with a thickness of about 2 mm and extending in the vertical direction. According to such a configuration, while covering the channel device 2700 and the right side game area 5b, it is possible to visually check the rolling state of the game balls on the back side through the area cover member 2600.

Note that the thickness of the area cover member 2600 is not necessarily limited to the thickness in this embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate, and the material constituting the area cover member 2600 may also be, for example, polycarbonate resin, It is also possible to use a colorless and transparent synthetic resin plate such as polyarylate resin or methacrylic resin.

In addition, the area cover member 2600 has a substantially planar shape on both the front and rear surfaces, and a penetration portion 2610 including penetration portions 2611 to 2620 is formed as a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction at a lower position when viewed from the front. ing. These penetrating portions 2611 to 2620 are configured to function as accommodating portions capable of accommodating the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 planted in the panel convex portion 1117 of the right side game area 5b.

More specifically, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of the game panel 1100 in FIG. 339 and the exploded rear perspective view of the area cover member 2600 in FIG. ~ 2613 accommodate the heads of the faulty nails 1201 to 1203, respectively, and the elongated hole-shaped penetrating portions 2614 to 2618 accommodate the faulty nails 1204 to 1209 and 1212 to 1215 that are close to each other. The nail heads of the three obstacle nails 1216 to 1218 are accommodated in the penetrating portion 2619, which accommodates two each and has a long hole longer than the penetrating portions 2614 to 2618. Further, a penetrating portion 2620 having a notch is formed in the right end of the area cover member 2600 when viewed from the front, and the nail heads of two adjacent obstacle nails 1210 and 1211 are formed in the penetrating portion 2620. It is configured to accommodate the parts.

Further, as shown in the exploded rear perspective view of the area cover member 2600 in FIG. By the game balls rolling on the back side of the ball coming into contact with the ball regulating protrusion 2640, it is possible to reduce the falling speed of the game balls, prevent ball clogging, and regulate the rolling direction. .

Furthermore, as shown in the exploded rear perspective view of the area cover member 2600 in FIG. It is fixed with screws (not shown) on the back side of the area cover member 2600 to prevent this from happening. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 342, in order to prevent the area cover member 2600 from being easily removed from the back side of the game panel 1100, screws screwed into the mounting bosses 2630, 2631, and 2633 are inserted from the rear of the game panel 1100. is accessible, but the screw screwed into the mounting boss 2632 is blocked by the panel plate 1110 and is configured so that it cannot be accessed. More specifically, the mounting bosses 2630 to 2633 are screwed onto the front unit 2000 fixed to the front surface of the panel board 1110, so when removing the area cover member 2600, the front unit 2000 itself must be first removed. It is configured such that it must be removed from the panel board 1110. Such a configuration makes it difficult for the area cover member 2600 to be removed by, for example, a malicious player, and it is possible to suppress acts such as illegally bending the obstructing nail.

In addition, as shown in the exploded front perspective view of the area cover member 2600 in FIG. The respective flow paths are formed by attaching and covering the area cover member 2600 to the front side. That is, since the area cover member 2600 is an essential component constituting a part of the flow path of the game ball, for example, a malicious player or the like may remove the area cover member 2600 and plant it in the right side game area 5b. Even if the installed obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are bent illegally and the game is played as is, with the area cover member 2600 removed, the game ball will not be able to move as expected in the design, causing ball jams and surrounding areas. It is constructed in such a way that it leads to damage to parts and makes it difficult to play the game normally. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent actions such as removing the area cover member 2600 and illegally bending the obstructing nail.

Next, FIGS. 343(a) to 343(c) show cross-sectional views of the part where the obstacle nails are installed in the right side game area 5b. Specifically, a mode is shown in which the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1201 to 1209 and 1212 to 1218 planted in the panel convex part 1117 are accommodated in the penetration part 2610 of the area cover member 2600, and this embodiment , the nail head of each obstruction nail is configured to be accommodated within the thickness of the area cover member 2600.

In this embodiment, as described above, the thickness of the area cover member 2600 is 2 mm, and the dimension (h) from the front surface of the panel convex portion 1117 where each obstacle nail is planted to the front surface of the area cover member 2600 is 2 mm. is approximately 18 mm. Further, the distance (w) between the center of the nail head of each obstacle nail and the end of each penetration portion 2610 of the area cover member 2600 is approximately 4 mm. Therefore, since the diameter of the nail head of the obstruction nail is about 4 mm, the gap between the outer peripheral end of the nail head and the opening end of each of the penetration parts 2610 is about 2 mm.

To explain this embodiment more specifically, the cross-sectional view of FIG. 343(a) shows how the nail heads of the obstruction nails 1201-1203 are accommodated in the penetrating portions 2611-2613. In this case, the gap from the outer peripheral end of the nail head of the obstacle nails 1201 to 1203 to the opening end of the penetration parts 2611 to 2613 provided in the area cover member 2600 is approximately 2 mm, as described above, and each The center of the nail head and the center of each penetration part are configured to coincide.

The sectional view of FIG. 343(b) shows how the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1204 to 1209 and 1212 to 1215 are accommodated in the penetrating portions 2614 to 2618. In this case, the gap from the outer circumferential ends of the nail heads of the pair of obstacle nails 1204 to 1209 and 1212 to 1215 that are close to each other to the opening ends of the penetration parts 2611 to 2613 provided in the area cover member 2600 is the same as described above. It is approximately 2 mm.

The sectional view of FIG. 343(c) shows how the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1216 to 1218 are accommodated in the penetrating portion 2619. In this case, the gap from the outer periphery of the nail heads of the obstruction nails 1216 to 1218 to the open end of the penetration portion 2619 provided in the area cover member 2600 is approximately 2 mm, as described above.

As mentioned above, since the gap between the outer peripheral end of the nail head of the faulty nail and the opening end of the penetration part 2610 constituting the accommodation section is only about 2 mm, a tool for bending the faulty nail is not required. In addition to making it difficult to insert the faulty nail, even if the faulty nail is incorrectly bent in some way, the outer peripheral end of the nail head of the faulty nail and the opening end of the penetration part 2610 will interfere, so it is difficult to insert the faulty nail. The degree of bending is limited to a very small amount, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending the faulty nail. In addition, when a faulty nail is bent illegally, the center position of the penetration part 2610 and the center position of the nail head of the faulty nail are eccentric, so it is easy to detect a fraudulent act by visually confirming the eccentricity from the front. It becomes possible to discover.

[35-6. Other embodiments]
Although the present embodiment has been described above based on the descriptions in the drawings, it is not necessarily limited to the above embodiment, and the following implementation configuration can be changed.

For example, the correspondence between the faulty nail and the penetrating portion 2610 constituting the accommodation section for the faulty nail is as described above based on the embodiment shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. The shape is not limited, and the shape of the inner circumferential surface of the penetrating portion 2610 can be changed in various ways as described below.

In the example of the penetrating portion 2610a shown in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 356(a) to 356(c), there are two places on the inner peripheral surface of the penetrating portion 2610a, one on the front side of the area cover member 2600a and one on the panel plate 1110 side. It forms a convex portion with a small cross section. According to such a configuration, when a tool or the like is forcibly inserted in order to illegally bend the obstacle nail 1220, traces such as chips and dents are likely to remain on the convex portion, making it difficult to easily discover fraudulent activity. This makes it possible to suppress the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail.

On the other hand, in the example of the penetrating portion 2610a illustrated in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 357(a) to (g), a convex portion facing the obstruction nail 1220 is formed in the center portion of the inner peripheral surface of the penetrating portion 2610a. There is. According to such a configuration, when a tool or the like is forcibly inserted in order to illegally bend the obstacle nail 1220, traces such as chips and dents are left on the convex portion, so that the illegal act can be easily discovered. It becomes possible to suppress the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail. Furthermore, compared to the embodiment shown in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 356(a) to 356(c), the convex portion can be formed easily.

Furthermore, in the example of the penetrating portion 2610a illustrated in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 358(a) to 358(d) and FIGS. A convex portion with a small cross section is formed on either the front side or the panel plate 1110 side. According to such a configuration, when a tool or the like is forcibly inserted in order to illegally bend the obstacle nail 1220, traces such as chips and dents are left on the convex portion, so that the illegal act can be easily discovered. It becomes possible to suppress the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail.

In the example shown in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 360(a) to 360(e), the front side of the area cover member 2600a of the inner peripheral surface of the penetrating portion 2610a is integrally closed with the area cover member 2600a, A housing recess 2670 is formed to accommodate the nail head. According to such a configuration, the obstacle nail 1220 cannot be accessed from the front side of the area cover member 2600a, so that it is possible to prevent the obstacle nail 1220 from being improperly bent. Furthermore, if the above-mentioned blocked part is destroyed and a tool etc. is inserted, traces will be left behind, making it easier to detect fraudulent activity and preventing unauthorized bending of obstructing nails. becomes.

Further, in the example shown in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 361(a) to 361(c), a rib of about several millimeters may be provided at the open end of the penetration portion 2610a provided in the area cover member 2600a. According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult for a tool, a piano wire, etc. for illegally bending the faulty nail to access the nail head of the faulty nail 1220 accommodated in the penetration portion 2610a, and it is also difficult to forcibly bend the faulty nail. When inserting a nail, etc., traces such as chips and dents will remain on the rib, so it is possible to further suppress the act of illegally bending the nail. Furthermore, by providing the ribs, the strength of the penetrating portion 2610a can be increased, and the rigidity of the area cover member 2600a itself can also be increased.

In addition, in this embodiment and the above-mentioned other examples, various aspects of the penetration part constituting the accommodation part for the faulty nail are illustrated, but the penetration part having a notch part, the penetration part having a plurality of notch parts, etc. It is possible to adopt various forms, including a penetrating part having a similar shape, as long as it accommodates all or a part of the faulty nail when viewed from the front and functions as a housing part.

Further, a decorative sticker with a decorative pattern may be pasted on the front surface of the area cover member 2600, which not only improves the design of the area cover member 2600 itself but also improves the outer periphery of the nail head of the obstacle nail. If a tool or the like is forcibly inserted into the gap between the end and the open end of the penetrating portion 2610, traces such as scratches or peeling will remain on the decorative seal, making it easier to discover fraudulent activity. , it becomes possible to further suppress the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail. In addition, by pasting a decorative sticker with a through hole corresponding to the penetration part 2610 on the surface of the area cover member 2600, the decoration of the game area (so-called a sticker pasted on the game board) can be seen at the rear position of the obstacle nail. In contrast to the conventional technology in which decoration was only performed using a cell sheet (cell decoration), a decorative seal with a through hole attached to the area cover member 2600 allows the game area near the obstacle nail to be decorated at the front position of the obstacle nail. Decoration becomes possible. In addition, by employing the decorative sticker affixed to the area cover member 2600 in conjunction with the cell decoration described above, three-dimensional decoration is realized on both the back and front sides of the obstacle nails, making it possible to create an unprecedented play area. New decorations are possible. In this case, the area cover member 2600 is made of a transparent member, and the decorative sticker affixed to the area cover member 2600 has a transparent part that allows the rear cell decoration area to be seen. It is preferable to do so. In addition, although the above embodiment has been explained using a sheet-shaped decorative sticker as an example, it is not necessarily limited to such a sticker, and the game area where the obstacle nails are planted or the area cover member 2600 may be painted or plated. The decoration may be applied directly by processing or other methods.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the area cover member 2600 was formed singly and attached to the front side of the table unit 2000, but the area cover member 2600 is not necessarily limited to the embodiment. It may be formed integrally with various winning devices, decorative members, etc. provided. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the effort required to attach the area cover member 2600 in the manufacturing process of the gaming machine.

Further, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the area cover member 2600 was configured as a single member that covers the channel device 2700 and the right side game area 5b, but it is not necessarily limited to this embodiment, and for example, The area cover member 2600 may be divided into a member that covers the channel device 2700 and a member that covers the right side game area 5b, and may be configured to be attached to the front unit 2000, respectively.

Further, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the channel device 2700 and the right side game area 5b were configured to be covered with the area cover member 2600, but this is not necessarily limited to this example. It is also possible to attach the area cover member 2600 to any location.

For example, it is also possible to attach the area cover member 2600a of the present invention to the gaming area shown in the front view of FIG. 353(a) in the manner shown in the front view of FIG. 353(b). More specifically, in the illustrated embodiment, the area cover member 2600a includes a substantially square-shaped penetrating portion 2651 that accommodates the nail head of the so-called jump nail 1231 and a nail head of the so-called life nail 1230. A notch-shaped penetrating portion 2650 that accommodates the nail heads of the two left guide nails 1232, a notch-shaped penetrating portion 2652 that accommodates the nail heads of the four right guide nails 1233, and a long hole shape that accommodates the nail heads of the four right guide nails 1233. A through portion 2653 is formed therein, and is fixed with screws from the back side of the panel plate 1110 to four boss portions 2660 integrally formed on the area cover member 2600a. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending each obstacle nail, which greatly affects the winning rate of game balls into the first starting port 2002. Furthermore, since the area cover member 2600a is fixed with screws from the back side of the panel board 1110, the screws cannot be easily accessed, making it possible to prevent illegal bending of obstructing nails. ing. In addition, although the area cover member 2600a is provided in this embodiment to accommodate the obstacle nail planted around the first starting port 2002, the area cover member 2600a is not necessarily limited to this, and may be used in other game areas. An area cover member 2600a may also be provided in addition to the area cover member 2600a, and it is also possible to cover the entire gaming area with a single area cover member 2600a.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of FIG. Although the cross section of the notch portion is configured to be closed, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. , the cutout portion of the penetrating portion may be closed. Further, the cutout portion in the penetrating portion may be provided in any direction of the area cover member 2600, and in this case, other constituent members present at positions opposite to the cutout portion may You can configure it so that it closes.

Further, FIG. 362 illustrates an installation mode of the area cover member 2600 in another embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 362(a), the faulty nails 1212 and 1213 are accommodated in a penetration part 2617 that serves as a housing part for the faulty nails, and a part of the penetration part 2617 has a notch. is provided.

In the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 362(a), all the faulty nails including the faulty nails 1212 and 1213 are in the designed state position, and in the penetrating portion 2617, there are two By positioning the nail head of the obstacle nail 1213 inside the line connecting the notch ends 2617a, it is possible to visually confirm that the obstacle nail 1213 is in the designed state position.

On the other hand, the mode illustrated in FIG. 362(b) shows a state in which the faulty nail 1213 is bent incorrectly, and the nail head of the faulty nail 1213 forms a line connecting the two notch ends 2617a. The structure is such that it is easy to visually recognize that the faulty nail is being bent illegally by being visually recognized in a state where the nail is exceeded. Note that although FIG. 362(a) shows an example in which the obstructing nail 1213 is located inside the line connecting the two notch ends 2617a as designed, the obstructing nail 1213 The area cover member 2600 is formed so that the state where it is located on the line connecting the end portions 2617a (so that the obstacle nail 1213 overlaps the line connecting the two notch ends 2617a in front view) is as designed. Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 362(b), if the line that connects the two notch ends 2617a is crossed, fraud can be easily discovered.

[36. Measures to facilitate nail position confirmation]
By the way, in a pachinko machine as a game machine, the ball payout rate (degree of winning) is greatly influenced by the adjustment of the obstacle nails planted on the surface of the game board. Depending on the ball payout rate, the number of customers will vary greatly, which will have a significant impact on the sales of the gaming hall. Therefore, it is necessary to check the condition of the obstructing nail at appropriate times when installing the gaming machine and after the installation, and to adjust the obstructing nail as necessary. Conventionally, nail sheets have been used to easily and accurately check the condition of a plurality of faulty nails and adjust the nails.

The nail sheet is made of translucent or transparent plastic film or paper material, and is formed into a thin sheet. Then, on the surface of the nail sheet, a pattern corresponding to each obstacle nail is printed in the same manner as the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nails installed on the game board.

In order to confirm the consistency between the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nails actually installed on the game board and the designed gauge arrangement printed on the nail sheet, conventionally, the gauge arrangement was printed on the nail sheet along with the above gauge arrangement. Obstacle nails are placed on the game board by aligning and overlapping the various accessory devices and various winning devices that are actually placed on the game board. I was checking the gauge arrangement.

However, in addition to the obstacle nails, various parts are generally placed on the game board, such as multiple winning devices, windmills, stages, decorative parts, etc., and the various parts are also arranged depending on the amount of protrusion in the front and back direction of the game machine. There are also various types. Therefore, when the nail sheet, which is thin and can be deformed freely, is placed on a game board, it is quite difficult even for an expert to arrange the nail sheet without twisting due to the unevenness of the back surface of the nail sheet. As a result, a problem has arisen in that it is not possible to accurately determine the consistency between the gauge array of the obstacle nails installed on the game board and the gauge array printed on the nail sheet.

The embodiments to be described hereinafter have been made in view of the above circumstances, and are intended to provide a gaming machine in which the position of an obstacle nail can be confirmed relatively easily.

[36-1. Nail sheet]
FIG. 344 shows a front view of a nail sheet 5000 corresponding to the game panel 1100 in this embodiment. In the nail sheet 5000, the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nail prints 5200 and the patterns of various arrangement members around the obstacle nail prints 5200 are printed in black on an A4-sized transparent film sheet 5100.

In addition, in the example illustrated in FIG. 344, the first area is printed on the nail sheet 5000 so that the gauge arrangement at multiple locations on the game panel 1100 can be confirmed using a limited range within the nail sheet 5000. A body 5110 and a second area print body 5120 are printed, and the gauge arrays corresponding to the two obstacle nail planting areas and the surrounding arrangement members are printed separately.

When confirming the gauge arrangement of the actually planted faulty nails using the nail sheet 5000 shown in FIG. 344, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. The outer edge of the area cover member 2600 printed on the area cover member 2600 and the plurality of penetration parts 2610 are accurately aligned and superimposed on the game panel 1100, and the printed obstacle nail printed body 5200 and the obstacle nails planted on the back side are overlapped on the game panel 1100. Check that there is no discrepancy between the two.

[36-2. Area cover member]
As described above, the area cover member 2600 of this embodiment is shown in the enlarged front perspective view of the game panel 1100 in FIG. 339, the top view of the arrangement of obstacle nails in FIG. 341, and the exploded rear perspective view of the area cover member 2600 in FIG. 342. As shown, the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1201 to 1203 are accommodated in the penetrating portions 2611 to 2613 of the area cover member 2600, which have a perfect circular shape when viewed from the front, and the penetrating portions 2614 to 2618, which are elongated holes, accommodate the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1201 to 1203, respectively. , two of the obstacle nails 1204 to 1209 and 1212 to 1215 that are close to each other are accommodated, and three obstacle nails 1216 are housed in the penetration part 2619 having a long hole longer than the penetration parts 2614 to 2618. ~1218 nail heads are configured to be accommodated. Further, a penetrating portion 2620 having a partial notch is formed at the right end of the area cover member 2600 when viewed from the front, and the nail heads of two adjacent obstacle nails 1210 and 1211 are formed in the penetrating portion 2620. It is configured to accommodate the parts.

Further, as shown in the exploded rear perspective view of FIG. 342, mounting bosses 2630 to 2633 are integrally provided on the back side of the area cover member 2600, and the area cover is fixed so that it cannot be removed from the front of the game panel 1100. It is screwed on the back side of the member 2600. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 342, in order to prevent the area cover member 2600 from being easily removed from the back side of the game panel 1100, screws screwed into the mounting bosses 2630, 2631, and 2633 are inserted from the rear of the game panel 1100. is accessible, but the screw screwed into the mounting boss 2632 is blocked by the panel plate 1110 and is configured so that it cannot be accessed. More specifically, the mounting bosses 2630 to 2633 are screwed onto the front unit 2000 fixed to the front surface of the panel board 1110, so when removing the area cover member 2600, the front unit 2000 itself must be first removed. It is configured such that it must be removed from the panel board 1110.

Furthermore, as shown in the exploded front perspective view of the area cover member 2600 in FIG. 340, the area cover member 2600 of this embodiment covers the channel device 2700 and the right side game area 5b in which the plurality of obstacle nails are planted. In this way, it is provided on the game panel 1100, and forms a wide and flat surface on the game panel 1100. Due to this unique configuration, when the very soft nail sheet 5000 is placed on the game panel 1100, it is stacked on the flat surface, so that it does not affect various members with different amounts of forward protrusion or obstacle nails. The nail sheet 5000 can be easily and stably superimposed on the game panel 1100 without causing damage, even by an unskilled person, and without causing twisting.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in the front view of FIG. 336, a grand prize opening 2005 is arranged below the right side gaming area 5b, and a grand prize not shown is provided on the front side of the grand prize opening 2005. A mouth cover member is provided. In addition, like the area cover member 2600, the big winning hole cover member is formed so that the front side and the back side have flat surfaces, and the area cover member 2600 is installed above the big winning hole cover member. It is installed so that the front side is flush with the front side. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to form a wider flat surface on the game panel 1100 by the area cover member 2600 and the big winning hole cover member, and the nail sheet 5000 can be further spread on the game panel 1100. It is possible to stably overlap them.

Furthermore, as described above based on the enlarged front perspective view of FIG. 339 and the rear perspective view of the game panel 1100 of FIG. 342, the area cover member 2600 of this embodiment accommodates the nail head of the obstacle nail, A plurality of penetration parts 2610 with different shapes are formed, and in positioning when stacking the nail sheets 5000, by superimposing the shape of the penetration part printed on the nail sheet 5000 on the penetration part 2610 on the back side, it is easy to In addition, it is possible to accurately align the nail sheet 5000 and quickly check the gauge arrangement of the faulty nail while observing the eccentricity of the faulty nail and the penetrating portion.

[36-3. Other embodiments]
Although the present embodiment has been described above based on the descriptions in the drawings, it is not necessarily limited to the above embodiment, and the implementation configuration can be modified as described below.

In the embodiment described above, the area cover member 2600 was configured as a single member that covers the channel device 2700 and the right side game area 5b, but it is not necessarily limited to this embodiment. For example, the area cover member 2600 The member 2600 may be configured to be provided on the game panel 1100 separately into a member that covers the channel device 2700 and a member that covers the right side game area 5b. That is, even if the area cover member 2600 having a flat surface on the front side is divided and attached on the game panel 1100, one large flat surface can be formed, so the nail sheet 5000 can be stably attached to the area cover member. It is possible to overlap the front side of 2600.

Further, the area cover member 2600 may be formed in a large and integral manner so as to cover a wider range of play areas, and with such a configuration, it is possible to further stably stack the nail sheet 5000 on the front surface of the area cover member 2600. It is.

In addition, the area cover member 2600 in the above-mentioned embodiment was composed of a single member capable of covering the channel device 2700 and the right side game area 5b, but in addition, the area cover member 2600 in the left side game area 5'a is An arbitrary range may be covered with a single region covering member or a plurality of region covering members. For example, as shown in the front view of FIG. 353(b), a plurality of region covering members around the first starting port 2002 One example is to provide a region cover member 2600a that accommodates the obstruction nail. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily and accurately superimpose the nail sheets 5000 at any location on the game panel 1100, and it is possible to quickly check the gauge arrangement of the faulty nails. Become.

(Third embodiment)
The third embodiment will be described below based on the embodiments illustrated in FIGS. 336 to 363.

[37. Measures to visually check the condition of faulty nails]
By the way, a pachinko machine as a gaming machine is equipped with multiple obstacle nails, but the obstacle nails are illegally bent by malicious players, and many game balls are fraudulently placed in the winning slot. There had been fraudulent activity. In order to prevent such fraudulent activities, conventionally, a decorative cover is provided on the winning slot device to prevent the entry hole obstruction nail, which is planted directly above the winning slot device, from being improperly bent. A concentric restriction portion was provided at a position corresponding to the above-mentioned inlet obstruction nail. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2008-188259).

In general, the ball payout rate (degree of winning) is greatly influenced by the adjustment of the obstacle nails installed on the surface of the game board, so many players consider obstacles when choosing a game machine to play on. They are very interested in the direction of inclination of the nail, and if the condition of the obstructing nail is disadvantageous to the game, they tend not to play the game with that game machine.

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned conventional technology, for example, as shown in FIG. Since the relative positional relationship between the introduction hole obstacle nail and the regulating part forming the penetration part is grasped, the player can know that the introduction hole obstacle nail is tilted in a direction disadvantageous to the winning of the game ball. There was a risk that interest would decline if the

The embodiments to be described hereinafter have been made in view of the above circumstances, and are intended to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decline in interest.

[37-1. Area cover member]
In order to cope with the above-mentioned problems, in this embodiment, as in the example illustrated in FIG. The main feature is that

The area cover member 2600a in this embodiment illustrated in FIG. , 1220 are accommodated in the penetrating portion 2610a.

On the other hand, the area cover member 2600a in this embodiment has the problem that the obstacle nail 1219 installed near the first starting hole 2002 has a large influence on the winning degree of the game ball into the first starting hole 2002. , 1220 are accommodated in the penetrating portion 2610a.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 346(a), the area cover member 2600a is attached to the decorative member of the first starting port 2002, and the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 are attached to the decorative member of the first starting port 2002 as shown in FIG. 346(a). It is accommodated in the penetrating portion 2610a in the manner shown in b).

Note that, as a method for attaching the area cover member 2600a to the first starting port 2002, as shown in FIG. It is possible. Further, as shown in FIG. 346(d), it is also possible to integrally mold and attach it to the decorative member of the first starting port 2002.

As an example of this embodiment, FIG. 347 shows a plurality of embodiments in which the center position of the penetration part 2610a formed in the area cover member 2600a is shifted from the center position of the nail heads of the obstruction nails 1219 and 1220. ing.

That is, in order to solve the above-mentioned conventional problem, the centers of the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219, 1220 are attached to the area cover member 2600a without bending or adjusting the obstacle nails 1219, 1220 that are actually installed. By forming the penetrating portion 2610a whose center position is shifted from the position (making it eccentric), is it more advantageous or disadvantageous than the actual installation state of the faulty nail (the degree of bending of the faulty nail, etc.)? This is something that the player can visually recognize.

For example, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 347(a), by shifting the center position of the penetrating portion 2610a on the right side in front view to the left side of the center position of the nail head of the obstruction nail 1220, This makes it possible for the player who sees the eccentric mode to have the illusion that the right obstacle nail 1220 is spread outward, thereby inducing a desire to play the game machine.

In addition, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 347(b), the center position of the penetration part 2610a on the left side in front view is shifted to the right side from the center position of the nail head of the obstacle nail 1219. This makes it possible for the player who sees the game machine to have the illusion that the left obstacle nail 1219 is spread outward, thereby inducing the player's desire to play the game machine.

Furthermore, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 347(c), the center positions of the penetrating portions 2610a on both sides are shifted inward from the center positions of the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220, so that this can be improved. This makes it possible for the player who sees the game machine to have the illusion that the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are spread outward, thereby inducing a desire to play the game machine.

On the other hand, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 347(d), the center position of the penetrating portion 2610a on the right side in front view is shifted to the right side from the center position of the nail head of the obstruction nail 1220. It is possible to make the player viewing the game have the illusion that the right obstacle nail 1220 is bent inward. A player who visually recognizes such an aspect assumes that the ball path between the obstacle nail 1219 and the obstacle nail 1220 is narrowed and is in a disadvantageous situation when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002, but in reality Since the right hand obstacle nail 1220 is not bent inward, the game ball enters the first starting slot 2002 at the normal winning frequency. With such a configuration, it is possible to show the player a surprising winning pattern and increase his/her interest in the game.

In addition, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 347(e), the center position of the penetration portion 2610a on the left side in front view is shifted to the left side of the center position of the nail head of the obstacle nail 1219. This makes it possible for the player viewing the game to have the illusion that the left obstacle nail 1219 is bent inward. A player who visually recognizes such an aspect assumes that the ball path between the obstacle nail 1219 and the obstacle nail 1220 is narrowed and is in a disadvantageous situation when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002, but in reality Since the left obstacle nail 1219 is not bent inward, the game ball will enter the first starting slot 2002 at the normal winning frequency. With such a configuration, it is possible to show the player a surprising winning pattern and increase his/her interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 347(f), the center positions of the penetrating portions 2610a on both sides are shifted outward from the center positions of the nail heads of the obstruction nails 1219 and 1220, thereby making this possible. This makes it possible for the player who sees the game to have the illusion that the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are bent inward. A player who visually recognizes such an aspect assumes that the ball path between the obstacle nail 1219 and the obstacle nail 1220 is narrowed and is in a disadvantageous situation when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002, but in reality Since the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are not bent inward, the game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 at the normal winning frequency. With such a configuration, it is possible to show the player a surprising winning pattern and increase his/her interest in the game.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 347(a) to 347(f), area cover members 2600a having different formation positions of the penetration portions 2610a are manufactured, and replaced as appropriate to cover the first starting port 2000. It is very time-consuming because it needs to be attached to the decorative part of the car. Therefore, in the following, based on FIGS. 348(a) to (e), it is possible to reduce the effort of manufacturing a plurality of area cover members 2600a and the effort of storing and replacing the plurality of area cover members 2600a at the game parlor side. An embodiment will be described.

As shown in the front view of FIG. 348(a), in this embodiment, four penetration parts 2610a are formed in one area cover member 2600a, and two penetration parts 2610a in the lower part are connected to two penetration parts in the upper part. It is formed inside of 2610a. When attached to the decorative portion of the first starting port 2002 with the illustrated △-shaped mark facing upward, as shown in the front view of FIG. 348(b), the penetration portions 2610a on both sides The player can visually confirm that the center position and the center positions of the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides coincide with each other. Furthermore, if the area cover member 2600a is rotated 180 degrees and the △-shaped mark is directed downward without replacing the region cover member 2600a, the center position of the penetration portion 2610a on both sides can be adjusted as shown in the front view of FIG. 348(c). It can be placed inside the center position of the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219, 1220 on both sides, thereby giving the player the illusion that the obstacle nails 1219, 1220 on both sides are spread outward. It is now possible.

Further, as shown in FIG. 348(d), when the area cover member 2600a is rotated 90 degrees to the right and installed with the △-shaped mark facing the right side, the obstruction nail 1219 on the left side is expanded outward. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348(e), if the area cover member 2600a is rotated 90 degrees to the left and installed with the △-shaped mark facing the left side, the right side It is possible to give the player the illusion that the obstacle nails 1220 are spread upward and slightly outward. With such a configuration, it is possible to variously change the visual recognition mode for the player with one area cover member 2600a without increasing the number of area cover members 2600a.

[37-3. Other embodiments]
Although the present embodiment has been described above based on the descriptions of the drawings, the present invention is not necessarily limited to the above-described embodiment, and the following modifications to the implementation configuration are possible.

For example, as shown in FIG. 349(a), it is also possible to form an oval-shaped penetration portion 2610a in the region cover member 2600a and attach it to the first starting port 2002, and as shown in FIG. 349(b). By moving the area cover member 2600a downward from the installation mode to the installation mode shown in FIG. 349(c), the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are spread outward to the player when viewed from the front. It is possible to create the illusion that With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's desire to play the game machine.

Furthermore, the shape of the penetrating portion 2610a is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and the penetrating portion 2610a may have various shapes as long as the relative positional relationship between the penetrating portion 2610a and the obstacle nail can be visually recognized by the player. can do. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 350(a), the shape of the penetrating portion 2610a may be a substantially rectangular shape with rounded portions arranged at the corners, or as illustrated in FIG. 350(b). It is also possible to have a square shape.

Furthermore, the penetrating portion 2610a of the present invention is not necessarily limited to a closed shape, and as illustrated in FIG. , 1220 nail heads. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 350(d), a cutout-shaped penetrating portion may be formed in an oblique direction to accommodate the nail heads of the faulty nails 1219 and 1220.

Further, from the viewpoint of making the state of the faulty nail visible, the penetration part 2610a of the present invention may accommodate the nail heads of a plurality of faulty nails in one penetration part 2610a, for example, as shown in FIG. 351(a). As shown in the figure, the shape of the penetration part 2610a provided in the area cover member 2600a is a long hole, and the nail heads of a plurality of faulty nails 1221, 1222 (or 1223, 1224) are accommodated in one penetration part 2610a. It is also possible to configure it as follows. As shown in FIG. 351(b), by forming two elongated hole-shaped penetrating portions 2610a in the inner position of the area cover member 2600a, the obstacle nails 1221, 1222 are visible to the player when viewed from the front. , 1223, and 1224 are spread outward. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's desire to play the game machine.

In addition, in the various embodiments described above, the area cover member is used to target obstructive nails planted near the first starting opening 2002, such as so-called life nails that greatly affect the winning rate for the first starting opening 2002. Although the installation mode of the 2600a has been explained, it is not necessarily limited to the above-mentioned obstacle nails, and as long as the obstacle nails are planted within the game area, no matter where the obstacle nails are placed, A region cover member 2600a may be provided to accommodate the obstruction nail within the penetration 2610a. That is, the player is made to visually check the relative positional relationship between the nail head of the obstacle nail and the penetration part 2610a provided in the area cover member 2600a, and whether the condition of the obstacle nail is advantageous to the game or not. If it is possible to make the player aware of whether the game machine is in a certain state, it becomes possible to increase the player's desire to play the game machine.

For example, another embodiment illustrated in the front views of FIGS. 353 and 354 shows the installation of an area cover member 2600a that accommodates a plurality of obstruction nails planted around the first starting port 2002. To be more specific, in the illustrated embodiment, the area cover member 2600a includes a substantially rectangular penetrating portion 2651 that accommodates the nail head of the so-called jump nail 1231, and a nail head of the so-called life nail 1230. A notch-shaped penetrating portion 2650 that accommodates the nail heads of the two left guide nails 1232, a notch-shaped penetrating portion 2652 that accommodates the nail heads of the four right guide nails 1233, and a long hole that accommodates the nail heads of the four right guide nails 1233. A hole-shaped through portion 2653 is formed, and is fixed with screws from the back side of the panel plate 1110 to four boss portions 2660 integrally formed on the area cover member 2600a.

An area cover member 2600a is provided for the game area shown in FIG. 353(a) in the manner shown in FIG. 353(b). The area cover member 2600a provided in FIG. 353(b) is configured so that the state of the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 is visually recognized by the player as neither advantageous nor disadvantageous. In this case, the nail head of the jump nail 1231 is located at the center of the penetrating portion 2651, and the nail head of the life nail 1230 is located below the penetrating portion 2650.

On the other hand, the area cover member 2600a illustrated in FIGS. 354(a) and 354(b) includes the area cover member 2600a in FIG. 353(b) and a penetration portion 2651 that accommodates the nail head of the jump nail 1231, respectively. The formation of the penetration part 2650 that accommodates the nail head of the life nail 1230 is different, and the area cover member 2600a illustrated in FIG. A penetrating portion 2650 for accommodating the nail head of the life nail 1230 is formed in a slightly longer manner by shifting downward. With such a configuration, the player who visually confirms the state of the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 shown in FIG. It is possible to create an illusion that the player is in an advantageous state for winning in the starting slot 2002, and to increase the player's desire to play.

Conversely, the area cover member 2600a illustrated in FIG. Each is formed into a short one. With such a configuration, the player who visually confirms the state of the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 shown in FIG. The player has the illusion that he or she is at a disadvantage in winning a prize in the starting slot 2002, and it becomes possible to increase the player's interest in selecting the gaming machine he or she wants to play. Also, even if they are visually recognized in a disadvantageous condition, the actual condition of the jump nail 1231 and life nail 1230 is not bent in a disadvantageous condition for winning a prize, so the winning rate for the first starting opening 2002 is It's not going down. Therefore, a player who plays the game even though he or she visually recognizes that the jump nail 1231 or the life nail 1230 is in a disadvantageous state may feel surprised or excited about the relatively good winning rate for the first starting opening 2002. You can feel the feeling.

Furthermore, the corresponding positional relationship between the life nail 1230 and the penetrating portion 2650 is not limited to the embodiments shown in FIGS. 353 and 354. For example, as shown in the front view of FIG. The state of the game nail is determined depending on whether the nail head is located inside the line connecting the ends of the cutout portion of the penetrating part 2650 or outside beyond the line connecting the ends. It is also possible to configure it so that it can be grasped.

Furthermore, the method of installing the area cover member 2600a on the game panel 1100 is not limited to the above-described method of fixing it to the decorative member of the first starting port 2002; for example, the front view of FIG. 351(c) As shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 351(d) or (e), it is possible to fix the area cover member 2600a to the panel plate 1110 from the front side with screws or the like. Note that as a fixing method, a mounting boss may be integrally molded on the panel board 1110 as shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. A screw hole may be provided on the 1110 side, and in this case, as shown in the front view of FIG. 351(c), the mounting part is placed below the obstacle nail so as not to interfere with the rolling of the game ball. It is preferable to do so.

Furthermore, the manner in which the area cover member 2600a is attached to the panel board 1110 is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and as shown in FIGS. It is also possible to fix the area cover member 2600a by doing so. With such a configuration, the area cover member 2600a cannot be easily removed from the front side of the gaming machine, so it is possible to prevent the act of illegally bending the obstructing nail. It is possible to prevent this.

In addition, in this embodiment and the above-mentioned other examples, various aspects of the penetration part constituting the accommodation part for the faulty nail are illustrated, but the penetration part having a notch part, the penetration part having a plurality of notch parts, etc. It is possible to adopt various forms, including a penetrating part having a similar shape, as long as it accommodates all or a part of the faulty nail when viewed from the front and functions as a housing part.

[38. Frame movable body]
By the way, in the gaming machines described with reference to FIGS. 282 to 335 and the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-093655, the progress state of the game is shown to the player by display contents on a predetermined display means, and By operating the movable decorative means provided on the frame forming the external shape of the gaming machine at a predetermined timing, it is possible to make the player feel interested. However, some players find it troublesome to move their line of sight from the predetermined display means to the movable decorative means provided on the frame that constitutes the external shape of the gaming machine, and do not move their line of sight to the movable decorative means that has been activated. In such cases, there is a risk that the player may not be able to fully feel the excitement of operating the movable decoration means.

The following describes the movable decorations provided on the frame that makes up the exterior of the gaming machine because players feel it is a hassle to move their line of sight to the movable decoration means provided on the frame that makes up the exterior of the gaming machine. An embodiment of a gaming machine that can make a player feel sufficiently interested even when the player does not move his/her line of sight to the means will be described.

364 and 365 show an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment shown and described in FIG. 282. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 364 and 365, in addition to a right ear frame movable body 7100 and a left ear frame movable body 7200, a frame movable body shaped like a root vegetable is provided in the door frame top unit 570. It is configured to include a root vegetable frame movable body 7800 that is movable in the direction.

364(A), FIG. 364(B), FIG. 365(A), and FIG. 365(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 364(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 364(D) and 364(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 365(C) is a front view showing the internal structure of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. 364(A), FIG. 364(C), and FIG. 364(D) show that the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570. Shows the stored state. FIG. 364(B) shows a state in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is stored in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570, and the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have moved to the moving position. There is. FIG. 365(A) shows a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 has been moved to the movement position. There is. 364(E) and 365(B) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 have moved to the movement position.

As shown in FIG. 365(C), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 has a root vegetable frame movable body first cover portion 7802 that imitates a root vegetable leaf on the right side when viewed from the front. Moreover, it has a root vegetable frame movable body second cover part 7804 that imitates the root of a root vegetable on the left side when viewed from the front. The root vegetable frame movable body first cover part 7802 and the root vegetable frame movable body second cover part 7804 are each made of white translucent synthetic resin, and a root vegetable frame movable body light emitting part 7810 is provided inside.

As shown in FIGS. 364(A), 364(B), etc., the lower end portion of the right side connecting linear member 7820 is attached to a predetermined position on the left side of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 when viewed from the front. Further, a lower end portion of a left connecting linear member 7830 is attached to a predetermined position on the right side of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 when viewed from the front. On the other hand, the upper end of the right connecting linear member 7820 is connected to the right vertical movement drive mechanism 7825. Further, the upper end of the left connecting linear member 7830 is connected to the left vertical movement drive mechanism 7835. The right connecting linear member 7820 and the left connecting linear member 7830 are string-shaped and have a predetermined length.

Specifically, the right side connecting linear member 7820 and the left side connecting linear member 7830 are constituted by a cylindrical cable, and inside thereof, a signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. A signal line (not shown) and a power supply line (not shown) that supplies power to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are provided. The signal line and the power supply line may be configured to be provided inside either the right connecting linear member 7820 or the left connecting linear member 7830. Note that instead of transmitting signals and supplying power to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 by wire, signals from the peripheral control board 1510 are transmitted to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 wirelessly, It may be configured such that power is supplied to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 from the door frame 3 side in a non-contact manner using a loop antenna or the like.

The right vertical movement drive mechanism 7825 and the left vertical movement drive mechanism 7835 each have a rotation mechanism (not shown), and by rotating this rotation mechanism based on drive control by the peripheral control board 1510, the cylindrical cable It is possible to wind up and unwind the right connecting linear member 7820 and the left connecting linear member 7830, which are configured by the following.

An opening (not shown) is provided on the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570, and by passing through the opening, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved downward from the state housed in the door frame top unit 570. It is possible to change the state from being located to the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 to the state where it is located to the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 to the state where it is stored in the door frame top unit 570. be. Specifically, for example, when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is located in the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIG. 364(A), by rotating the rotation mechanism in a predetermined direction, As shown in FIG. 365(A), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 can be moved to a moving position in front of the game board side effect display device 1600. Furthermore, by rotating the rotation mechanism in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved from the position in front of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. It is possible to move it to a standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 shown in 364(A).

As shown in FIG. 365(C), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 has a root vegetable frame movable body light emitting part 7810 inside. Specifically, the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting part 7810 has a shape that follows the external shapes of the root vegetable frame movable body first cover part 7802 and the root vegetable frame movable body second cover part 7804 that constitute the front surface of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. It consists of a white printed circuit board. As a specific configuration of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810, for example, the configuration described above for the face substrate 6020 may be adopted. By driving and controlling a plurality of light sources (for example, full-color LEDs) mounted on the front side of the printed circuit board by the peripheral control board 1510, the root vegetable frame movable body first cover part 7802 and the root vegetable frame movable body second cover part 7804 are controlled. It is possible to provide a luminescent decoration mode with a predetermined luminescent color.

The root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810 may be configured to adopt a light emitting mode similar to the light emitting mode described above for the rear wall substrate 6352. For example, a plurality of light sources corresponding to the root vegetable frame movable body second cover part 7804, which is a part imitating a root, of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting part 7810 are caused to emit white light, and the root vegetable frame movable body second cover part 7804, which is a part imitating a leaf, is emitted in white. By causing a plurality of light sources corresponding to one cover portion 7802 to emit green light, it is possible to make the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 into a light-emitting decoration mode imitating a radish. On the other hand, a plurality of light sources corresponding to the root vegetable frame movable body second cover part 7804, which is a part imitating a root, are emitted in red, and a plurality of light sources corresponding to the root vegetable frame movable body first cover part 7802, which is a part imitating a leaf, are emitted in red. By emitting green light from the light source, it is possible to make the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 have a light-emitting decoration mode imitating a carrot.

An example in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is provided by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 282 has been shown, but FIGS. In the embodiment described with reference to 313, a root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be provided. Further, in such an embodiment, the following presentation mode may be executed. In addition, in an embodiment in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 can be operated, among these frame movable bodies The root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be configured to move in response to the movement of at least one frame movable body (movement from a standby position to a movement position, change from a stopped state to a rotating state, etc.).

Below, with reference to FIGS. 366 and 367, a presentation mode using the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described. FIGS. 366(A) and 366(B) show the moving state of the first movable decoration means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200), and a simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means. It is a time chart showing the display mode and the movement state of the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800). Further, FIGS. 367(A) to 367(C) are front views showing the state of the gaming machine at a predetermined timing of such performance mode.

In addition, in the time chart shown in FIG. 366, in order to explain the timing of the performance, t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. are indicated according to the passage of time. The time between each timing is 1 second. These points also apply to time charts shown in drawings such as FIGS. 370, 372, 373, and 377 to 381, which will be described later, and presentation modes that are modified from these.

FIG. 366(A) shows an effect mode using the gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. 364 and 365. First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the decorative symbols start to change on the game board side performance display device 1600, and at timing t7, the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop at the same symbol, and only the central decorative symbol changes. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4↓4").

At timing t7, under drive control by the peripheral control board 1510, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start moving from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the upward movement position. do. At the same time, at timing t7, the display of a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is started on the game board side performance display device 1600.

FIG. 367(A) shows a state in which, at timing t7, the decorative pattern is in the reach state and the display of a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 has started. Note that the display of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 starts immediately after this (eg, 0.1 seconds later).

From timing t7 to timing t9, drive control is performed to move the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the movement position. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the manner in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to the movement position is dynamically displayed.

At timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 complete their movement to the movement position. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also displayed in a manner simulating a state in which movement to the movement position is completed.

FIG. 367(B) shows a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have completed their movement to the movement position at timing t9, a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body. A state in which a simulated image simulating a body 7200 is displayed in a manner simulating a state in which the movement to the movement position is completed is shown.

Next, at timing t13, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving from the standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570 to the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t14, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed. In this state, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 overlaps the display position of the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 on the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front. It will remain stationary in its position. At the same time, at timing t14, the display of the simulated images simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200 that have been displayed until then is ended.

In FIG. 367(C), at timing t14, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 displays a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 on the game board side effect display device 1600. The figure shows the state in which it has been moved to a position that overlaps the previous position when viewed from the front.

Next, at timing t18, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts changing from the state in which it is in the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the state in which it is in the standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t19, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed.

Next, at timing t22, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start moving from the upper movement position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. From timing t22 to timing t24, drive control is performed in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to the standby position. At this time, a simulated image simulating the manner in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to the movement position is not displayed. At timing t24, the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position is completed.

At a predetermined timing after timing t24, the fluctuation of the central decorative symbol that was fluctuating ends, and either the symbol indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (for example, "444") or the result of the special lottery A symbol indicating a loss (for example, "454") is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 366(B) shows a game in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 described with reference to FIGS. 364 and 365 is replaced with a rotatable right ear frame movable body 7100 and a left ear frame movable body 7200 as shown in FIG. This shows the performance when applied to a machine.

First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the decorative symbols start to change on the game board side performance display device 1600, and at timing t7, the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop at the same symbol, and only the central decorative symbol changes. Becomes a reach state. At timing t7, under drive control by the peripheral control board 1510, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change from a stopped state in the door frame top unit 570 to a rotated state. At the same time, at timing t7, the display of a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is started on the game board side performance display device 1600.

Next, at timing t13, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving from the standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570 to the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t14, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed. In this state, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 overlaps the display position of the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 on the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front. It will remain stationary in its position. At the same time, at timing t14, the display of the simulated images simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200 that have been displayed until then is ended.

Next, at timing t18, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts changing from the state in which it is in the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the state in which it is in the standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t19, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed. At timing t24, the states of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change from the rotating state to the stopped state where they are housed in the door frame top unit 570.

At a predetermined timing after timing t24, the fluctuation of the central decorative symbol that was fluctuating ends, and either the symbol indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (for example, "444") or the result of the special lottery A symbol indicating a loss (for example, "454") is stopped and displayed.

During the game, the player continues to look at the predetermined display means (the game board side effect display device 1600) where the effect based on the lottery result of the lottery means is performed, but according to the above-mentioned configuration, the frame body In accordance with drive control of the provided first movable decoration means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200), a simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means is displayed on a predetermined display means. As a result, the player is notified that the first movable decoration means is being driven and controlled, so that the player does not notice that the first movable decoration means is being driven and controlled. , a situation where the player is unable to feel the excitement caused by the drive control of the first movable decoration means, or a player who inadvertently comes into contact with the first movable decoration means and is injured. This makes it possible to prevent such situations from occurring.

On the other hand, a player who is reluctant to visually check the drive control of the first movable decoration means due to feeling tired, etc., may directly check that the first movable decoration means is being driven and controlled. Instead of visually recognizing the movement of the first movable decoration means, it is possible to virtually experience the operation of the first movable decoration means by viewing a simulated image of the first movable decoration means displayed on a predetermined display means.

Furthermore, since the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) moves to a position that overlaps the display position of the simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means in front view, the first movable decoration means Placing a burden on passive players who do not move their line of sight with respect to the first movable decoration means even though they are aware that the decoration means are being driven and controlled, such as by moving their line of sight. Instead, the user can feel the excitement caused by the movement of the second movable decoration means. In addition, it is possible to have such passive players regain their activeness in playing games.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 366(A) and 366(B), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is configured to move in front of the game board side effect display device 1600 at timing t13. In addition to the effect mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 does not move in front of the game board side effect display device 1600 and moves to the door frame. It may also be possible to perform a production mode in which the display continues to be located at a standby position within the top unit 570. With this configuration, after displaying the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves the right ear frame movable body 7100. A presentation mode in which the simulated image and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to a position overlapping in front view with respect to the display position of the simulated image, and a presentation mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 continues to be located at the standby position. can be executed.

Furthermore, when the effect mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves is executed, the expectation level for a jackpot state to occur is higher than when the effect mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 does not move is executed. may be configured.

With such a configuration, after displaying a simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200), the second movable decoration means (the root vegetable frame movable body 7200) is displayed. 7800) is drive-controlled and moves to a position that overlaps the display position of a simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means when viewed from the front, and the second movable decoration means is on standby. Since the second effect mode in which the second movable decoration means continues to be positioned will be executed, the player will be interested in whether or not the second movable decoration means moves.

Also, between the case where the first performance mode is executed and the case where the second performance mode is executed, the state (jackpot state) that is more advantageous for the player when the first performance mode is executed is When configured to increase the degree of expectation generated, it is possible to further increase the player's interest in the movement of the second movable decoration means.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 366(A) and 366(B), from timing t13 to timing t14, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves in front of the game board side effect display device 1600. Although it has been configured, it may be configured to provide a plurality of operation modes when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves in front of the game board side effect display device 1600. For example, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 temporarily stops at a position between the standby position and the movement position (between timing t13 and timing t14), and then returns to the standby position (timing t15). Or, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is temporarily stopped at an intermediate position between the standby position and the movement position (between timing t13 and timing t14), and then moved to the movement position (timing t15). It may be configured to execute. In this case, it is preferable to configure the system so that the degree of expectation that a jackpot state will occur is higher when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves to the movement position.

Alternatively, during the period (from timing t14 to timing t18) after the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 completes movement to the game board side performance display device 1600 and until it starts moving into the door frame top unit 570, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 In addition to the mode in which the 7800 is stopped in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, it may be configured to move in a predetermined operation mode within the range in front of the game board side effect display device 1600.

Further, the structure may be such that a plurality of operation modes are provided when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves into the door frame top unit 570 and returns. For example, in addition to an effect in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 returns from the movement position to the standby position from timing t18 to timing t19, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 temporarily stops at a position between the standby position and the movement position. (Between timing t18 and timing t19), and then return to the standby position (timing t20) may be configured to execute the production mode.

The mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves from the standby position to the movement position, the mode in the movement position of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800, and the mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves from the movement position to the standby position have been shown. An operation mode that combines these operation modes may be adopted as a plurality of operation modes for operating the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. Furthermore, the degree of expectation for occurrence of a jackpot state may be configured to differ depending on the plurality of operation modes.

With such a configuration, in addition to whether or not the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) moves, if it moves, drive control is performed in one of a plurality of operation modes. Therefore, in addition to whether or not the second movable decoration means moves, players are interested in how the second movable decoration means moves.

Furthermore, if the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player (a jackpot state) will occur is configured to differ depending on the operation mode, the player may be concerned about the manner in which the second movable decoration means will move. This makes it possible to further increase expectations.

The root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be configured to be in an unlit state until the forward movement of the game board-side effect display device 1600 is completed, and to be in a light-emitting decoration state after the movement to the movement position is completed. . Specifically, from timing t13 to timing t14, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is turned off, and at timing t14 when the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is put into the light-emitting decoration state. It is preferable that the light-emitting decoration state continues until timing t18 when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving to the storage position. Alternatively, the light-emitting decoration state may be continued until timing t19 when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 completes its movement to the storage position. As the light-emitting decoration state, either one of the above-mentioned light-emitting mode imitating a radish or a light-emitting mode resembling a carrot may be selected based on the special lottery result.

In this way, after the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) is moved to the movement position in front of the predetermined display means (game board side performance display device 1600) in a light-off state, the light-emitting decoration is displayed at the movement position. This makes it possible to give the player a big surprise. In addition, by creating a light-emitting decoration state based on the special lottery result, it is possible to make the player feel hopeful that the special lottery result will be in an advantageous state (big win) for the player. Furthermore, when the second movable decoration means is housed in the standby position, by continuing the light-emitting decoration state, the first movable decoration means located on the extension line of the moving direction of the second movable decoration means becomes more attractive. It becomes possible for the player to hold it.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 366 and 367, at the same time as the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start operating, a display area approximately in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. , it is configured to start displaying a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. Furthermore, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 366(A), at the same time as the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the movement positions is completed, the game board side effect display device 1600 is In the substantially central display area, a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are configured to be displayed to complete their movement to the movement position. Further, the right ear frame is movable when moved from the standby position to the movement position, as from timing t9 to timing t14 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 366(A), or from timing t7 to timing t14 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 366(B). During these periods, in the same manner as the operating states of the body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 which have changed from the non-rotating state located at the standby position to the rotating state. , it is preferable to display a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200.

With such a configuration, the first movable decoration means changes from the first state (positioned at the standby position) to the second state (positioned at the moving position or rotating state). The state of the (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) can be accurately grasped by visual confirmation of a predetermined display means (game board side performance display device 1600).

On the other hand, a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are displayed in a manner different from the operating states of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. It may be configured to do so.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 366(A), a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 move and appear from timing t7 to timing t9. However, this dynamic display may be performed again from timing t9 to timing t11, or further from timing t11 to timing t13.

In this way, the first movable decorative means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame change from the first state (standby state) to the second state (moving state). Even after the first movable decorative means has changed, a predetermined display means (game board side performance display device 1600) dynamically displays a simulated image that simulates the operating mode of the first movable decorative means, so that the player can see the first movable decorative means. It becomes possible to have the user take an interest in the operation of the decorative means. In the above example, such dynamic display is performed twice (from timing t9 to timing t11 and from timing t11 to timing t13), but dynamic display may be performed only once. It may be done three times or more.

Further, at timing t9 in the example shown in FIG. 366(A), the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 is separated from the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, and the game board side effect display device It may be configured such that it starts moving upward within the display area 1600, then moves upward within the display area, and completes its movement outside the display area at timing t11. Furthermore, a similar dynamic display may be performed for a simulated image of the left ear frame movable body 7200 from timing t11 to timing t13. FIG. 368(A) is a diagram showing a state at timing t10 in such an embodiment, in which a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 is separated from a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570. It shows a state in which it is moving upward.

In this example, the first movable decoration means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame are changed from the first state (standby state) to the second state (movement position). After changing to the state in which the movable body 7100 is located, a simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means (a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a left ear The frame movable body 7200 (simulated image) is configured to be moved in a predetermined direction indicating the position where the first movable decoration means is provided. Further, the first movable decoration means is configured to be located on an extension line of the moving direction of the simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means when viewed from the front.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the first movable decoration means is operated and changed from the first state to the second state. Furthermore, the position where the first movable decoration means is provided can be directly indicated, and it becomes possible to make the player interested in the operation of the first movable decoration means. In addition, the first movable decoration means performs an action that cannot be performed in real life using a simulated image that imitates the first movable decoration means, and in this respect as well, the player's interest in the operation of the first movable decoration means increases. It will be possible to have it brought to you.

Alternatively, from timing t9 to timing t14 in the example shown in FIG. It may be configured to dynamically display the simulated images so that they appear and appear alternately. FIG. 368(B) shows a state in which the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 is half housed with respect to the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570.

In this example, the first movable decoration means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame are changed from the first state (standby state) to the second state (movement position). After changing to the state in which the movable body 7100 is located, a simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means (a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a left ear A simulated image simulating the frame movable body 7200) is displayed in a manner that it moves back and forth in a predetermined direction. Further, the first movable decoration means is configured to be located on an extension line of the reciprocating direction when viewed from the front.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the first movable decoration means is operated and changed from the first state to the second state. Further, it is possible to suggest the position where the first movable decoration means is provided, and it is possible to make the player interested in the operation of the first movable decoration means. Further, by displaying a comical image imitating the first movable decoration means, it is possible to make the player interested in the operation of the first movable decoration means.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 368(A) and 368(B), the first movable decorative means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame body are After changing from the first state (standby state) to the second state (state located at the moving position), in the predetermined display means (game board side performance display device 1600), the first movable decoration means A dynamic display of a simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means (the ears pop upward, the ears move twitching, etc.) is performed in a manner different from the manner in which the state changes from the state to the second state. It consists of

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in how the first movable decoration means actually operates.

On the other hand, from timing t9 to timing t14 in the presentation mode shown in FIG. 366(A), a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are dynamically displayed in a predetermined color. It may be configured to do so. For example, in a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100, an image is displayed in which the part simulating the inside of the ear is red and the part simulating the outside of the ear is white, and then the colors are swapped and the part simulating the outside of the ear is displayed in red. The display operation of displaying an image in which the inner part of the ear is white and the outer part of the ear is red may be repeated multiple times (for example, 5 times in total by changing the colors every 1 second). . Further, such a display operation may be configured to be performed simultaneously on a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. FIG. 369(A) shows a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, in which the inner part of the ear is white and the outer part of the ear is white. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a state in which an image is displayed in which the imitated portion is red.

On the other hand, the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to continue to be displayed in a predetermined color without changing the color. FIG. 369(B) shows a simulated image of the right ear frame movable body 7100 in which both the inside of the ear and the outside of the ear are pink, and an image of the left ear frame movable body 7200. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a presentation mode in which an image in which both a portion simulating the inside of the ear and a portion simulating the outside of the ear are pink is continuously displayed as a simulated image simulating .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in how the first movable decoration means actually emits light.

Depending on the performance mode described with reference to FIG. 368 and FIG. 369, the degree of expectation for occurrence of a jackpot state may be configured to differ. For example, the performance mode described with reference to FIG. 368(A) is configured so that the expectation level for a jackpot state to occur is higher than the performance mode described with reference to FIG. 368(B). Good too. Further, the performance mode explained with reference to FIG. 369(A) is configured so that the expectation level for occurrence of a jackpot state is higher than the performance mode explained with reference to FIG. 369(B). Good too.

Furthermore, it may be configured to execute a presentation mode that is a combination of the presentation mode explained with reference to FIG. 368 and the presentation mode explained with reference to FIG. 369. For example, the performance described with reference to FIG. 368(B) is better than the performance described with reference to FIG. 368(B) than the performance described with reference to FIG. A combination of the performance mode and the performance mode described with reference to FIG. 369(B) may be configured so that the degree of expectation that a jackpot state will occur is higher.

Furthermore, it is preferable to configure the performance mode such that the rate of execution of the performance mode is lower when the degree of expectation that a jackpot state occurs is higher. For example, the production mode is adjusted so that the ratio of the number of executions of the production mode with a lower expectation level that will cause a jackpot state and the number of executions of a production mode with a higher expectation level that a jackpot state will occur is 9:1. It is a good idea to set the execution rate.

With this configuration, a simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means (a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100) displayed on a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) By providing a plurality of display modes for the (mock image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200), the monotony of the performance is eliminated, and it becomes possible to make the player more interested in the first movable decoration means. . Furthermore, the act of directly viewing the operation of the first movable decoration means, and the act of viewing a simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means to know the degree of expectation that an advantageous state will occur for the player. It becomes possible to provide the player with the interest of deciding which act to enjoy.

Furthermore, the display mode of the simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means indicates to the player the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player (jackpot state) will occur, so that the first movable decoration means can be visually recognized. In particular, it is possible to make reluctant players recognize the presence of the first movable decoration means anew.

In addition, by configuring the system so that the higher the expectation that a state advantageous to the player (jackpot state) will occur, the lower the rate at which the performance mode will be executed, the performance mode will normally have a low expectation level and a high execution rate. Although many aspects are visually recognized, rarely (for example, once every 10 times), a performance aspect with a high expectation level and a low execution rate is visually recognized, which may be surprising. When the player visually recognizes the latter performance mode, the player becomes more interested in the first movable decoration means due to the excitement of being shown to have high expectations.

The light emitting states of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are emitted so that they are recognized in the same manner as in the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. It may also be configured to do so. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 369(A), the outsides of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are made to emit red light, and in the state shown in FIG. 369(B), the right ear The entire frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to emit pink light.

In this way, the light emitting mode in the second state (the state located at the moving position) of the first movable decorative means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame is controlled in a predetermined manner. Simulated images simulating the first movable decoration means (simulated images simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and simulation images simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200) displayed on the display means (gaming board side effect display device 1600) By making the color the same as the image color of the image), when a player who is viewing a predetermined display means tries to visually recognize the first movable decoration means, the player can quickly recognize the first movable decoration means. becomes possible.

The root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved in a configuration in which the decorative symbols start changing and then are stopped and displayed in a manner according to the result of the special lottery in the approximately central display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. It may be configured as follows.

For example, when operating the root vegetable frame movable body 7800, the variation of the decorative pattern is started approximately at the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, and from the state in which the decorative pattern is changing, the decorative pattern being changed is is moved to the upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600 and displayed in a reduced size manner, and a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 is displayed in the approximately central display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display of a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be started.

Thereafter, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved from the standby position to a position overlapping the approximately central display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, and then the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved from the position overlapping the approximately central display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. After moving the frame movable body 7800 in the direction of storing it in the door frame top unit 570, the decorative pattern that had been displayed in the upper right corner is moved to the approximate center of the game board side performance display device 1600, and then returned to its original size. It is preferable that the display is enlarged to continue to be displayed in a variable manner, and finally stopped and displayed in a manner that suggests the lottery result.

When such a variation mode of the decorative pattern is adopted, the variation of the decorative pattern is repeated a plurality of times at approximately the center of the game board side performance display device 1600.

With this configuration, the player's line of sight remains at a predetermined position of the predetermined display means (approximately the center of the game board side effect display device 1600), and the first movable decoration means (right ear frame movable For reluctant players who feel stressed by visually checking the drive control of the body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200), display of a simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means and the second movable It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels stressed due to the movement of the decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800), which makes the player feel forced to move his/her line of sight.

The decorative pattern starts to change approximately at the center of the game board performance display device 1600, and at the upper right of the game board performance display device 1600, a decorative pattern smaller in size than the decorative symbol displayed approximately at the center of the game board performance display device 1600 is displayed. At the same time as the decorative symbols start to fluctuate, from the state in which each decorative symbol is fluctuating, the game board side continues to display the fluctuating decorative symbols in the upper right corner of the game board side performance display device 1600. The display of the decorative pattern displayed approximately in the center of the effect display device 1600 is temporarily stopped, and a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body are displayed approximately in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600. 7200 may be configured to start displaying a simulated image.

Thereafter, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved from the standby position to a position overlapping the display area approximately at the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is further moved from the position overlapping approximately the center of the game board side effect display device 1600. After moving the body 7800 in the direction of storing it in the door frame top unit 570, the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern at the approximate center of the game board side effect display device 1600 is resumed, and finally, along with the decorative pattern displayed at the upper right , may be configured to be stopped and displayed in a manner suggesting the lottery result.

When such a variation mode of the decorative symbols is adopted, the variations of the decorative symbols will be repeated a plurality of times at approximately the center and the upper right of the game board side performance display device 1600.

With such a configuration, the player's line of sight remains at a predetermined position of the predetermined display means (approximately the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 where relatively large decorative patterns are displayed). , the first movable decoration means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) are designed for passive players who feel stressed about visually checking the drive control of the first movable decoration means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200). By displaying a simulated image that imitates the root vegetable frame and by moving the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels stressed because he or she is forced to move his/her line of sight. It becomes possible to do so.

Although an example has been shown in which a small-sized decorative pattern is displayed at the upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is configured so that it is displayed at the lower right or lower left of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is During the period of movement from the standby position to the movement position (from timing t13 to timing t14 in FIGS. 366(A) and 366(B)), during the period of being located at the movement position (from timing t14 to timing t18), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves. During the period of movement from the position to the standby position (from timing t18 to timing t19 in FIGS. 366(A) and 366(B)), the small decorative pattern is configured so as not to be hidden by the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. It's okay. Specifically, during these periods, the configuration may be such that the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and the small decorative pattern do not overlap in front view.

In this way, by moving the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800), the predetermined position of the predetermined display means (the game board side effect display device 1600 where relatively small-sized decorative patterns are displayed) is moved. By configuring the game so that the decorative patterns displayed in the lower right and lower left areas are not hidden, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a passive player feels that the performance is excessive.

In the performance mode described later with reference to FIGS. 372, 373, etc., these display methods may be adopted when displaying a simulated image imitating a shaped object and a decorative pattern on the game board side performance display device 1600.

Corresponding to the display of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, the game board side effect display device 1600 determines when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will move. It may also be configured to display the waiting time indicated. A plurality of display modes will be shown below with reference to FIGS. 370(A) and 370(B). FIG. 370(A) shows a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 366(A). Moreover, FIG. 370(B) shows a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 366(B).

For example, the waiting time is displayed as "1" from timing t8 to timing t9 in the display area between the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. Displaying numbers, displaying the number "2" from timing t9 to timing t10, displaying the number "3" from timing t10 to timing t11, displaying the number "4" from timing t11 to timing t12, The character string "GO!!" (note that the notation is abbreviated as "GO" in FIG. 370(A)) may be configured to be displayed from timing t12 to timing t13. In addition to displaying such numbers and letters, from timing t7 to timing t8, a character string "What if the root vegetables fall...?" is displayed between a mock image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a left ear frame. It may be configured to be displayed in a display area between a simulated image simulating the movable body 7200.

Alternatively, without displaying such numbers or characters, from timing t7 to timing t13, a character string "What if the root vegetables fall...?" is displayed between a mock image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame. It may be configured to be displayed in a display area between a simulated image simulating the movable body 7200.

In this way, the images ("1", "2", "3", "4", "GO!!") suggest the waiting time until the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) operates. By adopting a configuration in which the display is performed on a predetermined display means (game board side performance display device 1600), it is possible to visually recognize the first movable decoration means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200). A game in which a player is able to recognize the timing at which the second movable decoration means operates, and moves his line of sight to the first movable decoration means by displaying a simulated image that imitates the first movable decoration means. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a person overlooks the operation of the second movable decoration means. In addition, for passive players who do not move their line of sight with respect to the first movable decoration means, the timing of operation of the second movable decoration means is suggested, so that the player moves his line of sight from the predetermined display means. It becomes possible to make the operation of the second movable decoration means wait without causing any delay.

In addition, at the same timing (timing t7) as the timing at which a simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means is displayed, an image suggesting that the second movable decoration means operates at a predetermined timing (“root vegetables are falling”) is displayed. By displaying "Ba...?"), the player can simultaneously recognize that the first movable decoration means has operated and that the second movable decoration means has operated, and can move his/her line of sight. A particularly active player moves his/her line of sight to the first movable decoration means first, and does not notice that a display indicating that the second movable decoration means is in operation is being displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation of the second movable decoration means is overlooked.

Furthermore, by displaying an image suggesting a waiting time until the second movable decoration means operates near and adjacent to the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means, the player can use the second movable decoration means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user does not notice that an image indicating the waiting time until the device operates is displayed.

Example of displaying an image suggesting a waiting time until the second movable decoration means operates in a display area between a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 However, the second movable decoration means operates so as to overlap one or both of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. It may be configured to display an image suggesting the waiting time until the second movable decoration means will operate or an image suggesting that the second movable decoration means will operate.

By adopting such a configuration, the player can see an image suggesting the waiting time until the second movable decoration means operates or an image suggesting that the second movable decoration means will operate. This makes it possible to further suppress the occurrence of situations in which the user does not notice that the vehicle is present.

Corresponding to the display of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, the game board side effect display device 1600 determines when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will move. Although an example has been shown in which the waiting time is displayed, a similar suggestion may be made by sound in place of or in addition to such a display. For example, in a display area between a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, as shown in FIGS. 370(A) and 370(B), the timing The sound "ichi" is output from t8 to timing t9, the sound "ni" is output from timing t9 to timing t10, the sound "san" is output from timing t10 to timing t11, and the sound "san" is output from timing t11 to timing t12. It may be configured to output the voice "Yon" and output the voice "Go" from timing t12 to timing t13. Alternatively, from timing t7 to timing t13, the line "Konsai garakasu ba" is output as a voice, or some kind of melody (a melody that lasts about 6 seconds and completes output at least at timing t13) is output. may be configured.

In this way, by adopting a configuration that outputs a sound indicating the waiting time until the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) operates, the first movable decoration means (right ear frame movable body 7100) , left ear frame movable body 7200), it is possible to auditorily recognize the timing at which the second movable decoration means operates even when the player moves his/her line of sight to the first movable decoration means. Therefore, it becomes possible to enjoy the operation of the first movable decoration means until just before the second movable decoration means operates.

Furthermore, in the case of a player who does not move his/her line of sight with respect to the first movable decoration means, the player visually recognizes a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) in which an effect is performed based on the lottery result of the lottery means. Regarding the act itself, the player does not necessarily continue to visually check the predetermined display means by operating a mobile phone or smartphone, but the timing of the operation of the second movable decoration means is aurally indicated to the player by sound. Therefore, it is possible to restore the desire to visually recognize the predetermined display means and the second movable decoration means.

With reference to FIGS. 366(A) and 366(B), an embodiment has been shown in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves to a position where it overlaps a simulated image imitating the left and right ear frame movable bodies in a front view. After the frame movable body 7800 is moved to the movement position, it may be configured to periodically move up and down at the movement position. For example, it may be configured to move up and down once every second and then move down for four seconds from timing t14 to timing t18, repeating such vertical movement four times in total. . In this movement, at least a portion of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is placed in the area where the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 were displayed when viewed from the front. It is recommended that the configuration be configured so that it moves within the range that overlaps with .

In this way, the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) is moved to the position where the simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) is displayed. After moving to a moving position where it overlaps in front view, at least a part of the second movable decoration means moves so as to overlap in front view with the area in which the simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means was displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a passive player feels stressed due to the operation of the second movable decoration means after it has been moved to the movement position.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 364 and 365, since the player can directly touch the root vegetable frame movable body 7800, the player may be injured by the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 that falls downward. In addition, there is a risk that the player may pull the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 downward and destroy the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and the like. Therefore, an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 364 and 365 will be described below with reference to FIG. 371. In this embodiment, it is difficult for the player to come into contact with the root vegetable frame movable body 7800.

371(A) and 371(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 371(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 371(D) and 371(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 371(A), FIG. 371(C), and FIG. 371(D) show that the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570. Shows the stored state. FIGS. 371(B) and 371(E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 have moved to the movement position.

As shown in FIG. 371, in this embodiment, a root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 that covers the movement area of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is provided. The root vegetable frame movable cover unit 7850 is provided in front of the door frame base unit 100 and below the door frame top unit 570, and includes a cover unit frame 7852 that has a square shape when viewed from the front and a right triangle shape when viewed from the side. A cover unit front part 7854 covers the square part formed on the front by the cover unit frame 7852, a cover unit right side part 7856 covers the right triangular part formed on the left and right sides by the cover unit frame 7852, and a cover unit left side It is composed of a surface portion 7858.

The cover unit frame 7852 is made of colored (specifically, green) opaque synthetic resin. Note that in order to increase the strength of the cover unit frame 7852, it may be made of metal. Further, the cover unit frame 7852 has a function of holding a cover unit front part 7854, a cover unit right side part 7856, and a cover unit left side part 7858.

The cover unit front part 7854, the cover unit right side part 7856, and the cover unit left side part 7858 are each plate-shaped and made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The cover unit front part 7854 is configured to be attached to the cover unit frame 7852 in a state where the upper part thereof is inclined toward the front side when viewed from the side. The cover unit right side surface portion 7856 and the cover unit left side surface portion 7858 are provided to face each other at the left and right ends of the gaming machine.

The player can visually confirm the operating state of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 through the colorless and transparent cover unit front part 7854. In addition, a player playing a game on an adjacent gaming machine can visually check the operating state of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 through the cover unit right side surface part 7856 and the cover unit left side surface part 7858. It is possible.

A gaming machine employing such a configuration may be configured to execute the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 366 and the like.

In this way, the protective members (cover unit front part 7854, cover unit right side part 7856, cover unit left side part 7858) are arranged so as to surround the movement area of the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800), By adopting a configuration that makes it difficult for the player to come into contact with the second movable decoration means and allows the player to visually recognize the second movable decoration means through a transparent protection member, the second While maintaining the visibility of the movable decoration means and the impact on the player when the second movable decoration means operates, it is possible to prevent a situation where the player is injured due to the movement of the second movable decoration means, It becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the second movable decoration means is destroyed by a player.

An example is shown in which the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 282 is modified to include a root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and a root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850. In the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 306 and 309 to 313, a root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and a root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 may be provided. Further, in such an embodiment, each performance mode described in this specification may be executed.

Although an example has been shown in which the cover unit frame 7852 holds the cover unit front part 7854, the cover unit right side part 7856, and the cover unit left side part 7858, it is possible to hold either or both of the cover unit right side part 7856 and the cover unit left side part 7858. The configuration may be such that it is not provided. For example, the cover unit frame 7852 may have only the cover unit front part 7854, or the cover unit frame 7852 may have only the cover unit front part 7854 and the cover unit left side part 7858.

In this way, the protective member (cover unit front section 7854, or the cover unit front section 7854 and the cover unit right side section 7856, or the cover unit front section) surrounds the movement area of the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800). portion 7854 and cover unit left side portion 7858) so as to contact the second movable decorative means from the sides (from the right and left, or only from the left, or only from the right). In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the second movable decoration means is visible to the player through the protective member, the visibility of the second movable decoration means and when the second movable decoration means is operated is improved. While maintaining the impact on the player, the second movable decoration means may move, causing injury to the player, or the second movable decoration means may be impulsively destroyed by the player. It becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of. Furthermore, since it is possible to contact the second movable decoration means from the side where no protection member is provided, even if some abnormality occurs in the second movable decoration means, maintenance such as repair can be carried out by the store staff at the game parlor. etc. becomes possible.

According to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 364 to 371, etc., it is possible to make the player fully feel the excitement of operating the movable decorative means provided on the frame that constitutes the outer shape of the gaming machine. Even if the player is unable to do so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's sense of interest is reduced.

[39. Frame movable body]
By the way, in the gaming machines described with reference to FIGS. 282 to 335 and the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-093655, the progress state of the game is shown to the player by display contents on a predetermined display means, and It is possible to make the player feel interested by driving the shaped bodies provided on the frame that constitutes the external shape of the gaming machine at a predetermined timing. However, there is room for improvement in the appearance when a plurality of shaped bodies are provided on the frame.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of a gaming machine that can provide a sufficient sense of interest to a player even if the frame has a plurality of movable shaped bodies will be described.

The gaming machine in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ear outer frame movable body"), which are frame movable bodies that imitate the outside of the ear. These four frame movable bodies can each independently take a state of being located at a standby position and a state of being located at a moving position.

Below, with reference to FIG. 372, FIG. 373, FIG. 374, and FIG. 375, a first presentation mode using the ear outer frame movable body and a second presentation mode using the ear inner frame movable body will be explained. . 372 and 373 are time charts for the first performance mode and the second performance mode, and FIGS. 374 and 375 are front views showing the state of the gaming machine at predetermined timings of such performance modes. .

The first performance mode will be described below with reference to FIG. 372(A) and FIG. 374. Note that the presentation mode shown in FIGS. 372(A) and 372(B) has a movable inner ear frame movable body and a movable ear outer frame movable body, like the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 300. This shows a performance mode applicable to the gaming machine.

First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the decorative symbols start to change on the game board side performance display device 1600, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop at the same symbol, and only the center decorative symbol changes. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4↓4").

At timing t8, under drive control by the peripheral control board 1510, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are moved from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the upward movement position. Start. At the same time, at timing t8, the display of a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is started on the game board side performance display device 1600.

FIG. 374(A) shows a state in which display of a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 is started at timing t8. Note that the display of a simulated image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 starts immediately after this (eg, 0.1 seconds later).

From timing t8 to timing t10, drive control is performed in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 move to the movement position. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the manner in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 moves to the moving position and a simulated image simulating the manner in which the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 moves to the moving position are dynamically displayed. be done.

Next, at timing t10, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 complete their movement to the movement position. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and a simulated image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are also displayed in a manner simulating a state in which movement to the movement position is completed.

FIG. 374(B) shows a state in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have completed their movement to the movement position at timing t10, a simulated image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and a left ear outer frame movable body 7350. A simulated image simulating the ear outer frame movable body 7450 is displayed in a manner simulating a state in which movement to the movement position is completed.

From timing t10 to timing t16, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 continue to be in the movement position. At the same time, the display of a simulated image simulating an aspect in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is located at the moving position and a simulated image simulating an aspect in which the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is located in the moving position is also continued.

Next, at timing t16, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 start moving from the upper movement position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and a simulated image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are dynamically displayed in such a manner that they start moving to the standby position.

From timing t16 to timing t18, drive control is performed to move the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the standby position. A simulated image simulating the manner in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 moves to the standby position and a simulated image simulating the manner in which the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 moves to the standby position are dynamically displayed. .

At timing t18, the movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the standby position is completed, and they are housed in the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, the display mode of the simulated image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the simulated image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 becomes the display mode in which movement to the standby position is completed. Specifically, after a state where only the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 is displayed is displayed for a moment, the display of the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 also ends.

At a predetermined timing after timing t18, the fluctuation of the central decorative symbol that was fluctuating ends, and either the symbol indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (for example, "444") or the result of the special lottery A symbol indicating a loss (for example, "454") is stopped and displayed.

The second presentation mode will be described below with reference to FIG. 372(B) and FIG. 375. First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the decorative symbols start to change on the game board side performance display device 1600, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop at the same symbol, and only the center decorative symbol changes. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4↓4").

At timing t5, display of a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and left ear inner frame movable body 7400 is started on the game board side effect display device 1600.

FIG. 375(A) shows a state in which display of a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 is started at timing t5. Note that the display of the simulated images simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 starts immediately after this (eg, 0.1 seconds later).

A simulated image simulating the manner in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 moves to the moving position and a simulated image simulating the manner in which the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 moves to the moving position from timing t5 to timing t7. is displayed dynamically.

At timing t7, a simulated image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a simulated image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed in a manner simulating a state in which movement to the movement position is completed.

FIG. 375(B) shows a state in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are still housed in the door frame top unit 570 at timing t7, and the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is simulated. A state in which a simulated image and a simulated image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed in a manner simulating a state in which the movement to the movement position is completed is shown.

Next, at timing t8, under drive control by the peripheral control board 1510, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are moved from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the upward movement position. start moving.

Next, at timing t10, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 complete their movement to the movement position.

FIG. 375(C) shows a state in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 have completed their movement to the movement positions at timing t10, a simulated image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and a left ear A simulated image simulating the inner ear frame movable body 7400 is displayed in a manner simulating a state in which movement to the movement position is completed.

From timing t10 to timing t16, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 continue to be located at the movement position. At the same time, a simulated image simulating an aspect in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is located at the moving position and a simulated image simulating an aspect in which the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 is located in the moving position are displayed.

Next, at timing t16, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 start moving from the upper movement position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a simulated image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are dynamically displayed in such a manner that they start moving to the standby position.

From timing t16 to timing t18, drive control is performed to move the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 to the standby position. A simulated image simulating the manner in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 moves to the standby position and a simulated image simulating the manner in which the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 moves to the standby position are dynamically displayed. .

At timing t18, the movement of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 to the standby position is completed, and they are housed in the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, the display mode of the simulated image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the simulated image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 becomes the display mode in which movement to the standby position has been completed. Specifically, after a state where only the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 is displayed is displayed for a moment, the display of the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 also ends.

At a predetermined timing after timing t18, the fluctuation of the central decorative symbol that was fluctuating ends, and either the symbol indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (for example, "444") or the result of the special lottery A symbol indicating a loss (for example, "454") is stopped and displayed.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, which are drive-controlled in the second production mode, are the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body, which are drive-controlled in the first production mode. Compared to the body 7450, the area when viewed from the front when moved to the movement position is smaller. Therefore, in the second presentation mode, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the display of a simulated image imitating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a simulated image imitating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, By controlling the drive of the frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, it is configured to supplement the sense of volume as a performance.

Note that the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode shown in FIGS. 372(A) and 372(B) are performed using a movable ear inner frame movable body, as in the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 300. Although an example is shown in which the present invention is applied to a gaming machine having a movable body and an ear outer frame movable body, the present invention may also be applied to the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 301. In this case, since the ear inner frame movable body moves from the upper standby position to the lower movement position, the simulated image of the ear inner frame movable body is also displayed from above in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display mode moves downward. Further, the present invention may be applied to the gaming machines described with reference to FIGS. 302 and 303. In this case, since the inner ear frame movable body and the outer ear frame movable body are moved from the lower standby position to the upper movement position, the simulated images of the inner ear frame movable body and the outer ear frame movable body are also The display mode moves from the bottom to the top within the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600. Alternatively, the inner ear frame movable body and the outer ear frame movable body may be moved from the upper standby position to the lower moving position, and the simulated images of the inner ear frame movable body and the outer ear frame movable body may also be moved to the game board side. The display mode may be such that the display moves from the top to the bottom within the display area of the performance display device 1600.

The first performance mode will be described below with reference to FIG. 373(A). Note that the performance modes shown in FIGS. 373(A) and 373(B) can be applied to gaming machines having a rotatable inner ear frame movable body and a rotatable ear outer frame movable body as shown in FIGS. 306, 309, etc. It shows a style of production.

First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the decorative symbols start to change on the game board side performance display device 1600, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop at the same symbol, and only the center decorative symbol changes. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4↓4").

At timing t8, under drive control by the peripheral control board 1510, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 change from the standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570 to a rotated state. . At the same time, at timing t8, the display of a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is started on the game board side performance display device 1600. The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 in a dynamic manner simulating a rotated state.

From timing t8 to timing t18, the rotational states of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, the door frame top unit 570 in the game board side effect display device 1600, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left The display of the simulated image simulating the ear outer frame movable body 7450 continues.

At timing t18, the states of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 change from the rotating state to the stopped state housed in the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, the display of the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 ends.

At a predetermined timing after timing t24, the fluctuation of the central decorative symbol that was fluctuating ends, and either the symbol indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (for example, "444") or the result of the special lottery A symbol indicating a loss (for example, "454") is stopped and displayed.

The second presentation mode will be described below with reference to FIG. 373(B). First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the decorative symbols start to change on the game board side performance display device 1600, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop at the same symbol, and only the center decorative symbol changes. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4↓4").

At timing t5, display of a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and left ear inner frame movable body 7400 is started on the game board side effect display device 1600. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in a dynamic manner simulating a rotated state.

At timing t8, under drive control by the peripheral control board 1510, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 change from the standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570 to a rotated state. .

From timing t8 to timing t18, the rotational states of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the door frame top unit 570 in the game board side effect display device 1600, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left The display of the simulated image simulating the inner ear frame movable body 7400 continues.

At timing t18, the states of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 change from the rotating state to the stopped state housed in the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, the display of the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 ends.

At a predetermined timing after timing t24, the fluctuation of the central decorative symbol that was fluctuating ends, and either the symbol indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (for example, "444") or the result of the special lottery A symbol indicating a loss (for example, "454") is stopped and displayed.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, which are drive-controlled in the second production mode, are the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body, which are drive-controlled in the first production mode. Compared to the body 7450, the maximum area that can be seen from the front in a rotated state is smaller. Therefore, in the second presentation mode, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the display of a simulated image imitating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a simulated image imitating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, By controlling the drive of the frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body, it is configured to supplement the sense of volume as an effect.

In this way, the first shaped bodies provided on the frame (right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450) and the second shaped bodies provided on the frame (right ear inner frame movable body 7300) and left ear inner frame movable body 7400), a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) starts displaying a simulated image imitating the second shaped object, and then displays a predetermined The configuration is such that driving of the second shaped body is started at the timing when the time has elapsed. Thereby, even when a plurality of shaped bodies are provided on the frame, it is possible to visually increase the sense of volume in the performance using the second shaped body. Furthermore, by displaying a simulated image imitating the second shaped object in advance on a predetermined display means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the drive control of the second shaped object. .

Also, among the plurality of shaped bodies (first shaped body and second shaped body) provided in the game machine, the size of the shaped body itself and the amount of visual change when the shaped body is driven and controlled are relative. When controlling the drive of the second shaped object, which is small in size and difficult to notice that it is being driven, the second shaped object is The structure is configured to start driving the modeled object. As a result, it is possible to visually increase the sense of volume for performances using the second shaped object, which has a small visual change in size and drive control, making it difficult to notice that the drive control is being performed. Become. In addition, by displaying a simulated image of the second shaped object in advance on a predetermined display means, it is possible to drive the second shaped object whose drive control is likely to be overlooked due to its relatively small size. It becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the player overlooks the control.

Further, at a timing corresponding to the driving of the first shaped bodies (right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450), a simulated image imitating the first shaped body is displayed on a predetermined display means (game board By displaying this on the side effect display device 1600), it is possible to show the player that the first shaped object is being driven and controlled.

Below, a modification of the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode described with reference to FIG. 372 will be described with reference to FIG. 376.

FIG. 376(A) shows a modification of the display mode of the simulated image of the first shaped object in the first presentation mode described with reference to FIG. 372(A). In the first modification, a display that changes the simulated image of the first shaped object from the first state to the second state is performed from timing t7 to timing t9. Furthermore, in the second modification, a display that changes the simulated image of the first shaped object from the first state to the second state is performed from timing t9 to timing t11. In addition, in modification example 3, after a display that changes the simulated image of the first shaped object from the first state to the second state is performed from timing t7 to timing t9, the display simulating the second state is performed. ends at timing t11, and from timing t11 to timing t13, the simulated image of the first shaped object is displayed changing from the first state to the second state.

In this way, the timing at which the display of the simulated image imitating the first object is started may be configured to be slightly later than the timing at which the drive control of the first object is started. Alternatively, the timing at which the display of the simulated image imitating the first shaped object is ended may be set to be earlier than the timing at which the first shaped object becomes in the first state. Even when such a configuration is adopted, similar effects can be achieved.

FIG. 376(B) shows a modification of the display mode of the simulated image of the second shaped object in the second presentation mode described with reference to FIG. 372(B). In the first modification, a simulated image of the second shaped object in the second state is displayed from timing t5 to timing t8. Furthermore, in the second modification, a simulated image of the second shaped object in the second state is displayed from timing t5 to timing t9.

In this way, as a simulated image of the second shaped object, an image simulating a state in which the second shaped body is driven and controlled to be in the second state is suddenly displayed, and the drive control of the second shaped body is changed to the second state. It may be configured to continue displaying until the timing when it starts. Even when such a configuration is adopted, similar effects can be achieved.

Below, a modification of the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode described with reference to FIG. 373 will be described with reference to FIG. 377.

FIG. 377(A) shows a modification of the display mode of the simulated image of the first shaped object in the first presentation mode described with reference to FIG. 373(A). In Modification 1, the simulated image of the first shaped object is displayed from timing t7 to timing t18. Moreover, in the second modification, the display of the simulated image of the first shaped object is performed from timing t9 to timing t18. Furthermore, in the third modification, the display of the simulated image of the first shaped object is performed from timing t7 to timing t13.

In this way, the timing at which the display of the simulated image imitating the first object is started may be configured to be slightly later than the timing at which the drive control of the first object is started. Alternatively, the timing at which the display of the simulated image imitating the first shaped object is ended may be set to be earlier than the timing at which the first shaped object becomes in the first state. Even when such a configuration is adopted, similar effects can be achieved.

FIG. 377(B) shows a modification of the display mode of the simulated image of the second shaped object in the second presentation mode described with reference to FIG. 373(B). In the first modification, a simulated image of the second shaped object in the second state is displayed from timing t5 to timing t8. Furthermore, in the second modification, a simulated image of the second shaped object in the second state is displayed from timing t5 to timing t9.

In this way, as a simulated image of the second shaped object, an image simulating a state in which the second shaped body is driven and controlled to be in the second state is displayed, and drive control of the second shaped body is started. It may be configured so that the display continues until the timing is reached. Even when such a configuration is adopted, similar effects can be achieved.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 372(A) and 373(A), a simulated image imitating the first shaped object is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the first effect mode. However, it may be configured such that the simulated image imitating the first shaped object is not displayed in the first presentation mode.

With such a configuration, it is possible to secure a display area on the predetermined display means (game board side performance display device 1600), and for example, the decorative pattern can be displayed near the center of the predetermined display means without reducing the size. It is possible to continue displaying.

Alternatively, in the first presentation mode, instead of displaying a simulated image imitating the first shaped object, a display indicating that the first shaped object is being driven and controlled may be displayed. For example, the game board side performance display device 1600 may be configured to display a message such as ``My ear might have popped out?!'' or a message such as ``Look up?!''.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player does not notice that the first shaped object is being driven and controlled.

Between the first shaped body and the second shaped body, the second shaped body has a smaller area and is less noticeable when viewed from the front when the drive is controlled, so in order to ensure a sense of volume as a performance, Although a simulated image imitating the second shaped object is displayed before the second shaped object is driven and controlled, even if the second shaped object is not conspicuous in other aspects, the second shaped object can be displayed in the same manner. It may be configured to display a simulated image that imitates the shaped object.

If the amount of vertical or horizontal movement of the second shaped body under drive control is shorter than that of the first shaped body, the second shaped body is less noticeable. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 374 and 375, the first shaped body (right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear outer frame movable body 7450) is drive-controlled to move upward from the standby position. 10 cm, and when the second shaped body (right ear inner frame movable body 7300, left ear inner frame movable body 7400) is drive-controlled and moves 5 cm upward from the standby position, the drive control of the second shaped body is as follows. It is less noticeable than the first shaped object. In such a case, by displaying a simulated image of the second shaped object, it is possible to ensure a sense of volume as an effect.

In this way, when the moving distance of the second shaped body is smaller than the moving distance of the first shaped body when the drive is controlled, the second shaped body is moved before the drive control of the second shaped body is performed. By displaying a simulated image, it is possible to ensure a sense of volume as a performance.

Alternatively, if the movement speed of the first shaped body and the second shaped body is slower when the second shaped body is driven, the rotatable first shaped body and the second shaped body are driven. In cases where the angular velocity of the second shaped body when rotated by control is slower, or when the time period during which the drive of the first shaped body and the second shaped body is controlled is shorter than that of the second shaped body, etc. , it may be configured to display a simulated image of the second shaped body prior to drive control of the second shaped body. In this case as well, it is possible to ensure a sense of volume in the performance using the second shaped body.

The system is configured to dynamically display a simulated image imitating the second shaped object a plurality of times, and is configured to indicate to the player the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot depending on the number of times the dynamic display is performed. Good too. For example, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 372(B), in addition to the dynamic display performed from timing t5 to timing t7, it is possible to perform a similar dynamic display from timing t3 to timing t5. It may be configured as follows. Furthermore, a similar dynamic display may be performed from timing t1 to timing t3. Furthermore, in addition to the dynamic display performed from timing t5 to timing t7, a similar dynamic display may be performed from timing t7 to timing t9. Furthermore, a similar dynamic display may be performed from timing t9 to timing t11.

In this way, the dynamic display of the simulated image imitating the second shaped object is repeatedly executed before or after the drive control of the second shaped object, and depending on the number of times it is repeated, a situation advantageous to the player occurs. By creating a configuration that suggests the degree of expectation for the second shaped object, it is possible to further increase the sense of volume as a performance for the second shaped object, and also to increase the movement of the second shaped object provided in the frame. Either the act of directly viewing the object, or the act of viewing a simulated image of the second shaped object displayed on a predetermined display means to know the degree of expectation that a situation advantageous to the player will occur. It becomes possible to provide the player with the interest of enjoying the game.

In addition, a plurality of simulated images with different display modes are prepared in advance as simulated images imitating the second shaped object, and the level of expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot depending on the type of displayed simulated image is set to the player. It may be configured as shown. For example, if a large simulated image that imitates a second shaped object and a small simulated image that simulates the second shaped object are prepared in advance, and the large simulated image that imitated the second shaped object is displayed. It may be configured such that the expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot is higher. Alternatively, a white simulated image that imitates the second molded object and a red simulated image that imitates the second molded object are prepared in advance, and the red simulated image that imitates the second molded object is displayed. It may be configured such that the expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot is higher when the lottery result is a jackpot.

In this way, it is possible to perform a plurality of different display modes as dynamic display modes of the simulated image imitating the second shaped object, suggesting the degree of expectation that an advantageous situation for the player will occur depending on the type of displayed simulated image. By adopting such a configuration, variations in the display mode of the simulated image imitating the second shaped object are increased, and in addition to making it possible to further increase the sense of volume as a production, it is also possible to The expectation that an advantageous situation will occur for the player through the act of directly viewing the movement of the second molded object itself and viewing the simulated image of the second molded object displayed on a predetermined display means. It becomes possible to provide the player with the interest of deciding which act of knowing the degree to enjoy.

Note that when suggesting the degree of expectation that an advantageous situation will occur to the player by the display mode of the simulated image imitating the second shaped object, the second shaped object is Although the motions of the two shaped bodies are the same, the degree of expectation that a situation advantageous to the player will occur depending on the motion of the second shaped body is determined by making the motion modes of the second shaped bodies different. It may also be configured to suggest.

In the second production mode, after displaying a simulated image imitating the second shaped object, the drive control of the second shaped body was performed. good. For example, from timing t5 to timing t18 in the second production mode described with reference to FIGS. 372(B) and 373(B), the display mode of the simulated image of the second shaped object is continued without being displayed. It is recommended to configure it as follows.

In this way, by configuring the third presentation mode that does not involve displaying a simulated image of the second shaped object to be executable in addition to the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode, the first presentation mode can be executed. It is possible to provide the player with an unexpected and tense performance mode in which a second shaped object, which is relatively less conspicuous than the shaped object, is being driven before he or she knows it.

When driving the first shaped object, a structure may be configured such that an evocative sound indicating that the first shaped object is being driven is outputted. For example, in the first effect mode described with reference to FIGS. 372(A) and 373(A), the first It is preferable that the structure is configured to output an evocative sound indicating that the shaped object is being driven. Alternatively, an evocative sound indicating that the first formed object is driven is output from timing t6 to timing t10 so that the evocative sound is output even after the first formed object is controlled to be driven. It is recommended to configure Alternatively, an evocative sound indicating that the first shaped object is being driven is output from timing t8 to timing t12 so that the evocative sound is output after drive control of the first shaped object is started. It is recommended to configure it as follows.

With such a configuration, the player can easily drive the first shaped body, which has a relatively large size and movement amount, among the plurality of shaped bodies (the first shaped body and the second shaped body). This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of situations such as accidents. Note that when the second shaped object is driven, since a simulated image imitating the second shaped object is displayed, the configuration is such that such evocative sound is not output.

With reference to FIG. 372(A), FIG. 373(A), etc., an example is shown in which an evocative sound is output during a predetermined period (timing t6 to timing t8 or timing t6 to timing t10). 328, FIG. 329, etc. may be adopted.

When driving the second shaped object, during either the display period of the simulated image imitating the second shaped object or the period during which the drive of the second shaped object is being controlled, or both, as BGM during the fluctuation. It may be configured to suppress the volume of the fluctuating effect sound that is output. For example, in the second production mode described with reference to FIGS. 372(A) and 372(B), the variable production sound is output in the normal mode until timing t5, and a simulation imitating the second shaped object is output. During the period from timing t5 to timing t8, which is the period from when the image is displayed until the drive control of the second shaped object is started, the variable effect sound is output in a manner that is more suppressed than in the normal manner. It is recommended to configure Alternatively, the variable effect sound is output in a normal manner until timing t5, and the period is from when a simulated image imitating the second object is displayed until the drive control of the second object is ended. It is preferable to configure the variable effect sound to be output in a manner that is more suppressed than in a normal manner during the period from timing t5 to timing t18. Note that in the suppressed state, the volume may be set to less than half the volume as compared to the normal state.

In this way, by changing the output state of the variable effect sound from the normal state to the suppressed state in conjunction with the display of the simulated image that imitates the second shaped object, it is possible to display a plurality of shaped objects (the first shaped object and the second shaped object). The player can concentrate on the fact that the second shaped body, which is relatively small among the shaped bodies), is being driven or is being driven.

According to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 372 to 375, etc., by providing a plurality of shaped bodies on the frame, the size of each shaped body and the movable range when driving each shaped body can be changed. Even in the case of restrictions, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels less interested when driving each shaped object alone.

[40. Frame movable body]
By the way, in the gaming machines described with reference to FIGS. 282 to 335 and the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2016-093655, movable decoration means provided on the frame that constitutes the external shape of the gaming machine is operated. This makes it possible to make players feel interested. However, if the player is not aware of the movement of the movable decorative means, there is a risk that the player may come into contact with the movable decorative means and injure himself. there were.

Below, an embodiment of a gaming machine that can suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player is injured by the movable decoration means will be described.

Below, the first effect mode and the second effect mode applicable to the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 371 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 378(A) and 378(B). Note that the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 in this embodiment is provided within the root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 as described with reference to FIGS. 371(A) to 371(E), and cannot be touched by the player. is difficult to configure.

Below, a first performance mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described with reference to FIG. 378(A).

In the first performance mode, first, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, variation of the decorative symbols is started on the game board side performance display device 1600, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop at the same symbol, A reach state occurs in which only the central decorative pattern changes (for example, "4↓4").

Next, at timing t5, output of an evocative sound that notifies that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 operate is started. Next, at timing t7, under drive control by the peripheral control board 1510, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are moved from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the upward movement position. Start.

From timing t7 to timing t9, drive control is performed to move the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the movement position. At this time, the evocative sound continues to be output.

At timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 complete their movement to the movement position. At the same time, the output of the evocative sound that has been continuously output from timing t5 ends.

Next, at timing t21, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving from the standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570 to the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t22, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed. From timing t22 to timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is stationary at a position overlapping the substantially center of the game board side performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts changing from the state in which it is in the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the state in which it is in the standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t26, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed.

Next, at timing t28, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start moving from the upper movement position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570.

From timing t28 to timing t30, drive control is performed to move the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position. At timing t30, the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position is completed.

At a predetermined timing after timing t30, the fluctuation of the central decorative symbol that has been fluctuating ends, and either a symbol indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (for example, "444") or a symbol indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot is displayed. A symbol indicating a loss (for example, "454") is stopped and displayed.

A second performance mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described below with reference to FIG. 378(B). Note that in the second presentation mode, unlike the first presentation mode, no evocative sound is output. Further, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are configured to start operating at the same time.

In the second performance mode, first, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the variation of decorative symbols is started on the game board side performance display device 1600, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop at the same symbol, A reach state occurs in which only the central decorative pattern changes (for example, "4↓4").

Next, at timing t21, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving from the standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570 to the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. . At the same time, under drive control by the peripheral control board 1510, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start moving from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the upward movement position.

At timing t22, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed. From timing t22 to timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is stationary at a position overlapping the substantially center of the game board side performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front. On the other hand, at timing t23, the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the movement positions is completed.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts changing from the state in which it is in the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the state in which it is in the standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t26, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed.

Next, at timing t28, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start moving from the upper movement position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570.

From timing t28 to timing t30, drive control is performed to move the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position. At timing t30, the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position is completed.

At a predetermined timing after timing t30, the fluctuation of the central decorative symbol that has been fluctuating ends, and either a symbol indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (for example, "444") or a symbol indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot is displayed. A symbol indicating a loss (for example, "454") is stopped and displayed.

Below, the rotatable right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7100 and the rotatable root vegetable frame movable body 7100 described with reference to FIG. 291 will be explained below. A first performance mode and a second performance mode that are applied to a gaming machine having a frame movable body 7200 and executable in the applied gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 379(A) and 379(B). do.

Below, a first presentation mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described with reference to FIG. 379(A).

In the first performance mode, first, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, variation of the decorative symbols is started on the game board side performance display device 1600, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop at the same symbol, A reach state occurs in which only the central decorative pattern changes (for example, "4↓4").

Next, at timing t5, output of an evocative sound is started to notify that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 will operate thereafter. Next, at timing t7, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change their states from the standby state stored in the door frame top unit 570 to the rotating state under drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. let

At timing t9, the output of the evocative sound that has been continuously output from timing t5 ends.

Next, at timing t21, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving from the standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570 to the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t22, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed. From timing t22 to timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is stationary at a position overlapping the substantially center of the game board side performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts changing from the state in which it is in the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the state in which it is in the standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t26, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed. Next, at timing t30, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change from a rotating state to a state where rotation is stopped and they are stored in the standby position.

At a predetermined timing after timing t30, the fluctuation of the central decorative symbol that has been fluctuating ends, and either a symbol indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (for example, "444") or a symbol indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot is displayed. A symbol indicating a loss (for example, "454") is stopped and displayed.

A second performance mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described below with reference to FIG. 379(B). Note that in the second presentation mode, unlike the first presentation mode, no evocative sound is output. Further, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are configured to start operating at the same time.

In the second performance mode, first, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the variation of decorative symbols is started on the game board side performance display device 1600, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop at the same symbol, A reach state occurs in which only the central decorative pattern changes (for example, "4↓4").

Next, at timing t21, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change their states from the standby state housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the rotating state under drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. let

At timing t21, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 simultaneously starts moving from the standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570 to the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t22, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed. From timing t22 to timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is stationary at a position overlapping the substantially center of the game board side performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts changing from the state in which it is in the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the state in which it is in the standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t26, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed. Next, at timing t30, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change from a rotating state to a state where rotation is stopped and they are stored in the standby position.

At a predetermined timing after timing t30, the fluctuation of the central decorative symbol that has been fluctuating ends, and either a symbol indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (for example, "444") or a symbol indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot is displayed. A symbol indicating a loss (for example, "454") is stopped and displayed.

In the first presentation mode and second presentation mode explained with reference to FIGS. 378(A) and 378(B), or the first presentation mode explained with reference to FIG. 379(A) and FIG. 379(B), In the presentation mode and the second presentation mode, the operation mode of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is common. On the other hand, in the first production mode, after the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 operate with the output of the evocative sound, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 operates after a predetermined period of time. On the other hand, in the second production mode, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start operating at the same timing as the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 without outputting the evocative sound. It is configured.

In this way, when the first movable decoration means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame operate independently, the evocative sound is outputted in advance, so that the game The player should be careful about the first movable decoration means, so that there is a risk that the player may come into contact with the first movable decoration means and be injured due to the player's careless movements (for example, standing up). It becomes possible to suppress the occurrence.

On the other hand, when operating the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) together with the first movable decoration means, it is configured not to output the evocative sound. This is because by moving the second movable decoration means to a position where it overlaps the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) in front view, the player's consciousness is directed to the vicinity of the predetermined display means, so the game This is because the player is less likely to make careless movements, and even if the first movable decoration means provided on the frame is in operation, the player is less likely to be injured.

An example of outputting an evocative sound during a predetermined period (timing t5 to timing t9) has been shown with reference to FIGS. 378(A), 379(A), etc.; The present invention may be configured to adopt the configuration related to the special evocative sound described above with reference to No. 329 or the like.

FIG. 380 shows a modification of the presentation mode described with reference to FIG. 378. Further, FIG. 381 shows a modification of the presentation mode described with reference to FIG. 379. In these modified examples, in the second performance mode, at timing t22 when the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are moved to the movement position. The moving operation is configured to be initiated.

In this way, at the timing when the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) starts its operation and moves to a position overlapping the predetermined display means (game board side performance display device 1600) in front view, the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) By starting the operation of the first movable decoration means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200), the player's consciousness will be directed closer to the predetermined display means, and the player will be able to avoid carelessness. It becomes difficult for the player to move, and even if the first movable decoration means provided on the frame moves, the player is less likely to be injured.

It may be configured such that the expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a jackpot is higher in the second presentation mode than in the first presentation mode. Further, the first presentation mode may be executed more frequently than the second presentation mode. For example, out of 100 special lottery draws, the first effect mode will be executed about 5 times (with a probability of 5%), and the second effect mode will be executed about once (with a probability of 1%). ).

In this way, in the first performance mode that is executed frequently and has a low expectation of winning a jackpot, by outputting an evocative sound, the first movable decoration means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear The player is prompted to move the frame movable body 7200). In particular, since the player's attention to the first movable decoration means is distracted partly due to the low level of expectation, it is effective to perform such arousal.

On the other hand, in the second performance mode, which is performed less frequently and has a high expectation of winning a jackpot, the evocative sound is not output, and the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) operates together with the first movable decoration means. I'm letting you do it. In this case, since the expectation of a jackpot is high, the player's line of sight is concentrated near the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) to which the second movable decoration means moves, and the player's eyes are concentrated on the vicinity of the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600), and the player's careless movement ( (e.g., standing up), it is not necessary to output an evocative sound when operating the first movable decoration means.

On the other hand, since the clerk at the game parlor can see from a distance that the first movable decoration means has operated, there is a high possibility that a situation advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot situation) will occur. This makes it possible to provide a predetermined service to the player (exchange of dollar box, cancellation processing in fixed-price gaming machines, etc.).

Furthermore, if a wake-up sound is output in a state where expectations are high, it is possible that the player may become disoriented, but by not outputting a wake-up sound, this situation can be suppressed. It becomes possible to do so.

It is preferable to output the evocative sound at the beginning and middle of the variation of the decorative pattern, but not to output the evocative sound during the middle of the variation of the decorative pattern.

With such a configuration, unnecessary sound is not output at the end of the variation when the variation result of the decorative symbol is shown, and the player can concentrate on the manner in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the predetermined display means. .

In the first performance mode, when outputting the evocative sound, the variable performance sound may be suppressed. For example, in the period from timing t5 to timing t9 and from timing t4 to timing t10 in the first production mode shown in FIGS. 378 and 379, the output state of the variable production sound is changed from the normal state to the suppressed state with a low volume. It is good to say.

On the other hand, in the second effect mode, the variable effect sound is suppressed until the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves downward, and the suppression of the variable effect sound is canceled at the same time as the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves downward. You may. For example, in the period from timing t18 to timing t21 or from timing t18 to timing t26 in the second production mode shown in FIGS. 378 and 379, the output state of the variable production sound is changed from the normal state to the suppressed state with a low volume. It is good to say.

With such a configuration, in the first performance mode, the evocative sound is output while the variable performance sound is suppressed, so that the first movable decoration means operates. will be effectively notified.

In addition, in the second performance mode, the movement of the second movable decoration means is suppressed by suppressing the variable performance sound during a predetermined period before the second movable decoration means starts moving. This will be easier to understand for players.

An example of suppressing fluctuating performance sounds during a predetermined period was shown with reference to FIGS. 378, 379, etc.; It may be configured to adopt a configuration related to a variable performance sound or a special evocative sound.

In the first performance mode, the game board side performance display device 1600 may be configured to display that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 operate. For example, as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 368(A), a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated left ear frame movable body 7200 are displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display for moving the simulated image upward may be displayed from timing t5 to timing t9 in the first effect mode described with reference to FIGS. 378 and 379.

On the other hand, in the second performance mode, the game board side performance display device 1600 may be configured not to display such a display when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 operate.

By performing such a display, it becomes possible to clearly convey to the player that the first movable decoration means operates in the first presentation mode. On the other hand, in the second presentation mode, such a display is not performed when the first movable decoration means is operated, thereby preventing excessive presentation around the predetermined display means. I can do it. It should be noted that not only the simulated image of the first movable decoration means but also other images (for example, an image of an upward arrow) may be displayed on the predetermined display means in a manner suggesting the position where the first movable decoration means is provided. It may be configured so that it is displayed in

In the first performance mode or the second performance mode, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 that has been moved to the movement position is moved to the standby position based on the player's operation on a predetermined operation unit (push button, lever, etc.) It may be configured so that it can be done. For example, in the first performance mode or the second performance mode, if the player operates a predetermined operation section at timing t23, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved from the movement position from timing t23 to timing t24. It is better to move it to the standby position.

In this way, the configuration may be such that the time during which the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) is located at the movement position can be changed in accordance with the operation by the player. As a result, it becomes difficult for other players to notice that the second movable decoration means is operating, and other players have a high expectation that an advantageous state (jackpot state) will occur for the player. It becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of situations where the user is subjected to acts of harassment based on bias.

In the modified examples of the first performance mode and the second performance mode in FIGS. 380 and 381, when there is an operation on the predetermined operation section by the player, compared to the case where there is no operation on the predetermined operation section, The first movable decoration means may be configured to be activated early. That is, in the modified examples shown in FIGS. 380 and 381, for the second movable decoration means that starts operating before the first movable decoration means, a player who repeatedly plays the game will see this effect many times. Therefore, the operation of the first movable decoration means becomes impatient. For this reason, the operation of the second movable decoration means is not always made to operate for a certain period of time before the first movable decoration means operates, but the operation of the second movable decoration means is started by a button operation. By making it possible to drive the first movable decoration means at an appropriate timing after the player has seen the same performance many times, the first movable decoration means can be activated as soon as possible. This will help prevent a decline in interest. Note that such a predetermined operation may be configured to start the process of returning the second movable decoration means to the standby position, or even if there is a predetermined operation, the second movable decoration means may be returned to the standby position at a predetermined timing. The second movable decorative means may be configured to start a process of returning it to the standby position.

According to the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 378, FIG. 379, etc., even if the first movable decoration means is not outputted with an evocative sound, the effect based on the lottery result can attract the player's attention. It is possible to direct the player's attention to the vicinity of the predetermined display means to be displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player from being injured by the first movable decoration means.

In the embodiment described above, the left and right ear frame movable bodies indicate that there is a high expectation that a jackpot, which is advantageous to the player, will occur by executing a predetermined presentation mode among a plurality of different presentation modes. Although it has been shown that the player is notified by operating the system, the system is configured to notify the player of the expectation level of other game contents other than the expectation level of the occurrence of a jackpot. It's okay.

For example, although it is certain that there will be a jackpot, the details of the profit that will be given to the player during the jackpot may be notified. As for the content of profit, for example, the type of profit may be notified, or the amount of profit may be notified.

Alternatively, the system may be configured to notify the details of the profit to be given to the player after winning the jackpot. For example, it may be configured to notify the type of profit to be given to the player after a jackpot, or it may be configured to notify the amount of profit to be given to the player after a jackpot. .

In this way, it is not limited to the expectation that a situation advantageous to the player will occur (for example, a jackpot situation), but also the amount of profit that will be given to the player in a situation that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot situation). Expectations regarding the number of balls that will be rolled out, the number of times the big prize opening will be opened, etc.), and the conditions that may be advantageous to the player that may occur after the conditions that are advantageous to the player end (for example, the variable rate condition or electric chew support) The degree of expectation that a certain state (state) will occur, the type (for example, a fixed change state or electric chew support state) and the amount ( As an example, even in a case where the system is configured to notify the number of fluctuations in which the variable probability state continues and the number of fluctuations in which the electric chew support continues, it is possible to achieve the same effects as in each of the embodiments described above.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 indicate that there is a high expectation that a jackpot that is advantageous to the player will occur by executing a predetermined performance mode among a plurality of different performance modes. , it has been shown that the player is notified by operating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, etc. The expectation level for a jackpot may be configured to include that it is certain that a jackpot will occur (100% jackpot will occur). For example, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, when the first presentation mode is executed, a 50% jackpot is generated, and when the second presentation mode is executed, a 100% jackpot is generated. It may be configured to occur.

In the embodiment described above, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body. When a simulated image imitating the body 7450 etc. is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, a simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 is also displayed at the same time. After displaying the simulated image for several seconds (for example, 2 seconds) in advance, the display of the simulated image of the right ear frame movable body 7100 to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 may be started. . For example, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 366(A), a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 may be displayed from timing t5 to timing t7.

In addition, the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 is fixedly displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and does not move, and the right ear frame is movable with respect to the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570. A simulated image imitating the body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200, right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 moves upward. It is recommended to configure it so that

In this way, movable decoration means that can be operated and movable shaped bodies (right ear frame movable body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200, right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body A unit (door frame top unit 570) that stores and holds movable movable decoration means and movable shaped objects as well as displaying a simulated image imitating the frame movable body 7400 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450). By configuring the display to display a simulated image, it becomes easier for the player to understand the operation mode and drive mode of the operable movable decoration means and the drivable shaped object.

In particular, a simulated image imitating a unit (door frame top unit 570) that accommodates and holds operable movable decorative means and drivable shaped bodies is displayed on a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600). By displaying them in a fixed manner in a predetermined area, it becomes possible for the player to more easily understand the operation mode and drive mode of the movable decorative means and the drivable shaped body.

Further, a unit that stores or holds the operable movable decorative means or the drivable shaped object at a timing prior to the timing of displaying the simulated image imitating the operable movable decorative means or the drivable shaped object. By displaying a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the player's expectations for the operation of the movable decoration means and the drive of the shaped object are increased. In addition, since the player can visually check the operation of the movable decoration means and the driving of the molded object from the timing when the movement of the movable decoration means and the driving of the molded object are started, the player can be enjoyed for a longer period of time.

In addition, in each embodiment mentioned above, you may be comprised so that the simulated image which imitated the door frame top unit 570 may not be displayed.

Note that instead of the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800, the rabbit accessory 6000 described with reference to FIG. It may be configured to do so. In this case as well, it is possible to achieve the same effects as each of the above-mentioned presentation modes.

The right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are the door frame top unit. Although an example has been shown in which the door frame operates between a state in which it is housed in the door frame top unit 570 and a state in which it protrudes upward from the door frame top unit 570, the change in state is not limited to this and may be in other states. . For example, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to move from a state in which half of them protrude from the door frame top unit 570 to a state in which they fully protrude from the door frame top unit 570.

In this way, the first movable decoration means moves from the first state (stored in the door frame top unit 570, half protruded from the door frame top unit 570) to the second position. Even if the door frame top unit 570 is configured to operate between the door frame top unit 570 and the second state (the state where the door frame top unit 570 is fully protruded), the above-mentioned effects can be achieved.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 366, 378, etc., the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is housed in the door frame top unit 570, and the front view is taken from approximately the center of the game board side performance display device 1600. Although an example has been shown in which the operation is performed between the states located at the overlapping position, the change in the state is not limited to this, and other changes in the state may be used. For example, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 changes from a state in which it overlaps the substantially lower part of the game board side performance display device 1600 in a front view to a state in which it overlaps with the approximate center of the game board side performance display device 1600 in a front view. It may be configured to move to a position.

In this way, the second movable decoration means is located at the first position in the first state (stored in the door frame top unit 570, overlapping with the substantially lower part of the game board side effect display device 1600 in front view). It is configured to operate between a state in which the game board is located at the first position) and a second state in which it is located in the second position (a state in which it is located at a position that overlaps the approximate center of the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front). Even in this case, the above-mentioned effects can be achieved.

As a performance display performed in a display area of a performance display device, a pre-read performance display is known that is performed across multiple variable displays of decorative symbols in response to the occurrence of a specific suspension. The fluctuating display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific suspension that caused the pre-reading effect display is different from the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern in which the pre-reading effect display is not performed, and the decorative pattern stops in a manner that indicates the occurrence of a jackpot. The probability of being displayed is set high. Therefore, when the pre-read effect display is executed, the player has a feeling of expectation that a jackpot will occur.

On the other hand, in the display area of the performance display device, a fluctuating display of decorative symbols is performed, and a plurality of performance displays corresponding to the decorative symbol being fluctuated (for example, the fluctuating decorative symbol indicates a jackpot). (e.g., an effect display indicating the level of expectation that is stopped and displayed in a different manner) is also performed. Therefore, in addition to the look-ahead performance display that suggests the fluctuating display result of the decorative symbol several times in the future, the player also has to be aware of the fluctuating display mode of the currently fluctuating decorative symbol and the display content of the performance display corresponding to the currently fluctuating decorative symbol. The situation has become such that it is necessary to visually confirm the situation at the same time.

Although such a situation can increase the fun of the game, it may also cause the problem that the player cannot fully grasp the contents indicated by these effect displays. In particular, since players are in a situation where they are paying attention to the fluctuating display of decorative symbols that are currently fluctuating and the various performance displays that correspond to the fluctuating display, the pre-reading performance display is relatively inconspicuous, and the pre-reading performance display is There has been a problem in that the player may not be aware of the fact that the game is being executed or that the decorative symbols corresponding to the look-ahead effect display are about to start changing.

Therefore, when executing the pre-reading effect display, the following will help the player understand that the pre-reading effect display is being executed and that the timing to start the variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the pre-reading effect display is approaching. An embodiment is shown below.

Below, with reference to FIG. 382, various images displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 that are performed when the prefetch effect display is executed will be explained.
Specifically, the game board-side performance display device 1600 displays the display of decorative symbols from the start of the fluctuation to the stop of the fluctuation, which is performed when the special lottery result held in response to a winning in the first starting opening 2002 is a loss. Examples of effects in the display area will be described with reference to FIGS. 382(A) to 382(F). In addition, an example of the production from the start of the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern to the stop of the fluctuation, which is performed when the special lottery result held in response to the winning in the first starting slot 2002 is a jackpot, is shown in FIGS. 382(D), FIG. 382(G), and FIG. 382(H).

FIG. 382(A) shows a state in which three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It also shows a state in which the pending image corresponding to the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed is displayed. It also shows a state where there are three pending games corresponding to winnings of game balls into the first starting port 2002. Specifically, at approximately the vertical center of the display area, a decorative pattern with the number "3" attached thereto is placed at equal intervals from the left as the left decorative pattern, and a decorative pattern with the number "5" attached as the middle decorative pattern is placed at equal intervals from the left. , a decorative pattern with the number "2" added thereto as a right decorative pattern is shown in a stopped state. The decorative pattern has a vertically elongated rectangular shape and consists of a background area (the white part in the figure) consisting of an image that forms the outline of the decorative pattern, and a numeric area (the white part in the figure) consisting of an image showing any number from "1" to "9". (Black text in the figure) As shown in the figure, the number area is located in the center of the background area.

It is preferable that the decorative pattern is composed of images of different colors from the color of the background area and the color of the number area. For example, the color of the background area may be white and the color of the number area may be black. Note that the rectangular outline forming the outer shape of the background area may be black.

At the bottom of the display area, from the left, the relevant hold display area, the first hold display area, the second hold display area, the third hold display area, and the fourth hold display area are set. A state is shown in which the held image is displayed in the display area, and held images are displayed in each of the first to third held display areas. Note that the fourth hold display area is shown with a dotted line in the figure for explanation purposes, but the dotted line is not actually displayed in the display area as a display state, and in the following drawings, a hold image is displayed. In principle, such dotted lines are not used to indicate the expected locations.

In FIG. 382(A), the pending image displayed in the pending display area is a pending image corresponding to the decorative symbols "3", "5", and "2" that are stopped and displayed. Further, the pending image displayed in the first pending display area is a pending image corresponding to a variable display that will be performed next after the variable display corresponding to the pending image ends. Furthermore, the held image displayed in the second held display area is the held image corresponding to the next variable display that will be performed after the variable display corresponding to the held image displayed in the first held display area ends. be. Furthermore, the held image displayed in the third held display area is the held image corresponding to the next variable display that will be performed after the variable display corresponding to the held image displayed in the second held display area ends. be.

FIG. 382(B) shows the display state at the time when the decorative pattern corresponding to the pending image displayed in the first pending display area described with reference to FIG. 382(A) starts changing.
Specifically, the top edge of the decorative pattern that is displayed one step earlier under the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is the same as that of the decorative pattern that is displayed one step later than the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, respectively. The bottom edge is displayed. Also, the display of the pending display ends.
The pending image displayed in the pending display area and the pending images displayed in the first to fourth pending display areas are always displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern. The pending image and the pending image have a perfect circular shape and are basically white in color. Further, the diameter of the circle in the retained image is larger than that of the retained image.

FIG. 382(C) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are being displayed in a variable manner. Each decorative pattern is displayed in a downward scrolling manner within the display area.

Specifically, for a certain decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner, the bottom side of the decorative pattern is first displayed on the top side of the display area, and then the decorative pattern moves downward to fill the display area. The entire decorative pattern will be displayed, and then, after the bottom edge of the decorative pattern reaches the bottom of the display area, only the upper part of the decorative pattern will be displayed. The upper end of the decorative pattern reaches the bottom edge of the display area, and the decorative pattern is no longer displayed. In this way, each decorative pattern changes its display state from a state where it is not displayed in the display area, to a state where it is displayed in the display area, and then to a state where it is not displayed in the display area.

The order in which the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are displayed is set. Specifically, following a decorative pattern with a certain number (for example, "1"), a decorative pattern with the next number (for example, "2") appears in order from the top of the display area. will be displayed. The order of the numbers attached to the decorative designs is "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8", "9". . After the decorative pattern numbered "9", a decorative pattern numbered "1" is displayed in the display area. For example, in Fig. 382(C), the left decorative pattern with the number "1" attached to the bottom and the left decorative pattern with the number "2" attached to the top are displayed as the left decorative patterns. is shown, but both left decorative patterns scroll downwards, and the left decorative pattern with the number "2" is followed by the left decorative pattern with the number "3". , will appear from the top of the display area.

With reference to FIG. 382(B), it was explained that the display of the pending image that had been displayed in the pending display area until then ends at the same time as the variation of the decorative pattern starts, but the display of the pending image ends. At the same time, the pending image displayed in the first pending display area is displayed so as to be enlarged and moved to the left, and is displayed as the pending image in the pending display area. At the same time, the pending image displayed in the second pending display area is displayed so as to move to the left, and is displayed as a pending image in the first pending display area. At the same time, the pending image displayed in the second pending display area is displayed so as to move to the left, and is displayed as a pending image in the first pending display area. Such enlargement of the held image and movement of the held image to the left are performed over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.67 seconds). FIG. 382(C) shows the state of such a held image after it has been moved.

FIG. 382(D) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the middle decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "2" added to the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. Furthermore, a new pending image is displayed in the third pending display area in response to the winning of a game ball into the first starting port 2002.

Here, the temporary stop display will be explained. A temporary stop display is a display mode of a decorative pattern in which a decorative pattern with a predetermined number is displayed as if it had stopped at or near the display position where the decorative pattern will finally be displayed. It is. Specifically, for example, a decorative pattern with a predetermined number is gently moved up and down to the extent that the number attached to the decorative pattern can be clearly seen, based on the display position where the decorative pattern will finally stop and be displayed. A temporary stop display of the decorative pattern is performed by displaying it in a moving or swaying manner. In this way, by performing a temporary stop display, the decorative symbols that are being displayed in a fluctuating manner appear to the player as if they are stationary, and the player can confirm the numbers attached to the decorative symbols. . Note that when the decorative pattern is finally displayed in a stopped state, the vertical movement or swaying display is not performed as described above, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a completely stopped state.

When performing variable display such that the temporarily stopped displayed decorative pattern becomes the final stopped displayed decorative pattern, or when the temporarily stopped displayed decorative pattern is moved and displayed again in a downward scrolling manner, There is a case where a variable display is performed so that a decorative pattern with another number is finally stopped and displayed, but the details will be described later.

In addition, in Figure 382 (D), arc-shaped lines are attached to the upper left and lower right of the left decorative pattern with the number "2", but this is because the left decorative pattern with the number "2" This line indicates that the symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Further, in other drawings, such arcuate lines may be attached to decorative patterns, but this also indicates that the decorative pattern is in a temporarily stopped display state.

FIG. 382(E) shows a state in which the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed following the left decorative pattern, and the middle decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "2" added thereto as the left decorative pattern and a decorative pattern added with the number "4" as the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed.

FIG. 382(F) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed. In accordance with the stop display of the middle decorative pattern, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern, which had been temporarily stopped and displayed, are also stopped and displayed. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, in the figure, the decorative pattern with the number "2" added to the left decorative pattern is the decoration with the number "7" added to the middle decorative pattern. The decorative patterns with the number "4" attached to the right decorative pattern are each stopped and displayed, and the combination of the stopped and displayed decorative patterns indicates that the special lottery result was a loss. In the state where the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a stopped state, as shown in the figure, the decorative patterns that were displayed above and below each decorative pattern during fluctuation or temporary stop are no longer displayed. The static display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is continued for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second), and after that, the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the pending image displayed in the first pending display area is newly started. Ru. Note that the display of the pending image that has been displayed in the pending image ends at the same timing as the start of variation of a new decorative pattern.

FIG. 382(G) shows a state in which, following the left decorative pattern, the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and the middle decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner from the display state shown with reference to FIG. 382(D). ing. Specifically, the decorative pattern with the number "2" attached to the left decorative pattern and the decorative pattern with the number "2" attached to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a temporary stop state, indicating that a reach state has occurred. Indicates the condition.

FIG. 382(H) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the middle decorative pattern, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern, which had been temporarily stopped and displayed, are also stopped and displayed. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, in the figure, the decorative pattern with the number "2" added to the left decorative pattern is the decoration with the number "2" added to the middle decorative pattern. The decorative patterns in which the number "2" is attached to the right decorative pattern are each stopped and displayed, and the combination of the stopped and displayed decorative patterns indicates that the special lottery result is a jackpot. In the state where the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a stopped state, as shown in the figure, the decorative patterns that were displayed above and below each decorative pattern during fluctuation or temporary stop are no longer displayed. After the stop display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, one second), the display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is no longer performed. After that, the jackpot game state is started, and at the timing when the jackpot game state ends, the display of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is restarted, and thereafter, the display of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol corresponds to the pending image displayed in the first pending display area. A new fluctuating display of decorative patterns begins.

In this way, in the example of variable display of decorative patterns explained with reference to FIG. After starting the variable display from the state, after the variable display is carried out for a predetermined period of time, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped in this order, and then the middle decorative symbol enters the stopped display state. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the middle decorative pattern, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are also in a stopped display state at the same time. Furthermore, by stopping the decorative symbols with the same numbers as the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is a jackpot. Furthermore, by stopping at least one of the left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols having a different number attached, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is a loss.

Below, an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 382 will be described with reference to production examples shown in FIGS. 383 and 384. FIG. 383 is a time chart in this performance example, and FIG. 384 is a diagram showing the display state of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 at a predetermined timing in this performance example. In addition, in FIG. 384, the variable display mode of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, the display mode of the pending image in the pending display area, and the display mode of the pending image in the first pending display area to the fourth pending display area are as follows. Unless otherwise specified, the display mode is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 382. Note that these points are the same in other embodiments and production examples described later unless otherwise specified.

FIG. 383 is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. Immediately before the timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is such that the decorative symbols have stopped fluctuating. FIG. 384(A) is a diagram showing this state, and shows a state in which decorative patterns numbered "6", "4", and "5" from the left are stopped and displayed. From this state, at timing t0, the variable display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is newly started. FIG. 384(B) is a diagram showing the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t1) after the start of the variable display, and shows a state in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner. There is.

In addition, in the time chart shown in FIG. 383(A), in order to explain the timing of the effect, t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. are indicated according to the passage of time. The time between each timing is 1 second. Note that these points are the same in other embodiments and production examples described later unless otherwise specified.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 383, at timing t2, a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and a new hold occurs. Further, with this starting winning as a trigger, a pre-read effect display is started at timing t2. In addition, in response to the look-ahead effect display, a specific pending image shaped like a pine branch with leaves is displayed instead of a normal pending image. The color of the specific pending image is green. FIG. 384(C) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t3) after the prefetch effect display is started at timing t2. Furthermore, a state is shown in which a specific pending image having a shape resembling a pine branch with leaves is displayed in the third pending display area, instead of a normal circular pending image.

In the look-ahead effect display, a look-ahead effect image is displayed that surrounds the display area in a frame shape in a manner that hides a part of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed as it scrolls downward. The look-ahead effect image is an image in which a plurality (specifically, six) of shapes resembling pine branches with leaves are arranged so as to pop out toward the inside of a horizontally long rectangular frame. The color of the prefetch effect image is slightly lighter green than the color of the specific pending image.

The display of the look-ahead effect image and the display of the specific pending image are performed based on the special lottery result obtained when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002, and only the normal pending image, which is circular and white in color, is displayed. The performance execution ratio is set so that the probability of hitting the jackpot is higher when the look-ahead effect image and the specific pending image are displayed than when they are displayed. For example, when a normal pending image is displayed, the probability of hitting the jackpot is 0.3%, and when a look-ahead effect image and a specific pending image are displayed, the probability of hitting the jackpot is 10.0%. It is configured so that

With this configuration, the player can display the prefetch effect image and the specific pending image, and when the decorative symbol corresponding to the specific pending image is to be changed, the normal pending image is displayed. The expectation is that the decorative pattern will be stopped and displayed in a static manner indicating that a jackpot will occur as a result of the change in the decorative pattern, compared to the case where the decorative pattern corresponding to the suspended image is changed. You will have a feeling.

From timing t2 to timing t4, while the look-ahead effect image is being displayed, a variable display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is performed, but during the variable display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is displayed. The look-ahead effect image is displayed closer than the right decorative pattern. For this reason, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner with a portion of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern being hidden by the pre-read effect image. Note that the pending image displayed in the pending display area, the normal pending image displayed in the first pending display area, the normal pending image displayed in the second pending display area, and the normal pending image displayed in the third pending display area. The specific pending image is displayed closer to the viewer than each decorative pattern or look-ahead effect image.

At timing t4, all of the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed. FIG. 384(D) shows a display state in which all of the left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t4. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the display order of the pre-reading effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is reversed, and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are closer to the front than the pre-reading effect image. It will be displayed on the side. Note that the pending image displayed in the pending display area, the normal pending image displayed in the first pending display area, the normal pending image displayed in the second pending display area, and the normal pending image displayed in the third pending display area. The specific pending image is displayed in front of the prefetch effect image.

Note that, at the timing when the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, the decorative patterns located above and below each decorative pattern are no longer displayed. For example, in FIG. 384(D), only the decorative pattern with the number "1" is stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern, but until just before timing t4, the decorative pattern with the number "1" is displayed as the left decorative pattern. The lower part of the decorative pattern with the number ``2'' is above the decorative pattern, and the upper part of the decorative pattern with the number ``9'' is below the decorative pattern with the number ``1''. Displayed. With such a configuration, only the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed can be visually recognized by the player in a conspicuous state.

The stop display of the decorative pattern continues from timing t4 to timing t5. In addition, during this period, the display mode in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed closer to the front than the pre-read effect image continues.

At timing t5, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the front-and-back relationship between the pre-reading effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is switched again, and the pre-reading effect image is displayed closer to you than the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern. The display mode will be

In addition, at the timing when the decorative patterns stopped being displayed, the decorative patterns located above and below each decorative pattern were no longer displayed, but at the timing when the new fluctuating display of the decorative patterns started, each decorative pattern The display of the decorative patterns located above and below the pattern is also restarted. For example, in FIG. 384(D), only the decorative pattern with the number "1" is stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern, but at timing t5, the upper side of the decorative pattern with the number "1" The lower part of the decorative pattern with the number "2" is displayed, and the upper part of the decorative pattern with the number "9" is displayed below the decorative pattern with the number "1". The downward movement display of each decorative pattern is instantly started.

Thereafter, similarly, in accordance with the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern and the stop of the variable display, the context of the pre-read effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern will be swapped. For example, in the period from timing t4 to timing t5, the display mode in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed closer to the front side than the look-ahead effect image continues, but in the period from timing t9 to timing t10 and timing t14 Similarly, during the period from to timing t15, the display mode in which the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are displayed closer to the front side than the prefetch effect image continues.

At timing t15, the variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the starting winning that triggered the display of the pre-read effect image and the specific pending image is started. In FIG. 384(E), at a predetermined timing after timing t15 (for example, timing t16), a look-ahead effect image is displayed in front of the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern, and a specific pending image is displayed in the pending display area. Indicates the displayed state.

At timing t25, the decorative symbols with the number "2" attached thereto as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and a ready-to-win state occurs. At this time, the medium decorative pattern is maintained in a fluctuating display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed. Further, at timing t25, the display of the pre-reading effect image that has been displayed up to that point is finished, and the state is such that the pre-reading effect image is not displayed. FIG. 384(F) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the ready-to-win state occurs and the display of the look-ahead effect image ends at timing t25.

At timing t33, the medium decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in a display mode according to the special lottery result come to a non-variable state. Specifically, if the special lottery result is a loss, a decorative pattern with a number other than "2" is stopped and displayed as a medium decorative pattern. Further, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, a decorative pattern with the number "2" attached thereto is stopped and displayed as a medium decorative pattern.

FIG. 384(G) shows a state in which, at timing t33, a decorative pattern with the number "3" added thereto as a medium decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, at timing t34, the display of the pending image displayed in the pending display area ends. On the other hand, the stopped display state of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern continues until a new game ball enters the first starting hole 2002.

On the other hand, FIG. 384(H) shows a state in which, at timing t33, a decorative pattern with the number "2" added thereto as a medium decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, at timing t34, the display of the pending image displayed in the pending display area and the display of the left to right decorative symbols are finished, and the state shifts to a jackpot game state.

This embodiment is configured such that the pre-reading effect image is displayed closer to the user than the decorative pattern while the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, and the decorative pattern is displayed closer to the user than the pre-reading effect image during the static display of the decorative pattern. ing.

By adopting such a configuration, the player can visually clearly understand the start and stop of each variable display, so the player can display the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific pending image without checking the movement of the specific pending image. This makes it possible to recognize when the display is one step closer to the fluctuation display.

In addition, the area occupied by the display area of the look-ahead effect image is larger than the area occupied by the display area of the specific pending image, and the area occupied by the look-ahead effect image is closer to the stop position of the decorative pattern than the specific hold image. Therefore, even if the player is focusing on visually recognizing the variation mode of the decorative pattern, it is possible to recognize that the player is one step closer to displaying the variation of the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific pending image. .

Furthermore, by displaying the decorative pattern and the pre-read effect image in an overlapping position, it is possible to increase the size of both the decorative pattern and the pre-read effect image, and it is possible to improve the utilization efficiency of the display area. Furthermore, the display can be optimized by configuring the image displayed on the front side to be switched between a decorative pattern and a look-ahead effect image depending on conditions.

Specifically, while the decorative symbols are changing, the look-ahead effect image is displayed on the front side, giving the player a big warning that the timing of the change display corresponding to the look-ahead effect image is approaching. It can create a sense of expectation. On the other hand, while the decorative symbols are stopped changing, the manner in which the decorative symbols are stopped is not obstructed by the look-ahead effect image, making it possible to clearly show the entirety of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed to the player. .

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 383 and 384, even if the prefetch effect image is displayed over a plurality of variable displays of decorative patterns, the size of the prefetch effect image does not change. , below, with reference to FIGS. 385, 387, and 388, the size of the pre-read effect image is changed when displaying the pre-read effect image over a plurality of variable displays of decorative patterns. An example of production is shown.

In this production example, a first look-ahead effect image that occupies the smallest area in the display area, a second look-ahead effect image that occupies a medium area in the display area, and a second look-ahead effect image that occupies the largest area in the display area. It is configured to switch and display the large third look-ahead effect image at a predetermined timing. The first look-ahead effect image to the third look-ahead effect image are a mode in which a plurality (specifically, six) of shapes resembling pine branches with leaves are arranged inside a horizontally long rectangular frame so that they pop out. In the case of the first look-ahead effect image, the size of the shape imitating a pine branch with leaves is the smallest, and in the case of the second look-ahead effect image, the size of the shape imitating a pine branch with leaves is the smallest. In the case of the third look-ahead effect image, the size of the shape imitating a pine branch with leaves is the largest. The color of the first prefetch effect image to the third prefetch effect image is slightly lighter green than the color of the specific pending image. Note that in the effect example described with reference to FIG. 384, the prefetch effect image displayed in the display area is the first prefetch effect image.

First, with reference to FIGS. 385(A) and 387, an example of a performance in which a pre-read performance image gradually increases in size over a plurality of variable displays of decorative symbols will be shown. FIG. 385(A) is a time chart in this performance example, and FIG. 387 is a diagram showing the display state of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 at a predetermined timing in this performance example.

In this performance example, the display of the first look-ahead performance image and the specific pending image is started in response to the winning of the game ball into the first start opening 2002 that occurs at timing t2. FIG. 387(A) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t3) after the display of the first look-ahead effect image and the specific pending image is started at timing t2.

At timing t4, all of the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed. FIG. 387(B) shows a display state in which all of the left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t4. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the display order of the pre-reading effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is reversed, and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are closer to the front than the pre-reading effect image. displayed on the side.

Next, at timing t5, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started, and the pre-read effect image is displayed closer to the viewer than the left to right decorative symbols, but in this example of effect, At timing t6, which is one second later, a second pre-reading effect image, which is larger than the first pre-reading effect image, is displayed instead of the first pre-reading effect image. FIG. 387(C) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t7) after the display of the second look-ahead effect image is started at timing t6.

Next, at timing t9, all of the left to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 387(D) shows a display state in which all of the left to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t9. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the display order of the second look-ahead effect image and the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern is reversed, and the left decorative pattern to right is displayed more than the second look-ahead effect image. Decorative designs are displayed on the front side.

Next, at timing t10, a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started, but in this production example, at timing t11, which is one second later, a second pre-reading effect is displayed instead of the second pre-reading effect image. It is configured to display a third look-ahead effect image that is larger than the image. FIG. 387(E) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t12) after the display of the third prefetch effect image is started at timing t11.

Next, at timing t14, all of the left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 387(F) shows a display state in which all of the left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t14. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the display order of the third look-ahead effect image and the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern is reversed, and the left decorative pattern to right is displayed more than the third look-ahead effect image. Decorative designs are displayed on the front side.

Next, at timing t15, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. This fluctuating display is a fluctuating display corresponding to the starting prize that triggered the start of the pre-reading performance display in this performance example. At timing t15, the display order of the third pre-read effect image and the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern is reversed, and the third pre-read effect image is displayed closer than the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern. FIG. 387(G) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t16) after the variable display of decorative symbols starts at timing t15.

In this way, in this embodiment, the decorative pattern is displayed closer to the front than the pre-reading effect image in accordance with the stop display of the decorative pattern, and then the pre-reading pattern is displayed in front of the decorative pattern in accordance with the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. After displaying the effect image on the front side, a look-ahead effect image that occupies a larger area of the display area than the previously displayed look-ahead effect image is displayed in place of the previously displayed look-ahead effect image. It is composed of

By adopting such a configuration, the player can visually clearly understand the start and stop of each variable display, so the player can change the decoration corresponding to the specific pending image without bothering to check the movement of the specific pending image. It becomes possible to recognize that the symbol is approaching a variable display.

In addition, the look-ahead effect image that was displayed behind the decorative pattern and partially hidden while the decorative pattern was stopped is changed to a larger look-ahead effect immediately after the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern starts. Since the image is switched and displayed, it becomes possible for the player to visually recognize that the pre-read effect image has been enlarged twice.

Further, in this embodiment, the size of the pre-read effect image is configured to increase in stages. Specifically, by first displaying a small look-ahead effect image, it is possible to make the player aware that the look-ahead effect has started, and at this stage, the visibility of the changing decorative patterns is not so obstructed. After that, the size of the look-ahead effect image gradually increases.

With this configuration, it became possible for the player to recognize that the look-ahead effect had started, and thereafter the size of the look-ahead effect image increased, making it difficult to see the changing decorative symbols. Even so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is unable to understand the content displayed in the display area.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 385(B) and 388, an example of a performance in which a pre-read performance image gradually becomes smaller over a plurality of variable displays of decorative symbols will be shown. FIG. 385(B) is a time chart in this performance example, and FIG. 388 is a diagram showing the display state of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 at a predetermined timing in this performance example.

In this production example, the display of the third look-ahead production image and the specific pending image is started in response to the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 2002 that occurs at timing t2. FIG. 388(A) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t3) after the display of the third prefetch effect image and the specific pending image is started at timing t2.

At timing t4, all of the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed. FIG. 388(B) shows a display state in which all of the left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t4. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the display order of the pre-reading effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is reversed, and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are closer to the front than the pre-reading effect image. displayed on the side.

Next, at timing t5, a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started, but in this production example, at timing t6, which is one second later, a third pre-reading effect is displayed instead of the third pre-reading effect image. It is configured to display a second look-ahead effect image that is smaller than the image. FIG. 388(C) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t7) after the display of the second look-ahead effect image is started at timing t6.

Next, at timing t9, all of the left to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 388(D) shows a display state in which all of the left to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t9. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the display order of the second look-ahead effect image and the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern is reversed, and the left decorative pattern to right is displayed more than the second look-ahead effect image. Decorative designs are displayed on the front side.

Next, at timing t10, a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started, but in this production example, at timing t11, which is one second later, a second pre-reading effect is displayed instead of the second pre-reading effect image. It is configured to display a first look-ahead effect image that is smaller than the image. FIG. 388(E) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t12) after the display of the first look-ahead effect image is started at timing t11.

Next, at timing t14, all of the left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 388(F) shows a display state in which all of the left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t14. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the display order of the first pre-reading effect image and the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern is reversed, and the left decorative pattern to right is displayed more than the first pre-reading effect image. Decorative designs are displayed on the front side.

Next, at timing t15, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. This fluctuating display is a fluctuating display corresponding to the starting prize that triggered the start of the pre-reading performance display in this performance example. At timing t15, the display order of the first pre-read effect image and the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern is reversed, and the third pre-read effect image is displayed closer than the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern. FIG. 388(G) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t16) after the variable display of decorative symbols starts at timing t15.

By adopting such a configuration, the same effects as the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 385(A) and 387 can be achieved. For example, since the player can visually clearly grasp the start and stop of each fluctuating display, the player can easily see when the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific pending image approaches, without having to take the trouble to check the movement of the specific pending image. It becomes possible to recognize.

Furthermore, by displaying the largest pre-read effect image first as the pre-read effect image, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the player cannot recognize that the pre-read effect has started. After that, by gradually reducing the size of the look-ahead effect image, the decoration that is variably displayed until the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the starting winning that triggered the display of the look-ahead effect image and the specific pending image starts. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is unable to understand the content of symbol fluctuations.

Furthermore, in the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 385(A), 387, 385(B), and 388, in addition to the large opening provided in the center of the pre-reading effect image, the pre-reading effect image ( The second look-ahead effect image, the third look-ahead effect image) are configured to have a small opening through which the image displayed on the rear side can be viewed.

Specifically, in the case of the second look-ahead effect image, a total of six openings are formed around the second look-ahead effect image, and in the case of the third look-ahead effect image, a total of eight openings are formed around the third look-ahead effect image. It is configured to provide In addition, openings are provided corresponding to the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern so that the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern do not become difficult to see. For example, in the case of the second look-ahead effect image, there are two openings on the top and bottom corresponding to the left decorative pattern, two openings on the top and bottom corresponding to the middle decorative pattern, and two openings on the top and bottom corresponding to the right decorative pattern. It is set up.

In addition, in the case of the third look-ahead effect image, there are three openings on the top and bottom corresponding to the left decorative pattern, two openings on the top and bottom corresponding to the middle decorative pattern, and three openings on the top and bottom corresponding to the right decorative pattern. It is set up. In this way, during the variation of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern becomes visible through the opening at a predetermined timing, so it is possible to suppress the visibility of the decorative pattern from decreasing.

By adopting such a configuration, even when the pre-reading effect image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner behind the pre-reading effect image. Since it becomes possible for the player to visually confirm this through the opening, while maintaining the impact on the player from displaying the pre-read effect image, it is possible to prevent the player from understanding the content displayed in the display area. It becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of situations.

An embodiment in which the size of the look-ahead effect image does not change (Fig. 383), an embodiment in which the size of the look-ahead effect image is increased after the decorative pattern starts changing (Fig. 385 (A)), or an embodiment in which it is reduced (Fig. 385 (A)). Although FIG. 385(B)) is shown, the degree of expectation of a jackpot may be suggested based on the size of the prefetch effect image displayed.

For example, as a look-ahead effect image, a first look-ahead effect image with a small proportion of the area occupying the display area, a second look-ahead effect image with a medium proportion of the area occupying the display area, and a third look-ahead effect image with a large proportion of the area occupying the display area. The prefetching effect display can be performed in three display modes of the prefetching effect image, and the expectation level is increased in the order of the first prefetching effect image, the second prefetching effect image, and the third prefetching effect image, and finally Depending on the type of look-ahead effect image that was being displayed, it may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the fluctuating result of the variable display corresponding to the starting prize that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect display will indicate a jackpot. . In this case, the player expects a larger pre-read effect image to be displayed as the pre-read effect image.

Alternatively, the expectation level may be configured to increase in the order of the third look-ahead effect image, the second look-ahead effect image, and the first look-ahead effect image, and the look-ahead effect display may be changed depending on the type of the look-ahead effect image that was finally displayed. It may be configured such that the fluctuating result of the fluctuating display corresponding to the starting winning that triggered the start suggests the degree of expectation that the fluctuating result will indicate a jackpot. In this case, the player expects a smaller pre-read effect image to be displayed as the pre-read effect image.

FIGS. 386(A) to 386(H) show modified examples of the state of the look-ahead effect display in the time chart described with reference to FIG. 385(A).

FIG. 386(A) is a diagram for showing the changing state of decorative symbols, the number of reservations, and which of the symbols or effect display is to be displayed with priority.

In FIG. 386(B), a first look-ahead effect image indicating a low expectation level is displayed at timing t2, a first look-ahead effect image indicating a low expectation level is continuously displayed at timing t5, and a first look-ahead effect image indicating a medium expectation level is displayed at timing t11. It is a time chart which shows the example of a performance in which a 2 look-ahead performance image is displayed.

In FIG. 386(C), a first look-ahead effect image indicating a low expectation level is displayed at timing t2, a first look-ahead effect image indicating a low expectation level is continuously displayed at timing t5, and a first look-ahead effect image indicating a high expectation level is displayed at timing t11. 3 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which a look-ahead performance image is displayed.

In FIG. 386(D), a first look-ahead effect image indicating a low expectation level is displayed at timing t2, a second look-ahead effect image indicating a medium expectation level is displayed at timing t5, and a second look-ahead effect image indicating a medium expectation level is displayed at timing t11. It is a time chart which shows the example of a performance in which a look-ahead performance image is continuously displayed.

In FIG. 386(E), at timing t2, a second look-ahead effect image indicating medium expectation level is displayed, at timing t5, a third look-ahead effect image indicating high expectation level is displayed, and at timing t11, a first look-ahead effect image indicating low expectation level is displayed. It is a time chart showing an example of effect in which a pre-read effect image is displayed.

In FIG. 386(F), at timing t2, a third look-ahead effect image indicating a high expectation level is displayed, at a timing t5, a third look-ahead effect image indicating a high expectation level is continuously displayed, and at a timing t11, a third look-ahead effect image indicating a high expectation level is displayed. 3 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which three look-ahead performance images are continuously displayed.

In this way, by configuring the expectation level to increase according to the size of the finally displayed pre-read effect image, it is possible to further enhance the interest when the pre-read effect image is displayed.

In the variable display corresponding to the starting winning that triggered the start of the pre-reading effect display, the pre-reading effect image and the decorative pattern may be displayed so as not to overlap.

FIG. 386(G) is a time chart showing an example of effect in which vertically elongated bar-shaped images are displayed on the left and right sides of the display area as a pre-read effect image instead of the third pre-read effect image indicating a high expectation level at timing t16. Further, FIG. 386(H) is a time chart showing an example of displaying a vertically long bar-shaped image on the left and right of the display area as a pre-reading effect image instead of the first pre-reading effect image indicating a low expectation level at timing t16. .

FIG. 388(H) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t17) after the display of the bar-shaped image is started at timing t16 in the time charts shown in FIG. 386(G) and FIG. 386(H). ing. As shown in FIG. 388(H), the bar-shaped image is displayed at a position that does not overlap with any of the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern that are being displayed in a variable manner. In the figure, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are being displayed in a variable manner. Moreover, the color of the bar-shaped image is light green, which is the same color as the first pre-read effect image and the third pre-read effect image that have been displayed up to that point.

In this way, in this embodiment, instead of the look-ahead effect image that has been displayed over multiple variations of the decorative pattern, a bar-shaped image that does not overlap with the changing decorative pattern is displayed as a look-ahead effect image with a different shape. It is configured to do so.

With this configuration, the left decorative pattern, right decorative pattern, The manner in which the decorative patterns that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the display area becomes clear in this order, and in terms of whether or not a reach state occurs, or which numbered decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, The player's visibility is no longer obstructed.

At game parlors, the game parlor may provide unique services to players (such as unlimited service using lucky numbers) based on numbers attached to decorative symbols that are displayed in a fixed diagonal pattern indicating a jackpot. The player can check the number attached to the stopped decorative pattern from the moment the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, which is the first time it is possible to determine whether or not such a service can be received.

Note that the expectation level of jackpot when a ready-to-reach state occurs may be configured to vary depending on the numbers attached to the decorative symbols. For example, between a reach state with a decorative symbol with the number "4" attached and a reach state with a decorative symbol with the number "7" attached, the latter is configured so that the expectation of a jackpot is higher. It's good to do that. Alternatively, the profit given to the player when a jackpot state occurs may be configured to differ depending on the numbers attached to the decorative symbols. For example, if a decorative pattern with the number ``4'' stops on a zero and becomes a jackpot, and a case where a decorative pattern with a number ``7'' stops on a zero and becomes a jackpot. In the latter case, it is preferable to configure the system so that more jackpots 2005 are opened during jackpot games and more prize balls are awarded to the player.

With such a configuration, the player will be concerned about which number is attached to the left decorative symbol that is initially temporarily stopped, but in this embodiment, the bar-shaped Visibility of the decorative pattern is ensured by displaying the image.

In the production example explained with reference to FIG. 388(H), the entire decorative pattern does not overlap with the bar-shaped image which is the look-ahead production image, but the number area and the background area that make up the decorative pattern Among these, the background area may be allowed to overlap with the bar-shaped image, and the number area may be configured so as not to overlap with the bar-shaped image. In this case, it is possible to slightly increase the thickness of the bar-shaped image described with reference to FIG. 388(H) in the left-right direction (inward direction in the display area). Even with such a configuration, the numbers attached to the decorative pattern do not overlap with the pre-read effect image, so the visibility of the decorative pattern is ensured.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 385 to 388, the size of the look-ahead effect image is configured to indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the variable display will be a jackpot, but depending on the size of the look-ahead effect image, Instead of or in addition to indicating the degree of expectation, it may be modified to indicate the degree of expectation of a jackpot based on other attributes other than the size in the look-ahead effect image.

For example, an image having the same shape as the first look-ahead effect image shown in FIG. As the effect image, a green pre-read effect image is displayed as a second pre-read effect image, and a red pre-read effect image is displayed as a third pre-read effect image in the time chart shown with reference to FIGS. 385 and 386. You may. Also, at this time, the expectation level when the blue first look-ahead effect image is displayed is set to low expectation level, the expectation level when the green second look-ahead effect image is displayed is set to medium expectation level, and the expectation level when the green second look-ahead effect image is displayed is set to medium expectation level. The expectation level when the 3 look-ahead effect image is displayed may be configured to be a high expectation level.

Furthermore, an example was shown in which images having the same shape as the first look-ahead effect image shown in FIG. 387(A) are colored blue, green, and red, but an image having the same shape as the second look-ahead effect image shown in FIG. 387(C) are displayed as blue, green, and red, and images of the same shape as the third look-ahead effect image shown in FIG. It may be configured to do so.

Alternatively, the degree of expectation may be indicated by a combination of the size and color of the look-ahead effect image. For example, the small-sized pre-reading effect image shown in FIG. 387(A) is used as the blue first pre-reading effect image, and the medium-sized pre-reading effect image shown in FIG. 387(C) is used as the green second pre-reading effect image. The pre-read effect image with the largest size shown in FIG. It may be configured such that the expectation level when the second look-ahead effect image is displayed is medium expectation level, and the expectation level when the third look-ahead effect image is displayed is high expectation level.

By adopting such a configuration, the player can clearly understand the start and stop of each variable display by the change in color of the look-ahead effect image. It becomes possible to recognize that the decorative pattern corresponding to the image is approaching a variable display.

When the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed while the look-ahead effect image is being displayed, the color of each of the decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed may be configured to be the same color or a similar color. good. For example, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern may all be colored blue.

Specifically, immediately before the fluctuation display stops, the background area and number area of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are colored blue, and are stopped and displayed in front of the look-ahead effect image in blue, and then the fluctuation starts. At times, it is preferable to display the color in blue behind the look-ahead effect image, and during the fluctuation, display the color in white or black, which is the original color. Alternatively, from the start of display of the look-ahead effect image, the color of the background area and number area of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is blue, and the background area of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is changed to blue until the display of the look-ahead effect image is finished. Alternatively, the color of the numeral area may continue to be blue. Note that the color of the background area and number area of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is not limited to blue, but may also be green, red, gray, or the like. Note that when the background area and the number area are made the same color, it is preferable to provide a black outline portion for the number.

Further, it is preferable that the colors of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern and the color of the look-ahead effect image are made different colors. For example, when blue is used as the color of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, it is preferable to use a color other than blue (for example, red or green) as the color of the look-ahead effect image.

In this way, at least at the timing when each decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, each of the decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed is made the same color (for example, blue) or a similar color, so that the left decorative pattern to the right decoration that are stopped and displayed are changed. In addition to creating a sense of unity between the symbols, it is possible to further enhance the visual difference between the left decorative symbol and the look-ahead effect image displayed on the background of the right decorative symbol. It becomes more clearly recognized by players.

Furthermore, by making the color of each decorative pattern and the look-ahead effect image different, it is possible to further enhance the visual difference between the color of each decorative pattern and the look-ahead effect image, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is ended. and the start will be more clearly recognized by the player.

In this way, when the colors of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are set to the same color, the color of each decorative pattern is changed to a different color while the look-ahead effect image is being displayed. It's okay. This kind of change of the color of the decorative pattern is performed when each decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner and is displayed in front of the look-ahead effect image, and each decorative pattern is displayed behind the look-ahead effect image. It is preferable that the color of the decorative pattern is not changed at the timing when the color of the decorative pattern is changed.

For example, the color of each decorative pattern may be changed from blue to green at the timing when each decorative pattern is displayed on the front side of the pre-read effect image while each decorative pattern is changing. In addition, depending on the color of the decorative pattern changed in this way, it is possible to indicate some state in the gaming machine (for example, the degree of expectation that the fluctuating display corresponding to the starting prize that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect display will be a fluctuating result indicating a jackpot). It may be configured to suggest.

With this configuration, the end and start of the variable display of decorative symbols can be more clearly recognized by the player.

The look-ahead effect image may be configured to include characters or symbols indicating the name of the effect. Further, when the decorative symbols are stopped, part or all of the characters or symbols indicating the name of the performance may be hidden by the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed. For example, if you add the character string "Pine Mark Multiplication Time" to the look-ahead effect image, and then use the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed in front of the look-ahead effect image, part of the character string "Pine Mark Multiplication Time" can be added. Or you can configure it so that everything is hidden. Further, in the bar-shaped image shown in FIG. 388(H), a character string "pine mark proliferation time" may be added as characters indicating the name of the effect.

With such a configuration, when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts and the display priority of the pre-read effect image and the decorative pattern is switched, the entire name of the pre-read effect image becomes visible to the player. , it is possible to impress upon the player that the pre-read effect image is being used.

Further, it is preferable to change the name of the effect displayed in the bar-shaped image according to the size of the look-ahead effect image (that is, the expected jackpot) that was displayed until just before. For example, when the first look-ahead effect image is displayed, the character string "Pine mark multiplication time (small)" is displayed, and when the second look-ahead effect image is displayed, the character string "Pine mark multiplication time (small)" is displayed. If the third look-ahead effect image is being displayed, the character string ``Pine Mark Multiplication Time (Large)'' may be displayed.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to confirm the jackpot expectation level suggested by the look-ahead effect image while ensuring the visibility of the temporarily-displayed decorative symbols.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 383 and the like, by displaying a specific pending image in correspondence with the prefetch effect image, the variable display corresponding to the starting prize that triggered the start of the prefetch effect display is displayed. However, in place of or in addition to displaying the specific pending image, a regular circular, white pending image is displayed, and a specific pending image is displayed at the same time as the look-ahead effect image starts to be displayed. The production sound may be configured to be output for a predetermined period of time (for example, one second from timing t2 to timing t3). Alternatively, it may be configured such that only the prefetched effect image is displayed without outputting such a specific effect sound.

By adopting such a configuration, the player can visually clearly understand the start and stop of each variable display, so the player can easily grasp the opportunity to start displaying the look-ahead effect image without checking the movement of the pending image. It becomes possible to recognize that the user is one step closer to the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that has become.

A performance mode is shown in which one of the pre-read performance image and the decorative pattern is displayed in an overlapping manner with one of them facing toward the front and the other facing toward the rear. In these examples, where the images located in the front and the images located in the rear overlapped, the images located at the rear were configured so that they were not visible, but the images located at the front were partially It may be configured to be transparent so that an image located at the rear can pass through an image located at the front and become visible.

With such a configuration, visibility of the pre-read effect image and the decorative pattern can be ensured.

In a state where the fluctuating display of decorative symbols is stopped and the decorative symbol is displayed closer to the front than the look-ahead performance image, expectations regarding the fluctuating display corresponding to the starting winning that triggered the start of displaying the look-ahead performance image It is preferable that the configuration is such that no effect display is performed that indicates the degree of expectation other than the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation related to other pending images). For example, if a new hold occurs in response to a winning in the first starting slot 2002 while the look-ahead effect display is being executed, a regular round white hold image will be displayed regardless of the result of the special lottery. It is best to configure it so that it is displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by information other than the fluctuating display corresponding to the starting winning that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect display.

Although FIGS. 387, 388 and the like show embodiments in which the pre-read effect image is displayed at the periphery of the display area, the pre-read effect image may be displayed near the center of the display area.

FIG. 389 shows a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 387 and 388. FIG. 389(A) shows a state in which the first look-ahead effect image is displayed at timing t2 in the time chart of FIG. 385(A), and FIG. FIG. 389(C) shows a state in which the second pre-read effect image is displayed, and FIG. 389(C) shows a state in which the third pre-read effect image is displayed at timing t11 in the time chart of FIG. 385(A). Further, FIG. 389(D) shows a display state in which all of the left to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t14 in the time chart of FIG. 385(A).

In FIG. 389, the first pre-read effect image to the third pre-read effect image are images representing a state in which one to three ingredients are stuck on an oden skewer. Specifically, the first look-ahead performance image is an image showing a skewer with a triangular-shaped konjac stuck on it, and the second look-ahead performance image is an image showing a skewer with a triangular-shaped konjac and a square-shaped radish. The third look-ahead effect image is an image showing a state in which a triangular-shaped konnyaku, a square-shaped radish, and an oval-shaped paste are stuck on a skewer.

In this way, the first pre-read effect image changes to the second pre-read effect image, and the second pre-read effect image changes to the third pre-read effect image at the timing when one second has passed from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern. In addition, when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the parts representing the ingredients (konnyaku, daikon radish, paste) are hidden by the decorative pattern being displayed in the foreground, and only the part representing the skewer is hidden in any pre-read performance image. It is visible to the player without being hidden by the decorative pattern.

With such a configuration, the look-ahead effect image can be viewed as a single image or as a plurality of images during the variation of the decorative pattern and when the variation is stopped. Therefore, the appearance of the look-ahead effect image appears to the player as having changed significantly, and the start and stop of each variable display can be more clearly understood visually.

Further, only the portion hidden by the decorative pattern is a place that can change when one pre-reading effect image changes to another pre-reading effect image. Therefore, when the type of look-ahead effect image indicates the expectation of a jackpot, if the player focuses only on the place where the decorative pattern stops, he or she can recognize when the decorative pattern stops changing and when it starts changing. , it is also possible to recognize the expectation level of jackpot.

In addition, when performing a variation mode in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed while the decorative pattern is changing once, and then the variable display is restarted, the look-ahead effect image It is preferable to continue displaying the prefetch effect image on the front side of the decorative pattern without changing the priority of the decorative pattern even during temporary stop display. For example, in the time chart shown in FIG. 385(A), the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed from timing t7 to timing t8 or from timing t17 to timing t18, and then the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed. Even when the variable display of symbols is configured to be restarted, it is preferable to configure the prefetch effect image to continue to be displayed in front of the decorative symbols.

With such a configuration, a situation may occur where the player mistakenly assumes that the fluctuating display has ended and a new fluctuating display has started, and that the decorative pattern is approaching the fluctuating pattern whose expectation level is suggested by the look-ahead effect image. It becomes possible to suppress the

Although an example has been shown in which a pre-reading effect image is displayed around the display area, a plurality of pre-reading effect images may be displayed around the display area.

Below, an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 383 and 384 will be described with reference to production examples shown in FIGS. 390, 391, and 392. FIG. 390 is a time chart in this performance example, and FIGS. 391 and 392 are diagrams showing the display state of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 at a predetermined timing in this performance example.

The look-ahead effect in this embodiment includes a look-ahead effect frame image that surrounds the outer periphery of the display area in a frame shape, and a 1st pine preview image to a 6th pine that are provided in a display format of 2 vertical rows and 3 horizontal rows in the display area. It is configured to be performed using a preview image.

Specifically, the first pine tree preview image is displayed in the upper left of the display area, the second pine tree preview image is displayed in the upper center of the display area, the third pine tree preview image is displayed in the upper right of the display area, and the third pine tree preview image is displayed in the lower left of the display area. The 4th pine preview image is displayed at the bottom center of the display area, the 5th pine preview image is displayed at the bottom right of the display area, and the 6th pine preview image is displayed at the bottom right of the display area. The first to sixth pine preview images have different display start timings and display end timings, and the display starts and ends independently of each other.

Further, the first to sixth pine preview images are images that suggest that a predetermined performance will be performed, respectively.

Specifically, the first pine preview image is an image that foretells that the operation on the operation button 410 will become effective, and is attached with the character string "Button Preparation".

In addition, the second pine preview image is an image that foretells that the ear frame movable body provided on the frame will change from the first state to the second state, and the character string "Be careful on the frame!" It is attached.

Further, the third pine preview image is an image that foretells that the reserved image will change to a reserved image indicating a higher degree of expectation, and has a character string "Green Reserved!" attached thereto, for example.

The fourth pine preview image is an image that displays a countdown indicating that some kind of preview or suggestion regarding the game will be made at a predetermined timing, and a character string that counts down as time passes is added. For example, after a display such as "In 18 seconds?" is displayed, the number of seconds is displayed as "In 17 seconds?", "In 16 seconds?", ..., "In 1 second?" every second that passes. This is an image where a countdown is displayed.

The fifth pine preview image is an image that foretells that a special reach, which is expected to be a jackpot more than a normal reach state, will occur as a reach state, and is attached with the character string "SP reach".

The 6th pine preview image, like the 4th pine preview image, is an image that displays a countdown indicating that some kind of preview or suggestion regarding the game will be made at a predetermined timing.

The color of the look-ahead performance frame image and the first to sixth pine preview images is green. The first to sixth pine preview images have their outer shapes framed with a color other than green (for example, black). As a result, it is possible to visually differentiate the first to sixth pine preview images from the look-ahead effect frame image that is displayed behind the first pine preview image to the sixth pine preview image. Further, the first to sixth pine preview images may continue to be displayed even after the corresponding preview or suggestion is executed, but in that case, they are displayed in gray instead of green. Furthermore, the characters attached to the first to sixth pine preview images are in black.

FIG. 390 is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. Immediately before the timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is such that the decorative symbols have stopped fluctuating.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 390, at timing t2, a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and a new hold occurs. Further, with this starting winning as a trigger, at timing t2, the display of a pre-read effect frame image, a third pine preview image, a fourth pine preview image, and a sixth pine preview image is started as a pre-read effect display.

FIG. 391(A) shows the display state immediately after the prefetch effect display is started at timing t2. Specifically, a look-ahead effect frame image surrounding the display area in a rectangular shape is displayed in front of the changing decorative pattern, and a third pine preview image, a fourth pine tree, etc. are displayed in front of the look-ahead effect frame image. A state in which a preview image and a 6th pine preview image are displayed is shown. Also, a state is shown in which the pending image is displayed closest to you. The pending image displayed in the third pending display area is a normal white pending image.

The 3rd pine preview image has the words "Green pending!", but this is due to the white pending that was newly generated due to the game ball entering the first starting slot 2002 at timing t2. This indicates that the color changes to green pending at a predetermined timing, indicating that the expectation of a jackpot is higher.

Further, the fourth pine preview image has a character string "18 seconds later?", and the sixth pine preview image has a character string "23 seconds later?". This indicates that some sort of advance notice or suggestion regarding the game will be made 18 seconds later (timing t20) and 23 seconds later (timing t25), respectively.

Next, at timing t4, all of the left to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 391(B) shows a display state in which all of the left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t4. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the display context of the third pine, fourth, and sixth pine preview images and the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern is reversed, The left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed closer to the front than the third pine preview image, the fourth pine preview image, and the sixth pine preview image. Note that the pending image displayed in the pending display area and the normal pending images displayed in the first to third pending display areas are displayed closer to the front than the prefetch effect frame image.

Next, at timing t5, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the new variable display of the decorative pattern starts, the context of the 3rd pine preview image, 4th pine preview image, 6th pine preview image and the left decorative pattern ~ right decorative pattern is switched again, and the left decorative pattern ~ The display mode is such that the third pine tree preview image, the fourth pine tree preview image, and the sixth pine tree preview image are displayed on the nearer side than the right decorative pattern.

Next, at timing t7, display of the fifth pine preview image is started. FIG. 391(C) shows the display state immediately after the display of the fifth pine preview image starts at timing t7. Specifically, a state is shown in which a preview image of the fifth pine tree with the words "SP Reach!" attached is displayed in front of the changing decorative pattern. The 5th pine preview image has the words "SP Reach!" attached to it, but this is a decorative pattern that corresponds to a new hold that occurred when a game ball entered the first starting slot 2002 at timing t2. This shows that the change in is the special reach.

Next, at timing t9, all of the left to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 391(D) shows a display state in which all of the left to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t9. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the display context of the third pine preview image, fourth pine preview image to sixth pine preview image, and the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern is reversed, The left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed closer to the front than the third pine preview image, fourth pine preview image to sixth pine preview image.

Next, at timing t10, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the new variable display of the decorative pattern starts, the context of the 3rd pine tree preview image, 4th pine preview image, 6th pine preview image, left decorative pattern, right decorative pattern is switched again, and the left decorative pattern ~ The display mode is such that the 3rd pine preview image, 4th pine preview image to 6th pine preview image are displayed closer to the right side than the right decorative pattern.

Next, at timing t11, display of the second pine preview image is started. FIG. 391(E) shows the display state immediately after the display of the second pine preview image starts at timing t11. Specifically, a state is shown in which a second pine preview image with the words "Be careful on the frame!" is displayed in front of the changing decorative pattern. The second pine preview image has a character string "Be careful on the frame!", but this corresponds to a new hold that occurred when a game ball entered the first starting slot 2002 at timing t2. This shows that the ear frame movable body provided on the frame changes from the first state to the second state at a predetermined timing in response to a change in the decorative pattern.

Next, at timing t13, the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area changes to a green pending image. At the same time, the display of the third pine preview image, which foretells that the white reserved image will change to the green reserved image, ends. FIG. 391(F) shows the state immediately after these displays are performed at timing t13.

Next, at timing t14, all of the left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 391(F) shows a display state in which all of the left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t14. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the display order of the second pine preview image, the fourth pine preview image to the sixth pine preview image, and the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are reversed, The left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed closer to the front than the second pine preview image, fourth pine preview image to sixth pine preview image.

Next, at timing t15, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the new variable display of the decorative pattern starts, the context of the second pine tree preview image, fourth pine preview image, sixth pine preview image, left decorative pattern, right decorative pattern is switched again, and the left decorative pattern ~ The display mode is such that the second pine preview image, fourth pine preview image to sixth pine preview image are displayed closer to the right side than the right decorative pattern. Further, this variation of the decorative pattern is a variation corresponding to the hold that occurred when the game ball entered the first starting hole 2002 at timing t2, and is a variation display that is the target of the pre-read effect display.

Next, at timing t17, display of the first pine preview image is started. FIG. 391(G) shows the display state immediately after the display of the first pine preview image starts at timing t17. Specifically, a state is shown in which the first pine preview image with the words "Button Preparation" attached is displayed in front of the changing decorative pattern. The first pine preview image has a character string "button ready" attached thereto, which indicates that the operation on the operation button 410 will become effective at a predetermined timing.

Next, at timing t20, the text attached to the fourth pine preview image changes from the text "01 seconds later?" to the text "Chance!". At the same time, the green pending image displayed in the pending display area changes to the red pending image. FIG. 392(A) shows the state immediately after these displays are performed at timing t20. The 4th pine preview image had previously been green, but now that the preview corresponding to the 4th pine pine preview image has been made (changed to a red pending image), it has become gray.

Next, at timing t22, the display of the fourth pine preview image with the words "Chance!" ends.

Next, at timing t25, the text attached to the sixth pine preview image changes from the text "01 seconds later?" to the text "Chance!". At the same time, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts falling toward the front side of the display area. At the same time, the left decorative pattern with the number "2" and the right decorative pattern with the number "2" are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, and a ready-to-win state occurs. Note that the medium decorative pattern continues to be displayed in a fluctuating display state in which it scrolls downward. FIG. 392(B) shows the state immediately after these displays are performed at timing t25. The sixth pine tree preview image had previously been green, but now that the preview corresponding to the sixth pine tree preview image (movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800) has been performed, it has become gray.

Next, from timing t25 to timing t29, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 changes from the first state (standby state) to the second state (fallen state), maintains the second state for a predetermined time, and then changes to the second state ( (falling state) to the first state (standby state). Furthermore, at timing t27, the display of the sixth pine preview image with the words "Chance!" ends.

Next, at timing t30, the size of the decorative pattern changes and a special reach occurs. Specifically, the left decorative pattern with the number "2", which had previously been displayed temporarily at the vertical center on the left side of the display area, is reduced to a square shape and temporarily displayed at the bottom left of the display area. The display will be stopped. Similarly, the right decorative pattern with the number "2", which was temporarily displayed at the vertical center on the right side of the display area, was reduced to a square shape and temporarily displayed at the bottom right of the display area. state. Furthermore, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern change from being displayed behind the pre-reading effect frame image to being displayed in front of the pre-reading effect frame image. At the same time, the horizontal size of the medium decorative pattern is approximately doubled, and a variable display is performed. At the same time, the display of the fifth pine preview image with the words "SP Reach!" ends. FIG. 392(C) shows the state immediately after these displays are performed at timing t30.

Next, at timing t35, the ear frame movable body changes from the first state (standby state) to the second state (moved state to the movement position or rotated state). Furthermore, the text attached to the second pine preview image changes from the text ``Be careful on the frame!'' to the text ``Operating on the frame!''. FIG. 392(D) shows a state immediately after the text attached to the second pine preview image changes to the text "Operating on the frame!" at timing t30. The second pine preview image had previously been green, but now that the preview corresponding to the second pine preview image (change in state of the ear frame movable body) has been performed, it has become gray.

Next, at timing t41, the operation on the operation button 410 changes to a valid state. Additionally, the text attached to the first pine preview image changes from "Button preparation" to "Press OK!". In addition, an image imitating a button labeled with the word "PUSH" is displayed at the center in the left-right direction at the bottom of the display area. FIG. 392(E) shows a state immediately after the characters attached to the first pine preview image change to the words "Press OK!" at timing t30. The first pine preview image had previously been green, but now that the preview corresponding to the first pine preview image has been made (change to a state in which the operation of the operation button 410 becomes valid), the color becomes gray.

Although not shown in the drawings, from timing t41 to timing t43, when the player operates a button, some kind of display indicating the expected jackpot is displayed. For example, it would be good to configure the display area so that in response to a button operation, a character string such as ``It might not be a hit...'' or a character string ``It might be a hit...'' is displayed for one second immediately after the button operation. . In this case, if the system is configured so that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the character string ``I might win...'' is displayed than when the character string ``I might not win...'' is displayed. good.

Next, at timing t45, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in either a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is a loss or a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is a jackpot. be done. FIG. 392(F) shows a display state in which the special lottery result is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is a loss. Further, FIG. 392(G) shows a display state in which the special lottery result is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is a jackpot. At this time, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern, which had been reduced and displayed at the corner of the display area, return to their original size and are stopped and displayed at approximately the vertical center of the display area. Additionally, the width of the medium decorative pattern returns to its original width, and it is stopped and displayed at approximately the center in the vertical direction of the display area.

As described above, in this embodiment, while the decorative pattern is changing, the decorative pattern is displayed closer to the first to sixth pine preview images, and while the decorative pattern is being stopped, the first pine The pine preview image to the sixth pine preview image are configured to be displayed in front of the decorative pattern. By adopting such a configuration, the player can visually clearly understand the start and stop of each variable display, so the player can clearly understand the start and stop of each variable display, so the player can clearly understand the start and stop of each variable display, so the player can clearly understand the start and stop of each variable display. It becomes possible to recognize that the decorative pattern corresponding to the pending image is approaching the variable display without taking the trouble of checking the movement of the pending image corresponding to the winning.

In the time chart shown in Fig. 390, an example of production in which all of the first to sixth pine preview images are displayed is shown, but instead of displaying all pine preview images, the special lottery result It may be configured such that only some of the pine preview images are displayed based on the above information. In this case, it is preferable to display the pine preview image from a predetermined timing before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed to a predetermined timing after the start of a new variable display. For example, in the production example shown in FIG. 390, the pine preview image is displayed during the period from timing t3 to timing t6, from timing t8 to timing t11, and from timing t13 to timing t16. It's good to do that.

For example, when displaying only the first pine preview image with the words "Button ready!" attached, the first pine preview image may be configured to continue to be displayed at least during the period from timing t3 to timing t16. good. Also, when displaying only the second pine preview image with the words "Be careful on the frame!", the second pine preview image should continue to be displayed at least during the period from timing t3 to timing t16. It is recommended to configure The same applies to the 3rd pine preview image to the 6th pine preview image.

By displaying a plurality of pine preview images, it may be configured such that any one of the pine preview images is displayed during the period from timing t3 to timing t16. For example, in the production example shown in FIG. 390, the third pine preview image with the words "Green on hold!" is not displayed from timing t13 to timing t16. Further, the fifth pine preview image with the words "SP Reach!" is not displayed from timing t3 to timing t6. However, if the configuration is such that both the third pine tree preview image and the sixth pine tree preview image are displayed, the pine tree preview image will be displayed during the period from timing t3 to timing t16. In this way, it is also possible to display a plurality of pine preview images with different display start timings and display end timings.

The size of the lookahead effect frame image is configured to display a lookahead effect frame image that is larger than the effect examples shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, so that the decorative patterns stopped and displayed on the near side of the lookahead effect frame image overlap. You can do it like this. In this case, the width of the look-ahead effect frame image that surrounds the display area is increased, and when the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the left side and top side of the left decorative pattern, the top side of the middle decorative pattern , it is preferable that the upper side and the right side of the right decorative pattern overlap with the pre-read effect frame image. Further, in this case, the number area of each decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed may be configured so as not to overlap with the pre-read effect frame image. FIG. 393(A) is a display example of the look-ahead effect frame image with the width increased in this way immediately after timing t2, and FIG. 393(B) is a display example of the look-ahead effect frame image with the width increased in this way immediately after timing t4. This is an example.

With this configuration, even if there is a case where none of the pine preview images are displayed during the period from timing t3 to timing t16, the look-ahead effect frame image is displayed behind the decorative pattern when the decorative pattern stops changing. The player can visually clearly understand the start and stop of each variable display.
Also, when the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that triggered the display of the pine preview image is stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern will be displayed in front of the pre-read performance frame image.

FIG. 394 is a modified embodiment of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 383 and 384. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 394, the hold display area, the first hold display area to the fourth hold display area are provided from the lower left position of the display area toward the upper right diagonally. FIG. 394(A) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t3) after the prefetch effect display is started in FIG. 383. Further, FIG. 394(B) shows a display state in which all of the left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t4 in FIG. 383. In addition, in FIGS. 394(A) and 394(B), a circular and white normal hold is displayed in the hold display area, the first hold display area, and the second hold display area, and the normal hold is displayed in the third hold display area. , shows a state in which a blue pending image is displayed, indicating that the expectation of a jackpot is high. Note that the number of pending items is three, and the fourth pending display area is indicated by a dotted line.

In this embodiment, during the variable display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the reserved image is displayed closer to the front than the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern. On the other hand, at the timing when the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the display order of the held image and the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern is reversed, and the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern is closer to the held image. displayed on the side.

In this way, when the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, part of the first to third pending display area and all of the fourth display area are temporarily hidden by the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern. The state will be as follows. In addition, as you get closer to the third reservation display area, the second reservation display area, and the first reservation display area, the area hidden by each display area by the decorative pattern decreases, and from the left decorative pattern to the right decoration When the symbols are stopped and displayed, the visibility of each pending image gradually increases, and the player's expectations for a jackpot increase at an accelerated pace.

With reference to FIGS. 395 and 396, depending on the points displayed in the display area corresponding to a predetermined effect display during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display result of the decorative pattern becomes the variable display result indicating a jackpot. An example of a performance that shows the level of expectation is shown below.

Specifically, as the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern starts, the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern is displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 to 4 times) in accordance with the expectation that the fluctuating display will result in a jackpot. The expectation level of jackpot is suggested by these temporary stop display effects. Below, examples of effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 396(A) to 396(H).

FIGS. 396(A) to 396(H) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode from the start to the end of the "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" effect.

The "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" performance is one of the display performances performed based on the special lottery result obtained when a game ball enters the first starting slot 2002. In this production example, after the oden production image display production pattern described below is executed four times, the result of the variable display of the decorative pattern that is being varied is expected to be a jackpot due to the oden image and oden points described below. degree is suggested.

FIG. 396(A) is a diagram showing a state immediately after the first oden performance image display performance pattern, which will be described later, is started in conjunction with the start of the "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" performance. In addition, immediately after the display states start in the production mode display area, the left oden production image display area to the right oden production image display area, and the cumulative oden point display area, which will be described later, the left decorative pattern to right decoration This shows a state in which variable display of symbols has started.

In this state, a rectangular performance mode display area having a long side equal to the length of the display area in the vertical direction is provided at the right end of the display area. The production mode display area will be in a state where the display will be performed as the "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" production begins, and will be in a state where the display will not be performed as the "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" production ends. . The name of the performance state being executed is written vertically in the performance mode display area. In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 396(A) to 396(H), a character string "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" is attached.

The display area is provided with three oden effect image display areas: a left oden effect image display area, a middle oden effect image display area, and a right oden effect image display area. Each oden effect display area is a display area where an oden effect image, which will be described later, is displayed.

The left oden effect image display area is located at the position where the left decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped and temporarily stopped state, the middle oden effect image display area is located at the position where the middle decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state and temporarily stopped, and the right oden performance image display area is located at the position where the middle decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped and temporarily stopped state. are provided at the positions where the right decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state and a temporary stopped state, respectively.

Moreover, each oden effect image display area is provided inside the peripheral part of the decorative pattern displayed at the corresponding position.

In addition, the number area located in the center of the background area in each decorative pattern from the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is shown in Fig. 396 (A ) ~ As shown in FIG. 396(H), it is displayed smaller than in the normal presentation at the lower left of the background area. As a result, even when an oden effect image to be described later is displayed overlapping the decorative pattern in front of the decorative pattern while each decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the visibility of the number area is ensured.

The oden effect image is an image displayed in the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display area, and there are two types: an oden image and an angry face image.

The oden performance image is displayed at a position overlapping with the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, and is displayed in front of each decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner that scrolls downward. On the other hand, for each decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed, there is a case where the oden effect image is displayed in front of each decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed, and a case where each decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed is displayed in front of the oden effect image. The display mode may be displayed on the side.

The oden image is one of the images displayed in the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display area and shows the addition and subtraction of oden points, which will be described later. The oden image is an isosceles triangular image that imitates konjac oden seeds.

The angry face image is one of the effect images that are displayed in the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display area and indicate the addition or subtraction of oden points, which will be described later. The angry face image is a perfect circular image imitating the angry face of the owner of a stall selling oden.

FIG. 395 shows 15 oden effect image display effects patterns that define combinations of oden effect images to be displayed in each image display area from the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display area. Each oden performance image display performance pattern will be explained below.

Oden performance image display performance pattern 01 is a performance pattern in which no oden performance image is displayed.

Oden performance image display performance pattern 02 and Oden performance image display performance pattern 03 are performance patterns in which one oden performance image is displayed. As shown in FIG. 395, when the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is executed, the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area. Further, when the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is executed, an angry face image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area. Although the explanation will be omitted below, in each production pattern, whether or not the oden production image is displayed in each of the left oden production image display area, middle oden production image display area, and right oden production image display area, If a performance image is to be displayed, it is defined whether to display an oden image or an angry face image.

Oden performance image display performance pattern 04 to oden performance image display performance pattern 07 are performance patterns in which two oden performance images are displayed.

Oden performance image display performance pattern 08 to oden performance image display performance pattern 15 are performance patterns in which three oden performance images are displayed.

In this production example, first, as shown in FIG. 396(A), as the "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" production has started, the oden production image display production is performed as the first oden production image display production pattern. Execution of pattern 04 is started.

FIG. 396(A) and FIG. 396(B) show the display state displayed when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is executed. Figure 396(A) shows a state in which an oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, an oden image is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area, and an oden effect image is not displayed in the right oden effect image display area. It shows that there is no condition.

At the lower left end of the display area, a rectangular cumulative oden point display area having a long side approximately half the length of the display area in the vertical direction is provided. In the cumulative oden point display area, as the "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" effect begins, a character string indicating the cumulative oden points is displayed, and when the "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" effect ends. Accordingly, the character string indicating the cumulative oden points is not displayed. Note that the cumulative oden points will be described later.

In the cumulative oden point display area, a character string such as "XX points!" is written vertically. The cumulative oden points are displayed in the "XX" portion of this character string. Note that if the oden point is a negative value, a "-" sign is added and displayed. Note that the method for calculating the cumulative oden points will be described later. Note that in the state where the "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" performance has started, the value of the cumulative oden points is "0".

In FIG. 396(A), the initial value of the cumulative oden points is "0" points, and no additions or subtractions are made to the oden points, so the character string "0 points!" The status attached to the cumulative oden point display area is shown.

FIG. 396(B) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 396(A).

When a predetermined period of time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed from the timing at which the execution of the Oden performance image display performance pattern 04 was started (the display state shown in FIG. 396(A)), the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern The display state changes from a display state in which the display moves as if scrolling downward and is displayed in a fluctuating manner to a state in which it is temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "5" attached as the left decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number "6" attached as the middle decorative pattern, and a decoration with the number "6" attached as the right decorative pattern. The symbols change from a display state in which they are scrolled downward and displayed in a variable manner to a state in which they are temporarily stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, oden images are displayed in the left oden effect image display area and the middle oden effect image display area, respectively.

As a result, the oden image is displayed in front of the left decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped, and the oden image is displayed in front of the middle decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed. Become.

Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time (specifically 1.5 seconds) has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. The oden image will now be displayed in front of the oden image.

Here, the acquired oden point display area will be explained. The acquired oden point display areas are three horizontally long rectangular display areas provided at the top of the display area. The three earned oden point display areas are arranged in the left-right direction, and are provided in this order from the left: the left earned oden point display area, the middle earned oden point display area, and the right earned oden point display area. In addition, the three acquired oden point display areas correspond to the oden performance image display area, and the left acquired oden point display area is above the left oden performance image display area, and the left acquired oden point display area is above the middle oden performance image display area. A middle earned oden point display area and a right earned oden point display area are provided above the right oden performance image display area, respectively.

In addition, at the timing when a predetermined period of time (specifically 2 seconds) has elapsed since the execution of any oden effect image display effect pattern has started, an oden effect will be displayed on the near side of each decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed. When an image is displayed, an arbitrary oden point increase/decrease image is displayed in the acquired oden point display area corresponding to the oden effect image display area in which the oden effect image is displayed.

Next, the Oden point increase/decrease image will be explained. The Oden point increase/decrease image is a production image that shows the Oden point increase/decrease, which is displayed from the left acquired Oden point display area to the right acquired Oden point display area, and there are two types: an Oden point increase image and an Oden point decrease image. ing.

For example, at the timing when a predetermined period of time (specifically, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the execution of Oden performance image display performance pattern 02 started, an Oden image is displayed on the near side of the left decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed. If it is displayed, the left acquired oden point display area corresponding to the oden production image display area where the oden image is displayed will display a symbol such as "+1" indicating that the oden point has increased by 1 point, and a number indicating oden. A point increase image is displayed.

For example, at the timing when a predetermined period of time (specifically, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the execution of Oden effect image display effect pattern 03 has started, an angry When the face image is displayed, a symbol such as "-1" indicating that the Oden points have decreased by 1 point will be displayed in the left earned Oden point display area corresponding to the Oden performance image display area where the angry face image is displayed. An Oden point reduction image showing a number is displayed.

Furthermore, at the timing when a predetermined period of time (specifically 2 seconds) has elapsed since the execution of the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern has started, an oden effect will be displayed on the near side of each decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed. If the image is not displayed, the oden point increase/decrease image will not be displayed in the acquired oden point display area.

In this production example, the temporary stop display is performed at a timing when a predetermined period of time (specifically, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the start of execution of the oden production image display production pattern 04 shown in FIG. 396(A). Since the oden image is displayed on the front side of the left decorative pattern of the state, in FIG. 396(B), a symbol such as "+1" indicating that the oden point has increased by 1 point is displayed in the left acquired oden point display area. The Oden point increase image showing the number is displayed.

Here, a method for calculating the cumulative oden points displayed in the cumulative oden point display area will be explained. When a predetermined period of time (specifically 2 seconds) has elapsed since the execution of the predetermined Oden performance image display performance pattern, the Oden point increase/decrease image will be displayed in the left acquired Oden point display area to the right acquired Oden point display area. If it is displayed, the Oden points indicated by the Oden point increase/decrease image are added to calculate the added/subtracted Oden points. If the calculated added/subtracted Oden points are a value other than "0", the cumulative Oden points indicated by "XX" in the character string "XX points!" attached to the cumulative Oden point display area, By adding and subtracting the acquired oden points, the value obtained by the addition becomes the new cumulative oden points. The new cumulative oden points will be calculated by adding "XX points" to the cumulative oden point display area when a predetermined period of time (specifically 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the execution of the predetermined oden performance image display performance pattern. !" is displayed as the new cumulative oden point value indicated by "XX" in the character string.

Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time (specifically 2 seconds) has elapsed since the execution of the predetermined oden performance image display performance pattern started, the Oden points will be increased or decreased from the left acquired Oden point display area to the right acquired Oden point display area. When the image is not displayed, the total oden points displayed in the total oden point display area do not change.

Also, at the timing when a predetermined period of time (specifically 2 seconds) has elapsed since the execution of the predetermined Oden performance image display performance pattern has started, Oden points will be increased or decreased between the left earned Oden point display area and the right earned Oden point display area. If the Oden points shown by the Oden point increase/decrease image that is displayed is added and the calculated Oden points are 0 (for example, if the Oden point increase image is 1 and the Oden point decrease image is 0). (if one is displayed), the cumulative oden points displayed in the cumulative oden point display area do not change.

In this production example, the left oden production image is displayed at a timing when a predetermined period of time (specifically, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the execution of the oden production image display production pattern 04 shown in FIG. 396(A) is started. By displaying the oden point increase/decrease image in any of the display areas from the area to the right oden performance image display area, the oden points indicated by the oden point increase/decrease image are added. The oden point increase/decrease image displayed is only the oden point increase image showing symbols and numbers such as "+1" displayed in the left oden effect image display area.

Further, since the value of the cumulative oden points is "0", the character string attached to the cumulative oden point display area is "0 points!".

As a result, the addition/subtraction oden point value "+1" is added to the cumulative oden point value "0", so that the new cumulative oden point value becomes "+1".

As a result, in the display state shown in FIG. 396(B) after a predetermined period of time (specifically, 3 seconds) has passed since the execution of the oden presentation image display effect pattern 04 shown in FIG. 396(A) has started, , the character string attached to the cumulative oden point display area is "1 point!".

The display state at the timing when a predetermined period of time (specifically, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the execution of the predetermined oden production image display production pattern started, is the timing at which the display state continues for a predetermined period of time (specifically, 1 second), Execution of the predetermined oden performance image display performance pattern is completed.

In this production example, the display state at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of execution of the oden production image display production pattern 04 shown in FIG. B), and after the display state shown in FIG. 396(B) continues for a predetermined period of time (specifically, 1 second), Oden performance image display performance pattern 04 is executed. is the end.

After the execution of the predetermined oden production image display production pattern is completed, when the next predetermined oden production image display production pattern is executed, the oden image display production interval continues for a predetermined period of time (specifically, 1 second). It will be done.

Specifically, at the same time as the oden image display performance interval starts, the oden performance image in the oden performance image display area that is being displayed according to a predetermined oden performance image display performance pattern that has finished execution. Then, the oden point increase/decrease image in the acquired oden point display area is not displayed.

In addition, at the same time as the oden image display performance interval starts, the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern that are temporarily stopped and displayed due to the predetermined oden performance image display performance pattern that has finished execution will be lowered again. The screen is displayed in a variable manner as if scrolling in the direction. In the variable display that restarts from the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the decorative pattern scrolls downward until the next predetermined oden effect image display pattern is executed and the display is temporarily stopped. The variable display state is maintained.

In this performance example, the oden image display performance interval starts as the execution of the oden performance image display performance pattern 04 ends. At the same time as the oden image display effect interval starts, the oden image in the left oden effect image display area and the oden point increase image in the left acquired oden point display area are displayed, as shown in FIG. 396(B). It will be in a state where it is not.

Also, at the same time as the oden image display effect interval starts, the oden effect image display effect pattern 04, which has finished executing, changes the decorative pattern with the number "5" as the left decorative pattern to the number "5" as the middle decorative pattern. The left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, where the decorative pattern with the number ``6'' and the right decorative pattern with the number ``6'' were temporarily stopped and displayed, are displayed in a variable manner. The current state will be resumed.

The variable display restarted from the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is such that each decorative pattern shown in FIG. 396(D) is temporarily stopped after execution of Oden performance image display performance pattern 09 shown in FIG. 396(C) is started. The variable display state in which the decorative pattern scrolls downward and is displayed is maintained until the state is reached.

FIG. 396(C) shows a state immediately after execution of oden performance image display performance pattern 09, which is the second oden performance image display performance pattern, has started in the "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" performance.

At this time, the oden performance image display performance pattern is Oden performance image display performance pattern 09, so the left oden performance image display area displays the oden image, the middle oden performance image display area displays the angry face image, and the right oden performance image display area displays the oden image. Angry face images are displayed in the effect image display area in front of each decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner.

Further, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are maintained in a variable display state in which the decorative pattern scrolls downward and is displayed moving. In addition, as the "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" effect starts in the state shown in FIG. 396(A), the character string "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" attached in the production mode display area continues. The displayed state is maintained. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 396(B), the character string "1 point!" attached to the cumulative oden point display area remains displayed continuously. Moreover, the oden point increase/decrease image is not displayed in the acquired oden point display area.

When a predetermined period of time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed since the execution of oden performance image display performance pattern 09 shown in FIG. The state changes to a state where a temporary stop is displayed. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "3" added as a left decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number "4" added as a middle decorative pattern, and a decoration with the number "4" added as a right decorative pattern. The symbols change from a state in which they are being displayed in a variable manner to a state in which they are temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, in the state shown in FIG. 396(C), each oden effect image displayed in each oden effect image display area is displayed in front of each decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed. The condition continues.

Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time (specifically 1.5 seconds) has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. A decorative pattern with the number "3" added thereto as a left decorative pattern is displayed in front of the oden image displayed in the left oden effect image display area. As a result, in the oden performance image display area, the oden image in the left oden performance image display area is no longer visible, the middle oden performance image display area displays an angry face image, and the right oden performance image display area displays an angry face image. The state is as follows.

Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time (specifically 2 seconds) has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. Corresponding to the image display area where each angry face image is displayed, in the acquired oden point display area, the medium acquired oden point display area displays "-1" indicating that the oden point decreases by 1 point. The Oden point reduction image showing symbols and numbers such as "-1" indicating that Oden points will be reduced by 1 point is displayed in the right acquired Oden point display area. becomes.

At this time, the Oden point increase/decrease image displayed in the acquired Oden point display area is the Oden point decrease image that shows "-1" in the middle acquired Oden point display area, and the Oden point decrease image that shows "-1" in the right acquired Oden point display area. Accordingly, the value of the added and subtracted acquired oden points in the oden performance image display performance pattern 09 is "-2", which is the sum of "-1" and "-1".

In addition, since the calculated value of the added and subtracted Oden points is "-2" and a value other than "0", additions are made to the value of the cumulative Oden points shown in the cumulative Oden point display area. . In the state shown in FIG. 396(C), the character string attached to the cumulative oden point display area is "1 point!", so the value of the cumulative oden point is "1", and this value On the other hand, by adding "-2" which is the value of the added/subtracted acquired oden points in the oden performance image display performance pattern 09, the new cumulative oden point value becomes "-1".

As a result, in the state shown in FIG. 396(D), which is the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 396(C), the total oden points display area is The character string will be "-1 point!".

FIG. 396(D) shows the display state at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 09 shown in FIG. 396(C) started. There is.

Specifically, from the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the decorative pattern with the number "3" attached as the left decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern with the number "4" attached as the middle decorative pattern, as the right decorative pattern. The decorative patterns with the number "4" are temporarily stopped and displayed.

Further, in the oden effect image display area, an angry face image is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area, and an angry face image is displayed in the right oden effect image display area.

In addition, in the acquired Oden point display area, an Oden point reduction image showing a symbol and number such as "-1" indicating that Oden points are decreased by 1 point is displayed in the middle acquired Oden point display area, and in the right acquired Oden point display area. Oden point reduction images showing symbols such as "-1" and numbers indicating that Oden points are reduced by 1 point are displayed.

Further, in the cumulative oden point display area, a character string such as "-1 point!" is attached.

After the display state shown in FIG. 396(D) continues for a predetermined period of time (specifically, 1 second), this is the second time of the oden performance image display performance pattern in the "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" performance. The execution of the oden performance image display performance pattern 09 is completed.

After the display state shown in FIG. 396(D) continues for a predetermined period of time (specifically, 1 second), the oden image display effect interval ends as the execution of oden effect image display effect pattern 09 ends. will be started.

At the same time as the oden image display effect interval starts, the angry face image in the middle oden effect image display area, the angry face image in the right oden effect image display area, and the middle image shown in FIG. 396(D) are displayed. The oden point reduction image in the oden point display area and the oden point reduction image in the right acquired oden point display area are not displayed.

In addition, at the same time as the oden image display effect interval starts, the oden effect image display effect pattern 09, which has finished executing, changes the decorative pattern with the number "3" as the left decorative pattern to the number "3" as the middle decorative pattern. The left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, in which the decorative pattern with the number ``4'' and the decorative pattern with the number ``4'' as the right decorative pattern were temporarily stopped, are displayed in a variable manner. The current state will be resumed.

The variable display restarted from the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is such that each decorative pattern shown in FIG. 396(F) is temporarily stopped after execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 10 shown in FIG. 396(E) is started. The variable display state in which the decorative pattern scrolls downward and is displayed is maintained until the state is reached.

FIG. 396(E) shows the state immediately after the execution of the oden performance image display performance pattern 10, which is the third time of the oden performance image display performance pattern in the "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" performance, is started.

At this time, the oden performance image display performance pattern is Oden performance image display performance pattern 10, so that the left oden performance image display area displays the oden image, the middle oden performance image display area displays the angry face image, and the right oden performance image display area displays the oden image. In the effect image display area, the oden image is displayed in front of each decorative pattern that is displayed in a variable display state.

Further, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are maintained in a variable display state in which the decorative pattern scrolls downward and is displayed moving. In addition, as the "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" effect starts in the state shown in FIG. 396(A), the character string "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" attached in the production mode display area continues. The displayed state is maintained. Furthermore, in the state shown in FIG. 396(D), the character string "-1 point!" attached to the cumulative oden point display area continues to be displayed. Moreover, the oden point increase/decrease image is not displayed in the acquired oden point display area.

When a predetermined period of time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed since the execution of the oden performance image display performance pattern 10 shown in FIG. The state changes to a state where a temporary stop is displayed. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "1" added as a left decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number "2" added as a middle decorative pattern, and a decoration with the number "2" added as a right decorative pattern. The symbols change from a state in which they are being displayed in a variable manner to a state in which they are temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, in the state shown in FIG. 396(E), each oden effect image displayed in each oden effect image display area is displayed in front of each decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed. The condition continues.

Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time (specifically 1.5 seconds) has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. A decorative pattern with the number "2" added thereto as a medium decorative pattern is displayed in front of the angry face image displayed in the medium effect image display area. As a result, in the oden effect image display area, the angry face image in the middle oden effect image display area is no longer visible, the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, and the oden image is displayed in the right oden effect image display area. The state is as follows.

Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time (specifically 2 seconds) has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. Corresponding to the state where each oden image is displayed in the display area, in the acquired oden point display area, the left acquired oden point display area has a symbol such as "+1" indicating that the oden point increases by 1 point. The Oden point increase image showing a number is displayed in the right acquired Oden point display area, and the Oden point increase image showing a symbol such as "+1" indicating that the Oden point increases by 1 point and a number are respectively displayed.

At this time, the Oden point increase/decrease image displayed in the acquired Oden point display area is the Oden point increase image that shows "+1" in the left acquired Oden point display area, and the Oden point increase image that shows "+1" in the right acquired Oden point display area. Since it is an Oden point increase image, the value of the added and subtracted Oden points in the Oden effect image display effect pattern 10 is ``+2'' which is the sum of ``+1'' and ``+1''.

Furthermore, since the calculated value of the added/subtracted acquired oden points is "+2", which is a value other than "0", addition is performed to the value of the cumulative oden points shown in the cumulative oden point display area. In the state shown in FIG. 396(E), the character string attached to the cumulative oden point display area is "-1 point!", so the value of the cumulative oden point is "-1", and this By adding "+2", which is the value of addition/subtraction oden points in the oden performance image display performance pattern 10, to the value, the new cumulative oden point value becomes "1".

As a result, in the state shown in FIG. 396(D), which is the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 396(E), the total oden points display area is The character string will be ``1 point!''.

FIG. 396(F) shows the display state at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 10 shown in FIG. 396(E) started. There is.

Specifically, from the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the decorative pattern with the number "1" added as the left decorative pattern, the decorative pattern with the number "2" added as the middle decorative pattern, as the right decorative pattern. The decorative patterns with the number "2" are temporarily stopped and displayed.

Further, in the oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, and the oden image is displayed in the right oden effect image display area.

In addition, in the acquired Oden point display area, the left acquired Oden point display area shows an Oden point increase image showing symbols and numbers such as "+1" indicating that Oden points increase by 1 point, and the right acquired Oden point display area shows Oden points. Oden point increase images showing symbols and numbers such as "+1" indicating that the number increases by one point are displayed.

Further, in the cumulative oden point display area, a character string such as "1 point!" is attached.

After the display state shown in FIG. 396(F) continues for a predetermined period of time (specifically, 1 second), this is the third time of the oden performance image display performance pattern in the "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" performance. The execution of the oden performance image display performance pattern 10 is completed.

After the display state shown in FIG. 396(F) continues for a predetermined period of time (specifically, 1 second), the execution of the oden image display effect pattern 10 is completed, and the oden image display effect interval is changed. will be started.

At the same time as the oden image display effect interval starts, the oden image in the left oden effect image display area, the oden image in the right oden effect image display area, and the left acquired oden points are displayed as shown in FIG. 396(F). The Oden point increase image in the display area and the Oden point increase image in the right acquired Oden point display area are not displayed.

In addition, at the same time as the oden image display effect interval starts, the oden effect image display effect pattern 10 that has finished executing changes the decorative pattern with the number "1" as the left decorative pattern to the number "1" as the middle decorative pattern. The left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, where the decorative pattern with the number "2" and the right decorative pattern with the number "2" were temporarily stopped and displayed, are all displayed in a variable manner. The current state will be resumed.

The variable display restarted from the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is such that each decorative pattern shown in FIG. 396(H) is temporarily stopped after execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 08 shown in FIG. 396(G) is started. The variable display state in which the decorative pattern scrolls downward and is displayed is maintained until the state is reached.

FIG. 396(G) shows a state immediately after execution of oden performance image display performance pattern 08, which is the fourth time of the oden performance image display performance pattern, in the "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" performance is started.

At this time, since the oden performance image display performance pattern is Oden performance image display performance pattern 08, the oden image is displayed in the left oden performance image display area, the oden image is displayed in the middle oden performance image display area, and the oden image is displayed in the right oden performance image display area. In the image display area, oden images are displayed in front of each decorative pattern displayed in a variable display state.

Further, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are maintained in a variable display state in which the decorative pattern scrolls downward and is displayed moving. In addition, as the "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" effect starts in the state shown in FIG. 396(A), the character string "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" attached in the production mode display area continues. The displayed state is maintained. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 396(F), the character string "1 point!" attached to the cumulative oden point display area remains displayed continuously. Moreover, the oden point increase/decrease image is not displayed in the acquired oden point display area.

When a predetermined period of time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed since the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 08 shown in FIG. The state changes to a state where a temporary stop is displayed. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number ``6'' added as a left decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number ``7'' added as a middle decorative pattern, and a decoration with the number ``7'' added as a right decorative pattern. The symbols change from a state in which they are being displayed in a variable manner to a state in which they are temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, in the state shown in FIG. 396(G), each oden effect image displayed in each oden effect image display area is displayed in front of each decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed. The condition continues.

Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time (specifically 1.5 seconds) has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 396(G), an arbitrary decorative pattern is displayed on the front side of the oden production image. As a result, the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area, and the oden image is displayed in the right oden effect image display area. Each of them will be displayed.

Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time (specifically 2 seconds) has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. Corresponding to the fact that the display area is displaying an oden image and the right oden performance image display area is displaying an oden image, in the acquired oden point display area, the left acquired oden point display area has 1 oden point. The Oden point increase image shows a symbol such as "+1" and a number indicating that the Oden points will increase. However, in the right acquired oden point display area, an oden point increase image showing a symbol such as "+1" and a number indicating that the oden point increases by 1 point is displayed.

At this time, the Oden point increase/decrease image displayed in the acquired Oden point display area is the Oden point increase image that shows "+1" in the left acquired Oden point display area, and the Oden point increase image that shows "+1" in the middle acquired Oden point display area. Oden point increase image and Oden point increase image that shows "+1" in the right acquired Oden point display area, the values of addition and subtraction acquired Oden points in Oden performance image display performance pattern 08 are "+1" and "+1". ” and “+1”, which is the sum of “+3”.

Further, since the calculated value of the added/subtracted acquired oden points is "+3" and is a value other than "0", addition is performed to the value of the cumulative oden points shown in the cumulative oden point display area. In the state shown in FIG. 396(G), the character string attached to the cumulative oden point display area is "1 point!", so the value of the cumulative oden point is "1", and this value On the other hand, by adding "+3" which is the value of the added/subtracted oden points in the oden performance image display performance pattern 08, the new total oden point value becomes "4".

As a result, in the state shown in FIG. 396(H), which is the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 396(G), the total oden points display area is The character string will be ``4 points!''.

FIG. 396(H) shows the display state at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 08 shown in FIG. 396(G) started. There is.

Specifically, from the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the decorative pattern with the number "6" added as the left decorative pattern, the decorative pattern with the number "7" added as the middle decoration pattern, as the right decorative pattern. The decorative patterns with the number "7" are temporarily stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area, and the oden image is displayed in the right oden effect image display area. There is.

In addition, in the acquired Oden point display area, the left acquired Oden point display area shows an Oden point increase image showing a symbol and number such as "+1" indicating that Oden points increase by 1 point, and the middle acquired Oden point display area shows Oden points. The Oden point increase image shows a symbol and number such as "+1" indicating that Oden points increase by 1 point, and the right Oden point display area shows a symbol and number such as "+1" indicating that Oden point increases by 1 point. Each image with increased points is displayed.

Further, in the cumulative oden point display area, a character string such as "4 points!" is attached.

After the display state shown in FIG. 396(H) continues for a predetermined period of time (specifically, 1 second), the fourth oden performance image display performance pattern in the "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" performance, The execution of the oden performance image display performance pattern 08 ends.

After the execution of a predetermined oden production image display performance pattern is completed, if the next predetermined oden production image display performance pattern is not executed, the oden image display performance end interval is set for a predetermined period of time (specifically, 1 second). ).

Specifically, at the same time as the oden image display effect end interval starts, the oden effect image in the oden effect image display area is displayed according to a predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern that has finished execution. Then, the oden point increase/decrease image in the acquired oden point display area is not displayed.

Further, as the "Oden x shop owner time!" performance starts, the character string "Oden x shop owner time!" attached in the performance mode display area continues to be displayed.

In addition, after the execution of a predetermined Oden performance image display performance pattern is completed, if the next predetermined Oden performance image display performance pattern is not executed, “XX points! ” continues to be displayed.

In addition, at the same time as the Oden image display performance end interval starts, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern that are temporarily stopped and displayed according to the predetermined Oden performance image display performance pattern that has finished execution are The state in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner is resumed. This variable display restarts from the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, as the reach state occurs, and the decorative pattern to which the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern each have the same arbitrary number becomes temporarily stopped. The variable display state in which the decorative pattern scrolls downward and is displayed is maintained until it becomes .

In this performance example, as the execution of the oden performance image display performance pattern 08 is completed, the next oden performance image display performance pattern is not executed, and an oden image display performance end interval is started. At the same time as the oden image display effect end interval starts, the oden image in the left oden effect image display area and the oden point increase image in the left acquired oden point display area are displayed, as shown in FIG. 396(H). It will be in a state where it will not be done.

In addition, as the "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" effect starts in the state shown in FIG. 396(A), the character string "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" attached in the production mode display area continues. The displayed state is maintained.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 396(H), the character string "4 points!" attached to the cumulative oden point display area remains displayed continuously.

In addition, at the same time as the oden image display effect end interval starts, the oden effect image display effect pattern 08 that has finished execution changes the decorative pattern with the number "6" as the left decorative pattern to the number "6" as the middle decorative pattern. The left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, where the decorative pattern with the number "7" and the right decorative pattern with the number "7" were temporarily stopped and displayed, are all displayed in a fluctuating manner. The current state will be resumed.

The oden image display effect end interval continues for a predetermined period of time (specifically, 1 second). When a predetermined period of time (specifically 1 second) has elapsed after the end of the oden image display performance end interval, a decorative pattern with a predetermined number as a left decorative pattern will be temporarily stopped from being displayed in a fluctuating state. The state will be as follows. Next, when a predetermined period of time (specifically 2 seconds) has elapsed after the end of the oden image display performance end interval, the same predetermined right decorative pattern as the one temporarily stopped and displayed on the left decorative pattern is displayed as the right decorative pattern. The decorative pattern with the number changes from being displayed in a fluctuating state to being temporarily stopped, and a reach state occurs. Further, at the timing when the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed, the middle decorative pattern is maintained in a fluctuating display state in which it is scrolled and moved downward.

When a predetermined period of time (specifically, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the ready-to-win state has occurred, the medium decorative pattern changes from a state in which it is being fluctuated to a state in which it stops fluctuating.

Specifically, if the special lottery result that triggered the start of "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" is a loss, a temporary stop is displayed on the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern as the middle decorative pattern. A decorative pattern with a number that is not the same as a decorative pattern with a predetermined number of the state is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, a decoration with the same number as the decorative pattern with a predetermined number that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern as the middle decorative pattern. The pattern will be stopped and displayed.

With reference to FIGS. 396(A) to 396(H), an example of a performance in which the oden performance image display performance pattern is executed four times and "4" is finally displayed as the value of the cumulative oden points has been described. It is preferable to configure the game system so that the expectation level of the jackpot is indicated by the player based on the value of the cumulative oden points.

Specifically, based on the results of the special lottery, we will determine whether or not to execute the “Oden x Shopkeeper Time!” performance, and what the final value of the cumulative Oden points will be at the end of the “Oden x Shopkeeper Time!” performance. First, determine what value will be obtained. Next, how many times to execute the oden effect image display effect pattern, in what order to execute the oden effect image display effect pattern, and in each oden effect pattern, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the oden effect image (oden image , angry face image) to be displayed on the front side or the back side of the decorative pattern may be determined based on the final value of the total oden points.

It may be configured such that the higher the final value of the cumulative oden points, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. For example, the final value of the cumulative oden points may be configured to take a value from "-3" to "10". In this case, when the value of the cumulative oden points is between "-3" and "0", it is preferable to configure the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a loss without forming a reach state. In addition, when the value of the cumulative Oden points is between "1" and "10", the decorative pattern forms a reach state, and the formed reach state indicates a jackpot by multiplying the cumulative Oden points by 10. It may be configured such that the expectation level is stopped and displayed as a result. For example, when the final value of the cumulative oden points is "4", the expectation level of jackpot in the next reach state may be set to 40%.

Note that the number of times the oden performance image display performance pattern is executed is preferably determined with a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) as the upper limit. If the upper limit of the number of times the Oden performance image display performance pattern is executed is set to 4, if the Oden performance image display performance pattern is executed once, and if the Oden performance image display performance pattern is executed twice, the Oden performance image display performance pattern will be executed twice. When the effect image display effect pattern is executed three times, or when the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed four times, either will be selected based on the special lottery result.

Furthermore, at the start of the "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" performance (for example, the display state shown in FIG. 396(A)), the number of times the oden performance image display performance pattern will be executed is displayed in the display area, etc. so that the player can It is preferable to configure the system so that the information is notified. In this case, the more times the oden performance image display performance pattern is executed, the higher the final value of the cumulative oden points may become. This creates a sense of expectation. Note that the final value of the total oden points may be configured to be larger as the number of times the oden effect image display effect pattern is actually executed is larger.

With such a configuration, it is possible to concretely know the jackpot expectation level based on the displayed number of points. The number of points increases or decreases each time a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the temporarily stopped display of the decorative pattern.

With reference to FIGS. 395 and 396, an embodiment was shown in which an oden image and an angry face image are displayed as the oden performance image, but only the oden image or only the angry face image is displayed as the oden performance image. An embodiment in which the effect can be executed will be described below with reference to FIGS. 397, 398, and 399.

Note that the various embodiments described below are basically modified versions of FIGS. 395 and 396, so the modified configurations will be particularly explained, but the configurations that will not be described are basically modified from FIGS. 395 and 396. This is similar to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 396.

FIG. 397(A) is a diagram showing a table in which a production pattern that can execute a "Super Oden Time!" production, which is a production in which only an oden image is displayed as an oden production image, is defined. Further, FIG. 398 is a diagram showing the display state in the display area when the "Super Oden Time!" effect is executed. Specifically, FIGS. 398(A) to 398(H) show display examples in chronological order when "Super Oden Time!" is executed as a performance corresponding to the hold. That is, in FIG. 398(A), FIG. 398(B), FIG. 398(C), FIG. 398(D), FIG. 398(E), FIG. 398(F), FIG. 398(G), and FIG. 398(H). The performance progresses in order.

As shown in FIG. 397(A), in the "Super Oden Time!" effect, only the oden image is displayed as the oden effect image.

FIGS. 398(A) and 398(B) are presentation examples when the oden presentation image display presentation pattern 03 is selected in the “Super Oden Time!” presentation.

Further, FIGS. 398(C) and 398(D) are presentation examples when the oden presentation image display presentation pattern 03 is selected in the “Super Oden Time!” presentation.

Further, FIGS. 398(E) and 398(F) are presentation examples when the oden presentation image display presentation pattern 04 is selected in the “Super Oden Time!” presentation.

Furthermore, FIGS. 398(G) and 398(H) are presentation examples when the oden presentation image display presentation pattern 04 is selected in the “Super Oden Time!” presentation.

In this way, the configuration may be such that the cumulative oden points do not decrease. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming disappointed due to a decrease in the cumulative oden points.

FIG. 397(B) is a diagram showing a table in which a production pattern that can execute the "Shop owner rage time!" production, which is a production in which only an angry face image is displayed as an oden production image, is defined. Further, FIG. 399 is a diagram showing the display state in the display area when the "Shopkeeper Furious Time!" effect is executed. Specifically, FIGS. 399(A) to 399(H) show display examples in chronological order when "Shopkeeper Furious Time!" is executed as a performance corresponding to the hold. That is, in FIG. 399(A), FIG. 399(B), FIG. 399(C), FIG. 399(D), FIG. 399(E), FIG. 399(F), FIG. 399(G), and FIG. 399(H). The performance progresses in order.

As shown in FIG. 397(B), in the "Shop owner furious time!" performance, only an angry face image is displayed as the oden performance image.
FIG. 399(A) and FIG. 399(B) are production examples when the oden production image display production pattern 03 is selected in the "Shop owner furious time!" production.
Further, FIGS. 399(C) and 399(D) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the effect "Shop owner furious time!".
Furthermore, FIGS. 399(E) and 399(F) are presentation examples when the oden presentation image display presentation pattern 02 is selected in the “shopkeeper rage time!” presentation.
Furthermore, FIGS. 399(G) and 399(H) are presentation examples when the oden presentation image display presentation pattern 04 is selected in the “Shopkeeper Furious Time!” presentation.

In addition, in the "Shopkeeper rage time!" display, the display in the cumulative oden point display area starts from "10 points remaining!", and the angry face image is displayed in front of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern. It is structured so that the cumulative oden points gradually decrease.

In this way, the configuration may be such that the cumulative oden points do not increase. In this case, the player visually confirms the "Shopkeeper Furious Time!" performance while hoping that the cumulative oden points will not decrease.

With reference to FIGS. 395 and 396, an embodiment has been shown in which the oden effect image is displayed a predetermined number of times while the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. An executable modified embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 400, 401, and 402.

In this embodiment, "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!", "Super Oden Time!", and "Shopkeeper Fury Time!" are configured to be executed as pre-read performances corresponding to the winning of game balls in the first starting opening 2002. are doing.

Specifically, it may be configured to determine whether or not to perform these pre-read effects based on the special lottery result obtained when a game ball wins in the first starting hole 2002 and held.

Figures 400 (A) to 400 (H) are tables when the "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" performance is executed as a look-ahead performance for a predetermined hold (the third hold in the diagram of Figure 400 (A)). Examples are shown in chronological order. That is, in FIG. 400(A), FIG. 400(B), FIG. 400(C), FIG. 400(D), FIG. 400(E), FIG. 400(F), FIG. 400(G), and FIG. 400(H). The pre-reading performance progresses in order.

FIG. 400(A) and FIG. 400(B) are presentation examples when the oden presentation image display presentation pattern 04 is selected in the “Oden x Shopkeeper Time!” presentation.

In addition, when executing the "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" effect as a look-ahead effect, the oden effect image is always displayed in front of the decorative pattern while the decorative pattern is changing, and the oden effect image is always displayed in front of the decorative pattern while the decorative pattern is stopped changing. The effect image is displayed on the front side or the back side of the decorative pattern, the oden point increase/decrease image is displayed in accordance with the display mode of the oden effect image, and the cumulative oden points are updated in accordance with the displayed oden point increase/decrease image. It is recommended to configure it as follows. 400(A), FIG. 400(C), FIG. 400(E), and FIG. 400(G) show the display state when the decorative pattern is changing. F) shows a display state in which decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. In addition, in FIG. 400 (H), each decorative pattern is in a temporary stop state, and from this state, each decorative pattern changes again to form a reach state, and then the display mode shows either a jackpot or a loss. The display will stop at .

Further, FIGS. 400(C) and 400(D) are presentation examples when the oden presentation image display presentation pattern 14 is selected in the “Oden x Shopkeeper Time!” presentation.

Further, FIGS. 400(E) and 400(F) are presentation examples when the oden presentation image display presentation pattern 10 is selected in the “Oden x Shopkeeper Time!” presentation.

Further, FIGS. 400(G) and 400(H) are presentation examples when the oden presentation image display presentation pattern 08 is selected in the “Oden x Shopkeeper Time!” presentation.

In addition, it is preferable to configure the system so that the final value of the cumulative oden points indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the variation of the decorative pattern corresponding to the starting prize that triggered the start of the look-ahead presentation will be displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot. .

In this way, by increasing and decreasing the cumulative oden points over a plurality of variable displays, it is possible to arouse the player's interest in the manner in which the decorative symbols stop.

Figures 401(A) to 401(H) show display examples when "Super Oden Time!" is executed as a look-ahead effect for a predetermined hold (the third hold in the diagram of Figure 401(A)). Shown in chronological order. That is, the look-ahead effect progresses in the order of Figure 401(A), Figure 401(B), Figure 401(C), Figure 401(D), Figure 401(E), Figure 401(F), and Figure 401(G). To go.

FIGS. 401(A) and 401(B) are presentation examples when the oden presentation image display presentation pattern 03 is selected in the “Super Oden Time!” presentation.

In addition, when executing the "Super Oden Time!" effect as a look-ahead effect, the oden effect image is always displayed in front of the decorative pattern while the decorative pattern is fluctuating, and the oden effect image is always displayed in front of the decorative pattern while the decorative pattern is stopped changing. The image will be displayed on the front or back side of the decorative pattern, the Oden point increase/decrease image will be displayed in accordance with the display mode of the Oden production image, and the cumulative Oden points will be updated in accordance with the displayed Oden point increase/decrease image. It is recommended to configure 401(A), FIG. 401(C), FIG. 401(E), and FIG. 401(G) show the display state when the decorative pattern is changing. F) shows a display state in which decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. In addition, in FIG. 401 (H), each decorative pattern is in a temporary stop state, and after this state, each decorative pattern changes again to form a reach state, and then the display mode shows either a jackpot or a loss. The display will stop at .

Further, FIGS. 401(C) and 401(D) are presentation examples when the oden presentation image display presentation pattern 03 is selected in the “Super Oden Time!” presentation.

Further, FIGS. 401(E) and 401(F) are presentation examples when the oden presentation image display presentation pattern 04 is selected in the “Super Oden Time!” presentation.

Further, FIGS. 401(G) and 401(H) are presentation examples when the oden presentation image display presentation pattern 04 is selected in the “Super Oden Time!” presentation.

In addition, it is preferable to configure the system so that the final value of the cumulative oden points indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the variation of the decorative pattern corresponding to the starting prize that triggered the start of the look-ahead presentation will be displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot. .

Figures 402(A) to 402(H) show display examples when "Shopkeeper Fury Time!" is executed as a look-ahead effect for a predetermined hold (the third hold in the diagram of Figure 402(A)). Shown in chronological order. That is, the look-ahead effect progresses in the order of Figure 402(A), Figure 402(B), Figure 402(C), Figure 402(D), Figure 402(E), Figure 402(F), and Figure 402(G). To go.

FIG. 402(A) and FIG. 402(B) are production examples when the oden production image display production pattern 03 is selected in the "Shop owner furious time!" production.

In addition, when executing the "Shopkeeper Furious Time!" effect as a look-ahead effect, the oden effect image will always be displayed in front of the decorative pattern while the decorative pattern is fluctuating, and the oden effect image will be displayed while the decorative pattern is stopped changing. The image will be displayed on the front or back side of the decorative pattern, the Oden point increase/decrease image will be displayed in accordance with the display mode of the Oden production image, and the cumulative Oden points will be updated in accordance with the displayed Oden point increase/decrease image. It is recommended to configure 402(A), FIG. 402(C), FIG. 402(E), and FIG. 402(G) show the display state when the decorative pattern is changing. F) shows a display state in which decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. In addition, in FIG. 402 (H), each decorative pattern is in a temporary stop state, and after this state, each decorative pattern changes again to form a reach state, and then the display mode shows either a jackpot or a loss. The display will stop at .

Furthermore, FIGS. 402(C) and 402(D) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the effect of "Shop owner furious time!".

Furthermore, FIGS. 402(E) and 402(F) are presentation examples when the oden presentation image display presentation pattern 02 is selected in the “Shopkeeper rage time!” presentation.

Furthermore, FIGS. 402(G) and 402(H) are presentation examples when the oden presentation image display presentation pattern 04 is selected in the “Shopkeeper Fury Time!” presentation.

In addition, it is preferable to configure the system so that the final value of the cumulative oden points indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the variation of the decorative pattern corresponding to the starting prize that triggered the start of the look-ahead presentation will be displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot. .

In the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 395 to 402, when displaying the temporarily stopped or stopped display of the decorative pattern in front of the oden effect image, the entire oden effect image is covered by the decorative pattern. However, by modifying these embodiments, when displaying a temporarily stopped or stopped displaying decorative pattern in front of the oden production image, a part of the oden production image can be hidden. may be configured so that it is visible.

403(A) to 403(C) show an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 402. This embodiment shows the display state when the oden performance image display performance pattern 04 is executed in "Shopkeeper Fury Time!".

FIG. 403(A) shows the display state at the timing when the execution of Oden performance image display performance pattern 04 is started, and FIG. 403(B) shows the display state after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the display state of FIG. 403(A). At the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, all angry face images are displayed in front of the decorative pattern in the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display area. ing. In addition, in FIG. 403(C), the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display is displayed at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of FIG. 403(A). In the area, a display state in which all angry face images are displayed behind the decorative pattern is shown.

As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, even if the angry face image is hidden by the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed, a part of the angry face image is visible to the player.

403(D) to 403(F) show an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 401. This embodiment shows the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is executed in "Super Oden Time!".

FIG. 403(D) shows the display state at the timing when the execution of Oden performance image display performance pattern 04 is started, and FIG. 403(E) shows the display state after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the display state of FIG. 403(D). At the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the display state is shown in which all the oden images are displayed in front of the decorative pattern in the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display area. There is. In addition, in FIG. 403(F), the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display is displayed at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of FIG. 403(D). In the area, a display state in which all the oden face images are displayed behind the decorative pattern is shown.

As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, even if the oden image is hidden by the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed, a part of the oden image is visible to the player.

By adopting such a configuration, before the decorative pattern is displayed temporarily or stopped, how many angry face images or oden images are displayed in the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display area. The player can check whether the information has been displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, when the oden image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern that has been temporarily stopped or stopped, the oden point increase image is displayed, and the cumulative oden point value is increased by "1". In this embodiment, when an angry face image is displayed in front of a decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped or stopped, an Oden point reduction image is displayed, and the cumulative Oden point value is reduced by "1". Although the embodiment has been described, the cumulative oden points may be configured to change when an oden image or an angry face image is displayed behind a decorative pattern that is displayed temporarily or stopped.

404(A) to 404(F) show an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 400. FIGS. 404(A) to 404(C) show the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 05 is executed in "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" in this embodiment. Further, FIGS. 404(D) to 404(F) show display states when the oden effect image display effect pattern 10 is executed in "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, when the oden image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed, the oden point increase image with the character string "+3" attached is displayed in the acquired oden point display area. Further, when an image of increasing oden points with the character string "+3" is displayed, the total oden points increase by 3.

Further, when an oden image is displayed behind the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed, an oden point reduction image with a character string "-1" attached is displayed in the acquired oden point display area. Further, when an oden point reduction image with a character string "-1" is displayed, the total oden points are reduced by 1.

Further, when an angry face image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed, an oden point reduction image with a character string "-3" attached is displayed in the acquired oden point display area. Further, when an oden point reduction image with a character string "-3" is displayed, the total oden points are reduced by 3.

Further, when the oden image is displayed behind the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed, the oden point increase image with the character string "+1" attached is displayed in the acquired oden point display area. Furthermore, when an image of increasing oden points with the character string "+1" is displayed, the total oden points increase by 1.

FIG. 404(A) shows the display state at the timing when the execution of the oden performance image display performance pattern 05 is started.

In FIG. 404(B), an angry face image is decorated in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of FIG. 404(A). This shows a display state in which an oden point reduction image is displayed in front of the symbol and has a character string "-3" attached in the left acquired oden point display area. In addition, in the medium oden performance image display area, the oden image will be displayed behind the decorative pattern, and in the medium earned oden point display area, an oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" will be displayed. This shows the current display state. It also shows a display state in which "-4 points!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In FIG. 404(C), the angry face image is displayed as the decorative pattern in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of FIG. 404(A). This shows a display state in which an oden point increase image is displayed behind the , and the left acquired oden point display area has the character string "+1" added to it. In addition, in the medium oden performance image display area, the oden image will be displayed behind the decorative pattern, and in the medium earned oden point display area, an oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" will be displayed. This shows the current display state. It also shows a display state in which "0 points!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

FIG. 404(D) shows the display state at the timing when the execution of the oden performance image display performance pattern 10 is started.

FIG. 404(E) shows that the oden image is displayed as a decorative pattern in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of FIG. 404(D). This shows a display state in which an oden point reduction image is displayed behind the , and a character string "-1" is attached in the left acquired oden point display area. In addition, in the medium oden performance image display area, an angry face image will be displayed in front of the decorative pattern, and in the medium earned oden point display area, an oden point reduction image with the character string "-3" will be displayed. This shows the display status. In addition, in the right Oden performance image display area, the Oden image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern, and in the right Oden point display area, an Oden point increase image with the character string "+3" is displayed. This shows the displayed state. It also shows a display state in which "-1 point!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

FIG. 404(F) shows that the oden image is displayed as a decorative pattern in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of FIG. 404(D). This shows a display state in which an oden point reduction image is displayed behind the , and a character string "-1" is attached in the left acquired oden point display area. In addition, in the medium oden performance image display area, an angry face image will be displayed behind the decorative pattern, and in the medium earned oden point display area, an oden point reduction image with the character string "+1" will be displayed. This shows the current display state. Also, in the right Oden production image display area, the Oden image will be displayed behind the decorative pattern, and in the right Oden point display area, an Oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" will be displayed. This shows the current display state. It also shows a display state in which "-1 point!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In this embodiment, even if the oden effect image is displayed behind the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed, the cumulative oden points are configured to increase or decrease. Therefore, the player pays attention to the display mode of all the displayed oden performance images, and it becomes possible to further improve the interest when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, even if the oden image or the angry face image is hidden by the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed, a part of the oden image or the angry face image is visible to the player. Further, depending on the shape of the visible portion, the player can determine whether the hidden oden performance image is an oden image or an angry face image.

Note that the oden image or the angry face image may be configured so that the entire oden image or angry face image is hidden by the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed.

405(A) to 405(F) show an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 401. 405(A) to 405(C) show the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is executed in "Super Oden Time!" in this embodiment. Further, FIGS. 405(D) to 405(F) show display states when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is executed in "Super Oden Time!" in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, when the oden image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed, the oden point increase image with the character string "+3" attached is displayed in the acquired oden point display area. Further, when an image of increasing oden points with the character string "+3" is displayed, the total oden points increase by 3.

Further, when an oden image is displayed behind the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed, an oden point reduction image with a character string "-1" attached is displayed in the acquired oden point display area. Further, when an oden point reduction image with a character string "-1" is displayed, the total oden points are reduced by 1.

FIG. 405(A) shows the display state at the timing when the execution of the oden performance image display performance pattern 02 is started.

FIG. 405(B) shows that the oden image changes to the decorative pattern in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of FIG. 405(A). This shows a display state in which an oden point increase image is displayed on the front side of , with the character string "+3" attached in the left acquired oden point display area. It also shows a display state in which "3 points!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In FIG. 405(C), the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of FIG. 405(A). This shows a display state in which an oden point reduction image is displayed on the rear side and has a character string "-1" attached in the left acquired oden point display area. It also shows a display state in which "-1 point!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

FIG. 405(D) shows the display state at the timing when the execution of the oden performance image display performance pattern 04 is started.

FIG. 405(E) shows that the oden image is displayed as a decorative pattern in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of FIG. 405(D). This shows a display state in which an oden point increase image is displayed on the front side of , with the character string "+3" attached in the left acquired oden point display area. In addition, in the medium oden performance image display area, the oden image will be displayed behind the decorative pattern, and in the medium earned oden point display area, an oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" will be displayed. This shows the current display state. Also, in the right Oden production image display area, the Oden image will be displayed behind the decorative pattern, and in the right Oden point display area, an Oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" will be displayed. This shows the current display state. It also shows a display state in which "1 point!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

FIG. 405(F) shows that the oden image changes to the decorative pattern in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of FIG. 405(D). This shows a display state in which an oden point reduction image is displayed behind the , and a character string "-1" is attached in the left acquired oden point display area. In addition, in the medium oden performance image display area, the oden image will be displayed behind the decorative pattern, and in the medium earned oden point display area, an oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" will be displayed. This shows the current display state. Also, in the right Oden production image display area, the Oden image will be displayed behind the decorative pattern, and in the right Oden point display area, an Oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" will be displayed. This shows the current display state. It also shows a display state in which "-3 points!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In this embodiment, when an oden image is displayed behind a decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed, the total oden points are reduced. Therefore, the player pays attention to the display mode of all the displayed oden images, making it possible to increase the player's interest. In addition, it is possible to make the player interested in how many oden images will be displayed and how many of the displayed oden images will be displayed in front of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed. .

406(A) to FIG. 406(F) show an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 402. FIGS. 406(A) to 406(C) show the display state when the oden performance image display performance pattern 02 is executed in "Shopkeeper rage time!" in this embodiment. Further, FIGS. 406(D) to 406(F) show the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is executed in "Shopkeeper Furious Time!" in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, when an angry face image is displayed in front of a decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed, an oden point reduction image with a character string "-3" attached is displayed in the acquired oden point display area. . Further, when an oden point reduction image with a character string "-3" is displayed, the total oden points are reduced by 3.

Further, when an angry face image is displayed behind the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed, an oden point increase image with a character string "+1" attached is displayed in the acquired oden point display area. Further, when an oden point reduction image with a character string "+1" is displayed, the total oden point increases by 1.

FIG. 406(A) shows the display state at the timing when the execution of the oden performance image display performance pattern 02 is started.

In FIG. 406(B), an angry face image is displayed as a decoration in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of FIG. 406(A). This shows a display state in which an oden point reduction image is displayed in front of the symbol and has a character string "-3" attached in the left acquired oden point display area. It also shows a display state in which "7 points remaining!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In FIG. 406(C), the angry face image is displayed as the decorative pattern in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of FIG. 406(A). This shows a display state in which an oden point increase image is displayed behind the , and the left acquired oden point display area has the character string "+1" added to it. It also shows a display state in which "11 points remaining!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

FIG. 406(D) shows the display state at the timing when the execution of the oden performance image display performance pattern 04 is started.

In FIG. 406(E), an angry face image is displayed as a decoration in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state in FIG. 406(D). This shows a display state in which an oden point reduction image is displayed in front of the symbol and has a character string "-3" attached in the left acquired oden point display area. In addition, in the medium oden performance image display area, an angry face image will be displayed behind the decorative pattern, and in the medium earned oden point display area, an oden point increase image with the character string "+1" will be displayed. This shows the current display state. Also, in the right Oden production image display area, an angry face image will be displayed behind the decorative pattern, and in the right Oden point display area, an Oden point increase image with the character string "+1" will be displayed. This shows the current display state. It also shows a display state in which "9 points remaining!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In FIG. 406(F), an angry face image is decorated in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of FIG. 406(D). This shows a display state in which an oden point increase image is displayed behind the symbol and has a character string "+1" attached in the left acquired oden point display area. In addition, in the medium oden performance image display area, an angry face image will be displayed behind the decorative pattern, and in the medium earned oden point display area, an oden point increase image with the character string "+1" will be displayed. This shows the current display state. Also, in the right Oden production image display area, an angry face image will be displayed behind the decorative pattern, and in the right Oden point display area, an Oden point increase image with the character string "+1" will be displayed. This shows the current display state. It also shows a display state in which "13 points remaining!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In this embodiment, when an angry face image is displayed behind the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed, the total oden points are increased. Therefore, the player pays attention to the display mode of all the displayed angry face images, making it possible to increase the player's interest. In addition, it is possible to make the player interested in how many angry face images will be displayed and how many of the displayed angry face images will be displayed behind the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed. becomes.

FIG. 407 shows an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 401.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 401, only an oden image imitating konnyaku was displayed as an oden effect image, but in this embodiment, as an oden effect image, a skewer It is configured to display images of different types of oden seeds stuck in the noodles. Note that in this embodiment, the presentation contents other than the oden presentation image may be configured in the same manner as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 401.

In this embodiment, when execution of the oden performance image display performance pattern 02 is started, an oden image imitating konnyaku is displayed in the left oden performance image display area. Further, a horizontally long skewer image imitating a skewer is displayed behind the oden image imitating konnyaku. In FIG. 408(A), an oden effect image that is displayed when execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is started is shown.

When execution of oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is started, an oden image imitating konjac is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, and an oden image imitating a rectangular radish is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area. An oden image is displayed. Moreover, a horizontally long skewer image imitating a skewer is displayed behind the oden image imitating konjac and the oden image imitating a radish. In FIG. 407(A), an oden effect image that is displayed when execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is started is shown.

When execution of oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is started, an oden image imitating konjac is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, and an oden image imitating a square radish is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area. An oden image is displayed, and an oden image imitating an elliptical paste is displayed in the right oden effect image display area. In addition, a horizontally long skewer image imitating a skewer is displayed behind the oden image imitating konjac, the oden image imitating a radish, and the oden image imitating a paste. In FIG. 407(E), an oden effect image that is displayed when execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is started is shown.

Figures 407(A) to 407(H) show display examples when "Super Oden Time!" is executed as a look-ahead effect for a predetermined hold (the third hold in the diagram of Figure 407(A)). Shown in chronological order. That is, the prefetch effect progresses in the order of FIG. 407(A), FIG. 407(B), FIG. 407(C), FIG. 407(D), FIG. 407(E), FIG. 407(F), and FIG. 407(G). To go.

FIGS. 407(A) and 407(B) are presentation examples when the oden presentation image display presentation pattern 03 is selected in the “Super Oden Time!” presentation.

407(A), FIG. 4075(C), FIG. 407(E), and FIG. 407(G) show the display state when the decorative pattern is changing. 407(F) shows a display state in which decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. In addition, in FIG. 407(H), each decorative pattern is in a temporarily stopped state, and after this state, each decorative pattern changes again to form a reach state, and then the display mode shows either a jackpot or a loss. The display will stop at .

Further, FIGS. 407(C) and 407(D) are presentation examples when the oden presentation image display presentation pattern 03 is selected in the “Super Oden Time!” presentation.

Further, FIGS. 407(E) and 407(F) are presentation examples when the oden presentation image display presentation pattern 04 is selected in the “Super Oden Time!” presentation.

Further, FIGS. 407(G) and 407(H) are presentation examples when the oden presentation image display presentation pattern 04 is selected in the “Super Oden Time!” presentation.

In this embodiment, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the image of the oden noodles and the image of the skewer as one performance display. Further, even if the oden seed image is hidden by the decorative pattern, the length of the skewer image corresponds to the number of oden seeds. With such a configuration, it is possible to know how many Oden types were displayed before the decorative pattern was stopped and displayed even after the decorative pattern was stopped and displayed.

408(A) to 408(F) show an embodiment in which the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 405 is applied to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 407.

FIGS. 408(A) to 408(C) show the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is executed in "Super Oden Time!" in this embodiment.

Further, FIGS. 408(D) to 408(F) show display states when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is executed in "Super Oden Time!" in this embodiment.

FIG. 408(A) shows the display state at the timing when the execution of the oden performance image display performance pattern 02 is started.

FIG. 408(B) shows an oden imitating konjac in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of FIG. 408(A). This shows a display state in which the image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and the oden point increase image with the character string "+3" attached is displayed in the left acquired oden point display area. It also shows a display state in which "3 points!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

FIG. 408(C) shows an oden image imitating konjac in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of FIG. 408(A). is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" attached is displayed in the left acquired oden point display area. It also shows a display state in which "-1 point!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

FIG. 408(D) shows the display state at the timing when the execution of the oden performance image display performance pattern 04 is started.

FIG. 408(E) shows an oden imitating konjac in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of FIG. 408(D). This shows a display state in which the image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and the oden point increase image with the character string "+3" attached is displayed in the left acquired oden point display area. In addition, in the medium oden performance image display area, an oden image imitating a radish is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and in the medium earned oden point display area, an oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed. This shows the current display state. In addition, in the right oden production image display area, an oden image imitating paste is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and in the right earned oden point display area, an oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed. This shows the current display state. It also shows a display state in which "1 point!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

FIG. 408(F) shows an oden imitating konjac in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of FIG. 408(D). This shows a display state in which an image is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and an oden point reduction image with a character string "-1" attached is displayed in the left obtained oden point display area. In addition, in the medium oden performance image display area, an oden image imitating a radish is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and in the medium earned oden point display area, an oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed. This shows the current display state. In addition, in the right oden production image display area, an oden image imitating paste is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and in the right earned oden point display area, an oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed. This shows the current display state. It also shows a display state in which "-3 points!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In this embodiment, when an oden image is displayed behind a decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed, the total oden points are reduced. Therefore, the player pays attention to the display mode of all the displayed oden images, making it possible to increase the player's interest. In addition, it is possible to make the player interested in how many oden images will be displayed and how many of the displayed oden images will be displayed in front of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed. .

In the display area provided by the display means, there are cases where the effect corresponding to the changing decorative pattern and the look-ahead effect are performed at the same time. The player's attention is directed to the effects corresponding to the decorative symbols, making the look-ahead effects less noticeable and the impact of the look-ahead effects becoming weaker. In particular, when changing the aspect of the look-ahead performance, there is a risk that the player may miss the changing aspect. In this way, look-ahead performances that suggest expectations by changing the display mode tend to lack impact, and there is a need to increase the impact of look-ahead performances.

In the embodiment shown below, at least a part of the predetermined effect image being displayed is once hidden by displaying another image in front of it, and then the entire predetermined effect image is hidden in front of the other image. The display mode of the predetermined effect image is changed in the state where the image is displayed.

With this configuration, the predetermined effect image becomes smaller, then larger, and then the display mode changes. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to visually recognize the information.

Below, examples of effects in this embodiment will be shown with reference to FIGS. 409 and 410. FIG. 409 is a time chart in this performance example, and FIG. 410 is a diagram showing the display state of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 at a predetermined timing in this performance example. In addition, there is no notice regarding the variable display mode of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the display mode of the pending image in the corresponding pending display area, the display mode of the pending image in the first pending display area to the fourth pending display area, etc. Insofar, the display mode is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 382.

FIG. 409 is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. Immediately before the timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is such that the decorative symbols have stopped fluctuating. FIG. 410(A) is a diagram showing this state, and shows a state in which decorative symbols numbered "3", "5", and "2" from the left are stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the holding display area, a perfectly circular and white held image is displayed, in the first holding display area, a perfectly circular and blue holding image is shown, and in the second holding display area, a perfectly circular and white holding image is displayed. In the third pending display area, a perfectly circular white pending image is displayed. Note that the white pending image displayed in the pending display area is a pending image corresponding to the decorative symbols with numbers "3", "5", and "2" that are displayed in a stopped state.

In this embodiment, in addition to a white pending image as a pending image, a blue pending image is used as a pending image indicating that the expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot is higher than a white pending image, It is possible to display a green pending image and a red pending image. In addition, the expectation level when the blue pending image is displayed is low expectation level, the expectation level when the green pending image is displayed is medium expectation level, and the expectation level when the red pending image is displayed. It is designed to have high expectations.

At timing t0 from the state where the decorative patterns shown in FIG. 410(A) are stopped and displayed, the variable display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is newly started.

At timing t7, a plurality of images imitating pine branches with leaves are displayed in an overlapping manner at the lower part of the display area, at the center in the left-right direction. Specifically, an image imitating a pine branch with three leaves on the bottom row, two leaves on the middle row, and one leaf on the top row is displayed. Hereinafter, these as a whole will be referred to as a pine mark group image.

The pine mark group image is displayed at a position overlapping the medium decoration pattern, and is displayed in front of the medium decoration pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner or in a stopped state. Furthermore, the pine mark group image has three transparent areas (openings) through which images located on the rear side can be visually recognized. Further, the pine mark group image is displayed at a position overlapping with the hold display area and the first hold display area. As will be described later, the pine mark group image, the said held image, and the held image displayed in the first held display area are the case where the pine mark group image is displayed on the front side, and the said held image and the first held display area. The display mode may be such that the reserved image displayed in the area is displayed on the front side.

At timing t7, when the display of the pine mark group image is started, the pine mark group image is displayed on the nearer side than the pending image and the pending image displayed in the first pending display area. FIG. 410(B) is a diagram showing the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t8) after the display of the pine mark group image is started at timing t7, and the pine mark group image is and a state in which the pending image is displayed in front of the pending image displayed in the first pending display area.

In this state, the blue pending image is hidden by the pine mark group image, and only a part of the blue pending image is visible. Specifically, in the three transparent areas that the pine mark group image has, the blue pending image located behind the pine mark group image is divided into three parts and can be visually recognized.

Further, the pending image displayed in the first pending display area is hidden by the pine mark group image, and only a part of the pending image displayed in the first pending display area is visible. Specifically, the pending image displayed in the first pending display area is divided into two parts that are visible in one transparent area of the pine mark group image and an area outside the pine mark group image. .

At timing t9, the display priority of the pine mark group image and the held image displayed in the held image and the first held display area is switched, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the held image and the first held display area. The state in which the pending image and the pending image displayed in the first pending display area are displayed in front of the pine mark group image changes from the state where the pending image is displayed in front of the pine mark group image.

FIG. 410(C) shows a predetermined timing (timing 9 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (between t9 and timing t10). FIG. In this state, the entire blue pending image is visible. Furthermore, the entire pending image displayed in the first pending display area is visible.

At timing t10, the green pending image is displayed in place of the blue pending image that had been displayed up until then. FIG. 410(D) is a diagram showing the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t11) after the state changes to a state in which the green pending image is displayed instead of the blue pending image at timing t10. It is.

At timing t17, the display priority of the pine mark group image and the held image and the held image displayed in the first held display area are switched, and the held image and the held image displayed in the first held display area are changed to pine mark group images. The state where the pine mark group image is displayed in front of the mark group image changes to the state where the pine mark group image is displayed in front of the pending image and the pending image displayed in the first pending display area.

FIG. 410(E) shows a predetermined timing (e.g. , timing t18), and shows a state in which the pine mark group image is displayed in front of the pending image and the pending image displayed in the first pending display area. In this state, a part of the green pending image located at the rear side is visible in the three transparent areas of the pine mark group image. Further, a part of the pending image displayed in the first pending display area is visible.

At timing t19, the display priority of the pine mark group image and the pending image displayed in the pending image and the first pending display area is switched, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the pending image and the first pending display area. The state in which the pending image and the pending image displayed in the first pending display area are displayed in front of the pine mark group image changes from the state where the pending image is displayed in front of the pine mark group image. FIG. 410(F) shows a predetermined timing (timing 9 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (between t19 and timing t20). FIG. In this state, the entire green pending image is visible. Furthermore, the entire pending image displayed in the first pending display area is visible.

At timing t20, the red pending image is displayed in place of the green pending image that had been displayed up until then. FIG. 410(G) is a diagram showing the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t21) after the state changes to a state in which the red pending image is displayed instead of the green pending image at timing t20. It is.

At timing t25, the decorative symbols with the number "2" attached thereto as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and a ready-to-win state occurs. At this time, the medium decorative pattern is maintained in a fluctuating display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed. Furthermore, at timing t25, the display of the pine mark group images that had been displayed until then ends. FIG. 410(H) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the reach state occurs and the display of the pine mark group image ends at timing t25.

At timing t33, the medium decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in a display mode according to the special lottery result come to a non-variable state. Specifically, if the special lottery result is a loss, a decorative pattern with a number other than "2" is stopped and displayed as a medium decorative pattern. Further, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, a decorative pattern with the number "2" attached thereto is stopped and displayed as a medium decorative pattern. In addition, if the special lottery result is a loss, a new display of decorative symbols will start from timing t34, and if the special lottery result is a jackpot, a new display of the decorative symbols will be displayed after the jackpot game ends. A significant change begins.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 409(B) to 409(E), other examples of effects regarding the display mode of the hold display will be shown.

In the production example shown in FIG. 409(B), at timing t10, the blue pending image that has been displayed up to that point does not change, and the blue pending image continues to be displayed. Further, at timing t20, the green pending image is displayed in place of the blue pending image that had been displayed up until then.

In the production example shown in FIG. 409(C), at timing t10, the green pending image is displayed in place of the blue pending image that had been displayed up to that point. Further, at timing t20, the green pending image that has been displayed until then does not change, and the green pending image continues to be displayed.

In the production example shown in FIG. 409(D), at timing t10, the green pending image is displayed in place of the white pending image that had been displayed up to that point. Further, at timing t20, the red pending image is displayed in place of the green pending image that had been displayed up until then.

In the production example shown in FIG. 409(E), at timing t10, the white pending image that has been displayed up to that point does not change, and the white pending image continues to be displayed. Further, at timing t20, the white pending image that has been displayed up to that point does not change, and the white pending image continues to be displayed.

It is preferable that the production examples of the display mode of the pending display shown in FIGS. 409(A) to 409(E) be configured to be executable based on the special lottery result.

In this way, based on the special lottery results, at predetermined timings (timing t10, timing t20), instead of the currently displayed pending image, the pending image that suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is higher is displayed. Alternatively, it may be configured to continue displaying the currently displayed pending image at predetermined timings (timing t10, timing t20) without changing it.

The changes in the pending image described with reference to FIGS. 409(A) to 409(E) are merely examples. Specifically, at timing t10, the white pending image, the blue pending image, the green pending image, and the red pending image continue to be displayed as they are, or are switched to the pending image with higher expectations. It is preferable to configure the display mode to be changed. Further, at timing t20, the white pending image, the blue pending image, the green pending image, and the red pending image continue to be displayed as they are, or the display mode is changed to the pending image with higher expectations. It is preferable to configure it so that it changes.

In this way, in this embodiment, a part of the pending image (for example, the blue pending image) that suggests a predetermined jackpot expectation level is visually visible in a manner that it is once hidden by the predetermined image (pine mark group image). After that, the entire pending image becomes visible again, and the pending image that is completely visible is changed to a pending image that suggests a higher jackpot expectation (for example, the green pending image). It is configured to be displayed by switching.
With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to visually recognize the changing manner of the pending image as having more impact.

Also, a part of the held image (the held image, the held image displayed in the first held display area) is hidden by a predetermined image (pine mark group image), and a part of the held image is not hidden by the predetermined image. This allows the player to visually confirm what kind of pending image the hidden pending image is (what color it is).

With such a configuration, it is possible to know the expectation level for a jackpot even when the pending state is hidden.

Note that the entire pending image (at least one of the pending image and the pending image displayed in the first pending display area) may be configured to be hidden by a predetermined image (pine mark group image).

In this embodiment, an example of production in which there are two opportunities to change the display mode of a pending image has been shown, but it may also be configured such that the opportunity to change the display mode of a pending image occurs only once. Alternatively, it may be configured to occur multiple times (three or more times).

With this configuration, as long as a predetermined image (pine mark group image) is displayed, there will be a continuous opportunity for the display mode of the pending image to change, so the player will not be able to see the display mode of the pending image changing. This makes it possible to create a sense of expectation that this will happen.

An example has been shown in which the display mode of the pending image can change at a predetermined timing (timing t10, timing t20) when a predetermined image (pine mark group image) is displayed. In this case, the currently displayed pending image (blue pending image) may be configured to always change to a pending image (green pending image, red pending image) that has a higher jackpot expectation.
With such a configuration, by displaying a predetermined image, it is possible to make the player have great expectations for a change in the display mode of the pending image.

In addition, the length of the period (timing t7-timing t9, timing t17-timing t19) in which the pine mark group image is displayed in front of the corresponding pending image and the pending image displayed in the first pending display area is After the held image and the held image displayed in the first held display area are displayed in front of the pine mark group image, the held image may change to the held image in another display mode. It is longer than the length of the period (timing t9-timing t10, timing t19-timing t20) up to a certain timing.

In addition, after the held image and the held image displayed in the first held display area are displayed in front of the pine mark group image, the held image is changed to the held image in another display mode. The length of the period up to the timing that may change is the period during which the pending image and the pending image displayed in the first pending display area are displayed in front of the pine mark group image (timing t10 - timing t17). , timing t19-timing t25).

In this way, the length of the period in which the held image is displayed on the front side (for example, 6 seconds, 7 seconds) is the same as the length of the period in which the held image is displayed on the back side (for example, 2 seconds). It is longer than . With such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the period during which a state in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the level of expectation suggested by the pending image is maintained.
Also, the length of the period from when the held image is displayed on the front side until the held image changes (for example, 2 seconds) is longer than the length of the period during which the held image is displayed on the back side (for example, 2 seconds). , 1 second) is shorter. With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to recognize the change in the display mode of the pending image as a series of effects.

The second to fourth reservation display areas are configured so as not to be hidden by the pine mark group image.

With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether the number of pending items is likely to reach the maximum (this can be determined by visually checking the second pending display area or the third pending display area), and whether the number of pending items has reached the maximum (this can be determined by visually checking the second pending display area or the third pending display area). The player can clearly check the hold status when looking at the second hold display area or the fourth hold display area. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player feels stressed, such as a starting winning occurring even though the number of reserved prizes is the maximum (four). In addition, if it is confirmed that the number of pending balls is likely to reach the maximum or that the number of pending balls has reached the maximum, the player operates the handle 302 to change the handle 302 to a state in which no game balls are fired. It will be necessary to do so.

In the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 409(A) to 409(E) and FIG. The display mode may be changed in the same way for the reserved images displayed in the. Even in the case of such a configuration, the same effect as when changing the display mode of the pending image can be achieved.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 409(A), an embodiment has been described with reference to FIG. 410 in which the hold display area and the first hold display area are hidden by the pine mark group image. In the time chart shown in 409(A), the hold display area is not hidden by the pine mark group images, but the first hold display area to the fourth hold display area are modified so that they may be hidden by the pine mark group images. An embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 411.

Immediately before the timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is such that the decorative symbols have stopped fluctuating. FIG. 411(A) is a diagram showing this state, and shows a state in which decorative symbols numbered "3", "5", and "2" from the left are stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the holding display area, a perfectly circular and white held image is displayed, in the first holding display area, a perfectly circular and blue holding image is shown, and in the second holding display area, a perfectly circular and white holding image is displayed. In the third pending display area, a perfectly circular blue pending image is displayed. Note that the white pending image displayed in the pending display area is a pending image corresponding to the decorative symbols with numbers "3", "5", and "2" that are displayed in a stopped state.

At timing t7, display of the pine mark group image is started in the lower right corner of the display area. When the display of the pine mark group image is started, the pine mark group image is placed in front of the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area and the blue pending image displayed in the second pending display area. Is displayed.

FIG. 411(B) is a diagram showing the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t8) after the display of the pine mark group image is started at timing t7, and the pine mark group image is the first pending This shows a state in which the white pending image displayed in the display area and the blue pending image displayed in the second pending display area are displayed on the nearer side. In this state, the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area and the blue pending image displayed in the second pending display area are hidden by the pine mark group image and are not displayed in the first pending display area. Only a part of the white pending image displayed in the second pending display area and a part of the blue pending image displayed in the second pending display area are respectively visible.

At timing t9, the display priority of the pine mark group image, the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area, and the blue pending image displayed in the second pending display area is switched, and the pine mark group image The white pending image displayed in the first pending display area is displayed in front of the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area and the blue pending image displayed in the second pending display area. The image and the blue pending image displayed in the second pending display area change to a state where they are displayed in front of the pine mark group image.

FIG. 411(C) shows that at timing t9, the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area and the blue pending image displayed in the second pending display area are displayed in front of the pine mark group image. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (a predetermined timing between timing t9 and timing t10) after the state changes. In this state, the entire white pending image displayed in the first pending display area and the blue pending image displayed in the second pending display area are visible.

At timing t10, a green pending image is displayed in place of the blue pending image that had been displayed in the second pending display area. FIG. 411(D) shows a predetermined timing (for example, timing t11) after the state changes to a state in which a green pending image is displayed in place of the blue pending image displayed in the second pending display area at timing t10. ) is a diagram showing a display state in FIG.

At timing t17, the display priority of the pine mark group image, the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area, and the green pending image displayed in the second pending display area is switched, and the display priority is switched between the pine mark group image and the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area. The white pending image displayed in the second pending display area and the green pending image displayed in the second pending display area are displayed in front of the pine mark group image, and then the pine mark group image is displayed in the first pending display area. The state changes to a state where the held image is displayed in front of the white held image displayed in the second held display area and the green held image displayed in the second held display area.

FIG. 411(E) shows that at timing t17, the pine mark group image is displayed in front of the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area and the green pending image displayed in the second pending display area. It is a diagram showing the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t18) after changing to the state, in which the pine mark group image is displayed on the white pending image and the second pending display displayed in the first pending display area. This shows a state in which the image is displayed in front of the green pending image displayed in the area.

At timing t19, the display priority of the pine mark group image, the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area, and the green pending image displayed in the second pending display area is switched, and the pine mark group image The white pending image displayed in the first pending display area is displayed in front of the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area and the green pending image displayed in the second pending display area. The image and the green pending image displayed in the second pending display area change to a state where they are displayed in front of the pine mark group image.

FIG. 411(F) shows that at timing t19, the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area and the green pending image displayed in the second pending display area are displayed in front of the pine mark group image. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (a predetermined timing between timing t19 and timing t20) after the state changes. In this state, the entire white pending image displayed in the first pending display area and the green pending image displayed in the second pending display area are visible.

At timing t20, a red pending image is displayed in place of the green pending image that had been displayed in the second pending display area. FIG. 411(G) is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t21) after the state changes to a state in which a red pending image is displayed instead of a green pending image at timing t20. .

At timing t25, the decorative symbols with the number "2" attached thereto as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and a ready-to-win state occurs. At this time, the medium decorative pattern is maintained in a fluctuating display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed. FIG. 411(H) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the ready-to-reach state occurs at timing t25.

At timing t33, the medium decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in a display mode according to the special lottery result come to a non-variable state. Specifically, if the special lottery result is a loss, a decorative pattern with a number other than "2" is stopped and displayed as a medium decorative pattern. Further, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, a decorative pattern with the number "2" attached thereto is stopped and displayed as a medium decorative pattern. In addition, if the special lottery result is a loss, a new display of decorative symbols will start from timing t34, and if the special lottery result is a jackpot, a new display of the decorative symbols will be displayed after the jackpot game ends. A significant change begins.

Although an example of production in which the display mode of the pending image is changed in the second pending display area is shown, the area where the display mode of the pending image is changed is not limited to the second pending display area, and the first pending display area ~ In any one of the display areas of the fourth hold display area, the display mode of the hold image may be configured to change as in the present production example.

In this embodiment, it is possible to hide the first to fourth pending display areas with the pine mark group image. Further, the hold display area is configured so as not to be hidden. In this way, by configuring a plurality of pending display areas to be hidden by predetermined images, it is possible to make the player feel interested in which pending image will change. In addition, by configuring the hold display area so that it is not hidden by a predetermined image, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the player is unable to confirm the degree of expectation regarding the stopping mode of the most recent decorative pattern. becomes possible.

Note that the display mode of the pending image may be configured to be changed. In this case, the display of the pine mark group images is ended while the decorative pattern of the relevant pending image is changing, and the pine mark group images are not displayed, but are displayed in the first to fourth pending display areas. In a state in which the display mode of the pending image cannot be changed, the display mode of the pending image may be changed and the decorative pattern corresponding to the pending image may continue to fluctuate.

With such a configuration, even when the pine mark group image is displayed, it is possible to change the display mode of the pending image and make the player feel interested. Furthermore, since the timing at which the pending image displayed in the first pending display area to the fourth pending display area can change the display mode is different from the timing at which the pending image changes the display mode, the player It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations such as confusion regarding the performance.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 409(A), an embodiment has been described with reference to FIG. 410 in which the hold display area and the first hold display area are hidden by the pine mark group image. An embodiment in which the time chart shown in 409(A) is modified so that the pending display area to the fourth pending display area may be hidden by the pine mark group image will be described with reference to FIG. 412.

Immediately before the timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is such that the decorative symbols have stopped fluctuating. FIG. 412(A) is a diagram showing this state, and shows a state in which decorative patterns numbered "3", "5", and "2" from the left are stopped and displayed.

Further, in the holding display area, a circular-shaped, white-colored held image is displayed, in the first holding display area, a circular-shaped, blue-colored holding image is displayed, and in the second holding display area, a circular-shaped, white-colored holding image is displayed. However, in the third pending display area, circular white pending images are respectively displayed. Note that the white pending image displayed in the pending display area is a pending image corresponding to the decorative symbols with numbers "3", "5", and "2" that are displayed in a stopped state.

At timing t7, display of the pine mark group image is started in the lower part of the display area. When the display of the pine mark group image is started, the pine mark group image includes the blue pending image displayed in the corresponding pending display area, the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area, and the second pending display. It is displayed in front of the white pending image displayed in the area.

FIG. 412(B) is a diagram showing the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t8) after the display of the pine mark group image is started at timing t7, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the pending display. Indicates a state in which the held image is displayed in front of the blue held image displayed in the area, the white held image displayed in the first held display area, and the white held image displayed in the second held display area. ing. In this state, the blue pending image displayed in the pending display area, the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area, and the white held image displayed in the second pending display area are marked with a pine mark. The blue pending image hidden by the group image and displayed in the pending display area, the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area, and part of the white pending image displayed in the second pending display area. Only one of them is visible.

At timing t9, the pine mark group image, the blue pending image displayed in the pending display area, the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area, and the white pending image displayed in the second pending display area. The display priority with the image is switched, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the corresponding pending display area, the blue pending image is displayed in the first pending display area, the white pending image is displayed in the first pending display area, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the second pending display area. The blue pending image is displayed in the pending display area, the white pending image is displayed in the first pending display area, and the white pending image is displayed in the second pending display area. The displayed white pending image changes to a state in which it is displayed in front of the pine mark group image.

FIG. 412(C) shows the blue pending image displayed in the pending display area at timing t9, the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area, and the white pending image displayed in the second pending display area. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (a predetermined timing between timing t9 and timing t10) after the image changes to a state where it is displayed on the front side of the pine mark group image. In this state, the blue pending image displayed in the applicable pending display area, the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area, and the white held image displayed in the second pending display area are all visible. It is possible.

At timing t10, the green pending image starts to be displayed in place of the blue pending image that had been displayed in the pending display area until then. FIG. 412(D) shows a predetermined timing (for example, timing FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the display state at time t11).

At timing t17, the pine mark group image, the green pending image displayed in the pending display area, the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area, and the white pending image displayed in the second pending display area. The display priority of the image is switched, and the green pending image is displayed in the pending display area, the white pending image is displayed in the first pending display area, and the white pending image is displayed in the second pending display area. is displayed in front of the pine mark group image, the pine mark group image is displayed in the green pending display area, the white pending image is displayed in the first pending display area, and the pine mark group image is displayed in front of the pine mark group image. 2 The state changes to a state where the pending image is displayed in front of the white pending image displayed in the pending display area.

FIG. 412(E) shows the green pending image in which the pine mark group image is displayed in the pending display area at timing t17, the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area, and the white pending image displayed in the second pending display area. This is a diagram showing the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t18) after the display changes to a state in which the white pending image is displayed on the front side of the white pending image, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the pending display area. Indicates that the green pending image is displayed in front of the green pending image displayed in the first pending display area, the white held image displayed in the second pending display area, and the white held image displayed in the second pending display area. There is.

At timing t19, the pine mark group image, the green pending image displayed in the pending display area, the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area, and the white pending image displayed in the second pending display area. The display priority of the image is switched, and the green pending image is displayed in the pending display area, the white pending image is displayed in the first pending display area, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the second pending display area. The green pending image displayed in the corresponding pending display area, the white held image displayed in the first pending display area, and the second pending display area The displayed white pending image changes to a state in which it is displayed in front of the pine mark group image.

FIG. 412(F) shows the green pending image displayed in the pending display area at timing t19, the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area, and the white pending image displayed in the second pending display area. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (a predetermined timing between timing t19 and timing t20) after the image changes to a state where it is displayed on the front side of the pine mark group image. In this state, the green pending image displayed in the pending display area, the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area, and the white held image displayed in the second pending display area are all visible. It is possible.

At timing t20, the red pending image is displayed in place of the green pending image that had been displayed in the pending display area until then. FIG. 412(G) is a diagram showing the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t21) after the state changes to a state in which the red pending image is displayed instead of the green pending image at timing t20. It is.

At timing t25, the decorative symbols with the number "2" attached thereto as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and a ready-to-win state occurs. At this time, the medium decorative pattern is maintained in a fluctuating display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed. Furthermore, at timing t25, the display of the pine mark group images that had been displayed until then ends. FIG. 412(H) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the reach state occurs and the display of the pine mark group image ends at timing t25.

At timing t33, the medium decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in a display mode according to the special lottery result come to a non-variable state. Specifically, if the special lottery result is a loss, a decorative pattern with a number other than "2" is stopped and displayed as a medium decorative pattern. Further, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, a decorative pattern with the number "2" attached thereto is stopped and displayed as a medium decorative pattern. In addition, if the special lottery result is a loss, a new display of decorative symbols will start from timing t34, and if the special lottery result is a jackpot, a new display of the decorative symbols will be displayed after the jackpot game ends. A significant change begins.

Although an example of production in which the display mode of the pending image is changed in the corresponding pending display area is shown, the area in which the display mode of the pending image is changed is not limited to the corresponding pending display area, and the area from the corresponding pending display area to the fourth pending In any one of the display areas, the display mode of the pending image may be configured to change as in the present production example.

In this embodiment, it is possible to hide the hold display area to the fourth hold display area with the pine mark group image. In this way, by configuring a plurality of pending display areas to be hidden by predetermined images, it is possible to make the player feel interested in which pending image will change.

FIG. 413 shows an example of presentation in an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 411.

In this embodiment, two triangular strip images are displayed above and below the display area, and the strip image displayed at the bottom of the display area (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "lower strip image") The 1st hold display area to the 4th hold display area are hidden. In this embodiment, the hold display area is provided at the lower left of the display area, and in the area on the right side, from the left, the first hold display area, the second hold display area, the third hold display area, and the fourth hold display area. A hold display area is provided respectively.

The lower band-shaped image has a shape that does not overlap with the holding display area, but overlaps with the first holding display area to the fourth holding display area. Further, as the first pending display area, second pending display area, third pending display area, and fourth pending display area become larger, the area overlapping with the lower band-shaped image becomes larger. For example, in the first holding display area, only about 1/4 of the lower side overlaps with the lower band-shaped image, but in the fourth holding display area, about 3/4 of the lower side overlaps with the lower band-shaped image. It is composed of
FIGS. 413(A) to 413(D) show display examples in chronological order when an effect is executed for a predetermined hold (the third hold in the diagram of FIG. 413(A)). That is, the performance progresses in the order of FIG. 413(A), FIG. 413(B), FIG. 413(C), and FIG. 413(D).

In FIG. 413(A), the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are being displayed in a variable manner, a circular white pending image is displayed in the corresponding pending display area to the fourth pending display area, and band-shaped images are displayed above and below the display area. is displayed. In the figure, the lower band-shaped image is located at a position that overlaps with the held images displayed in the first held display area to the fourth held display area, and is higher than the held images displayed in the first held display area to the fourth held display area. The display state displayed on the rear side is also shown.

FIG. 413(B) shows a display state in which the lower band-shaped image is displayed in front of the reserved images displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas.

FIG. 413(C) shows a display state in which the reserved images displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas are displayed in front of the lower band-shaped image.

FIG. 413(D) shows a display state in which a blue pending image is displayed in place of the white pending image displayed in the third pending display area.

It may be configured to display band-shaped images such as those shown in FIGS. 413(A) to 413(D) instead of the pine mark group images in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 409. .

Although an example of production in which the display mode of the pending image is changed in the third pending display area is shown, the area where the display mode of the pending image is changed is not limited to the second pending display area, and the first pending display area to In any one of the display areas of the fourth hold display area, the display mode of the hold image may be configured to change as in the present production example.

When the lower band-shaped image is displayed in front of the held image, the proportion of the area of the held image that is hidden by the lower band-shaped image is configured to vary depending on the area where the held image is displayed. . Specifically, the retained image is not hidden by the lower strip image in the first place, approximately 20% of the lower area of the first retained image is hidden, and approximately 40% of the lower area of the second retained image is hidden. The area is hidden, about 60% of the lower area of the third reserved image is hidden, and about 80% of the lower area of the fourth reserved image is hidden. In this way, the closer the fourth pending display area is, the higher the concealment ratio of the pending image by the lower strip image becomes.

With such a configuration, it is possible to strengthen the impact of a change in hold in a hold in which variable display starts later.

Although the lower band-shaped image has a triangular shape, the lower band-shaped image may be transformed into a step-like shape as shown in FIGS. 413(E) and 413(F). Specifically, it is preferable to provide a plurality of horizontal steps by combining lines perpendicular to the display area and lines horizontal to the display area, so that the overall shape slopes upward to the right.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 413(E) and 413(F), the configuration is such that a plurality of pending images can be hidden in one horizontal stage. For example, about 30% of the lower area of the relevant reserved image and the first reserved image is hidden by one horizontal step, and about 60% of the lower area of the second reserved image and the third reserved image is hidden by one horizontal step. The fourth reserved image is configured such that the entire image is hidden by one horizontal step.

Alternatively, with the strip images formed in a stepwise manner in this way, the reserved image is not hidden by the lower strip image, about 20% of the lower area of the first reserved image is hidden, and the second reserved image is hidden by the lower strip image. About 40% of the bottom area is hidden, about 60% of the bottom area of the third reserved image is hidden, and about 80% of the bottom area of the fourth pending image is hidden. may be configured.

Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to strengthen the impact of a change in hold in a hold in which variable display starts later.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 409(A), an embodiment has been described with reference to FIG. An embodiment modified so that the hold display area to the fourth hold display area may be hidden by the pine mark group image will be described with reference to FIGS. 414 and 415. Note that FIG. 414 is a time chart showing an example of performance in this embodiment. Further, FIG. 415 is a diagram showing the display state in the display area.

In the state of timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the holding display area, a perfectly circular and white held image is displayed, in the first holding display area, a perfectly circular and blue holding image is shown, and in the second holding display area, a perfectly circular and white holding image is displayed. A perfectly circular white pending image is displayed in the third pending display area.

At timing t7, display of the pine mark group image surrounding the display area is started. The pine mark group image in this embodiment is composed of a combination of 16 green images shaped like pine branches with leaves. An image imitating a pine branch with leaves is labeled with the letters "N," "E," "X," or "T." When the display of the pine mark group image is started, the pine mark group image is displayed in front of each of the pending images displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area.

FIG. 415(A) is a diagram showing the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t8) after the display of the pine mark group image is started at timing t7, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the pending display. This shows a state in which the pending images are displayed in front of each pending image displayed in the area to the third pending display area. In this state, each pending image displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area is hidden by the pine mark group image, and each held image displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area is hidden by the pine mark group image. Only some of them are visible.

At timing t9, the display priority of the pine mark group image and each pending image displayed in the corresponding pending display area to the third pending display area is switched, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the corresponding pending display area to the third pending display area. from a state in which each held image displayed in the 3rd to 3rd held display area is displayed in front of the pine mark group image. and changes.

FIG. 415(B) shows a predetermined timing after each pending image displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area changes to a state in which it is displayed in front of the pine mark group image at timing t9. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing between timing t9 and timing t10. In this state, the entirety of each pending image displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area is visible.

At timing t10, a green pending image is displayed in the first pending display area in place of the blue pending image that had been displayed in the first pending display area. In addition, the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern that were being scrolled downward are temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern with the number "4" attached, the middle decorative pattern with the character string "Continue", and the right decorative pattern with the number "4" attached are displayed in the display area. At approximately the center in the vertical direction, the number "4" and the character string "Continue" are temporarily stopped and displayed in a visible manner.

FIG. 415(C) shows a predetermined timing after a green pending image is displayed in the first pending display area instead of a blue pending image at timing t10 (for example, between timing t10 and timing t11). FIG. In this state, the entirety of each pending image displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area is visible.

In this embodiment, the pine mark group image is temporarily not displayed during the period from timing t11 to timing t13. In addition, during this period, a character string "x2" is displayed so as to overlap the upper right part of the right decorative pattern that is being temporarily stopped and displayed. FIG. 415(D) is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t12) between timing t10 and timing t13. In this state, the entirety of each pending image displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area is visible.

At timing t13, display of the pine mark group image is started again. At this time, the pine mark group image is displayed in front of each of the pending images displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area. Further, at timing t13, the display state changes from the temporarily stopped display state to a display state in which the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern scroll and move downward. FIG. 415(E) shows that at timing t13, the pine mark group image has changed to a state where it is displayed in front of each pending image displayed in the corresponding pending display area to the third pending display area. 7 is a diagram showing a display state at a later predetermined timing (for example, timing t14). FIG.

At timing t19, the display priority of the pine mark group image and each pending image displayed in the corresponding pending display area to the third pending display area is switched, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the corresponding pending display area to the third pending display area. from a state in which each held image displayed in the 3rd to 3rd held display area is displayed in front of the pine mark group image. and changes.

FIG. 415(F) shows a predetermined timing after each pending image displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area changes to a state in which it is displayed in front of the pine mark group image at timing t19. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing between timing t19 and timing t20. In this state, the entirety of each pending image displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area is visible.

At timing t20, a red pending image is displayed in the first pending display area in place of the green pending image that had been displayed in the first pending display area. In addition, the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern that were being scrolled downward are temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, the display area includes a left decorative pattern with the number "7" attached, a middle decorative pattern with the character string "Continue", and a right decorative pattern with the number "7" attached. At approximately the center in the vertical direction, the number "7" and the character string "Continue" are temporarily stopped and displayed in a visible manner.

FIG. 415(G) shows a predetermined timing after a red pending image is displayed in the first pending display area instead of a green pending image at timing t20 (for example, between timing t20 and timing t21). FIG. In this state, the entirety of each pending image displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area is visible.

In this embodiment, the pine mark group image is no longer displayed at timing t21. Further, from timing t21 to timing t22, a character string "x3" is displayed so as to overlap the upper right part of the right decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed during this period. FIG. 415(H) is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t22) between timing t21 and timing t23. In this state, the entirety of each pending image displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area is visible.

At timing t23, the display state changes from the temporarily stopped display state to a display state in which the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern scroll and move downward.

At timing t25, the decorative symbols with the number "7" attached thereto as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and a ready-to-win state occurs. At this time, the medium decorative pattern is maintained in a fluctuating display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed. FIG. 415(H) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the ready-to-reach state occurs at timing t25.

At timing t33, the medium decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in a display mode according to the special lottery result come to a non-variable state. Specifically, if the special lottery result is a loss, a decorative pattern with a number other than "7" is stopped and displayed as a medium decorative pattern. Further, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, a decorative pattern with the number "7" attached thereto is stopped and displayed as a medium decorative pattern. In addition, if the special lottery result is a loss, a new display of decorative symbols will start from timing t34, and if the special lottery result is a jackpot, a new display of the decorative symbols will be displayed after the jackpot game ends. A significant change begins.

Although an example of production in which the display mode of the pending image is changed in the second pending display area is shown, the area where the display mode of the pending image is changed is not limited to the second pending display area, and the first pending display area ~ In any one of the display areas of the fourth hold display area, the display mode of the hold image may be configured to change as in the present production example.

In this embodiment, it is possible to hide the hold display area to the fourth hold display area with the pine mark group image. Further, the hold display area is configured so as not to be hidden. In this way, by configuring a plurality of pending display areas to be hidden by predetermined images, it is possible to make the player feel interested in which pending image will change. Further, the display mode of the suspended image can be changed at the timing when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. Therefore, compared to the case where the decorative symbols are displayed as if they are scrolling, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the changes in the pending image, and the player is prevented from being distracted by the movement of the decorative symbols. , it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it becomes impossible to check the change mode of the held image.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 409(A), an embodiment has been described with reference to FIG. A modified embodiment in which the hold display area may be hidden by the operation instruction image will be described with reference to FIGS. 416 and 417. Note that FIG. 416 is a time chart showing an example of performance in this embodiment. Further, FIG. 417 is a diagram showing the display state in the display area.

In the state of timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the hold display area has a circular blue hold image, the first hold display area has a circular white hold image, and the second hold display area has a circular white hold image. However, circular white pending images are displayed in the third pending display area.

At timing t5, an operation instruction image indicating that the operation on the operation button 410 is valid starts frame-in from the lower left-right center of the display area to the upper side. The operation instruction image has a horizontally elongated oval shape, and a character string "PUSH" is attached to the image.

At timing t6, frame-in of the operation instruction image into the display area is completed. The operation instruction image is displayed behind the pending image. Furthermore, the operation instruction image continues to move upward even after the frame-in is completed. FIG. 417(A) shows a state in which the operation instruction image has moved from the bottom to the top and frame-in to the display area has been completed.

At timing t7, the operation instruction image completes upward movement. At the same time, the state in which the operation instruction image is displayed behind the held image changes to the state in which the held image is displayed behind the operation instruction image. At the same time, the state in which operation reception on the operation button 410 is not valid changes to the valid state. The valid operation period for the operation button 410 continues for two seconds from timing t7 to timing t9. FIG. 417(B) shows a state in which the operation instruction image is displayed behind the operation instruction image at timing t7, after the operation instruction image changes from a state in which the operation instruction image is displayed behind the operation instruction image. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (timing t8).

FIG. 417(C) shows a case where the operation is performed during the valid operation period (for example, when the player operates the operation button 410 at timing t8 during the valid operation period) or when the valid operation period ends. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a display state displayed (when the player does not operate the operation button 410 during the operation validity period). Specifically, the timing is when the player operates the operation button 410 during the valid operation period (for example, timing t8), or the timing when the valid operation period ends without any operation by the player (timing t9). ), the state in which the blue held image is displayed behind the operation instruction image changes to the state in which the operation instruction image is displayed behind the blue held image.

At timing t10, a green pending image is displayed in the pending display area in place of the blue pending image that had been displayed in the pending display area until then. FIG. 417(D) shows a predetermined timing (for example, between timing t10 and timing t11) after a green pending image is displayed in the pending display area instead of the green pending image at timing t10. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing.

At timing t11, the display of the operation instruction image displayed behind the pending image ends.

At timing t15, the operation instruction image indicating that the operation on the operation button 410 is valid starts frame-in from the lower center of the display area in the left-right direction to the upper side. The operation instruction image has a horizontally elongated oval shape, and a character string "PUSH" is attached to the image. Furthermore, the image is larger than the operation instruction image that was displayed from timing t5 to timing t11.

At timing t16, frame-in of the operation instruction image into the display area is completed. The operation instruction image is displayed behind the pending image. Furthermore, the operation instruction image continues to move upward even after the frame-in is completed. FIG. 417(E) shows a state in which the operation instruction image has moved from the bottom to the top and frame-in to the display area has been completed.

At timing t17, the operation instruction image completes upward movement. At the same time, the state in which the operation instruction image is displayed behind the held image changes to the state in which the held image is displayed behind the operation instruction image. At the same time, the state in which operation reception on the operation button 410 is not valid changes to the valid state. The valid operation period for the operation button 410 continues for two seconds from timing t17 to timing t19. FIG. 417(F) shows a state after the state in which the operation instruction image is displayed behind the relevant held image changes to a state in which the relevant held image is displayed behind the operation instruction image at timing t17. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (timing t18).

FIG. 417(G) shows a case where the operation is performed during the valid operation period (for example, when the player operates the operation button 410 at timing t18 during the valid operation period) or when the valid operation period ends. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a display state displayed (when the player does not operate the operation button 410 during the operation validity period). Specifically, the timing is when the player operates the operation button 410 during the valid operation period (for example, timing t18), or the timing when the valid operation period ends without any operation by the player (timing t9). ), the state where the green pending image is displayed behind the operation instruction image changes to the state where the operation instruction image is displayed behind the green pending image.

At timing t10, instead of the green pending image that had been displayed in the pending display area until then, an image that is red and larger than the green pending image that had been displayed up until then (specifically (double the diameter) the held image will now be displayed. FIG. 417(H) shows a predetermined timing (between timing t20 and timing t21) after a red pending image is displayed in the pending display area instead of a green pending image at timing t10. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing.

At timing t21, the display of the operation instruction image displayed behind the pending image ends.

At timing t25, decorative symbols having the same number (for example, "2") as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and a ready-to-win state occurs. At this time, the medium decorative pattern is maintained in a fluctuating display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed.

At timing t33, the medium decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in a display mode according to the special lottery result come to a non-variable state. Specifically, if the special lottery result is a loss, a decorative pattern with a number other than "2" is stopped and displayed as a medium decorative pattern. Further, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, a decorative pattern with the number "2" attached thereto is stopped and displayed as a medium decorative pattern. In addition, if the special lottery result is a loss, a new display of decorative symbols will start from timing t34, and if the special lottery result is a jackpot, a new display of the decorative symbols will be displayed after the jackpot game ends. A significant change begins.

In this way, by switching the context of the operation instruction image and the reserved image, it is possible to produce an impactful effect regarding the change in the reserved image. Further, since the characters attached to the operation instruction image are hidden by the reserved image, it is possible to give a large impact to the player.

In this embodiment, two types of operation instruction images of different sizes are configured to be displayable, but when the operation instruction image is large, only the color of the pending image changes, and the color of the pending image changes. In addition to this, the size of the held image may change. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that the color of the held image does not change, but the size of the held image may change. For example, at timing t20, only the color of the green pending image is changed without changing the size to create a red pending image, or both the size and color of the green pending image are changed to create a large red pending image. Or, it may be configured such that only the size of the green pending image is changed without changing the color thereof, resulting in a large green pending image. Furthermore, when the size of the pending image increases, the expectation level for a jackpot may be set higher than when the size of the pending image does not increase.

With this configuration, the enlarged pending image is visually recognized by the player so as to hide the operation instruction image, so it is possible to make the performance in which the pending image changes more impactful.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 409(A), an embodiment has been described with reference to FIG. An embodiment modified so that the holding display area to the fourth holding display area may be hidden by the decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner will be described with reference to FIGS. 418 and 419. Note that FIG. 418 is a time chart showing an example of the effect in this embodiment. Further, FIG. 419 is a diagram showing the display state in the display area.

At timing t0, variable display of decorative symbols is started in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. FIG. 419(A) shows that after the variable display of decorative symbols starts at timing t0, a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t1), and the number of pending balls shows a state in which the upper limit is four.

In this embodiment, the held images are not displayed horizontally at the bottom of the display area, but are displayed vertically on the left side of the display area. Specifically, on the left side of the display area, from the top, a fourth reservation display area, a third reservation display area, a second reservation display area, a first reservation display area, and the reservation display area are provided.

In addition, instead of using a circular-shaped pending image as a pending image, an image of oden ingredients stuck on a skewer (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an "oden pending image") is configured to be used as a pending image. There is. The oden pending image is composed of a portion imitating a skewer and a portion imitating ingredients. The number of ingredients ranges from 1 to 10, and as the number of ingredients increases, the length of the skewer becomes longer. Also, the larger the number of ingredients in the image (when looking at the entire oden pending image, the longer the length of the oden pending), the more the variation result of the decorative pattern that is executed or is being executed corresponding to that pending image. The system is structured so that the expectation level is high that this indicates a jackpot. Moreover, in this embodiment, the oden pending image is basically displayed on the near side of the decorative pattern.

Below, corresponding to the number of ingredients that the oden holding image has, an oden holding image with one ingredient is shown as an oden holding image with one ingredient, and an oden holding image with two ingredients is shown as an oden holding image with two ingredients. Image, Oden with 3 ingredients pending image, Oden with 3 ingredients pending image, Oden with 4 ingredients pending image, Oden with 5 ingredients pending image, Oden with 5 ingredients pending image Oden with 5 ingredients pending image, Oden with 6 ingredients pending image, Oden with 6 ingredients pending image, Oden with 7 ingredients pending image, Oden with 8 ingredients pending image The image is referred to as an 8-ingredients oden pending image, an oden 9-ingredients pending image is referred to as a 9-ingredients oden pending image, and an oden 10-ingredients pending image is referred to as a 10-ingredients oden pending image.

During the period from timing t0 when the decorative pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner to timing t13, the oden pending image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. FIG. 419(A) shows an image of Oden with 4 ingredients reserved in the reserved display area, an image of Oden with 1 ingredient reserved in the first reserved display area, and an image of Oden with 2 ingredients reserved in the second reserved display area. , shows a state in which one-ingredient oden pending images are displayed in the third pending display area and the fourth pending display area.

At timing t13, the display priority of the oden pending image and the decorative pattern is switched, from a state in which the oden pending image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern to a state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the oden pending image. and changes. FIG. 419(B) shows the predetermined state after the state in which the oden pending image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern at timing t13 changes to the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the oden pending image. The display state at a timing (for example, timing t14) is shown.

At timing t15, the display priority of the oden pending image and the decorative pattern is switched, from a state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the oden pending image to a state in which the oden pending image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. and changes. In FIG. 419(C), the display priority of the oden pending image and the decorative pattern is switched at timing t15, and the oden pending image changes from a state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the oden pending image to a state in which the oden pending image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. The display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t15 and timing t16) after changing to the state displayed in is shown.

At timing t16, the state changes to a state in which a 6-ingredient oden pending image is displayed in place of the 4-ingredient oden pending image that had been displayed in the pending display area, and at the same time, in the second pending display area, The state changes to a state in which a 3-ingredient oden pending image is displayed instead of the 2-ingredient oden pending image that had been displayed up to that point. In FIG. 419(D), at timing t16, the state changes to a state in which a 6-ingredient oden pending image is displayed in place of the 4-ingredients oden pending image that had been displayed in the pending display area, and At a predetermined timing (for example, timing t17) after the second pending display area changes to a state where the 3-ingredient oden pending image is displayed instead of the 2-ingredients oden pending image that had been displayed up until then. Indicates the display status.

At timing t19, the display priority of the oden pending image and the decorative pattern is switched, from a state in which the oden pending image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern to a state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the oden pending image. and changes.

FIG. 419(E) shows the predetermined state after the state in which the oden pending image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern at timing t19 changes to the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the oden pending image. The display state at a timing (for example, timing t20) is shown.

At timing t21, the display priority of the oden pending image and the decorative pattern is switched, from a state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the oden pending image to a state in which the oden pending image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. and changes.

In FIG. 419(F), the display priority of the oden pending image and the decorative pattern is switched at timing t21, and the oden pending image changes from a state where the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the oden pending image to a state in which the oden pending image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. The display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t21 and timing t22) after changing to the state displayed in is shown.

At timing t22, the state changes to a state in which a 10-ingredient oden pending image is displayed in place of the 6-ingredient oden pending image that had been displayed in the pending display area, and at the same time, in the second pending display area, The state changes to a state in which a 6-ingredient oden pending image is displayed instead of the 3-ingredient oden pending image that had been displayed up until then.

In FIG. 419(G), at timing t22, the state changes to a state in which a 10-ingredient oden pending image is displayed in place of the 6-ingredients oden pending image that had been displayed in the pending display area, and At a predetermined timing (for example, timing t23) after the second reservation display area changes to a state in which a 6-ingredient oden reservation image is displayed instead of the previously displayed 3-ingredient oden reservation image. Indicates the display status.

At timing t25, decorative symbols having the same number (for example, "2") as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and a ready-to-win state occurs. At this time, the medium decorative pattern is maintained in a fluctuating display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed.

At timing t33, the medium decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in a display mode according to the special lottery result come to a non-variable state. Specifically, if the special lottery result is a loss, a decorative pattern with a number other than "2" is stopped and displayed as a medium decorative pattern. Further, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, a decorative pattern with the number "2" attached thereto is stopped and displayed as a medium decorative pattern. Note that if the special lottery result is a loss, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started from timing t34. On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, at timing t34, the display of the pending image in the corresponding pending display area to the fourth pending display area is temporarily stopped, and after the jackpot game ends, a new decorative pattern is displayed. At the same timing as the start of the variable display, the display of the pending image in the pending display area to the fourth pending display area is resumed.

In this embodiment, for a normal oden pending image (one ingredient oden pending image) with low jackpot expectation, even if the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the oden pending image, the decorative pattern It is configured so that it does not overlap.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot confirm the current number of reservations when the player attempts to visually check the number of reservations.

On the other hand, for oden pending images (1 ingredient oden pending image to 10 ingredient oden pending image) that have higher jackpot expectations than normal oden pending images (1 ingredient oden pending image), the decorative pattern is oden. When displayed on the front side of the reserved image, it is configured so that it overlaps with the decorative pattern and is visually recognized by the player as if the oden reserved image is hidden by the decorative pattern. Therefore, if the oden pending image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern and the display mode changes to another oden pending image, the oden pending image will be visually recognized by the player as if it had become twice larger. , it becomes possible to give a big impact to the players.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 409(A), an embodiment has been described with reference to FIG. An embodiment modified so that the holding display area to the fourth holding display area may be hidden by the decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner will be described with reference to FIGS. 420 and 421. Note that FIG. 420 is a time chart showing an example of performance in this embodiment. Further, FIG. 421 is a diagram showing the display state in the display area.

At timing t0, variable display of decorative symbols is started in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. During the period from timing t0 when the decorative pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner to timing t7, the pending images displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area are displayed in front of the decorative pattern.

FIG. 421(A) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t1) after the variable display of decorative symbols starts at timing t0. In the figure, the relevant pending image in blue is in the pending display area, the white pending image is in the first pending display area, the white pending image is in the second pending display area, and the held white image is in the third pending display area. A state in which an image is displayed is shown. Furthermore, a state is shown in which each of the pending images displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. In this embodiment, the pending images displayed in the pending display area to the fourth pending display area are basically displayed in front of the decorative pattern.

At timing t7, the display priority of each pending image and decorative pattern displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area is switched, and each pending image displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area is decorated. The decorative pattern changes from a state where it is displayed in front of the symbols to a state in which it is displayed in front of each pending image displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area.

FIG. 421(B) shows that at timing t7, each pending image displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area is displayed in front of the decorative pattern, and then the decorative pattern is displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area. 3 shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t8) after the display changes to a state in which the pending images are displayed in front of each pending image displayed in the pending display area.

At timing t9, the display priority of each pending image and decorative pattern displayed in the corresponding pending display area to the third pending display area is switched, and the decorative pattern is displayed in each pending display area to the third pending display area. The state in which each pending image displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area changes from being displayed in front of the image to a state in which each pending image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern.

FIG. 421(C) shows that at timing t9, the display priority of each pending image and decorative pattern displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area is switched, and the decorative pattern is displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area. The state in which each pending image displayed in the corresponding pending display area to the third pending display area changes from being displayed in front of each pending image to a state in which each pending image displayed in the corresponding pending display area to the third pending display area is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. It shows the display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t9 and timing t10) after the operation.

At timing t10, the state changes to a state in which a green pending image is displayed in place of the blue pending image that had been displayed up until then in the pending display area.

FIG. 421(D) shows a predetermined timing ( For example, the display state at timing t11) is shown.

At timing t17, the display priority of each pending image and decorative pattern displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area is switched, and each pending image displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area is decorated. The decorative pattern changes from a state where it is displayed in front of the symbols to a state in which it is displayed in front of each pending image displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area.

FIG. 421(E) shows that at timing t17, each pending image displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area is displayed in front of the decorative pattern, and then the decorative pattern is displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area. 3 shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t18) after the display changes to a state in which the held images are displayed in front of each held image displayed in the held display area 3.

At timing t19, the display priority of each pending image and decorative pattern displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area is switched, and the decorative pattern is displayed in each pending display area to the third pending display area. The state in which each pending image displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area changes from being displayed in front of the image to a state in which each pending image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern.

FIG. 421(F) shows that at timing t19, the display priority of each pending image and decorative pattern displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area is switched, and the decorative pattern is displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area. The state in which each pending image displayed in the corresponding pending display area to the third pending display area changes from being displayed in front of each pending image to a state in which each pending image displayed in the corresponding pending display area to the third pending display area is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. It shows the display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t19 and timing t20) after the above.

At timing t20, the state changes to a state in which a red pending image is displayed in place of the green pending image that had been displayed in the pending display area.

FIG. 421(G) shows a predetermined timing ( For example, the display state at timing t21) is shown.

At timing t25, decorative symbols having the same number (for example, "2") as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and a ready-to-win state occurs. At this time, the medium decorative pattern is maintained in a fluctuating display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed.

At timing t33, the medium decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in a display mode according to the special lottery result come to a non-variable state. Specifically, if the special lottery result is a loss, a decorative pattern with a number other than "2" is stopped and displayed as a medium decorative pattern. Further, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, a decorative pattern with the number "2" attached thereto is stopped and displayed as a medium decorative pattern. Note that if the special lottery result is a loss, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started from timing t34. On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, at timing t34, the display of the pending image in the corresponding pending display area to the third pending display area is temporarily stopped, and after the jackpot game ends, a new decorative pattern is displayed. At the same timing as the start of the variable display, the display of the pending image in the pending display area to the fourth pending display area is restarted.

In this embodiment, after the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area is hidden by the decorative pattern, the display mode of the reserved image is changed while the reserved image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. There is. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the impact of pending changes.

During the period in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the reserved image (from timing t7 to timing t9, from timing t17 to timing t19), there is a possibility that it is difficult to visually recognize the reserved image. Therefore, it is preferable to configure the decorative pattern to be scrolled downward at a variable speed that allows the reserved image to be visually recognized from the gap between the decorative pattern displayed on the upper side and the decorative pattern displayed on the lower side.

Specifically, at least once during the period in which the decorative pattern is displayed on the front side of the pending image, the data is displayed from the pending display area to the third section from the gap between the decorative pattern displayed on the upper side and the decorative pattern displayed on the lower side. 4. It is preferable to configure the holding display area so that it is visible. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot confirm the current number of reservations when the player attempts to visually check the number of reservations.

With reference to FIG. 420(A) and FIG. 421(A) to FIG. 421(G), an example is shown in which the display mode of the reserved image is changed during the variable display in which the decorative pattern is scrolled downward. Below, with reference to FIGS. 420(B) and 421(H), an embodiment will be described in which a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the display mode of the suspended image is changed during the temporarily stopped display. . It should be noted that FIG. 420(B) is a time chart showing an example of the performance regarding the fluctuating state of the decorative pattern in this embodiment. Further, FIG. 421(H) is a diagram showing the display state in the display area.

In this embodiment, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed during a period from timing t7 to timing t11 and a period from timing t17 to timing t21.

In the present embodiment, during the period from timing t7 to timing t9 and from timing t17 to timing t19, the decorative pattern is on the front side of each pending image displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area. The state is shown in . In this state, the upper half of each pending image displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area is visible to the player in a manner hidden by the decorative pattern.

Further, at timing t11 and timing t21, the display priority of each pending image and decorative pattern displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area is switched, and the decorative pattern is displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area. The state in which the held images are displayed in front of each displayed held image changes to the state in which each held image displayed in the held display area to the third held display area is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. . In this state, the entirety of each pending image displayed in the pending display area to the third pending display area is visible to the player.

FIG. 421(H) shows a predetermined timing ( The display state at a predetermined timing (between timing t10 and timing t11) is shown.

In this way, even if a part of the held image is hidden by the temporarily displayed decorative pattern while the decorative pattern is changing, and then the entire held image becomes visible, the held image It becomes possible to make an impact on the changes.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 409(A), an embodiment in which the pending display area and the first pending display area are hidden by the pine mark group image has been described with reference to FIG. A modified embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 422 and 423 in which a display effect that counts down the displayed time may be hidden by a decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner. Note that FIG. 422 is a time chart showing an example of performance in this embodiment. Further, FIG. 423 is a diagram showing the display state in the display area.

At timing t0, variable display of decorative symbols is started in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. At the same time, a left countdown image is displayed behind the left decorative pattern. The color of the left countdown image is green at this time.

The countdown image is an image with a diamond-shaped outer shape. The countdown image is an image indicating that a predetermined effect display will be performed at a predetermined timing. Specifically, the number attached to the countdown image indicates the remaining time (remaining seconds) until a predetermined effect is executed. A predetermined effect display is executed at the timing when the number attached to the countdown image becomes "00". Three countdown images are provided, a left countdown image, a middle countdown image, and a right countdown image, corresponding to the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern. Each countdown image is displayed on the front side or behind each decorative pattern in the upper part of the display area.

FIG. 423(A) shows the display state at timing t5. In the figure, a state in which the left countdown image is displayed behind the left decorative pattern is shown. The number "20" is attached to the left countdown image. The number attached to the left count image decreases by 1 every second that passes from this state, and at timing t25, the number "00" is displayed, but the number "00" At the timing when is displayed, a predetermined effect display (for example, any one of a plurality of characters indicating different jackpot expectations is displayed in the display area) is started. Note that these points are not limited to the left countdown image, but also apply to the middle countdown image and right countdown image, which will be described later.

At timing t8, the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative pattern is switched, and the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the countdown image changes to the state in which the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. .

In FIG. 423(B), the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative pattern is switched at timing t8, and the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the countdown image changes to the state in which the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. This shows the display state immediately after the display changes to the new state.

From timing t9 to timing t12, a middle countdown image appears from behind the left countdown image toward the right side. FIG. 423(C) shows the display state at timing t10 when the middle countdown image is appearing. In the figure, the middle countdown image is appearing from behind the left countdown image toward the right side. Also, the countdown image moving to the right has a character string "??" instead of a number.

At timing t12, the movement of the middle countdown image to the right side is completed, and the middle countdown image and the middle decorative pattern are in an overlapping state. The medium countdown image is displayed on the front side of the medium decorative pattern. At the same time, the number "30" is added instead of the character string "??" attached to the middle countdown image. Also in the middle countdown image, the attached numbers are displayed in a countdown manner as time passes. Furthermore, at timing t12, the left countdown image, which was green, changes to red.

FIG. 423(D) shows a state immediately after such a change in display mode is performed at timing t12.

At timing t13, the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative pattern is switched, and the state in which the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern changes to the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the countdown image. .

In FIG. 423(E), the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative pattern is switched at timing t13, and the state in which the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern changes to the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the countdown image. The display state at timing t14, which is the timing after the state changes to the state shown in FIG.

At timing t15, the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative pattern is switched, and the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the countdown image changes to the state in which the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. .

In FIG. 423(F), the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative pattern is switched at timing t15, and the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the countdown image changes to the state in which the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. This shows the display state immediately after the display changes to the new state.

At timing t17, display of the right countdown image is started. The right countdown image does not start displaying by sliding like the middle countdown image, but is suddenly displayed at a position overlapping the right decorative pattern. The number "60" is attached to the right countdown image.

FIG. 423(G) shows the display state immediately after the display of the right countdown image is started.

At timing t18, the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative pattern is switched, and the state in which the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern changes to the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the countdown image. .

In FIG. 423(H), the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative pattern is switched at timing t18, and the state in which the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern changes to the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the countdown image. The display state at timing t19, which is the timing after the state changes to the state shown in FIG.

At timing t23, the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative pattern is switched, and the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the countdown image changes to the state in which the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. .

At timing t25, the number attached to the left countdown image becomes "00" and at the same time the display of the left countdown image ends. At the same time, a predetermined display effect is started in the display area.

At timing t26, the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative pattern is switched, and the state in which the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern changes to the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the countdown image. .

Regarding the middle countdown image and the right countdown image, the same display effect as the left countdown image is performed in the period before and after the timing when the attached number becomes "00".

After a predetermined display effect corresponding to the right countdown image is executed, decorative patterns with the same number (for example, "2") attached as the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed, and a ready-to-reach state occurs. At this time, the medium decorative pattern is maintained in a fluctuating display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed.

After a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, the medium decorative symbols that have been fluctuatingly displayed in a display mode according to the special lottery result will stop fluctuating. Specifically, if the special lottery result is a loss, a decorative pattern with a number other than "2" is stopped and displayed as a medium decorative pattern. Further, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, a decorative pattern with the number "2" attached thereto is stopped and displayed as a medium decorative pattern. Note that if the special lottery result is a loss, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started from timing t34. After the jackpot game ends, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started.

In this embodiment, the color of the countdown image (for example, green or red), the length of the countdown period (for example, 25 seconds, 30 seconds, or 60 seconds), the number of countdown images to be displayed (only the left countdown image The expectation level of the jackpot may be suggested by at least one of the following: one of the left countdown image and the middle countdown image, or three of the left countdown image to the right countdown image. Alternatively, a plurality of effect displays with different jackpot expectations may be provided as the effect display to be displayed when the count reaches "00", and any effect display may be set according to the possible forms of the countdown image. It may be configured to suggest to the player whether or not the game will be executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when changing the display mode of the countdown image, the countdown image is temporarily hidden by the decorative pattern, and after the entire image is made visible again, the display mode of the countdown image is changed. It is configured to allow With such a configuration, it is possible to create an impact in the manner in which the countdown image changes.

Although an example has been shown in which the color of the countdown image changes from green to red, it may be configured so that the color does not change in some cases.

The suspended image may be configured to change over a plurality of variable displays of decorative symbols. Below, with reference to FIG. 424(A) and FIG. 425, the display priority of the pending image corresponding to a predetermined pending and the pine mark group image is switched over multiple times of variable display of the decorative pattern. An embodiment is shown that is modified to change the image. Note that FIG. 424(A) is a time chart showing an example of performance in this embodiment. Further, FIG. 425 is a diagram showing the display state in the display area.

At timing t0, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started.

At timing t2, display of the pine mark group image is started. The pine mark group image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. Also, at this stage, the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area, the white pending image displayed in the second pending display area, and the blue held image displayed in the third pending display area displayed at the rear. Note that the pine mark group image displayed in this embodiment is the same pine mark group image as that used in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 411.

FIG. 425(A) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t3) after the display of the pine mark group image is started at timing t2.

At timing t4, the decorative symbols change from a fluctuating display state to a stationary display state in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is a loss. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "2" attached as the left decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number "5" attached as the middle decorative pattern, and a number "4" attached as the right decorative pattern. The decorative pattern that has been displayed will be in a stopped display state. At the same time, the display priority of each pending image displayed in the first pending display area to the third pending display area and the pine mark group image is switched, and each pending image displayed in the first pending display area to the third pending display area is switched. From a state in which the image is displayed in front of the pine mark group image, to a state in which the pine mark group image is displayed in front of each held image displayed in the first to third held display areas. and changes.

In FIG. 425(B), at timing t4, the decorative pattern becomes a stopped display state, and the pine mark group image is displayed in front of each pending image displayed in the first pending display area to the third pending display area. The display state at a predetermined timing (a predetermined timing between timing t4 and timing t5) after the display changes to the current state is shown.

At timing t5, the pending image that had been displayed in the pending display area is no longer displayed, and the decorative pattern changes from the static display state to the variable display state, corresponding to the pending image that had been displayed in the first pending display area until then. Variable display of decorative patterns begins. At the same time, the display priority of each pending image displayed in the first pending display area to the third pending display area and the pine mark group image is switched, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the first pending display area to the third pending display area. From a state in which each held image is displayed in front of the displayed held images, to a state in which each held image displayed in the first to third held display areas is displayed in front of the pine mark group image. and changes.

In FIG. 425(C), at timing t5, the decorative pattern changes from the static display state to the variable display state, and each of the pending images displayed in the first to third pending display areas is changed from the pine mark group image. also shows the display state immediately after changing to the state where it is displayed on the near side.

At timing t5, the held images displayed in each held display area simultaneously start moving toward the adjacent left held display area, and at timing t6, the held images start moving to the adjacent left held display area. completed at the same time. Specifically, the pending image that had been displayed in the first pending display area is enlarged and moved to the left, so that it is displayed in the pending display area. Furthermore, the pending image that had been displayed in the second pending display area moves to the left and is now displayed in the first pending display area. Additionally, the blue pending image that had been displayed in the third pending display area moves to the left and is now displayed in the second pending display area. Further, at timing t6, a green pending image is displayed in the second pending display area in place of the blue pending image that has completed its movement to the second pending display area.

In FIG. 425(D), when the movement of each pending image is completed at timing t6, the green pending image is moved to the second pending display area in place of the blue pending image that has completed its movement to the second pending display area. The display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t7) after the display starts is shown.

At timing t9, the decorative symbols change from a fluctuating display state to a stationary display state in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is a loss. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "6" attached as the left decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number "9" attached as the middle decorative pattern, and a number "1" attached as the right decorative pattern. The decorative pattern that has been displayed will be in a stopped display state. At the same time, the display priority of each pending image displayed in the first pending display area to the second pending display area and the pine mark group image is switched, and each pending image displayed in the first pending display area to the second pending display area is switched. From a state in which the image is displayed in front of the pine mark group image, to a state in which the pine mark group image is displayed in front of each held image displayed in the first holding display area to the second holding display area. and changes.

In FIG. 425(E), at timing t9, the decorative pattern is in a stopped display state, and the pine mark group image is displayed in front of each pending image displayed in the first pending display area to the second pending display area. The display state is shown at a predetermined timing (a predetermined timing between timing t9 and timing t10) after the display changes to the current state.

At timing t10, the pending image that had been displayed in the pending display area is no longer displayed, and the decorative pattern changes from the static display state to the variable display state, which corresponds to the pending image that had been displayed in the first pending display area until then. Variable display of decorative patterns begins. At the same time, the display priority of each pending image displayed in the first pending display area to the second pending display area and the pine mark group image is switched, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the first pending display area to the second pending display area. From a state in which each held image is displayed in front of the displayed held images, to a state in which each held image displayed in the first held display area to second held display area is displayed in front of the pine mark group image. and changes.

In FIG. 425(F), at timing t10, the decorative pattern changes from the static display state to the variable display state, and each of the pending images displayed in the first pending display area to the second pending display area changes from the pine mark group image. also shows the display state immediately after changing to the state where it is displayed on the near side.

At timing t10, the held images displayed in each held display area simultaneously start moving toward the adjacent left held display area, and at timing t11, the held images start moving to the adjacent left held display area. completed at the same time. Specifically, the pending image that had been displayed in the first pending display area is enlarged and moved to the left, so that it is displayed in the pending display area. Further, the green pending image that had been displayed in the second pending display area moves to the left and is now displayed in the first pending display area. Further, at timing t11, a red pending image is displayed in the first pending display area in place of the green pending image that has completed its movement to the first pending display area.

In FIG. 425(G), when the movement of each held image is completed at timing t6, the red held image is moved to the first held display area in place of the green held image that has completed its movement to the first held display area. The display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t12) after the display starts is shown.

At timing t14, the decorative symbols change from a fluctuating display state to a stationary display state in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is a loss. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "4" attached as the left decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number "1" attached as the middle decorative pattern, and a number "2" attached as the right decorative pattern. The decorative pattern that has been displayed will be in a stopped display state. At the same time, the display priority of the red pending image displayed in the first pending display area and the pine mark group image is switched, and the red pending image displayed in the first pending display area is placed in front of the pine mark group image. The state in which the pine mark group image is displayed changes to the state in which the pine mark group image is displayed in front of the red pending image displayed in the first pending display area.

At timing t15, the pending image that had been displayed in the pending display area is no longer displayed, and the decorative pattern changes from the static display state to the fluctuating display state, and the red pending image that had been displayed in the first pending display area until then stops displaying. The variable display of the corresponding decorative pattern is started. At the same time, the display priority of the red pending image displayed in the first pending display area and the pine mark group image is switched, and the pine mark group image is placed in front of the red pending image displayed in the first pending display area. The state in which the red pending image displayed in the first pending display area changes to the state in which the red pending image is displayed in front of the pine mark group image.

At timing t15, the red pending image displayed in the first pending display area starts moving toward the corresponding pending display area, and at timing t16, the movement of the red pending image to the corresponding pending display area is completed. Specifically, the red pending image that had been displayed in the first pending display area moves to the left while being enlarged, so that it is displayed in the pending display area.

At timing t25, the decorative symbols with the number "2" attached thereto as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and a ready-to-win state occurs. At this time, the medium decorative pattern is maintained in a fluctuating display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed. The display of the pine mark group ends at the same time as the reach state occurs.

FIG. 425(H) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the ready-to-reach state occurs at timing t25.

At timing t33, the medium decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in a display mode according to the special lottery result come to a non-variable state. Specifically, if the special lottery result is a loss, a decorative pattern with a number other than "2" is stopped and displayed as a medium decorative pattern. Further, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, a decorative pattern with the number "2" attached thereto is stopped and displayed as a medium decorative pattern. In addition, if the special lottery result is a loss, the decorative pattern will continue to be displayed in a stopped state until the game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 and a new special lottery result is obtained, and the special lottery result will not be displayed. In the case of a jackpot, a new variation of the decorative symbols is started after the jackpot game ends.

In this way, the display mode of the pending image may be configured to be changed over multiple stop displays of decorative patterns. With such a configuration, it is possible to create an impact in the manner in which the reserved images change.

Below, with reference to FIG. 424(B) and FIG. 426, the pending image is displayed while changing the display priority between the pending image corresponding to the predetermined pending and the decorative pattern over multiple variable displays of the decorative pattern. 3 shows an embodiment that has been modified to make a change. Note that FIG. 424(B) is a time chart showing an example of performance in this embodiment. Further, FIG. 426 is a diagram showing the display state in the display area.

At timing t0, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. Further, at timing t0, the pending images displayed in the first pending display area to the fourth pending display area simultaneously start moving toward the adjacent left holding display area, and at timing t1, the held images displayed in the first pending display area to the fourth pending display area simultaneously start moving. The movement of the pending image displayed in the fourth pending display area from the corresponding pending display area to the third pending display area is completed at the same time.

FIG. 426(A) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t2) after the movement of the reserved image is completed at timing t1. In this state, a blue pending image is displayed in the third pending display area.

At timing t4, the decorative symbols change from a fluctuating display state to a stationary display state in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is a loss. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "2" attached as the left decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number "5" attached as the middle decorative pattern, and a number "4" attached as the right decorative pattern. The decorative pattern that has been displayed will be in a stopped display state. At the same time, the display priority of each pending image and decorative pattern displayed in the first pending display area to the third pending display area is switched, and each pending image displayed in the first pending display area to the third pending display area is changed. The state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the decorative pattern changes to the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of each of the pending images displayed in the first to third pending display areas.

FIG. 426(B) shows that at timing t4, the decorative pattern is in a stopped display state, and the decorative pattern is displayed in front of each of the pending images displayed in the first to third pending display areas. It shows the display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t4 and timing t5) after the state changes.

At timing t5, the pending image that had been displayed in the pending display area is no longer displayed, and the decorative pattern changes from the static display state to the variable display state, corresponding to the pending image that had been displayed in the first pending display area until then. Variable display of decorative patterns begins. At the same time, the display priority of each pending image and decorative pattern displayed in the first pending display area to the third pending display area is switched, and the decorative pattern is displayed in each of the first pending display area to the third pending display area. The state where each of the pending images displayed in the first to third pending display areas changes from being displayed in front of the pending image to being displayed in front of the decorative pattern.

In FIG. 426(C), at timing t5, the decorative pattern changes from the static display state to the variable display state, and each of the pending images displayed in the first to third pending display areas is placed in front of the decorative pattern. The display state immediately after changing to the state displayed on the side is shown.

At timing t5, the held images displayed in each held display area simultaneously start moving toward the adjacent left held display area, and at timing t6, the held images start moving to the adjacent left held display area. completed at the same time. Specifically, the pending image that had been displayed in the first pending display area is enlarged and moved to the left, so that it is displayed in the pending display area. Furthermore, the pending image that had been displayed in the second pending display area moves to the left and is now displayed in the first pending display area. Additionally, the blue pending image that had been displayed in the third pending display area moves to the left and is now displayed in the second pending display area. Further, at timing t6, a green pending image is displayed in the second pending display area in place of the blue pending image that has completed its movement to the second pending display area.

In FIG. 426(D), the movement of each pending image is completed at timing t6, and the green pending image is moved to the second pending display area in place of the blue pending image that has completed its movement to the second pending display area. The display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t7) after the display starts is shown.

At timing t9, the decorative symbols change from a fluctuating display state to a stationary display state in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is a loss. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "6" attached as the left decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number "9" attached as the middle decorative pattern, and a number "1" attached as the right decorative pattern. The decorative pattern that has been displayed will be in a stopped display state. At the same time, the display priority of each pending image and decorative pattern displayed in the first pending display area to the second pending display area is switched, and each pending image displayed in the first pending display area to the second pending display area is The state where the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the decorative pattern changes to the state where the decorative pattern is displayed in front of each of the pending images displayed in the first pending display area to the second pending display area.

FIG. 426(E) shows that at timing t9, the decorative pattern is in a stopped display state, and the decorative pattern is displayed in front of each pending image displayed in the first pending display area to the second pending display area. It shows the display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t9 and timing t10) after the state changes.

At timing t10, the pending image that had been displayed in the pending display area is no longer displayed, and the decorative pattern changes from the static display state to the variable display state, which corresponds to the pending image that had been displayed in the first pending display area until then. Variable display of decorative patterns begins. At the same time, the display priority of each pending image and decorative pattern displayed in the first pending display area to the second pending display area is switched, and each decorative pattern displayed in the first pending display area to the second pending display area is switched. The state in which each of the pending images displayed in the first pending display area to the second pending display area changes from being displayed in front of the pending image to a state in which each pending image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern.

FIG. 425(F) shows that at timing t10, the decorative pattern changes from the static display state to the variable display state, and each of the pending images displayed in the first pending display area to the second pending display area is placed in front of the decorative pattern. The display state immediately after changing to the state displayed on the side is shown.

At timing t10, the held images displayed in each held display area simultaneously start moving toward the adjacent left held display area, and at timing t11, the held images start moving to the adjacent left held display area. completed at the same time. Specifically, the pending image that had been displayed in the first pending display area is enlarged and moved to the left, so that it is displayed in the pending display area. Further, the green pending image that had been displayed in the second pending display area moves to the left and is now displayed in the first pending display area. Further, at timing t11, a red pending image is displayed in the first pending display area in place of the green pending image that has completed its movement to the first pending display area.

In FIG. 425(G), when the movement of each held image is completed at timing t6, the red held image is moved to the first held display area in place of the green held image that has completed its movement to the first held display area. The display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t12) after the display starts is shown.

At timing t14, the decorative symbols change from a fluctuating display state to a stationary display state in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is a loss. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "4" attached as the left decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number "1" attached as the middle decorative pattern, and a number "2" attached as the right decorative pattern. The decorative pattern that has been displayed will be in a stopped display state. At the same time, the display priority of the red pending image displayed in the first pending display area and the decorative pattern was switched, and the red pending image displayed in the first pending display area was displayed in front of the decorative pattern. The state changes to a state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the red pending image displayed in the first pending display area.

At timing t15, the pending image that had been displayed in the pending display area is no longer displayed, and the decorative pattern changes from the static display state to the fluctuating display state, and the red pending image that had been displayed in the first pending display area until then stops displaying. The variable display of the corresponding decorative pattern is started. At the same time, the display priority of the red pending image displayed in the first pending display area and the decorative pattern was switched, and the decorative pattern was displayed closer to the user than the red pending image displayed in the first pending display area. The state changes to a state in which the red pending image displayed in the first pending display area is displayed in front of the decorative pattern.

At timing t15, the red pending image displayed in the first pending display area starts moving toward the corresponding pending display area, and at timing t16, the movement of the red pending image to the corresponding pending display area is completed. Specifically, the red pending image that had been displayed in the first pending display area moves to the left while being enlarged, so that it is displayed in the pending display area.

At timing t25, the decorative symbols with the number "2" attached thereto as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and a ready-to-win state occurs. At this time, the medium decorative pattern is maintained in a fluctuating display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed. The display of the pine mark group ends at the same time as the reach state occurs.

FIG. 426(H) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the ready-to-reach state occurs at timing t25.

At timing t33, the medium decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in a display mode according to the special lottery result come to a non-variable state. Specifically, if the special lottery result is a loss, a decorative pattern with a number other than "2" is stopped and displayed as a medium decorative pattern. Further, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, a decorative pattern with the number "2" attached thereto is stopped and displayed as a medium decorative pattern. In addition, if the special lottery result is a loss, the decorative pattern will continue to be displayed in a stopped state until the game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 and a new special lottery result is obtained, and the special lottery result will not be displayed. In the case of a jackpot, a new variation of the decorative symbols is started after the jackpot game ends.

In this way, the display mode of the pending image may be configured to be changed over multiple stop displays of decorative patterns. With such a configuration, it is possible to create an impact in the manner in which the reserved images change.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 425 and 426, a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started, and each pending image displayed in the pending display area has completed its movement to the adjacent pending display area. Although an example has been shown in which the display mode of the held image is changed to a different display mode at timings (timing t6, timing t11), the display mode of the held image may be changed to a different display mode at other timings. Good too.

For example, at the timing (timing t5, timing t10) when a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the display mode of the pending image is changed to a different display mode in the display state before the movement of the pending image starts. may be configured. Alternatively, the period from when a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started until each pending image displayed in the pending display area completes its movement to the adjacent pending display area (from timing t5 to timing t6, from timing t10 to timing At t11), the display mode of the reserved image may be gradually changed to a different display mode.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 409 to 423, the display mode of the pending image, oden pending image, countdown image, etc. is changed during one variation of the decorative pattern, but these As shown in the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 424 and 426, the reserved image, oden reserved image, countdown image, etc. in the embodiment of FIG. At the same time, the display is configured to be displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern in accordance with the start timing of a new variable display of the decorative pattern, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after being displayed on the near side of the decorative pattern (e.g. After 1 second), the display mode of the pending image, oden pending image, countdown image, etc. may be changed.

Conventionally, when displaying a hold image, image data representing that there is a hold in the relevant hold display area, image data representing that there is a hold in the hold display area and the first hold display area, and image data representing that there is a hold in the hold display area and the first hold display area. Image data showing that there is a hold in the first hold display area to the second hold display area, image data showing that there is a hold in the hold display area and the first hold display area to the third hold display area, the hold display A total of five image data representing that there is a reservation in the area and the first reservation display area to the fourth reservation display area are stored in advance in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, and the number of reservations changes as the gaming situation progresses. In response to this, drawing data for an image to be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 was generated based on any of the image data.

Specifically, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs screen data indicating that the number of reservations has increased by one to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source at the timing when a winning start to the first starting port 2002 occurs, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source , based on the screen data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, instead of the image data indicating the number of reservations that had been used to generate drawing data, image data with one more number of reservations is sent to the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. The display method used was to read the data from the computer and use it to generate drawing data.

Similarly, at the timing when the variable display corresponding to the pending image ends and a new variable display starts, screen data indicating that the number of pending images has decreased by one is output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. Based on the screen data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source displays image data with one less number of reservations on the LCD, instead of the image data indicating the number of reservations that had been used to generate drawing data. A display method has been used in which the data is read from the sound control ROM 1512b and used to generate drawing data.

However, in recent years, effects have been performed that change the display mode of the pending image from the normal display mode to a different display mode. In this case, in addition to the five patterns described above, image data with different display modes for the held image is prepared in advance in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, but it is possible to provide multiple different display modes for the held image, As the number of variations in the display mode of the held images increases, such as displaying multiple held images in different display modes at the same time, the amount of image data to be prepared in advance increases in a geometrical progression. There was a problem in that the data size of the image stored in the image became large.

In addition to changing the display mode of the held image, we also provide image data for starting the display of the held image, image data for moving the held image to an adjacent held display area, and image data for ending the display of the held image. The more you try to increase the presentation modes for pending images, such as data, the more it becomes necessary to prepare image data corresponding to those presentation modes in advance in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, and the more the image data is stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. There was a problem that the size of the image data became large.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, separate layers are prepared for each of the holding display area to the fourth holding display area, image data corresponding to one holding display area is arranged in one layer, The configuration is now configured to generate drawing data by compositing each layer.

The following describes an embodiment in which a plurality of layers with different display priorities are used, image data is arranged in each layer, and the arranged images are displayed in a superimposed manner. .

Each layer has a predetermined number of vertical and horizontal pixels. This number of pixels is the same as the number of pixels in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. For example, in a gaming machine equipped with a game board effect display device 1600 having a display area of 1280 pixels horizontally and 800 pixels vertically, the number of pixels in each layer is also 1280 pixels horizontally and 800 pixels vertically, similar to this display area. . In the following, this embodiment will be described as having a game board side performance display device 1600 having a display area of 1280 pixels horizontally and 800 pixels vertically. Note that the number of pixels in the display area of the game board-side effect display device is not limited to 1280 pixels horizontally and 800 pixels vertically; for example, a display device having a display area of 1920 pixels horizontally and 1080 pixels vertically may be used. It may be configured as follows.

The display area has an x-axis as a horizontal axis, a y-axis as a vertical axis, and has an origin at the upper left. The coordinates of the origin are (0,0), the coordinates of the lower left of the display area are (0,799), the coordinates of the upper right of the display area are (1279,0), and the coordinates of the lower right of the display area are (1279,799). be. Images stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b can be placed in each layer by specifying arbitrary coordinates in the layer. Images that can be placed on a layer have a rectangular shape, and are placed so that the upper left pixel of the image is located with respect to the specified coordinates. FIG. 430(A) is a diagram showing the state of a layer in which no image is placed.

A display priority is set for each layer, and image data placed in a layer with a high priority is composited so that it is displayed in front of image data placed in a layer with a low priority. drawing data is generated.

For example, if image data placed in a layer with a low priority and image data placed in a layer with a high priority overlap, the image data placed in a layer with a high priority will Rendering data is generated in which image data arranged in a lower layer is hidden.

In each layer, it is possible to arrange image data only in a part of the layer, or it is also possible to arrange image data in the entire layer. For example, if image data is placed only in part of a layer with a high priority, drawing data will be generated in a manner that allows the image placed in a layer with a low priority to be viewed from the area where no image data is placed. That will happen. On the other hand, if image data is placed all over a layer with a high priority, even if some image data is placed in a layer with a low priority, the image placed in this layer with a low priority will be visible. This results in the generation of drawing data in a manner that is not possible.

It may also be configured such that transparency can be set for image data arranged in a layer. In this case, it is preferable to configure the transparency to be settable for each pixel of the image data arranged in the layer. In this embodiment, transparency can be set in a range of 0% to 100%. When the transparency is 0%, the pixel is displayed opaquely, when the transparency is 50%, the pixel is semitransparent, and when the transparency is 100%, the pixel is displayed transparently. In this embodiment, if there is no particular mention of transparency, the transparency of the pixel or the image is 0%, that is, it is opaque.

By configuring so that transparency can be set for pixels of image data placed in layers, it is possible to make both images visible even when images placed in layers with different priorities overlap each other. It is. For example, if you set the transparency of all pixels of image data placed on a layer with high priority to 50%, and set the transparency of all pixels of image data placed on a layer with low priority to 0%, The image placed on a layer with a high priority becomes semi-transparent, and the image placed on a layer with a low priority can be viewed in a display mode that makes the image placed on a layer with a high priority transparent. It is possible to generate drawing data that can be used.

Below, with reference to FIGS. 427 and 428, an embodiment will be described in which a plurality of such layers are set and a pending image corresponding to one pending is arranged in each of the plurality of layers.

In the embodiment shown below, the upper limit of the number of reservations related to the first starting port 2002 is four. In addition, in the order of winning in the first starting opening 2002, the relevant reservation and up to four reservations (in the order in which the corresponding decorative pattern changes are started, the reservation, the first reservation, the second reservation, the third reservation, and the 4 (sometimes referred to as "on hold") is displayed.

FIG. 427 is a diagram showing display priorities set for layers used for display processing in this embodiment and image data arranged in the layers, starting from layer L00 which is the layer with the highest display priority. A part of the layer up to layer L99, which is the layer with the lowest degree, is shown in the figure. Among these, layer L40, layer L45, layer L50, layer L55, and layer L60 are the layers in which the reserved images are arranged.

Note that the layer L00 is a layer in which an error notification image indicating that some kind of error has occurred in the gaming machine is arranged. Further, layer L35 is a layer in which decorative patterns that are being stopped and displayed are arranged. Further, the layer L65 is a layer in which decorative patterns that are being displayed in a variable manner are arranged. Furthermore, layer L99 is a layer on which a background image is arranged.

In this embodiment, basically, the pending image corresponding to the pending is placed in the layer L40. Further, a pending image corresponding to the first pending is arranged in layer L45. Further, a pending image corresponding to the second pending is arranged in layer L50. Furthermore, a pending image corresponding to the third pending is arranged in layer L55. Further, a pending image corresponding to the fourth pending is arranged in layer L60.

FIG. 428 is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 429 is a diagram showing how reserved images are arranged in layers in this embodiment.

The reserved image in this embodiment has a square shape of 320 pixels horizontally and 320 pixels vertically. The retained image is made up of pixels forming a perfect circular portion with a diameter of 320 pixels and pixels forming an outer portion of the circular shape with 100% transparency. In addition, the pixels forming a part of a perfect circular shape are composed of pixels whose outline of the circle is black, and the part inside the black outline is composed of white pixels. The outline portion has a width of approximately several pixels (for example, three pixels). By arranging such a hold image at a predetermined coordinate of a predetermined layer, it is possible to generate drawing data in which the hold in a perfect circular shape is visually recognized.

In this embodiment, FIG. 429(A) shows an example in which the pending image is placed at coordinates (480, 440) of layer L40.

The reserved image in this embodiment has a square shape of 160 pixels horizontally and 160 pixels vertically. The retained image consists of pixels that form a circular part with a diameter of 160 pixels and pixels that form an outer part of the circular shape with 100% transparency. In addition, the pixels forming a part of a perfect circular shape are composed of pixels whose outline of the circle is black, and the part inside the black outline is composed of white pixels. The outline portion has a width of approximately several pixels (for example, three pixels). By arranging such a hold image at a predetermined coordinate of a predetermined layer, it is possible to generate drawing data in which a perfectly circular hold is visually recognized.

FIG. 429(B) shows a state in which the above-described square-shaped reservation image with 160 pixels horizontally and 160 pixels vertically is arranged as the first reservation at the coordinates (760, 600) of layer L45.

FIG. 429(C) shows a state in which the above-described square-shaped reservation image with 160 pixels horizontally and 160 pixels vertically is arranged as a second reservation at the coordinates (880, 600) of layer L50.

FIG. 429(D) shows a state in which the above-mentioned square-shaped reservation image with 160 pixels horizontally and 160 pixels vertically is arranged as a third reservation at the coordinates (1000, 600) of layer L55.

FIG. 429(E) shows a state in which the above-described square-shaped reservation image with 160 pixels horizontally and 160 pixels vertically is arranged as a fourth reservation at the coordinates (1120, 600) of layer L60.

Further, FIG. 429(F) shows each layer (for example, layers L40 to L60) described with reference to FIGS. 430(B) to 430(F) and the layer L65 in which the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner is arranged. This shows an example of drawing data generated by compositing.

In this embodiment, in a layered structure capable of performing such display, it is possible to perform display processing in which each pending image is placed in a different layer, as described below.

FIG. 428 is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. At timing t1, timing t2, timing t3, timing t8, and timing t10, a start win to the first start opening 2002 occurs, and the pending image corresponding to the pending and the first pending are displayed in layers L40 to L60. A pending image corresponding to the fourth pending image to a pending image corresponding to the fourth pending image are respectively arranged.

FIG. 429(F) is a diagram showing the display state at timing t11. In this state, the display priority of the pending image is the highest, and the display priority of the pending image corresponding to the fourth pending is the lowest.

At timing t13, the pending image corresponding to the pending is placed on layer L60, the held image corresponding to the first pending is placed on layer L55, the held image corresponding to the second pending is placed on layer L50, and the held image corresponding to the second pending is placed on layer L50. The pending image corresponding to the 3rd pending is arranged in the layer L45, and the pending image corresponding to the 4th pending is arranged in the layer L40. The coordinates placed at this time remain unchanged.

FIG. 429(G) is a diagram showing the display state at timing t14. In this state, the display priority of the pending image is the lowest, and the display priority of the pending image corresponding to the fourth pending is the highest.

At timing t16, the pending image corresponding to the pending, the pending image corresponding to the first pending to the pending image corresponding to the fourth pending are arranged in layers L40 to L60, respectively, and the pending images corresponding to the first pending to fourth pending are arranged respectively in layers L40 to L60, and the pending images corresponding to the first pending to fourth pending are arranged respectively in layers L40 to L60. Return to state.

At timing t19, the pending image corresponding to the pending that was placed on layer L40 is placed on layer L50, and the held image corresponding to the second pending that was placed on layer L50 is placed on layer L40. The coordinates placed at this time remain unchanged.

FIG. 429(H) is a diagram showing the display state at timing t20. In this state, the display priority of the pending image corresponding to the second pending is the highest. Furthermore, the display priority of the held image corresponding to the first hold is lower than the display priority of the held image corresponding to the second hold, and the display priority of the held image corresponding to the first hold is lower than the display priority of the held image corresponding to the second hold. The display priority of the pending image is the lowest.

At timing t22, the pending image corresponding to the pending, the pending image corresponding to the first pending to the pending image corresponding to the fourth pending are arranged in layers L40 to L60, respectively, and the pending images corresponding to the first pending to fourth pending are arranged respectively in layers L40 to L60. Return to state.

At timing t25, the pending image corresponding to the pending that was placed in layer L40 is placed again in layer L50, and the held image corresponding to the second pending that was placed in layer L50 is placed in layer L40. .

At timing t28, the pending image corresponding to the pending, the pending image corresponding to the first pending to the pending image corresponding to the fourth pending are arranged in layers L40 to L60, respectively, and the pending images corresponding to the first pending to fourth pending are placed in layers L40 to L60, respectively, and the pending images corresponding to the first pending to fourth pending are arranged respectively in layers L40 to L60. Return to state.

In this way, by switching the display priority of the pending image while the decorative pattern is changing, it is possible to easily change the appearance of the entire pending image. Furthermore, it is possible to make a specific pending image stand out more than other pending images.

Note that from timing t13 to timing t16, the display priority of the pending image is the lowest and the display priority of the pending image corresponding to the fourth pending is the highest. In addition to this, the same display may be displayed multiple times.

Note that from timing t19 to timing t22 and from timing t25 to timing t28, the display priority of the pending image corresponding to the second pending is raised twice, so that the pending image corresponding to the second pending is made to stand out. , such a display mode may be configured to be performed only once, or may be configured to be performed three or more times. In addition, the configuration is such that not only the held image corresponding to the second holding, but also the held image corresponding to the first holding, the holding image corresponding to the third holding, and the holding image corresponding to the fourth holding are displayed in the same way. You may.

Note that the display mode shown in FIG. 429(G) can be said to make the pending image corresponding to the fourth pending image stand out more than the other pending images. Note that such a display may be configured to be executed according to the prefetch results of each suspension. For example, by increasing the display priority of a specific hold as in this example of presentation, it may be configured to indicate that the expectation of a jackpot for that hold is high.

In addition, in this embodiment and each of the embodiments to be described later, the pending image corresponding to the currently occurring variation of the decorative pattern, the pending image corresponding to the first pending to the pending image corresponding to the fourth pending are specially displayed. Sometimes referred to as The special display includes a special display in which only the relevant held image is displayed, a special display in which a held image corresponding to the concerned held image and the first held image is displayed, a held image corresponding to the concerned held image and the first held image, and a second held image. A special display in which a pending image corresponding to the pending is displayed; a special display in which the pending image, a pending image corresponding to the first pending, a pending image corresponding to the second pending, and a pending image corresponding to the third pending are displayed; There is a special display in which the pending image, a pending image corresponding to the first pending, a pending image corresponding to the second pending, a pending image corresponding to the third pending, and a pending image corresponding to the fourth pending are displayed. The special display makes it possible to show the player the number of times the decorative pattern has changed from one to five times, including the number of times the decorative pattern is currently changing.

Instead of the normal white pending image that is displayed as the pending image corresponding to the pending, the pending image corresponding to the 1st pending to the pending image corresponding to the 4th pending, a blue color indicating a higher jackpot expectation is displayed. , green, red, and other reserved images may be arranged in layers.

In this production example, a reserved image of a specific color such as blue, green, or red is placed instead of a white reserved image in a state where the display priority is not changed and a state where the display priority is changed. It is good to configure the probabilities that .

For example, if the held image corresponding to the second hold is placed in layer L50 with a relatively low display priority (for example, from timing t16 to timing t19), and if the held image corresponding to the second hold is placed in layer L40 with a relatively high display priority. (for example, from timing t19 to timing t22), when the image is placed in a layer with a high display priority, a specific color such as blue, green, or red is displayed instead of a white pending image. The configuration may be such that there is a high probability that the reserved image will be placed.

Note that the timing for arranging the reserved image of a specific color is a predetermined timing after the display priority is changed until the display priority is changed again (for example, 2 seconds after the display priority is changed). It is better to make it . For example, if the held image corresponding to the second hold is placed in layer L50 with a relatively low display priority (for example, from timing t16 to timing t19), at timing t18, the held image is replaced with a white held image. The configuration may also be such that a reserved image of a specific color is arranged. Furthermore, if the display priority is relatively high in the layer L40 (for example, from timing t19 to timing t22), at timing t21, a reserved image of a specific color is arranged in place of the white reserved image. It may be configured as follows.

Also, only when the image is placed in layer L40 with a relatively high display priority (for example, from timing t19 to timing t22), instead of the white pending image, a red image indicating a higher jackpot expectation is displayed. It may be configured such that reserved images can be placed.

In this way, there are layers with high display priority and layers with low display priority as the layers in which the 1st pending image is placed, and depending on the layer to be placed, a specific held image may be placed in place of the placed held image. The images are configured to have different probabilities of placement. With this configuration, if the display priority of the pending image changes, the player can feel the expectation that the display mode of the pending image will change to suggest that the expectation of a jackpot is higher. It becomes possible to hold the

In addition, in the time chart, the held image corresponding to the second holding was explained, but this is just an example, and the held image corresponding to the holding, the holding image corresponding to the first holding, and the holding image corresponding to the third holding are explained. The same display processing may be performed for both the pending image and the pending image corresponding to the fourth pending image.

In addition, in the time chart, we have explained an example of a state in which the number of holds is four, but this is not limited to the case where the number of holds is four, and when there is only the hold, the hold and the first hold, the hold and the first hold. When there is a first hold and a second hold, the same effect display may be performed even when there is the hold and the first hold to the third hold. Note that if there is only the pending image, there is no need to switch layers, so the display may be configured such that the pending image is changed to a pending image of a different color without switching the layer. Note that similar configurations may be adopted in other embodiments as well.

Furthermore, in other embodiments to be described later, the same applies to a held image whose layer is changed at a predetermined timing (for example, 2 seconds after the layer where the held image is placed is changed). The display mode of the pending image may be changed accordingly.

Note that at the timings for changing the layer in which the held image is placed (for example, timing t13, timing t16, timing t19, timing t22, timing t25, timing t28), an effect display indicating that the layer in which the held image is placed has been changed. may be configured to be executed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. For example, the displayed pending images may be configured to move together in the vertical direction. Alternatively, it may be configured such that only the held image with the highest priority, such as the held image corresponding to the second hold in the production example, is moved in the vertical direction.

Note that the timing for performing such an effect display is a predetermined timing (for example, timing t12, timing t15, timing t18, timing t21, timing t24, timing t27) before the timing of changing the layer in which the reserved image is placed. Alternatively, it may be a predetermined timing (for example, timing t14, timing t17, timing t20, timing t23, timing t26, timing t29) after changing the layer in which the pending image is placed.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the layer in which the pending image is placed has been changed. Furthermore, it is possible to make the player feel hopeful that the display mode of the predetermined pending image will change.

Below, with reference to FIGS. 427 and 430, another embodiment will be described in which a plurality of such layers are set and a pending image corresponding to one pending image is placed in each of the plurality of layers.

In this embodiment, after the power is turned on to the gaming machine, when a starting winning occurs in the first starting opening 2002 for the first time, a pending image is arranged in the layer L40. Next, when a starting prize to the first starting opening 2002 occurs, a pending image is placed in the layer L45. Next, when a starting prize to the first starting opening 2002 occurs, a pending image is arranged in the layer L50. Similarly, in response to the occurrence of a starting prize in the first starting opening 2002, the layer L55, layer L60, and the layer in which the reserved image is arranged are switched. In addition, after the pending image data is arranged in the layer L60, if a starting prize to the first starting opening 2002 occurs, the pending image data is arranged in the layer L40, and in the same manner, the data is transferred to the layer L45, the layer L50, etc. Then, when a starting prize to the first starting opening 2002 occurs, the layer in which the pending image data is arranged is cyclically changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 430, a mode of arranging images in a predetermined layer will be described with reference to a reserved layer and a reserved image. FIG. 430(A) is a diagram showing the state of a layer in which no image is placed. As shown in the figure, the number of pixels of the layer in this embodiment is 1280 pixels horizontally and 800 pixels vertically. Further, the origin (0,0) is provided at the upper left of the layer as shown in the figure.

The reserved image in this embodiment has a square shape of 160 pixels horizontally and 160 pixels vertically. The retained image is made up of pixels forming a perfect circular portion with a diameter of 160 pixels and pixels forming an outer portion of the circular shape with 100% transparency. In addition, the pixels forming a part of a perfect circular shape are composed of pixels whose outline of the circle is black, and the part inside the black outline is composed of white pixels. The outline portion has a width of approximately several pixels (for example, three pixels). By arranging such a hold image at a predetermined coordinate of a predetermined layer, it is possible to generate drawing data in which the hold in a perfect circular shape is visually recognized.

In this embodiment, FIG. 430(B) shows an example in which the pending image is placed at coordinates (560, 600) of a predetermined layer (for example, layer L40).

The reserved image in this embodiment has a square shape of 80 pixels horizontally and 80 pixels vertically. The retained image consists of pixels forming a perfect circular part with a diameter of 80 pixels and pixels forming an outer part of the circular shape with 100% transparency. In addition, the pixels forming a part of a perfect circular shape are composed of pixels whose outline of the circle is black, and the part inside the black outline is composed of white pixels. The outline portion has a width of approximately several pixels (for example, three pixels). By arranging such a hold image at a predetermined coordinate of a predetermined layer, it is possible to generate drawing data in which a perfectly circular hold is visually recognized.

FIG. 430(C) shows an example in which a reserved image is placed as a first reserved image at coordinates (760, 680) of a predetermined layer (for example, layer L45). FIG. 430(D) shows an example in which a reserved image is placed as a second reserved image at coordinates (880, 680) of a predetermined layer (for example, layer L50). FIG. 430(E) shows an example in which a reserved image is placed as a third reserved image at coordinates (1000, 680) of a predetermined layer (for example, layer L55). FIG. 430(F) shows an example in which a reserved image is placed as a fourth reserved image at coordinates (1120, 680) of a predetermined layer (for example, layer L60).

Further, FIG. 430(G) shows an example of drawing data generated by combining the layers (for example, layers L40 to L60) described with reference to FIGS. 430(B) to 430(F). There is. Note that although background images and decorative patterns are not shown in FIG. 430(G), in reality, all layers including these images are combined to generate drawing data.
In this way, in this embodiment, the pending image corresponding to the pending image and each of the pending images corresponding to the first to fourth pending images are arranged at predetermined coordinates of different layers, and the layers are combined. It is configured as follows.

Below, with reference to FIGS. 431 and 432, an example of a performance in which the drawing data generated in this manner is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 will be shown.

FIG. 431 is a time chart showing how reserved images are allocated to layers in this embodiment. Further, FIG. 432 is a display example in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Note that, in the following, the reservations will be expressed as reservations A to G according to the order in which the reservations occur. Note that such notation may be used in other embodiments as well.

At timing t1, a hold A is generated in response to the occurrence of a starting prize in the first starting opening 2002, and at the same time, the hold image corresponding to the hold A is placed at the coordinates (560, 600) of the layer L40. As described above, the reserved image has a square shape of 160 pixels horizontally and 160 pixels vertically, and is an image that is visually recognized as a white perfect circle.

Until the timing t1, the pending number is 0 and the decorative symbols are not displayed in a variable manner, so the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in response to the occurrence of this starting winning.

FIG. 432 shows a display state at a predetermined timing (a predetermined timing between timing t1 and timing t2) after a starting prize is generated in the first starting port 2002 at timing t1.

At timing t2, a hold B is generated in response to the occurrence of a winning start to the first start opening 2002, and at the same time, a hold image corresponding to the hold B is placed at the coordinates (760, 680) of the layer L45. As described above, the reserved image has a square shape of 80 pixels horizontally and 80 pixels vertically, and is an image that is visually recognized as a white perfect circle.

At timing t3, a hold C is generated in response to the occurrence of a starting prize in the first starting opening 2002, and at the same time, a hold image corresponding to the hold C is placed at the coordinates (880, 680) of the layer L50.

At timing t4, the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the pending A becomes a stopped display state.

At timing t5, the pending image corresponding to pending A, which had been placed on layer L40, is no longer placed on layer L40.

Further, at timing t5, variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the reservation B is started. At the same time, the pending image that was placed at coordinates (760, 680) of layer L45 is no longer placed, and instead, the pending image corresponding to pending B is placed at coordinates (560, 600) of layer L45.

Furthermore, at timing t5, the pending image that was placed at the coordinates (880, 680) of layer L50 corresponding to pending C is no longer placed, and instead, the pending image corresponding to pending C is placed at the coordinates (880, 680) of layer L50. It is located at the coordinates (760, 680).

In this way, in this embodiment, five layers are prepared for displaying reservations, and the layers are sequentially used when a reservation occurs in response to the occurrence of a starting prize at the first starting opening 2002. It is composed of

At timing t9, a pending image corresponding to pending E is placed in layer L60, and thereafter, at timing t11, a pending image corresponding to pending F is placed in layer L40, where the pending image corresponding to pending A was placed. be done. Similarly, at timing t17, the pending image corresponding to pending G is placed on the pending image corresponding to pending B and the layer L45 in which the pending image was placed.

In this way, by placing only one pending image in one layer, even if you want to change the display mode of the pending image, you can change the display mode of the pending image without considering the display status in other layers. It becomes possible to change the display mode of.

We have shown an example in which a square-shaped image of 80 pixels horizontally and 80 pixels vertically is placed as a reserved image, and a square-shaped image of 160 pixels horizontally and 160 pixels vertically is placed on a predetermined layer. The image may be enlarged twice in both the vertical and horizontal directions and used as the retained image. Alternatively, the retained image may be reduced to 1/2 in both the vertical and horizontal directions and used as the retained image.

With this configuration, there is no need to create image data for at least one of the held image and the held image in advance, and it is possible to reduce the size of image data stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. Become.

The white portion of the pending image may be configured to have a color other than white, such as blue, green, or red. In this case, the white retained image consisted of pixels forming the white part of a perfect circular shape with a diameter of 160 pixels and pixels forming the outer part of the circular shape with 100% transparency. It is preferable that the reserved image in which the pixels forming the part are blue is generated in advance and stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. Similarly, the held image in which the pixels forming the white portion of the perfect circular shape are green and the holding image in which the pixels forming the white portion of the perfect circular shape are red are generated in advance and stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. It's a good idea to leave it there. The blue pending image, the green pending image, and the red pending image may be arranged at coordinates (560, 600) instead of the white pending image.

Note that the display mode of the pending image may be configured to indicate the jackpot expectation level. In this case, as described above, it is preferable to configure the jackpot expectation level to increase in the order of white, blue, green, and red.

Similarly to the pending image, the pending image may also be configured such that the white portion of the pending image is a color other than white, such as blue, green, or red. In this case, the white retained image consisted of pixels forming a white portion of a perfect circular shape with a diameter of 80 pixels and pixels forming an outer portion of the circular shape with 100% transparency. It is advisable to create in advance a reserved image in which pixels forming a blue color are stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. Similarly, if a reserved image in which the pixels forming the white portion of a perfect circular shape are set to green and a held image in which pixels forming the white portion of the regular circular shape are set to red are created in advance and stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. good. Then, the blue pending image, the green pending image, and the red pending image are replaced with the white pending image, and coordinates (760,680), coordinates (880,680), and coordinates (1000,680) are used. ), and may be arranged at coordinates (1120, 680).

Note that the display mode of the pending image may be configured to indicate the jackpot expectation level. In this case, as described above, it is preferable to configure the jackpot expectation level to increase in the order of white, blue, green, and red.

In this way, a plurality of images with different display modes are created in advance as the relevant pending image or pending image, and one of the images is placed in a predetermined layer as the pending image or pending image based on the special lottery result. may be configured. Note that the timing for arranging the held images or held images with different display modes in a predetermined layer is the timing at which the held image or held image corresponding to a given hold is first placed in a predetermined layer (for example, It may be the timing t1) at which the pending A in the time chart shown in FIG.

Alternatively, the timing may be a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after being placed in a predetermined layer (for example, timing t6, which is a timing after timing t2 when pending B is placed in layer L45 in the time chart shown in FIG. 431).

Alternatively, the timing at which the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the suspended image ends and each suspended image is rearranged to the adjacent left image arrangement position (for example, the layer The timing t10) may be used to arrange the image placed at the coordinates (880, 680) of layer L55 at the coordinates (760, 680) of layer L55.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the display can be made such that the held image or held image can be switched to the held image or held image with a different display mode at any timing without significantly increasing the storage capacity of the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. It becomes possible to execute.

When a game ball enters the first starting slot 2002 and a new hold occurs, a new hold image will be placed on a layer where nothing was placed until then, but the hold as described above The configuration may be such that the held image is first placed at a predetermined coordinate position a predetermined pixel above the image placement position, and the placement coordinates of the held image are dynamically changed so that the held image moves downward.

At timing t1 when the hold A described with reference to FIG. ) and move it downward by 80 pixels to place the pending image corresponding to pending A at the coordinates (560, 600). In this case, the player visually recognizes a display mode in which the held image is displayed upward by the radius of the perfectly circular held image, and then moves downward by the radius over approximately 0.67 seconds. That will happen.

Furthermore, at timing t2 when the hold B described with reference to FIG. It is preferable that the pending image corresponding to pending B is placed at the coordinates (760, 680) by moving the pending image downward by 40 pixels over a period of time (seconds). In this case, the player will see a display mode in which the held image is displayed above the perfect circular held image by the radius, and then moves downward by the radius over approximately 0.67 seconds. Become.

In the embodiment described above, the held image or held image placed at a predetermined position on a layer is a single still image with no movement, but the display mode is changed at a predetermined cycle. The image to be viewed may be arranged at a predetermined position on the layer. For example, image data consisting of 30 still images is created in advance, and one still image among the 30 still images is arranged repeatedly in order at a predetermined position on a layer for each frame. You may. With such a configuration, it is possible to dynamically display the held image with a cycle of 1 second.

In the embodiment described above, at the start of a new variable display, the reserved image is suddenly placed at a position 120 pixels to the left on the layer. In this case, the player may see the pending image as if it has suddenly been displayed, and may not be able to understand the game situation.

Therefore, at the start of a new variable display, the coordinates at which the held image is placed on a predetermined layer may be gradually changed so that the manner in which the held image moves in the horizontal direction can be visually recognized. For example, in the coordinates where the held image is placed, the y-coordinate does not change, but the x-coordinate value decreases by 6 every frame, and in 20 frames (approximately 0.67 seconds) the x-coordinate value decreases by 120 (i.e. 120 pixels in the left direction). With such a configuration, it becomes possible to dynamically move the held image over a period of 0.67 seconds.

In addition, in the display process of moving the placement position of the held image by 120 pixels over 20 frames, image data consisting of 20 still images is created in advance, and 20 still images are moved every frame. It may also be configured such that they are arranged in order. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to visually recognize a display mode in which the pending image moves and changes its display mode.

Note that while the decorative pattern is changing, up to four pending images can be displayed visibly, but the intervals between the coordinates where each pending image is placed are equal intervals ( 120 pixels). In this case, the process of dynamically moving the held image using image data consisting of 20 still images is performed when moving the second holding to the left, moving the third holding to the left, It may also be configured to be used in each of the cases where the four reservations are moved to the left. In this way, by setting the arrangement coordinates of the reserved images at equal intervals, it becomes possible to use image data in common.

Regarding the coordinates at which the held image is placed, the y-coordinate is not changed, and only the x-coordinate is subtracted by a constant value for each frame. The diameter is twice (160 pixels) compared to the diameter of (80 pixels). A modified example of the embodiment in which the reserved image that has been placed as the first reserved image is arranged as the reserved image will be shown below. Specifically, image data consisting of 20 still images is created in advance, and the coordinates (560, 680), which are the placement coordinates of the pending image, are changed from the coordinates (760, 680) of the pending image placed as the first pending , 600), the arrangement coordinates of each still image may be determined so that it moves linearly over 20 frames, and the still image may be arranged frame by frame. Note that the 20 still images are configured such that the number of pixels in the vertical direction and the number of pixels in the horizontal direction also increase in stages.

We have shown an example in which image data consisting of 20 still images is created in advance and displayed sequentially, but the reserved image placed on the layer as the first reserved image is gradually enlarged over 20 frames. The image may be enlarged to twice the size vertically and horizontally at the 20th frame.

With this configuration, there is no need to create image data consisting of 20 still images in advance, and it is possible to reduce the size of image data stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b.

In this way, by individually arranging each held image in a different layer, it is possible to increase the variation in presentation modes of held images, and to reduce the size of image data stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. becomes.

Further, although a plurality of modifications have been shown regarding the display mode of the pending image and the pending image, these modifications may be applied to each embodiment described later. Also, when applied to each embodiment described later, the above-mentioned effects will be achieved.

Next, an embodiment that is a modification of the display method using layers described with reference to FIG. 427 and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 433 and 434. FIG. 433 is a diagram showing display priorities set for each layer in this embodiment. Further, FIG. 434 is a time chart of an example of production using the layered structure in this embodiment.

FIG. 433 is a diagram showing display priorities set for layers used for display processing and image data arranged in the layers in this embodiment. Similar to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 427, in this embodiment as well, layer L35, layer L40, layer L45, layer L50, layer L55, and layer L60 are the layers on which the reserved images are arranged. In this embodiment, the layer L40 is arranged with the pending image displayed as the pending, the layer L45 is arranged with the pending image indicating the first pending, and the layer L50 is arranged with the pending image indicating the second pending. Pending images are arranged, a pending image indicating the third pending is arranged in the layer L55, and a pending image indicating the fourth pending is arranged in the layer L60.

In this embodiment, at the timing t5 when the variable display of the decorative pattern ends, the arrangement of the pending image that has been arranged in the layer L40 is ended.

On the other hand, at timing t5, instead of the pending image that was placed as the pending image indicating the first pending at the coordinates (760, 680) of the layer L45, the pending image is placed at the coordinates (560, 600) of the layer L45. do. In this case, using the display method described above, in layer L45, the held image that was placed at the coordinates (760, 680) as the first held image is moved over 20 frames, and the held image is moved at the coordinates (760, 680) as the held image. It may be configured to be located at (560, 600).

In addition, at timing t5, the pending image that was placed as the pending image indicating the second pending at the coordinates (880, 680) of the layer L50 is changed to the pending image indicating the first pending at the coordinates (760, 680) of the layer L50. Place it as In this case, using the above-mentioned display method, in layer L50, the held image that was placed at the coordinates (880, 680) as the second held image is moved over 20 frames, and is displayed as the first held image. It may be configured to be located at coordinates (760, 600).

At timing t6, the pending image that was placed at the coordinates (560, 600) of layer L45 as an image indicating the pending is placed at the coordinates (560, 600) of layer L40, and the pending image in layer L45 is Image placement is complete. Note that if the layer is switched without changing the coordinates of the arrangement, no difference will occur in how the player views the hold.

Further, at timing t6, the pending image that was placed at the coordinates (760, 680) of layer L50 as the image indicating the first pending is placed at the coordinates (760, 680) of layer L45, and the pending image is placed at the coordinates (760, 680) of layer L45, The placed state ends.

In this way, in this embodiment, when a new hold occurs, the held image corresponding to the newly generated hold is placed in the layer with the highest display priority among the layers in which no held image is placed. Placed. Also, at the timing when the fluctuating display of a decorative pattern corresponding to a predetermined suspension ends and the fluctuating display of a new decorative symbol begins, the coordinates of the suspended image placed in each layer are changed in that layer. After that, it is configured to be rearranged to a layer with a higher display priority.

Further, the coordinates at which the reserved images are arranged may be gradually moved using a plurality of frames. In this embodiment, at a timing one second after the start of variable display of a new decorative pattern, the layer in which each pending image is placed is changed to a layer with a high display priority without changing the placement coordinates. It is configured to be rearranged. In this way, when performing a display in which the held image gradually moves, it is preferable to configure so that the movement of the held image is completed before the held image is placed in a layer with a high display priority.

With reference to FIGS. 433 and 434, regarding the pending image that was placed at the predetermined coordinates of the predetermined layer at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, the placement coordinates are changed within that layer and then the placement coordinates are maintained. An embodiment in which the layer is placed in a layer with a high display priority is shown.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 433 and 435, the reserved image that was placed at the predetermined coordinates of the predetermined layer at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern is first placed in a layer with a high display priority, and then In the following, an embodiment modified to change the arrangement coordinates will be described. FIG. 433 is a diagram showing the layer structure in this embodiment. Further, FIG. 435 is a time chart of an example of production using the layered structure in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, at the timing t5 when the variable display of the decorative pattern ends, the arrangement of the pending image that has been arranged in the layer L40 is ended.

On the other hand, at timing t5, instead of the pending image placed as the image indicating the first pending at the coordinates (760, 680) of the layer L45, the image indicating the pending is placed at the coordinates (760, 680) of the layer L40. Place the reserved image once. After that (for example, one frame later), the held image of 160 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions is arranged at the coordinates (560, 600) of the layer L40.

In this case, using the display method described above, in layer L40, the pending image placed at the coordinates (760, 680) is moved over 20 frames, and the pending image is displayed at the coordinates (560, 600). It may be configured so that it is placed in

Also, at timing t5, the pending image that was placed as the pending image indicating the second pending at the coordinates (880, 680) of the layer L50 is changed to the pending image indicating the first pending at the coordinates (880, 680) of the layer L45. Place it as After that (for example, one frame later), the reserved image is placed at the coordinates (760, 600) of layer L45.

In this case, using the display method described above, in layer L45, the reserved image placed at the coordinates (880, 680) is moved over 20 frames, and the reserved image indicating the first reservation is moved at the coordinates (880, 680). 760, 600).

In this way, in this embodiment, when a new hold occurs, the held image corresponding to the newly generated hold is placed in the layer with the highest display priority among the layers in which no held image is placed. Placed. Also, at the timing when the fluctuating display of a decorative pattern corresponding to a predetermined suspension ends and the fluctuating display of a new decorative symbol starts, the suspended images placed in each layer are placed in a layer with a high display priority. After redoing the process, the coordinates at which the reserved image is placed in each newly placed layer are changed.

Further, the coordinates at which the reserved images are arranged may be gradually moved using a plurality of frames. In this embodiment, it is preferable that the movement of the pending image is completed by the time one second elapses from the timing when the variable display of the new decorative pattern is started.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 433 and 434, and the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 433 and FIG. The display priority is configured such that the display priority becomes lower in the order of the pending image shown in FIG. A method of displaying pending images using such set display priorities will be described below.

FIG. 436 shows an example of rendering in which, when held images overlap each other in the display process using layers described with reference to FIG. 433, the overlapping manner of the held images is automatically determined.

FIG. 436(A) shows a state in which the above-described square-shaped reserved image with 160 pixels horizontally and 160 pixels vertically is arranged at coordinates (560, 600) of layer L40.

FIG. 436(B) shows a state in which a horizontally long rectangular-shaped pending image is placed at coordinates (680, 680) of layer L45 as a first pending image. Specifically, this retained image consists of pixels forming a white part of an oval shape of 240 pixels horizontally and 80 pixels vertically that is inscribed in a rectangle consisting of 240 pixels horizontally and 80 pixels vertically, and an oval shape with 100% transparency. It consists of pixels forming the outer part. In addition, in this performance example, this reservation, which is visually recognized as an ellipse, is set to have a higher jackpot expectation level than other reservations, which are visually recognized as a perfect circle.

FIG. 436(C) shows a state in which the above-described square-shaped reserved image with 80 pixels horizontally and 80 pixels vertically is arranged as a second reserved image at coordinates (880, 680) of layer L50.

FIG. 436(D) shows a state in which the above-described square-shaped reservation image with 80 pixels horizontally and 80 pixels vertically is arranged as a third reservation at the coordinates (1000, 680) of layer L55.

FIG. 436(E) shows a state in which the above-described square-shaped reservation image with 80 pixels horizontally and 80 pixels vertically is arranged as a fourth reservation at the coordinates (1120, 680) of layer L60.

FIG. 436(F) schematically shows the drawing data generated when each layer shown in FIGS. 436(A) to 436(E) and the layer L65 in which the changing decorative pattern is placed are superimposed. This is what is shown. Furthermore, FIG. 436(G) shows a state in which one pending image has been deleted from the state shown in FIG. 436(F), and a horizontally long rectangular pending image has been placed at coordinates (400, 600) as the pending image. ing. In addition, in the figure, the portions with 100% transparency outside the circular-shaped portion and the elliptical-shaped portion are not shown.

In this way, by arranging only one pending image in one layer in layers whose display priorities are set in a predetermined order, the display mode of the pending images can be greatly increased as shown in the figure. However, even if parts of the held images that do not have 100% transparency overlap, one of the held images will be automatically displayed in front based on the set display priority. Become.

Note that the horizontally long rectangular-shaped held images shown in FIGS. 436(B) and 436(G) may be configured such that the horizontally long rectangular-shaped held images are arranged in a layer from the time when a starting prize is generated. , At the time of starting winning, a square-shaped pending image is placed in a layer, and a square-shaped pending image is placed at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the first pending changes to the corresponding pending and the variation of the decorative pattern starts). Alternatively, a horizontally long rectangular retained image may be arranged.

FIG. 437 shows an example of rendering in which, when held images overlap each other in the display process using layers described with reference to FIG. 433, the overlapping manner of the held images is automatically determined.

FIG. 437(A) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image with 320 pixels horizontally and 320 pixels vertically is arranged at coordinates (480, 440) of layer L40. The retained image is made up of pixels forming a perfect circular portion with a diameter of 320 pixels and pixels forming an outer portion of the circular shape with 100% transparency. In addition, the pixels forming a part of a perfect circular shape are composed of pixels whose outline of the circle is black, and the part inside the black outline is composed of white pixels. The outline portion has a width of approximately several pixels (for example, three pixels).

FIG. 437(B) shows a state in which the above-described square-shaped reservation image with 160 pixels horizontally and 160 pixels vertically is arranged as the first reservation at the coordinates (760, 600) of layer L45.

FIG. 437(C) shows a state in which the above-described square-shaped reserved image with 160 pixels horizontally and 160 pixels vertically is arranged as a second reserved image at coordinates (880, 600) of layer L50.

FIG. 437(D) shows a state in which the above-described square-shaped reservation image with 160 pixels horizontally and 160 pixels vertically is arranged as a third reservation at the coordinates (1000, 600) of layer L55.

FIG. 437(E) shows a state in which the above-described square-shaped reservation image with 160 pixels horizontally and 160 pixels vertically is arranged as a fourth reservation at the coordinates (1120, 600) of layer L60.

FIG. 437(F) schematically shows the drawing data generated when each layer shown in FIGS. 436(A) to 436(E) and the layer L65 in which the changing decorative pattern is placed are superimposed. This is what is shown. Note that in the figure, the portion outside the circular portion where the transparency is 100% is omitted.

In this way, by arranging only one pending image in one layer in layers whose display priorities are set in a predetermined order, the transparency of the pending images is 100, as shown in the figure. Even if the portions other than % overlap each other, one of the reserved images will be automatically displayed on the front side based on the set display priority.

In this way, by configuring to place only one pending image in one layer, you can change the color of the pending image, increase the size of the pending image, move the pending image, or change the size of the adjacent pending image. Even in the case of displaying pending images in which images may overlap, it is possible to generate drawing data related to the pending images without considering the display status of other pending images.

In the drawing data shown in FIG. 436(F), FIG. 436(G), and FIG. 437(F), although there is a case where a part of the other held image is hidden by one held image, the whole of the other held image is is large enough that it cannot be completely hidden. With such a configuration, the player can accurately recognize the number of reserved tickets.

FIG. 438 shows a layer structure in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 433, which is modified so that the display priority order of the layers in which the pending image to the fourth pending image are arranged is reversed. FIG. In the layer structure shown in FIG. 438, a pending image indicating the fourth pending is arranged in layer L40, a pending image indicating the third pending is arranged in layer L45, and a pending image indicating the third pending is arranged in layer L50. In the layer L55, a pending image indicating the first pending is arranged, and in the layer L60, the pending image displayed as the pending is arranged.

FIG. 439 is a time chart of an example of a performance using such a layered structure. The time chart shown in FIG. 439 is the same as the production example described with reference to FIG. 434 except for the priority of the layers, such as the variation time of the decorative symbols and the timing of starting winnings. Also in the production example shown in FIG. 439, similarly to the production example explained with reference to FIG. . On the other hand, at a timing (for example, timing t6 or timing t11) when one second has elapsed since the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, a display process is performed in which the reserved image is placed in a layer with one lower display priority.

FIG. 440 is a time chart of an example of a performance using such a layered structure. The time chart shown in FIG. 440 is the same as the production example described with reference to FIG. 435, except for the priority of the layers, such as the variation time of the decorative symbols and the timing of starting winnings. In the production example shown in FIG. 440, at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, the reserved image that was placed at the predetermined coordinates of the predetermined layer is first placed in a layer with a low display priority, and then placed within that layer. Display processing to change the coordinates is performed.

Note that various modifications of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 433 to 435 may be applied to the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 438 to 440.

FIG. 441 shows an example of rendering in which, when held images overlap each other in the display process using layers described with reference to FIG. 438, the overlapping manner of the held images is automatically determined.

FIG. 441(A) shows a state in which the above-described square-shaped reservation image with 80 pixels horizontally and 80 pixels vertically is arranged as a fourth reservation at coordinates (1120, 680) of layer L40.

FIG. 441(B) shows a state in which the above-described square-shaped reservation image with 80 pixels horizontally and 80 pixels vertically is arranged as a third reservation at the coordinates (1000, 680) of layer L45.

FIG. 441(C) shows a state in which the above-described square-shaped reservation image with 80 pixels horizontally and 80 pixels vertically is arranged as a second reservation at the coordinates (880, 680) of layer L50.

FIG. 441(D) shows a state in which a horizontally long rectangular-shaped pending image is placed at coordinates (680, 680) of layer L55 as a first pending image. Specifically, this retained image consists of pixels forming a white part of an oval shape of 240 pixels horizontally and 80 pixels vertically that is inscribed in a rectangle consisting of 240 pixels horizontally and 80 pixels vertically, and an oval shape with 100% transparency. It consists of pixels forming the outer part. In addition, in this performance example, this reservation, which is visually recognized as an ellipse, is set to have a higher jackpot expectation level than other reservations, which are visually recognized as a perfect circle.

FIG. 441(E) shows a state in which the above-described square-shaped reserved image with 160 pixels horizontally and 160 pixels vertically is arranged at coordinates (560, 600) of layer L60.

FIG. 441(F) schematically shows the drawing data generated when each layer shown in FIGS. 441(A) to 441(E) and the layer L65 in which the changing decorative pattern is placed are superimposed. This is what is shown. Furthermore, FIG. 441(G) shows a state in which one pending image has been deleted from the state shown in FIG. 441(F), and a horizontally long rectangular pending image has been placed at coordinates (400, 600) as the pending image. ing. In addition, in the figure, the portions with 100% transparency outside the circular-shaped portion and the elliptical-shaped portion are not shown.

In this way, by arranging only one pending image in one layer in layers whose display priorities are set in a predetermined order, the display mode of the pending images can be greatly increased as shown in the figure. However, even if parts of the held images that do not have 100% transparency overlap, one of the held images will be automatically displayed in front based on the set display priority. Become.

FIG. 442 shows an example of rendering in which, when held images overlap each other in the display process using layers described with reference to FIG. 438, the overlapping manner of the held images is automatically determined.

FIG. 442(A) shows a state in which the above-described square-shaped reservation image with 160 pixels horizontally and 160 pixels vertically is arranged as a fourth reservation at the coordinates (1120, 600) of layer L40.

FIG. 442(B) shows a state in which the above-described square-shaped reservation image with 160 pixels horizontally and 160 pixels vertically is arranged as a third reservation at the coordinates (1000, 600) of layer L45.

FIG. 442(C) shows a state in which the above-described square-shaped reservation image with 160 pixels horizontally and 160 pixels vertically is arranged as a second reservation at the coordinates (880, 600) of layer L50.

FIG. 442(D) shows a state in which the above-described square-shaped reservation image with 160 pixels horizontally and 160 pixels vertically is arranged as the first reservation at the coordinates (760, 600) of layer L55.

FIG. 442(E) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image with 320 pixels horizontally and 320 pixels vertically is arranged at coordinates (480, 440) of layer L60. The retained image is made up of pixels forming a perfect circular portion with a diameter of 320 pixels and pixels forming an outer portion of the circular shape with 100% transparency. In addition, the pixels forming a part of a perfect circular shape are composed of pixels whose outline of the circle is black, and the part inside the black outline is composed of white pixels. The outline portion has a width of approximately several pixels (for example, three pixels).

FIG. 442(F) schematically shows the drawing data generated when each layer shown in FIGS. 442(A) to 442(E) and the layer L65 in which the changing decorative pattern is placed are superimposed. This is what is shown. Note that in the figure, the portion outside the circular portion where the transparency is 100% is omitted.

In this way, by arranging only one pending image in one layer in layers whose display priorities are set in a predetermined order, the transparency of the pending images is 100, as shown in the figure. Even if the portions other than % overlap each other, one of the reserved images will be automatically displayed on the front side based on the set display priority.

In this way, by configuring to place only one pending image in one layer, you can change the color of the pending image, increase the size of the pending image, move the pending image, or change the size of the adjacent pending image. Even in the case of displaying pending images in which images may overlap, it is possible to generate drawing data related to the pending images without considering the display status of other pending images.

Instead of or in addition to changing the display mode of the held image, the held image can be decorated by placing a specific image corresponding to the held image in a layer with a higher or lower display priority than the held image. You may. Further, by arranging such a specific image, it may be configured to indicate that there is a high expectation that the variation result of the decorative pattern related to the pending image will be a jackpot.

An embodiment modified so that a specific image can be placed in a predetermined layer in response to a reserved image will be described below with reference to FIG. 443.

FIG. 443 is a diagram showing display priorities set for layers used for display processing in this embodiment and image data arranged in the layers, starting from layer L00 which is the layer with the highest display priority. A part of the layer up to layer L99, which is the layer with the lowest degree, is shown in the figure.

Layer L37 is a layer in which specific images corresponding to the pending image, the pending image corresponding to the first pending to the pending image corresponding to the fourth pending are arranged.

Layer L39 is a layer in which a specific image corresponding to the pending image is displayed. Layer L40 is a layer in which the pending image is placed. Layer L41 is a layer in which a specific image corresponding to the pending image is displayed.

Layer L44 is a layer in which a specific image corresponding to the first hold is displayed. Layer L45 is a layer in which a pending image corresponding to the first pending is arranged. Layer L46 is a layer in which a specific image corresponding to the first hold is displayed.

Layer L49 is a layer in which a specific image corresponding to the second hold is displayed. Layer L50 is a layer in which a pending image corresponding to the second pending is arranged. Layer L51 is a layer in which a specific image corresponding to the second hold is displayed.

Layer L54 is a layer in which a specific image corresponding to the third hold is displayed. Layer L55 is a layer in which a pending image corresponding to the third pending is arranged. Layer L56 is a layer in which a specific image corresponding to the third hold is displayed.

Layer L59 is a layer in which a specific image corresponding to the fourth hold is displayed. Layer L60 is a layer in which a pending image corresponding to the fourth pending is arranged. Layer L61 is a layer in which a specific image corresponding to the fourth hold is displayed.

Layer L63 is a layer in which specific images corresponding to the pending image, the pending image corresponding to the first pending to the pending image corresponding to the fourth pending are arranged.

Further, layer L00 is a layer in which an error notification image indicating that some kind of error has occurred in the gaming machine is arranged. Further, layer L35 is a layer in which decorative patterns that are being stopped and displayed are arranged. Further, the layer 65 is a layer in which decorative patterns that are being displayed in a variable manner are arranged. Furthermore, layer 99 is a layer on which a background image is placed.

FIG. 444 is a diagram showing an example of performance in a gaming machine that employs the layered structure described with reference to FIG. 443. In the production example shown in FIG. 444(A) to FIG. 444(G), a perfectly circular pending image corresponding to the pending is arranged in layer L40, and a perfectly circular pending image corresponding to the first pending is arranged in layer L45. is arranged, a perfectly circular pending image corresponding to the second pending is arranged in layer L50, a perfectly circular pending image corresponding to the third pending is arranged in layer L55, and a perfectly circular pending image corresponding to the fourth pending is arranged in layer L60. The pending images are placed.

FIG. 444(A) is a production example in which a specific image visually recognized as a horizontally long oval corresponding to the first reservation is arranged on layer L46. Note that it may be configured such that horizontally oblong elliptical specific images are arranged in corresponding layers corresponding to the hold, the second hold to the fourth hold.

In FIG. 444(B), a specific image with a perfect circular shape corresponding to the reservation is arranged on layer L41, a specific image with a perfect circular shape corresponding to the first reservation is arranged on layer L46, and a second reservation is placed on layer L51. This is an example of a production in which a specific image with a perfect circular shape corresponding to the third reservation is arranged, and a specific image with a perfect circular shape corresponding to the third reservation is arranged on the layer L56.

FIG. 444(C) is an example of rendering in which a horizontally long rectangular specific image is arranged on layer L37 to hide the lower half of the reserved image located at the rear.

FIG. 444(D) is an example of a production in which a specific image having a horizontally long rectangular shape and a transparency of 50% is arranged on the layer L37 so that the entire reserved image located at the rear side is visually recognized as semi-transparent.

FIG. 444(E) is an example of rendering in which a horizontally long rectangular specific image is arranged on layer L65 so as to overlap the lower half of the reserved image located on the near side.

In FIG. 444(F), a specific image in a vertically elongated oval shape with a transparency of 50% is placed on layer L39 so that the pending image corresponding to the pending item located at the back side is visible as semi-transparent. This is an example of a production in which a specific image having a vertically elongated elliptical shape with a transparency of 50% is arranged on layer L49, so that the pending image corresponding to the second pending located at the rear side is visually recognized as semi-transparent.

FIG. 444(G) shows an effect in which the placement mode of each specific image explained with reference to FIG. 444(B) and the placement mode of each specific image explained with reference to FIG. 444(F) are simultaneously executed. This is an example.

In this way, by configuring to provide a layer in which a specific image can be placed corresponding to each held image, it becomes possible to perform various display modes for the held images while maintaining the visibility of each held image. .

Note that as shown in FIGS. 444(A), 444(B), 444(F), and 444(G), by displaying a specific image in response to a predetermined hold, the corresponding specific image It may be configured to indicate that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than that of a pending item that is not displayed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 444(C) to 444(E), by displaying a specific image corresponding to the displayed hold (from the concerned hold to the fourth hold in the figure), the specific image can be It may be configured to indicate that any one of the displayed reservations has a higher jackpot expectation than a reservation that is not displayed. Moreover, such a presentation form may be applied to the embodiment described above. For example, when changing the pending image for the first pending, a display mode as shown in FIG. 444 may be configured.

FIG. 445 is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 443. In such a layered structure, the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 444 may be configured to be executable.

It is possible to realize diversification of effects not only by displaying decorative patterns or displaying reserved images, but also by arranging a plurality of characters in a plurality of layers with different display priorities. Below, an embodiment modified to perform display effects by effectively utilizing display processing using a plurality of layers will be described.

FIG. 446(A) shows a first car image, a second car image, a first medal image, a second medal image, and a third medal image displayed in the display area in this embodiment. Further, FIG. 446(B) is a diagram schematically showing how medal images are arranged with respect to car images. FIG. 447 shows the layer structure in this embodiment and how images are arranged on layers in a plurality of presentation patterns.

First, with reference to FIG. 446(A), car images (first car image, second car image) and medal images (first medal image, second medal image, third medal image) will be described.

The first car image is a horizontally long rectangular image with 280 pixels horizontally and 200 pixels vertically. The first vehicle image is an image imitating a light van type cash transport vehicle. The first car image consists of an area consisting of black pixels representing the car body and tires, and an area consisting of other pixels with 100% transparency (the upper left part of the image and the parts to the left and right of the tire part). It is composed of.

The second car image is a horizontally long rectangular image with 280 pixels horizontally and 200 pixels vertically. The second vehicle image is an image imitating a truck with an open type loading platform. The second car image consists of an area consisting of black pixels representing the car body and tires, and an area consisting of other pixels with 100% transparency (top left part of the image, top right part of the image, tire part). (left and right parts).

The first medal image is a square-shaped image of 80 pixels horizontally and 80 pixels vertically. The first medal image is an area consisting of black pixels that represents a circular perfect circle with a width of several pixels (for example, 3 pixels) inscribed in a square of 80 pixels horizontally and 80 pixels vertically, and is located inside the circular perfect circle. It consists of an area made up of black pixels representing the kanji ``金'' and an area made up of other pixels with 100% transparency.

The second medal image is a square-shaped image of 80 pixels horizontally and 80 pixels vertically. The second medal image is an area consisting of black pixels that represents a circular perfect circle with a width of several pixels (for example, 3 pixels) inscribed in a square of 80 pixels horizontally and 80 pixels vertically, and is located inside the circular perfect circle. It consists of an area made up of black pixels representing the Chinese character "silver" and an area made up of other pixels with 100% transparency.

The second medal image is a square-shaped image of 80 pixels horizontally and 80 pixels vertically. The third medal image is an area consisting of black pixels representing a circular perfect circle with a width of several pixels (for example, 3 pixels) inscribed in a square of 80 pixels horizontally and 80 pixels vertically, and located inside the circular perfect circle. It consists of an area made up of black pixels representing the Chinese character "copper" and an area made up of other pixels with 100% transparency.

The medal image and the car image are placed on different layers. This will be explained below with reference to FIGS. 446(B) and 447. As shown in FIG. 447, car effect patterns 01 to 05 are provided as effect patterns in this embodiment. In each car effect pattern, a display is performed in which the car image and the medal image move from the right end to the left end in the lower part of the display area. Further, the car image and the reserved image, and the medal image and the reserved image may have an overlapping positional relationship, but the details will be described later.

In the car effect pattern 01, one of the medal images (first medal image, second medal image, third medal image) is placed in layer L39, and one of the car images (first car image, second car image) is placed in layer L41. Either one will be placed. Note that the layer L40 is a layer in which the pending image corresponding to the pending image is placed.

In car effect pattern 02, one of the medal images (first medal image, second medal image, third medal image) is placed in layer L44, and one of the car images (first car image, second car image) is placed in layer L46. Either one will be placed. Note that the layer L45 is a layer in which a pending image corresponding to the first pending is arranged.

In car effect pattern 03, one of the medal images (first medal image, second medal image, third medal image) is placed in layer L49, and one of the car images (first car image, second car image) is placed in layer L51. Either one will be placed. Note that the layer L50 is a layer in which a pending image corresponding to the second pending is arranged.

In car effect pattern 04, one of the medal images (first medal image, second medal image, third medal image) is placed in layer L54, and one of the car images (first car image, second car image) is placed in layer L55. Either one will be placed. Note that the layer L56 is a layer in which a pending image corresponding to the third pending is arranged.

In car effect pattern 05, one of the medal images (first medal image, second medal image, third medal image) is placed in layer L59, and one of the car images (first car image, second car image) is placed in layer L60. Either one will be placed. Note that the layer L61 is a layer in which a pending image corresponding to the fourth pending is arranged.

The relative positional relationship between the car image placed on a predetermined layer and the medal image placed on a predetermined layer is the positional relationship where the medal image is located at the rear of the car image when the layers are overlapped. It becomes. In addition, the positional relationship between the car image and the medal image does not change even when the car image is moved in car effect pattern 01 to car effect pattern 05, and even if the car image moves, the relative position of both images remains the same. The relationship will continue to be maintained.

FIG. 446(B) shows car images (first car image, second car image) arranged in a predetermined layer and medal images (first medal image, second medal image, third medal image) arranged in a predetermined layer. (medal image). In addition, in the figure, only the outline portion of a portion imitating a car is shown.

The combinations (six in total) of car images and medal images shown in FIG. 446(B) can be applied to each of car effect patterns 01 to 05 shown in FIG. 447. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a total of 30 performance patterns.

Referring to FIG. 448, an example of executing a car effect using a car image and a medal image is shown. In this presentation example, the decorative symbols are changing, and the maximum number of pending symbols is four. Further, in the lower part of the display area, from left to right, the pending image corresponding to the pending, the pending image corresponding to the first pending to the fourth pending image corresponding to the fourth pending are respectively arranged. Note that the pending image and each pending image are square-shaped pending images of 80 pixels horizontally and 80 pixels vertically as described above. Note that, as described above, when this image is placed in a predetermined layer, it is in a display state in which a reservation is visually recognized in a perfect circular shape with a black outline and a white inside of the outline.

FIG. 448 shows an example of the effect in the display area when the car effect pattern 03 is executed. In this production example, the first medal image is arranged in layer L49, and the first car image is arranged in layer L51. Further, in the layer L50, a pending image corresponding to the second pending is arranged.

FIG. 448(A) shows a state in which placement of the first medal image on layer L49 and placement of the first car image on layer L50 have started. A pending image corresponding to the fourth pending is arranged in layer L60. For this reason, the first medal image placed on layer L49 and the first car image placed on layer L50 are located on the near side of the pending image corresponding to the fourth pending and are visually recognized. This is the display mode.

FIG. 448(B) shows that the first medal image placed on layer L49 and the first car image placed on layer L51 move leftward from the state shown in FIG. 448(A) at the bottom of the display area. A state in which the image has been moved by a predetermined pixel is shown. In this state, the first car image is located behind the pending image corresponding to the second pending arranged in layer L50. Further, the first medal image is located closer to the front side than the pending image corresponding to the second pending arranged in the layer L50.

The first medal image consists of a circular outline made up of black pixels, a text part made of black pixels (in this case, the word "gold"), and other parts with 100% transparency. There is. Therefore, when the first medal image is located in front of the reserved image, the black perfect circular outline and black letters of the first medal image are located in front of the white pixels of the reserved image. It becomes visible. In FIG. 448(B), the left half of the character "gold" overlaps the white part of the reserved image, making it visible.

FIG. 448(C) shows that the first medal image placed on layer L49 and the first car image placed on layer L51 move leftward from the state shown in FIG. 448(B) at the bottom of the display area. A state in which the image has been further moved by a predetermined pixel is shown. Even in this state, the first medal image placed on layer L49, the first car image placed on layer L51, and the pending image corresponding to the second pending placed on layer L50 are in overlapping positions. Yes, and the entire character "gold" overlaps the white part of the pending image corresponding to the second pending. Therefore, the entire character "gold" is visible to the player.

FIG. 448(D) shows that the first medal image placed on layer L49 and the first car image placed on layer L51 move leftward from the state shown in FIG. 448(C) at the bottom of the display area. A state in which the image has been further moved by a predetermined pixel is shown. In this state, the first medal image placed on layer L49, the first car image placed on layer L51, and the pending image corresponding to the pending item placed on layer L40 are in overlapping positions. However, since the pending image corresponding to the pending that is arranged in layer L40 has a higher display priority, the first car image and the first medal image are higher than the pending image corresponding to the pending. displayed at the back.

In this manner, in this embodiment, by arranging the predetermined images in the layers before and after the layer in which the predetermined pending image is placed, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the pending image.

In the above-mentioned performance example, the performance example was shown in which the car performance pattern 03 is executed to perform the performance corresponding to the second hold, but by executing the car performance pattern 01, the performance corresponding to the second hold is executed. Similar effects can be achieved for images. Similarly, by executing the car effect pattern 02, the car effect pattern 04 is executed for the held image corresponding to the first hold, and the car effect pattern 04 is executed for the held image corresponding to the third hold. By executing step 05, it is possible to realize a similar presentation mode for the pending image corresponding to the fourth pending.

It may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the car effect pattern based on the special lottery result. Further, it is preferable to configure the system so that the degree of expectation that the special lottery result is a jackpot is indicated depending on the type of visually recognized medal. For example, the special lottery result is better when the second medal is displayed than when the third medal is displayed, and when the first medal is displayed than when the second medal is displayed. It is best to configure the system so that there is a high expectation that the player will win the jackpot. For example, in this production example, between the characters "silver" and the characters "gold" on the front side of the white part of the pending image displayed as the second pending, the latter corresponds to the second pending. It is preferable to configure the system so that the expectation that the variation result of the decorative pattern will be a jackpot is high.

We have shown an example where the medal image moves from the right edge to the left edge at the bottom of the display area together with the car image, but after the medal image moves to the position of the corresponding held image, it stops moving horizontally. It may be configured as follows. FIG. 448(E) shows a modification example in which the first medal image that has moved from the right direction is stopped at the center of the perfect circle in the pending image corresponding to the second pending. In the figure, the first car image is shown in a state where it continues to move to the left and is just about to go out of frame from the display area, separately from the first medal image that is stopped and displayed. has been done.

FIG. 449 shows an example of a performance modified so that the second car image is moved instead of the first car image in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 448.

In this way, when each car effect pattern is executed using the second car image, the player can visually confirm which medal image is placed immediately after the car image appears at the left end of the lower part of the display area. becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to arouse the player's interest as to which suspension corresponds to which medal image that has become visible stops.

In the embodiment shown below, an embodiment will be described in which a special lottery result is suggested according to the result of a display effect in which a plurality of characters run a foot race.

FIG. 450 is a diagram showing layers in which various images used in the foot race reach effect in this embodiment are arranged and the display priorities of those layers. Further, FIG. 451 shows an example of a performance in a foot race performance.

In this embodiment, in a reach state, a reach effect is executed in which six male characters who are sextuplets and a tall male rival character who is a rival of the sextuplets run a foot race, and depending on the result of the foot race, , special lottery results are suggested.

Specifically, the six male characters who are sextuplets are the eldest son's first sibling character, the second son's second sibling character, the third son's third sibling character, the fourth son's fourth sibling character, and the fifth son's fifth sibling character. It consists of a brother character and a sixth brother character.

Each character is a vertically rectangular image consisting of opaque pixels of a predetermined color representing the character's head and character's body, and pixels with 100% transparency other than the character's head and character's body. By arranging it in layers (layer L70, layer L72, layer L74, layer L76, layer L78, layer L80, layer L82), a display state is achieved in which it is visually recognized as a predetermined character.

As shown in FIG. 451(A), the head of each character image is provided with a predetermined character so that each character can be identified. Specifically, "1" is placed on the head of the first sibling character image, "2" is placed on the head of the second sibling character, "3" is placed on the head of the third sibling character, and "3" is placed on the head of the fourth sibling character. The character ``4'' is placed on the head of the character, ``5'' is placed on the head of the fifth sibling character, ``6'' is placed on the head of the 6th sibling character, and the letter ``LA'' is placed on the head of the rival character. ing.

As shown in FIG. 450, layer L82 has a first sibling character image showing the first sibling character, layer L80 has a second sibling character image showing the second sibling character, and layer L78 has a third sibling character image showing the third sibling character. The layer L74 is a fourth brother character image showing the fourth brother character, the layer L72 is a fifth brother character image showing the fifth brother character, and the layer L70 is a sixth brother character image showing the sixth brother character. This is the layer on which images are placed. Furthermore, layer L76 is a layer in which a rival character image indicating a rival character is arranged. Furthermore, layer L69, layer L71, layer L73, layer L75, layer L77, layer L79, and layer L81 are layers on which medal images are arranged.

FIG. 451(A) shows the display state immediately after the foot race reach effect is started. In this state, the first sibling character image is on layer L82, the second sibling character image is on layer L80, the third sibling character image is on layer L78, the rival character image is on layer L76, and the fourth sibling character image is on layer L74. As for the images, a fifth sibling character image is arranged in layer L72, and a sixth sibling character image is arranged in layer L70. Furthermore, the reserved image, which is white and visually recognized as a perfect circle, is arranged in the layer L60. In addition, on layer L65, decorative patterns with the number "2" attached to the upper left end and upper right end are arranged in a temporarily stopped state, and the reach state is controlled by the decorative symbols attached with the number "2". It is formed.

In the display state shown in FIG. 451(A) immediately after the start of the footrace reach effect, the first sibling character image is behind the second sibling character image, and the second sibling character image is behind the third sibling character image. The third sibling character image is behind the rival character image, the rival character image is behind the fourth sibling character image, the fourth sibling character image is behind the fifth sibling character image, and the fifth sibling character image is behind the fifth sibling character image. The character image is located behind the sixth sibling character image. In this way, each image other than the sixth sibling character image is displayed in such a manner that a portion of the image is hidden by the character image on the near side.

FIG. 451(B) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 451(A). Further, FIG. 451(C) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 451(B). In the footrace reach effect, in each layer, the coordinates in the y-axis direction of the first to sixth sibling character images are not changed, but the values in the x-axis direction are changed to a predetermined value. ~The sixth sibling character is configured to be visually recognized as moving in the left and right direction. Regarding the rival character image, the arrangement coordinates in the layer L76 do not change during the execution of the foot race reach effect, and the state in which it is displayed in the center of the display area is maintained.

In this way, by arranging a plurality of character images in overlapping positions and moving them only in one axis direction, it is possible to create a sense of depth in the representation of characters running in a race.

FIG. 451(D) shows a display state after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 451(C). Specifically, it shows a state in which the goal line image placed on layer L84 is moving from the right side to the left side of the display area. Note that in layer L84, the goal line image enters the frame from the right side of the display area, moves to the left at a constant speed, and finally frames out at the left side of the display area.

In the foot race reach performance, there are cases where the rival character wins the foot race, and cases where any of the 1st to 6th sibling characters win the foot race, and any of the 1st to 6th sibling characters The system is configured so that the expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a jackpot is higher when the player wins the foot race. Note that whether or not the player wins the foot race is determined by whether or not the character image overlaps the goal line image first.

FIG. 451(E) shows a display example when the rival character first overlaps the goal line image. On the other hand, FIG. 451(G) shows a display example when the first sibling character and the second sibling character overlap the goal line image before the rival character.

After the display state shown in FIG. 451(E) or FIG. 451(G) is reached, the first medal image described with reference to FIG. 446(A) corresponds to the order in which each character reaches the goal line. A third medal image is displayed corresponding to the character images that have won from first to third place. No medal image is displayed corresponding to the character images that have won fourth place or later.

FIG. 451(F) shows the first to third medal images described with reference to FIG. 446(A) corresponding to the ranking of each character after the display state shown in FIG. 451(E) is achieved. shows a display state arranged corresponding to the character images that won the top three prizes.

Specifically, the first medal image is on layer L75, the rival character image is on layer L76, the second medal image is on layer L77, the third sibling character image is on layer L78, and the third medal image is on layer L81. A first sibling character image is arranged in layer L82. As a result, a display mode is shown in which the rival character has won a gold medal, the third brother character has won a silver medal, and the first brother character has won a bronze medal.

Similarly, in FIG. 451 (H), after the display state shown in FIG. This shows a display state in which three medal images are arranged corresponding to the character images that won the top three prizes.

Specifically, layer L75 has a third medal image, layer L76 has a rival character image, layer L77 has a second medal image, layer L78 has a third sibling character image, layer L81 has a first medal image, A first sibling character image is arranged in layer L82. As a result, a display mode is shown in which the first sibling character has won a gold medal, the third sibling character has won a silver medal, and the rival character has won a bronze medal.

With this configuration, as shown in FIGS. 451(F) and 451(H), it is possible to realize a display state in which medals are visually recognized in an overlapping manner in front of each character. Further, by performing such a display effect, the player is shown the degree of expectation that the decorative symbols in the ready-to-win state will be stopped and displayed in a stopped manner indicating that a jackpot will occur.

The display states shown in FIGS. 451(F) and 451(H) are for layers L69, L71, L73, L75, L77, L79, and L81, which are layers for arranging medal images. This is achieved by placing medal images.

Specifically, medal images corresponding to the rankings from 1st to 3rd place are displayed in correspondence with the layers in which the character images ranked from 1st to 3rd place are arranged.

A process of arranging a medal image on layer L69 corresponding to a character image placed on layer L70, a process of arranging a medal image on layer L71 corresponding to a character image placed on layer L72, and a process of arranging a medal image on layer L74 corresponding to a character image placed on layer L74. A process of arranging a medal image on layer L73 corresponding to a character image, a process of arranging a medal image on layer L75 corresponding to a character image placed on layer L76, a process of arranging a medal image on layer L75 corresponding to a character image placed on layer L78. A process of placing a medal image on layer L77, a process of placing a medal image on layer L79 corresponding to a character image placed on layer L80, a process of placing a medal image on layer L80 corresponding to a character image placed on layer L82. The placement process is performed in response to the result of the foot race.

In this way, the foot race reach effect is configured so that a special lottery result is suggested depending on the character that reaches the goal line first. On the other hand, the special lottery result may be suggested in a different manner in the foot race reach performance. Below, a modification of the foot race reach performance described with reference to FIGS. 450 and 451 will be described with reference to FIGS. 452 and 453.

FIG. 452 shows a first modification of the footrace reach effect. In this production example, the fourth to sixth brother characters leave the footrace in the middle of the footrace and play pranks on the first to third brother characters and rival characters who are continuing the footrace. A display effect such as this is executed.

FIG. 452(A) shows the state immediately after the start of the foot race. This display state is the same as the state shown in FIG. 451(A).

FIG. 452(B) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 452(A). FIG. 452(B) shows a state in which the fourth sibling character and the sixth sibling character have moved to the left side of the display area, and the fifth sibling character has moved to the right side of the display area.

FIG. 452(C) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 452(B). FIG. 452(C) shows a display state in which the fourth sibling character and the sixth sibling character are framed out to the left side of the display area, and the fifth sibling character is framed out to the right side of the display area. In the display area, the first to third brother characters and a rival character are in a footrace.

FIG. 452(D) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 452(C). In the display state shown in FIG. 452(D), the fifth brother character holding a bronze medal (third medal image) enters the frame from the left side of the display area. Note that the fifth sibling character image is placed on layer L72, and the third medal image is placed on layer L71.

FIG. 452(E) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 452(D). In the display state shown in FIG. 452(E), the fifth brother character holding the bronze medal (third medal image) moves to the center of the display area and overlaps the rival character and the third brother character. Become. In this state, a display effect is performed in which the fifth brother character hands over a bronze medal (third medal image) to the third brother character. For example, in the layer L71 where the third medal image is arranged, the arrangement position of the third medal image may be moved so as to vibrate in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction.

FIG. 452(F) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 452(E). In the display state shown in FIG. 452(F), the bronze medal (third medal image) held by the fifth sibling character is handed over to the third sibling character and overlaps with the front side of the third sibling character. state. Note that the third sibling character image is placed on layer L78, and the third medal image is placed on layer L77. Furthermore, at the timing when the third medal image is placed on layer L77, the third medal image is not placed on layer L71. Note that a goal line is displayed at the right end of the display area.

FIG. 452(G) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 452(F). In the display state shown in FIG. 452(G), the third brother character is the first to reach the goal line while holding the bronze medal (third medal image).

FIG. 452(H) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 452(G). In the display state shown in FIG. 452(H), the fourth brother character is shown holding a gold medal (first medal image) and the sixth character is holding a silver medal (second medal image) on the left side of the display area. has been done. In this performance, the bronze medal acquired by the third brother character indicates the degree of expectation that a jackpot will occur. In addition, there is no indication of the degree of expectation that a jackpot will occur due to the rival character and the first sibling character who finished in the top three but did not get a medal.

FIG. 453 shows a second modification of the foot race reach effect. In this production example, the fourth to sixth brother characters leave the footrace in the middle of the footrace and play pranks on the first to third brother characters and rival characters who are continuing the footrace. A display effect such as this is executed.

FIG. 453(A) shows the state immediately after the start of the foot race. This display state is the same as the state shown in FIG. 451(A).

FIG. 453(B) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 453(A). FIG. 453(B) shows a state in which the fourth sibling character and the sixth sibling character have moved to the left side of the display area, and the fifth sibling character has moved to the right side of the display area.

FIG. 453(C) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 453(B). FIG. 453(C) shows a display state in which the fourth sibling character and the sixth sibling character are framed out to the left side of the display area, and the fifth sibling character is framed out to the right side of the display area. In the display area, the first to third brother characters and a rival character are in a footrace. Also, at this time, the layer on which the third sibling character is placed is changed from layer L78, where it had been placed, to layer L74. Further, the coordinates where the third sibling character is placed are also changed from the right side of the rival character to the lower left side.

FIG. 453(D) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 453(C). In the display state shown in FIG. 453(D), the fourth brother character holding a gold medal (first medal image) enters the frame from the left side of the display area. Note that the fourth sibling character image is placed on layer L72, and the first medal image is placed on layer L71.

FIG. 453(E) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 453(D). In the display state shown in FIG. 453(E), the fourth brother character holding the gold medal (first medal image) moves to the center of the display area and overlaps with the third brother character on the near side. In this state, a display effect is performed in which the fourth brother character hands over a gold medal (first medal image) to the third brother character.

FIG. 453(F) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 453(E). In the display state shown in FIG. 453(F), the gold medal (first medal image) held by the fourth sibling character is handed over to the third sibling character and overlaps with the front side of the third sibling character. state. Note that the third sibling character image is placed on layer L74, and the first medal image is placed on layer L73. Note that a goal line is displayed at the right end of the display area.

FIG. 453(G) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 453(F). In the display state shown in FIG. 453(G), a state in which the rival character reaches the goal line first is shown. Further, a state in which the third brother character reaches the goal line in second place while holding the gold medal (first medal image) is shown.

FIG. 453(H) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 453(G). In the display state shown in FIG. 453(H), the fourth brother character is shown holding a bronze medal (third medal image) and the sixth character is holding a silver medal (second medal image) on the left side of the display area. has been done. In this performance, the gold medal won by the third brother character indicates the degree of expectation that a jackpot will occur. In addition, there is no indication of the degree of expectation that a jackpot will occur due to the rival character and the first sibling character who finished in the top three but did not get a medal.

As in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 451, it may be configured such that the expectation level of the jackpot is suggested based on the ranking in which the player reaches the goal line. In particular, it may be configured such that the degree of jackpot expectation is suggested by the ranking of sibling characters or the ranking of rival characters. In this embodiment, a medal image is added to the character image as a display effect so that the ranking is easily understood.

On the other hand, as explained with reference to FIGS. 452 and 453, some of the characters leave the screen during the foot race performance, and those characters hand over medals to the characters running the foot race. , it may be configured to perform an effect that forcibly determines the ranking. In this case, the ranking of the characters running in a footrace can be predicted before they reach the goal line, making it more interesting than the performance described with reference to FIG. 451.

In addition, in FIG. 453, the layer on which the third sibling character image is arranged is changed from layer L78 to layer L74 during the foot race reach performance. Such display control makes it possible to perform an effect display in which the third sibling character image receives a medal from another character on the nearer side of L76 where the rival character image is placed.

As shown in FIG. 452(D), the third sibling character image is arranged in a layer behind the rival character image, and as shown in FIG. 453(D), the third sibling character image is the rival character image. It is preferable that the manner of the medal given to the third sibling character differs depending on whether the medal is placed on a layer closer to the viewer than the third sibling character.

For example, when the third sibling character is behind the rival character, the rival character will get in the way, and the fourth sibling character and fifth sibling character will give the third sibling character a predetermined medal. It may be configured so that there are cases where it cannot be passed.

On the other hand, when the third sibling character is in front of the rival character, the rival character will not interfere with the character, and the fourth sibling character and fifth sibling character will almost certainly be able to hand over the medals they brought. It may be configured as follows. In this way, when the third sibling character is in front of the rival character, a given medal (for example, a gold medal) is placed in the third position, compared to when the third sibling character is behind the rival character. It may be configured such that the probability of passing it to a sibling character is high.

Further, the medal may be handed over to the third sibling character multiple times. In this case, when the third sibling character is behind the rival character or in front of the rival character, if the third brother character is in front of the rival character, a predetermined medal (for example, a gold medal) indicating that the expectation of jackpot is higher is higher. ) is preferably configured so that the probability of having it in hand at the goal is high.

In each of the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 382 to 453, examples were shown in which the displayed image was moved from the front side to the back side or from the back side to the front side. In this case, by applying display processing using the layer structure as described with reference to FIG. By moving the image to a layer, the displayed image may be moved from the front side to the back side, or from the back side to the front side.

In this embodiment, a plurality of obstacle nails 1201 are planted from the front in obstacle nail through holes 1110a provided in the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. Specifically, the obstacle nail 1201 is held in the panel board 1110 by engaging the obstacle nail helical portion 1201c provided at the tip of the obstacle nail 1201 so as to bite into the panel board 1110. Furthermore, the panel board 1110 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and it is possible to visually recognize the movable accessory and the light-emitting decorative part arranged behind the panel board 1110 through the panel board 1110. However, by engaging the obstacle nail spiral shaped portion 1201c with the panel board 1110, the panel board 1110 may be scratched or cracked, resulting in a cloudy area (hereinafter collectively referred to as the whitened area HKB). ), and these parts become visible to the player, resulting in a problem in that the aesthetic appearance deteriorates. This is a problem that cannot occur when obstacle nails are planted on wooden game boards as in the past.

The applicant has conducted a detailed study on the causes and locations of occurrence of such whitened areas HKB. First, the manufacturing method and structure of the game panel 1100 on which the whitening portion HKB occurs will be explained with reference to FIGS. 454 and 455.

FIG. 454(a) is a side view showing the obstacle nail 1201 installed in the panel board 1110. FIG. 454(b) is a sectional view of the panel board 1110 and the obstruction nail through hole 1110a provided in the panel board 1110, viewed from the right. FIG. 454(c) is a sectional view of the state in which the obstacle nail 1201 is installed in the obstacle nail through hole 1110a provided in the panel board 1110, viewed from the right. FIG. 454(d) is a cross-sectional view of a region A where a whitened portion HKB may occur around the obstructing nail 1201 implanted in the panel board 1110, viewed from the right. FIG. 454(e) is a cross-sectional view, viewed from the right, of an example of a state in which a whitened portion HKB has actually occurred around the faulty nail 1201 planted in the panel board 1110. 455(a) shows the dimensions of each part constituting the obstacle nail 1201, and FIG. 455(b) shows the dimensions of the glass plate 192, the obstacle nail 1201, and the panel board 1110 with the obstacle nail 1201 planted in the panel board 1110. It is a sectional view showing dimensions of each shown member. Note that some symbols are omitted in the figure.

The structure and shape of the obstacle nail 1201 will be explained with reference to FIG. 454(a). The obstacle nail 1201 is entirely made of brass and has a certain degree of elasticity. In addition, the entire surface is visually recognized as having a yellowish metallic luster in a white light irradiation environment. When viewed from the side, the faulty nail 1201 includes, from the left side, a faulty nail head 1201a, a faulty nail first body portion 1201b, a faulty nail spiral-shaped portion 1201c, a faulty nail second body portion 1201d, and a faulty nail tip portion 1201e. It has become. The length L1 of the obstacle nail 1201 is 27 mm. The shape of the obstacle nail head 1201a is a dome-like round head shape, and is a perfect circle shape when viewed from the front. The diameter L2 of the faulty nail head 1201a when viewed from the front is 4 mm, and the thickness L3 when viewed from the side is 1 mm. The shape of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b is a cylindrical shape. The length L4 of the first body portion 1201b of the obstacle nail is 20 mm. The diameter L5 of the first body portion 1201b of the obstacle nail is 2 mm. The shape of the obstacle nail spiral portion is approximately cylindrical. The length L7 of the obstacle nail spiral-shaped portion 1201c is 4 mm. The diameter of the helical nail portion 1201c is slightly larger than the diameter L5 of the first body portion 1201b of the nail. The shape of the obstacle nail second body portion 1201d is cylindrical. The length L8 of the second body portion 1201d of the obstacle nail is 1 mm. Further, the diameter L6 of the second body portion 1201d of the obstacle nail is 2 mm, which is the same as the diameter L5 of the first body portion 1201b of the obstacle nail. The shape of the obstacle nail tip 1201e is a conical shape. The length L9 of the distal nail end portion 1201e is 1 mm.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 454(b) and 455(b), the structure of the panel board 1110 before the obstacle nail 1201 is installed will be described. The panel board 1110 is made of a colorless and transparent acrylic board material. The front and rear surfaces of the panel board 1110 are formed to be smooth, and members located at the rear can be clearly viewed through the panel board 1110. Note that the panel board 1110 may be made of a board material made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin. The thickness L10 of the panel board 1110 is 10 mm. The panel board 1110 is provided with an obstacle nail through hole 1110a for installing the obstacle nail 1201. The obstruction nail through hole 1110a has a cylindrical shape, and its diameter L11 is 2 mm. The obstruction nail through hole 1110a is formed by cutting the panel board 1110. Therefore, the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a becomes slightly cloudy and is visible to the player.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 454(c) and 455(b), a method for planting the obstacle nail 1201 into the obstacle nail through hole 1110a provided in the panel board 1110 will be described. The obstructing nail tip 1201e of the obstructing nail 1201 is pushed into the obstructing nail through-hole 1110a, and the entire obstructing nail spiral-shaped portion 1201c, obstructing nail second body portion 1201d, and obstructing nail tip 1201e are inside the obstructing nail through-hole 1110a. The obstacle to the panel board 1110 is removed by applying force toward the rear (to the right in the figure) until a part of the first body portion 1201b of the obstacle nail is located in the obstacle nail through hole 1110a. The installation of the nail 1201 is completed. Note that the obstacle nail 1201 is planted using a nail gun. The length L4 of the first body portion 1201b of the obstacle nail is 20 mm, but the length L12 of the portion located within the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is 3 mm, and the length L12 of the portion located within the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is not located within the obstacle nail penetration hole 1110a and is The length L13 of the portion located closer to this side than the front surface is 17 mm. FIG. 454(c) shows a state in which the installation of the obstacle nails 1201 on the panel board 1110 is completed.

Note that the distance L14 between the tip of the obstructing nail tip 1201e and the rear surface of the panel board 1110 is 1 mm. With such a configuration, even if a manufacturer of a game machine or an employee of a game parlor inadvertently touches the rear surface of the panel board 1110, there is no chance of injury caused by the obstructing nail 1201. It is possible to prevent this.

Note that the shape of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is such that it passes through the panel board 1110 because the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is shaved when the obstacle nail 1201 is planted in the panel board 1110. This is to remove the acrylic resin powder from the rear of the panel board 1110 to the outside.

As described above, the diameter L5 of the first body portion 1201b of the nail and the diameter L6 of the second body portion 1201d of the nail are 2 mm. Similarly, the diameter L11 of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is also 2 mm. On the other hand, the diameter of the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c is slightly larger than 2 mm. Therefore, when pushing the obstacle nail 1201 into the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is slightly deformed by the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c. When the pushing of the obstacle nail 1201 is completed, the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c is engaged with the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, and the obstacle nail 1201 is firmly held against the panel board 1110. .

Note that the diameter L11 of the faulty nail through hole 1110a is slightly larger than the diameter L5 of the faulty nail first body portion 1201b and the diameter L6 of the faulty nail second body portion 1201d, and larger than the diameter of the faulty nail spiral-shaped portion 1201c. It may also be configured to be slightly smaller. In this case, in a state in which the helical nail portion 1201c is engaged with the inner wall of the nail through hole 1110a, the first body portion 1201b of the nail, the second body portion 1201d of the nail, and the inner wall of the nail through hole 1110a are connected to each other. There will be a slight gap between them. With such a configuration, when the game ball collides with the obstacle nail 1201 and the obstacle nail 1201 is elastically deformed, the obstacle nail 1201 is allowed to be elastically deformed by the amount of this gap. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the obstacle nail 1201 breaks when the game ball repeatedly collides with the obstacle nail 1201.

By the way, in the process of planting the obstacle nail 1201, the obstacle nail helical portion 1201c moves backward within the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, causing damage to the inside of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a provided in the panel board 1110. There is a problem that it is perceived as white.

Further, the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is formed by cutting the panel board 1110, and has a shape that passes through the panel board 1110. Since the through hole is formed by cutting, the inner surface of the through hole has a rough surface and is visually recognized as white. In particular, since the distal nail tip 1201e is planted while remaining within the panel board 1110, the rearmost portion of the dislocated nail through hole 1110a itself is visually recognized as whitened.

In addition, when the installation of the obstacle nail 1201 is completed, the engagement state with the obstacle nail helical portion 1201c is maintained by elastically deforming the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, but if the limit of elastic deformation is exceeded. In some cases, cracks may occur outward from the inner wall of the nail through hole 1110a that the nail spiral portion 1201c engages with.

In addition, during a game in a game machine installed in a game parlor, the game ball collides with the obstacle nail 1201 many times, and the kinetic energy of the game ball is transferred to the obstacle nail through hole 1110a of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b. The cracks may be transmitted to the inner wall of the nail through hole 1110a through the portion located inside, and cracks may occur on the front side of the nail through hole 1110a. In addition, cracks may occur around the area (inside the panel board 1110) where the helical nail portion 1201c of the nail through-hole 1110a engages.

In addition, in gaming machines installed in gaming parlors, fraudulent actions such as forcibly bending the obstacle nails 1201 are carried out in order to make the winning rate of the predetermined winning openings more advantageous for players. After cleaning the front surface of the panel board 1110 with the door frame 3 in the open state, a store clerk moves the door frame 3 in the closing direction to put the door frame 3 in the closed state. 3 and the obstacle nail 1201 may occur. Even in such a case, a large force is applied to the faulty nail 1201, and the force is applied to the faulty nail through-hole 1110a through the portion of the faulty nail first body portion 1201b located inside the faulty nail through-hole 1110a. The cracks may be transmitted to the inner wall, and cracks may occur on the front side of the faulty nail through hole 1110a. In addition, cracks may occur around the area (inside the panel board 1110) where the helical nail portion 1201c of the nail through-hole 1110a engages.

In FIG. 454(d), A indicates a portion where a whitening portion HKB may occur as described above due to a collision between game balls YGK, etc. Moreover, FIG. 454(e) and FIG. 455(b) show an example of a state in which a whitened portion HKB actually occurs. 454(e) and 455(b) show a state in which the force applied to the first body portion 1201b of the faulty nail is transmitted to the inner wall of the faulty nail through hole 1110a, and a whitened portion HKB is generated on the front surface of the panel board 1110. ing. It also shows a state in which a whitened portion HKB has occurred inside the panel board 1110 starting from a portion of the fault nail through hole 1110a where the fault nail spiral-shaped portion 1201c engages. As shown in FIG. 455(b), the diameter L15 of the game ball YGK is 11 mm, the thickness L16 of the glass plate 192 is 3 mm, and the distance L17 between the glass plate 192 and the obstacle nail 1201 is 2 mm.

Furthermore, the longer the operating period at the game parlor, the higher the possibility that the whitened portion HKB will occur on the panel board 1110. In addition, once the whitened area HKB occurs, the structure of the synthetic resin around the whitened area HKB becomes weak, and the whitened area HKB gradually expands from that area, and when viewed from the front, the obstructed nail 1201 A situation may also occur in which the whitened area HKB extends outward from the center.

Note that the shape of one whitened part HKB generated in this way is generally planar, and its area is approximately 1-2 square mm, but multiple whitened parts HKB are formed around one faulty nail 1201. may occur radially when viewed from the front. Furthermore, such whitened portions HKB may occur in each of the plurality of faulty nails 1201.

Furthermore, due to the occurrence of such a whitened portion HKB, there is a possibility that the strength of engagement with the helical nail portion 1201c in the nail through-hole 1110a may be weakened. In this case, when the game ball collides with the obstacle nail 1201, the bounce mode is weaker than what was expected at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 1 (even if the game ball hits the nail, it does not rebound much and absorbs the momentum). There is a possibility that a situation may occur in which the winning rate in the winning opening changes.

In addition, when playing games on gaming machines installed at gaming parlors, a situation may occur where the obstructive nail 1201 breaks due to long periods of operation at the gaming parlor. In this case, the entire gaming board 5' may be broken. It will be replaced.

In this way, when the obstacle nails 1201 are planted on the panel board 1110 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, the predetermined movable accessories and the predetermined light-emitting decorative parts located behind the panel board 1110 become visible. While this improves the aesthetic appearance, the area around the obstruction nail through hole 1110a where the obstruction nail 1201 is installed looks white, which causes a problem in that the aesthetic appearance is degraded. Conventionally, a game machine is known in which a pilot hole is provided in a game board made of transparent synthetic resin, and a game nail is driven into the pilot hole (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-161638). This did not solve the problem that the engagement area between the game nail and the game board and the pilot hole were cloudy and visible, deteriorating the aesthetic appearance. On the other hand, the occurrence of whitening HKB during the manufacturing stage of the pachinko machine 1 has been countered by methods such as mixing rubber into the material of the acrylic board (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-104622). Phenomena in which a whitened area HKB occurs when a game machine is installed in a game parlor and used for gaming for a long period of time, or the whitened area HKB gradually grows larger starting from the generated whitened area HKB. This was not expected to occur, and there was room for improvement in this respect. Below, means for solving these problems will be shown.

The embodiment shown below is a structure near the panel board 1110 described with reference to FIG. This is a modified embodiment. Note that in this modification, the area cover member 2600a is not provided.

FIG. 456 shows an embodiment in which a panel board back rough surface portion 1110b is provided on the rear surface of the panel board 1110. FIG. 456(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. In addition, illustration of the fault nail head 1201a is omitted in the figure. Therefore, the circles showing the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 shown in the figure are actually the obstacle nail number of the obstacle nail 1201 that constitutes the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232. 1 shows the thickness of the body portion 1201b. Moreover, this can also be said to indicate the thickness of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a. Note that these points are the same in each of the drawings illustrating an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456.

FIG. 456(b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 456(a). FIG. 456(b) schematically shows a cross section taken through the part where the life nail 1230 is implanted, which is located on the left side when viewed from the front. Note that this point also applies to each drawing illustrating an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456.

FIG. 456(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection projection method. The angle of inclination in this cabinet diagram is 45 degrees. In addition, in the figure, the detailed structure of the faulty nail 1201, such as the faulty nail head 1201a, the faulty nail spiral-shaped part 1201c, and the faulty nail tip 1201e, is omitted from illustration, and the faulty nail 1201 as a whole is shown as one cylinder. ing. In addition, in this cylinder, the part shown by the solid line has shown the fault nail head 1201a of the fault nail 1201, and the part located in the front side rather than the panel board 1110 of the fault nail 1st body part 1201b. In addition, in this column, the parts indicated by dotted lines are the part of the first body part 1201b of the obstacle nail located inside the panel board 1110, the spiral shaped part 1201c of the obstacle nail, the second body part 1201d of the obstacle nail, and the part of the obstacle nail first body part 1201b located inside the panel board 1110. The tip portion 1201e and the rear end portion of the obstruction nail through hole 1110a are shown. Note that these points also apply to each of the drawings illustrating a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456.

Note that in FIG. 456(a), illustration of the whitened portion HKB is omitted. Further, in FIG. 456(c) as well, although the illustration of the whitened portion HKB is omitted, the whitened portion HKB occurs around the portion of the faulty nail 1201 indicated by the dotted line. Furthermore, in FIGS. 456(a) to 456(c), illustration of the first starting port 2002 is omitted. Note that these points also apply to each of the drawings illustrating a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456.

The rough panel back surface portion 1110b may be formed by cutting the rear surface of the panel board 1110 to a thickness of about 1 mm. The rough surface portion 1110b on the back side of the panel may be processed into a lens cut shape or a satin finish shape. The panel board back rough surface portion 1110b formed in this way is exposed to light emitted from the pachinko machine 1, light from lighting equipment installed inside the gaming parlor, or light emitted from the lighting equipment installed inside the gaming parlor. When light from other gaming machines is incident, these lights are diffusely reflected on the rough surface portion 1110b of the back of the panel board, resulting in a whitish appearance.

As shown in FIGS. 456(a) and 456(c), the portion of the panel board 1110 where the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is provided is visible from the front or diagonally above the left of the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b. In this case, the player will see the panel board in a state where it overlaps with the back rough surface portion 1110b.

In this way, behind the obstacle nails 1201 that are planted as the life nails 1230, the jump nails 1231, and the left guide nails 1232 on the transparent board (panel board 1110), there is a bright color visible part (the rough surface on the back of the panel board). 1110b), it becomes possible to make the whitened portion HKB near the implantation site of the faulty nail 1201 less noticeable due to the bright color visible portion that is visually recognized as white.

Note that white color is visible when a given object reflects diffusely (approximately 100 to 80%) uniformly (approximately 100 to 80%) of the visible light of all wavelengths of natural light irradiated to the given object, regardless of the wavelength range. It refers to the color that is said to be In addition, bright color means that a predetermined object partially absorbs light in a specific wavelength range of natural light irradiated onto a predetermined object, and diffusely reflects the remaining light in the wavelength range, for example. , refers to colors that are considered visible, such as cream, light gray, and bright yellow. On the other hand, black color means that the surface of a given object uniformly absorbs most of the visible light of all wavelengths of natural light irradiated onto the given object, and a portion of the irradiated natural light (20 to several %) refers to the color that becomes visible when it is diffusely reflected. In addition, dark color means that most of the wavelength range of natural light irradiated onto a given object is uniformly absorbed, and only a part of the irradiated light (approximately 20 to several percent) is diffusely reflected. However, in a specific wavelength range, the absorption rate of light differs, so it refers to a color that is close to black, for example, a color that can be visually recognized as dark blue. These definitions may be adopted as the definitions of each color in this specification. In addition, in the embodiment described in this specification, the white part may be made light-colored, or the light-colored part may be made white. For example, instead of emitting white light from a predetermined light emitting member, it may be configured to emit bright colored light. Further, the black part may be made dark, or the dark part may be made black.

FIG. 456(d) is a diagram showing a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456(a). In the example shown in FIG. 456(d), a panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is provided below the panel board 1110, white light emitted from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is introduced to the panel board 1110, and the panel board 1110 is The structure is such that the introduced white light is diffusely reflected on the plate back rough surface portion 1110b. In this case, the panel back rough surface portion 1110b becomes visible to the player with white light. Note that the lower panel light emitting board 2400 may be configured to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. Further, a light emitting section similar to the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is provided on the side or above the panel board 1110 instead of or in addition to the panel board lower light emitting board 2400, instead of below the panel board 1110, The light emitting section provided in this manner may be configured to emit light in the same manner as the panel board lower light emitting board 2400.

With this configuration, the amount of light emitted from the lighting equipment installed inside the game parlor was weak, and the light from the gaming machines installed inside the game parlor was weak (for example, when games were being played). A gaming machine that is not installed may automatically go into power saving mode, reducing the amount of light emitted by the gaming machine, or even if the gaming machine is in use, the player may adjust the amount of light, causing the amount of light emitted by the gaming machine to be reduced. ), the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB will be visible as one, and the whitened portion HKB near the site where the faulty nail 1201 is installed will be visible. It is possible to make it less noticeable. In this state, the whitened portion HKB itself also diffusely reflects the introduced white light and is visually recognized as white, but the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel is larger than the whitened portion HKB. Since much light is diffusely reflected behind the whitened portion HKB, it is possible to prevent the whitened portion HKB from becoming conspicuous.

Note that a plurality of embodiments that are modified from the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456 will be shown below, but the technical content shown in one embodiment may be applied to the technical content shown in other embodiments.

Although an example has been shown in which white light is introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the sides of the panel board 1110, a configuration may be adopted in which yellow light is introduced instead of white light. . In this case, the rough panel back surface portion 1110b becomes visible to the player as yellow due to the introduced light. Furthermore, the whitened portion HKB is also visually recognized as yellow due to the introduced light. By the way, as described above, the obstacle nail 1201 is made of brass and has a yellowish metallic luster. Therefore, the color of the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB is visually recognized as a similar color to the color of the obstruction nail 1201, and the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable. This is because the obstacle nail 1201 has been used for several decades in the pachinko machine 1, so the part of the obstacle nail 1201 located on the front side of the panel board 1110 (the obstacle nail head 1201a and the obstacle nail number This is because the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable about the color or shape of the portion (of the body portion 1201b that is not buried in the panel board 1110).

Although the obstacle nails 1201 are shown to be made of brass, other metal obstacle nails 1201 may be installed in the panel board 1110. For example, a stainless steel obstacle nail 1201 that is visually recognized with a grayish-white metallic luster or a pure copper obstacle nail 1201 that is visually recognized as a reddish metallic luster may be installed in the panel board 1110.

When stainless steel obstruction nails 1201 are employed, the color of the light introduced from the lower panel board light emitting board 2400 is preferably white. In this case as well, the color of the whitened portion HKB and the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the color of the obstruction nail 1201 are visually recognized as similar colors, making it possible to make the presence of the whitened portion HKB less noticeable. .

Similarly, when the obstacle nail 1201 made of pure copper is employed, the color of the light introduced from the lower panel board light emitting board 2400 may be set to red or orange. In this case as well, the color of the whitened portion HKB and the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the color of the obstruction nail 1201 are visually recognized as similar colors, making it possible to make the presence of the whitened portion HKB less noticeable. . In addition, in the obstacle nail 1201 made of pure copper, the color of the light introduced from the lower panel board light emitting board 2400 may be white.

In this way, the color of the metal that makes up the obstacle nail 1201 and the color of the metal that makes up the obstacle nail 1201 and the color of the metal that makes up the obstacle nail 1201 are determined from the light emitting means (the lower light emitting board 2400 of the panel board) to the transparent plate part (panel board 1110). By introducing similar colors and irradiating light to the diffused reflection part (panel board back rough surface part 1110b) and whitened part HKB located behind the obstacle nail 1201, the diffused reflection part (panel board back rough surface part 1110b) and whitened part Since the portion HKB and the obstructing nail 1201 are visually recognized in similar colors, the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

In the embodiment shown below, the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232, which were explained with reference to FIGS. 456(a) to 456(d), are all made of the same metal but are In this embodiment, a metal having a metallic luster color is used, and the light emitted from the lower light emitting substrate 2400 of the panel plate is configured to change from one predetermined color to a color at a predetermined timing.

Specifically, in FIGS. 456(b) and 456(c), a stainless steel obstacle nail 1201 is used as the left guide nail 1232, a pure copper obstacle nail 1201 is used as the jump nail 1231, and a brass obstacle nail 1201 is used as the life nail 1230. The obstacle nails 1201 made by Manufacturer Co., Ltd. are used in each case. Further, the color of the light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 to the panel board 1110 changes from the off state to white, green, red, and yellow in this order at a predetermined timing.

In this case, the light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 to the panel board 1110 and irradiated to the obstacle nail 1201 by diffuse reflection from the panel board back rough surface part 1110b is visible to the obstacle nail 1201 under the ambient light inside the game store. The amount of light is set to such an extent that the change in the visually recognized hue of the obstacle nail 1201 is slight compared to the color of the obstacle nail 1201. For example, with respect to the obstacle nail 1201 that is visually recognized as a yellowish metallic luster under the ambient light inside the game store, even when the light introduced from the lower panel board light emitting board 2400 is red, the obstacle nail 1201 is yellowish. It is visually recognized as a metallic luster.

In such a configuration, the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is turned on in white from the unlit state to the light emitting state, thereby introducing white light to the lower side surface of the panel board 1110. In this case, the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b diffusely reflects the introduced light, so that it is visually recognized as white. Furthermore, the whitened portion HKB also becomes visible as white due to the introduced light. As described above, the left guide nail 1232 uses the stainless steel obstacle nail 1201, so that the white light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 to the panel board 1110 and the panel board back rough surface part 1110b are It reflects the diffusely reflected white light and is visually recognized as a grayish-white metallic luster with a color similar to that of the panel board 1110 and the whitened portion HKB. Therefore, the presence of the left guide nail 1232 and the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

On the other hand, the jump nail 1231 is visually recognized with a reddish metallic luster because the obstacle nail 1201 is made of pure copper. Further, the life nail 1230 is visually recognized with a yellowish metallic luster due to the use of the brass obstacle nail 1201. These jump nails 1231 and life nails 1230 are caused by the light introduced into the panel board 1110 from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 and the light diffusely reflected by the panel board back rough surface part 1110b, respectively. Then, the obstacle nail 1201 with a yellowish metallic luster can be visually recognized by the player in a conspicuous state. Therefore, the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made relatively less noticeable.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 changes its light emitting state from white to green, thereby introducing green light to the lower side surface of the panel board 1110. In this case, the panel back rough surface portion 1110b diffusely reflects the introduced light, so that it appears green. Furthermore, the whitened portion HKB is also visually recognized as green due to the introduced light. As described above, the left guide nail 1232 uses the stainless steel obstacle nail 1201, so that the green light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 to the panel board 1110 and the panel board back rough surface part 1110b are It reflects the diffusely reflected green light and is visually recognized as a greenish metallic luster with a color similar to that of the panel board 1110 and the whitened portion HKB. Therefore, the presence of the left guide nail 1232 and the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

On the other hand, the jump nail 1231 is visually recognized with a reddish metallic luster because the obstacle nail 1201 is made of pure copper. Further, the life nail 1230 is visually recognized with a yellowish metallic luster due to the use of the brass obstacle nail 1201. These jump nails 1231 and life nails 1230 are caused by the light introduced into the panel board 1110 from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 and the light diffusely reflected by the panel board back rough surface part 1110b, respectively. Then, the obstacle nail 1201 with a yellowish metallic luster can be visually recognized by the player in a conspicuous state. In particular, the jump nail 1231 is visually recognized more conspicuously because while the panel back rough surface 1110b located at the periphery is seen in green when viewed from the front, it is seen with a reddish metallic luster, which is a complementary color. The state will be as follows. Therefore, the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made relatively less noticeable.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 changes its light emitting state from green to red, thereby introducing red light to the lower side surface of the panel board 1110. In this case, the panel back rough surface portion 1110b diffusely reflects the introduced light, so that it appears red. In addition, the whitened portion HKB also becomes visible in red due to the introduced light. As described above, the left guide nail 1232 uses the stainless steel obstacle nail 1201, so that the red light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 to the panel board 1110 and the panel board back rough surface part 1110b are It reflects diffusely reflected red light and is visible with a reddish metallic luster. In addition, the jump nail 1231 uses the obstacle nail 1201 made of pure copper, so that the light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 to the panel board 1110 and the light diffusely reflected by the panel board back rough surface part 1110b are eliminated. Upon reflection, it is visually recognized as a reddish metallic luster with a color similar to that of the panel board 1110, the whitened portion HKB, and the left guiding nail 1232. Therefore, the presence of the left guide nail 1232, the jump nail 1231, and the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

On the other hand, the life nail 1230 is visually recognized with a yellowish metallic luster due to the use of the brass obstacle nail 1201. Due to the light introduced into the panel board 1110 from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 and the light diffusely reflected by the panel board back rough surface part 1110b, the obstacle nail 1201 with a yellowish metallic luster is visible to the player in a conspicuous state. It becomes possible to do so. Therefore, the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made relatively less noticeable.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the light emitting state of the lower panel board 2400 changes from red to yellow, thereby introducing yellow light to the lower side surface of the panel board 1110. In this case, the panel back rough surface portion 1110b diffusely reflects the introduced light, so that it appears yellow. Furthermore, the whitened portion HKB is also visually recognized as yellow due to the introduced light. As described above, the left guide nail 1232 uses the stainless steel obstacle nail 1201, so that the yellow light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 to the panel board 1110 and the panel board back rough surface part 1110b are It reflects diffusely reflected yellow light and is visible with a yellowish metallic luster. In addition, the life nail 1230 uses a brass obstacle nail 1201 to prevent light introduced into the panel board 1110 from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 and light diffusely reflected by the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b. Upon reflection, it is visually recognized as a yellowish metallic luster with a color similar to that of the panel board 1110, the whitened portion HKB, and the left guide nail 1232. Therefore, the presence of the left guide nail 1232, the life nail 1230, and the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

On the other hand, the jump nail 1231 is visually recognized with a reddish metallic luster because the obstacle nail 1201 is made of pure copper. Due to the light introduced into the panel board 1110 from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 and the light diffusely reflected by the panel board back rough surface part 1110b, the obstacle nail 1201 with a reddish metallic luster is made visible to the player in a conspicuous state. becomes possible. Therefore, the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made relatively less noticeable.

In this way, predetermined light that is switched to a different color at a predetermined timing is introduced from the light emitting means (panel board lower light emitting board 2400) into the transparent board part (panel board 1110), and the light is illuminated behind the obstacle nail 1201. By irradiating the located diffuse reflection part (panel board back rough surface part 1110b) and whitened part HKB, the diffuse reflection part (panel board back rough surface part 1110b) and whitened part HKB are visually recognized in a similar color to the predetermined switched color of light. It becomes a state where it continues.

Furthermore, by configuring the plurality of obstacle nails 1201 with metals of a plurality of colors, as light of a predetermined color is introduced to the transparent board (panel board 1110) at a predetermined timing, the first The obstacle nails 1201 of the first predetermined color are visually recognized by the player in a state that is inconspicuous as a similar color to the predetermined color of light, and the obstacle nails 1201 of the second predetermined color are noticeable as a different color to the predetermined color of light. It is visible to the player in this state.

Further, the predetermined light introduced to the transparent board (panel board 1110) at a predetermined timing becomes different predetermined light, and the color of the light irradiated to the obstacle nail 1201 changes, so that the first predetermined color The obstacle nails 1201 of the second predetermined color are visually recognized by the player in a state where they stand out as different colors against different predetermined colors of light, and the obstacle nails 1201 of the second predetermined color are inconspicuous as similar colors against different predetermined colors of light. is visible to the player.

In this way, by changing the color of the light irradiated to the diffused reflection section (rough panel back surface section 1110b) located behind the obstacle nail 1201, the obstacle nail 1201 is switched between a state where it is noticeable and a state where it is not noticeable. Since the player can visually recognize the obstacle nail 1201, the way the player views the obstacle nail 1201 can be changed.

In this way, as the color of the predetermined light introduced to the transparent board (panel board 1110) changes, the color is different from the predetermined color, making it more visible to the player. Since the obstacle nails 1201 that are displayed change fluidly, the player can enjoy the visual interest of following the obstacle nails 1201 that stand out, and the player's attention is accordingly diverted. This makes it possible to make the presence of the whitened portion HKB relatively less noticeable.

An example has been shown in which the whitened portion HKB and the panel back rough surface portion 1110b are made visible in a predetermined color by light of a predetermined color introduced from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 to the panel board 1110. The light emitting state of the predetermined color on the lower light emitting board 2400 may be configured to remain lit from when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on until the power is turned off.

With such a configuration, the diffused reflection part (the panel board back rough surface part 1110b) and the whitened part HKB, or the diffused reflection part (the panel board back rough surface part 1110b) and the whitened part HKB, and the obstacle nail 1201 have similar colors. Since the whitened portion HKB can be visually recognized in this color, the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

Although an example has been shown in which the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 continues to be lit in a predetermined color while power is being applied to the pachinko machine 1, the light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 indicates decoration or the game state. It may be configured as follows. For example, at a predetermined timing while power is being turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 may be changed from lighting up in a predetermined color to blinking in a predetermined color. Alternatively, the light intensity may be increased or decreased while the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is lit in a predetermined color. With such a configuration, the light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 can be used for decoration and for indicating the game status. Note that when the player starts playing the game and the main control board 1310 detects that a game ball has won in the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, and the second starting hole 2004, or when the first starting hole 2002, the special lottery result drawn when a game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 is a jackpot, and the predetermined timing may be when a jackpot game state in which the jackpot opening 2005 opens and closes a predetermined number of times is started. . Note that it is preferable to return to the original light emitting state at the timing when the player finishes playing the game or when the jackpot gaming state ends. Alternatively, the special lottery result may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation of a jackpot by such a change in the light emission mode.

In this way, by changing the light emitting mode of the light introduced from the light emitting means (panel plate lower light emitting board 2400) to the transparent plate part (panel board 1110) into different light emitting modes depending on the gaming state, The light introduced into the transparent plate part can be used as light to decorate the diffused reflection part (rough panel back surface part 1110b) and the whitened part HKB while making the presence of the whitened part HKB less noticeable. .

Note that the color of the light introduced into the panel board 1110 may be a predetermined color other than white or a color similar in tone to the obstacle nail 1201. For example, it may be configured to selectively introduce any one of blue, green, and red light to the brass obstacle nail 1201. Further, it may be configured such that any one of blue, green, and gold light is selected and introduced into the obstacle nail 1201 made of pure copper. In these cases, although the panel board back rough surface part 1110b and the whitened part HKB are visually recognized by the color of the introduced light, the color of the light visually recognized in the panel board back rough surface part 1110b and the whitened part HKB and the color of the obstruction nail 1201 are different. Since they are no longer the same color, the effect is limited in terms of making the presence of the whitened portion HKB less noticeable. On the other hand, since it is possible to introduce a plurality of different colors to the panel board 1110, it is possible to increase decorative diversity.

On the other hand, blue, green, red, and gold light may be introduced into the stainless steel obstacle nail 1201. In this case, the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB are visually recognized by the color of the introduced light, and some of the introduced light also reaches the obstacle nail 1201, so the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b The color of the light that is visually recognized in the whitened area HKB and the color of the obstruction nail 1201 are visually recognized as the same color, and the presence of the whitened area HKB is made less noticeable, while a plurality of different colors are applied to the panel board 1110. This makes it possible to increase decorative diversity.

Light of one color out of a plurality of colors is introduced into the panel board 1110 from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400, and a special lottery is drawn based on the color of the introduced light to the panel board back rough surface part 1110b and the whitened part HKB. It may be configured to perform a light emitting effect that indicates the degree of expectation that the result will be a jackpot. This light emitting effect may be configured to start at a timing before the result of the special lottery is shown to the player by the stoppage of fluctuation of the decorative symbols.

For example, when a brass obstacle nail 1201 is adopted, the light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 to the panel board 1110 is the first expected color indicating that the expected jackpot is low (for example, 10%). Blue light is used as the second expected color when the jackpot expectation is medium (e.g. 30%), and golden light is used as the third expected color when the jackpot expectation is high (e.g. 70%). It may be configured to do so.

In addition, when the obstacle nail 1201 made of pure copper is adopted, the light introduced from the panel board 1110 from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is blue as the first expected color indicating that the jackpot expectation is low (for example, 10%). Green light is used as the second expected color when the expected jackpot is medium (for example, 30%), and red light is used as the third expected color when the expected jackpot is high (for example, 70%). It may be configured as follows.

In addition, when the stainless steel obstacle nail 1201 is adopted, the light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 to the panel board 1110 is used as the first expected color indicating that the jackpot expectation is low (for example, 10%). Blue light is used as the second expected color when the jackpot expectation is medium (e.g. 30%), and white light is used as the third expected color when the jackpot expectation is high (e.g. 70%). It may be configured to do so.

In this way, based on the results of the special lottery, when making the panel board back rough surface part 1110b and the whitened part HKB visible in a predetermined color, the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is colored in a luminescent color with a relatively low jackpot expectation. Compared to the case where the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 emits light in a luminescent color with a relatively high expectation of jackpot, the color of the panel board back rough surface part 1110b and the whitened part HKB, and the color of the obstacle nail 1201. It is preferable to configure the display so that it can be visually recognized in similar colors.

In this way, when performing a light emitting effect in which the light emitting means (panel board lower light emitting board 2400) emits light in a light emitting color with a high probability of winning, the color of the obstacle nail 1201 and the diffused reflection part (panel board back rough surface part 1110b) ) and the color of the whitened area HKB can be visually recognized as similar colors, making the whitened area HKB less noticeable, and when a highly anticipated light emission effect is performed, the presence of the whitened area HKB can be easily recognized. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player becomes aware of this and puts a damper on the player's interest, which has increased due to the performance of the highly anticipated light emission performance.

Note that the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is normally kept in the off state, and at a timing that indicates the expected level of jackpot (for example, the timing of occurrence of a reach state), the expected color of any one of the first to third expected colors is displayed. The light may be emitted for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) to introduce light of any one of the first to third expected colors into the panel board 1110.

The color of the light emitted by the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 may be configured to be changed from the first expected color to the second expected color at a timing before the special lottery result is suggested by the stoppage of the decorative pattern. . Alternatively, the first expected color may be changed to the second expected color, and then further changed to the third expected color. Further, the first expected color may be changed to the third expected color, or the second expected color may be changed to the third expected color. Further, it is preferable to configure such a change in the expected color to actually increase the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot.

The light emitting effect using the first to third expected colors may be configured to be executed until the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern indicating the result of the special lottery ends. Specifically, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern indicating the result of the special lottery will change until the display stops, or the fluctuating display corresponding to the next special lottery result will change. The light emitting effect may be continued until the start of the display. On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the decorative pattern continues to emit light even when the fluctuating display indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot stops displaying, and the jackpot game state is reached. The light emitting effect may be continued even after the light emitting effect has started. In this case, the timing for ending the light emitting effect may be the start of a predetermined round during the jackpot gaming state or the end of the jackpot gaming state.

When the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the player is shown that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (for example, a special character is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, The light emitting effect state using the first expected color or the second expected color may be changed to the light emitting effect state using the third expected color at a timing such as when a special sound effect is output. In this case, the timing for ending the light emitting effect may be the start of a predetermined round during the jackpot gaming state or the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In this way, the light emitting effect using the third expected color can be executed at the timing when it is determined that the player will be in an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state), or the light emission effect can be continued even during the player's advantageous state (jackpot gaming state). By performing a light emitting effect using the third expected color, the whitened portion HKB is made less noticeable and the player is less likely to notice its existence, thereby creating a state advantageous to the player (jackpot game state). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the increased interest of the player is dampened at the timing when the player's interest is determined or during the occurrence of a state advantageous to the player (jackpot game state).

The configuration is such that the state of the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 can be changed from an off state to a light emitting state, or from a light emitting state to an off state, in response to an operation on the operation button 410 by a player or an employee at a game parlor. You may. Alternatively, the intensity of the light emitted by the lower panel light emitting board 2400 may be set to multiple levels, and the amount of light emitted by the lower light emitting board 2400 of the panel board may be adjusted in accordance with the operation of the operation button 410 by the player or the clerk at the game parlor. The strength may be configured to be changeable. Alternatively, a plurality of colors of light emitted by the lower panel light emitting board 2400 may be provided, and the color of the light emitted by the lower light emitting board 2400 of the panel board can be changed in response to the operation of the operation button 410 by the player or the clerk at the game parlor. It may be configured to be changeable. At this time, it is preferable to adopt yellow, white, red, etc. as the emitting color that can be selected. Moreover, you may combine these. With such a configuration, it is possible to irradiate the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB with light of an appropriate color and appropriate amount of light that makes the whitened portion HKB less noticeable.

This is because the amount of light from the lighting equipment installed inside the game parlor and the amount of light from other gaming machines installed inside the game parlor (especially the gaming machines installed back to back to Pachinko machine 1) This is because the amount of light is not necessarily sufficient to illuminate the panel back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB. For example, when the amount of light from lighting equipment or other gaming machines is sufficient, and the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and whitened portion HKB are illuminated with white light that is a mixture of light from these multiple light sources. If there is, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable even when the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is turned off. Moreover, it is also possible to suppress the power consumption of the pachinko machine 1.

On the other hand, the color of the light from the lighting equipment installed inside the game parlor, and the light from other gaming machines installed inside the game parlor (especially the gaming machines installed back to back to Pachinko machine 1) The color is not necessarily close to white; for example, an event may occur in which the rough panel back surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB are illuminated by blue or green surrounding light. In this case, by operating the operation button 410 so that the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 emits light in a color similar to the metal color constituting the obstacle nail 1201, the panel board back rough surface part 1110b and the whitened part It becomes possible to visually recognize the HKB and the obstacle nail 1201 in similar colors. For example, if the obstacle nail 1201 made of brass is used, yellow light is used, and if the obstacle nail 1201 is made of pure copper, the light emitting board 2400 below the panel board is configured to be irradiated with red or orange light. It's good to do that. Note that by adjusting the amount of light emitted by the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 to such an extent that the color of light from lighting equipment and other gaming machines is not noticeable, the consumption of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced while making the whitening part HKB less noticeable. It becomes possible to reduce power consumption.

Note that such changes in the light emitting state, light emitting color, and light amount may be configured to be executable while the player is playing the game. For example, it may be configured such that the light emitting state, light emitting color, and light amount can be changed by operating the operation button 410 while the decorative symbols are changing or during the jackpot game state. Further, although the operation button 410 is an operation button for presentation, a dedicated button for changing the color or amount of light may be provided on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Further, it is preferable to configure the button so that it can be operated without opening the door frame 3.

In this way, the color and amount of light emitted from the light emitting means (panel board lower light emitting board 2400) can be adjusted by operating the operating means (operation button 410, etc.) that can be operated by the clerk of the game parlor. Therefore, it is possible to make the light emitting state of the diffuse reflection portion (the rough surface portion 1110b on the back side of the panel board) into a light emitting state in which the whitened portion HKB is less noticeable.

Although an example has been shown in which a light emitting effect is performed by emitting light from the panel plate lower light emitting board 2400 in a predetermined color while the decorative patterns are changing, etc., such a light emitting effect can be executed during a jackpot game state. Good too. For example, the light emitting effect may be started at a predetermined timing during the jackpot game, and may be ended at a predetermined timing during the jackpot game. The light emitting effect may be configured to suggest, for example, the degree of expectation regarding the game state that will occur after the end of the jackpot game state (for example, the degree of expectation that the probability fluctuation state will occur after the jackpot game state).

In this way, the light emitting means (panel By making the board lower light emitting board 2400) emit light, the whitened part HKB can be made less noticeable, and when a highly anticipated light emitting performance is performed, the player will notice the existence of the whitened part HKB, and the whitened part HKB can be made less noticeable. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's interest, which has increased due to the highly anticipated light-emitting performance, is dampened.

By providing the panel board back rough surface part 1110b behind the obstacle nail 1201 or by introducing light of a predetermined color into the panel board 1110 from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400, the panel board back rough surface part 1110b can be visually recognized in a predetermined color. However, there is a problem in that the front surface of the faulty nail head 1201a (a hemispherical portion) is visually recognized as is the color of the metal that constitutes the faulty nail head 1201a. Particularly when the amount of light from lighting equipment installed in a game parlor or from other game machines is weak, the rear of the obstructing nail 1201 is visible in bright color, so that only the front of the obstructing nail head 1201a is visible. The color may be visually recognized as a darker color than the bright color, making it stand out, and the player may feel uncomfortable.

Below, an embodiment will be described in which the front surface of the faulty nail head 1201a is made less noticeable by irradiating the front surface of the faulty nail head 1201a with light from the side, above, below, front, or the like.

The door frame right side unit 550 shown in FIG. 6 or the like may be in a light emitting state, and the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a may be illuminated by the light emitted from the door frame right side unit 550. When the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is in the off state, the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b is visible in bright color, so the color of the light emitted from the door frame right side unit 550 is preferably white. On the other hand, when the panel plate lower light emitting board 2400 is in the light emitting state, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is in a state where it is visible by the color of the emitted light, so the color of the light irradiated from the door frame right side unit 550 is It is preferable that the color is the same as the color of the light emitted from the panel back rough surface portion 1110b. Furthermore, when the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is in the light emitting state, the door frame right side unit 550 is in the light emitting state, and when the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is in the off state, the door frame right side unit 550 is in the light out state. It is good to say. In this way, by matching the emission color and timing of the emitted light between the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 and the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to make the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a less noticeable. .

In this way, an irradiation means (door frame right side unit 550, etc.) capable of irradiating light from the front to the obstacle nail 1201 is provided, and the white or bright color light from the light emitting means (panel plate lower light emitting board 2400) is provided. In a state where the diffused reflection portion (the panel board rough surface portion 1110b) diffusely reflects light, the irradiation means irradiates white or bright color light from the front toward the faulty nail 1201, thereby making the faulty nail head 1201a conspicuous. It can be made difficult.

By the way, when the door frame right side unit 550 is set to the light emitting state, only the right side of the front of the obstructing nail head 1201a is illuminated with light when viewed from the front, and the left side of the front of the obstructing nail head 1201a is illuminated with light. It is still visible and conspicuous in its dark color. Therefore, the door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 may be configured to have a bilaterally symmetrical structure with the door frame right side unit 550, and may be controlled to emit the same light as the door frame right side unit 550. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to irradiate the entire front surface of the faulty nail head 1201a with light, and it becomes possible to make the front surface of the faulty nail head 1201a even more inconspicuous. Note that it is desirable that the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 match the emission color and timing of the emitted light.

In this way, a plurality of irradiation means (door frame right side unit 550, door frame left side unit 530, etc.) capable of irradiating light from the front to the obstacle nail 1201 are provided, and a light emitting means (panel board lower light emitting board 2400) is provided. In a state in which the diffused reflection portion (the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel board) diffusely reflects the light from The portion 1201a can be made less noticeable.

Although the embodiment has been shown in which the door frame right side unit 550 is in a light emitting state, instead of or in addition to the door frame right side unit 550, the obstructing nail head 1201a can be illuminated by light from another member capable of emitting light. It may be configured to irradiate the front surface of the light with light. Note that in these other members as well, it is preferable that the emission color and emission timing of the irradiated light match those of the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400.

Furthermore, when irradiating light from the door frame right side unit 550 toward the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a, the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 may not be in the light emitting state but may remain in the unlit state. This is because when the faulty nail head 1201a is irradiated with light from the front, the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB are also irradiated with the light at the same time. In this case, it is preferable to irradiate the head of the nail 1201a with white light from the front, or to irradiate the head 1201a with light of a color similar to the color of the metal forming the nail 1201. Furthermore, when the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a is irradiated with light not only from the door frame right side unit 550 but also from other members capable of emitting light, the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 can be used in the same way. It is also possible to leave it in the unlit state without turning it into the light emitting state.

In this way, an irradiation means (door frame right side unit 550, etc.) capable of irradiating light from the front to the obstacle nail 1201 is provided, and when the light emitting means (panel board lower light emitting board 2400) is in the off state, the irradiation means can illuminate the obstacle nail 1201. By irradiating the nail 1201 with white or bright-colored light from the front, the white or bright-colored light from the irradiation means is also irradiated to the diffusely reflecting portion (the panel back rough surface portion 1110b), and the diffusely reflecting portion emits the light. Even in the case of a configuration in which diffused reflection is possible, the obstructing nail head 1201a can be made less noticeable.

Further, a light emitting part capable of emitting light downward is provided on the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 described with reference to FIG. It's okay. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to irradiate light above the front surface of the faulty nail head 1201a, and it becomes possible to make the front surface of the faulty nail head 1201a less noticeable. Further, the light emitted from the frame top lens decoration board 437 of the production operation unit 400 described with reference to FIGS. 24, 37, etc. is configured to be able to be emitted not only diagonally forward but also diagonally backward, It may be configured such that light is irradiated through the frame top lens 418 toward the faulty nail head 1201a. Note that the frame top lens 418 is preferably made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to irradiate the lower part of the front surface of the faulty nail head 1201a with light, and it becomes possible to make the front surface of the faulty nail head 1201a less noticeable. Note that it is desirable that the door frame top unit 570 and the frame top lens decoration board 437 included in the production operation unit 400 match the emission color and emission timing of the irradiated light.

In this way, an irradiation means (door frame right side unit 550, etc.) that can irradiate light to the obstacle nail 1201 from the front is provided at least one above or below the obstacle nail 1201, and the Even when configured to irradiate light, the faulty nail head 1201a can be made less noticeable.

Note that instead of the door frame top unit 570 and the production operation unit 400 described with reference to FIGS. 24 and 37, the door frame top unit 570 and production operation unit 400 described with reference to FIG. A similar configuration may be adopted in an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to it, and may be configured to irradiate the front light of the obstructing nail head 1201a. In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 282, the operation button 410 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a light emitting means is provided in the operation button 410 to emit light to the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a. It may be configured to irradiate.

It may be configured such that light is irradiated from the frame movable body provided on the door frame top unit 570 to the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a. For example, the rear surface of the printed circuit board constituting the right ear inner frame movable body light emitting section 7330 of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 described with reference to FIGS. 301, 302, and 303, and the left ear inner frame movable body Light emitting diodes are mounted on the rear surfaces of the printed circuit boards constituting the left ear inner frame movable body light emitting unit 7430 of the body 7400, and the rear surface of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are mounted with light emitting diodes. The rear surface of the body 7400 is made of colorless transparent or milky white synthetic resin, and light from a light emitting diode mounted on a printed circuit board constituting the right ear inner frame movable body light emitting unit 7330 and the left ear inner frame movable It may be configured such that light from a light emitting diode mounted on the rear surface of the printed circuit board constituting the left ear inner frame movable body light emitting unit 7430 of the body 7400 illuminates the front surface of the faulty nail head 1201a. . Further, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 described with reference to FIG. It may also emit light.

In this way, movable bodies (right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear outer frame movable body 7450, right ear inner frame movable body 7300, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, etc.) and operable operation means (operation button 410, etc.) to irradiate light onto the obstructing nail 1201 from the front. Even in this case, the faulty nail head 1201a can be made less noticeable.

In addition, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 described with reference to FIGS. 309(A) to 309(E) Light from the right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit, which are provided in the door frame top unit 570 so as to irradiate the object, illuminates the front surface of the faulty nail head 1201a. It may be configured as follows.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 309(B) and 309(E), the first surface of the right ear inner frame movable body 7310, the first surface of the right ear outer frame movable body 7360, and the first surface of the left ear inner frame movable body 7410, with the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 facing the front and stopped (third state), the right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit are turned on. It is good to make it emit light. Of the light emitted from the right side light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, and the left A portion of the light that is not irradiated to either the inner ear frame movable body first surface 7410 or the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 is irradiated to the lower part of the game area 5a.

With such a configuration, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, and the left ear inner frame in a stopped state (third state) facing forward. The movable body first surface 7410 and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 can be illuminated with light to make them decorative, and the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a planted in the lower part of the game area 5a. It becomes possible to irradiate light upward from the left and right directions, and it becomes possible to make the front surface of the faulty nail head 1201a less noticeable without providing a new light source.

In addition, when the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is in the off state, the panel board back rough surface part 1110b is in a state where it is visible in bright color, so the right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side in the door frame top unit The color of the light emitted from the light emitting unit 7052 is preferably white. On the other hand, when the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is in the light emitting state, the panel board back rough surface part 1110b is in a state where it can be visually recognized by the color of the emitted light. It is preferable that the color of the light emitted from the left side light emitting section 7052 in the top unit is the same as the color of the light emitted from the panel back rough surface section 1110b.

In this way, by matching the emitted light color and emission timing of the panel board lower light emitting board 2400, the right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit, and the left light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit, it is possible to eliminate the problem with the head of a nail. It is possible to make the front surface of the portion 1201a more inconspicuous.

Further, from the standby position (first state) shown in FIGS. 309(A), 309(C), and 309(D), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear After rotating the inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 clockwise by 10 degrees when viewed from the right side and stopping, the right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting part in the door frame top unit are turned. The portion 7052 may be made to emit light. Of the light emitted from the right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit, most of the light emitted downward from the door frame top unit 570 is from the movable right inner frame. The entire gaming area 5a is irradiated without being blocked by the body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450.

With such a configuration, it is possible to irradiate light from left and right above the front surface of the obstacle nail heads 1201a planted throughout the gaming area 5a, and the obstacle nail heads can be illuminated from the left and right without providing a new light source. It is possible to make the front surface of the portion 1201a less noticeable.

In addition, when the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is in the off state, the panel board back rough surface part 1110b is in a state where it is visible in bright color, so the right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side in the door frame top unit The color of the light emitted from the light emitting unit 7052 is preferably white. On the other hand, when the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is in the light emitting state, the panel board back rough surface part 1110b is in a state where it can be visually recognized by the color of the emitted light. It is preferable that the color of the light emitted from the left side light emitting section 7052 in the top unit is the same as the color of the light emitted from the panel back rough surface section 1110b.

In this way, by matching the emitted light color and emission timing of the panel board lower light emitting board 2400, the right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit, and the left light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit, it is possible to eliminate the problem with the head of a nail. It is possible to make the front surface of the portion 1201a more inconspicuous.

In addition, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are in the standby position (first state) shown in FIGS. 309(A), 309(C), and 309(D), and With the ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 in the stopped state (third state) facing the front as shown in FIGS. 309(B) and 309(E), The right side light emitting section 7050 and the left side light emitting section 7052 in the door frame top unit may be made to emit light.

Of the light emitted from the right side light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit, the light emitted from the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 A part of the light that is not irradiated to any area is irradiated to the upper part of the game area 5a and the lower part of the game area 5a.

With this configuration, the first surface 7360 of the movable right ear outer frame body and the first surface 7460 of the movable left ear outer frame body in the stopped state facing forward (third state) are illuminated with light and decorated. In addition, it becomes possible to irradiate light from left and right above the front surfaces of the obstacle nail heads 1201a planted in the upper part of the game area 5a and the lower part of the game area 5a, and a new light source is provided. It is possible to make the front surface of the obstructive nail head 1201a less noticeable without causing any problems. In addition, in the center in the vertical direction of the gaming area 5a, the light from the right side light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit is transmitted to the right outer frame movable body first surface 7360, It is hardly irradiated because it is blocked by the first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body. As a result, light is reflected on the front side and back side of the glass unit 190 and the surface of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the amount of light that feels "dazzling" enters the player's eyeballs. , it is possible to avoid a situation where the player's visibility of the game board side performance display device 1600 is obstructed.

In addition, when the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is in the off state, the panel board back rough surface part 1110b is in a state where it is visible in bright color, so the right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side in the door frame top unit The color of the light emitted from the light emitting unit 7052 is preferably white. On the other hand, when the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is in the light emitting state, the panel board back rough surface part 1110b is in a state where it can be visually recognized by the color of the emitted light. It is preferable that the color of the light emitted from the left side light emitting section 7052 in the top unit is the same as the color of the light emitted from the panel back rough surface section 1110b.

In this way, by matching the emitted light color and emission timing of the panel board lower light emitting board 2400, the right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit, and the left light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit, it is possible to eliminate the problem with the head of a nail. It is possible to make the front surface of the portion 1201a more inconspicuous.

Alternatively, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 described with reference to FIGS. 364, 365, 371, etc. may be configured to irradiate light onto the front surface of the obstructed nail head 1201a. In this case, a light emitting diode is mounted on the rear surface of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting section 7810 made of a white printed circuit board, and the light emitting diode is mounted on the rear surface of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting section 7810 with the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 located at the movement position. The structure may be such that light from a light emitting diode illuminates the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a. In this case, in order to protect the back surface of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810, a cover member made of colorless transparent or milky white synthetic resin may be provided on the back surface of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800.

Note that no light emitting diode is mounted on the rear surface of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting section 7810, and only a cover member made of colorless transparent or milky white synthetic resin is provided to protect the back surface of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting section 7810. Good too. In this case, light is emitted forward from the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 on the back side of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 located at the moving position and on the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810 made of a white printed circuit board. The light diffusely reflected backward illuminates the front surface of the faulty nail head 1201a. In this case, it is preferable to adopt white or a color similar to the color of the obstacle nail as the display color used for the background image and character image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Alternatively, as the background image or character image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, an image colored in red, green, and blue in equal proportions may be used. This is because these lights are diffusely reflected and mixed on the back side of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810 made of a white printed circuit board, so that the color of the light illuminating the obstacle nail 1201 becomes white. Because it will be.

In this way, an irradiation means (game board side effect display device 1600, etc.) capable of irradiating light to the obstacle nail 1201 from behind is provided behind the obstacle nail 1201, and also capable of reflecting light to the obstacle nail 1201. Even when a reflective means (root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810, etc.) is provided in front of the obstacle nail 1201 to irradiate light to the obstacle nail 1201 from the front, the obstacle nail head 1201a is made less noticeable. be able to.

Note that the shape of the panel back rough surface portion 1110b is a representation of a snowy mountain. In this way, by adopting a shape that imitates the shape of some kind of article or a geometric shape as the shape of the panel board back rough surface part 1110b, the panel board back rough surface part 1110b can also function as a part for decoration. It becomes possible to do so. Note that, in this specification, members or parts with similar shapes that are white or that diffusely reflect light represent snowy mountains. Also, members and parts with similar shapes and metallic luster represent glaciers. Other colors indicate plants growing on the mountain or rocks exposed as the mountain surface.

In this way, by making the outer shape of the diffused reflection portion (the panel back rough surface portion 1110b, etc.) into a decorative shape, the obstructing nail head 1201a can be made less noticeable.

Although the method of planting the obstacle nails 1201 into the obstacle nail through holes 1110a provided in the panel board 1110 has been shown, when a plurality of obstacle nails 1201 are planted adjacently, the distance between the adjacent obstacle nails 1201 is In the region, both the effect of the elastic deformation of the panel board 1110 caused by one of the planted obstacle nails 1201 and the effect of the elastic deformation of the panel board 1110 caused by the other of the planted obstacle nails 1201 are affected. I will be joining. Therefore, whitened portions HKB are likely to occur between adjacent faulty nails 1201. In particular, when the left guide nail 1232 is provided adjacently so that the game ball does not pass between the obstacle nails 1201 and the obstacle nails 1201 that constitute the left guide nail 1232, such a whitening part HKB is likely to occur. Note that there is a high possibility that the whitened portion HKB will similarly occur on the right guide nail 1233 as well.

Therefore, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456, the entire left guide nail 1232 is configured to be located within one panel board back rough surface portion 1110b when viewed from the front. With such a configuration, even if the whitened portion HKB occurs in a region where the whitened portion HKB is particularly likely to occur, the generated whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable. In addition, regarding the two obstacle nails 1201 planted as life nails 1230 and the two obstacle nails 1201 planted as jump nails 1231, the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b is The configuration may be such that each of them is provided.

Note that it is preferable to configure the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the game board side effect display device 1600 so that they do not overlap when viewed from the front. With such a configuration, the visibility of the game board side effect display device 1600 is not hindered. On the other hand, the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to overlap in front view. With such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize at least a portion of the periphery of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a decorative manner.

It is also possible to have a configuration in which technical matters in each embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456 are combined. For example, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means in one embodiment may be adopted as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means in another embodiment. Further, technical matters in each embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456 may be adopted in other embodiments described later. In addition, in the case of an embodiment having a panel plate rear substrate 2420 instead of the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400, the panel plate rear substrate 2420 is replaced with the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 in the same manner as the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400. It may be configured to emit light in the following manner.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456, in the panel board 1110, the boundary between the part where the panel board back rough surface part 1110b is provided and the part where the panel board back rough surface part 1110b is not provided is a combination of a plurality of straight lines. It is configured as follows. Specifically, a plurality of linear parts having a length similar to the length of the obstacle nail 1201 is used to form a boundary between a region where the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b is provided and a region where the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b is not provided. has been done.

In this way, the boundary between the diffuse reflection part (the panel board back rough surface part 1110b, etc.) and the rear visibility part where it is easy to visually recognize the rear part (the part where the panel board back rough surface part 1110b, etc. is not provided) is formed by a plurality of straight lines. By configuring so that This makes it possible for the player to visually recognize the whitened portion HKB, making it less noticeable. Note that instead of all boundaries having a straight line shape, at least some of the boundaries may have a straight line shape.

Further, the panel back rough surface portion 1110b may be formed in a mesh shape. FIG. 457 shows an embodiment in which the shape of the panel back rough surface portion 1110b described with reference to FIG. 456 is modified into a mesh shape. FIG. 457(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 457(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection projection method.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 457(a), among the obstacle nails 1201, the second from the right among the obstacle nails 1201 functioning as the jump nails 1231 provided on the left side and the left guide nails 1232. The obstacle nail 1201 is provided at a position that does not overlap the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b in a front view. Further, the two obstacle nails 1201 functioning as the life nails 1230 are provided at positions where they partially overlap the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b when viewed from the front. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 457(b), the portions of these obstacle nails 1201 implanted within the panel board 1110 can be visually recognized as at least partially overlapping with the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b. In this way, it is possible to make the obstacle nail 1201 and the rough panel back surface part 1110b visible to the player in an integrated manner while ensuring the visibility of the decorative member located at the rear.

Further, the panel back rough surface portion 1110b may be formed from a plurality of decorative shapes. FIG. 458 shows an embodiment in which the panel back rough surface portion 1110b described with reference to FIG. 456 is modified to be formed from a plurality of decorative shapes. FIG. 458(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 458(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection projection method.

In this embodiment, the panel back rough surface portion 1110b has a decorative shape imitating a shuriken. As shown in FIG. 458(a), among the obstacle nails 1201, the first obstacle nail 1201 from the right among the left guide nails 1232 and the two obstacle nails 1201 functioning as the life nails 1230 are located behind the panel board. It is provided at a position that does not overlap the rough surface portion 1110b when viewed from the front. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 458(b), the portions of these obstacle nails 1201 implanted within the panel board 1110 can be visually recognized as at least partially overlapping with the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b. In this way, it is possible to make the obstacle nail 1201 and the rough panel back surface part 1110b visible to the player in an integrated manner while ensuring the visibility of the decorative member located at the rear.

Furthermore, instead of the panel back rough surface portion 1110b, a panel back first rough surface portion 1110c and a panel back second rough surface portion 1110d having different roughness may be provided on the back surface of the panel board 1110. FIG. 459 shows a modification in which a first rough surface section 1110c and a second rough surface section 1110d of the back surface of the panel board having different roughness are provided in place of the rough surface section 1110b of the back surface of the panel board described with reference to FIG. 456. An embodiment is shown. FIG. 459(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 459(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, the panel back side second rough surface portion 1110d, which has a relatively rough roughness, is provided above and below the panel back first rough surface portion 1110c, which has a relatively fine roughness. The visual recognition modes of the panel back first rough surface portion 1110c and the panel back second rough surface portion 1110d are different. The boundary between the first rough surface portion 1110c on the back of the panel and the second rough surface portion 1110d on the back of the panel has a decorative shape imitating a mountain range. As shown in FIG. 459(a), among the obstacle nails 1201, the first to third obstacle nails 1201 from the left among the left guide nails 1232 are located at positions that overlap with the second rough surface portion 1110d of the panel back side in front view. It is set in. Further, the obstacle nail 1201 functioning as the jump nail 1231 on the left side and the obstacle nail 1201 functioning as the life nail 1230 on the left side are provided at a position that overlaps the first rough surface part 1110c of the panel board back side in front view. .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 459(b), the parts of the first to third obstruction nails 1201 from the left among the left guide nails 1232 that are implanted in the panel board 1110 are located at the first rough surface on the back of the panel board. It can be visually recognized that at least a portion thereof overlaps with 1110c. In addition, the part of the obstacle nail 1201 functioning as the jump nail 1231 on the left side and the obstacle nail 1201 functioning as the life nail 1230 on the left side that is planted in the panel board 1110 is the second rough surface part 1110d on the back of the panel board. It can be visually recognized that at least a portion of the image overlaps with the image.

Note that instead of providing the panel back first rough surface portion 1110c and the panel back second rough surface portion 1110d depending on the difference in the degree of roughness, the panel back first rough surface portion 1110c and the panel A second rough surface portion 1110d may be provided on the back side of the plate. For example, the first rough surface portion 1110c on the back of the panel may be formed by matte finishing, and the second rough surface portion 1110d on the back of the panel may be formed by lens cutting. Even in this case, it is possible to make the visual recognition modes of the first rough surface portion 1110c of the panel back and the second rough surface portion 1110d of the back of the panel different.

In this way, by providing a plurality of diffuse reflection parts (the first rough surface part 1110c on the back of the panel and the second rough surface part 1110d on the back of the panel) with different visibility modes, it is possible to visually recognize the decorative shape at the boundary between the plurality of diffuse reflection parts. Even in this case, the obstructing nail 1201 and the panel back rough surface portion 1110b can be visually recognized by the player in an integrated manner, and the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456(d), an embodiment was shown in which white light emitted from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is introduced to the panel plate 1110. In the modified example described with reference to this, a configuration may be adopted in which white light emitted from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 is introduced into the panel board 1110.

Referring to FIG. 456, an example is shown in which the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b is provided on the back surface of the panel board 1110. However, instead of the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b, a planar plate that can specularly reflect incident light is used. An example modified to provide a metallic glossy portion 1110e on the back of the panel will be described with reference to FIG. 460.

FIG. 460(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 460(b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 460(a). FIG. 460(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection projection method. FIG. 460(d) is a cross-sectional view showing a mode in which a panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is provided below the panel board 1110.

The panel plate back metal glossy portion 1110e may be formed by plating the back surface of the panel plate 1110. It is preferable to provide the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e with a plating layer that has grayish-white metallic luster and is visually recognized as silver by plating using aluminum as a material. Alternatively, a metallic luster part 1110e on the back of the panel board may be provided which has a reddish metallic luster by plating using pure copper as a material, or a metallic luster having a yellowish tint by plating using brass as a material. , it may be configured to provide a metallic glossy portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate that is visually recognized in gold. Note that it is preferable that the shape of the panel back metal glossy portion 1110e is the same as that of the panel back rough surface portion 1110b. The thickness of the plated thin film formed by the plating process is about 0.2 mm, but it is exaggerated in the figure. This point also applies to other embodiments described later and drawings showing other embodiments.

In this way, by configuring the metal glossy part (also the metallic glossy part 1110e on the back of the panel panel made of metal) to be provided behind the metal obstacle nail 1201, the obstacle nail 1201 and the metal luster part become metallic. Since the whitened portion HKB located between the obstructing nail 1201 and the metallic shiny portion can be visually recognized as one piece, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB located between the obstructing nail 1201 and the metallic shiny portion less noticeable in the front and back.

As shown in FIG. 460(d), light may be introduced into the panel plate 1110 by the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400, and the introduced light may be reflected at the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e. Furthermore, the light emitting mode and the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456(d) may be adopted as the light emitting mode and the like of the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 in this embodiment. With this configuration, when the light emitted by the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed inside the game parlor, or the light from other game machines installed inside the game parlor is weak, Even in this case, the panel board back metallic gloss portion 1110e and the obstacle nail 1201 can be visually recognized with metallic luster, and as a result, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

Further, the panel back metal glossy portion 1110e may be formed in a mesh shape. FIG. 461 shows an embodiment in which the shape of the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e described with reference to FIG. 460 is modified into a mesh shape. FIG. 461(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 461(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection projection method.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 461(a), among the obstacle nails 1201, the second from the right among the obstacle nails 1201 functioning as the jump nails 1231 provided on the left side and the left guide nails 1232. The obstacle nail 1201 is provided at a position that does not overlap the metallic glossy portion 1110e of the back of the panel when viewed from the front. Further, the two obstacle nails 1201 functioning as the life nails 1230 are provided at positions that partially overlap the panel back metal glossy portion 1110e when viewed from the front. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 461(b), these obstructing nails 1201 can be visually recognized as at least partially overlapping with the metallic glossy portion 1110e on the back of the panel. In this way, it is possible to make the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel back metal shiny part 1110e visible to the player in an integrated manner while ensuring the visibility of the decorative member located at the rear.

Further, the panel back metal glossy portion 1110e may be formed from a plurality of decorative shapes. FIG. 462 shows an embodiment in which the panel back metal glossy portion 1110e described with reference to FIG. 460 is modified to be formed from a plurality of decorative shapes. FIG. 462(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 462(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection projection method.

In this embodiment, the metallic glossy portion 1110e on the back of the panel has a decorative shape imitating a shuriken. As shown in FIG. 462(a), among the obstacle nails 1201, the first obstacle nail 1201 from the right among the left guiding nails 1232 and the two obstacle nails 1201 functioning as the life nails 1230 are located behind the panel board. It is provided at a position that does not overlap the rough surface portion 1110b when viewed from the front. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 462(b), these obstructing nails 1201 can be visually recognized as at least partially overlapping with the metallic glossy part 1110e on the back of the panel. In this way, it is possible to make the obstacle nail 1201 and the rough panel back surface part 1110b visible to the player in an integrated manner while ensuring the visibility of the decorative member located at the rear, and as a result, whitening can be prevented. The part HKB can be made less noticeable.

Although an example is shown in which the panel back metal glossy portion 1110e is provided in a planar shape, if the panel back metal glossy portion 1110e specularly reflects light, only the panel back metal glossy portion 1110e becomes conspicuous. , there is a possibility that the sense of unity between the panel back metal glossy portion 1110e and the obstacle nail 1201 will be weakened. This tendency becomes more pronounced as the area of the metallic glossy portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate increases. Therefore, as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 461, the back metal glossy portion 1110e of one panel plate may be formed in a mesh shape. Alternatively, as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 462, it is preferable to provide a plurality of panel plate back metal glossy portions 1110e to reduce the area of one panel plate back metal glossy portion 1110e. For example, an independent metallic glossy portion 1110e on the back of the panel may be provided for each obstacle nail 1201. Alternatively, a part of the panel back metal glossy portion 1110e generated by the plating process may be shaved off so that the panel back metal glossy portion 1110e can reflect light more diffusely. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the visual sense of unity between the panel back metal glossy portion 1110e and the obstacle nail 1201.

Moreover, instead of the panel back metal glossy part 1110e, a panel back first metal gloss part 1110f and a panel back second metal gloss part 1110g, which are visually recognized with mutually different metallic luster, are provided on the back surface of the panel board 1110. It may be configured as follows. FIG. 463 shows a panel back first metallic gloss section 1110f and a panel back second metallic gloss section 1110g, which are visually recognized with different metallic luster, instead of the panel back metallic gloss section 1110e described with reference to FIG. 460. This figure shows an embodiment modified to provide the following. FIG. 463(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 463(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection projection method.

In this embodiment, the second metallic glossy portion 1110g on the back of the panel is provided above and below the first metallic glossy portion 1110f on the back of the panel. Further, the boundary between the first metallic glossy portion 1110f on the back of the panel and the second shiny metallic portion 1110g on the back of the panel has a decorative shape imitating a mountain range.

For the first metal glossy part 1110f on the back of the panel and the second glossy metal part 1110g on the back of the panel, there is a plated part made of aluminum and visible in silver, a plated part made of pure copper and visible in reddish color, and a plated part made of pure copper and visible in reddish color. It is possible to appropriately combine the plated parts, which are made of aluminum and are visually recognized as gold, on both the first metallic glossy part 1110f on the back of the panel and the second shiny metallic part 1110g on the back of the panel. Specifically, the first metallic glossy part 1110f on the back of the panel is made up of a plated part that is visually recognized as silver, and the second shiny metallic part 1110g on the back of the panel is made up of a plated part that is visually recognized as reddish or gold. It may also be configured by a plated part. Alternatively, the first metallic glossy part 1110f on the back of the panel board is configured with a plated part that is visually recognized as a gold color, and the second metallic glossy part 1110g on the back side of the panel board is configured as a plated part that is visually recognized as a silver color or a plated part that is visually recognized as a reddish color. It may be configured by Alternatively, the first metallic glossy part 1110f on the back of the panel board is configured with a plated part that is visually recognized as a reddish color, and the second metallic glossy part 1110g on the backside of the panel board is configured as a plated part that is visually recognized as a silver color or a plated part that is visually recognized as a gold color. It may be configured by

A combination may be adopted in which the metallic luster on the panel back metal glossy portion 1110e obtained by a predetermined plating process and the metallic luster on the obstacle nail 1201 have a similar color tone. For example, when a stainless steel obstacle nail that is visually recognized as silver is used as the obstacle nail 1201, it is preferable to perform a plating process that is visually recognized as silver on the back surface of the panel board 1110. Further, when the obstacle nails 1201 made of pure copper are employed as the obstacle nails 1201, it is preferable to perform a plating process on the back surface of the panel board 1110, which is visually recognized with a reddish metallic luster. Further, when a brass obstacle nail 1201 is used as the obstacle nail 1201, it is preferable to perform a plating process on the back surface of the panel board 1110 so that it is visually recognized as gold. In this way, by configuring the color of the obstacle nail 1201 to match the color of the panel board back metal shiny part 1110e, the color of the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board back metal gloss part 1110e can be integrated as a decorative part. This makes the whitened portion HKB more visible to the player, making it possible to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable.

Similarly, the metallic luster of one of the first metallic glossy part 1110f on the back of the panel and the second metallic glossy part 1110g on the back of the panel and the metallic luster of the obstacle nail 1201 have a similar color tone. A combination may also be adopted. For example, if a stainless steel obstacle nail that is visually recognized as silver is used as the obstacle nail 1201, plating that is visually recognized as silver on the back side of the panel board 1110 can be applied to the first metallic luster on the back of the panel board. part 1110f and one of the second metallic glossy parts 1110g on the back of the panel so that it is visually recognized with the same silver metallic luster as the obstacle nail 1201, and the first metallic glossy part 1110f on the back of the panel and the panel It is preferable that the other of the second metallic gloss portions 1110g on the back side of the plate be subjected to a plating treatment that is visually recognized as a metallic luster other than silver (reddish metallic luster or gold color).

In addition, when a brass obstacle nail 1201 is adopted as the obstacle nail 1201, by applying a plating process that is visually recognized in gold to the back surface of the panel board 1110, the first metal glossy part 1110f on the back of the panel board and the panel One of the second metallic glossy parts 1110g on the back side of the panel is formed so that it is visually recognized with the same golden metallic luster as the obstacle nail 1201, and the first metallic glossy part 1110f on the back side of the panel and the second metallic glossy part 1110g on the back side of the panel are formed. It is preferable that the other of the metallic luster parts 1110g be plated so as to be visually recognized with a metallic luster other than gold (reddish metallic luster or gold color).

In this way, the metallic luster of the obstacle nail 1201, the first metallic lustrous part (for example, the first metallic lustrous part 1110f on the back of the panel board) and the second metallic lustrous part (for example, the second metallic lustrous part 1110g on the back side of the panel board) ), the color of the obstacle nail 1201 and either one of the first metallic luster part and the second metallic luster part are integrated. This will be visually recognized by the player as a decorative aspect, and the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable. Further, since the metallic luster is still visible in the other metallic lustrous part of the first metallic lustrous part and the second metallic lustrous part, the other metallic lustrous part is also the same as the obstacle nail 1201. They are generally visually recognized as one, and the whitened portion HKB can be made even less noticeable.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 460(d), an embodiment was shown in which light irradiated from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is introduced into the panel plate 1110, but with reference to FIGS. 461 to 463 In the modification described above, the light emitted from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be configured to be introduced into the panel board 1110.

Referring to FIGS. 456 to 459, an embodiment is shown in which a diffuse reflection portion (panel back rough surface portion 1110b, panel back first rough surface portion 1110c, panel back second rough surface portion 1110d) is provided on the rear surface of the panel board 1110. However, the diffused reflection portion in these embodiments is subjected to the plating process described with reference to FIGS. A glossy portion 1110f and a second metal glossy portion 1110g on the back of the panel may be provided. Furthermore, in an embodiment having a plurality of diffuse reflection parts, such as the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 458 and 459, a metallic luster part may be similarly provided for at least one diffuse reflection part. good. Note that the other diffusely reflecting portions (the rough surface portion 2410a of the panel rear decorative member) may be similarly plated. Alternatively, another metallic luster portion may be formed by such a method to have an uneven shape.

In such a configuration, the metallic shiny part is not planar but has an uneven shape, so that environmental light and light from the light emitting means (lower light emitting board 2400 of the panel board, etc.) are transmitted to the metallic shiny part. It becomes possible to diffuse reflection on the front surface of the object, and the obstructing nail 1201 and the metallic shiny part are more visible as one, so that the whitened part HKB can be made even less noticeable. Moreover, by providing both the diffused reflection part and the metallic glossy part, the diffused reflection part and the whitened part HKB are visually recognized as one, and the metallic glossy part and the metal obstacle nail 1201 are visually recognized as one. Therefore, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

By the way, charged game balls may roll onto the front surface of the panel board 1110. This kind of phenomenon occurs when the game balls are transported and polished on a game machine island where multiple pachinko machines are installed, and when the game balls and other parts (such as the polishing cloth used for polishing) This can occur because the game ball becomes charged with static electricity due to friction with the synthetic resin, etc. that constitutes the flow path of the game ball, and the game ball charged in this way is ejected into the game area 5a. A discharge phenomenon may occur from a charged game ball toward its surroundings, but when a discharge phenomenon occurs, a high-frequency electromagnetic pulse is generated centered at the location where the discharge phenomenon occurred, and the electrons located in the surrounding area are generated. This may cause parts to break down or electronic parts to malfunction.

In order to prevent such a problem from occurring, it is necessary to remove the metallic glossy part 1110e, the first metallic glossy part 1110f, and the second metallic glossy part 1110g from the front when viewed from the front. Electronic components and electronic elements may be arranged in overlapping positions, and these metallic shiny parts may be configured to be used as shield members for protecting the electronic components and electronic elements. For example, sensors such as vibration detection sensor 2405, first starting port sensor 4002, second starting port sensor 4004, count sensor 4005, general prize winning port sensor 4020, and magnetic detection sensor 4024 are located behind these metallic shiny parts, and It is best to place them in positions that overlap when viewed from the front.

In this way, electronic components or electronic By arranging at least one of the elements, it becomes possible to give the metallic luster part used as decoration a function of protecting the electronic parts and electronic elements.

In addition, the back metal glossy part 1110e of the panel, the first glossy metal part 1110f of the back of the panel, and the second glossy metal part 1110g of the back of the panel are connected to the electrical circuit ground (for example, , the circuit ground of the peripheral control board 1510). Note that if the first metallic glossy part 1110f on the back of the panel board and the second shiny metallic part 1110g on the backside of the panel board are electrically connected, only one of them can be connected to the electric circuit provided on the game board 5'. It may be configured to be electrically connected to the ground of.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456, an example was shown in which the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b is provided by cutting the back surface of the panel board 1110. However, instead of such a method, the back surface of the panel board 1110 By printing a predetermined pattern in white or light color or pasting a sticker with a predetermined pattern in white or light color, the back side of the panel board can be seen in bright color, which can diffusely reflect light. The structure may be such that a portion 1110h is provided. It is preferable that the shapes of such patterns and seals be similar to those of the panel back rough surface portion 1110b, the panel back first rough surface portion 1110c, and the panel back second rough surface portion 1110d.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 460, an example was shown in which the panel board rear metallic gloss portion 1110e is provided by plating the back surface of the panel board 1110. However, instead of such a method, the panel board A metallic glossy part 1110e on the back side of the panel board is provided by printing a predetermined pattern that is visible with metallic luster or pasting a sticker with a predetermined pattern that is visible with metallic luster on the back surface of panel board 1110. It may be configured as follows.

Referring to FIG. 456, an example is shown in which the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b is provided on the back surface of the panel board 1110, but instead of the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b, the panel board back surface is visually recognized in white or bright color. An example modified to include a visual recognition portion 1110h and a panel plate back metal glossy portion 1110e capable of specularly reflecting incident light will be described with reference to FIG. 464. Note that the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 460 may be adopted for the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e.

FIG. 464(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 464(b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 464(a). FIG. 464(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection projection method. FIG. 464(d) is a sectional view showing a state in which a panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is provided below the panel board 1110.

According to such a configuration, the diffuse reflection part (panel board back bright color visible part 1110h) and the whitened part HKB are visually recognized as one body, and the metallic gloss part (panel board back metal gloss part 1110e) and metal Since the whitened portion HKB can be visually recognized as one with the obstructing nail 1201 made of aluminum, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

Note that the metal obstacle nail 1201 and the panel back metallic gloss portion 1110e may be configured to have similar metallic luster. For example, when stainless steel obstacle nails 1201 are used, it is preferable to use a metallic glossy part 1110e on the back of the panel plate that is visually recognized as silver. Alternatively, when brass obstacle nails 1201 are used, it is preferable to use a metal shiny part 1110e on the back of the panel plate that is visually recognized as gold. With such a configuration, the panel back metal glossy portion 1110e and the metal obstacle nail 1201 can be more visually recognized as one.

Note that the metal obstacle nail 1201 and the panel back metallic gloss portion 1110e may be configured so that they do not have metallic luster of the same color. For example, when the obstacle nail 1201 made of stainless steel is used, the metallic glossy part 1110e on the back of the panel plate, which is visually recognized with a reddish metallic luster, may be employed. Alternatively, if a brass obstacle nail 1201 is used, a metallic shiny part 1110e on the back of the panel plate that is visually recognized as silver may be used. Even in this case, since the obstructing nail 1201 and the metallic glossy part 1110e on the back of the panel board match in terms of metallic luster, the obstructing nail 1201 and the metallic glossy part 1110e on the backside of the panel board can be visually recognized as one. I can do it.

Note that the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 may be configured to emit light in a predetermined color, and the light emitted from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 may be introduced from below the panel board 1110. FIG. 464(d) is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided. For example, it is preferable to configure the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to emit white or yellow light. Furthermore, the light emitting mode and the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456(d) may be adopted as the light emitting mode and the like of the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 in this embodiment. With this configuration, when the light emitted by the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed inside the game parlor, or the light from other game machines installed inside the game parlor is weak, Even in this case, the panel board back metallic gloss portion 1110e and the obstacle nail 1201 can be visually recognized with metallic luster, and as a result, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

Although an example has been shown in which the light emitted from the panel plate lower light emitting board 2400 is introduced from below the panel plate 1110, the light is introduced forward to the rear of the panel plate back bright color visible part 1110h and the panel plate back metallic gloss part 1110e. It is also possible to arrange a predetermined light emitting means for illuminating the panel backside bright color visible portion 1110h and the panel backside metallic glossy portion 1110e from behind. They are formed into a thin film by reducing the thickness of the panel back bright color visible part 1110h and the panel back metal gloss part 1110e, or by increasing the amount of light emitted forward from a predetermined light emitting means. By passing the light irradiated from the rear to the panel board back bright color visible part 1110h and the panel board back metal glossy part 1110e, the panel board back bright color can be seen by the light irradiated from the predetermined light emitting means. It is possible to decorate the portion 1110h and the metallic glossy portion 1110e on the back of the panel.

The embodiments and technical matters related to the panel board back rough surface part 1110b described with reference to FIGS. May be adopted. Similarly, the embodiments and technical matters related to the panel back metal glossy portion 1110e described with reference to FIGS. It may also be employed in the glossy portion 2410b). Moreover, the embodiment and technical matters related to the panel board back bright color visible part 1110h described with reference to FIG. 464 may be adopted for members and parts that are visually recognized in bright color in other embodiments.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 460 and 464, a manufacturing method is adopted in which the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is provided in the panel board 1110 after plating, printing, etc. are performed on the rear surface of the panel board 1110. good. This is because if the back surface of the panel board 1110 is plated, printed, etc. after the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is provided in the panel board 1110, the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a may be plated, This is because the ink used for printing may adhere to the inner wall of the obstruction nail through hole 1110a, degrading the aesthetic appearance of the panel board 1110. By the way, a light is directed forward at the rear position of the panel board 1110, which employs a manufacturing method in which the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is provided in the panel board 1110 after plating processing, printing processing, etc. are performed on the rear surface of the panel board 1110. When a predetermined light emitting means for illuminating the obstruction nail through hole 1110a is disposed, light leaks forward from the gap between the rear end of the obstruction nail through hole 1110a and the obstruction nail tip 1201e, and the rear end portion of the obstruction nail through hole 1110a is There is a risk that the light leaking out will be visible to the player in an annular shape, and the aesthetic appearance will deteriorate. Below, means to solve such problems will be shown.

FIG. 465 shows a modified embodiment of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. An embodiment is shown in which a light-emitting section 2425 is used to illuminate the back panel bright color viewing section 1110h from behind.
FIG. 465(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 465(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the panel board rear board 2420 using an oblique projection projection method. FIG. 465(c) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 465(a). FIG. 465(d) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection projection method.

The rear panel board 2420 is composed of a white printed circuit board on its front and rear surfaces. A plurality of panel board rear board light emitting parts 2425 are provided on the front surface of the panel board rear board 2420. The panel board rear board light emitting section 2425 is composed of a plurality of light emitting diodes surface mounted on the front surface of the panel board rear board 2420 as a light source. The direction of the light emitted from the panel plate rear substrate light emitting section 2425 is the normal direction of the panel plate rear substrate 2420, and the light is emitted vertically toward the front.

As shown in FIG. 465, in this embodiment, a decoratively shaped panel back bright color visible part 1110h is provided on the rear surface of the panel board 1110, and behind the panel board back bright color visible part 1110h, A panel rear substrate 2420 having the same external shape as the panel rear bright color viewing portion 1110h is provided. Furthermore, by causing the panel board rear substrate light emitting section 2425 to emit light, it is possible to decorate the panel board back bright color viewing section 1110h with light emission from the rear. The life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, the left guide nail 1232, and the panel board rear board light emitting section 2425 are provided at positions that do not overlap when viewed from the front.

With this configuration, the bright color visible portion (for example, the bright color visible portion 1110h on the back of the panel board) can be decorated with light from the light source provided at the rear (for example, the panel board rear board light emitting portion 2425). can do. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the amount of light leaking forward from the rear end portion of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, which is caused by the player seeing the rear end portion of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a in an annular shape. It becomes possible to suppress deterioration in aesthetic appearance.

A light emitting diode that emits light toward the side of the mounting surface may be employed as the panel board rear substrate light emitting section 2425. In this case, since the light emitted from the panel board rear board light emitting section 2425 is irradiated in a direction parallel to the panel board rear board 2420, it is possible to irradiate the entire panel board rear board 2420 with light. , it is possible to prevent unevenness in the amount of light irradiated on the front surface of the panel board rear substrate 2420.

Note that the embodiment regarding the panel board rear substrate 2420 described with reference to FIG. 465 may be adopted for the panel board rear substrate 2420 in other embodiments or a white substrate on which a light emitting diode is mounted.

Although an example of the bright color visible portion 1110h on the back side of the panel plate is shown, such a configuration may be adopted not only for decorations that are visible in bright colors but also for decorative portions provided in the form of a thin film on the back side of the panel plate. . In particular, in the case of black or dark-colored decorative parts, when light leaks in the front, it is more noticeable than in white or light-colored decorative parts, but even in this case, it is necessary to prevent the deterioration of the aesthetic appearance. becomes possible. Note that when a plurality of decorative parts are provided, and some of them are relatively bright and others are relatively dark, a decorative part with a brighter color is provided at a position that overlaps with the obstacle nail 1201 in a front view. Good. With such a configuration, it is possible to further suppress deterioration in aesthetic appearance caused by the rear end portion of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a being visually recognized by the player in an annular shape.

On the back surface of the panel board 1110, a diffused reflection part that diffusely reflects light (for example, the panel board back rough surface part 1110b) is provided, or a metallic gloss part that is visually recognized with metallic luster (for example, the panel board back metallic gloss part 1110e) is provided. , an example has been shown in which the whitened area HKB around the faulty nail 1201 is made less noticeable by providing a bright color visible part (for example, the bright color visible part 1110h on the back of the panel board) that is visible in a bright color. 456, a panel board rear decorative member 2410 is provided close to the back surface of the panel board 1110, which diffusely reflects light, is visible with metallic luster, or is visible with bright color. An embodiment in which this is provided will be described with reference to FIG. 466.

FIG. 466(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 466(b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 466(a). FIG. 466(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection projection method. FIG. 466(d) is a cross-sectional view showing a mode in which a panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is provided below the panel board 1110.

In this embodiment, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin is arranged behind the panel plate 1110. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 has a thickness of 2 mm, and has a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a formed by lens cutting or satin finishing on the front side. The rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member diffusely reflects environmental light and is visually recognized as whitish in color. Note that the reason why the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is provided on the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is that the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is arranged closer to the whitening portion HKB than when it is provided on the rear surface. This is because the whitened portion HKB can be visually recognized more integrally with the whitened portion HKB.

The panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is configured to be located behind the obstacle nails 1201 that are planted as the life nails 1230, jump nails 1231, and left guide nails 1232 that are planted on the panel board 1110. There is.

In this way, behind the obstacle nails 1201 that are implanted as the life nails 1230, the jump nails 1231, and the left guide nails 1232 on the transparent board part (panel board 1110), there is a diffuse reflection part (the rough surface of the rear decorative member of the panel board). 2410a, etc.) (panel board rear decorative member 2410, etc.), the whitened portion HKB near the site where the faulty nail 1201 is installed can be made less noticeable due to the diffused reflection portion that is visible in white. It becomes possible. Moreover, by providing the diffused reflection part on the front surface of the decorative member, the distance between the diffused reflection part and the whitened part HKB can be made closer, and it becomes possible to make the diffused reflection part and the whitened part HKB more visible as one. In this embodiment or other embodiments, metal plating is applied to the front surface of the diffused reflection portion (rough surface portion 2410a, etc. of the panel board rear decorative member) included in the decorative member (panel board rear decorative member 2410, etc.) to reduce unevenness. It may be configured to form a certain metallic luster.

As shown in FIG. 466(d), light of a predetermined color (for example, white or yellow) is irradiated onto the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 by the panel plate lower light emitting board 2400, and the light is irradiated on the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a. It may be configured to reflect light. Furthermore, the light emitting mode and the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456(d) may be adopted as the light emitting mode and the like of the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 in this embodiment. With this configuration, when the light emitted by the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed inside the game parlor, or the light from other game machines installed inside the game parlor is weak, Even in this case, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a can be visually recognized as whitish, and as a result, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

Referring to FIG. 466, an example is shown in which a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is provided at the rear of the panel plate 1110, which is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin and has a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on the front surface. An embodiment modified to have a panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b in place of the plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a will be described with reference to FIG. 467.

FIG. 467(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 467(b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 467(a). FIG. 467(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection method. FIG. 467(d) is a cross-sectional view showing a mode in which a panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is provided below the panel board 1110.

In this embodiment, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin is arranged behind the panel plate 1110. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 has a thickness of 2 mm, and has a panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b formed by plating on the front side. The metallic luster portion 2410b of the panel plate rear decorative member diffusely reflects ambient light and is visually recognized as metallic luster. Even with such a configuration, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

As shown in FIG. 467(d), the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is configured to irradiate the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and the introduced light is reflected at the panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b. Good too. Furthermore, the light emitting mode and the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456(d) may be adopted as the light emitting mode and the like of the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 in this embodiment. With this configuration, when the light emitted by the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed inside the game parlor, or the light from other game machines installed inside the game parlor is weak, Even in this case, the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b and the obstacle nail 1201 can be visually recognized as one with the metallic luster, and as a result, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

Referring to FIG. 466, an example is shown in which a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is provided at the rear of the panel plate 1110, which is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin and has a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on the front surface. An embodiment in which the plate rear decorative member 2410 is modified to have a panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b in addition to the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a will be described with reference to FIG. 468.

FIG. 468(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 468(b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 468(a). FIG. 468(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection projection method. FIG. 468(d) is a cross-sectional view showing a mode in which a panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is provided below the panel board 1110.

In this embodiment, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin is arranged behind the panel plate 1110. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 has a thickness of 2 mm, and includes a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a formed by lens cutting and a panel plate formed by plating. It has a rear decorative member metallic shiny part 2410b on the front side. The rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member diffusely reflects environmental light and is visually recognized as whitish in color. Further, the metallic luster portion 2410b of the panel plate rear decorative member diffusely reflects environmental light and is visually recognized as metallic luster.

In this way, a decorative member (panel board rear decorative member) including a diffused reflection part (panel board rear decorative member rough surface part 2410a, etc.) and a metallic gloss part (panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss part 2410b) is provided behind the obstacle nail 1201. 2410, etc.), the diffuse reflection part and the whitened part HKB are visually recognized as one, and the metallic shiny part and the metal obstacle nail 1201 are visually recognized as one, so that the whitening is The part HKB can be made less noticeable. In this embodiment or other embodiments, the decorative member (panel plate rear decorative member 2410, etc.) is subjected to lens cut processing, and a part of the decorative member is subjected to plating processing, thereby creating an uneven metallic shiny part (panel board rear decorative member 2410, etc.). The plate rear decorative member may be configured to form a metallic glossy portion 2410b).

As shown in FIG. 468(d), the panel plate lower light emitting board 2400 irradiates the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 with light, and the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b are irradiated with light. It may also be configured to reflect the light emitted. Furthermore, the light emitting mode and the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456(d) may be adopted as the light emitting mode and the like of the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 in this embodiment. With this configuration, when the light emitted by the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed inside the game parlor, or the light from other game machines installed inside the game parlor is weak, Even if the metallic gloss part (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss part 2410b) and the obstacle nail 1201 can be visually recognized with the metallic luster, the diffused reflection part (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface part 2410a) ) can be visually recognized as whitish, and as a result, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 468, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b are provided on the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. An embodiment in which at least one of the rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b is provided on the rear surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 will be described with reference to FIG. 469. .

FIGS. 469(a) to 469(c) are cross-sectional views taken along line AA showing a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 468(b). FIG. 469(a) shows an embodiment in which a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is modified to have a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on the rear side and a panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b on the front side. ing. FIG. 469(b) shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is modified to have a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on the front side and a panel plate rear decorative member metallic shiny portion 2410b on the rear side. ing. FIG. 469(c) shows an embodiment in which the panel rear decorative member 2410 is modified to have both the panel rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b on the rear surface side. . Note that although only cross-sectional views are shown in FIGS. 469(a) to 469(c), when viewed from the front, it has a decorative shape as shown in FIG. 468(a). . Further, this point also applies to other embodiments in which the embodiments are illustrated with reference to cross-sectional views.

In this way, the decorative member ( For example, since the panel board rear decorative member 2410) is visually recognized as having a three-dimensional shape with a sense of depth, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 468 and 469, the part where the panel board rear decorative member rough surface part 2410a is formed is referred to as the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss part 2410b, and the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss part The portion where 2410b is formed may be configured to be the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a.

In the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 469(a) and 469(b), the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b are respectively 2410, but by providing a plurality of rough surface portions 2410a of the panel rear decorative member 2410a, and providing a plurality of metallic shiny portions 2410b of the panel rear decorative member 2410, the front side of the panel rear decorative member 2410 is improved. An embodiment modified so as to be provided on both the and rear side will be described with reference to FIG. 470.

FIGS. 470(a) to 470(b) are cross-sectional views taken along line AA, showing a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 469(a). FIG. 470(a) shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is modified so as to have the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portions 2410a on both the front side and the rear side. FIG. 470(b) shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is modified so as to have panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portions 2410b on both the front side and the rear side.

In this way, by providing a plurality of diffuse reflection parts (panel board rear decorative member rough surface part 2410a) at a distance in the front-rear direction, the plurality of diffuse reflection parts that are visible in white can be seen three-dimensionally. The visual sense of unity between the diffused reflection part and the whitened part HKB can be enhanced, and the whitened part HKB can be made less noticeable. In addition, by providing a plurality of metallic shiny parts (panel plate rear decorative member metallic shiny parts 2410b) at a distance in the front-rear direction, the plurality of metallic shiny parts can be viewed three-dimensionally. A sense of visual unity with the obstructing nail 1201 can be enhanced, and the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 469 and 470, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a provided on the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b, The panel rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel rear decorative member metallic shiny portion 2410b provided on the rear surface of the plate rear decorative member 2410 are provided so as not to overlap when viewed from the front, but at least a portion of these may be modified so that they overlap when viewed from the front, and an embodiment modified in this manner will be shown below.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 466, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a was provided on the front side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. An embodiment modified to include a plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b will be described with reference to FIGS. 471(a) to 471(e).

FIGS. 471(a) to 471(e) are sectional views taken along line AA, respectively, showing modifications of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 466A(a). In FIG. 471(a), a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is provided on the front side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and a panel plate rear decorative member metallic shiny portion 2410b is provided on the rear side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. This figure shows a modified embodiment. In FIG. 471(b), a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is provided on the front side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and a panel plate rear decorative member metallic shiny portion is provided only on a part of the rear side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. 2410b is shown. In FIG. 471(c), a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface part 2410a is provided only on a part of the front side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and a panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss part is provided on the rear side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. 2410b is shown. In FIG. 471(d), a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface part 2410a is provided only on a part of the front side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and a panel plate rear decorative member metal glossy part is provided on the rear side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. 2410b is shown. In FIG. 471(e), a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is provided on the front side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and a panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion is provided only on a part of the rear side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. 2410b is shown.

With such a configuration, a diffuse reflection part (for example, the rough surface part 2410a of the panel rear decorative member) or a metallic gloss part (for example, the metallic gloss part 2410b of the panel rear decorative member) is provided behind the whitened part HKB when viewed from the front. As a result, at least one of the above is located, making it possible to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable. In particular, as shown in FIG. 471(a), FIG. 471(d), and FIG. In the case where the metallic glossy part 2410b) is located, the game board side effect display device 1600 or other light emitting decorations are placed from behind against the diffused reflection part (for example, the rough surface part 2410a of the panel board rear decorative member). Since no light is irradiated from the member to be used, the rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member can be visually recognized as whiter.

Note that in the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 469 to 471, only cross-sectional views are shown; however, in these embodiments, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b As the shape in front view, the shape in front view in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 468 may be adopted. In this case, the boundary between the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b is visually recognized as a decorative shape imitating a mountain range.

Referring to FIG. 466, an example is shown in which a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is provided at the rear of the panel plate 1110, which is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin and has a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on the front surface. A modified embodiment in which the plate rear decorative member 2410 itself is formed of milky white resin will be described with reference to FIG. 472.

FIG. 472(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 472(b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 472(a). FIG. 472(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection projection method. FIG. 472(d) is a cross-sectional view showing a mode in which a panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is provided below the panel board 1110.

In this embodiment, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 made of milky white synthetic resin is arranged behind the panel plate 1110. The thickness of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is 2 mm. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is visually recognized as milky white.

In this way, when the bright color viewing part (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410) is arranged behind the transparent plate part (panel plate 1110), the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 has a lens cut or The whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable without performing processing such as plating.

Note that the panel rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a shown in the other embodiments may be provided on the front surface of the panel rear decorative member 2410. With such a configuration, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

In addition, instead of arranging the panel board rear decorative member 2410 made of milky white synthetic resin behind the obstacle nail 1201, a translucent or opaque panel board made of light-colored (white, yellow, flesh-colored, etc.) synthetic resin may be used. The rear decoration member 2410 may be arranged behind the obstacle nail 1201.

As shown in FIG. 472(d), the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is configured to irradiate light onto the panel board rear decoration member 2410, and the panel board rear decoration member 2410 reflects the irradiated light forward. It's okay. Furthermore, the light emitting mode and the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456(d) may be adopted as the light emitting mode and the like of the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 in this embodiment. With this configuration, when the light emitted by the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed inside the game parlor, or the light from other game machines installed inside the game parlor is weak, Even in this case, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 can be visually recognized as whitish, and as a result, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

In addition, a light-colored printed portion or a light-colored sticker may be attached to the front surface of the panel board rear decorative member 2410, which is made of a dark-colored (black, dark blue, etc.) synthetic resin and is visible as semi-transparent or opaque. It may be configured as follows. Further, it is preferable to arrange such a light-colored printed portion or a light-colored sticker so as to be located behind the obstacle nail 1201. Furthermore, a predetermined decorative shape (for example, a plurality of rows of chevron-shaped decorative shapes as shown in FIG. 468) may be provided using such brightly colored printed parts or stickers. Alternatively, a part of the predetermined decorative shape may be provided by a printed portion or a sticker having metallic luster.

Referring to FIG. 466, an example is shown in which a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is provided at the rear of the panel plate 1110, which is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin and has a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on the front surface. An embodiment in which the plate rear decorative member 2410 is made of metal itself will be described with reference to FIG. 473.

FIG. 473(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 473(b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 473(a). FIG. 473(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection projection method. FIG. 473(d) is a cross-sectional view showing a mode in which a panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is provided below the panel board 1110.

In this embodiment, a panel rear decorative member 2410 made of a metal plate is arranged behind the panel 1110. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 has a thickness of 2 mm. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is visually recognized with metallic luster. As the metal constituting the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, metals such as stainless steel, pure copper, and brass are preferably used. Further, as the metal constituting the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, it is preferable to adopt a metal that is visually recognized in a similar color to the material of the obstacle nail 1201.

Also. The panel rear decorative member 2410 may be formed by bending a metal plate material into a bellows shape or deforming it into a predetermined decorative shape using a mold. At this time, it is recommended to process the metal plate material so that it has depth in the front-rear direction. With such a configuration, the decorative member (for example, the panel rear decorative member 2410) that is visually recognized with metallic luster is visually recognized by the player as having an uneven feeling, and the decorative member (for example, the panel rear decorative member 2410) is visually recognized by the player. ) and the obstacle nail 1201 are more visually recognized as one. Further, by providing a transparent top coat portion in a predetermined color (for example, red or yellow) on the front surface of the stainless steel flat plate, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 can have a metallic luster (for example, copper) with a predetermined color. It may be configured so that it can be visually recognized by the color (gold).

As shown in FIG. 473(d), the panel plate lower light emitting board 2400 is configured to irradiate light onto the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and reflect the irradiated light on the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. It's okay. Furthermore, the light emitting mode and the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456(d) may be adopted as the light emitting mode and the like of the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 in this embodiment. With this configuration, when the light emitted by the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed inside the game parlor, or the light from other game machines installed inside the game parlor is weak, Even in this case, the decorative member (for example, the panel rear decorative member 2410) and the obstacle nail 1201 can be visually recognized with metallic luster, and as a result, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 465, an example is shown in which the panel back bright color viewing section 1110h is illuminated from behind by the panel back board light emitting section 2425 provided on the front surface of the panel board back board 2420. However, an embodiment modified so as not to have the back panel bright color viewing portion 1110h will be described with reference to FIG. 474.

FIG. 474(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 474(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the panel board rear board 2420 using an oblique projection method. FIG. 474(c) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 474(a). FIG. 474(d) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection projection method.

In this embodiment, the panel board rear board 2420 made of a white printed circuit board is configured to be directly visible through the panel board 1110. Even with such a configuration, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable by the panel board rear substrate 2420 that is visually recognized in white. Note that it is preferable to adopt a light-colored light emitting diode mounted on the front surface of the panel board rear substrate 2420. In addition, dark-colored elements (ICs that control light-emitting diodes, drivers that drive light-emitting diodes, etc.) may be mounted on the rear surface of the panel board rear board 2420, and when viewed from the front, they may be mounted on the rear surface of the panel board rear board 2420. It is best to mount them in positions where they do not overlap. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the dark-colored element and the whitened portion HKB are visually recognized in close proximity and the whitened portion HKB becomes conspicuous.

Note that in this embodiment, a light emitting diode that emits light laterally may be employed as the panel board rear substrate light emitting section 2425. In this case, it becomes possible to irradiate the entire front surface of the panel board rear board 2420 with light from the panel board rear board light emitting section 2425.

An embodiment that combines the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 466 and the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 474 will be described with reference to FIG. 475.

FIG. 475(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 475(b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 475(a). FIG. 475(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, behind the obstacle nail 1201, a panel board rear decoration member 2410 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin and having a lens cut treatment on the front surface is arranged, and further behind the panel board rear decoration member 2410 is arranged a light emitting section of the panel board rear board. A white panel board rear substrate 2420 having 2425 is arranged. With such a configuration, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable, especially when the panel board rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 is turned off.

In this embodiment, the light emitted from the panel board rear board light emitting section 2425 is formed by a panel board rear decorative member rough surface part 2410a that can diffusely reflect the light, and a panel board rear board 2420 made of a white printed circuit board. As a result, light is uniformly irradiated onto the entire rough surface portion 2410a of the rear decorative member of the panel board, increasing the utilization efficiency of the light irradiated from the rear board light emitting portion 2425 of the panel board. is also possible.

An embodiment that combines the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 468 and the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 475 will be described with reference to FIG. 476.

FIG. 476(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 476(b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 476(a). FIG. 476(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection projection method.

In this embodiment, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin is arranged behind the obstacle nail 1201, and further behind it is a white panel plate having a panel plate rear substrate light emitting part 2425. A rear substrate 2420 is arranged. Further, the front surface of the panel rear decorative member 2410 is composed of a panel rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and a panel rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b. The light emitted from the panel board rear substrate light emitting section 2425 is irradiated forward through the panel board rear decorative member rough surface section 2410a. On the other hand, when the light emitted from the panel board rear board light emitting part 2425 is irradiated onto the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss part 2410b, the light is directed rearward on the back surface of the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss part 2410b. The light is reflected and returns to the white panel board rear substrate 2420, and is ultimately irradiated forward via the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a.

With such a configuration, the panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b and the obstacle nail 1201 are visible as one unit, and the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a located behind the whitened portion HKB and the white The panel board rear substrate 2420 can make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable.

Note that the panel rear decorative member 2410 in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 468 to 471 may be adopted as the panel rear decorative member 2410 in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 476.

Further, as the light emitting mode of the panel board rear substrate 2420 in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 475 and 476, the light emitting mode of the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 described above may be adopted.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 475 and 476, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be made into an integrated decorative unit.

On the panel board rear board 2420, an element for controlling or driving the panel board rear board light emitting part 2425 (an IC for controlling a light emitting diode, a light emitting diode) is installed at a position overlapping the panel board rear decorative member metallic shiny part 2410b in front view. It may also be configured to mount a driver, etc. that drives the computer. In this case, these elements will be located behind the panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b. Note that a dark-colored element may be employed as such an element.

With such a configuration, even if electrostatically charged game balls flow onto the board surface of the game board 5 and discharge occurs at a predetermined position and an electromagnetic pulse is generated, the rear decorative member of the panel board It becomes possible to reduce the influence of electromagnetic pulses on these elements located behind the metallic shiny portion 2410b. Further, since it is no longer visible adjacent to the obstructing nail 1201, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable. Note that instead of mounting these elements on the front surface of the panel rear substrate 2420, these elements may be mounted on the rear surface of the panel rear substrate 2420. In this case as well, similar effects can be achieved.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 474 to 476, a panel board rear board 2420 including a panel board rear board light emitting section 2425 is located behind the obstacle nail 1201. Therefore, it is possible to directly illuminate the area around the obstructing nail 1201 with a stronger light intensity than the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 described with reference to FIG. 456 and the like.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 474 to 476, when the panel plate rear substrate light emitting section 2425 emits light in a predetermined color (for example, white, red, yellow) and with a strong light intensity, the panel plate rear substrate 2425 It is possible to make the panel board rear decorative member 2410 visible in a predetermined color, and it is also possible to make the whitened portion HKB visible in a predetermined color. Furthermore, regarding the obstacle nail 1201 having a metallic luster, by mirror-reflecting the light from the panel board rear substrate 2420 located at the rear (particularly at the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b), the metal that constitutes the obstacle nail 1201 can be mirror-reflected. Instead of being visually recognized in this color, it will be visually recognized in a predetermined color. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB even less noticeable. In this way, when causing the panel board rear board light emitting part 2425 to emit light with a strong light intensity, each embodiment applied to the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is applied to the panel board rear board light emitting part 2425, and a predetermined amount of light is emitted. The light may be emitted in different colors and timings.

Note that the light of a predetermined color from the panel board rear board 2420 does not reach the front surface of the faulty nail head 1201a, which is a part of the faulty nail 1201, but in that case, as described above, the door frame right side unit 550, etc. It is preferable that light of the same color as the predetermined color be irradiated onto the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a by a member located in front of the obstructing nail 1201. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the front surface of the faulty nail head 1201a from becoming conspicuous.

The color of the panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b may be made to correspond to the luminescent color of the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 to create a light emission effect, and the configuration may be such that the level of expectation is indicated by the light emission mode. At this time, in the case of a performance with relatively high expectations, it is preferable to configure the panel board rear board light emitting part 2425 to emit light in a color similar to the color of the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss part 2410b. Furthermore, in the case of a performance with relatively low expectations, the panel board rear substrate light emitting section 2425 may be configured to emit light in a color different from the color of the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss section 2410b.

For example, in the case where the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss part 2410b that is visually recognized in gold is provided, yellow light is emitted from the panel board rear board light emitting part 2425 as a relatively highly expected effect. It's good to do that. Furthermore, as a production with relatively low expectations, it is preferable to configure the display so that blue light is emitted from the rear board light emitting section 2425 of the panel board. With this configuration, in a performance with relatively high expectations, the panel board rear decorative member metal gloss portion 2410b and the panel board rear decorative member metal The panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, which becomes decorative due to the light of the same color as the glossy portion 2410b, is visible to the player as one unit, and the whitened portion HKB also has the metallic luster of the panel plate rear decorative member. Since the color of the portion 2410b is similar to that of the portion 2410b, the portion 2410b is in a decorative state and is visually recognized as one by the player. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the whitened part HKB is visually recognized and the player's expectation of a jackpot, which has been excited by the performance with relatively high expectations, is diminished. Furthermore, since the rough surface portion 2410a of the panel rear decorative member and the metallic shiny portion 2410b of the rear decorative member of the panel plate are seen as one body in similar colors, it is possible to give a visual impact to the player. . Specifically, areas that were previously perceived as separate areas are now perceived as a unified area, and the area visually feels larger.

In addition, when the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss part 2410b that is visually recognized with a silver metallic luster is provided, the luminescent color of the panel board rear board light emitting part 2425 in a relatively highly anticipated production is not yellow. It may be configured to use white color. Similarly, when the panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss part 2410b that is visually recognized with a reddish metallic luster is provided, the luminescent color of the panel plate rear board light emitting part 2425 in a relatively highly anticipated production is yellow. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the color red is used.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 474 and 475, the panel board rear board light emitting section 2425 provided on the panel board rear board 2420 is configured to be arranged around the obstacle nail 1201 when viewed from the front. Good too. For example, two panel board rear light emitting parts 2425 may be arranged at opposite positions (180 degree positions) with the obstacle nail 1201 in between, or three panel boards may be arranged at 120 degree angles around the obstacle nail 1201. It is preferable to arrange the substrate light emitting section 2425. In FIGS. 474(a) and 475(a), there are three panel board rear board light emitting parts 2425 around the jump nail 1231 on the left side when viewed from the front and the rightmost obstacle nail 1201 among the left guiding nails 1232. It is set up so that it is evenly illuminated from the surrounding area.

With this configuration, light of a predetermined color from the surroundings is blocked from the surrounding body parts of the first body part 1201b of the nail 1201, the spiral shaped part 1201c, and the second body part 1201d of the nail. It becomes possible to irradiate without On the other hand, when only one panel board rear board light emitting part 2425 is arranged around the obstacle nail 1201, the part where the light from the panel board rear board light emitting part 2425 is difficult to reach is located across the obstacle nail 1201. This occurs on the side opposite to the side where the panel board rear board light emitting section 2425 is provided, and the aesthetic appearance of the faulty nail 1201 is impaired. This tendency is particularly noticeable when the members located at the rear (panel board rear decorative member 2410, panel board rear board 2420) are visually recognized as white, as in this embodiment. Note that when irradiating light from a plurality of panel board rear substrate light emitting sections 2425, it is preferable that the light emission mode of each panel board rear substrate light emitting section 2425 be the same. For example, it is preferable to configure the plurality of panel board rear board light emitting parts 2425 to all light up in the same predetermined color (white, red, yellow, etc.).

Referring to FIGS. 456 to 476, at the rear of the panel board 1110, there is a panel board back rough surface part 1110b, a panel board back metal shiny part 1110e, a panel board rear decorative member 2410, a panel board rear decorative member rough surface part 2410a, and a panel board rear surface part 1110a. Although an example has been shown in which the decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b, the panel plate rear substrate 2420, etc. are arranged, in addition to these, the area cover member 2600a described with reference to FIG. 353 etc. is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. , the area cover member 2600a is provided with at least one of a diffuse reflection part similar to the rough surface part 2410a of the panel plate rear decoration member, a bright color visible part, and a metallic gloss part similar to the panel plate rear decoration member metallic gloss part 2410b. may be configured. By adopting such a configuration, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable. In addition, in order not to obstruct the visual recognition of the rolling game ball, these rough surface parts and metallic shiny parts are formed into a band shape, and the width is configured to be less than the diameter of the game ball. It is preferable to configure the game ball so that it does not become completely hidden by these rough surfaces and metallic shiny parts.

The diffused reflection portion or the metallic luster portion may be provided on the back surface of the glass plate 192 instead of the area cover member 2600a. Alternatively, in an embodiment having a plurality of glass plates 192, the rough surface portion or the metallic luster portion may be provided between the glass plates 192.

In addition, by hiding the vicinity of the tip of the obstacle nail 1201 with these diffused reflection parts and metallic shiny parts, when the vicinity of the tip of the obstacle nail 1201 is viewed from a predetermined angle, it becomes difficult to see the vicinity of the tip of the obstacle nail 1201. Alternatively, it may be configured to be invisible.

By configuring the diffuse reflection part, the bright color visible part, and the metallic luster part in front of the whitened part HKB, the obstacle nail 1201 is sandwiched between the metallic lustrous part located in the front and the metallic lustrous part located in the rear. This makes it possible to further enhance the sense of unity between the obstacle nail 1201 and the metallic shiny part. Furthermore, when the whitened portion HKB is viewed from a predetermined angle, the whitened portion HKB is hidden by the metallic luster portion and the diffusely reflective portion. Furthermore, even if the whitened area HKB is in a visible position, it will be sandwiched between the diffused reflection area and bright color visible area located at the rear and the diffused reflection area and bright color visible area located in the front, and the whitened area HKB can be made less noticeable.

Referring to FIGS. 465 to 476, an embodiment is shown in which one or both of the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 is arranged at the rear of the panel board 1110, thereby making the whitened portion HKB less noticeable. As shown, one or both of the panel plate rear decoration member 2410 and the panel plate rear board 2420 may be configured to be able to be moved or rotated as an effect. Further, it is preferable that this movement effect is executed under control by the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, this moving performance may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation of a jackpot. Note that the drive mechanism for moving and rotating the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear board 2420 may be configured to be driven and controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

By the way, when the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 are configured to be movable in this way, the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board light emitting part 2425 located in the standby position cause There is a possibility that the whitened portion HKB, which had been made inconspicuous until then, becomes noticeable as the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 move to the moved position. Therefore, in order to prevent the whitened portion HKB from becoming conspicuous, the following embodiment may be adopted.

FIG. 477 shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is modified to be movable in the vertical direction in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 466. FIG. 477(a) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 466(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is in the standby position. FIG. 477(b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 466(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decoration member 2410 is in the moving position. When the panel board rear decoration member 2410 moves from the standby position to the first movement position, it moves a predetermined distance (10 mm) upward in a plane parallel to the panel board 1110, but even in this state, the obstacle nail 1201 It is located at a position overlapping with the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 when viewed from the front. FIG. 477(c) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 466(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decoration member 2410 is in the moving position. When the panel plate rear decoration member 2410 moves from the standby position to the second movement position, it moves a predetermined distance (20 mm) upward in a plane parallel to the panel plate 1110, but in this state, the obstacle nail 1201 The panel plate rear decorative members 2410 are located at positions where they do not overlap when viewed from the front.

In this way, when the decorative member having the diffused reflection part (for example, the panel board rear decorative member 2410) moves from the standby position to the first movement position in the movement effect, the obstacle nail 1201 moves toward the rear of the panel board as seen from the front. By locating it so as to overlap with the decorative member 2410, it is possible to maintain a state in which the whitened portion HKB is less noticeable.

Note that when the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 moves to the first movement position, it is desirable that all the obstacle nails 1201 can maintain a state in which they overlap with the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 in a front view. Even if only the nails 1201 are positioned so as to overlap the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in front view, the whitened portion HKB can be maintained in a less conspicuous state.

When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves to the second moving position that is farther away than the first moving position, the impact on the player becomes larger due to the large amount of movement; The obstacle nail 1201 shown in 477(c) and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 no longer overlap in front view. Therefore, the frequency of execution of the effect of moving the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 from the standby position to the first moving position and then returning to the standby position without moving it to the second moving position, and the execution frequency of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 are determined. Regarding the frequency of execution of the performance in which 2410 is moved from the standby position to the second movement position and then returned to the standby position, it is preferable to configure the former performance to be performed with a high frequency. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize diversification of presentation modes in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is moved, and to reduce the frequency of occurrence of a situation in which the whitened portion HKB becomes conspicuous.

In addition, when moving the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, it is preferable to move the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate lower light emitting board 2400 together. Alternatively, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be moved together. Then, while the panel plate rear decoration member 2410 is in the first movement position or the second movement position, the panel plate lower light emitting board 2400 or the panel plate rear board 2420 may be brought into a light emitting state.

In addition, the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 or the panel board rear board 2420 is brought into different light emitting states depending on when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is in the first moving position and when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is in the second moving position. The decoration member 2410 may be configured to have a light emitting effect state in which it is visually recognized in different light emitting states. Further, in the game board side effect display device 1600, a special effect image may be displayed at the same time in response to this light emitting effect state. Furthermore, different effect images may be displayed when the panel plate rear decoration member 2410 is in the first movement position and when it is in the second movement position. Depending on the external shape of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 located at the first movement position or the second movement position and the special effect image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, one character, an integrated effect, etc. It may be configured to represent. For example, as a special effect image, it may be configured to display a rainy or snowy state on the panel rear decorative member 2410 representing a mountain range. Further, the plurality of performance modes may be configured to suggest different jackpot expectation levels.

With this configuration, the player's attention is directed to the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the game board side effect display device 1600 located in the direction in which the panel board rear decoration member 2410 moves. Even if the decorative member 2410 moves to the second movement position and the obstacle nail 1201 does not overlap the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 in front view, it is possible to distract the player's consciousness from the whitening part HKB. becomes.

Although an embodiment is shown that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 466, the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 465 and FIGS. 467 to 476 is not limited to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 466. may be similarly modified. Further, the embodiment may be applied to the modified examples of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 466. Further, a modification of the panel rear decorative member 2410 may also be applied to the panel rear substrate 2420. In these cases as well, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

FIG. 478 shows an embodiment in which the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 are modified to be movable in the vertical direction in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 475.

FIG. 478(a) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 475(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decoration member 2410 and the panel plate rear board 2420 are in the standby position.

FIG. 478(b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 475(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is in the moving position. When the panel plate rear decoration member 2410 moves from the standby position to the movement position, it moves a predetermined distance (20 mm) upward in a plane parallel to the panel plate 1110, but in this state, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel plate rear Although the decorative member 2410 is located at a position where they overlap when viewed from the front, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear board 2420 are located at a position where they overlap when viewed from the front.

FIG. 478(c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 475(a), showing a state in which the panel board rear substrate 2420 is in the moving position. When the panel board rear board 2420 moves from the standby position to the movement position, it moves a predetermined distance (20 mm) upward on a plane parallel to the panel board 1110, but in this state, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear board Although the nails 2420 are located at positions where they do not overlap when viewed from the front, the obstacle nails 1201 and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 are located at positions where they overlap when viewed from the front.

In this way, at a certain timing, only one of the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 is moved from the standby position to the movement position, and the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 are moved from the standby position to the movement position. 2420 may be configured so that they do not move to the movement position at the same time. For example, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be moved so as to alternately appear and retract in the vertical direction.

With this configuration, even when a movement effect is executed to move the panel board rear decorative member 2410 or the panel board rear board 2420 to the moving position, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 or the panel board rear Since it is located so as to overlap with one of the substrates 2420 that has not moved in a front view, it is possible to maintain a state in which the whitened portion HKB is less noticeable. Although the embodiment has been shown in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 are moved from the standby position to the movement position, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is provided in place of the panel board rear board 2420, so that the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 are overlapped in the front and rear direction. The two panel plate rear decorative members 2410 may be moved in the same manner. Further, a panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be provided in place of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and two panel plate rear substrates 2420 overlapping in the front-rear direction may be moved in the same manner. Alternatively, the positions of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 may be reversed in the front-rear direction, with the panel board rear board 2420 provided at the front and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 at the rear, and moved in the same manner. . Furthermore, a plurality of decorative units each consisting of the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 may be arranged in a stacked manner and moved in the same manner.

FIG. 478(d) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 475(a), showing a state in which both the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are in the moving position. When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 move from the standby position to the movement position, they move a predetermined distance (20 mm) upward in a plane parallel to the panel board 1110, but in this state, no obstruction occurs. With respect to the nail 1201, both the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 are located at positions where they do not overlap when viewed from the front. In this case, the whitened portion HKB around the tip of the faulty nail 1201 may become noticeable.

Therefore, when both the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 are in the moving position, the panel board rear board 2420 is made to emit light in a predetermined luminescent color, thereby making the panel board rear decoration member 2410 It may be configured to be in a light emitting effect state. Further, in the game board side effect display device 1600, a special effect image may be displayed at the same time in response to this light emitting effect state. One character or the like may be represented by the outer shape of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 located at the moving position and a special effect image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. Note that an aspect similar to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 477 may be adopted.

With this configuration, the player's attention is focused on the panel board rear decoration member 2410, the panel board rear board 2420, and the game board side located in the direction in which the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 have moved. In order to face the production display device 1600, the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 move to the movement position, and the obstacle nail 1201 does not overlap the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 in front view. Even if this occurs, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable.

Although an embodiment is shown that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 475, the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 476 is not limited to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. It's okay. Furthermore, the embodiment may be applied to the modified examples of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 475. In this case as well, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

A predetermined pattern or the like is applied to the front surface at the rear of the movably configured panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the movably configured panel plate rear board 2420 at a position overlapping with the obstacle nail 1201 in front view. , a decorative member that is visually recognized in bright color or metallic luster is provided, and this decorative member is visually recognized when both the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 are moved from the standby position to the movement position. The configuration may be such that this is possible. Note that even in the case where only one of the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 is provided, the same decoration means may be adopted. With this configuration, it is possible to maintain a state in which the whitened portion HKB is less noticeable even when both the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 are moved to the movement position.

A panel board rear decorative member 2410, not a decorative member, is placed behind the movable panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the movable panel board rear board 2420 at a position overlapping the obstacle nail 1201 in front view. Alternatively, a drive mechanism (arm, pinion, rack, etc.) for driving the panel board rear board 2420 may be provided. In this case, the drive mechanism is formed of a colorless transparent or white opaque synthetic resin, and when the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 are moved to the moving position and stopped, the obstacle nail 1201 and the drive mechanism are It is preferable to configure it so that the portion having a predetermined shape (preferably a shape other than a planar shape, such as having unevenness) overlaps in a front view. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to maintain a state in which the whitened portion HKB is less noticeable. Incidentally, if the drive mechanism were formed of black or dark-colored synthetic resin, the whitened portion HKB would be very noticeable. In this case, it is preferable to print letters or patterns in white on the front surface of the drive mechanism so that these overlap the obstacle nails 1201 when viewed from the front. Note that the flat cable and flexible board that transmit control signals and power from the peripheral control board 1510 to the panel board rear board 2420 are white, and the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 are moved to the moving position. In the stopped state, the obstacle nail 1201 may be located at a position where the flat cable or the flexible board overlaps when viewed from the front. In addition, in the case where only one of the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 is provided, a similar configuration may be adopted.

FIG. 479 shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is modified to be movable in the front-rear direction in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 466. FIG. 479(a) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 466(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decoration member 2410 and the panel plate rear board 2420 are in the front standby position. FIG. 479(b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 466(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is in the rearward movement position. When the panel board rear decoration member 2410 moves from the standby position to the movement position, it moves a predetermined distance (5 mm) backward from the panel board 1110, but even in this state, the obstruction nail 1201 and the panel board rear decoration member 2410 are visible when viewed from the front. They are located in overlapping positions.

In this way, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be configured to be movable in the front-rear direction, and may be configured to be in a state away from the rear surface of the panel board 1110 and a state in which it is close to the rear surface of the panel board 1110. Note that while the panel board 1110 and the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 are close to each other, the panel board 1110 and the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 are apart. It is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable than the state.

For example, as an effect to show that the expectation of a jackpot is high, the panel board rear decoration member 2410 may be moved to a backward movement position, and the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear decoration member 2410 may be changed to a state separated from each other. Furthermore, during a predetermined period in which the player is playing the game, the time during which the player is executing the moving effect (the time when the player is located at the moving position), which indicates that the expectation level of the jackpot is high, indicates that the expectation level of the jackpot is high. It is preferable to configure the time period to be shorter than the time during which the movement effect shown is not executed (not located at the movement position). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable during the time when the performance indicating that the expectation of a jackpot is high is not being executed, which occupies a large portion of the gaming time.

On the other hand, the position of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 shown in FIG. 479(b) may be set as a standby position, and the position of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 shown in FIG. 479(a) may be set as a moving position. In addition, during the predetermined period in which the player is playing the game, the time during which the player is performing a performance indicating that the expectation of a jackpot is high (the time when the player is located at the moving position) indicates that the expectation of a jackpot is high. It is shorter than the time when the performance is not executed (not located at the moving position). In this case, as an effect indicating that the expectation of a jackpot is high, it is preferable to move the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 to a forward movement position and change the state so that the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 are close to each other. . With this configuration, the whitened area HKB can be made less noticeable, and when a moving performance with high expectations for a jackpot is being performed, the player will notice the existence of the whitened area HKB, and the player will be less likely to expect a jackpot. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's interest, which has increased due to the execution of a highly moving performance, is dampened.

FIG. 480 shows that in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 466, the front surface of the panel rear decoration member 2410 is made to have a depth in the front-rear direction, and the panel rear decoration member 2410 is movable in the vertical direction. 2 shows a modified embodiment.

FIG. 480(a) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 466(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decoration member 2410 and the panel plate rear board 2420 are in the standby position. FIG. 480(b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 466(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is in the moving position. When the panel board rear decoration member 2410 moves from the standby position to the movement position, it moves a predetermined distance (10 mm) upward on a surface parallel to the panel board 1110, but even in this state, the obstruction nail 1201 and the panel board rear decoration member 2410 is located closer in the front-rear direction than when they were in the standby position and overlapped with each other when viewed from the front. Note that the portion having a deep shape may be configured so that it is visually recognized as a decorative shape imitating a mountain range when viewed from the front.

In this way, the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is shaped to have a recessed portion and a protruding portion in the front-rear direction, so that when the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 moves horizontally with respect to the panel plate 1110, The obstacle nail 1201 and the protruding portion are configured to move to a position where they overlap in a front view, and the distance between the obstacle nail 1201 and the front surface of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 becomes closer as the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves. It may be configured as follows. Note that the moving direction of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is not limited to the up-down direction, but may be configured to move horizontally in the left-right direction or diagonal direction when viewed from the front.

In addition, the time when the performance indicating that the expectation of a jackpot is high (the time when the player is located at the moving position) is the time when the performance indicating that the expectation of a jackpot is high is not executed (the time when the player is located at the moving position). (not). In this case, as an effect to show that the expectation of a jackpot is high, it is preferable to move the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 to an upward movement position and change the state so that the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 are close to each other. . With this configuration, the whitening part HKB can be made less noticeable, and when a moving performance with high expectations for a jackpot is performed, the player will notice the existence of the whitening part HKB, which will reduce the expectation of a jackpot. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's interest, which has increased due to the execution of a highly moving performance, is dampened.

On the other hand, the position of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 shown in FIG. 480(b) may be set as a standby position, and the position of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 shown in FIG. 480(a) may be set as a moving position. For example, as an effect to show that the expectation of a jackpot is high, the panel board rear decoration member 2410 may be moved to a downward movement position, and the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear decoration member 2410 may be moved away from each other. In addition, the time when the moving effect indicating that the expectation of a jackpot is high (the time when the moving effect is located at the moving position) is the time during which the moving effect indicating that the expectation of a jackpot is high is being executed (the time when the moving effect is located at the moving position). shorter than (not located). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable during the time when the performance indicating that the expectation of a jackpot is high is not being executed, which occupies a large portion of the gaming time.

479 and 480, an embodiment has been shown in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is movable in the vertical direction and the front-back direction. It may also be configured to perform a vibration performance that causes fine vibrations in the direction or in the front-back direction. Further, it is preferable to configure the system so that the vibration effect indicates that the expectation of a jackpot is high. In addition, when vibrating, it is preferable to configure the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 to vibrate within a range of about 3 mm to 5 mm. Note that, in the vibration range, it is preferable to maintain a state in which it overlaps the obstacle nail 1201 when viewed from the front. With such a configuration, the state of light reflection on the panel rear decorative member 2410 continues to change, so that the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable. It should be noted that not only the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 479 and 480 but also other embodiments may be configured to be able to perform similar vibration effects.

FIG. 481 shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 466 is modified to be rotatable about the front-rear direction as a rotation axis. FIG. 481(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is shown in a standby position. FIG. 481(b) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is shown in a position rotated approximately 45 degrees clockwise from the standby position.

The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise around a panel plate rear decorative member rotation shaft 2410c provided in the front-rear direction. It should be noted that it is preferable to configure such a rotating effect to suggest that the expectation of a jackpot is high. It is also possible to stop the rotation at a predetermined rotation angle, and the angle at which the rotation stops may be configured to indicate the degree of jackpot expectation. In this embodiment, even when the panel board rear decoration member 2410 is rotated, the obstacle nail 1201 functioning as the left jump nail 1231 and the obstacle nail 1201 functioning as the left life nail 1230 are fixed to the panel board rear decoration. It always maintains a state in which it overlaps the member 2410 when viewed from the front.

With such a configuration, even if the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is configured to be rotatable, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the obstacle nail 1201 will continue to be in an overlapping positional relationship when viewed from the front, and these Regarding the faulty nail 1201, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable. Note that, as an effect, it is preferable to maintain the rotated state of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, rather than rotating the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 by a predetermined angle from the standby position and stopping the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. In this case, when viewed from the front, a state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is located behind the obstacle nail 1201 and a state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is not located behind the obstacle nail 1201 alternate. Therefore, although a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is not located behind the obstacle nail 1201 temporarily appears, it is possible to maintain a state in which the whitened part HKB is hard to stand out. In this case, the rotation speed and rotation direction of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 may be configured to indicate the degree of jackpot expectation.

FIG. 482 shows an embodiment in which the panel rear decorative member 2410 of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 466 is modified to be rotatable about the left-right direction. FIG. 482(a) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 466(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decoration member 2410 and the panel plate rear board 2420 are in the standby position. FIG. 479(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 466(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is in the moving position. When the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 rotates from the standby position to the moving position, it rotates approximately 30 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right side, but even in this state, the obstruction nail 1201 and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 are They are located in overlapping positions when viewed from the front. FIG. 479(c) is a modification of the cross-sectional view shown in FIG. 479(b), and shows a state in which the game board side effect display device 1600 is located behind the panel board rear decorative member 2410.

In this way, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is configured to be rotatable about the panel plate rear decorative member rotation axis 2410c, and can be in a standby state parallel to the panel plate 1110 and a moving state not parallel to the panel plate 1110. It may be configured so that Further, it is preferable to configure the action of moving to a moving state to be executable as an effect indicating that the expectation of a jackpot is high. Specifically, it is preferable to provide a plurality of rotation angles at the movement position of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and to configure the system so that the degree of jackpot expectation is indicated by the rotation angle. Note that when the panel board rear decoration member 2410 is not parallel to the panel board 1110, the display of the game board side effect display device 1600 located behind the panel board rear decoration member 2410 as shown in FIG. 482(c) It is preferable to configure such that light from the area is directly incident on the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. In this case, the light emitted from the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is diffusely reflected on the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, so that the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable. Further, when the display mode of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is such that a predetermined image is displayed blinking at a predetermined cycle, it is possible to make the presence of the whitened portion HKB even less noticeable.

Note that light can be irradiated not only on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 but also on the front surface of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 that has been rotated at a predetermined angle by another member capable of irradiating light. It may be configured to do so.

In this way, there is a high expectation of a jackpot in the game board side effect display device 1600 and other light-emitting decorative members, etc., with respect to the panel board rear decorative member 2410 that is originally tilted or has become tilted. It may be configured so that the light emitted in white color indicating the color is directly irradiated. In this case, since the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is illuminated in white, the whitened portion HKB becomes less noticeable than when illuminated in other colors. In addition, when the obstacle nail 1201 made of brass is adopted, it may be illuminated in yellow instead of white.

FIG. 483(a) shows that in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 482(c), a light guide plate 2460 is provided between the panel board 1110, the panel board rear decorative member 2410, and the game board side effect display device 1600. It is a sectional view explaining an embodiment changed to. Moreover, FIG. 483(b) is an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment shown in FIG. FIG.

In this embodiment, a light guide plate 2460 is provided behind the panel board 1110. The light guide plate 2460 is a flat member made of a colorless and transparent resin, and has a light guide plate uneven portion 2460a formed by fine unevenness on a part of either the front or rear surface. The thickness of the light guide plate 2460 is 2 mm. Moreover, the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a as a whole is in a form that is visually recognized as a predetermined decorative shape such as a predetermined character, design, or pattern. Furthermore, a predetermined light emitting section is provided that introduces light from the side to the light guide plate 2460. Control of the light emitting section is performed by a peripheral control board 1510.

In a state where no light is introduced to the light guide plate 2460 from a predetermined light emitting part, the light guide plate 2460 is visually recognized as colorless and transparent, and the panel board rear decoration member 2410 located behind the light guide plate 2460 and the game board side effect display device 1600 are visible. It is possible to visually recognize the Further, since the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a is minute, the predetermined shape formed by the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a is not visible to the player or is difficult to see. On the other hand, when light is introduced into the light guide plate 2460 from the side, the introduced light is diffusely reflected on the uneven portions, so that the predetermined shape formed by the uneven portions 2460a of the light guide plate reflects the introduced light. It becomes visible to the player in the form of colored light.

In this embodiment, the obstacle nail 1201 and the light guide plate concavo-convex portion 2460a, which is visible in a predetermined shape when viewed from the front, are provided so as to overlap when viewed from the front. When white light is introduced into the light guide plate 2460, the light guide plate 2460 and the whitened portion HKB are visible as one, making it possible to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable. Further, when yellow light is introduced into the light guide plate 2460, the light guide plate 2460 and the brass obstacle nail 1201 are visible as one, making it possible to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable. In addition, it is preferable to configure such that an effect in which light is introduced into the light guide plate 2460 is executed as an effect suggesting that the expectation level of a jackpot is high.

The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 may be arranged behind the light guide plate 2460. In this case, even when no light is introduced into the light guide plate 2460, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable by the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 located at the rear. Furthermore, when light is introduced into the light guide plate 2460, a position closer to the obstructing nail 1201 can be made to emit white or yellow light, so that the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

Note that the configuration may be such that a predetermined shape formed by the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a is visible to the player in a state in which light is not introduced into the light guide plate 2460 from a predetermined light emitting portion. In this case, it is preferable to configure the light guide plate so that the uneven reflection portion 2460a diffusely reflects the environmental light and appears white. In the case of such a configuration, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable by the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a provided in the light guide plate 2460 and visually recognized in a predetermined shape.

As shown in FIG. 483(b), the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600 may be located behind the panel board 1110 at a position overlapping the obstacle nail 1201 when viewed from the front. It is preferable to display a white image in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 at a position that overlaps the site where the obstacle nail 1201 is installed when viewed from the front. With the white image, the white image and the whitened portion HKB can be visually recognized as one, and the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable. Further, the configuration may be such that a yellow image is displayed. When configured to display a yellow image, the game board side performance display device 1600 and the brass obstacle nails 1201 are visible as one, and the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable. In addition, it is preferable to configure the system so that an effect that displays a white image or a yellow image is executed as an effect that suggests that the expectation level of a jackpot is high.

Further, in this embodiment, the light guide plate 2460 is provided behind the panel board 1110, and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is located behind the light guide plate 2460. It may be configured such that the light guide plate concavo-convex portion 2460a provided on the light plate 2460 and visible in a predetermined shape and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 overlap in a front view.

When the light guide plate 2460 is in a non-light emitting state, it is preferable to display a yellow or white image at a position in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 that overlaps the brass obstacle nail 1201 when viewed from the front.

Alternatively, when the light guide plate 2460 is in the light emitting state, white is adopted as the color of the light introduced into the light guide plate 2460, and the color overlaps with the brass obstacle nail 1201 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front. It is a good idea to display a white image at the position. Alternatively, when the light guide plate 2460 is in the light emitting state, yellow is adopted as the color of the light introduced into the light guide plate 2460, and the color overlaps with the brass obstacle nail 1201 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front. It is a good idea to display a yellow image at the location.

Alternatively, when the light guide plate 2460 is in the light emitting state, yellow or white is adopted as the color of the light introduced into the light guide plate 2460, and the brass obstacle nail 1201 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is viewed from the front. It is a good idea to display a black image at the overlapping position.

Even when these configurations are adopted, the light guide plate 2460, the game board side effect display device 1600, and the obstacle nail 1201 can be seen as one, making it possible to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable. In the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 477 to 483, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a may be transformed into the panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b. Furthermore, the aspects shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 477 to 483 are applied to the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 466 to 474. May be applied. In addition, displays on various members that can display, move, and emit light, such as the game board side performance display device 1600, the panel board lower light emitting board 2400, the panel board rear decorative member 2410, the panel board rear board 2420, and the light guide plate 2460, Effects such as movement and light emission may be configured to be executed by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the special lottery results. Further, it is preferable that the performance indicating the jackpot expectation degree executed by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the special lottery result is started at least at a timing before all the decorative symbols stop. In addition, the performance that suggests the expectation of a jackpot may end before all the decorative patterns stop, or it ends after a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has passed after all the decorative patterns have stopped. It may be configured to do so.

As described above, when the brass obstacle nails 1201 are planted on the panel board 1110, whitening parts HKB are generated around the obstacle nails 1201 due to long-term operation at the game parlor, and gradually It is possible that an event will occur where the situation expands. The condition in which the whitened portion HKB occurs degrades the aesthetic appearance and hinders the player's enjoyment.

On the other hand, in game parlors, there is a desire to know in advance the long-term operating status of the pachinko machine 1. This is because when the pachinko machine 1 is operated at a game parlor for a long period of time, there is an increased possibility that failures or damage will occur in the various parts that make up the pachinko machine 1. A gaming machine may be equipped with dedicated hardware for measuring operating time (for example, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-200434), but in this case, there is a problem that the price of the gaming machine becomes high. Furthermore, it is possible to ascertain the cumulative operating time by installing a hall computer that tallies the operating status of the pachinko machine 1 in a game parlor, but it is necessary to install an expensive hall computer, and it is not necessary to operate the hall computer. It was necessary to obtain the operating history of gaming machines. Furthermore, when a game parlor purchases a used game machine, it is difficult to know the cumulative operating time up to that point.

Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, it is difficult for players to notice that the whitening portion HKB has occurred, and the staff at the game parlor can easily grasp the operating status of the pachinko machine 1 using an inexpensive configuration. A pachinko machine 1 that can perform the following will be described.

FIG. 484 shows an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456. Specifically, a panel front decoration member 2450 is provided on the front surface of the panel board 1110.

FIG. 484(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 484(b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 484(a). FIG. 484(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection method. FIG. 484(d) is a sectional view showing a modification of the panel front decorative member 2450.

In this embodiment, a panel board front decorative member 2450 made of colored (specifically blue) opaque synthetic resin is provided in a shape surrounding the obstacle nail 1201 on the front surface of the panel board 1110. Specifically, after the panel board front decoration member 2450 is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110, the obstacle nails 1201 are planted in the obstacle nail through holes 1110a provided in the panel board 1110. Note that the obstacle nail 1201 may be made of stainless steel, pure copper, or brass. Note that the panel front decorative member 2450 is provided with a panel front decorative member through hole 2450a for passing the obstacle nail 1201 therethrough. Further, the panel front decorative member 2450 has a decorative outer shape.

As shown in FIG. 484(a), when viewed from the front, the portions located inside the panel board 1110 of all the obstacle nails 1201 that constitute the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 can be visually recognized. is impossible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 484(c), when viewed from a predetermined angle (from the diagonal upper right in the figure; the same applies to other embodiments), a specific obstacle nail 1201 (in this example In this case, it is possible to visually recognize the portions of the first to third obstruction nails 1201 from the left among the left guiding nails 1232 located inside the panel board 1110. At this time, it becomes possible to visually confirm the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB in the portion of the particular faulty nail 1201 located inside the panel board 1110.

By adopting such a configuration, the whitened portion HKB that has occurred on the panel board 1110 is difficult to be seen by the player, so that the whitened portion HKB that has occurred or the generated whitened portion HKB is enlarged. Even if the player does, it is difficult for the player to notice that the whitening portion HKB has occurred, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming a hindrance to improving the player's interest.

On the other hand, the vicinity of the tip of a particular obstacle nail 1201 is configured to be visible from a predetermined direction via the panel board 1110. As a result, on the game parlor side, without opening the door frame 3 or removing the game board 5', it is possible to set the game board 5' at a predetermined angle with the game board 5' attached to the main body frame 4 and with the door frame 3 closed. It becomes possible to visually confirm the vicinity of the tip of a particular obstacle nail 1201 through the glass plate 192. Then, the occurrence status of the whitened portion HKB around the tip of the specific faulty nail 1201, specifically whether or not the whitened portion HKB has occurred, and if the whitened portion HKB has occurred, its size, etc. It is now possible to check if a malfunction or damage has occurred in the Pachinko machine 1, and take measures such as performing maintenance on the Pachinko machine 1, ordering replacement parts, or preparing a Pachinko machine 1 to be installed in its place. It is possible to do this in advance. Although it is possible to observe the specific faulty nail 1201 while the power to the Pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is preferable to observe the particular faulty nail 1201 when the power to the Pachinko machine 1 is turned off.

Note that the value of the kinetic energy of the game ball fired from the ball launcher 680 gradually decreases as the game ball passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 and rises. The value of potential energy gradually increases. When the game ball passes through the part where the backflow prevention member 1007 is provided and reaches the upper part of the game area 5a, the value of the kinetic energy of the game ball is smaller than when it is launched, but the The value of potential energy has increased compared to when it was fired. From this state, the game ball will fall through the area where the obstacle nails 1201 are planted in the game area 5a. Therefore, as you move toward the bottom of the board, the value of the kinetic energy of the rolling game ball increases again, while the value of potential energy decreases. For this reason, the whitening portion HKB is likely to occur particularly near the obstacle nail 1201 planted near the bottom of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, regarding the obstacle nail 1201, there is a risk that an unauthorized adjustment may be made to change the winning rate of game balls entering the winning opening. In this case, the obstacle nail 1201, which is planted particularly close to the winning opening, is likely to become a target of unauthorized adjustment. Therefore, the whitening portion HKB is also likely to occur around the tip of the obstacle nail 1201 that is planted close to the winning hole.

In this embodiment, when viewing from a predetermined angle the vicinity of the tip of the obstacle nail 1201 that constitutes the left guide nail 1232 provided close to the first starting port 2002 located at the bottom of the board surface, the whitened portion HKB is It is configured so that you can check the occurrence status. Note that the same configuration is adopted not only for the left guide nail 1232 but also for the obstacle nails 1201 that constitute the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the right guide nail 1233, so that when viewed from a predetermined angle, the whitening part HKB It may be configured so that the occurrence status can be confirmed.

In addition, in the left guide nail 1232, the game ball does not fall downward between the obstacle nails 1201 that constitute the left guide nail 1232, but the game ball slides on the upper surface of the left guide nail 1232 toward the lower right. It's rolling. The game ball thus rolled may collide with the jump nail 1231 provided on the left side with increased momentum. For this reason, it is desirable to configure the jump nail 1231 provided particularly on the left side so that the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB can be confirmed when viewed from a predetermined angle.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 353, a guide nail composed of a plurality of obstacle nails 1201 is provided at the upper left of the left guide nail 1232, similar to the left guide nail 1232. Also in this guide nail, the game ball slides on its upper surface and rolls toward the lower right (the game ball does not fall between the obstacle nails 1201 that make up the guide nail. On the other hand, this guide The game ball may fall between the nail and the left guide nail 1232). Therefore, among the obstacle nails 1201 constituting the left guide nail 1232, the more the obstacle nail 1201 is located on the left side, the more the game balls are likely to collide with each other, the more the momentum has increased. Among them, a game ball with increased momentum may collide with the obstacle nail 1201 provided on the far left side. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the obstruction nail 1201 constituting the left guide nail 1232 is configured so that the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB can be confirmed when viewed from a predetermined angle. As described above, the area where the obstruction nail 1201 is implanted close to the left guide nail 1232 is a site where the whitening part HKB is likely to occur.

Referring to FIG. 484(c), an example is shown in which a specific obstacle nail 1201 is viewed diagonally from the upper right, but the angle at which the specific obstacle nail 1201 is viewed is This may vary depending on the relationship between the shape and the shape of the panel front decorative member 2450. For example, for the second obstacle nail 1201 from the right among the obstacle nails 1201 constituting the left guide nail 1232, it is easier to visually recognize the area around the tip of the obstacle nail 1201 when viewed diagonally from above to the left.

The angle at which the faulty nail 1201 is viewed is such that the area around the tip of the specific faulty nail 1201 can be seen from an angle of about 30 degrees to 60 degrees (the angle of incidence when the glass plate 192 is viewed from the front). It is desirable to provide a decorative member 2450 in front of the panel. This is because when attempting to visually check from an angle close to horizontal to the glass plate 192, the environmental light is totally reflected and reflected on the glass plate 192, making it difficult to see the area around the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201. This is because it may be difficult. Furthermore, in addition to the ambient light, the panel board 1110 also reflects the specific obstacle nail 1201 to be observed, making it difficult to visually recognize the area around the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201.

Although it is somewhat complicated, if the game board 5' attached to the main body frame 4 is visually recognized with the door frame 3 open and the main body frame 4 closed, the door frame 3 will be closed. Visibility is not obstructed by the glass plate 192 at a position closer to the panel board 1110 than in the above state, and it becomes possible to visually recognize the vicinity of the tip of the specific faulty nail 1201.

When the door frame 3 is closed, the tip of a particular obstacle nail 1201 cannot be seen through the panel board 1110, and when the door frame 3 is open, the end of the particular obstacle nail 1201 cannot be seen through the panel board 1110. A decorative member 2450 may be provided in front of the panel so that it can be visually recognized. Alternatively, when the door frame 3 is closed, the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 is difficult to see through the panel board 1110, and when the door frame 3 is open, the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 is difficult to see through the panel board 1110. A decorative member 2450 in front of the panel may be provided so as to be easily visible through the panel.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to notice the occurrence of the whitening portion HKB. Further, it is possible to check the occurrence status of the whitened portion HKB simply by opening the door frame 3.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 484(d), the end of the panel front decorative member 2450 may be chamfered obliquely. With such a configuration, the strength of the panel front decorative member 2450 can be increased, and the occurrence of a situation in which a game ball collides with the panel front decorative member 2450 and the panel front decorative member 2450 is damaged can be suppressed. becomes possible.

Referring to FIG. 484, an example in which the panel front decorative member 2450 is provided on the front surface of the panel board 1110 has been shown. A modified embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 485.

FIG. 485(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 485(b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 485(a). FIG. 485(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection projection method.

In this embodiment, the panel front decorative member 2450 is made of a colorless and transparent panel front decorative member 2452 that is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin and can be seen from the rear, and a colored (specifically blue) opaque synthetic resin that is made of a rearward view. and an invisible panel front decorative member opaque portion 2454. Further, the upper end of the panel front decorative member colorless transparent portion 2452 and the boundary between the panel front decorative member colorless transparent portion 2452 and the panel front decorative member opaque portion 2454 have a decorative shape.

As shown in FIG. 485(a), when viewed from the front, the portions located inside the panel board 1110 of all the obstacle nails 1201 that constitute the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 can be visually recognized. is impossible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 485(c), when viewed from a predetermined angle, a specific obstacle nail 1201 (in this example, the left guide nail 1232 For the first to third obstacle nails 1201) from the left, the portions located inside the panel board 1110 can be visually recognized. At this time, it becomes possible to visually confirm the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB in the portion of the particular faulty nail 1201 located inside the panel board 1110.

Referring to FIG. 484, an example is shown in which a front panel decorative member 2450 made of a colored opaque synthetic resin is provided on the front surface of the panel board 1110. However, the front panel decorative member 2450 may be made of a colored (blue) transparent synthetic resin. An embodiment modified in this manner will be described with reference to FIG. 486.

FIG. 486(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 486(b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 486(a). FIG. 486(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, the panel front decorative member 2450 is made of colored transparent synthetic resin.

As shown in FIG. 486(a), when viewed from the front, the portions located inside the panel board 1110 of all the obstacle nails 1201 that constitute the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 can be visually recognized. It is difficult.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 486(c), when viewed from a predetermined angle, a specific obstacle nail 1201 (in this example, the first to third obstacle from the left of the left guide nails 1232) As for the nails 1201), the portions located inside the panel board 1110 can be visually recognized. At this time, it becomes possible to visually confirm the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB in the portion of the particular faulty nail 1201 located inside the panel board 1110.

Referring to FIG. 484, an example in which the panel front decorative member 2450 is provided on the front surface of the panel board 1110 has been shown. An embodiment modified to include the following will be described with reference to FIG. 487.

FIG. 487(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 487(b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 487(a). FIG. 487(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection projection method.

In this embodiment, the panel front decorative member 2450 is made of a colorless and transparent panel front decorative member 2452 that is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin and can be seen from behind, and a colorless and transparent part 2452 that is made of a colored (blue) transparent synthetic resin and can be seen from the rear. It is composed of a colored transparent part 2456, which is a difficult panel front decorative member. Further, the upper end of the panel front decorative member colorless transparent portion 2452 and the boundary between the panel front decorative member colorless transparent portion 2452 and the panel front decorative member colored transparent portion 2456 have a decorative shape.

As shown in FIG. 487(a), when viewed from the front, the portions located inside the panel board 1110 of all the obstacle nails 1201 that constitute the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 can be visually recognized. is impossible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 487(c), when viewed from a predetermined angle, a specific obstacle nail 1201 (in this example, the left guide nail 1232 For the first to third obstacle nails 1201) from the left, the portions located inside the panel board 1110 can be visually recognized. At this time, it becomes possible to visually confirm the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB in the portion of the particular faulty nail 1201 located inside the panel board 1110.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 484, the panel front decorative member 2450 may be configured to have a perfect circular shape, and the specific obstacle nail 1201 may be located at the center of the perfect circle.

FIG. 488(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. The panel board 1110 in FIG. 488(a) is provided with a perfectly circular panel front decoration member 2450, and the life nail 1230 is located at the center of the panel front decoration member 2450.

The panel front decorative member 2450 may have a right triangle or star shape. The panel board 1110 in FIG. 488(a) is provided with a star-shaped panel front decoration member 2450 and a right-angled triangle-shaped panel front decoration member 2450, and a left jump is placed in the center of the star-shaped panel front decoration member 2450. A nail 1231 is located. Furthermore, the right jump nail 1231 is located at the center of the panel front decorative member 2450 in the shape of a right triangle. In this way, one panel front decorative member 2450 may be provided corresponding to one obstacle nail 1201.

Further, the panel front decorative member 2450 may be provided for a plurality of obstacle nails 1201. The left guide nail 1232 shown in FIG. 488(a) is provided in one panel front decorative member 2450.

Not limited to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 484, the shape of the panel front decorative member opaque portion 2454 described with reference to FIG. 485, the shape of the panel front decorative member 2450 described with reference to FIG. These shapes may be adopted for the shapes of the colored transparent portions 2456 of the panel front decorative member described with reference to the above or modified embodiments thereof.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the angle at which the vicinity of the tip of a specific obstacle nail 1201 can be viewed. For example, regarding the vicinity of the tip of a specific obstacle nail 1201, the upper side, lower side, right side, left It becomes possible to visually recognize the image from various directions.

An example has been shown in which the shape of the panel front decorative member 2450 is a perfect circle, a right triangle, a star shape, etc., and a specific obstacle nail 1201 is placed at the center of the shape. The specific obstacle nail 1201 may be arranged at a position deviated from the above.

FIG. 488(b) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, and shows an embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 488(a). It is a diagram.

In FIG. 488(b), the obstacle nail 1201 planted as the life nail 1230 on the left side is located below the center of the panel front decorative member 2450 having a perfect circular shape. In addition, the obstacle nail 1201 planted as the life nail 1230 on the right side is located below the center of the panel front decorative member 2450 having a perfect circular shape, and is positioned so as to protrude downward from the end of the panel front decorative member 2450. are doing. In addition, the obstacle nail 1201 planted as the jump nail 1231 on the left side is located below the center of the star-shaped panel front decorative member 2450 and is positioned so as to protrude downward from the end of the panel front decorative member 2450. are doing. Moreover, the obstacle nail 1201 planted as the jump nail 1231 on the right side is located below the center of the panel front decorative member 2450 in the shape of a right triangle, and is located so as to be in contact with the end of the panel front decorative member 2450. There is. Further, the obstacle nails 1201 planted as the left guide nails 1232 are positioned so as to protrude obliquely to the lower left from the end of the panel front decorative member 2450.

As mentioned above, the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 are located at the bottom of the board. Therefore, the player who is playing the game sees these nails and the panel front decorative member 2450 from diagonally above. Therefore, in this embodiment, the panel front decorative member 2450 is provided biased upward with respect to a specific obstacle nail 1201. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to arrange the front panel decorative member 2450 in a more free position while making the whitened portion HKB less noticeable. Note that the left guide nail 1232 is viewed by the player diagonally above and from the right side. Therefore, with respect to the left guide nail 1232, the panel front decorative member 2450 is provided biased toward the upper side and the right side. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to arrange the front panel decorative member 2450 in a more free position while making the whitened portion HKB less noticeable.

A member that is visible in a color other than bright color is placed behind a specific obstacle nail 1201, and when the vicinity of the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 is viewed from a predetermined angle, the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 and It may be configured such that members that are visually recognized in colors other than bright colors are visually recognized in an overlapping manner. With such a configuration, it becomes easier to understand the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB around the tip of a particular faulty nail 1201. Note that it is desirable to use dark color or black as the color other than white or bright color.

Although it has been shown that it is desirable to arrange a member that is visible in a color other than white or bright color behind the specific obstacle nail 1201, it is desirable that this member be in a flat state without any irregularities. At least, when the vicinity of the tip of the particular nail 1201 is viewed from a predetermined angle, it is preferable that a flat portion with no unevenness is located behind the entire vicinity of the tip of the nail 1201.

The display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, which is visible in a dark color when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, may be located behind the specific obstacle nail 1201. When the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the vicinity of the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 are viewed from a predetermined angle, the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are displayed. The display area may be configured so that it is visible so that it overlaps with the display area. With such a configuration, it becomes easier to understand the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB around the tip of a particular faulty nail 1201.

Modifications have been shown in which members that are visually recognizable in bright colors or metallic luster, such as the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420, described with reference to FIGS. 465 to 476, are configured to be movable. The embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 484 to 489 may be applied to the modified example. Specifically, behind a specific obstacle nail 1201, a member that is visible in bright color or metallic luster, such as the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear board 2420 described with reference to FIGS. 465 to 476, is placed. It is preferable to arrange it so that it can be moved.

In this case, during the game, behind the specific obstacle nail 1201, members that are visible in bright color or metallic luster, such as the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420, are placed in a standby state, and the expectation of a jackpot is expected. It is preferable to configure the structure so that members visually recognized in bright colors or metallic luster, such as the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420, move to the moving position during the presentation that suggests the degree of display. With such a configuration, even if a whitened portion HKB occurs at the tip of a particular obstacle nail 1201, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice this fact.

On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, components that are visible in bright color or metallic luster, such as the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420, are placed in the state where the door frame 3 is open and the main body frame 4 is closed. In this state, it is preferable to configure the panel board 1110 so that an employee at the game parlor can directly touch and move the panel board 1110 by putting his/her hand into an opening provided in the center of the panel board 1110. In addition, when the members that are visible in bright color or metallic luster, such as the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420, are moved, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2410 and the rear panel board It is preferable to configure the structure so that members other than members such as the substrate 2420 that are brightly colored or have metallic luster can be visually recognized. In this case, as the visible member, it is preferable to employ a member that is not visible in bright colors or a member that is visible in a color tone that does not have metallic luster. Specifically, it is preferable to use a member that is visually recognized in a dark color.

By employing such a configuration, when a clerk at a game parlor tries to visually check the occurrence of the whitening portion HKB near the tip of a particular faulty nail 1201, he/she can check the rear decorative member 2410 of the panel board or the panel board. By manually moving a member such as the rear substrate 2420 that is visible in bright color or metallic luster, the visibility of the vicinity of the tip of a particular obstacle nail 1201 can be improved.

Depending on the amount of light emitted by the lighting equipment installed in the game parlor and the location of the lighting equipment, there is a possibility that the amount of light reaching a specific obstacle nail 1201 will not be sufficient. In particular, such a situation may occur when the panel front decorative member 2450 is made of an opaque material. Therefore, it may be configured such that light is irradiated from behind on a specific obstacle nail 1201 in response to the operation of the operation button 410 by a clerk at the game parlor. As a light source for irradiating light, the panel board rear board light emitting part 2425 mounted on the panel board rear board 2420, the game board side effect display device 1600, the above-mentioned light guide plate 2460, etc. are used to reach the operation button 410. These light sources can be changed from an unlit state to a lit state in response to an operation on the operation button 410, and these light sources that have been in a lit state can be changed to an unlit state in response to an operation on the operation button 410. It is recommended to configure it as follows. Further, the configuration may be such that the amount of light from these light sources can be changed in accordance with the operation of the operation button 410. For example, the intensity of the amount of light emitted by these light sources may be set at multiple levels (for example, three levels), so that the intensity of the amount of light is sequentially switched depending on the number of times the clerk at the game store operates the operation button 410. may be configured. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to provide an appropriate amount of light around the tip of a particular faulty nail 1201, and it becomes possible to confirm the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB in a good manner.

Note that the light source that has been turned on or adjusted in this manner may be configured to remain lit for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) rather than blinking. Alternatively, the color of the light (for example, white) emitted by the light source that is turned on or adjusted may be configured not to be changed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds). Further, the configuration may be such that these operations are performed simultaneously. Further, after the lighting state is maintained for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds), it may be configured to turn off. In this way, by maintaining the lighting state for a predetermined period of time or by maintaining the emitting state of a predetermined color for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to reduce the number of obstructions compared to the case where the light source blinks or the emitted light color changes. Visibility around the tip of 1201 can be improved.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 484, the front end of the obstacle nail 1201 is made difficult to see from the player by the front panel decorative member 2450 made of synthetic resin. 489, a modified embodiment in which a panel front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m is provided on the front surface of the panel board 1110 will be described. Note that the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 484 to 488 may be applied to this embodiment.

FIG. 489(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 489(b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 489(a). FIG. 489(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection method. FIG. 489(d) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 489(a) in a modified embodiment of this embodiment.

In this embodiment, a panel front decoration opaque thin layer portion 1110m is provided on the front surface of the panel board 1110. The decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m in front of the panel is blue in color and has a decorative shape imitating a mountain range. After pasting an opaque sheet having a predetermined pattern and external shape on the panel board 1110, the panel board 1110 is cut together with this sheet to form the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, and the obstacle nail 1201 is planted in the obstacle nail through hole 1110a. It is recommended to set

Even in the case of such a configuration, as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. It becomes possible to easily visually check the occurrence situation.

Note that the embodiment of the panel front decoration member 2450 described with reference to FIGS. 484 to 487 may be applied to the panel front decoration opaque thin layer portion 1110m. For example, as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 488, the panel front decoration opaque thin layer portion 1110m may have a decorative shape, or as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 485, the panel front decoration A part of the opaque thin layer portion 1110m may be made transparent, or the panel front decoration opaque thin layer portion 1110m may be made colored (blue) and translucent instead of opaque, as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. good.

If the game ball comes into contact with the end of the panel front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m many times, there is a risk that the panel front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m will be damaged from the end. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 489(d), the game ball that is in contact with the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board 1110 may be configured so that it does not come into contact with the end of the decorative opaque thin layer section 1110m in front of the panel board. By configuring the end portion of the panel front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m in this manner, it is possible to hide the whitened portion HKB and prevent the end portion of the panel front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m from being damaged.

By the way, a predetermined decorative member may be attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. In this case, a predetermined decorative member is provided with a plurality of positioning bosses that protrude rearward. Further, the predetermined decorative member is also provided with a hole into which a screw for attaching the decorative member to the panel board 1110 is inserted. On the other hand, the panel plate 1110 is provided with an insertion hole for inserting a boss and a mounting hole for attaching a screw.

When attaching the decorative member, positioning bosses are inserted into attachment holes provided in the panel board 1110. Next, the decorative member is fixed to the panel board 1110 by passing the screw through the insertion hole of the decorative member and the mounting hole provided in the panel board 1110 and rotating the screw. It is also possible to remove the decorative member by rotating the screw in the opposite direction.

By employing such an attachment method, it is possible to shorten the time required for positioning the decorative member with respect to the panel board 1110, and it is also possible to attach the decorative member to the panel board 1110 at an accurate position. Such a positioning method is described, for example, in the CD-ROM of Utility Model Application No. 05-059197 (Utility Model Application No. 07-022791).

By the way, when both the panel board 1110 and the decorative member are formed of transparent synthetic resin, the mounting holes provided in the panel board and the bosses provided in the decorative member are visible through the transparent decorative member. Therefore, there was a problem that the aesthetic appearance of the decorative member was spoiled. Specifically, from the front of the decorative member, the inner wall of the mounting hole provided in the panel board 1110 and the boss located inside the mounting hole are visible as a cloudy cylinder, which impairs the aesthetic appearance. there were.

Furthermore, when a decorative member made of transparent synthetic resin is attached to the wooden panel board 1110, the mounting hole provided in the wooden panel board is visible as a black opening through the decorative member. There was the issue of putting it away. In particular, when the pattern of the cell plate provided on the front side of the wooden panel board is close to white, there is a problem in that such black openings become conspicuous.

Below, means for solving these problems will be described with reference to FIG. 490.

FIG. 490(a) is a front view of the decorative member 2470. FIG. 490(b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 490(a). FIG. 490(c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 490(a). FIG. 490(d) is a front view showing the decorative member 2470 attached to the panel board 1110. FIG. 490(e) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 490(d) when a panel board 1110 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin is employed. FIG. 490(f) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 490(d) when a wooden panel board 1110 is used.

As shown in FIG. 490(a), the decorative member 2470 in this embodiment has a horizontally long rectangular shape. Furthermore, the decorative member 2470 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The decorative member 2470 is plate-shaped, and when the decorative member 2470 is attached to the panel board 1110, it has a horizontally rectangular decorative member front part 2470a located in the front and a horizontally rectangular decorative member rear part located in the rear. 2470b. The thickness of the decorative member 2470 is 4 mm, and it is possible to visually recognize the member located at the rear through the decorative member 2470. The decorative member rear surface portion 2470b is provided with two cylindrical decorative member bosses 2470c that vertically protrude rearward from the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b. The diameter of the decorative member boss 2470c is slightly smaller than 2 mm. Further, the length of the decorative member boss 2470c is 3 mm. The area of the decorative member rear part 2470b is larger than the area of the decorative member front part 2470a, and is formed obliquely as if chamfered from the end of the decorative member front part 2470 toward the end of the decorative member rear part 2470b. Four decorative member inclined parts 2470d are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 490(b) and 490(c), the angle between the decorative member front part 2470a and the decorative member inclined part 2470d is 135 degrees, and the angle between the decorative member rear part 2470b and the decorative member inclined part 2470d. is 45 degrees. The front surface of the decorative member 2470 comes into contact with the game ball that has been rolling in the game area 5a, but by providing the decorative member sloped portion 2470d in a chamfered shape, the rolling game ball does not collide with the decorative member 2470. Therefore, damage to the end portion of the decorative member 2470 can be suppressed. The decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position where it is visible with a portion thereof overlapping the decorative member inclined portion 2470d when viewed from the front. The decorative member 2470 includes two decorative member screw insertion holes 2470e for inserting decorative member mounting screws 2471 for attaching the decorative member 2470 to the panel board 1110.

In this embodiment, the panel board 1110 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The panel board 1110 is provided with two panel board boss insertion holes 1110p. The diameter of the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p is 2 mm, which is a diameter that allows the decorative member boss 2470c to be inserted and removed. Furthermore, the panel plate 1110 is provided with two panel plate screw insertion holes 1110q. The diameter of the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q is 2 mm. The panel board boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel board screw insertion hole 1110q each have a cylindrical shape and pass through the panel board 1110.

Next, how to attach the decorative member 2470 to the panel board 1110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 490(d) and 490(e). The decorative member 2470 is brought close to the front surface of the panel board 1110 from the front, and the decorative member boss 2470c is inserted into the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p provided in the panel board 1110. By bringing the decorative member 2470 into contact with the rear surface portion 2470b, the decorative member 2470 is positioned. Next, the decorative member installation screw 2471 was inserted into the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470e and the panel board screw insertion hole 1110q, and the decorative member installation screw 2471 was rotated clockwise to attach the decorative member 2470 to the panel board 1110. state. Note that the decorative member mounting screw 2471 can be removed by rotating the decorative member mounting screw 2471 counterclockwise. Further, by removing the decorative member attachment screws 2471 in this manner, the decorative member 2470 can be removed from the panel board 1110.

By employing such a configuration, the boundary line between the decorative member front portion 2470a and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d is located with respect to the decorative member boss 2470c. Therefore, the decorative member boss 2470c is visually recognized as partially overlapping with the decorative member inclined portion 2470d when viewed from the front. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the decorative member 2470, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less noticeable. Further, with such a configuration, a damaged decorative member 2470 can be easily replaced with a new decorative member 2470.

With reference to FIGS. 490(d) and 490(e), an embodiment in which the panel board 1110 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin has been shown, but with reference to FIG. 490(f), the panel board 1110 is made of wood. An embodiment modified to be constructed of plywood will be described.

FIG. 490(f) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 490(d) in the case where a wooden panel board 1110 is employed. In this embodiment, the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel board screw insertion hole 1110q, which the panel board 1110 has, each have a cylindrical shape, but do not penetrate the panel board 1110. Furthermore, a panel front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m is provided on the front surface of the panel board 1110, so that the plywood forming the panel board 1110 is not visible. The method of attaching and removing the decorative member 2470 to the panel board 1110 configured in this way is the same as the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 490(d) and 490(e).

In this embodiment, a panel board boss insertion hole 1110p is provided so as to penetrate through the panel front decoration opaque thin layer part 1110m. Therefore, when the colorless and transparent decorative member 2470 is attached to the panel board 1110, the circular panel board boss insertion hole 1110p provided in a manner that penetrates the panel board front decoration opaque thin layer part 1110m. It is a black circle with a diameter of 2 mm and is visible from the front, spoiling its aesthetic appearance. Therefore, in this embodiment, the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p, which is visually recognized as a black circle, and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d are configured so that they are partially overlapped when viewed from the front. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the presence of the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p less noticeable.

In addition, it is preferable to provide a predetermined character or pattern as the panel front decoration opaque thin layer portion 1110m provided on the front surface of the panel board 1110 by printing, pasting, or the like. In this case, the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p may be provided in a dark or black part of the panel front decoration opaque thin layer part 1110m provided as a character or picture. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p less noticeable.

In addition, when the panel board front decoration opaque thin layer part 1110m is provided on the front surface of the panel board 1110 formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, the white or bright color of the panel board front decoration opaque thin layer part 1110m provided as a character or pattern. It is preferable that the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p is provided at the location. This is because the light from the predetermined light emitting means and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 reaches the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p and the decorative member boss 2470c from the rear of the panel board 1110, and the panel board boss insertion This is because the hole 1110p and the decorative member boss 2470c are visually recognized in a state in which light is diffusely reflected. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p less noticeable. Although an example is shown in which two decorative member bosses 2470c are provided, a configuration may be provided in which two or more decorative member bosses 2470c are provided. Further, although the embodiment has been described in which the two decorative member bosses 2470c of the decorative member 2470 are located on the boundary line between the decorative member front part 2470a and the decorative member inclined part 2470d, all the decorative member bosses 2470c of the decorative member 2470 It is not necessary to arrange the decorative member boss 2470c on the boundary line between the decorative member front part 2470a and the decorative member inclined part 2470d, and at least one decorative member boss 2470c is located on the boundary line between the decorative member front part 2470a and the decorative member inclined part 2470d. That's fine.

491(a) and 491(b) each show an example of attaching the decorative member 2470 to the panel board 1110. FIG. 491(a) shows an embodiment in which the decorative member 2470 is attached horizontally. On the other hand, FIG. 491(b) shows an embodiment in which the decorative member 2470 is attached obliquely. In this embodiment, the inclination of the long side of the rectangular decorative member 2470 and the angle of the left guide nail 1232 are horizontal. Furthermore, by providing the decorative member inclined portion 2470d and the left guide nail 1232 in close proximity, the rolling game ball is prevented from coming into contact with the panel board 1110 in the area sandwiched between the left guide nail 1232 and the decorative member 2470. It is composed of

With such a configuration, in the area above the left guide nail 1232 where the game ball may collide with force, the game ball that collides with the left guide nail 1232 and bounces back collides directly with the panel board 1110, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the panel board 1110 is damaged or the panel front decoration opaque thin layer portion 1110m provided in front of the panel board 1110 is damaged. In addition, regarding the decorative member 2470, there may be a situation where the game ball that bounced off the left guide nail 1232 directly collides with it, resulting in a partially cloudy area, but in this case, the decorative member 2470 It is best to replace it. In this embodiment, the decorative member 2470 can be replaced with a new decorative member 2470 by simply removing the decorative member mounting screw 2471 with the door frame 3 open.

With reference to FIGS. 492 and 493, an embodiment in which the position where the decorative member boss 2470c is provided and the shape of the decorative member boss 2470c are modified will be described. 492(a), FIG. 492(b), FIG. 492(c), FIG. 493(a), FIG. 493(b), and FIG. 493(c) are front views of the decorative member 2470.

FIG. 492(a) is an example in which a decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position overlapping a decorative member front portion 2470a and two adjacent decorative member inclined portions 2470d in front view. With such a configuration, the boundary line between the decorative member front part 2470a and one decorative member inclined part 2470d, and the boundary line between the decorative member front part 2470a and the other decorative member inclined part 2470d, with respect to the decorative member boss 2470c. Three boundary lines are located: a boundary line, and a boundary line between one decorative member inclined portion 2470d and the other decorative member inclined portion 2470d. Therefore, these three boundaries overlap with the decorative member boss 2470c, so that the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less noticeable.

FIG. 492(b) is an example in which a decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position that does not overlap the decorative member front portion 2470a when viewed from the front, but overlaps two adjacent decorative member inclined portions 2470d when viewed from the front. Even with such a configuration, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less noticeable.

FIG. 492(c) is an example in which a decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position that does not overlap the decorative member front portion 2470a when viewed from the front, but overlaps the decorative member inclined portion 2470d when viewed from the front. Even with such a configuration, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less noticeable.

Note that, as in the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 492(b) and 492(c), when the decorative member boss 2470c is provided close to the end of the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, the panel board When positioning the decorative member 2470 with respect to the decorative member 1110, the decorative member boss 2470c comes into contact with another member provided on the panel board 1110, and the decorative member incline, which is formed thinner than the decorative member front part 2470a, If an unexpected force is applied to the end of the portion 2470d, there is a risk that the decorative member inclined portion 2470d may be bent or cracked.

In this regard, in the embodiments described with reference to FIG. 490 and FIG. Since it is possible to position the decorative member 2470 at a certain position, it is possible to reduce the probability of occurrence of a situation in which the decorative member 2470 accidentally comes into contact with another member. Furthermore, since the decorative member boss 2470 is provided at a position slightly apart from the end of the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, even if the decorative member boss 2470c comes into contact with another member, the entire decorative member inclined portion 2470d In order to absorb the force, the decorative member inclined portion 2470d becomes difficult to bend, and as a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the decorative member inclined portion 2470d bends or cracks.

493(a) to 493(c) show an embodiment in which the shape of the decorative member 2470 is changed from a horizontally long rectangle to a cross. FIG. 493(a) is an example in which a decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position overlapping a decorative member front portion 2470a and two adjacent decorative member inclined portions 2470d in front view. With such a configuration, the boundary line between the decorative member front part 2470a and one decorative member inclined part 2470d, and the boundary line between the decorative member front part 2470a and the other decorative member inclined part 2470d, with respect to the decorative member boss 2470c. Three boundary lines are located: a boundary line, and a boundary line between one decorative member inclined portion 2470d and the other decorative member inclined portion 2470d. Therefore, these three boundaries overlap with the decorative member boss 2470c, so that the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less noticeable.

FIG. 493(b) shows an example in which a decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position that is adjacent to the end of the decorative member front portion 2470a in front view and overlaps two adjacent decorative member inclined portions 2470d in front view. It is. With this configuration, the end of the decorative member front part 2470a is adjacent to the decorative member boss 2470c, and the sloped part of one decorative member is located at a position overlapping the decorative member boss 2470c in front view. The boundary line between 2470d and the other decorative member inclined portion 2470d is located. Therefore, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less noticeable.

FIG. 493(c) is an example in which a decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position overlapping two adjacent decorative member inclined portions 2470d in front view. With such a configuration, the boundary line between one decorative member inclined portion 2470d and the other decorative member inclined portion 2470d is located at a position overlapping the decorative member boss 2470c in a front view. Therefore, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less noticeable.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 490 and 492, the decorative member front portion 2470a is located between the decorative member bosses 2470c and 2470c. By providing the decorative member bosses 2470c and the decorative member bosses 2470c at separate positions in this manner, it is possible to quickly position the decorative member bosses 2470c with respect to the panel board 1110.

In the present embodiment, the portion of the decorative member inclined portion 2470d that overlaps the decorative member boss 2470c in front view has a linear shape, but other shapes than the linear shape may be adopted. For example, it may have an arc shape or a zigzag shape. If such a shape is adopted, the visibility of the front of the decorative member boss 2470c becomes complicated, so it is possible to make the presence of the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p less noticeable. Become. Further, the decorative member 2470 may have a perfect circular shape when viewed from the front, and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d may also have a perfect circular shape when viewed from the front. In this case, the boundary between the decorative member front part 2470a and the decorative member inclined part 2470d is arc-shaped, and the shape is similar to the decorative member boss 2470c, which is also arc-shaped. The insertion hole 1110p can be made less noticeable.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 490, the decorative member inclined part 2470d was provided from the decorative member front part 2470a to the decorative member rear part 2470b, but instead of the decorative member inclined part 2470d, the decorative member An embodiment modified to include a first sloped portion 2470f and a decorative member second sloped portion 2470g will be described with reference to FIG. 494.

FIG. 494(a) is a front view of the decorative member 2470. FIG. 494(b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 494(a). FIG. 494(c) is a sectional view taken along line AA in an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 494(a).

As shown in FIGS. 494(a) and 494(b), the decorative member 2470 in this embodiment has a first decorative member inclined portion 2470f and a second decorative member inclined portion 2470g. The angle between the decorative member front portion 2470a and the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f is 155 degrees. Furthermore, the angle formed by the first decorative member inclined portion 2470f and the second decorative member inclined portion 2470g is 160 degrees. Further, the angle between the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g and the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b is 45 degrees. The decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position overlapping the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f when viewed from the front.

In this embodiment, since the boundary between the decorative member first inclined part 2470f and the decorative member second inclined part 2470g is visually recognized by the player as a straight line, the decorative member The presence of the boss 2470c and the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less noticeable.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 494(a) and 494(b), the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f has a planar shape, but may have a curved shape. FIG. 494(c) shows an embodiment in which the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f is configured in a curved shape. In this embodiment, the decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position that overlaps the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f formed in a curved shape when viewed from the front. In such a configuration, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p are refracted and become visible, making the presence of the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p less noticeable. It becomes possible to do so.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 494(a), an embodiment was shown in which the decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position overlapping with the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f in front view, but the decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a different position. An embodiment modified to include the above will be described with reference to FIG. 495(a).

FIG. 495(a) is a front view of the decorative member 2470. FIG. 495(b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 495(a). FIG. 495(c) is a BB sectional view of an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 495(a). FIG. 495(d) is a front view of a decorative member 2470 in an embodiment in which the position of the decorative member boss 2470c is changed.

As shown in FIG. 495(b), the decorative member boss 2470c provided at the lower left of the decorative member 2470 is arranged in a front view with respect to the boundary line between the decorative member first sloped portion 2470f and the decorative member second sloped portion 2470g. It is located in an overlapping position. In addition, as shown in FIG. 495(c), the decorative member boss 2470c provided at the upper right of the decorative member 2470 is arranged in a front view with respect to the boundary line between the decorative member front part 2470a and the decorative member first inclined part 2470f. It is located in an overlapping position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 495(d), the decorative member boss 2470c provided at the lower left of the decorative member 2470 is connected to the boundary line between the decorative member first sloped portion 2470f and the decorative member first sloped portion 2470f. The boundary line between the first inclined part 2470f and the second inclined part 2470g of the decorative member, and the boundary line between the second inclined part 2470g of the decorative member and the second inclined part 2470g of the decorative member are overlapped in a front view. It is provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 495(d), the decorative member boss 2470c provided at the upper right of the decorative member 2470 is connected to the boundary line between the decorative member first sloped portion 2470f and the decorative member first sloped portion 2470f. They are provided at positions that overlap in front view with respect to each of the boundary lines formed by the first inclined part 2470f and the second decorative member inclined part 2470g.

In this way, the first plate part (for example, panel plate 1110) having a positioning hole part (for example, panel board boss insertion hole 1110p) and the positioning protrusion (for example, decorative member boss 2470c) inserted into the positioning hole part and a transparent second plate portion (e.g., decorative member 2470) having a chamfered portion (e.g., decorative member inclined portion 2470d) provided from the front to the rear, and the positioning protrusion is inserted into the positioning hole portion. In this state, at least a portion of the positioning protrusion overlaps the chamfered part in a front view, thereby making it possible to make the presence of the positioning protrusion and the positioning hole less noticeable.

Although an example is shown in which the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel board screw insertion hole 1110q are shaped to penetrate the panel board 1110, the panel board boss insertion hole and the panel board screw insertion hole do not penetrate the panel board 1110. Instead, the structure may be such that the panel board 1110 is provided only halfway. For example, the length of the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p may be set to be approximately the same as the length of the decorative member boss 2470c, or the length of the panel board screw insertion hole 1110q may be set to be approximately the same length as the decorative member mounting screw 2471.

With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the length of the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel board screw insertion hole 1110q that are visible from the front through the transparent panel board 1110, and the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel board screw insertion hole 1110q can be shortened. The presence of the hole 1110p and the panel screw insertion hole 1110q can be made less noticeable.

A colored transparent synthetic resin may be used as the material constituting the decorative member 2470. In this case, the thickness of the portion where the decorative member boss 2470c is provided is 7 mm to 8 mm, and the thickness of the portion where the decorative member boss 2470c is not provided is 4 mm. Therefore, the area where the decorative member boss 2470c is provided appears darker in color than the area where the decorative member boss 2470c is not provided. For example, even if a synthetic resin that is visible in blue is used as the decorative member 2470, the area where the decorative member boss 2470c is not provided will be visually recognized as a relatively light blue color, and the area where the decorative member boss 2470c is provided will be relatively dark blue. It will be visible in blue. Although the decorative member boss 2470c stands out when viewed in this way, the decorative member boss 2470c stands out because the boundary line between the decorative member front part 2470a and the decorative member inclined part 2470d is located with respect to the decorative member boss 2470c. 2470c can be made less noticeable.

A rough surface portion that can diffusely reflect light may be formed on a part or the entire decorative member 2470 by satin finishing, texture processing, etc., and the rough surface portion and the decorative member boss 2470c may be configured to overlap in a front view. good. For example, a rough surface portion may be provided on the surface of at least one of the decorative member front portion 2470a, the decorative member rear portion 2470b, the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f, and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g. It is recommended to configure Note that a plurality of the decorative member inclined parts 2470d, the first decorative member inclined parts 2470f, and the plurality of decorative member second inclined parts 2470g are each provided, and it is preferable to provide a rough surface part on the surface of at least one of them. Note that the entire surface of each of the decorative member front part 2470a, the decorative member rear part 2470b, the decorative member inclined part 2470d, the decorative member first inclined part 2470f, and the decorative member second inclined part 2470g is made into a rough surface part. Alternatively, only a part of the surface may be roughened.

With this configuration, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p can be inserted while maintaining the transparency of decorative light and the visibility of the panel front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m located at the rear of the decorative member 2470. It can be made less noticeable.

Although an example has been shown in which a rough surface portion is provided on the decorative member 2470, a metallic luster portion may be provided on the surface of the decorative member 2470 by plating or the like instead of the rough surface portion. In this case, it is preferable to make the entire decorative member 2470 or at least one of the decorative member front part 2470a and the decorative member rear part 2470b a metallic luster part. Alternatively, instead of making the entire surface of the decorative member front part 2470a and the decorative member rear part 2470b a metallic shiny part, only a part of the surface thereof may be configured to have a metallic shiny part. Further, it is preferable that the metallic shiny portion surrounds the panel screw insertion hole 1110q. Further, it is preferable that the decorative member mounting screw 2471 and the metallic luster part be colored in similar colors. For example, when the decorative member attachment screw 2471 is made of stainless steel and visually recognized as silver, it is preferable to make the metallic luster part silver in color. Further, when the decorative member mounting screw 2471 is made of brass and visually recognized with a yellowish metallic luster, it is preferable to make the metallic luster part gold in color. Note that the area where the metallic shiny part is provided is only around the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470e, and the area where the decorative member boss 2470c is provided is provided with the decorative member boss 2470c by adopting the method described above without providing the metallic shiny part. It is better to make 2470c less noticeable.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the decorative member mounting screws 2471 less noticeable when the decorative member 2470 is attached to the panel board 1110.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the decorative member 2470 itself is provided with a rough surface portion and a metallic luster portion, the back rough surface portion 1110b of the panel board and the panel board in the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 454 to 483 etc. Back first rough surface portion 1110c, panel back second rough surface portion 1110d, panel back metallic gloss portion 1110e, panel back first metallic gloss portion 1110f, panel back second metallic gloss portion 1110g, panel back bright color visible 1110h, panel plate rear decorative member 2410, panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b, panel plate rear substrate 2420, and other members that diffusely reflect light or are visually recognized with metallic luster. It may be configured such that a member that is visible in white or bright color or a member that emits light is located.

Specifically, a panel back rough surface portion 1110b, a panel back first rough surface portion 1110c, a panel back second rough surface portion 1110d, and a panel back surface rough surface portion 1110c are provided at positions overlapping with the decorative member boss 2470c and the decorative member screw insertion holes 2470e in a front view. Panel back metal shiny part 1110e, panel back first metallic gloss part 1110f, panel back second metallic gloss part 1110g, panel back bright color visible part 1110h, panel rear decorative member 2410, panel rear decorative member rough surface part 2410a, panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b, panel plate rear substrate 2420, etc., where members that diffusely reflect light, members that are visible with metallic luster, members that are visible as white or bright color, and members that emit light are located. It is recommended to configure it so that

Note that the obstacle nails 1201 and the decorative member bosses 2470c may be provided at positions that overlap each other in a front view with respect to one panel board back rough surface portion 1110b. Alternatively, the obstacle nails 1201 and the decorative member screw insertion holes 2470e may be provided at positions that overlap each other in a front view with respect to one panel board back rough surface portion 1110b. Alternatively, the obstacle nails 1201, the decorative member bosses 2470c, and the decorative member screw insertion holes 2470 may be provided at positions that overlap each other in a front view with respect to one panel board back rough surface portion 1110b.

Not limited to the panel board back rough surface part 1110b, panel board back first rough surface part 1110c, panel board back second rough surface part 1110d, panel board back metallic gloss part 1110e, panel board back first metallic gloss part 1110f, panel board back surface part 1110c. 2 metallic glossy part 1110g, panel back bright color visible part 1110h, panel board rear decorative member 2410, panel board rear decorative member rough surface part 2410a, panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss part 2410b, panel board rear board 2420, etc. A similar configuration may be adopted for a member that reflects diffusely, a member that is visible with metallic luster, a member that is visible as white or bright color, and a member that can emit light.

With such a configuration, the panel board back rough surface part 1110b, the panel board back first rough surface part 1110c, the panel board back second rough surface part 1110d, the panel board back metallic gloss part 1110e, and the panel board back first metallic gloss part 1110f, second metallic glossy part on back of panel 1110g, bright color visible part on back of panel 1110h, rear decorative member of panel 2410, rough surface part of rear decorative member of panel 2410a, shiny metallic part of rear decorative member of panel 2410b, rear of panel Members that diffusely reflect light such as the substrate 2420, members that are visible with metallic luster, members that are visible in white or bright colors, and members that emit light are used not only for decoration, but also for decorative member bosses 2470c and decorative member screws. It can also be used to make the insertion hole 2470e and the decorative member attachment screw 2471 less noticeable. Note that in this embodiment, the decorative member boss 2470c is not necessarily provided at the boundary between the decorative member front portion 2470a and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, and the decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position that overlaps only the decorative member front portion 2470a when viewed from the front. 2470c may be provided.

Character ornaments 9100, snowman ornaments 9200, rabbit ornaments 6000, stump ornaments 6100, stump part 6200, stump box part 6300, grass ornaments 6400, mountain ornaments 6500 described with reference to FIGS. 224 to 280, etc. , the first giant tree accessory 6600, the first cloud accessory 6700, and the back grass accessory 6800, which include members that diffusely reflect light, members that are visible with metallic luster, and members that are visible as white or bright colors. The members that can emit light and the members that can emit light are the panel back rough surface portion 1110b, the panel back first rough surface portion 1110c, the panel back second rough surface portion 1110d, the panel back metal glossy portion 1110e, and the panel back first metal. Glossy part 1110f, second metallic glossy part 1110g on the back of the panel, bright color visible part 1110h on the back of the panel, rear decorative member 2410 of the panel, rough surface part 2410a of the rear decorative member 2410a, shiny metallic part 2410b of the rear decorative member of the panel, panel Similar to the plate rear substrate 2420 and the like, it may be provided at a position overlapping with the obstacle nail 1201, the decorative member boss 2470c, or the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470 when viewed from the front.

A decorative member 2470 may be attached to the rear surface of the panel board 1110. In this case as well, it is preferable to adopt a similar mounting structure using the decorative member boss 2470c, the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470e, the decorative member mounting screw 2471, the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p, and the panel board screw insertion hole 1110q. In this case, the head of the decorative member mounting screw 2471 is difficult to see from the front, and is connected to the spiral-shaped portion of the body of the decorative member mounting screw 2471 and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q provided in the panel plate 1110. The engaged portion becomes visible from the front as a whitened portion HKB. When the decorative member 2470 is attached to the panel plate 1110 by inserting the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q from the rear in this way, the part where the decorative member mounting screw 2471 is inserted will be visually recognized as the whitened part HKB. Become. For the whitened portion HKB that is visually recognized in this manner, a configuration may be adopted that makes the whitened portion HKB as described above less noticeable. For example, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be arranged behind the decorative member 2470. Alternatively, the entire decorative member 2470 may be made of transparent or translucent synthetic resin that is visible in bright color or white. Furthermore, the surface of at least one of the decorative member front part 2470a, the decorative member rear part 2470b, the decorative member inclined part 2470d, the decorative member first inclined part 2470f, and the decorative member second inclined part 2470g is subjected to satin finishing, graining, etc. A rough surface portion that can diffusely reflect light may be formed.

With this configuration, even when the decorative member 2470 is attached to the rear surface of the panel board 1110, the whitened portion HKB generated in the panel board screw insertion hole 1110q and the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less noticeable. .

When attaching the decorative member 2470 to the rear surface of the panel board 1110, the length of the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel board screw insertion hole 1110q is preferably such that the panel board 1110 is not penetrated.

With this configuration, the lengths of the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel board screw insertion hole 1110q can be made shorter, and the whitened portion HKB generated in the panel board screw insertion hole 1110q and the panel board boss insertion hole can be reduced. The hole 1110p can be made less noticeable. Furthermore, cigarette ashes, dust, etc. enter the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel board screw insertion hole 1110q from the front of the game area 5a where the game ball rolls, causing the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel board screw insertion hole 1110q to enter. It is possible to prevent the inner wall of the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q from becoming dirty. Incidentally, cigarette ashes and dust adhere to the game balls mainly when the game balls are located in the upper tray 321, and move into the game area 5a together with the game balls.

Although the embodiment has been described using the decorative member 2470 attached to the panel plate 1110 as an example, it is not limited to the decorative member 2470, but other plate-shaped colorless transparent or colored transparent members attached to the panel plate 1110 may be similarly used. The configuration may also be adopted. Further, the same configuration may be adopted not only for the panel board 1110 but also when attaching a colorless and transparent plate-shaped or colored transparent decorative member to a predetermined colorless and transparent plate-shaped member. Moreover, when attaching a plate-shaped, colorless and transparent member to a plate-shaped, colorless and transparent member, a similar configuration may be adopted.

Further, a similar configuration may be adopted as a structure for attaching a predetermined transparent member and a predetermined transparent member. For example, a similar configuration may be employed when attaching a specific portion of a first member made of a transparent material and a specific portion of a second member made of a transparent material. Specifically, it is preferable that one specific part is provided with a boss, and the other specific part is provided with an insertion hole into which the boss is inserted.

2. Description of the Related Art When molding a member made of synthetic resin using a mold, a molding method is known in which an ejector pin is used to separate the molded product from the mold. However, where ejector pins are used, there is a problem in that the shape of the tip of the ejector pin is attached to the molded product. The tip of the ejector pin is generally circular in shape. For this reason, the molded product is left with a circular concave or protruding trace of a decorative member having a diameter of 3 mm and a thickness of 0.1 mm, for example. When forming a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material using a mold like the decorative member 2470 in this embodiment, the ejector pin marks will remain in a circular shape on the decorative member. is not aesthetically pleasing.

Therefore, it is preferable to configure the decorative member 2470 so that the circular mark formed by the ejector pin is located on the rear surface of the decorative member 2470. Further, it is preferable that a part or all of the circular mark formed by the ejecting pin overlaps the decorative member inclined portion 2470d in a front view. Alternatively, the decorative member 2470 may be provided with a rough surface portion such that the rough surface portion and the circular trace overlap in a front view.

In this way, by providing the decorative member 2470 in a position that makes it difficult for the player to see the marks caused by molding using a mold, or by adopting a configuration that makes them difficult to see, the marks of the ejecting pins on the decorative member 2470 can be removed. can be made less noticeable. Note that the embodiment applied to the whitened portion HKB, the decorative member boss 2470c, the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p, etc. may be applied to the ejection pin traces of the decorative member 2470. In this case as well, the same effects as in the embodiment regarding the whitened portion HKB and the decorative member boss 2470c are achieved.

By the way, among gaming machines, for example, regarding a pachinko machine, each player generally plays the game by sitting on a seat installed at a position facing the front of the pachinko machine. At this time, the distance between the position of the player's eyes and the front of the game machine is close, and although there are considerable differences in height due to age and gender, the player's eyes are generally located in front of the center of the pachinko machine. Become. Then, depending on the movement of the game ball that rolls around the playing area around the center of the pachinko machine, the decorative state such as light emitting and movable decorative members, or the gaming state, the line of sight can be adjusted vertically, horizontally, or diagonally. This means shifting it in a predetermined direction, such as upward. Therefore, when the center position of the gaming machine is the center, a member provided at a point where the player shifts his/her line of sight in this way may be used as a member to hide the whitened portion HKB.

For example, when the obstacle nail 1201 planted as the life nail 1230 or the jump nail 1231 is viewed diagonally from above with the player's line of sight, the member constituting the first starting port 2002 formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin; It may be configured such that the whitened portion HKB caused by the planting of the obstruction nail 1201 is visually recognized as overlapping with the whitened portion HKB. Similarly, when the obstacle nail 1201 planted as the left guide nail 1232 is viewed diagonally from above with the player's line of sight, the member constituting the general prize opening 2001 formed of colorless and transparent synthetic resin and the obstacle nail 1201 It may be configured such that the whitened portion HKB caused by the planting is visually recognized as overlapping with the whitened portion HKB. Note that, as described above, the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guiding nail 1232 are preferably provided at positions that overlap with the bright color visible portion, the diffused reflection portion, and the metallic luster portion when viewed from the front. In addition, the panel board 1110 is penetrated in order to insert the members constituting the general winning opening 2001 and the members constituting the first starting opening 2002, and to allow the winning game balls to pass from the front surface to the rear surface of the panel board 1110. The cut hole made by the above method is visually recognized as having a whitened inner wall like the obstructing nail through hole 1110a, but this cut hole and the whitened part HKB caused by the planting of the obstructing nail 1201 are visually recognized as being overlapped. It may be configured as follows.

In this way, when viewed from a predetermined angle (for example, diagonally above) that is different from the front view, the winning opening member (for example, the member constituting the general winning opening 2001, the member constituting the first starting opening 2002) and the obstacle Even in the case where the nail 1201 is visually recognized as being overlapped with the implanted part of the nail 1201, the whitened part HKB can be made less noticeable. In addition, when viewed from a predetermined angle, the bright color visible portion, the diffused reflection portion, or the metallic luster portion may be visually recognized as overlapping the site where the obstacle nail 1201 is installed. Further, the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable even when viewed from the front or from a predetermined angle different from the front view.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 491, the decorative member 2470 is provided above the obstacle nails 1201 that constitute the left guide nail 1232 and the left jump nail 1231. By adopting such a configuration, when viewed diagonally from above with the player's line of sight, the whitening part HKB and the decorative member that occur due to the planting of the obstacle nails 1201 that constitute the left guide nail 1232 and the left jump nail 1231 can be seen. 2470 and is visually recognized, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable. Specifically, the decorative member front part 2470a, the decorative member rear part 2470b, the decorative member boss 2470c, the decorative member inclined part 2470d, the decorative member mounting screw 2471, etc. Since it is visually recognized on the near side, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable as a result. Furthermore, the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel board screw insertion hole 1110q for attaching the decorative member 2470 to the panel board 1110 are also visible as they overlap with the whitened part HKB, so the whitened part HKB can be made less noticeable. .

Note that the decorative member 2470 may be configured to be provided below the obstacle nail 1201 that constitutes the left guide nail 1232 or the left jump nail 1231. In this case, when viewed diagonally from above with the player's line of sight, the whitening portion HKB that occurs due to the planting of the obstruction nails 1201 that constitute the left guiding nail 1232 and the left jumping nail 1231 is visible from the decorative member boss 2470c and the decorative member attachment. It is preferable to provide the decorative member 2470 at a position where it can be visually recognized while overlapping the screw 2471, the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p, and the panel board screw insertion hole 1110q. With such a configuration, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

By the way, gaming machines may be installed in gaming parlors for several years. On the other hand, the history of game boards formed by planting obstacle nails in transparent panel boards is shorter than the history of game boards formed by planting obstacle nails in wooden panel boards, and It is only in the past 10 years that game machines installed on panel boards have been installed in full scale at game arcades. Furthermore, the gameplay of the gaming machines themselves is constantly evolving. For this reason, the gauge configuration formed by driving the obstacle nails and the equipment installed on the game board change each time, and the number of obstacle nails planted on the transparent panel board and the number of obstacle nails planted are adjusted accordingly. The position, the distance between the obstacle nails, etc. also change. Therefore, in order to verify whether the pattern of the gauge configuration that can occur in various ways is one that is likely to cause whitening areas HKB or one that makes it difficult for whitening areas HKB to occur, it is necessary to The current situation is that it will take months.

Until now, as obstacle nails that receive the impact from the collision from the game ball immediately after launch, for example, a plurality of obstacle nails 1201 planted in the upper left of the game area 5a, and a plurality of obstacle nails 1201 planted on the right side of the game area 5a. There is a predetermined obstacle nail 1201 among the plurality of obstacle nails 1201. Further, after that, as an obstacle nail 1201 where game balls flowing down and rolling in the game area are concentrated according to the game state, for example, game balls that have rolled from the upper left of the game area 5a, which are concentrated during normal games, are placed in a predetermined position. A plurality of obstacle nails 1201 are planted on the left side of the game area 5a that collide with each other with a probability, and obstacle nails 1201 (jump nails) are installed corresponding to the rolling path from the upper left of the game area 5a to the first starting port 2002. 1231, life nail 1230, left guide nail 1232), and the obstacle nail 1201 provided close to the big prize opening 2005, which is concentrated during the jackpot game, are presumed to have deteriorated in the whitening part HKB.

In the embodiment described below, before a quality problem occurs in the operation of a certain gaming machine at a gaming parlor that could impede the progress of the game or the aesthetic appearance perceived by the player, such a gaming machine is installed. An embodiment will be described in which a store clerk at a game parlor can determine whether or not a quality problem is likely to occur.

In order to make the whitening part HKB less noticeable, a bright color visible part, a diffused reflection part, and a metallic luster part are provided behind the part where the fault nail 1201 is installed when the part where the fault nail 1201 is installed is viewed from the front. Although an example has been shown, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, a configuration may be adopted in which the whitened portion HKB of a predetermined obstacle nail 1201 among the obstacle nails 1201 is intentionally planted in a conspicuous position.

Specifically, among the obstacle nails 1201 constituting the left guide nail 1232, the first obstacle nail 1201 and the second obstacle nail 1201 from the left are decorated with decorative members that are not bright in color when viewed from the front (preferably dark colored decorations). may be arranged so as to overlap with the member).

With this configuration, the whitened portions HKB of many of the faulty nails 1201 are made less noticeable, while the occurrence of the whitened portions HKB of some predetermined faulty nails 1201 is clearly visible. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily estimate the cumulative operating time of a gaming machine, and it becomes possible to use it as an indicator of whether or not a quality problem is likely to occur in the gaming machine.

As the dark-colored decorative member, in order to make the whitened portion HKB more conspicuous, it is desirable to employ, for example, a decorative member with a black-based decoration. Alternatively, it is preferable to use a liquid crystal display device, which is often used as an effect display device, as a basic device constituting a gaming machine. For example, the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 described with reference to FIGS. 250 to 253 is visually recognized as a black flat surface in front when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off.

FIG. 496 shows an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. FIG. 496 is a front view of the game board 5. In this embodiment, a game board side effect display device 1600 is provided behind a colorless and transparent panel board 1110, and a life nail 1230, a jump nail 1231, a left guide nail 1232, and other obstacles are installed on the panel board 1110. A portion of the nails 1201 is provided at a position that overlaps the display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, the front surface of the display area 1600a is visually recognized as a black plane.

In this way, a position that overlaps the display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is visually recognized as a dark decorative member or a black surface, in a front view, or in a predetermined direction around the center position of the pachinko machine as described above. If a predetermined obstacle nail 1201 is planted at a position that overlaps with a dark-colored decorative member or the display area 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600 when the line of sight is tilted at a predetermined angle, the whitened portion HKB of the predetermined obstacle nail 1201 will be removed. This makes it easy to check the occurrence status.

With this configuration, it is possible to check the occurrence of the whitening portion HKB on the predetermined obstacle nail 1201 that is planted in a position that overlaps the dark-colored decorative member and the display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front. This makes it easy to confirm. It should be noted that, as described above, instead of looking from the front, there is a dark-colored decorative member or the side of the game board that overlaps with the predetermined obstacle nail 1201 when the line of sight is tilted at a predetermined angle in a predetermined direction about the center position of the pachinko machine. It may be configured such that the display area 1600a of the effect display device 1600 is located therein. Further, this configuration may be adopted for the obstacle nail 1201 in other embodiments to improve the visibility of the whitened portion HKB.

Note that the predetermined obstacle nails 1201 that allow the whitened portion HKB to be visually recognized may be planted in such a manner as to penetrate through the panel front decorative member 2450 or the panel front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m. Alternatively, it may be planted in such a manner that it does not penetrate either the panel front decorative member 2450 or the panel front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m.

FIG. 497 shows an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 496. FIG. 497 is a front view of the game board 5. In this embodiment, a panel board back rough surface portion 1110b is provided on the back surface of the panel board 1110. The life nails 1230, the jump nails 1231, and some of the left guide nails 1232 planted in the panel board 1110 are provided at positions that overlap the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b, which is visually recognized in bright colors, when viewed from the front. On the other hand, some of the left guiding nails 1232 (the two upper left obstruction nails 1201) and other obstruction nails 1201 do not overlap with the panel board back rough surface part 1110b when viewed from the front, and the game board side effect display device 1600 It is provided so as to overlap the display area 1600a.

With this configuration, it is possible to always make the whitened portion HKB of some of the obstructing nails 1201 less noticeable, and for other obstructing nails 1201, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. By displaying a bright color or yellow effect image in the display area 1600a in the manner described above depending on the gaming state, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable, and when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off. It becomes possible to make the whitened part HKB more noticeable.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 497, by applying the above-described embodiment in place of the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b, the whitening portion HKB of some of the faulty nails 1201 is configured to be made less noticeable. You may. For example, instead of or in addition to the panel back rough surface portion 1110b, the panel back first rough surface portion 1110c, the panel back second rough surface portion 1110d, the panel back metallic glossy portion 1110e, and the panel back first metallic gloss portion 1110f. , a second metallic glossy part 1110g on the back of the panel, a bright color visible part 1110h on the back of the panel, a decorative opaque thin layer part 1110m on the front of the panel, a rear decorative member 2410 of the panel, and a rear substrate 2420 of the panel. It may be configured as follows. Note that the shape of these members when viewed from the front is preferably configured to be the same shape as the shape of the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b when viewed from the front.

464, 465, etc., embodiments in which the panel board back bright color visible part 1110h is provided on the back side of the panel board 1110 are shown, but in these embodiments, the panel board back bright color visible part 1110h and The dark-colored visual recognition section on the back of the panel, which adopts the same configuration but has only a dark color, is viewed from the front with the predetermined obstacle nail 1201 as described above, or when the line of sight is tilted at a predetermined angle in a predetermined direction centering on the center position of the pachinko machine. It may also be configured so that they are provided at overlapping positions when With such a configuration, it becomes easy to check the occurrence state of the whitened portion HKB with respect to the predetermined faulty nail 1201 as described above.

Although an example has been shown in which a plurality of light emitting diodes are mounted as the panel board rear board light emitting section 2425 on the white panel board rear board 2420, it is also possible to use a method such as printing on the panel board rear board 2420 adjacent to each light emitting diode. The color of the character string (for example, "LED01", "LED02", etc.) for confirming the mounted component provided in the screen may be brightly colored (specifically, cream color or yellow). With this configuration, when brass obstacle nails 1201 are adopted, or when a golden metallic luster part is used as the metallic luster part of the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster part 2410b provided in the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, If this is adopted, or if yellow is adopted as the emission color of the panel board rear substrate light emitting section 2425, it becomes possible to make these character strings less noticeable.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 491 to 495, the decorative member 2470 is provided with two decorative member bosses 2470c, but the decorative member inclined portion 2470d is provided with two decorative member bosses 2470c. As such, it is preferable to employ a decorative member inclined portion 2470d in which a surface forming the decorative member inclined portion 2470d faces obliquely upward.

With this configuration, dirt such as cigarette ashes, dust, dirt, dust, player's hand marks on the game ball, cigarette tar, etc. adheres to the decorative member inclined portion 2470d that faces diagonally upward. In this case, these stains can make the decorative member boss 2470c difficult to see. Incidentally, although dirt (particularly highly sticky dirt such as cigarette tar or finger marks) adheres to the decorative member inclined portion 2470d that faces diagonally downward, the decorative member that faces diagonally upward relatively. Dirt is more likely to adhere to the inclined portion 2470d.

For example, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 491(b), of the two decorative member bosses 2470c, the decorative member boss 2470c provided at the upper left is more difficult to visually recognize due to dirt than the decorative member boss 2470c provided at the lower right. This makes it possible to achieve the desired state.

Furthermore, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 493(a) to 493(c), dirt is likely to adhere to the region where the valley-like boundary is formed by the two decorative member inclined portions 2470d. Therefore, it is possible to make the decorative member boss 2470c provided at the upper left shown in FIGS. 493(a) to 493(c) difficult to see due to dirt. In addition, in the game parlor, the game area 5a and the decorative member 2470 are cleaned regularly to remove the adhered dirt. However, when such cleaning is performed, dirt may instead collect in the valley-like boundaries of this embodiment. If such an event occurs, not only the decorative member boss 2470c provided on the upper left but also the decorative member boss 2470c provided on the lower right will be in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the decorative member boss 2470c due to dirt. becomes possible.

In a state where the decorative member 2470 is attached to the panel board 1110, at least the decorative member sloped portion 2470d that faces diagonally upward among the plurality of decorative member sloped portions 2470d of the decorative member 2470 is rolled in the game area 5a. It is preferable to configure the game ball so that it can be touched. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to efficiently attach dirt to the decorative member inclined portion 2470d by the rolling game balls. Note that the game ball may be configured to be able to come into contact with all the decorative member inclined portions 2470d that the decorative member 2470 has. With this configuration, the game ball comes into direct contact with the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, so that when dirt adheres to the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, the decorative member boss 2470c becomes difficult to see. It becomes possible to do so.

Note that in these embodiments, not only one decorative member boss 2470c but also a plurality (for example, two) or all decorative member bosses 2470c are located at a position where they overlap the decorative member inclined portion 2470d facing diagonally upward in front view. It may be configured so that it is placed in With such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the number of decorative member bosses 2470c that are difficult to visually recognize.

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with operating means have been considered, and below, a gaming machine that is equipped with a plurality of operating means and effectively utilizes the plurality of operating means in production will be described. As shown in FIG. 498, the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment includes a mission button 3700, an attack button 3710, a left lever 3720, a right lever 3730, and a defense button 3740 that can be operated by the player at the bottom of the door frame 3. .

The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is capable of displaying an effect of displaying the own tank during the variable display of decorative symbols in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 by displaying an image. In this production, your own tank moves along various routes, and while moving to its destination, it undergoes battles with enemy tanks, etc., and the result of the battle is structured so that the result of the change in the decorative pattern is suggested. ing. Also, while your own tank is moving or during a battle between your own tank and an enemy tank, you can press the mission button 3700, attack button 3710, left lever 3720, right lever 3730, defense button 3740, etc. provided at the bottom of the door frame 3. By accepting a player's operation on the operating means, it is possible to change the content of the performance, such as the manner in which the variation results of decorative symbols are suggested.
In addition, in this specification, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 may be simply referred to as a display area.

The mission button 3700 is a button that functions in various ways in the presentation of displaying own tanks. The attack button 3710 is a button that can be used to mainly attack enemy units in a presentation that displays own tanks. The defense button 3740 is a button that can mainly be used to defend against attacks from enemy tanks in the presentation of displaying one's own tank. Each button can be pressed down a predetermined distance. The pachinko machine 1 is capable of detecting each button press by a player using a sensor (not shown), inputting the detected information to the peripheral control board 1510, and using it for performance. When each button is not pressed by the player, it is moved upward by a return mechanism (not shown) using a spring or the like.

The left lever 3720 is a rod-shaped operating means that can perform directional input. The base of the left lever 3720 is pivoted and can be tilted 360 degrees in any direction. The maximum tilt angle is 45 degrees. The left lever 3720 is configured to return to a vertical state (state not tilted in any direction) when the player releases the left lever 3720 by a return mechanism (not shown) using a spring or the like. The pachinko machine 1 is capable of detecting the direction in which the left lever 3720 is tilted and the tilt angle using a sensor (not shown), and inputting the detected information to the peripheral control board 1510 for use in performance. The player can perform operation input by gripping the left lever 3720 and tilting it in a predetermined direction at a predetermined angle.

A left lever vibration source 3722 capable of generating vibration is built in below the left lever 3720 in the vertical direction. The left lever vibration source 3722 may be configured by a stepping motor with an eccentric weight attached to a rotating shaft or a solenoid that reciprocates. The left lever vibration source 3722 can generate vibrations by being driven and controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. By transmitting the vibrations generated from the left lever vibration source 3722 to the palm of the player who is gripping the left lever 3720, it is possible to use the vibrations as an effect. For example, the left lever vibration source 3722 may be vibrated in a predetermined vibration mode in response to an operation of the left lever 3720 in response to an operation instruction. Further, the vibration mode may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation regarding an event advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot.

A plurality of left lever vibration sources 3722 may be provided within the left lever 3720. For example, the left lever vibration source 3722 may be provided in the upper half of the left lever 3720 and the lower half of the left lever 3720, respectively. Then, only one of them may be vibrated, or both vibration sources may be vibrated simultaneously.

A left lever light source 3724 capable of emitting light in a predetermined color is built in above the left lever 3720 in the vertical direction. The left lever 3720 is made of milky white synthetic resin, and the entire left lever 3720 can be decorated with light depending on the color of the light output from the left lever light source 3724. Specifically, the left lever light source 3724 is composed of a plurality of full-color LEDs and a drive circuit, and can emit light in a predetermined color by driving and controlling the drive circuit by the peripheral control board 1510. By the left lever light source 3724, mainly the upper half of the left lever 3720 can be decorated with light, and the color of the light and the mode of light such as blinking or lighting can be used as a presentation. For example, the light may be emitted in a predetermined light emission mode in response to an operation performed in response to an instruction to operate the left lever 3720. Further, the light emission mode may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation regarding an event advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot. Note that the left lever 3720 may be formed using another material as long as it can transmit light. For example, it may be formed from a colorless and transparent synthetic resin with a lens cut.

The right lever 3730 has the same structure and function as the left lever 3720. For example, the right lever 3730 can accept operation input. Also, like the left lever 3720, a right lever vibration source 3732 and a right lever light source 3734 are provided inside the right lever 3730, and can be used for the same effects as the left lever 3720.

The arrangement of each button is not limited to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 498. FIG. 499 shows an embodiment in which an attack button 3710 is installed at the upper end of the left lever 3720, and a defense button 3740 is installed at the upper end of the right lever 3730. In this case, it is possible to press down the attack button 3710 at the upper end of the left lever 3720 with the thumb while holding the left lever 3720 and performing a tilting operation of the left lever 3720. Similarly, while holding the right lever 3730 and performing a tilting operation of the right lever 3730, it is possible to press down the defense button 3740 at the upper end of the right lever 3730 with the thumb.

Note that the attack button 3710 is formed of milky white or colorless transparent synthetic resin, and the left lever light source 3724 is set to a predetermined light emission mode in response to the operation of the attack button 3710, so that the attack button 3710 can be set to a predetermined light emission mode. Good too. Similarly, the defense button 3740 is formed of a milky white or colorless transparent synthetic resin, and the right lever light source 3734 is set to a predetermined light emission mode in response to the operation of the defense button 3740. You can also use it as

Instead of installing the attack button 3710 at the top end of the left lever 3720 and the defense button 3740 at the top end of the right lever 3730, the mission button 3700 is installed at the top end of the left lever 3720 in place of the attack button 3710. Good too. Alternatively, the defense button 3740 may be replaced with the upper end of the right lever 3730. Alternatively, two or three of these buttons may be installed at the upper end of one lever.
With this configuration, the tilting operation of the lever and the pressing operation of one or more buttons can be performed with one hand.

FIG. 500 shows an embodiment in which the effect of displaying own tanks is executed as a reach effect while the decorative symbols are changing. FIG. 500(a) shows a state in which decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. When a starting winning occurs in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols start changing.

FIG. 500(b) shows a state in which left, middle, and right decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner, appearing from above the display area and disappearing downward. Decorative symbols can be stopped and displayed without forming a reach state and displayed as a symbol representing a loss, forming a reach state and being stopped and displayed as a symbol representing a loss, or forming a reach state and causing a jackpot. It may be stopped and displayed with a symbol representing .

FIG. 500(c) shows a state in which the right and left "3" symbols are temporarily stopped and a ready-to-reach state is formed. In this embodiment, as a reach effect, it is possible to perform a tank reach effect in which the own tank is displayed in the display area and moves forward.

FIG. 500(d) shows a state in which the display of an own tank has been started as a tank reach effect. Specifically, the self-tank is moving forward on the road. The decorative pattern is displayed at the upper left of the display area.

FIG. 500(e) shows a state in which an own tank and an enemy tank are engaged in battle. Further, FIG. 500(f) shows a state in which the own tank has arrived at the destination. These functions as a performance that suggests the result of the special lottery. For example, an effect display is executed to show whether or not the own tank can defeat the enemy tank shown in FIG. is suggested. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 500(f), a performance display is performed to show whether or not the own tank can reach the destination without being defeated by enemy tanks, and the result of the special lottery is suggested based on the result of the performance display. .

FIG. 500(g) shows a mode in which the display of decorative symbols is stopped when the special lottery result is a loss. Further, FIG. 500(h) shows a mode in which the variable display of decorative symbols is stopped when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. The display of images of own tanks, enemy tanks, roads, etc. ends immediately before the decorative patterns stop changing.

Referring to FIG. 500, an example was shown in which the own tank is displayed as a reach effect in the display area. It may be configured as follows. For example, by pre-reading the special lottery result related to a hold that occurs when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, it is possible to start executing an effect that displays your own tank, and to do so multiple times. It may be configured to be executed across symbol variations and to suggest the variation result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the pre-read suspension. Alternatively, you can run an effect that displays your own tank from the start to the end of the jackpot, or execute an effect that displays your tank from the end of the jackpot until the decorative pattern changes a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). By executing this, it suggests what kind of gaming state the gaming state changed at the end of the jackpot (for example, whether the probability of being judged as a jackpot in a special lottery is a high probability state or a low probability state) It may be configured to do so. In this way, the targets suggested by the display of own tanks are not limited to special lottery results (e.g., the level of expectation that a jackpot will occur); good.

FIG. 501 shows a performance situation in which the user operates either the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 with the left hand and rotates the handle 302 with the right hand. During the display of your own tank, your own tank basically moves forward automatically. At this time, by operating the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730, it is possible to change the speed of the own tank or move it in the left-right direction. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 501, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 forward as viewed from the player, it is possible to increase the speed of the own tank. Further, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 backward (towards the player) when viewed from the player, it is possible to reduce the speed of the own tank. Furthermore, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the right as viewed from the player, it is possible to move the own tank to the right. Furthermore, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the left when viewed from the player, it is possible to move the own tank to the left.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which one lever is operated with one hand (left hand) to move the own tank, it may be configured to be able to perform an effect in which the left lever 3720 is operated with the left hand and the right lever 3730 is operated with the right hand. . Furthermore, since a reach effect, in which the expectation of a jackpot is higher than normal variations in decorative symbols, is occurring, the player does not necessarily need to operate the handle 302, but can use both hands to move the left lever 3720 or the right lever. Since it is possible to operate various buttons such as the lever 3730 and the mission button 3700, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the performance.

During the display of your own tank, your own tank basically moves forward automatically. At this time, by operating the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730, it is possible to change the speed of the tank or move it in the left and right direction. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 502, it is possible to increase the speed of the tank by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 forward as viewed from the player. Further, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 rearward (towards the player) when viewed from the player, it is possible to reduce the speed of the tank. Furthermore, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the right as viewed from the player, it is possible to move the tank to the right. Furthermore, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the left when viewed from the player, it is possible to move the tank to the left.

Further, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are simultaneously tilted forward as viewed from the player, the speed can be increased significantly compared to when only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated. Similarly, if the left lever 3720 and right lever 3730 are tilted backwards at the same time as viewed from the player, the speed can be significantly reduced compared to when only one of the left lever 3720 and right lever 3730 is operated. . Additionally, if the left lever 3720 and right lever 3730 are tilted to the right at the same time as viewed from the player, it is possible to move the tank to the right more significantly than if only one of the left lever 3720 and right lever 3730 is operated. It is. Similarly, if the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are tilted to the left at the same time as viewed from the player, the tank cannot be moved much to the left compared to when only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated. It is possible.

In this way, when the tank moves forward, the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 can be used to change the direction of the tank's movement, allowing it to avoid attacks from enemy troops or to avoid being set up in the field. This makes it possible to move forward while avoiding obstacles such as mines and rocks.

The basic usage of the mission button 3700, attack button 3710, and defense button 3740 in tank reach will be explained. By operating the mission button 3700, it becomes possible to fire bullets forward from the machine gun mounted on the own tank. Furthermore, by operating the attack button 3710, it becomes possible to fire a cannonball forward from the gun battery mounted on the own tank. Furthermore, by operating the defense button 3740, it becomes possible to provide a defense shield in front of the own tank to protect against attacks from enemy tanks. Note that the functions applied to each button may differ depending on the situation of the performance.

By the way, in this embodiment, a new condition is adopted as a condition for changing the gaming state. Below, with reference to FIGS. 503 and 504, new conditions will be described as conditions for changing the gaming state.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002, a variable display of special symbols is performed on the first special symbol display 1403, and a first special lottery result is displayed. Further, in the display area of the game board side performance display device, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a manner corresponding to the variable display results of the special symbols.
Similarly, when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004, a variable display of special symbols is performed on the second special symbol display 1405, and a second special lottery result is displayed. Further, in the display area of the game board side performance display device, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a manner corresponding to the variable display results of the special symbols.
In addition, if the normal lottery result that is drawn when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003 is a "win", the second starting port 2004 accepts the game ball from a state where it is impossible or difficult to accept the game ball. It is possible to change into a possible state.

In this embodiment, regarding the lottery mode of special symbols, there are two situations: a state where the probability that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a "jackpot" lottery result is low (probability: 1/300), and a lottery where the lottery result of the special symbol will be a "jackpot" lottery result. It is possible to take a state in which the probability of the result is high (probability: 1/30).
In addition, regarding the lottery mode of normal symbols, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is long (30 seconds on average), and the probability that the normal lottery result will be a "hit" lottery result is low (probability: 1/100). It is possible to have a state in which the fluctuation time is short (2.0 seconds on average) and the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol becomes a "winning" lottery result is high (probability: 1/1.2).
The following four gaming states are possible by combining these.
1: A normal state in which the probability that the special symbol lottery result will be a "jackpot" lottery result is low, the normal symbol fluctuation time is long, and the probability that the regular lottery result will be a "hit" lottery result is low.
2: A time-saving state in which the probability that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a "jackpot" lottery result is low, the fluctuation time of the regular symbol is short, and the probability that the regular lottery result will be a "hit" lottery result is high.
3: A non-time-saving variable state where the probability that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a "jackpot" lottery result is high, the fluctuation time of the regular symbol is long, and the probability that the regular lottery result will be a "hit" lottery result is low. .
4: A variable probability state in which there is a high probability that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a "jackpot" lottery result, the fluctuation time of the regular symbol is short, and the probability that the regular lottery result will be a "hit" lottery result is high.
In addition to these gaming states, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a "jackpot", the following states will occur.
5: A jackpot state in which the jackpot opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. It should be noted that the special symbols are not displayed in a variable manner during the jackpot state.
FIG. 503 is a table showing these five gaming states.
In this way, in this embodiment, five game states are possible. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the game, the game state changes from one of these game states to another game state. FIG. 504 is a diagram showing the transition conditions of the gaming state.

The time saving state transitions to the normal state on the condition that the number of times a losing special lottery result has occurred after entering the time saving state reaches a predetermined number of times. For example, when the jackpot state ends and the time saving state is entered, and the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 100 in the time saving state, the gaming state shifts to the normal state.
The non-time-saving variable probability state and the variable probability state continue until a jackpot gaming state occurs.

In this embodiment, three lottery results are provided as special lottery results: "Lose", "Lose with time saving", and "Jackpot".

If the special lottery result is a "lose", after the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time, the grand prize opening 2005 will not open and close in the predetermined opening/closing pattern, and the normal lottery result will be a "lose". ”, and the “time-saving state” in which it takes a short time to display the normal lottery results does not occur.

If the special lottery result is a "lose with time saving", after the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time, the grand prize opening 2005 is not opened and closed in the predetermined opening/closing pattern, and the regular lottery result is a "win". The game state shifts to a "time saving state" in which the probability that the result of the lottery is displayed is increased and the time until the normal lottery result is displayed is short. Even if the special lottery result is a "lose with time saving", if the game state is in the time saving state, non-time saving probability variable state, or probability variable state, the transition to the time saving state is not performed. Note that it is preferable that the "time-saving loss" occur with a predetermined probability. For example, among the special lottery results, it is preferable that the probability of occurrence of a "jackpot" is 1/300, the probability of occurrence of a "loss" is 298/300, and the probability of occurrence of a "loss with time saving" is 1/300.

When the special lottery result is a "jackpot", the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and the grand prize opening 2005 is opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. After the jackpot state ends, the game mode shifts to any one of a normal state, a time-saving state, a non-time-saving probability variable state, and a probability variable state based on the predetermined jackpot details. Note that the rate of transition after the jackpot state may be set as appropriate, and the number of game states that can be shifted to after the jackpot may be less than four. For example, after the jackpot state, the percentage of shifting to the probability variable state may be 50%, the percentage of shifting to the time saving state may be 50%, and the percentage of shifting to the normal state and the non-time saving probability variable state may be 0%.

On the other hand, without adopting "loss with time saving", the number of times the special lottery result was consecutively a loser under normal conditions was counted, and the number of times the special lottery result was consecutively a loser was determined by a predetermined number of times. When the number of times (for example, 500 times) is reached, the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the game state shifts from a normal state to a time-saving state without opening or closing a big prize opening 2005.
Furthermore, even if the number of times the special lottery result is a loss during the time-saving state, non-time-saving definite variable state, or definite variable state reaches a predetermined specific number (for example, 500 times), the transition to the time-saving state will not occur. do not have.

For the transition from the normal state to the time-saving state based on a loss with time-saving, and the transition from the normal state to the time-saving state based on the execution of a specific number of special drawings, either one or both may be adopted. Good too.

By adopting "loss with time saving" as the special lottery result, the game state can be shifted from the normal state to the time saving state without any balls being put out. Furthermore, compared to the normal state, it is possible to receive the special lottery result in a time-saving state in which the number of game balls is less likely to decrease.

In addition, as the special lottery is executed a certain number of times, the gaming state shifts from the normal state to the time-saving state, so if the normal state continues for a certain period of time, the time-saving state where the number of game balls is less likely to decrease is lower than in the normal state. It will be possible to receive the special lottery results.

The breakdown of the jackpot when the first special lottery result is a jackpot and the breakdown of the jackpot when the second special lottery result is a jackpot may be the same.
Alternatively, the breakdown of the jackpot when the first special lottery result is a jackpot may be different from the breakdown when the second special lottery result is a jackpot. For example, the breakdown when the first special lottery result becomes a jackpot is 50% for the normal jackpot, 50% for the time-saving jackpot, and the breakdown when the second special lottery result becomes a jackpot. , the jackpot that results in a time saving state may be 20%, and the jackpot that results in a variable probability state may be 80%.

Below, an embodiment of the ready-to-win effect executed using such an operation unit and the conditions for changing the game state will be described together with the display contents displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

Conventionally, by displaying an image of a character or the like on a display means, an effect suggesting a fluctuating display result of a decorative pattern has been performed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 2016-179063 and 2010-022544). For example, by displaying an image of a predetermined character before the fluctuation of the decorative pattern stops, the player is informed that the probability that the fluctuating display result of the decorative pattern will be a jackpot is a predetermined probability (for example, 10%). The suggested performance was being carried out.
However, some players may not necessarily like to see such suggestive effects. For example, if a certain suggestion effect is displayed multiple times, but the results of the most recent fluctuating displays in which the suggestion effect was displayed all result in a fluctuating display result indicating a loss, then They may feel a sense of disbelief, thinking, ``I'm going to fail again...'' or feel that the experience was a bad experience, and they may not want to see the suggestion. Such a tendency is noticeable in suggestion effects in which a player is requested to operate a predetermined operation unit, and a display indicating a predetermined level of expectation is performed based on the acceptance of the operation. In such a case, the player may lose interest in the game because he or she is made to see a suggestive performance that he or she does not want to see, even though he has taken the trouble to operate the operating means.

Furthermore, there are players who prefer that the results of the variable display be clearly informed, rather than being suggested with half-hearted expectations. For such players, being shown a suggestive performance with a low level of expectation (for example, 10%) may actually cause a decrease in interest.

However, the existence of such players has not been taken into account in the past, and there is room for improvement in the manner in which the suggestion effect is executed. In the embodiment shown below, an embodiment will be described in which the existence of such players is taken into account and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Below, with reference to Figure 505, etc., in a battle scene between your own tank and an enemy tank, the "shield bullet "Reach" is explained.

FIG. 505 is a time chart showing the progress of "shield bullet reach" in this embodiment. In this time chart, when it is decided in the main control board 1310 to execute a performance pattern in which a variable display of special symbols is performed for 34 seconds in response to one start-up winning, the game is started under control by the peripheral control board 1510. The progress of a performance mode in which a variable display of decorative symbols is executed over 34 seconds in the display area of the board-side performance display device 1600 is shown. Note that after the end of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols, the stop display of the special symbols and the stop display of the decorative symbols are executed for one second. In addition, in the display area, in addition to the variable display of decorative patterns, an image of your own tank, an image of an enemy tank, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, a simulated image imitating the defense button 3740, etc. are displayed. Details will be described later.
Further, FIGS. 506 and 507 show the display mode of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing of the time chart described with reference to FIG. 505.

In addition, in the time chart shown in FIG. 505, in order to explain the timing of the performance, t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. are indicated according to the passage of time. The time between each timing is 1 second. Note that these points are the same in other embodiments and production examples described later unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, each of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 510 to 557 is basically a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 505 to 509. Therefore, for configurations that are not specifically mentioned in the description of each embodiment shown in FIGS. 510 to 557 (for example, the display mode when the decorative pattern starts changing, the display mode when it stops, etc.), FIGS. 505 to 509 The embodiments in the embodiments shown in are applicable.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 505, variable display of decorative symbols starts at timing t0. From timing t0 to timing t5, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner as shown in FIG. 500(b). At timing t5, as shown in FIG. 500(c), a pattern in which the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are the same (in this embodiment, the pattern consisting of the number "3") is temporarily stopped and displayed, and a reach state occurs. Then, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are reduced and displayed at the upper left of the display area. At the same time, an image of the own tank moving forward on the road is displayed in the display area. Further, during the period from timing t5 to timing t27, operation reception of the defense button 3740 is enabled.

FIG. 506(a) shows a state in which an image of the own tank is displayed in the display area at timing t5. Each decorative symbol ("3", "↓", "3") in reach state will be displayed at the top left of the display area, the image of your own tank will be displayed at the bottom center of the display area, and your tank will move to the center of the display area in the horizontal direction. An image of the road is displayed at the top of the display area, an image of the horizon and the sky is displayed at the bottom right of the display area, a line image of the production character ``Colonel Dyna'' is displayed at the bottom right of the display area, and a window image surrounding the line image is displayed at the bottom left of the display area. It shows a state in which a dialogue image of "Might Sergeant", a character in the performance, and a window image surrounding the dialogue image are displayed. In addition, the player himself is set as a second lieutenant who operates his own tank, and moves around the battlefield in his own tank with "Colonel Dyna", who is higher in rank than a second lieutenant, and "Sergeant Mite", who is lower in rank than a second lieutenant. The performance will be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the immersion in the virtual reality reach performance.

As shown in the lines of "Colonel Dyna" in FIG. 506(a), by long pressing the defense button 3740, a shield image is displayed in front of the own tank, which will be described in detail later.

At timing t9, the image of the white enemy tank starts to be displayed at the upper right of the display area, and is displayed moving to the left. FIG. 506(b) shows a state in which the image of the enemy tank is moving leftward toward the road at timing t10.

At timing t11, the image of the white enemy tank that has moved from right to left within the display area is positioned on the road. Note that at this timing, the image of the white enemy tank may be replaced with the image of the red enemy tank and displayed. At the same time, operation reception of the attack button 3710 is enabled, and a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed to the right of the lines of "Might Sergeant". The valid operation period of the attack button 3710 continues for 3 seconds from timing t11 to timing t14.
There are two types of enemy tank images displayed on the road: a white enemy tank image and a red enemy tank image. The display ratio of enemy tank images is set so that when a red enemy tank image is displayed, there is a higher possibility that the special lottery result will be a jackpot.
In addition, two types of simulated images imitating the attack button 3710 are prepared: a white simulated image and a red simulated image, and the red simulated image is displayed more than the white simulated image. The display ratio of enemy tank images is set so that there is a higher possibility that the special lottery result will be a jackpot when

The expectation level of a jackpot may be suggested by the combination of the color of the image of the enemy tank and the color of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710.
For example, if the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 are both white in color, the expectation level is 10%, and the color of the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is white and the other is white. The appearance rate may be set such that the expectation level is 20% when the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image of the attack button 3710 are red, and 30% when the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image of the attack button 3710 are both red.
Note that the color of either one of the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image of the attack button 3710 may be changed from white to red to suggest the level of expectation. Also, depending on the combination of the color of the image of the enemy tank and the color of the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the expectation level of the jackpot is 100%, that is, the pattern in which the occurrence of the jackpot is confirmed when that combination is displayed. You may also prepare one.

FIG. 506(c) shows a state in which a white simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a white enemy tank image are displayed on the road in the display area at timing t12.

On the other hand, FIG. 506(e) shows a state in which a red simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a red image of an enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area from timing t11 to timing t12. .

If the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation validity period (timing t11 to timing t14) of the attack button 3710, an image of a shell flying out of the own tank's battery is displayed, and an image of the enemy tank is displayed. However, it changes to a destroyed image. An image of the shell exploding is also displayed. Furthermore, the display of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 ends.

FIG. 505(b) is a time chart showing the display mode when the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation validity period of the attack button 3710. Further, FIG. 505(c) is a time chart showing the display mode when the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation validity period of the attack button 3710.

The display of the image of the destruction of the enemy tank and the display of the image of the explosion of the shell continue for 3 seconds from the timing when the attack button 3710 is pressed. For example, when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t13, the display of the destroyed image of the enemy tank and the display of the exploding image of the shell continue until timing t16.

There are two types of images of shells exploding: images of moderate explosions of shells and images of large explosions of shells, and the greater the degree of explosion, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. Display percentage is set. For example, if an image of a moderately exploding shell is displayed, the expectation level increases by +10 compared to the expectation level that was previously shown by the image of an enemy tank and the image imitating the attack button 3710. %, and when an image of a large explosion of a cannonball is displayed, the rate of occurrence of the effect may be set so that the expectation level increases by +20%.

FIG. 506(d) shows a state in which an image of a white enemy tank being destroyed and an image of a medium-sized shell exploding are displayed on the road in the display area from timing t13 to timing t16. On the other hand, FIG. 506(f) shows a state in which an image of a white enemy tank being destroyed and an image of a large exploding shell are displayed on the road in the display area from timing t13 to timing t16. Note that even when a red enemy tank is displayed as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. Either an image of a large explosion or an image of a large shell exploding will be displayed on the road. In this way, the color of the moving tank image and the color of the destroyed tank image are the same color.

FIG. 505(c) is a time chart showing the content displayed in the display area when the attack button 3710 is not operated within the valid operation period. If the attack button 3710 is not operated within the valid operation period, at timing t14, which is the end timing of the valid operation period, an image of a shell being fired from your own tank is displayed, and an image of an enemy tank is displayed. changes into a destroyed image. Additionally, either an image of a moderately exploding shell or an image of a large exploding shell is displayed. Furthermore, the display of the destroyed image continues for three seconds from timing t14 to timing t17. These display modes are the same as when the attack button 3710 is operated.
In this way, regardless of whether the player operates the attack button 3710 or not, the player sees the same display effect except for the display timing and the position of the enemy tank in the left and right direction. Then, the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot can be recognized based on the performance mode of the visually recognized display performance.

After such a display effect is performed from timing t9 to timing t17 at the longest (when the attack button 3710 is not operated), from timing t17 to timing t25 at the longest (when the attack button 3710 is not operated), The same performance will be performed again. Further, in the performance performed again, the expectation level that the special lottery result will be a jackpot is similarly suggested.

In addition, the enemy tank moves and is destroyed from timing t9 to timing t17 at the longest (when the attack button 3710 is not operated), and from timing t17 to timing t25 at the longest (when the attack button 3710 is not operated). We have shown an example of executing this, but it is possible to execute a production pattern in which the enemy tank moves and is destroyed only at the former timing, or a production pattern in which the enemy tank moves and is destroyed only at the latter timing. It may also be possible to perform a performance pattern in which a performance is performed. Furthermore, a production pattern in which enemy tanks are not displayed may be executed at two timings. In this case, the "shield bullet reach" performance ends without the player operating the attack button 3710.

It is preferable to set the appearance ratio of performance patterns so that the expectation of a jackpot is higher for a performance pattern in which enemy tanks are displayed than in a performance pattern in which enemy tanks are not displayed. Also, it is recommended to set the appearance rate of performance patterns so that the expectation of a jackpot is higher for a performance pattern in which the enemy tank moves twice and is destroyed than in a performance pattern in which the enemy tank moves and is destroyed only once. . With this configuration, when this suggestion effect is executed, the enemy tank may be moved and destroyed 0 to 2 times, so the appearance mode (color/number of times) of the enemy tank and the enemy tank's Players' expectations for the destruction mode will increase. Note that a performance pattern in which the enemy tank is moved and destroyed three or more times may be configured to be executable.

FIG. 505(d) is a time chart showing the display contents when the defense button 3740 is not operated. As shown in FIG. 505(d), when the defense button 3740 is not operated, the effect display based on the operation of the defense button 3740 is not performed. 506(c) to 506(f) show the display mode in the display area when the effect display based on the operation of the defense button 3740 is not performed.

Next, the display mode in the display area when the defense button 3740 is operated will be described.

A setting that prevents attacks from enemy tanks by long-pressing the defense button 3740 during the operation period of the defense button 3740 (timing t5 to timing t27) between the image of your own tank and the image of the enemy tank. A shield image is displayed. Note that the condition for determining that the long press has started may be that the defense button 3740 continues to be pressed for 0.5 seconds. Further, as long as the defense button 3740 is kept pressed, the shield image continues to be displayed.
Note that although the shape of the shield image is a horizontally elongated ellipse in the figure, the shape of the shield image may be configured to dynamically change during display. Further, the shield image may be displayed intermittently. For example, if you continue to press and hold the defense button 3740, the shield image will gradually become smaller after it starts being displayed, and when the shield image is completely no longer displayed, the shield bullets will be automatically fired. A display effect may be repeatedly performed in which a target is fired, a shield bullet explodes, and a new shield image is displayed. Continuation of the display of the shield image includes such a display mode.

FIG. 505(e) is a time chart showing the display mode when the defense button 3740 is pressed for a long time while the operation of the defense button 3740 is valid. As shown in this time chart, the shield image is displayed from timing t7, when it is determined that the player is pressing the button for a long time, to timing t24, when the player releases the defense button 3740 and ends the long press. is displayed. By displaying the shield image based on the player's operation of the defense button 3740 in this way, it is possible to hide the color of the enemy tank image, the color of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, and the destruction mode of the enemy tank. It is.

For example, FIG. 507(a) shows the timing after the display shown in FIG. This shows the display state displayed when the long press of the defense button 3740 is operated. As shown in the figure, a shield image is displayed based on the detection of long press of the defense button 3740. In addition, the dialogue image of "Colonel Dyna" is also compatible with the display of the shield image.

FIG. 507(b) shows a state in which a shield image is displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, from timing t9 to timing t11) when an image of an enemy tank is displayed and the enemy tank is moving toward the road. That is, in the display state shown with reference to FIG. 506(b), if the shield image is being displayed, the display state becomes as shown in FIG. 507(b).

507(c) and 507(e) show that when an image of an enemy tank is displayed on the road and a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed (for example, from timing t11 to timing t14), the shield This shows a display mode in which an image is displayed. That is, in the display state shown with reference to FIG. 506(c), if the shield image is being displayed, the display state becomes as shown in FIG. 507(c). Similarly, in the display state shown with reference to FIG. 506(e), if a shield image is being displayed, the display state becomes as shown in FIG. 507(e).

At this time, the color of the enemy tank image and the color of the simulated image of the attack button 3710 suggest the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot, but since these images are hidden by the shield image, , it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the degree of expectation of a jackpot.

507(d) and 507(f) show that the shield image is displayed when an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed (for example, from timing t12 to timing t15 when an operation is performed, and from timing t14 to timing t17 when no operation is performed). An example of the displayed state is shown. That is, in the display state shown with reference to FIG. 506(d), if the shield image is being displayed, the display state becomes as shown in FIG. 507(d). Similarly, in the display state shown with reference to FIG. 506(f), if a shield image is being displayed, the display state becomes as shown in FIG. 507(f).

At this time, the way the shell explodes and the color of the image of the destroyed enemy tank suggest the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot, but since these images are hidden by the shield image, the expectation that it will be a jackpot is lowered. It is now possible to make the degree difficult to recognize.

To hide the image of an enemy tank, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, or the explosion mode of a shell, the display priority of the shield image can be set to the image of an enemy tank, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, or a shell. It is recommended to set the display priority higher than the display priority of the image. Furthermore, it is preferable to set the display priority of the window in which the lines of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Mite" are displayed to be higher than the display priority of the shield image.

Note that the operation acceptance period of the defense button 3740 is from timing t5, which is the timing when the reach effect starts, to timing t27, which is after the second destruction image of the enemy tank is displayed. Further, even if the defense button 3740 is pressed for a long time, the display of the shield image ends at the same time as the operation validity period of the defense button 3740 ends.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the performance display that suggests the level of expectation difficult to see according to the player's preference, so that it is stress-free for players who do not want to know the level of expectation. It becomes possible to provide a gaming environment.
For example, by operating the defense button 3740 at the timing when an image of an enemy tank is displayed on the right side of the display area, as shown in FIG. You can make it difficult to see depending on your preferences and mood that day.

With reference to FIGS. 506(a) to 506(f) and FIGS. 507(a) to 507(f), the color of the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is set to white or red. In addition to these, the configuration is configured so that a production pattern that displays an image of an enemy tank or a mock image imitating the attack button 3710 is sometimes executed due to the gold color whose expectation level is 100%. Good too. In particular, it is preferable that an image of an enemy tank or a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 be displayed the first time in a pattern in which the image is displayed twice. In this case, the player can cancel the long press of the defense button 3740 to display the image of the enemy tank for the second time, so that the shield image will not be displayed and the "shield bullet" that has been confirmed to be a jackpot will be displayed. You can enjoy the "Reach" performance.

Note that there is a possibility that the player operates the defense button 3740 by mistake for the attack button 3710. In this case, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of a moving enemy tank, the destroyed image of an enemy tank, and the image of an exploding shell, which may actually reduce the interest. be. Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, the shield image is displayed not only when the defense button 3740 is pressed, but also when the defense button 3740 is held down for a long time. With this configuration, even if the defense button 3740 is operated by mistake, the shield image will not be displayed immediately, which can cause stress to the player who wants to see the suggestive effects. can be prevented from occurring.

Although the embodiment has been shown in which the display of the shield image ends when the long press on the defense button 3740 ends, the shield image may continue to be displayed for a predetermined number of seconds (6 seconds) after the long press ends.

When the player presses and holds the defense button 3740, the shield image gradually becomes larger in concentric circles, and when the player releases the defense button 3740, the shield image gradually becomes smaller in a concentric circle. It may be configured as follows. For example, the shield image may be configured to gradually increase in size concentrically over 2 seconds, and the shield image may gradually decrease concentrically over 2 seconds. With this configuration, even if you accidentally operate the defense button 3740, you can quickly release your hand from the defense button 3740 to display a simulated image of the attack button 3710 or an image of an enemy tank. Since the visibility of the player is restored, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player who wants to see the suggestive performance feels stressed. In addition, by changing the display mode of the shield image in this way, the image indicating the degree of expectation can be changed from a display mode in which it is not hidden at all, a mode in which it is partially hidden, or a mode in which it is completely hidden by the shield image to a mode in which it is completely hidden by the shield image. It may be configured so that the display mode can be changed.

Although we have shown an example in which the display mode of the shield image changes based on the player's operation, the display mode of the currently displayed shield image can be changed without the player's operation. may be configured. For example, the size of the shield image can be configured to automatically increase or decrease, the shape of the shield image can be configured to change periodically, or the transparency of the shield image can be configured to change. You may. Furthermore, these display modes may be combined. In addition, by changing the display mode of the shield image in this way, the image indicating the degree of expectation (a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 or an image of an enemy tank) can be completely hidden or partially hidden by the shield image. The display mode may be configured such that the display mode can be changed from either the completely hidden mode or the completely hidden mode to another display mode.

Instead of or in addition to long-pressing the defense button 3740, a shield image may be displayed for a predetermined number of seconds when it is detected that the defense button 3740 is repeatedly pressed by the player. FIG. 505(f) is a time chart showing the effect mode modified in this way. In this time chart, the shield image is displayed in the period from timing t10 to timing t16 and from timing t18 to timing t24 based on the detection of repeated hits of the defense button 3740 by the player. It shows. Note that the condition for determining that consecutive hits have been made may be that the button is pressed four or more times in one second. Note that after the shield image is displayed, there is no need to continue hitting repeatedly, and the shield image is displayed for a predetermined number of seconds (6 seconds).
Note that instead of pressing and repeatedly pressing the defense button 3740, a configuration may be made such that when the defense button 3740 is pressed, a predetermined lottery is performed and a shield image is displayed with a probability of 1/3.

Further, the configuration may be such that a shield image is displayed when the mission button 3700 and the defense button 3740 are pressed at the same time. Alternatively, when the operation unit described with reference to FIG. 499 is employed, the shield image may be displayed when the defense button 3740 is pressed while the right lever 3730 is tilted forward.

In this way, by configuring the shield image to be displayed when a specific condition regarding the defense button 3740 is satisfied based on the operation of the defense button 3740, it is possible for the player to accidentally operate the defense button 3740. Even if this occurs, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a shield image is immediately displayed, and the visibility of the suggestive effect is not hindered.

Operation of the defense button 3740 is performed when the result of the variable display in which the tank reach effect in which only the operation of the attack button 3710 is valid indicates failure a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 or 5 times) in a row. The configuration may be such that the reception is enabled and the "shield bullet reach" in which the shield image is displayed can be executed. In addition, on the condition that the result of the variable display when "Shield Bullet Reach" is executed indicates a jackpot, the reception of the operation for the defense button 3740 will be disabled, and only the operation of the attack button 3710 will be valid. If the configuration is such that the shield image display is not displayed even if the defense button 3740 is operated until the result of the variable display that has been executed shows a failure a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 or 5 times) consecutively. good. With such a configuration, it is possible to nullify the erroneous operation of the defense button 3740 and to reduce the feeling of dissatisfaction that the player feels when the special lottery results of losing are repeated.

The display time of the shield image displayed by pressing the defense button 3740 may be set to be longer than the display time of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710. For example, in this embodiment, the enemy tank's movement time before the operation validity period is set to 2 seconds, and the display time of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is set to 3 seconds, but the display time is set to 3 seconds based on the press of the defense button 3740. The display time of the shield image may be set to 6 seconds. With this configuration, once the display of the shield image is started, the simulated image that simulates the attack button 3710 remains hidden until the display of the simulated image that simulates the attack button 3710 is finished. It is possible to reduce the operational burden on the player.

After operating the attack button 3710 or at the end of the validity period of the attack button 3710, an image of an enemy tank being destroyed and an image of an exploding shell will be displayed, but these images will also be hidden by the shield image. The display time of the shield image may be determined. For example, in this embodiment, the display time of an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding shell is 3 seconds, but the display time of a shield image displayed by pressing the defense button 3740 is 6 seconds. It's good to do that. With this configuration, an image of an enemy tank being destroyed and an image of an exploding shell can be hidden by the shield image.

In this embodiment, the display time of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is set to 3 seconds at the maximum, and the display time of the image of a destroyed enemy tank and the image of an exploding shell is set to 3 seconds, but the display time of the shield image is set to 3 seconds. The time may be longer than the total time (for example, 10 seconds). With this configuration, by displaying the shield image while the enemy tank is moving, it is possible to shield both the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of the enemy tank being destroyed, and the image of the shell exploding. It can be hidden by images.

The configuration may be such that the player can stop displaying the shield image that has been displayed for a predetermined period of time. For example, the display of the shield image may be configured to end by pressing the mission button 3700 or the defense button 3740 while the shield image is being displayed. With this configuration, by visually recognizing a part of the performance that suggests a high level of expectation, a player who notices that a performance indicating a high level of expectation is actually being performed can be informed of the performance. It is possible to promptly provide a situation in which the Alternatively, the display of the shield image may be automatically stopped when a suggestive effect indicating an expectation level higher than a predetermined level is started. For example, if an image of a golden enemy tank whose expectation level is 100% or a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed, the display of the shield image may be automatically stopped.

On the other hand, if the display of the shield image is configured to be canceled when a simple condition such as pressing a button is met, the production mode may be easily visible if the player incorrectly presses the button. It becomes a state. Therefore, it is preferable to stop displaying the shield image when a specific condition is satisfied based on pressing the mission button 3700 or the defense button 3740. Specifically, the same conditions as those used when starting the display of the shield image as described above may be adopted as the conditions when stopping the display of the shield image.

The configuration may be such that, while the shield image is being displayed, an operating method for canceling the display of the shield image is displayed. For example, the dialogue window for "Colonel Dyna" displays the line "You weakling! Press the mission button to release the shield!" or "You weakling! Press the defense button 3740 to release the shield!" It would be good to display a line like “!”. With such a configuration, even if the player accidentally displays the shield image, the display of the shield image can be quickly ended.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 505(e), the shield image is configured to be displayed multiple times by allowing the operation of the defense button 3740 to be accepted multiple times during the validity period. . Further, as long as the defense button 3740 is held down, the display time of the shield image is extended and the shield image is continuously displayed. As a result, the image of an enemy tank, the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of a destroyed enemy tank, and the image of an exploding shell can all be made difficult to see.

It may be configured to be able to execute a display effect in which the shield image cannot be displayed or the display of the currently displayed shield image ends. For example, the display of the shield image ends at the timing when an image suggesting high expectations (for example, a red or gold image) is displayed, and the shield image is stopped for a predetermined period during which the image suggesting high expectations is displayed, or when an image suggesting high expectations is displayed. It may be configured such that the shield image cannot be displayed by the player until the fluctuating display of decorative symbols indicating the degree of expectation is completed. Or, during the display of the shield image, a starting prize is generated in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and based on the pre-reading result of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball. At the timing when it is decided to perform a highly anticipated performance, the display of the shield image ends, and the "shield bullet reach" performance continues until the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern targeted for pre-reading ends. In addition, it may be configured such that the shield image is not displayed by the player. Furthermore, as a display effect in this case, an image of the enemy tank that is larger than the shield image may be displayed.
In this way, the teacher can be improved by making the shield image invisible to the player based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. Further, by displaying a predetermined image larger than the shield image, it is possible to increase the expectation that an advantageous situation will occur for the player.

In the present embodiment, the operation acceptance period for the defense button 3740 is started after the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, but the operation acceptance period for the defense button 3740 is started at the same time as the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. You may start it. In this case, it is preferable to display the mode shown in FIG. 506(a) at timing t0.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operation acceptance period of the defense button 3740 was set to end before the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern stops, but the defense button 3740 does not operate until the end timing of the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern (timing t35). The operation acceptance of 3740 may be continued. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the manner in which the decorative symbols indicating the special lottery results are stopped, depending on the player's intention, using the shield image.

By combining these embodiments, the shield image may be configured to be displayable from the start of variation of the decorative pattern (timing t0) to the end of variation display (timing t35).

An embodiment has been shown in which the shield image is displayed for a predetermined period of time (6 seconds, etc.) under conditions such as repeated hits of the defense button 3740 or a 1/3 lottery to be held when the defense button 3740 is operated. It may be configured so that the person can set it. For example, during the demo period when the decorative symbols are not being displayed in a variable manner and the jackpot game is not in progress, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730, the display time of the shield image can be changed from 5 seconds to 60 seconds. It may be configured such that it can be set between With such a configuration, the shield image can be displayed in a manner that suits the player's mood.

The period during which the shield image can be displayed may be configured to be settable by the player based on the number of changes in the decorative pattern. For example, if 20 times is set as the number of times the decorative symbol changes, the defense button 3740 is pressed in the tank reach effect that occurs during the period from when the player makes the setting until the number of times the decorative symbol changes 20 times. By operating it, you will be able to display a shield image. On the other hand, if the player does not make the settings, the shield image will not be displayed even if the defense button 3740 is operated during the tank reach performance.

Even if the conditions for displaying the shield image again are met while the shield image is being displayed, a new shield image will not be displayed. This can prevent excessive effects from being performed. On the other hand, if the conditions for displaying the shield image again are met while the shield image is being displayed, the display time of the currently displayed shield image will be postponed starting from the timing when the conditions for displaying the shield image are met. It may be configured so that With such a configuration, it is possible to continue hiding the suggestive effect with the shield image while suppressing excessive effects.

On the other hand, if the condition for displaying the shield image again is met while the shield image is being displayed, a new shield image may be immediately displayed. In this case, the display of the currently displayed shield image may be interrupted and a new shield image may be displayed, or a new shield image may be displayed in addition to the currently displayed shield image. With such a configuration, the time during which the shield image is not displayed can be shortened, and the time during which the shield image is displayed can be easily extended.

Furthermore, it may be configured to output sound effects corresponding to the types of images of enemy tanks, the types of simulated images simulating the attack button 3710, and the types of images of explosions of artillery shells. In this case, the level of expectation will be indicated to the player by the output sound.
On the other hand, for players who do not want to know their expectations, outputting such performance sounds is not desirable. Therefore, when displaying the shield image, output of the special sound may be started at the timing when the shield image is displayed. The output of the special sound is preferably continued until the display of the shield image is finished.
Further, when outputting the special sound, the volume of the effect sound may be suppressed. It is preferable to continue suppressing the volume of the effect sound until the display of the shield image ends. Further, the volume of the special sound may be made larger than the volume of the performance sound. Alternatively, both of these may be employed.
With such a configuration, the level of expectation indicated by the sound may be difficult to hear due to the volume reduction, or the sound may be difficult to hear due to the special sound, even if the level of expectation is suggested by the sound. can be made difficult to understand.
Note that when an enemy tank appears, a predetermined effect sound that does not indicate the level of expectation may be output. In this case, the player who does not want to know the level of expectation can display the shield image and start outputting the special sound by immediately operating the defense button 3740 at the timing when the player hears the predetermined performance sound. can.

The suggestion performance may be made possible to be performed even in a game state advantageous to the player, such as a time saving state in which the variation time of decorative symbols is short, or a probability variation state in which the probability that the result of a special lottery is a jackpot is increased. In this case, the shield image may not be displayed even if the defense button 3740 is operated. With this configuration, it is possible to accidentally operate the defense button 3740 in a game state where jackpots are more likely to occur than usual, and an image of an enemy tank, a mock image imitating the attack button 3710, or an image of an enemy tank may be displayed. It is possible to prevent a destroyed image from becoming difficult to see, and to prevent a situation in which a player misses a highly anticipated performance.

On the other hand, if it is possible to perform a suggestive effect in a game state advantageous to the player, such as a time saving state or a probability fluctuation state, a shield image may be displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740. . With such a configuration, the suggestion performance can be hidden even in a gaming state where jackpots are more likely to occur than usual.
Alternatively, in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the size of the shield image may be made smaller or the display time of the shield image may be shortened compared to the normal state, thereby reducing the suggestive effects hidden by the shield image. The visibility may be slightly increased.

Furthermore, it may be possible to perform a suggestion performance during the jackpot game state. In this case, the suggestion effect is to notify the expectation level that the jackpot will occur again after the jackpot game state ends by looking ahead, or to inform you of the expectation level that the jackpot will occur again after the jackpot game state ends, or to inform you of the time saving state or probability fluctuation state that is more advantageous than the normal state after the jackpot ends. It would be good to notify the level of expectation as to whether or not the transition will be made. For example, when a 10-round jackpot is being executed, such a suggestion effect may be performed from the third round to the fifth round. With this configuration, if you accidentally operate the defense button 3740 at a timing when you can know the game state that will occur after a jackpot, the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image of the attack button 3710, and the image of the enemy tank destroyed. It is possible to prevent the displayed image from becoming difficult to see.

On the other hand, if it is possible to perform the suggestion effect during a jackpot, a shield image may be displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740. With such a configuration, the suggestive performance can be hidden even during a jackpot. It is possible to make it difficult for a player who does not want to know the gaming state after winning the jackpot to recognize the level of expectation regarding the gaming state after winning the jackpot.

A similar effect to the "shield bullet reach" effect in which the self-tank moves on the road may be performed over multiple variations of decorative symbols as a look-ahead effect based on the pending look-ahead in the normal state.
In this case, it is preferable that the display effect of the own tank moving on the road be performed continuously from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the variation a plurality of times. In addition, while the decorative patterns are changing, the expectation level of the jackpot for the reservation subject to pre-reading is suggested by the above-mentioned simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, an image of an enemy tank, an image of an exploding shell, etc. It is preferable that shield images are displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740, and that these images are difficult to visually recognize. The shield image may be displayed over a plurality of variable displays of decorative symbols.
Note that the pending image that is the target of prefetching may be configured to be hidden by a shield image.
In this way, it is possible to create a sense of unity in the performance by performing a suggestive performance in which the own tank moves on the road across the variations of a plurality of decorative patterns.

If a jackpot state occurs due to the "Shield Bullet Reach" effect in which your tank moves on the road, if a jackpot occurs, the display effect in which your tank moves continues during and after the jackpot condition. You can. In addition, after the jackpot gaming state occurs, the expectation level that a jackpot will occur again after the jackpot gaming state ends is notified by looking ahead, and the time-saving state and the probability that the jackpot is more advantageous than the normal state after the jackpot ends. It is preferable to notify the level of expectation as to whether or not the state will shift by indicating that the own tank moves on the road. Furthermore, if the time saving state or the probability variable state is entered after the jackpot, the suggestive effect of the own tank moving on the road may be continued until the time saving state or the probability variable state ends. In this case as well, it is preferable to configure the shield image displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740 to make it difficult to see the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of an enemy tank, the image of an exploding shell, etc. .
Further, the display of the shield image may be configured to be displayed across a variable display state of decorative symbols, a stopped display state of decorative symbols, a jackpot game state, and a variable state of decorative symbols after the jackpot game state.
Even with such a configuration, it is possible to create a sense of unity in the performance.

Although an example has been shown in which a part of the image of the enemy tank is made invisible due to the shield image, the configuration may be such that the entire image of the enemy tank is made invisible due to the shield image.
FIG. 508(a) shows a modification of the production example shown with reference to FIG. 507(e). In the production example shown in FIG. 508(a), all of the image of the enemy tank and part of the simulated image of the attack button 3710 are hidden by the shield image.

Although we have shown an example in which part of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 becomes invisible due to the shield image, it is configured such that the entire simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 becomes invisible due to the shield image. Good too.
FIG. 508(b) shows a modification of the production example shown with reference to FIG. 507(e). In the production example shown in FIG. 508(b), part of the image of the enemy tank and the entire simulated image of the attack button 3710 are hidden by the shield image.

We have shown an example where the image of a destroyed enemy tank and part of the explosion mode of a shell are not visible due to the shield image, but the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the explosion mode of a shell are all visible due to the shield image. It may be configured so that it is impossible.
FIG. 508(c) shows a modification of the production example shown with reference to FIG. 507(d). In the production example shown in FIG. 508(c), the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the explosion mode of the shell are all hidden by the shield image.

The shield image is opaque, and the images of enemy tanks that have a lower display priority than the shield image, the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the manner in which the shell explodes are rendered invisible by the shield image. However, the shield image may be made semi-transparent so that these images having a low display priority can be viewed through the shield image.

In this way, the entire simulated image simulating the first operation section and the corresponding display corresponding to the operation of the operation section can be displayed in a manner hidden by the image displayed based on the operation on the second operation section. These images can hide any implied expectations.
In addition, it is possible to display a simulated image simulating the first operation section or a part of the corresponding display corresponding to the operation of the operation section in a hidden manner by the image displayed based on the operation on the second operation section. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the degree of expectation shown by the images while recognizing that an image indicating the degree of expectation is being displayed using these images.
In addition, only a part of these images suggests the degree of expectation, and the part suggesting the degree of expectation is configured so that it can be partially or completely hidden by the shield image. Good too.

Although an example has been shown in which the level of expectation is indicated by the color of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, instead of or in addition to the color of the simulated image, the shape and size of the simulated image itself may be different. Further, the shape of the simulated image itself and the size of the image may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation. Here, it is preferable to configure such that the area protruding from the shield image becomes larger when the degree of expectation is high. Further, it is preferable to adopt a similar configuration for images of enemy tanks, images of destroyed enemy tanks, and explosion modes of artillery shells. With such a configuration, when the degree of expectation is high, it is possible to make it difficult for the image indicating the degree of expectation to be hidden by the shield image.

In the displayed state where the shield image is displayed, by performing a more difficult operation (for example, pressing the defense button 3740 for a longer time or hitting it repeatedly), a larger shield image is displayed. Good too. In addition, this large shield image allows the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of the enemy tank, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the explosion mode of the shell to be hidden more than the normal shield image. It's okay.
With this configuration, the player can be involved in determining the percentage of images that suggest the degree of expectation that are hidden, thereby further increasing the level of interest.

509(a) to 509(d) show modified examples of the production example shown with reference to FIG. 506(c). FIG. 509(a) shows an example of rendering in which a small-sized simulated image is displayed as a simulated image of the attack button 3710. FIG. 509(b) shows an example of a performance in which a small-sized simulated image and a shield image are displayed as a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710. FIG. 509(c) shows an example of rendering in which a large-sized simulated image is displayed as a simulated image of the attack button 3710. FIG. 509(d) shows an example of a performance in which a large-sized simulated image and a shield image are displayed as a simulated image of the attack button 3710.
The expectation of a jackpot is higher when a large-sized simulated image is displayed as a simulated image of the attack button 3710 than when a small-sized simulated image is displayed as a simulated image of the attack button 3710. It is configured to be high.
With this configuration, when a simulated image with a high level of expectation is displayed, the area of the simulated image that is not hidden by the shield image increases, allowing the player to see that the level of expectation is high. can be recognized.
Note that the image is not limited to the simulated image, and the image of an enemy tank or a destroyed enemy tank may be configured to similarly indicate the degree of expectation by varying the shape and size of the image.

Examples have been shown in which the level of expectation is suggested by a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, an image of an enemy tank, an image of a destroyed enemy tank, and an image of an exploding shell. It may also be applied to embodiments in images. Alternatively, an embodiment applied to a certain plurality of images may be applied to an embodiment applied to another plurality of images.

An example was shown in which the level of expectation is suggested by a simulated image of the attack button 3710, an image of an enemy tank, an image of a destroyed enemy tank, and an image of an exploding shell. It may be configured as suggested. In this case, it is preferable to configure at least a portion of the shield image to be hidden. With such a configuration, it is possible to grasp the progress of the performance while making it impossible or difficult to recognize the level of expectation.

As described above, according to the "shield bullet reach" in this embodiment, the predetermined image indicating the level of expectation related to the first operation section can be made difficult to see by the image displayed by the operation of the second operation section. Therefore, it is possible to provide players who do not want to know their expectation level with the option of hiding their expectation level, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

Conventionally, gaming machines provided with a plurality of operation sections have been known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-087638). Further, the valid period during which operations on the operating section can be accepted is limited to a part of the period during which the decorative pattern is changing. Therefore, even if some players have an increased desire to operate the operation section, they may feel irritated by not being able to operate the operation section. Furthermore, if an operation is performed during the valid period, a display effect corresponding to the operation is always performed, so the user may feel sluggish when operating the operation section. Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, in consideration of the existence of players who think in this way, an operating means that can be operated for a long period of time while the decorative symbols are changing is provided, and an operating means that corresponds to operations on the operating section is provided. Therefore, a display change is not always applied, but a special display change is added only when a specific condition is met.

An embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 505 and the like will be described below with reference to time charts shown in FIGS. 510 to 513, display examples shown in FIGS. 514 and 515, and the like. In the "Special Machine Gun Reach" effect in this embodiment, the functions and displays related to the attack button 3710 are displayed in the same way as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 505.
On the other hand, in the "Special Machine Gun Reach" performance, a performance pattern is executed in which operation reception for the mission button 3700 is valid instead of the defense button 3740. The operation reception of the mission button 3700 becomes valid at the timing (timing t5) when the decorative pattern becomes the reach state and the reach effect in which the own tank moves starts (timing t5). The operation reception ends at timing t27, which is the timing after the enemy tank is displayed twice.

The period during which operation reception for the mission button 3700 is valid (timing t5 to timing t27) is longer than the period during which operation reception for the attack button 3710 is valid (timing t11 to timing t14), and the operation reception for the mission button 3700 is valid. This period includes a period during which operation acceptance for the attack button 3710 is valid. Further, as described above, the attack button 3710 is always given a display change in response to an operation accepted during the valid operation period. On the other hand, even if the mission button 3700 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not necessarily performed, but the display changes displayed in the display area at a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3 probability). will be granted. For example, each time the mission button 3700 is operated, a lottery is drawn with a probability of 1/3 of winning, and if a winning result is obtained, a bullet fired from a special machine gun will be displayed in the display area. An image of the explosion occurring when the object was hit is displayed for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is continuously displayed during the period when operation reception of the mission button 3700 is valid (timing t5 to timing t27), indicating that the operation of the mission button 3700 is within the valid period. It will be done.

The time chart in FIG. 510 shows an example of the effect when neither the attack button 3710 nor the mission button 3700 is operated.
In the time chart shown in FIG. 510, the variable display of decorative symbols starts at timing t0. From timing t0 to timing t5, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner as shown in FIG. 500(b). At timing t5, as shown in FIG. 500(c), a pattern in which the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are the same (in this embodiment, the pattern consisting of the number "3") is temporarily stopped and displayed, and a reach state occurs. Then, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are reduced and displayed at the upper left of the display area. At the same time, an image of the own tank moving forward on the road is displayed in the display area. Furthermore, operation acceptance of the mission button 3700 is valid during the period from timing t5 to timing t27.

FIG. 514(a) shows a state in which an image of the own tank is displayed in the display area at timing t5. Each decorative symbol ("3", "↓", "3") in reach state will be displayed at the top left of the display area, the image of your own tank will be displayed at the bottom center of the display area, and your tank will move to the center of the display area in the horizontal direction. An image of the road is displayed at the top of the display area, an image of the horizon and the sky is displayed at the bottom right of the display area, a line image of the production character ``Colonel Dyna'' is displayed at the bottom right of the display area, and a window image surrounding the line image is displayed at the bottom left of the display area. The dialogue image of the production character "Sergeant Might" and the window image surrounding the dialogue image are in a state where a mock image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed in the upper left of the window image that displays the dialogue image of "Colonel Dyna". It shows.

As shown in the line from "Colonel Dyna" in Figure 514(a), by operating the mission button 3700, a bullet is fired from the own tank's special machine gun and displayed moving, but details will be described later. do.

At timing t9, the image of the white enemy tank starts to be displayed at the upper right of the display area, and is displayed moving to the left. FIG. 506(b) shows a state in which the image of the enemy tank is moving to the left toward the road at timing t10.

At timing t11, the image of the white enemy tank that has moved from right to left within the display area is positioned on the road. At the same time, operation reception of the attack button 3710 is enabled, and a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed to the right of the lines of "Might Sergeant". The valid operation period of the attack button 3710 continues for 3 seconds from timing t11 to timing t14.

FIG. 514(b) shows a state in which a white simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a white enemy tank image are displayed on the road in the display area at timing t11. Further, FIG. 514(c) shows a state in which a white simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a white image of an enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area at timing t12.

At timing t14, the image of the enemy tank enters a display state in which it has reached the left end of the road. Furthermore, the valid period of operation for attack button 3710 ends. FIG. 514(d) shows the display state at timing t14.

From timing t14 to timing t16, the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left in the display area, and at timing t16, the image of the enemy tank moves out of the screen and is no longer displayed.

The operational validity period of the mission button 3700 and the display of the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 continue until timing t27. At timing t27, the operational validity period of the mission button 3700 and the display of the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 end.

Thereafter, from timing t32 to timing t34, the display mode becomes as shown in FIG. 500(f), and at timing t34, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. If the special lottery result is a loss, from timing t34 to timing t35, the display state is as shown in FIG. 500(g), and if the special lottery result is a jackpot, from timing t34 to timing t35, the display state is as shown in FIG. The display state shown in is obtained.

With reference to the time chart of FIG. 510, an example of the effect when the player does not operate the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is shown.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 511, an example of the effect when the player operates the attack button 3710 will be shown.

The time chart in FIG. 511 shows an example of the effect when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t12. In this case, from timing t12 to timing t13, a display of the shell moving is performed. FIG. 514(e) shows a display example when the shell is moving. Further, the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 ends at timing t12, which is the timing when the attack button 3710 is operated.

At timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. Additionally, an image of the shell exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed for 3 seconds (in this production example, 3 seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). FIG. 514(f) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding shell are displayed.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 512, an example of the effect when the player operates the mission button 3700 will be shown.

The time chart in FIG. 512 shows an example of the effect when the mission button 3700 is operated at timing t12. FIG. 512(a) is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which an operation on the mission button 3700 is performed, a bullet is fired from a special machine gun, and an image of the bullet exploding is displayed. Further, FIG. 512(b) is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which an operation is performed on the mission button 3700 and a bullet is fired from the special machine gun, but an image of the bullet exploding is not displayed.

In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 512(a), a display in which a bullet fired from a special machine gun moves is performed from timing t12 to timing t13. FIG. 515(a) shows a display example when the bullet is moving. Note that the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 ends at timing t14.

The production example shown in FIG. 512(a) is a production example in which a lottery result based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is won (selected with a probability of 1/3), and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. It is. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. Additionally, an image of the bullet exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding bullet are displayed for 3 seconds (in this production example, 3 seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). FIG. 515(b) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding bullet are displayed.

On the other hand, the production example shown in FIG. 512(b) is a production in which the lottery performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 results in a loss (selected with a probability of 2/3), and the image of the destroyed enemy tank is not displayed. This is an example. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank does not change to the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left. Further, an image of the bullet exploding is not displayed. FIG. 515(c) is a display example in a state where the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left without changing to the image of the destroyed enemy tank (for example, at timing t14).

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 513, an example of the effect when the player operates both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 will be shown.

The time chart in FIG. 513 shows an example of the effect when the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are operated simultaneously at timing t12. FIG. 513(a) is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which an image of an exploding bullet is displayed when the mission button 3700 is operated. Further, FIG. 513(b) is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which an image of an exploding bullet is not displayed even though the mission button 3700 is operated.

In the case of the example shown in FIG. 513(a), from timing t12 to timing t13, a display in which a cannonball fired from a cannon turret moves and a display in which a bullet fired from a special machine gun moves are performed. FIG. 515(d) shows an example of a display in which a cannonball and a bullet are moving. Further, at timing t12, the operational validity period of attack button 3710 ends.

The production example shown in FIG. 513(a) is a production example in which a lottery result based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is won (selected with a probability of 1/3), and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. It is. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of an exploding shell and an image of an exploding bullet are displayed. An image of a destroyed enemy tank, an image of an exploding shell, and an image of an exploding bullet are displayed for 3 seconds (in this production example, 3 seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). FIG. 515(e) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank, an image of an exploding bullet, and an image of an exploding shell are displayed.

On the other hand, in the production example shown in FIG. 513(b), the lottery performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 results in a loss (selected with a probability of 2/3), and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. This is an example of production. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. Additionally, an image of the shell exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed for 3 seconds (in this production example, 3 seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). FIG. 515(f) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding shell are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 515(e), the size of the image of the exploding bullet displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is larger than the size of the image of the exploding shell displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710. It's also big. Further, an image of an exploding shell displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710 is set to have a higher display priority than an image of a destroyed enemy tank. Further, an image of an exploding bullet displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is set to have a higher display priority than an image of an exploding shell displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make a display change that is not necessarily given noticeable based on the operation of the mission button 3700. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to overlook the display change imparted in this manner.

When the player operates the attack button 3710, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed in response to the operation. Therefore, during the performance of moving the tank, the player operates the attack button 3710 to display the explosion image and changes the image of the enemy tank to a destroyed display mode, and then operates the mission button 3700. , an additional explosion image can be added to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. On the other hand, the player can change the image of an enemy tank to an image of a destroyed enemy tank by operating only the mission button 3700 without operating the attack button 3710.

Display modes (color, size, shape, etc.) of images of destroyed enemy tanks, simulated images of the mission button 3700, simulated images of the attack button 3710, images of exploding shells, and images of exploding bullets. It is preferable that at least one of them indicates the degree of expectation of a jackpot. Specifically, it is preferable to adopt the same method (color, size, shape, etc. of each image) as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 505 and the like. Note that these images do not have to indicate the degree of expectation of a jackpot.

According to this configuration, when the mission button 3700 is operated and a specific condition (a 1/3 lottery win) is met, the image of the enemy tank is changed to the image of a destroyed enemy tank. It can be changed. Additionally, an image of a bullet exploding can be added to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. Then, by providing such a display change, the player feels that the operation on the mission button 3700 has been rewarded, and feels great joy for having worked so hard to make the display change appear. It can improve your interest.

The explosion image displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is configured to have a higher display priority than the explosion image displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710. With this configuration, in addition to operating the mission button 3700, the visibility of the image that is displayed only when a specific condition (1/3 lottery win) is achieved is ensured, and the mission button 3700 is operated. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the visibility of the displayed image is obstructed by the operation of 3700 and the player feels dissatisfied.

A plurality of modes with different appearance ratios may be displayed as modes of display change performed in the display area in response to the operation of the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700. For example, there are three destroyed images of enemy tanks with different degrees of destruction, and the probability that the destroyed image with a high degree of destruction will be displayed is 10%, and the probability that the destroyed image with a medium degree of destruction will be displayed. The destroyed image may be selected and displayed so that the probability of displaying a destroyed image with a small degree of destruction is 30% and 60%. Furthermore, a destroyed image of an enemy tank with an extremely large degree of destruction may be provided, which is displayed with an extremely low probability (1%) only when the mission button 3700 is operated. According to this, even rarer display change grants are shown to the player when a display change grant is made to appear with difficulty. In place of or in addition to the destruction image, a similar display may be performed on the explosion image.

If the player does not operate the attack button 3710, a cannonball is automatically fired from the turret at the end of the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 (timing t14), and the shell is automatically fired without the player having to operate it. The configuration may be such that a destroyed image of an enemy tank is displayed. With this configuration, the player can concentrate on operating the mission button 3700.

In this embodiment, when an enemy tank is not displayed, the mission button 3700 is operated, a bullet is fired from the special machine gun of the own tank, and a display is performed in which the fired bullet hits the road and explodes. Is possible. For example, by operating the mission button 3700 at timing t5, a display is performed in which the bullets fired from timing t5 to timing t6 move. In addition, if the 1/3 lottery is won, an image of a fired bullet hitting the ground and exploding is displayed for 3 seconds from timing t6 to timing t9.
Note that the operation timing that can result in an image of a moving enemy tank being destroyed by a bullet fired based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be from timing t9 to timing t16, which is the movement period of the enemy tank, or The period may be from timing t11 to timing t14, which is the valid operation period of the attack button 3710.

On the other hand, before the attack button 3710 is operated, the player operates the mission button 3700 to win the 1/3 lottery, and a display is displayed in which a bullet fired from the special machine gun of the own tank hits an enemy tank and explodes. In this case, even if the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period of the attack button 3710, an image of a shell moving or an image of a shell exploding corresponding to the operation of the attack button 3710 may not be displayed. It may be configured so that it is not performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to create an effect in which the player feels as if he has defeated an enemy tank with his own strength, and the player is able to experience the effect of displaying an image of exploding bullets, which is an effect that has been made with great effort. can increase their sense of satisfaction. Furthermore, since the image of the exploding shell is not displayed, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the image of the exploding bullet, which is an effect that has been made to appear through operation of the mission button 3700.
Note that if the mission button 3700 is operated in a situation where an image of an exploding shell corresponding to the operation of the attack button 3710 and an image of a destroyed enemy tank are displayed, an image corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700 will be displayed. It is a good idea to add an image of the bullet exploding. In this case, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction as if he was able to destroy more enemy tanks.

Similar to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 505 and the like, the degree of expectation may be suggested by the color of the enemy tank or the destruction mode of the enemy tank. In this case, it is preferable that at least a portion of the color of the enemy tank and the destruction mode of the enemy tank be visually recognized by the image of the bullet exploding that is displayed by operating the mission button 3700. With such a configuration, visibility of the indicated expectation level can be ensured.
In addition, if the suggestion performance has low expectations, the bullet will explode by operating the mission button 3700 during a predetermined period after the completion of the suggestion performance (for example, from timing t16 to timing t27). Since the displayed image can be displayed once or multiple times, it is possible to restore interest in the game that has decreased due to execution of a performance with low expectations.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the mission button 3700 is operated, in addition to the mission button 3700, the right lever 3730 and the left lever 3720 can also be operated, and the direction of the special machine gun can be changed from side to side by the right lever 3730 and left lever 3720. It may be possible to do so. If the special machine gun is facing the enemy tank, the probability of winning the lottery when the mission button 3700 is operated is set to 1/2, which is a higher chance of winning than 1/3, or the special machine gun If the tank is not facing the enemy tank, the probability of winning the lottery when the mission button 3700 is operated may be set to 1/10, which is less likely to win than 1/3. Furthermore, if the operation mode of the right lever 3730 or the left lever 3720 is very appropriate, the probability of winning the lottery may be set to 100%. Conversely, if the operation mode of the right lever 3730 or the left lever 3720 is extremely inappropriate, the probability of winning the lottery may be set to 0%.
In this case, the player aims to display the enemy tank in a destroyed state by operating the mission button 3700 while operating the right lever 3730 and the left lever 3720, which makes the game more immersive. It becomes possible to obtain. Furthermore, when an image of destroying an enemy tank is displayed, the user feels a great sense of accomplishment.

Note that the game parlor may be configured so that when the mission button 3700 is operated, the probability of winning the lottery can be changed. Alternatively, the real-time clock function may be used to change the probability of winning the lottery on a weekly basis when the mission button 3700 is operated. With such a configuration, it is possible to set the appearance rate of performances according to the tendencies of players visiting the store. For example, the probability of winning the lottery may be changed cyclically from 0%, 30%, 100%, 50%, 0%, etc. every day.

The mission button 3700 may be configured to have a situation in which an operation instruction is displayed and a situation in which an operation instruction is not displayed during a period in which operation acceptance is valid. For example, a performance pattern that displays a simulated image that simulates the mission button 3700 and a performance pattern that does not display a simulated image that simulates the mission button 3700 may be configured to be executable.

Such selection of performance patterns may be configured so that the clerk at the game parlor can select which performance pattern to execute, or a real-time clock function may be used to select which performance pattern to execute. may be configured to change every month. For example, for one month after the introduction of the Pachinko machine 1, only the production pattern that does not display operation instructions can be executed, and after one month has passed since the introduction of the Pachinko machine 1, the production pattern that does not display the operation instructions can be executed. It is preferable that both of the performance patterns for displaying operation instructions are configured to be executable. Alternatively, when executing "Special Machine Gun Reach", it is preferable to select either a performance pattern in which the operation instruction is not displayed or a performance pattern in which the operation instruction is displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, a 50/50 probability).

With such a configuration, in the case of a performance pattern in which no operation instruction is displayed, the display content in the display area can be simplified. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player who is not accustomed to the game becomes confused by being shown multiple operation instructions. On the other hand, a player who is accustomed to the game can operate the mission button 3700 even when no operation instruction display is displayed, fire a bullet from the special machine gun of his own tank, and explode when the fired bullet hits him. It becomes possible to display the mode in which the

An example has been shown in which a 1/3 lottery is performed in response to the operation of the mission button 3700, but in this case, the player who expects the display change to be given will press the mission button 3700 repeatedly. On the other hand, if the mission button 3700 is simply pressed repeatedly, there is a problem in that the player gets bored. Therefore, it may be configured such that the 1/3 lottery is performed by other operation modes, for example, by pressing and holding the mission button 3700. In this case, for example, it may be configured such that a lottery is drawn once every time the mission button 3700 is pressed for one second.

Furthermore, it is preferable to instruct the player which operation is required for the production pattern at the timing when operation acceptance of the mission button 3700 becomes possible. For example, in the case of a production pattern that requires repeated pressing of the mission button 3700, "Colonel Dyna"'s line is displayed as "Press the mission button 3700 repeatedly!", and in the case of a production pattern that requires a long press of the mission button 3700, In such a case, it is preferable to display the line ``Press and hold the mission button 3700!'' as a line for ``Colonel Dyna.''

With this configuration, the player does not have to operate the mission button 3700 aimlessly, but instead feels a sense of excitement as to which performance pattern will be executed and which operating instruction will be presented. In addition, the number of times you can win the lottery is smaller when you press and hold the button repeatedly (generally, you can press repeatedly several times per second), so in production patterns that require a long press, If the enemy tank is displayed in an exploding manner, the player will feel a greater sense of accomplishment. By providing a plurality of performance patterns with different levels of difficulty in displaying images in this way, it is possible to improve the game's interest.
Note that the appearance ratio of performance patterns that require repeated hits and performance patterns that require long presses may be configured so that it can be selected by the staff at the game parlor, or may be set using a real-time clock function. may be configured.

Furthermore, when the player executes an operation mode different from the operation instruction mode for the mission button 3700, an effect pattern may be implemented in which a bullet is displayed being fired from the special machine gun.

For example, if the mission button 3700 is pressed repeatedly according to the operation instructions in a production pattern that displays "Map the mission button 3700 repeatedly!", the display to fire the special machine gun will not be displayed, and the operation instructions will not be displayed. When a long press is performed, which is a different operation, a lottery will be drawn with a 1/2 probability of winning each time the mission button 3700 is pressed for 1 second, and if the lottery is won, a display will be displayed to fire a special machine gun. It is recommended to configure the system so that it is performed.

On the other hand, if the mission button 3700 is pressed and held according to the operation instructions in a production pattern that displays "Press and hold the mission button 3700," the display to fire the special machine gun will not be displayed, and the display will not match the operation instructions. If you perform multiple hits, which is a different operation, a lottery will be drawn with a 1/2 probability of winning each time the mission button 3700 is pressed, and if you win the lottery, a display will fire a special machine gun. It is recommended that the configuration be configured so that this is performed.

It may be configured such that images of exploding bullets in different formats (preferably different colors and shapes) are displayed when the button is pressed for a long time and when the button is pressed repeatedly.

Furthermore, a performance pattern is executed that does not instruct the operation mode of the mission button 3700, which displays the line ``I wonder what I should do with the mission button to fire the special machine gun...'' as a line for ``Colonel Dyna''. It may be possible to configure. Note that internally, as a performance pattern, either a performance pattern that requires a long press of the mission button 3700 or a performance pattern that requires repeated hits of the mission button 3700 may be executed. Furthermore, if the operation mode provided by the player is different from the required operation mode, "Colonel Dyna" will say, "I remember! To fire the special machine gun, press the mission button repeatedly!" or ``I remember! To shoot the special machine gun, press and hold the mission button!'' may be displayed to prompt the player to perform an appropriate operation. In this way, there are cases where the operation that the player performed after estimating the operation mode was an appropriate operation mode, or when the operation that the player performed after estimating the operation mode was inappropriate and the appropriate operation mode was If the player performs an appropriate operation mode after the instruction is displayed, an image of a bullet exploding in a special mode different from that when the instruction for the operation mode has been displayed in advance is configured to be displayed. It's okay. Additionally, different special sound effects may be output in response to each exploding image.

With such a configuration, it is possible to satisfy the rebellious spirit of players who feel as if they are constantly being commanded by the gaming machine. Alternatively, it is possible to give surprise and satisfaction to a player who accidentally or intentionally performs an operation different from the instruction. Furthermore, since the player plays the game while guessing the operation mode for the operating section, it is possible to increase the activeness of participating in the game. Furthermore, the second operation section may have a display mode in which the operation instructions are not necessarily clearly displayed, and in this case, the user's satisfaction with the operation performed by himself/herself will further improve.

We have shown an example in which a special machine gun is displayed when a special machine gun is fired when a specific condition is met by holding down or repeatedly pressing the mission button 3700 to draw a lottery, but the specific condition can also be achieved by other methods. It may be configured as follows. For example, in a performance pattern that requires a long press of the mission button 3700, a display may be made in which, when the mission button 3700 is held down for 10 seconds, a bullet is fired from a special machine gun. Alternatively, in a performance pattern that requires repeated pressing of the mission button 3700, a display may be made in which a bullet is fired from the special machine gun when the mission button 3700 can be pressed 16 times or more in one second. Good too.

The attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 have the same operation mode in terms of being pressed. Therefore, instead of pressing the mission button 3700, by rotating the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 once clockwise or counterclockwise, the lottery will be performed and a bullet will be fired from the special machine gun with a probability of 1/3. The configuration may be such that a display is performed. Alternatively, the display may be such that a bullet is fired from the special machine gun by rotating the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 clockwise or counterclockwise multiple times (for example, three rotations). .

The configuration may be such that operations on the mission button 3700 can always be accepted while the decorative symbols are changing. With this configuration, the mission button 3700 can be operated by a player who feels helpless and angry because the variable display result shows a highly expected reach but the variable display result is a failure. By doing so, such resentment can be alleviated. For example, while displaying a decorative pattern that has been stopped due to a loss, it is possible to relieve one's worries by attacking the decorative pattern.
Further, it is preferable to configure such that the applied display change does not end even if the next variable display after the unsuccessful variable display starts. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the display of the image of a bullet exploding, which was displayed to relieve the player's worries, is forcibly interrupted and the player feels further dissatisfied. In addition, in this way, if it is determined that the display of the image of a bullet exploding straddles the variation of the decorative pattern, the "special machine gun reach" is executed again at timing t0, which is the start of the variation of the next decorative pattern. It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an unnatural state of presentation.

Note that whether or not a bullet is fired by operating the mission button 3700 may also be determined by lottery. For example, the configuration may be such that a bullet is fired with a probability of 1/2 and a bullet is not fired with a probability of 1/2.

According to the present embodiment, when the mission button 3700 is operated and specific conditions are met, the display content of the display area is changed, so the player does not have to worry about it. You will feel a sense of satisfaction that the display has come to fruition. Further, even if the displayed result from the operation on the attack button 3710 is undesirable for the player and the player feels dissatisfied with the displayed result, the display based on the operation on the mission button 3700 is performed. This alleviates the dissatisfaction felt by the player. In particular, since the mission button 3700 is allowed to be operated multiple times, a display corresponding to the operation will eventually be displayed, which is effective in alleviating the dissatisfaction felt by the player.

Conventionally, gaming machines provided with a plurality of operation sections have been known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-087638). In addition, at the timing when the operation on the operation panel becomes effective, a sound effect indicating that the operation can be accepted or that the operation can be accepted is output, or when the operation is accepted at the timing when the operation is performed. A gaming machine that outputs a sound effect that indicates a game is known. However, there was room for further improvement in terms of presentation. Below, when operation reception on the operation unit is enabled, no sound effect is output even if an operation is performed on the operation unit, and when specific conditions are met, an operation response reception display is displayed. , shows an embodiment in which a special sound is output.

Below, an embodiment related to a "silent machine gun reach" that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 510 and the like will be described with reference to FIG. 516 and the like. Note that, except for outputting sound effects such as voices, substantially the same display as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 510 and the like is performed in the display area. Note that various modifications of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 510 and the like can be applied to this embodiment. Note that the "silent machine gun" in this embodiment is an improvement on the "special machine gun" in the embodiment described with reference to FIG.

The time chart in FIG. 516 is a diagram showing a situation in which neither the attack button 3710 nor the mission button 3700 is operated. As shown in FIG. 516, in this embodiment, the attack button 3710 can be operated for a predetermined period (timing t9 to timing t11) immediately before the timing when the attack button 3710 operation is enabled. A sound effect "preparing to fire a cannon", which is a precursor sound, is output. Furthermore, at timing t11 when the acceptance of the operation of the attack button 3710 becomes valid, output of the voice "OK", which is a valid sound indicating that the acceptance of the operation is valid, is started. The voice "OK" is output from timing t11 to timing t12. The valid operation period of the attack button 3710 ends at timing t14. At timing t14, when the operation acceptance period for the attack button 3710 ends, a voice saying "Stop preparing the cannon", which is an end sound indicating that the operation acceptance period for the attack button 3710 has ended, is output from timing t14 to timing t16. be exposed.
On the other hand, regarding the mission button 3700, the valid operation period starts at timing t5 and ends at timing t27, but the sound effects are not output according to the start of the valid operation period or the end of the valid operation period. Not done.

FIG. 520(a) shows a state in which an image of the own tank is displayed in the display area at timing t5.
As shown in the lines of "Colonel Dyna" in Figure 520(a), by operating the mission button 3700, a bullet is fired from the silent machine gun of the own tank and displayed moving. This will be explained later.

520 and 521 show display examples in the display area, and the type of audio that is output (or is being output) when the display state is reached is described in the upper right part of the figure. ing. For example, the character string "\OK/" is written in the upper right corner of the display example shown in FIG. 520(c), but this does not mean "OK" when the display example shown in FIG. This indicates that the sound is being outputted (or is being outputted).

At timing t9, an image of a white enemy tank is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area. Further, from timing t9 to timing t11, a voice saying "preparing to fire cannon" is output. FIG. 520(b) shows a state in which an image of a white enemy tank is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area at timing t9.

At timing t11, an image of an enemy tank is displayed on the road. At the same time, the operation validity period of attack button 3710 starts. Furthermore, a voice saying "OK" is output from timing t11 to timing t12. FIG. 520(c) shows a state in which an image of an enemy tank is displayed on the road at timing t11.

FIG. 520(c) shows the display state at timing t12.

At timing t14, the image of the enemy tank enters a display state in which it has reached the left end of the road. Furthermore, the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 ends. Further, from timing t14 to timing t16, a voice saying "Stop preparing cannons~" is output. FIG. 520(d) shows the display state at timing t14.

The time chart in FIG. 517 is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which the attack button 3710 is operated and the mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period. As shown in FIG. 517, when the attack button 3710 is operated at a predetermined timing (timing t12 in this production example) during the valid operation period of the attack button 3710, the sound of a cannonball being fired from a cannon is heard. After a certain sound effect of "Zudoon" is output for a predetermined time (timing t12 to timing t13), a sound effect of "boom", which is the sound of a shell hitting a tank and exploding, is output for a predetermined time (timing t12 to timing t13). t13 to timing t15) is performed.

From timing t12 to timing t13, a display of the shell moving is performed. FIG. 520(f) shows a display example when the shell is moving. Further, at timing t12, the operational validity period of attack button 3710 ends.

At timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. Additionally, an image of the shell exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed for 3 seconds (in this production example, 3 seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). Further, from timing t13 to timing t15, a sound effect called "boom", which is the sound of a shell exploding, is output. FIG. 520(g) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding shell are displayed.

The time chart in FIG. 518 shows an example of the effect when the attack button 3710 is not operated but the mission button 3700 is operated. When the mission button 3700 is operated, as described above, there are cases where the enemy tank can be destroyed and cases where the enemy tank cannot be destroyed. FIG. 518(a) shows an example of the effect when the enemy tank can be destroyed, and FIG. 518(b) shows an example of the effect when the enemy tank cannot be destroyed. As mentioned above, the probability of destroying an enemy tank is 1/3, and the probability of not being able to destroy an enemy tank is 2/3. If the enemy tank is destroyed, an image of the enemy tank's destruction is displayed and at the same time a sound effect called ``boom'', which is the sound of a bullet exploding when it hits the enemy tank, is output. On the other hand, if the enemy tank cannot be destroyed, no sound effect is output.
Note that in the production example shown in FIG. 518, since the attack button 3710 is not operated, the same sound effect as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 516 is output.

In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 518(a), a display in which a bullet fired from a silent machine gun moves is performed from timing t12 to timing t13. FIG. 521(a) shows an example of a display when a bullet is moving. Note that the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 ends at timing t14.

The production example shown in FIG. 518(a) is a production example in which a lottery result based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is won (selected with a probability of 1/3), and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. It is. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. Additionally, an image of the bullet exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding bullet are displayed for 3 seconds (in this production example, 3 seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). Further, from timing t13 to timing t15, a sound effect called "boom", which is the sound of a bullet hitting an enemy tank and exploding, is output. FIG. 521(b) is a display example showing a state (for example, timing t14) in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding bullet are displayed.

On the other hand, the production example shown in FIG. 518(b) is a production in which the lottery performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 results in a loss (the selection is made with a probability of 2/3), and the image of the destroyed enemy tank is not displayed. This is an example. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left without changing to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Further, an image of the bullet exploding is not displayed. Furthermore, no sound is output in response to the firing of a bullet. FIG. 521(c) is a display example in a state where the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left without changing to the image of the destroyed enemy tank (for example, at timing t14).

The time chart in FIG. 519 is a diagram showing a situation in which both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are operated. In this case, in response to the operation of the attack button 3710, a sound effect similar to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 517 is output. Further, in response to the operation of the mission button 3700, a sound effect similar to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 518 is output.

The time chart in FIG. 519 shows an example of the effect when the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are operated simultaneously at timing t12. FIG. 519(a) is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which an image of an exploding bullet is displayed when the mission button 3700 is operated. Further, FIG. 519(b) is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which an image of an exploding bullet is not displayed even though the mission button 3700 is operated.

In the case of the example shown in FIG. 519(a), from timing t12 to timing t13, a display in which a shell fired from a cannon turret moves and a display in which a bullet fired from a silent machine gun moves are performed. Additionally, a sound effect called ``Zudon'', which is the sound of a cannonball being fired from a cannon, is output. FIG. 521(d) shows an example of a display in which a cannonball and a bullet are moving. Further, at timing t12, the operational validity period of attack button 3710 ends.

The production example shown in FIG. 519(a) is a production example in which a lottery result based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is won (selected with a probability of 1/3), and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. It is. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of an exploding shell and an image of an exploding bullet are displayed. An image of a destroyed enemy tank, an image of an exploding shell, and an image of an exploding bullet are displayed for 3 seconds (in this production example, 3 seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). Further, from timing t13 to timing t15, a sound effect called "boom", which is the sound of a bullet hitting an enemy tank and exploding, is output. At the same time, a sound effect called ``boom'', which is the sound of a shell exploding when it hits an enemy tank, is output. FIG. 521(e) is a display example showing a state (for example, timing t14) in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank, an image of an exploding bullet, and an image of an exploding shell are displayed.

On the other hand, in the production example shown in FIG. 519(b), the lottery performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 results in a loss (selected with a probability of 2/3), and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. This is an example of production. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. Additionally, an image of the shell exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed for 3 seconds (in this production example, 3 seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). Further, from timing t13 to timing t15, a sound "boom", which is the sound of a shell hitting an enemy tank and exploding, is output. FIG. 521(f) is a display example showing a state (for example, timing t14) in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding shell are displayed.

It is preferable that the volume of the sound effect "boom" output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is higher than the volume of the sound effect "boom" output based on the operation of the attack button 3710. In FIGS. 521(b) and 521(e), the loudness of the sound effect "boom" is indicated by increasing the font size of the characters "\boom/".
Further, during the period (timing t13 to timing t15) in which the sound effect "boom" that is output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is output, the volume of the fluctuating effect sound such as BGM may be suppressed. .
In addition, when the sound effect "thump" is output based on the operation of the mission button 3700, the sound effect "thump" that would normally be output when the attack button 3710 is operated is not output. Alternatively, if the output is already in progress, the output may be interrupted and the output of the sound effect "boom" based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be started.
Further, it is preferable that the period for outputting the sound effect "thump" that is output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is longer than the sound effect "thump" that is output based on the operation of the attack button 3710. For example, the period for outputting the sound effect "thud" that is output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is three times the period for outputting the sound effect "thump" that is output based on the operation of the attack button 3710. It may be a certain 6 seconds. Further, the sound effect (the sound effect "boom") that is output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be output multiple times. For example, the sound effect "boom" may be output three times in six seconds. Further, the image of the bullet exploding may be displayed multiple times. For example, it may be configured to display an image of a bullet exploding three times in six seconds.
Furthermore, the sound effects output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 and the sound effects output based on the operation of the attack button 3710 may be different. For example, based on the operation of the mission button 3700, a sound effect called "bokaan" may be output.
In addition, the display and sound effects that are displayed and output based on the operation of the attack button 3710 are visible and heard by the player once for each player operation that satisfies the conditions. However, the display displayed and the sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 are made so that the player can see and hear them multiple times at least twice for each player operation that satisfies the conditions. You can.

In this way, for the attack button 3710, a sound effect indicating that the operation can be accepted, a sound effect indicating that the operation can be accepted, and a sound effect indicating that the operation has been accepted are output. .
On the other hand, regarding the mission button 3700, no sound effect indicating that the operation can be accepted or a sound effect indicating that the operation can be accepted is output. Furthermore, even if an operation is performed, a sound effect is output with a predetermined probability (1/3) after a predetermined time (1 second) after the operation is performed.
In this way, since sound effects are not necessarily output when operating the mission button 3700, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.
In addition, the sound effects output and the explosion images displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 are output or displayed multiple times, thereby making it more interesting.
Further, the explosion image displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is larger than the explosion image displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710. Furthermore, as described above, it is desirable that the sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 be easier to hear than the sound effect output based on the operation of the attack button 3710.
With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the sound effects and special displays related to the operation of the mission button 3700, which are relatively difficult to make appear.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operation acceptance period of the mission button 3700 is started after the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, but the operation acceptance period of the mission button 3700 is started at the same time as the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. You may start it. In this case, it is preferable to display the mode shown in FIG. 520(a) at timing t0.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operation acceptance period of the mission button 3700 is set to end before the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols stops, but the mission button 3700 is not operated until the end timing of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols (timing t35). The operation acceptance of 3700 may be continued.

By combining these embodiments, operation reception of the mission button 3700 may be continued from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (timing t0) to the end of the variation display (timing t35). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the opportunity for the player to make a sound effect or special display related to the operation of the mission button 3700, which is relatively difficult to make appear, appear.

If the display of an image of a bullet exploding or the output of the "boom" sound effect, which is the sound of a bullet exploding, are performed once based on the operation of the mission button 3700, after these displays and sound output are finished, It is preferable to configure it so that it can display images and output sound effects.
For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 518(a), the output of the sound effect "boom" ends at timing t15, and the display of the image of the bullet exploding ends at timing t16. In this case, the period from timing t16 to timing t17 is a period in which the image of the bullet exploding is not displayed or the sound effect "boom" that is the sound of the bullet exploding is not output, and after timing t17, these images are not displayed. It is preferable to configure the system so that it can output sounds and sound effects.
Further, even if the operation of the mission button 3700 satisfies the output conditions for the sound effect of "boom" and the display conditions for the image of a bullet exploding between timings t15 and t16, these sounds and displays are executed. During the period, no sound will be output or displayed, and if an operation that satisfies the conditions is performed after timing t16 when these sounds and displays end, the sound effect will be output and images will be displayed again. You may start it.
With this configuration, each display of an image or the output of a sound effect can be more clearly recognized each time, so the player can easily recognize the display of an image or the output of a sound effect, which he or she has taken a lot of effort to perform. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations that cannot be recognized.

In the production example shown with reference to FIG. 516 etc., the valid period during which the attack button 3710 can be operated occurs only once from timing t11 to timing t14, but it is configured so that it can occur multiple times. You may. For example, a similar display may be performed from timing t19 to timing t22. Alternatively, the number of occurrences may be determined based on the special lottery results, and the degree of expectation may be suggested based on the number of occurrences and the content of each performance. Note that it is preferable that the operation validity period of the attack button 3710 occurs multiple times during the operation validity period of the mission button 3700.
The number of times the operation validity period related to the attack button 3710 occurs, that is, the number of times the image of a shell exploding based on the operation of the attack button 3710 is displayed, can be determined based on the special lottery result in this way. On the other hand, based on the operation of the mission button 3700, the display of an image of a bullet exploding and the output of the sound effect "boom" that is the sound of a bullet exploding are not based on the special lottery result, and can be performed multiple times during the valid operation period. It is possible to execute it twice.
With such a configuration, by performing the operation on the mission button 3700 multiple times, it is possible to successfully display an image of an exploding bullet, and it is possible to increase the player's sense of accomplishment.

Note that the own tank may be configured to be equipped with an additional machine gun. In this case, an intermediate presentation mode between the bullets fired from the gun turret and the bullets fired from the silent machine gun in this embodiment may be adopted. For example, although the further machine gun basically takes the same operation acceptance mode and performance mode as the silent machine gun in this embodiment, when the operation is performed, a reception sound indicating that the operation has been accepted (for example, a bullet flies) The configuration may be such that the sound (sound) is always output. Note that the defense button 3740 may be used as the operation unit in this case. Further, the size of the bullet explosion image is preferably set to be an intermediate size between the explosion image of a cannonball and the explosion image of a silent machine gun.

As shown in FIG. 520(a) etc., it is shown that the operation of the mission button 3700 is effective by a mock image imitating the mission button 3700 and the lines of "Colonel Dyna", but the operation of the mission button 3700 is effective. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that does not notify that this is the case.
For example, in the first half of the operation validity period of the mission button 3700, the operation instruction of the mission button 3700 is not given, and in the second half of the operation validity period of the mission button 3700, the operation instruction of the mission button 3700 may be configured. good. In addition, it is preferable that the enemy tank moves from the right side of the display area in the first half and the second half of the valid operation period of the mission button 3700, and the operation of the attack button 3710 becomes valid. In this case, when an enemy tank is displayed for the first time, you can concentrate on operating the attack button 3710, and when an enemy tank is displayed for the second time, in addition to operating the attack button 3710, you can concentrate on operating the mission button 3700. It becomes possible to perform operations.
In this way, even when displaying based on acceptance of operation of the mission button 3700 is enabled, the configuration may be such that there are times when an operation instruction for the mission button 3700 is displayed and times when it is not displayed.
Note that the special sound and display content based on the acceptance of operation of the mission button 3700 may be different depending on whether or not an operation instruction for the mission button 3700 is displayed. For example, when the operation instruction display for the mission button 3700 is not displayed, a louder special sound is output, or a larger explosion image is displayed, compared to when the operation instruction display for the mission button 3700 is displayed. You may also do this. With such a configuration, the player's sense of interest can be further enhanced.

It may be configured such that the case where the operation instruction display is performed and the case where it is not displayed can be switched by the above-mentioned real-time clock function or operation by the player or the store clerk.

As described above, according to the "silent machine gun reach" according to the present embodiment, a special sound is output when the second operation section is operated and further a specific condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, even if the second operation section is operated, the special sound may be output sometimes and sometimes not, so the special sound may not be output with good luck. The player will feel great joy.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been known in which operation instructions for an operation unit are displayed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-046210). In such gaming machines, players simply follow instructions, and there is room for improvement in terms of increasing interest. For example, if you do not follow the operating instructions, the same display as if you followed the operating instructions is displayed after a predetermined period of time, or if you do not give the operating instructions, no display is displayed. This was common, and the player's intention of not following the operating instructions was not respected. Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, an embodiment will be shown in which a special display is displayed when the operation unit is operated in an operation manner contrary to the instructed content.

Below, with reference to FIG. 522 and the like, a description will be given of "bomb character reach" in which the own tank and the bomb character engage in a battle while accelerating or decelerating the own tank.

FIG. 522 is a table showing selected performance patterns in "Bomb Character Reach". Further, FIGS. 523 to 525 are time charts showing examples of effects when any of the effects patterns are executed. Further, FIGS. 526 to 531 show display examples at predetermined timings in these time charts.

In "Bomb Character Reach", the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner for 34 seconds, and the decorative symbols are statically displayed for one second. During the variable display of the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols become ready-to-reach at timing t5. In addition, the period from timing t6 to timing t15 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "first period"), the period from timing t16 to timing t25 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "second period"), In addition to own tank, an effect is performed in which bomb character A or bomb character B is displayed.

In "Bomb Character Reach", a bomb character appears on the road where your own tank is moving, and a performance is performed in which you are asked whether or not to operate the left lever 3720 so that your tank advances toward the bomb character. .

As the bomb characters, a bomb character A is displayed, which is a bomb character wearing sunglasses, and a bomb character B, whose sunglasses are upside down compared to the bomb character A, is displayed. If bomb character A is displayed, if your tank rams into it, part of your tank will be destroyed; if bomb character B is displayed, even if your tank rams into it, your tank will not be destroyed and you can move on. I can move on.

A bomb character is displayed in front of the own tank, and two characters ("Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Mite") indicate whether or not the own tank should ram into the bomb character. For example, as a line for "Colonel Dyna," a line instructing the player to move the left lever 3720 forward (on the gaming machine side, the same applies hereinafter) is displayed, such as "I'm sure it's a fake! Move forward!" Furthermore, as a line from "Sergeant Mite," a line instructing the player to move the left lever 3720 backwards (on the player's side, the same applies hereinafter) is displayed, such as "An enemy bomb has been found in front of you! Please slow down!" In addition, instead of indirect expressions such as ``forward'' or ``reverse'', more direct expressions such as ``please move the left lever forward'' or ``please move the left lever backward'' may be used. .

In addition, on the left side of the window where the lines from "Colonel Dyna" are displayed, there is a simulated image of the left lever 3720 in the shape of a vertically long rectangle, and an image that instructs how to operate the left lever 3720 ("lean forward", " The words "backward tilt") are displayed. Similarly, on the right side of the window in which the lines from "Sergeant Mite" are displayed, a simulated image simulating the left lever 3720 in a vertically long rectangular shape and an image instructing how to operate the left lever 3720 are displayed.

In "Bomb Character Reach", if "Colonel Dyna"'s lines are for operational instructions, those instructions are basically 100% incorrect operational instructions. Further, the image that instructs the operation mode of the left lever 3720 is also an image that instructs the operation mode that is incorrect. On the other hand, if "Sergeant Might"'s dialogue is to give operational instructions, there is a 20% chance that the dialogue that gives the wrong operational instructions will be displayed, and a 80% chance that the dialogue that gives the correct operational instructions will be displayed. be. Further, as an image for instructing how to operate the left lever 3720, an image that matches the instruction content indicated by the dialogue is displayed.
For this reason, the player only needs to operate the lever in the opposite direction to the instructions for the lines of "Colonel Dyna" and the operation instructions for the left lever 3720, and for the lines of "Sergeant Mite" and the operation instructions for the left lever 3720, the player only has to operate the lever in the opposite direction to the instructions. Just operate the lever with some caution.
Once the player gets used to it, he or she will be able to identify the type of bomb character by the shape of the sunglasses, and will be able to determine whether or not to ram his tank into the bomb character, and then move the left lever 3720 appropriately. can be operated.

When the bomb character A is displayed, if the own tank collides with the own tank, a portion of the own tank will be destroyed. If the own tank does not ram into the bomb character A, only the bomb character A can be prevented from exploding before the own tank collides with the own tank, thereby preventing the own tank from being destroyed. When the bomb character A and the own tank collide, in the first collision, the gun turret of the own tank is destroyed (the state of the own tank shown in FIG. 527(c)). Furthermore, in the second collision, the own tank's machine gun is also destroyed (the state of the own tank shown in FIG. 527(f)).
On the other hand, when bomb character B is displayed, even if bomb character B collides with the own tank, the own tank is not destroyed and can proceed. Bomb character B is actually a huge balloon disguised as a bomb, and even if your own tank hits it, your own tank will not be destroyed.
It should be noted that when the own tank moves forward, a huge bomb character appears and can be performed using the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700, but the details will be described later.

The production pattern shown in the table of FIG. 522 determines whether or not the bomb character is displayed and whether the bomb character is displayed from timing t6 to timing t11 and from timing t16 to timing t21 in the time charts shown in FIGS. 523 and 524. In this case, it indicates whether the displayed bomb character is bomb character A or bomb character B. Also, at timing t26, the state in which the image of the own tank can be taken is shown.

Performance pattern 01, performance pattern 03, performance pattern 07, and performance pattern 09 are performance patterns in which the bomb character A does not appear. Therefore, at timing t26, the own tank is in a state where it is not destroyed.
Performance pattern 02, performance pattern 04, performance pattern 06, and performance pattern 08 are performance patterns in which the bomb character A appears once. Therefore, at timing t26, the own tank is in either a state where it is not destroyed or a state where the gun battery of the own tank is destroyed.
Performance pattern 05 is a performance pattern in which bomb character A appears twice. Therefore, at timing t26, the own tank is in one of the following states: undestroyed, the gun turret of the tank destroyed, or the gun turret and machine gun of the tank destroyed.

Which of the effect patterns 01 to 09 is to be executed is determined by the peripheral control board 1510. For example, it may be determined based on the results of a special lottery.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 523, 526, and 527, a mode of presentation using the explosive character A will be described.
FIG. 523(a) is a time chart showing the state of the variable display of decorative symbols that is executed together with the effects shown in the time charts of FIGS. 523(b) and 523(c).
FIG. 523(b) is a time chart showing the execution mode of the production pattern in which the bomb character A is displayed in the first period. The effect state when effect pattern 04, which is an effect pattern for displaying bomb character A during the first period (timing t6 to timing t15), is executed will be described below.
At timing t5, "bomb character reach" is started. FIG. 526(a) shows a display example from timing t5 to timing t6.
At timing t6, bomb character A is displayed at the top center of the display area. At this time, the lines ``Colonel Dyna'' displays are either ``I'm sure it's a fake! Move forward!'' or ``Hmm, mumble.'' On the other hand, "Sergeant Might"'s lines are displayed as follows: "Enemy bomb detected ahead! Please slow down!", "He's a fake. Move forward!", or "Hmm, mumble." Ru. Further, if the line indicates tilting the left lever 3720 forward, a simulated image of the lever with the words "tilt forward" is displayed along with the line. Further, if the line indicates tilting the left lever 3720 backward, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 with the words "tilt backwards" is displayed along with the line. Further, if the lines do not indicate the operation mode of the left lever 3720, the simulated image of the left lever 3720 is not displayed.

FIGS. 526(b) to 526(g) show display examples displayed in the display area from timing t6 to timing t11. As mentioned above, there are two types of lines for "Colonel Dyna" and three types for lines for "Sergeant Mite," and there are a total of six combinations that can be displayed by combining these lines. These six combinations are shown in FIGS. 526(b) to 526(g).

For example, Figure 526(b) shows the incorrect operation instruction from Colonel Dyna, saying, ``I'm sure it's a fake! Move forward~!'' and the correct operation instruction from Sergeant Might, ``There are enemies ahead!'' This is a display example showing a state in which the line "Bomb detected! Please slow down!" is displayed.
In this case, the player can avoid a collision with the bomb character A by performing an operation (tilting the left lever 3720 backward) that is the opposite of the operation mode instructed by the lines of "Colonel Dyna". Furthermore, a collision with the bomb character A can be avoided by performing an operation (operation of tilting the left lever 3720 backward) according to the operation mode instructed by the lines of "Mite Sergeant". In addition, a collision with bomb character A can be avoided even if the player tilts the lever backward after confirming that the displayed bomb character is bomb character A, regardless of the instruction content of the dialogue.

In addition, Figure 526(e) shows the display of the line ``Colonel Dyna'' saying ``Hmmm, mumble.'' and the correct operation instruction ``Sergeant Might'' saying ``He's a fake. Forward!'' This is a display example showing a state in which the following is displayed.
In this case, the operation mode is not instructed by "Colonel Dyna's" lines. Moreover, by performing an operation (operation of tilting the left lever 3720 forward) according to the operation mode instructed by the lines of "Mite Sergeant", the bomb character A collides with the bomb character A. On the other hand, if the player confirms that the displayed bomb character is bomb character A without being bound by the instruction content of the dialogue, and tilts the left lever 3720 backward, bomb character A collision can be avoided.

In the operation period for tilting the left lever 3720 in a predetermined direction, it is determined that an operation input has been performed when the left lever 3720 is tilted in a predetermined direction for a predetermined time within a period from timing t6 to timing t11. For example, if the left lever 3720 is tilted forward for two seconds from timing t7 to timing t9, it is determined that the operation has been performed.

When the left lever 3720 is tilted forward when the bomb character A is displayed, an effect display in which the bomb character A and the own tank collide is performed from timing t11 to timing t15.
Specifically, from timing t11 to timing t12, an image of the collision between the own tank and the bomb character A is displayed. FIG. 527(a) is a display example from timing t11 to timing t12.
Next, from timing t12 to timing t15, an image of the gun battery of the own tank being destroyed is displayed. FIG. 527(c) is a display example from timing t12 to timing t15.

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is tilted backward when the bomb character A is displayed, an effect display in which the bomb character A explodes in front of the own tank is performed from timing t11 to timing t12. FIG. 527(b) is a display example from timing t11 to timing t12. Note that from timing t12 to timing t15, a display as shown in FIG. 526(a) may be performed.

FIG. 523(c) is a time chart showing the execution mode of the production pattern in which the bomb character A is displayed in the second period. FIG. 523(c) shows an example of a performance when, for example, performance pattern 02, which is a performance pattern in which the bomb character A is displayed in the second period, is executed.
In this performance example, a performance display similar to the performance example shown with reference to FIG. 523(b) is performed from timing t16 to timing t25.

In the case where either the bomb character A or the bomb character B is displayed in both the first period and the second period as in the production pattern 05, production pattern 06, production pattern 08, and production pattern 09, FIG. The performance mode related to timing t11 to timing t15 in the time chart shown in (b) or the production mode related to timing t11 to timing t15 in the time chart shown in FIG. 524(b), which will be described later, and the time chart shown in FIG. 523(c) A presentation mode related to timing t16 to timing t25 in , or a presentation mode that is a combination of presentation modes related to timing t16 to timing t25 in the time chart shown in FIG. 524(c) is executed.

For example, when production pattern 05 is selected, the production mode from timing t11 to timing t15 in the time chart shown in FIG. 523(b) and from timing t16 to timing t25 in the time chart shown in FIG. 523(c) A presentation mode that is a combination of such presentation modes is executed.
In this case, there is a possibility that the own tank will ram into the bomb character A during both the first period and the second period.
For example, in the first period, when the own tank rams into bomb character A, the own tank's battery is destroyed, but in the second period, when the own tank's battery is destroyed by bomb character A, the own tank's battery is destroyed. By ramming into it, the tank's machine gun is destroyed.
FIG. 527(d) shows a display example from timing t21 to timing t22 when a self-tank whose battery has been destroyed rams into bomb character A in the second period. Further, from timing t22 to timing t25, the state is as shown in the display example shown in FIG. 527(f).
On the other hand, in the second period, if the own tank whose battery has been destroyed does not ram into the bomb character A, the display example shown in FIG. 527(e) is reached from timing t21 to timing t22.

Next, a mode of presentation using the explosive character B will be described with reference to FIGS. 524, 528, and 529.
FIG. 524(a) is a time chart showing the state of the variable display of decorative symbols that is executed together with the effects shown in the time charts of FIGS. 524(b) and 524(c).
FIG. 524(b) is a time chart showing the execution mode of the production pattern in which the bomb character B is displayed in the first period. Below, the performance state when the performance pattern 07, which is the performance pattern for displaying the bomb character B during the first period (timing t6 to timing t11), is executed will be explained.
At timing t5, "bomb character reach" is started. FIG. 528(a) shows a display example from timing t5 to timing t6.
At timing t6, bomb character B is displayed at the top center of the display area. At this time, one of the lines ``Colonel Dyna'' is displayed is ``It's an enemy bomb - slow down!'' or ``Hmm, mumble.'' On the other hand, "Sergeant Mite"'s lines are displayed as follows: "He's a fake. Forward!", "Enemy bomb detected ahead! Please slow down!", or "Hmm, mumble." Ru. Furthermore, if each line indicates tilting the left lever 3720 forward, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 with the words "tilting forward" attached together with the line is displayed. Further, if each line indicates tilting the left lever 3720 backward, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 with the words "tilt backwards" is displayed along with the line. Further, if the lines do not indicate the operation mode of the left lever 3720, the simulated image of the left lever 3720 is not displayed.

FIGS. 528(b) to 528(g) show display examples displayed in the display area from timing t6 to timing t11. As mentioned above, there are two types of lines for "Colonel Dyna" and three types for lines for "Sergeant Mite," and there are a total of six combinations that can be displayed by combining these lines. These six combinations are shown in FIGS. 528(b) to 528(g).

For example, Figure 528(b) shows the display of the line ``Colonel Dyna'', which is an incorrect operation instruction, ``It's an enemy bomb - slow down!'', and the correct operation instruction, ``Sergeant Might'', ``That guy... This is a display example showing a state in which the line "It's a fake. Forward!" is displayed.
In this case, the player can ram the bomb character B by performing an operation (tilting the left lever 3720 forward) that is the opposite of the operation mode instructed by the lines of "Colonel Dyna". Furthermore, by performing an operation (operation of tilting the left lever 3720 forward) according to the operation mode instructed by the lines of "Sergeant Mite," it is possible to ram the bomb character B. In addition, the user can ram the bomb character B by confirming that the displayed bomb character is the bomb character B and tilting the left lever 3720 forward, without being limited by the instruction content of the dialogue.

In addition, Figure 528(e) shows the display of the line ``Hmmm, mumble'' from ``Colonel Dyna'' and the correct operational instructions from ``Sergeant Might'' ``An enemy bomb has been detected in front of you! Please slow down! This is a display example showing a state in which a line such as "" is displayed.
In this case, the operation mode is not instructed by "Colonel Dyna"'s lines. Further, by performing an operation (operation of tilting the left lever 3720 forward) according to the operation mode instructed by the lines of "Might Sergeant", the bomb character B cannot be rammed. On the other hand, if the player tilts the left lever 3720 forward after confirming that the displayed bomb character is bomb character B, regardless of the content of the instructions given by the dialogue, if the player tilts the left lever 3720 forward, bomb character B can be plunged into.

If the lever is tilted forward when the bomb character B is displayed, an effect display in which the own tank rams into the bomb character B is performed from timing t11 to timing t15.
From timing t11 to timing t12, an image of the own tank ramming into bomb character B is displayed. FIG. 529(a) is a display example from timing t11 to timing t12. Note that from timing t12 to timing t15, a display as shown in FIG. 526(a) may be performed.

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is tilted backward when the bomb character B is displayed, the bomb character B located in front of the own tank is displayed as is from timing t11 to timing t12. FIG. 529(b) is a display example from timing t11 to timing t12. Note that from timing t12 to timing t15, a display as shown in FIG. 526(a) may be performed.

FIG. 524(c) is a time chart showing the execution mode of the production pattern in which the bomb character B is displayed in the second period. FIG. 524(c) shows an example of a performance when, for example, performance pattern 03, which is a performance pattern in which the bomb character B is displayed in the second period, is executed.
In this performance example, a performance display similar to the performance example shown with reference to FIG. 524(b) is performed from timing t16 to timing t25.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 525, the performance mode from timing t26 to timing t35 when performance pattern 01 to performance pattern 09 are executed will be described.
As described above, based on the selected performance pattern and the player's operation of the left lever 3720, the own tank can be in an undamaged state, a state in which the turret is destroyed, or a state in which the turret and machine gun are destroyed at timing t26. It is displayed in one of the following states.

As shown in FIG. 525(a), the display of bomb character A or bomb character B starts at timing t26. Further, from timing t26 to timing t28, operation of either attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 becomes valid.
The attack button 3710 becomes effective when the own tank is in an undamaged state. On the other hand, the mission button 3700 becomes effective when the gun turret of the own tank is destroyed. Note that when the artillery turret and machine gun are destroyed, neither the attack button 3710 operation nor the mission button 3700 operation is effective. Note that the presentation mode when the operation of the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is not valid will be described later.

At timing t26, the operation of the attack button 3710 becomes valid and at the same time the bomb character A is displayed in the center of the display area. Furthermore, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed at the upper right of the window displaying the lines of "Sergeant Might."
FIG. 530(a) shows the sequence from timing t26 until the attack button 3710 is operated (t28 in FIG. 525(a)) or until the operation validity period of the attack button 3710 ends (t29 in FIG. 525(a)). This is an example of the display for the period (up to ).

If the special lottery result is a jackpot, the display that bomb character A explodes will be displayed 3 times from the timing when the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 or from the timing when the operation valid period ends. It takes place for seconds. FIG. 530(b) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A explodes after the attack button 3710 is operated or after the valid operation period ends when the special lottery result is a jackpot. Thereafter, at timing t34, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.
On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a loss, the bomb character A will be moved to your tank from the timing when the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 or from the timing when the operation valid period ends. The display of the robot moving toward the target is displayed for 3 seconds. FIG. 530(c) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A moves toward the own tank after the attack button 3710 has been operated or after the operation validity period has expired when the special lottery result is a loss. Thereafter, at timing t34, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss.
Note that, based on the operation of the attack button 3710 or the end of the valid operation period, a display effect in which a cannonball is fired from the gun turret of the own tank is executed, as in the example effect shown with reference to FIG. 514.

At timing t26, the operation of the mission button 3700 becomes valid and the bomb character A is displayed at the center of the display area. Further, a mock image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed at the upper left of the window displaying the lines of "Colonel Dyna".
FIG. 530(d) shows the sequence from timing t26 until the mission button 3700 is operated (t28 in FIG. 525(a)) or until the operation validity period of the mission button 3700 ends (t29 in FIG. 525(a)). This is an example of the display for the period up to ).

If the special lottery result is a jackpot, the display of bomb character A exploding will be 3 times from the timing when the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period for the mission button 3700 or from the timing when the operation valid period ends. It takes place for seconds. FIG. 530(e) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A explodes after the operation or after the operation validity period ends when the special lottery result is a jackpot. Thereafter, at timing t34, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.
On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a loss, the bomb character A will be moved to your own tank from the timing when the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period for the mission button 3700 or from the timing when the operation valid period ends. The image of the robot moving toward the target is displayed for 3 seconds. FIG. 530(f) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A moves toward the own tank after the operation of the mission button 3700 or after the valid period of operation has expired when the special lottery result is a loss. Thereafter, at timing t34, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss.
Note that, based on the operation of the mission button 3700 or the end of the valid operation period, a display effect in which a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the own tank is executed, as in the example effect shown with reference to FIG. 515.

If production pattern 05 is executed and the own tank rams into bomb character A in both the first period and the second period, at timing t26, the own tank with its turret and machine gun destroyed is displayed. The Rukoto.
FIG. 525(b) is a time chart showing the performance state executed in this case.

In this case, if the special lottery result is a loss, the bomb character A starts to be displayed at timing t26 and is displayed at that position until timing t29. FIG. 531(a) shows a display example from timing t26 to timing t29.
From timing t29 to timing t32, a display of bomb character A moving toward own tank is performed for 3 seconds. FIG. 531(b) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A is moving toward the own tank. Thereafter, at timing t34, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss.
On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, the display of the bomb character B starts at timing t26 and is displayed at that position until timing t29. FIG. 531(a) shows a display example from timing t26 to timing t29.
From timing t29 to timing t32, a display of bomb character B moving toward own tank is performed for 3 seconds. FIG. 531(b) shows a display mode in which bomb character B is moving toward own tank. Thereafter, at timing t34, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.
Note that in either case, neither the attack button 3710 nor the mission button 3700 becomes valid for accepting operations.

In this way, by giving appropriate operation instructions without being confused by incorrect operation instructions for the left lever 3720, the player can achieve the results shown in FIGS. 530(a), (b), (d), and (e). It becomes possible to operate special operation parts (attack button 3710 and mission button 3700), and special images (images of bomb character A exploding, images of the sunglasses worn by bomb character A tilting, images of "Dyna It becomes possible to visually recognize lines such as "Colonel" and "Might Sergeant". On the other hand, if the player obediently follows the operation instructions, the player will not be able to operate the special operation section as shown in FIGS. 531(a) and (d), and the special image will not be visible. I can't.
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 530(a) and (d) or FIG. 530(b) and (e), the player can visually confirm a special effect display depending on the manner of destruction of his own tank. .

Note that if the player does not operate the left lever 3720, the configuration may be such that the operation instructions given by "Colonel Dyna" or "Sergeant Mite" are automatically executed. Further, at this time, the image that is displayed when the player issues the operation instruction may be automatically displayed. Furthermore, if "Colonel Dyna" or "Sergeant Mite" does not give any operation instructions and the player does not operate the left lever 3720, either the forward tilt operation or the backward tilt operation will be automatically selected by lottery. may be displayed. For example, it may be configured such that a forward tilting operation is selected with a probability of 1/2 and a backward tilting operation is selected with a probability of 1/2, and a display corresponding to the selected operation is performed.

In the embodiment described above, the player is required to perform an operation that does not follow the operation instruction during at least one of the first period and the second period. Further, by performing an operation that does not follow the operation instructions, it is possible to generate a performance state in which the operation on a specific operation section becomes effective immediately before the decorative pattern stops, and a special image is displayed.
In this way, the player is given operating instructions in a manner different from the intended operation instructions, or in a manner that is contradictory, making it difficult for the player to understand what is the appropriate operation for the operation section. After estimating whether this is the case, the left lever 3720 is tilted. If the player is able to perform an appropriate operation contrary to the operating instructions, the player may be able to operate a special operation section or view a special image or effect display. becomes possible.
Additionally, in addition to performing an operation contrary to the operation instructions, a special image may be displayed only when a specific condition (for example, successfully performing an operation contrary to the operation instructions multiple times) is met. . With this configuration, the special display can be made visible only to the player who is able to properly operate the operation unit, rather than being displayed by chance by operating the operation unit appropriately. .

It may be configured such that the player can operate the left lever 3720 in the left-right direction to cause the own tank moving forward to avoid a mine field set on the road.
For example, an image of a real minefield and an image of a fake minefield may be displayed on the right or left side of the road, and the player may operate the left lever 3720 in the left or right direction to avoid the minefield. It's good to do that. If your own tank enters a real minefield, it is best to configure it so that your own tank's gun emplacement and machine gun are destroyed. Furthermore, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" and the lines of "Sergeant Mite" are configured to give incorrect operation instructions regarding the operation mode of the left lever 3720. It is preferable to configure such a production to be executable in the first period and the second period.

In this way, even if the left lever 3720 is operated appropriately to move the own tank while avoiding the minefield left and right, and the operation contrary to the operation instructions is successfully performed, the explanation will be made with reference to FIGS. 522 to 531, etc. Similar to the embodiment described above, it is possible to allow the player to operate a special operation unit and to visually recognize a special image or effect display.

The effect table shown in FIG. 522 had a first period and a second period, but it is configured to have only the first period, and no bomb character appears in the first period. A table may be adopted in which any one of a performance pattern, a performance pattern in which bomb character A appears, and a performance pattern in which bomb character B appears is selected.
In this case, it is preferable that if the own tank rams into the bomb character A, both the gun turret and the machine gun of the own tank are destroyed.

The effect table shown in FIG. 522 has a first period and a second period, but a effect can be created using a effect table configured to provide three or more periods in which the bomb character can be displayed. May be executed.
In addition, we perform pre-reading of suspension, and based on the pre-reading results, we set multiple periods in which the bomb character can be displayed over multiple decorative pattern fluctuation displays (the bomb character can be displayed in one decorative pattern fluctuation). (You may set one period at a time, or you may set a period in which an arbitrary number of bomb characters can be displayed in one fluctuation of the decorative pattern), or stop the fluctuation display corresponding to the reservation targeted for pre-reading. It may be configured so that the effect display shown with reference to FIG. 525, FIG. 530, and FIG. 531 is executed at the last minute.

Further, although three levels of display modes for own tanks are provided, two levels or four or more levels may be provided. In addition, as a change in the display mode, we have shown an example where the destruction of the own tank progresses in stages, but when the own tank is repaired, the destruction stage of the own tank returns to a stage where it is relatively undestroyed. may be configured to be executable.

In the first period or the second period, an example was shown in which the bomb character does not appear, the bomb character A appears, and the bomb character B appears. In this case, either bomb character A or bomb character B may be configured to be always displayed. For example, the table shown in FIG. 522 may be modified to adopt a table consisting only of effect pattern 05, effect pattern 06, effect pattern 08, and effect pattern 09. With such a configuration, one of the bomb characters is displayed in each period of the effect pattern, so that the feeling of tension when operating the left lever 3720 can be increased.

Note that in the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 526 to 531, display examples in which the bomb character is displayed are mainly illustrated, but in a period in which the bomb character is not displayed, the display example shown in FIG. 526 ( As shown in a), it is preferable to display the own tank character moving forward.

A special image may be displayed only when a specific condition is met. For example, a special display may be displayed only when an operation that does not follow the operation instructions is successfully performed multiple times. Further, even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation instructions, it is preferable to perform a predetermined lottery and display a special display with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/5). With this configuration, a special image will not be displayed by chance simply by operating the operation panel, and the difficulty level for displaying a special image can be increased, so that a special image will not be displayed by chance. It is possible to increase the surprise and joy that the player feels when the is displayed.

When a special image is displayed based on the operation of the left lever 3720, a suppressed state may be set in which the volume of the variable effect sound is reduced at least during the period in which the special image is displayed.
Further, when a special image is displayed based on the operation of the left lever 3720, a special sound (for example, a special explosion sound, etc.) is output at least during the period when the special image is displayed. It's okay.
Furthermore, the suppression of the variable performance sound and the output of the special sound may be performed simultaneously.
In this way, by suppressing the variable effect sound and outputting a special sound in response to the display of a special image, it is possible to prevent the display of a special image from being disturbed by the variable effect sound. Moreover, the display of a special image can be made more conspicuous by outputting a special sound.

It should be noted that the fluctuating performance sound is a sound in which a predetermined piece of music is played in accordance with the fluctuation of the decorative symbols, and is perceived by the player as background music. For example, a song consisting of the voice sung by a predetermined singer and the sounds of multiple musical instruments is played for several minutes, and during that time, the variation of the decorative pattern (for example, all the variation results of the decorative pattern are non-reach misses, and the variation time is 10% on average. ) is performed multiple times. By outputting such variable effect sound to the player, it is possible to increase interest in the game. Note that a plurality of such songs may be prepared in advance, and the configuration may be such that the playback of a different song starts at the timing when the playback of a certain song ends. Alternatively, in accordance with a change in the gaming state, the music that was being played up to that point may be faded out during playback, and another music that is different from the music that was being played up to that point may be played.

The configuration is such that a game state in which a special image is displayed occurs when the left lever 3720 is operated properly without being fooled by the operation instructions, but the display period of the special image and the attack The display period of the simulated image imitating the button 3710 is configured so that it can overlap, and a special image (such as an image of a bomb exploding) and the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 are displayed at the same time. An example is shown below.

532(a) to 532(c) show other display examples that can be displayed at the timing when the diagram shown in FIG. 530(a) is displayed.
In each of Figures 532(a) to 532(c), the display priority of the image of diagonally tilted semi-transparent sunglasses is set to the window displaying the lines of "Colonel Dyna" and the window displaying the lines of "Colonel Dyna". The display priority is higher than that of the image, the image of own tank, the image of bomb character A, and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710. Furthermore, the images of translucent sunglasses are displayed in one case as shown in FIG. 532(a), in a case where two images are displayed as shown in FIG. 532(b), and in a case as shown in FIG. 532(c). There are cases where three are displayed as shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 530(a), when the translucent sunglasses image is displayed, the expectation of winning is higher when the translucent sunglasses image is displayed than when the translucent sunglasses image is not displayed. It is determined whether or not to display the image. Furthermore, the display mode of the translucent sunglasses images is determined such that the greater the number of translucent sunglasses images, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

For example, the expectation level when the display state shown in FIG. 530(a) is reached is 10%, the expectation level is 30% when the display state is shown in FIG. 532(a), and the display shown in FIG. 532(b) is set. It is preferable to display the translucent sunglasses image so that the expectation level is 50% when the display state is reached, and the expectation level is 80% when the display state shown in FIG. 532(c) is reached.

The display of the translucent sunglasses image starts at timing t26 and continues until the attack button 3710 is operated or until the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 ends. Note that if the bomb character A can be exploded (that is, if the special lottery result is a jackpot), the display of the translucent sunglasses image may be continued until the display of the explosion image is finished.

With such a configuration, the same effects as the above-described embodiment can be achieved. In addition, since the semi-transparent sunglasses image (special image) is displayed in front of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, the special image that was able to be seen is replaced by the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710. can be prevented from being hidden by

FIG. 532(d) is a modification of the display example shown with reference to FIG. 532(c). As in this display example, the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 may be displayed in front of the translucent sunglasses image (special image).
Alternatively, the display mode shown in FIG. 532(c) and the display mode shown in FIG. 532(d) may be alternately displayed. For example, the display mode may be changed every 0.5 seconds from timing t26 to timing t29.
By adopting such a configuration, both the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and the translucent sunglasses image can be made to stand out.
Note that the bomb character A before or after the explosion may be displayed in the same display manner as the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710.

Note that the image of semi-transparent sunglasses does not have to indicate the level of expectation. In this case, a difference may be provided in the appearance rate of the displayed images.

In the production examples shown with reference to FIGS. 525 and 530, the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 can be operated once from timing t26 to timing t29. A modified embodiment that can accept operations on the mission button 3700 or the mission button 3700 multiple times will be described with reference to FIG. 533.

533(a) to 533(c) are display examples when the attack button 3710 is configured to be operable multiple times (for example, 5 times) from timing t26 to timing t29. Further, a plurality of simulated images (for example, five) imitating the attack button 3710 are displayed depending on the number of times the attack button 3710 can be operated. Moreover, each time the attack button 3710 is operated once, the display of the simulated image displayed furthest from among the simulated images imitating the attack button 3710 ends. When the attack button 3710 is operated, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, an image of bomb character A being hit by a shell and exploding is displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2). It is a good idea to do this. Further, when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot and the fifth operation is performed, an exploded image may be displayed with a 100% probability. Note that if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the bomb character A will not be hit by the shell and the image of the explosion will not be displayed.
FIG. 533(a) shows a display example at timing t26.
Further, FIG. 533(b) shows a state in which when the attack button 3710 is operated for the third time, a lottery with a predetermined probability is won and an exploded image is displayed.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the display shown in FIG. 533(c) will be displayed for 3 seconds from the timing when the attack button 3710 is operated five times or from the timing when the operation validity period ends. state.
Note that when the exploded image is displayed, if the number of times the attack button 3710 can be operated remains, the remaining number of operations will be accepted, and in response to this operation, the exploded image will be displayed. The aspect may also be configured to be displayed in an exploded manner.
When an explosion image is displayed, it is not necessarily necessary to operate the attack button 3710, so a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 may be displayed with a lower display priority than an exploded image. In FIG. 533(b), a display example is shown in which the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed with a lower display priority than the exploded image.

FIGS. 533(d) to 533(f) are display examples when the mission button 3700 is configured to be operable multiple times (for example, 5 times) from timing t26 to timing t29. Furthermore, a plurality of simulated images (for example, five) imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed depending on the number of times the mission button 3700 can be operated. Furthermore, each time the mission button 3700 is operated once, the display of the closest simulated image of the simulated images imitating the mission button 3700 ends. When the mission button 3700 is operated, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, an image of bomb character A being hit by a shell and exploding is displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3). It is a good idea to do so. Note that if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the exploded image will not be displayed.
FIG. 533(d) shows a display example at timing t26.
Further, FIG. 533(d) shows a state in which when the mission button 3700 is operated for the third time, a lottery with a predetermined probability is won and an exploded image is displayed.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the display shown in FIG. 533(f) is displayed for 3 seconds from the timing when the mission button 3700 is operated five times or from the timing when the valid operation period ends. state.
Note that when the exploded image is displayed, if the number of times the mission button 3700 can be operated remains, the remaining number of operations will be accepted, and the exploded image will be displayed according to this operation. The aspect may also be configured to be displayed in an exploded manner.
When an explosion image is displayed, an operation on the mission button 3700 is not necessarily required, so a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 may be displayed with a lower display priority than the explosion image. In FIG. 533(e), a display example is shown in which the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed with a lower display priority than the exploded image.

In addition, in the production examples shown with reference to Figures 533(d) to 533(f), "Colonel Dyna"'s line is an incorrect operation, "Fire the special machine gun! Press the defense button!" It is an instruction. Therefore, the player needs to carefully observe the production situation and operate the mission button 3700. If the mission button 3700 can be operated, a special image of the bomb exploding can be viewed.

Next, an example of a performance that combines the example of performance shown with reference to FIGS. 533(a) to 533(c) and the example of performance shown with reference to FIGS. 533(d) to 533(f) is shown in FIG. This will be explained with reference to 534. In this embodiment, when the gun turret of the own tank is not destroyed and timing t26 comes, operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 becomes valid at the same time. At this time, the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 can each accept operations a predetermined number of times (for example, five times each). Further, a predetermined number of simulated images simulating the attack button 3710 and a predetermined number of simulated images simulating the mission button 3700 are displayed.

FIG. 534(a) shows a display example in which five simulated images imitating the attack button 3710 and five simulated images imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed. Note that, as described above, the operation validity period may start from timing t26.
In this state, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated, a lottery with a predetermined probability (1/2 for the attack button 3710, 1/2 for the attack button 3710, Regarding the mission button 3700, an image of the explosion is displayed depending on whether or not 1/3) is hit.

FIG. 534(b) shows a state in which an exploded image is displayed in response to the third operation of the attack button 3710. Further, FIG. 534(d) shows a state in which an exploded image is displayed in response to the third operation of the mission button 3700. The display examples shown in FIGS. 534(b) and 534(d) can be displayed when the special lottery result is a jackpot, respectively. Note that when the exploded image is displayed, if the number of times the attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 can be operated remains, the remaining number of operations will be accepted, and the exploded image will be displayed according to the operation. The display mode may be configured to be displayed in an even more explosive mode.
For example, if you win a predetermined lottery (1/3) based on the operation on the mission button 3700 in the display state shown in FIG. 534(b), the explosion mode in the display state shown in FIG. 534(d) The display mode may be changed to Alternatively, if a predetermined lottery (1/2) is won based on the operation on the attack button 3710 in the display state shown in FIG. 534(d), the display state is changed to the explosion state shown in FIG. 534(b). may be changed.
In addition, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, even if you continue to miss the designated lottery by operating the mission button 3700 and attack button 3710, if you operate the mission button 3700 and attack button 3710 for the 10th time in total, you will receive 100% It is preferable to display an exploded image in a mode corresponding to the last button operated with a probability of .
When an explosion image is displayed, it is not necessary to operate the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700, so a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 or a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 has display priority over the exploded image. It is better to display the degree lower. In FIGS. 534(b) and 534(d), a display example is shown in which a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed with lower display priority than the exploded image. ing.
In addition, if the special lottery result is a loss, the attack button 3710 is operated five times and the mission button 3700 is operated five times during the valid operation period, or for 3 seconds from the timing when the valid operation period ends, as shown in Fig. 534. The display state shown in (c) is obtained.
In the production example shown with reference to FIG. 534(a), "Colonel Dyna"'s line is an incorrect operation instruction, "Fire the special machine gun! Press the defense button!". Therefore, the player needs to carefully observe the production situation and operate the mission button 3700.

In the production example explained with reference to FIG. 530(d), the lines of "Colonel Dyna" are to instruct the operation of the mission button 3700, but the line is "Shoot the special machine gun! Press the mission button! Instead of the line ``Shoot the special machine gun! Press the defense button!'', the incorrect line may be displayed.
In addition, the example of presentation explained with reference to FIG. 530(a), the example of presentation explained with reference to FIG. 532(a), the example of presentation explained with reference to FIG. 533(a), and the example of presentation explained with reference to FIG. In the production example referenced and explained, the line from "Sergeant Mite" is to instruct the operation of the attack button 3710, but the line is "It's a large bomb! Please attack with the attack button!" Alternatively, the configuration may be such that an incorrect line such as "It's a large bomb! Attack with the defense button!" is displayed.
With such a configuration, the player is required to carefully observe the production situation, so it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. Note that the player can recognize the operation unit to be operated by the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710.

In addition, the simulated images of the attack button 3710 and mission button 3700 showed the operation parts that should be operated, but these also had lines from "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" (because they gave incorrect instructions). In the same way as in the above case, a simulated image may be displayed that instructs an operation unit different from the operation unit that is supposed to be operated. In this case, when an appropriate operation is performed, a display may be made to fire a cannonball or a bullet to indicate to the player that an appropriate display has been performed.

Note that although a display example is shown in which simulated images of the left lever 3720, attack button 3710, and mission button 3700 are displayed, these may not be displayed. In this case, the player may need to operate the control section in a manner that is contrary to or different from the operation instructions based on the type of bomb character, the state of destruction of his own tank, etc., so the player must perform appropriate operations. Since the difficulty of performing the operations increases, it is possible to increase the interest felt when the operations are performed appropriately.

Referring to FIGS. 533 and 534, even in the period after timing t26, if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation instructions, a special image (such as an explosion image or an image with tilted sunglasses) may be displayed. An example of a performance that generates a performance state is shown. Such an embodiment also provides the same effects as the embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 522 to 532.

Note that it is preferable that the time for displaying the special image that violates the operation instruction and the time for displaying the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 be longer than the time for displaying the special image. With such a configuration, the player can enjoy special images.

Note that the special image displayed when an operation is performed in a manner contrary to the operation instruction or in a manner different from the operation instruction is preferably displayed as a larger image than the operation instruction. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 532, an image (image of large translucent sunglasses shown in FIG. 532(c)) that is larger than an image giving an operation instruction (an image of lines instructing an incorrect lever operation) is used. images) can be displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's interest in displaying a more special image.

In this embodiment, an operation instruction display such as "forward tilt" or "backward tilt" is performed as an operation instruction for the left lever 3720, but if no operation instruction is given (FIG. 526(g), FIG. 528(g) In the case of the display example shown in ), the content of the operation can also be estimated based on the display mode of the displayed bomb character. A special image may be displayed only when the player is able to properly operate the left lever 3720 in such a more difficult operation situation. For example, in the display example shown in FIG. 530(b), there are cases where an image of sunglasses tilted is displayed and cases where it is not, and when an operation instruction for attack button 3710 is not given, an operation for attack button 3710 is When the sunglasses are tilted, an image (special image) in which the sunglasses are tilted may be displayed with a predetermined probability (1/10).

Note that when operating the left lever 3720 or the various buttons described above, the operation reception sound that directly corresponds to the operation of the left lever 3720 or the various buttons described above is intentionally not output. It may be configured such that a special sound corresponding to the operation is output only when such special conditions are met and a special image is displayed. With such a configuration, the player will feel that the special image is displayed even more special. Note that a similar configuration may be adopted for displaying special images in the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 532 to 534.

Note that as an operation contrary to the operation instruction, an example of a production in which the left lever 3720 is tilted in a different direction and an example of a production in which a button different from the instructed button is operated are given, but other embodiments may be used. For example, when the player is instructed to press and hold the attack button 3710, repeatedly pressing the attack button 3710 may be adopted as an operation contrary to the operation instruction. Alternatively, when the operation of the attack button 3710 is instructed, operating the defense button 3740 may be adopted as an operation contrary to the operation instruction.

In addition, we have shown an example of a performance in which a special display change is given when an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display is performed, but by giving such a special display change, the expectation of a jackpot is indicated. It may be configured as follows. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the expectation level of the jackpot is not indicated. Alternatively, among the above-mentioned special display changes, some display changes may indicate the expectation of a jackpot, while other display changes may not indicate the expectation of a jackpot. Good too.

In the present embodiment, the operation acceptance period of the left lever 3720 is started after the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, but the operation acceptance period of the left lever 3720 is started at the same time as the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. You may start it. In this case, at timing t0, a display as shown in FIG. 526(b) may be performed to start "bomb character reach".

Further, based on the pending pre-reading, an effect similar to the "bomb character reach" shown with reference to FIGS. 526 to 534 may be performed over a plurality of variable displays of decorative symbols. In this case, it is preferable to display the bomb character A and the bomb character B once in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is executed before the variable display of the decorative pattern that is the target of pre-reading. Then, during the entire period when the decorative pattern is fluctuating and being displayed, an effect is performed that accepts the operation of the left lever 3720 in response to the displayed bomb character, and during the entire period when the decorative pattern is not changing, the operation of the left lever 3720 is accepted. It would be best to provide a corresponding display effect. For example, the production example performed from timing t6 to timing t11 in FIGS. 523 and 524 is executed while the decorative symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner, and the production example performed from timing t11 to timing t15 is performed while the decorative symbols are not fluctuating. It's a good idea to do this. Then, during the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern that is the target of pre-reading to the end of the static display, it is preferable to perform the effect that is performed from timing t26 to timing t35 in FIG. 525.

It should be noted that it may be configured such that when the player's own tank's gun turret is destroyed and the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display, the destroyed turret becomes revived.
Further, it may be configured such that when the player's own tank's machine gun is destroyed and the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display, the destroyed machine gun is restored.
Further, it may be configured such that when the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display while the gun turret of the own tank is not destroyed, the player's own tank becomes more upgraded. For example, a display change may be provided in which the number of turrets increases one by one, the color of the turret changes, or the turret changes into an extra-large turret.
In this case, instead of setting the timing at which the bomb character can appear only twice as shown in FIG. 522, the number of times the bomb character can appear is increased, such as five times, to further improve the interest of the production. I can do it. In addition, special effects such as a destroyed machine gun being revived or an own tank being upgraded can be made visible to the player.

The display change may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation of a jackpot, or may be configured such that the display change is provided merely as a performance and does not indicate the degree of expectation.
For example, the level of expectation may be expressed by the number of turrets, the color of the turrets, and the size of the turrets. Alternatively, the number of turrets, the color of the turrets, and the size of the turrets may be used to suggest or notify the current game state or the game state that will occur.

The bomb character A or the bomb character B may be configured to be always displayed in the first period, the second period, and the variable display in the look-ahead effect. With such a configuration, operation instructions are always shown to the player, making it possible to create a sense of tension in the player, thereby increasing interest.

Although we have shown an example in which a special display change is given by operating the left lever 3720 without following the instructed operation details, an operation that is contrary to the instructed operation details or an operation that is different from the instructed operation details has been shown. It may be configured such that a special display change is given depending on the display.

Although we have shown an example in which both "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Mite" give operational instructions, it may also be configured so that only one character gives operational instructions in a series of "Bomb Character Reach". . In this case, it is preferable for the other character to display a line such as "Um, munyamunya."

In this way, in ``Bomb Character Reach,'' a special display change is applied when an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display is performed, making it possible to give the player a special sense of satisfaction. Become.

Conventionally, there have been cases in which a predetermined image is displayed to suggest the result of a special lottery based on an operation by a player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2010-046210). Incidentally, the number of times such operations are accepted and the number of times displays are performed in response to the acceptance of operations are determined in advance. Further, the period during which the player can perform operations is limited to a predetermined period, and the display mode cannot be freely changed by the player's free operation. Further, the display time of the effects displayed in this manner is constant, and there is room for improvement in this respect as well. In the embodiment shown below, it is possible to accept multiple operations during the valid operation period, and the display time of the image displayed based on the operation is set to be long or short, and depending on the length of the displayed time, special An embodiment that makes it possible to suggest the lottery result will be described.

The "sudden tank effect" that can be executed as a look-ahead effect pattern will be described below with reference to FIG. 535 and the like. Note that whether or not to perform the "sudden tank effect" is determined based on pre-reading the pending contents on the peripheral control board 1510.
FIG. 535 shows the types of performance patterns that can be selected, the conditions under which the performance patterns are selected, and the period during which the look-ahead performance is executed (specifically, how many times the display of decorative patterns changes) in the "sudden tank performance". This is a table showing whether the program is executed with

The look-ahead performance pattern 01 is a performance pattern that can be selected when the number of reservations is 1 to 4 when the previous fluctuating display of decorative symbols ends and the fluctuating display of decorative symbols starts anew. The look-ahead effect pattern 01 is an effect pattern in which a "sudden tank effect" is executed in the variable display related to the suspension at the start of the variable display. Note that the look-ahead effect pattern 01 is executed only in one variable display period, so strictly speaking it is not a look-ahead effect, but for convenience, it will be referred to as a look-ahead effect.

The look-ahead performance pattern 02 is a performance pattern that can be selected when the number of reservations is 1 to 3 when the previous fluctuating display of decorative symbols ends and the fluctuating display of decorative symbols starts anew. The look-ahead effect pattern 02 is an effect pattern in which a "sudden tank effect" is executed in the variable display related to the hold at the start of the variable display and the variable display related to the first hold.

The look-ahead performance pattern 03 is a performance pattern that can be selected when the number of reservations is 1 to 2 when the previous variable display of decorative symbols is finished and the variable display of decorative symbols is newly started. The look-ahead performance pattern 03 is a performance pattern in which a "sudden tank performance" is executed in the variable display related to the hold at the start of the variable display, the variable display related to the first hold, and the variable display related to the second hold.

The look-ahead performance pattern 04 is a performance pattern that can be selected when the number of reservations is 1 to 3 when the previous variable display of decorative symbols is finished and the variable display of decorative symbols is newly started. In the look-ahead effect pattern 04, the "sudden tank effect" is executed in the variable display related to the relevant hold at the start of the variable display, the variable display related to the first hold, the variable display related to the second hold, and the variable display related to the third hold. This is a performance pattern.

In addition, in performance patterns that perform multiple fluctuating displays such as look-ahead performance pattern 02 to look-ahead performance pattern 04, for the final fluctuating display when the "sudden tank performance" is executed, the result of the special lottery is the difference between a jackpot and a loss. Either one is fine, but for the special lottery results for the intermediate variable display other than the last variable display where the "sudden tank effect" is executed, if all of them are losers, the pre-read effect based on the pre-read effect pattern 02 to the pre-read effect pattern 04 will be applied. It is a good idea to do this.

FIG. 536 is a table showing three display effect patterns displayed in the "sudden tank effect". Further, FIG. 537 is a time chart showing the effect mode when the prefetch effect pattern 01 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 537(a), in the "sudden tank performance", the time during which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is 14 seconds from timing t0 to timing t14. Further, the time during which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is one second. Further, at timing t0, the operation reception of the attack button 3710 becomes valid, and at timing t14 when the variable display of the decorative pattern ends, the operation reception of the attack button 3710 becomes invalid. During a period (timing t0 to timing t14) during which operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 is valid, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed in the display area. Below, with reference to FIG. 538, a description will be given of the performance mode displayed in the display area based on the player's operation on the attack button 3710.

FIG. 538 is a diagram showing a display mode in the display area at a predetermined timing in the time chart described with reference to FIG. 537.

FIG. 538(a) shows a state in which an image of the own tank is displayed in the display area at timing t0. The decorative symbols (3, ↓, 3) in the reach state are displayed in the upper left of the display area, the image of your own tank facing forward is displayed in the lower center of the display area, and the image of your own tank facing forward is displayed in the upper center of the display area. An image of the enemy tank facing its direction, an image of the road the tank is moving on in the center of the display area in the horizontal direction, an image of the horizon and sky at the top of the display area, and a character for the production at the bottom right of the display area. In the lower left of the display area, there is a window image surrounding the dialogue image of Colonel Dyna, and a window image surrounding the dialogue image of Sergeant Might, who is a production character, and a window image surrounding the dialogue image of Sergeant Might. A simulated image simulating an attack button 3710 is displayed on the right side of the enclosing window image.
In this manner, in the "sudden tank effect", at timing t0, the image of the own tank and the image of the enemy tank are suddenly displayed, and operation reception for the attack button 3710 becomes valid.

As shown in FIG. 537(a), if the attack button 3710 is not operated during the valid operation period, the display of the image of the enemy tank continues until timing t14. Further, at timing t14, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, after the operation of the attack button 3710 by the player is detected, an effect display corresponding to the operation is immediately executed. FIG. 536 is a table showing performance patterns executed based on the operation on the attack button 3710.
Furthermore, FIGS. 537(b) to 537(d) are time charts showing a state in which a production pattern corresponding to the operation is executed based on the reception of the operation on the attack button 3710 at timing t3.
Furthermore, FIGS. 537(e) to 537(g) are time points showing a state in which a production pattern corresponding to the operation is executed based on the reception of the operation on the attack button 3710 at two timings, timing t3 and timing t8. It is a chart.

FIG. 536 shows the effect patterns selected in response to the operation of the attack button 3710.
When smoke display effect pattern 01 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. At the same time, a smoke image showing smoke rising from the enemy tank will be displayed for 1 second in the upper right corner of the image of the enemy tank being destroyed. After that, an image of the enemy tank being destroyed is displayed for one second.
When smoke display effect pattern 02 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for two seconds. At the same time, a smoke image showing smoke rising from the enemy tank will be displayed for 2 seconds in the upper right corner of the image of the enemy tank being destroyed. After that, an image of the enemy tank being destroyed is displayed for one second.
When smoke display effect pattern 03 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for 3 seconds. At the same time, a smoke image showing smoke rising from the enemy tank will be displayed for 3 seconds in the upper right corner of the image of the enemy tank being destroyed. After that, an image of the enemy tank being destroyed is displayed for one second.

The appearance ratio is determined in advance by the smoke display performance pattern 01 to smoke display performance pattern 03 so as to indicate the degree of expectation that the fluctuating display result will be a jackpot. The expectation level is 30% when smoke display performance pattern 01 is executed, the expectation level is 50% when smoke display performance pattern 02 is executed, and the expectation level is 100% when smoke display performance pattern 03 is executed. It is.

FIG. 537(b) is a time chart showing an example of the effect in which the smoke display effect pattern 01 is executed from timing t3 to timing t5 based on the operation on the attack button 3710.
FIG. 537(c) is a time chart showing an example of the effect in which the smoke display effect pattern 02 is executed from timing t3 to timing t6 based on the operation on the attack button 3710.
FIG. 537(d) is a time chart showing an example of the effect in which the smoke display effect pattern 03 is executed from timing t3 to timing t7 based on the operation on the attack button 3710.

FIG. 538(b) shows a display example in the display area when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t3 in the production examples shown in FIGS. 537(b) to 537(d). In FIG. 538(b), an image of a shell being fired at an enemy tank and the shell exploding, and an image of the destroyed enemy tank are displayed in the display area.

The display shown in FIG. 538(b) ends in less than 1 second (for example, 0.1 seconds), and the display state shown in FIG. 538(c) is reached. In this display state, the enemy tank's gun battery is destroyed, and a smoke image showing smoke rising from the enemy tank is displayed at the upper right of the image of the destroyed enemy tank.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 537(b), smoke display effect pattern 01 is selected, and one second after the display state shown in FIG. 538(c) is reached, the smoke image shown in FIG. 538(d) is displayed. is not displayed. Also, here, "Colonel Dinah's" lines are also displayed differently, indicating that expectations are low.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 537(c), since smoke display effect pattern 02 is selected, a display state in which no smoke image is displayed will be achieved 2 seconds after the display state shown in FIG. 538(c) is reached. (Illustration omitted). The line from "Colonel Dyna" that will be displayed two seconds later will be "Is the power of the new gun pretty good?" Here, ``Colonel Dinah'''s line indicates that expectations are moderate.

In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 537(d), smoke display production pattern 03 is selected, so that 3 seconds after the display state shown in FIG. 538(c) is reached, the smoke image shown in FIG. 538(e) is displayed. is not displayed. In addition, the lines of "Colonel Dinah" are also displayed differently, indicating that expectations are high.

In this way, it is suggested that the longer the smoke image is displayed (one second, two seconds, or three seconds), the higher the expectation of a jackpot.
Therefore, the player visually recognizes the display area, expecting that the smoke image will be displayed for a long time.
Furthermore, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" that are displayed when the display of the smoke image ends are displayed in correspondence with each smoke display performance pattern. Therefore, the line ``Colonel Dinah'' also suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot. "Colonel Dyna's" lines correspond to the display time of the smoke image, so even if you don't know the exact display time of the smoke image, you can know the level of expectation and don't bother checking the display time of the smoke image. It is possible to make even players who have nothing to do and have a low level of concentration on the game feel interested in the game.

One second after the smoke image stops being displayed, a new image of an enemy tank is displayed. For example, in the case of the production example shown in FIG. 537(b), a new image of an enemy tank is displayed at timing t5. In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 537(c), a new image of an enemy tank is displayed at timing t6. In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 537(d), a new image of an enemy tank is displayed at timing t7. FIG. 538(f) is a presentation example showing a state in which an image of a new enemy tank is displayed.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 537(b) to 537(d), the attack button 3710 is not operated after that, and the variable display of decorative symbols ends at timing t14.

FIG. 539(a) shows a display example that is displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot in the production examples shown in FIGS. 537(b) to 537(d). There is. In the figure, the decorative pattern is shown stopped at "333" indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. In addition, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Mite" are also displayed in a manner that notifies you of a jackpot.
FIG. 539(b) shows a display example that is displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a loss in the production examples shown in FIGS. 537(b) to 537(d). There is. In the figure, the decorative pattern is shown stopped at "343" indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss. Furthermore, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Mite" are also displayed in a manner that notifies them of their loss.

With reference to FIG. 537(b) to FIG. 537(d), an example of the effect is shown when the attack button 3710 is accepted for operation at timing t3. It is possible to execute any of the smoke display performance patterns by accepting an operation from.

In this way, by accepting the operation from the player not only once but multiple times from timing t0 to timing t14, it is possible to execute the smoke display performance pattern multiple times.

FIGS. 537(e) to 537(g) show examples of effects when it is detected that the attack button 3710 has been operated at two timings, timing t3 and timing t8.
FIG. 537(e) shows an example of a performance in which smoke display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t3 and smoke display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t8.
FIG. 537(f) shows an example of a performance in which smoke display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t3 and smoke display performance pattern 02 is started at timing t8.
FIG. 537(g) shows an example of a performance in which smoke display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t3 and smoke display performance pattern 03 is started at timing t8.
Note that even if the smoke display effect pattern is executed multiple times, each time the effect pattern is executed, the same display as the effect example described with reference to FIGS. 537(b) to 537(d) is displayed. It will be done.

Note that if it is detected that the player has operated the attack button 3710 while a certain smoke display effect pattern is being executed, after the smoke display effect pattern that is being executed ends, the screen shown in FIG. 538(f) After the display state shown in FIG. 538(b) continues for one second, one of the smoke display effect patterns may be automatically executed, resulting in the display state shown in FIG. 538(b) and thereafter. For example, if the player operates the attack button 3710 three times in a short period of time (for example, one second) while an image of an enemy tank that has not been destroyed is displayed, a smoke display pattern will be automatically executed three times. will be done.

An example was shown in which the "sudden tank effect" is executed in one variable display when the look-ahead effect pattern 01 is selected. The execution mode of "tank production" will be explained.
In the ``sudden tank effect'', the effect is executed over a maximum of four variable displays, but the variable time required for each variable display is 14 seconds, and the variable stop time is 1 second.

Below, with reference to FIGS. 540 and 541, an example of the effect when the prefetch effect pattern 02 is executed will be described. The look-ahead performance pattern 02 is a performance pattern in which a "sudden tank performance" is executed over two variable displays.
In this case, the target whose expectation level is suggested by the look-ahead effect is the special lottery result corresponding to the second variable display. Moreover, the special lottery results corresponding to the variable display other than the second time are losers. This point is the same for the pre-read effect pattern 03 and the pre-read effect pattern 04.
In addition, in the look-ahead effect pattern 02 to look-ahead effect pattern 04, if the display of the smoke image or the image of the destroyed enemy tank starts and ends during the variable display of the decorative pattern, refer to FIGS. 537 and 538. A display similar to the production example described above is performed.

Below, the display mode of the smoke image and the image of the destroyed enemy tank during the static display of the decorative pattern will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 540(a), if the attack button 3710 is not operated at all, the display state shown in FIG. 541(a) is reached from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 540(b), when smoke display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t12 based on the operation of attack button 3710, the effect by smoke display effect pattern 01 ends at timing t14, and at timing t14. The display state shown in FIG. 541(b) is reached from timing t15 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 540(c), when the smoke display effect pattern 02 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the smoke image and the destroyed enemy tank are displayed from timing t14 to timing t15. Since the image is displayed, the display state shown in FIG. 541(c) is reached from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 540(d), when the smoke display effect pattern 03 is started at timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the smoke image and the destroyed enemy tank are displayed from timing t14 to timing t15. Since the image is displayed, the display state shown in FIG. 541(c) is reached from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 540(e), when smoke display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15. Therefore, the display state shown in FIG. 541(d) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 540(f), when the smoke display effect pattern 03 is started at timing t11 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15. Therefore, the display state shown in FIG. 541(e) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.

Incidentally, at timing t15, variable display of a new decorative pattern is started. At this time, the display of decorative symbols is also started in a display mode forming a reach state such as "3↓3".

With reference to FIG. 540, the display mode of the smoke image and the destroyed enemy tank image when the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that occurred before the hold that was the target of the look-ahead effect is stopped has been described. , with reference to FIG. 542, the display mode of the smoke image and the destroyed enemy tank image when the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that is the target of the look-ahead effect is stopped will be described.

542(b) to 542(f) each show an example of a performance in which the execution period of the selected smoke display performance pattern overlaps with the stop display period of the decorative pattern (timing t29 to timing t30). In the production examples shown in FIGS. 542(b) to 542(f), even during the execution period of the selected smoke display production pattern, the smoke display production pattern in progress is stopped at timing t29, and the decoration This shows an example of a performance in which symbols are displayed in a stopped state. From timing t29 to timing t30, the display state is as shown in FIG. 539(a) or FIG. 539(b) based on the special lottery result.

On the other hand, only when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the currently executed smoke display effect pattern may be executed for a predetermined execution period. In this case, although the jackpot game state starts from timing t30, timings t30 to t35 are the opening state of the jackpot game, and the opening/closing operation of the jackpot opening 2005 is preferably started from timing t35. FIGS. 543(b) to 543(f) show examples of effects in which a smoke image or an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed while the variation of decorative symbols is stopped or during a jackpot game.

On the other hand, it may be configured such that the currently executed smoke display effect pattern is executed for a predetermined execution period only when the result of the special lottery is a loss. In this case, although the next variable display starts from timing t30, the tank effect is suddenly continued even in the next variable display, and the "sudden tank effect" is configured to end in the middle of the variable display. good.
Figures 543(b) to 543(f) show examples of effects in which a smoke image or an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed when the decorative pattern stops changing or when the next changing display starts. .

In this way, in the "sudden tank effect" according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accept an operation on the attack button 3710 (operation section) at the same time as the decorative pattern starts changing, and display effects based on the operation on the operation section can be performed. The number of times the display effect is performed is not predetermined, and the display effect can be performed an arbitrary number of times based on the player's intention, so that the player has a strong interest in operating the operation unit. I can do it. In addition to simply operating the operation panel, pay attention to the display time of the smoke image (specific display) that is displayed in response to the operation (it is suggested that the longer the display time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. This can further improve interest. Furthermore, since the variation time of the decorative pattern is set to be short, it is possible to create a sense of tension in the display time of the smoke image displayed in response to the operation on the operation unit and the operation. In addition, as a look-ahead effect, by configuring this display effect to be executable over the fluctuations of multiple decorative patterns, the degree of expectation indicated by the display time of the smoke image is determined by the degree of expectation regarding the change of any decorative pattern. It is possible to increase the player's interest in whether or not there is such a thing.

Although three smoke display effect patterns are shown in FIG. 536, the "sudden tank effect" may be executed using a table in which only smoke display effect pattern 01 and smoke display effect pattern 02 are executed. Alternatively, a "sudden tank effect" can be executed using a table in which only smoke display effect pattern 01 and smoke display effect pattern 03 are executed, or a table in which only smoke display effect pattern 02 and smoke display effect pattern 03 are executed. Good too.

Furthermore, as a smoke display performance pattern 04, a performance pattern in which a destruction image and a smoke image are displayed for 4 seconds, and then only the destruction image is displayed for 1 second, and a performance pattern with a jackpot expectation of 100%, and a smoke display performance pattern 05, Either or both of the performance patterns in which the expected jackpot is 100% may be adopted in a performance mode in which the destruction image and the smoke image are displayed for 5 seconds, and then only the destruction image is displayed for 1 second. In this way, by adopting a performance pattern with a long performance execution period, the player can almost certainly notice that the level of expectation is 100%, and it is possible to increase interest.

With reference to FIGS. 535 to 543, an embodiment has been shown in which the longer the display time of the smoke image (specific display), the higher the expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a jackpot. An embodiment modified such that the shorter the display time of the image (image of a destroyed enemy tank), the higher the expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot will be described with reference to FIGS. 544 to 551. . Note that descriptions of processes, displays, etc. that are the same as before transformation may be omitted.

FIG. 544 shows the effect patterns selected in response to the operation of the attack button 3710.
When white flag display effect pattern 01 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for three seconds. After that, an image of the enemy tank being destroyed is displayed for one second. At the same time, a white flag image indicating that the enemy tank has surrendered is displayed for one second over the image of the enemy tank being destroyed.
When white flag display performance pattern 02 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for two seconds. After that, an image of the enemy tank being destroyed is displayed for one second. At the same time, a white flag image indicating that the enemy tank has surrendered is displayed for one second over the image of the enemy tank being destroyed.
When the white flag display performance pattern 03 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. After that, an image of the enemy tank being destroyed is displayed for one second. At the same time, a white flag image indicating that the enemy tank has surrendered is displayed for one second over the image of the enemy tank being destroyed.

The appearance ratio is determined in advance by the white flag display performance pattern 01 to white flag display performance pattern 03 so as to indicate the degree of expectation that the fluctuating display result will be a jackpot. The expectation level is 30% when white flag display performance pattern 01 is executed, the expectation level is 50% when white flag display performance pattern 02 is executed, and the expectation level is 100% when white flag display performance pattern 03 is executed. It is.

FIG. 545(b) is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which the white flag display performance pattern 01 is executed from timing t3 to timing t7 based on the operation on the attack button 3710.
FIG. 545(c) is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which the white flag display performance pattern 02 is executed from timing t3 to timing t6 based on the operation on the attack button 3710.
FIG. 545(d) is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which the white flag display performance pattern 03 is executed from timing t3 to timing t5 based on the operation on the attack button 3710.

FIG. 546(b) shows a display example in the display area when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t3 in the production examples shown in FIGS. 545(b) to 545(d). In FIG. 546(b), an image of a shell being fired at an enemy tank and the shell exploding, and an image of the destroyed enemy tank are displayed in the display area.

The display shown in FIG. 546(b) ends in less than 1 second (for example, 0.1 seconds), and the display state shown in FIG. 546(c) is reached. In this display state, the gun battery of the enemy tank is destroyed, and an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. Note that the white flag image is not yet displayed at this stage.

In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 545(b), since the white flag display production pattern 01 is selected, the white flag image shown in FIG. 546(d) is displayed 3 seconds after the display state shown in FIG. 546(c) is reached. The display state will be such that is displayed. Also, here, "Colonel Dinah's" lines are also displayed differently, indicating that expectations are low.

In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 545(c), by selecting the white flag display production pattern 02, the display state in which the white flag image is displayed 2 seconds after the display state shown in FIG. 546(c) is reached. (not shown). The line from "Colonel Dyna" that is displayed two seconds later is "Is the enemy's army's morale fair?" Here, ``Colonel Dinah'''s line indicates that expectations are moderate.

In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 545(d), since the white flag display production pattern 03 is selected, the white flag image shown in FIG. 546(e) is displayed one second after the display state shown in FIG. 546(c) is reached. The display state will be such that is displayed. In addition, the lines of "Colonel Dinah" are also displayed differently, indicating that expectations are high.

This suggests that the longer the white flag image is not displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed (either 1 second, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds), the higher the expectation of a jackpot. be done.
Therefore, the player views the display area expecting that the white flag image will not be displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank will be displayed for a long time.
Furthermore, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" that are displayed when the white flag image starts to be displayed are displayed in correspondence with each white flag display performance pattern. Therefore, the line ``Colonel Dinah'' also suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot. "Colonel Dyna's" line corresponds to the time when the white flag image is not displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed, so the white flag image is not displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. Even if you don't know exactly when the image will be displayed, you can still know what to expect and don't bother checking the time when the white flag image is not displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. Even players who have a low level of concentration on games can be made to feel interested in the game.

One second after the white flag image is displayed, a new image of an enemy tank is displayed. For example, in the case of the production example shown in FIG. 545(b), a new image of an enemy tank is displayed at timing t7. In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 545(c), a new image of an enemy tank is displayed at timing t6. In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 545(d), a new image of an enemy tank is displayed at timing t5. FIG. 546(f) is a presentation example showing a state in which an image of a new enemy tank is displayed.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 545(b) to 545(d), the attack button 3710 is not operated after that, and the variable display of decorative symbols ends at timing t14.

FIG. 547(a) shows a display state that is displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot in the production examples shown in FIGS. 545(b) to 545(d). There is. In the figure, the decorative pattern is shown stopped at "333" indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. In addition, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Mite" are also displayed in a manner that notifies you of a jackpot.
FIG. 547(b) shows a display state that is displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the special lottery result is a loss in the production examples shown in FIGS. 545(b) to 545(d). There is. In the figure, the decorative pattern is shown stopped at "343" indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss. Furthermore, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Mite" are also displayed in a manner that notifies them of their loss.

With reference to FIG. 545(b) to FIG. 545(d), an example of the effect is shown when the attack button 3710 is accepted for operation at timing t3. It is possible to execute any of the white flag display effects patterns by accepting an operation from the user.

Further, by accepting an operation from the player not only once but multiple times from timing t0 to timing t14, it is possible to execute the white flag display performance pattern multiple times.

FIGS. 545(e) to 545(g) show examples of effects when it is detected that the attack button 3710 has been operated at two timings, timing t3 and timing t8.
FIG. 545(e) shows an example of a performance in which the white flag display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t3 and the white flag display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t8.
FIG. 545(f) shows an example of a performance in which white flag display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t3 and white flag display performance pattern 02 is started at timing t8.
FIG. 545(g) shows an example of a performance in which white flag display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t3 and white flag display performance pattern 03 is started at timing t8.
Note that even if the white flag display effect pattern is executed multiple times, each time the effect pattern is executed, the same display as the effect example described with reference to FIGS. 545(b) to 545(d) is displayed. It will be done.

Note that if it is detected that the player has operated the attack button 3710 while a certain white flag display performance pattern is being executed, then after the white flag display performance pattern that is being executed is completed, the process shown in FIG. 546(f) After the display state shown in FIG. 546(b) continues for one second, one of the white flag display effect patterns may be automatically executed, resulting in the display state shown in FIG. 546(b) and thereafter. For example, if the player operates the attack button 3710 three times in a short period of time (for example, one second) while an image of an enemy tank that has not been destroyed is displayed, a three-time white flag display effect pattern will be automatically executed. will be done.

An example was shown in which the "sudden tank effect" is executed in one variable display when the look-ahead effect pattern 01 is selected. The execution mode of "tank production" will be explained.
In the ``sudden tank effect'', the effect is executed over a maximum of four variable displays, but the variable time required for one variable display is 14 seconds, and the variable stop time is 1 second.

Below, with reference to FIGS. 548 and 549, an example of the effect when the prefetch effect pattern 02 is executed will be described. The look-ahead performance pattern 02 is a performance pattern in which a "sudden tank performance" is executed over two variable displays.
In this case, the target whose expectation level is suggested by the look-ahead effect is the special lottery result corresponding to the second variable display. Moreover, the special lottery results corresponding to the variable display other than the second time are losers. This point is the same for the pre-read effect pattern 03 and the pre-read effect pattern 04.
In addition, in the look-ahead effect pattern 02 to look-ahead effect pattern 04, if the display of the white flag image or the image of the destroyed enemy tank starts and ends during the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern, refer to FIGS. 545 and 546. A display similar to the production example described above is performed.

Below, the display mode of the white flag image and the image of the destroyed enemy tank during the static display of the decorative pattern will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 548(a), if the attack button 3710 is not operated at all, the display state shown in FIG. 549(a) is reached from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 548(b), when the white flag display performance pattern 03 is started at timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the performance by the white flag display performance pattern 03 ends at timing t14, and at timing t14. The display state shown in FIG. 549(b) is reached from timing t15 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 548(c), when the white flag display effect pattern 02 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15. Therefore, the display state shown in FIG. 549(c) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 548(d), when the white flag display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15. Therefore, the display state shown in FIG. 549(c) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 548(e), when the white flag display performance pattern 03 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, from timing t14 to timing t15, the white flag image and the destroyed enemy tank are displayed. Since the image is displayed, the display state shown in FIG. 549(d) is reached from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 548(f), when the white flag display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t11 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, from timing t14 to timing t15, a white flag image and a destroyed enemy tank are displayed. Since the image is displayed, the display state shown in FIG. 549(e) is reached from timing t14 to timing t15.

Incidentally, at timing t15, variable display of a new decorative pattern is started. At this time, the display of decorative symbols is also started in a display mode forming a reach state such as "3↓3".

With reference to FIG. 548, the display mode of the white flag image and the destroyed enemy tank image when the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that occurred before the hold that was the target of the look-ahead effect is stopped has been explained. , with reference to FIG. 550, the display mode of the white flag image and the destroyed enemy tank image when the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that is the target of the look-ahead effect is stopped will be described.

FIGS. 550(b) to 550(f) all show performance examples in which the execution period of the selected white flag display performance pattern overlaps with the stop display period of the decorative pattern (timing t29 to timing t30). In the production examples shown in FIGS. 550(b) to 550(f), even during the execution period of the selected white flag display production pattern, the white flag display production pattern in progress is stopped at timing t29, and the decoration This shows an example of a performance in which symbols are displayed in a stopped state. From timing t29 to timing t30, the display state is as shown in FIG. 547(a) or FIG. 547(b) based on the special lottery result.

On the other hand, only when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the currently executed white flag display performance pattern may be configured to be executed for a predetermined execution period. In this case, although the jackpot game state starts from timing t30, timings t30 to t35 are the opening state of the jackpot game, and the opening/closing operation of the jackpot opening 2005 is preferably started from timing t35. FIGS. 551(b) to 551(f) show examples of effects in which a white flag image or an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed while the variation of decorative symbols is stopped or during a jackpot game.

On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the currently executed white flag display performance pattern is configured to be executed for a predetermined execution period, and if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the currently executed white flag display pattern is configured to be executed for a predetermined execution period. The production pattern may be configured to be interrupted without being executed for a predetermined execution period. This prevents the occurrence of situations where players feel dissatisfied with the outcome of the special lottery, even though the highly anticipated performance was executed if the display of the destroyed images of enemy tanks is interrupted. This is to do so.
In addition, if the result of the special lottery is a loss and there is one or more pending items, the next variable display will start from timing t30, but the "sudden tank effect" will continue even in the next variable display, It is preferable to configure the system so that the "sudden tank effect" ends during the fluctuating display. With this configuration, it is possible to end the "sudden tank effect" in a natural manner without making the player feel uncomfortable.
Figures 551(b) to 551(f) show examples of effects in which a smoke image or an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed when the decorative pattern stops changing or when the next changing display starts. .

The embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 544 to 551 can also achieve the same effects as the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 536 to 543. In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 544 to 551, it is suggested that the shorter the display time of the destroyed enemy tank, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. We will be watching the display effects while hoping that the display time of the tank will be short.

535 to 551, an embodiment regarding the "sudden tank effect" has been shown, but the embodiment may be modified as follows. Although an embodiment in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and a smoke image are displayed will be described as an example, a similar modification will be made in an embodiment in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and a white flag image are displayed. Good too.

As shown in FIGS. 536 and 544, the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank is 2 seconds, 3 seconds, or 4 seconds. A predetermined sound effect may be output while the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. For example, it is preferable to prepare sound effects for 2 seconds, 3 seconds, and 4 seconds in advance, and start outputting the sound effects for the same number of seconds at the same time as the image of the destroyed enemy tank starts to be displayed. In this way, the display of the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the output of the sound effects may be configured to start at the same timing and end at the same timing.

On the other hand, it may be modified so that the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the output time of the sound effect are different. For example, prepare only a sound effect with an output time of 4 seconds, and output this sound effect regardless of whether the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for 2 seconds, 3 seconds, or 4 seconds. It is recommended to configure it as follows. With this configuration, the level of expectation will not be known unless one is watching the display of the image of the destroyed enemy tank, making it possible to create a sense of tension in the game. Note that only sound effects with an output time of 3 seconds may be used, or only sound effects with an output time of 2 seconds may be used.

Audio may be output by looping a predetermined sound effect. For example, a sound effect having a length of one second may be played multiple times (twice, three times, four times) in accordance with the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank. For example, a sound effect whose length is 1 second may be played four times in succession to output the sound effect for 4 seconds. In this case, as above, the sound effect is output a certain number of times (for a certain period of time), although the display time is different, so that the expectation level is not known unless you are paying close attention to the display form of the image of the destroyed enemy tank. This can add a sense of tension to the game.

Note that in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 536, the expectation level when smoke display effect pattern 01 is executed is set to 30%, but it may be set to 0% instead of 30%. Similarly, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 544, the expectation level when the white flag display performance pattern 01 is executed is set to 30%, but it may be set to 0% instead of 30%.

This embodiment is configured so that a performance pattern that displays an image of an enemy tank being destroyed can be executed multiple times by referring to each performance pattern described in FIGS. 536 and 544 based on operations by the player. However, for highly anticipated performance patterns, a limit may be set on the number of times they are executed. For example, the number of times that the smoke display performance pattern 03 and the white flag display performance pattern 03 with a jackpot expectation level of 100% are executed during one "sudden tank performance" may be limited to one time. Further, the number of times that a performance pattern with an expectation level of 0% as described above is executed may be similarly limited to one time. With this configuration, the player carefully observes whether or not a production pattern with high expectations (or low expectations) will be executed, making it possible to create a sense of tension in the game.

As shown in FIGS. 538 and 546, in this embodiment, a decorative pattern (during variable display and stopped display), a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, an image of an undestroyed enemy tank, an image of a destroyed enemy Although the tank images are displayed relatively small in the display area, at least one of them may be displayed larger. For example, decorative patterns may be displayed in variable sizes as shown in FIGS. 500(b) and 500(c). In this case, these images may be displayed in an overlapping manner. In this case, the display priority is given to the image of an undestroyed enemy tank and the image of a destroyed enemy tank. ). Furthermore, it is preferable to further lower the display priority for images of own tanks, dialogue images, and background images such as roads.

With this configuration, the decorative pattern (during fluctuating display and static display), the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, the image of an undestroyed enemy tank, or the image of a destroyed enemy tank overlap each other. Even if displayed, the visibility of images of undestroyed enemy tanks and destroyed enemy tanks is not obstructed by the decorative pattern or the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710. As a result, the timing at which the image of the destroyed enemy tank starts to be displayed and the display ends becomes clear, thereby preventing the player from having a misunderstanding about the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank, that is, the degree of expectation. can.

An embodiment has been shown in which the image of the enemy tank is always displayed in a destroyed state by operating the attack button 3710, but the difficulty level has been increased so that the image of the enemy tank is displayed in a destroyed state. It's okay. In this case, the display conditions for the operation of the operation unit in the embodiment described above may be adopted. For example, a lottery may be drawn when the attack button 3710 is operated, and if a winner is won with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2), the image of the enemy tank may be destroyed and displayed. Good too. In this way, by configuring the image of the destroyed enemy tank to be displayed when specific conditions are met, it is possible to increase the difficulty of displaying the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the attack button 3710 Even if the player is operating the tank, the player can feel a sense of tension in not knowing when the image of the destroyed tank will be displayed.

In the example described above, when the expectation level of the jackpot is 100%, that is, the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, an example of a production in which an image of a destroyed tank is displayed at a different time than usual in the "sudden tank production" (smoke (Example of performance when display performance pattern 03 or white flag display performance pattern 03 is selected) is shown, but it not only suggests a jackpot, but also suggests other gaming values that will be profitable for the player. You may do so. For example, as mentioned above, by winning a symbol that gives time savings, or by executing a predetermined number of losing fluctuations from the time the power is turned on or from the previous win, time savings are given from the normal gaming state. A ``sudden tank performance'' may be performed in the event of a loss change that triggers a switch to the gaming state. This case also has the common point that a time-saving gaming state is provided instead of a win as an advantageous benefit to the player, so that the various effects described in the above-mentioned embodiments can be similarly achieved.

In the above-described embodiment, the expectation level of a jackpot is indicated by the "sudden tank effect", but it may be configured such that the "sudden tank effect" indicates the type of profit to be given to the player. For example, as a profit to be given to the player, after a fluctuating decorative symbol becomes a jackpot, which of the time-saving state or the variable probability state will be given, or is it likely to be granted (for example, the expectation that the variable probability state will be given)? It may also be possible to indicate what percentage the degree is. Alternatively, in a gaming machine that can shift to a time-saving state or a variable probability state after a change in decorative symbols without going through a jackpot state, whether or not the time-saving state or variable probability state is granted after a change in decorative symbols is given. It may also indicate whether it is easy (for example, what percentage is the expectation that the probability variable state will occur).

In this way, the "Ikinari Tank Effect" can improve the interest of the gaming machine.

Conventionally, there has been an effect that requires a player to operate an operation unit (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-046210). In such effects, a predetermined effect display is displayed regardless of whether the player performs an operation on the operation section or not, so that the operation on the operation section becomes more tense. It was blurry. In particular, even if a complicated operation mode is required, in the end it is just a pretense, and a predetermined effect will be performed regardless of the operation mode performed by the player on the operation section. By executing such a performance, there is a risk that the player's interest in the performance display may be reduced. As described above, there is room for improvement in conventional gaming machines in terms of effectively utilizing operations on the operating section to improve gaming enjoyment. Therefore, in the embodiments described below, a gaming machine is provided in which it is possible to give the player a sense of tension regarding the manner in which the player operates the operation section, and thereby it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in playing the game. I will explain about it.

In the embodiment shown below, the player is required to operate the left lever 3720, and the operation depends on whether the player can tilt the left lever 3720 in a predetermined direction and angle and maintain that state. The system is configured so that there are cases in which the special effect display is not obstructed and cases in which it is obstructed (cases in which it is impossible to see it or cases in which it is difficult to see it). There is.

Below, with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 552, the display examples shown in FIGS. 553 and 554, etc., the "full power breakthrough reach" in which the player is required to operate the left lever 3720 within a predetermined range will be described. ” will be described. Note that FIG. 553 shows a display example when an appropriate operation is performed as shown in FIG. 552(a). Further, FIG. 554 shows a display example when an appropriate operation is not performed as shown in FIG. 552(b).

At timing t5, a reach effect state occurs. In ``Full Power Breakthrough Reach'', a speed display window showing the speed of your own tank is displayed above ``Colonel Dyna'''s dialogue window. The display in the speed display window changes depending on how the player operates the left lever 3720. Images of decorative patterns, roads, and self-tanks are displayed in the same way as in other embodiments. FIGS. 553(a) and 554(a) show display examples at timing t5 when the ready-to-reach effect state occurs.

At timing t5, the operation valid period of left lever 3720 occurs. As shown with reference to FIG. 501, by operating the left lever 3720, the lateral position and speed of the own tank can be changed. The operation validity period of the left lever 3720 continues until timing t34, which is the timing at which the fluctuation of the decorative pattern stops.

At timing t7, a state is created in which a cannonball comes flying from behind the own tank. This effect state continues for 4 seconds until timing t11. Also, during this period, a simulated image simulating the left lever 3720 is displayed on the left side of "Colonel Dinah"'s dialogue window. Furthermore, the words "forward tilt" indicating the operation mode of the left lever 3720 are added to the simulated image.
FIG. 553(b) and FIG. 554(b) show display examples at timing t7.

Hereinafter, an example of the effect when the left lever 3720 is appropriately operated will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 552(a), the display example shown in FIG. 553, etc. Further, below, an example of the effect when the left lever 3720 is not operated appropriately will be explained with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 552(b), the display example shown in FIG. 554, etc.

From timing t7 to timing t11, the player needs to tilt the left lever 3720 forward by a predetermined angle for a predetermined period of time. Specifically, it is necessary to maintain the left lever 3720 between 10 degrees and 45 degrees forward from the upright position of the left lever 3720 for 2 seconds. By performing such an operation, the display area displays that the own tank is accelerating and moving. FIG. 553(c) shows a display example when the own tank is sufficiently accelerated at timing t9.

The time chart shown in FIG. 552(a) shows a state in which the player was able to tilt the left lever 3720 at an appropriate angle from timing t8 to timing t10. At timing t11, the display of the operation instruction for the left lever 3720 ends. FIG. 553(d) shows a display example from timing t11 to timing t15 when the left lever 3720 is appropriately operated.

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is not operated properly, for example, if there is not enough time or angle to operate the left lever 3720, a shell fired from an enemy tank may hit your own tank. , a shell is shown exploding.

The time chart in FIG. 552(b) shows an example of a performance in which the left lever 3720 is operated for only one second from timing t8 to timing t9 during the valid operation period of the left lever 3720. In this case, your tank's speed is not sufficient. Therefore, at timing t11, which is the end timing of the operation instruction display, display of an image of smoke generated by exploding shells around the image of the own tank is started.

The display state shown in FIG. 554(c) shows a display example when the speed of the own tank is not sufficient at timing t9. Further, FIG. 554(d) shows a display example in which a smoke image is displayed from timing t11 to timing t15 because the speed of the own tank was not sufficient.

Note that in FIGS. 553(c) and 553(d), the characters "30 km/h" are displayed as the speed of the own tank. Furthermore, in FIGS. 554(c) and 554(d), characters "20 km/h" are displayed as the speed of the own tank. In this way, if an appropriate operation is performed on the left lever 3720 while the operation instruction is being displayed, the speed display window will display 30 km/h or more, and the appropriate operation will be performed while the operation instruction is being displayed. If not, or if an appropriate operation is not performed while the operation instruction is being displayed, the speed display window displays less than 30 km/h. Specifically, the time from when the left lever 3720 reaches the appropriate angle is measured, and the speed display of the own tank is increased by 1 km/h every 0.1 seconds. According to such a configuration, by looking at the display in the speed display window, the player can determine whether or not the operation mode of the left lever 3720 is performed appropriately, and whether or not the left lever 3720 is operated appropriately. Recognizable.

From timing t15 to timing t24, a display effect in which the own tank moves forward is performed. Due to the explosion of the shell from the enemy unit, the display of the smoke image ends at timing t15 even if the smoke image is being displayed. FIGS. 553(e) and 554(e) show examples of display in which the own tank moves forward from timing t15 to timing t24. Note that the speed in the speed display window that has been changed according to the operation on the left lever 3720 changes from the timing (timing t15) when the display of the smoke image ends to the timing when the operation instruction for the left lever 3720 is displayed again ( It is preferable to set the speed to "10 km/h" at a predetermined timing up to timing t24).

Note that in this embodiment, the speed of the own tank can be changed in accordance with the operation of the left lever 3720 during the period from timing t5 to timing t34. Therefore, by operating the left lever 3720 during the period when no operation instruction is displayed, the player can practice changing the speed of his own tank. In this case, it is preferable that the speed display window display "10 km/h" at the timing when the speed instruction display is started.

At timing t24, images of a plurality of enemy tanks are displayed at the top of the display area. The images of the plurality of enemy tanks are displayed at the top of the display area, moving leftward until timing t32. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the left lever 3720 is displayed, and display of operation instructions for the left lever 3720 is started. The operation instruction display for the left lever 3720 is continued until timing t32.

From timing t24 to timing t32, the player needs to tilt the left lever 3720 forward at a predetermined angle for a predetermined period of time. Specifically, the left lever 3720 must be maintained between 30 degrees and 45 degrees forward from the upright position of the left lever 3720 for 4 seconds. By performing such an operation, the display area displays that the own tank is moving at a maximum speed of 50 km/h.

The time chart shown in FIG. 552(a) shows a state in which the player was able to tilt the left lever 3720 at an appropriate angle from timing t25 to timing t29. At timing t32, the display of the operation instruction for the left lever 3720 ends. FIG. 553(g) shows a display example from timing t32 to timing t34 when the left lever 3720 is appropriately operated.

Next, from timing t34 to timing t35, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. FIG. 553(h) is a display example showing a display state in which decorative patterns are stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is not operated properly, for example, if there is not enough time to operate the left lever 3720, if the left lever 3720 is tilted at an insufficient angle, or if the left lever 3720 is tilted in the wrong direction, it will cause damage to the enemy tank and own tank. The display shows that the own tank exploded due to a collision.

The time chart in FIG. 552(b) shows a state in which the left lever 3720 is appropriately tilted for only 2 seconds from timing t25 to timing t27 during the valid operation period of the left lever 3720. In this case, your tank's speed is not sufficient. Therefore, from timing t32, which is the timing at which the operation instruction display ends, display of an image of smoke generated by the collision with an enemy tank starts around the image of the own tank.

FIG. 554(g) shows a display example from timing t32 to timing t34 when the own tank's acceleration is insufficient. Moreover, FIG. 554(h) shows a display example in which a smoke image is displayed from timing t34 to timing t35 when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

Note that although the display examples shown in FIGS. 553 and 554 show display examples when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the same display is performed when the result of the special lottery is a loss. In this case, it is preferable to stop displaying the decorative pattern with the number "343" to indicate that the result of the special lottery is a loss.

As described above, according to the "full power breakthrough reach" in this embodiment, when the player is unable to operate the left lever 3720 in an appropriate operation mode, the visibility of the stop display mode of the large displayed decorative symbol is Disturbed by smoke images. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to confirm the stop display mode of the large displayed decorative symbols, and the player will be conscious of performing operations appropriately from next time onwards. On the other hand, when the player operates the left lever 3720 in an appropriate manner, the player can visually recognize the stopped display mode of the large displayed decorative pattern without obstructing the visibility. You will feel a sense of satisfaction from completing a stressful operation.

In the present embodiment, the operation instruction display for the left lever 3720 is performed twice: from timing t7 to timing t11 and from timing t24 to timing t32, and the effect display according to the operation mode in both periods is performed. It will be done.
At this time, the operating mode of the left lever 3720 is such that the time required for the operation is longer and the operating angle is within a narrower range at the later timing than at the first timing. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an operation mode that gives a more tense feeling.

FIG. 552(c) is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 552(a) and 552(b). In this embodiment, when a smoke image is displayed due to a shell from an enemy tank, the display time of the smoke image is increased, and the smoke image is configured to be displayed until the timing when a group of enemy tanks is displayed. There is.
Specifically, the smoke image is displayed until timing t27. In such a configuration, the display period of the smoke image (timing t11 to timing t27) and a part of the display period (timing t24 to timing t31) during which the second operation instruction display is performed may overlap. Become.
At this time, it is preferable that part or all of the simulated image of the left lever 3720 be hidden by the smoke image. Similarly, the configuration may be such that part or all of the lines of "Colonel Dyna" instructing the operation of the left lever 3720 and the speed display window are hidden.
With this configuration, if an appropriate operation is not performed during the display period (timing t7 to timing t11) during which the first operation instruction display is performed, the display period during which the second operation instruction display is performed. Since it becomes difficult to recognize the operation mode during (timing t24 to timing t31), the feeling of tension in operating the left lever 3720 can be further increased.

Further, the length for displaying the smoke image when the left lever 3720 is not properly operated may be determined by lottery. For example, the display time may be determined by lottery from a minimum of 4 seconds to a maximum of 24 seconds. In this case, the smoke image will be displayed for 4 seconds from timing t11 to timing t15 at the shortest and 24 seconds from timing t11 to timing t35 at the longest. In particular, when the longest display period is selected, the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed in the center of the display area becomes difficult or invisible due to the smoke image, regardless of how the left lever 3720 is operated for the second time. .

Note that the technical idea related to the "sudden tank effect" shown with reference to FIGS. 535 to 551 may be applied to the display mode of the smoke image in the "full power breakthrough reach". For example, the display time of the smoke image in "full power breakthrough reach" may be configured to differ depending on whether a jackpot state or a time saving state occurs.

We have shown an example in which smoke images are displayed when the player is unable to perform an appropriate operation while the operation instructions are being displayed, but instead of always displaying these images, it is possible to perform an appropriate operation. If this is not possible, the configuration may be such that these images are displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/2).
Also, if the special lottery result is a loss, the smoke image is configured to be displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 3/4 probability), and if the special lottery result is a jackpot, the smoke image is not displayed. It may be configured as follows.
Further, a plurality of colors and shapes of the smoke image may be provided, and the degree of expectation of the special lottery result may be indicated by the display mode of the displayed smoke image.

Another embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 552 and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 555 and 556. FIG. 555 is a time chart in this embodiment. Further, FIG. 556 shows a display example in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, instead of the effect in which a group of tanks is displayed, an effect in which a minefield is displayed on the road along which the own tank is traveling is performed from timing t24 to timing t29. FIG. 556(a) shows a display example at timing t29, which is the timing at which the minefield display starts. From timing t24 to timing t29, a display is performed in which the own tank approaches the minefield.

At timing t26, operation acceptance of the mission button 3700 becomes valid. The operational validity period of the mission button 3700 continues until the mission button 3700 is operated. If the mission button 3700 is not operated, the process continues until timing t29. Further, while the operation of the mission button 3700 is valid, a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed at the upper left of the "Colonel Dyna" dialogue window. FIG. 556(b) shows a display example at timing t26 when the operational validity period of the mission button 3700 occurs.

As shown in FIG. 555(c), if the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period (timing t28), an effect display is displayed in which the own tank jumps and jumps over the advancing minefield. is performed for 3 seconds. FIG. 556(c) shows a display example at the timing (for example, timing t31) when the player operates the mission button 3700 during the valid operation period and the effect of the own tank jumping ends (for example, timing t31). This display continues until timing t34.

Next, from timing t34 to timing t35, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. FIG. 556(d) is a display example showing a display state in which decorative patterns are stopped and displayed.

FIG. 555(d) shows an example of the effect when the mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period. In this case, from timing t29, which is the end of the valid operation period, to timing t35, a smoke image with a higher display priority than the own tank is displayed, and the own tank enters the minefield and is surrounded by smoke. A performance display is performed. FIG. 556(e) shows a display example from timing t29 to timing t34.

Next, from timing t34 to timing t35, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. FIG. 556(f) is a display example showing a display state in which decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the center of the display area is hidden by the smoke image.

In this way, if the mission button 3700 is operated properly, the visibility of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed is not obstructed, but if the mission button 3700 is not operated properly, smoke The visibility of the statically displayed decorative pattern is obstructed by the image. Therefore, the player feels more nervous when operating the mission button 3700.

Note that the modification shown with reference to FIG. 552(c) may also be applied to the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 556. In this case, the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" instructing the operation of the mission button 3700, and the display mode in which the own tank is jumping are difficult to see due to the smoke image generated by the enemy tank's shell. or become invisible. This further increases the sense of tension in operating the left lever 3720.

In this way, according to the "full power breakthrough reach" in this embodiment, depending on whether or not the left lever 3720 can be operated within a predetermined operating range, the display mode of the decorative pattern indicating the result of the special lottery (or The visibility of the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700, the operation instruction display for the mission button 3700, and the effect display corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700) may or may not be obstructed by the smoke image, so the game The player will feel nervous when operating the left lever 3720, and will be motivated to actively operate the left lever 3720, which will improve his enjoyment of the game.

An example has been shown in which a smoke image is displayed with a predetermined probability (1/2 probability) when the operation of the left lever 3720 is inappropriate. , the probability of displaying the smoke image may be different. For example, if the tilting direction of the left lever 3720 is appropriate but the operating time is shorter than a predetermined time, the smoke image may be more likely to be displayed as the operating time is shorter. Furthermore, the smoke image may be configured to be displayed with a probability of 90% or 100% if no operation is performed or if an operation is performed in the opposite direction to the direction instructed.

Note that the visibility of the operation instruction image, decorative pattern, etc. may be completely invisible due to the smoke image, or may be partially invisible but partially visible. Alternatively, a translucent image may be used as the smoke image, and the operation instruction image, decorative pattern, etc. may be vaguely visible through the semi-transparent smoke image. With such a configuration, visibility of the operation instruction image and the decorative pattern is ensured to a certain degree.

A display effect with an expectation level of 100% and a very low appearance probability (such as displaying a predetermined character image) is configured to be executable, and the timing at which this display effect is executed is set to the timing at which a smoke image can be displayed. Good too. Further, part or all of this display effect may be made invisible or difficult to see due to the smoke image. In this case, this display effect may be hidden by the smoke image, which is a very unfortunate gaming situation for the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to further maintain the feeling of tension in operating the operating means for the player.

Although the smoke image obstructs the visibility of the reach mode of the decorative pattern, it is possible to set the display time of the smoke image so that the display of the smoke image ends before the decorative pattern stops displaying. good. For example, the display of the smoke image may end at timing t34, and the smoke image may not be displayed during the period from timing t34 to timing t35. With this configuration, the visibility of the statically displayed decorative pattern is no longer obstructed by the smoke image, so when it comes to the result of a special lottery, even though the statically displayed decorative pattern indicates a jackpot, there is no chance that it will be a loss. In this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misunderstands, or the player misunderstands that the stopped and displayed decorative pattern indicates a loss, but that it is a jackpot.

Alternatively, even when a smoke image is displayed, the configuration may be such that there are cases where the visibility of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed is obstructed and cases where it is not obstructed. For example, a lottery with a probability of 1/2 may be executed so that a decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed may or may not be hidden by the smoke image. Alternatively, if the time during which the left lever 3720 was tilted is less than half of the required operation time, the decorative pattern displayed in a stopped state remains hidden by the smoke image, and the time during which the left lever 3720 was tilted is If this is more than half of the required operation time, the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed may not be hidden by the smoke image (for example, the display of the smoke image ends at timing t34). With this configuration, the player can operate the left lever 3720 with more tension.

The variable display of the decorative pattern may be configured to be invisible or difficult to see over a plurality of variable displays due to the smoke image.
For example, the display time of the smoke image may be set to 120 seconds instead of 4 seconds, and the smoke image may be displayed over the variable display of a plurality of decorative patterns. Alternatively, the display time of the smoke image may be modified from the lottery mode described above, and the display time of the smoke image may be determined by lottery from a minimum of 4 seconds to a maximum of 120 seconds.Also, an operation instruction display for the left lever 3720 may be performed. If the left lever 3720 is ignored both times (from timing t7 to timing t11 and from timing t24 to timing t32) and the left lever 3720 is not tilted, such a smoke image will be displayed with a high probability (99/100 probability). It is recommended to configure it as follows.
In this case, during the period when the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner (timing t32 to timing t34) and during the period when the decorative pattern is being displayed in a static manner (timing t34 to timing t35), the decorative pattern etc. are hidden by the smoke image and cannot be easily seen. Furthermore, the visibility of the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern and the stop display of the decorative pattern starting after timing t35 may be obstructed by the smoke image multiple times.
In this case, it is preferable to configure the "full power breakthrough reach" to continue even after timing t35 for the purpose of ensuring consistency as a performance. In this case, the player is required to operate the left lever 3720 again.
Furthermore, when the display of the smoke image straddles the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern, the operation of the left lever 3720 is also disabled while the fluctuating decorative pattern is stopped or immediately after the fluctuating display starts (between timing t0 and timing t5). First, the valid operation period is configured to last for a plurality of variable displays, so that an effect display (such as a change in the speed display in the speed display window) based on the operation reception of the left lever 3720 is performed at any time. may be configured.

Although the speed of the own tank is displayed in the display area in the figure, the direction in which the left lever 3720 is tilted or the angle at which the left lever 3720 is tilted may also be displayed. Alternatively, it may be configured to display the elapsed time since the left lever 3720 was tilted at the required angle in a situation where an instruction to operate the left lever 3720 is given. With this configuration, the player can recognize whether the left lever 3720 is being operated within an appropriate range and for how many seconds the left lever 3720 is being operated within an appropriate range.

Although we have shown an example in which a simulated image of the left lever 3720 is displayed and operation instructions are displayed using lines from "Colonel Dyna," instead of or in addition to this production pattern, the left lever 3720 may be displayed in the following manner. A performance pattern that requires a tilting operation of the left lever 3720 may be configured to be executable without clearly displaying an operation instruction using an image display. For example, it is possible to indicate that an enemy tank is approaching from the rear by displaying a state in which a cannonball is fired from the rear, and the player may voluntarily operate the tilting operation of the left lever 3720 without displaying an operation instruction. It may be configured so that By configuring the game so that more difficult game situations can occur in this way, it is possible to further increase the sense of tension when operating the left lever 3720.

The player may not be able to properly recognize whether the left lever 3720 is properly maintained within a predetermined operating range. Therefore, the operation mode of the left lever 3720 may be notified by the vibration mode of the left lever vibration source 3722 built into the left lever 3720. For example, when the operating range of the left lever 3720 moves within an appropriate operating range due to an operation by the player, the vibration source may be caused to vibrate for 0.5 seconds. Alternatively, when the operating range of the left lever 3720 moves within the appropriate operating range, the left lever vibration source 3722 starts vibrating, and during the period when the operating range of the left lever 3720 is within the appropriate operating range. The vibration of the left lever vibration source 3722 may be continued, and the vibration of the vibration source may be terminated when the operation range of the left lever 3720 is outside the appropriate range.

In addition, the operation mode of the left lever 3720 (whether the operation is being performed appropriately) was shown by the display content in the speed display window, but when the operation mode is displayed and when the operation mode is displayed. It may be configured so that there is. For example, the speed of the own tank within the speed display window may be hidden by the smoke image. In this case, since the operation mode is not displayed, the player operates the left lever 3720 with a greater sense of tension.

An example is shown in which the left lever 3720 is tilted forward, but in order to further increase the difficulty of operation, the range in which the lever should be operated is limited to only around 30 degrees to the front (for example, from 25 degrees to 35 degrees). If the tank is completely tilted forward at 45 degrees, smoke will come out from the tank's engine with a predetermined probability (1/2 probability), and the smoke image shown in Figure 554(d) or Figure 554(g) will be The image of the own tank and the operation instruction display may be hidden by the smoke image. In this case, the player is required to perform operations with a higher degree of difficulty, making it possible to further increase the sense of tension. Note that when such an embodiment is adopted, it becomes possible to practice tilting the left lever 3720 to an appropriate range at any time during the period in which the left lever 3720 can be operated.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 555 and 556, if the left lever 3720 cannot be operated properly, a smoke image is displayed, which obstructs the visibility of the operation instructions for the mission button 3700. It is configured so that Further, even if the mission button 3700 can be operated, the smoke image obstructs the visibility of the effect display (display mode in which the own tank jumps) corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the feeling of tension when operating the left lever 3720.

Furthermore, the display mode of the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700, the display mode of the lines of “Colonel Dyna” that instructs the operation mode of the mission button 3700, the type of the lines themselves, and the display mode of the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700, Depending on the type of display mode in which the tank jumps, an operation-compatible image indicating the degree of expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a jackpot may be displayed. According to such a configuration, depending on whether the left lever 3720 can be operated within an appropriate operating range, the visibility of the display indicating the level of expectation may or may not be obstructed by the smoke image. That will happen. Therefore, a player who wants to know the level of expectation will naturally operate the left lever 3720 with a sense of nervousness, which will increase his or her interest.
In addition, the technical idea that suggests the level of expectation in "shield bullet reach" shown with reference to Figures 505 to 509 is based on the image of the cannonball fired by the enemy unit and the left lever 3720 in "full power breakthrough reach". The present invention may be applied to a display mode of a simulated image, a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700, an image of an enemy tank group, an image of a minefield, etc. For example, the degree of expectation that a jackpot state or a time saving state will occur may be indicated by the display mode of these images in "full power breakthrough reach". Further, the technical idea related to the shield image in "shield bullet reach" may be applied to the smoke image in "full power breakthrough reach".

Although the operation of the mission button 3700 is requested after the instruction to operate the left lever 3720 is completed, the configuration may be such that the operation of the mission button 3700 is requested while the instruction to operate the left lever 3720 is being requested. With this configuration, the difficulty level of operating the left lever 3720 and the mission button 3700 can be increased, and the player's sense of tension can be further enhanced. Note that when both operation instruction displays are performed at the same time, it is preferable to display the operation instruction displays in a manner that they do not overlap. For example, a simulated image simulating the lever 3720 and a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 in the display mode shown in FIG. 553(b) and the display mode shown in FIG. 553(b) may be displayed in a manner that they do not overlap. If there is not enough space available for display in the display area, you can move either the simulated image simulating the lever 3720 or the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 to the front and one to the back. It is preferable to display the simulated images in an overlapping manner so that a part of the simulated images displayed at the rear can be visually recognized.

However, if the difficulty level is increased too much, players who are not good at complex operations may avoid playing the game. Therefore, even if there is no operation by the player, an automatic reception mode is adopted in which the same effect display as when there is an appropriate operation by the player is adopted, and the left lever 3720 or mission button 3700 is not operated. Even if the player performs an appropriate operation, the same effect display as when the player performs an appropriate operation may be configured. In this case, the player only needs to concentrate on operating the operating section that was not set to the automatic reception mode.
Note that the configuration may be such that only the operation of the left lever 3720 can be set to the auto reception mode, only the operation of the mission button 3700 can be set to the auto reception mode, or the operation of both the left lever 3720 and the mission button 3700 can be set to the auto reception mode.
In particular, if only the operation of the mission button 3700 is set to the automatic acceptance mode, the player only has to concentrate on operating the left lever 3720 properly, which may confuse players who are not accustomed to "full power breakthrough reach". can be prevented from occurring. Furthermore, if both the left lever 3720 and the mission button 3700 are set to the auto acceptance mode, the player only has to concentrate on viewing the performance without operating the left lever 3720 or the mission button 3700. .

In addition to the left lever 3720, a right lever 3730 may also be configured to be operable. For example, when operating the right lever 3730, similarly to the left lever 3720, it is preferable to make it a condition for executing the production mode that the right lever 3730 be tilted within a predetermined tilting range for a predetermined period of time. For example, it is preferable to display an effect in which dust comes out from caterpillars to represent how the own tank is accelerating. In this case, the configuration may be such that an image (simulated image, etc.) instructing the operation of the right lever 3730 is not displayed.
In this way, the right lever 3730 may be configured to have a presentation mode that makes the presentation display based on the operation of the left lever 3720 look gorgeous. Therefore, no operation instruction is displayed, and the image displayed based on the operation of the right lever 3730 does not indicate the degree of expectation.
Note that the valid operation period of the right lever 3730 may be made to match the valid operation period of the left lever 3720.
With this configuration, it is possible to maintain a higher sense of tension for players who are tired of operating the left lever.

Furthermore, the left lever 3720, the right lever 3730, and the mission button 3700 are located in a position where it is difficult to operate them simultaneously with one hand, a position where they cannot be operated (a position where it is impossible to operate), and a position where they are easily touched. It is best to install it in a location where it is impossible to do so. In other words, since one operation unit is operated with one hand, the sense of tension in the game can be further increased.
Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, there are cases where the three operating sections, the left lever 3720, the right lever 3730, and the mission button 3700, can be operated at the same time. It can create a sense of tension.
In the operation section shown in Fig. 498, the attack button 3710 is provided between the mission button 3700 and the left lever 3720 and they are separated from each other, so it is extremely difficult to operate both operation sections with one hand. It's impossible. On the other hand, the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are close to each other. Therefore, the positions where the right lever 3730 and the defense button 3740 are provided may be switched. In this case, since the defense button 3740 will be located between the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730, it will be extremely difficult or impossible to operate both operation parts with one hand.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the left lever 3720 is used for a predetermined effect, the right lever 3730 may be used instead of the left lever 3720. It may be configured such that both the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 can be operated, and when the operation on either lever satisfies the above-mentioned conditions, the above-mentioned display effect etc. can be executed.

As described above, according to the "full power breakthrough reach" in this embodiment, it is possible to increase the feeling of tension when operating the operating section.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, it has been known to perform an effect in which one operation section is pressed in a gaming machine. In this case, by providing a plurality of operating units and using the operating units for performance, it is possible to improve the game's interest (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-087638). Furthermore, if the operations on a plurality of operation sections are made valid at the same time, it is possible to further improve the game's interest. On the other hand, for players looking for a simple game, the requirement for such complicated operation modes may feel troublesome and stressful, and there is a fear that this may actually lead to a decline in interest. In the following, a gaming machine that satisfies players with different tastes and does not reduce interest in any case will be described.

In "AI Tank Reach" in this embodiment, the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 may be enabled at the same time at a predetermined timing during the display performance, but the attack button 3710 indicating the operation instruction for the attack button 3710 The player can set whether to display each of the simulated image and the simulated image of the mission button 3700 indicating operation instructions for the mission button 3700.
In advance, the player selects a first setting (first performance situation) that displays both a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700, and displays only a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710. A second setting (second performance situation) that displays only a simulated image that simulates the mission button 3700, a third setting (third performance situation) that displays only a simulated image that simulates the attack button 3710, and a simulated image that simulates the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700. It is possible for the player to select and set any one of the four settings (performance situation) of the fourth setting (fourth performance situation) in which both of the simulated images are not displayed. .
The player is configured to be able to make selections using the left lever 3720, attack button 3710, etc. during the demonstration when the decorative symbols are not changing. Further, when the power is turned on without any selection by the player, the first setting is selected by default.

When the operational validity period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 occurs while the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, a mock image imitating the attack button 3710 and a mock image imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed in a manner corresponding to the settings selected by the player. The image is displayed. For example, when the player selects the third setting, the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is not displayed, and only the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed.

Regarding "AI Tank Reach", with reference to FIGS. 557 to 562, etc., the following will explain how the attack button 3710 and mission button 3700 are operated when the first to fourth settings are performed. An example of the display will be explained below.

FIG. 557(a) is a time chart showing an embodiment in which the first setting (first performance situation) is made and a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 are displayed.
FIG. 559 corresponds to the time chart shown in FIG. 557(a) and shows a display state in which the first setting is made and a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 are displayed. It is a diagram.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 557(a), "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In "AI Tank Reach", a display effect is performed in which the own tank moves on a mountain road. FIG. 559(a) is a display example at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. Additionally, lines from "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Mite" instructing the operation of the attack button 3710 and mission button 3700 are displayed. Furthermore, the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 are started. Furthermore, during the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed. FIG. 559(b) shows a display example at timing t8.
The valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 each continue for 3 seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. Furthermore, at the timing when the valid operation period ends, the display of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 also ends.
If the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period, a shell is fired from the own tank's battery, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, the shell hits the enemy tank, and the shell is fired. A display will be performed in which an explosion will occur. FIG. 559(c) shows an example of a display in which a cannonball is moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 559(d) shows an example of a rendering in which an image of a cannonball hitting an enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the movement of the shell and the subsequent display of the image of the shell exploding are performed for 3 seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
If the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, a bullet is fired from the own tank's machine gun, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, the bullet hits the enemy tank, and the bullet A display will be performed in which an explosion will occur. FIG. 559(e) shows an example of a display in which a bullet is moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 559(f) shows an example of a presentation in which an image of a bullet hitting an enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The movement of the bullet and the subsequent image of the bullet exploding are displayed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
Note that if the attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period, the shells and bullets will not be displayed moving or exploding, and the enemy tank will move backwards. As a result, a display that is no longer displayed in the display area is performed.
Note that, after timing t23 as well, the same display effect as such a display effect executed after timing t8 is performed.

FIG. 557(b) is a timing diagram showing an embodiment in which the second setting (second performance situation) is made and a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed, but a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is not displayed. It is a chart.
FIG. 560 corresponds to the time chart shown in FIG. 557(b), where the second setting is made and a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed, but a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is not displayed. It is a figure showing a state.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 557(b), "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In "AI Tank Reach", a display effect is performed in which the own tank moves on a mountain road. FIG. 560(a) is a display example at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. Additionally, a line from "Sergeant Mite" instructing the operation of the attack button 3710 is displayed. Furthermore, the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 are started. Furthermore, during the operation validity period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed, and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is not displayed. It won't happen. FIG. 560(b) shows a display example at timing t8.
The valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 each continue for 3 seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. Furthermore, at the timing when the valid operation period ends, the display of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 also ends.
If the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period, a shell is fired from the own tank's battery, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, the shell hits the enemy tank, and the shell is fired. A display will be performed in which an explosion will occur. FIG. 560(c) shows an example of a display in which a cannonball is moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 560(d) shows an example of a presentation in which an image of a shell hitting an enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the movement of the shell and the subsequent display of the image of the shell exploding are performed for 3 seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
If the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, a bullet is fired from the own tank's machine gun, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, the bullet hits the enemy tank, and the bullet A display will be performed in which an explosion will occur. FIG. 560(e) shows an example of a display in which a bullet is moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 560(f) shows an example of a presentation in which an image of a bullet hitting an enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The movement of the bullet and the subsequent image of the bullet exploding are displayed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
Note that if the attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period, the shells and bullets will not be displayed moving or exploding, and the enemy tank will move backwards. As a result, a display that is no longer displayed in the display area is performed.
Note that, after timing t23 as well, the same display effect as such a display effect executed after timing t8 is performed.

FIG. 558(a) is a timing diagram showing an embodiment in which a third setting (third performance situation) is made, and a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is not displayed, but a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed. It is a chart.
FIG. 561 corresponds to the time chart shown in FIG. 558(a), and the third setting is made, and a display in which a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is not displayed but a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed. It is a figure showing a state.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 558(a), "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In "AI Tank Reach", a display effect is performed in which the own tank moves on a mountain road. FIG. 561(a) is a display example at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. Additionally, a line from "Colonel Dyna" instructing the operation of the mission button 3700 is displayed. Furthermore, the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 are started. Furthermore, during the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (from timing t8 to timing t11), a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is not displayed, but a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed. be exposed. FIG. 561(b) shows a display example at timing t8.
The valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 each continue for 3 seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. Furthermore, at the timing when the valid operation period ends, the display of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 also ends.
If the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period, a shell is fired from the own tank's battery, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, the shell hits the enemy tank, and the shell is fired. A display will be performed in which an explosion will occur. FIG. 561(c) shows an example of a display in which a cannonball is moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 561(d) shows an example of a rendering in which an image of a shell hitting an enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the movement of the shell and the subsequent display of the image of the shell exploding are performed for 3 seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
If the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, a bullet is fired from the own tank's machine gun, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, the bullet hits the enemy tank, and the bullet A display will be performed in which an explosion will occur. FIG. 561(e) shows an example of a display in which a bullet is moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 561(f) shows an example of a presentation in which an image of a bullet hitting an enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The movement of the bullet and the subsequent image of the bullet exploding are displayed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
Note that if the attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period, the shells and bullets will not be displayed moving or exploding, and the enemy tank will move backwards. As a result, a display that is no longer displayed in the display area is performed.
Note that, after timing t23 as well, the same display effect as such a display effect executed after timing t8 is performed.

FIG. 558(b) is a time chart showing an embodiment in which the fourth setting (fourth performance situation) is made and neither the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 nor the simulated image imitated the mission button 3700 is displayed.
FIG. 562 corresponds to the time chart shown in FIG. 558(b) and shows a display state in which the fourth setting is made and neither the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 nor the simulated image imitated the mission button 3700 is displayed. It is.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 558(b), "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In "AI Tank Reach", a display effect is performed in which the own tank moves on a mountain road. FIG. 562(a) is a display example at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. Furthermore, the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 are started. Further, during the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 are not displayed. FIG. 562(b) shows a display example at timing t8.
The valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 each continue for 3 seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. Furthermore, at the timing when the valid operation period ends, the display of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 also ends.
If the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period, a shell is fired from the own tank's battery, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, the shell hits the enemy tank, and the shell is fired. A display will be performed in which an explosion will occur. FIG. 562(c) shows an example of a display in which a cannonball is moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 562(d) shows an example of a rendering in which an image of a cannonball hitting an enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the movement of the shell and the subsequent display of the image of the shell exploding are performed for 3 seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
If the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, a bullet is fired from the own tank's machine gun, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, the bullet hits the enemy tank, and the bullet A display will be performed in which an explosion will occur. FIG. 562(e) shows an example of a display in which a bullet is moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 562(f) shows an example of a presentation in which an image of a bullet hitting an enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The movement of the bullet and the subsequent image of the bullet exploding are displayed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
Note that if the attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period, the shells and bullets will not be displayed moving or exploding, and the enemy tank will move backwards. As a result, a display that is no longer displayed in the display area is performed.
Note that, after timing t23 as well, the same display effect as such a display effect executed after timing t8 is performed.

The operation validity period of attack button 3710 and the operation validity period of mission button 3700 match. At this time, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed in accordance with the settings selected by the player. In addition, in response to the display of these simulated images, the lines of ``Colonel Dyna'' and ``Sergeant Might'' also change to indicate operational instructions. If an operation on either the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is accepted, the operation validity period ends. Therefore, when the operation of one of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 is accepted, the effect display corresponding to the operation on the other operation section is not performed.

It is preferable to configure the system so that the degree of expectation of a jackpot is suggested by display modes such as an image of an enemy tank, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, and an image of an exploding shell. In this case, it is preferable to apply various expectation level suggestion modes in "shield bullet reach" shown with reference to FIGS. 505 to 509 to the display effect in this embodiment.
Note that the display mode of the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 and the image of exploding bullets may be similar to the display mode of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and the image of exploding shells.

As described above, according to the "AI Tank Reach" in this embodiment, there is a performance situation in which a simulated image imitating the operation part is displayed based on the player's intention, and a display of a simulated image imitating the operation part is performed. Since a performance situation in which no game is performed is realized, a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Although we have shown an example in which the player can select the first to fourth settings, an operation section (dip switch, button, etc.) that allows the player to select the settings is provided on the back of the door frame 3, so that the clerk at the game parlor can select the settings. The configuration may be such that the settings can be changed while the door of the door frame 3 is open. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide players with an optimal gaming environment by changing the settings as appropriate depending on the customer base of the gaming parlor, the location, the number of days that have passed since the introduction, etc. Note that the settings made by the gaming parlor may be configured to be effective only when the gaming machine is powered on, and then the settings can be changed by the player.

A first setting in which display of a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 or a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is not restricted by operating a predetermined operation unit (for example, defense button 3740) that can be operated by the player; The configuration is such that the display of a simulated image imitating the button 3710 or a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 can be alternately switched between any one of the second to fourth settings. Good too. For example, if the player has selected the second setting, operating the defense button 3740 once will switch to the first setting, and the player may operate the defense button 3740 once more. , it is preferable to configure the configuration so that the second setting is used again. Note that if the player has selected the first setting, the state in which the first setting is selected continues even if the defense button 3740 is operated. For example, the setting may be configured to be switched when the defense button 3740 is operated at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t14) while the decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, the configuration may be such that the settings cannot be switched during the valid operation period (the period during which a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 or a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed).
With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly switch to a setting in which both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 simulated images are displayed.

Note that if the player can switch the settings with a simple operation, a situation may occur where the player feels dissatisfied, such as when the setting is changed just by pressing a button by mistake. Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which switching of settings is not easily performed. For example, the setting may be configured to be switched when a specific condition regarding the operation, such as pressing and holding the defense button 3740 for 3 seconds, is met.

If the non-gaming state continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 minutes), if the settings are in the second to fourth settings, the settings will be automatically changed to the first setting, which is the default setting. You may also do so. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player who has started playing the game from feeling uncomfortable due to the changed settings.

An example was shown in which both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 can be operated at the same time, and when either button is operated, the operation validity period of the other button ends. The configuration may be such that even if the button is operated, the valid period of operation of the other button does not end. For example, if the attack button 3710 is operated and then the mission button 3700 is operated, the effect display corresponding to the operation of the attack button 3710 (display of shell firing, movement, explosion) is started, and then the mission button 3700 is operated. It is preferable to configure the system so that an effect display (display of firing, moving, and exploding bullets) corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700 is started.

It may be configured such that there are cases in which only the operation of the attack button 3710 is enabled and cases where only the operation of the mission button 3700 is enabled. In this case, it is preferable to determine whether or not to display a simulated image of the button whose operation is enabled based on the settings. Alternatively, the configuration is not limited to the settings, and may be configured to display a simulated image of the operating means whose operation is enabled. If only one operation section is enabled, it is assumed that the player will have little difficulty in operating the buttons, so it is advantageous to adopt such a method.

Rather than enabling the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 at the same time, for example, in a situation where one operating section is enabled, the other operating section may be enabled. In this case as well, it is preferable to determine whether or not to display a simulated image simulating the operation unit based on the settings.

After the mission button 3700 becomes operational, the attack button 3710 may be activated. Here, if the attack button 3710 is enabled while an image corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700 (an image of moving bullets) is displayed, a mock image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed. It may be configured so that it is not displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid an overload of information, and the stress felt by the player is reduced.

Before or at the same time as the operation validity period occurs, a sound effect indicating that the operation validity period has started or that the operation validity period is in progress may be output. For example, a predetermined sound effect may be output at timings (from timing t7 to timing t8, from timing t22 to timing t23) before the operation valid period starts. Alternatively, a predetermined sound effect may be output when the valid operation period occurs (from timing t8 to timing t9, from timing t23 to timing t24).
On the other hand, if the setting is such that the simulated image of the operation unit is not displayed even if the operation validity period has expired, the configuration may be such that the sound effect indicating that the operation validity period has expired for that operation unit is not output. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent players from feeling confused. On the other hand, when an operation is performed, a predetermined sound corresponding to the reception of the operation may be output. In this case, it is possible to prevent the effect of the presentation from decreasing.

Depending on the selected settings, a performance situation in which one simulated image imitating a button is displayed and a performance situation in which two simulated images imitating a button are displayed may occur. At this time, when only one simulated image is displayed, the size of the simulated image may be displayed larger than when two simulated images are displayed.
With such a configuration, the display area can be used effectively. Furthermore, players who do not choose to display multiple simulated images may not notice that the simulated images have been displayed due to their advanced age, but displaying the simulated images in a larger size in this way can make the operation more effective. This allows the user to notice what has happened, and to better suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the third operation section (defense button 3740) is used, and both the first operation section (attack button 3710) and the second operation section (mission button 3700) can accept operations, and the first operation section is simulated. In the first production situation in which both the image (display related to the operation of the first operation section) and the simulated image of the second operation section (display related to the operation of the second operation section) are displayed, the player can select the third operation section. A special display that makes it difficult to visually recognize both the displayed simulated image of the first operating section and the displayed simulated image of the second operating section may be made to appear based on the fact that is operated.
For players who operate the third operation section in a situation where they would normally operate the first or second operation section, this special display will notify the player that the operation was incorrect. It becomes possible to suggest. Furthermore, it is considered that the player who operates the third operation section in a situation where the simulated image of the first operation section and the simulated image of the second operation section are being displayed intentionally is doing such an act. Therefore, in order for a special display to be displayed to such an intentional player, the condition for the appearance of the display is not limited to simply that the third operation section has been operated, but also that the third operation section has been operated. It is desirable that the above-mentioned special display be performed when the third operation section is operated and the operation time of the third operation section satisfies a special condition of a predetermined number of seconds or more.

As described above, according to the "AI tank reach" in this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the effects related to the display mode of the simulated image.

With reference to FIGS. 498 to 562, an embodiment has been described in which the performance using the operation section is further improved in interest. Embodiments applicable to these embodiments will be described below.

Although an example is shown in which the operating section is provided at the bottom of the door frame, other operating sections may be employed. For example, a non-contact infrared sensor is installed on the game board, the glass plate is equally divided into multiple areas, for example, four areas in the upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left, and a hand is applied to each of these areas. The operation may be accepted when the user approaches the user. With this configuration, the player will be able to move his/her hand significantly upwards, giving him/her the feeling of being more involved in the game. In this regard, sensors are installed on the movable parts of the movable body provided on the frame (such as a movable body imitating a rabbit's ear or a movable body imitating a root vegetable), so that movement by the player can be detected, and operation input by the player can be performed. These movable parts may be provided with a function to receive the information. In this case, the feeling of participating in the game will be further enhanced.

In the various operation instructions in each of the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 498 to 562, certain operations that do not follow the operation instructions (for example, operating in a different operation mode than the instructed mode, operating a different operation section than the instructed operation section) It may be configured such that a special display is displayed by operating the section. For example, each embodiment may be modified so that an image that would normally be displayed when an operation is performed in accordance with the operation instructions is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed that does not follow the operation instructions. .

On the other hand, there are some players, such as tired players and elderly players, who may not like operation inputs that require large body movements. Therefore, one or more sensors are provided in a predetermined area in the game area, and the various operation parts described above are operated based on the sensor detecting the game ball launched into the game area by the player. It can be used as a substitute for tata. In this case, the player can use only his right hand to operate the operating unit, so even a tired or elderly player can operate the control unit while firing the game ball. It becomes possible to perform input. Note that it is also possible to accept both operations on the operation unit and input from a sensor provided in a predetermined area, and when an operation input is made to either one, a performance display corresponding to the operation input is displayed. good. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the player or the clerk at the game parlor can select whether to accept the operation input through the operation unit or a sensor provided in a predetermined area. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the operation input is performed only by the game balls being fired. As the predetermined area, a dedicated performance sensor that can detect the passage or approach of game balls may be provided on the board, or an existing winning opening (for example, general winning opening, first starting opening, gate An operation input may be accepted based on a game ball winning a prize (detected by a sensor) in a big prize opening, etc.). Note that the function as a sensor may be added to an existing predetermined member instead of a predetermined area. For example, if a sensor is installed at the backflow prevention member at the top of the rail or at the stop at the upper right corner of the game board, it is possible to detect when a game ball fired through a player's operation passes or when a game ball collides with the player. It may also be configured to accept operation input. In addition, in order to correspond to the direction input of the lever, the direction input may be performed in a pseudo manner using two or more sensors provided at different positions. Further, the operation time may be calculated in a pseudo manner according to the number of detected objects per unit time. In this way, the player may adjust the firing strength of the game ball so that a predetermined sensor or the like detects the game ball, thereby accepting the operation input. This makes it possible to further diversify the effects by reducing the number of operation units and by making it possible to display additional effects based on the reception of operations on the operation units.

With reference to FIGS. 505 to 509, an embodiment in which a predetermined image can be hidden by a shield image has been shown. However, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. It may also be configured such that simulated images simulating each part are displayed and these can be hidden by a shield image. Further, the configuration may be such that operation instruction displays are displayed for each of the plurality of operation units, and these can be hidden by a shield image. Further, the configuration may be such that operation corresponding displays are displayed in response to operations on a plurality of operation units, and these can be hidden by a shield image. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who has little interest in operating the operation sections to visually recognize the displays related to the plurality of operation sections.
The embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 510 to 562 may also be configured to be capable of displaying a plurality of operation units and displaying a shield image.
Note that the display of the shield image may be configured to be performed by operating a predetermined operation unit (defense button 3740, etc.).

Referring to Figures 498 to 562, "Shield bullet reach", "Special machine gun reach", "Silent machine gun reach", "Bomb character reach", "Sudden tank effect", "Full power breakthrough reach", "AI tank reach" '', but it is possible to adopt a predetermined technical idea for one effect as a technical idea for another effect. Further, it is possible to employ a plurality of technical ideas in a plurality of performances as technical ideas in one production.

For example, the display of the shield image related to "shield bullet reach" can be changed to "special machine gun reach", "silent machine gun reach", "bomb character reach", "sudden tank effect", "full power breakthrough reach", "AI tank reach" It may be applied to each performance. At this time, predetermined images displayed in each production (enemy tank image, bomb character image, simulated image imitating a predetermined button, image of an exploding shell, image of an exploding bullet, smoke image, white flag image, etc.) (images used for each production), it is a good idea to indicate the level of expectation using a method related to "shield bullet reach." Further, the degree of expectation shown in this manner may be configured to be hidden by a shield image.
In addition, the look-ahead mode related to the "Ikinari Tank Effect", the execution mode related to the look-ahead effect, and their technical philosophy are explained as "Shield Bullet Reach", "Special Machine Gun Reach", "Silent Machine Gun Reach", "Bomb Character Reach", "Full Power "Breakthrough Reach" and "AI Tank Reach" will be applied to "Shield Bullet Reach", "Special Machine Gun Reach", "Silent Machine Gun Reach", "Bomb Character Reach", and "Full Power Breakthrough" in multiple variable displays. "Reach" and "AI Tank Reach" may be executed.
For example, in contrast to the production mode using a shield image related to "shield bullet reach" and the smoke image related to "full power breakthrough reach", the production mode and technique using an image of a destroyed enemy tank in "sudden tank production" You may apply ideas.
Furthermore, the shield image and the smoke image may be configured to be displayed multiple times by the player, or the shield image and the smoke image may be displayed across the variable display. In this case, the image that suggests the level of expectation (in the case of "Ikinari Tank Production", the image of the destroyed enemy tank) corresponding to the variable display that is subject to pre-reading is hidden by the shield image or smoke image. It is recommended to configure it as follows.
Furthermore, for example, in "Special Machine Gun Reach" and "Silent Machine Gun Reach", images of shells fired from a turret, bullets fired from a machine gun, and exploding shells and bullets may be displayed across the variable display. .
For example, in "Bomb Character Reach", the collision scene between the bomb character and the own tank can occur not only during the fluctuation of the decorative pattern but also immediately before the fluctuation of the decorative pattern stops, and the display of the decorative pattern stopped. It may be configured such that there are cases in which the own tank explodes (a part of the own tank is destroyed) across the area, and cases in which the own tank straddles the stop display of the decorative pattern without exploding. In addition, immediately before the fluctuation of the fluctuation display that is the target of pre-reading stops, it is preferable to perform an effect of displaying a large bomb character as shown with reference to FIG. 525, FIG. 530, FIG. 531, and the like.
Furthermore, in the "full power breakthrough reach", it may be configured such that the enemy unit may be attacked by shells multiple times during one fluctuating display of the decorative pattern. Further, the smoke image may be displayed over the variable display of decorative patterns. After performing the effect display based on the look-ahead multiple times in this way, it is preferable to display a group of enemy tanks appearing at the last timing of the variable display that was the target of the look-ahead.
Furthermore, in the case of "AI Tank Reach", a plurality of variable displays may be displayed based on pre-reading. In this case, it may be configured such that encounters with enemy tanks occur once to multiple times in each variable display. At least, an image of an encounter with an enemy tank occurring and a destroyed cannonball or bullet may be displayed so as to straddle the variable display of the decorative pattern immediately before the decorative pattern stops being displayed. Furthermore, when the left lever 3720, which normally does not give operation instructions, is operated, the tank is configured to fall onto a cliff on the left side of the road and a smoke image is displayed on the screen. Good too. In this case, the display of the smoke image may be performed over a plurality of times of variable display of the decorative pattern until the variable display of the decorative pattern that is the target of the pre-read effect display stops.
In addition, the mission button cannot be pressed for each of the following effects: "Shield Bullet Reach", "Special Machine Gun Reach", "Silent Machine Gun Reach", "Bomb Character Reach", "Sudden Tank Effect", "Full Breakthrough Reach", and "AI Tank Reach" 3700, the attack button 3710, the left lever 3720, the defense button 3740, etc. are shown to be operable, but in each production example, for some or all of the operation parts, the validity period is displayed by changing the decorative pattern. In the case where a pre-read effect is performed, it may be configured to be able to be executed across the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols. Further, it is preferable that the effective number of operations be configured to be able to be performed multiple times during the variable display of one decorative pattern. Further, the display corresponding to the reception of the operation on the operation unit may also be configured to be displayed multiple times. Further, it is preferable that a display corresponding to such operation acceptance be displayed across the variable display of decorative symbols.
With such a configuration, some sort of reaction on the display occurs in response to the player's operation on the operation unit, making it possible to satisfy the player. Furthermore, by straddling the variable display and executing the effect display based on the operation without being interrupted by the stop display of the variable display, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the executed effect.

Each technical item in the structure of the gaming machine in the embodiment may be combined and applied to form the embodiment. Furthermore, embodiments may be implemented by combining and applying each production example and each technical matter in each production example. Moreover, it is good also as an embodiment by applying each technical matter in each accessory structure in combination. Furthermore, embodiments may be created by applying a combination of these technical matters.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention, as shown below. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the embodiment, the gaming machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention can also be applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Even in this case, similar effects can be achieved.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5' Game board 5a Game area 190 Glass unit 530 Door frame left side unit 550 Door frame right side unit 570 Door frame top unit 931 Power supply board 1000 Front component 1001 Outer rail 1002 Inner rail 1100 Game panel 1100a Game panel opening 1110 Panel board 1110a Obstacle nail penetration hole 1110b Panel board back rough surface part 1110c Panel board back first rough surface part 1110d Panel board back second rough surface part 1110e Panel board back metal shiny part 1110f First metallic gloss area on the back of the panel 1110g Second metallic gloss area on the back of the panel 1110h Bright color visible area on the back of the panel 1110i First bright color visible area on the back of the panel 1110j Second bright color visible area on the back of the panel 1110m Decoration in front of the panel Opaque thin layer portion 1110p Panel plate boss insertion hole 1110q Panel plate screw insertion hole 1117 Panel convex portion 1200 Obstruction nail 1201 Obstruction nail 1201a Obstruction nail head 1201b Obstruction nail first body portion 1201c Obstruction nail spiral shaped portion 1201d Obstruction nail second body Part 1202 Obstruction nail 1203 Obstruction nail 1204 Obstruction nail 1205 Obstruction nail 1206 Obstruction nail 1207 Obstruction nail 1208 Obstruction nail 1209 Obstruction nail 1210 Obstruction nail 1211 Obstruction nail 1212 Obstruction nail 1213 Obstruction nail 1214 Obstruction nail 1215 Obstruction nail 1216 Obstruction nail 1217 Obstacle nail 1218 Obstacle nail 1219 Obstacle nail 1220 Obstacle nail 1221 Obstacle nail 1222 Obstacle nail 1223 Obstacle nail 1224 Obstacle nail 1230 Life nail 1231 Jump nail 1232 Left guide nail 1233 Right guide nail 1402 Normal symbol display 1403 First special symbol display 1404 First special Reservation number display 1405 Second special symbol display 1406 Second special reservation number display 1407 Round display 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 1600 Game board side performance display device 1600a Display area 2000 Table unit 2001 General prize opening 2002 No. First starting port 2003 Gate part 2004 Second starting port 2005 Big prize opening 2400 Panel board lower light emitting board 2410 Panel board rear decorative member 2410a Panel board rear decorative member rough surface part 2410b Panel board rear decorative member Metal gloss part 2410c Panel board rear decorative member Rotation axis 2420 Panel plate rear substrate 2425 Panel plate rear substrate light emitting part 2450 Panel plate front decorative member 2450a Panel plate front decorative member through hole 2452 Panel plate front decorative member colorless transparent part 2454 Panel plate front decorative member opaque part 2456 Panel plate front decorative member colored transparent part 2460 Light guide plate 2460a Light guide plate uneven part 2470 Decorative member 2470a Decorative member front part 2470b Decorative member rear part 2470c Decorative member boss 2470d Decorative member inclined part 2470e Decorative member screw insertion hole 2470f Decorative member first inclined part 2470g Decorative member second inclined part 2471 Decorative member attachment screw 2522 Warp exit 2530 Stage 2600 Area cover member 2600a Area cover member 2610 Penetration part 2610a Penetration part 2611 Penetration part 2612 Penetration part 2613 Penetration part 2614 Penetration part 2615 Penetration part 2616 Penetration part 2617 Penetration part 26 17a Notch end 2618 Penetrating part 2619 Penetrating part 2620 Penetrating part 2630 Mounting boss 2631 Mounting boss 2632 Mounting boss 2633 Mounting boss 2640 Ball regulating protrusion 2650 Penetrating part 2651 Penetrating part 2652 Penetrating part 2653 Penetrating part 2660 Boss part 2670 Accommodating recess 270 0 Channel device 2710a First flow Entry ball opening 2710b Second channel entry ball opening 2720a First channel forming member 2720b Second channel forming member 2730a First channel outlet 2730b Second channel outlet 3700 Mission button 3710 Attack button 3720 Left lever 3722 Left lever vibration source 3724 Left lever light source 3730 Right lever 3732 Right lever vibration source 3734 Right lever light source 3740 Defense button 5000 Nail sheet 5100 Film sheet 5110 1st area print 5120 2nd area print 5200 Obstacle nail print 5950 Rail member 6000 Rabbit role Object 6010 Face cover part 6011 Front part of face cover part 6011a First face light scattering part 6011b Second face light scattering part 6012 Upper part of face cover part 6013 Right part of face cover part 6014 Lower part of face cover part 6015 Left part of face cover part 6016 First arm 6017 Second arm 6020 Face board 6021 First ear 6021a First ear ornament 6022 Second ear 6022a Second ear ornament 6023 Face light emitting section 6023a First face light emitting section 6023b Second face light emitting section 6024 Mouth decoration part 6025 Control element 6026 Driver 6027 Resistor 6027a First resistor 6027b Second resistor 6027c Third resistor 6027d Fourth resistor 6027e Fifth resistor 6027f Sixth resistor 6028 Capacitor 6028a First capacitor 6028b Second capacitor 6029 Connector 603 0 Body part 6100 Stump Accessories 6200 Stump Part 6210 Stump Board Part 6210a Stump Opening Part 6300 Stump Box Part 6310 Box Top Wall Part 6320 Box Right Wall Part 6330 Box Bottom Wall Part 6340 Box Left Wall Part 6350 Box Rear Wall Part 6352 Rear Wall Board 6352a No. 1 rear wall substrate 6352b 2nd rear wall substrate 6354 rear wall light emitting section 6354a 1st rear wall light emitting section 6354b 2nd rear wall light emitting section 6356 rear wall cover 6358 rear wall cover light scattering section 6358a 1st rear wall cover light scattering section 6358b Second rear wall cover light scattering part 6360 First grass movable part 6360a First grass decoration part 6370 Second grass movable part 6370a Second grass decoration part 6380 Rear wall plate part 6381 Grass plate part 6381a Grass plate colored transparent part 6381b Grass plate Colorless transparent part 6382a Grass board center decoration part 6382b Grass board top decoration part 6382c Grass board right decoration part 6382d Grass board bottom decoration part 6382e Grass board left decoration part 6400 Grass accessory 6420 Grass board 6422 Grass board front light emitting part 6422a Grass board front First light emitting part 6422b Second light emitting part on the front side of the grass board 6422c Third light emitting part on the front side of the grass board 6424 Rear light emitting part on the grass board 6424a First light emitting part on the rear side of the grass board 6424b Second light emitting part on the rear side of the grass board 6426 Grass board opening 6426a Grass board First opening 6426b Grass substrate second opening 6440 Grass front cover 6442 Grass front cover transparent part 6442a Grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442b Grass front cover colored transparent part 6444 Grass front cover light scattering part 6444a Grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444b Front grass cover colored light scattering part 6446 Front grass cover opaque part 6448 Front grass cover opening 6448a Front grass cover first opening 6448b Front grass cover second opening 6460 Back grass cover 6462 Back grass cover transparent part 6462a Back grass cover Colorless transparent part 6462b Back grass cover colored transparent part 6464 Back grass cover light scattering part 6464a Back grass cover colorless light scattering part 6464b Back grass cover colored light scattering part 6466 Back grass cover opaque part 6470 First grass accessory 6475 Second grass part Object 6480 Third grass accessory 6485 Fourth grass accessory 6500 Mountain accessory 6520 Mountain board 6522 Mountain board front light emitting part 6522a Mountain board front first light emitting part 6522b Mountain board front second light emitting part 6522c Mountain board front third light emitting part 6522d Fourth light emitting section on the front surface of the mountain board 6522e Fifth light emitting section on the front surface of the mountain board 6522f Sixth light emitting section on the front surface of the mountain board 6522g Seventh light emitting section on the front surface of the mountain board 6522h Eighth light emitting section on the front surface of the mountain board 6522i Ninth light emitting section on the front surface of the mountain board 6524 Mountain Substrate opening 6540 First mountain front cover 6542 First mountain front cover colored transparent part 6544 First mountain front cover colored light scattering part 6548 First mountain front cover opening 6560 Second mountain front cover 6562 Second mountain front cover colorless and transparent Part 6564 2nd mountain front cover colorless light scattering part 6600 1st giant tree accessory 6610 1st giant tree trunk board 6630 1st giant tree leaf board 6650 2nd giant tree accessory 6660 2nd giant tree trunk board 6680 2nd giant tree leaf board 6700 1st Cloud accessory 6750 Second cloud accessory 6800 Back grass accessory 6820 Back grass board 6822 Front light emitting part of the back grass board 6824 Opening part of the back grass board 6824a First opening of the back grass board 6824b Back grass board No. 2 opening 6824c 3rd opening on back grass board 6824d 4th opening on back grass board 6840 Front cover on back grass 6842 Colored transparent section on front cover on back grass 6844 Colored light scattering section on front grass on back board 6848 Back grass on board Front cover opening 6848a First opening in the front cover behind the board 6848b Second opening in the front cover behind the board 6848c Third opening in the front cover behind the board 6848d Fourth opening in the front cover behind the board 7000 Top of the door frame top unit Right ear opening 7002 First right ear opening on door frame top unit 7004 Second right ear opening on door frame top unit 7010 Left ear opening on door frame top unit 7012 First left ear opening on door frame top unit 7014 Door frame top unit upper second left ear opening 7020 Door frame top unit lower right ear opening 7022 Door frame top unit lower first right ear opening 7024 Door frame top unit lower second right ear opening 7030 Door frame top Unit lower left ear opening 7032 Door frame top unit lower first left ear opening 7034 Door frame top unit lower second left ear opening 7040 Door frame top unit upper both ear openings 7050 Right light emitting part inside door frame top unit 7052 Left side light emitting part in the door frame top unit 7100 Right ear frame movable body 7110 Right ear frame movable body first surface 7112 Right ear frame movable body first surface inner decoration part 7114 Right ear frame movable body first surface outer decoration part 7116 Right ear Frame movable body inner light emitting part 7118 Right ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7120 Right ear frame movable body second surface 7140 Right ear frame movable body rotation axis 7200 Left ear frame movable body 7210 Left ear frame movable body first surface 7212 Left Ear frame movable body first surface inner decoration part 7214 Left ear frame movable body first surface outer decoration part 7216 Left ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7218 Left ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7220 Left ear frame movable body second surface 7240 Left ear frame movable body rotation axis 7300 Right ear inner frame movable body 7310 Right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7320 Right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7330 Right ear inner frame movable body light emitting part 7340 Right ear inner frame movable body Body rotation axis 7350 Right ear outer frame movable body 7360 Right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7370 Right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7380 Right ear outer frame movable body light emitting part 7390 Right ear outer frame movable body rotation axis 7400 Left ear inner frame movable body 7410 Left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7420 Left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7430 Left ear inner frame movable body light emitting part 7440 Left ear inner frame movable body rotation axis 7450 Left ear outer side Frame movable body 7460 Left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7470 Left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7480 Left ear outer frame movable body light emitting part 7490 Left ear outer frame movable body rotation axis 7500 Door frame top unit face decoration part 7510 Door frame top unit face upper movable body 7512 Door frame top unit right eye decoration part 7514 Door frame top unit left eye decoration part 7520 Door frame top unit face lower part 7522 Door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7524 Door frame top unit face lower mouth Movable body 7600 Door frame side unit right arm part 7610 Door frame side unit right arm case part 7620 Door frame side unit right arm upper arm part 7630 Door frame side unit right arm lower arm part 7650 Door frame side unit left arm part 7660 Door frame side unit left arm case part 7670 Door frame side unit left arm upper arm part 7680 Door frame side unit left arm lower arm part 7700 Curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7710 Curtain plate bottom unit right leg shin part 7720 Curtain plate bottom unit right foot tip part 7750 Curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7760 Curtain Plate bottom unit left leg shank part 7770 Curtain plate bottom unit left foot part 7800 Root vegetable frame movable body 7802 Root vegetable frame movable body first cover part 7804 Root vegetable frame movable body second cover part 7810 Root vegetable frame movable body light emitting part 7820 Right side connecting linear member 7825 Right side vertical movement drive mechanism 7830 Left side connecting linear member 7835 Left side vertical movement drive mechanism 7850 Root vegetable frame movable cover unit 7852 Cover unit frame 7854 Cover unit front part 7856 Cover unit right side part 7858 Cover unit left side part 9100 Character object 9110 Cover Parts (cover body)
9111 Transparent part (first area)
9112 Non-transparent part (second area)
9120 Character accessory board 9130 Base member 9200 Snowman accessory 9210 Cover member 9210a Front side cover member 9210b Back side cover member 9220 Snowman board 9301 Light emitting body (LED)
9302 Resistance HKB Whitening Department YGK Game Ball

Claims (1)

a determination means capable of deriving a predetermined determination result;
an effect control means capable of displaying an effect display on a display means based on a determination result of the determination means;
an operation section that can be operated by a player and that can change the display on the display means;
The effect control means is capable of executing a variable display showing the determination result in the display means,
If the operating section is operated outside the predetermined operating range during a specific period in which the operating section is to be operated within a predetermined operating range, and further specific conditions are met, a specific display is displayed on the display means. , due to the specific display, the visibility of the effect display displayed on the display means is lowered compared to the state before the specific display was displayed,
The specific display that is displayed when the operation unit is operated outside the predetermined operation range and further specific conditions are met is a display that does not suggest the determination result,
The specific display can be displayed when the symbol indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed,
Separately from the operation section, a separate operation section that can be operated by the player is provided, and a suggestion display suggesting the determination result can be displayed by operating the separate operation section, and when the suggestion display is displayed, The above specific display may now be displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images